Honda Accord 1998 - 2002 Service Manual COMPLETE

Service Manual
1998 - 2002 Accord 2/4 Dr

General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
1998 Model... .... .... ........ ...... ... ...... ...... 1-2
1999 Model ........................................ 1-3
2000 Model ........................................ 1-4
2001 Model ........................................ 1-5
2002 Model ........................................ 1-6
Identification Number Locations ........ 1-7
Warning/Caution Label Locations 1-8
Under-hood Emission
Control Label ..................................... 1-12
Lift and Support Points ........................ 1-17
o ~ i n g .................................................. 1-18
Parts Marking .. ................ ..... ..... ..... ...... 1-19
Revised Component Terms ................. 1-20
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - 1998 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
1HG CG5 5 4 * W A 000001
"rrrrrr-
a b cdefgh
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle
1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.
HONDA Passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
CF8: ACCORD/F23A5
CG3: ACCORD COUPE/F23A1, F23A4
CG5: ACCORD/F23A 1
CG6: ACCORD/F23A4
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
1: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual
2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic
5: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Manual
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
US model Canada model
4: DX, LX 4: DX, LX
5: EX 5: EX
7: EX-ULEV
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
W: 1998
g. Factory Code
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A.
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
800001-: Canada model
1-2
Vehicle Identification Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification.
Vehicle Identification Number and Canadian
Engine Number
F23A1 - 1000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
F23A 1: 2.3 g SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
F23A4: 2.3 g SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A5: 2.3 g SOHC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
BAXA - 5000001
II
a b
a. Transmission Type
BAXA: 4-speed Automatic
P2A8: 5-speed Manual
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-80P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-592P
NH-612M
RP-25P
RP-29P
R-94
YR-508P
Color
Mystic Blue Pearl
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Flamenco Black Pearl
Regent Silver Metallic
Black Currant Pearl
Raisin Pearl
San Marino Red
Heather Mist Metallic
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
.....--+-8-80P
KAS84AOA
Paint Code '------..-/
BACK
1 HG CG5 5 4 * X A 000001
1IIIIIri
a b cdefgh
8. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle
JHM: HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
CF8: ACCORD/F23A5
CG5: ACCORD/F23A 1
CG6: ACCORD/F23A 1, F23A4
4: OX, LX 4: OX, LX
5: EX, LX, LX-ULEV 5: EX
6: LX-ULEV
7: EX, EX-ULEV
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
X: 1999
g. Factory Code
C: Saitama Factory in Japan (Sayama)
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
En ine Number
F23A1 - 2000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
F23A1: 2.31A SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A4: 2.3 1A SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A5: 2.3 1A SOHC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
F23A1, F23A4: 2000001- (Ohio)
F23A1, F23A4: 2500001- (Sayama)
F23A5: 2000001-
Transmission Number
BAXA - 6000001
II
a b
BAXA: 4-speed Automatic (Ohio)
MAXA: 4-speed Automatic (Sayama)
b. Serial Number
BAXA: 6000001- (Ohio)
MAXA: 2000001- (Sayama)
P2A8: 2000001 - (Ohio)
P2A8: 2500001 - (Sayama)
Paint Code
Code Color
B-80P Mystic Blue Pearl
B-89P Deep Velvet Blue Pearl
G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl
NH-578 Taffeta White
NH-592P Flamenco Black Pearl
NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic
NH-623M Satin Silver Metalic*Note
RP-25P Black Currant Pearl
RP-29P Raisin Pearl
R-94 San Marino Red
YR-508P Heather Mist Metallic
* Note: US model only
COLOR LABEL
Examplo:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KAS84AOA
PolntCode'-----'
1-3
BACK
General Information
1HGCG554* Y A 000001
iifffiTi
a b cdefgh
CF8: ACCORD/F23A5
CG5: ACCORD/F23A 1
CG6: ACCORD/F23A1, F23A4
0: EX-SULEV
4: DX, LX
5: EX, LX-ULEV
6: EX, LX-ULEV
7: EX-ULEV, LX-SE
8: EX-ULEV
9: LX-SE
4: DX, LX
5: EX
6: EX
7: LX-SE
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
Y:2000
g. Factory Code
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
1-4
Engine Number
F23A 1 - 3000001
I---r-
a b
a. Engine Type
F23A1: 2.3.e SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A4: 2.3.e SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A5: 2.3.e SOHC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
F23A1, F23A4, F23A5: 3000001- (Ohio)
F23A1, F23A4, F23A5: 3500001- (Sc!y'ama)
Transmission Number
BAXA - 7000001
I-I
a b
b. Serial Number
BAXA: 7000001- (Ohio)
MAXA: 3000001 - (Sayama)
P2A8: 3000001- (Ohio)
P2A8: 3500001- (Sayama)
Paint Code
Code
B-89P
B-92P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-623M
RP-31M
R-94
YR-524M
Color
Deep Velvet Blue Pearl
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Satin Silver Metallic
Signet Silver Metallic
San Marino Red
Naples Gold Metallic
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TVPEE
EXT. COLOR
8-S0P
KAS84AOA
Paint Code '------'
BACK
1HG CG5 54* 1 A 000001
IIIIII11
a b cdefgh
1 HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.
3HG: HONDA DE MEXICO,
CF8: ACCORD/F23AS
CG3: ACCORD COUPE/F23A 1, F23A4
CGS: ACCORD/F23A 1
CG6: ACCORD/F23A4
US model
0: EX-SULEV
4: DX, LX
5: EX, LX-ULEV, LX-A
6: EX, LX-ULEV
7: EX-ULEV, LX-A, LX-A ULEV
8: EX-ULEV, LX
9: LX-ULEV with Side Airbags
e. Check Digit
f. Model Vear
1: 2001
g. Factory Code
Canada model
4: DX, LX
S:EX
6: EX
8: LX
X: EI Saito Factory in Mexico
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
Engine Number
F23A1 4000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
F23A1: 2.3 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A4: 2.3 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23AS: 2.3 SOHC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
F23A1, F23A4, F23AS: 4000001- (Ohio)
F23A1, F23A4, F23AS: 4S00001- (Sayama)
F23A1: 4400001- (EI Saito)
Transmission Number
BAXA - 7000001
II
a b
P2A8: S-speed Manual
b. Serial Number
BAXA: 7000001- (Ohio)
MAXA: 4000001- (Sayama)
P2A8: 4000001- (Ohio)
P2A8: 4S00001- (Sayama)
Paint Code
Code Color
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl
B-96P Eternal Blue Pearl
NH-S78 Taffeta White
Note
NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic
R-94 San Marino Red
R-S07P Firepepper Pearl
RP-31M Signet Silver Metallic
YR-S24M Naples Gold Metallic
Note: US model only
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TVPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KASB4AOA
1-5
BACK
General Information
1HG CG5 54* 2 A 000001
"rrriTi
a b cdefgh
CF8: ACCORD/F23AS
CGS: ACCORD/F23A 1
CG6: ACCORD/F23A4
1: 2-door Coupe/S-speed Manual
S: 4-door Sedan/S-speed Manual
US model
0: EX-SULEV, SE
1: SE
2:SE
3:SE
4: DX, LX
S: EX, LX-ULEV, LX-A
6: EX, LX-ULEV, DX VP
7: EX-ULEV, LX-SE, LX-A ULEV,
SE
8: EX-ULEV, LX, SE
9: LX-ULEV
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
2:2002
g. Factory Code
Canada model
O:SE
4: DX, LX
S:EX
6: EX
7:SE
8: LX
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
1-6
Motor Vehicle Safety Standerd Certification.
Engine Number
F23A1 5000001
II
8 b
a. Engine Type
F23A 1: 2.3 a SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23A4: 2.3 a SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
F23AS: 2.3 a SOHC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
BAXA 8000001
II
8 b
P2A8: S-speed Manual
b. Serial Number
BAXA: 8000001- (Ohio)
MAXA: S000001- (Sayama)
P2A8: 4000001- (Ohio)
P2A8: 4S00001- (Sayama)
Paint Code
Code Color
B-96P Eternal Blue Pearl
G-S08P Noble Green Pearl
NH-S78 Taffeta White
R-94 San Marino Red
R-S07P Firepepper Pearl
YR-S24M Naples Gold Metallic
*:
US model only
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KAS84AOA
BACK
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Number (VIN)
Transmission Number
(Manual)
Engine Number
1-7
BACK
General Information
Warning/Caution Label Locations
1-8
CABLE REEL CAUTION
ISRS I
INSTALLATION OF THE SRS CABLE REEL IS
CRITICAL TO THE PROPER OPERATION OF THE SRS SYSTEM.
REFER TO THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR DETAILED
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
DRIVER MODULE DANGER
A DANGER
EXPLOSIVE/FLAMMABLE
STORAGE TEMPERATURES MUST NOT EXCEED
200F(93C). FOR PROPER HANDLING STORAGE
AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES, REFER TO SERVICE
MANUAL SRS SUPPLEMENT.
FIRST AID
IF CONTENTS ARE SWALLOWED,INDUCE
VOMITING. FOR EYE CONTACT, FLUSH EYES
WITH WATER FOR 15 MINUTES. IN EVERY CASE,
GET PROMPT MEDICAL ATTENTION.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
AWARNING
THE AIRBAG INFLATOR IS EXPLOSIVE AND,IF
ACCIDENTALLY DEPLOYED, CAN SERIOUSLY
HURT OR KILL YOU.
DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT
OR PROBING DEVICES. THEY CAN CAUSE
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
NO SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. DO NOT
DISASSEMBLE.
PLACE AIRBAG UPRIGHT WHEN REMOVED.
FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS
CAREFULLY.
BACK
SRS WARNING (HOOD)
'98-00 models with driver's and passenger's airbags
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DRIVER AND
FRONT SEAT PASSENGER AIRBAGS. ALL SRS
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTORS ARE
COLORED YELLOW. TAMPERING WITH,
DISCONNECTING, OR USING ELECTRICAL TEST
EQUIPMENT ON THE SRS WIRING CAN MAKE
THE SYSTEM INOPERATIVE OR CAUSE
ACCIDENTAL FIRING OF THE INFLATOR.
~ WARNING
THE AIRBAG INFLATOR IS EXPLOSIVE AND,
IF ACCIDENTALLY DEPLOYED, CAN SERIOUSLY
HURT YOU.
CAREFULLY.
SRS WARNING (HOOD)
'00-02 models with driver's and passenger's,
and front seats side airbags
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DRIVER AND
FRONT SEAT PASSENGER, AND FRONT AND
SIDE AIRBAGS. ALL SRS ELECTRICAL WIRING AND
CONNECTORS ARE COLORED YELLOW.
TAMPERING WITH, DISCONNECTING, OR USING TEST
EQUIPMENT ON THE SRS WIRING CAN MAKE
THE SYSTEM INOPERATIVE OR CAUSE
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
AWARNING
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT CAN SERIOUSLY
HURT OR KILL YOU.
CAREFULLY.
STEERING COLUMN NOTICE
I NOTICEI
TO PREVENT SRS DAMAGE, REMOVE STEERING
WHEEL BEFORE REMOVING STEERING SHAFT
CONNECTING BOLT.
FRONT PASSENGER MODULE DANGER
A DANGER
EXPLOSIVE/FLAMMABLE
STORAGE TEMPERATURES MUST NOT EXCEED
200F (93C). FOR PROPER HANDLING STORAGE
AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES REFER TO
SERVICE MANUAL SRS SUPPLEMENT.
FIRST AID
IF CONTENTS ARE SWALLOWED, OBTAIN IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION. FOR EYE CONTACT, FLUSH
EYES WITH WATER FOR 15 MINUTES.
IN EVERY CASE, GET PROMPT MEDICAL ATTENTION.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
AWARNING
THE AIRBAG INFLATOR IS EXPLOSIVE AND, IF
ACCIDENTALLY DEPLOYED, CAN SERIOUSLY
HURT OR KILL YOU.
DO NOT USE ELECTRICAL TEST EQUIPMENT
OR PROBING DEVICES. THEY CAN CAUSE
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT .
NO SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. DO NOT
DISASSEMBLE.
PLACE AIRBAG UPRIGHT WHEN REMOVED.
CAREFULLY.
. MONITOR NOTICE
I NOTICEI ISRSI
NO SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER TO SERVICE MANUAL FOR DETAILED
INSTRUCTIONS.
(cant'd)
1-9
BACK
General Information
Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)
FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WARNING
(CHILD SEAT)
49ST '98, '99-02 models
i .. WARNING
CHILDREN CAN BE KILLED OR INJURED BY THE
PASSENGER AIRBAG.
THE BACK SEAT IS THE SAFEST PLACE FOR
CHILDREN 12 AND UNDER.
MAKE SURE ALL CHILDREN USE SEAT BELTS
OR CHILD SEATS.
FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WARNING
(CHILD SEAT)
California '98 model
. 4l WARNING
CHILDREN CAN BE KILLED OR INJURED BY THE
PASSENGER AIRBAG.
MAKE SURE ALL CHILDREN USE SEAT BELTS
OR CHILD SEATS.
SRS INFORMATION
Canada '99-02 models (located only driver side sun visor)
CAUTION
TO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY:
FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY PROTECTION IN ALL
TYPES OF CRASHES, YOU MUST ALWAYS
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT.
DO NOT INSTALL REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEATS IN ANY FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
POSITION.
DO NOT SIT OR LEAN UNNECESSARILY CLOSE
TO THE AIRBAG.
DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECTS OVER THE
AIRBAG OR BETWEEN THE AIRBAG AND
YOURSELF.
1-10
SEE THE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR FURTHER
INFORMATION AND EXPLANATIONS.
SRS INFORMATION
U.S.A. model
AIRBAG WARNING
FLIP VISOR OVER.
SRS WARNING INFORMATION
U.S.A. '98 model
h. WARNING
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR.
CHILDREN 12 AND UNDER CAN BE KILLED BY
THEAIRBAG.
CHILDREN.
NEVER PUT A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT IN
THE FRONT.
SIT AS FAR BACK AS POSSIBLE FROM THE
AIRBAG.
ALWAYS USE SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS.
THE SRS MUST BE INSPECTED TEN YEARS
AFTER IT IS INSTALLED.
THE DATE OF INSTALLATION IS SHOWN ON
THE DRIVER'S DOORJAMB.
SRS WARNING INFORMATION
U.S.A. '99-02 models
i .. WARNING
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY CAN OCCUR.
CHILDREN 12 AND UNDER CAN BE KILLED BY
THEAIRBAG.
CHILDREN.
NEVER PUT A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT IN
THE FRONT.
SIT AS FAR BACK AS POSSIBLE FROM THE
AIRBAG.
ALWAYS USE SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS .
SRS INFORMATION
Canada '98 model (located only driver side sun visor)
CAUTION
TO AVOID SERIOUS INJURY:
FOR MAXIMUM SAFETY PROTECTION IN ALL
TYPES OF CRASHES, YOU MUST ALWAYS
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT.
DO NOT INSTALL REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEATS IN ANY FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
POSITION.
DO NOT SIT OR LEAN UNNECESSARILY CLOSE
TO THE AIRBAG.
DO NOT PLACE ANY OBJECTS OVER THE
AIRBAG OR BETWEEN THE AIRBAG AND
YOURSELF.
SEE THE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR FURTHER
INFORMATION AND EXPLANATIONS
THE SRS MUST BE INSPECTED TEN YEARS
AFTER IT IS INSTALLED.
THE DATE OF INSTALLATION IS SHOWN ON
THE DRIVER'S DOORJAMB.
BACK
ENGINE
COOLANT
INFORMATION
BATTERY
CAUTION
SERVICE
INFORMATION
(Under-hood
Emission
Control Labell
SRS
WARNING
LABEL
'98-99 models
'00-02 models
'(
~ I U (b
/) I /
~
TIRE INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG INFORMATION
o Labeled only on models with side airbags
o Located on driver's door jamb and
passenger's door jamb (not shown)
SIDEAIRBAG
o THIS CAR IS EQUIPPED
WITH SIDE AIRBAGS IN THE
DRIVER'S AND PASSENGER'S
SEAT.
o DO NOT LEAN AGAINST THE
DOOR.
o SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR
MORE INFORMATION.
1-11 BACK
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label (1998 Model)
Emission Group Identification
Example:
VEHICLE EMISSION CON ROLINFORMATION
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO u. 5. EPA
i REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
Il:r
CATALYST
III VAlVE --1
I TWC /H025 2 EGR/SFi/OBD" CERTlFIEO
VAlV'lASH IN:O. liO. )PAl
u,(-
(COLD) EX: O. JOO. 02mm WHNXRCl130AAA .
SPARK PLUG GAP 1. 0-1, lmm
{7 REGULATOR
NO OTHER A.DJUSTMENTS NEEDED. Ul
FRONT
{H]
I I
(P'A)
I I HONDA MOTOR CO LTD
PAA-AOO
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA AND STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
TIER 1/LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 AND
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA LEV
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
CALIFORNIA ULEV
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
1-12
Engine and Evaporative Families:
Engine Family:
W HNX V 02.3 PF1
IIIII
abc d e
a. Model Year
W: 1998
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX:HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
W HNX R 0130 AAA
IIIII
abc d e
a. Model Year
W: 1998
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
BACK
Example:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA
.. i REGULATIONS APPLICABLE 10 1999 MODn YEAR
Iii'.
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CATALYST

TWC/H02S"72 /EGR/SFI/OBDIIC RT1FIED

VALV, LASH IN: O. 2UO. 02m: I XHNXV02 lPAl
(COLD) u.: O. lO:!.O. 02mm
SPARK PLUG GAP 1.0-1. Imm XHNXROIJOAAA
fRONf {>-
REGULATOR
NO OTH[R ADJUSTMENTS HHOlO. 2. 3l
(HJ
23VHGGFG
(poL)
I I HONDA MOTOR CO lTD
PAA-L12
FEDERAL
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
NEWTLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
TIER 1/LEV
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
CALIFORNIA ULEV
Engine Family:
X HNX V 02.3 PA3
rr-r'l
abc d e
a. Model Year
X: 1999
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
X HNX R 0130 AAA
rr-ri,
abc d e
a. Model Year
X: 1999
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
1-13 BACK
General Information
Example
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION.
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO u. S. EPA NLEV AND

CLEAN-FUEL VEHICLE ANO CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABALE TO GASOLINE FUELED
2000 MODEl YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
CERTIFICATION TEST FUEl: EPA UNLEADED GASOLINE
FlED
1---
r 1M'4:Jn.
VALVE LASH IN: o. 2UD. Olenm
YHNXV02. lPAl .
(COLD) EX: o. lO:!::O. 02mlll
SPARK PLUG GAP I. 0-1. 1mm
YHNX RO IlOAAA
FRONT {}
REGUlATOR
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED. 2.lL
(HJ
23VHGFFG
(poW)
I I HONDA MOTOR CO . L TO
PAS-AD)
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV AND
CLEAN-FUEL VEHICLE AND CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO GASOLINE FUELED
2000 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
CERTIFICATION TEST FUEL: EPA UNLEADED
GASOLINE
CALIFORNIA ULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
NEW ULEV PASSENGERS CARS, AND CALIFORNIA
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS.
1-14
Engine Family:
Y HNX V 02.3 PA3
riril
ab cd
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
e
HNX:HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
Y HNX R 0130 AM
rirll
ab cd
a. Model Year
Y:2000
e
HNX:HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
BACK
Example:
THIS vEHICLE TO U.S. EPA
lAC VALVE
i
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE 10 2001 MODH YEAR

TO [VAP CANISTER
N(W ULEV PASSENGER CARS AHO CALIFORNIA
II
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 20rH MODEL nAIl Ci:.. CAlruSHR
NEW UlfV PASSENGER CARS.
PURGE

CATALYST
T we / H02S (2) IE GR / SF I / OBO II R T I F IE 0
]
VALV"ASH '",'.26<0. 02mm.I'H",V'2JW81
lHNXAOlioAAF
FRONT {}
REGULATOR
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS loll
(HJ
23VAGJJG

I I HONDA MOTOA CO .. L TO
PAA-L21
FEDERAL
CLEAN-FUEL VEHICLE REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO
GASOLINE FUELED 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV
PASSENGER CARS.
CALIFORNIA lEV
CLEAN-FUEL VEHICLE AND CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO GASOLINE FUELED
2001 MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
CALIFORNIA UlEV
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS.
CALIFORNIA SULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO CALIFORNIA
NEW LEVII SULEV PASSENGER CARS.
THIS VEHICLE MAY ONLY BE INTRODUCED INTO
COMMERCE FOR SALE IN CALIFORNIA.
CANADIAN TIER 1
REGULATIONS AND CANADIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS
FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS.
Engine Family:
1 HNX V 02.3 WB7
IIIII
a b c d
a. Model Year
1: 2001
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
1 HNX R 0130 AAF
IIIII
ab c d
a. Model Year
1:2001
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
1-15 BACK
General Information
Example:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATIO.N
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA NLEV
lAC VALVE

REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO ZDOZ MODEL YEAR
"'=81
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
?

REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO ZDOl MODEL YEAR
..
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS. puAGE
CATALYST
VALVE
TWC I HOU-r'lI 7fo'R/IFI/OBD I CERTIFIED

VALVE LASH IN, D. , ........ ,
;UE'""J
(COLD) II: O. IOU. 01.111 IHUVIII.3WIl
PRESSURE
SPU PLUI GAP 1. 0.1. hUll
FROn{}
REGULATOR
NO OTHER AD"USTlle." HEEDED.
(Q)
23VAGJJG
CE0
I I Hondl Motor Co . Lid
PAAL21
FEDERAL and CANADIAN TIER 1
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
1-16
Engine Family:
2 HNX V 02.3 WB7
lilil
ab cd
a. Model Year
2:2002
e
HNX:HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
2 HNX R 0130 AAF
IIIII
ab cd
a. Model Year
2:2002
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
BACK
Lift and Support Points
Frame Hoist
If you are going to remove heavy components such as
suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle,
first support the front of the vehicle with a tall safety
stand. When substantial weight is removed from the
rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and
cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands,
under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear
support points (e).
2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle
gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift
points for solid contact with the lift blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points (B and e) as for a frame hoist. Always
use safety stands when working on or under any
vehicle that is supported only by a jack.
Floor Jack
1. Setthe parking brake.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
3. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
gearshift lever in reverse (or the automatic
transmission in position.)
4. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the
jack lift platform (e) on the jacking bracket, and jack
up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands
under it.
A c
c
5. Position the safety stands under the support points
and adjust them so the vehicle will be level.
6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
1-17
BACK
General Information
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional
towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
There are three popular methods oftowing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Equipment- The operator loads the vehicle
on the back of a truck. This is the best way of
transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is
equipped with a towing hook (A) and tie down hooks (8).
The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the
vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hooks can be
used to secure the vehicle to the truck.
B
A
Wheel Lift Equipment- The tow truck uses two
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground.
Sling-type Equipment- The tow truck uses metal
cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged. This
method of towing is unacceptable.
1-18
If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it
should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If
due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the
front wheels on the ground, do the following:
Manual Transmission
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
Automatic Transmission
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to position, then rID position.
Turn off the engine.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80
km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
INOTICEI
Improper towing preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine
(automatic transmission), the vehicle must be
transported on a flat-bed.
Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
BACK
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original parts
have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. The original engine or transmission
VIN plate is transferred to a replacement engine or transmission and attached with break-off bolts.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
1-19
BACK
General Information
Revised Component Terms
Beginning with '01 models, the following component terms have been changed to conform with the standards in SAE
document J 1930. If you find a terms or abbreviation in a '01 manual that is unfamiliar to you, check this list. If a term is
not listed below, it did not change.
00 and Earlier Models '01 Model or later
Meaning HONDA Abbreviations Meaning New Abbreviations
SAE recommendation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (for H02S Air Fuel Ratio Sensor AlFSENSOR
some models)
Brake Switch Brake Pedal Position Switch BPPSwitch
Clutch Switch Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Distributor Ignition Rotor 01 Rotor Distributor Rotor
Function Sensor Engine Speed Fluctuation RPM Fluctuation
Sensor Sensor
Evaporative Emission Control EVAP Control Canister Evaporative Emission EVAP Canister
Canister Canister
Evaporative Emission Control EVAP Control Canister Evaporative Emission EVAP Canister Vent
Canister Vent Shut Valve Vent Shut Valve Canister Vent Shut Valve Shut Valve
Evaporative Emission Purge EVAP Purge Control Evaporative Emission EVAP Canister Purge
Control Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Canister Purge Valve Valve
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Lift Sensor Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Position
Valve Lift Valve Position Sensor
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Control Solenoid Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Vacuum
Control Solenoid Valve Valve Valve Vacuum Control Control Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Vacuum Control Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Vacuum
Vacuum Control Valve Valve Valve Vacuum Control Control Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
Radiator Fan Control Module Fan Control Module
Fuel Tank Evaporative Fuel Tank Vapor/Liquid
Emission Valve Separation Valve
ORVR Vent Shut Valve Fuel Tank Vapor Control
Valve
ORVR Vapor Recirculation Fuel Tank Vapor Recirculation
Tube Tube
First Idle Themo Valve Idle Air Control Thermal lAC Thermal Valve
Valve
Fuel Injector Injector
Fuel Injection Air Control FIA Control Valve Intake Air Bypass Control
Valve Valve
Fuel Injection Air Control FIA Control Solenoid Intake Air Bypass Control
Solenoid Valve Valve Themal Valve
Intake Air Bypass Check Valve lAB Check Valve Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Vacuum Check
Control Vacuum Check Valve Valve
Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Actuator
Control Actuator
Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Actuator Wire
Control Actuator Wire
Intake Air Bypass Control lAB Control Diaphragm Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Diaphragm
Diaphragm Control Actuator Diaghragm
Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Module
Control Module
1-20
BACK
00 and Earlier Models '01 Model or later
Meaning HONDA Abbreviations Meaning New Abbreviations
SAE recommendation
Intake Air Bypass Control lAB Control Solenoid Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve Valve Control Solenoid Valve
Intake Air Bypass Vacuum lAB Vacuum Tank Intake Manifold Runner IMRCVacuum
Tank Control Vacuum Reservoir
Intake Air Bypass Valve Body lAB Valve Body Intake Manifold Runner IMRCValve
Assembly Assembly Control Valve
Breather Chamber Oil/Air Separator
Fuel Pressure Regulator Pressure Regulator Vacuum
Control Solenoid Valve Control Solenoid Valve
Air Control Valve Check Valve Secondary Air Injection Air Control Vacuum
Control Vacuum Check Valve Check Valve
Air Control Valve Vacuum Secondary Air Injection Air Control Vacuum
Tank Control Vacuum Reservoir Reservoir
Air Control Solenoid Valve Secondary Air Injection Air Control Valve
Control Vacuum Control Vacuum Control
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Air Pump Secondary Air Iniection Pump Air Pump
Air Control Valve Secondary Air Injection Pump Air Control Valve
Control Valve
Air Pump Electric Current Secondary Air Injection Pump Air Pump Electric
Sensor Electric Current Sensor Current Sensor
Shift/Clutch Pressure Control Shift Solenoid and Automatic SS and AfT Clutch
Solenoid Valve Set Transaxle Clutch Pressure Pressure Control
Control Solenoid Valve Set Solenoid Valve Set
Shift Control Solenoid Valve Shift Solenoid and Torque SS and TCC Solenoid
Set Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Set
Valve Set
Shift/Lock-up Clutch Control Shift Solenoid and Torque SS and TCC Solenoid
Solenoid Valve Assy Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Valve
Shift Control Solenoid Valve Shift Solenoid Valve A SS Valve A
A
Shift Control Solenoid Valve Shift Solenoid Valve B SS Valve B
B
Throttle Valve Control Throttle Actuator
Module
Lock-up Clutch Control Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid and AfT
Solenoid Valve Set Solenoid and Automatic Clutch Pressure Control
Transaxle Clutch Pressure Solenoid Valve Set
Control Solenoid Valve Set
Lock-up Clutch Control Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Automatic Transaxle Position AfT Gear Position Transmission Range Switch TR Switch
Switch Switch
Variable Valve Timing and VTEC Pressure Switch Variable Valve Timing and VTEC Oil Pressure
Valve Lift Electronic Control Valve lift Electronic Control Switch
Pressure Switch Pressure Switch
1-21
BACK
BACK
Specifications
II
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Electrical .................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .................................................. 2-2
Cylinder Head ........................................................ 2-3
Engine Block .......................................................... 2-4
Engine lubrication ................................................ 2-5
Cooling ................................................................... 2-6
Fuel and Emissions ............................................... 2-6
Clutch ..................................................................... 2-6
Manual Transmission and Differential ................ 2-7
Automatic Transmission and Differential ........... 2-10
Steering .................................................................. 2-16
Suspension ....................................................... ..... 2-16
Brakes ............... ................. ................... .................. 2-17
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-17
Design Specifications
Dimensions ............................................................ 2-18
Weight (U.S.A.) ...................................................... 2-18
Weight (CANADA) ................................................. 2-18
Engine .................................................................... 2-18
Starter .................................................................... 2-18
Clutch ..................................................................... 2-18
Manual Transmission ........................................... 2-19
Automatic Transmission ...................................... 2-19
Steering .................................................................. 2-19
Suspension ............................................................ 2-19
Wheel Alignment .................................................. 2-19
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-19
Tires ........................................................................ 2-19
Electrical Ratings ................................................... 2-20
Body Specifications
Illustration .............................................................. 2-21
E EI ngme ectnca
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V
Primary winding resistance at 68F (20C) F23A1 and F23A4 engines: 0.45-0.55 Q
F23A5 engine: 0.63-0.77 Q
Secondary winding resistance at 68F (20C) F23A1 and F23A4engines: 16.8-25.2 kQ
F23A5 engine: 12.8- 19.2 kQ
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Ignition wire Resistance at 68F (20C) 25kQ max.
Spark plug Type '98-99 models NGK: ZFR5F-11
DENSO: KJ16CR-L11
'00-01 models NGK: PZFR5F-11
DENSO: PKJ 1 6CR-L 11
Gap '98-99 models 1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)
'00-01 models 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) 1.3 mm (0.051 in.)
Ignition timing At idle (check the Mrr (in neutral): 122BTDC at 70050 rpm
red mark) Arr (in IBl or [lI): 12 2BTDC at 700 50 rpm
Alternator belt Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) WithoutAlC Used belt: 10.5- 12.5 mm (0.41 -0.49 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a applied mid-way between pulleys (with AlC, see New belt: 8.0-10.0 mm (0.31 -0.39 in.)
new belt to the "Compressor
new belt spec., belt" in the AlC
run the engine table)
for 5 minutes, Tension (measured with belt tension WithoutAlC Used belt: 290-440 N (30-45 kgf, 66-99Ibs)
then readjust it gauge) (with AlC, see New belt: 540-740N (55-75kgf, 120-170Ibs)
to the used belt "Compressor
spec. belt" in the AlC
table)
Alternator Output At 13.5Vand F23A 1 engine: 80 A
normal engine F23A4 engine: 90 A
temperature F23A5 engine: 80 A
Coil (rotor) resistance at 68F (20C) 2.8-3.0kQ
Slip ring 0.0. 14.4 mm (0.57 in.) 14.0 mm (0.55 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 2.9-3.5 N (0.66-0.79Ibs)
Starter for Mrr Output 1.2kW
(DEN SO) Commutator mica depth 0.5-0.8 mm (0.020-0.031 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator 0.0. 29.9-30.0 mm (1.177-1.181 in.) 29.0 mm (1.142 in.)
Brush length 15.0- 15.5 mm (0.59-0.61 in.) 10.0 mm (0.39 in)
Brush spring tension (new) 14-20 N (1.4-2.0 kgf, 4.0-5.3Ibs)
Starter for Arr Output 1.4kW
(MITSUBA) Commutator mica depth 0.4-0.6 mm (0.016-0.020 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Brush length 15.8- 16.2 mm (0.62-0.64 in.) 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
Brush spring tension (new) 16-18 N (1.6-1.8 kgf, 3.5-4.0 Ibs)
E ngme A ssem bl IV
Compression Pressure check at 200 rpm with wide Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm', 135 psi) --
open throttle. (See Design Specs for Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) --
ratio.) variation
2-2
BACK
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage
-- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height
99.95-100.05 mm
--
(3.935-3.939 in.)
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.15 mm
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
(0.002-0.006 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050-0.089 mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height VTEC intake, 37.775 mm (1.4872 in.) --
primary
VTEC intake, mid 39.725 mm (1.5640 in.) --
VTEC intake, 34.481 mm (1.3575 in.) --
secondary
VTEC exhaust 38.366 mm (1.5105 in.) --
Intake 38.339 mm (1.5094 in.) --
Exhaust 37.716 mm (1.4849 in.) --
Valves Clearance (cold) Intake 0.24-0.28 mm (0.009-0.011 in.) --
Exhaust 0.28- 0.32 mm (0.011- 0.013 in.) --
StemO.D. Intake 5.485-5.495 mm 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
(0.2159-0.2163 in.)
Exhaust 5.450-5.460 mm 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
(0.2146-0.2150 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020-0.045 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0008-0.0018 in.)
Exhaust 0.055-0.080 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
Valve seats Width Intake 1.25-1.55mm 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
(0.049-0.061 in.)
Exhaust 1.25-1.55 mm 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
(0.049-0.061 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.75-47.55 mm 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
(1.841-1.872 in.)
Exhaust 46.68-47.48 mm 47.73 mm (1.879 in.)
(1.838-1.869 in.)
Valve springs Free length VTEC intake 51.08 mm (2.011 in.) --
VTEC exhaust 55.58 mm (2.188 in.) --
Intake 53.66 mm (2.113 in.) --
Exhaust 55.58 mm (2.188 in.) --
Valve guides 1.0. Intake 5.515-5.530 mm 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
(0.2171-0.2177 in.)
Exhaust 5.515-5.530 mm 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
(0.2171-0.2177 in.)
Installed height Intake 21.20-22.20 mm --
(0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust 20.63-21.63 mm --
(0.812-0.852 in.)
Rocker arms Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.026 - 0.067 mm 0.08 mm 10.003 in.)
(0.0010-0.0026 in.)
Exhaust 0.018-0.054 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0007-0.0021 in.)
2-3
BACK
E nglne 81 oc k
Block Warpage of deck
0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter
Aorl 86.010-86.020 mm (3.3862-3.3866 in.) 86.070 mm (3.3886 in.)
B or II 86.000-86.010 mm (3.3858-3.3862 in.) 86.070 mm (3.3886 in.)
Bore taper -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit ---
0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
Piston Skirt 0.0. at 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from No letter 85.980-85.990 mm (3.3850-3.3854 in.) 85.970 mm (3.3846 in.)
bottom of skirt Letter B 85.970-85.980 mm (3.3846-3.3850 in.) 85.960 mm (3.3842 in.)
Clearance in cylinder 0.020--0.040 mm (0.0008-0.0016 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Second 1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in)
Oil 2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in) 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
Piston rings Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.035-0.060 mm (0.0014-0.024 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Second 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in.) 0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin 0.0. 21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648 in.) 21.954 mm (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.0050- +0.0010 mm 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020-+0.00004 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in.) 0.Q19 mm (0.0007 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652 in.) --
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 48.0 mm (1.89 in.) --
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.30 mm (0.006-0.012 in.) 0.40 mm (0.061 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter No.1 journal 54.980-55.004 mm (2.1646-2.1655 in.) --
No.2 journal
No.4 journal
No.3 journal 54.976-55.000 mm (2.1644-2.1654 in.) --
No.5 journal 54.992-55.Q16 mm (2.1650-2.1660 in.) --
Rod journal diameter 44.976-45.000 mm (1.7707-1.7717 in.) --
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No.1 journal 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearings F23A 1 (1000001-, 2000001-,3000001-, No.2 journal 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
4000001- ), No.3 journal 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.) 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
F23A4 (1000001 -, 2000001 -,3000001 -, No.4 journal 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
4000001-), No.5 journal 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 in.) 0.040 mm (0.0016 in.)
F23A5 (1000001 -,2000001 -,3000001 -,
4000001-),
F23A 1 (3400001 - , 4400001 - ),
F23A4 (3400001 - , 4400001- )
engines
Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No.1 journal 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.) 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
F23A 1 (3500001 -,4500001), No.2 journal 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.) 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
F23A4 (3500001 -,4500001), No.3 journal 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
F23A5 (3500001 - , 4500001) No.4 journal 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 in.) 0.045 mm (0.0018 in.)
engines No.5 journal 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 in.) 0.040 mm (0.0016 in.)
Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No.1 journal 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 in.) 0.045 mm (0.0018 in.)
F23A 1 (2500001 -), F23A4 (2500001 -) No.2 journal 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
engines No.3 journal 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.) 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
No.4 journal 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 in.) 0.045 mm (0.0018 in.)
No.5 journal 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 in.) 0.040 mm (0.0016 in.)
Rod bearing clearance 0.021-0.049 mm (0.0008-0.0019 in.) 0.060 mm (0.0024 in.)
2-4
BACK
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service limit
Balancer shafts Journal diameter No.1 journal, 42.722- 42.734 mm 42.71 mm (1.681 in.)
front shaft (1.6820-1.6824 in.)
No.1 journal, 20.938 - 20.950 mm 20.92 mm (0.824 in.)
rear shaft (0.8243-0.8248 in.)
No.2 journal, 38.712-38.724 mm 38.70 mm (1.524 in.)
front and rear (1.5241-1.5246 in.)
shafts
shafts
Journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) --
End play Front shaft 0.10-0.40 mm --
(0.004-0.016 in.)
Rear shaft 0.04-0.15 mm --
(0.002-0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) 0.03 mm (0.001 in.)
Shaft-to-bearing oil clearance No.1 journal, 0.066-0.098 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
front shaft (0.0026-0.0039 in.)
No.3 journal,
front and rear
shafts
rear shaft (0.0020-0.0030 in.)
shafts
Balancer shaft 1.0. No.1 journal, 42.800-42.820 mm 42.83 mm (1.686 in.)
bearings front shaft (1.6850-1.6858 in.)
rear shaft (0.8268- 0.8273 in.)
shafts
shafts
E L b" t" ngme u rica Ion
Engine oil Capacity 5.6 A (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qtl for engine overhaul
4.3 A (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt) for oil change, including filter
4.0 A (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) for oil change, without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.02 - 0.16 mm (0.001 - 0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.10-0.19 mm (0.004-0.007 in.) 0.21 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial 0.02-0.07 mm (0.001-0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
clearance
Relief valve Oil pressure with oil temperature at at idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm', 10 psi) min.
176F (80C) at 3,000 rpm 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) min.
2-5
BACK
C r 00 mg
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
I
Service Limit
Radiator Coolant capacity (Includes engine, MIT: engine 7.0/1 (7.4 US qt, 6.2 Imp qt)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) overhaul
MIT: coolant 5.5/1 (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt)
change
NT: engine 6.911 (7.3 US qt, 6.1 Imp qt)
overhaul
NT: coolant 5.411 (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt)
change
Reservoir Coolant capacity 0.611 (0.6 US qt, 0.5 Imp qt)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm', 14-18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169-176F (76-80C)
Fully open 194F (90C)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.) min.
Radiator fan Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196-203F (91-95C)
switch A Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5-15F (3-8C) from actual "ON" temperature
Fuel and Emissions
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New I
Service Limit
Fuel pressure Pressure with regulator vacuum hose 320-370 kPa (3.3-3.8 kgf/cm', 47-54 psi)
regulator disconnected
Fuel tank Capacity 64.811 (17.1 US gal, 14.3 Imp gal)
Engine idle Idle speed with headlights and radiator MIT in neutral 70050rpm
fan off NT in [t!I or[fl 70050rpm
Fast idle MIT in neutral 1,40050 rpm
NT in [t!I or[fl 1,40050 rpm
IdleCO% 0.1 max.
Clutch
Clutch pedal Height from the floor 190 mm (7.5 in.) --
Stroke 141-151 mm (5.6-5.9 in.) --
Play 9-15 mm (0.4-0.6 in.) --
Disengagement height from the floor 96 mm (3.8 in.) min. --
Flywheel Runout on clutch mating surface 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Clutch disc Rivet head depth 1.650-1.225 mm 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
(0.065-0.089 in.)
Rivet head thickness 8.5-9.1 mm (0.33-0.36 in.) 6.0 mm (0.24 in.)
Pressure plate Warpage 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Height of diaphragm spring fingers Measure with 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) max. 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
feeler gauge and
special tool
2-6
BACK
Manual Transmission and Differential
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit
Transmission oil Capacity Use Honda MTF Forfluid change: 1.94 (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt)
For overhaul: 2.0 4 (2.1 US qt, 1.81mp qt)
Mainshaft End play
0.10-0.16 mm (0.004-0.006 in.) Adjust
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 27.977 - 27.990 mm 27.940mm
(1.1015-1.1020 in.) (1.1000 in.)
Diameter of needle bearing contact 37.984-38.000 mm 37.930mm
area (1.4954-1.4961 in.) (1.4933 in.)
Diameter of ball bearing contact area 27.987 - 28.000 mm 27.940mm
(1.1018-1.1024 in.) (1.1000 in.)
Mainshaft 3rd 1.0. 43.009 - 43.025 mm 43.080mm
and 4th gears (1.6933-1.6939 in.) (1.6961 in.)
Thickness 3rd gear 32.42-32.47 mm (1.276-1.278 in.) 32.3 mm (1.27 in.)
4th gear 30.92-30.97 mm (1.217-1.219 in.) 30.8 mm (1.21 in.)
Mainshaft 5th 1.0. 43.009-43.025 mm 43.080mm
gear (1.6933-1.6939 in.) (1.6961 in.)
Thickness 30.92-30.97 mm (1.217-1.219 in.) 30.8 mm (1.21 in.)
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact 38.000-38.015 mm 37.950mm
area (1.4961-1.4967 in.) (1.4941 in.)
Diameter of ball bearing and needle 24.987 - 25.000 mm 24.940mm
bearing contact area (0.9837-0.9843 in.) (0.9819 in.)
Diameter of 1st gear contact area 39.984-40.000 mm 39.930mm
(1.5742-1.5748 in.) (1.5720 in.)
Countershaft 1st 1.0. 46.009 - 46.025 mm 46.08 mm (1.814 in.)
gear (1.8114-1.8120 in.)
Thickness 32.95-33.00 mm (1.297-1.299 in.) --
Countershaft 2nd 1.0. 47.009-47.025 mm 47.08 mm (1.854 in.)
gear (1.8507-1.8514 in.)
Thickness 28.92-28.97 mm (1.139-1.141 in.) --
Countershaft 2nd 1.0. 36.48-36.49 mm 36.50 mm (1.437 in.)
gear spacer (1.4362-1.4366 in.)
collar 0.0. 41.989 - 42.000 mm 41.94 mm (1.651 in.)
(1.6531-1.6535 in.)
Length 29.07 - 29.09 mm --
(1.1445-1.1453 in.)
(cont'd)
2-7
BACK
Manual Transmission and Differential (cont'd)
Item
Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Service Limit
Mainshaft 4th 1.0.
31.002-31.012 mm
31.06 mm (1.223 in.)
and 5th gears
(1.2205-1.2209 in.)
spacercoilar 0.0.
37.989-38.000 mm
37.94 mm (1.494 in.)
(1.4956-1.4961 in.)
Length
A 56.45-56.55 mm --
(2.222-2.226 in.)
+
) . I]
,
B 26.03 - 26.08 mm
26.01 mm (1.024 in.)
" I
t
.' (1.025-1.027 in.)
L __ J
,
, ,
Reverse idler 1.0.
20.016-20.043 mm 20.09 mm (0.7909 in.)
gear
(0.7880-0.7891 in.)
Gear-to-reverse gear shaft clearance 0.036-0.084 mm 0.160 mm (0.0063 in.)
(0.0014-0.0033 in.)
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear clearance (ring pushed 0.85-1.10 mm 0.40 mm (0.016 in.)
against gear) (0.033-0.043 in.)
Dual cone Outer synchro ring-to-synchro cone Ring pushed 0.5-1.0 mm 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
synchro clearance against gear (0.02-0.04 in.)
Synchro cone-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.5-1.0mm 0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
against gear (0.02-0.04 in.)
Outer synchro ring-to-gear clearance Ring pushed 0.95-1.68 mm 0.6 mm (0.02 in.)
against gear (0.037-0.066 in.)
Shift fork Finger thickness 6.2-6.4mm --
(0.24-0.25 in.)
Fork-to-synchro sleeve clearance 0.35-0.65 mm 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
(0.014-0.026 in.)
Reverse shift Pawl groove width 13.0-13.3 mm --
fork (0.51-0.52 in.)
Fork-to-reverse idler gear clearance 0.5-1.1 mm 1.8 mm (0.07 in.)
(0.02-0.04 in.)
Groove width atA 7.05-7.25 mm --
A (0.278-0.285 in.)
I
~
at B 7.4-7.7 mm --
(0.29-0.30 in.)
Fork-to-5th/reverse shift shaft atA 0.05-0.35 mm 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
clearance (0.002-0.014 in.)
A at B 0.4-0.8mm 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
/ ~
(0.02-0.03 in.)
Shift arm 1.0. 15.973-16.000 mm --
(0.6289-0.6299 in.)
Shift arm-to-shaft clearance 0.005-0.059 mm --
(0.0002-0.0023 in.)
Shift fork diameter at contact area 12.9-13.0 mm --
(0.508-0.512 in.)
Shift arm-to-shift fork shaft clearance 0.2-0.5 mm 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
(0.008-0.020 in.)
2-8
BACK
Select lever Shaft outer diameter 15.941 - 15.968 mm --
(0.6276-0.6287 in.)
Shaft arm cover clearance 0.032-0.102 mm --
(0.0013-0.0040 in.)
Shift lever 0.0. 15.941-15.968 mm --
(0.6276-0.6287 in.)
Transmission housing clearance 0.012-0.122 mm --
(0.0005-0.0048 in.)
Interlock Bore diameter 16.00-16.05 mm --
(0.630 0.632 in.)
Shift arm clearance 0.032-0.109 mm --
(0.0013-0.0043 in.)
MIT differential Pinion shaft contact area 1.0. 18.000-18.018 mm --
carrier (0.7087 -0.7094 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.017-0.047 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0007 - 0.0019 in.)
Oriveshaft and intermediate shaft 28.005-28.025 mm --
contact area 1.0. (1.1026-1.1033 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.025-0.066 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.0010- 0.0026 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.055-0.091 mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.0022-0.0036 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque 1.4-2.5 Nm Adjust
(preload) (14-26 kgfcm. 12-23Ibfin)
MIT differential Backlash 0 0 5 ~ 0 1 5 mm --
pinion gear (0.002-0.006 in.)
1.0. 18.042- 18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.0022 - 0.0037 in.)
2-9
BACK
Automatic Transmission and Differential
ATF (Automatic Capacity Honda ATF-Zl For fluid change: 2.52 (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt)
Transmission For overhaul: 6.1 2 (6.4 US qt, 5.4 Imp qt)
Fluid)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in B50-910 kPa BOO kPa
[HJ or [f] position (B.7 9.3 kgf/cm', 120 - 130 psi) (B.2 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
4th clutch pressu re At 2,000 rpm in B40-920 kPa 790 kPa
position (B.6 -9.4 kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) (B.l kgf/cm', 120 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in B40-920 kPa 790 kPa
position (8.6-- 9.4 kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) (B.l kgf/cm', 120 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in B40-920 kPa 790 kPa
00 position (B.6-9.4 kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) (B.l kgf/cm', 120 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in B40-920 kPa 790 kPa
[I] position (B.6-9.4 kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) (B.l kgf/cm', 120 psi)
Stall speed Check with vehicle on level ground F23A 1/F23A4 2,400-2,700 rpm
engines
F23A5 engine 2,350-2,650 rpm
Clutches Clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance 1st 1.15- 1.35 mm
(0.045-0.053 in.)
2nd 0.7-0.9 mm
(0.02B-0.035 in.)
3rd 0.6-0.Bmm
(0.024-0.031 in.)
4th 0.4-0.6 mm
(0.016-0.024 in.)
- -
Clutch return spring free length 1st, 2nd 45.7 mm (1.BO in.) 43.7 mm (1.72 in.)
3rd,4th 33.5 mm (1.32 in.) 31.5 mm (1.24 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) --
Clutch plate thickness 1st 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
2nd 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
3rd 2.6 mm (0.102 in.) When discolored
4th 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
1st and 2nd clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 3.10 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
Mark 2 3.20 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored
Mark3 3.30 mm (0.130 in.) When discolored
MarkB 2.BO mm (0.110 in.) When discolored
MarkO 3.00 mm (0.1 lB in.) When discolored
3rd and 4th clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 2.10 mm (0.OB3 in.) When discolored
Mark2 2.20 mm (0.OB7 in.) When discolored
Mark 5 2.50 mm (0.09B in.) When discolored
2-10
BACK
Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact 1.0. Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm (1.0630-1.0638 in.) When worn or damaged
side
ATF pump side 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF pump gear thrust clearance 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
ATF pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.) --
ATF pump driven gear 1.0. 14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525 in.) When worn or damaged
A TF pump driven gear shaft 0.0. 13.980-13.99 mm (0.5504-0.5508 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse shift fork Fork finger thickness 5.60-6.00 mm (0.220-0.236 in.) 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
Park gear and pawl When worn or damaged
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000-14.010 mm (0.5512-0.5516 in.) --
Shift fork shaft valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm (1.4567-1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact 1.0. 32.000-32.013 mm (1.2598-1.2604 in.) 32.050 mm (1.2618 in.)
body
Accumulator body Sealing ring contact 1.0. 35.000-35.025 mm (1.3780-1.3789 in.) 35.05 mm (1.3799 in.)
Stator shaft Sealing ring contact 1.0. 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426 in.) 29.050 mm (1.1437 in.)
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at stator shaft 22.984-23.000 mm (0.9049-0.9055 in.) When worn or damaged
area at3rd gear 55.975-55.991 mm (2.2037-2.2044 in.) When worn or damaged
at 4th gear collar 33.975-33.991 mm (1.3376-1.3382 in.) When worn damaged
1.0. of 3rd gear 61.000-61.019 mm (2.4016-2.4023 in.) When worn or damaged
1.0. of 4th gear 40.000-40.016 mm (1.5748-1.5754 in.) When worn or damaged
End play of 3rd gear 0.03-0.31 mm (0.001-0.012 in.) --
End play of 4th gear 0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in.) --
41 x 72 mm thrust shim thickness No.1 6.35 mm (0.2500 in.) When worn or damaged
No.2 6.40 mm (0.2520 in.) When worn or damaged
Thrust washer thickness 27x47 x5mm 5.00 mm (0.197 in.) When worn or damaged
Length of 4th gear collar 49.40-49.50 mm (1.9449-1.9448 in.) --
4th gear collar flange thickness 4.35-4.50 mm (0.171-0.177 in.) When worn or damaged
Sealing ring thickness 32 mm sealing 1.85-1.95 mm (0.073-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring
29 mm sealing 1.85-1.95 mm (0.073-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.080 mm (0.082 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 3rd clutch 5.97-5.98 mm (0.2350-0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
4th clutch 11.47-11.48 mm (0.4516-0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 3rd clutch 6.018-6.030 mm (0.2369-0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
4th clutch 11.500-11.518 mm (0.4528-0.4535 in.) 11.530 mm (0.4539 in.)
(cont'd)
2-11 BACK
Automatic Transmission and Differential (cont'd)
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 4th gear 33.975-33.991 mm When worn or
area (1.3376-1.3382 in.) damaged
at 2nd gear 39.979- 40.000 mm When worn or
(1.5740-1.5748 in.) damaged
at park gear 41.964-41.980 mm When worn or
(1.6521-1.6528 in.) damaged
at left end 36.005-36.015 mm When worn or
(1.4175-1.4179 in.) damaged
1.0. of 4th gear 40.000- 40.016 mm When worn or
(1.5748-1.5754 in.) damaged
1.0. of idler gear 50.000-50.016 mm When worn or
(1.9685-1.9691 in.) damaged
1.0. of reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm When worn or
(1.8110-1.8116 in.) damaged
End play of 1st gear 0.00-0.33 mm (0.000-0.013 in.) --
End play of idler gear 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.) --
End play of reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.004-0.010 in.) --
Length of distance collar 50.42-50.46 mm (1.985-1.987 in.) --
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.) --
Reverse selector hub 0.0. 55.87 - 55.90 mm (2.1996- 2.2008 in.) When worn or
damaged
2-12
BACK
Secondary shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 1st gear 37.978-37.993 mm When worn or
area
(1.4952-1.4958 in.) damaged
at 2nd gear 33.986-33.999 mm When worn or
(1.3380-1.3385 in.) damaged
1.0. of 1 st gear 44.000-44.016 mm When worn or
(1.7323-1.7329 in.) damaged
1.0. of 2nd gear 40.000-40.016 mm When worn or
(1.5748-1.5754 in.) damaged
End play of 1 st gear 0.07-0.15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.) --
End play of 2nd gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.) --
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer thickness No.1 6.85 mm (0.270 in.) When worn or
damaged
No.2 6.90 mm (0.272 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
NO.4 7.00 mm (0.276 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
NO.6 7.10 mm (0.280 in.) When worn or
damaged
37 x 55 mm thrust shim thickness No.1 4.90 mm (0.193 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Sealing ring thickness 1.890-1.95 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 7.97-7.98 mm (0.3138-0.3142 in.) 7.95 mm (0.3130 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 8.000-8.015 mm (0.3150-0.3156 in.) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in.)
Reverse idler Diameter of needle bearing contact at reverse idler 14.985 -15.000 mm When worn or
gear area gear shaft (0.5900-0.5906 in.) damaged
1.0. 20.007 - 20.020 mm When worn or
(0.7877-0.7882 in.) damaged
End play 0.20-0.55 mm (0.008-0.022 in.) --
1.0. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.800-14.824 mm When worn or
(0.5827 - 0.5836 in.) damaged
1.0. of transmission housing of reverse 14.800-14.818 mm --
idler gear shaft contact area (0.5827-0.5834 in.)
(cont'd)
2-13
BACK
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
Main valve body Lock-up control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.9mm 14.2
springs (see (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
page 14-160). Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9mm 7.6mm 63.0mm 22.4
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.480 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 32.2mm 13.4
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.268 in.)
Shift valve D spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 35.7mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4mm 33.5mm 9.8
(0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 35.7mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 mm 8.4mm 38.2mm 14.0
(0.043 in.) (0.331 in.) (1.504 in.)
Cooler check valve spring 0.6mm 5.8mm 14.5 mm 6.8
(0.024 in.) (0.228 in.) (0.571 in.)
Regulator valve Regulator valve spring B 1.6mm 9.2mm 44.0mm 12.5
body springs (0.063 in.) (0.362 in.) (1.732 in.)
(see page 14- Regulator valve spring A 1.9mm 14.7 mm 77.4mm 15.2
163). (0.075 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.047 in.)
Stator reaction spring 4.5mm 35.4mm 30.3mm 1.92
(0.177 in.) (1.394 in.) (1.193 in.)
Relief valve spring 0.9mm 6.6mm 39.8mm 20.4
(0.035 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.567 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.65mm 6.6mm 34.8mm 15.6
(0.026 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.370 in.)
Servo body Shift valve B spring 0.8mm 7.1 mm 40.4mm 16.9
page 14-164). Shift valve A spring 0.8mm 7.1 mm 40.4mm 16.9
(0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.591 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7mm 6.1mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7mm 6.1mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
3rd accumulator spring 3.8mm 19.6mm 59.8mm 7.8
(0.150 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.354 in.)
4th accumulator spring 3.8mm 19.6mm 59.8mm 7.8
(0.150 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.354 in.)
Accumulator 1st accumulator spring B 2.5mm 12.8mm 49.5mm 8.5
(see page 14- 1st accumulator spring A 2.6mm 19.6mm 69.7mm 10.8
165). (0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.744 in.)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.7mm 14.8mm 51.0 mm 9.6
(0.106 in.) (0.583 in.) (2.008 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.6mm 21.6mm 73.2mm 10.0
(0.102 in.) (0.850 in.) (2.882 in.)
2-14
BACK
AfT differential Pinion shaft contact area 1.0. 18.010-18.028 mm --
carrier (0.7091 -0.7098 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.023-0.057 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
Driveshaft shaft contact area 1.0. 28.025- 28.045 mm --
(1.103-1.104 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.086 mm (0.002-0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new 2.7-3.9 Nm Adjust
(preload) bearing (28-40 kgfcm, 24-35Ibfin)
For used 2.5-3.6 Nm Adjust
bearing (25-37 kgfcm, 22-32Ibfin)
AfT differential Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in.) --
pinion gear 1.0. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.002-0.004 in.)
2-15
BACK
s teenng
Service Umit
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside With engine 0- 10 mm (0-0.39 in.) --
edge
running
Starting load measured at outside With engine 30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 Ibs) --
edge running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened
20Max.
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve
7,200-7,800 kPa (73-80 kgf/cm', 1,040- 1,140 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Use Honda For fluid change: 0.411 (0.42 US qt, 0.35 Imp qt)
fluid Power Steering For system overhaul: 1.1 II (1.16 US qt, 0.97 Imp qt)
Fluid
Power steering Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) Used belt: 13.0-16.0 mm (0.51-0.63 in.)
pump belt applied mid-way between pulleys New belt: 11.0-12.5 mm (0.43-0.49 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a Tension (measured with belt tension Used belt: 390-540 N (40-55 kgf, 88- 121 Ibs)
new belt to the gauge) New belt: 740-880 N (75-90kgf, 165-198Ibs)
new belt spec,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
then readjust it
to the used belt
spec.
s uspenslon
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0000' 1
Rear -0030' 1
Caster Front 248'1
Total Toe Front 02 mm (01/16 in.)
Rear IN 2+2 (1/16+ 1/16 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 3832'2
Outside wheel 3103' (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Steel wheel Runout Axial 0- 1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearings End play Front 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Rear 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
2-16
BACK
Brakes
Parking brake Distance travelled when pulled with Disc brake 6-9 clicks
lever 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibs) of force Drum brake 4-7 clicks
Brake pedal Pedal height (Carpet removed) MiT 144 mm (5 11/16 in.)
NT 148 mm (513/16 in.)
Free play 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance 0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 22.9-23.1 mm (0.90-0.91 in.) 21.0 mm (0.83 in.)
Rear 9.9 -1 0.1 mm (0.39 - 0.40 in.) 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Runout Front -- 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Rear -- 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Parallelism Front and rear -- 0.015 mm
(0.0006 in.)
Brake pads Thickness Front 10.5 -11.5 mm (0.41- 0.45 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 8.9 - 9.1 mm (0.350 - 0.358 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Brake drum I.D. 219.9-220.0 mm 221 mm (8.700 in.)
(8.657 -8.661 in.)
Brake shoes Lining thickness 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
A" C Ir on
d" "
Itlomng
Refrigerant Type HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
Capacity or system 600-650 g (21-23 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type DEN SO: ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 mil (5/6 fI OZ, 0.9 Imp oz)
Evaporator 40 mil (1 1/3 fI OZ, 1.4 Imp OZ)
Each line and 10 mil (1/3 fl OZ, 0.41mp OZ)
hose
Receiver 10 mil (113 fl OZ, 0.4 Imp oz)
Compressor 160 mil (5 1/3 fl OZ, 5.6 Imp oz)
Compressor Starter coil resistance at 68F (20C) 3.4-3.8 Q
(DENSO) Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0.50.15 mm (0.020.006 in.)
Alternator-com- Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) Used belt: 7.0-9.0 mm (0.28-0.35 in.)
pressor belt applied mid-way between pulleys New belt: 4.0-6.0 mm (0.16-0.24 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a Tension (measured with belt tension Used belt: 490-590 N (50-60 kgf, 110-130 Ibs)
new belt to the gauge)
New belt: 1,030-1,130 N (105-115 kgf, 231-254Ibs)
new belt spec.,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
then readjust it
to the used belt
spec.
2-17
BACK
Item Measurement
aualification
Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length
4-door 4,795 mm (188.8 in.)
2-door 4,745 mm (186.8 in.)
Overall width
1,785 mm (70.3 in.)
Overall height
4-door 1,445 mm (56.9 in.)
2-door 1,395 mm (54.9 in.)
Wheelbase
4-door 2,715 mm (106.9 in.)
2-door 2,670 mm (105.1 in.)
Track
Front 1,555 mm (61.2 in.)
Rear 1,535 mm (60.4 in.)
Ground clearance
158 mm (6.2 in.)
Seating capacity
Five
WEIGHT (U.S.A.) 4-door Sedan: OX (99-00) 3,9901bs
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating OX (01) 4,0351bs
(GVWR) LX (98-02)
EX (98-00)
EX (01-02) 4,0801bs
2-door Coupe: LX (98-00) 3,9451bs
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating LX (01-02) 3,9901bs
(GVWR) EX (98-02) 4,0351bs
WEIGHT 4-door sedan: OX (98-00) 1,810 kg
(CANADA) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating DX(Ol) 1,830 kg
(GVWR) LX(98-02)
EX(98-00)
EX (01-02) 1,850 kg
2-door Coupe: LX (98-00) 1}90kg
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating LX (01-02) 1,810 kg
(GVWR) EX (98-02) 1,830 kg
ENGINE Type F23A 1 and F23A4 Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC gasoline engine
engines
F23A5 engine Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 86.0 x 97.0 mm (3.39 x 3.82 in.)
Displacement 2,254 em' (mlA) (138 cu in.)
Compression ratio F23A 1 and F23A4 9.3
engines
F23A5 engine 8.8
Valve train F23A 1 and F23A4 Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
engines
F23A5 engine Belt driven, SOHC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 53.7IA (56.7 US qt, 47.3 Imp qt)/minute
Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 150 IA (159 US qt, 132 Imp qt)/minute
Fuel required UNLEADED gasoline with 86 pump octane number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output MIT 1.2kW
AJT 1.4kW
Nominal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Clockwise as viewed from gear end
CLUTCH Clutch MIT Single plate dry, diaphragm spring
AJT Torque converter
Clutch friction material surface MIT 217 em' (33.6 sq in)
area
2-18
BACK
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
MANUAL Type
Synchronized, 5-speed forward, 1 reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 3.285
2nd 1.807
3rd 1.193
4th 0.903
5th 0.685
Reverse 3.000
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.062
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically controlled automatic, 4-speed forward, 1 reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
2nd 1.427
3rd 0.931
4th 0.620
Reverse 1.863
Gear ratio 4.466
STEERING Type Power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 16.09
Turns, lock-to-Iock 3.11
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent double wishbone, coil spring with stabilizer
Rear Five-link double wishbone
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
WHEEL Camber Front 0
ALIGNMENT Rear - 030'
Caster Front 248'
Total toe Front Omm(Oin.)
Rear In 2 mm (1/16 in.)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear without ASS Power-assisted self-adjusting solid drum
Rear with ABS Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 49 cm' x 2 (7.6 sq in x 2)
Rear 28cm' x 2 (4.3 sq in x 2)
Shoe friction surface area Rear 74 cm' x 2 (11.5 sq in x 2)
TIRES Size offront and rear tires OX P195nO R14 90S
LX and EX P195/65 R15 89H
Size of spare tires T125nO 015 95M
AIR Cooling capacity 5,240 Kcal/h (20,800 BTU/h)
CONDITIONING Compressor Type/manufacturer Swash plate/DENSO
Number of cylinders 10
Capacity 177.7 mA/rev. (10.84 cu in/rev.)
Maximum speed 7,600 rpm
Lubricant 160 mA (51/3 fl oz)
capacity
Lubricant type NO-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
2-19
BACK
(cont'd)
Item Measurement
AIR Blower
CONDITIONING
Temperature control
Compressor clutch
Refrigerant
ELECTRICAL Battery
RATINGS Starter
Alternator
Fuses
Light bulbs
2-20
Qualification
Type
Motor input
Speed control
Maximum capacity
Type
Electrical power
consumption at
6BoF (20C)
Type
Quantity
DENSO
MITSUBA
F23A1 and
F23AS engines
F23A4 engine
Under-hood fuse/
relay box
Under-dash driver's
fuse/relay box
Under-dash
passenger's fuse/
relay box
Headlight high
beam
Headlight low
beam
Front turn signal!
Front side marker
lights
Front parking lights
Rear turn signal
lights
Brake/Taillights
Inner taillight
High mount
brake light
Back-up lights
License plate light
Ceiling light
Trunk lights
Door courtesy
lights
Vanity mirror lights
Glove box light
Spotlights
Gauge lights
Indicator lights
Panel and pilot
lights
Heater control
panel lights
Specification
Sirocco fan
230W/12 V
4-speed
520 m'/h (18,300 cu ft/h)
Air-mix type
Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
40 W maximum at 12 V
HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
600-650 g (21-23 oz)
12 V-52 AH/S hours
12V-1.2kW
12V-1.4kW
12 V-BOA
12V-90A
100A, 50 A, 40 A, 30A, 20 A, 1S A
30 A, 1SA,10A, 7.SA
30 A, 20 A, 10 A, 7.S A
12V-60W
12V-S1 W
12 V -24 W/2.2 CP (candlepower)(two filaments)
12 V-3 CP
12V-21 W
12 V-21/SW
12 V-3 CP
12 V-21 W
12V-21 W
12 V-3 CP
12V-7W
12V-5W
12 V-2 CP
12V-1.1W
12 V-3.4 W
14 V-4 CP
14 V-1.4 W, 3.0 W, 3.4 W
12V-LED, 14V-0.56W, 0.7 W, 1.4W
14 V-0.S6W, 0.B4W
14V-1.12W,1.4W
BACK
Body Specifications
4-door sedan
III III
... en
........
N
......
Unit: mm (in.)
(cant'd)
2-21
BACK
Body Specifications
(cont'd)
2-door coupe
2-22
o
o
CI III
.... ..
CD ....
N ..
C'!
P" CI
-+U------lI---lI!III--II-l-ll----I- 1::
jg
P" P"
Unit: mm (in.)
BACK
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ...... ..... ......... ......... ... ....... 3-2
Maintenance Schedule for Normal
Conditions (1998-2000 Models)
Listed by DistancefTime ............................................... 3-4
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
and Severe Conditions (1998-2000 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-8
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work
grace d ( h A bl IR bl RIO h I I II ) . d . h . ures suc as ssem IVI eassem ry, eplacement, ver au, nsta atlon, etc. contarne rn eac section.
NO. LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT
1 Engine Honda Motor oil. API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy
Conserving" grade oil. The oil container may also
display the API Certification seal shown below. Make
sure it says "For Gasoline Engines." SAE Viscosity: See
chart below.
2 Transmission Manual Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)" ,
Automatic Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF)'2
Transmission
3 Brake line (includes ABS line) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid"3
4 Clutch line Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid"3
5 Power steering gearbox Steering grease PIN 08733-B070E
6 Release fork (manual transmission) Super High Temp Urea Grease (PIN 08798-9002)
7 Shift and select cable ends (manual
transmission)
8 Throttle cable end (dashboard lower panel hole) Silicone grease
9 Throttle cable end (throttle link) Multi-purpose grease
10 Brake master cylinder push rod
11 Clutch master cylinder push rod
12 Pedal linkage
13 Battery terminals
14 Fuel fill lid
15 Rear brake shoe linkage Honda White Lithium Grease
16 Hood hinges and hood latch
17 Trunk hinges and latch
18 Door hinges, upper and lower
19 Door opening detent
20 Caliper piston boot, caliper pins and boots Silicone grease
21 Brake line joints (front and rear wheelhouse) Rust preventives
22 Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid"'
23 Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: DEN SO: NO-OIL 8 (PIN 38897-PR7-A01
AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
For refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
API CERnRCAnON SEAL Recommended Engine Oil
Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
For '98-00 models For '01-02 models
-I
I
=.;1
I
I:
1111 r IIII
5W-20
-20 20 40 &0 80 100"" 20 0 20 40 60 80 'OOF
I I I I I I
, ! , ! , , , !
-30 20 -to to 20 10 40"
-30 -20 ,0 0 ,0 20 30 4OC
*1: Always use Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does
not contain the proper additives.
*2: Always use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
*3: Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
*4: Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission
fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
3-2 BACK
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
@ cv@ @ @
@CD@ @ @
@

@
@ @
@
@
\
./
3-3
BACK
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
(1998-2000 Models)
Listed by Distance/Time
This two-page maintenance schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance. Service at the indicated time or distance, whichever comes
first. Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions if the vehicle meets any of the qualifiers listed in the severe conditions schedule or if
the vehicle is normally driven in Canada.
7 ,500 mil 12,000 km/- o Do items in A.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year o Do items in A and B.
22,500 mi/36,OOO km/ o Do items in A.
30,000 mil 48,000 km/2 years
o Replace spark plugs for '98-99 models. Use NGK (ZFR5F-11) or DENSO (KJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Do: item in A. Band C.
37 ,500 mi/60.000 km/- o Do items in A.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/3 years
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10) Capacity: MIT: 5.511 (5.B US qt, 4.8 Imp qt), AfT: 5.411 (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
o Replace brake fluid. Use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
o Do items in A and B.
52,500 mil 84.000 km/- o Do items in A,
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 years
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Do: item in A, Band C.
67,500 mi/108,000 km/ o Do items in A.
75,000 mil120,000 km/ 5 years
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10) Capacity: MIT: 5.511 (5.B US qt, 4.8 Imp qt), AfT: 5.411 (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season
82,500 mi/132,000 km/- o Do items in A.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 years
Gap: 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Replace transmission fluid. MIT: 1.9 II (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt) Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3). AfT: 2.5 II (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt) Use
Honda ATF-Z1 (see page 14-113).
o Replace brake fluid. Use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
o Do items in A, B, and C.
97,500 mi/156,OOO km/- o Do items in A.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-14) Intake: 0.24 - 0.28 mm (0.009 - 0.011 in.) Exhaust: 0.28 - 0.32 mm (0.011 - 0.013 in.)
o Replace spark plugs for '98-99 models. Use NGK (ZFR5F-11) or DENSO (KJ16CR-L11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Replace spark plugs for '00 model (see page 4-26). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)
o Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23), Installation: (see page 6-26)) and inspect water pump (see page 10-9).
o Check idle speed. Should be 70050 rpm in neutral (Automatic transmission in IJ!l or If) position) (see page 11-110).
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: MIT: 5.511 (5.B US qt, 4.Blmp qt), AfT: 5.44 (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season
112,500 mil181 ,000 km/- o Do items in A.
120,000 mi/193,000 km/8 years
o Replace spark plugs for '98-99 models. Use NGK (ZFR5F-11) or DENSO (KJR16CR-L11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Do the items in A, B, and C.
3-4 BACK
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
D Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.3 11 (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
D Rotate tires. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual -Check tire inflation and condition.
B
D Replace engine oil filter (see page 8-6).
D Inspect front and rear brakes (see page 19-10).
Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mount bolts.
D Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks (disc brake) or within 4 to 7 clicks (drum brake).
D Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-8).
Check rack grease and steering linkage.
Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
D Inspect suspension components.
Check bolts for tightness.
Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
D Inspect driveshaft boots. Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness (see page 16-3).
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). - Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage.
D Check all fluid levels and condition offluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-113) or MTF (see page 13-3), engine coolant,
brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
D Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Check for damage, leaks, and deterioration.
Check for proper fan operation.
D Inspect exhaust system* . Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-5).
D Inspect fuel lines and connections*. Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts (see page 11-118).
C
D Replace air cleaner element.
D Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Look for cracks and damage, then check belt deflection by pushing on it (about 22 Ibs) midway between the pulleys.
- Alternator belt: 10.5-12.5 mm (0.41-0.49 in.)(see page 4-40)
- PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.0 mm (0.51-0.63 in.) (see page 17-12)
- AlC compressor belt: 7.0-9.0 mm (0.28-0.35 in) (see page 4-39)
D Replace the air conditioning filter (see page 21-26).
Replace it twice as often (at 15,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with asterisk ( * ) will not void customer's emissions
warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval to ensure long-term reliability.
3-5 BACK
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
(1998-2000 Models)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule (see page 3-4).
Severe Driving Conditions
Less than 5 miles (8 km) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip
In extremely; hot weather (over 90F/32C)
Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
Trailertowing
On muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads
Driving in mountainous conditions
3,750 mil 6,000 km/ - o Replace oil and filter.
7,500 mil 12,000 km/6 months o Do items in A.
11 ,250 mil 18,000 km/ o Replace oil and filter.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year
o Clean air cleaner element with low pressure air.
18,750 mil 30,000 km/ o Replace oil and filter.
22,500 mil 36,000 km/ 1 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
26,250 mil 42,000 km/ o Replace oil and filter
30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years:
o Replace spark plugs for '98-99 models. Use NGK (ZFR5F-ll) or DENSO (KJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Do items A, B, and C.
37 ,500 mil 60,000 km/2 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/ 3 years:
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: MIT: 5.5 .Q (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt), AfT: 5.4 .Q (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt).
o Replace brake fluid (see page 19-7).
Use Genuine Honda DOT 3. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
48,750 mil 78,000 km/- o Replace oil and filter.
52,500mi/ 84,000 km/3 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/ 4 years:
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23), Installation: (see page 6-26)) and inspect the water pump for '98-99
models (see page 10-9) ifthe vehicle is regularly driven in weather over 110F (43C) or under -20F (-29C); If not, replace the belts
at 105,000 miles.
o Do items in A, Band C.
63,750 mi/102,000 km/- o Replace oil and filter.
67,500 mi/108,000 km 4 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
71 ,250 mi/114,000 km - o Replace oil and filter.
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: MIT: 5.5 .Q (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt), AfT: 5.4 .Q (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt)
o Do items in A, and B.
82,500 mi/132,000 km/5 1/2 years o Do items in A.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/ 6 years:
o Replace spark plugs for '98-'99 models. Use NGK (ZFR5F-11) or DENSO (KJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Replace brake fluid (see page 19-7).
Use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
97,500 mi/156,000 km/6 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
3-6
BACK
105,000 mi/168,OOO km/7 years:
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-14) Intake: 0.24-0.28 mm (0.009-0.011 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
D Replace spark plugs for '00 model. Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
D Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23), Installation: (see page 6-2611 and inspect the water pump (see page 10-
9) only if the belts were not replaced at 60,000 miles.
D Check idle speed* (see page 11-110).: 700 50 rpm in neutral (Automatic transmission in !HI or [fJ position)
D Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: MIT: 5.5 II (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp Qt), AfT: 5.4 II (5.7 US Qt, 4.8 Imp Qt).
D Do items in A, B.
108,750 mi/174,OOO km/- D Replace oil and filter.
112,500 mi/180,OOO km/7 1/2 years: D Do items in A.
116,250 mi/186,OOO km/- D Replace oil and filter.
120,000 mi/192,OOO km/ 8 years:
D Replace spark plugs for '98-'99 models. Use NGK (ZFR5F-11) or DENSO (KJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
D Do items A, B, and C.
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval.
A
D Replace engine oil and filter (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.3 f! (4.5 US Qt, 3.8 Imp Qt)
D Inspect front and rear brakes, every 6 months if vehicle is driven less than 7,500 mile per year (see page 19-10).
D Rotate tires, if the vehicle has been driven the distance listed. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual. (Check tire inflation and
condition.)
Check fluid lines for damage and leaks.
B
D Check parking brake adjustment. - Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks (disc brake) or within 4 to 7 clicks (drum brake).
D Lubricate locks, hinges and latches with Honda white lithium grease.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage and
leakage (see page 19-30).
D Check fluid levels and condition offluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-113) or MTF (see page 13-3), engine coolant,
brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
D Inspect exhaust system. * Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-5).
D Inspect fuel lines and connections. * Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
D Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the positions of the headlights (see page 22-95).
o Inspect the vehicle underbody. Check the paint for damage, scratches, stone chipping, and dents.
C
D Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-133).
D Inspect and adjust drive belt. Look for cracks and damage, then check tension by pushing on each belt (about 22 Ibs) midway between the
pulleys:
Alternator belt: 10.5-12.5 mm (0.41-0.49 in) (see page 4-40).
PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.0 mm (1/2-5/8 in) (see page 17-12).
AlC compressor belt: 7.0-9.0 mm (0.28-0.35 in) (see page 4-391.
D Replace air conditioning filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-26).
D Replace transmission fluid. Use Genuine Honda MTF or ATF.
MIT: 1.9 II (2.0 US Qt, 1.7 Imp Qt)
AfT: 2.5 II (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp Qt)
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with asterisk (*) will not void customer's emissions
3-7
BACK
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions
(1998-2000 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
If driven in normal conditions, do items with a dot (.) .
If driven in severe conditions (see page 3-6) or normally driven in Canada, do the circle (0) and dot (.) items.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever miles x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25
comes fi rst.
km x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
years - 1/2 - 1 - 11/2 -
30 33.75
48 54
2 -
Replace engine oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,OOOkm) or 1 year
37.5
60
21/2
Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter Normal Conditions: Every other oil change
Severe Conditions: Every oil change
Clean air cleaner element
0
Replace air cleaner element

Inspect valve clearance Adjust only if noisy.
Replace spark plugs '98-99 models

'00 model
Replace timing belt, balancer belt NOTE', and inspect water '98-99 models
pump
'00 model
Inspect and adjust drive belts

Inspect idle speed*
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
0
Inspect front and rear brakes 0

0

0
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment

Replace air conditioning filter NOTE'

Lubricate locks, hinges, and latches 0 0
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once a month)

Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 0

0

0
Inspect suspension components 0

0

0
Inspect driveshaft boots 0

0

0
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ASS)

Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids

Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

Inspect exhaust system*

Inspect fuel lines and connections*

Check lights and controls 0 0
Inspect vehicle under body 0 0
3-8
BACK
41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
-
3 - 31/2 - 4
-
41/2
-
5 - 51/2
-
6
-
61/2 - 7 - 71/2 - 8
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,OOOkm) or 1 year Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change
0 0 0

Adjust only if noisy.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
NOTE:
1 If the vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather, over 110'F (43'C) or under - 20'F (- 29'C), replace this belt every 60,000 miles; If not, replace it at 105,000 miles.
2 Replace the air conditioning filter every 15,000 miles if the vehicle is driven mostly where air has a high concentration of soot from industry and diesel-powered vehicle; also
replace it anytime airflow is less than usual.
* According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void customer's emissions
3-9
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
7,500 mi/12,OOO km/- D Do items in A.
15,000 mi/24,OOO km/1 year D Do items in A and B.
22,500 mi/36,OOO km/ D Do items in A.
30,000 mil 4B,OOO km/2 years D Do item in A, B, and C.
37,500 mil 60,000 km/ D Do items in A.
/ /3 years D Do items in D.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/3 years D Do items in A and B.
52,500 mi/B4,OOO km/ - D Do items in A.
60,000 mi/96,OOO km/4 years D Do item in A, B, and C.
67 ,500 mi/10B,OOO km/ - D Do items in A.
75,000 mi/120,OOO km/5 years D Do items in A and B.
82,500 mi/132,OOO km/- D Do items in A.
-/-/6years D Do items in D.
90,000 mi/144,OOO km/6 years D Do items in A, B, and C.
97 ,500 mi/156,OOO km/- D Do items in A.
105,000 mi/168,OOO km/7 years
D Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-14) Intake: 0.24-0.28 mm (0.009- 0.011 in.) Exhaust: 0.2B-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
D Replace spark plugs for '01 model (see page 4-26). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)
D Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23), Installation: (see page 6-26)) and inspect water pump (see page 10-9).
D Check idle speed. Should be 70050 rpm in neutral (Automatic transmission in [NJ or position) (see page 11-110).
D Do items in A and B.
112,500 mi/1BO,OOO km/- D Do items in A.
120,000 mi/192,OOO km/ B years D Do items in A, Band C.
120,000 mil192,OOO km/6 years
D Replace manual transmission fluid. Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3).
Capacity: 1.911 (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt)
120,000 mi/192,OOO km/ 6 years, then every 90,000 mi/144,OOO km/5 years
D Replace automatic transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF).
Capacity: 2.511 (2.6 US qt, 2.2 Imp qt)
120,000 mil192,OOO km/ 10 years, then every 60,000 mil96,OOO km or 5 years
D Replace engine coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: M{(: 5.511 (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt), AfT: 5.411 (5.7 US qt. 4.Blmp qt).
3-10
BACK
Do the items in parts A, B, C and D as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
D Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.3 II (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
D Rotate tires. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual - Check tire inflation and condition.
B
Check brake lining for cracking, glazing, wear, and contamination.
Check wheel cylinders for leaks.
D Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks (disc brake) or within 4 to 7 clicks (drum brake).
D Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and rack boots for damage and leaking grease and fluid (see page 17-8).
Check steering linkage for looseness.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). - Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage.
D Check all fluid levels and condition offluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add Honda ATF-Z1 (see page 14-113) or MTF (see page 13-3),
engine coolant, brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
c
D Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Look for cracks and damage, then check belt deflection by pushing on it (about 22 Ibs) midway between the pulleys.
- Alternator belt: 10.5-12.5 mm (0.41-0.49 in.) (see page 4-40)
- PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.0 mm (0.51-0.63 in.) (see page 17-12)
- AlC compressor belt: 7.0-9.0 mm (0.28-0.35 in) (see page 4-39)
D Replace the dust and pollen filter (see page 21-26).
Replace it twice as often (at 15,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
airfrom industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
D
D Replace brake fluid every 3 years (Independent of distance), Use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
(see page 19-7).
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with asterisk( * ) will not void customer's emissions
3-11
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
Trailer towing
3,750 mil 6,000 km/- o Do items in A.
7,500 mil 12,000 km/- o Do items in A, B.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/l year
22,500 mil 36,000 kml o Do items in A, B.
30,000 mil 48,000 km/2 years o Do items in A, B, C and 0 .
37,500 mil 60,000 km/- o Do items in A and B.
-1-/3years o Do items in E.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/3 years
o Do items in A, B, and C.
52,500mi/84,000 km/- o Do items in A, B.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/3 years
o Replace manual transmission fluid. Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3). Capacity:l.9.Q (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt)
60,000 mil 96,000 km/3 years, then every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 years
o Replace automatic transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Zl (ATF) (see page 14-113). Capacity:2.5 II (2.6 US qt, 2.21 Imp qt)
60,000 mil 96,000 kml 4 years:
o Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23l.lnstallation: (see page 6-26)) and inspect the water pump (see page 10-
9) if the vehicle is regularly driven in weather over 110F (43C) or under - 20F (- 29C); If not, replace the belts at 105,000 miles.
o Do items in A, B, C and D.
63,750 mill 02,000 kml o Do items in A.
67,500 mi/l08,000 kml o Do items in A, B.
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years
78,750 mi/126,000 kml 0 Do items in A.
82,500 mi/132,000 kml 0 Do items in A, B.
86,250 mi/138,000 km/- 0 Do items in A.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 years, then every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 years
o Replace automatic transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Zl (ATF) (see page 14-113).
-1-/6 years 0 Do items in E.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 years: 0 Do items in A, B, C, and D.
97,500 mi/156,000 km/ 0 Do itemsin A, B.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years:
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-14) Intake: 0.24-0.28 mm (0.009-0.011 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
o Replace spark plugs for '01 model. Use NGK (PZFR5F-ll) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L 11).
Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-26).
o Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23), Installation: (see page 6-26)) and inspect the water pump (see page 10-
9) only if the belts were not replaced at 60,000 miles.
o Check idle speed* (see page 11-110).: 700 50 rpm
3-12 BACK
108,750 mi/174,000 km/- D Do items in A.
112,500 mi/180,000 km/- D Do items in A, B.
116,250 mi/186,000 km/ - D Do items in A.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 8 years:
D Replace timing belt and balancer belt (Removal: (see page 6-23), Installation: (see page 6-26)) and inspect the water pump (see page
10-9) only if the belts were not replaced at 60,000 miles.
D Do items A, B, C and D.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 10 years, then every 60,000 mi/96,000 km or 5 years
D Replace engine coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 .
Capacity: MIT: 5.5 A (5.8 US at. 4.8 Imp at), A/T: 5.4 A (5.7 US at. 4.8 Imp at)
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 6 years
D Replace manual transmission fluid. Use Honda MTF (see page 13-3). Capacity: 1.9 A (2.0 US at, 1.7 Imp at)
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 7 years, then every 30,000 mi/48,OOO km/ 2 years
D Replace automatic transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF). Capacity: 2.5 A (2.6 US at, 2.2 Imp at)
Do the items in parts A, B, C, D and E as required for mileage/time interval.
A
D Replace engine oil and filter (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.3 A (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
B
Check brake lining for cracking, glazing, wear, and contamination.
Check wheel cylinders for leaks.
condition.)
D Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and rack boots for damage and leaking grease and fluids (see page 17-8).
Check steering linkage for looseness.
c
D Check parking brake adjustment. - Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks (disc brake) or within 4 to 7 clicks (drum brake).
D Lubricate door locks and hinges with Honda white lithium grease.
leakage (see page 19-30).
D Check fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add Honda ATF-Z1 (see page 14-113) or MTF (see page 13-3), engine
coolant, brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
D Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the positions of the headlights (see page 22-95).
D Inspect the vehicle underbody. Check the paint for damage, scratches, stone chipping, and dents.
D
D Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-133).
pulleys:
Alternator belt: 10.5-12.5 mm (0.41-0.49 in) (see page 4-40).
PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.0 mm (1/2-5/8 in)(see page 17-12).
AlC compressor belt: 7.0-9.0 mm (0.28-0.35 in) (see page 4-39).
D Replace dust and pollen filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-26).
E
D Replace brake fluid every 3 years (Independent of distance), Use Genuine Honda DOT 3. Fill to between marks on reservoir. (see page 19-7).
3-13
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first .
If driven in severe conditions (see page 312) or normally driven in Canada, do the circle (0) and dot (.) items.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever miles x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5
comes first.
km x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
years - 1/2 - 1 -
11/2 - 2 - 21/2
Replace engine oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,OOOkm) or 1 year
Clean air cleaner element 0

Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt, balancer belt NOTE', and inspect water pump

Inspect idle speed*
Replace engine coolant Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then
every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then
Replace transmission fluid Manual Normal Conditions: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years
Transmission Severe Conditions: Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years
Automatic Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every
Transmission 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
3-14 BACK
41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
- 3 - 31/2 - 4
-
41/2 - 5 - 51/2
-
6 - 61/2 - 7 - 71/2 - 8
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000km) or 1 year Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change
0 0 0


0

0

Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Severe Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Normal Conditions: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years
Severe Conditions: Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years
Severe Conditions: At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
(cont'd)
3-15
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item (cont'd)
Service at the indicated distance or time. whichever miles x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25
comes first.
km x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
years - 1/2 - 1 - 11/2 -

0
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years

Replace air conditioning filter NOTE 2
Lubricate locks. hinges. and latches 0

Inspect tie-rod ends. steering gearbox. and boots 0

0

0

0
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS)





Check lights and controls 0
Inspect vehicle underbody 0
3-16
30 33.75 37.5
48 54 60
2 - 21/2

0

0

0

0

0

0
0
BACK
41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
- 3 - 31/2 - 4
-
41/2 - 5
-
51/2
-
6 - 61/2
-
7 - 71/2
-
8

0

0

0

0

0

Every 3 years

0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
NOTE:
1 If the vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather, over 110'F (43'C) or under -20'F (- 29'C), replace this belt every SO,OOO miles; If not, replace it at 105,000 miles.
2 Replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles if the vehicle is driven mostly where air has a high concentration of soot from industry and diesel-powered vehicle; also
replace it anytime airflow is less than usual.
3-17
BACK
BACK
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools ................................ 4-2
Starting System
Component Location Index 4-3
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-4
Starter Circuit
Troubleshooting ...................... 4-5
Clutch Interlock Switch Test ....... 4-6
Starter Solenoid Test .................. 4-7
Starter Performance Test ............ 4-8
Starter Replacement ................... 4-9
Starter Overhaul .......................... 4-10
Ignition System
Component Location Index ........ 4-17
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-18
Ignition Timing Inspection .......... 4-19
Distributor Replacement ............. 4-19
Distributor Overhaul ................... 4-21
Ignition Control Module (lCM)
I nput Test ............. ..................... 4-23
Ignition Coil Test .......................... 4-24
Ignition Wire Inspection
and Test .................................... 4-25
Spark Plug Inspection ................. 4-26
Charging System
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-28
Charging Circuit
Troubleshooting ...................... 4-29
Alternator Replacement .............. 4-32
Alternator Overhaul .................... 4-33
Aiternator-AIC Compressor Belt
Inspection and Adjustment ..... 4-39
Alternator Belt Inspection and
Adjustment ............................... 4-40
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-42
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index ......................................... 4-43
Cruise Control
Communication Circuit
Troubleshooting (AfT) ............ 4-45
Control Unit Input Test ................ 4-46
Main Switch
Test/Replacement .................... 4-48
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch
Test/Replacement .................... 4-48
Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Test ............................................ 4-49
Brake Pedal Position Switch
Test ............................................ 4-49
Actuator Solenoid Test ............... 4-50
Actuator Test ................................ 4-51
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable
Replacement ............................ 4-52
Actuator Cable Adjustment ........ 4-54
Engine Mount Control System
Circuit Diagram ............................ 4-56
Troubleshooting .......................... 4-57
r--:'II
L::.I
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Number Tool Number Qty
CD A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in.Hg 1
* 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1
077 46-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
G) 077 49-00 1 0000 Driver 1
*Included In the Belt TensIon Gauge Set, T/N 07JGG-001000A
I !
0 .')';, 111
CD
G)
4-2
BACK
Starting System
Component Location Index
UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S
FUSEfRELA V BOX
REAR SIDE
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (AfT)
Test, page 14-138
Replacement, page 14-139
STARTER
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-5
Solenoid Test, page 4-7
Performance Test, page 4-8
Overhaul, page 4-10
CLUTCH INTERLOCK
SWITCH (MfT)
Test, page 4-6
Switch Position Adjustment,
page 12-4
4-3
BACK
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No.4t (tOOA) No.42 (SOA)
+ >----t-- BlK ---1.......ar"'\..O--<rv:>--+--WHT
ST
BlK/RED
ST HOT in START (III)
BlKlWHT
)
____________
NO.t3 (7.SA)

PCM
PGMFI
MAIN RELAY
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BlKlWHT BlUIWHT
4-4
(AfT)
,
B
-.----.
S
l __ __
STARTER
(Permanent magnet type)
(MIT)

,
,
B S
L_-I---__
STARTER
(Field winding type)
I
GtOt
(MIT)
I
, CLUTCH
L
' INTERLOCK
SWITCH
(AfT) B
I
: TRANSMISSION J
RANGE SWITCH

BACK
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Air temperature must be between 59and 100F (15
and 38C) during this procedure.
After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the
ECM/PCM to clear any codes (see page 11-3).
The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged.
Recommended Procedure:
Use a starter system tester.
Connect and operate the equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Alternate Procedure
1. Hook up the following equipment:
Ammeter, 0-400 A
Voltmeter, 0 - 20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt)
Tachometer, 0-1200 rpm
[1J
A
2. Remove the No. 46 (15A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
3. With the shift lever in I!!I or (AfT), or the clutch
pedal depressed (MIT), turn the ignition switch to
start (III).
Did the starter crank the engine normally?
YES- The starting system is OK .
NO -If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go
to step 4. If it cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 7. If it won't disengage from the
flywheel or torque converter ring gear when you
release the key, check for the following until you
find the cause.
Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction
Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch
r--:'I
I.!!!!.I
4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical
connections atthe battery, the negative battery
cable to body, engine ground cables, and the
starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try
starting the engine again.
Did the starter crank the engine?
YES- Repairing the loose connection fixed the
problem. The starting system is OK .
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then
disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (A) from the starter
solenoid (B). Connect a jumper wire from the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
A
B
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Remove the starter and repair or replace as
necessary.
6. Check the following items in the order listed until
you find the open circuit.
Check the BLK/WHT wire and connectors
between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the ignition switch, and between the driver's
under dash fuse/relay box and the starter.
Check the ignition switch (see page 22-56).
Check the transmission range switch and
connector (AfT) or the clutch interlock switch (see
page 4-6) and connector(MIT).
Substitute a known-good starter relay.
(cont'd)
4-5
BACK
Starting System
(cont'd)
7. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble the starter, and check for the following
until you find the cause.
Excessively worn starter brushes
Open circuit in commutator brushes
Dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear
Faulty drive gear clutch
8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.
Is cranking voltage no less than 8.5 volts (with
AlT) or 8.0 volts (with MIT), and current draw no
more than 380 amps (with AlT) or 280 amps (with
MIT)?
YES- Go to step 9.
until you find the cause.
Open circuit in starter armature commutator
segments
Starter armature dragging
Shorted armature winding
Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and
the flywheel or torque converter ring gear for
damage. Replace any damaged parts .
4-6
Clutch Interlock Switch Test
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector.
2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (A).
3. Check for continuity between the terminals
according to the table.
\
Terminal
Clutch Interlock Switch \
1 2
PRESSED 0 -0
RELEASED
4. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the clutch
padal height (see page 12-4).
BACK
Starter Solenoid Test
1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S
terminal and the armature housing (ground). There
should be continuity.
If there is continuity, go to step 2.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
MIT:
M
s
A/T:
s
2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S
terminal and M terminal. There should be
continuity.
If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.

4-7
BACK
Starting System
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wires from the S terminal and the M
terminal.
2. Make the connections as described below using as
heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to
the wire used for the vehicle). To avoid damaging
the starter, never leave the battery connected for
more than 10 seconds.
3. Connect the battery as shown. Be sure to
disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
12V
BATTERY
s
4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the
pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil ofthe
solenoid is working properly .
4-8
12V
BATTERY
. --------
5
5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. Ifthe
pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
12V
BATTERY
5
6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in
the diagram below, and confirm that the motor
starts and keeps rotating.
BATTERY
12V
8. If the electric current and motor speed meet the
specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is working properly.
Specifications:
Maker Electric current Motor speed
DENSO 90 A or less 3,000 rpm or
more
MITSUBA 80 A or less 2,600 rpm or
more
BACK
Starter Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write down the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the engine wire harness and radiator
lower hose from the bracket on the starter motor.
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal
on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire
(B) from the S terminal.
MIT:
8x 1.25 mm

44 Nm (4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibfttl

A/T:
10x 1.25 mm
44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfftl
A-
0\

8x 1.25mm
10x 1.25 mm
44Nm
(4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfttl
5. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then
remove the starter.
6. Install the stater in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal (A)
is facing out.
A
7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative
cable to the battery.
8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
the customer's radio station presets.
9. Retest starter performance.
4-9
BACK
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly - M/T
HARNESS B R ~
4-10
STEEL BALL
When reassembling,
install steel ball
from clutch side.
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
OVERRUNNING
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
BRUSH HOLDER
ROLLER BEARINGS and CAGE
BRUSH
ARMATURE
Prevent rollers from being scattered and lost.
-$;jijjjffl
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
BACK
Disassembly IReassembly - AfT
STARTER
SOLENOID
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
END COVER
GEAR HOUSING
OVERRUNNING
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
GEAR HOUSING
COVER
r--:'I

(cant'd)
4-11
BACK
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Armature Inspection and Test
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-91.
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
4. Check the commutator (AI surface. If the surface is
dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe
within the following specifications, or recondition
with # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (8).
A
4-12
5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
Standard (New):
MIT: 29.9-30.0 mm (1.177-1.181 in.)
A/T: 28.0 mm-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.)
Service Limit:
MIT: 29.0 mm (1.142 in.'
AIT: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.'
6. Measure the commutator (AI runout.
Ifthe commutator runout is within the service
limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments .
If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.' max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.'
A
BACK
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B),
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
the commutator segments. The undercut should
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (0).
Commutator Mica Depth
Standard (New):
MIT: 0.5-0.8 mm (0.020-0.031 in.)
A/T: 0.4-0.5 mm (0.016-0.020 in.'
Service Limit:
MIT: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.'
AfT: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
8. Check for continuity between the segments of the
commutator. If an open circuit exists between any
segments, replace the armature.
r--:'I

9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
B
A
10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists
between the commutator (A) and armature coil
core (B), and between the commutator and
armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the
armature.
t \
c B A
(cont'd)
4-13
BACK
Starting System
Starter Brush Inspection
11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the
service limit, replace the armature housing
assembly (MfT), or the brush holder assembly (AIT).
Brush Length
Standard (New):
MIT: 15.0-15.5 mm (0.59-0.61 in.)
A/T: 15.8-16.2 mm (0.62-0.64 in.)
Service Limit:
MIT: 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
AIT: 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
Starter Field Winding Test (MIT)
12. Check for continuity between the brushes (A). If
there is no continuity, replace the armature
housing (B).
13. Check for continuity between each brush (A) and
the armature housing (B). If there is continuity,
replace the armature housing.
4-14
Starter Brush Holder Test
14. Check that there is no continuity between the (+)
brush holder (A) and (-) brush holder (8). If there
is no continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.
MIT:
A
B
A/T:
B
B
BACK
15. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact with the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (e). Measure
the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off
the brush. If the spring tension is not within
specification, replace the spring.
Spring Tension:
MIT: 13.7 -19.6 N (1.4 - 2.0 kgf, 3.07 - 4.41 Ibf)
AfT: 15.7-17.7 N (1.6-1.8 kgf, 3.53-3.97Ibf)
16. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then
position the brush about halfway out of its holder,
and release the spring to hold it there.
NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or
# 600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate
the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
will be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
r--:'I

17. Install the armature in the housing, and install the
brush holder. Next, pry back each brush spring
again, and push the brush down until it seats
against the commutator, then release the spring
against the end of the brush.
18. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush
holder (B).
B
(cont'd)
4-15
BACK
Starting System
Solenoid Plunger Inspection (MIT)
19. Check the contact points (A) and the point
contacting face (B) of the starter solenoid plunger
(C) for burning, pitting or any other defects. If
surfaces are rough, recondition them with a strip of
# 500 or # 600 sandpaper.
4-16
Overrunning Clutch Inspection
20. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
21. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways.
Does it lock in one direction and rotate smoothly in
reverse? If it does not lock in either direction or it
locks in both directions, replace it.
A
L
B
22. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged,
replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the flywheel or torque
converter ring gear if the starter drive gear teeth
are damaged.
23. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of
disassembly.
BACK
Ignition System
DISTRIBUTOR
Overhaul, page 4-21
Ignition Control Module (lCM)
Input Test, page 4-23
Ignition Coil Test, page 4-24
------
Ignition Timing Inspection, page 4-19
IGNITION WIRES
SPARK PLUG
Inspection, page 4-26
Inspection and Test, page 4-25

4-17
BACK
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHooD FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATIERY
~ No.4l (100A) No.42 (SOA)
&-BlK -+--<:r-U"':"--C"\..l>-+--WHT
DISTRIBUTOR
CVPSENSOR
VEL BLK
~ ~
ECWPCM
CYP SENSOR: Cylinder posHion sensor
4-18
IGNITION SWITCH
~ No.6
(15A)
BlKIYEl
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
ECMlPCM
r
YEUGRN
F23Al , F23A4engines: WHTlBlK
F23A5 engine: WHTIBLU BLKlYEl VEUGRN
IGNITION CONTROL
MODULE (ICM)
(
Has u i h ~ n )
noise condenser
IGNITION WIRES
SPARK
PLUGS
BACK
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see
page 11-110).
2. Connect the Honda PGM tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC), and follow the tester's prompts in
the"SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester
Operator's Manual).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
no load (NT in [HJ or [fl, MIT in neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Connect the timing light to the No.1 ignition wire,
then point the light toward the pointers (A) on the
timing belt cover.Check the ignition timing in no
load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear
window defogger, and air conditioner are not
operating.
Ignition Timing:
MIT: 122 BTDC (RED mark (B)) during idling in
neutral
A/T: 12 2 BTDC (RED mark (B)) during idling in
[fl or [HJ
A
B
5. If the ignition timing is incorrect, replace the ECM/
PCM. (Ignition timing is not adjustable.)
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester and the timing
light.
Distributor Replacement
Removal
1. Disconnect the connector(A) from the distributor.
F23A1, F23A4 engines:
B
F23A5 engine:
2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor
cap.
3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts (8) then
remove the distributor (C) from the cylinder head.
(cont'd)
4-19
BACK
Ignition System
Distributor Replacement (cont'd)
Installation
1. Bring the No.1 piston to compression stroke TOC.
2. Coat a new a-ring (A) with engine oil, then install it.
F23A 1, F23A4 engines:
A
d'
V'"
C
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft)
F23A5 engine:
.
&"
C
22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibfft)
3. Slip the distributor into position.
NOTE: The lugs on the end of the distributor and
their mating grooves in the camshaft end (B) are
both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing
the distributor 180
0
out of time.
4. Install the mounting bolts (C), and tighten them.
4-20
5. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor cap as
shown.
No.1
CYLINDER
MARK
No.3
No.1
F23A5 engine:
No.3
No.1
CYLINDER
MARK
No.1
No.4
No.2
No.4
No.2
6. Connect the connector to the distributor.
7. Check the ignition timing (see page 4-19).
BACK
Distributor Overhaul- F23A1, F23A4 Engines
O-RING
Replace.

CAP SEAL
Check for damage.
/
DISTRIBUTOR HOUSING
Check for cracks and damage.
IGNITION COIL
/

BLK/YEl
WHT/BLK
CYPSENSOR
Do not disassemble.

I DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR
IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (lCM)
4-21
BACK
Ignition System
Distributor Overhaul - F23A5 Engine
O-RING
Replace.
/
DISTRIBUTOR HOUSING
Check for cracks and damage.
4-22
DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR
_I
CAP SEAL
/ Check for damage.
/
DISTRIBUTOR CAP
Check for cracks, wear,
damage, and fouling.
Clean or replace.
Do not disassemble.
/
CVPSENSOR
a

-1llJ IGNmONCOIL
IGNITION CONTROL I ,/
MODULE (ICM)

WHT/BLU
BlK/VEl

BACK
r:-:'I

Ignition Control Module (ICM) Input Test
NOTE:
Ifthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) comes on,
refer to the Fuel and Emission System (see page 11-3).
Perform an input test for the Ignition Control Module
(lCM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the
ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems.
The tachometer should operate normally if the ICM is
OK.
1. Remove the distributor cap, the distributor rotor,
and the leak cover.
2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM (A).
F23A 1, F23A4 engines:
A
F23A5 engine:
A
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage
between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL
wire between the ignition switch and the ICM.
Ifthere is battery voltage, go to step 4.
between the WHT/BLK (WHT/BLU for the F23A5
engine) wire and body ground. There should be
battery voltage.
If there is no battery voltage, check:
- ignition coil.
- WHT/BLK (WHT/BLU for the F23A5 engine)
wire between the ICM and ignition coil.
If there is battery voltage, go to step 5.
5. Disconnect the Engine Control Module (ECM)/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connector B (25
P), and check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire
between the ICM and ECM/PCM connector terminal
B13. There should be continuity.
6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body
ground. There should be no continuity.
7. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM and
reconnect the ECM/PCM connector B (25P).
4-23
BACK
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Test
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the
distributor cap.
2. Disconnect the BLK/YEL and WHT/BLK (WHT/BLU
for the F23A5 engine) wires from terminals A (+)
and B (-) respectively.
A
F23A5 engine:
B
4-24
3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between
the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is
not within specifications.
NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil
temperature; specifications are at 68F (20C).
Primary Winding Resistance
(Between the A and B terminals):
F23A1, F23A4 engines: 0.45-0.55 Q
F23A5 engine: 0.63-0.77 Q
Secondary Winding Resistance
(Between the A and Secondary Winding terminals)
F23A 1, F23A4 engines: 16.8 - 25.2 k Q
F23A5engine: 12.8-19.2kQ
BACK
Ignition Wire Inspection and Test
1. Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on
the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might
break them inside.
2. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If
any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken
or distorted, replace the ignition wire.

L------g
Check for broken,
corroded, and bent terminals.
3. Connect ohmmeter probes, and measure
resistance while flexing and moving the wire. Do
not bend the wires, you might break them inside.
Ignition Wire Resistance:
25 k Q max. at 68F (20
D
e)
r. 0
"' I. 0+-------- g
'-----'
4. If resistance exceeds 25 k Q, replace the ignition
wire.
r--:'I

4-25
BACK
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
Advanced ignition timing
Loose spark plug
Plug heat range too hot
Insufficient cooling
Fouled plug may be caused by:
Retarded ignition timing
Oil in combustion chamber
Incorrect spark plug gap
Plug heat range too cold
Excessive idling/low speed running
Clogged air cleaner element
Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires
Worn or deformed
Damaged
gasket

4-26
f
. Improper gap
Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
l . Cracked center
l electrode insulator
2. Check the electrode gap.
'98-99 models:
Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool.
Electrode Gap
Standard (New): 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)
Replace the plug if the center electrode is
rounded (A).
Spark Plugs
NGK: ZFR5F-11
DENSO: KJ16CR-L 11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)

-+
-:::=.:::-:=:----=-
.-----------

=---
------
'00-02 models:
Replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification.
Electrode Gap
Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)
Sercive Limit: 1.3 mm (0.05 in.)
Replace the pi ug if the center electrode is
rounded (A).
Spark Plugs
NGK: PZFR5F-11
DENSO: PKJ16CR-L 11
3. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to
the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head finger-tight. Torque them to 18 Nm
(1.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft).
BACK
Charging System
r--:'I

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(In the gauge assembly)
Test, page 22-57
AL TERNATOR-A/C COMPRESSOR BELT
Inspection and Adjustment, page 4-39
BATTERY
ALTERNATOR
Troubleshooting, page 4-29
Overhaul, page 4-33
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
(Has built-in ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT)
Test, page 22-51
4-27
BACK
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
No.4l (100A)
&-BlK - ..... <r\"o""'1-...... +--I
U_+----WHT
GRNlRED
BLK
ALTERNATOR B
H
RECTIFIER
A
" "
I
:- .
:-
I A
" .
l A"
BLK
1
G202
4-28
BlKlYEl
No.6
(15A)
IGNITION
SWITCH
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BlKlYEl BlKIYEl BLKIYEL

LIGHT
SULB
(1.4W)

WHTIGRN BLKlYEL WHTIBLU
Ic IIG I L
I I I
VOLTAGE REGULATOR

FIELD WINDING
11

-'
...
INTEGRATED
CONTROL
UNIT
Y
WHT/BLU
I
BACK
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
If the charging system indicator does not come on or
does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the
following items in the order listed below:
Battery (see page 22-57)
Charging system indicator
Alternator/regulator circuit
Alternator control system
Charging System Indicator Test
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the charging system indicator come on?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to step 6.
2. Start the engine.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK .
NO- Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the
alternator.
YES- Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repair the
short in the WHT/BLU wire. Ifthe WHT/BLU wire is
shorted to ground, the voltage regulator in the
alternator may be damaged .
NO - Go to step 9.
7. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the
alternator.
r--:'I
I.!::J
8. Connect the alternator 4P connector terminal No.3
to body ground with jumper wire. Turn the ignition
switch ON (II).
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
2
3 4
LIWHT/BLUI
=
Wire side of
female terminals
Does the charging system indicator come on ?
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check for a
blown No.6 (15A) fuse and a blown charging
system light bulb. If the fuse and bulb are OK,
repair the open in the BLK/VEL and WHT/BLU wire
to the indicator bulb .
9. Measure the voltage at the No.1 terminal of the
alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON
(II).
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
3 4
v
IG IBLK/YELI
=
Is there battery voltage?
Wire side of
female terminals
YES- Go to alternator and regulator circuit test .
NO-- Repair open in the BLK/VEL wire between the
alternator and the under-dash driver's fuse relay
box .
(cont'd)
4-29
BACK
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged and in
good condition (see page 22-51).
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn
the selector switch to position 1 (starting).
LOAD ADJUSTER
VOLT (CARBON PILE)
SELECTOR . . . . . . = = ~ . . . = ~
FULL FIELD
TESTER LEAD (BLU)
/'
_VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE
LEAD (BLK)
I
NEGATIVE TESTER
CABLE (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
CABLE (RED)
B TERMINAL WIRE
3. Shift to neutral or park, and start the engine. Hold
the engine at 3,000 rpm, with no load until the
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
Is the voltage over 15.1 V?
YES- Repair the voltage regulator .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle.
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the
selector switch to position 2 (charging).
7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the
ammeter.
8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire
of the alternator so that the arrow points away from
the alternator.
4-30
there.
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
YES - Repai r the alternator components (see page
4-33) .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery
voltage drops to between 12 -13.5 V.
Is the amperage 75 A or more?
YES- The charging system is OK .
NO-Gotostep 11.
11. With the engine speed still at 2,000 rpm, full-field
the alternator. Attach the probe to the VAT-40 full-
field test lead, and insert the probe into the full field
access hole at the back of the alternator. Switch the
field selector to the "A (Ground)" position
momentarily, and check the amperage reading.
Because voltage will rise quickly when the
alternator is full-fielded, do not allow the voltage to
exceed 18 V: it may damage the electrical system.
END COVER
REGULATOR
(Located inside
the end cover)
FULL FIELD
ACCESS HOLE
Is the alternator output 75 A or more?
YES - Replace the voltage regulator..
NO - Go to alternator control system test .
BACK
Alternator Control System Test
1. Check proper operation of the Electrical Load
Detector (ELD) by confirming with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) is off and there is no DTC for
ELD failure (see page 11-3).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the alternator.
3. Start the engine and turn the headlights (high
beam) ON.
4. Measure voltage between the 4P connector
terminal No.2 and the positive terminal ofthe
battery.
BATIERV
2 ALTERNATOR
1-
3
+-
4
-1 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals
Is there 1 V or less?
YES-Goto step 8.
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connector C (31
Pl.

7. Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM
connector terminal C2 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (31PI
ALTC (WHT/GRNI
=
Is there continuity?
YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between
the alternator and ECM/PCM .
NO-Check that the terminals are firmly seated at
the connectors. If OK, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, and recheck. (see page 11-3). If
prescribed voltage is now available, replace the
original ECM/PCM .
9. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector C (31 Pl.
connector terminal C2 and alternator 4P connector
terminal No.2.
ALTC (WHT IGRN)
ALTERNATOR
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) 4P CONNECTOR
YES- Repair the alternator (see page 4-33) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the
alternator and ECM/PCM .
4-31
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Replacement
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then
3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and SLK wire (S)
from the alternator.
A
4-32
8 Nm (0.8 kgfm,
6lbfftl
4. Remove the adjusting bolt (A), locknut (S), and
mounting bolt (C), then remove the alternator belt
and alternator.
B
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16lbfftl
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the alternator belt tension (see page 4-40) or
the alternator-AiC belt tension (see page 4-39).
BACK
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
SPACER RING
A \ REAR BEARING
~ , I ROTOR
(jJ
BEARING
RETAINER
BRUSH ASSEMBL V
END COVER
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
JOE 'REcnFER, ASSEMBLV
t
BRUSH HOLDER
INSULATOR
r--:'I
I..!::..I
(cont'd)
4-33
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment. 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during
this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you
remove them (see step 1 on page 4-30).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-32).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing. remove the
pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a
22 mm wrench (8). If necessary. use an impact
wrench.
4. Remove the three flange nuts (A) and the screw (8)
from the alternator. then remove the plate terminal
(C).
4-34
5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (8) from
the "8" terminal. then remove the end cover (C)
and dust seal (D) .
C@[O
/ \
A B
6. Remove the brush holder.
BACK
7. Remove the voltage regulator.
8. Remove the four screws (A), then remove the
rectifier (8) and rubber seal (C).
c-----@
9. Remove the four flange nuts.
r--:'I
~
10. Remove the rear housing (A) and washer (8).
A
~
(cont'd)
4-35
BACK
Charging System
11. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or
rear bearing, go to step 18. Remove the rotor from
the stator drive end housing.
12. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the
bearing journal surface in the stator housing for
seizure marks .
If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged,
replace the alternator.
If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK,
go to step 13.
13. Remove the rear bearing using a puller as shown.
4-36
14. With a hammer and commercially available tools
shown, install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft.
15. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
BACK
16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out
the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer.
A
17. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new
front bearing in the stator housing.
07746-0010400
Rectifier Test
~
~
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the
B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the
E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair.
All diodes should have continuity in only one
direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed
to allow current to pass in one direction, and the
rectifier is made up of eight diodes (four pairs). you
must test each diode in both directions for
continuity with an ohmmeter that has diode
checking capability: a total of 16 checks .
If any diode failed, replace the rectifier assembly.
(Diodes are not available separately.)
If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.
A"-....
B,
A B',
. n. ~ 1 ~ .. ....
B,
1-
B,
B,
B.
~ ~ ~ ~
-,
~ ~ ..
c
(cont'd)
4-37
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Brush Inspection
19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a
vernier caliper (B).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush assembly.
If brush length is OK, go to step 20.
Alternator Brush Length:
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Rotor Slip Ring test
20. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings
(A).
If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.
C
J
A
21. Check that there is no continuity between each slip
ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C) .
If there is no continuity, go to step 22 .
Ifthere is continuity, replace the alternator.
4-38
Stator Test
22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of
leads (A) .
If there is no continuity, replace the alternator .
___ --:::::=::::=;;O/A
B
23. Check for no continuity between each lead and the
coil core (B).
If there is no continuity, go to step 24.
If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
24. Reassemble the alternator in reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip
rings .
If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
111 Nm (11.3 kgfm, 81.7 Ibfft) when you
reinstall it.
25. Reinstall the alternator, and adjust its belt tension
(see page 4-39).
BACK
r--:'I

Alternator-A/C Compressor Belt Inspection and Adjustment
8elttension gauge 07JGG-001010A
Belt Tension Gauge Method
Inspection
1. Remove the three bolts from the left end of the
splash shield, and pull it back as needed.
2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and
measure the tension. Follow the gauge
manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or
damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment,
goto step 3.
Tension:
Used Belt: 490-590 N (50-60 kgt, 110-130 Ibt)
New Belt: 1,030-1,130 N (105-115 kgf, 231-
Adjustment
2541bt)
A
10x1.25mm
B
8x 1.25 mm
3. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and locknut (8).
4. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt
tension, then retighten the locknut and mounting
bolt.
5. Recheck the belt tension.
6. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
7. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment
(see page 17-12).
Deflection Method
Inspection
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22Ibf), and measure
the deflection atthe mid point (A) between the
alternator and crankshaft pulley.lfthe belt is worn
or damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment,
go to step 2.
Deflection:
Used Belt: 7.0-9.0 mm (0.28-0.35 in.)
New Belt: 4.0-6.0 mm (0.16-0.24 in.)
Adjustment
B
10x1.25mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfftl
C
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m, 16lbf.ftl
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (8) and locknut (C).
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (0) to obtain the proper belt
bolt.
specification.
(see page 17-12).
4-39
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Belttension gauge 07JGG-001010A
Inspection
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt and
measure the tension. Follow the gauge
manufacturer's instructions. If the belt is worn or
damaged, replace it. If the belt needs adjustment,
goto step 2.
A
Tension:
Used Belt: 290 - 440 N (30 - 45 kgt, 66 - 99 Ibt)
New Belt: 540-740 N (55-75 kgf, 120-170 Ibt)
10x 1.25 mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgf.m.
33lbftt)
c---__
Adjustment
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and locknut (B).
3. Turn the adjusting bolt (C) to obtain the proper belt
tension. then retighten the locknut and mounting
bolt.
minutes. then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
(see page 17-12).
4-40
Deflection Method
Inspection
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf. 22Ibf). and measure
the deflection at the mid point (A) between the
alternator and crankshaft pulley. Ifthe belt is worn
or damaged. replace it. If the belt needs adjustment.
go to step 2.
Deflection:
Used Belt: 10.5-12.5 mm (0.41-0.49 in.)
New Belt: 8.0-10.0 mm (0.31-0.39 in.)
B
10x1.25mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm. 33 Ibftt)
/
/ .... : .. -:-..
# \::\
A '.
C
8x1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm.
16lbftt)
Adjustment
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B) and locknut (C).
3. Turn the adjusting boltlD) to obtain the proper belt
bolt.
5. If you installed a new belt. run the engine for 5
minutes. then readjust the belt to the used belt
specification.
(see page 17-12).
BACK
Cruise Control
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH (MIT)
Test. page 4-49
Clutch Pedal Adjustment.
page 12-4
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(Built into gauge assembly)
Bulb Locations. page 22-59
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Test. page 4-49
Pedal Height Adjustment. page 19-5
ACTUATOR
Test. page 4-51
r--:'I

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (Am
Test. page 14-138
Solenoid Test. page 4-50
Relacement. page 4-52
4-41
BACK
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HI----'-Cr'\..J>--<r'-l:>--r-WHT BAT BLKlYEL _+-... ___ __.
BATTERY --&
IGI NO.9 No.6
lTGRNlBLU
BLUIRED WHTIYEL

HORN
SET
3
IGI HOT in ON (II) (7.5A) (15A)
and START (III)
HORN SWITCH
RE
SUME
2
SETI
RESUME/
CANCEL
SWITCH
YEL
MAIN
SWITCH
2
LTGRN
1
BLK
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
Y
REDIBLK
5
RED
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
REDlBlK

VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR (VSS)
'PCM
BlK DIMMING CIRCUIT
4-42
EPEDAL
OSITION
BAAl<
P
S WITCH
I
BRAKE
LIGHTS
2

3 4
GRY
5 2
9
BRNlBLK
BRNIWHT
CABLE GAUGE
REEL ASSEMBLY PCM
Y Y
LTGRNlRED L T GRN/BLK BLUIWHT BLU/GRN L T GRN
6 7 12
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
BRN CRUISE CONTROL
ACTUATOR
I
G302
14
I
G401
8 13
100.-...... -----....
3
BlK
A/T : TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(ON:
MIT : ClLlTCH PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
(ON : Pedal released)
BLK
I
GSOI
CRUISE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.2W)
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
BACK
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
NOTE:
The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence .
Before troubleshooting.
r--:'I
I..:!!.I
- check the No.9 (7.5A) and No.6 (15A) fuses in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 47 (20A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box.
- check that the horn sounds.
- check the tachometer to see if it works properly.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Cruise control cannot be 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48) Poor ground:
set 2. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-48) G302, G401, or
3. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see page G501
4-49) Open circuit,
4. Check clutch pedal position switch and mounting (MIT) (see loose or
page 4-49) disconnected
5. Check transmission range switch (AfT) (see page 14-138) terminals:
6. Check control unit (see page 4-46) LTGRN,
LTGRN/RED,
GRY, LTBLU,
BLU/WHT
Cruise control can be set Check control unit (see page 4-46) Poor ground:
but indicator light does G302, G401, or
not go on G501
Open circuit,
loose or
disconnected
terminals:
YEL, BLU/BLK
Cruise speed is 1. Check vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (see page 22-69)
noticeably higher or 2. Check actuator and vent line for the actuator (see page 4-51)
lower than what was set 3. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Excessive overshooting 1. Check actuator and vent line for the actuator (see page 4-51)
or undershooting when 2. Check vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (see page 22-69)
trying to set speed 3. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Speed fluctuation on a 1. Check vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (see page 22-69)
flat road with cruise 2. Check actuator (see page 4-51)
control set 3. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Vehicle does not 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-48) Open circuit, loose
decelerate or accelerate 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) or disconnected
accordingly when SET/ terminals:
RESUME/CANCEL button LTGRN/RED,
is pushed LTGRN/BLK
Cruise control does not 1. Check clutch pedal position switch and mounting (see page Short to ground in
cancel when clutch pedal 4-49) the L T BLU wire
is pushed (MIT) 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Cruise control does not 1. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-138) Short to ground in
cancel when shift lever is 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) the L T BLU wire
moved to rm position
(AfT)
Set speed is not 1. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see page Open circuit, loose
cancelled when brake 4-49) or disconnected
pedal is pushed 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) terminals:
WHT/BLK
(cont'd)
4-43
BACK
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
--
Set speed, does not 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48) Shorted main
cancel when main switch 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) switch or short to
is pushed OFF power in the L T
GRNwire.
Set speed, does not 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-48) Open circuit, loose
cancel when CANCEL 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) or disconnected
button is pushed terminals:
LTGRN/REO,
LTGRN/BLK
Set speed will not 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-48) Open circuit, loose
resume when RESUME 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) or disconnected
button is pushed (with terminals:
main switch on, when set LTGRN/BLK
speed is temporarily
cancelled by pressing the
brake pedal)
The transmission shifts 1. Troubleshoot the cruise control communication circuit (see Open circuit, loose
down slower than normal page 4-45) or disconnected
when going up a hill with terminals, or short
the cruise control on to ground: BLU/
(AfT) GRN
4-44
BACK

Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting (AfT)
2. Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive
the vehicle to speeds over 2S mph (40 km/h) with
the cruise control.
Does the cruise control operate?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Check the cruise control unit (see page 4-46)
or cruise control actuator .
4. Disconnect Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
connector A (32P) and cruise control unit connector.
S. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
terminal AS and body ground.
V
2 3
PCM CONNECTOR A 132P)
BLU/GRN
I
4 5 6
/
8 9
12 13 14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
/
25 26 27 2B 29 30
V
10
/
23 24
32
"-
'Y.
=
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the PCM
connector terminal AS and the cruise control unit
connector terminal No.8 .
NO-Goto step 6.
6. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise
control unit connector.
8. Connect a voltmeter between cruise control unit
14P connector terminal No.8 and body ground.
Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 2Smph
(40km/h) with the cruise control set, and watch the
voltmeter.
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
..--
1 2 3
V
5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BLU/GRN
'Y.
=
Is there about 1 V?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Replace the cruise control unit .
9. Connect a voltmeter between PCM connector
terminal AS and body ground. Drive the vehicle at
speeds over 2Smph (40km/h) with the cruise
control set, and watch the voltmeter.
V
2 3
BLU/GRN
t
4 5 6
/
8 9
12 13 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
/
25 26 27 2B 29 30
V
Is there about 1 V?
10
1/
23 24
32

'Y.
YES-Check for loose connections ofthe BLU/GRN
wire between the cruise control unit and the PCM. If
necessary replace the PCM and recheck. (see page
11-3) .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the AS
terminal and the cruise control unit connector
terminal No.8 .
4-45
BACK
Cruise Control
Control Unit Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS components locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service (see page 23-28).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-84).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
CRUISE CONTROL
UNIT
BRN/BLK
14P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female
terminals
4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
9 BRN/WHT Under all conditions Check for resistance to ground: Faulty actuator solenoid
There should be 80-120 Q. Poor ground (G401)
1 BRN Under all conditions Check for resistance to ground: An open in the wire
There should be 40-60 Q. Short to ground
11 BRN/BlK Under all conditions Check for resistance to ground:
There should be 70 -11 0 Q.
2 GRY Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: Faulty brake pedal position
(II), main switch ON There should be 0 V with the switch
and brake pedal pedal depressed and battery An open in the wire
depressed, then voltage with the pedal released. Open in cruise control main
released switch
Blown No.6 (15A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash
fuse/relav box
3 BlK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. An open in the wire
4-46
BACK
Cavity Wire Test condition
5 WHT/BLK Brake pedal depressed,
then released
6 LT GRN/RED Set button pushed
7 LTGRN/BLK Resume button pushed
10 BLU/BLK Ignition switch ON (II)
12 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON (II)
and main switch ON;
raise the front of the
vehicle, and rotate one
wheel slowly while
holding the other wheel
13 LTGRN Ignition switch ON (II)
and main switch ON
14 LTBLU A/T: Shift lever in 2, or

MIT: Clutch pedal
released
8 BLU/GRN Reconnect the 14P
connector to the control
unit, then start the engine,
main switch ON and
drive the vehicle to speed
over 25 mph (40 km/h)
with the cruise control set
Test: Desired result
Check for voltage to ground:
There should be battery voltage
with the pedal depressed, and
o V with the pedal released.
There should be battery voltage.
When testing terminal No.6,
there should be no voltage on
terminal No.7.
When testing terminal No.7,
there should be no voltage on
terminal No.6.
Attach to ground:
Cruise indicator light in the
gauge assembly should comes
on.
Check for voltage between the
BLU/WHT (+) and BLK (-)
terminals:
Cycles about 0 V - 5 V (2.5 V
average).
Check for continuity to ground:
There should be continuity.
NOTE: There should be no
continuity when the clutch
pedal is depressed or when the
sift lever is in other positions.
There should be about. 1 V.

Possible cause if result is
not obtained
Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse
in the under-hood fuse/
relay box
Faulty brake pedal
position switch
An open in the wire
relay box
Faulty horn relay
Faulty set/resume/cancel
switch
Faulty cable reel
An open in the wire
Blown bulb
Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse
in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
Faulty dimming circuit in
the gauge assembly
An open in the wire
Faulty vehicle speed
sensor (VSS) (MIT)
An open in the wire
Short to ground
Blown No.6 (15A) fuse in
the under-dash driver's
fuse/relay box
Faulty main switch
An open in the wire
Faulty transmission
range switch
Faulty or misadjusted
clutch pedal position
switch
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Loose connection
Faulty cruise control unit.
Short to ground
Faulty PCM
5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK,
the control unit may be faulty; replace it. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works
properly, replace the control unit.
4-47
BACK
Cruise Control
Main Switch Test/Replacement
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out ofthe instrument
panel.
Terminal side of male
terminals
B
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position
OFF
ON
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the
switch.
4-48
5
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/
Replacement
1. Remove the two screws (A), then remove the
switch (B).
terminals
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in
If there is continuity and it matches the table, but
switch failure is occurred on the cruise control
unit input test, check and repair the wire harness
on the switch circuit.
Ifthere is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
r\
Terminal
2 3
\
1
Position
SET ION,
Q
.()
RESUME ION'
()
-0
0 0
CANCEL ION'
I
-0
BACK
Clutch Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal
position switch.
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
3P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of male terminals
2. Remove the clutch pedal position switch.
1\
Terminal
Clutch Switch \
2 3
PRESSED 0
r.
RELEASED
4. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the pedal
height (see page 12-4).
r--:'I
I.!!!.I
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch (A).
2. Remove the brake pedal position switch.
\
Terminal
Brake Switch \
1 2 3
PRESSED
,....
RELEASED
r0-
D
4
r.
height (see page 19-5).
4-49
BACK
Cruise Control
Actuator Solenoid Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the actuator.
2. Check for resistance between the terminals
NOTE: Resistance will vary slightly with
temperature; specified resistance is at 70F (20C).
\
Terminal
Resistance I Q I \
1 2 3 4
VENT SOLENOID ,..

40-60 Q
- -
VACUUM SOLENOID
30-50 Q
SAFETY SOLENOID
40-60 Q
4 1 3 2
3. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the
actuator.
4-50
BACK
Actuator Test
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
1. Disconnect the actuator cable from the actuator rod
and disconnect the 4P connector (A).
Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Connect battery power to the No.4 terminal and
ground the No.1, No.2 and No.3 terminals.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose. Then
apply vacuum to the actuator.
4. The actuator rod (A) should pull in completely. If
the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for
a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid.
/
~ r
...
r--:'I
I.!!:!..I
5. With voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull
the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be
able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective.
6. Disconnect ground from the No.3 terminal. The
actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but
the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the
solenoid valve assembly is defective.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground
from the No.1 terminal. The actuator rod should
return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and
filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly
is defective.
8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure
to use new O-rings on each solenoid.
9. Disconnect power and ground from the 4P
connector. Disconnect the vent hose from the
actuator. Connect a vacuum pump to the actuator
vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod
should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve
is stuck open. Replace the actuator.
4-51
BACK
Cruise Control
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement
Removal/Installation
c
A
\

B
2. Loosen the two mounting bolts (8), and remove the
actuator with the bracket.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (C).
4. Remove the three nuts (A).
D
5. Disconnect the actuator cable (8) from the actuator
rod (C) by releasing the clip (D) from the rod with a
screwdriver.
4-52
6. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the
actuator cable (8) from the throttle linkage (C).
7. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust
the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting
the actuator cable.
BACK
Disassembly IReassembly
ACTUATOR BRACKET

I
ACTUATOR
FILTERS

I.:!!..I
VACUUM HOSE
4-53
BACK
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly
with no binding or sticking.
D
-------n--- c

!
B

A
2. Measure the amount of movement of the output
linkage (8) until the engine speed starts to increase.
At first, the output linkage should be located at the
fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should be
3.75O.5 mm (O.15O.02 in.).
3. If the free play is not within specs, move the cable
to the point where the engine speed starts to
increase, and tighten the locknut (A) and adjusting
nut (8).
B
/
4-54
4. Turn the adjusting nut (8) until it is 3.75O.5 mm
(O.15O.02 in.) away from the bracket (C).
3.7SO.S mm (O.1SO.02 in.1
B
5. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (8) touches
the bracket, and tighten the locknut (A).
BACK
REAR MOUNT
-~ = = - - -- ~
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
~
~
4-55
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
NO.41 (lOOA) NO.42 (SOA)
~ - - - ~ D - - - ~ ~ ~ - - ~
4-56
WHT
IGNITION
SWITCH
IGI HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
BlKlYEl
No.6
(1 SA)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSElRElAY BOX
BlKlYEl
2
GRNIWHT
A2
PCM
BlK
1
Gl01
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
BACK
Troubleshooting
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively
when idling.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (the cooling fan comes on twice).
Is the idle speed less than 800 rpm?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Adjustthe idle speed (see page 11-110) .
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. With the transmission in gear, have an assistant
disconnect and reconnect the 2P connector from
the engine mount control solenoid valve.
Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
when the 2P connector is disconnected?
YES - Reconnect the 2P connector to the solenoid
valve. The engine mount control system is OK .
NO-Goto step 4.
4. Shift to [N] or position.
5. Disconnect the 2P connector from the engine
mount control solenoid valve.
r--:'I

6. Measure voltage between the No.2 terminal and
body ground.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
BlK/VEL
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in BLK/YEL wire between the 2P
connector and No.6 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box .
7. Measure voltage between the No.1 and No.2
terminals.
GRN/WHT
4-----, Wire side of
t-----I female terminals
BlK/VEl
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in GRN/WHT wire between
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (A2) and the 2P
connector. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-
good Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and
recheck (see page 11-3) .
(cont'd)
4-57
BACK
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.
terminals.
Wire side of
female terminals
BLK/VEL
VES- Repair short to body ground in GRN/WHT
wi re between PCM (A2) and the 2P connector. If the
wire is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck (see page 11-3) .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) from the
engine mount control solenoid valve (8), and
connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose. Apply
vacuum for 20 seconds.
B
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?
VES-Gotostep 11.
NO- Either the vacuum hose or the engine mount
has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed .
4-58
11. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
with and without vacuum applied?
VES-Gotostep 12.
NO- Replace the engine mount .
12. Disconnect the lower vacuum hose (A) from the
engine mount control solenoid valve (8) and
connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose.
Is there manifold vacuum?
A973X-041-
XXXXX
VES- Replace the engine mount control solenoid
valve .
NO- A hose is restricted or pinched or the intake
manifold port is plugged. Repair as needed .
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal .................................................... 5-2
Engine Installation ................................................ 5-10
Cylinder Head .. ....... .... ....... ............. ......... ... 6-1
Engine Block ... ...... .......... ..... ...... ... ....... ... .... 7-1
Engine Lubrication .......... .............. ............. 8-1
Intake Manifold/Exhaust System ............. 9-1
Engine Cooling . ...... ............ ... .... ..... ............ 10-1
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Secure the hood in the open position.
preset buttons.
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then
the positive terminal.
4. Remove the intake air duct (A).
5. Fix the hood in the vertical position by using a
support rod (P/N 74145-S84-AOO) as shown below.
5-2
6.
7. Disconnect the connector (C) from the under-hood
fuse/relay box (8), and remove the bolt (D).
8. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control
cable (8) by loosening the locknuts (C) then
slipping the cable ends out of the accelerator
linkage. Take care not to bend the cable when
removing them.
Always replace any kinked cables with a new one.
BACK
9. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-115).
10. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
(8).
B
11. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister hose (8),
vacuum hose (e) and PIS hose clamp (0).
A
12. Remove the mounting bolts (A), then remove the
Power Steering (PIS) pump belt (8) and pump
without disconnecting the PIS hoses.
A
/'
A
B
(cont'd)
5-3
BACK
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connectors from
the ECM/PCM.
15. Remove the grommet (A), then pull out the ECM/
PCM connectors.
A
5-4
16. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on
the right side of the engine compartment.
~
"
17. Remove the starter cable (A), wire harness clamp
(8), ground cable (C) and back-up light switch
connectors (D).
B
BACK
18. Remove the shift cable (A) and select cable (B).
Take care not to bend the cable when removing it.
Always replace any kinked cable with a new one
(Mm.
B
19. Remove the clutch slave cylinder and line/hose
assembly (Mm.
NOTE:
Do not disconnectthe line/hose assembly.
Do not operate the clutch pedal once the slave
cylinder has been removed.
Take care not to bend the line.
20. Remove the rear engine mount bracket mounting
bolt/nut (A).
M/T:
AfT:

A
21. Remove the rear stiffener (B) (except '01 model
A/T).
22. Remove the front engine mount bracket mounting
bolts (A), and loosen the mount bolt (B).
B
(cont'd)
5-5
BACK
Engine Assembly
23. Remove the radiator cap.
24. Raise the hoist to full height.
25. Remove the front tires/wheels.
26. Remove the splash shield.
27. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator to drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-10).
28. Drain the Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) (see
page 13-3) or Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
(see page 14-113). Reinstall the drain plug using a
new washer.
29. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
5-6
30. Lower the hoist, then remove the upper radiator
hose (A), lower radiator hose (B) and the heater
hoses (e).
A
~
B
31. Remove the ATF cooler hoses, then plug the ATF
cooler hoses and lines.
~
/
BACK
32. Remove the AlC compressor without disconnecting
the AlC hoses.
33. Make sure the hoist supports are positioned
correctly on the vehicle. Raise the hoist to full
height.
35. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder
(8), then remove the shift cable cover (C). To
prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure
to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
cover (AfT).
36. Remove the lock bolt (D) securing the control lever
(E), then remove the shift cable (F) with the control
lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable while
removing it (AfT).
37. Remove the damper fork (see page 18-17).
38. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints
(see page 18-17).
39. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-3). Coat all
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil.
Tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
(cont'd)
5-7
BACK
Engine Assembly
40. Remove the rear engine mount bracket.
MIT:
'98-00 models A/T:
'01-02 models A/T:
5-8
41. Remove the flange bolts securing the radius rods.
o
42. Mark the front beam (A) and rear beam (B), then
remove the front beam.
BACK
43. Lower the hoist.
44. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown.
45. Remove the ground cable (A) and the stop (B), then
remove the upper bracket (C).
~
I'
46. Remove the transmission mount bracket.
47. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
electrical wiring.
48. Slowly lower the engine about 150 mm (6 in.).
Check once again that all hoses and wires are
disconnected from the engine/transmission.
49. Lower the engine all the way. Remove the chain
hoist from the engine.
50. Remove the engine from under the vehicle.
5-9
BACK
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
10x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25mm
49 Nm (5.0 kgf.m, 36 Ibfft)
5-10
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,16Ibfft)
BACK
2. Push the engine under the vehicle. Attach the chain
hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into position
in the vehicle.
I NOTICE I
Reinstall the mounting bolts/nuts in the
sequence given. Failure to follow this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the bolt
and nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
6x1.0mm
CD 12, 1.25 mm 12 Nm 1\'.2 ':; ~ ; ~ . m .
54 N.m 15.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf.ft)
40lbfftl /
A
. . . . ~ \
4. Install the stop (B).
12x 1.25 mm
54 Nm 15.5 kgfm,
40 Ibfftl
5. Install the transmission mount bracket. Tighten the
bolt and nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
MIT:
CD 12 x 1.25 mm
AIT:
54 Nm 15.5 kgfm,
40Ibfft)
CD 12 x 1.25 mm
(V10x1.25mm
38 Nm 13.9 kgfm,
28Ibfft)
54 Nm 15.5 kgfm, 40 Ibf.ftl
10x1.25mm
10x 1.25 mm
38 Nm 13.9 kgfm,
28Ibfft)
\
38 Nm 13.9 kgfm, 28 Ibfft)
6. Remove the chain hoist from the engine.
(cont'd)
5-11
BACK
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
8. Install the front beam. Align the marks on the rear
beam (B) and front beam (e) then tighten the bolts.
14x 1.5 mm
103 Nm (10.5 kgf.m,
76lbfft,
Replace.
B
12x 1.25mm
64 Nm 16.5 kgf.m,
47lbfft,
9. Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods.
14x1.5mm
162 Nm (16.5 kgfm,119Ibf.ft,
5-12
10. Install the rear mount bracket, then tighten the
bolts.
MIT:
'98-00 models AIT:
'01-02 models A/T:
12x1.25mm
54Nm
15.5 kgfm, 40 Ibfft,
Replace.
12x1.25mm
54 Nm 15.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibfft,
Replace.
BACK
12. Tighten the rear mount mounting bolt/nut (A).
MIT:
A
12x1.25mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
47Ibftt)
Replace.
A/T:
10x 1.25mm
10x1.25mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm, 28 Ibftt)
A
12x 1.25mm
54 Nm 15.5 kgfm, 40 Ibftt)
~
~ ~
"-
/
13. Install the rear stiffener (B) (except '01-02 models
AfT).
14. Tighten the front mount bracket mounting bolts in
the numbered sequence shown.
CD 10 x 1.25 mm
10x1.25mm
64 Nm 16.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibftt)
Replace.
(cont'd)
5-13
BACK
Engine Assembly
16. Install a new spring clip on the end of each
driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure
each clip "clicks" into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
17. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints. Use
new cotter pins (see page 18-17).
18. Install the damper fork (see page 18-17).
19. Install the AlC compressor.
... \
~
ax 1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibftt)
20. Install the exhaust pipe A (A); use new gaskets (B)
and new self-locking nuts (C).
5-14
~ I C
----C
10 x 1.25 mm
54Nm
(5.5 kgfm,
40Ibftt)
10 x 1.25 mm
33Nm
(3.4 kgfm, 25 Ibf.tt)
21. Install the control lever (A), with the shift cable (B),
on the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable any
more than is necessary to install the control lever
(AfT).
F
B
A
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
1
ax 1.25 mm
26 Nm 12.7 kgfm,
20Ibfft)
22. Install the lock bolt (C) with a new lock washer (D),
then bend the lock tab of the lock washer (AfT).
23. Install the shift cable cover (E), then install the shift
cable holder (F) on the shift cable cover (AfT).
24. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), lower radiator
hose (B) and heater hoses (C).
C
BACK
25. Connect the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
cooler hoses (AfT).
26. Install the splash shield.
27. Install the front tires/wheels.
29. Install the clutch slave cylinder and line/hose
assembly. Take care not to bend the line (MIT).
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)

8x 1.25 mm
23 Nm (2.3 kgfm,
17lbfft)

30. Install the shift cable (A) and select cable (8); use
new cotter pins (C).
8x1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
B
A
...
(PIN 08798-9002)
(cont'd)
5-15
BACK
Engine Assembly
31. Loosely install the alternator belt.
32. Loosely install the PIS pump belt and pump.
33. Adjust the alternator belt (see page 4-39) and the
Power Steering (PIS) pump belt (see page 17-12).
34. Install the starter cable (A), wire harness clamp (B),
ground cable (C) and back-up light switch
connectors (D).
A
_----c
35. Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the
right side of the engine compartment.
~
----
5-16
36. Push the ECM/PCM connectors through the
bulkhead, then install the grommet (A).
A
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfftl
37. Connect the ECM/PCM connectors.
BACK
38. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A),
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister hose (B) and
vacuum hoses (C).
A
\
B
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kg'.m,
8.7Ib'tt)
39. Install the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
(B), using new washers (C).
40. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
cable (see page 4-54).
41. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
page 11-134).
42.
A
43. Install the intake air duct.
B

6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kg'm,
8.7Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-17
BACK
Engine Assembly
44. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with
sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease
to prevent corrosion.
45. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).
46. Refill the transmission with MTF (see page 13-3) or
ATF (see page 14-113).
47. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see page 10-10).
48. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the AfT gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch (AfT).
49. Check that the transmission shifts into gear
smoothly (Mrr).
50. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn ON (II) the ignition
switch (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel
pump runs for approximately 2 seconds and
pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation two
or three times, then check for fuel leakage at any
point in the fuel line.
5-18
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools ................................................................. 6-2
Component Location Index ........................................ 6-3
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 6-7
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test ........................................... 6-10
VTEC Rocker Arms Test ............................................... 6-11
Valve Clearance Adjustment ....................................... 6-14
Valve Seal Replacement with
Cylinder Head Installed ............................................ 6-16
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-18
Timing Belt Inspection ................................................. 6-19
Balancer Belt Inspection .............................................. 6-20
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Adjustment ................ 6-22
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Removal ..................... 6-23
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Installation ................. 6-26
Cylinder Head Removal ............................................... 6-30
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ...................... 6-35
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................. 6-35
Rocker Arms shafts Disassembly/Reassembly
-F23A 1, F23A4 Engines ............................................. 6-36
Rocker Arms shafts Disassembly/Reassembly
-F23A5 Engines ......................................................... 6-37
Rocker Arms and shafts Inspection ............................ 6-38
Camshaft Inspection .................................................... 6-40
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals Removal ................ 6-43
Valve Inspection ........................................................... 6-43
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-43
Valve Guide Replacement ........................................... 6-44
Valve Seat Reconditioning .......................................... 6-46
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals Installation ............ 6-48
Camshaft/Rocker Arms,
Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation ................... 6-49
Cylinder Head Installation ........................................... 6-51
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ................................ 6-54
CKP/TDC Sensors Replacement .................................. 6-55
BACK
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty
CD 07HAH-PJ7010B Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
07 JAA-001 020A Socket, 19 mm 1
07 JAB-001 020A Holder Handle 1
CD 07LAJ-PR3020B Air Stopper 1
07MAB-PY3010A Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1
07 NAF-PT001 OA Installer Cup 1
(J)
07NAF-PT0020A Installer Shaft 1
07NAG-PT0010A Seal Guide 1
07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adaptor 1
@-1 07406-0020201 A/T Pressure Hose 1
@-2 07406-0070300 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
@-3 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
@-4 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adaptor 1
@ 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
I - - I
CD
"'"
u
0
_.-

(J)

@-1,@-2,@-3,@-4 @
6-2
BACK
l_RUBBER SEALS
TIMING BELT
UPPER COVER
/
TIMING BELT
ADJUSTING BOLT
I
TIMING BELT
Adjustment, page 6-22
Removal, page 6-23
Installation, page 6-26
~ T I M I N BELT
~ LOWER COVER
/RUBBER SEAL
@
/
.-/
CRANKSHAFT
PULLEY BOLT
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
~
~ /ADJUSllNG NUT
(Q)
CKP/TDC SENSORS
BALANCER BELT
Removal, page 6-23
(cont'd)
6-3
BACK
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
/
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
Installation. page 6-54
6-4
O-RING
/
CYLINDER HEAD
GASKET
DOWEL PIN
1
/WASHER
. _ V RUBBER SEAL
HEAD COVER GASKET
/
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
Tightening. page 6-51
1
BACK
F23A 1/F23A4 engines
DOWEL PIN
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
Overhaul, page 6-36
LOCKNUT
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
VALVE KEEPERS
SPRING RETAINER
INTAKE VALVE SPRING

1J
INTAKE VALVE SEAL
: Replacement, page 6-42
'
VALVE SPRING SEAT
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
SEAL
,)(1
!

/ Q
CYLINDER I
CAMSHAFT PULLEY
Removal, page 6-30
j \
EXHAUST VALVE \
GUIDE
Replacement, page 6-44 EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE VALVE
Removal. page 6-42
(cont'd)
6-5
BACK
Cylinder Head
F23A5 engine
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
Overhaul, page 6-37
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
LOCKNUT
DOWEL PIN

VALVE
KEEPERS
VALVE SPRING SEAT
EXHAUST VALVE
SEAL
6-6
EXHAUST VALVE
GUIDE
VALVE KEEPERS
V
INTAKE VALVE SPRING
oU / Replacement, page 6-42
i/ /'NrAJ<EVALVESEAL
'/
INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-42
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
CAMSHAFT PULLEY
Removal, page 6-30
SEAL
BACK COVER
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1259: A problem in the VTEC Oil
Pressure Switch circuit or VTEC Solenoid
Valve circuit.
Pressure Gauge Adaptor 07NAJ-P07010A
AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070300
AfT Pressure Hose 07406-0020201
AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
AfT Pressure Adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Do the Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) reset procedure
(see page 11-3).
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
4. Road test the vehicle:
Accelerate in 1 st gear to an engine speed over
4,000 rpm. Hold that engine speed for at least 2
seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the
first road test, repeat this test two more times.
Is DTC P1259 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at VTEC
solenoid valve and ECM/PCM .
6. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure
switch between the pressure switch 2P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2.
VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
terminals
YES- Go to step 8.
NO -- Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch .
9. Measure the voltage between the VTEC oil
pressure switch harness 2P connector terminal
No.2 and body ground.
VTM
IBLU/BLKI
Wi re side of female
terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Inspect for an open or short to ground in the
wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the
ECM/PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM and recheck .
(cont'd)
6-7
BACK
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure
switch harness 2P connector.
VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
- - - - ~ ';;1..1-----'
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Goto step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil
pressure switch and G101. Ifthe wire is OK,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and recheck .
12. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1 P connector.
13. Check for continuity on the VTEC solenoid valve
between the solenoid valve 1 P connector terminal
and body ground.
6-8
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE
1P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
male terminal
Is there 14- 30 Q ?
YES - Go to step 14.
Q
=
NO- Replace the VTEC solenoid valve .
14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and
install the special tools as shown, then reinstall the
VTEC oil pressure switch.
07406-0020201
or
07MAJPV4011A and
07MAJPV40120
15. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1 P connector
and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector.
16. Connect a tachometer.
18. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000, 2,000
and 4,000 rpm. Keep measuring time as short as
possible because the engine is running with no
load (less than one minute).
Is pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgflcrrf , 7 psi)?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO -Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-
10) .
21. Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC
solenoid valve terminal.
22. Start the engine and check oil pressure at an engine
speed of 3,000 rpm.
Is pressure above 390 kPa (4.0 kgflcrrf ,57 psi)?
YES- Go to step 23.
NO-Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6
10) .
BACK
23. With the battery positive terminal still connected to
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between
C10 and body ground.
=
Is there battery voltage above 4,000 rpm?
NO- Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch .
25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal from the
VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
26. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid
valve harness 1 P connector terminal and the ECM/
PCM connector terminal 812.
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS
1P CONNECTOR
VTS (GRN/YELI
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (25 PI
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (812) and VTEC solenoid valve connector..
valve 1 P connector terminal and body ground.
1P CONNECTOR
=
Wire side of female
terminal
YES- Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (812) and VTEC solenoid valve connector .
NO - Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
recheck. If symptom/indication goes away, replace
the original ECM/PCM .
6-9
BACK
Cylinder Head
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test
1. Disconnect the 1 P connector from the VTEC
solenoid valve.
2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body
ground.
Resistance: 14 - 30 Q
=
3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the
VTEC solenoid valve assembly (A) from the
cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve
filter/O-ring (8) for clogging.
If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and
the engine oil.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
6-10
4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid
valve with your finger and check its movement.
If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the
engine oil pressure.
6x1.0mm
12 8.7 Ibf.kl
t

!!1 ./.
( .......
BACK
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Air Stopper 07LAJ-PR3020B
1. Set the No.1 piston at TDC (see page 6-26).
2. Remove the cylinder head cover.
3. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No.1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the intake primary rocker arm (B)
and intake secondary rocker arm (C) .
If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the mid, primary, and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and check that the pistons
in the mid and primary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary, mid, and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and test .
If the intake mid rocker arm moves freely, go to
step 4.
A
4. Repeat step 3 on the remaining intake mid rocker
arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 5.
5. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa
(4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi).
6. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-14).
7. Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect
the belt.
8. Plug the relief hole with the air stopper (A).
07LAJ-PR3020B
(cont'd)
6-11
BACK
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
9. Remove the sealing bolt (A) from the inspection
hole (8). and connect an air pressure regulator with
a 0-100psi gauge (C).
NOTE: Remove any oil from the bolt threads and
camshaft holder threads before retightening the
sealing bolt.
07LAJ-PR3020B
/
B
10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the
specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
400 kPa (4 kgf/cm
2
, 57 psi)
6-12
11. With the specified air pressure applied and the
piston at TOC, push up the timing plate (A) 2 - 3
mm (0.08 -0.12 in.) at the plate end then release it.
The synchronizing piston will pop out and engage
the intake mid, primary (8) and secondary (C)
rocker arms.
Visually check the engagement of the
synchronizing pistons A (0)/8 (E). The
synchronizing pistons can be seen in the gap
between the mid (F), secondary (C) and primary (8)
rocker arms.
NOTE:
With the timing plate (A) engaged in the groove
on the timing piston (G), the piston is locked in
the pushed out position .
Do not apply too much force when pushing up
the timing plate.
A
c
G
D E
BACK
12. Make sure that the intake primary (A) and
secondary (B) rocker arms are mechanically
connected by the pistons, and that the mid rocker
arm (C) does not move when pushed manually. If
any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of
the intake primary and secondary rocker arms,
replace the rocker arms as a set.
B
13. Stop applying air pressure. Push up the timing
plate (A); the synchronizing pistons (B) will snap
back to their original positions.
Visually check the disengagement of the
synchronizing pistons AlB. Replace the intake
rocker arms as an assembly if either piston does
not work correctly.
NOTE: When the timing plate is pushed up, it
releases the timing piston (C), letting the return
spring move the synchronizing pistons to their
original positions.
- -------------
c
/ B
A
14. Remove the special tools.
15. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion
assembly by pushing down on each mid rocker
arm. Replace any lost motion assembly that does
not move smoothly.
6-13
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head
temperature is less than 100F (38C).
2. Set the No.1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on
the camshaft pulley should be at the top, and the
TDC grooves (8) on the pulley should line up with
the top edge of the head.
3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the
valves you're going to check.
Intake: 0.26 mm (0.010 in.)0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
Exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.012 in.)0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
Valve Adjusting Screw Locations
INTAKE
No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
EXHAUST
6-14
4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
screw (8) and the end of the valve stem and slide it
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
B
5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (8) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
B
A
7 xO.75mm
20 Nm (2.0 kgf.m,
14lbfftJ
6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment if necessary. '
BACK
7. Rotate the crankshaft 180counterclockwise (the
camshaft pulley turns only 90). The "UP" mark (A)
on the camshaft pulley should be toward the
exhaust side of the head.
Number 3 Piston at TDC
A
8. Check and. if necessary. adjust the valve clearance
on No.3 cylinder.
9. Rotate the crankshaft pulley 180counterclockwise
to bring No.4 piston to TDC. Grooves (A) are visible
again.
Number 4 Piston at TOC
A
on No.4 cylinder.
11. Rotate the crankshaft 180counterclockwise to
bring No.2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark (A)
should be on the intake side of the head.
Number 2 Piston at TDC
A
on No.2 cylinder.
13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-54).
6-15
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Seal Replacement with Cylinder Head Installed
The procedure shown below applies when using the in-
car valve spring compressor (Snap-on YA8845 with
YA8845-2 A 7/8" attachment).
1. Turn the crankshaft so that the No.1 and No.4
pistons are at top dead center (TOC).
3. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-35).
4. Remove the injectors and the wire harness.
5. Using the 8 mm bolts (A) supplied with the tool,
mount the two uprights (B) to the cylinder head at
the end camshaft holders. The uprights fit over the
camshaft as shown.
A
6. Insert the cross shaft (C) through the top hole of the
two uprights.
6-16
Intake Valve Seals
7. Select the 7/8 in. diameter long compressor
attachment, and fasten the attachment to the No.5
hole of the lever arm with the speed pin supplied.
8. Insert an air adaptor into the spark plug hole. Pump
air into the cylinder to keep the valve closed while
compressing the springs and removing the valve
keepers.
9. Put shop towels over the oil passages (A) to
prevent the valve keepers from falling into the
cylinder head.
A
10. Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the
lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the
compressor attachment rests on top of the retainer
for the spring being compressed. Use the front
position slot on the lever as shown.
BACK
11. Using a downward motion on the lever arm,
compress the valve spring and remove the keepers
from the valve stem. Slowly release pressure on
the spring.
12. Remove the valve seals (see page 6-42).
13. Install the valve seals (see page 6-48).
14. Install the springs, the retainers and the keepers in
reverse order of removal.
Exhaust Valve Seals
15. Select the 7/8 in. diameter short compressor
attachment, and fasten the attachment to the No.4
hole of the lever arm with the speed pin supplied.
16. Put shop towels over the oil passages to prevent
the valve keepers from falling into the cylinder
head.
17. Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the
lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the
compressor attachment rests on top of the retainer
for the spring being compressed. Use the front
position slot on the lever as shown.
18. Using a downward motion on the lever arm,
compress the valve spring and remove the keepers
from the valve stem. Slowly release pressure on
the spring.
19. Remove the valve seals (see page 6-42).
20. Install the valve seals (see page 6-48).
21. Install the springs, the retainers and the keepers in
22. Repeat steps 7 to 21 on the other cylinders.
6-17
BACK
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Holder Handle 07JA8-001020A
Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MA8-PY3010A
Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 mm socket
Removal
1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder
attachment (8).
A
07JAB.OJ
020
>
B
07MAB-PY3010A
\
C
07JAA-001020A
(or Commercially available)
2. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket
(C) and breaker bar.
Installation
1. Clean the pulleys (A), crankshaft (8), bolt (C), and
washer (D). Lubricate as shown below.
0: Clean
.: Lubricate
A
6-18
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold with holder
handle (A) and holder attachment (8).
'C
07 JAA-001 020A
3. Tighten the bolt to 245 Nm (25.0 kgfm, 181 Ibft)
with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not
use an impact wrench.
BACK
Timing Belt Inspection
preset button.
3. Disconnect the alternator wire harness.
A
-1 Pull up the lock (A), then release the wire
harness tie (8).
-2 Pull back the boot and remove the 6 mm nut
(e).
-3 Disconnect the connector (D) from the
alternator.
5. Remove the upper cover.
6. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant
soaking. Replace the belt if it is oil or coolant
soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the
belt.
7. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt
to 245 Nm (25.0 kgfm, 181 Ibfft).
8. Reinstall all removed parts.
6-19
BACK
Cylinder Head
Balancer Belt Inspection
Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
preset buttons.
4. Remove the alternator bracket (see page 5-10).
6-20
~
7. Remove the dipstick and tube (A). Discard the
O-ring (B).
BACK
attachment (8).
"-C
07JAA-001020A
lor Commercially available)
(e) and breaker bar.
10. Remove the rubber seal (A) from the adjusting nut,
then remove the lower cover.
11. Install the crankshaft pulley.
12. Inspect the balancer belt for cracks and oil or
coolant soaking. Replace the belt if it is oil or
coolant soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets
on the belt.
13. Reinstall all removed parts.
14. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt
to 245 Nm (25.0 kgfm, 181Ibfft).
6-21
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Adjustment
NOTE:
Always adjust timing belt tension when the engine is
cold .
Always rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise when
viewed from the pulley side. Rotating it clockwise
may result in improper adjustment of the belt tension.
preset buttons.
harness tie (8).
(C).
alternator.
D
6-22
4. Remove the cylinder head cover .
5. Rotate the crankshaft five or six revolutions to set
the belt.
6. Set the No.1 piston at TDC.
7. Loosen the adjusting nut (A) 2/3-1 turn.
A
8. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise three teeth
on the camshaft pulley.
9. Tighten the adjusting nut (A).
10. After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt
to 245 Nm (25.0 kgf.m, 181 Ibfft).
BACK
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Removal
Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
preset buttons.
3. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TDC mark (A) lines
up with the pointer (B).
B
6. Loosen the mounting bolts (A), then remove the
PIS belt (B).
A
A
harness tie (B).
(C).
alternator.
9. Remove the alternator bracket (see page 5-10).
(cont'd)
6-23
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Removal (cont'd)
10. Support the engine with a jack and wood block
under the oil pan.
11. Remove the stopper (A) and ground cable (8), then
remove the upper bracket (e).
~
11 z c
6-24
14. Remove the dipstick and tube (A). Discard the
O-ring (8).
o
.________B
BACK
attachment (8).
A
07 JAB-001 020A
/
'C
07JAA-001020A
(e) and breaker bar.
17. Remove the rubber seal from the adjusting nut,
then remove the lower cover.
__ o,)L
f@JlJ

"-
',--
18. If you are removing only the balancer belt, go to
step 19. If you are removing both the balancer belt
and the timing belt, go to step 20.
19. Release tension from the balancer belt:
-1 Install a 6 mm bolt (A)(from the timing cover)
through the hole in the end of the timing belt
adjuster arm to temporarily lock the arm in
place.
-2 Loosen the adjusting nut (8) 2/3-1 turn.
-3 Push the tensioner (e) up to take tension off the
balancer belt.
-4 Retighten the adjusting nut (8).
A C
20. Release tension from the balancer belt and the
timing belt:
-1 Loosen the adjusting nut (A) 2/3-1 turn.
-2 Push the balancer belt tensioner (8) up to take
tension off the balancer belt.
-3 Push the timing belt tensioner (e) down to take
tension off the timing belt.
-4 Retighten the adjusting nut (A).
A
21. Remove the balancer belt.
22. Remove the timing belt.
6-25
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Installation
o Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
o Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
o Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A
NOTE:
o If you are installing the timing belt and the balancer
belt, go to step 1.
o If you are installing only the balancer belt, go to step
7.
1. Remove and clean the balancer belt drive pulley.
2. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and the upper and
lower timing cover.
3. Set the crankshaft to TDC. Align the dimple (A) on
the tooth of the timing belt drive pulley with the
pointer (B) on the oil pump.
A
4. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TDC.
-1 The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley
should be at the top.
-2 Align the TDC grooves (B) on the pulley with
A
B
6-26
5. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise
sequence, starting with the drive pulley.
-1 Drive pulley (A).
-2 Tensioner pulley (B).
-3 Water pump pulley (C).
-4 Camshaft pulley (D).
c
6. Loosen and retighten the adjusting nut to tension
the timing belt.
7. Clean any oil off both faces ofthe balancer belt
drive pulley.
8. Check the lower cover rubber seal for cracks and
other damage.
NOTE:
o If the rubber seal is coming off, apply liquid
gasket to the lower cover and reinstall the rubber
seal. Wipe off any liquid gasket that is pressed
out.
o When replacing the rubber seal, clean the lower
cover groove, cut the repair rubber seal to length,
and put the rubber seal into the groove evenly.
9. Install the balancer belt drive pulley and the lower
cover.
BACK
10. Temporarly install the crankshaft pulley and bolt.
11. Rotate the crankshaft pulley five or six turns
counterclockwise to seat the timing belt on the
pulleys.
12. Adjustthe belttension.
-1 Loosen the adjusting nut (A) 2/3-1 turn.
-2 Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise three
teeth on the camshaft pulley (B).
-3 Tighten the adjusting nut to 44 Nm (4.5 kgf.m,
33Ibfft).
13. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its TOC mark (A) lines
up with the pointer (B).
A
14. Check the camshaft pulley marks .
If the camshaft pulley marks are also at TOC, go
to step 15 .
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TOC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 3, 4 and
5.
A
15. Remove the crankshaft pulley and the lower cover.
16. Turn the crankshaft to TOC again.
17. Lock the timing belt adjuster arm in place with one
of the 6 mm timing cover bolts.
18. Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3-1 turn, and make
sure the balancer belt tensioner moves freely. Then
push the tensioner up and retighten the adjusting
nut.
(cant'd)
6-27
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt and Balancer Belt Installation (cont'd)
19. Align the rear balancer shaft pulley with a 6 x 100
mm bolt (or equivalent).
-1 Remove the bolt (A) and washer (B) from the
maintenance hole (C).
-2 Scribe a line on a 6 x 100 mm bolt, 74 mm (2.9
in) from the end.
-3 Insert the bolt in the maintenance hole and into
the hole in the balancer shaft (D) up to the line
you scribed.
20. Align the groove (A) on the front balancer shaft
with the pointer (B) on the oil pump housing as
shown.
B
A
6-28
21. Install the balancer belt. Loosen the adjusting nut
2/3-1 turn to tension the balancer belt. Retighten
the bolt.
22. Remove the 6 x 100 mm bolt from the maintenance
hole and reinstall the sealing bolt. Tighten the bolt
to 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 22 Ibft).
23. Adjust the balancer belt.
-1 Temporarily reinstall the crankshaft pulley.
-2 Loosen the adjusting nut 2/3-1 turn.
-3 Turn the crankshaft pulley 1 turn
counterclockwise, then tighten the adjusting
nut.
24. Remove the 6 mm bolt from the timing bolt
adjuster arm.
25. Check the lower cover rubber seal for cracks and
other damage.
NOTE:
If the seal is coming off, reattach it with liquid
gasket. Wipe off any excess liquid gasket .
When replacing the seal, clean out the groove in
the cover, cut the repair strip to length, and press
the new piece into the groove.
26. Remove the crankshaft pulley and reinstall the
lower cover.
27. Install the rubber seal around the adjusting nut.
28. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
29. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft
pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and
washer (C).
B
/A
o \
0
0 0
ml::[
000 0
000 0
0 0
/
0
0
C
0: Clean
e: Lubricate
BACK
30. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold with holder
handle (A) and holder attachment (8).
A
07JAB-001020A
I :7MAB-PV30'OA
~
'C
07 JAA-001 020A
lor Commercially availablel
31. Tighten the bolt to 245 Nm (250 kgfm, 181 Ibfft)
with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not
use an impact wrench.
32. Install the dipstick and tube (A) with a new O-ring
(8).
Y:x'oomm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm,
)7lbf
o
ftl
33. Install the upper cover.
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfttl
34. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-54).
35. Install the alternator bracket (see page 5-10).
36. Install the alternator (see page 4-32).
37. Connect the alternator harness.
38. Install and adjust the power steering pump belt
(see page 17-12).
39. Install and adjust the alternator belt (see page 4-40).
40. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the bolt
and nuts in the numbered sequence shown.
CD12 x 1.25 mm
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibftt)
54 Nm 15.5 kgfm,
40Ibftt)
\
/
CD12 x 1.25 mm
54 Nm 15.5 kgfm,
40Ibfft)
A
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
~ <.j "12x1.25mm
,-I-a. ~ 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
'.C' _ _. . 16Ibfft)
~
~ . ~
~ B
~ ~ ~ . '-""
41. Install the stop (8).
42. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
6-29
BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal
Engine removal is not required for this procedure.
NOTE:
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100F (38C)
before loosening the retaining bolts.
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-10).
4. Remove the intake air duct.
6-30
cable (8) by loosening the locknuts (C), then
slipping the cable ends out of the accelerator
linkage. Take care not to bend the cable when
removing it. Always replace any kinked cable with
a new one.
6. Remove the breather hose (A) and Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) hose (8).
A
BACK
(B).
9. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and
vacuum hoses (B).
B
10. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister
hose (A), vacuum hose (B) and PIS hose clamp (C).
A
C
11. Remove the three water bypass hoses (A).
A
A
B
(cont'd)
6-31 BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
13. Remove the alternator belt.
-1 Loosen the alternator mounting bolt (A).
-2 Loosen the alternator locknut (8).
-3 Loosen the adjusting bolt (C).
-4 Remove the alternator belt (D).
A
c B D
6-32
A
harness tie (8).
(C).
alternator.
D
BACK
15. Remove the upper radiator hose (A), lower radiator
hose (8) and heater hose (C).
A
-------....
16. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps from the cylinder head and
the intake manifold.
Four injector connectors
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) sensor connector
Idle Air Control (lAC) valve connector
Throttle Position (TP) sensor connector
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (primary H02S)
connector (F23A 1, F23A5 engine)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) sensor connector (F23A4
engine)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
connector
Radiator fan switch connector
Coolant temperature gauge sending unit
connector ('98-00 models)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve connector
CKP/TDC sensor connector
VTEC solenoid valve connector (F23A 1/F23A4
engines)
VTEC oil pressure switch connector (F23A 1/
F23A4 engines)
17. Remove the spark plug caps and distributor from
the cylinder head.
under the oil pan.
19. Remove the stop (A) and ground cable (8), then
remove the upper bracket (C).
S
..
','
I
"-,
(cont'd)
6-33 BACK
Cylinder Head
21. Remove the balancer belt and timing belt (see page
6-23).
22. Remove the camshaft pulley (A) and back cover (B).
A
23. Remove the exhaust manifold cover (A), then
remove the exhaust manifold (B).
A
\...
~ ( J
B
6-34
24. Remove the intake manifold.
25. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE:
CD

26. Remove the cylinder head.
BACK
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
NOTE: If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 6-
40) are not within specifications, the cylinder head
cannot be resurfaced.
If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances are within
specifications, check the cylinder head for warpage.
Measure along the edges, and three ways across the
center.
o If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) cylinder
head resurfacing is not required.
o If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and 0.2
mm (0.008 in.), resurface cylinder head.
o Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) based
on a height of 100 mm (3.94 in.).
Cylinder Head Height:
o C>
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A).
A
A
2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
-1 Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts 2 turns at a
time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent
damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The
bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the
springs and the rocker arms on the shafts.
CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING
SEQUENCE:

@
@
6-35
BACK
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly IReassembly - F23A 1, F23A4 Engines
NOTE:
o Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original locations.
o Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-38).
o The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
o When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep
the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
o Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points.
o Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
Letter 'A' is stamped
on rocker arm.
EXHAUST ROCKER
~
No.1 CAMSHAFT
HOLDER
/9
S ~ ~ /
TIMING
PLATE
E'
p
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
6-36
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
I
aUG dUD dO ..
'1
"- V
000 4 0
Q Q
\
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARMB
ST
G
/
QYY'{)
9
No.5 CAMSHAFT
Q HOLDER
BACK
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly IReassembly - F23A5 Engine
NOTE:
o Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in their original locations.
o Inspect rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-381.
o The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
o When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep
the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
o Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points.
EXHAUST ROCKER ARM A
Letter 'A' stamped
on rocker arm.
10 0
o
o
\
000 000 000
SPRING COLLAR
EXHAUST ROCKER ARM B
Letter '8' stamped
on rocker arm.
o 01
10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01
INTAKE ROCKER ARM A
Letter' A' stamped
on rocker arm.
/
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
INTAKE ROCKER ARM B
Letter '8' stamped
on rocker arm.
6-37
BACK
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
6-38
3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
Intake: 0.026 - 0.067 mm
(0.0010-0.0026 in.)
Exhaust: 0.018-0.054 mm
(0.0007 - 0.0021 in.)
Inspect rocker arm
face for wear.
4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the
clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any VTEC
intake rocker arm needs replacement, replace all
three rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and
secondary).
BACK
5. Inspect the rocker arm piston (A). Push it manually.
If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker
arm set.
NOTE:
When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to its oil passage .
Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling.
B
6. Assemble each timing plate (A) and return spring
(B) on its camshaft holder as shown.
B
/A
6-39
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
NOTE:
Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection.
Remove the rocker arms and rocker shafts.
1. Put the camshaft and the camshaft holders on the
cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the
specified torque.
Specified torque:
8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
6 mm bolts: @, @, @, @
(j) CD @
2. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the
distributor end of the cylinder head.
3. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
distributor drive, then push the camshaft back and
forth and read the end play.
Camshaft End Play:
Standard (New): 0.05-0.15 mm
(0.002-0.006 in.)
6-40
4. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a
time, in a crisscross pattern. Then remove the
camshaft holders from the cylinder head.
5. Lift the camshaft out of the cylinder head, wipe
them clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the
camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or
excessively worn.
6. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder
head, then set the camshaft back in place. Place a
plastigage strip across each journal.
7. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts
to the specified torque as shown in step 1.
8. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest
portion of plastigage on each journal.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, go to step 10.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 9.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance:
(0.0020 - 0.0035 in.)
BACK
9. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported
on V-blocks.
If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft-
to-holder oil clearance. Ifthe oil clearance is still
out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout:
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Rotate camshaft
while measuring.
10. Measure cam lobe height.
Cam lobe Height Standard (New):
INTAKE EXHAUST
F23A11 PRI 37.775 mm 38.366 mm
F23A4 (1.4872 in.) (1.5105 in.)
engines MID 39.725 mm
(1.5640 in.)
SEC 34.481 mm
(1.3575 in.)
F23A5 engine 38.339 mm 37.716 mm
(1.5094 in.) (1.4849 in.)
PRI: Primary MID: Mid
IN: Intake EX: Exhaust
SEC: Secondary
T/B: Timing Belt
PRI MID SEC
~ T B
EX IN EX
F23A1/F23A4 engines:
Inspect this area for wear.
6-41
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are
removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring
and remove the valve keepers.
6-42
3. Install the valve guide seal remover.
4. Remove the valve seal.
BACK
Valve Inspection
Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New,:
B Standard (New,:
C Standard (New,:
C Service Limit:
D Standard (New,:
D Service Limit:
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
33.85-34.15 mm
(1.333-1.344 in.'
114.85-115.15 mm
(4.522 - 4.533 in.'
5.485 -5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in.)
5.455 mm (0.2148 in.'
0.85-1.15 mm
(0.033-0.045 in.'
0.65 mm (0.026 in.'
A Standard (New,: 28.85 - 29.15 mm
B Standard (New,:
C Standard (New):
C Service Limit:
D Standard (New,:
D Service Limit:
11.136-1.148 in.'
112.85-113.15 mm
(4.443 - 4.455 in.)
5.450-5.460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.'
5.420 mm (0.2134 in.'
1.05-1.35 mm
(0.041-0.053 in.'
0.95 mm (0.037 in.'
- I I ~ - D - - - - B ------
c
f ~ I - I - - - - ' - : __ -1-LJIOJ
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10mm, then
measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial
indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of
normal thrust (wobble method'.
If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
recheck it using a new valve.
If the measurement is now within the service
limit, reassemble using a new valve.
If the measurement with a new valve still
exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
Standard (New': 0.04-0.09 mm
(0.002 - 0.004 in.'
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.11- 0.16 mm
(0.004 - 0.006 in.'
2. Subtract the 0.0. of the valve stem, measured with
a micrometer, from the 1.0. of the valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Standard (New,: 0.020-0.045 mm
(0.0008-0.0018 in.'
Standard (New': 0.055-0.080 mm
(0.0022-0.0031 in.'
6-43
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7010B
1. Modify a commercially available air-impact valve
guide driver (A) to the dimensions shown. In most
cases, the same procedure can be done using the
special tool and a conventional hammer.
A S.3mm
I 10.21 in.)
(,,----I -0 0 1++
I-- 87 mm --l- 57 mm ---l T t
\ 13.43 in.) . I . 12.24 in.) . I
10.8mm
(0.42 in.)
2. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill
them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300F (150C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300F (150C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
6-44
4. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1
in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
valve guide to prevent damaging the driver.
5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward
the camshaft side of the head.
6. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm
(5/16 inch) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
7. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a
time, as you need them.
BACK
8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside
of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the
camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to
drive the guide in to the specified installed height
(A) of the guide (8). If you have all 16 guides to do,
you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height:
Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust: 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812 -0.852 in.)
9. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil.
10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length ofthe
valve guide bore.
07HAH-PJ70108
11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
removing it from the bore.
12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
13. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-43).
Verify that the valve slides in the intake and
exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure.
6-45
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning
If the valve guides are worn (see page 6-43), replace
them (see page 6-44) before cutting the valve seats.
1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.
2. Carefully cut a 45seat, removing only enough
material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
3. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with a 30cutter
and the lower edge of the seat with a 60cutter.
Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly.
4. Make one more very light pass with the 45cutter
to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width:
Standard (New): 1.25 -1.55 mm
(0.049-0.061 in.)
6-46
5. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve
seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
6. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
o If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
must make a second cut with the 60cutter to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45
cutter to restore seat width.
o If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with
the 45cutter.
BACK
7. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and
measure valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height:
(1.841-1.872 in.)
Service limit: 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height:
(1.838-1.869 in.)
8. If valve stem installed height is over the service
limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
6-47
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation
1. Coatthe valve stems with engine oil. Install the
valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (8).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D),
and intake valve seal (E) has a white spring (Fl.
They are not interchangeable.
E c
B
6-48
5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
toward the cylinder head.
6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the
spring and install the valve keepers.
7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three
times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
the stem.
A
\
BACK
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
- Seal Guide 07 NAG-PT001OA
- Installer Cup 07NAF-PT0010A
-Installer Shaft 07NAF-PT0020A
NOTE:
- To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming
apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holes.
1. After wiping down the camshaft and the journals in
the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and
install the camshaft.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifice (A) with a
new O-ring (B).
c
3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway (C) is facing up.
(No.1 piston TDC).
4. Loosen all the valve adjusting screws.
5. Apply liquid gasket to the head mating surfaces
(the shaded areas) of the No.1 and No.5 camshaft
holders.
No.5
No.1
6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely
install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
7. Install the camshaft oil seal (A) using the special
tools as shown.
07NAGPT0010A
Apply oil.
I I ~ ~ ~ 7 F ~ 1 M
Ie)
A
07NAF-PT0020A
07NAF-PT0020A
OA
(cont'd)
6-49
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation (cont'd)
8. Make sure all the rocker arms are aligned with the
valves.
9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time, in the
sequence shown below, to ensure that the rockers
do not bind on the valves.
Specified torque:
8 mm bolts: 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibft)
6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibft)
6 mm bolts: @, @, @, @
(J) CD
6-50
@
10. Check the back cover rubber seal for cranks and
other damage.
NOTE:
If the rubber seal is coming off, reattach it with
liquid gasket. Wipe off any excess liquid gasket.
When replacing the seal, clean the lower cover
groove, cut the repair strip to length, and press
the new piece into the groove evenly.
After installing the rubber seal, check the joints.
Apply liquid gasket if there is any gap or opening.
11. Install the back cover (A).
10x 1.25mm
59 Nm (6.0 kgfm,
43lbfftl
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfftl
12. Install the camshaft pulley (8) onto the camshaft,
then tighten the retaining bolt to the torque shown.
BACK
Cylinder Head Installation
1. Clean the cylinder head and block surfaces.
2. Install the cylinder head gasket (A) and dowel pins
(8) on the cylinder block. Always use a new
cylinder head gasket.
3. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TOC. Align the
dimple (A) on the tooth of the timing belt drive
pulley with the pointer (8) on the oil pump.
4. Clean the camshaft pulley and set it to TOC.
-1 The "UP" mark (A) on the camshaft pulley
should be at the top.
-2 Align the TOC grooves (8) on the pulley with
A
B
5. Install the cylinder head on the block.
6. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
point A and point 8.
B 70 mm 12.8 in.)
A 45 mm 11.8 in.)
7. If either diameter is less than 11.3 mm (0.44 in.),
replace the cylinder head bolt.
8. Apply clean engine oil to the bolt threads and under
the bolt heads of all the cylinder head bolts.
(cont'd)
6-51
BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
9. Tighten the cylinder head bolts. Tighten the
cylinder head bolts is sequence to 29 Nm (3.0
kgfm, 22 Ibfft). Use a beam-type torque wrench.
When using a preset type torque wrench, be sure to
tighten slowly and do not overtighten. If a bolt
makes any noise while you are torquing it, loosen
the bolt and retighten it.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE SEQUENCE:
6-52
10. Mark the bolt head (A) and the cylinder head (B) as
shown.
11. Tighten the cylinder head bolts until the mark on
the bolt head aligns with the second mark on the
cylinder head (turn the bolt 180).
If you are using a new cylinder head bolt, tighten
the bolt to the the third mark (270).
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
23 Ibfft)

22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
23 Ibf.ft) 23 Ibfft)
BACK
13. Install the exhaust manifold (A) and tighten the new
self-locking nuts (8) in a crisscross pattern in two or
three steps, beginning with the inner nuts. Always
use a new exhaust manifold gasket (e).
8x 1.25 mm
22 N.\m. 1 .... ftl
A
B
8x1.25mm
31 Nm (3.2 kgfm,
23lbfftl
14. Install the exhaust pipe A with a new gasket (D) and
new self-locking nuts (E).
15. Install the exhaust manifold bracket (F) and cover
(G).
16. Install the timing belt (see page 6-26).
17. Adjustthe valve clearance (see page 6-14).
6-53 BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
groove.
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of
the cylinder head cover (B). Seat the head cover
gasket in the recesses for the camshaft first, then
work it into the groove around the outside edges.
Make sure the head cover gasket is seated securely
in the corners of the recesses (C) with no gap.
e
/\
e
B
3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.
4. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-
0003, to the head cover gasket at the four corners
of the recesses (A).
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more
have elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead,
reapply liquid gasket after removing old residue.
A
6-54
5. Hold the head cover gasket in the groove by
placing your fingers on the camshaft holder
contacting surfaces (top of the semicircles). Set the
spark plug seal (A) on the spark plug tube. Once the
cylinder head cover (B) is on the cylinder head,
slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat the
head cover gasket.
6x 1.0mm
B
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft) ..-----e
I
6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
BACK
7. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final
step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 9.8 Nm (1.0
kgfm, 7.2 Ibfft).
CD
@
.------....,

8. Check that all tubes, hoses and connectors are
installed correctly.
9. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before
filling the engine with oil.
CKP ITOC Sensors Replacement
1. Remove the balancer belt (see page 6-23).
2. Remove the balancer belt drive pulley.
3. Disconnect the CKP(TDC sensors connector (A),
then remove the CKP(TDC sensors (8).
A
/
4. Install the CKP(TDC sensors in reverse order of
removal.
5. Install the balancer belt (see page 6-26).
6-55
BACK
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Component Location Index ......................................... 7-3
Flywheel Removal and Installation ............................. 7-7
Drive Plate Removal and Installation .......................... 7-7
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................. 7-8
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-9
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-13
Balancer Shafts Inspection .......................................... 7-15
Crankshaft, Piston and Balancer Shaft
Removal ..................................................................... 7-18
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-21
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-22
Cylinder Honing ............................................................ 7-24
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement .......... 7-25
Piston Ring Replacement ............................................. 7-28
Piston Installation ......................................................... 7-30
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection .................................. 7-31
Crankshaft and Balancer Shafts Installation .............. 7-32
Pulley End Crankshaft Seallnstallation-In-car ........... 7-37
Balancer Shaft Seals Installation-in-car .................... 7-37
Transmission End Crankshaft Seal
Installation-In-car ...................................................... 7-38
BACK
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty
CD 07GAF-SE00200 Hub Assembly Guide Attachment 1
07 LAB-PVOO 100 Ring Gear Holder 1
07 LAD-PT30 1 OA Seal Driver 1
CD 077 46-0030300 Attachment, 30 mm 1.0. 1
077 49-0010000 Driver 1
07948-5B00101 or 07VAD-P8A010A Driver Attachment 1
CD
... ....... J

7-2
BACK
Compo nent Location Index
OIL SCREEN

DOWEL PIN
OIL PAN
Removal
page 7-18
n, page 7-32
/
AfT DRIVE PLATE
PLATE BOLT
uesequ
@U page 7-7 ence,

WASHER
(cont'd)
7-3
BACK
Engine Block
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil clearance, page 7-9
Selection, page 7-9
BALANCER
GEAR CASE

o
BALANCER DRIVEN
GEAR
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL, PULLEY END
and page 8-7
7-4
THRUST WASHERS
CRANKSHAFT
End play, page 7-8
Runout, Taper and
Out-of-Round, page 7-21
ENGINE BLOCK END COVER
I
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
TRANSMISSION END
and page 7-38
BACK
REAR BALANCER SHAFT
End play, page 7-15
Runout, Taper and
Out-of-Round, page 7-15
BALANCER SHAFT
BEARINGS
FRONT BALANCER
SHAFT
(cont'd)
7-5
BACK
Engine Block

PISTON RINGS
Measurement, page 7-28
Alignment, page 7-28

Q PISTON
7-6
PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-25
CONNECTING ROD
BEARINGS
Clearance, page 7-13
Selection, page 7-13
Removal, page 7-18
CONNECTING ROD
End play, page 7-8
Small end measurement, page 7-25
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder bore inspection, page 7-22
Warpage inspection, page 7-22
Cylinder bore honing, page 7-24
Ridge removal, page 7-18

f\ ______ CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP
I ____ CONNECTING ROD BOLT
______ Inspection, page 7-31
Tightening, page 7-32
BACK
Flywheel Removal and Installation
Ring Gear Holder 07LAB-PV00100
1. Remove the transmission (see page 13-4).
2. Remove the pressure plate and clutch disk.
3. Remove the 8 flywheel bolts, then separate the
flywheel from the crankshaft flange. After
installation, tighten the bolts in the sequence
shown.
07LAB-PV00100

07LAB-PV00100
/
Inspect ring gear
teeth for wear or damage.
12x 1.0mm
103 Nm (10.5 kgf.m,
76Ibfft)
4. Install the transmission (see page 13-10).
Drive Plate Removal and
Installation
2. Remove the 8 drive plate bolts, then separate the
drive plate from the crankshaft flange. After
shown.
7-7
BACK
Engine Block
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-8).
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 13 on page 7-19).
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler
gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft.
Connecting Rod End Play:
(0.006-0.012 in.'
4. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance,
install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is
still out-of-tolerance; replace the crankshaft (see
page 7-18).
7-8
5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play:
(0.004-0.014 in.'
6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust
washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolorance,
replace the crankshaft.
BACK
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the main caps and bearing halves.
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a
clean shop towel.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt
the main cap down to check clearance, the weight
of the crankshaft and flywheel will flatten the
plastigage further than just the torque on the cap
bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the
bolts to 69 Nm (7.0 kgfm, 51 Ibfft).
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during
inspection.
5. Remove the caps and bearings again, and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Main 8earing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:
USA - Produced:
F23A 1-1000001-,2000001-, 3000001-, 4000001-
F23A4 -1000001-,2000001-,3000001-, 4000001-
F23A5 -1000001-,2000001- ,3000001-, 4000001-
MEXICO- Produced:
F23A 1-3400001-, 4400001-
F23A4-3400001-, 4400001-
Standard (New):
No.1, 2,4:0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.)
No.3: 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.)
No.5: 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 in.)
Service Limit:
No.1, 2, 4:0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
No.3: 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
No.5: 0.040 mm (0.0016 in.)
JAPAN - Produced:
F23A1-2500001-
F23A4-2500001 -
Standard (New):
No. 1,4: 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 in.)
No.2: 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.)
No.3: 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.)
No.5: 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 in.)
Service Limit:
No. 1,4: 0.045 mm (0.0018 in.)
No.2: 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
No.3: 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
No.5: 0.040 mm (0.0016 in.)
JAPAN - Produced:
F23A 1-3500001-, 4500001 -
F23A4-3500001- , 4500001-
F23A5-3500001-, 4500001 -
Standard (New):
No. 1,2: 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.)
No.3: 0.021-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.)
No.4: 0.013-0.037 mm (0.0005-0.0015 in.)
No.5: 0.009-0.033 mm (0.0004-0.0013 in.)
Service Limit:
No. 1,2: 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
No.3: 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
No.4: 0.045 mm (0.0018 in.)
No.5: 0.040 mm (0.0016 in.)
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
(remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove
the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the
bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do
not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
adjust clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
replace the crankshaft and start over.
(cont'd)
7-9
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Main Bearing Selection
Crankshaft Bore Code Location
1. Numbers or Letters or Bars have been stamped on
the end of the block as a code for the size of each of
the 5 main journal bores. Write down the crank bore
codes.
If you can't read the codes because of accumulated
dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
No. S BORE
(DRIVE PLATE END)
7-10
Main Journal Code Locations
2. The Main Journal Codes are stamped in 1 of 2
locations: either on the side of the crankshaft next
to the main journals, or on the No.1 web.
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)
No.1 JOURNAL
(PULLEY END)
No. SJOURNAL
(DRIVE PLATE END)
BACK
3. Use the crank bore codes and crank journal codes
to select the appropriate replacement bearings
from the following table.
NOTE:
Color code is on the edge of the bearing .
When using bearing halves of different colors, it
does not matter which color is used in the top or
bottom.
USA-Produced:
F23A1-1000001-, 2000001-, 3000001-,4000001-
F23A4-1 000001-, 2000001-, 3000001-,4000001-
F23A5-1 000001-, 2000001-, 3000001-,4000001-
MEXICO-Produced:
F23A 1-3400001-,4400001-
F23A4-3400001-,4400001-
Rod
Journal
code
Crank
bore
code
----I ... Smaller bearing (Thicker)
1 or I Red
Red!
Pink Yellow
Pink
2 or II
Red!
Pink Yellow
Yellow!
Pink Green
3 or III
Pink Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
4 or 1111 Yellow
Yellow!
Green Brown
Green
5 or 11111
Yellow!
Green Brown
Brown!
Green Black
6 or 111111 Green Brown
Brown!
Black
Black
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
journal (Thicker)
JAPAN-Produced:
F23A 1-2500001-
F23A4-2500001-
No.1,4Journals:
Bearing Identification
Color code is on the
edge of the bearing.
----... Smaller bearing (Thicker)
1 or I Yellow
20rll
Yellow!
Green
3 or III Green
4 or 1111
Green!
Brown
5 or 11111 Brown
6 or 111111
Brown!
Black
Smaller
main
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
No.2, 3, 5 Journals:
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Green Brown
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Green!
Brown
Brown!
Brown Black
Brown
Brown!
Black
Black
Brown!
Black
Black!
Black Blue
Black
Black!
Blue
Blue
---..... m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
1 or I
20rll
3 or III
4 or 1111
5 or 11111
6 or 111111
Smaller
main
journal
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Yellowl
Green
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Green!
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown!
Black
Brownl
Black
Black
(cont'd)
7-11
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
JAPAN-Produced:
F23A 1-3500001-,4500001-
F23A4-3500001-,4500001-
F23A5-3500001-,4500001-
No.1, 2 Journals:
1 or I
2 or II
3 or '"
4 or 1111
5 or "'"
6 or """
"
Pink
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Smaller
main
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
No.3 Journal:
10rl
20rll
30r"l
40r""
50r""1
r
6 or 111111
Smaller
main
journal
7-12
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Brown!
Black
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Green!
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown!
Black
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Green!
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown!
Black
Brown!
Black
Black
Black
Black!
Blue
No.4 Journal:
10rl
-----
20rll
- ---... __.. _-
3 or '"
4 or I'"
5 or "'"
,r
6 or 1111"
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
._----
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Brown!
Black
Smaller
main
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
No.5 Journal:
1 or I
20rll
3 or '"
40r""
5 or "'''
60rl""
Smaller
main
journal
Pink
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Green Brown
--- ---
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
--.--_.- .. _.- - -- ---
-- . __ ..
Green!
Brown
Brown!
Brown Black
--
Brown
Brown!
Black
Black
Brown!
Black
Black!
Black Blue
1---
Black
Black!
Blue
Blue
Pink!
Yellow
Yellow!
Yellow Green
Yellow
Yellow!
Green
Green
--
Yellow!
Green
Green!
Green Brown
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Green!
Brown
Brown!
Brown Black
Brown
Brown!
Black
Black
BACK
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
with a clean shop towel.
3. Place plastigage across the rod journal.
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the
bolt (see page 7-32).
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during
inspection.
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil
Clearance:
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
0.021-0.049 mm
(0.0008-0.0019 in.)
0.060 mm (0.0024 in.)
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
complete bearing with the same color code(s), and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bearing, replace the crankshaft and start over.
Rod Bearing Selection
1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat
damage.
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code locations
2. Each rod has a tolerance range from 0 to 0.024 mm
(0.0009 in), in 0.0006 mm (0.0002 in) increments,
depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then
stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3 or 4/1, II, III, or
1111) indicating the range. You may find any
combination of numbers and bars in any engine,
(Half the number or bar is stamped on the bearing
cap,the other half on the rod.).
If you can't read the code because of an
accumulation of oil and varnish, do not scrub them
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with
solvent or detergent.
(cont'd)
7-13
BACK
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
3. The Connecting Rod Journal Codes are stamped in
2 locations: either on the side of the crankshaft next
to the rod journals, or on the No.1 web.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars)
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or Bars)
7-14
No.1 JOURNAL
(PULLEY END)
No.4 JOURNAL
(DRIVE PLATE
ENOl
4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes
to select appropriate replacement bearings from
the following table.
NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing.
--------i ... Larger big end bore
1 or I 12 or II 1 3 or III 14 or 1111
Rod
Journal
code
Big end
bore
code ---.... Smaller bearing (Thicker)
Aorl
B or II
C or III
o or 1111
Smaller
rod
journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Red
Pink
Yellow
Green
Pink Yellow Green
Yellow Green Brown
Green Brown Black
Brown Black Blue
BACK
Balancer Shafts Inspection
NOTE: Inspect the balancer shaft end play before
removing the right side cover and the balancer gear
case (see page 7-18).
1. Remove the oil pan and the right side cover (see
page 7-18).
2. Push the front balancer shaft firmly away from the
dial indicator. Zero the dial against the end of the
balancer shaft, then pull the shaft firmly back
toward the indicator. If end play is excessive,
inspect the retainer and thrust surfaces on the shaft.
NOTE: The thickness of the retainer must not be
changed either by grinding or shimming.
Front Balancer Shaft End Play
(0.004-0.016 in.)
3. Push the rear balancer shaft firmly away from the
dial indicator. Zero the dial against the end of the
balancer shaft, then pull the shaft firmly back
toward the indicator. If end play is excessive,
inspect the thrust washer and the thrust surfaces
on the driven gear and the oil pump body.
NOTE: The thickness of the thrust washer must not
be changed either by grinding or shimming.
4. Remove the balancer shafts (see page 7-18).
5. Clean the balancer shafts, and Inspect the surface
of each balancer shaft journal and bearing.
6. Replace the bearing or balancer shaft if there is
wear, damage or discoloration on the surface of the
bearing or the balancer shaft journal. A mirror-like
surface is normal. When replacing the rear No.1
bearing, be sure to replace the oil pump housing
with a new one.
7. Measure taper at the edges of each journal. The
difference between measurements on each journal
must not exceed the standard.
Journal Taper
A
A1 B1

)
(cont'd)
7-15
BACK
Engine Block
Balancer Shafts Inspection (cont'd)
8. Measure runout on the No.2 journal (A) of each
balancer shaft to make sure the balancer shafts are
not bent.
Balancer Shaft Total Indicated Runout
9. Measure the diameters of the journals on the front
balancer shaft (A) and the rear balancer shaft (B).
Journal Diameter
Standard (New):
No.1 journal:
Front (C):
Rear (D):
42.722-42.734 mm
(1.6820 -1.6824 in.)
20.938 - 20.950 mm
(0.8243-0.8248 in.)
No.2 journals front (E) and rear (F):
38.712-38.724 mm
(1.5241 -1.5246 in.)
No.3 journals front (G) and rear (H):
34.722-34.734 mm
(1.3670-1.3675 in.)
Service Limit:
No.1 journal:
Front (C): 42.71 mm (1.681 in.)
Rear (D): 20.92 mm (0.824 in.)
38.70 mm (1.524 in.)
34.71 mm (1.367 in.)
7-16
A
\
\
B D
10. Remove the crankshaft, the pistons and the other
parts from the block, then clean the balancer shaft
journal bearings in the block and the oil pump
housing with a clean shop towel.
11. Check the surface of the bearings; if there is wear,
damage or dicoloration, replace the bearings or the
oil pump housing.
BACK
12. Measure the inner diameters of the bearings for the
front balancer shaft (A) and the rear balancer shaft
(B).
Bearing Inner Diameter
Standard (New):
No.1 journal:
Front (C):
Rear (D):
42.800-42.820 mm
(1.6850-1.6858 in.)
21.000-21.013 mm
(0.8268-0.8273 in.)
38.800 - 38.820 mm
(1.5276-1.5283 in.'
34.800 - 34.820 mm
(1.3701 -1.3709 in.)
Service Limit:
No.1 journal:
Front (C): 42.83 mm 11.686 in.)
Rear (D): 21.02 mm (0.828 in.)
38.83 mm (1.529 in.)
34.83 mm (1.371 in.)
C E G
F H
A
B
13. Calculate the shaft-to-bearings oil clearances.
BEARING I.D. -JOURNAL O.D.= OIL CLEARANCE
Shaft-to-Bearings Oil Clearances
Standard (New):
No. 1 front journal, No.3 front and rear journals:
0.066-0.098 mm (0.0026-0.0039 in.)
No.2 front and rear journals:
0.076-0.108 mm (0.0030-0.0043 in.)
No.1 rear journal:
0.050-0.075 mm (0.0020-0.0030 in.'
Service Limit:
No.1 front journal, No.3 front and rear journals:
0.12 mm (0.005 in.'
No.2 front and rear journals: 0.13 mm (0.005 in.'
No.1 rear journal: 0.09 mm (0.004 in.)
7-17
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft, Piston and Balancer Shaft Removal
1. Remove the engine assembly (see page 5-2).
2. Remove the transmission:
Manual transmission (see page 13-4) .
Automatic transmission (see page 14-114).
3. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
4. Drive an oil pan seal cutter between the oil pan and
cylinder block.
5. Cut the oil pan seal by striking the side of the cutter
to slide the cutter along the oil pan. Remove the oil
pan.
7-18
6. Remove the right side cover.
7. Remove the CKPfTDC sensors.
8. Remove the timing belt drive pulley.
9. Remove the balancer gear case.
10. Insert a screwdriver (A) in the front balancer shaft
maintenance hole (B), and remove the front
balancer driven pulley (C).
BACK
11. Remove the balancer driven gear.
E
-1 Remove the bolt (A) and washer (8) from the
-2 Scribe a line on a 6 X 100 mm bolt, 74 mm (2.9
in.) from the end.
the hole in the rear balancer shaft (D) up to the
line you scribed.
-4 Remove the bolt and balancer driven gear (E).
12. Remove the oil screen (A) and the oil pump (8).
A C
t It "
B
13. Remove the baffle plate (C).
14. Remove the 6 mm bolts. To prevent warpage,
unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time;
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
15. Remove the 11 mm bolts. To prevent warpage,
unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time;
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
16. Remove the bearing cap bridge.
17. Turn the crankshaft so No.2 and 3 crankpins are at
the top.
18. Remove the rod caps/bearings and main caps/
bearings. Keep all caps/bearings in order.
(cont'd)
7-19
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft, Piston and Balancer Shaft Removal (cont'd)
19. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engine, being
careful not to damage the journals.
A
20. Remove the front balancer shaft and the rear
balancer shaft.
-1 Remove the bolt and the retainer (A).
-2 Pull out the front balancer shaft (B).
-3 Pull out the rear balancer shaft (e).
21. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
connecting rods, and set them aside with their
respective caps.
22. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine
in the proper order.
7-20
23. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon
around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the pistons as they are pushed out.
24. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive
out the pistons (B).
B
25. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps
after removing each piston/connecting rod
assembly.
26. To avoid mixup on reassembly, mark each piston/
connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod
does not indicate its position in the engine, it
indicates the rod bore size.
BACK
Crankshaft Inspection
Straightness
NOTE:
Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners
or a suitable brush.
Check the keyway and threads.
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see
page 7-18).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe
cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Clean the keyway and thread; repair or replace it if
necessary.
4. Support the crankshaft with a V-blocks.
5. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure
the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft two
complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Indicator Runout:
Out-of-Round and Taper
1. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod
and main journal in two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit .
Journal Out-of-Round:
J t
'f r
2. Measure taper at the edge of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:
7-21
BACK
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page
7-18).
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16 mm (0.6
in) from the bottom of the skirt. There are two
standard-size pistons (No Letter or A, and B). The
letter is stamped on the top ofthe piston. Letters
are also stamped on the block as cylinder bore
sizes.
Piston Diameter:
Standard (New):
No Letter (or A): 85.980-85.990 mm
(3.3850 - 3.3854 in.)
B: 85.970 - 85.980 mm
(3.3846-3.3850 in.)
Service Limit:
7-22
No Letter (or A): 85.970 mm (3.3846 in.)
B: 85.960 mm (3.3842 in.)
4. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at 3
levels in each cylinder as shown. If measurements
in any cylinder are beyond the Oversize Bore
Service Limit, replace the block. If the block is to be
rebored, refer to step 6 after reboring.
Cylinder Bore Size:
Standard (New):
Aorl:
B or II:
Service Limit:
Oversize:
86.010-86.020 mm
(3.3862-3.3866 in.)
86.000-86.010 mm
(3.3858-3.3862 in.)
86.070 mm (3.3886 in.)
0.25: 86.250-86.260 mm (3.3957-3.3960 in.)
Reboring limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Bore Taper:
Limit: (Difference between 1 st and 3rd
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
6 mm (0.2 in.)
-'-
T
" ~ Measurement
" 2nd
iE
,1st
.' : Measurement
',,,,,, 3rd
, ' < ~ . Measurement
6 mm (0.2 in.)
No.1 No.4
BACK
5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
6. Check the top of the block for warpage. Measure
along the edges and across the center as shown.
Engine Block Warpage:
Standard (New': 0.07 mm (0.003 in.' max.
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the
piston and cylinder block for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance:
Standard (New,: 0.020 - 0.040 mm
(0.0008-0.0016 in.'
Oversize Piston Diameter:
0.25: 86.230-86.240 mm (3.3949-3.3953 in.'
7-23
BACK
Engine Block
Cylinder Honing
Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be honed.
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-22).
If the block is to be reused, hone the cylinders and
remeasure the bores.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern
(A). Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer
stone such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent. Do
not use stones that are worn or broken.
x. . .x. x. .x..
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the
engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the
cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical
scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep
enough to catch your fingernail and does not run
the full length ofthe bore.
7-24
BACK
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly
1. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)
and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (8).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
[J@El
~ ~
A B
2. Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in
the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings
carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear
eye protection.
A
3. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to
about 158F (700e), then remove the piston pin.
(cont'd)
7-25
BACK
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Inspection
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod
when they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter:
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
7-26
3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance:
Standard (New): -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
( - 0.00020 to + 0.00004 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance:
(0.0002 - 0.0006 in.)
BACK
Reassembly
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A).
A
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in
the connecting rod, and the piston pin with engine
oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158F (70C).
/

. V .
,4/
'="'"
4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (8)
and connecting rod (C) with the embossed marks
(D) on the same side.
o
/ZA
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
7-27
BACK
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see
page 7-18).
2. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
cylinder bore 15-20 mm (0.6-0.8 in.) from the
bottom.

,/

, '
A
. ;,;
& 15-20 mm
< ..................... t (0.6-0.8 in.)

3. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler
gauge:
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
the proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-22).
Ifthe bore is over the service limit, the cylinder
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap:
Top Ring
Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.35 mm
(0.008-0.014 in.)
Second Ring
(0.016-0.022 in.)
Service limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 in.1
Oil Ring
(0.008-0.028 in.)
7-28
4. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
B

5. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared-
off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade
to fit the piston grooves.
The top and second ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05
in.) wide. The oil ring groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in.)
wide.
File down a blade if necessary .
Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves,
or cut the ring grooves deeper with cleaning tools .
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
BACK
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 18
mark and the second ring (8) has a 28 mark. The
manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
Piston Ring Dimensions:
A
Top Ring (Standard):
A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
Second Ring (Standard):
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
DO NOT position any ring gap
at piston thrust surfaces.
in line with the piston pin hole.
OIL RING GAP
9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
ring-to-groove clearances:
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0014-0.0024 in.)
Second Ring Clearance
(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
7-29
BACK
Engine Block
Piston Installation
If the crankshaft is already installed
1. Set the crankshaft to BOC for each cylinder.
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
3. Position the arrow (A) and the mark (B) facing the
timing belt side of the engine.
A
Hll._---B
4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in
using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor
(B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
5. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and
check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
7-30
6. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
plastigage (see page 7-13).
7. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the
rod caps with bearings. Torque the bolts to 20 Nm
8. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as
shown.
B
A
9. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90).
BACK
If the crankshaft is not installed
1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
2. Position the arrow (A) and the mark (B) facing the
timing belt side ofthe engine.
A
B
4. Position all pistons at top dead center.
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
35mm
(1.3Bin.)
20mm
(0.79 in.)
A
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point
A and point B.
Point A - Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out oftolerance,
replace the connecting rod bolt.
7-31
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Balancer Shafts Installation
. Driver 07749-0010000
. Driver Attachment 07948-S800101
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-7).
3. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page -
.. ).
4. Apply a coat of engine oil to the main bearings and
rod bearings.
5. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and
connecting rods.
6. Hold the crankshaft so rod journal No.2 and rod
journal No.3 are straight up.
7. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No.4 journal of
the cylinder block.
B E
D c
8. Lower the crankshaft into the block, seating the rod
journals into connecting rod No.1 (8) and
connecting rod No.4 (C). Install the connecting rod
caps and bolts finger tight.
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, seat the journals
into connecting rod No.2 (D) and connecting rod
No.3 (E). Install the connecting rod caps and bolts
finger tight. Install caps so the bearing recess is on
the same side as the recess in the rod.
7-32
10. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the
rod caps with bearings, and torque the bolts to 20
Nm (2.0 kgfm, 14 Ibfft).
11. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (8) as
shown.
A
the bolt 90).
13. Check main bearing clearance with plastigage (see
page 7-9).
14. Install the main bearing caps and bearing cap
bridge. Coat the bolt threads with engine oil.
15. Tighten the 11 mm bolts in two steps. In the first
step, tighten all bolts in sequence to about 29 Nm
(3.0 kgfm, 22 Ibfft): in the final step, tighten in the
same sequence to 78 Nm (8.0 kgf.m, 58 Ibfft).
l @ @
CD
BACK
16. Tighten the 6 mm bolts in sequence to 12 Nm (1.2
kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft).
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.
@

17. Drive the crankshaft oil seal squarely into the right
side cover.
077 49-0010000
07948-S800101
18. Confirm thatthe clearance is equal all the way
around with a feeler gauge.
Clearance: 0.5-0.8 mm (0.02-0.03 in.)
0.S-0.8mm
(0.02-0.03 in.)
19. Clean and dry the right side cover mating surfaces.
Apply a light coat of oil to the crankshaft and to the
lip ofthe seal.
20. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of
the right side cover and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A) and the right
side cover (B) on the cylinder block.
have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
B
,/ ____ 6 x 1.0 mm
d ~ 12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m.
8.7Ibfft)
(cont'd)
7-33
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Balancer Shafts Installation (co nt' d)
22. Install the rear balancer shaft (A) and the front
balancer shaft (B) into the block, then install the
retainer (C).
6x 1.0mm
7-34
23. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
24. Install the oil pump (A).
-1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump
(see step 17 on page 8-9).
-2 Apply liquid gasket part, No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
-3 Grease the lips ofthe oil seals and apply oil to
the new O-ring (B).
-4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor with the crankshuft and install the oil
pump.
-5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and
balancer shaft and check the seals for
distortion.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
~
D
A
6x1.0mm
25. Install the baffle plate (0), then install the oil screen
(E).
BACK
26. Hold the front balancer shaft with a screwdriver (A),
then install the timing balancer belt driven pulley
(8).
8x 1.25 mm
27. Before installing the balancer driven gear (A) and
the balancer gear case (B) apply molybdenum
disulfide (C) to the thrust surfaces of the balancer
gears as shown.
A
28. Install the balancer driven gear.
-1 Remove the bolt (A) and washer (B) from the
-2 Scribe a line on a 6 x 100 mm bolt, 74 mm from
the end.
the hole in the rear balancer shaft (0) up to the
line you scribed.
-4 Install the balancer driven gear (E).
o ~
~ ~
C/
A
12x 1.5 mrn
29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 22 Ibf.ftl
(cont'd)
7-35
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Balancer Shafts Installation (cont'd)
29. Install the balancer gear case (A).
-1 Apply clean engine oil to the new a-ring (B).
-2 Hold the rear balancer shaft with the 6 x 100
mm bolt.
-3 Align the notch (C) on the pulley edge with the
pointer (D) on the gear case.
-4 Install the gear case (A).
8x 1.25mm
25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18Ibfft)
c
30. After installation, make sure the pulley pointer (A)
aligns with the oil pump pointer (B).
A
-0
{
.'
7-36
31. Clean and dry the cylinder block mating surfaces.
32. Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0009 evenly to
the cylinder block mating surface of the oil pan and
to the inner threads of the bolt holes, then install
the oil pan.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket in a 4 mm wide bead.
Apply a second bead where the two ends of the
first bead meet.
Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have
elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead,
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.
33. Tighten the bolts/nuts in two or three steps. In the
final step, tighten all bolts/nuts, in sequence, to 12
Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft).
@ CD @@
! ! ! !
@ @ @ @@
BACK
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal
Installation - In-car
Seal Driver 07LAD-PT3010A
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
the lip of the seal.
3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the
crankshaft and check that the oil seal lip is not
distorted.
07LAD-PT3010A
Install seal with the
part number side
facing out.
Balancer Shaft Seals Installation -
In-car
. Hub Assembly Guide Attachment 07GAF-SE00200
. Attachment, 30 mm 1.0. 077 46-0030300
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the balancer shaft
and to the lip of the seal.
3. Using the special tools, drive in the front balancer
shaft oil seal until the driver bottoms against the oil
pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess
grease off the balancer shaft, and check that the oil
seal lip is not distorted.
07GAF-SE00200 07746-0030300
)\
7-37
BACK
Engine Block
Transmission End Crankshaft Seal Installation - In-car
. Driver 07749-0010000
. Driver Attachment 07948-5800101 or 07VAD-P8A010A
3. Using the special tools, drive the crankshaft oil seal
into the right side cover to the point where the
clearance between the bottom of the crankshaft oil
seal and right side cover is 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.02 - 0.03
in.) (see page 7-32). Align the hole in the driver
attachment with the pin on the crankshaft.
077490010000
079485800101
Install seal with the
part number side
facing out.
4. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7-38
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-4
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-4
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-5
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-6
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-7
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Number Tool Number Description Qty
CD 07LAD-PT3010A Seal Driver 1
077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 X 47 mm 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
CD 07912-6110001 Oil Filter Wrench 1
0
,
., .
. ~
~ ~ -.- .
CD
8-2
BACK
FRONT BALANCER
BELT DRIVEN
PULLEY
BALANCER DRIVEN
GEAR

O-RING
THRUST
WASHER
0 ___________ D.RING

OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-7

\
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Diagram, page 22-79
SWitch test, page 8-4
Oil pressure test, page 8-4
OIL FILTER
OIL SCREEN
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-18

WASHER DRAIN BOLT
8-3
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test
1. Remove the VEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil
pressure switch (B).
B c A
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal
(C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity with the engine stopped. There should
be no continuity with the engine running.
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil
level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine
oil pressure.
8-4
Oil Pressure Test
Ifthe oil pressure warning light stays on with the
engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil
level is correct:
1. Connect a tachometer or a Honda PGM Tester.
2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install
an oil pressure gauge (A).
3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176F (SOC)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi)
minimum
At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
minimum
5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect
these items:
Check the oil filter for clogging .
Check the oil pump (see step 11 on page 8-8).
BACK
Engine Oil Replacement
NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be
replaced at every other oil change. Under severe
conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil
change.
Change interval
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
(Normal conditions)
(Severe conditions).
1. Warm up the engine.
A
44 Nm 14.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibfft)
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
4.0 A (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) at oil change.
4.3 A (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qtl at oil change
including filter.
5.6 A (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qtl after engine overhaul.
5. Run the engine for more than three minutes, then
check for oil leakage.
8-5
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil Filter Wrench 07912-6110001
1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter
wrench.
2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block,
then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal.
Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.
A
3. Install the oil filter by hand.
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise with the special tool.
Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise.
Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibfft)
07912-6110001
\
8-6
5. If eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the
outside of the filter, use the following procedure to
tighten the filter.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the block, and note which number is at the
bottom .
Tighten the filter by turing it clockwise 7 numbers
from the one you noted. For example, if number
2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten
the filter until the number 1 comes around the
bottom.
Number when rubber
seal is seated.
Number when 1
rubber seal is
seated
Number after 8
tightening
2 3
1 2
Number after tightening.
4 5 6 7 8
3 4 5 6 7
6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the
specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
BACK
Oil Pu mp Overhaul
Exploded y. lew
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm (12k . gfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
OIL SEALS
Replace.
PUMP/
Apply Ii
to gasket
the surface of
when
PUMP COVER
b OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
I
V
RELIEF VALVE
. alve mu "
In freely
Replace "f ore.
I scored.
SPIUNG
-----

m (4.0 kgfm, 29 Ib'ft)
(cont'd)
8-7
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Seal Driver 07LAD-PT3010A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
this procedure.
Removal
1. Drain the engine oil.
2. Remove the timing belt and the balancer belt (see
page 6-23).
3. Remove the timing belt tensioner and the balancer
belt tensioner.
4. Remove the CKP/TDC sensors, then remove the
timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-55).
5. Remove the balancer belt driven pulley (see page
7-18).
6. Remove the balancer gear case and the balancer
driven gear (see page 7-18).
7. Separate the oil pan from the cylinder block with an
oil pan seal cutter (see page 7-18).
8. Remove the oil pan and the oil screen (A).
B
~ ... \\"''''/
~
9. Remove the mounting bolts and the oil pump
assembly (8).
10. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then
separate the housing and cover.
8-8
Inspection
11. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (8). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the inner and outer rotors.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
12. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between
the rotor (A) and pump housing (8). If the housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the set of inner and outer rotors and/or the
pump housing.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance
B
A
BACK
13. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
exceeds the service limit, replace the set of inner
and outer rotors and/or the pump housing.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
o
14. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for
scoring or other damage. Replace parts if
necessary.
15. Remove the old oil seals from the oil pump.
16. Gently tap in the new oil seals until the special tool
bottoms on the pump.
07LAD-PT3010A
07746-0010300
Installation
17. Reassemble the oil pump, applying liquid thread
lock to the pump housing screws.
18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
19. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surface.
(cont'd)
8-9
BACK
Engine Lubrication
-1 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
bolt holes.
-2 Grease the lips ofthe oil seals and apply oil to
the new O-ring (B).
-3 Install a dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
balancer shaft and check the seals for
distortion.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or
more have elapsed since applying liquid
gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after
removing the old residue.
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibf.ft)
C ~
( ) ~ A
\J '2f ~
B
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfft)
6x 1.0mm
22. Install the baffle plate (D).
8-10
23. Hold the front balancer shaft with a screwdriver (A),
then install the timing balancer belt driven pulley
(B).
B
8x 1.25 mm
24. Before installing the balancer driven gear (A) and
the balancer gear case (B), apply molybdenum
disulfide (C) to the thrust surfaces of the balancer
gears as shown.
c
A
BACK
25. Install the balancer driven gear.
-1 Remove the bolt (A) and washer (8) from the
-2 Scribe a line on a 6 x 100 mm bolt, 74 mm from
the end.
the hole in the rear balancer shaft (D) up to the
line you scribed.
-4 Install the balancer driven gear (E).
8x 1.25mm
25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18Ibfft)
c
26. Install the balancer gear case (A).
-1 Apply clean engine oil to the new O-ring (8).
-2 Hold the rear balancer shaft with the 6 x 100
mmbolt.
-3 Align the notch (C) on the pulley edge with the
pointer (D) on the gear case.
-4 Install the gear case (A).
c
27. After installation, make sure the pulley pointer (A)
aligns with the oil pump pointer (8).
A
(cont'd)
8-11
BACK
Engine Lubrication
28. Clean and dry the cylinder block mating surfaces.
29. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0009, evenly to
the cylinder block mating surface of the oil pan and
to the inner threads of the bolt holes, then install
the oil pan.
NOTE:
Apply a 4 mm wide bead of liquid gasket.
Apply a second bead where the two ends of the
first bead ends meet.
Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more have
elapsed since applying liquid gasket. Instead,
I
I
I
o - ,=-0==- 0
~ o
~
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.
30. Tighten the bolts/nuts in two or three steps. In the
final step, tighten all bolts/nuts, in sequence to
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft).
@@ (l)
1111
@@
@@ @@
8-12
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ................. 9-2
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation .............. 9-3
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-5
BACK
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Use new a-rings and gaskets when reassembling.
Check for folds or scratches on the surface of the gasket.
Replace with a new gasket if damaged.
__________ '0
INTAKE AIR /
TEMPERATURE
(lATI SENSOR
18 Nm (1.8 kgfm.
13lbfft
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m.
8.7Ibf.ftl
O-RING
Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
IDLE AIR CONTROL
(lACIVALVE GASKET
Replace.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if cracked or
if mating surface is
damaged.
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm. 16lbfftl
INTAKE MANIFOLD
CHAMBER
Replace if cracked or
if mating surface is
damaged.
GASKET
Replace.
'" /8x1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm.
16lbf.ftl

O
A:?:8X1.25mm
'It{l'II 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm.
16lbfftl
GASKET
Replace.
@ __ 8 x 1.25 mm
\f;II 22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m.
16lbfftl
EXHAUST GAS
RECIRCULATION
(EGRIVALVE
\GAmT
8x1.25mm
Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm. 16 Ibfftl
8x1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m. 16lbfftl
INTAKE MANIFOLD
BRACKET
9-2
BACK
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16lbfftl
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
PRIMARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR (H02SI
SELF-LOCKING NUT
8x 1.25 mm
31 Nm (3.2 kgfm, 23 Ibf.ftl
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 Nm (4.5 kgfm,
33lbfft,
~ G S K E T
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x1.25mm
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm,
33lbfftl
9-3
BACK
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
F23A4 engine:
NOTE:
COVER
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfftl
8 x 1.25 mm
i Nm 12.2 kgl.m. 16 Ibfftl
o
\
l EXHAUST
MANIFOLD
AIR FUEL RATIO lA/F) . BRACKET
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
SENSOR
10x 1.25 mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm. 33 Ibfftl
9-4
COVER
BACK
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
Except F23A4 engine SULEV model:
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
HEATSHILD
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x1.25mm
33 Nm (3.4 kgfm,
251bf.ftl
Replace. 10 x 1.25 mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm,
MUFFLER
I.

______ Eif ____
GASKET l----
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgfm,
40lbfftl
Replace.
HEAT SHIELD
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibf.ftl
28lbfftl _____ a SECONDARY HEATED
"" OXYGEN SENSOR (H02SI
_____ 0
GASKET
Replace.

PIPE/"
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x1.25mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgfm,
4Olbfftl
Replace.
8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16lbfftl
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x1.25mm
Replace.
Nm (4.5 kgfm, 33lbfftl

GASKET
Replace.
THREE WAY CATALmC
CONVERTER (TWCI
THREE WAY CATALmC
CONVERTER (TWCI
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
9-5
BACK
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement (cont'd)
F23A4 engine SULEV model:
/MUFFLER

"
SELF-LOCKING NUT
lOx 1.25mm
54 Nm (5.4 kgfm.
40Ibfft)
Replace.
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S)
44 Nm (4.5 kgfm.
33Ibfft)

Replace.

'lY TWC
9-6

12 Nm (1.2 kgfm.
8.7Ibfft)
SELF-LOCKING NUT
lOx 1.25 mm
TWC TIGHTENING
SEQUENCE
33 Nm (3.4 kgfm. 25 Ibfft)
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
BACK
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test ............................... 10-5
Sending Unit Test ......................................................... 10-7
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-7
RadiatorTest ................................................................. 10-8
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-8
ThermostatTest ........................................................... 10-9
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-9
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-10
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-10
Water Outlet Replacement .......................................... 10-12
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-13
Radiator and Fan Replacement ................................... 10-14
Fan Controls
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 10-16
Circuit Diagram With AlC ............................................. 10-17
Circuit Diagram Without AlC ....................................... 10-18
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting ........................ 10-19
Radiator Fan Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting (Open) ........................................... 10-21
Troubleshooting (Short) .......................................... 10-21
Radiator Fan Switch Test ............................................. 10-22
BACK
Cooling System
/
AIC CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY

/
FAN MOTOR
Test, page 10-8
10-2
RADIATOR FAN
SHROUD
RADIATOR CAP

re=======::::n-,
RADIATOR
ATf COOLER HOSES
BACK
WATER BYPASS HOSE
O-RING
HEATER HOSE
IDLE AIR CONTROL
UAC) VALVE
HEATER HOSE
O-RING
HEATER VALVE
(cant'd)
10-3
BACK
Cooling System
Component Location Index (co nt' d)
WATER OUTLET COVER
10-4
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
'98-'99 models:
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test, page 10-7
O-RINGS
\
CONNECTING PIPE
BACK
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test
'98-99 models:
1. Check the No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box before testing.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then
disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) from the coolant
temperature gauge sending unit (B), and ground it
with a jumper wire.
S
Check that the pointer of the coolant temperature
gauge starts moving toward the "H" mark. Turn the
ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "H"
on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the
gauge .
Ifthe pointer ofthe gauge does not move at all,
check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire.
If the wires are OK, replace the coolant
temperature gauge .
If the coolant temperature gauge works, test the
coolant temperature sending unit.
'00-02 models:
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at
All
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect ECM/
PCM connector terminal C24 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)
1 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
YEL/GRN
--
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .
After 30 seconds or more, does the temperature
gauge needle move to the Hot side?
YES-Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
recheck (see page 11-5).lfthe symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect ECMI
PCM connector C (31P).
(cont'd)
10-5
BACK
Cooling System
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal C24
and body ground.
1 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
fEUGRN
=
Is there about 5V ?
YES - Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
NO- Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for
continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C
24 and gauge assembly connector terminal C2.
11
2
3V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V 1/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
v EL/GRN
Q
v EL/GRN
GAUGE CONNECTOR C (16P)
1 2 3
><
4 5 6 7
8 9 10
111XI12
1/
14 15 16
YES- Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
NO-Repair open in the wire between ECM/PCM
connector terminal C24 and gauge connector
terminal C2.
10-6
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes Past the Hot
Mark
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect ECM/
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) , and watch the
coolant temperature gauge.
Does the temperature gauge needle move at all ?
(you may have to watch it for about 30 seconds.)
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
recheck (see page 11-5).lfthe symptom/indication
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again, and watch the coolant temperature gauge.
Does the temperature gauge needle immediately
go past the Hot mark?
assembly.
NO-The temperature gauge needle went past the
Hot mark after about 30 seconds ormore. Go to
step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
gauge assembly connector C.
5. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector
terminal C24 and gauge assembly connector
terminal C2.
5 6 7 8 9 10
13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21
26 27 26 29 30
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECM/PCM
connector terminal C24 and gauge connector
terminal C2.
NO - Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
BACK
Sending Unit Test
'98-99 models:
A
2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the change in
resistance between the positive terminal (C) and
the engine (ground) with the engine cold and with
the engine at operating temperature.
Temperature 133F (56C) 185F (85C)-
212F (100C)
Resistance (Q ) 137 46-30
3. If the obtained readings are substantially different
from the specifications above, replace the sending
unit.
Radiator Cap Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with
engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester
(B) (commercially available).
B
2. Apply a pressure of 93 -123 kPa (0.95 -1.25
kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
10-7
BACK
Cooling System
Radiator Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach the pressure tester (A)(commercially
available) to the radiator and apply a pressure of
93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
~
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
pressure.
4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in
the engine oil.
10-8
Fan Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan
motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B).
LOCK
A
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the
No.1 terminal, and ground to the No.2 terminal.
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,
replace it.
BACK
Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
B
A
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with the
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is
fully open.
STANDARD THERMOSTAT
Lift height: above B.O mm (0.31 in.)
Starts opening: 169-176F (76-BOC)
Fully open: 194F 190C)
Water Pump Inspection
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-23).
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise.
Check that it turns freely.
3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of
"weeping" from the bleed hole (A) is normal.
A
10-9
BACK
Cooling System
Water Pump Replacement
2. Remove the camshaft pulley and the back cover
3. Remove the water pump (A) by removing five bolts.
4. Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and the
mating surface on the cylinder block.
5. Install the water pump, with a new O-ring (8), in the
6. Clean the spilled engine coolant.
10-10
Coolant Replacement
1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
dial to maximum heat, then turn off the engine.
Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
A
4. Remove the drain bolt (A) from the rear side of the
cylinder block.
A
83 Nm (S.5 kgfm,
61Ibfft)
5. After the coolant has drained, apply liquid gasket to
the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a
new washer and tighten it securely.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
BACK
7. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the
tank to the MAX mark with Honda All Season
8. Loosen the air bleed bolt (A) in the thermostat
housing, then pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2 into the radiator to the bottom of
the filler neck. Do not let coolant spill on any
electrical parts or the paint. If the any coolant spills,
rinse it off immediately.
NOTE:
Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water Pre-
mixing is not required.
Engine Coolant Refill Capacity [including the
reservoir capacity of 0.6 (0.6 US qt, 0.5 Imp qt)]
MIT: 5.5 (5.8 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt)
A/T: 5.4 (5.7 US qt, 4.8 Imp qt)
A
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfft)
(
9. Tighten the bleed bolt as soon as coolant starts to
run out in a steady stream.
10. With the radiator cap off, start the engine and let it
run until warmed up (radiator fan comes on at least
twice). Then, if necessary, add more Honda All
Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 to bring the level
back up to the bottom ofthe filler neck.
11. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
again and check for leaks.
10-11
BACK
Cooling System
Water Outlet Replacement
Install the water outlet (AI with a new O-ring (BI.
10-12
, ~
A
~
Metal-type: Replace the O-ring
whenever the outlet is removed.
Plastic type: Replace the outlet
(with built-in O-ring) whenever it's
removed.
BACK
Thermostat Replacement
NOTE: Use new a-rings when reassembling.
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
THERMOSTAT
Install with pin up.
PIN
THERMOSTAT COVER
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, S.7Ibf.ft)
10-13
BACK
Cooling System
Radiator and Fans Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses.
RADIATOR CAP
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE lilt \
ASSEMBLY "" AlC CON, DENSER FAN /\'
\
ATF COOLER HOSE N . ---: '0 __ .. :::::
6x1.0mm u
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
l
--6X1.0mm
-::' 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfft)
____ UPPER BRACKET
. AND CUSHION

6x 1.0mm
7 Nm Ibfftl
RADIATOR
FAN SHROUD
FAN MOTOR
3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.

CUSHION
O-RING
Replace.
.=----LOWER RADIATOR
HOSE
FAN MOTOR
CONNECTORS
4. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.
5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator.
6. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely.
7. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air.
10-14
BACK
Fan Controls
UNDER-HOOD
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
Motor Test. page 10-8
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY
Test. page 22-52
__ RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test. page 22-52
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
Test. page 10-22
AIC CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY
Motor Test. page 10-8
10-15
BACK
Fan Controls
Before performing any troubleshooting procedures check:
Fuses
Grounds
Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
SYMPTOM PROCEDURE
Radiator fan does not run at all Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-19).
Radiator fan does not run for engine cooling, but it runs Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)
withA/C on (see page 10-21).
Radiator fan runs with ignition switch ON (11), A/C oft, Radiator Fan Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
and engine temperature below 199F (93C) (see page 10-21).
10-16
BACK
Circuit Diagram With AIC
SA TTERY
+
UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
No.41 (1OOA)
No.57 (20A)
-<>'""-
I
~ ~
..
I
BlUlBlK
RADIATOR
M FAN
MOTOR
BlK
G201
BlK
G101
No.42 (50A)
N o . ~
1
I ~ 1
..
I
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH
ECMlPCM
(
Closed: Above)
199F (93"C)
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
WHT YEl-+-a""-'C>-+-..,
~
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
I
BlUIYEl
CONDENSER
M FAN
MOTOR
BlK
G201
AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
10-17
BACK
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram Without AIC
UNDER-HOOD FUSEIRELAY BOX
BA TTERY
+
No.4! (!OOA) No.42 (SOA)
No.57 (20A)
...... ,...
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
10-18
~ ~
BLU/BLK GRN
BlK BlK
G201 GIO!
IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
@ > Q ~
BAT
WHT
IG2
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH
IG2 HOT in ON (II)
(
Closed: Above)
!9S"F (93"C)
BlKIYEL -----......
BACK
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No.4 (7.5A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse (s) OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse (s) and recheck .
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-52).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the radiator fan relay .
3. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
Terminal side of female terminals
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
4. Connect the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the
radiator fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
~
J U M P R
2 WIRE
4 3
Does the radiator fan run?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 6.
5. Disconnect the jumper, and turn the ignition switch
ON (II). Check for voltage between the No.3
terminal of the radiator fan relay 4P socket and
body ground.
1
2
=
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and under-dash fuse/
relay box .
(cont'd)
10-19
BACK
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
7. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and the No.2
terminal of the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
1
Terminal side of 2
female terminals
4 3
Wire side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Goto step 8.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No.2 .
the radiator fan motor 2P connector and body
ground.
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES - Replace the radiator fan motor .
NO-Check for an open in the wire between
radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No.1 and
body ground. If the wire is OK, check for a poor
ground at G201 .
10-20
9. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
10. Disconnect the radiator fan switch 2P connector.
11. Connect the No.1 and No.2 terminals, of the
radiater fan switch 2P connector with a jumper wire.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
~ J U M P R
CD---JWIRE
YES- Replace the radiator fan switch .
NO-Gotostep 12.
12. Remove the jumper wire, and measure the voltage
between the No.2 terminal of the radiator fan
switch connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Check for an open in the wire between
radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and
ground at G302 .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the radiator
fan switch terminal No.2 and the under-hood
fuse/relay box .
BACK
Troubleshooting (Open)
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch 2P connector.
3. Measure voltage between the No.2 terminal of the
radiator fan switch 2P connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH 2P
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
/s there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
=
fan switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and under-
hood fuse/relay box .
continuity between the No.1 terminal of the
radiator fan switch 2P connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH 2P
CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
/s there continuity?
=
YES- Replace the radiator fan switch .
radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and
ground at G201 .
Troubleshooting (Short)
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-52).
/s the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the radiator fan relay .
2. Remove the radiator fan switch, and test it (see
page 10-22).
Is the radiator fan switch OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the radiator fan switch .
3. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) and the
under-hood fuse relay box 14P connector.
the radiator fan switch 2P connector and body
ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between the radiator
fan switch 2P connector terminal No.2 and under-
NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
10-21
BACK
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Switch Test
NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing
the radiator fan switch (see page 10-10).
1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the
thermostat cover (see page 10-2).
2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container
of water as shown.
C
D
A
3. Heat the water and check the temperature with a
thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch
the bottom of hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (e)
and B terminal (D) according to the table.
1\
Terminal
Operation Temperature
A B
ON
196-203F
0-
f-O
(91-95C)
SWITCH
5
0
-15F (3-S
O
C) lowe
OFF than the temperature
when it goes on
10-22
BACK
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools ............................ 11-2
General Troubleshooting
Information ........................... 11-3
DTC Troubleshooting Index .... 11-6
Symptom Troubleshooting .... 11-9
System Descriptions ................ 11-10
How to Set Readi ness Codes .. 11-42
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-47
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting ... 11-91
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting .. 11-95
Injector Replacement ............... 11-97
H02S and AlF Sensor
Replacement ......................... 11-99
Idle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting ............. .
AlC Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting .................. .
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Starter Switch Signal Circuit
PSP Switch Signal Circuit
Signal Circuit
Idle Speed Adjustment ........... .
Fuel Supply System
11-100
11-101
11-104
11-106
11-107
11-108
11-109
11-110
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit
Troubleshooting ................... 11-112
Fuel Pressure Relieving ........... 11-115
Fuel Pressure Test ................... 11-115
FuelPumpTest ........................ 11-117
Fuel Line Inspection ................ 11-118
Fuel Tube/QuickConnect Fittings
Precautions ........................... 11-120
Removal ................................ 11-120
Installation ............................ 11-121
Fuel Pressure Regulator
Replacement ......................... 11-123
Fuel Filter Replacement ........... 11-123
Fuel Pump Replacement ......... 11-124
Fuel Tank Replacement ........... 11-125
Fuel Gauge Test ....................... 11-128
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Test/Replacement ................ 11-129
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Test ........................................ 11-130
Intake Air System
Th rottle Body Test ............ ....... 11-132
Intake Air Bypass Control
ValveTest ............................. 11-132
Air Cleaner Element
Replacement ......................... 11-133 r.)
Throttle Cable Adjustment ...... 11-134 , ___
Throttle Body Removal/
Installation ............................ 11-135
Throttle Body Disassembly/
Reassembly .......................... 11-136
Catalytic Converter System
EGRSystem
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and
Test ........................................ 11-143
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting ............. .
EVAP Two Way Valve Test ..... .
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve
Test ....................................... .
Replacement ........................ .
11-144
11-145
11-159
11-160
11-162
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty
CD A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in. Hg 1
07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0-4 in. Hg 1
07SAZ -001 OOOA Backprobe Set 2
G) 07VAJ-0040100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment 1
07406-0040001 Fuel Pressure Gauge 1

11-2 BACK
General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose wires at
all connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts
"Open" and "Short" are common electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something won't work at all. With complex electronics
such as ECMs/PCMs, this can sometimes mean
something works, but not the way it's supposed to.
How to Use the PGM Tester or a Scan Tool
If the MIL (MaHunction Indicator Lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine and check the MIL.
2. If the MIL stays on, connect the Honda PGM Tester
(A) or an OBDII scan tool to the Data Link Connector
(DLC) (B) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard.
4. Check the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and note
it. Then also check the freeze data. Refer to the DTC
Troubleshooting Index and begin the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction was detected.
The scan tool and the Honda PGM tester can read
the DTC, freeze data, current data, and other
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) data.
For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the scan tool or PGM
Tester.
If the MIL did not come on
If the MIL did not come on but there is a driveablility
problem, refer to the Symptom Troubleshooting index
in this section.
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting in this section requires
you to reset the ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC.
Ifthe problem is intermittent and you can't duplicate
the code, do not continue through the procedure. To do
so will only result in confusion and, possibly, a
needlessly replaced ECM/PCM.
(cont'd)
11-3
BACK
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Reset the ECM/PCM
You can reset the ECM/PCM in either of two ways:
Use the OBO II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear
the ECM/PCM memory.
See the OBO II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's
manuals for specific instructions.
Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the No.13
CLOCK BACKUP fuse (7.5A) (A) from the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.
NOTE: If the No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A) fuse is
removed and engine is started, the MIL will come on
and the PCM will store OTC P0560 (F23A4 engine).
How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the ECM/PCM as described above.
3. Disconnect the OBO II scan tool or Honda PGM
Tester from the OLC.
NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer
system. If you replace the ECM/PCM, it will have a
different immobilizer code. In order for the engine
to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with
the Honda PGM Tester.
11-4
How to Remove the ECM/PCM for Testing
If the inspection for a trouble code requires voltage or
resistance checks at the ECM/PCM connectors, remove
the ECM/PCM and test it:
1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's and
driver's side of the center console to expose the
ECM/PCM.
2. Remove the two bolts (4 cylinder model), or three
bolts (V6 model) from the ECM/PCM (A).
BACK
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the ECM/PCM
Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a
commercially available digital multimeter
8ackprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (8), and connect the cords to a
multi meter (C).
A
07SAZ-001000A
2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the
contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide
the tip into the connector from the wire side until it
touches the end ofthe wire terminal.
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector
or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the
connector and probe the terminals (8) from the
terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
connector.
A
INOTICEI
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
B
How to substitute the ECM/PCM for testing
purposes
Use this procedure if you need a known-good ECM/
PCM to test a vehicle. It allows you to swap an ECM/
PCM from a "donor" vehicle without having to program
it to the test vehicle's ignition key.
1. Cut a temporary ignition key for the test vehicle
with a non-immobilizer key blank.
2. Remove the ECM/PCM from the test vehicle.
3. Write the test vehicle's VIN on the ECM/PCM you
just removed to avoid confusing it with the donor
vehicle's ECM/PCM.
4. Remove the known-good ECM/PCM from the donor
vehicle, and install it in the test vehicle.
5. Tape the donor vehicle's ignition key head-to-head
to the test vehicle's temporary key (A). The ECM/
PCM will recognize the code from the donor
vehicle's key (8) and allow you to start the engine
with the temporary key.
B
6. After completing your tests, reinstall both ECMs/
PCMs, and destroy the temporary key.
11-5
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting Index
DTC Temporary Detection Item Note
(MIL indication *) DTC
P0107 (3) --
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit Low (see page 11-47)
Voltage
P0108 (3) --
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit High (see page 11-48)
Voltage
P0112 (10) --
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-50)
P0113(10) --
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-51)
P0116 (86) P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-52)
Range/Performance Problem
P0117 (6) --
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-52)

P0118 (6) -- Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-53)
High Voltage
P0122 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (see page 11-54)
P0123 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-57)
P0128*3.*7 (87) P0128 Cooling System Malfunction (see page 11-58)
P0131*5 (1) P0130 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (see page 11-59)
(Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage
P0132* (1) P0130 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (see page 11-60)
(Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage
P0133* (61) P0133* Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (see page 11-61)
(Sensor 1) Slow Response
P0135* (41) -- Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary H02S) (see page 11-67)
(Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0137 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary F23A4 SULEV engine: (see
H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage page 11-63), Except F23A4
SULEV engine: (see page
11-62)
P0138 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary F23A4 SULEV engine: (see
H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage page 11-65), Except F23A4
SULEV engine: (see page
11-64)
P0139 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary (see page 11-66)
H02S) (Sensor 2) Slow Response
P0141 (65) -- Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary (see page 11-67)
H02S) (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Lean 11-69)
P0172 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Rich (see page 11-69)
P0300 and some of P1399 Random Misfire (see page 11-70)
P0301 (71)
P0302(72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0301 (71) P1399 No.1 Cylinder Misfire (see page 11-71)
P0302(72) No.2 Cylinder Misfire
P0303 (73) No.3 Cylinder Misfire
P0304 (74) No.4 Cylinder Misfire
*. These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MalfunctIon IndIcator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS servIce slgnallrne IS
jumped with the Honda PGM Tester.
**. The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
*1: MIT *5: F23A1, F23A5 engine
*2: AfT *6: '00 model
*3: F23A4 engine *7: '01-02 models
*4: F23A1 engine
11-6
BACK
DTC Temporary Detection Item Note
(MIL indication *) DTC
P0325 (23) -- Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit Malfunction (see page 11-72)
P0335 (4)
-- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Circuit No signal (see page 11-73)
P0336 (4)
--
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Intermittent (see page 11-73)
Interruption
P0401 (80) P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow 11-138)
P0420 (67) -- Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (see page 11-137)
P0451*6 (91) P0451 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/Performance (see page 11-145)
Problem
P0452 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low (see 11-146)
P0453 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage (see page 11-147)
P0500*' (17) -- Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Circuit Malfunction 11-75)
P0505 (14) P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction (seepage 11-101)
P0560*3 (34)
--
ECM/PCM Back up Circuit Low Voltage 11-76)
P07XX*2.** (70) -- Automatic Transaxle Refer to the Automatic
Transmission DTC
Troubleshooting Index
P1106 (13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARD) Sensor Range/ (see page 11-77)
Performance Problem
P1107 (13)
--
Barometric Pressure (BARD) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-77)
Voltage
P1108 (13) --
Barometric Pressure (BARD) Sensor Circuit High (see page 11-77)
Voltage
P1121 (7) P1121 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Lower Than 11-56)
P1122 (7) P1122 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher Than Expected (see page 11-56)
P1 128 (5) P1128 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Lower (see page 11-49)
Than Expected
P1129 (5) P1129 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Higher (see page 11-49)
Than Expected
P1149*" (61) P1149*3 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/ (see page 11-78)
Performance Problem
P1162*3 (48) --
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit (see page 11-79)
Malfunction
P1163*3(61) P1163*3 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Slow Response (see page 11-61)
P1164*3 (61) P1164*3 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/ (see page 11-80)
Performance Problem
P1165*"(61) P1165*3 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Rangel (see page 11-78)
Performance Problem
P1166*3 (41) --
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit (see page 11-81)
Malfunction
P1167*3 (41) --
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System (see page 11-83)
Malfunction
*: These DTCs are mdlcated by a bllnkmg Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line IS
**: The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
*1: MIT
*2:A/T
*3: F23A4 engine
*4: F23A1 engine
*5: F23A1, F23A5 engine
*6: '00 model
*7: '01-02 models
*8: F23A4 ULEV engine
(cont'd)
11-7 BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index (co nt' d)
DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Note
(MIL indication *)
P1259*3,*4 (22) -- VTEC System Malfunction (see page 6-7)
P1297 (20) -- Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low (see page 11-84)
Voltage
P1298 (20) -- Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High (see page 11-85)
VoltaQe
P1359 (8)
--
Crankshaft Position (CKP)fTop Dead Center (TDC) (see page 11-87)
Sensor Circuit Malfunction
P1361 (8)
--
Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor Intermittent (see page 11-73)
Interruption
P1362 (8) -- Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor No Signal (see page 11-73)
P1381 (9) -- Cylinder Position (CYP) Sensor Intermittent (see page 11-88)
Interruption
P1382 (9) -- Cylinder Position (CYP) Sensor No Signal (see page 11-88)
P1456 (90) P1456 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System (see page 11-149)
Leakage (Fuel Tank System)
P1457 (90) P1457 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System (see page 11-152)
Leakage (EVAP Canister System)
P1486*6 (87) P1486 Cooling System Malfunction (see page 11-58)
P1491 (12) P1491 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve (see page 11-138)
Insufficient Lift
P1498 (12) -- Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position (see page 11-142)
Sensor Circuit High Voltage
P1519 (14) -- Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve Circuit Malfunction (see page 11-102)
P1607 (-) -- Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control (see page 11-90)
Module (PCM) Internal Circuit Malfunction
P17xx*2,** (70) --
Automatic Transaxle Refer to the Automatic
Transmission DTC
Troubleshooting Index
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIl) when the SCS service signal line IS
*1: MfT
*2: AfT
*3: F23A4 engine
*4: F23A1 engine
*6: '00 model
*7: '01-02 models
11-8 BACK
These symptoms DO NOTtrigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and cause the Malfunction (MIL) to
come on. If the MIL is reported on, check for DTCs. If the vehicle has one of these symptoms, do the diagnostic
procedure for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom
Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engine will not start 1. Testthe battery (see page 22-51) Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-5)
compression
3. Testthe fuel pump (see page 11-117) No ignition
4. Testthe ignition wires (see page 4-25) spark
5. Test the ignition coil (see page 4-24) Intake air leaks
6. Check the ICM (ignition control module) inputs (see page Locked up
4-23) engine
7. Troubleshoot the PGM-FI main relay circuit (see page 11- Slipped!
112) broken timing
belt
Contaminated
fuel
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-91)
(MIL comes on and stays on,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCsset)
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the immobilizer system (see page 22-204)
(immobilizer indicator light
comes on)
Hard starting 1. Testthe battery (see page 22-51)
Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-115) compression
3. Testthe ignition wires (see page 4-25) Intake air leaks
4. Test the ignition coil (see page 4-24) Contaminated
5. Check the ICM (ignition control module) inputs (see page fuel
4-24) Weak ignition
spark
Cold fast idle too low Check/adjustthe idle speed (see page 11-110)
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Cold fast idle too high 1. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-110)
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-134)
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-132)
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-110) Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjustthe throttle cable (see page 11-134)
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-132)
Low power 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-115) Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect and testthe throttle body (see page 11-132) compression
3. Inspect/adjustthe throttle cable (see page 11-134)
Engine stalls 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-115) Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the ignition wires (see page 4-25) Faulty harness
3. Check!adjustthe idle speed (see page 11-110) and sensor
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal connections
circuit (see page 11-109)
Difficult to refuel 1. Test the fuel tank vapor control valve (see page 11-160) Malfunctioning
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect the fuel tank vapor control signal tube between gas station filling
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank vapor control valve nozzle
3. Inspect the fuel tank vapor vent tube between the EVAP
canister and the fuel tank vapor control valve
4. Check the EVAP canister (see page 11-138)
Fuel overflows during Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve (see page 11-162) Malfunctioning
refueling gas station filling
(No DTCs set) nozzle
11-9
BACK
System Descriptions
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the engine control module (ECM) on vehicles
with manual transmissions or the powertrain control module (PCM) on vehicles with automatic transmissions.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the ECM/PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-
programmed value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the ECM/PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the
system in order to permit minimal driving.
Self-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the ECM/PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable memory. When the ignition is first turned on, the
ECM/PCM supplies ground to the MIL for 2 seconds ('98-01 models) or 15 to 20 seconds ('02 models) to check the MIL
bulb condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method
To prevent false indications, the "two driving cycle detection method" is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the ECM/PCM stores it in its memory. When the same abnormality recurs after the
ignition switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the ECM/PCM turns on the MIL.
11-10 BACK
ECM/PCM Data
You can retrieve data from the ECM/PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the data link
connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below conform to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester
also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE to help you find the causes of intermittent problems.
NOTE:
The "operating values" listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual
vehicle .
Unless noted otherwise, "at idle speed" means idling with the engine completely warmed up, AfT in park or neutral,
M IT I d h A/C d II . d ff in neutra position, an t e an a accessories turne o .
Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data
Diagnostic If the ECM/PCM detects a problem, it will store it as a code If no problem is YES
Trouble Code consisting of one letter and four numbers. Depending on detected, there is no
(DTC) the problem, as SAE-defined code (POxxx) or a Honda- output.
defined code (P1 xxx) will be output to the tester.
Engine Speed The ECM/PCM computes engine speed from the signals Nearly the same as YES
sent from the Crankshaft Position sensor. This data is tachometer indication
used for determining the time and amount of fuel At idle speed: 70050
injection. rpm
Vehicle Speed The ECM/PCM converts pulse signals from the Vehicle Nearly the same as YES
Speed Sensor (VSS) (MIT) or countershaft speed sensor speedometer
(AfT) into speed data. indication
Manifold The absolute pressure caused in the intake manifold by With engine stopped: YES
Absolute engine load and speed. Nearly the same as
Pressure atmospheric pressure.
(MAP) At idle speed: about 21
-41 kPa (160-310
mmHg, 6.3-12.2 inHg),
0.7-1.3V
Engine The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into voltage With cold engine: YES
Coolant and signals the ECM/PCM. The sensor is a thermistor Same as ambient
Temperature with internal resistance that changes with coolant temperature and IAT
(ECT) temperature. The ECM/PCM uses the voltage signals from With engine warmed
the ECT sensor to determine the amount of injected fuel. up: about 158-212F
(70-100C) 0.5to 0.7
Volts
Heated The Heated Oxygen Sensor detects the oxygen content in 0.0-1.25V YES
Oxygen the exhaust gas and sends voltage signals to the ECM/ At idle speed: (Primary,
Sensor (H02S) PCM. Based on these signals, the ECM/PCM controls the about 0.1-0.9 V Sensor 1
(Primary, air/fuel ratio. When the oxygen content is high (that is, only)
Sensor 1) when the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric ratio), the
(Secondary, voltage signal is lower. When the oxygen content is low
Sensor 2) (that is, when the ratio is richer than the stoichiometric
ratio), the voltage signal is higher.
Air Fuel Ratio The A/F sensor detects the oxygen content in the exhaust 0.0-1.25 V NO
(A/F) Sensor, gas and sends voltage signals to the ECM/PCM. Based on At idle speed:
(Sensor 1) these signals, the ECM/PCM controls the air/fuel ratio. about 0.1 - 0.9 V
(F23A4 When the oxygen content is high (that is, when the ratio is
engine) leaner than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is
lower. When the oxygen content is low (that is, when the
ratio is richer than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage
signal is higher. The A/F sensor Signals are electrical
current that are indicated as voltage on the scan tool.
(cont'd)
11-11
BACK
System Descriptions (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Data (cont'd)
Fuel System loop status is indicated as "open" or "closed". At idle speed: closed YES
Status Closed: Based on the H02S and/or A/F Sensor output, the
ECM/PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the
amount of injected fuel.
Open: ignoring H02S or A/F Sensor output, the ECM/PCM
refers to signals from the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature ((AT),
Barometric Pressure (BARO), and Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the amount of
injected fuel.
Short Term The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for correcting the 1.000.20 YES
Fuel Trim amount of injected fuel when the Fuel System Status is
"closed". When the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric
ratio, the ECM/PCM increases short term fuel trim
gradually, and the amount of injected fuel increases. The
air/fuel ratio gradually gets richer, causing a lower
oxygen content in the exhast gas. Consequently, the short
term fuel trim is lowered, and the ECM/PCM reduces the
This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio close to the
stoichiometric ratio when in closed loop status.
long Term long term fuel trim is computed from short term fuel trim 1.000.20 YES
Fuel Trim and indicates changes occuring in the fuel supply system
over a long period.
If long term fuel trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of
injected fuel must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the
amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
Intake Air The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into With cold engine: YES
Temperature voltage and signals the ECM/PCM. When intake air Same as ambient
(IAT) temperature is low, the internal resistance ofthe sensor temperature and ECT
increases, and the voltage signal is higher.
Throttle Based on the accelerator pedal position, the opening At idle speed: YES
Position angle of the throttle valve is indicated. approx.10%
Ignition Ignition timing is the ignition advance angle set by the At idle speed: 122 NO
Timing ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM matches ignition timing to the BTDC with the SCS
driving conditions. service signal line is
jumped with the Honda
PGMTester
Calculated ClV is the engine load calculated from the MAP data. At idle speed: YES
load Value 21-41%
(ClV) At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
13-26%
11-12
BACK
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections
'--
I
----- --- ---- -----
CYP
SENSOR
Ej
I
r==i. ._---
roc
b9 ___________
SENSOR
-----
CKP

SENSOR

PGM.fI MAIN RELAY
811GP1 PG182
891GP2 PG2810
A24STS IMOFLR A1S
821 V8U
820 LG1
822LG2
CZ9CVPP INJ1 811
C30CVPM 1NJ283
C20TDCP INJ384
CZ1 TDCM 1NJ48S
CSCKPP
CSCKPM
IACV823

>-t--
-=-
INJECTORS
No.1

lAC VALVE

ToELD r h
,", -"1 4-
*1 i _1....:. -,-__
To SPEEDOMETER
i. ..
DATA
UNK
CONNECTOR
C
A21 K-LINE ACCA17 r----- ToAIC CLUTCH RELAY
To RADIATOR FAN RELAY.
r---- RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
ACS A27 To AIC SWITCH
L-----l
__
ALT
FUSES:
(j) BACK UP, ACC (40A)*A
(2) STOP (20A)U
@ACGS (15A)*A
BATTERY (100A) *A
<5> IG MAIN (50A)*A
@No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A)*B
r:t> No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT UGHT (7.5A)*B
@ No.6 ECU (ECMlPCM)
CRUISE CONTROL (15A)*B
No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)* B
(10 No.13 CLOCK BACKUP (7.5A)*C
@POWERSEAT (40A)*A
@No.6 LAF HEATER (20A)*C
* A : in the under-hood fuse/relay box
* B : in the under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
*c: In the under-dash passenger's fuse/relay box
r
IMOLMPA12
IMM081l1ZER
INDICATOR
UGHT
*1 :M/T
*2:A/T
*3: F23A4 engine
*6: '0D--iI2 models
E
(cont'd)
11-13 BACK
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
TP
SE NSOR
EG
PO
SE
RVALVE
.--
smON
NSOR
R EG
VA LVE

FTP
SEN SOR
MA
SE
P
NSOR
CUMATE To
C ONTROL
UNIT

B
_J
I
...=-
E
PR
HO
IMARY
2S (SENSOR 1)5
II

CONDARY SE
HO 2S (SENSOR 2)
II ..

-_ ... -..
---
----._.- ... -
-
C28 VCC2
C27TPS
C18SG2
C&EGRL
87E-EGR
I
A29PTANK
C19VCC1
C17MAP
C7SGl

...
C26 ECT
IA!,SENSOR
.....
C25IAT
PSP;;;;'CH
--..:..7
A28PSPSW
BPPA'CH

A32BKSW
SWlTCH4
-S
C10VTM
04
'-7
1;1
C1 P02SHTC
5
------ ......... ----
C16PH02S .5

A8S02SHTC
__ 00-- ..
.. ---- ... -
A23SH02S
_/
ICMB13
I
NEPAl.
CRSAS
PCSA8
MCSA2
.2VBSOLDS
2WBSA3
VSVA4
.4VTSB12
04
KSC3
IMOCDA2S
IMOENA13
02ILUA28
OiiMTRTWC24
BARO
SENSOR
(Buih Into
lhe ECMlPCM)

11-14
1
-1
ICM
1 T

To GAUGE
r
ASSEMBLY
TEST
TACHOMETER
To CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT

EVAP PURGE VALVE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
'00
EVAP Bm,.SS SOLENOID VALVE
EVA;- VENT SHUT VALVE
VTEC VALVE
4
'00
1
j KNOCK SENSOR
4
.... m_ ---"{[]I
l
To IMMOBIUZER
RECEIVER
To IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER
To MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UN IT
(DRIVER'S)2
ToECTGAUGE
BACK
-

0
2ND Q'CH PRESSURE SWITCH '2
0
'20P2SWB14
1
'20P3SWB24
3RD Q'CH PRESSURE SWITCH'
2
r--
!
---<r;r
B16 P02SHTCli1
=
A/F'sENsoR
HEATED CONTROL
RELAY'3
C13 P02SHTC-j!
u,
B19 P02SHTC
03
'Ilf'A jr
C15 PH02S 03
IF/"
C14 PH02S+ 03
AlFSENSOR
(SENSOR 1)03
02 LC 01

VV
r
OZSHAD7
VALVE A oZ
'VV

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B'
2
02 SHB D2
'VV
A14D41ND
02
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C'
2
*zSHC D3
'uu
D13ATPNP02

v:
0
I
DiATPR
02
02LSA+B17
,........ I
lID
II
D9ATPD4'
2
02
LSA
B8
PRESSURE CONTROL
rI [ill
D8ATPD3*2
SOLENOID VALVE A 02
01Qil
IF
D14ATP2*Z 02 LSB+B25
I
IQiI
D15ATPl
02 *2 LSB BIB
AIT ;LUUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
rn SOLENOID VALVE B *2
[I]
AlTGEAR
C
POSITION
SWITCH *2 *2NM 011
ww e w ____ .. __ .. ______
------
'2NMSG 012
'
*2 NC OlD
.... -- -_ .. --- .. -- ---- ..
------
c 8J COUNTERSHAFT -=
'2NCSG D16
SPEED SENSOR
ECMlPCM A (32P) ECMlPCM B (25P)
ECMlPCM C (31 p) ECMlPCM D (16P)
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
(cont'd)
11-15
BACK
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)
V
2 3 4
MCS 2\NBS vsv
12 13 14 15
V
IMO lMO 05 IMO
LMP EN INO FLR
25
26 27
IMO
CD
PSPSN I>CS
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.
Terminal
number
2
3
4
5
6
8
9*'
10
12
13
14*'
15
17
18
19
20
*1: MIT
*2:A/T
Wire color
GRN/WHT
BLU
LTGRN/
WHT
BLU/GRN
RED/YEL
BLK/WHT
BLU/WHT
BRN
PNK
BLU
GRN/BLK
GRN/YEL
RED
GRN/ORN
BLU
GRN
*3: F23A4 engine
Terminal name
MCS (ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE)
2WBS (EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE)
VSV (EVAP CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE)
CRS (CRUISE CONTROL
SIGNAL)
PCS (CANISTER PURGE
VALVE)
S02SHTC (SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
HEATER CONTROL)
VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL)
SCS (SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL)
IMOLMP (IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR LIGHT)
IMOEN (IMMOBILIZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
D41ND (D4INDICATOR)
IMO FLR (IMMOBILIZER FUEL
PUMP RELAY)
ACC lAIC CLUTCH RELAY)
MIL (MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT)
NEP (ENGINE SPEED PULSE)
FANC (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
* 4: F23A 1, F23A4 engine
11-16
5 6
/
8 9
CRS PCS
S02S VSS
HTC OTU
17 18 19 20 21
/
I>CC MIL NEP FANC K-UNE
28 29 30
/
ILU PTANK EL
Description
Drives engine mount control
solenoid valve.
Drives EVAP bypass solenoid
valve.
Drives EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
Detects cruise control signal.
Drives EVAP canister purge
valve.
Drives secondary heated
oxygen sensor heater.
Sends vehicle speed sensor
signal.
Detects service check
connector signal (the signal
causing a DTC indication).
Drives immobilizer indicator
light.
Sends immobilizer enable
sianal.
Drives D4 indicator light.
Drives fuel pump relay.
Drives AlC clutch relay.
Drives MIL.
OutDuts engine e d ~ u l s e
Drives radiator fan relay.
10
/
scs
23 24
SH02S STS
32
8KSW
Signal
Atidle:OV
Above idle: batterv voltaae
With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
With engine running, engine coolant, below 167F
(75C): battery voltage
With engine running. engine coolant, above 167F
(75C): dutv controlled
With fully warmed up engine running: duty
controlled
Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
With the service check signal shorted with the
PGM Tester: 0 V
With the service check signal opened: about 5 V
or batterv voltaae
With immobilizer indicator light turned ON: 0 V
With immobilizer indicator lightturned OFF:
battery voltage
With D4 indicator light turned ON: 0 V
With D4 indicator light turned OFF: battery
voltaae
o V for two seconds after turning ignition switch
ON (II) then battery voltage
With compressor ON: 0 V
With compressor OFF: batterv voltaae
With MIL turned ON: 0 V
With MIL turned OFF: batterv voltaae
With enaine runnina: Dulses
With radiator fan running: 0 V
With radiator fan stopped: batterv voltaQe
BACK
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)
/
2 3 4
MCS 2W8S vsv
12 13 14 15
/
IMO IMO 05 IMO
LMP EN INO FLR
25
26 27
IMO
CD
PSPSW />CS
Terminal
number
21
23
24
25
26
27
28*'
29
30
32
*1: MIT
*2:A/T
Wire color
GRY
WHT/RED
BLU/ORN
RED
GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/RED
LTGRN
GRN/RED
WHT/BLK
*3: F23A4 engine
Terminal name
K-LiNE
SH02S (SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR,
SENSOR 2)
STS (STARTER SWITCH
SIGNAL)
IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER CODE)
PSPSW (P/S PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
ACS (AlC SWITCH SIGNAL)
ILU (INTERLOCK CONTROL
UNIT)
PTANK (FUEL TANK
PRESSURE (HP) SENSOR)
EL(ELD)
BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH)
5 6
V
6 9
S02S vss
CRS PCS
HTC OTU
17 16 19 20 21
/
ACC MIL NEP FANC K-UNE
2B 29 30
V
ILU PTANK EL
Description
Sends and receives scan tool
sional.
Detects secondary heated
oxygen sensor (sensor 2)

Detects starter switch signal.
Detects immobilizer signal.
Detects PSP switch signal.
Detects AlC switch signal.
Drives interlock control unit.
Detects FTP sensor signal.
Detects ELD signal.
Detects brake pedal position
switch sional.
10
/
SCS
23 24
SH02S STS
32
BKSW
Signal
With throttle fully opened from idle and fully
warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
With throttle ouickly closed: below 0.4 V
With starter switch ON (III): battery voltage
With starter switch OFF: 0 V
At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead
position: 0 V
At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery
voltaQe
With AlC switch ON: 0 V
With AlC switch OFF: about 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: batteryvolt<m.e
With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap:
opened: about 2.5 V
With parking lights turned on at idle: about 2.5-
3.5V
With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about
1.5-2.5 V
With brake pedal released: 0 V
With brake pedal pressed: battery voltaoe
(cont'd)
11-17
BACK
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P)
1 2
IGPI PGl
9 10
IGP2 PG2
19
20
PQ2S
LGI
HTC
Terminal
number
1
2
3
4
5
7
8*'
9
10
11
12*'
13
14*'
16*'
17*'
18*'
19*'
20
21
22
23
24*'
25*'
*1: MIT
*2: NT
Wire color
VEL/BlK
BlK
RED
BLU
VEL
PNK
WHT
VEL/BlK
BlK
BRN
GRN/VEl
VEL/GRN
BLU/BlK
GRN/RED
RED
GRN
BlK/WHT
BRN/BlK
WHT/VEl
BRN/BlK
BlK/BlU
BLU/WHT
ORN
*3: F23A4 engine
Terminal name
IGP1 (POWER SOURCE)
PG1 (POWER GROUND)
INJ2(No.2INJECTOR)
INJ3 (No.3 INJECTOR)
E-EGR
lSA-(NT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A-SIDE)
IGP2 (POWER SOURCE)
PG2 (POWER GROUND)
VTS (VTEC SOLENOID
VALVE)
ICM (IGNITION CONTROL
MODULE)
OP2SW (2ND Oil PRESSURE
SWITCH)
P02SHTCR (AIR FUEL RATIO
SENSOR HEATER CONTROL
RELAV)
lSA + (NT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A + SIDE)
lSB - (NT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B-SIDE)
P02SHTC (AIR FUEL RATIO
SENSOR HEATER CONTROL)
lG1 (lOGIC GROUND)
VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP)
lG2 (lOGIC GROUND)
IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL
VALVE)
OP3SW (3RD Oil PRESSURE
SWITCH)
lSB + (NT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B + SIDE)
*4: F23A1. F23A4 engine
11-18
3 4 5
INJ2 INJ3 INJ4
11 12 13
14
/
INJI VTS ICM
OP
2SW
21 22 23
VBU LG2 IACV
Description
Power source for the PCM
control ci rcu it.
Ground for the ECM/PCM
control circuit.
Drives No.2 iniector.
Drives No.4 injector.
Drives EGR valve.
NT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A power
suoolv neaative electrode
Power source for the PCM
control circuit.
control circuit.
Drives VTEC solenoid valve.
Sends ignition pulse.
Detects 2nd oil pressure
switch.
Drives air fuel ratio sensor
heater relay.
supply positive electrode
solenoid valve B power
suoolv neaative electrode
Drives air fuel ratio sensor
heater.
control circuit.
Power source for the ECM/
PCM control circuit.
Power source for the DTC
memory.
control circuit.
Drives lAC valve.
Detects 3rd oil pressure
switch.
suppl'Lru)sitive electrode
/
7 6
EEGR LSA-
16
17 16
PQ2S
LSA+ LSB-
HTCR
24
25
OP
LSB+
3SW
Signal
With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
less than 1.0 V at all times
With engine running: duty controlled
With EGR operation during driving with fully
warmed up engine: duty controlled
With EGR not ooeratina: 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
With enaine run nina: duty controlled
With engine at low rpm: 0 V
With enaine at hiah rom: battery voltaae
With el1Qjne running:_pulses
With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
With fully warmed uo enaine run nina: 0 V
Battery voltage at all times
With engine running: duty controlled
With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
BACK
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C (31P)
1
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
P02S
AlTC KS AlTF EGAL SGI CKPP CKPM VTM
HTC
1/ 1/
13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21
V
P02S PH02 PH02
PH02S MAP SG2 veCI TDCP TDCM
HTC+ 5+ 5-
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
lL:
vss MTRTW lAT ECT TPS veC2 CYPP CYPM
Wife side of 'emilie tormln.'s
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal
number
1*' BLK/WHT P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated oxygen With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
2
3*'
5
6
7
8
9
10*'
13*'
14*'
15*'
16*'
17
18
19
20
21
23*'
24*"
25
26
27
28
29
30
*1. MIT
*2:A/T
WHT/GRN
RED/BLU
WHT/RED
WHT/BLK
GRN/WHT
BLU
WHT
BLU/BLK
WHT
RED
BLU
WHT
RED/GRN
GRN/BLK
YEL/RED
GRN
RED
BLU/WHT
YEL/GRN
RED/YEL
RED/WHT
RED/BLK
YEL/BLU
YEL
BLK
*3: F23A4 engine
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER
CONTROL)
ALTC (ALTERNATOR
CONTROL)
KS (KNOCK SENSOR)
ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR
SIGNAL)
EGRL (EXHAUST GAS
RECIRCULATION (EGR)
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
SG1 (SENSOR GROUND)
CKPP (CKP SENSOR P SIDE)
CKPM (CKP SENSOR M SIDE)
VTM (VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
P02SHTC+ (AIR FUEL RATIO
(A/F) SENSOR HEATER
CONTROL + SIDE)
PH02S+ (AIR FUEL RATIO
(NF) SENSOR. SENSOR 1 +
SIDE)
PH02S (AIR FUEL RATIO
(A/F) SENSOR. SENSOR 1-
SIDE)
PH02S (PRIMARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR. SENSOR
1)
MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE SENSOR)
SG2 (SENSOR GROUND)
VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE)
TDCP (TDC SENSOR P SIDE)
TDCM (TDC SENSOR M SIDE)
VSS (VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR)
MTRTW
IAT(lNTAKEAIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
ECT (ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
TPS (THROTILE POSITION
SENSOR)
VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE)
CYPP (CYP SENSOR P SIDE)
CTPM (CYP SENSOR M SIDE)
* 4: F23A 1. F23A4 engine
*5: F23A 1. F23A5 engine
*6: '00-02 models
sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty
controlled
Sends alternator control With fully warmed up engine running: battery
signal. voltage
Duril'lg driving with small electrical load: 0 V
Detects KS sianal. With engine knocking: pulses
Detects alternator FR signal. With fully warmed up engine running: 0 V-battery
voltaae (deoending on electrical load)
Detects EGR valve position At idle: about 1.2 V
sensor signal.
Ground for MAP sensor. Less than 1.0 V at all times
Detects CKP sensor. With engine running: oulses
Ground for CKP sensor.
Detects VTEC pressure switch With engine at low engine speed: 0 V
signal. With engine at high engine speed (vehicle
runnina): battery volt!rn.e
Detects A/F sensor heater With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
voltage.
Detects A/F sensor (sensor 1)
signal.
Detects A/F sensor (sensor 1)
signal.
Detects primary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully.
oxygen sensor (sensor 1) warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
signal. With throttle Quickly closed: below 0.4 V
Detects MAP sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
At idle: about 1.0 V engine soeed)
Sensor ground. Less than 1.0 V at all times.
Power source to MAP sensor. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With ianition switch OFF: 0 V
Detects TDC sensor. With engine running: oulses
Ground for TDC sensor.
Detects VSS signal. With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheel
rotating: cycles 0 V-5 V
Sends engine coolant With ignition switch ON (II): pules
temoerature signal.
Detects IAT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.8 V
intake airtemoerature)
Detects ECT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8V
(de.Rending on engine coolant temoerature)
Detects TP sensor signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
With throttle fully closed: about 0.5 V
Provides sensor voltage. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
Detects CYP sensor. With engine runninQ: oulses
Ground for CYP sensor.
(cont'd)
11-19
BACK
ECM/PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P)
1 2 3
V
LC SHB SHC
6 7 8 9 10 11
ATPR SHA ATPD3 ATPD4 NC NM
13 14 15 16
ATPNP ATP2 ATP1 NCSG
Terminal
number
1*'
2*'
3*'
5*'
6*'
7*'
8*'
9*'
10*'
11*'
12*'
13*'
14*'
15*'
16*'
*1: MIT
*2: AfT
Wire color
VEL
GRN/WHT
GRN
BLK/YEL
WHT
BLU/YEL
PNK
VEL
BLU
RED
WHT
BLU/WHT
BLU
BRN
GRN
*3: F23A4 engine
Terminal name
LC (TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH (TCC) PRESSURE
SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE (3)
SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C)
VBSOL (BA TTERV VOLTAGE
FOR SOLENOID VALVE)
ATPR (AT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH)
SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A)
ATPD3 (AT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH)
ATPD4 (AT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH)
NC (COUNTERS HAFT SPEED
SENSOR)
NM (MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR)
NMSG (MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR GROUND)
ATPNP (AT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH)
ATP2 (AT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH)
ATP1 (AT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH)
NCSG(COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR GROUNDI
11-20
Description
Drives TCC pressure control
solenoid valve.
Drives shift solenoid valve B.
Drives shift solenoid valve C.
Power source of solenoid
valve.
Detects AfT gear position
switch sianal.
Drives shift solenoid valve A.
switch sianal.
switch sianal.
Detects countershaft speed
sensor signals.
Detects mainshaft speed
sensor signals.
Ground for mainshaft speed
sensor.
switch sianal.
switch signal.
switch sional.
Ground for countershaft
soeed sensor.
5
VBSOL
12
NMSG
Signal
With lock-up ON: battery voltage
With lock-up OFF: 0 V
With engine running in 1st, 2nd gears: battery
voltage
With engine runnimtin 3rd 4th aears: abaut 0 V
With engine running in 1st and 3rd gears: battery
voltage
With engine running in 2nd and 4th gears: about
OV
In R position: 0 v
In any other position: battery voltaoe
With engine running in 2nd, 3rd gears: battery
voltage
With enaine runnina in 1st 4th Clears: about 0 V
In D3 position: 0 V
In any other position: battery voltaae
In 04 position: 0 V
In any_ othel"Qosition: about 5V or battery voltaae
With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheels
rotatina: oulses
With engine running: pulses
In Park or Neutral: 0 V
In any other position: t t ~ voltaae
In 2nd position: 0 V
In any other oosition: battery voltaae
In 1st position: 0 V
In any other oosition: battery voltaae
BACK
Vacuum Hose Routing: '98-00 models
VACUUM i
T ~
To CRUISE
CONTROL
DIAPHRAGM
(with cruise control)
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
To ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (MAP)
SENSOR
/
IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC)
VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAPI PURGE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
.-..-- PURGE JOINT
To EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) PURGE CONTROL
CANISTER
FUEL PRESSURE
REGULATOR
(cant'd)
11-21
BACK
Vacuum Hose Routing: '01-02 models
AfT
r-------------
: -,
CHECK VALVE I .,
--+- '--,
: -,
I ,
: ,
I -,
: -,
VACUUM TANK ! -->--
-----.t.. -_./
i / - / _ - ~
: ./
I -_/-
: ./
L _______ _
To CRUISE
CONTROL
DIAPHRAGM
(with cruise control)
--------'-
\.
To ENGINE MOUNT \
CONTROL SOLENOID --\
VALVE --
\.
\
".".0'
1 - . . . . . - - - - - - ~
FRONT OF VEHICLE
11-22
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
/
IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC)
VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) PURGE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
To EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) PURGE CONTROL
CANISTER
FUEL PRESSURE
REGULATOR
BACK
Vacuum Distribution
r-1 (AfT)
. l.._ .. _ .. _ ..
I TOENGINE :
MOUNT
L,
I
.. _ .. _.j
"3
=___1
(j) AIR FUEL (A/F) SENSOR OR PRIMARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY H02S) (SENSOR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (SECONDARY
H02S) (SENSOR 2)
@ MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
@ INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE UAT) SENSOR
@ CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
(j) TOP DEAD CENTER (TOC) SENSOR
@ KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
IDLE AIR CONTROL UAC) VALVE
@ THROTTLE BODY
@INJECTOR
@ FUEL PULSATION DAMPER
I
FUEL FILTER
I FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

\!.!V FUEL TANK
AIR CLEANER
@RESONATOR
@ EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION IEGR) VALVE and
POSITION SENSOR
I
I
I !
: I
l._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ...;
*1: '98-99 model of F23A5 engine for 49ST and
Canada models
*2: F23A4, F23A 1 engine
*3: '98-01 models
*4: '02 model
> POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION IPCV) VALVE
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION IEVAP) CANISTER
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION IEVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION IEVAP) BYPASS SOLENOID
VALVE
@ FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
@ FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
@ FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
@ PURGE JOINT
(cant'd)
11-23 BACK
PGM-FI System
The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a
sequential multi port fuel injection system.
Air conditioning (A/C) Switch
The AlC (air conditioning) switch signals the ECM/PCM
whenever there is a demand for cooling.
AIC Compressor Clutch Relay
When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling
from the AlC system, it delays the compressor from
being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure
smooth transition to the AlC mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (AI F) Sensor (F23A4 engine)
The AlF Sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
AlF Sensor is installed in the exhaust manifold.
HEATER
Alternator Control
SENSOR
TERMINALS
~ -
HEATER
TERMINALS
The alternator signals the ECM/PCM during charging.
The ECM/PCM then controls the voltage generated at
the alternator according to the electrical load
determined by the ELD (Electrical Load Detector) and
driving mode. This reduces engine load to improve fuel
economy.
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The barometric pressure sensor is inside the ECM/PCM.
It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal
that modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
11-24
Crankshaft Position (CKP) and Top Dead Center (TOC)
Sensors
The CKP sensor determines fuel injection timing and
ignition timing for each cylinder, and also detects
engine speed. The TDC sensor determines ignition
timing at start-up and when crankshaft position signal
is abnormal.
~ , , ~ : : ~
~ ~
TDCSENSOR
Cylinder Position (CYP) Sensor
The CYP sensor inside the distributor detects the
position ofthe No.1 cylinder as a reference for
sequential fuel injection to each cylinder.
F23A 1, F23A4 engine:
F23A5 engine:
PICKUP
ASSEMBLY
ROTOR
BACK
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
as the Engine Coolant temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
as the intake air temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
Ignition Timing Control
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic ignition
timing at various engine speeds and manifold air flow
rates. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
coolant temperature. The ECM/PCM detects misfiring
by using the CKP sensor to monitor fluctuations in
crankshaft speed. It will then set DTCs depending on
how much misfiring occurs.
Injector Timing and Duration
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring Long Term Fuel Trim, the ECM/PCM
detect long term malfunctions in the fuel system and
set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) if the malfunction
occurs during two consecutive trips.
Knock Sensor (F23A1, F23A4 engine)
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing for
the octane rating of the gasoline used.
PIEZO CERAMIC
DIAPHRAGM
TERMINAL
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
to Readiness Codes)-F23A4 engine
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, ifthe DTCs have been cleared, or ifthe ECM/PCM
has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states,
part of the emissions testing is to make sure these
codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to
complete, the vehicle may fail the test.
To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition
switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will
come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, one or
more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set
each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as
described in the procedures to set them in this section
(see page 11-42).
(cont'd)
11-25
BACK
Primary Heated Oxygen sensor (Primary H02S)
The primary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which
varies the duration offuel injection accordingly. To
stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The primary H02S is installed in the exhaust manifold.
By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary H02S and
secondary H02S, the deterioration of the primary H02S
can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the
feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable
driving conditions, the sensor is considered
deteriorated and the ECM/PCM sets a DTC.
HEATER
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
TERMINALS
Secondary Heated Oxygen sensor (Secondary H02S)
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic
Converter (TWC) and sends signals to the ECM/PCM
which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly.
To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The secondary H02S is installed in the TWC.
HEATER
11-26
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
TERMINALS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the
throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the
sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The
TP sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle
body.
INNER
BUSHING
BRUSH HOLDER
BRUSH

TERMINAL
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (MIT)
The speed sensor is driven by the differential. It
generates a pulsed signal from an input of 5 volts. The
number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with
the speed of the vehicle.
BACK
Intake Air System
Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
layout of the system.
Throttle Body
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting
screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, is located
on the top of the throttle body.
IDLE ADJUSTING
SCREW
Idle Control System
When the engine is cold, the AlC compressor is on, the
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed,
the PIS load is high, or the alternator is charging, the
ECM/PCM controls current to the lAC valve to maintain
the correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to
see the functional layout of the system.
Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve
To maintain the proper idle speed, the lAC valve
changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body
in response to an electrical signal from the ECM/PCM.
To INTAKE
MANIFOLD
From AIR
CLEANER
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power
steering load is high.
Starter (Ignition) Switch
The starter switch signals the ECM/PCM when the
engine is cranking.
The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM
when the brake pedal is pressed.
(cont'd)
11-27 BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Control
When the ignition is turned on, the ECM/PCM grounds
the PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to the fuel
pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With
the engine running, the ECM/PCM grounds the PGM-FI
main relay and feeds current to the fuel pump. When
the engine is not running and the ignition is on, the
ECM/PCM cuts ground to the PGM-FI main relay which
cuts current to the fuel pump.
Fuel Cut-off Control
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
current to the fuel injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at speeds over 1,100 rpm.
Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed
exceeds 6,500 rpm, regardless of the position of the
throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving.
On AfT models, when the vehicle is stopped, the PCM
cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm.
PGM-FI Main Relay
The PGM-FI relay contains two separate relays. One is
energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies
battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel
injectors, and power for the second relay. The second
relay is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for
two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and
when the engine is running.
No.2
No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7
11-28
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
EGRValve
The EGR valve is designed to lower peak combustion
temperatures and reduce oxides of nitrogen emissions
(NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake
manifold and into the combustion chambers.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
r n r
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ w /BREATHER , HOSE
,,-pcv
I HOSE
.. : BLOW-BY VAPOR
~ : FRESH AIR
BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned.
EVAP Canister Parge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 167F
(75C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge
valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM.
SENSOR CHIP
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), dinitrogen (N2),
and water vapor.
THREE WAY
CATALYSTS
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
(cont'd)
11-29
BACK
Intake Air System Diagram
This system supplies air for engine needs. A resonator in the air intake duct provides additional silencing as air is
drawn into the system.
/
ENGINE 0
COOLANT
INTAKE
'--__ J MANIFOLD
Idle Control System Diagram
YELl
BLK
BLKI
BLU
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
_RESONATOR
From
PGMFI
MAIN
RELAY
/L_
,/ --1 VARIOUS
---- ECM/PCM SENSORS
I
BLK

The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the Idle Air Control (lAC) valve:
After the engine starts, the lAC valve opens for a certain time. The amount of air is increased to raise the idle speed
by about 150-300 rpm .
When the engine coolant temperature is low, the lAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The
amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.
11-30
ENGINE
COOLANT
BLK

From

BLKI ------ ECM/PCM
BLU
BLK

RELAY
. ' VARIOUS

BACK
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The ECM/PCM memory includes the ideal EGR valve lift for
varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM then
compares it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference
between the two, the ECM/PCM controls current to the EGR valve.
EGRVAlVE
POSITION SENSOR
-- -------1

EGR
VALVE
L-__ GRNI
BlK

----,
ECM/PCM
BlK

VARIOUS
SENSORS
(cont'd)
11-31
BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is
above 16JOF (75C).
When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP two way valve, the valve opens and
regulates the flow of fuel vapor to the EVAP control canister.
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
'-;===-.--I-___ __
VEL
From No. 6
ECU(ECM/PCM'
_ .......... CRUISE CONTROL
------.... (1SA'
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
FUEL TANK II
Btilt __ \-=-] FILTER
"'" EVAP BVPASS \
_ SOLENOID VALVE EVAPCANISTER
/
FUEL AU CAP FUEL TANK VAPOR
11-32
RECIRCULAT10N VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR
RECIRCULAT10N TUBE
BLU
----_.
VELI
l
BLU
LTGRN I
GRNI I
BLK
'--
LT GRNI _ ECM/PCM
WHT
REDI
VEL
BLK
-.L
(in the driver's
under-dash
fuse/relay box'
VARIOUS
Y-' SENSORS
BACK
Circuit Diagram
ECM/PCM Circuit D." agram
A
GRNIBLK'
....
To CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
MAP SENSOR
GRNlBLK'---- ,
ECTSENSOR
GRN/BLK'----.l
IATSENSOR
TPSENSOR
EGRVALVE
PosmON SENSOR
EGRVALVE
(cant'd)
11-33 BACK
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
11-34
( From page 11-33 )
*5
___ . ----------------------------
GRN/BLK
2
-1
C
BLKlYEL
dJ

GANIYEL'

BW/BLK
2
BAN/But'
B
BLK/YEL -1
-
PRIMARY *5
H02S (SENSOR 1)

SOLENOID -
VALVE" -
>--BRN/BLK' II -----. II
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH"
. BRN/BLK'

BLKI
____ I CONNECTOR
'--
But'
0
"'"
.........
G101
KS"
1-........ ---(C3 ---------- RED/BLU .---------------------------------- --

C21 TDCM RED"---------------------+-----------t
1---t-----{C8 ______ . BwI. ___________________________________ _

...... :.:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------;. f" I
*4: FHA1, FHA4 engine
*5: FHA1, F23A5 engine
DISTRIBUTOR
BACK
__ WHTiGRN _________________________ _I
ALTC
WHTlREo' -
All
J-'-'''''----BLU/WHT'----------------.----+--:S::g
VSS 01

r"''"'--- BLU/VEL --------------------------------11-------1
SHS
2
r"'-'----GRN/Wiff-'---------------t----i

011 ______ RE07 _. _________________ ._ __________ ._.

VALVEC2
012 NMSG
2

MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR 02

RED.------------------------1[r===:n

AfT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE A 02

AfT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE B 02
(cont'd)
11-35
BACK
11-36
YELlBLK'
BR
No. 1 INJECTOR
YELlBLK'
RED'
No.2 INJECTOR
YELlBLK'
BLU'
No. 3 INJECTOR
YELlBLK'
YEL'
No.4 INJECTOR
H
YELlBLK'
BLKlBLU
-= BLK'
lAC VALVE
C103
IGP1
YELlBLK'
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
IGP2
YELlBLK'
0P2Sw
2

I
2ND 1
-=
I
3RD 1
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWlTCH2
To
IMMOBIUZER
}
UNIT
BACK
*2:AIT
*3: F23M engl ..
*6: 'OCI-Q2 m_l.

AIR FUEL RAllO
SENSOR
(SENSOR 1)3
C1D2
t------GRN/R

AIR FUEL RAllO
C203 SENSOR RELAy3
o
T
REDI
IW

...---YEL-L
C101 C204 0

C1D2 C204
LKlIW ILKlIW
NT' wHf
RED/ILK RED/ILK
NK' PNK'
u' ILu'
ti BRti

L....f------------- RED/ILK
MIL
ECT
GAUGE

f------HR
1----4-IN
D.
f------Io,
1-------l2
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
AIT GEAR POSmDN
(cant'd)
11-37
BACK
11-38
C204
---1-; f5B I
L N
SECONDARY
H02S (SENSOR 2)
l=::::....-GRNlWHT'------I I------------I---=:::J I =1 I

ENGINE MOUNT
-o
:C101 0
REDIYEL' !t=:::'JI =1 I
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE

,

-
C204
Bw'
o
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
""'"
I

INDICATOR UGItT
To
1+ TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TEST
[ TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
ILU .2
r-....... __ WHT/REoZ II
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
FANe From
RADIATOR FAN RELAY.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
BACK
-
LTGRN/WHT
f-..... -(j\29).:.:.::=-- LTGRN ---
aw'-----
-
YELl
aw
1

GRNI
BLK'

r--

EVAP
CANISlER VENT
BHUTYALVE

FTPSENSOR
:VEL=-=rrn
EVAPBVPA&S
SOLENOID YALVE
CON
DRIVER'S UNDEA-DASH
HECTOR B FllSfJRELAY BOX
'--8 l-
-- GRN/8 f--
r
:?{

f-
f-
A ....
8
R
CONNEClOAK
- BWiOAN---------I
f--Nf---{U!}-====- WKl'/BLK'------------------i
IGNITION
SWITCH
FUSES
A: No. BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT !7.sA)
8: No. ECUIECIIIPCIIl
CRUISE CONTROL (1SA)
C: No. 13 STAInER SIGNAL
!7,SA)
D: No. 1 FUEL PUMP (1SA)
-
-
-
\
C
CUT :

.....
RELAY ;
D
I
I
IIII
.', I
I
Y
I
cr ...... 11040)
(cont'd)
11-39 BACK
ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (co nt' d)
C102
11-40
NE GRY
( From page 11-39 )
__
CONNECTOR I
.------ BRN'- !---'
BLU/ORN _. 1-

REDIWHT-
BLKIYEL - I--
,---WHT/BLK'- I--
0202 CONNECTOR N
I L!I----I-I-- WHT--{
WHT CONNECTOR E

.- BLKlYEL _
DRIVER'S UNDERDASH
Q FUSEIRELA Y BOX
C401
I
N
DATAUNK
rl--+-- - WHT/GRN CONNECTOR
r
BLK
=
G401
L..4----...
WHT/BLK'--fF-=ll

BRAKE PEDAL
POsmON SWITCH
,r-":" --=tQ
1
G5S2
L.....--r--r- YEL/BLK' YEL/BLK'-
'------+-+--+-_+_ BLK' BLK'-
9
C1m
,
-,_.L
L-__
REDIWHT- ..
C401 _ I ..
GRN/YEL -lD--I-------l----+---GRNlYEL -
L-__ -/-__ BLKlYEL - ,---..
T
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
BACK
1
0 D CONNECTORC
BLKlYEL
)..:..::::.. __ WHTIYEL 1-C1_01 __ +-_____ ::::.
BRN/BLK' YEL -----/
L--{] BRN/BLK'
C1112 To A/C .--BLU/RED
PRESSURE SWITCH
CONNECTORH
BLU/IiED -------+--1----1---1-- BW/RED =t
BRN/BLK'
WHTIYEL
E
E!J CONNECTOIII
L.-BLKlYEL ---[ I--+----...J
CONNECTOIIJ
BRN/BLK'---f
I---+-+-----IIED/BLU ---L f-__ ............
F
..... _---,
Q T
CONNECTORD
YELlGRN ---[ 1----------'
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
L
L--++-+-----11-- WHTCONNECTOII C[ f-_ ....
CONNECTOR A H
1-__ 1-WHT/GRN ---[ 1----0----1
C202 CONNECTOR B I
WHT/YEL J
1-+...-..:=----1-- VEL I--......
K
---..
YELlGRN 1---__ 0-_--+
BLK 1===:::::;--1
GRN/:JED' __________ [
CONNECTORD
- RED' I---------t-RED'--[
G2II2
FUSES
E : No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP t7.5Al
F : No.6 LAF HEATER C20A>
G: IG MAIN <liOAl
H:ACGSC15Al
I : STOP C20Al
J : BACK UP ACC !4oA)
K : POWER SEAT (4OA)
L : BATTERY (100Al
UNDER-HOOD
FUSEIRELAY BOX
BATTERY
G1
L
11-41 BACK
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) indication
(In relation to Readiness Codes)-F23A4
engine
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the ECM/PCM
has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states,
part of the emissions testing is to make sure these
codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to
complete, the vehicle may fail the test.
To check if the read i ness codes a re set, tu rn the
ignititon switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The
MIL will come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off,
the readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times,
one or more readiness codes are not set to complete.
To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as
described in the following procedures.
11-42
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor Code
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch OFF.
When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all
readiness codes are cleared.
Required condition:
Ambient temperature between 20 - 95F (-7 - 35C).
1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
(DLC).
2. Start the engine. Hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load
(in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
3. Let the engine idle for 5 seconds.
4. Drive at a steady speed between 50-62 mph (80-
100 km/h) with the transmission in 04 position for
about 2 minutes.
5. With the A/T in 04 position or MIT in 5th gear,
decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) by completely
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. Ifthe
engine is stopped during this procedure, repeat steps
4 and 5.
6. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
BACK
Catalytic Converter Monitor Code
NOTE:
When the ECM/PCM is cleared with the OBD II scan
tool or Honda PGM Tester, all readiness codes are
cleared.
Required condition:
Ambient temperture between 20 - 95F (-7 - 35C).
1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector.
2. Start the engine. Hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load
(in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
3. Drive for about 10 minutes, without stopping, on a
highway. Your speed can vary.
4. With the AfT in D4 position or MIT in 5th gear, drive
at a steady speed between 50 -60 mph (80 -1 00
km/h) for 30 seconds.
5. Repeat step 4 three times. Between each repetition,
close the throttle completely for 1-2 seconds. If
the engine is stopped during this part of the
procedure, repeat steps 3, 4, and 5.
EGR Monitor Code
NOTE:
2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no
load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on.
3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmission in D4
position between 50-62 mph (80-100 km/h) for
4. With the AfT in D4 position or MIT in 5th gear,
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
engine is stopped during this procedure, repeat steps
3 and 4.
(cont'd)
11-43 BACK
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
EVAP Leak Monitor Code
NOTE:
When the ECM/PCM is cleared with the aBO II scan
tool or Honda PGM Tester, all readiness codes are
cleared.
If the engine is stopped between step 6 and 16, do the
entire procedure again.
1. Make sure the gasoline level is 60-90 percent of
fuel tank capacity (not full).
3. Let the vehicle sit more than 8 hours.
4. Make sure the outside temperature is 20-95F (-7
-35C).
6. Start the engine, and drive for about 15 minutes.
7. Keep the vehicle at a steady speed between 50-70
mph (80-114 km/h), without moving the
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute.
8. Stop the vehicle (do not stop engine).
9. Repeat step 7 and 8 two more times.
10. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool. If
the readiness code does not set, go to step 11.
11. When ambient temperature is less than 32F (OC),
hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
12. Remove the fuel fill cap, then reinstall it.
13. Drive for about 20 minutes on a highway.
14. Keep the vehicle at a steady speed between 50-70
mph (80-114 km/h) without moving the
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute.
15. Stop the vehicle (do not stop the engine).
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 two more times.
"-44
H02S Monitor Code
NOTE:
Required condition:
Ambienttemperature between 20-95F (-7-35C).
2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no
load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on.
3. Letthe engine idle for 5 seconds.
4. Drive at a steady speed between 50 - 62 mph (80-
100 km/h) for about 2 minutes.
5. With the AfT in 04 position or MIT in 5th gear,
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
engine is stopped during this procedure, repeat
steps 4 and 5.
H02S Heater Monitor Code
NOTE: When the battery negative cable is disconnected,
all readiness codes are cleared.
2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
BACK
PGM-FI System
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
CYLINDER POSITION (CYP)
SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) (M/Tl
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(lAT) SENSOR
THROTTLE POSITION (TP)
SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
page 11-54
CRANKSHAFT POSITION/TOP
DEAD CENTER (CKP/TDC) SENSOR
KNOCK SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
page 11-72
PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (PRIMARY H02S)
OR AIR FUEL RATIO SENSOR
(SENSOR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S)
(SENSOR 2)
-'-- '::}/
__ :--c..:: : ....... "........... / /'
\ \
---, .'. - CO ,---{ /
: 'r ""'11 111 : .' -----.;:::- <0
__ E' L .. _i -_ ....)
---It:} F23A5 ENGINE: Except ... I ,
: f.. 49ST, CANADA F23A5, ENGINE: 'f!-L--0:.
('98-99 ,"-odels) !l 49ST, CANADA .o') "'\
('9 .... .. ,b)

(cont'd)
11-45 BACK
PGM-FI System
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3
11-46
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECMII
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
OTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
2. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
Is approx. 101 kPa (760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or 2.9 V
indicated?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM .
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector.
6. Measure voltage between MAP sensor connector
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG1 (GRN/WHTI
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector
terminals C19 and C7.
SG1 (GRN/WHTI
YES- Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C19) and the MAP sensor .
recheck (see page 11-3). If normal MAP readings are
indicated, replace the original ECM/PCM .
Is approx. 2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg) or less, or
o V indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Replace the MAP sensor..
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (31 Pl.
11. Check for continuity between MAP sensor
connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
recheck (see page 11-5). If normal MAP readings are
11-47
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
no load (in park or neutral) until the radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle.
Is approx. 101 kPa (780 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or higher
or approx. 2.9 V indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM .
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector.
s. Install a jumper wire between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No.2 and No.3.
SG1 (GRN/WHT) MAP (RED/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
Is approx. 159 kPa (1,190 mmHg, 47in.Hg) or
higher or 4.49 V or higher indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Replace the MAP sensor .
8. Remove the jumper wire.
11-48
9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ECMI
11. Install a jumper wire on ECM/PCM connector
terminals between C7 and C17.
11
L/
SG1(GRN/WHTI
I
2 3
V
5 6
It
8
L
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
9
21
23 24 25 26
2/7
28 29 30
MAP (RED/GRN)
l
JUMPER WIRE
10
lL
lL
Is approx. 159 kPa (1, 190 mmHg, 47 in.Hg) or
higher or 4.49 V or higher indicated?
recheck (see page 11-S). If normal MAP readings are
BACK
DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than
Expected
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (1/).
Is 54.1 kPa (406 mmHg, 16.0 in.Hg) or higher
indicated?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time .
NO - Replace the MAP sensor..
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
Is 43.3 kPa (325 mmHg, 12.8 in.Hg) or less
indicated?
time .
NO - Replace the MAP sensor .
11-49
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
2. Check the IAT with the scan tool.
Is 302F (150C) or higher (or H-Limit in Honda
mode of PGM Tester), or 0 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Goto step 8.
3. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector.
Is 302F(150C) or higher (or H-Limit in Honda
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Replace the IAT sensor .
7. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2P
IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C25) and the IAT sensor .
recheck (see page 11-5). If normallAT readings are
indicated. replace the original ECM/PCM .
11-50
8. Check the temperature reading on the scan tool. Be
aware that if the engine is warm, the reading will
be higher than ambient temperature. If the engine
is cold, the IAT and ECT will have the same value.
Is the correct ambient temperature indicated?
YES-Intermittent failure. system is OK at this time.
IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM .
NO- Replace the IAT sensor .
BACK
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Is -4F (-20C) or less (or L-Limit in Honda
YES - Go to step 3.
NO-Intermitent failure, system is OK atthis time.
IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM .
3. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector.
4. Connect IATsensor 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2 with a jumper wire.
IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
SG2 IGRN/BLKI
JUMPER WIRE
IAT IRED/YELl
Is -4F (-20C) or less (or L-Limit in Honda
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the IATsensor .
7. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals C18 and
C25 with a jumper wire.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C 131PI
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
L,(
/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 25 26 27 ~ 29 30
V
IAT IRED/YELl I
I
SG2IGRN/BL KI
JUMPER WIRE
Is - 4F (-20C) or less (or L-Limit in Honda
recheck (see page 11-5). If normal voltage is
PCM (C18, C25) and the IATsensor .
11-51
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0116: ECT Sensor Range/Performance
Problem
NOTE: If DTC P0117 and/or P0118 are stored at the
same time as DTC P0116, troubleshoot those DTCs first,
then recheck for DTC P0116.
2. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
Is 176- 200F (80- 93C) or 0.4-0.7 V
indicated?
YES -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check the thermostat and the cooling system .
NO - Check the thermostat and the cooling system.
If they are OK, replace the ECT sensor .
11-52
DTC P0117: ECT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
YES - Go to step 3.
ECT sensor and the ECM/PCM .
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the ECT sensor..
6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (31P).
7. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2P
ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
=
PCM (C26) and the ECT sensor .
recheck (see page 11-5). If normal ECT readings are
BACK
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Is - 4F (- 20C) or less (or L-Umit in Honda
YES - Go to step 3.
ECT sensor and the ECM/PCM .
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor connector.
4. Connect ECT sensor 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2 with a jumper wire.
ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
SG2 IGRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
ECT IRED/WHT)
Is - 4F (-20C) or less (or L-Umit in Honda
YES-Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the ECT sensor .
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C 131P)
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26 27
~ ~
29 30
/
ECT IRED/WHT) L SG21GRNI BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
Is -4F (-20C) or less (or L-Umit in Honda
recheck (see page 11-5). If normal voltage is
PCM (C18, C26) and the ECT sensor .
11-53
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0122: TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
comes on, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
Is there approx. 10% or 0.5 V when the throttle is
fully closed and approx. 90% or 4.5 V when the
throttle is fully opened?
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and at the ECM/PCM
NO- Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the TP sensor connector.
7. Measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector
TPSENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLKI VCC2 (VEL/BLUI
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 15.
11-54
9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between TP
sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with
the throttle fully closed.
TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
TPS
Is there approx. 0.5- 0.9 kQ ?
NO- Replace the throttle body (The TP sensor is
not available separately.) .
10. Measure resistance between TP sensor 3P
connector terminals No.2 and No.3 with the
throttle fully closed.
TPS
Is there approx. 4.5kQ ?
YES- Go to step 11.
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector (31 Pl.
BACK
12. At the wire harness side, check for continuity
between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the ECMI
PCM (C27) and the TP sensor .
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal C27 and
body ground with a jumper wire.
1 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 1/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23
V
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
TPS (RED/BlK)
JUMPER WIRE
--
and body ground.
TPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
recheck (see page 11-5). If the prescribed voltage is
now available, replace the original ECM/PCM .
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
I
11 2 3
V
5 6
t
8 9 10
V 1/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
VCC2 (VEl/BlU)

Is there approx. 5V?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ECMI
NO- Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
11-55
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P1122: TP Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected
Is 16.5% (F23A 1, F23A4 engine) or 15.3% (F23A5
engine) or less indicated when the throttle is fully
closed?
YES -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time .
11-56
DTC P1121: TP Sensor Signal Lower Than
Expected
Is 14.1% (F23A1, F23A4 engine) or 13.3% (F23A5
engine) or higher indicated when the throttle is
fully opened?
time .
NO - Replace the throttle body (The TP sensor is
BACK
DTC P0123: TP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
sensor and at the ECM/PCM .
NO - Go to step 4.
7. At the wire harness side, measure voltage between
TP sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
VCC2 (VEL/BLU)
YES- Replace the throttle body (The TP sensor is
not available separately) .
NO - Go to step 8.
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
I
11
2 3
/
5 6
r
8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
k"
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
V
VCC2 (VEL/BLU)
'Y.
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ECMI
11-57
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0128/P1486: Cooling System
Malfunction
NOTE: If the OTCs listed below are stored at the same
time as OTC P0128/P1486, troubleshoot those OTCs first,
then recheck for P0128/P1486.
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P1106, P1107, P1108: Barometric Pressure Circuit
P1253, P1257, P1258, P1259: VTEC System (F23A1,
F23A5 engine)
P0401: EGR Flow Insufficient
P1491: EGR Valve Lift Insufficient
P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor High Voltage
P0116, P0117, P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature
Circuit
P0112, P0113: Intake Air Temperature Circuit
P0500: Vehicle Speed Sensor
P0335, P0336, P1359: Crankshaft Position Sensor
P0300, P1399: Random Misfire
P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304: Cylinder 1, 2, 3, or 4 Misfire
Detected.
P0505: Idle Control System Malfunction
P1519: Idle Air Control Valve
OTC P0128/P1486 can set occasionally when the hood is
opened.
11-58
1. Check the engine coolant level.
/s the engine coo/ant leve/low?
YES-Refill the engine coolant. If necessary, check
the cooling system .
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and make sure the AlC is
off.
3. Check the radiator fan.
Does the radiator fan keep running?
YES-Check the radiator fan circuit with AlC model
(see page 10-19) or without AlC model (see page
10-21), radiatorfan switch circuit (see page 10-23),
and the radiator fan switch (see page 10-22).
If the circuits and the switch are OK, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM and recheck (see page 11-5).
Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original ECM/PCM .
NO-Test the thermostat (see page 10-9) .
BACK
DTC P0131: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Circuit
Low Voltage
1. Resetthe ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
comes on.
3. Check the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage
with the scan tool during acceleration using wide
open throttle.
Does the voltage stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES - Go to step 4.
Primary H02S (Sensor 1) and atthe ECM/PCM .
4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-115).
Is it normal?
YES- Go to step 5.
NO- Repair the fuel supply system .
6. Disconnect the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector.
7. Start the engine and let it idle.
with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Replace the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
11. Check for continuity between Primary H02S
(Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.
PRIMARY H02S (SENSOR 11
4P CONNECTOR
PH02S(WHTI
3 4
=
PCM (C16) and the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
recheck (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM .
11-59
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
High Voltage
1. Reset the ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
comes on.
with the scan tool.
Does the voltage stay at 0.9 V or more?
YES - Go to step 4.
Primary H02S (Sensor 1) and at the ECM/PCM .
5. Disconnect the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector.
6. Connect Primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
SG2(GRN/B
PRIMARY H02S (SENSOR 1)
4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
r--I ,----, L.....
'--
1 2 r-
lK) PHO 2S(WHT)
3 4
11-60
with the scan tool.
Is there 0.9 V or more?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 2R 27 12R 29 30
/
PH02S (WHT) SG2(GRNI BlK)
'---
JUMPER WIRE
with the scan tool.
goes away replace the original ECM/PCM .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C16) and the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
BACK
DTC P0133: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Slow
Response
DTC P1163: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Slow
Response
NOTE:
If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at the
same time as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0133 .
If DTC P1162 is stored at the same time as DTC P1163,
troubleshoot DTC P1162 first, then recheck for DTC
P1163.
comes on.
3. Test-drive under following conditions.
55 mph (89km/n) steady speed
AfT in D4 position (MIT in 5th gear)
Until readiness code or Temporary DTC P0133
and/or P1163 (F23A4 engine) comes on
4. Check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool.
Is Temporary DTC P0133 and/or P1163
indicated?
VES- Replace the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
Check for poor connections or loose wires at C101
(located under the under-hood fuse/relay box), the
Primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM .
11-61
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0137: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
Circuit Low Voltage-Except F23A4 SULEV
Engine
comes on.
3. Check the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output
voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool.
YES- Go to step 4.
(located under the right side of the dash), C102
Secondary H02S (Sensor 2), and the ECM/PCM .
5. Disconnect the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
voltage with the scan tool.
YES- Go to step 8.
NO- Replace the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (32P).
11-62
10. Check for continuity between Secondary H02S
ground.
SECONDARY H02S
ISENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SH02S IWHT/RED)
3 4
PCM (A23) and the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
BACK
Circuit Low Voltage-F23A4 SULEV engine
1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4).
comes on.
voltage with the scan tool during acceleration using
wide open throttle.
Secondary H02S (Sensor 2), and the PCM .
NO-Go to step 4.
connector.
YES-Go to step 8.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
10. Check for continuity between Secondary H02S
ground.
SECONDARY H02S
(SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
SH02S (WHT/RED)
3 4
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(A23) and the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM .
11-63
BACK
PGM-FI System
Circuit High Voltage-Except F23A4 SULEV
engine
comes on.
YES - Go to step 4.
connector.
6. Connect Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
SECONDARY H02S
(SENSOR 214P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
2
SG2 (GRN/BLK) SH02S (WHT/RED)
3 4
11-64
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
10. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A23 and
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
A (32PI
Vl2
3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
/1
112113 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 241
25 26 27 28 29 30
/

2
-
SH02S (WHT IRED)
JUMPER WIRE
-
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
C(31P)
11
2 3
V
5 6 8 9
V /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
10
V
V
recheck (see page 11-5). If the symptom/ndication
PCM (A23) and the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
BACK
Circuit High Voltage-F23A4 SULEV Engine
comes on.
3. Accelerate using wide open throttle. Then
decelerate for at least 3 seconds with the throttle
completely closed.
YES - Go to step 5.
Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .
connector.
7. Connect Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
SECONDARY H02S
(SENSOR 21 4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
2
SG2(GRN/BLKI SH02S (WHT/REDI
3 4
YES- Go to step 10.
11. Connect PCM connector terminals A23 and C18
with a jumper wire.
A (32PI
PCM CONNECTORS
VI2
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
,,/"1
112113 14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
lL'
23 24 I
25 26 27 2B 29 30
/
..J
i2
r--
SH02S
(WHT/REDI
SG2
JUMPERWIR
C(31PI
(GRN/BLKI
V
2 3
1/
5 6 8 9 10
IL V
13 14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
E
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A23) and the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
11-65
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow
Response-Except F23A4 SULEV Engine
comes on.
Does the voltage stay within 0.3- 0.6 V for 2
minutes?
YES - Replace the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
11-66
DTC P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow
Response-F23A4 SULEV engine
comes on.
3. Accelerate using wide open throttle. Then
completely closed.
YES - Replace the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
NO -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
(located under the right side of the dash), C1 02
Secondary H02S (Sensor 2), and the PCM .
BACK
DTC P0135: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater
Circuit Malfunction
Heater Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( * ) applies
to DTC P0141.
Is DTC P0135 or P0141 indicated?
VES- Go to step 3.
(located under the right side of the dash), C101,
C102 (located at the left side of the engine
compartment), the Primary H02S (Sensor 1), the
3. Check the No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM) CRUISE
CONTROL (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
VES- Go to step 4.
NO- Replace the fuse and retest.
5. Disconnect the H02S (Primary or Secondary * )
(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
6. At the H02S side, measure resistance between
H02S 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
H02S 4P CONNECTOR
2
3 4
Is there 10- 40 Q (F23A4 SULEV engine: 2.0-
20.0 Q)?
VES- Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) or
Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * .
7. Check for continuity between body ground and H02S
4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4 individually.
H02S 4P CONNECTOR
2
3 4
VES-Replace the H02S (Primary or Secondary *)
(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) .
NO- Go to step 8.
9. Measure voltage between H02S 4P connector
terminals, No.3 and No.4.
PRIMARY /SECONDARY* H02S (SENSOR 1/
SENSOR 2*) 4P CONNECTOR
P02HTC
(BLK/WHT),
S02HTC
(BLK/WHT)*
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-67
BACK
PGM-FI System
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (31 P) (ECM/PCM
connector A, 32P) * .
terminal C1 (A8) * and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
CI31PI
S02SHTC
IBLK/WHTI*
PCM (C1, A8 * ) and the H02S (Primary or
Secondary *) (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) .
13. Measure voltage between H02S terminal No.4 and
body ground.
PRIMARY/SECONDARY* H02S (SENSOR 1/
SENSOR 2*1 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 14.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the No.6
ECU (ECM/PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse and
the H02S .
11-68
15. Reconnect the H02S 4P connector.
16. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (31 P) (ECM/PCM
terminals 82 and C1 (A8) * .
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
+
P02SHTC (BLK/WHTJ C (31PJ
r1 2 3 17 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/ 1/ 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1/
23 r7 25 2E 2728 29 30 1/
"'" PG1 (BLKJ
t
B(25PJ
1 2 3 4 5 1/ 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14 r7 16 17 181
19 20
~ ~
23 24 25
S02SHTC
A (32PI (BLK/WHTJ*
1/12 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
/"1
~ 2 T 3 14 15 17 17 18 19 17 202 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30./
~
Is there 0.1 V or less?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C1, A8 * ) and the H02S (Primary or
Secondary *) (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) .
BACK
DTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean
DTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich
NOTE: If some of the OTCs listed below are stored at
the same time as OTC P0171 and/or P0172,
troubleshoot those OTCs first, then recheck for P0171
and/or P0172.
P0106, P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P0135: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater
P0137, P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Heater
P1259: VTEC System (F23A1, F23A4 engine)
P1491: EGR Valve Lift Insufficient
P1498: EGR Valve Lift Sensor High Voltage
Is fuel pressure OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Check these items:
If the pressure is too high. Check the fuel
pressure regulator and the fuel return line .
If the pressure is too low. Check the fuel pump,
the fuel feed line, the fuel filter, and the fuel
pressure regulator .
comes on.
3. Check the Primary H02S or Air Fuel Ratio (NF)
Sensor (Sensor 1) output with the scan tool.
Does it stay at less than 0.3 V or more than 0.6 V?
YES-Replace the Primary H02S or Air Fuel Ratio
(NF) Sensor (Sensor 1) .
NO-Goto step 4.
4. With a vacuum pump, apply vacuum to the EVAP
canister purge valve from the intake manifold side.
Does it hold vacuum?
YES-Check the valve clearances and adjust if
necessary.lfthe valve clearances are OK, replace
the injectors .
NO- Replace the EVAP canister purge valve .
11-69
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P0300: Random Misfire
and Any Combination of the Following:
OTC P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire
NOTE:
If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored .
If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel metering
P0401, P1491, P1498: EGR system
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC System (F23A1, F23A4 engine)
P1361, P1362: TDC sensor
P1381, P1382: CYP sensor
P1519: lAC valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the symptom.
3. Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures and checks, in the order listed, until you find
the cause.
Symptom Procedure Also check for:
Random misfire only at 1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-115). Low compression
low RPM and under load 2. Inspect the ignition distributor housing. Low quality fuel
Correct EGR valve
function
Random misfire only 1. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-25). Malfunction in the
during acceleration 2. Inspect the ignition distributor housing. VTEC system (F23A 1,
3. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-115). F23A4 engine) (see
4. Testthe ignition coil (see page 4-24). page 6-7)
5. Test the ignition control module (see page 4-23).
Random misfire at high 1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-115). Correct valve
RPM and load, or under 2. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-25). clearance (see page
random conditions 3. Inspect the ignition distributor housing. 6-14)
4. Test the ignition coil (see page 4-24).
5. Test the ignition control module (see page 4-23).
11-70
BACK
NOTE: If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at
the some time as a misfire DTC, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for the misfire DTC.
P0131, P0132: Primary H02S
P0171, P0172: Fuel Supply System
P0401: EGR System
P1359, P1361, P1362: TDC Sensor
P1381, P1382: CYP Sensor
1. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound from
the injector in the problem cylinder.
Does it click?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 11.
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, do the
ECM/PCM Reset Procedure. If there is no freeze
data of misfiring, just clear the DTC.
3. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
with one from another cylinder.
4. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of
the freeze data or under various conditions if there
was no freeze data.
5. Check for a DTC or Temporary DTC with the scan
tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, or
Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,
etc. (no misfire at this time) .
6. Determine which cylinder(s) had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
spark plug was exchanged?
YES- Replace the faulty spark plug .
NO- Go to step 7.
7. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
8. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
was no freeze data.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, or
Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this time) .
10. Determine which cylinder(s) had the misfire.
injector was exchanged?
YES- Replace the faulty injector .
NO-Check the engine compression, and perform a
cylinder leak down test .
11. Check for an open or short in the harness between
the ECM/PCM and the injector.
Are the wires OK?
YES-Gotostep 12.
NO- Repair open or short in the wire .
12. Install a known-good injector, and recheck.
Does the injector click?
YES- Replace the injector .
11-71
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0325: KS Circuit Malfunction
3. Hold the engine at 3,000 - 4,000 rpm for at least 60
seconds.
YES - Go to step 4.
knock sensor and at the ECM/PCM.
5. Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
terminal C3 and body ground.
KS (RED/BLU)
I
11 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
Q
PCM (C3) and the knock sensor .
NO-Go to step 7.
11-72
7. Connect knock sensor connector terminal No.1 to
KNOCK SENSOR 1P CONNECTOR

L--J 1 JUMPER WIRE
KS (RED/BLU)
I
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
Q
=
YES-Go to step 9.
PCM (C3) and the knock sensor.
9. Substitute a known-good knock sensor and recheck.
YES- Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
NO - Replace the origi nal knock sensor (see page 7-
24) .
BACK
DTC P033S: CKP Sensor No signal
DTC P0336: CKP Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
DTC P1361:TDC 1 Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
DTC P1362: TDC 1 Sensor No Signal
1. Check for DTC P1359. If it is stored along with any
of the DTCs listed above, troubleshoot it first, then
troubleshoot the other DTCs.
Is DTC P0335, P0336, P1361, or P1362 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
CKP/TDC sensor and at the ECM/PCM .
5. Disconnect the CKP/DTC sensor 4P connector, and
measure resistance between its terminals at the
locations shown for the DTC(s) you retrieved.
P1361 or P1362
CKP/TOC SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
TOCP TOCM
P033S or P0336
CKP/TDC SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
CKPP Jib P
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the CKP/TDC sensor (see page 6-55.
6. Check for continuity from body ground to each
terminal indicated for the DTC(s) you retrieved.
P1361 or P1362
CKP/TDC SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
TOCP
= =
P033S or P0336
CKP /TOC SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
= =
YES - Replace the CKP/TDC sensor
(see page 6-55) .
NO- Go to step 7.
7. Reconnect the CKP/TDC sensor 4P connector.
(cont'd)
11-73
BACK
PGM-FI System
8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (31 P), and
measure resistance between the terminals
indicated for the DTC(s) you retrieved.
P033S or P0336
P
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (31 P)
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8
1/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 129
Wire side of TDCP
female terminals (GRN)
1361 or P1362
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR
CKPP
C(31P)
(BLU)
11
2 3
1/
5 6 7 8
I/" V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
9
21
3p
Q
Q
9
21
30
10
1/
V
T DCM
ED) (R
C KPM
WHT) (
10
/
/
NO- Repair open in the faulty sensor wire(s) .
11-74
connector terminal(s) to body ground as indicated
for the DTC(s) you retrieved.
P1361 or P1362 CKPP
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR (BLU)
C(31P)
I
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
V
Wire side of
female terminals
=
P033S or P0336
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (31 P)
11 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26 27 28
2P
30
V
Wire side of TDCP
female terminals (GRN)
YES- Repair short in the faulty sensor wire(s) .
BACK
DTC P0500: VSS Circuit Malfunction
1. Test-drive the vehicle.
2. Check the vehicle speed sensor reading with the
scan tool.
Is the correct speed indicated?
YES -Intermittent failure. system is OK at this time.
VSS and atthe ECM .
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Block the rear wheels and set the parking brake.
5. Raise the front of the vehicle. and make sure it is
securely supported.
7. Block the right front wheel. and slowly rotate the
left front wheel.
8. Measure voltage between ECM connector
terminals B20 and C23.
ECM CONNECTORS
B(25PI
1 2 3 4 5
V 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
--
LG1 (BRN/BLKI
C(31PI
11 2 3 ;/ 5 6 7 8 9
V /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
23 24 25 26272B
VSS (BLU/WHT)
29 30
Does the voltage pulse between 0 V and 5 V?
10
/
L
YES-Substitute a known-good ECM and recheck
(see page 11-5). Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away. replace the original ECM .
NO-Gotostep9.
10. Disconnect ECM connector C (31P).
"
12. Block the right front wheel. and slowly rotate the
left front wheel.
13. Measure voltage between ECM connector
terminals B20 and C23.
ECM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5
/ 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14 ;/ 16 17 181
19 20

23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
C(31P)
11 2 3
/
5 6 7
IL' /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
8 9
20 21
23 24 25 26 27 2B 29 30
VSS (BLU/WHT)
Does the voltage pulse between 0 V and 5 V?
10
1/
/
YES-Substitute a known-good ECM and recheck
away. replace the original ECM .
NO-Check these items:
A short or an open in the wire between the ECM
(C23) and the VSS.
If the wire is OK. test the VSS (see page 22-69).
11-75
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0560: ECM/PCM Back up Circuit Low
Voltage
NOTE: Ifthe No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box is removed and
the engine is started, the MIL will come on and the ECM
/PCM will store DTC P0560.
YES - Go to step 3.
No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and
ECM/PCM .
4. Inspectthe No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in
the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box .
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO - Check for these problems .
Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM
(B21) and No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in
the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box .
Repair short in the wire in the back up circuit
(see page 22-46) .
11-76
terminal B21 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
1 2
9 10
19 20 2122
VBU (WHT /VEL)
PCM (B21) and the No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.5A)
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box .
BACK
DTC P1106: BARD Sensor Range/Perfomance
Problem
3. Test-drive with the AfT in 2nd position, or the MIT
in 4th gear.
4. Accelerate for 5 seconds using wide open throttle.
Is Temporary DTC P1106 indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time .
DTC P1107: BARD Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P1108: BARD Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
Is DTC P1107 or P110B indicated?
time .
11-77
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P1149: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Rangel
Performance Problem
Performance Problem
NOTE: If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at
the same time as DTC P1149 or P1165, troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then troubleshoot DTC P1149 or P1165.
P0141: Secondary H02S (sensor 2) Heater
comes on.
55 mph (89 km/h) steady speed
AfT in D4 position (MfT in 5th gear)
Until the readiness code or Temporary DTC
P1149 (P1165) comes on
Is Temporary DTC P1149 (P1165) indicated?
YES-Replace the Primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
primary H02S relay, the primary H02S (Sensor 1),
and the ECM/PCM .
11-78
BACK
DTC P1162: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit
Malfuncion
2. Start the engine, and wait at least 2 minutes.
Is DTe P1162 indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
Check for poor connections or loose wi res at the
A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) and at the ECM/PCM .
terminals C14 and 820, and between C15 and 820.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5 1/ 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
1617 181
19 20
.EJ.f&
23 25
/
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
C(31P)
1 2 3V 5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 1415 16 1718 19 20 21V
23241$ 26 27 28 29 30 1/
1
':::L
PH02S- (BLU)
Is there 2.5- 3.0 V?
YES- Go to step 6.
NO-Gotostep 10.
7. Disconnect the A/F Sensor 4P connector and ECMI
PCM connector C (31 Pl.
8. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals C14 and C15
to body ground with a jumper wire.
11
2 3
:/
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
:/
23 24
26 27 28 29 30
:/
PH02 S+ (RED) PH02S- (BLU)
JUM PER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
.....
9. Check for continuity between A/F Sensor (Sensor
1) 4P connector terminal No.1, No.2, and body
ground individually.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
PH02S- (BlU) ,.......--,---'-, I PH02S+ (RED)
2 1+-----,
1---1-------1
3 4
=
YES- Replace the A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-99) .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the A/F
Sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM (C14 or
C15) .
(cont'd)
11-79
BACK
PGM-FI System
11. Disconnect the A/F Sensor 4P connector and ECM/
12. Check for continuity between body ground and A/F
Sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No.2 and
No.1.
PH02S- (BLU) 1--'--,--'--,1 PH02S+ (RED)
2
3 4
YES- Repair short in the wire between the A/F
Sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM (C14 or
C15) .
NO- Replace the A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-99) .
11-80
Performance Problem
comes on.
11-99) .
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Test-drive in 03 position. Starting at 1,600 rpm,
accelerate using wide open throttle for at least 5
seconds. Then decelerate for at least 5 seconds
with the throttle completely closed until the
readiness code or Temporary DTC P1164 comes on.
11-99) .
A/F Sensor relay, the A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) and the
ECM/PCM .
BACK
DTC P1166: NF Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
Circuit Malfunction
YES - Go to step 3.
(located under the under-hood fuse/relay box), A/F
Sensor relay, the A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) and the
ECM/PCM .
3. Check the following fuses:
POWER SEAT (20A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
No.4 ECU (ECM/PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A)
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
No.6 LAF HEATER (20A) in the passenger's
Are any of the fuses blown?
Sensor relay and the fuses .
NO - Go to step 4.
terminals 819 and 820, 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned ON (II).
C P02SHT
(BLKIWHTI
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI
1 2 3 4 5
1/
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
16
19 20 21 22 23 24
'--'--
lwJ
LG1 (BRN/BLKI
7
81
17 181
25
YES- Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
NO- Go to step 5.
terminals C13 and 820.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
1 2 345 V 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 / 16 17 181
19 20
~ g g
23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLKI
C (31P)
11
2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23
214
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
4>
J
P02SHTC+
(WHT)
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Go to step 10.
7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector 8 (25P).
9. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal 816 to body
ground with a jumper wire, then measure voltage
between ECM/PCM connector terminals 819 and
820.
1 2 3 4
9 10 11 12 13
19 20 21 22
'--'--
r ~ LG1(BRN/BLKI
HTC 'Y.. P02S
(BLK/WHTI
1
5
A"
14
/
16
23 24
7
81
17 18J
25
JUMPER
WIRE
-=
recheck (see page 11-5). Ifthe symptom/indication
NO- Repair open or short in the wire between A/F
Sensor (Sensor 1) and ECM/PCM (819) .
(cont'd)
11-81 BACK
PGM-FI System
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector 8 (25P) and the
A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
12. Check for continuity between A/F Sensor (Sensor 1)
P02SHTC+
(BlK/WHT)
2
3 4
Sensor (Sensor 1) and ECM/PCM (819) .
NO- Go to step 13.
11-82
terminals 816 and 820
1 2 3
9 10 11 12
19 20 21
lG1 (BRN/BlK) I
4 5
13 14
22

/
7
/
16 17
23
*
25
P02SHTCR
(GRN/RED)
8
18
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (C13) and the A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) or Secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) .
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Check for continuity in the wires between A/F
Sensor and the fuses.
YES- The wires are OK. Replace the A/F Sensor
relay .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the A/F
Sensor relay and the fuses .
BACK
DTC P1167: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
System Malfunction
NOTE: If DTC P1162 is stored at the same time as DTC
P1167, troubleshoot DTC P1162 first, then troubleshoot
DTC P1167.
2. Start the engine. Wait for at least 80 seconds.
YES-Go to step 3.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at C1 02
A/F Sensor relay, the A/F Sensor (Sensor 1), and
the ECM/PCM .
3. Disconnect the A/F Sensor 4P connector, and ECM/
C15 to body ground with a jumper wire.
[1 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
IV IV
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 :2p 26 27 28 29 30
V
PH02 S+ (RED) PH02S- (BLU)
JUM PER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
~ --
5. Check for continuity between A/F Sensor (Sensor 1)
4P connector terminal No.1, No.2, and body
ground individually.
PH02S- (BLU) Ii---'--r--'--, PH02S+ (RED)
2
3 4
=
11-99) .
NO- Repair open or short in the wire between the
A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM (C14 or
C15) .
11-83
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage
3. Turn on the headlights.
YES- Go to step 4.
(located under the right side of dash), the ELD, and
the ECM/PCM .
4. Turn the ignition switch and the headlights OFF.
5. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
7. Measure voltage between body ground and ELD 3P
connector terminal No.3.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
YES - Replace the ELD .
NO-Goto step 8.
11-84
10. Check for continuity between body ground and
ECM/PCM connector terminal A30.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
PCM (A30) and the ELD .
BACK
DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage
3. Turn on the headlights.
/s DTC P1298 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
(located under the right side of dash), the ELD, and
the ECM/PCM .
4. Turn the ignition switch and headlights OFF.
5. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
7. Measure voltage between body ground and ELD 3P
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
2 3
=
YES-Go to step 8.
ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse and the
ELD .
9. Connect ELD 3P connector terminal No.3 to body
ground with a jumper wire.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
EL IGRN/RED)
JUMPER WIRE
terminal A30 and body ground.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A 132P)
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ECM
(A30) and the ELD .
(cont'd)
11-85
BACK
PGM-FI System
12. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
terminal No.2 and body ground.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between ELD
connector terminal No.2 and G202 .
13. Reconnect the ELD 3P connector.
15. While measuring voltage between ECM/PCM
connector terminals A30 and 820, turn the
headlights on (low).
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
Vl2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
/'
112113 14 15 17 17 18 192 021
V
23 24
25 26 27 28 2930 /
...lL
EL (GRN/RED)
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5 V 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 181
19 20

23 24 25
LG1(BRN/BLK)
Does the voltage drop?
NO-Replace the ELD .
11-86
BACK
DTC P1359: CKP/TDC Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
YES - Go to step 3.
CKPrrOC sensor and the ECM/PCM .
3. Check for poor connections or loose wires between
the CKPrrOC sensor and the ECM/PCM.
Are the connections OK?
NO-Repair as necessary .
11-87
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P1381: CYP Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
DTC P1382: CYP Sensor No Signal
Is Dre P1381, and/or P1382 indicated?
YES- Go to step 3.
distributor and the ECM/PCM .
3. Check for poor connections at the ignition (spark
plug) wires.
Are the wires OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Correct as necessary .
4. Check the condition of the ignition wires
(see page 4-25).
Are the wires OK?
YES- Go to step 5.
NO- Replace the ignition wires .
6. Disconnect the distributor 4P connector.
11-88
7. For the F23A 1 or F23A4 engine, measure resistance
between distributor 4P connector terminals No.3
and No.4. For the F23A5 engine, measure resistance
between the distributor 4P connector terminals
No.2 and No.4.
DISTRIBUTOR 4P CONNECTOR
F23A1, F23A4 ENGINE F23A5 ENGINE

CYPP CYPM
ffiBj
CYPP
1 2
3 4
CYPM
Is there 800-1,500 Q ?
YES- Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the ignition distributor housing .
8. For the F23A 1 or F23A4 engine, check for continuity
between body ground and the distributor connector
terminals No.3 and No.4 individually. For the
F23A5 engine, check for continuity between body
ground and the distributor connector terminals
No.2 and No.4 individually.
DISTRIBUTOR 4P CONNECTOR
F23A1, F23A4 ENGINE F23A5 ENGINE
3
CYPM
= =
YES-Replace the ignition distributor housing .
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Reconnect the distributor 4P connector.
BACK
11. Measure resistance between ECM/PCM connector
1 2 3 [7 5 6 7 8 9 10
V IV
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
CYPM
(BLK)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
evpp
(YEll Q
Is there 800- 1,500 Q ?
YES-Go to step 12.
PCM (C29, C30) and the distributor .
ECM/PCM connector terminal C29.
1 2 3 [7 5 6 7 8 9 10
IV IV
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
iV
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
fPP{VEL
=
PCM (C29) and the distributor..
11-89
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P1607: ECM/PCM Internal Circuit
Malfunction
3. Wait 30 seconds.
NO- Go to step 4.
6. Wait 10 seconds.
time .
11-90
BACK
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect an aBO II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester
(see page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the aBO II
scan tool/Honda PGM Tester.
Does the OBD II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester
communicate with the ECM/PCM?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to troubleshooting "OLC Circuit
Troubleshooting" (see page 11-95).
3. Check the aBO II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester for
OTCs.
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the OTC Troubleshooting index.
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON ("), and watch the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
Does the MIL come on and stay on for more than
20 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON
(II)?
YES-If the MIL always come on and stays on, go
to step 16. But if the MIL sometimes works
normally, first check for these problems.
o An intermittent short in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A10) and the Data Link Connector
(OLC).
An intermittent open in the wire between the
ECM/PCM (A21) and the OLC.
ECM/PCM (A 18) and the gauge assembly.
NO-If the MIL is always off, go to step 6. But if the
MIL sometimes works normally, first check for
these problems.
o A loose No.9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT
LIGHT (7.5A) fuse in the driver'S under-dash fuse/
relay box.
o A loose ACG S (15A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
o A loose No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
o A poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A 18.
o An intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire
between the ECM/PCM (A 18) and the ga uge
assembly.
ECM/PCM (C19) and the MAP sensor.
ECM/PCM (C28) and the TP sensor, EGR valve
position sensor, or Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor.
6. Check the low oil pressure light.
Is the low oil pressure light on?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for these problems.
o A blown No.9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT
LIGHT (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
o A short or open in the wire between the No.9 BACK
UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A) fuse and
the gauge assembly.
(cont'd)
11-91
BACK
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Goto step 10.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect ECM/PCM
connector terminal A18 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
VJ2 3 4 5 6
1/
8 9 10
/1
112113 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 1
25 26 27 12s 29 30
1/
32
MIL (GRN/ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
_ ....
=
Is the MIL on?
NO-Check for an open in the wires between the
ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly. Also
check for a blown MIL bulb .
11-92
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect ECM/
PCM connector C (31 P), and check for continuity
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminals C19 and C28 individually.
1 2 3
V
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
VCC2 VCC1
,yn
(VEL/BLUI (VEL/RED)
YES-Goto step 11.
NO-Go to step 12.
11. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these
sensors, one at a time, and check for continuity
between body ground and ECM/PCM connector
terminal C19 and C28 individually.
MAP Sensor
EGR valve position sensor
FTP sensor
TP sensor
YES- Repair the short to body ground in the wire
between the ECM/PCM (C19) and the MAP sensor,
or the ECM/PCM (C28) and the TP sensor, EGR
valve position sensor, or FTP sensor .
NO - Replace the sensor that made continuity to
body ground go away when disconnected .
12. Disconnectthe injectors and lAC valve connectors.
BACK
voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM
connector terminals 81 and 89 individually.
IGP1
(VEl/BlK)
1 2 3 4 5 1/ 7
r-
9 10 11 12 13 14 1/ 16 17
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
IGP2
':i ':i
(VEl/BlK)
=
YES-Go to step 14.
NO - Check for these problems:
81
181
o An open in the wire(s) between the PGM-FI main
relay and ECM/PCM connector terminals 81 and
89.
o Poor connections at the PGM-FI main relay.
o A faulty PG M-FI main relay (see page 11-112).
If necessary, repair or replace the relay .
14. Reconnect the connectors to the sensors, then
reconnect ECM/PCM connector C (31 Pl.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure
voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM
connector terminals 82, 810, 820, and 822
individually.
-
__
1 2 7 8
9 10
19 20
':i
lG1
PG2
(BlK)
(BRN/ lG2 (BRN/BlK)
BlK)
-
=
=
Is there less than 1.0 V?
NO- Repair the open in the wire(s) that had more
than 1.0 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM (82, 810,
820,822) .
(cont'd)
11-93
BACK
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it back ON
(II), and measure voltage between ECM/PCM
connector terminal A 10 and body ground.
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES- Go to step 17.
NO- Repair short in the wire between the OLC and
the ECM/PCM (A10) .
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect ECM/PCM
connector A (32P), then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Does the MIL stay on?
YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge
assembly and the ECM/PCM (A18) .
NO- Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
11-94
BACK
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting
If the ECM/PCM does not communicate with the OBO II
scan tool, Honda PGM Tester, or I/M test equipment, do
this troubleshooting procedure.
1. Measure voltage between OLC terminal No. 16 and
body ground.
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Repair open in the wire between OLC terminal
No. 16 and the ACGS (15A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box .
2. Measure voltage between OLC terminals No.4 and
No. 16.
YES - Go to step 3.
No.4 and body ground (G401) .
No. 16.
YES-Go to step 4.
No.5 and body ground (G101) .
No.7.
YES- Go to step 10.
NO - Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
11-95
BACK
PGM-FI System
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (32P). Make sure
the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester is
disconnected from the DLC.
8. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7
and body ground.
DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (A21). After
repairing the wire, check the DTC with the OBD II
scan tool/Honda PGM Tester and go to the DTC
Troubleshooting index .
NO- Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7
and ECM/PCM terminal A21.
Wire side of
female terminals

K-LiNE (GRV)
11-96
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No.7 and the ECM/PCM (A21). After repairing the
wire, check the DTC with the OBD " scan tool/
Honda PGM Tester and go to the DTC
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (32P). Make sure
the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester is
disconnected from the DLC.
13. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.5 and
No.7.
Is there 0 V?
NO- Repair short to power in the wire between the
DLC terminal No.7 and the ECM/PCM (A21). After
repairing the wire, check the DTC with the OBO "
scan tool/Honda PGM Tester and go to the DTC
BACK
Injector Replacement
2. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A), the EGR valve (8), and the EVAP canister purge valve (C).
c
H
_______ G
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
_---D
3. Disconnect the vacuum hoses and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (D) and EVAP canister purge
valve. Place a rag or shop towel over the hoses before disconnecting them.
4. Disconnect the fuel hose (E) from the fuel rail (F).
5. Remove the retainer nuts (G) from the fuel rail and harness holder (H).
6. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve, and disconnect the PCV valve (I).
7. Disconnect the fuel rail.
8. Remove the injectors from the fuel rail.
(cont'd)
11-97
BACK
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont'd)
9. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).
D c
/
A
B
E
10. Coat new a-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
11. Insert the injectors into the fuel rail (D).
12. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold.
13. Install the injectors into the intake manifold.
14. Install and tighten the retainer nuts.
15. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail with new washers.
16. Connect the vacuum hoses and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator and EVAP canister purge valve.
17. Install the connectors on the injectors, EGR valve, and EVAP canister purge valve.
18. Install the EVAP canister purge valve and PCV valve.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-98 BACK
Primary H02S and A/F Sensor
Replacement
02 sensor wrench SNAP-ON YA8875 or SP Tools 93750
or equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the primary H02S or A/F Sensor 4P
connector, then remove the primary H02S or A/F
Sensor (A).
A
2. Install the primary H02S or A/F Sensor in the
Secondary H02S Replacement
02 sensor wrench SNAP-ON YA8875 or SP Tools 93750
or equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector, then
remove the secondary H02S (A).
A
2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of
removal.
11-99
BACK
Idle Control System
11-100
IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE
Troubleshooting. page 11-102
POWER STEERING PRESSURE
(PSP) SWITCH
Troubleshooting. page 11-108
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0505: Idle Control System Malfunction
NOTE: If DTC P1519 is stored at the same time as DTC
P0505, troubleshoot DTC P1519 first, then recheck for
DTC P0505.
2. Check the engine speed at idle under no-load
conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger,
radiator fan, and air conditioner off.
Is it 700 50 rpm?
time .
NO-If the idle speed is less than 650 rpm, go to
step 3; if it's 750 rpm or higher, go to step 4.
3. Disconnect the 3P connector from the lAC valve.
Does the engine speed increase or fluctuate?
YES-Adjustthe (base) idle speed (see page 11-
110). If it's impossible, clean the ports in the throttle
body .
NO - Replace the lAC valve .
5. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
7. Put your finger on the lower port (AI in the throttle
body.
Does the engine speed drop?
YES-Adjust the idle speed (see page 11-110). If it's
impossible, replace the lAC valve .
NO- Check for vacuum leaks, make sure the
throttle valve is completely closed, and repair as
necessary .
11-101
BACK
Idle Control System
DTC P1519: lAC Valve Circuit Malfunction
/s DTC P1519 indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
lAC valve and the ECM/PCM .
4. Disconnect the lAC valve 3P connector.
6. At the wire harness, measure voltage between lAC
valve 3P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
lAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the lAC valve
and the PGM-FI main relay .
11-102
8. Check for continuity between body ground and lAC
valve 3P connector terminal No.1.
3
=
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the lAC valve
and G101 .
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector 8 (25P).
ECM/PCM connector terminal 823.
1 2 3 4 5
V
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
IACV IBLKIBLU, ?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the lAC
valve and the ECM/PCM (823) .
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
11. Connect lAC valve 3P connector terminal No.3 to
2 3
IACV (BLK/BLUI
JUMPER WIRE
=
terminal 823 and body ground.
1 2 3 4 5
/
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
lACY IBlK/BlU, ?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the lAC valve
and the ECM/PCM (823) .
13. Reconnect the lAC valve 3P connector.
15. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/
PCM connector terminal 823.
1 2 3 4 5
/
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
lACY IBLKJBlU'
=
NO-Replace the lAC valve .
11-103
BACK
Idle Control System
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Disconnect the AlC pressure switch connector.
terminals A27 and 820.
A (32P)
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
VI2 3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/"1
L12j13 14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 I
25 2627 28 29 30
/
32
-
ACS (BLU/RED)
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5
/ 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
1/
16 17 18J
19
20 ~ g 23 24 25
~ L G (BRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 12.
6. Reconnect the AlC pressure switch connector.
11-104
8. Momentarily connect ECM/PCM connector
terminals A 17 and 820 with a jumper wire several
times.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
VI2 3 4 5 6
1/
8 9 10
/
112J13 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
lL
23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
~
ACC(RED)
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5
V
7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
~
16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
'---
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
Is there a clicking noise from the AlC compressor
clutch?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Goto step 15.
10. Turn the blower switch ON.
11. Turn the AlC switch ON.
Does the AlC operate?
YES- The air conditioning signal is OK .
NO-Gotostep 16.
13. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (32P)
BACK
ECM/PCM connector termi nal A27.
PCM (A27) and the AlC pressure switch .
now available, replace the original ECM/PCM. If not,
check the AlC system for other symptoms .
15. Momentarily connect under-hood fuse/relay box 16
P connector terminal No. 11 to body ground with a
jumper wire several times.
NOTE: The under-hood fuse/relay box 16P
connector is on the bottom of the fuse box. When
you unbolt and invert the fuse box, leave the upper
cover on to prevent short circuits.
7
CONNECTOR D (16P)
ACC (RED) JUMPER WIRE
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor
clutch?
YES- Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A 17) and the AlC clutch relay .
NO-Check the AlC system for other symptoms .
A (32P)
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
[7[2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10 -;7
f12T13 14 15
17
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
1/

ACS (BLU/RED)
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5 7 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14 7 16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
I
'---
goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM. If not,
inspect the air conditioning system .
PCM (A27) and the AlC pressure switch .
11-105 BACK
Idle Control System
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
terminals 820 and C5.
B(25P)
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
1 2 3 4 5 V 7 8
9 10 11 12 1314 V
16 17 18
19 20
J ~
23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
C (31P)
Y..
ALTF (WHT/RED)
t
1 2 3 1/ 5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
V
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 14.
5. Reconnect the alternator 4P connector.
terminals 820 and C5.
Does the voltage decrease when the headlights
and rear window defogger are turned on?
YES - The AL T FR signal is OK .
NO - Go to step 8.
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
11. Disconnect the AL T 4P connector.
11-106
12. Connect the alternator 4P connector terminal No.4 to
AL T 4P CONNECTOR
r-.
1 2
ALTF( WHT/RED)
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
_.L..
=
I ALTF (WHT/RED)
1 2 3
V
5 6 7 8
1/ 1/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Q
=
YES- Troubleshoot the charging circuit
(see page 4-29) .
9 10
21
1/
30
/
PCM (C5) and the alternator..
BACK
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C 131P)
1 ALTF /WHT /RED)
1 2 3
1/
5 6 7 8 9 10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
V
Q
=
PCM (C5) and the alternator .
recheck (see page 11-5). If the prescribed voltage
is now available, replace the original ECM/PCM .
Starter Switch Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting
NOTE:
MIT: Clutch pedal be pressed
AfT: Transmission in Park or neutral
terminals A24 and 820 with the ignition switch in
the start position (III).
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
A/32P)
VI 2
3 4 5 6
V 8 9 10
L
112113 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
32
-
STS IBLU/ORN)
B125P)
':i
1 2 3 4 5 1/ 7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
I LG1 /BRNiBLK)
YES- The starter switch signal is OK .
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Inspectthe No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
/s the fuse OK?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A24) and the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5 A)
fuse .
NO- Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A24) and the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5 A)
fuse or the PGM-FI main relay. Replace the No. 13
STARTER SIGNAL (7.5 A) fuse .
11-107
BACK
Idle Control System
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
A132P)
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
V/2 3 4 5 6 1/
8 9 10 /
112113 14 15'/ 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
25 2627 28 29 30
V

PSPSWIGRN)
B125P)
':i.
1 2 345
/
7
9 10 11 12 13 14
'/
16 17
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
--
I LG1 IBRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 6.
4. Turn the steering wheel to full lock position.
YES- The PSP switch signal is OK .
NO-Go to step 11.
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
11-108
81
18-1
9. At the harness side, connect PSP switch 2P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper
wire.
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
YES - Replace the PSP switch .
ECM/PCM (A26) and the PSP switch, or an open in
wire between the PSP switch and G302 .
12. Disconnectthe PSP switch 2P connector.
BACK
A (32P)
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
VI2
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/
112113 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
32
-
PSPSW(GRN)
B(25P)
'Y.
1 2 3 4 5
V
7 81
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
19 20 21 22 23
'---
I
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
YES - Replace the PSP switch .
NO-Go to step 15.
16 17
24 25
ECM/PCM connector terminal A26.
181
V\2
3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
/\
\12\13 14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 I
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
32
PSPSW(GRN)
Q
=
PCM (A26) and the PSP switch .
recheck (see page 11-5). If the prescribed voltage
is now available, replace the original ECM/PCM .
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal
Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the brake lights.
Are the brake lights on without pressing the
brake pedal?
YES -I nspect the brake pedal position switch (see
page 19-5) .
NO- Go to step 2.
2. Press the brake pedal.
Do the brake lights come on?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 4.
terminals A32 and 820 with the brake pedal
pressed.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
YES- The brake pedal position switch signal is
OK .
PCM (A32) and the brake pedal position switch .
4. Inspectthe STOP (20A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the brake
pedal position switch and the STOP (20 A) fuse.
Inspect the brake pedal position switch (see page
19-5) .
NO-Repair short in the wire between the ECM/
PCM (A32) and the STOP (20 A) fuse. Replace the
STOP (20 A) fuse .
11-109 BACK
Idle Control System
Idle Speed Adjustment
Adjust idle speed using the Honda PGM Tester
procedure, if possible. If not, use the following
procedure.
NOTE:
Leave the lAC valve connected.
Before setting the idle speed, check these items:
- The MIL has not been reported on.
-:- Ignition timing
- Spark plugs
- Air cleaner
- PCV system
On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever up.
Start the engine, then check that the headlights are
off.
1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
2. Connect a tachometer, or connect the Honda PGM
Tester (A) or an OBD II scan tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC) (B) located under the driver's side
ofthe dashboard.
4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan,
and air conditioner off.
11-110
5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the
idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more
than 1/4-turn without checking the idle speed.
A
6. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn,
check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn
the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn again.
7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with the heater fan
switch on HI and the air conditioner on, then check
the idle speed.
NOTE:
Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air
conditioner is on .
If the idle speed is not within specification, see
Symptom Troubleshooting Index.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
BACK
Fuel Supply System
FUEL FILL CAP
/ FUEL TANK
FUEL PUMP
Test, page 11-117
FUEL TUBE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS
Precautions, page 11-120
Removal, page 11-120
FUEL FILTER
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test/Replacement, page 11-129
FUEL FEED LINE
FUEL RETURN LINE
FUEL VAPOR LINE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
PGM-FI MAIN RELA V
11-111 BACK
Fuel Supply System
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector.
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.3.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 7P CONNECTOR
2
3 PG1IBLK)
4 5 6 7
=
YES - Go to step 3.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
main relay and G101 .
3. Measure voltage between body ground and PGM-FI
main relay 7P connector terminal No.7.
2 3
4 5 6 7 BAT IWHT/GRN)
=
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 4.
11-112
4. Check for a blown ACG S (15A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Repair the short in the wire between the
PGM-FI main relay and the ACG S (15A) fuse .
NO-Repairthe open in the wire between the PGM-
FI main relay and the ACG S (15A) fuse .
voltage between body ground and PGM-FI main
relay 7P connector terminal No.5.
2 3
456 7
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check for a blown No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in
Is the fuse blown?
PGM-FI main relay and the No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A)
fuse .
NO-Repair the open in the wire between the PGM-
FI main relay and the No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A)
fuse .
BACK
7. Push the clutch pedal in, or shift to Park, then turn
the ignition switch to the START (III) position, and
measure voltage between body ground and PGM-FI
main relay 7P connector terminal No.2.
STS IBLU/ORN)
2 3
4 5 6 7
=
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 8.
8. Check for a blown No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)
Is the fuse blown?
PGM-FI main relay and the No. 13 STARTER
SIGNAL (7.5A) fuse .
NO - Repai r the open in the wi re between the PG M-
FI main relay and the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL
(7.5A) .
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect ECM/
PCM connector A (32P).
10. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 7P
connector terminal No.1 and ECM/PCM connector
terminal A15.
Q
9 10
23 24
32
YES- Go to step 11.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
main relay and the ECM/PCM (A 15) .
11. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (32P) and the
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector.
voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals 81
and 820, and between 89 and 820.
l'GP1 (YEL/BLK)
IGP2
1 2 3 4 5
/
7 81 (YEL/BLK)
f
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
16 17 181
f
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
/1 LG1 (BRN/BLK)
YES-Gotostep 13.
NO-Check for an open in the wires between the
PGM-FI main relay and the ECM/PCM (81, 89). If
the wires are OK, replace the PGM-FI main relay .
(cont'd)
11-113 BACK
Fuel Supply System
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then ON (II) again,
and measure voltage between the ECM/PCM
connector terminals A15 and 82 within the first 2
seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
A (32PI
Vl2
3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
/
[12 113
14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
25
2 ~
27 28 29 30
V
32
----
FLR (GRN/YELI
~
B(25PI
1 2 3 4 5
/
7
81
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
'---'---
Is there 1.0 V or less?
YES- The PGM-FI main relay may be faulty. Go to
step 14.
14. Remove the PGM-FI main relay.
11-114
15. Connect battery power to the PGM-FI main relay 7P
connector terminal No.2, and connect ground to the
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.1.
Then check for continuity between the PGM-FI
main relay 7P connector terminals No.5 and No.4.
NOTE: Use the terminal numbers shown. Ignore
the terminal numbers molded into the relay.
ToIG1
To GROUND
To ST. SWITCH
To ECM/PCM
(A15)
YES-Goto step 16.
No.2
To FUEL PUMP
NO- Replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest .
connector termi nal No.5, and connect ground to
the PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.3.
YES-Go to step 17.
connector terminal No.6, and connect ground to
the PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.1.
YES- The PGM-FI main relay is OK .
BACK
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, release
pressure from the system by loosening the fuel
pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail.
preset buttons.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at
the fuel rail.
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper one
complete turn.
NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel
pulsation damper is loosened or removed.
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040001
Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-0040100
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Use a wrench to remove the fuel pulsation damper
from its fitting, then attach the fuel pressure gauge
attachment.
07VAJ-0040100
3. Attach the fuel pressure gauge.
B
c
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the fuel
pressure regulator (B) and pinch it closed with a
clamp (C).
(cant'd)
11-115
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test (cont'd)
Ifthe engine starts, go to step 7.
If the engine does not start, go to step 6.
6. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: remove
the fuel fill cap and listen to the fuel fill port while
an assistant turns the ignition switch ON (II). You
should hear the pump run for about 2 seconds
when the ignition is turned ON (II).
If the fuel pump runs, go to step 7.
If the fuel pump does not run, test it (see page 11-
117).
7. Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure
regulator vacuum hose disconnected and clamped).
The pressure should be 320-370 kPa (3.3-3.8
kgf/cm2, 47 - 54 psi).
If the pressure is OK and engine is running, go to
step 8. If the engine is not running, repair the
cause, then continue this test.
If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 9.
8. With the engine running, unpinch and reconnect
the vacuum hose, and read the gauge again.
The pressure should be 260-310 kPa (2.7-3.2
kgf/cm
2
, 38-46 psi).
If the fuel pressure is OK, the test is complete.
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pressure
regulator again while you watch the pressure
gauge. The pressure should rise when you
disconnect the hose.
If the pressure did not rise, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-123).
If the pressure rose, but a" your readings were
lower than specified, check for a clogged fuel
filter and for leaks in the fuel lines.
If the pressure rose, but a" your readings were
higher than specified, check for a pinched or
clogged fuel return hose or line.
11-116
10. Reconnect the vacuum hose, remove the pressure
gauge, and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper with
a new washer. Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to
22 Nm (2.2kgfm, 16 Ibfft).
NOTE: Disassemble and clean the fuel pressure
gauge attachment thoroughly after use.
BACK
Fuel Pump Test
If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that
the fuel pump actually runs; when it is ON, you will hear
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel
fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for 2
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If
the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows:
1. Remove the trunk floor (see page 20-78).
2. Remove the access panel from the floor.
fuel pump 5P connector.
4. Connect the PGM-FI main relay 7P connector
FUEL PUMP
IBLK/YEL)
-
1 2 3
-
4 5 6 7
IG1
IRED/WHT)
'----
JUMPER WIRE
6. Check that battery voltage is available between the
fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body
ground when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
If battery voltage is available, check the fuel
pump ground. If the ground is OK, replace the
fuel pump (see page 11-124).
If there is no voltage, check the wire harness (see
page 11-112).
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
=
FUEL PUMP
IBLK/YELl
11-117
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, or deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
11-118 BACK
Check all hose clamps, and retighten them if necessary .
: Do not disconnect the hose from the line at these points.
B VB
[:;
To
FUEL /'"
PRESSURE / /" ,
REGULATOR /
To EVAPORATIVE B
EMISSION (EVAPI
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
A
10-15mm
(0.39-0.59 in.1
B
Clamp in the middle.
11-119
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings
Precaution
The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly connects
the in-tank fuel pump to the fuel feed line and the fuel
return line. When removing or installing the fuel pump
and fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect
the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to following:
The fuel tubes (A) and quick-connect fittings (B) are
not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them
during welding or other heat-generating procedures.
The fuel tubes and quick-connect fittings are not
acid-proof; do not touch them with a shop towel that
was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them
if they came into contact with electrolyte or
something similar.
When connecting or disconnecting the fuel tubes
and quick-connect fittings, be careful not to bend
or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are
damaged.
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when
replacing the fuel pump.
replacing the fuel filter.
replacing the fuel feed line.
replacing the fuel return line.
it has been removed from the line.
it is damaged.
MANUFACTURER TUBE RETAINER TUBE
COLOR COLOR
SANOH BLACK WHITE FEED
TUBE
(BOTH
SIDES)
TOKAI SANOH BLACK YELLOW RETURN
TUBE
(BOTH
SIDES)
A
B
11-120
Removal
1. Disconnectthe battery negative cable.
4. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings for dirt, and
clean them if necessary.
5. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and squeeze
the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release
the tabs from the locking pawls (C). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
Be careful notto damage the line (D) or other
parts.
Do not use tools.
If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
BACK
6. Check the contact area (A) ofthe line (B) for dirt and
damage.
o Ifthe surface is dirty, clean it.
o If the surface is rusty or damaged, replace the
fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel feed line and fuel
return line.
B
7. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
cover the disconnected connector and line end with
plastic bags (A).
NOTE:
o The retainer cannot be reused once it has been
removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when
- replacing the fuel pump.
- replacing the fuel filter.
- replacing the fuel feed line.
- replacing the fuel return line.
- it has been removed from the line.
- it is damaged.
Installation
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (8) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if necessary.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the
retainer is damaged, or after
o replacing the fuel pump.
o replacing the fuel filter.
o replacing the fuel feed line.
o replacing the fuel return line .
removing the retainer from the line.
B
(cont'd)
11-121
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Installation (cont'd)
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
the mating line.
A
o
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A),
and align the retainer (B) locking pawls with the
connector (C) grooves. Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the line until both retainer
pawls lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of
new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer:
c
/ /"
11-122
Reconnection to existing retainer:
5. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually
and by pulling the connector.
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable, and turn the
ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will run for
about two seconds, and fuel pressure will rise.
Repeat 2 or 3 times, and check that there is no
leakage in the fuel supply system.
BACK
Replacement
1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure
regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-
115).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose.
3. Remove two 6 mm retainer bolts (A) and the fuel
pressure regulator (B).
A
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 9lbf.ftl
I
4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (C), and
carefully install it into its proper position.
5. Install the fuel pressure regulator and the 6 mm
retainer bolts.
6. Reconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate
the starter. After the fuel pump runs for
approximately 2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the
fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check
for fuel leakage.
Fuel Filter Replacement
After making sure that the fuel pump and the fuel
pressure regulator are OK, replace the fuel filter
whenever fuel pressure drops below the specified value
(320-370 kPa, 3.3-3.8 kgf/cm
2
, 47-54 psi with the fuel
pressure regulator vacuum hose disconnected and
pinched).
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-124).
2. Remove the fuel filter (A).

D
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new base gasket, then check these items:
When connecting the wire harness, make sure
the connection is secure and the terminal (B) is
firmly locked into place.
Check that the tab of the clamp (C) does not
interfere with the wire harness.
Do not push the lower part of the suction filter (D).
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (E),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
11-123
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Replacement
1. Remove the trunk floor (see page 20-78).
4. Remove the fuel cap.
5. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-115).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel
pump.
7. Remove the bolts (A), and the fuel tank unit (B).
A
4Nm
(0.4 kgfm, 3 Ibfft)
\
11-124
8. Remove the bracket (A), the fuel filter (B), the fuel
gauge sending unit (C), the hose (D), and the wire
harness (E).
A
9. When connecting the fuel pump, make sure the
connection is secure and the suction filter (H) is
firmly connected to the fuel pump (I).
with a new base gasket, then check these items:
the connection is secure and the terminal (F) is
firmly locked into the place.
Check that the tab of the clamp (G) does not
Do not push the lower part of the suction filter.
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
BACK
Fuel Tank Replacement
Removal
3. Drain the fuel tank: Remove the fuel tank unit (see
page 11-124). Using a hand pump, hose, and
container suitable for gasoline, draw the fuel from
the fuel tank.
4. Remove the trunk floor and the access panel (A)
from the floor. Disconnect the fuel tank 5P
connector (8).
5. Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, then raise the
vehicle and make sure it is securely supported.
Remove the rear wheels.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Remove the catalytic converter (see page 9-5).
8. Remove the fuel line cover (A). Disconnect the fuel
fill neck tube (8), the fuel tank vapor recirculation
tube (C) and the fuel tank vapor control signal tube
(D) from the fuel fill lines (E).
A
D
9. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor vent tube (A) and the
quick-connect fittings (8). Disconnect the hose (C).
Remove the hose from the line holder (D).
Disconnect the hose (E) from the EVAP two way
valve (F). Remove the line holder (G).
F
D
'"
D G
(cont'd)
11-125
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Replacement (cont'd)
10. Ifthe vehicle has ABS, disconnectthe wheel sensor
2P connectors (A); if not, go to step 11.
A
11. Remove the stabilizer bar (A), the heat shield (B)
and the parking brake cable bracket (C).
S
12. If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, go to step 14. If
it has rear disc brakes, remove the clip (A) and
parking brake cable (B), two caliper bolts (C),
caliper body (D), and brake hose bracket (E).
11-126
13. Hook the caliper body (A) on to the damper spring
(B). Go to step 16.
A
14. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel
cylinder (B).
A
15 Nm (1.5 kgfm.
11lbfftl
B
15. Remove the brake drum and brake shoes. Remove
the two mounting bolts for the parking brake cable
from the backing plate, then remove the parking
brake cable using a 12 mm offset wrench.
BACK
16. Remove the flange bolt (A).
~
~
//
A
18. Remove the bolts (A) and the fuel tank straps (8).
A A
c
B
19. Remove the lines from the fuel line holder (C).
20. Lift the fuel tank out of the sub frame.
Installation
1. Install the fuel tank straps (A), and tighten the bolts
(8). Install the lines to the fuel line holder (C).
B
3BNm
13.9kgf.m,
~ l b \ i ~ ~ r ~
2. Place the jack, or support, under the rear
suspension sub frame. Install the rear suspension
sub frame, aligning the pins (A) with the holes in
the rear suspension sub frame.
A
3. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of
removal.
A
4. If equipped with drum brakes, bleed the brake system
after installing the brake hose (see page 19-7).
If not, go to step 5.
5. After installation, adjust the wheel alignment (see
page 18-5).
11-127
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-60).
1. Check the No.9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT
LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box before testing.
3. Remove the spare tire lid.
5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.
6. Measure voltage between fuel pump 5P
ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5
and8 v.
o If the voltage is OK, go to step 6.
o If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- an open in the YEl/BLU or BlK wire.
- poor ground (G552).
11-128
8. Connect fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.
1 and No.2 with a jumper wire, then turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
JUMPER
WIRE
(VEl/BLU)
(BlK)
9. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts
moving toward the "F" mark.
o If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at
all, replace the gauge.
o If the pointer moves, the gauge is OK; inspect the
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-129).
NOTE:
o Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer
reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so
may damage the fuel gauge.
o The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, so the
fuel level is continuously indicated even when the
ignition switch is OFF. The pointer moves more
slowly than that of a bimetal type.
BACK
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test/Replacement
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel
pump.
7. Remove the bolts (A) and the fuel tank unit (B).
A
4Nm
L ~ ~ ~ ~ 1.\' .. '''' 3 Iblft]
8. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.
2 terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF
FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the
fuel gauge sending unit (A).
Float Position
Resistance ( Q )
Terminal side of
male terminals
with a new base gasket and new quick connect
fittings, then check these items:
the connection is secure and the terminal (B) is
firmly locked into place.
Check that the tab of the clamp (C) does not
Do not fold over the lower part of the mesh filter
(D).
When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (A),
D
11-129 BACK
Fuel Supply System
Low Fuel Indicator Light Test
NOTE: For the low fuel indicator circuit diagram, see
page 22-60.
LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fusel
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Drain the fuel tank: Remove the fuel return line
from the fuel pressure regulator, and attach a
suitable hose to the regulator fitting. Place the
other end of the hose in a container suitable for
gasoline. Start the engine, and run it until the tank
is empty (the engine stalls).
4. Add less than 8.5 a (2.2 U.S. Gal, 1.8Imp. Gal) of fuel,
and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The low fuel
indicator light should come on within 4 minutes.
o If the light comes on within 4 minutes, go to step
9.
o If the light does not come on within 4 minutes, go
to step 5.
11-130
8. Connect the fuel pump 5P connector terminals No.
1 and No.3 with a jumper wire.
o If the light comes on, replace the fuel gauge
sending unit (see page 11-129).
o If the light does not come on, check for:
- an open in the L T GRN/RED wire between the
fuel gauge sending unit and the fuel gauge
assembly.
- a blown bulb.
- a poor ground (G552).
JUMPER WIRE
IBLKI
IL T GRN/REDI
9. Add 4 a of fuel (1.1 U.S. Gal, 0.9 Imp. Gal). The light
should go off within 4 minutes.
BACK
Intake Air System
AIR CLEANER
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-132
page 11-135
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-136
THROTTLE CABLE
11-131
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test
NOTE:
Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. It is preset at the
factory.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp has been reported
on, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) (see
page 11-3).
1. With the engine off, check the throttle cable
operation.The cable should move without binding
or sticking.
If the cable is OK, go to step 2.
If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.
If it's faulty, reroute it or replace it and adjust it
(see page 11-134), then go to step 2.
2. Operate the throttle lever by hand to see if the
throttle valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight.
If there is excessive play in the throttle valve
shaft, or any binding in the throttle valve at the
fully closed position, replace the throttle body .
. If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 3.
3. Connect a scan tool to the Data Link Connector.
5. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. There
should be approx. 10% when the throttle is fully
closed and approx. 90% when the throttle is fully
opened.
If the throttle position is correct, the throttle body
is OK.
If the throttle position is not correct, replace the
throttle body.
11-132
Intake Air Bypass Control Valve
Test
1. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let
it idle.
2. Disconnect the air assist hose (A) from the lAC
valve (8) then connect it to a vacuum pump/gauge
(C).
D
3. Start the engine, then let it idle.
4. Check the vacuum.
Is there any vacuum
YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Repair the air assist hose .
5. Disconnect the air assist hose from the vacuum
pump/gauge, then connect the air assist hose, the
lAC valve and the vacuum pump/gauge by using a
three-way joint (D).
6. Disconnect the lAC valve 3P connector.
7. Check the vacuum.
Is there vacuum above 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 12 in.
Hg)?
YES-Replace the lAC valve .
NO-The intake air bypass control system is OK .
BACK
Air Cleaner EI ementR eplacement
AIR CLEANER
HOUSING
AIRCLEA
COVER NER HOUSING
11-133
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Cable Adjustment
1. Push the throttle link (A) toward the throttle lever
(8) until there is no clearance.
A
B
2. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable
deflection (A) should be 10-12 mm (3/8-1/2 in.).
e
A
3. If deflection (A) is not within spec (10-12 mm, 3/8
-1/2 in.), loosen the locknut (8), turn the adjusting
nut (C) until the deflection is as specified, then
retighten the locknut.
4. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle
valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
11-134
BACK
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Do not adjust the throttle stop screw.
After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-541 and the throttle cable (see page 11-1341.
The TP sensor is not removable.
TPsENsOR MAP SENSOR
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfftl
THROTTLE CABLE
11-135
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Disassembly IReassembly
O-RING
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
11-136
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below
Threshold
NOTE: If some of the OTCs listed below are stored at
the same time as OTC P0420, troubleshoot those OTCs
first, then recheck for OTC P0420.
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Heater
comes on.
3. Except F23A4 SULEVengine: Test-drive at 40-55
mph (64-88 km/h) for approx. 2 minutes. Then
completely closed. Then reduce the vehicle speed
to 35 mph (56 km/h), and try to hold it until the scan
tool indicates FAIL or PASS as the TWC test result.
F23A4 SULEV engine: Test-drive at 50-55 mph (80
-88 km/h) for approx. 2 minutes. Then decelerate
for at least 4 seconds with the throttle completely
closed. Then accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h), and
try to hold it until the scan tool indicates FAIL or
PASS as the TWC test result.
Is the test result FAIL?
YES - Check the three way catalytic converter
(TWC). If necessary, replace the TWC .
time .
11-137 BACK
EGRSystem
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow
2. Test-drive under the following conditions. Then
check for a Temporary DTC with the scan tool.
o Without any electrical load.
o Decelerate from 55 mph (88 km/h) for at least 5
seconds.
Is Temporary OTC P0401 indicated?
YES-Clean the intake manifold EGR port with
carburetor cleaner. Clean the passage inside the
EGR valve with carburetor cleaner, or replace the
EGRvalve .
NO-Intermittent failure, go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
5. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR
valve connector terminal No.4.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
E-EGR PG1
6. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
Did the engine stall or run rough?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK atthis
time .
NO- Clean the intake manifold EGR port with
carburetor cleaner. Clean the passage inside the
EGR valve with carburetor cleaner, or replace the
EGR valve .
11-138
DTC P1491: EGR Valve Insufficient Lift
,. Resetthe ECM/PCM (see page 11-4).
comes on.
4. Test-drive the vehicle for approx. 10 minutes.
Try to keep the engine speed in the 1,700- 2,500
rpm range.
Is Temporary OTC P1491 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
EGR valve and the ECM/PCM .
8. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector
E-EGRIPNKI
1 2 3
4 6
PG11BLKI
NO-Go to step 9.
BACK
SG2
(GRN/BLKI
4
'-----I ':i. l-----'
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Gotostep 12.
VCC2
(VEL/BLUI
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR C (31 PI
SG2 (GRN/BLKI
1 2 3
/
5 6 8 9 10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
VCC2 (VEL/BLUI
':i.
Wire side offemale terminals
YES- Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM (C18, C28) .
14. At the sensor side, measure resistance between
EGR valve 6P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
EGRL
(WHT/BLKI
SG2 (GRN/BLKI
6
Is the resistance 100 kQ or more?
YES- Replace the EGR valve .
NO- Go to step 15.
15. Measure resistance between EGR valve 6P
EGRL
(WHT/BLKI
VCC2
(VEL/BLUI
Is there 100 kQ or more?
YES- Replace the EGR valve .
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Reconnect the EGR valve connector.
(cont'd)
11-139
BACK
EGRSystem
EGRL
':i
SG2
(WHT/BLK)
(GRN/BLK)
I
1 2 3
V
5 6
17
8 9 10
L!
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
Is there approx. 1.2 V?
NO- Repair short in the wire between the EGR
valve and the PCM (C8) .
20. Connect EGR valve 6P connector terminal No.1 to
I ..---
1 2 3
4
1/
6
EGRL
(WHT/BLK) JUMPER WIRE
-'-
11-140
I EGRl (WHT/BlK)
1 2 3
1/
5 6 7 8 9 10
V 1/
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
V
Q
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM (C6) .
=
23. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve
6P connector terminal No.4 with a jumper wire.
E-EGR PG1
24. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No.6 with a jumper wire.
Does the engine stall or run rough?
NO- Replace the EGR valve .
26. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (25P).
BACK
28. Connect EGR valve 6P connector terminal No.4 to
-
1 2 3
4
/
6
E-EGRIPNK )
JUMPER WI RE
-....
=
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B 125P)
E-EGRIPNK)
I
1 2 345
V 7 81
9 10 1112 1314
/
16 17 18/
19 20

23 24 25
JUMPER WIRE
_ ....
=
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR B 125P)
E-EGRIPNK)
I
1 2 345
V 7 81
9 10 1112 13 14V 1617 181
19 20

23 24 25
Q
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EGR
NO-Go to step 31.
31. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
2 3
4
NO- Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101 .
11-141
BACK
EGRSystem
DTC P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor
Circuit High Voltage
Is OTe P1498 indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
EGR valve and the ECM/PCM .
SG2
(GRN/BLKI
4
'-----;'Y t----'
YES-Replace the EGR valve .
NO-Goto step 7.
11-142
VCC2
IVEL/BLUI
SG2 (GRN/BLKI
1 2 3
/
5 6 8 9 10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
VCC2 (VEL/BLUI
'Y
YES-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM (C18) .
BACK
PCVSystem
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (8), and
connections for leaks or restrictions.
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the
PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
11-143 BACK
Evaporative Emission Control System
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL
VALVE
Test, page 11-160
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO-WAY VALVE
Test, page 11-159 FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
11-144 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Range/Performance
Problem
Vacuum Pump/Gauge. 0-30 in. Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
3. Monitor FTP sensor voltage with the Honda PGM
Tester. or measure voltage between ECM/PCM
connector terminals A29 and C18.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the FTPsensor .
5. Open the fuel vent assembly cover (A) in front of
the EVAP canister.
A
6. Disconnect the hose between the EVAP two way
valve and the FTP sensor at the EVAP two way
valve end.
7. Connect a vacuum pump to the open end of that
hose.
Tester. or measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals A29 and C18. and carefully squeeze the
vacuum pump slowly.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
10. The voltage should smoothly drop from approx.
2.5 V down to approx. 1.5 V. STOP applying
vacuum when the voltage drops to approx. 1.5 V or
damage to the FTP sensor may occur.
Does the voltage drop to approx. 1.5 V and hold?
YES-Check for misrouted.leaking. or broken FTP
sensor vacuum lines. If the vacuum lines are OK.
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and recheck
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away.
replace the original ECM/PCM .
NO-Replace the FTPsensor .
11-145
BACK
OTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
1. Check the vacuum lines of the FTP sensor for
misrouting, leakage, breakage, or clogging.
Are the vacuum lines OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Repair or replace vacuum lines as
necessary .
Tester, or measure voltage between body ground
and ECM/PCM connector terminal A29.
/
2 3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/
12 13 14 15
1/
17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
32
, PTANKILT GRN)
=
FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM .
NO - Go to step 6.
11-146
7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
10. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
YES- Go to step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM (C28) .
BACK
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES - Replace the FTP sensor .
NO- Go to step 12.
14. Check for continuity between FTPsensor3P
FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM (A29) .
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
1. Check the vacuum lines of the FTP sensor for
misrouting, leakage, breakage, or clogging.
Are the vacuum lines OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Repair or replace vacuum lines as
necessary .
Tester, or measure voltage between body ground
and ECM/PCM connector terminal A29.
VI2
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/1
112113 14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
32
fAN" III GRNI
=
FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM .
NO - Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
11-147
BACK
7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
YES- Go to step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM (C28) .
11-148
YES-Replace the FTPsensor .
NO-Go to step 12.
terminals A29 and C18.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
YES-Repair open in the wire between the FTP
sensor and ECM/PCM (A29) .
recheck (see page 11-5). If the system/indication
BACK
DTC P1456: EVAP Control System Leakage
(Fuel Tank System)
1 NOTICE 1
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or cause
eventual fuel tank failure
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 -- 30 in. Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
This is a two-trip code; once cleared, it cannot be
reproduced in one trip. Also, certain specific driving
and ambient conditions must occur before the ECM/
PCM will complete the system checks. Additional test
drives may still not meet the specific conditions needed
to reproduce the code.
Follow these troubleshooting procedures carefully to
ensure the integrity of the system and to confirm the
cause of the problem or code.
NOTE: Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for
testing is fresh fuel and less than a full tank of fuel. If
possible, to assist in leak detection, add one gallon of
fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank),
just before starting these procedures.
Fuel fill cap check
1. Check the fuel fill cap. It must be a gray or black
OEM cap and be tightened at least 3 "clicks" to
properly seal the system.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace or tighten the cap .
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged?
YES - Replace the fuel fill cap (gray or black
colored cap) .
NO- The fuel fill cap is OK. Go to step 3.
EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP two-
way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the
hose.
A973X-041-XXXXX
4. With the Honda PGM Tester in the EVAP test mode,
turn on the bypass solenoid, or connect ECM
jumper wire.
V]2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10 ,/"1
112113
*
15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 1
125 26 27 28 29 30
V

2WBS(BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
-'-
=
(cont'd)
11-149
BACK
6. Apply vacuum to the hose.
Does the valve hold vacuum?
VES- Go to step 7.
NO-The EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two-
way valve is OK. Go to step 12.
8. Disconnectthe EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P
connector.
9. Check for continuity between EVAP bypass
solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and
body ground.
EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VES-Gotostep 10.
NO-Repair open in wire between the EVAP bypass
solenoid valve and ECM/PCM (A3) .
11-150
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
11. Measure voltage between EVAP bypass solenoid
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VES- Replace the EVAP bypass solenoid valve (A)
and the O-rings (B) .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
bypass solenoid valve and No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM)
CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse .
BACK
12. Plug the upper port (A) of the EVAPtwo-way valve.
A
~ X _ X X X X X
13. While monitoring the FTPsensorvoltage with the
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring the voltage
between PCM connector terminals A29 and C18,
slowly pump vacuum until the voltage drops to
approximately 1.5 volts.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
SG2 (GRN/BlK)
Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold for at
least 20 seconds?
YES - The EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two-
NO-Repair leakage from the EVAP bypass
solenoid valve, EVAP two-way valve, FTP sensor,
orO-rings .
Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test
14. Perform the fuel tank vapor control valve test (see
page 11-160).
Is the fuel tank vapor control valve normal?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO - Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve .
15. Tighten the fuel cap 3 "clicks", then monitor fuel
tank pressure readings with the Honda PGM Tester.
16. Start the engine. Let the engine idle for 5 minutes.
17. Check the FTP sensor reading.
J
I
B
C F
Is the reading above 0.53 kPa (0.16 in. Hg 4 mm
Hg) pressure, or approx 3V ?
YES - Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and
retest (see page "-5). If the symptom/indication
NO-Check the following parts for leaks:
Fuel tank (A)
Fuel fill cap (B)
Fuel fill pipe (C)
Fuel tank vapor control valve (0)
Fuel tank vapor recirculation valve (E)
Fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (F)
Fuel tank vapor signal tube (G)
Fuel tank vapor vent tube (H)
EVAP two-way valve (I)
FTP sensor (J)
- Repair or replace any leaking parts .
11-151
BACK
DTC P1457: EVAP Control System Leakage
(EVAP Canister System)
I NOTICE I
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or cause
eventual fuel tank system failure.
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 - 30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
This is a two-trip code; Once cleared, it cannot be
reproduced in one trip. Also certain specific driving and
ambient conditions must occur before the ECM/PCM
will complete the system checks. Additional test drives
may still not meet the specific conditions needed to
reproduce the code.
Follow these troubleshooting procedures carefully to
ensure the integrity of the system and to comfirm the
cause of the problem or code.
NOTE: Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for
testing is fresh fuel, and there must be less than a full
tank of fuel. If possible, to assist in leak detection, add
one gallon of fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not
fill the tank), just before starting these procedures.
11-152
EVAP Canister Purge Valve Test
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP
canister purge valve (A), and connect the vacuum
pump to the hose.
2. Turn the EVAP canister purge valve on with the
Honda PGM Tester, then connect ECM/PCM connector
terminal A6 to body ground with a jumper wire.
(CS (RED/VEL)
V/2
3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
//
/12L13 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 /
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
32
-
JUMPER WIRE
-"-
BACK
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The EVAP canister purge valve is OK. Go to
step 10.
S. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
7. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VAlVE2PCONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and ECM/PCM (AS) .
9. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BlK/VEl)
YES - Replace the EVAP canister purge valve .
canister purge valve and No. S ECU (ECM/PCM)
(cont'd)
11-153 BACK
OTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP two-
way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the
hose.
A973X-041-XXXXX
YES - The EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two-
NO-Go to step 13.
14. Disconnect the EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P
connector.
body ground.
11-154
VALVE2PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 16.
NO- Replace the EVAP bypass solenoid valve (A)
and O-rings (8) .
body ground.
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP
bypass solenoid valve and ECM/PCM (A3) .
BACK
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test
18. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP
canister filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump to
the hose.
19. With the Honda PGM Tester in the EVAP test mode,
turn on the bypass solenoid, or connect ECM/PCM
jumper wire.
ECM/PCM CONNECTOR A 132PI
I VSV ILT GRN/WHTI
VI2
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/1
l12113 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 I
25 26 27 28 29 30
1/

JAMPERWIRE
-'-
=
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
YES- The EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK. Go
to step 27.
NO-Goto step 22.
23. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
24. Check for continuity between EVAP canister vent
shut valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE2PCONNECTOR
=
NO- Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and ECM/PCM (A4) .
(cont'd)
11-155
BACK
26. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
IG1 (BlK/YELI
=
YES - Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(A) and O-ring (B) .
canister vent shut valve and No.6 ECU (ECM/PCM)
11-156
Canister System Leak Test
28. Connect two three-way tee fittings (A) into the hose
from the EVAP canister to the EVAP two-way valve.
Connect the FTP sensor to one of the tee fittings
and the vacuum pump to the other.
29. Remove the vent hose from the EVAP canister vent
shut valve (A) and plug the port (B) to seal the fresh
air vent for the EVAP canister.
A
BACK
31. While monitoring the Fuel Tank Pressure sensor
voltage with the Honda PGM Tester, or measuring
voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A
29 and C18, slowly pump the vacuum pump.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
SG2 IGRN/BLK)
32. Continue to pump until the voltage drops to about
1.5 V. Make sure your vacuum pump has no leak.
33. Monitor the voltage for 20 seconds.
Does the voltage drop to about 1.5 V and hold for
at least 20 seconds?
YES -I nspect the EVAP canister vent shut valve
line and connections .
NO - Go to step 34.
35. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A) from the
EVAP canister, and cap the canister port (B).
B
37. While monitoring FTPsensorvoltagewiththe
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between
ECM/PCM connector terminals A29 and C18, slowly
pump the vacuum pump.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
SG2 IGRN/BLKI
38. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops
to about 1.5 V.
39. Check the voltage for 20 seconds.
least 20 seconds?
YES-Inspect the fuel tank vapor line and
connections for vacuum leaks .
NO- Go to step 40.
(cont'd)
11-157
BACK
41. Disconnectthe purge line hose (A) from the
canister at the metal line and cap the canister port
(B).
43. While monitoring FTP sensor voltage with the
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between
ECM/PCM connector terminals A29 and C18, slowly
pump the vacuum pump.
ECM/PCM CONNECTORS
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
11-158
44. Continue to pump until the voltage drops to about
1.5 V. Make sure the engine coolant temperature is
still above 95F (35C) and your vacuum pump has
no leak.
45. Monitor the voltage for 20 seconds.
at least 20 seconds?
YES -Inspect the EVAP canister purge valve line
and connections for vacuum leaks. If they are OK,
do the EVAP two-way valve test, and fuel tank
vapor control valve test (see page 11-160) .
NO- Replace the EVAP canister .
BACK
EVAP Two Way Valve Test
Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0- 4 in.Hg 07JAZ-0010008
2. Disconnect the vapor line from the EVAP two-way
valve (A), and connect the line to aT-fitting (8) from
the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump as shown.
07 JAZ-001 0008
---------
/
A
A973X-041-XXXXX
3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while
watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize
momentarily at 0.8 - 2.1 kPa (6 - 16 mmHg, 0.2 - 0.6
in.Hg). If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below
0.8 kPa (6 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.1 kPa (16
mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest.
4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum
fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum
gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure
side (A) as shown.
A973X-041-XXXXX
5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the
gauge. The pressure should stabilize momentarily
above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg).
If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve
opens) above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3in.Hg), the
valve is OK.
Ifthe pressure stabilizes below 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg,
0.3 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest.
11-159
BACK
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test
Float Test
1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full.
2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the fuel tank
pressure, then reinstall the cap.
3. Remove the left rear inner fender. Disconnect the
fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (A), and connect a
vacuum pump to the vapor recirculation tube.
4. Plug the line (8).
5. Apply vacuum to the fuel tank vapor recirculation
tube (A) .
If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank vapor
control valve (see page 11-162).
If the vacuum does not hold, the float is OK.
Go to step 1 of the valve test.
11-160
Valve Test
1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full.
3. Remove the left rear inner fender. Disconnect the
fuel tank vapor signal tube (A).
A
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister (8), and then plug the ports with plugs (e).
A
D
A
E
A973X-041-
XXXXX
5. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D) from the EVAP
canister vent shut valve (E), and connect a hose (F)
and a vacuum pump to the EVAP canister vent shut
valve.
6. Pump the vacuum pump 80 times .
If the vacuum holds, go to step 7 .
If the vacuum does not hold, go to step 10.
BACK
7. Connect a second vacuum pump to the fuel tank
vapor signal tube (A).
8. Apply vacuum to the fuel tank vapor signal
tube, then check the vacuum on the pump in
step 6 .
A
control valve (see page 11-162) .
If the vacuum is released, the EVAP canister vent
shut valve is OK. Go to step 10.
9. Fill the fuel tank with fuel, then check for fuel in the
two way valve and fuel tank vapor recirculation
hose (B).
NOTE: At either location, tiny droplets of fuel are
normal.
If fuel runs out of the hoses at either location,
replace the fuel tank vapor control valve.
If fuel does not run out of the hoses at either
location, the fuel tank vapor control system is
normal.
Check for fuel
running out.
10. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor hose quick
disconnect from the EVAP canister, then plug the
port on the canister. Reapply vacuum (80 pumps).
vent shut valve (see page 11-162).
If the vacuum does not hold,inspectthe EVAP
canister vent shut valve O-ring. If the O-ring is OK,
replace the EVAP canister and repeat step 4.
11-161 BACK
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11-125).
2. Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve (A) from
the fuel tank (8).
3. Replace the base gasket (C).
4. Install the fuel tank vapor control valve (A).
5. Install the fuel tank (see page 11-125).
11-162 BACK
Transaxle
Clutch
Special Tools ............................................................. 12-2
Component Location Index ..................................... 12-3
Clutch Pedal and Clutch Switch Adjustment .......... 12-4
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement ..................... 12-5
Slave Cylinder Replacement .................................... 12-6
Clutch Replacement .................................................. 12-7
Manual Transmission ....... .................. ........... 13-1
MIT Differential ............................................. 13-53
Automatic Transmission .............................. 14-1
AIT Differential.......... .................................... 14-198
Drivelinel Axle .......... ...................................... 16-1
Clutch
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description
Qty
CD 07JAF-PM7011A Clutch Alignment Disc 1
07 LAB-PVOO 1 00 or 07924-PD20003 Ring Gear Holder 1
07LAF-PT00110 Clutch Alignment Shaft 1
cD 07936-3710100 Remover Handle 1
CD
12-2
BACK
/
MIT ASSEMBLY
PEDAL PIN
"" LOCK PIN
CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCHUNE
~ R S R V O I R HOSE
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FLYWHEEL
Inspection, step 1 on page 12-9
Removal, step 1 on page 12-9
Installation, step 1 on page 12-9
DOWEL PIN
CLUTCH DISC
Removal, page 12-7
PRESSURE PLATE
Removal, page 12-7
~ Installation, step 1 on page 12-10
SLAVE CYLINDER
RELEASE BEARING
Replacement, step 1 on page 12-11
12-3
BACK
Clutch
Clutch Pedal and Clutch Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
NOTE:
To check the clutch switch (see page 4-49).
The clutch is self-adjusting to compensate for wear.
If there is no clearance between the master cylinder
piston and push rod, the release bearing is held
against the diaphragm spring, which can result in
clutch slippage or other clutch problems.
1. Loosen locknut (A), and back off the clutch switch
(8)(or adjusting bolt) until it no longer touches the
clutch pedal (C).
D
7Nm
(0.7 kgfm. 5lbfftl
H
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfftl
c
2. Loosen locknut (D), and turn the push rod (E) in or
out to get the specified stroke (F) and height (G) at
the clutch pedal.
Clutch Pedal Stroke: 141-151 mm (5.6-5.9 in.)
Clutch Pedal Height: 190 mm (7.5 in.)
3. Tighten locknut (D).
4. Turn the clutch switch (8) in until it contacts the
clutch pedal (C).
12-4
5. Turn the clutch switch (8) in an additional 3/4 to 1
turn.
6. Tighten locknut (A).
7. Loosen locknut (H) and the clutch interlock switch
(I ).
8. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
9. Release the clutch pedal 15 - 20 mm (0.59 - 0.79 in.)
from the fully pressed position, and hold it there.
Adjust the position of the clutch interlock switch (I)
so that the engine will start with the clutch pedal in
this position.
10. Tighten locknut (H).
BACK
Clutch Master Cylinder Replacement
NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint,
wash it off immediately with water.
1. Remove the brake fluid from the clutch master
cylinder reservoir (AI with a syringe.
A
\
B
2. Disconnect the reservoir hose (BI from the clutch
master cylinder reservoir. Plug the end of the
reservoir hose with a shop towel to prevent brake
fluid from coming out.
3. Remove the clutch master cylinder reservoir.
4. Remove the power relay (el.
5. Pry out the lock pin (AI, and pull the pedal pin (BI
out of the yoke. Remove the nuts (el.
C A
~
/
B
.. .wmit
6. Remove the retaining clip (AI. Disconnect the clutch
line (BI, and remove the a-ring (el. Plug the end of
the clutch line with a shop towel to prevent brake
fluid from coming out.
7. Remove the clutch master cylinder (DI, then
remove the reservoir hose (EI from the clutch
master cylinder (DI.
8. Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse
order of removal. Install the new a-ring. Tighten
the master cylinder mounting nuts to 13 Nm (1.3
kgfm, 9.4 Ibfftl.
9. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system (see step 5 on
page 12-61.
12-5 BACK
Clutch
Slave Cylinder Replacement
NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint,
wash it off immediately with water.
1. Remove the mounting bolts (A), the slave cylinder
(B), and clutch line mounting bolt (e).
2. Remove the roll pin.
12-6
3. Remove the slave cylinder (A) and a-ring (B). Plug
the end of the clutch line with a shop towel to
prevent brake fluid from coming out.

(PIN 08798-9002)
4. Install the slave cylinder in the reverse order of
removal. Install the new a-ring. Apply Super High
Temp Urea Grease (PIN 08798-9002) to the push
rod of the slave cylinder. Tighten the slave cylinder
mounting bolts to 23 Nm (2.3 kgfm, 17 Ibfft).
5. Bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Tighten the
bleeder screw to 8 Nm (0.8 kgfm, 6 Ibfft).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the slave cylinder
by overtightening the bleeder screw.
Attach a hose to the bleeder screw (A), and
suspend the hose in a container of brake fluid.
Make sure there is an adequate supply offluid at
the clutch master cylinder, then slowly pump the
clutch pedal until no more bubbles appear at the
bleeder hose.
Refill the clutch master cylinder with fluid when
done.
Always use only Genuine Honda DOT 3 brake
fluid.
A
BACK
Clutch Replacement
Clutch alignment shaft 07LAF-PT00110
Clutch alignment disc 07JAF-PM7011A
Remover handle 07936-3710100
Ring gear holder 07LAB-PV00100 or
07924-PD20003
Pressure Plate and Clutch Disc Removal
1. Assemble the special tools as shown. Assemble the
Clutch Alignment Disc with side marked" A" facing
the diaphragm spring.
2. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for height
using the special tools and a feeler gauge (A). If the
height is more than the service limit, replace the
pressure plate.
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
07936-3710100
0.6 mm (0.02 in.) max.
0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
3. Install the special tools.
\
,
4. To prevent warping, unscrew the pressure plate
mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross pattern in several
steps, then remove the pressure plate (B).
5. Inspect the pressure plate (A) surface for wear,
cracks, and burning.
B
6. Inspect the fingers of the diaphragm spring (B) for
wear at the release bearing contact area.
(cont'd)
12-7
BACK
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
7. Inspect for warpage using a straight edge (A) and
feeler gauge (B). Measure across the pressure plate
(e). If the warpage is more than the service limit,
replace the pressure plate.
8. Remove the clutch disc and special tools.
9. Inspect the lining of the clutch disc for signs of
slipping or oil. If the clutch disc is burned black or
oil soaked, replace it.
12-8
10. Measure the clutch disc thickness. Ifthe thickness
is less than the service limit, replace the clutch disc.
(0.33-0.35 in.) max.
11. Measure the rivet depth from the clutch disc lining
surface (A) to the rivets (B) on both sides. If the
rivet depth is less than the service limit, replace the
clutch disk.
(0.065-0.089 in.) max.
B
BACK
Flywheel Inspection
1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage.
2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the
flywheel for wear, cracks and burning.
3. Measure the flywheel (A) runout using a dial
indicator (B) through at least two full turns with the
engine installed. Push against the flywheel each
time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust
washer clearance. If the runout is more than the
service limit, replace the flywheel and recheck the
runout.
Standard (New):
Service Limit:
A
0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max.
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Flywheel Removal
1. Install the special tool.
07LAB-PV00100 or
07924-PD20003
2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross
pattern in several steps, then remove the flywheel.
Flywheel Installation
1. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft
dowel pin, and install the flywheel. Install the
mounting bolts finger-tight.
2. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel
mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several
steps.
Fl VWHEEl MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE:
(cont'd)
12-9
BACK
Clutch
Clutch Replacement (cont'd)
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Installation
1. Install the ring gear holder.
07LAF-PT00110
A

(PIN 08798-9002)
3. Install the pressure plate (A) and the mounting
bolts (8) finger-tight.
\
,-
A
12-10
4. Torque the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten the bolts in several steps to prevent
warping the diaphragm spring.
PRESSURE PLATE MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE:
6. Make sure the diaphragm spring fingers are all the
same height.
BACK
Release Bearing Replacement
1. Remove the release fork boot (A) from the clutch
housing (8).
2. Remove the release fork (C) from the clutch
housing (8) by squeezing the release fork set spring
(D) with pliers. Remove the release bearing (E).
3. Check the release bearing for play by spinning it by
hand. If there is excessive play, replace the release
bearing with a new one.
NOTE: The release bearing is packed with grease.
Do not wash it in solvent.
4. Apply Super High Temp Urea Grease (PIN 08798-
9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt
(8), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing
guide (D) in the shaded areas.
B D
1.0-1.69
(0.04-0.06oz)
5. With the release fork slid between the release
bearing pawls, install the release bearing on the
mainshaft while inserting the release fork through
the hole in the clutch housing.
6. Align the detent of the release fork (A) with the
release fork bolt (8), then press the release fork
over the release fork bolt (B) squarely.
7. Install the release fork boot (E), make sure the boot
seals around the release fork and clutch housing.
8. Move the release fork (A) right and left to make
sure that it fits properly against the release bearing
(8), and that the release bearing slides smoothly.
B
12-11
BACK
BACK
Transaxle
Manual Transmission
Special Tools ................................ 13-2
Transmission Fluid Inspection
and Replacement ..................... 13-3
Back-up Light Switch Test .......... 13-3
Transmission Removal ............... 13-4
Transmission Insta"ation ........... 13-10
Shift Arm Replacement ............... 13-18
Transmission Disassembly ........ 13-21
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance
Inspection ................................. 13-25
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance
Inspection ................................. 13-26
Mainshaft Disassembly .............. 13-28
Mainshaft Inspection ................... 13-29
Mainshaft Reassembly ............... 13-30
Countershaft Assembly Clearance
Inspection ................................. 13-32
Countershaft Disassembly ......... 13-34
Countershaft Inspection ............. 13-35
Countershaft Reassembly .......... 13-36
Shift Forks Clearance
Inspection ................................. 13-39
Shift Forks Disassembly/
Reassembly .............................. 13-40
Synchro Sleeve and Hub
Inspection and Reassembly
Synchro Ring and Gear
Inspection ................................ .
Countershaft Bearing
Replacement ........................... .
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Replacement ........................... .
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance
Adjustment .............................. .
Transmission Reassembly ........ .
Gearshift Mechanism
Replacement ........................... .
MIT Differential
Component Location .................. .
Backlash Inspection .................... .
Final Driven Gear/Carrier
Replacement ........................... .
Carrier Bearings Replacement .. .
Oil Seal Replacement ................. .
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement and Preload
Adjustment .............................. .
13-41
13-41
13-43
13-44
13-45
13-48
13-52
13-53
1:9]
13-54
13-54
13-55
13-55
13-57
BACK
Manual Transmission
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number DescriPtion
CD 07GAD-PG40100 Driver Attachment
**
07GAJ-PG20110 Mainshaft Holder
**@ 07GAJ-PG20130 Mainshaft Base
CD 07HAD-SF10100 Driver Attachment
07HAJ-PK4020 1 Preload Inspection Tool
07 JAD-PH80 101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment
IJ) 07 JAD-PH80400 Pilot, 28 x 30 mm
07LAD-PW50601 Bearing Attachment
*
07736-AO 1 OOOB Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm
@ 077 46-00 10300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm
@ 077 46-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm
@ 077 46-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm
@ 077 46-0030 100 Driver, 40 mm I.D.

077 46-0030400 Attachment, 35 mm 1.0.
@ 077 49-0010000 Driver
@ 07947-6890100 Oil Seal Driver
* Must be used with commercially available 3/8"- 16 Slide Hammer.
** Part of Mainshaft Inspection Tool Set, 07GAJ-PG2010A.
@
(55)
0
e
\ c )

"----...-/ ,
P'
CD
@
CD

-----)
,
l:1

---------
'c

)
'. './
'--'-../
(J)

@ @
<JJ

c:P
@
-
..../-/
\2 {'I
!:;: .".

@

@ @
13-2
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G

0
, I
@
BACK
Transmission Fluid Inspection and
Replacement
,. Park the vehicle on level ground. and turn the
engine OFF.
2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and washer (B). check
the condition of the fluid. and make sure the fluid at
the proper level (C).
c
/
3. If the transmission fluid is dirty. remove the drain
plug (D) and drain the fluid. Cover the front and
rear beams with a shop towel (E) to catch any
spilled fluid.
4. Reinstall the drain plug (D) with a new washer (F).
and refill the transmission fluid to the proper level.
Oil Capacity
1.9 A (2.0 US qt, 1.7 Imp qt) at fluid change
2.0 A (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt) at overhaul
Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer
shifting because it does not contain the proper
additives.
5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer (B).
Back-Up Light Switch Test
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch (A) connectors.
A

2. Check for continuity between the terminals (B).
There should be continuity when the shift lever into
reverse.
3. If necessary. replace the switch.
13-3
BACK
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal
Engine hanger, A and Reds AART1256 or equivalent,
commercially available
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) cable first, then the
positive (+) cable from the battery. Remove the
battery.
2. Remove the intake air duct (A) and air cleaner
housing (8).
3. Remove the battery tray.
13-4
4. Remove the engine wire harness clamp.
5. Carefully remove the slave cylinder (A) and clutch
line clamp (8) so as not to bend the clutch line. Do
not operate the clutch pedal once the slave cylinder
has been removed.
B
BACK
6. Disconnect the starter cables (A), then remove the
starter motor (8).
A
B
8. Remove the transmission ground cable (8) and
starter cable clamp (C).
9. First remove the cable bracket (A), then disconnect
the cables (8) from the top of the transmission
housing. Carefully remove both cables and the
bracket together so as not to bend the cables.
:::L}f-----A
B
10. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
connector.
(cont'd)
13-5
BACK
Manual Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
11. Remove the rear engine mount bracket brace.
12. Remove the engine wire harness (A) and two upper
transmission mounting bolts (B).
B
13-6
13. Remove the front engine mount bracket 3
mounting bolts.
14. Raise vehicle and make sure it is securely
supported.
15. Drain transmission fluid with a shop towel covering
the front and rear beams to catch any spilled fluid
(see page 13-3).
BACK
17. Remove the cotter pins (A), and loosen the castle
nuts (8), then separate the ball joints and lower
arms (C) on both sides (see step 3 on page 18-17).
18. Remove the both damper forks (D).
19. Pull the driveshafts out of the intermediate shaft
and differential (see page 16-3). Coat all the
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil
grease. Tie bags over the driveshaft ends.
/ ~ ,
\ ( ',,- ,
..
20. Remove the intermediate shaft. Coat all the
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil
grease. Tie bags over the shaft end.
~
21. Remove the engine stiffener.
(cont'd)
13-7
BACK
Manual Transmission
22. Remove the radius rod mounting bolts from the
lower arm (A).
23. Remove the power steering cooler line (A) from the
front beam (B).
A
13-8
24. Make reference marks (A) on the rear beam (B) and
front beam (C), then remove the front beam.
B
c
c
25. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly
with an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-1256, available
through the American Honda Tool and Equipment
Program, or equivalent).
26. Place a floor jack under the transmission, and raise
the transmission just enough to take weight off of
the mounts.
BACK
27. Remove the transmission mount bracket (A) and
transmission mount (8).
28. Remove the transmission mount stud bolt (C) on
the transmission housing.
29. Remove the intake manifold bracket.
30. Remove the two rear engine mount bracket (A)
mounting bolts (8).
B
31. Remove the rear side transmission mounting bolt
(C).
32. Remove the front side transmission mounting bolt.
(cont'd)
13-9
BACK
Manual Transmission
33. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it
clears the mainshaft, then lower it on the
transmission jack. Take care not to bend the clutch
line.
34. Remove the slave cylinder bracket from the
transmission.
35. Remove the boot (A), the release fork (B), and the
release bearing (C) from the transmission (0).
D
':AIM

B
13-10
Transmission Installation
1. Check that the dowel pins are installed in the clutch
housing.
2. Install the slave cylinder bracket on the
transmission
8x 1.25 mm
9002) to the release fork (A), the release fork bolt
(B), the release bearing (C), and the release bearing
guide (0) in the shaded areas.
1.0-1.6 9 (0.04-0.06 ozl
0.4-1.0 9
(0.01-0.04 ozl
4. Install the release bearing (C), release fork (A), and
boot (E) on the transmission (F).
BACK
5. Place the transmission on the transmission jack.
and raise it to the engine level.
6. Install the front side transmission mounting bolt.
12 x 1.25 mm
64 Nm 16.5 kgfm. 47 Ibftt)
I
7. Install the rear side transmission mounting bolt (A).
A C
12 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
64 Nm 16.5 kgfm. 54 Nm 15.5 kgfm.
47 Ibftt) 40 Ibftt)

B
8. Install the 2 rear engine mount bracket (8) new
mounting bolts (C).
9. Install the transmission mount stud bolt (A) on the
transmission housing.
50mm
11.97 in.)

10. Raise the transmission. install the transmission
mount (8) and transmission mount bracket (C).
Torque mounting bolts and nut in the sequence
shown .
Make sure the bushings are not twisted or offset.
CD 12 x 1.25 mm 64 Nm (6.5 kgfm. 47 Ibfft)
Temporary tightening
10 x 1.25 mm 38 Nm (3.9 kgfm, 28Ibfft)
CD 12 x 1.25 mm 54 Nm (5.5 kgfm. 40 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
13-11
BACK
Manual Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
11. Remove the engine/transmission hanger.
12. Install the front beam (A) in its original position by
aligning the marks (B) you made in the removal
procedure.
13-12
14x 1.5mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm, 75.9 Ibfftl
12x1.25mm
64Nm
(6.5 kgfm, 47 Ibfftl
13. Install the power steering cooler line (A) in the line
clamps (B).
A
B
14. Install both radius rods (A) with new mounting
bolts on the lower arm (B).
BACK
15. Install the engine stiffener.
12x1.2Smm
. 64Nm
16.S kgfm,
. f 47 Ibfftl
; '-- I
(/
/
10x 1.2Smm
44 Nm 14.S kgfm, 33 Ibfftl
16. Install the intake manifold bracket.
8x 1.2Smm
17. Install the intermediate shaft (see page 16-26).
10x 1.2Smm
18. Install the driveshafts with new set rings (see page
16-20).
(cont'd)
13-13
BACK
Manual Transmission
19. Install the damper forks (A) with new locknuts (B).
10x 1.25 mm

"

L ....

E F
12x 1.25mm
49-59Nm
(5.0-6.0 kgfm, 36-43 Ibfftl
B
12x 1.25mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
47lbfftl
20. Install the ball joints (C) onto the lower arms (D),
and install the castle nuts (E) and cotter pins (F).
13-14
22. Install the washer (A) and the front engine mount
bracket mounting bolts (B).
B
10x 1.25mm
A
23. Install the engine wire harness (A) and two upper
transmission mounting bolts (B).
A
B
12x 1.25mm
BACK
24. Install the rear engine mount bracket brace.
10x 1.25 mm
25. Connect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector.
26. Install the cable bracket (A) and cables (8). Turn the
shift lever boot (C) so the hole is facing down.
(PIN 08798-90021
27.
8x 1.25 mm
7 ~ ~ f t l
L ~
~ ~ ~ -A
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
c
28. Connect the back-up light switch connectors (C).
(cont'd)
13-15
BACK
Manual Transmission
29. Install the starter motor (A), then connect the
starter cables (B). Make sure that the crimped side
ofthe ring terminal is facing out.
B
10x 1.25 mm
38 Nm 13.9 kgfm,
271bf.ftl
8x1.25mm
9
12x1.25mm
64 Nm 16.5 kgfm,
47lbfftl
9002) to the end of the slave cylinder rod.
Install the slave cylinder (A) and clutch line clamp
(B). Take care not to bend the clutch line.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl

13-16
31. Install the engine wire harness clamp.
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfftl
32. Install the battery bracket.
6x1.0mm
9 .. 7.21 ... ffl
8x1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
'.,bIftJ ) . .
BACK
33. Install the intake air duct (AI and air cleaner
housing (81.
34. Turn the breather cap so that the "F" mark points
toward the front of the vehicle.
35. Install the battery. Connect the positive (+ I cable
first, then the negative (- I cable to the battery.
36. Refill the transmission fluid (see page 13-31.
37. Test drive the vehicle.
38. Check the clutch operation.
39. Check the transmission for noise and smooth
operation.
40. Check the front wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
41. Loosen the three mounting bolts on the front
engine mount bracket, then retorque them to 38
Nm (3.9 kgfm, 27 Ibftl.Make sure the bushings are
not twisted or offset.
13-17
BACK
Manual Transmission
Shift Arm Replacement
Exploded View
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm. 9Ibf.ft)
SELECT ARM
/
(PIN 08798-9002) 5 x 22 mm
13-18
SPRING PIN
Replace.
SHIFT LEVER SHAFT
SELECT LEVER

(PIN 08798-9002)
INTERLOCK BOLT

SHIFT LEVER
BOOT

(PIN 08798-9002)
SHIFT ARM
8x 1.0 mm
28 Nm (2.9 kgfm.
21'\

BACK
NOTE: The shift arm cover can be removed and
installed with the transmission in the vehicle.
1. With the transmission installed, remove the shift
arm cover assembly (A).
6x 1.0mm
12Nm,
11.2 kgfm, 9lbfftl
8x 14mm
2. Remove the spring pin (A), then remove the select
lever (B), select arm (e) and springs (D).
3. Remove the reverse lock cam (A) from the shift arm
cover (B).
1>
6X1.0mm
15Nm
@ 11.5 kgf.m, 11lbfftl
~ ~
~
4. Remove the oil seal (A) from the shift arm cover (B).
A
~

(PIN 08798-90021
B
(cont'd)
13-19
BACK
Manual Transmission
Shift Arm Replacement (cont'd)
5. Bend the tab of the lock washer (A), then remove
the bolt (B).
B
8x 1.0mm
6. Remove the interlock bolt (C).
7. Remove the shift lever shaft (A), shift arm (B), and
interlock (C).

(PIN 08798-9002)
13-20
8. Install the shift arm assembly in the reverse order
of removal, and note these items.
During reassembly, grease all sliding parts.
Use only Super High Temp Urea Grease (PIN
08798-9002).
Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the
interlock bolt threads before reassembly.
Turn the shift lever boot so the hole is facing
down.
Use liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001).
Remove the dirty oil from the sealing surface.
Seal the entire circumference of the bolt holes to
prevent oil leakage.
If 20 minutes have passed after applying liquid
gasket. reapply it and assemble the housings.
Allow it to cure at least 20 minutes after
assembly before filling the transmission with oil.
:LlQUID
GASKET
BACK
Transmission Disassembly
Exploded View - Gears, Shafts and Clutch Housing
@
CD CLUTCH HOUSING
OILSEAL
14 x 20 mm DOWEL PIN
OIL GUIDE PLATE
NEEDLE BEARING
RETAINING PLATE
(j) MAGNET
I
......... .
................. I
/'" I
@ .................. i
........................... i
' ........... _._._._._._._.-1
@ SHIFT FORK ASSEMBL V
@ MAINSHAFT ASSEMBL V
REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
@OILSEAL
@ BALL BEARING
@ SPRING WASHER
@WASHER
@ COUNTERSHAFT ASSEMBL V
@ DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBL V
@ REVERSE SHIFT FORK
(cont'd)
13-21
BACK
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
Exploded View - Transmission Housing
CD SHIFT ARM ASSEMBL V
OIL GUTTER PLATE
@78mmSHIM
@ OIL GUIDE PLATE
WASHER
Replace.
@ BACKUP LIGHT SWITCH
SET SCREW
13-22
r'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'1
I ' !
i '- " !
i u O!
. I
El ~ i
~ ~ i
/)
a /
~ /@
L._._._._/ "
WASHER
Replace.
SPRING L. 26 mm /1.02 in.)
@STEEL BAU O.D. 5/16 in.
FRONT TRANSMISSION HANGER
@32 mm SEALING BOLT
@WASHER
Replace.
@ REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT BOLT
@OILSEAL
@DRAINPLUG
@WASHER
Replace.
@ OIL FILLER PLUG
@WASHER

I
~
Replace.
@REARTRANSMISSION HANGER
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
BACK
Note the following during disassembly:
Ifthe transmission housing or clutch housing are
replaced, the bearing preload must be adjusted .
Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood thick
enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the
workbench.
1. Remove the shift arm cover assembly (see page 13-
18).
2. Remove the reverse idler gear shaft bolt (A).
3. Remove the setting screws (8), then remove the
washers (C), springs (D), and steel balls (E).
4. Remove the back-up light switch (A).
~
~
5. Remove the bolts and transmission hangers (8) in a
crisscross pattern in several steps.
6. Remove the 32 mm sealing bolt (A) .
7. Expand the snap ring (8) on the countershaft ball
bearing, and remove it from the groove using a pair
of snap ring pliers.
8. Separate the transmission housing (C) from the
clutch housing (D), and wipe it clean of the sealant.
(cont'd)
13-23
BACK
Manual Transmission
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
10. Remove the reverse shift fork (A). Be careful not to
lose the steel ball (B).
11. Remove the reverse idler gear shaft (A) and the
reverse idler gear (B).
13-24
12. Tape the mainshaft splines, then remove the
mainshaft assembly (A) and countershaft assembly
(B) with the shift forks (e) from the clutch housing
(0).
C ~ r ~ 1
13. Remove the differential assembly.
BACK
Reverse Shift Fork Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearances between the reverse shift
fork (A) and 5th/reverse shift piece pin (8).
If the clearance are more than the service limit,
go to step 2.
If the clearance are within the service limits, go to
step 3.
Standard: CD: 0.05 - 0.35 mm
(0.002-0.014 in.)
0: 0.4-0.8 mm
(0.02-0.03 in.)
Service Limit: CD: 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
0: 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
2. Measure the widths of the groove in the reverse
shift fork (A).
Ifthe widths ofthe grooves are not within the
standard, replace the reverse shift fork with a
new one.
If the widths of the grooves are within the
standard, replace the 5th/reverse shift piece with
a new one.
Standard: CD: 7.05-7.25 mm (0.278-0.285 in.)
0: 7.4-7.7 mm (0.29-0.30 in.)
CD
00
3. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler
gear (A) and reverse shift fork (8). If the clearance is
more than the service limit, go to step 4.
Standard: 0.5-1.1 mm (0.02-0.04 in.)
4. Measure the width of the reverse shift fork (A) .
If the width is not within the standard, replace the
reverse shift fork with a new one .
If the width is within the standard, replace the
reverse idler gear with a new one.
Standard: 13.0-13.3 mm (0.51-0.52 in.)
00
13-25
BACK
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the
synchro sleeve and hub as a set.
1. Support the bearing inner race with a socket (A),
and push down on the mainshaft (B).
2. Measure the clearance between 2nd (C) and 3rd (0)
gears with a feeler gauge (E).
Ifthe clearance is more than the service limit, go
to step 3.
If the clearance is within the service limit, go to
step 4.
Standard: 0.06-0.21 mm
(0.002-0.008 in.'
3. Measure the thickness of 3rd gear (A).
If the thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service
limit, replace 3rd gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service
limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new
one.
(1.276-1.278 in.'
13-26
4. Measure the clearance between 4th gear (A) and
the spacer collar (B) with a dial indicator (C). Ifthe
clearance is more than the service limit, go to step
5.
(0.002-0.008 in.'
5. Measure distance CD on the spacer collar.
If distance CD is less than the service limit,
replace the spacer collar with a new one .
B
If distance CD is within the service limit, go to step
6.
Standard: 26.03 - 26.08 mm
(1.025-1.027 in.'
I I
BACK
6. Measure the thickness of 4th gear.
If the thickness of 4th gear is less than the service
limit, replace 4th gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 4th gear is within the service
limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new
one.
Standard: 30.92 - 30.97 mm
(1.217-1.219 in.)
7. Measure the clearance between the spacer collar
(A) and 5th gear (8) with a dial indicator (e). Ifthe
8.
(0.002 - 0.008 in.)
c
\
o
B
8. Measure distance on the spacer collar.
If distance is less than the service limit,
replace the spacer collar with a new one.
If distance is within the service limit, go to step
9.
Standard: 26.03 - 26.08 mm
(1.025-1.027 in.)
L J

--
9. Measure the thickness of 5th gear.
If the thickness of 5th gear is less than the service
limit, replace 5th gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 5th gear is within the service
limit, replace the 5th synchro hub with a new one.
(1.217-1.219 in.)
13-27
BACK
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Disassembly
1. Remove the angular ball bearing (A) and the
tapered cone ring (B) using a commercially
available bearing separator (e) and a commercially
available bearing puller (0). Be sure the bearing
separator is under the tapered cone ring.
D
2. Support 5th gear (A) on steel blocks I and press the
mainshaft out of the 5th synchro hub (B). Use of a
jaw-type puller can cause damage to the gear teeth.
PRESS
...
13-28
3. Support the 3rd gear (A) on steel blocks I and press
the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B).
Use of a jaw-type puller can cause damage to the
gearteeth.
PRESS
BACK
Mainshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for
wear and damage. then measure the mainshaft at
points A. B. and C. If any part of the mainshaft is
less than the service limit. replace it with a new one.
Standard:
A (Ball bearing surface): 27.987 - 28.000 mm
(1.1018-1.1024 in.)
B (Needle bearing surface): 37.984-38.000 mm
C (Ball bearing surface):
(1.4954-1.4961 in.)
27.977 - 27.990 mm
(1.1015-1.1020 in.)
Service Limit: A: 27.940 mm (1.1000 in.)
A
B: 37.930 mm (1.4933 in.)
C: 27.940 mm (1.1000 in.)
2. Inspectthe runout by supporting both ends ofthe
mainshaft. Rotate the mainshaft two complete
revolutions when measuring the runout. If the
runout is more than the service limit. replace the
mainshaft with a new one.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
13-29
BACK
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Reassembly
Exploded View

SPRING
-----
ijS SVNCHRO SLEEVE
_---.1ID/4TH SVNCHROHUB
hJ

SYNCHRO
RING

NEEDLE BEARING
Check for wear and operation.
---SYNCHRO SPRING
--SVNCHRORING
-----5TH GEAR

Q NEEDLE BEARING
/ Check for wear and operation.
SPACER COLLAR _
9---
nHGEM
13-30
BACK
Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 07746-0030100
Attachment, 35 mm 1.0. 077 46-0030400
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed during
this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solevent, dry them, and apply
lubricant to all contact surfaces except the 3rd/4th,
and 5th synchro hubs.
2. Install 3rd gear, its bearing, and the 3rd gear
synchro ring and synchro spring on the shaft.
3. Support 2nd gear (A) on steel blocks, then install
the 3rd/4th synchro hub (B) using the special tools
and a press (C). Note the direction of installation for
the 3rd/4th synchro hub. After installing, check the
operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set .
c

07746-0030100
4. Install the 4th gear synchro spring and ring, 4th
gear and its bearing, the spacer ring, and 5th gear
and its bearing on the shaft.
5. Install the 5th synchro hub (A) using the special
tools and a press (B).

6. Install the spacer and tapered cone ring.
7. Install the angular ball bearing (A) with the thin-
edged outer race facing down. Use the special tools
and a press (8).
13-31
BACK
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Assembly Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the 1st gear (A)
and the thrust washer (8) with a feeler gauge (e). If
the clearance is more than the service limit, go to
step 2.
Standard: 0.06-0.23 mm (0.002-0.009 in.)
A
2. Measure the thickness of the thrust washer.
If the thickness is less than the standard, replace
the thrust washer with a new one .
If the thickness is within the standard, go to step
3.
Standard: 1.95-1.97 mm (0.077-0.078 in.)
13-32
3. Measure the thickness ofthe 1st gear.
If the thickness of 1st gear is less than the
standard, replace 1 st gear with a new one.
If the thickness of 1st gear is within the standard,
replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 32.95-33.00 mm (1.297-1.299 in.)
BACK
4. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear (A)
and 3rd gear (B) with a feeler gauge (e). If the
5.
Standard: 0.10-0.15 mm (0.004-0.006 in.)
B
5. Measure the thickness of the spacer .
If the thickness is less than the standard, replace
the spacer with a new one .
If the thickness is within the standard, go to step
6.
Standard: 29.07-29.09 mm (1.144-1.145 in.)
6. Measure the thickness of the 2nd gear.
If the thickness of 2nd gear is less than the
standard, replace 2nd gear with new one.
If the thickness of 1st gear is within the standard,
replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one.
Standard: 28.92-28.97 mm (1.139-1.141 in.)
13-33
BACK
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Disassembly
1. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a
bench vise with wood blocks.
A
2. Use a chisel (A) to raise the locknut tab (B) from the
groove in the countershaft.
3. Remove the locknut (A) and the spring washer (B).
13-34
4. Support 4th gear (A) on steel blocks (B), then use a
press (C) and an attachment (0) to press the
countershaft (E) out of the ball bearing (F).
5. Remove the friction damper (A) from the spacer (B)
using a press (C) and a socket (0) as shown.
A
BACK
Countershaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for
wear and damage, then measure the countershaft
at points A, 8, and C. If any part of the countershaft
is less than the service limit, replace it with a new
one.
Standard: A: 38.000-38.015 mm
(1.4961-1.4967 in.)
B: 39.984-40.000 mm
(1.5742-1.5748 in.)
C: 24.987 - 25.000 mm
(0.9837 -0.9843 in.)
Service Limit: A: 37.950 mm (1.4941 in.)
B: 39.930 mm (1.5720 in.)
C: 24.940 mm (0.9819 in.)
c
2. Inspect the runout by supporting both ends of the
countershaft. Rotate the countershaft two complete
revolutions when measuring the runout. Ifthe
runout exceeds the service limit, replace the
countershaft with a new one.
Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
13-35
BACK
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly
Exploded View
)
___ 'STGEAR
~ NEEDLE BEARING
~ Ch""o' ... " "d op."tloo.
----THRUST WASHER
___ FRICTION DAMPER
Check for wear and damage.
13-36
BACK
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Seal driver 07947-6890100
this procedure.
1. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply
lubricant to all contact surfaces.
2. Install the thrust washer (A) and the needle bearing
(B) onto the countershaft (C). Assemble the friction
damper (D) and 1st gear (E) together and install
them on the countershaft, then install the synchro
ring (F) and the synchro spring (G).
3. Install the 1st/2nd synchro hub (A) by aligning the
fingers on the friction damper (B) with 1st/2nd
synchro hub grooves.
A
B
4. Install reverse gear, 2nd gear synchro spring, and
the double cone synchro assembly.
5. Install the friction damper (A) on the spacer (B)
using the special tools and a press.
PRESS
077 49-0010000

/07746-0010300
(cont'd)
13-37
BACK
Manual Transmission
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Install the friction damper and spacer, and the 2nd
gear bearing.
7. Install 2nd gear (A) by aligning the synchro cone
fingers (B) with 2nd gear grooves (C).
A
c
B
8. Install 3rd gear, 4th gear, and 5th gear.
9. Install the needle bearing (A) and the ball bearing
(B) using the special tool and a press IC).
c

13-38
10. Install the spring washer (A),and loosely install the
new locknut (B).
B
11. Securely clamp the countershaft assembly in a
bench vise with wood blocks.
12. Torque the new locknut to 127 Nm (13kgm, 94Ibft),
then loosen it and torque it again to the same value.
Stake the locknut tab into the groove.
BACK
Shift Forks Clearance Inspection
NOTE: The synchro sleeve and synchro hub should be
replaced as a set.
1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork (A)
and its matching synchro sleeve (S). Ifthe
clearance exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
Standard: 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 in.'
A
2. Measure the thickness of the shift fork (A) fingers.
If the thickness of the shift fork finger is less than
the standard, replace the shift fork with a new
one .
If the thickness of the shift fork finger is within
the standard, replace the synchro sleeve with a
new one.
Standard: 6.2 - 6.4 mm (0.24 - 0.25 in.)

/
A
3. Measure the clearance between the shift fork (A)
and the shift arm (8). If the clearance exceeds the
service limit, go to step 4.
Standard: 0.2-0.5 mm (0.008-0.020 in.'
4. Measure the width ofthe shift arm (A) .
If the width of the shift arm is less than the
standard, replace the shift arm with a new one.
If the width of the shift arm is within the standard,
replace the shift fork or shift piece with a new
one.
Standard: 12.9-13.0 mm (0.508-0.512 in.'
A
I
13-39
BACK
Manual Transmission
Shift Forks Disassembly IReassembly
Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact parts.
5TH SHIFT FORK
PIN DRIVER 5.0 mm
13-40

/
5TH/REVERSE
SHIFT PIECE
3RD/4TH SHIFT FORK
/
r
5x22mm
SPRING PIN
Replace.
\
1ST/2ND SHIFT FORK
BACK
Synchro Sleeve and Hub Inspection
and Reassembly
1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro
sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate
wear.
2. Install each synchro hub (A) in its mating synchro
sleeve (B), and check for freedom of movement. Be
sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (C) (120
degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three
sets of deeper grooves (D) in the synchro hub. Do
not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth
in the 1st/2nd synchro hub slots (E) because it will
damage the spring ring.
NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace
the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set.
B
c
E
A
Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection
1. Inspect the inside of the synchro ring (A) for wear.
B __
2. Inspect the synchro ring teeth (B) for wear (rounded
off).
o o
GOOIY WORN
3. Inspect the synchro sleeve teeth (C) and matching
teeth on the gear for wear (rounded off).
o
c
o
GOOD WORN
(cont'd)
13-41
BACK
Manual Transmission
Synchro Ring and Gear Inspection (cont'd)
4. Inspect the gear hub thrust surface (D) for wear.
5. Inspect the cone surface (E) for wear and
roughness.
6. Inspect the teeth on all gears (F) for uneven wear,
scoring, galling, and cracks.
7. Coat the cone surface of the gear (E) with oil, and
place the synchro ring on it. Rotate the synchro ring,
making sure that it does not slip.
13-42
8. Measure the clearance between the synchro ring
(A) and gear (8) all the way around. Hold the
synchro ring against the gear evenly while
measuring the clearance. If the clearance is less
than the service limit, replace the synchro ring and
synchro cone.
Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance
Standard: 0.85-1.10 mm (0.033-0.043 in.)
Double Cone Synchro-to-Gear Clearance
Standard:
CD:Outer Synchro Ring (A) to Synchro Cone (C)
0.5 -1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in.)
:Synchro Cone (C) to Gear (B)
0.5 -1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in.)
:Outer Synchro Ring (A) to Gear (B)
0.95-1.68 mm (0.037 -0.066 in.)
Service Limit:
CD:0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
:0.3 mm (0.01 in.)
:0.6 mm (0.02 in.)
CD
L
C

I
I
1"-8
I
BACK
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm
07736-A01000B
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the retaining plate (A) from the clutch
housing (B).
2. Remove the needle bearing (A) using the special
tool, then remove the oil guide plate (B).
A
B
3/S" -16 SLIDE HAMMER
/ (Commercially available)
3. Position the oil guide plate (A) and new needle
bearing (B) in the bore ofthe clutch housing (C).
NOTE: Position the needle bearing with the oil
holes (D) facing up.
~ L ~
~ ~ A
~
'--.-I-=-;
~
4. Install the needle bearing (A) using the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
~ I _ A
(cont'd)
13-43
BACK
Manual Transmission
(cont'd)
5. Install the retaining plate (AI with new bolts (BI and
stake the bolt heads into the groove in the retaining
plate.
B
6x1.0mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, S.7 Ibf.ftl
13-44
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25- 40 mm
07736-A01000B
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
2. Remove the ball bearing (AI from the clutch
housing (BI using the special tool.
A
3/S
N
-16 SLIDE HAMMER
/' (Commercially available)
3. Remove the oil seal (el from the clutch side.
BACK
4. Drive the new oil seal (A) in from the transmission
side using the special tools.
5. Drive the new ball bearing (A) in from the
transmission side using the special tools.
Adjustment
Mainshaft base 07GAJ-PG20130
Mainshaft holder 07GAJ-PG20110
1. Remove the 78 mm shim (A) and oil guide plate (B)
from the transmission housing (C).
A---..
2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub (A), the spacer collar
(B), the 5th synchro hub (C), the spacer (D), and ball
bearing (E) on the mainshaft (F), then install the
assembled mainshaft in the transmission housing
(G).
H CD
3. Install the washer (H) on the mainshaft.
4. Measure distance CD between the end of the
transmission housing and washer with a straight
edge and vernier caliper. Measure at three
locations and average the reading.
(cont'd)
13-45
BACK
Manual Transmission
Mainshaft Thrust Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5. Measure distance between the end of the clutch
housing (A) and bearing inner race (B) with a
straight edge and depth gauge. Measure at three
locations and average the readings.
Shim Selection Formula:
6. Select the proper 78 mm shim from the chart.
Follow the example below, and use the
measurements you made in steps 4 and 5:
Add distance (step 5) to distance CD (step 4).
From this number, subtract 0.93 (which is the
midpoint of the flex range of the clutch housing
bearing spring washer).
Take this number and compare it to the available
shim sizes in the chart.
Try the 1.68 mm (0.0661 in) shim.
(For example)
<D:2.39
+:0.22
= 2.61
13-46
2.61
-0.93
= 1.68
78mmSHIM
Part Number
A 23941-P16-000
B 23942-P 16-000
C 23943-P16-000
D 23944-P16-000
E 23945-P16-000
F 23946-P16-000
G 23947-P16-000
H 23948-P16-000
I 23949-P16-000
J 23950-P16-000
K 23951-P16-000
L 23952-P16-000
M 23953-P16-000
N 23954-P16-000
0 23955-P16-000
P 23956-P16-000
Q 23957 -P16-000
R 23958-P16-000
S 23959-P16-000
T 23960-P16-000
U 23961-P16-000
V 23962-P16-000
W 23963-P16-000
X 23964-P16-000
y
23965-P16-000
Z 23966-P16-000
AA 23967 -P16-000
AB 23968-P16-000
AC 23969-P16-000
AD 23970-P16-000
AE 23971-P16-000
AF 23972-P16-000
AG 23973-P16-000
AH 23974-P16-000
AI 23975-P16-000
AJ 23976-P16-000
AK 23977 -P16-000
AL 23978-P16-000
AM 23979-P16-000
AN 23980-P16-000
Thickness
1.20 mm (0.0472 in.)
1.23 mm (0.0484 in.)
1.26 mm (0.0496 in.)
1.29 mm (0.0508 in.)
1.32 mm (0.0520 in.)
1.35 mm (0.0531 in.)
1.38 mm (0.0543 in.)
1.41 mm (0.0555 in.)
1.44 mm (0.0567 in.)
1.47 mm (0.0579 in.)
1.50 mm (0.0591 in.)
1.53 mm (0.0602 in.)
1.56 mm (0.0614 in.)
1.59 mm (0.0626 in.)
1.62 mm (0.0638 in.)
1.65 mm (0.0650 in.)
1.68 mm (0.0661 in.)
1.71 mm (0.0673 in.)
1.74 mm (0.0685 in.)
1.77 mm (0.0697 in.)
1.80 mm (0.0709 in.)
1.83 mm (0.0720 in.)
1.86 mm (0.0732 in.)
1.89 mm (0.0744 in.)
1.92 mm (0.0756 in.)
1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)
1.98 mm (0.0780 in.)
2.01 mm (0.0791 in.)
2.04 mm (0.0803 in.)
2.07 mm (0.0815 in.)
2.10 mm (0.0827 in.)
2.13 mm (0.0839 in.)
2.16 mm (0.0850 in.)
2.19 mm (0.0862 in.)
2.22 mm (0.0874 in.)
2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
2.28 mm (0.0898 in.)
2.31 mm (0.0909 in.)
2.34 mm (0.0921 in.)
2.37 mm (0.0933 in.)
BACK
7. Install the 78 mm shim (A) selected and oil guide
plate (B) in the transmission housing (e).
A _____
8. Throughly clean the spring washer (A) and washer
(B) before installing them on the ball bearing. Note
the installation direction of the spring washer.
9. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing.
10. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft
and onto the clutch housing.
11. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with
several 8 mm and 10 mm bolts.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent
between the housings.
12. Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer.
A
07GAJPG20130
14. Attach the special tool to the mainshaft as follows:
Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt (A) and loosen
the two hex bolts (B).
Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is
towards the transmission.
Align the mainshaft holder's lip around the
groove at the inside of the mainshaft splines,
then tighten the hex bolts.
[ o ~ t
t
07GAJPG20110
07GAJPG20130
15. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping its end with a
plastic hammer.
16. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just
contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base.
(cont'd)
13-47
BACK
Manual Transmission
Adjustment (co nt' d)
17. Zero a dial gauge (A) on the end ofthe mainshaft.
A
07GAJ-PG20110
18. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt (B) clockwise; stop
turning when the dial gauge (A) has reached its
maximum movement. The reading on the dial
gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play.
Do not turn the mainshaft holder bolt more than 60
degrees after the needle ofthe dial gauge stops
moving, this may damage the transmission.
19. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance
is correct. If the reading is not within the standard,
recheck the shim thickness.
Standard: 0.' 0 - o. , 6 mm 10.004 - 0.006 in.'
13-48
Transmission Reassembly
1. Install the differential assembly in the clutch
housing.
2. Install the spring washer (A) and washer (B) over
the ball bearing Ie).
Note the installation direction of the spring washer
(A).
3. Tape the splines of the mainshaft (E) with vinyl tape
to protect the seal.
Insert the mainshaft and countershaft (F) into the
shift forks (D), and install them as an assembly.
BACK
4. Install the reverse idler gear (AI and reverse idler
gear shaft (81 in the clutch housing (CI.
5. Install the reverse shift fork (AI in the clutch
housing (81 with the 5th/reverse shift piece pin
positioned in the slot of the reverse shift fork. Make
sure the steel ball (CI is in the proper position.
A
B
6x 1.0mm
15Nm
(1.5 kgfm, 11lbfft)
c
6. Install the oil gutter plate in the transmission
housing.
7. Select the proper size 78 mm shim (AI according to
the measurements made during the Mainshaft
Thrust Clearance Adjustment (see page 13-451.
Install the oil guide plate (81 and 78 mm shim into
the transmission housing (CI.
A __
(cont'dl
13-49
BACK
Manual Transmission
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Remove the dirt and oil from the transmission
housing sealing surface. Apply liquid gasket (PIN
08718-0001) to the sealing surface. Be sure to seal
the entire circumference ofthe bolt holes to
prevent oil leakage.
NOTE: If 20 minutes have passed after applying
liquid gasket, reapply it and assemble the housings.
Allow it to cure at least 20 minutes after assembly
before filling the transmission with oil.
...... : Liquid gasket
9. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins.
10. Set the tapered cone ring (A) as shown. Place the
transmission housing over the clutch housing,
being careful to line up the shafts.
13-50
11. Lower the transmission housing the rest of the way
as you expand the snap ring (A). Release the snap
ring so it seats in the groove of the countershaft
bearing.
12. Check that the snap ring (A) is securely seated in
the groove of the countershaft bearing.
Dimension CD as installed: 3.6-6.3 mm
(0.14-0.25 in.'
13. Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the threads
of the 32 mm sealing bolt (B), and install it on the
BACK
14. Install the front transmission hanger (A) and the
rear transmission hanger (B), then tighten the bolts
in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
8 x 1.25 mm bolts: 27 Nm (2.8 kgf.m, 20 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 mm bolts: 47 Nm (4.8 kgfm, 35Ibfft)
15. Install the 5/16 in steel balls (A), 26 mm (1.02 in.)
length springs (B), washers (e) and setting screws
(D).
16. Install the reverse idler gear shaft bolt (E) with a
new washer (F).
17. Install the shift arm cover assembly (see page 13-
18).
18. Shift the transmission through all the gears before
installing it.
13-51
BACK
Manual Transmission
Gearshift Mechanism Replacement
(j)Rotate the shift
cable toward the
opening.
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
S Nm (O.S kgf.m,
5.Slbfftl

Sx
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16lbf.ftl
-------,
Remove the shift cable from the
shift lever bracket.
6x1.0mm
9.S Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfftl
\
,
WASHER SHIFT CABLE CLIP
COLLAR SELECT LINK PIN
SELF-LOCKING NUT
Replace.
(PIN OS79S-90021 6 x 1.0 mm
SHIFT CABLE CLIP
Replace.
COTTER PIN
/RePlace.

: (PIN 0879S-90021
/
a\\

Replace.
FLOATING (!!/ Replace.
10 Nm (1.1 kgf.m, Slbfftl
SHIFT LEVER BRACKET
FLOATING RUBBER DAMPER
Inspect for wear
and damage.
13-52
BACK
MIT Differential
OIL SEAL
'?-... __ ----- CLUTCH HOUSING
75mmSHIM
CARRIER BEARING
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 13-54
Preload Adjustment, page 13-57
BEARING OUTER RACE
THRUST SHIM
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
CARRIER BEARING
/lllANS .. SSlON HOUSING
a
OIL SEAL
13-53
BACK
MIT Differential
Backlash Inspection
,. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and
install both axles.
2. Measure the backlash of both pinion gears (8) with
a dial indicator (e). If the backlash is not within the
standard, replace the differential carrier.
13-54
Replacement
1. Remove the bolts (left-hand threads) in a crisscross
pattern in several steps, then remove the final
driven gear from the differential carrier.
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfer on the
inside diameter facing the carrier. Tighten the bolts
in a crisscross pattern in several steps.
3. Adjust the carrier bearing preload (see page 13-57).
BACK
Carrier Bearings Replacement
Special Tool Required
Bearing attachment 07LAD-PW50601
1. Check the carrier bearings for wear and rough
rotation. If they rotate smoothly and their rollers
show no signs of wear, the beaings are OK.
2. Remove the cariier bearing (A) with a
commercially-available bearing puller (B) and
bearing separator (C).
A
3. Install the new bearings (A) with the special tool
and a press. Press each bearing on until it bottoms.
There should be no clearance between the bearings
and the carrier.
4. Inspect the bearing preload (see page 13-57).
Oil Seal Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07GAD-PG40100
Pilot, 28 x 30 mm 07JAD-PH80400
Driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission
housing (B).
B
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the clutch housing (B).
B
A
(cont'd)
13-55
BACK
MIT Differential
Oil Seal Replacement (cont'd)
4. Install the new oil seal (A) in the transmission
housing (B) with the special tools.
07GADPG40100
A
07JADPH80400
13-56
5. Install the new oil seal (A) in the clutch housing (B)
with the special tools.
BACK
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement and Preload Adjustment
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
If any of the items listed below were replaced, the
carrier bearing preload must be adjusted.
Transmission housing
Clutch housing
Differential carrier
Carrier bearing and outer race
1. Remove the oil seals from the transmission
housing and clutch housing (see page 13-55).
Thrust Shim Replacemnet (Transmission Housing)
2. Drive the bearing outer race (A) and thrust shim (B)
out of the transmission housing (C). Do not reuse
the thrust shim. If you replaced the carrier bearing
on the transmission housing side ofthe carrier,
discard the outer race.
07749-0010000
077460010400
B
A
3. If you replaced the carrier bearing on the clutch
housing side of the carrier, remove and discard the
beaing outer race, Heat up the clutch housing to
about 212F (100C) with a heat gun (A), then
remove the outer race (B) and the 75 mm shim(C).
Do not heat the housing in excess of 212F (100C).
B
4. Select a new thrust shim that's the same size as the
one you removed, and use the special tools to
install it (A) and the bearing outer race (8) in the
transmission housing. (Use a new race if you
replaced the bearing.) There should be no space
between the race, shim, and housing.
07749-0010000
077460010500
B
A
(cont'd)
13-57
BACK
MIT Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement and Preload Adjustment (cont'd)
5. If you removed the bearing outer race from the
clutch housing, use the specail tools to install a
new one (A) along with the 75 mm shim (B). There
should be no space between the race, shim, and
housing.
07749-0010000
B
6. With the mainshaft and countershaft removed,
install the differential assembly, bolt the
transmission and clutch housing together, and
torque the 10 mm bolts to 47 Nm (4.8 kgfm, 35
Ibfft) and the 8 mm bolts to 27 Nm (2.8 kgfm, 20
Ibfft).
7. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
to seat the tapered roller bearings.
13-58
8. At normal room temperature, measure the starting
torque of the differential assembly by rotating it in
both directions with the special tool and a torque
wrench (A).
STANDARD: 1.4-2.5 Nm (14-26 kgfcm, 12-23
Ibfin.)
07HAJ-PK40201
9. Ifthe carrier bearing preload is not within the
standard, select a thrust shim that will provide the
correct preload:
Compare the bearing preload you got on the first
try with the specified preload of 1.4 - 2.5 Nm
(14 - 26 kgfcm, 12 - 23Ibfin).
If the preload you measure was less than
specified, subtract it from the specified preload.
If the preload you measure was more than
specified, subtract it from the specified preload.
For example, with a 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.) thrust
shim:
CD specified
- you got less
2.5 Nm (26 kgfcm, 23 Ibfin.)
0.6 Nm (6 kgfcm, 5 Ibfin.)
1.9 Nm (20 kgfcm, 18Ibfin.) less
you got more 3.3 Nm (34 kgfcm, 30 Ibfin.)
- specified 2.5 Nm (26 kgfcm, 23 Ibfin.)
0.8 Nm (8 kgfcm, 7 Ibfin.) more
NOTE: Each shim size up or down from standard
makes about 0.3-0.4 Nm (3-4 kgfcm, 2.6-3.5
Ibfin.) difference in preload.
In example CD, your preload was 1.9 Nm (20 kgfcm,
18 Ibfin.) less than standard, so you need a thrust
shim five sizes thicker than standard (try the 2.32
mm (0.0913 in.) thrust shim, and recheck).
BACK
In example , your preload was 0.8 Nm (8 kgfcm,
7 Ibfin.) more than standard, so you need a thrust
shim two sizes thinner (try the 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.)
thrust shim, and recheck).
THRUST SHIM
Part Number Thickness
A 41381-PX5-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
B 41382-PX5-000 1.93 mm (0.0760 in.)
C 41383-PX5-000 1.96 mm (0.0772 in.)
D 41384-PX5-000 1.99 mm (0.0783 in.)
E 41385-PX5-000 2.02 mm (0.0795 in.)
F 41386-PX5-000 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)
G 41387 -PX5-000 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.)
H 41388-PX5-000 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.)
I 41389-PX5-000 2.14 mm (0.0843 in.)
J 41390-PX5-000 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.)
K 41391-PX5-000 2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)
L 41392-PX5-000 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.)
M 41393-PX5-000 2.26 mm (0.0890 in.)
N 41394-PX5-000 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.)
0 41395-PX5-000 2.32 mm (0.0913 in.)
P 41396-PX5-000 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
Q 41397 -PX5-000 2.38 mm (0.0937 in.)
R 41398-PX5-000 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.)
S 41399-PX5-000 2.44 mm (0.0961 in.)
T 41400-PX5-000 2.47 mm (0.0972 in.)
AA 41873-P16-000 1.66 mm (0.0654 in.)
AB 41874-P16-000 1.69 mm (0.0665 in.)
AC 41875-P16-000 1.72 mm (0.0677 in.)
AD 41876-P16-000 1.75 mm (0.0689 in.)
AE 41877 -P 16-000 1.78 mm (0.0701 in.)
AF 41878-P16-000 1.81 mm (0.0713 in.)
AG 41879-P16-000 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
AH 41880-P 16-000 1.87 mm (0.0736 in.)
10. Once the carrier bearing preload is correct, install
new oil seals in the differential (see page 13-55).
11. Reinstall the transmission.
13-59
BACK
BACK
Special Tools ................................................... 14-2
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-3
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............................ 14-7
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................ 14-8
System Description ...................................... 14-18
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-64
Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting ....................................... 14-93
Interlock System Troubleshooting
Shift Lock System Circuit ......................... 14-96
Key Interlock System Circuit ...................... 14-99
Road Test ........................................................ 14-101
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-103
Pressure Tests ............................................ 14-104
Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Valve Test ............................... 14-106
Solenoid Valve Replacement ..................... 14-106
Shift Solenoid Valves Band C Test ............... 14-107
Shift Solenoid Valves Band C
Replacement ............................................... 14-107
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valves A and B Test .................................... 14-108
Valves A and B Replacement ..................... 14-109
Speed Sensor Replacement .......................... 14-109
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch
('98-00 Models) Replacement .................... 14-110
('01-02 Models) Replacement .................... 14-111
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch
Replacement .......... ....... .............................. 14-112
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-113
A TF Replacement ........................................... 14-113
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-114
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-119
ATF Cooler Flushing ....................................... 14-125
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement ................... 14-126
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-127
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-128
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-130
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-131
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-134
AfT Gear Position Indicator
Component Location Index ........................... 14-136
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-137
Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-138
Transmission Range Switch
Replacement ............................................... 14-139
Indicator Input Test ........................................ 14-141
Indicator Bulb Replacement .......................... 14-142
AfT Interlock System
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-144
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 14-145
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test .............. 14-147
Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-147
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-148
Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-148
Transmission End Cover
End Cover and Idler Gears Removal
Park Lever Stop Inspection and
Adjustment ................................................ ..
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation ....... ..
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal .... .
Bearing Replacement ................................... ..
Shaft Assemblies and Housing
Installation .................................................. .
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal .... .
Valve Body Repair ........................................ ..
Valve Body Valve Installation ....................... .
Main Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ..................... .
ATF Pump Inspection .................................... .
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ................... ..
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly ........................................ .
Accumulator Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ..................... .
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer
Installation .................................................. .
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing/Oil Seal
Replacement ............................................. ..
Countershaft Bearing Replacement ............ .
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
14-149
14-152
14-194
14-153
14-155
14-192
14-156
14-158
14-159
14-160
14-162
14-163
14-164
14-165
14-189
14-166
14-167
14-167
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-168
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection ............. 14-169
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement ........ 14-170
Countershaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-171
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub,
3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement ........ 14-172
Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-174
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-175
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection ........ 14-176
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-178
Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-179
Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-182
Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-184
AfT Differential
Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-201
Replacement ............................................... 14-201
Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-202
Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-203
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement ............................................... 14-204
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ............... 14-205
BACK
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number
CD
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder

07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 Seal Driver Attachment

07GAD-SD40101 Attachment, 78 x 90 mm
G) 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly
*
07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller
07HAD-SF10100 Driver Attachment
(f) 07HAJ-PK40201 Preload Inspection Tool
07JAD-PH80101 Driver Attachment
07 JAD-PH80400 Pilot, 28 x 30 mm
@) 07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm
**@ 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment
@ 07MAJ-PY4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
@ 07MAJ-PY40120 AfT Pressure Hose Adapter
@ 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set
@ 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment
@ 07406-0020400 AfT Oil Pressure Gauge Set w/Panel
***
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm
@ 077 46-00 10300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm
@ 077 46-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm
@ 077 46-00 1 0600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm
077 46-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D.
@ 077 49-0010000 Driver
l 07947 -6340500 Driver Attachment

07949-3710001 Driver
* If the top arm IS too short, replace It with 07SAC-POZ01001.
** 07HAE-PL501 01 may be used to substitute one of these tools.
*** Must be used with commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer.
W

..
, . . .",/
\' -
@
/-9
6)/-

14-2
G)

@

ot '
@
(fJ)
lj 0
@) @

@
g
..... ;;:.:"
..:...... _ ...
l
@
C!. :;\y

Q
@
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BACK
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester IScan Tool
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the indicator in the gauge assembly will blink.
When the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the OBD II Scan
Tool or Honda PGM Tester as shown, the scan tool or tester will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) when the
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(16PI
HONDA PGM TESTER or
OBD II SCAN TOOL
/
Ifthe indicator or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and observe the DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, AfT DTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700). DTC P0700 means there is one or more AfT DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit ofthe PCM.
5. Get the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets.
6. Reset the memory with the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and then
recheck for DTCs.lfthe AfT DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index on page 14-7. Ifthe DTC does not
return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight,
and then go to step 8.
8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, reset the radio preset stations, and set the clock.
(cont'd)
14-3
BACK
How to Check for DTCs
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the indicator in the gauge assembly will usually
blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may come on. When the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to
the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the indicator will blink the Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
When the indicator has been reported on, connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
select Honda Systems, and then the SCS mode, then observe the indicator.

Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After
determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
Short blink (oncel

Long blink Short blinks (five timesl
lfuiiUiJl'------l
U1J1J1IlJL See DTC15
If the indicator or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel/emissions DTCs, AfT DTCs, and freeze data.
DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more AfT DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the numbers of the radio station presets.
4. Reset the memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
recheck for DTCs. If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does no return, there was
an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.
14-4 BACK
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital
multi meter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a multi meter (C).
Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
C
07SAZ-001000A
(cont'd)
14-5
BACK
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM memory:
Use the OBO II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester .
Remove the BACK UP fuse (7.5 A)(A) from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.
A
B
This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
2. Disconnect the OBO II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester from the OLC.
3. Reset the PCM.
5. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vihicle for several minuites at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).
14-6
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
DTC* ~ Indicator MIL Detection Item Page
~ J
P0715 (15) Blinks ON Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-76)
P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-75)
P0730 (41) OFF ON Shift control system (see page 14-89)
P0740(40) OFF ON Lock-up control system (see page 14-88)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-71)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-73)
P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-80)
P0780 (45) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-90)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-66)
P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-69)
P1738 (25) OFF OFF 2nd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-84)
P1739 (26) OFF OFF 3rd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-86)
P1753 (1) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-64)
P1768 (16) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-78)
Pl773 (23) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-82)
The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the indicator indicates when the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester.
NOTE: Codes P0780 (45), P1750 (46), and P1751 (47) are applied to the '00-02 models.
14-7
BACK
These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (OTCs) or cause the indicator to blink. If the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) was reported ON or the indicator has been blinking, check for OTCs. But if the vehicle has one of
the symptoms in the following chart, check the probable cause(s) for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the problem.
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When you turn the A problem in the indicator Check the indicator circuit (see page 14-93).
ignition switch ON circuit
(II), the
comes on and stays
on or never comes
on at all
Shift lever cannot be A problem in shift lock Check interlock system -shift lock system circuit (see
moved from [f] system of interlock system. page 14-96).
position while you're
pushing on the brake
pedal
Ignition key cannot A problem in key interlock Check interlock system - key interlock system circuit
be moved from ACC system of interlock system (see page 14-99).
(I) position to LOCK
(0) position while
you're pushing the
ignition key with the
shift lever in [f]
position
14-8
BACK
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
move in any gear adjustment ATF cooler lines.
3. Joint in shift cable and Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
transmission or body worn transmission control shaft.
4. ATF pump worn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
5. Regulator valve stuck or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
spring worn symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
6. ATF strainer clogged a high pitched squeak.
7. Mainshaft worn or Measure line pressure.
damaged Ifthe strainer is clogged, find the damaged
8. Final gears worn or components that caused debris.
damaged Inspect the differential pinion gear for wear. If the
9. Transmission-to-engine differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
assembly error differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
10. Axle disengaged thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush the
torque converter, cooler, and lines.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
Install the main seal flush with the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in 1. 1 st accumulator defective Inspect 1st clutch pressure.
III and lID, but not 2. 1 st gears worn or damaged Inspectthe secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
in ~ ~ or ill 3. 1st clutch defective assembly for wear and damage.
position Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-9
BACK
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift solenoid valve A Check the III indicator indication, and check for loose
ill, IR), but defective connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift
not in III position 2. Shift valve A defective solenoid valve for seizure.
3. 2nd accumulator defective Inspectthe secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
4. 2nd gears worn or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
5. 2nd clutch defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift fork shaft stuck Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure.
2. Modulator valve defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
not in IR) position 3. Reverse CPC valve shaft.
defective If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
4. 4th accumulator defective aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump.lfthe ATF pump is
5. 4th clutch defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
6. Reverse gears worn or replace the torque converter.
damaged Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the
counters haft 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the
reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are
worn or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking,
grinding, or whirring noises, also replace the
mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.
Ifthe 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If
the ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is
dented. The O-ring under the guide is probably worn.
Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd and
4th clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th
clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace
the end cover.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspectthe clutch end plate-to-top disc
clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
with the clutch end plate.
14-10
BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
flares on starting 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
adjustment ATF cooler lines.
positions: 3. ATF pump worn or binding Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Stall speed high in 4. Regulator valve stuck or transmission control shaft.
[lJ, and II) spring worn Check line pressure.
positions 5. ATF strainer clogged Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
6. Torque converter check converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
valve defective symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
pitched squeak.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
flares on starting adjustment transmission control shaft.
off in and 2. 1 st cI utch defective Check 1st clutch pressure.
positions: Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
Stall speed high in spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
II) clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
positions is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
flares on starting adjustment transmission control shaft.
off in [lJ position: 2. 2nd clutch defective Check 2nd clutch pressure.
Stall speed high in Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
[lJ position spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
or damaged, replace them as a set. Ifthey are OK,
Poor acceleration; 4th clutch defective Check 4th clutch pressure.
flares on starting Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
off in [RJ position: and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
Stall speed is in damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
specification in clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
[lJ, and II) the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
positions, but high the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
in [RJ position them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-11
BACK
.--
Poor acceleration; 1. Torque converter clutch Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Stall speed low solenoid valve defective
2. Torque converter one-way
clutch defective
3. Engine output low
4. Lock-up clutch piston
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve
defective
6. Restricted cooler
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
vibration 2. Torque converter clutch no good, adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
solenoid valve defective engine section ofthis service manual.
3. Drive plate defective or Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
transmission leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
misassembled ATF cooler lines.
4. Engine output low Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
6. ATF pump worn or binding
defective
Vehicle moves in 1. Excessive ATF Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
IHl position 2. Foreign material in leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
separator plate orifice ATF cooler lines.
3. 1st clutch defective Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
4. 2nd clutch defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
5. 3rd clutch defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-ta-top disc
6. 4th clutch defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
7. Clutch clearance incorrect the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
8. Needle bearing seized up, the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
worn or damaged them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
9. Thrust washer seized up, plate clearance.
worn, or damaged Check for clutch pressure in neutral.
14-12 BACK
- ._------ -_.-- ._._--_.-
Late shift from rID 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
position to and defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
positions 2. AfT clutch pressure control shift solenoid valve for seizure.
solenoid valves A and B Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
defective body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
3. Shift cable broken or out of If the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve is
adjustment stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
s. Shift fork shaft stuck If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. CPC valve A stuck aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
7. Foreign material in OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
separator plate orifice replace the torque converter.
8. Shift valve C defective Check 1st clutch pressure.
9. Servo control valve Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
10. 1st accumulator defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
11. 1 st check ball stuck clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
12. 1st clutch defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
-
Late shift from rID 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
position to [HJ defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
position 2. AfT clutch pressure control shift solenoid valve for seizure.
s. Shift fork shaft stuck If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. Foreign material in aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
separator plate orifice OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
7. Reverse CPC valve replace the torque converter.
defective Check 4th clutch pressure.
8. 4th accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
9. 4th clutch defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
the discs and plates are worn and damaged, replace
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-13
BACK
---
No shift Modulator valve defective Measure line pressure.
---
Erratic shifting 1. Shift solenoid valve A Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve
gears: defective for seizure.
Fails to shift in 2. Mainshaft speed sensor Check the indicator indication, and check for
position; does not defective loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
upshift to 4th 3. Countershaft speed sensor switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
defective replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
4. Shift valve A defective adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
5. Shift valve 0 defective
Erratic shifting 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the indicator indication, and check for
gears: defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
Fails to shift in 2. Shift fork shaft stuck shift solenoid valve for seizure.
and IR!I positions; 3. Shift valve B defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
does not upshift to 4. Servo control valve shaft.
3rd and 4th defective
Erratic shifting 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the indicator indication, and check for
gears: defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
Fails to shift in 2. Shift valve B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
~ and [j] 3. Shift valve E defective
positions; starts off
in3rd
Excessive shock, 1. AfT clutch pressure control Check the indicator indication, and check for
or flares on all solenoid valves A and B loose connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
upshifts and defective control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
downshifts 2. CPC valve A defective pipes for wear and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure
3. CPC valve B defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. Foreign material in If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
separator plate orifice aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump. Ifthe ATF pump is
OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
flares on 1-2 defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
upshift or 2-1 2. 2nd clutch pressure switch shift solenoid valve for seizure. Check that the outlet
downshift defective is not clogged inside of the 2nd clutch pressure
3. Foreign material in switch connector.
separator plate orifice Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
4. Shift valve C defective Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
5. 1 st accumulator defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
6. 2nd accumulator defective clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance
7. 1st check ball stuck is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
8. 2nd check ball stuck for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
9. 1st clutch defective or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
10. 2nd clutch defective adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
14-14
BACK
Excessive shock, 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
or flares on 2-3 defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
upshift or 3-2 2. 3rd clutch pressure switch shift solenoid valve for seizure. Check that the outlet
downshift defective is not clogged inside of the 3rd clutch pressure switch
3. Foreign material in connector.
separator plate orifice Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
4. Shift valve C defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
5. 2nd accumulator defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
6. 3rd accumulator defective damage. Inspectthe clutch end plate-to-top disc
7. 2nd check ball stuck clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
8. 2nd clutch defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
9. 3rd clutch defective the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
plate clearance.
Excessive shock, 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
or flares on 3-4 defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
upshift or 4-3 2. Foreign material in shift solenoid valve for seizure.
downshift separator plate orifice Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
3. Shift valve C defective If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
4. 3rd accumulator defective aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. Ifthe ATF pump is
5. 4th accumulator defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
6. 3rd clutch defective replace the torque converter, and check the stall
7. 4th clutch defective speed.
plate clearance.
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Torque converter housing converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
shift lever or transmission housing symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
positions bearing worn or damaged pitched squeak.
Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary
shaft with the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates
for damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe
for damage and out of round. Ifthe 1st clutch feed
pipe is damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace
the seconda ry shaft if the bushi ng for the 1 st cI utch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate more defective
than 31 mph (50
km/h)
(cont'd)
14-15
BACK
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
shift lever transmission misassembled no good, adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
positions engine section of the service manual.
Check the stall speed.
Shift lever does 1. AfT gear position switch Check the indicator indication, and check for
not operate defective or out of loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
smoothly adjustment switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
2. Shift cable broken or out of replace it. Ifthe transmission range switch is out of
adjustment adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
not shift into adjustment transmission control shaft.
position 2. Joint in shift cable and Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
transmission or body worn lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
3. Park mechanism defective install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the
distance between the park pawl and the park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance with the park lever stop.
Lock-up clutch 1. Torque converter clutch Check the indicator indication, and check for
does not solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
disengage 2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
solenoid valves A and B pipes for wear and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure
defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. Lock-up clutch piston Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
defective
5. Lock-up control valve
defective
6. Lock-up timing valve
defective
14-16
BACK
does not operate solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
smoothly 2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
3. Lock-up clutch piston Center all engine mounts.
defective
4. Torque converter check
valve defective
defective
defective
defective
does not engage solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes
solenoid valves A and B for wear and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. Mainshaft speed sensor
defective
4. Countershatft speed sensor
defective
defective
valve defective
defective
defective
AfT gear position 1. Transmission range switch Check the indicator indication, and check for
indicator does not defective or out of loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
indicate shift lever adjustment switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
positions 2. Shift cable broken or out of replace it. Ifthe transmission range switch is out of
Speedometer does Countershaft speed sensor Check the indicator indication, and check for
not operate defective loose connectors.
14-17
BACK
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
automatic transmission which provides 4 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel while transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel
shafts: the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft.
The mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral with
4th the gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive
gear is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd,
and idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center,
providing 4th gear or reverse, depending on which way the selector moved. The gears on the mainshaft and the
secondary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted from the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the
countershaft to provide ~ /II, rn and [BJ positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve 0, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up control valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF pump gears.
The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up timing valve, and the relief valve. The servo body
contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.
The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators, and the lubrication check valve. Fluid from the
regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive fluid
from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, while
receiving input signal from various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the
positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B, to shift smoothly between lower gear and higher gear. This
pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In ~ position (3rd and 4th), and ~ position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of
lock-up according to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
14-18 BACK
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions: (f] PARK, 1RI REVERSE, [ftI NEUTRAL, 1stthrough 4th gear ranges, ~ 1stthrough
3rd gear ranges, 00 2nd gear, and rn 1st gear.
Position Description
(f] PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with the park gear on the countershaft. All clutches
released.
1RI REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch engaged.
[ftI NEUTRAL All clutches released.
~ R I V E General driving; starts off in 1 st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
(1st through 4th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1 st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
~ R I V E For rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill driving;
(1st through 3rd) starts off in 1 st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and throttle
position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
00 SECOND Driving in 2nd gear; stays in 2nd gear, does not shift up and down. For engine braking or better
traction starting off on loose or slippery surface.
rn FIRST Driving in 1st gear, stays in 1st gear, does not shift up. For engine braking.
Starting is possible only in (f] and [ftI positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (A/T) Gear Position Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows what gear has been selected without looking down at
the console.
(cont'd)
14-19
BACK
System Description (cont'd)
Clutches
The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated cluches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1 st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1 st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rdClutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
14-20
BACK
Transmission Cutaway View
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
PISTON
DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
3RDGEAR
ATFPUMP
DRIVEN GEAR
MAINSHAFT
4TH GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
PITOTPIPE
('00-02 models)
(cont'd)
14-21
BACK
Power Flow
POSITION PART
TORQUE 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RDGEAR 4TH REVERSE PARK
'CONVERTER 1ST 2ND 3RD GEAR CLUTCH GEAR GEAR
CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
0
x x x x x x
0
!Rl 0
x x x x
0 0
x
IHI 0
x x x x x x x
1ST 0 0
x x x x x x
2ND 0
x
0
x x x x x
3RD 0
x x
0
x x x x
4TH 0
x x x
0 0
x x
1ST 0 0
x x x x x x
2ND 0
x
0
x x x x x
3RD 0
x x
0
x x x x
[!)
0
x
0
x x x x x
III 0 0 x x x x x x
0: Operates
x: Doesn't operate
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.
The 4th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The idler gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:
The final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
The 1st gear, 3rdgear, 2nd gear, and park gear are splined with the countershaft and rotate with the countershaft.
The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined with the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
The idler gear rotates freely from the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:
The 1st gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
The 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
'The idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft and rotates with the secondary shaft.
14-22
BACK

Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
[H] Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged with the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, when the shift lever is shifted in [H] position from position. The countershaft reverse gear is engaged when
shifted from!Rl position.
TORQUE CONVERTER

MAINSHAFT IDLER GEAR
/
MAINSHAFT

IDLER GEAR
.---__ SECONDARY SHAFT
, /SECONDARY SHAFT
/ IDLER GEAR
(cont'd)
14-23
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
In or IP! position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
or Position in 1 st gear and rn Position
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft .
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
'"
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
____ FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-24
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
BACK
or Position in 2nd gear and Position
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
'"
..... _----- COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR --------SECONDARY SHAFT
SHAFT
2ND GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
__ -------FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
14-25
BACK
System Description (co nt' d)
Power Flow (cont'd)
or Position in 3rd gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
TORQUE CONVERTER
""
14-26
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
3RDCLUTCH
L---=----1---"lJ..::b. / MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
3RDGEAR
-
BACK
Position in 4th gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range 00 and [I] position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
TORQUE CONVERTER
'"
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAfT
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
____ ------ SECONDARY SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
(cont'd)
14-27
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
1ft) Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the 1ft) position.
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The rotation direction ofthe countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, which drives the reverse selector hub.
TORQUE CONVERTER
\
14-28
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
/ FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
~ REVERSE
IDLER GEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
\ REVERSE GEAR
SHIFT FORK
BACK
Functional Diagram
Throttle Position Sensor 11-----+1
Signal 1
Engine Coolant Temperature Lt----H
Sensor Signal 1
MULTIPLEX -EJ
IDRIVER'SI
'-- CONTROL UNIT P 1---.....
l
f-----1H
D4
D3
2
PCM
PGM-FI
Control System
AfT Control System
Shift Control
H-----l[ Data Link Connector
I
1+1t----;1 Shift Solenoid Valve A I
1+1----1: Shift Solenoid Valve B
H I I l ~ Shift Solenoid Valve C I
1 Automatic Transaxle Clutch I
1+11---...... -;1 Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A
1 Automatic Transaxle Clutch J
H-I1--...... --1--l
1
Pressure Control Solenoid
ValveB
H-I1----t--1--l1 2nd Clutch Pressure
L Switch
1+11---+---7-;1 3rd Clutch Pressure
~ 1 Switch
I
I
Lock-up Control 1+1----1
1
1 Solenoid Valve
-1 ~ Indicator I
'-----------' 1-1-__ -11 Mainshaft Speed Sensor I
,.-------, L Signal
~ Self-Diagnosis Signal Lt----1t+1 SeH-Diagnosis L--_________ --'
L-________ -' 1-1-__ -11 Countershaft Speed
I 1 Function I
'--_____ ....1 1 Sensor Signal
(cont'd)
14-29
BACK
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Electronic Controls Location
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
MAINS HAFT SPEED
SENSOR
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
14-30

)
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
BACK
Shift Control
Shifting is related to engine torque through the AfT clutch pressure control solenoids, which are controlled by the PCM.
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors, and actuates the
shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System has been adopted to control
shifting in and positions while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C are shown in the table below.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves
A B C
~ ~ Shifting from !HI position ON ON ON
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON
Shifting gears between 1 st and 2nd ON ON ON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON OFF OFF
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON
~ Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF
00
2nd ON ON OFF
III 1st OFF ON ON
1ft! Shiftil}g from ~ and [HI position OFF ON ON
Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF
Reverse inhibit OFF ON ON
~
Park OFF ON OFF
[HI Neutral OFF ON OFF
. .
NOTE: For a deSCription of the reverse inhibit mode, refer to page 14-56 .
Lock-up Control
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON, the condition of lock-up starts. The AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure, and apply
pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd, and
4th gear in ~ and in 3rd gear in positions.
(cont'd)
14-31
BACK
Grade Logic Control System
How it works:
The PCM compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the
countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, and the shift lever position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or
descending a slope, or reducing speed.
SENSORS/SWITCHES SIGNALS DETECTED PCM
.------
}-
Y Countershaft Speed
Sensor
-f- Judgement of Controlling Area
H Throttle Position
~
Driving Resistance
rr-
1/1
Sensor
r-
c
I I
0
E
"0
Detection of c
Calculation Calculation 0
standard
(,)
of actual
acceleration
of decelera-
aI
acceleration tion c
(in Memory)
~
Q
r-IEngine Coolant
Coolant Temperature t--
I I
Temperature Sensor Calculation of gradient
I I
r-I Transmission
~ or Position
~
I I
Range Switch
Selection of Shifting Mode
'-----
Normal Mode (Flat road mode)
Ascending Mode
Fuzzy Logic
Descending Mode
Gradual Descending Mode
Steep Descending Mode
Deceleration Mode
I
I
Automatic 4 Speeds
14-32
I
BACK
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in and positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
NOTE:
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable the PCM's
fuzzy logic to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient .
Fuzzy logic is a form of artificial intelligence that lets computers respond to changing conditions much like a human
mind would.
o '---'-........II ....
Descending Control
4TH
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
---: FLAT ROAD MODE
- - - - - _. : GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
_ _ . _ .. : STEEP ASCENDING MODE
: 2ND3RD SHIFTING CHARACTERISTICS
CONTROL AREA
_ : 3RD-4TH SHIFTING CHARACTERISTICS
-- CONTROL AREA
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in and positions, the shift-up speed from 3rd to
4th gear and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to
widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking from the deceleration lock-up,
achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are two descending modes with different 3rd gear
driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the
vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will
downshift to 3rd gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100%
50
o
Deceleration Control
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
--- : FLAT ROAD MODE
- - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
-"-"- : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
62 mph
(100 km/hl
Vehicle speed
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope with
upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
14-33 BACK
PCM Electrical Connections
ATTERY
+
-<:T"..P ~
IGNITION SWITCH
PGMFI
MAIN
~ ~
RELAY
r-
-<T"
L..-
I
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
I ENGINE COOLANT 1--
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
I
l-
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
,8 . 0
BRAKE LIGHT
1
B2
F.
81
U
B21
C2B
C27
CIS
C26
AIO
A32
820
822
Jr IGNITION SWITCH
IGI
GAUGE ASSEM8L Y
I
~ T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
PGI
PG2
IGPI
IGP2
VBU
VCC2
TPS
SG2
ECT
SCS
BKSW
LGI
LG2
000 @00
P
TRANSMISSION
RANGE R
~ ~ .
N
D'
OJ
2
,
D. INDICATOR I
@I
PCM
?
I
?
I
PGMFI
I
CONTROL
I
SYSTEM AUTOMATIC
b
TRANSAXLE
CONTROL
I
SYSTEM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
05
VB SOL
A9
VSSOUT
06
ATP R
D9
ATPD.
DB
ATPDJ
014
ATP2
0'5
ATP'
0'3
ATPNP
A'4
D41ND
PCM Connedor TerminallocattOns
A (32P) B(25P) C (3IP)
14-34
LSA,
BI7
/>JT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOUENOID
BB
VALVE A
LSA
LS B,
B25
/>JT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
BIB
VALVE B
LSB
SHA
07
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
02
SH 8
~ SHIFT SOLENOID
*VALVE8
SHC
03
~ SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE C
TIT
LC
01
~ TOROL'E
CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VAlVE
7!T
011
NM
EJ MAiNSHAFT
'"'"' SPEED SENSOR
NMSG
012
NC
010
EJ COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
NCSG
016
ILU
A2B I MULTIPLEX CONTROL I
I UNIT (DRIVER'S)
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
OP2SW
BI4
~
3RD CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
OP3SW
B2.
~
CRS
AS r CRUISE CONTROL
I 1
UNIT
o (16P)
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs
The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals related to the AfT control
system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 11.
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
,,:..
-
1sT
1/12
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
VI
1 2 345
/
7 8111 2 3
/
5 6 7 8 9 10 1 23V
1
12
1
1
3
14 15 16 17 18 1920 21V 23 241 9 10 11 12 1314
V
1617
181V
/
13 1415 16 17 18 19 20 21/ 6 7 8 9 10 111121
25 26 27 28 2930
/
32 19 20 2122 23 24 25
/ V
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
13 14 15 16
'-- '--- '--
A (32P) B(25P) C (31P) D(16P)
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage
Number
A5 BLU/GRN CRS Downshift signal input from When cruise control is used: Pulsing signal
cruise control unit
A9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT Vehicle speed signal detected Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
from countershaft speed
sensor
A10 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
service check signal connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected with Honda PGM
tester: OV
A14 GRN/BLK D41ND D4 indicator control When ignition switch is first turned ON (II):
Battery voltage for two seconds
In position: Battery voltage
A28 WHT/RED ILU Interlock control When ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
A32 WHT/BLK BKSW Brake pedal position switch Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
signal output Brake pedal released: 0 V
(cont'd)
14-35
BACK
/
r--r-- r-
r5l Vl2
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10 VI 1 2 345
/
7 8111 2 3
/
567 8 9 10 1 2 3/
112j13 14 1516 17 18 1920 21V 23
241
9 10 1112 1314
V
1617
181V
V
13 1415 16 17 1819 20 21V 6 7 8 9 10 111121
25 26 27 2B 29 30
/
32 19 20 2122 23 2425
V /
25 26 27 2B 29 30
V
1314 15 16
'-- '--'-- -'-- '--
A (32P) B(25P) C(31P) D(16P)
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
Number
B1 VEL/BlK IGP1 Power supply circuit from With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
main relay_ With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B2 BlK PG1 Ground (G101)
B8 WHT lSA- AfT clutch pressure control
supply negative electrode
main relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B10 BlK PG2 Ground (G101)
B14 BlU/BlK OP2SW AfT 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure)
B17 RED lSA+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
B18 GRN lSB- AfT clutch pressure control
sUlmly negative electrode
B20 BRN/BlK lG1 Ground (G101)
B21 WHT/YEl VBU Back-up power supply Always battery voltage
(Fuse No. 13 in passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box)
B22 BRN/BlK lG2 Ground (G101)
B24 BlU/WHT OP3SW AfT 3rd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
switch signal input (No 3rd clutch pressure)
B25 ORN lSB+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
14-36
BACK
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)
Number
D1 VEL lC Torque converter clutch During lock-up condition: Battery voltage
solenoid valve control During no lock-up condition: 0 V
D2 GRN/WHT SHB Shift solenoid valve B control Battery voltage in following positions:
[1] and 00 positions.
~ and ~ positions in 1st and 2nd gear
[fl, IBJ, and IN] positions
o V in following positions:
~ and positions in 3rd gear
~ position in 4th gear
D3 GRN SHC Shift solenoid valve C control Battery voltage in following positions:
[1] position
~ and positions in 1 st and 3rd gear
00 position
~ and positions in 2nd gear
[fl, 00, and IN] positions
D4 -- -- Not used
D5 BlK/YEl VBSOl Power supply for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
under-dash fuse/relaj' box)
D6 WHT ATPR Transmission range switch 00 In 00 position: 0 V
position input In other than 00 position: Battery voltage
D7 BLU/YEl SHA Shift solenoid valve A control Battery voltage in following positions:
00 position
~ and positions in 2nd and 3rd gear
[1] position
~ and positions in 1st gear
[fl, IBJ, and IN] positions
(cont'd)
14-37
BACK
/
r--r--- r-
Isl
1/12
3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10 VI 1 2 345
V
7 8111
2 3
/
5 6 7 8 9 10 1 23/
1
12
1
1
3
14 1516 17 18 19 20 21
/
23
241
9 10 1112 1314
/
1617
18
1 V /
13 14 15 16 17 1819 20 21V 6 7 8 9 10 111121
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
32 19 20 2122 23 24 25
/ V
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
13 14 15 16
'-- '--'-- '-- '--
-
A (32P) B(25P) C (31P) D(16P)
Number
D8 PNK ATPD3 Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
position input In other than position: Battery voltage
D9 VEL ATPD4 Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
position input In other than position: Battery voltage
D10 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
input When vehicle is stopped: Approx. 0 V
D11 RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
When engine is stopped: Approx. 0 V
D12 WHT NMSG Mainshaft speed sensor
ground
D13 BLU/WHT ATPNP Transmission range switch In and IHI positions: 0 V
and IHI positions input In other than and IHI positions: Battery
voltage
D14 BLU ATP2 Transmission range switch [!] In [!] position: 0 V
position input In other than [!] position: Battery voltage
D15 BRN ATP 1 Transmission range switch ill In ill position: 0 V
position input In other than ill position: Battery voltage
D16 GRN NCSG Countershaft speed sensor
ground
14-38 BACK
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
The ATF pump is driven by splines on the right end ofthe torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure, through the main valve body, to the manual valve,
directing pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves Band C are mounted on the outside of the torque
converter housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the
torque converter housing as an assembly. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVES A and B

REGULATOR VALVE BODY
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE/SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A

3RDCLUTCH
/ PRESSURE SWITCH
/SERVOBOOY
'------------2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
(cont'd)
14-39
BACK
System Description (co nt' d)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve
E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up
control valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main valve body is to
switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
TORQUE CONVERTER SH FT VALVE D MODULATOR VALVE
CHECK VALVE
SHIFT VALVE C
REVERSE CPC VALVE
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve Body
The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up timing valve, and the relief valve.
REGULATOR VALVE

LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
14-40
BACK
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains a constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. The fluid from the ATF pump flows through Sand
S'. Fluid entering from S flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the
regulator valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque
converter and the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve
moves to the left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through S, the position of the regulator valve
changes, and the amount of fluid from S' through torque converter also changes. This operation is continued,
maintaining the line pressure.
NOTE: When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the illustration below.
From ATF PUMP
To TORQUE CONVERTEr 1 T LUBRICATION
VALVE ORIFICE
~ ~
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined with the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR
~
VALVE
SPRING CAP
(cont'd)
14-41
BACK
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve 8, the CPC
valves A and 8, and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and 2nd
accumulators and the lubrication check valve.
SERVO BODY

14-42
CPCVALVEB
SERVO VALVE
4TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
-------SERVO BODY
2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON
LUBRICATION CHECK VALVE
BACK
Hydraulic Flow
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves apply shift solenoid pressure to
the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and switches
the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode.
The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the
port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and CPC pressure is intercepted.
Engaging the clutch with line pressure happens when shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the ports is as follows:
PORT NO. DESCRIPTION OF PORT NO. DESCRIPTION OF PORT NO. DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
1 LINE 5H CPC B or LINE 57 LS B
3 LINE 5J CPC B or LINE 58 LS Aor LS B
3' LINE 5K CPC B or LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
3" LINE 5K' CPC B or LINE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER
4 LINE 6 MODULATE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
4' LINE SA SHA 91' TORQUE CONVERTER
4" LINE SB SH B 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
4A CPCA SC SHC 93 ATFCOOLER
4B CPC B LA LC 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
5A CPCA 9 LINE 95 LUBRICATION
5D CPCB 10 1ST CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION
5B CPCAor LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
5E CPC A or LINE 25 LINE 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
5F CPCAor LINE 30 3RDCLUTCH 99 SUCTION
5F' CPCAor LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH X DRAIN
5C CPC B or LINE 41 4TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5G CPC B or LINE 56 LSA AX AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
SH: Shift Control Solenoid pressure
LS: AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure
LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
14-43
BACK
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
!Hl Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is moved to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and the shift valve 8 remains in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at the shift valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the
modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift solenoid valves and
the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-02 models are similar.
14-44
BACK
IQ1I Position: 1st gear shifting from [NJ position
The peM turns shift solenoid valves A and e ON when shifting to IQ1I position from [NJ. Shift solenoid valve B remains
ON. Shift solenoid valve e is turned ON, and SH e pressure (Se) in the right Side of shift valve e is released, then shift
valve e is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of shift
valve A is released, then shift valve A is moved to the right side. The NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
regulates LS A pressure (56), and applies it to the epe valve A. Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (4) at the
manual valve, and flows to the shift valve e and the epe valve A. Line pressure (4A) becomes epe A pressure (4A) and
passes through the shift valve e, A and B, then epe A pressure (4A) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve B.
1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch is engaged with pressure ofthe epe pressure
mode. Line pressure (4) passes through shift valve A and B, and stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit .
(cont'd)
14-45
BACK
~ Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves Band C remain ON. SH A pressure (SA) is applied
to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is moved to the left side. This movement switches the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 1st
clutch is engaged securely. The CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
TCfWl CD'lVERrE.R
~ ~ SOlENOID
r--\..
14-46
11f ACC\NUUlOll
I
I
-
I
I
BACK
~ Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. Shift solenoid
valves Band C remain ON. Then shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift
valve A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The
PCM also controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and B. line pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at the CPC valve
B, and CPC B pressure passes through shift valves C, B, and A, to become 2nd clutch pressure. The 1st and 2nd
clutches are engaged with the CPC pressure mode.
NOTE:
... .. ... l i : : : : ~ _ v ... wc
(cont'd)
14-47
BACK
Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). The shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC
A pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to
the right side of it. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The
2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure
(50) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
,IT ACCUMULATOII
RJI-
........

n . ==- J m :F-.
ti E"i t - I r= II '. W!1 j l J
))
f\

ROUE CQNVEATt" TO
Cl
v"-
U1'CH SDC.ENDlD
r--,. ..

r:.
;II
J
Iv ..... -
' .... rr

.:1l=o:. .....

I:
1-
J
.':="(
14-48

....:;:..;.:.;

_ .......
1Ir_I-_r_
-. -Ilrl
-;b
-.
,iIi': --Ii
';"
Jo.l

...
-ttfi}u
JI. L
1
_. IT
n. I
J
- --
.l..JA =-
-,
n
--==- ....b.
.4
___ ......... _v ..... f( !
\\.. I
-F"
.......

I ... _v ......
....l

I
.,... ...... c

-"r-I_

I

, .. ,
." ........ -
--
VMWI
I': 0011 [--
,K ..
, , ...

'I
.,,--
II' -1:C--
VMVlA
--...
'Ill
vu,,_
11 If li
. uu.
_ .... ,
J 1 'r'
..
I ]
10 10
--
.....
rV

It
..J!I. I

-t!

AfJ
.... '-tf
P"'"' ." .......

I
I
I
I
BACK
Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve 8 OFF. The PCM also
controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to the CPC valve A. Shift solenoid
valve A remains ON, and C remains OFF. Shift soleniod valve 8 is turned OFF, and SH 8 pressure (58) is applied to the
right side of shift valve 8. Then shift valve 8 is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC
pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at the CPC valve A. The CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 3rd
clutch pressure (30) at shift valve 8, and flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure
mode by switching the position of shift valve B.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-49
BACK
Position: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release lS B
pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing lS B pressure in the CPC valve B
releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC)
in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure. 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged
securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.
NOTE:
When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit .
14-50
BACK
~ Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also
controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8 to apply LS 8 pressure (57) to CPC valve 8. Shift solenoid valve 8
remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left
side of shift valve A. Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
Line pressure (4) becomes CPC 8 pressure (48) at CPC valve 8. The CPC 8 pressure (48) becomes 4th clutch pressure
(41) at shift valve D, and flows to the 4th clutch via the manual valve. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC
pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve A.
NOTE:
--......-
.... _ ........ v ....
~ ~ m f f i f P
A/fcunae"",
--
".WI
(cont'd)
14-51 BACK
Position: Driving in 4th gear
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the
3rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of
shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The CPC
B pressure (5B) changes to line pressure (5B) at shift valve C, and flows to the 4th clutch via shift valve C, shift valve B,
shift valve 0, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching the
position of shift valve A, and shift valve C. The 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (50) stops at shift
valve A.
NOTE:
la.
14-52
I
I
BACK
00 Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C is moved to the left side.
The PCM also controls AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve
A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and
2nd clutch is engaged securely.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-53
BACK
ill Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is moved to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and shift valve 8 is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (58) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve 8 via shift valve A,
and becomes 1 st clutch pressure (10). 1 st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1 st clutch, and 1 st clutch is engaged
securely.
NOTE:
"
m
'" , .. ct.u"," _a.UTCM
....
-rf- -.

j=""
W
"" I) r=-I t H
2
, J i I lID
nw II-il
k: i)

.CfC'

1 f\
rE!flb
[v .....
I .11"1
......
..,. ,r .Ibl'_
';'
--

.---

-,I;,

IHI'TVALYEC
OROUE CONVERTER
LuTCH SOLENOID
"'-YE

.c=-J ...
...

,r.
-;D

J U
r",;i- 'Y
11-1' ti

,"

,Jl'
An cum:tI ..... UM

--
VAl.VEa
,VYI r
11'". I' 10-
I 'II MII

IU'
I
- ..
I .. ..., .......
'.
AI
." ........ -
I!I'
-
.lIi'I." 11 I
II
...
UW'- 1
I
UK r
uH II. H. .. U.
nl,
'=iI
I
I i-:'
_1111 IT
r .. I [_v ....
f!I
I
,t
"I' ..
flu
....
n
1 .1 is_ .l.
JI.

--
v ....
.:r::u
1"- 11.:

lm
=---

'(f

l_
J '=tf
.=.

14-54 BACK
[RJ Position: Shifting to [RJ position from [t] or [HI position.
Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the
reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40). The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and 4th clutch is engaged with the reverse CPC
pressure mode.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-55
BACK
[RJ Position: Driving in reverse gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is the same as in [RJ position,
and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control
When the [RJ position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speed over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM outputs
the 1st speed signal to turn the shift solenoid valve C ON; shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve
B remains ON. The reverse CPC valve is moved to right side and cover the port so stop the line pressure (3') to the
servo valve. The line pressure (3') is not applied to the servo valve, and the 4th clutch pressure (40) is not applied to
the 4th clutch, as result, power is not transmitted to the reverse position.
NOTE:
+
2:t J
14-56
BACK
[f] Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC
valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo
valve. Line pressure (3') passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
1ST ACCUMULATOIII 2NDACCUMUUTOII JllDACCUMUUTOll
(cont'd)
14-57
BACK
Lock-up System
In position (3rd and 4th), and position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve (lock-up control solenoid valve)
activates, modulator pressure changes to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing
valve control the range of lock-up according to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque
converter clutch solenoid valve is mounted on the torque converter housing, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B are mounted on the transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.
General Operation
1. Operation (clutch on)
With the lock-up clutch on, fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is
drained off, and the converter fluid exerts pressure through the piston against the torque converter cover. As a
result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the
vehicle in direct drive.
!powerflow I
The power flows by way of:

T converter cover
'1Ck.UP piston
DTmper spring
Turbina
I
Mainshaft
2. Operation (clutch off)
LOCKUP PISTON
/
TORQUE CONVERTER
COVER
DAMPER SPRING
TURBINE
To ATF coolar
MAINSHAFT
With the lock-up clutch off, fluid flows in the reverse of CLUTCH ON. As a result, the lock-up piston moves away
from the converter cover, and torque converter lock-up is released.
14-58
IPower flow I

DrvePlate
T'jrque converter cover
Pimp
Turbine
I
Mainshaft
TURBINE
MAiNSHAFT
PUMP
To ATF cooler
INlET
ttl
I
BACK
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM.
The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA) on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The
lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the
torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side
of the torque converter (to disengage the lock-up clutch). The lock-up clutch is OFF.
NOTE:
VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
ATFCOCIWI '--___ J
(cont'd)
14-59
BACK
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the
left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter.
Torque converter pressure (92) flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM
also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter
pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) from the
lock-up timing valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. LS A or LS B (58) increases, and the lock-up
timing valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch
is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure from the right side of the
torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
NOTE:
TCNIOUECONVEATER

14-60
BACK
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to
increase LS A or LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the
lock-up timing valve, and moves them to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure is released
fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
NOTE:

COD .... _CII
VALVE
REUEFVALVE
ATFCOOU. '--___ -J
...........
VALVE
(cont'd)
14-61
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD FUSEIRELAY BOX
BATTERY
N047(2OA)

No.41 (lODA) No 42 (SOA)
No.5-C (4DA) No.46 (ISA)
WHTNEl
B21
VBU
VSP
OUT
AS
BlUlWHT
PASSENGERS
UNDER DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
ToSV
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
BAT
IGI
ST
IGNITION
SWITCH
No 6 (ISA)
No.9 (7.SA)
No I(ISA)
DRIVERS UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
YEUBlK YEUBlK
BI B9
IGPI IGP2
TOl2V
5V
REGULATOR
BLK
B2
PGI
PGMFI
MAIN
RELAY
BIO
PG2
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
SHIFT lOCK
SOLENOID
SHIFT LOCK B22
SOLENOID
GRN
GIOI
ILU
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
04
IND
AI4
DRIVER'S
GAWIIU< UNDER.DASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
WHT
MULTIPLEX
p
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
YEL
PNK
I
!
BLU
I
I
ATP
NP
BlUIWHT
BAN
BlKNEL
os
VB SOL
Tol2V
DRIVERS
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRElAY
BOX
No9 (7.SA)
Y

el2
}-------H e15 BlKIBlU 1l-1!- BLKlBlU -ip
: BLKlBLU l
I
i
STARTER
CUT RELAY
co
WHT---;
"
WHT---4
YEl
el. REDlBlK --I
."
REDlBLK -; .!... REDlBU<
L pNK

L!!-. BRN
J
co
PNK---; 9
PNK---4
e7
BlU---; BLU ---4
e.
BRN---;
BRN---4
II. 1-___ ------'
BLK
1
Gsal
14-62
r- L TBLU --t:>
Bn
I.
,
a 7 6

I 2
31
T
RED
1111111
YEL BlU GAY REDlWHT
N
D.
D,
ST A E
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
BACK
.,-
LSA LSA+ LSI
B8 117 II'
WIlT RED GRN
A (32P)
.,-
?
LSI. LC SHA SHI
1125
ORN
01 07
VEL ILUIYEL
Ll
T T
VEL
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
VAlVE
GRN.9LK
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE A
02
GRNlWHT
I (2SP)
IW GRN REDlWHT
010 016 C26
NC NCSG ECT
.,-
.,- .,- .,- .,-
POWERrRAIN CONTROL MODULE [PCM)
SHC
D3
GRN
ILK ILK
PeM Co_ Terminal Locahans
C(31P)
II.
lLUllLK
GIOI
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
B24
ILUNlHT
o (16P)
3RDCWTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
C2I
VCC2
LGI
B20
Gl0l
C27 CII
TPS SG2
.,-
.,-
.,- .,-
~ G
B22
GIOI
14-63
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1753: Problem in Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit
2. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (25P) and D (16P).
4. Measure the voltage between the D1 and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25P)
1 2
9
PCM CONNECTORS
lC(YEl)
'------{':i,}---------'
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
YES- Repair short to power in the wire between
the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch
solenoid valve .
NO- Go to step 5.
14-64
6. Measure the resistance between the D1 and 820 or
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
lC (YEll
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
'-------{QI----------'
Is the resistance 12- 25 ~ ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Check for continuity between the 820 and 822
terminals and body ground.
2 3 4 5 7 8
9 10
19 20 21 22 232425
lG2 (BRN/BlK)
YES- Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in the wires between the 820 and
822 terminals and ground (G101) .
BACK
8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve/shift solenoid valve A 2P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the Dl and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25P)
1 2
9 10
19 20
PCM CONNECTORS
LC (YEll
)-----...,
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
the Dl terminal and the torque converter clutch
solenoid valve .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Measure the resistance between the No.1 terminal
of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A connector and body ground.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
CONNECTOR (2P)
Is the resistance 12-25 Q ?
YES-Check for open in the wire between the Dl
terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve .
NO- Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve/shift solenoid valve A..
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
r - - - - - - - - - - - ~ ~ ~ - - - - - - ~ ~
- - - - - - - - - ; ~ I - - - - - - -
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
YES- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck .
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the D5 terminal and the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .
14-65
BACK
DTC P1705: Short in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit
2. Observe the AfT gear position indicator, and shift
each position separately.
Do any indicators stay on when the shift lever is
not in that position?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-The system is OK at this time. Check the wire
harness for damage .
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
Do all gear position indicators go out?
YES - Replace the transmission range switch
NO-Goto step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect the
transmission range switch connector.
6. Shift to all positions other than IRJ.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) (16P)
V
r-
V
r--
1 2 345 7 8 1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
16 17 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 2122 23 24 25
11 14
15 16
l ~ T
'--
'Y.
I ATPR(WHT)
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
'Y.
BRN BlK /
14-66
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Check for short in the wire between the D6
terminal and the transmission range switch or AfT
gear position indicator, and check for an open in
the wires between the 820 and 822 terminals and
body ground (G101). If wires are OK, check for
loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck .
8. Shift to all positions other than or IHJ.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
(16P)
V
r-
/
r--
1 2 345 7 8
1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
1617 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1314 15 16
l;2T
~
I
--
ATP NP (BlU/WHT
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
'::i
(BRN/BLK)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.
terminal and the transmission range switch, and in
the and IHJ position signal wires between the AfT
gear position indicator and the transmission range
switch. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good PCM and recheck .
BACK
10. Shift to all positions other h a n ~
11. Measure the voltage between the 09 and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25P)
PCM CONNECTORS
D (16P)
V
7 81
-
2 3V
J5l
1 2 345
1
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 181
6 7 8 9 10 111121
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 14 1511
16
l';21
'--
Y.
ATP D4 (V
(BRN/BlK)
EL)
lG1
Y.
(BRN/BlK)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Goto step 12.
NO - Check for short in the wi re between the 09
terminal and the transmission range switch. If wire
is OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck .
12. Shift to all positions other h a n ~
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
D (16P)
V 7 81
r-
V
-
1 2 345
1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 181
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 1411
16
'--
l;2T
y.
J ATPD3 (PNK
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
Y.
(BRN/BlK)
YES-Go to step 14.
NO- Check for short in the wire between the 08
gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for
recheck .
(cont'd)
14-67
BACK
14. Shift to all positions other than 00.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
D (16P)
v
.--
V
.--
1 2 345 7 8
1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
1617 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 2425
13 14 15 16
'--
L";2l"
':L
1
ATP2 (BLU)
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
':L
(BRN/BLK)
YES- Go to step 16.
NO-Check for short in the wire between the 014
recheck .
14-68
16. Shift to all positions other than III.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
D (16P)
,.........
.-
1 2 345
II
7 8
1 2 3
V
5
9 10 11 12 13 14
I
1617 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 2122 23 24 25
13 14 15 16
L ~ T
I
'--
':L
ATP1 (BRN)
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
':L
(BRN/BLK)
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck .
recheck .
BACK
DTC P1706: Open in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit (no gear position inputs)
1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-
138).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the transmission range switch .
2 345 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
YES-Goto step 4.
822 terminals and ground (G 1 01), or repair poor
ground (G101) .
5. Shift to position.
822 terminals.
B(25P)
PCM CONNECTORS
D(16P)
v
-
V
r--
1 2 345 7 8
1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 1314
V
16 17 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
131415 16
'--
l-;2T
'Y.

ATPD4(Y ELI
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
'Y.
BRN BlK I
Is there voltage?
YES- Repair open in the wire between the 09
terminal and the transmission range switch .
NO-Goto step 7.
7. Shift to [RI position.
822 terminals.
B(25P)
1 2
9 10
19 20
345
PCM CONNECTORS
D(16P)
-
V
7 8
1 2 3
/
11 12 13 14
V
16 17 18
678 9 10
21 22 23 24 25 j: 14 15 16
-
-
5
11 12
l-;2
T
'Y.
I ATPR(WHT)
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
'Y.
BRN BlK I
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the 06
NO-Gotostep9.
(cont'd)
14-69
BACK
9. Shift to (f] or [ID position.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
/
-
V
r-
1 2 345 7 8 1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
16 17 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1314 15 16
'--

':i
I
ATP NP (BLU/WHT
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
':i
(BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the D13
NO-Go to step 11.
11. position.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B{25P) D (16P)
/
-
/
r--
1 2 345 7 8
1 2 3 5
9 10 11 12 13 14
/
1617 18
678 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
13
141!
16
'--

':i
I ATPD3{PNK
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
':i
BRN BlK /
Is there voltage?
NO-Goto step 13.
14-70
13. Shift to 00 position.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) D (16P)
- r-
1 2 345
/
7 8 1 2 3
V
5
9 10 11 12 1314
/
16 17 18
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
13 14 15 16
'--
;2T
':i
I
ATP2(BLU)
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
':i
BRN BlK
Is there voltage?
YES - Repa i r open in the wi re between the D 14
NO-Gotostep 15.
15. Shift to rn position.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
/
-
3/
f5l
1 2 345 7 8
1 2
9 10 11 12 1314
/
16 17 18
678 9 10 111121
19 20 21 22 23 2425
13 14 15 16
';2T I
'--
':i
ATP 1 (BRN)
(BRN/BlK)
lG1
':i
(BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
NO-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors. If necessary, subsitute a known-good
PCM and recheck .
BACK
DTC P0753: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve
A Circuit
2. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (25P) and D (16P).
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
y.
SH A (BlU/YEl)
B(25P)
D (16P)
-;-
V
7 81
r--
23V
lsi
1 2 345 1
9 10 11 12 1314
V
1617 181 6 7 8 9 10 111121
19 20 2122 23 24 25 131 415 16
0
'-TlG2 (BRN/BlK)
'-
Y.
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
VES- Repair short to power in the wire between
the D7 terminal and the shift solenoid valve A .
NO-Goto step 5.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SH A (BlU/YEl)
B(25P) D(16P)
--
V
7 81
-
23/
lsi
1 2 345 1
9 10 1112 1314
/
1617
18J 6 7 8 9 10
11112 J
19 20 2122 23 24 25 131 415 16
0
'- TlG2 (BRN/BlK)
-
Q
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
Is the resistance 12- 25 Q ?
VES-Gotostep 11.
NO- Go to step 7.
2 345 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
=
YES - Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
14-71 BACK
9. Check for continuity between the 07 and 820 or
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
)--------,
D(16P)
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
the 07 terminal and shift solenoid valve A .
NO- Go to step 10.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVEI SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
CONNECTOR (2P)
=
/s the resistance 12-25 Q ?
YES-Check for open in the wire between the 07
terminal and shift solenoid valve A..
valve/shift solenoid valve A .
14-72
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
':i
B (25P)
"-"&PI ?h
r--r--
V
7 eJ 1 2 345 1 2 3/ 5
9 10 1112 1314
V
1617
1aJ
6 7 e 9
10 ~ 2 J
19 20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
-=r
'-T LG2 (BRN/BLK)
-
':i
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
YES - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck .
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the 05 terminal and the
BACK
B Circuit
2. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (25P) and 0 (16P).
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
':i.
B(25P) IIO(16P)
-r---
V
7 81
r-
2 3 V
r5J
1 2 345 1
9 10 1112 1314
/
1617
18
1
6 7 8 9 10111121
19 20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
0
...... TlG2 (BRN/BlK)
-
':i.
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between
the 02 terminal and the shift solenoid valve 8 .
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Measure the resistance between the 02 and 820 or
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
.Q
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B(25P) IO(16P)
-r--
V
7 81
r-
2 3/
r5J
1 2 345 1
9 10 1112 1314
V
1617
18
1
6 7 8 9 10111121
19 20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
0
-T lG2 (BRN/BlK)
'-
Q
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
YES - Go to step 11 .
NO - Go to step 7.
2 345 7 8
9 10 11
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
lG2 (BRN/BlK)
YES-Go to step 8.
822 terminals and ground (G101 ) .
(cont'd)
14-73
BACK
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D2 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B IGRN/WHTI
l--------.
BI25PI
2
9 10 11 12 13 14
19 20 21 22 232425
lG2IBRN/BlK)
lG1 IBRN/BlK)
'------I Qr------.......J
the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B .
NO- Go to step 10.
10. Measure shift control solenoid valve B resistance at
the solenoid valve connector.
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES - Check for open in the wi res between the D2
terminal and the shift solenoid valve Band
between the No.1 terminal of the shift solenoid
valve B connector and ground (G101) .
NO- Replace the shift solenoid valve B .
14-74
12. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20
terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
}-_______ ....:.IB:...:l::.:.:;K/yELI
DI16PI
lG1IBRN/BlKI
'------1 'Y.}-------l
PCM and recheck .
BACK
DTC P0720: Problem in Countershaft Speed
Sensor Circuit
1. Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
Is the countershaft speed sensor installed
properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Reinstall and recheck .
2. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor 2P
connector.
3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at
the sensor connector.
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 4.
NO- Replace the countershaft speed sensor..
4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).
5. Check for continuity between body ground and the
D10 terminal and D16 terminal individually.
PCM CONNECTOR D (16PI
NC(BLUI
~ ; t J
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 12
13 14 15
=
=
YES- Repair short in the wires between the D10
and D16 terminals and the countershaft speed
sensor .
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector.
7. Measure the resistance between the D10 and D16
terminals.
PCM CONNECTOR D (16PI
NC (BLUI
.---
II
....--
1 2
3 II
5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Q
13 14 15 16
NCSG(GRNT
PCM and recheck .
NO- Repair loose terminal or open in the wires
between the D10 and D16 terminals and the
countershaft speed sensor .
14-75
BACK
DTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed
Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn't always mean
there's an electrical problem in the mainshaft or
countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15)
may also indicate a mechanical problem in the
transmission. Any problem causing irregular
countershaft to mainshaft speed difference can cause
this code.
1. Check the mainshaft and countershaft speed
sensor installation.
Are the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensors
installed properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P
connector.
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the
sensor connector.
MAINS HAFT SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
YES- Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the mainshaft speed sensor..
14-76
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
NM(REO)
YES- Repair short in the wires between the D11
and 012 terminals and the mainshaft speed
sensor .
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector.
7. Measure the resistance between the 011 and 012
terminals.
PCM CONNECTOR 0 (16P)
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13141516
NM (RED)
YES-Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart
for code P0720 (code 9). Check for loose terminal fit
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK
connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D11 terminal and
the No.1 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
2 3
678
13 14 15
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
5
12
YES- Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the D11
terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor..
connector.
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
131415
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR L..---'---'
PCM and recheck .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the D12
14-77 BACK
DTC P1768: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
1. Disconnect the NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A 2P connector.
2. Measure NT clutch pressure control solenoid
resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
Is the resistance about 5 Q ?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the NT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A .
3. Disconnect the 8 (25P) connector from the PCM.
88 terminal and the 817 terminal individually.
LSA-(WHT)
2 3 4 5
9 10
19 20 21 22
LSA+(RED)
Q Q
=
14-78
YES- Repair short to ground in the wires between
the 88 and 817 terminals and NT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A .
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Connect the NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
terminals.
LSA-IWHT)
I

1 2 345
V
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 1 7 18
19 20 2122 23 24
--
LSA+(RED)
YES-Go to step 7.
between the 88 and 817 terminals and NT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A .
BACK
7. Disconnect PCM connector 0 (16P).
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
'Y.
IBLK/YEL
BI25PI o n6P)
3/ M
-..--
V
7 81
-
1 2 345 1 2
9 10 1112 1314
V
1617
18
1
6 7 8 9 10
111121
19 20 2122 23 2425 1314 15 16
-T
-TLG2IBRN/BLK)
-
'Y.
LG1 IBRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 10.
under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the 05 terminal and the
PCM CONNECTOR B 125P)
2
9 10
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
PCM and recheck .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the 82, 810,
820 and 822 terminals and ground (G101). Repair
poor ground (G101) .
14-79
BACK
C Circuit
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
':i.
SHC(GRN)
B(25P)
D (16P)
II
II
7 81
r-
I f5l
1 2 345 1 2 3
9 10 1112 1314
V
1617
18
1
6 7 8 9 10 111121
19 20 2122 23 2425 1314 15 16
~ L-TlG2 (BRN/BlK)
-
':i.
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve C .
NO - Go to step 5.
14-80
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SHC(GRN)
B(25P) D (16P)
II
,--,--
II
7 81
,..-
I f5l
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
9 10 1112 1314
I
1617
18
1
6 7 8 9 10 111121
19 20 2122 2324 25 1314 15 16
-=r
L- T lG2 (BRN/BlK)
'-
Q
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
YES- Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
2 345 78
9 10
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG2 (BRN/BlK)
YES - Go to step 8.
BACK
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve C 2P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D3 and 820 or
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SHC(GRNI
)--------. r-----,
B(25PI
2
9 10
345
19 20 2122 232425
LG2 (BRN/BLKI
LG1 (BRN/BLKI

NO- Go to step 10.
10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the
solenoid valve connector.
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
YES-Check for open in the wires between the D3
terminal and the shift solenoid valve C and
valve C connector and ground (G101) .
NO- Replace shift solenoid valve C .
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS

B(25PI
1 2
9 10
19 20 21 22 232425
LG2 (BRN/BLKI
L--------I'Y.l-------'
LG1 (BRN/BLKI
PCM and recheck .
under-dash fuse/relay box. (f the fuse is OK, repair
14-81
BACK
DTC P1773: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE: Record a" freeze data before you troubleshoot.
1. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve 8 2P connector.
2. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES- Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve 8 .
3. Disconnect the PCM connector 8 (25P).
14-82
2
9 10 11
19 20
=
the 818 and 825 terminals and AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve 8 .
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
terminals.
1 2 3 4 5
V
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
V
16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LSB-( GRN)
'--'--
LSB+(ORNI
.Q
YES-Go to step 7.
between the 818 and 825 terminals and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve 8 .
BACK
7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16PI.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (III.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
':L
(BLK/YEL)
B(25P) D(16P)
2 3 4 5 2 3
9 10 6 7 8
19 20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
LG2 (BRN/BLK)
L....------{':L 1--------'
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15AI fuse in the driver's
driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box .
2 345 7 8
9 10 11 12 13
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
=
PCM and recheck .
NO - Repair open in the wire between the 82, 810,
820 and 822 terminals and ground (G1011. Repair
poor ground (G1011 .
14-83 BACK
DTC P1738: Problem in 2nd Clutch Pressure
Switch Circuit
2. Measure the voltage between the B14 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
2
9 10 11
19 20
lG1 IBRN/BlK)
21 22 23 24 25
lG2
IBRN/BlK)
OP2SW IBlU/BlK)
Is there about battery voltage?
YES-Goto step 7.
NO- Go to step 3.
14-84
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).
5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
6. Check for continuity between the B14 terminal and
body ground.
1 2 3 4 5
:1
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14V 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1-.1.-
OP2SWIBlU /BlK)
VES- Repair short to ground in the wire between
the B14 terminal and the 2nd clutch pressure
switch .
PCM and recheck .
BACK
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.
8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels
securely.
9. Start the engine, then shift to 00 position and drive
for more than five seconds.
822 terminals.
2
9 10 11
19 20
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
21 22 23 24 25
lG2
(BRN/BlK)
OP2SW (BlU/BlK)
Is there aboutO V?
PCM and recheck .
NO-Goto step 11.
12. Disconnectthe 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminal
NO- Repair open in the wire between the 2nd
clutch pressure switch and the PCM .
15. Measure the resistance between the 2nd clutch
ground.
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
Terminal side of male terminal
Is the resistance 10 MQ or more?
YES- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck .
NO - Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch .
14-85
BACK
DTC P1739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure
Switch Circuit
,. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
822 terminals.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
2
9 10
19 20
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
7 8
OP3SW
(BLU/WHT)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 3.
14-86
5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector.
6. Check for continuity between the 824 terminal and
body ground.
1 2 3 4 5
V
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 [7 1617 18
19 20 2122 2324 25
'--'--
1
P3

W(BLU/WHT)
=
VES- Repair short to ground in the wire between
the 824 terminal and the 3rd clutch pressure
switch .
NO- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck .
BACK
securely supported.
8. Setthe parking brake, and block rear wheels
securely.
9. Start the engine, then shift to position and drive
in 3rd gear for more than five seconds.
822 terminals.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
1 2
9 10
19 20
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
7 8
OP3SW
(BLU/WHT)
Is there about 0 V?
PCM and recheck .
NO-Goto step 11.
connector.
14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 15.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the 3rd
15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch
ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
=
PCM and recheck .
NO- Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch .
14-87
BACK
DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control
System
NOTE:
Keep replacement solenoid valves on hand:
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A
- AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates
another code.
Does the OBO /I scan too/ indicate another code?
YES - Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for
the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after
troubleshooting .
NO- Go to step 2.
NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected.
2. Measure the line pressure.
/s the line pressure within the service limit?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Repair the hydraulic system as necessary (see
page 14-104) .
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-106).
4. Replace the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B (see page 14-109).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM
memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
6. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the
engine coolant temperature is in 176F (80C) and
above.
7. Drive the vehicle at 55 mph (88 km/h) constantly for
more than one minute.
14-88
8. Recheck for code P0740.
Does the OBO /I scan too/ indicate code P0740?
YES - Replace the transmission and torque
converter .
NO - The system is OK at this ti me .
BACK
DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System
NOTE:
Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot .
solenoid valve A
- Shift solenoid valves Band C
- AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
another code.
Does the aBO II scan tool indicate another code?
YES- Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for
troubleshooting .
NO - Go to step 2.
NOTE: Do not continue with the troubleshooting
corrected.
2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch pressure
(see page 14-104).
Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Repair the hydraulic system as necessary .
4. Replace the shift solenoid valve B and shift
solenoid valve C (see page 14-107).
5. Replace the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle at a speed over 12 mph (20 km/h)
in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th gear in position for more
than 30 seconds.
Does the aBO II scan too/ indicate code P0730?
YES - Replace the transmission .
NO - The system is OK atthis time .
14-89
BACK
DTC P0780: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic
Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve A
and AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valves A and B, or Problem in Hydraulic
Control System
NOTE:
solenoid valve A
another code.
Does the aao /I scan tool indicate another code?
troubleshooting .
NO- Go to step 2.
shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-106), and the
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
(see page 14-109).
4. Reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box
for more than 10 seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd,
3rd, and 4th gears in position.
Does the aao /I scan tool indicate code P0780?
YES- Replace the transmission assembly .
NO-The problem has been corrected .
14-90 BACK
Control System for AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valves A and S, or Problem
in Hydraulic Control System
another code.
Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate another code?
troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 2.
Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate code P1750?
NO- The problem has been corrected .
14-91
BACK
Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve B
Control System
NOTE:
- Shift solenoid valve B
1. Check whether the OBD " scan tool indicates
another code.
Does the aBO 1/ scan too/ indicate another code?
troubleshooting .
NO- Go to step 2.
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-
107), and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and 8 (see page 14-109).
4. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1 st, 2nd,
Does the aBO 1/ scan too/ indicate code P1751?
14-92
BACK
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
indicator light.
Does the indicator come on and stay on?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-If the light comes on for about two seconds
and then goes off. It's OK, if it doesn't come on at
all, go to step 11.
5. Measure the voltage between the A14 terminal and
body ground.
V
2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
/
12 131 415 16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
26 27 28 29 30
V
32
'--
D41ND (GRN/BLK)
':i.
-=
Is there voltage?
the A14 terminal and the gauge assembly .
NO- Go to step 6.
7. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).
9. Shift to any positions other than
10. Measure the voltage between the 09 terminal and
body ground.
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 12
131415
ATPD4(VEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty the PCM orthe gauge assembly .
NO- Check for short to ground in the wire between
the 09 terminal and the transmission range switch.
If wire is OK, check the transmission range
switch .
11. Make sure the Honda PGM Tester is not connected
to the DlC.
Does the indicator come on?
connectors and recheck the indicator several times.
If the problem is intermittent, substitute a known-
good PCM and recheck. If the light then works OK
every time, replace the original PCM .
NO-Gotostep 13.
(cont'd)
14-93 BACK
~ Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between body ground and 820
and 822 terminals.
2 345 7 8
9 10
1920 2122
LG2 (BRN/BLK)
=
Is there continuity between ground and each
terminal?
NO- Repair open in the wire(s) between the 820 or
822 terminal and ground (G101) .
17. Measure the voltage between terminals 81 and 8
22, and between terminals 89 and 820.
IGP1 ( VEL/BLK) I
~
1 2 3 4 5
1/
7 8
f':
10 11 12 13 14
V
1617 18
20 2122 23 24 25
I
~
IGP2(VE
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair open or short in the wire between the
81 or 89 terminal and the PGM-FI main relay and
from fuse No. 46 in the under-hood fuse/relay box
to the PGM-FI main relay .
14-94
19. Reconnect PCM connector 8 (25P).
20. Connect the digital multimeter between the A 14
and 820 or 822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P) B(25P)
D41ND (GRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK)
Is there voltage for at least 2 seconds?
YES-Check for open in the wire between the A14
terminal and the gauge assembly. If wire is OK,
check for a faulty indicator bulb or a faulty printed
circuit board in the gauge assembly .
NO-Go to step 22.
BACK
24. Check for continuity between the A 14 terminal and
No.12 terminal of the gauge assembly C (16P)
connector.
D41ND
(GRN/BLK)
Q
GAUGE ASSEMBL V C (16P)
CONNECTOR
VES- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors. Check the transmission range switch. If
recheck .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the A 14
terminal and the gauge assembly .
14-95
BACK
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
Are the brake lights ON?
YES- Go to step 2.
NO- Repair faulty brake light circuit (see page 22-
91) .
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to [f]
position.
3. Press the brake pedal, and release the accelerator
pedal.
body ground.
V
2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
V
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
~
~ (WKT/RED)
YES- Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 8.
14-96
5. Measure the voltage between the 812 terminal of
the multiplex control unit, driver's 8 (22P)
connector and body ground with the throttle
released and the brake pedal pressed.
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT,
DRIVER'S B (22P) CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the A28
terminal ofthe PCM and 812 terminal ofthe driver's
multiplex control unit .
connector and body ground.
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT,
DRIVER'S B (22P) CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 7.
=
NO-Repair open in the wire between the 822
terminal ofthe driver's multiplex control unit and
the driver's under-dash fuse No.9 (via the shift lock
solenoid) .
BACK
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the shift
lever to [f] position.
Dose the [f] indicator in the gauge assembly
illuminate?
YES-Check for loose terminal fitto the driver's
multiplex control unit 812 and 822 terminal wires.
If necessary, substitute a known-good driver's
NO- Repair open in the [f] position switch circuit
from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box K10
(8LK/8LU) wire to ground (G 1 01) .
9. Disconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and 8 (25P).
10. Measure the voltage between the A32 and 820 or
822 terminals while pressing the brake pedal.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
B(25P)
YES-Go to step 11.
lG2
(BRN/BlK)
NO- Repair open in the wire between the A32
terminal and the brake pedal position switch .
(cont'd)
14-97
BACK
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and 8 (25P).
13. Measure the voltage between the C27 and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25P)
1 2
19 20
PCM CONNECTORS
LG1 L-____ ---{ ':i. }-------'
(BRN/BLK)
Is there about 0.5 V (throttle fully closed)?
PCM and recheck .
NO-Go to step 14.
15. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.
the throttle position sensor and the 820 or 822
terminal of the PCM.
2 3 4 5
9 10 11121314
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK)
YES-Repair throttle position sensor installation .
NO-Go to step 17.
14-98
17. Check for continuity between the C18 and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25P)
1 2
19 20
PCM CONNECTORS
L G ~ ~ ___ -{
(BRN/BLK)
YES- Repair open in the wire between the C18
terminal and the throttle position sensor .
PCM and recheck .
BACK
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the AfT shift cable adjustment (see page 14-
134).
2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector from the
steering lock assembly.
3. Connect the No.7 terminal of the key switch
connector to the battery positive terminal, and
connect the No.5 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7PI
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the
ignition key.
5. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A
clicking sound should be heard while pushing the
ignition key, and no sound should be heard when r
eleasing the key.
Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch.
Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock
assembly .
NOTE: Do not re-key the new ignition switch.
Re-key the other lock cylinders to match the new
switch.
6. Measure the voltage between the No.7 terminal
and body ground.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
=
YES- Go to step 7.
NO - Check for blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open or short in the wire between the No.7
terminal ofthe key switch connector and under-
7. Disconnect the park pin switch 4P connector on the
front side ofthe shift lever.
8. With the shift lever in Park, check for continuity
between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the park
pin switch 4P connector.
PARK PIN SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
YES- Go to step 9.
NO- Repair open in the wires between the park pin
switch and the 4P connector. If wires are OK,
replace the park pin switch .
(cont'd)
14-99
BACK
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
the park pin switch 4P connector and the No.5
terminal ofthe key switch connector.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7PI
WHT/RED
NO- Repair open in the wire between No.4
terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and
the No.5 terminal of the key switch connector .
14-100
the 4P connector and body ground.
PARK PIN SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose key switch connector and
park pin switch connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good steering lock assembly .
NO- Repair open in the wire between No.3
terminal ofthe 4P connector and ground (G101) .
BACK
Road Test
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001 OOOA (Two required)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to position while pressing the brake
pedal. While fully pressing the brake pedal press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not
stall.
3. Repeat the same test in position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and go to the PGM-FI Data List; then go to step 7. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM (A).
6. Connect the digital multimeter (B) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27( +) terminal and B20
(-) or B22( - )terminal of the PCM.
A
A (32P)
VI2
3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
VI
112113 1415 1617 18 1920 2122 23 241
2526 27 2829 30
/
32
-
__ -B
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) C (31 P)
-;---
alll 2/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9 10 1112 1314 15/ 17
181 V
V /
L
20 21122 2324 25
V /
-r
Y.
lG2 (BRN/BlK)
Y.
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
C
07SAZ-001000A
I
5 6 7 8 9 10
I V
1617 1819 20
21/
25 26 2728 29 30
/
D(16P)
r-
2 3V
J5l
1
6 7 a 9
10 "1121
1314 15 16
"---
I
TPS (RED/BlK)
(cont'd)
14-101
BACK
Road Test (cont'd)
7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)

Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st-2nd 2nd-3rd 3rd- 4th Lock-upON
Throttle position mph 9-11 21-23 26-30 47-49
sensor voltage: 0.8 V km/h 15-17 33-37 42-48 75-79
FUlly-opened throttle, mph 34-38 62-65 96-100 97-101
Throttle position km/h 55-61 99-105 155-161 156-162
sensor voltage: 4.5 V
position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 4th- 3rd 3rd-2nd 2nd-1st
Throttle position mph 45-48 19-21 -- 5-7 (3rd - 1st)
sensor voltage: 0.8 V km/h 73-77 30-34 -- 8-12 (3rd - 1st)
Throttle position 58-62 -- -- --
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 94-100 -- -- --
Fully-opened throttle, O!ph 91-94 85-89 54-58 26-30
8. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift from position to 00 position.
The vehicle should immediately begin slowing down from engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the following positions.
ill (1st Gear) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur with the shift lever in this position.
00 (2nd Gear) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
lID (Reverse) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
10. Test in [f] (Park) Position.
Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16), apply the parking brake, and shift into [f] position. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
14-102
BACK
Stall Speed Test
1. Set the parking brake. and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. and start the engine.
3. Make sure the AlC switch is OFF.
4. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). shift to 00 position.
5. Fully press the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds. and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
6. Allow two minutes for cooling. then repeat the test in . 1 1 J . and !Rl positions.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
Stall speed should be the same in ~ . 00. rn. and !Rl positions.
Do not test stall speed with the AfT pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:
F23A 1 and F23A4 Engines:
Specification: 2,550 rpm
Service Limit: 2,400-2,700 rpm
F23A5 Engine:
TROUBLE
Stall rpm high in 00. rn. and !Rl positions
Stall rpm high in rn position
Stall rpm high in 00 position
Stall rpm high in !Rl_position
Stall rpm low n ~ . 00. rn and!Rl positions
PROBABLE CAUSE
Low fluid level or ATF pump output
Clogged ATF strainer
Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
Slipping clutch
Slippage of 1st clutch
Slippage of 2nd clutch
Slippage of 4th clutch
Engine output low
Torque converter one-way clutch slipping_
14-103
BACK
Pressure Tests
AfT oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400
AfT pressure hose, 2210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect the tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the holes.
TORQUE: 18 Nm 11.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft)
AfT OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
SETWfPANEL
07406-0020400
14-104
AfT PRESSURE HOSE, 2210 mm
07MAJ-PY4011A
(4 Required)
END COVER
AfT PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER
07MAJ-PY 40120
(4 Required)
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
INSPECTION HOLE
BACK
7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm.
8. Shift to [HJ or [fJ position, and measure line pressure at the line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than [HJ or [fJ.
9. Shift to II] position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (8).
10. Shift to 00 position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to [fJ position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to position, and release the brake pedal (the transmission is in 1st gear).
13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission will shift to 2nd gear).
14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission is shifted to 2nd gear; the engine speed
will decrease to about 1,000 rpm.
15. Press the accelerator slowly (so it takes at least 5 seconds to raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm), then hold the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), as the transmission shifts from 2nd gear to 3rd gear, then to 4th gear.
PRESSURE SHIFT SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE
LEVER Standard Service Limit
POSITION
---
[HJ or [E Line (A) No (or 10w)line Torque converter, 850-910 kPa 800 kPa (8.2 kgf/cm2,
pressure ATF pump, (8.7-9.3 kgf/cm2, 120 psi)
pressure regulator 120-130 psi)
valve, torque
converter check
valve
1 st clutch (8) II] No or low 1st clutch 840-920 kPa 790 kPa
1st pressure (8.6-9.4 kgf/cm2, (8.1 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch (C)
00 No or low 2nd clutch 120-130 psi) 120 psi)
2nd pressure
3rd clutch (D) No or low 3rd clutch
3rd pressure
4th clutch (E) No or low 4th clutch
[RJ 4th pressure Servo valve or 4th
clutch
17. Install the sealing bolt with a new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft)
NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.
14-105
BACK
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test
2. Measure the resistance of the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve between the No.1 terminal of
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
3. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve A
between the No.2 terminal of the 2P connector and
body ground.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
shift solenoid valve A if either resistance is out of
specification.
5. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the
No.1 terminal of the 2P connector to the battery
positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Connect the No.2 terminal to the battery positive
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A if no sound is heard when
connecting either terminal to the battery positive
terminal.
14-106
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A
Replacement
NOTE: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve-shift
solenoid valve A must be removed/replaced as an
assembly.
1. Remove the mounting bolts and torque converter
clutch solenoid valve-shift solenoid valve A.
\
B
2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
the torque converter clutch solenoid valve-shift
solenoid valve A, and install a new torque
converter clutch solenoid valve-shift solenoid valve
A with a new filter/gasket (8).
3. Install the bolts with the connector bracket (C) and
the harness clamp bracket (D), and tighten the bolts.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
reconnect the connector securely.
BACK
Shift Solenoid Valves Band C Test
1. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve 8 or C 2P
connector.
B
2. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals of the shift solenoid valve 8 or C.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve 8 or C if the
resistance is out of standard.
No.2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve 8 or C
Replace the shift solenoid valve 8 or C if no clicking
sound is heard.
Replacement
NOTE: If the shift solenoid valves 8 and C are replaced
or removed at the same time, be sure to reinstall them
correctly. The connector color of shift solenoid valve 8
is black, and the connector color of shift solenoid valve
C is brown.
1. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid
valve 8.
A
11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfftl
valveC.
3. Install a new shift solenoid valve 8 or C with new 0-
rings (A). While installing the valves, do not allow
dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission.
14-107
BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
valves A and B 2P connectors.
B
A
2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1
and No.2 terminals of each connector.
STANDARD: About 5.0 Q
3. If the resistance of either AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid is out of standard, replace the AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
4. Connect the No.1 terminal of the AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the
battery positive terminal, and connect the No.2
terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking
sound should be heard.
5. If not, remove the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.
6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valves for dust and dirt.
14-108
7. Connect the No.1 terminal of the AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the
terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make
sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A (A) and B (B) move.
B
A
8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check
valve movement.
NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
body (C).
9. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or ifthe
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid does not
operate, replace the AfT clutch pressure control
BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Valves A and B
Replacement
1. Remove the mounting bolts and the AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 (A).
e
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibfftl
the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and 8 and the transmission housing.
3. Install a new AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and 8 with a new gasket (8), new O-rings
(C), ATF feed pipes (D), and harness clamp bracket
(E).
NOTE: Install the filter side of the ATF feed pipes in
the transmission housing.
4. Check the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
them securely.
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and
countershaft speed sensors.
2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed
sensor, then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
(A) from the end cover.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
\ B

6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfftl
3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed
sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor
(8) from the transmission housing.
4. Replace the O-rings (C) with new ones before
installing the sensors.
5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed
sensors, then connect the connectors.
14-109
BACK
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch ('98-00 Models) Replacement
1. Remove the rear stiffener (A).
~
B
connector (B).
3. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch, then install
a new one with a new sealing washer. Tighten the
switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
14-110
4. Reconnect the connector (A), making sure there is
no water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside
it.
10x 1.25 mm
5. Install the rear stiffener (B).
BACK
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch ('01-02 Models) Replacement
1. Support the transmission with a transmission jack.
2. Remove the rear mount bracket bolts.
3. Remove the rear mount nut (A), then remove the
rear mount bracket (8).
A
I ________ 12 x 1.25 mm
54Nm
(5.5 kgfm, 40 Ibfft)
4. Remove the rear stiffener (A).
connector.
6. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch (A), then
install a new one with a new sealing washer (8).
Tighten the switch on the metal part, not the plastic
part.
(cont'd)
14-111
BACK
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch ('01-02
Models) Replacement (cont'd)
8. Secure the nut (e) by your hand until it contacts the
stiffener, then tighten it to the specified torque. If
you can not tighten the nut to the stiffener surface
by hand, replace the nut and the special bolt (D).
9. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no
water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
10. Install the rear mount bracket, and loosely tighten
the rear mount nut.
11. Install the rear mount bracket bolts.
12. Tighten the rear mount nut to the specified torque.
14-112
Replacement
1. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch
pressure switch.
2. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install
BACK
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Turn off the
engine.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.
A
)
/
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It
should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
-8
-c
6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the
recommended fluid into the filler hole to bring it to
the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a
non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
ATF Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the
engine off.
3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the automatic
transmission fluid (ATF).
NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF
Cooler Flushing (see page 14-125).
18x 1.5 mm
49 Nm (5.0 kgf.m, 36 Ibf.ft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer,
then refill the transmission with the recommended
fluid into the filler hole to the upper mark on the
dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.5 a (2.6 us qt, 2.2 Imp qt) at changing
6.1 a (6.4 US qt, 5.4 Imp qt) at overhaul
14-113
BACK
1. Before disconnecting power, make sure you have
the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down
the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal, then
remove the positive terminal.
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then
remove the battery and battery tray.
4. Remove the battery cable clamps from the battery
base.
5. Remove the battery base.
'6. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
7. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is sacurely
supported. Remove the drain plug, and drain the
automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall the
drain plug with a new sealing washer.
14-114
8. Remove the starter cables (A) and harness clamps
(B), and remove the breather tube (C) and radiator
hose (D) from the clamps (E).
E
D
9. Remove the transmission ground cable (A), and
disconnect the connectors from the Aff clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B (B),
mainshaft speed sensor (C) and 3rd clutch pressure
switch (D), then remove the harness clamps (E)
from the clamp brackets.
Do not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to get inside the 3rd clutch pressure
switch connector.
BACK
valve/shift solenoid valve A connector (A).
11. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (8) from the ATF
cooler lines (C). Turn the ends ofthe ATF cooler
hoses up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then
plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose
joints.
12. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve 8 connector (D),
and C connector (E), then remove the harness
clamp (F) from the clamp bracket (G).
13. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor
connector (A), and remove the harness clamp (8)
from the connector/clamp bracket (C).
B
14. Remove the transmission range switch connector
(D) from the connector/clamp bracket, then
disconnect it.
15. Disconnectthe 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector (A), then remove the rear stiffener (8)
('98-00 models). Do not allow water, fluid, oil, dust,
or other foreign particles to get inside the
connector.
B
\
A
16. Remove the transmission housing bolts.
(cont'd)
14-115
BACK
17. Remove the front mount bracket bolts.
14-116
19. Remove the cotter pins (A) and castle nuts (B), and
remove the damper forks (C), then separate the ball
joints from the lower arms (0) (see page 18-17).
/c
E
20. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods from the lower arms (0).
21. Pry the driveshaft out of the differential (see step 10
on page 16-4).
22. Make a reference mark (A) across the front beam
(both side) (B) and the rear beam (C).
BACK
23. Remove the front beam.
24. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the drives hafts
(A) from the differential.
B
25. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean
engine oil, then tie plastic bags (B) over the
driveshaft ends.
26. Remove the engine stiffener (A).
E
27. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (B),
then remove the shift cable cover (C).
NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint,
remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
cover.
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
29. Remove the eight drive plate bolts (G) one at a time
while rotating the crankshaft pulley.
program, or equivalent).
(cont'd)
14-117
BACK
31. Place a transmission jack under the transmission.
32. Remove the transmission mount bracket.
33. Remove the rear mount bracket bolts:
12 x 1.25 mm bolts (2) (A) for all models .
10 x 1.25 mm bolts (2) (8) for '01-02 models.
14-118
clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the
transmission jack.
35. Remove the torque converter assembly.
36. Remove the starter from the torque converter
housing.
37. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's
damaged.
BACK
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-125).
2. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the
mainshaft (S) with a new O-ring (e).
C D
3. Install the 14 mm dowel pins (D) in the torque
converter housing (E).
4. Install the starter (F) on the torque converter
housing.
E
5. Place the transmission on a transmission jack, and
raise it to engine level.
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install
the rear mount bracket bolts:
12 x 1.25 mm bolts (2) (A) for all models.
10 x 1.25 mm bolts (2) (S) for '01-02 models.
7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
(cont'd)
14-119
BACK
8. Face the dot mark (A) on the breather tube (B) up.
E
10x 1.25mm

I-f---B
9. Install the transmission mount bracket (C). Tighten
the bolt (D) loosely, and tighten the nuts (E) to the
specified torque, then tighten the bolt to the
specified torque.
10. Remove the transmission jack and hoist bracket.
14-120
11. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (A)
with eight bolts (B). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
6x1.0mm
B
10 Nm 11.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
10x 1.25 mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm,
33lbfftl
'\
I I
8x 1.25mm
26 Nm 12.7 kgfm,
20Ibfft)
F
6x1.0mm
D
12. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see
page 6-18).
13. Install the control lever (C) with the shift cable (D)
on the control shaft (E). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
14. Install the lock bolt (F) with a new lock washer (G),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the engine stiffener (H).
16. Install the shift cable cover (I), then install the shift
cable holder (J) on the shift cable cover.
be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
BACK
17. Install new set rings on the right and left
driveshafts.
18. Install the right and left driveshaft (see page 16-20).
While installing the driveshaft in the differential, be
sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles to
enter the transmission.
NOTE:
o Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the
transmission (differential) with solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
o Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully
outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its spring clip engage
the side gear.
19. Install the front beam (A) by aligning the reference
marks (B) on the rear beam (C).
14x 1.5 mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm,
75.9 Ibfftl
A
~ l
12 x 1.25 mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgf.m.
47lbfftl
"-
14x 1.5 mm
103Nm
(10.5 kgfm.
75.9 Ibfftl
20. Install the front mount bracket bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 Nm 13.9 kgfm. 28 Ibfft)
21. Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball
joints on each lower arms (B) with the castle nuts
(C) and new cotter pins (0).
10x 1.25mm
43 Nm 14.4 kgf'm, 32 Ibfft)
~ ~ ~ 6 ~ : . t :
471bfftl ~ . ~ .
12x 1.25mm
49-59 Nm (5.0-6.0 kgfm,
36-43 Ibfft)
E
B
22. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.
(cont'd)
14-121 BACK
24. Connect the 2nd clutch pressure switch connector
(A), and install the rear stiffener (8) ('98-00 models).
00 not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to get inside the 2nd clutch pressure
switch connector.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm, 28 Ibfttl
\
B A
14-122
25. Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve
8 (A) and C (8), and install the clamp (C) on the
clamp bracket (0).
c
26. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (E) to the cooler lines
(F) (see page 14-126).
27. Connect the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A connector (G).
28. Connect the connector to the countershaft speed
sensor (A) and transmission range switch (8), and
install the harness clamp and transmission range
switch connector on the connector/clamp bracket
(0).
c
A
BACK
29. Install the transmission ground cable terminal (A).
D
E 6x 1.0mm
10 Nm (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfftl
A
30. Connect the connectors to the mainshaft speed
sensor (8), AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and 8 (C) and 3rd clutch pressure switch
(D), and install the harness clamps (E) on the clamp
brackets. Do not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or
other foreign particles to get inside the 3rd clutch
pressure switch connector.
31. Install the starter cables (A) with crimped side of
the ring terminals facing out.
G
9 Nm (0.9 kgf.m,
6.5Ibfftl
H
C
32. Install the harness clamps (8) on the clamp
brackets (C).
33. Install the radiator hose (D) on the clamp (E).
34. Install the breather tube (F) on the clamp (G) with
the dot (H) on the tube facing up.
(cont'd)
14-123
BACK
Transmission Installation (co nt' d)
35. Install the battery base.
36. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
37. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
38. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
39. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-113).
40. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect
the negative terminal.
41. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
42. Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
43. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see
page 18-5).
44. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the
transmission in or lID position, then turn it off
and check the ATF level (see page 14-113).
45. Perform a road test (see page 14-101).
14-124
47. Loosen the front mount bracket bolt (A) after the
road test, then retighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
A
10x 1.25 mm
BACK
ATF Cooler Flushing
Commercially available transmission cooler flusher
Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivqlent
This procedure should be performed before reinstalling
the transmission.
1. Check the equipment for wear and cracks before
using it. Replace any worn or cracked components.
2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21
ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable
flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with
any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on
the fluid container.
3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the
flusher with compressed airto 550-829 kpa (5.6-
8.45 kgf/cm2, 80-120 psi). The air line should be
equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air
system.
4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle.
5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (8) to the return
line of the ATF cooler using a clamp.
D
6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the
ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the
opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or
floor drain.
7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
available.)
OFF
8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water
does not flow through the cooler, it is completely
plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced.
9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the
water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger
down.
10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for
two minutes, turn the air valve on for five seconds
every 15-20 seconds to create a surging action.
AIR PRESSURE:
MAX 845 kpa (8.45 kgf/cm
2
, 120 psi)
11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then
reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in
the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler with water
for one minute.
13. Turn the water valve and the water supply off.
14. Turn the air valve on for two minutes, or until no
moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
transmission.
15. Remove the flusher form the cooler line. Attach the
drain hose to an ATF container.
16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose
attached to the cooler line.
(cont'd)
14-125 BACK
ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd)
17. Make sure the transmission is in [f] position.
Fill the transmission with ATF, and run the engine
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95
(1.0 US qt., 0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged.
18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler
return hose to the transmission.
19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level
(see page 14-113).
14-126
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement
1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (8) and the
ATF cooler (C), and secure them with the clips (D)
as shown.
2. Install the clamp (E) on the cooler hoses.
BACK
Shift Lever Removal
1. Shift the transmission into [RJ position.
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-831.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (AI,
then separate the shift cable end from the shift
lever assembly.
4. Rotate the socket holder (AI on the shift cable (BI
counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder to remove the shift cable from the shift lever
bracket base (CI.
NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting
the shift cable guide pipe (01.
\\
D
5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (AI
and park pin switch 4P connector (BI.
6. Remove the four bolts (CI securing the shift lever
bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.
14-127
BACK
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and verify that the
[RJ position indicator comes on.
CD
3. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then
release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one
step so that the shift position is in [RJ.
(g)-U ~
+++++[8]+
14-128
5. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the
positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
through the positioning hole on the shift lever
assembly.
6. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C).
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the
square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the
shift cable.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the
shift cable guide (H).
)
D F
BACK
7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly
installed on the mounting stud (8).
Properly Installed:
@D=
I
T
\
A
Not Properly Installed:
Cable end rides on the bottom
of the mounting stud.
B
8. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable
from the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.
9. Install and tighten the nut.
8x 1.25mm
10. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and park
transmission range switch.
13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
14-129
BACK
Shift lever Disassembly IReassembly
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
Apply silicone grease to these parts:
Movable parts of the shift lever.
Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism.
Sliding surfaces on the detent spring.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID PLUNGER
PLUNGER SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
s ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
/
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
DETENT SPRING
SHIFT LEVER BRACKET BASE
14-130
~
SCREW
/
Apply non-hardening thread
o lock sealant.
~
----LEVER COVER
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR BULB
------8 x 1.25mm
~
SHIFT CABLE
8x 1.25mm
BACK
Shift Cable Replacement
securely supported (see page 1-17).
2. Set the parking brake, and block the rear wheels
securely.
3. Shift the transmission into IBJ position.
4. Remove the console panel (see page 20-83).
5. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A),
lever assembly.
bracket base (C).
the shift cable guide pipe (D).
)
7. Remove the floor heat shield.
8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and
grommet (B).
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm(1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfftl
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A),
then remove the shift cable cover (B).
cover.
A
10. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) with the control
lever.
(cont'd)
14-131 BACK
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
11. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket.
12. Verify that the transmission is in [RJ position on the
control shaft.
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (e). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
G
c
6x 1.0mm
14 Nm (1.4 kgf.m,
10Ibfft)
6x1.0mm
9.a Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
ax 1.2Smm
26 Nm (2.7 kgfm, 20 Ibf.ft)
14. Install the lock bolt (D) with a new lock washer (E),
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the cover.
converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
14-132
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
[RJ position indicator light comes on.
l j l ~
+++[B]+
assembly.
BACK
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (e).
shift cable.
D
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
@D=
/
T
\
A
ofthe mounting stud.
B
F
cable bracket base.
24. Install the tighten the nut.
8x1.25mm
27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
14-133 BACK
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Shift the transmission into 00 position.
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-83).
lever assembly.
bracket base (e).
the shift cable guide (D).
\1
/
14-134
5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release your
hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the
shift position is in 00.
@,...-) ""","-I)-----'""'-'11I)[)=
+ ++[B]+
00 position indicator light comes on.
assembly.
BACK
9. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (8)
shift cable.
D
Properly Installed:
@D=
I
r
\
A
of the mounting stud.
B
F
cable bracket base.
J
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m, 16Ibfft)
lever releases.
14-135
BACK
14-136
AIT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Indicator Input Test, page 14-141
Indicator Bulb Replacement, page 14-142
Test, page 14-138
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHooD FU5ElRELAY BOX
No 41(IOOA) No'2 (SDA)
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FU5ElRELAY BOX

VSP
OUT
A9
BLUIWHT
.,
811
...
BLK
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
CI2
CIS
C'
D4
IND
A,.
GRNlBLK
BLKlBLU
DRIVERS
UNDERDASH
FUSElRELAY
BOX
WHi---i 17
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
,
r.
BLKlBLU l
c" REDIBLK ---l
WHT----l
RED/BLK --l
!
[M"
C6
C7
PNK---i
BLU--i
BRN---i
PNK ----l PNK
I I.
BLU
11
BLU ----l r
-BRN-
"
,
WHT YEL BLU
PNK
I
I
I
i
I
9
,
7 6 S
ATP
NP
013
BLUIWHT
BRN I
I
I

I 2
r- LT BLU
STARTER
CUT RELAY
-{>
CRUISE
CONTI'IOL
UNIT
Bn
,l
1
G5D1
BLIulll I 11111
WHT YEL BLU GRY REDIWHT
N
D. 5T A
14-137
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) from the connector bracket (8), then disconnect the
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below.
NOTE: Terminal No.1: Neutral position switch
A
Transmission Range Switch Continuity Check
\
Terminal
8 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
Position
\
[f]
,...
<>
IRl -
,...
IN]
,... ,...
'"' -
- v
-

,...
v .'-'
-
00 v v
'"'
III v v
14-138
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
securely supported (see page 1-17).
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels
securely.
3. Shift to [I!I position.
(A) from the connector bracket (8), then disconnect
B
5. Remove the clamp from clamp bracket on the
transmission housing, and remove the harness
clamp (A) from the end cover (8).
/A /
B
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (e),
then remove the transmission range switch (D)
from the end cover.
7. Set the transmission range switch to [I!I position.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in [NJ
position.
(cont'd)
14-139
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on
the control shaft (8), then secure it with the bolts.
NOTE: Do not move the transmission range switch
when tightening the bolts.
10. Install the transmission range switch cover (C) and
the harness clamp (D) on the end cover (E).
11. Connect the transmission range switch connector
(A), then install it on the connector bracket (8).
14-140
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all gears, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the AfT gear
position indicator (A).
A
13. Start the engine. Move the shift lever through all
gears, and verify the following:
The engine will not start in any position other
than IHl or [fl.
The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in lID position.
BACK
Indicator Input Test
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-84).
2. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard (see page 22-68), then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P)
and C (16P) connectors.
3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
- If a test indicates a problem, find a correct the cause, then recheck the system.
- If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS
Cavity Wire Color Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause
(If result is not obtained)
B11 VEL Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.S A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
B16 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (GS01)
C4 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range
and shift lever in !RI There should be 1 V or less. switch
CS BRN Ignition switch ON (II) NOTE: There should be battery An open in the wire
and shift lever in rn voltage in any other shift lever
C6 PNK Ignition switch ON (II) position.
and shift lever in
C7 BLU Ignition switch ON (II)
and shift lever in [!]
C12 GRN/BLK Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range
and shift lever in There should be battery voltage. switch
Faulty PCM
An open in the wire
C1S BLK/BLU Shift lever in Check for continuity to ground: Faulty transmission range
There should be no continuity in switch
anxother shift lever position. An open in the wire
C16 RED/BLK Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground:
and shift lever in [HJ There should be 1 V or less.
NOTE: There should be battery
voltage in any other shift lever
position.
14-141
BACK
AIT Gear Position Indicator
Indicator Bulb Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service
(see page 23-28).
2. Remove the gauge assembly, and disassemble it
(see page 22-68).
3. Replace the bulbs (A) at the gauge assembly (8).
14-142
BACK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'SI
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Test, page 14-147
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SWITCH
Test, page 14-147
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCMI
PARK PIN SWITCH
Test, page 14-148
14-143 BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
NO.47 (20A)

No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOA)
14-144
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT
IGI
YEl
A12
IGI
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
NO.9 (7.5A)
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
YEl
GRN
B22
SHIFT lOCK
SOLENOID
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S
PG lG
BlK BlK
G401
ATPP
A15
BlKIBLU

TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
STEERING lOCK
ASSEMBLY
IlU
B12
WHT/RED
A28
IlU
KEY
INTERLOCK
SWITCH

WHT/YEl
WHT/RED
1
PARK
PIN
SWITCH
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
BlK WHTlBlK
1
GSOI
A32
BKSW
H
:
BACK
1. Disconnect the multiplex control unit 22P connector driver's, then remove the multiplex control unit (driver's)
from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) while depressing the brake pedal
with the shift lever in [f] position, the shift lock system is OK. If the shift lever cannot be shifted from [f] position,
test the transmission range switch.
3. With the driver's unit still disconnected from its connector and the fuse/relay box, make these input test at its
connector or its fuse/relay box socket.
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
14-145
BACK
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
MUL TIPEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTORS
A (24P) B(22P)
Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
Multiplex Control Unit (Driver'sI24P Connector
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause
Color Ilf result is not obtainedl
A3
-- Shift lever in [f] Check for continuity to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
There should be continuity. Poor ground IG1011
An ODen in the wire
A12
-- Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.13 (7.5AI fuse in the passenger's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay
Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box
An ODen in the wire
A14 -- Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G4011
There should be continultv. An open in the wire
A24 -- Ignition switch turned ON (III Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5 AI fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
Faultv driver's under-dash fuse/relav box
Multiplex Control Unit (Driver'sl22P Connector
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause
Color lit result is not obtainedl
B11 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G503)
There should be continuitv. An ODen in the wire
B22 GRN Ignition switch ON 1111 Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5 AI fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
Faulty shift lock solenoid
An open in the wire
4. Reconnect the connectors to the multiplex control unit (driver's), and make this input test.
Ilf result is not obtained)
B12 WHT/RED Ignition switch ON 1111, and Check for voltage to ground: Faulty brake pedal position switch
brake Dedal Dushed There should be battery voltaae. Faulty PCM
Ignition switch ON (III, brake Check for voltage to ground: Faulty multiplex control unit
pedal and accelerator pedal There should be 1 V or less. (driver's)
pressed at the same time An open in the wire
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good mUltiplex control unit (driver's), and recheck the system.
If the system is OK, the multiplex control unit (driver's) must be faulty; replace it.
14-146
BACK
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test
(see page 23-28).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see
page 20-84).
3. Check for continuity between the No.5 and No.7
terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no
continuity when the key is released.
4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power
connected to the No.7 terminal and ground
connected to the No.3 terminals.
If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock
solenoid is OK.
If the key can be removed, replace the steering
lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not
available separately).
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-83).
2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.
3. Connect the No.1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid
terminal.
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the
position. Release the battery terminals from the
shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
back to the position, and make sure it locks.
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 terminal
(reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
inside the solenoid.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release
lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the
release lever is released .
6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.
14-147
BACK
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a
screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (8).
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (e) and
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of
the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock
stop (E).
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then
connect the shift lock solenoid connector.
14-148
Park Pin Switch Test
2. Disconnect the park pin 4P connector.
3. Shift the shift lever into the [f.J position, then check
for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift the shift lever out of the [f.J position, and check
for continuity between the terminals in step 3.
5. Ifthe park pin switch is faulty, replace the shift
lever bracket base.
NOTE: The park pin switch is not available
separately from the shift lever bracket base.
BACK
End Cover and Idler Gears Removal
Exploded View
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
END COVER GASKET
Replace.
MAINSHAFT LOCKNUT
Left-hand threads
Replace.
SECONDARY SHAFT
LOCKNUT
Replace.
~ E
CONICAL
SPRING
WASHER
ooP, .... /
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
ATFCOOLER
LINE
ATF COOLER LINE
LINE BOLT
PARK GEAR
(cont'd)
14-149
BACK
End Cover and Idler Gears Removal (cont'd)
Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
this procedure.
1. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
2. Remove the bolts securing the harness clamp (two
bolts), then remove the transmission range switch.
3. Remove the bolts securing the end cover (14 bolts),
then remove the cover.
4. For '00-02 models: Remove the lubrication pitot
pipe (A) and the pitot pipe (B), then remove the
pitot flange (e) from the mainshaft 1st gear (D).
14-150
5. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF50101 or
07GAB-PF50100
6. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
BACK
7. Cutthe lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (8) using
a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical
spring washers from each shaft.
NOTE:
Mainshaft locknut has left-hand threads.
Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the
press fit idler gears on the mainshaft and
secondary shaft, and the park gear and bearing
hub on the countershaft.
Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
A
/
B
8. Remove the special tool (mainshaft holder) from
the mainshaft.
9. Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the
secondary shaft idler gear (8) with a puller (C).
o
B
c
10. With the puller, remove the bearing hub (D) from
the countershaft, then remove the countershaft
idler gear (E) and bearings.
11. Remove the park gear (F) with the puller.
12. Remove the park pawl, spring, shaft, and shaft stop.
13. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
14. Remove the line bolts, then remove the ATF cooler
lines.
14-151
BACK
Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment
1. Set the park lever in the position.
2. Measure the distance (A) between the park pawl
shaft (8) and the park lever roller pin (e).
STANDARD:
69.5-70.5 mm (2.74-2.78 in.)
B
14 Nm(1.4 kgf.m, 10 Ibfft)
14-152
3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and
install the appropriate park lever stop (A) from the
table below.
PARK LEVER STOP
Mark Part Number L, L2
1 24537 -PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
(0.433 in.) (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65 mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the
distance is within tolerance.
BACK
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE GASKET
HARNESS CLAMP
BRACKET
Replace.
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
SPECIAL BOLT
('01-02 models)
Replace.
MAINS HAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
--------- .
SECONDARY SHAFT
ATF FEED PIPE TRANSMISSION GROUND
TERMINAL BRACKET
/
MOUNTING BOLTS
/
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
SHAFT IHOLDER
! Y ASSEMBLY
- 0 TRANSMISSION HOUSING
COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR
/(;
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
/LOCK WASHER
, Replace.
t!
\ COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SUB-ASSEMBLY DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
REAR STIFFENER
('01-02 models)
(cont'd)
14-153
BACK
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal (cont'd)
Housing puller 07HAe-PK40102
this procedure.
1. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B.
2. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts.
'98-00 models:
Remove the 16 bolts, hangers, and brackets .
'Q1-02 models:
Remove the rear stiffener and special bolt, then
remove 15 bolts, hanger, and brackets.
3. Install a 5 x 0.8 mm bolt (A) in the reverse idler gear
shaft (B), then remove the reverse idler gear shaft!
holder assembly (e).
A
B c
4. When removing the transmission housing from the
torque converter housing, move the reverse idler
gear out of way of the countershaft 2nd gear in the
direction shown.
NOTE: The transmission housing will not separate
from the torque converter housing if the reverse
idler gear is not moved.
14-154
5. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with
the transmission housing groove (e) by turning the
control shaft.
07HAC-PK40102 C A
B
6. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then
remove the transmission housing.
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too
short, replace it with Housing Puller Arm, 205 mm,
07SAe-POZ0101.
7. Remove the reverse idler gear from the
8. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then slide and
remove the countershaft reverse gear and the
needle bearing.
9. Remove the bolt securing the shift fork, then
remove the shift fork, reverse selector, reverse
selector hub, and countershaft 4th gear.
If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, leave it
and 4th gear on the countershaft.
10. Remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly.
If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove
the secondary shaft sub-assembly, countershaft
sub-assembly and mainshaft sub-assembly
together.
11. Remove the mainshaft sUb-assembly.
12. Remove the countershaft sub-assembly.
BACK
Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver 07949-3710001
Driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm, 07746-0010600
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft
bearing (8), and secondary shaft bearing (C) from
the transmission housing, expand each snap ring
with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out
NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's
necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
B
2. Install the bearings in the direction shown.
3. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers,
and insert the bearing part-way into the housing
4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into
the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
5. After installing the bearings verify the following:
The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and
housing grooves .
The ring end gaps (8) are correct.
B:0-7mm
(0-0.28 in.)
A
14-155
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Exploded View
ATF FEED PIPES.
ATF FEED PIPE.
8x71 mm /6X 1.0mm
\
Eight Bolts
B x "n n_n_-lh.. VALVE
----""'u U / ATF FEED PIPES
o 1/ SrATOR SHAFT
PLATE 0
REGULATOR SEPARATOR
o DETENT ARM
STATOR SHAFT STOP <> lb SHAFT
/O-RING
, Replace.
DOWEL PIN
ATF FEED PIPE 8 x 1.25 mm
. "'" Three Bolts
6x1'.!''?lm 0
One Bolt
MAIN VALVE BODY
COOLER CHECK
VALVE SPRING
COOLER CHECK
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE /
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
ATF PUMP DRIVEN
GEAR SHAFT
MAIN SEPARATOR
PLATE
DOWEL PINS
\
6x 1.0mm
Two Bolts
SERVO DETENT
BASE
6x1.0mm
Two Bolts
SERVO BODY
DOWEL PIN
SERVO SEPARATOR
PLATE
6x 1.0mm
Six Bolts
ACCUMULATOR BODY
14-156
BACK
this procedure.
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the main valve
body, regulator valve body, and servo body.
2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).
3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).
4. Remove the accumulator cover (two bolts).
NOTE: The accumulator cover is spring loaded. To
prevent stripping the threads in the servo body,
press down on the accumulator cover while
unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern.
5. Remove the bolts securing the servo body (nine
bolts), then remove the servo body and servo
separator plate.
6. Remove the accumulator body (six bolts).
7. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
8. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
9. Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm, then
remove the detent arm shaft, detent arm, and
control shaft.
10. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler
check valve (steel ball).
11. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).
12. Remove the torque converter check valve and
spring.
13. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then
remove the ATF pump gears.
14. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins
(three).
15. Clean the inlet opening (A) ofthe ATF strainer (8)
thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not
clogged or damaged.
B

r-_
16. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
14-157 BACK
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for
about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and
insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't
require much polishing to remove any burrs.
14-158
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
compressed air.
6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the
valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
BACK
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence
shown for the main valve body (see page 14-160),
regulator valve body (see page 14-163), and servo
body (see page 14-164). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
ofthe valve body.
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(8). Push the spring in with a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
~ ~
A ~
B
14-159 BACK
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-158).
4. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Install the filter in the direction shown.
LOCK-UP
SHIFT VALVE
LOCKUP 1'"0
CONTROL \!!!I
VALVE

TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE /

14-160
MODULATOR VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY
Inspect for scoring and
damage.
REVERSECPC
VALVE
SLEEVE

@(@
\1
/
CL

SERVO CONTROL //\1
VALVE
@
MANUAL VALVE
I
VALVE CAP CLIP
BACK
Sectional View

SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No. Spring Standard (New) Unit: mm (in.)
WireOia. 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
CD Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2
Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4
Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 32.2 (1.268) 13.4
CD Shift valve 0 spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
ill Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.4 (0.331) 38.2 (1.504) 14.0
l Cooler check valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 5.8 (0.228) 14.5 (0.571) 6.8
14-161
BACK
Valve Body
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B)
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main
valve body (0). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved
and chamfered side facing up.
/
c
D
14-162
2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
gear (A) and driven gear (B).
ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance:
Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.)
A
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (0).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)
Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 in.'
Service Limit:
0.07 mm (0.003 in.'
C
D
BACK
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse ofthe disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
6. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
7. Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
STOP BOLT
6x 1.0mm
REGULATOR VALVE
SPRING SEAT
RELIEF VALVE
o
FILTER

/LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
/ALVE CAP
Replace.
Install in this direction.
Inspect for scoring and damage.

'41.{9/
0 _____ VALVE CAP CLIP
No. Spring Standard (New) Unit: mm (in.)
Wire Dia. 0.0. Free Length
CD Regulator valve spring B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0 (1.732)
Regulator valve spring A 1.9 (0.075) 14.7 (0.579) 77.4 (3.047)
Stator reaction spring 4.5 (0.177) 35.4 (1.394) 30.3(1.193)
(1) Relief valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.6 (0.260) 39.8 (1.567)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.65 (0.026) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370)
No. of Coils
12.5
15.2
1.92
20.4
15.6
14-163
BACK
Valve Body
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
SHIFT VALVE A
VALVE SEAT
\

VALVE CAP
'"

/m
VALVE CAP CLIP
CPCVALVEA
/
SHIFT VALVE B
No. Spring
CD Shift valve B spring
Shift valve A spring
CPC valve A spring
G)
CPC valve B spring
3rd accumulator spring
4th accumulator spring
14-164
SERVO BODY

I :
: I
I :

SHIFT FORK
SHAFT/SERVO
@

: I
! :
3RD ACCUMULATOR
PISTON
4TH ACCUMULATOR
PISTON
O-RINGS
Replace.
O-RING
/RePlace.
Standard (New) Unit: mm (in.)
0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4 (1.591) 16.9
0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4 (1.591) 16.9
0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
3.8 (0.150) 19.6 (0.772) 59.8 (2.354) 7.8
3.8 (0.150) 19.6 (0.772) 59.8 (2.354) 7.8
BACK
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls.
passages.

o 6x1.0mm
STOP BOLT
'., g 12 NmI1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
ACCUMULATOR BODY
---------ACCUMULATOR
BODY COVER
bJ CHECK BALLS, 2
CD _____
----@
' ____
------- 1
----.....1 I
0
1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON lJ
/ O-RING
/ l Replace.
O-RING
Replace. SNAP RINGS
No. Springs Standard (New) Unit: mm (in.)
WireOia. 0.0. Free Length
CD 1st accumulator spring B 2.5 (0.098) 12.8 (0.504) 49.5 (1.949)
1st accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6 (0.772) 69.7 (2.744)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.7 (0.106) 14.8 (0.583) 51.0 (2.008)
ill 2nd accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 21.6 (0.850) 73.2 (2.882)
No. of Coils
8.5
10.8
9.6
10.0
14-165
BACK
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25 - 40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01 OOOA
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the
special tool.
SLIDE HAMMER,
3/S" -16
(Commercially available)

r?fi-2\ J y/ 0
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
/"P

2. Drive in the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms
in the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
a 0

1"'(
1
07746-0010500
14-166
3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing using
the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
BACK
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) with the
special tool.
SLIDE HAMMER,
3/S
N
-16
(Commercially available)
A
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).
0-0.03mm
(0-0.001 in.)
B
3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) with
the special tools.
Secondary Shaft Bearing
Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25 - 40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07947-6340500
1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) with the
special tool.
A
07149-0010000
B
the special tools.
14-167 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly.
2. Check clearance of 3rd/4th clutch assembly (see page 14-169).
3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
6. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
7. Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 72 mm thrust shim in the direction shown.
8. Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged, replace them (see
page 14-170).
14-168
THRUST WASHER
27 x47x5 mm
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
HEXHEDBOLT
6x 1.0 mm
('00-02 models)

-------::
4TH GEAR COLLAR
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
226 Nm(23.0 kgf.m, 166Ibfft)--+ 0 ....
167 Nm(17.0 kgfm, 123Ibfft)
/
--e
CONICAL
"""""'" SPRING WASHER
a Replace.
------- PITOT FLANGE
('00-02 models)

- ""TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
:B
NEEDLE BEARING
----. ......... Install sealing rings \j
SET RING mating faces as shown. THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
BACK
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings from the mainshaft.
2. Assemble the 41 x 72 mm thrust shim (AI. 3rd/4th
clutch assembly (8) and 4th gear collar (C) on the
mainshaft (D).
3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch
assembly (81. then measure the clearance between
the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar with a
feeler gauge (F) in at least 3 places. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD:
0.03 - 0.11 mm (0.001 - 0.004 in.)
/
B
4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the
thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.
THRUST SHIM, 41 x 72 mm
No. Part Number Thickness
1 90414-P6H-0 10 6.35 mm (0.250 in.)
2 904 15-P6H-0 10 6.40 mm (0.252 in.)
3 904 16-P6H-0 1 0 6.45 mm (0.254 in.)
4 90417-P6H-010 6.50 mm (0.256 in.)
5 90418-P6H-010 6.55 mm (0.258 in.)
6 90419-P6H-010 6.60 mm (0.260 in.)
6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the
clearance is within standard.
14-169 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement
The sealing rings on the mainshaft are synthetic resin
with chamfered ends. Check condition of the sealing
rings, and replace them only if they are worn, distorted,
or damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze the sealing ring together
slightly before installing them.
2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install
them on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the
following:
The rings are fully seated in the groove.
The rings are not twisted.
The chamfered ends of the rings are properly
joined.
14-170
BACK
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and take off components down to the reverse selector hub.
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-172).
3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-174).
5. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
7. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the shaft and gears.
8. Install the conical spring washer, idler gear, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and distance collar in the
direction shown.
--PARK GEAR
14-171
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement
Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Removal
1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th
gear (B) with a universal 2-jaw (or 3-jaw) puller (e).
Place a shaft protector (D) between the puller and
countershaft (E) to prevent damaging the
countershaft.
NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not
pressfitted, and can be removed without using a
puller.
c
A
B
E
14-172
2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance
collar, and 29 mm cotters from the countershaft.
3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) together
from the countershaft (e) with a puller (D). Place a
shaft protector (E) between the puller and
countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.
D E
c
B
A
BACK
Installation
1. Apply ATF to the parts.
2. Align the shaft splines with those on 1st gear, then
press the countershaft (A) into the 1st gear (8) with
a press.
Place an attachment (C) between the press and
countershaft to prevent damaging the
countershaft.
Stop pressing the countershaft when the 1st gear
contacts the final drive gear (0).
3. Align the shaft splines with those on 3rd gear, then
press the countershaft into the 3rd gear with a
press.
Place an attachment between the press and
counters haft.
Stop pressing the countershaft when the 3rd gear
contacts the 1st gear.
4. Install the 29 mm cotters, distance collar, snap ring,
needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the
countershaft.
5. Slide the reverse selector hub (8) over the
countershaft (C), and then press it into place with
the special tool and a press.
press-fitted and can be installed without using the
special tool and a press.
14-173
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough
movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged,
replace it.
2. Remove the bearing (A) from the bearing hub with
the special tools, a bearing separator (8), and a
press.
07746-0010300
A
3. Install the new bearing on the bearing hub with the
special tools and a press.
077 ..... , ....
/
14-174
BACK
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears.
3. Check clearance of the secondary shaft assembly (see page 14-176).
5. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
6. Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-178).
9. Install the conical spring washer and 38 x 56.5 mm splined washer in the direction shown.
SECONDARY SHAFT
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST GEAR

SPLINED WASHER,
38x56.5mm
Selective part
Replace.
226 Nm(23.0 kgfm, 166Ibfft)-- 0 --
167 Nm(17.0 kgfm, 123 Ibfft)
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
2ND GEAR
o 0 0
000 O.
//.
---::%
-0
o 0 0 0 0 '- THRUSTSHIM,37x55mm
Selective part
\1 .... I----COTTERS, 32 mm
-COTTER RETAINER
----SNAP RING
SEALING RINGS

O-RING
Replace.
14-175
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove all O-rings from the shaft.
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle
bearing (8), 1st gear (e), thrust needle bearing (0),
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer (E), 32 mm cotters (F),
cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the
secondary shaft (I).
A
B
c
D
-----F
-----G
H
14-176
3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 mm
splined washer (E) and cotters (F) with a feeler
gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average
as the actual clearance.
STANDARD:
0.07-0.15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.)
splined washer, and measure its thickness. .
5. Select and install a new splined washer, then
recheck.
SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 mm
1 90502-POZ-000 6.85 mm (0.270 in.)
2 90503-POZ -000 6.90 mm (0.272 in.)
3 90504-POZ-000 6.95 mm (0.274 in.)
4 90S0S-POZ-000 7.00 mm (0.276 in.)
5 90S06-POZ -000 7.05 mm (0.278 in.)
6 90507 -POZ-OOO 7.10 mm (0.280 in.)
BACK
6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer from the
mainshaft.
7. Assemble the 1 st/2nd clutch assembly (A), 37 x 55
mm thrust shim (8), thrust needle bearing (e),
needle bearing (D), 2nd gear (E), thrust needle
bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer
(removed from mainshaft) (G) on the secondary
shaft (H).
~ G
_____ F
D
B
8. Set the dial indicator (I) on 2nd gear (E).
~
9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer (G) against
the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear
axial clearance in at least three places while
moving the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the
actual clearance.
STANDARD:
0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.'
A
10. Ifthe clearance is out of standard, remove the 37 x
55 mm thrust shim and measure its thickness.
11. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck.
1 90406-POZ-000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.)
2 90407 -POZ-OOO 4.95 mm (0.195 in.)
3 90408-POZ-000 5.00 mm (0.197 in.)
4 90409-POZ-000 5.05 mm (0.199 in.)
5 9041 O-POZ -000 5.10 mm (0.201 in.)
6 90411-POZ-000 5.15 mm (0.203 in.)
7 90412-POZ-000 5.20 mm (0.205 in.)
12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer on the
mainshaft.
14-177 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
1. Check the bearing for wear, damaged, and rough
replace it.
2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with
soft jaws.
3. Remove the bearing (A) from the secondary shaft
idler gear (8) with a commercially availables,
1-1/2"-2" blind hole bearing puller (C), and
1-5/8"-3" slide hammer (D).
A
14-178
4. Install the new bearing on the secondary shaft idler
gear with the special tool and a press .
077 ..... ' ....
.7GAD-SD .. ,., /
BACK
Clutch Disassembly
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch
end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates with a
screwdriver (B).
B
A
2. Remove the disc spring from the 3rd and 4th
clutches.
3. Remove the wave spring from the 1st clutch.
4. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch
assembly.
07GAE-PX40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
07LAE-PX40100
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50100
(cont'd)
14-179 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
5. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full
contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
B
6. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of
the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the
special tool works on the clutch return spring (C).
14-180
7. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of
the spring retainer which is unsupported by the
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
8. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be
removed.
BACK
9. Remove the snap ring (A). Then remove the special
tools (8), spring retainer (e), return spring.
c
10. For 3rd and 4th clutch:
Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and
apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove
the piston (8). Place a finger tip on the other end
while applying air pressure.
B
14-181
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
SPRING

SNAP RING .........
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard /
2.0 mm (0.079 in/,
CLUTCH END
PLATE
I
SNAP RING
14-182
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
I / CLUTCH END
PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.3 mm (0.091 in.)

___ SPRING
RETAINER
RETURN SPRING
)/O-RINGS
___ /" Replace .
......-2ND CLUTCH
DRUM
____ 1 ST CLUTCH
DRUM
BACK
3RD/4TH CLUTCH
ORINGS
Replace.
CHECK VALVE
CLUTCH PISTON
DISC SPRING
RETURN SPRING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH END
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
SNAP RING
/ CLUTCH END PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
ORINGS
Replace.
4TH CLUTCH DRUM
---- 3RD CLUTCH DRUM
14-183
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly
07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch compressor attachment
07ZAE-PRP0100
NOTE:
Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor
cleaner, and dry them with compressed air.
Blowout all passages.
Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
14-184
2. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B).
A
3. Install the piston (A) in the clutch drum (B). Apply
pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before
installing.
NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the
piston with too much force.
A
BACK
4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B),
and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer.
____ A
5. Insta" the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch
assembly.
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
07LAE-PX40100

07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and 4
the clutches.
B
7. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of
special tool work on the clutch return spring (C).
(cont'd)
14-185
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
return spring. the retainer may be damaged.
9. Compress the return spring.
10. Install the snap ring (A).
14-186
12. Install the disc spring in the 3rd. and 4th clutches in
the direction shown.
13. Install the wave spring in the 1st clutch.
BACK
14. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a
minimum of 30 minutes. Before installing the
plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch
drum is free of dirt and other foreign matter.
15. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the
clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) with the flat side toward the disc (B).
A
B
16. Install the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver (8).
17. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end plate (B).
18. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end plate
lifted up to the snap ring (e).
(cont'd)
14-187 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
19. Release the clutch end plate to lower the clutch end
plate, then put the special tool on the end plate (A).
B.......... 0 40N
Q ~ J 14 kgf, 9 b f )
~
07ZAE-PRP0100
o
20. Press the special tool down with 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf)
using a force gauge, and read the dial indicator (B).
The dial indicator reads the clearance (e) between
the clutch end plate and top disc (0). Take
measurements in at least three places, and use the
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:
Clutch Service Limit
1st 1.15- 1.35 mm (0.045-0.053 in.)
2nd 0.7-0.9 mm (0.028-0.035 in.)
3rd 0.6-0.8 mm (0.024-0.031 in.)
4th 0.4-0.6 mm (0.016-0.024 in.)
14-188
21. If the clearance is not within the service limits,
select a new clutch end plate from the following
table.
NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed,
but the clearance is still over the standard, replace
the clutch discs and clutch plates.
l.. I
1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
Mark Part Number Thickness
6 22551 -P6H-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22552-P6H-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22553-P6H-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22554-P6H-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in-.)
0 22555-P6H-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
1 22556-P6H-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
2 22557 -P6H-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
3 22558-P6H-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
4 22559-P6H-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
3RD and 4TH CLUTCH END PLATES
1 22551 -PX4-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22552-PX4-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22553-PX4-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22554-PX4-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22555-PX4-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22556-PX4-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22557 -PX4-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22558-PX4-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22559-PX4-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation
Exploded View
Torque:
- 6 x 1.0 mm: 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfft)
6 x 1.0 mm - 8 x 1.25 mm: 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm. 13Ibfft)
ATF FEED PIPE. \ / Eight Bolts 6 x 1.0 mm
8 x 27 mm Two Bolts
n REGULATOR VALVE
IV ATFFEEDP,.ES
REGULATOR SEPARATOR .. ! STATOR SHAFT
PLATE Q '/
.. J"';;,;: DETENT ARM SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP

/O-RING
DOWEL PIN
ATFFEED PIPE

One Bolt
MAIN VALVE
BODY
COOLER CHECK
VALVE SPRING

COOLER CHECK
, Replace.
\
6x 1.0mm
Two Bolts
ACCUMULATOR
COVER
........... 6x 1.0mm
Nine Bolts
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE / ;
CONTROL SHAFT
DOWEL PIN
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
ATF PUMP DRIVEN
GEAR SHAFT
MAIN SEPARATOR
PLATE
ATF PUMP DRIVE
GEAR
DOWEL PIN

\
6x 1.0mm
Six Bolts
ACCUMULATOR BODY
(cont'd)
14-189 BACK
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation (cont'd)
this procedure.
1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and
ATF pump driven gear shaft (0). Install the ATF
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered
side facing down.
2. Install the torque converter check valve and spring,
then install the main valve body (one 6 mm bolt
and three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump
drive gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal
operating direction, and the ATF pump driven gear
shaft (0) moves smoothly in the axial and normal
operating direction.
B
D
3. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF pump
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized
ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear
shaft.
14-190
4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the
main valve body, then install the two dowel pins
and the regulator separator plate.
5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
7. Install the two dowel pins and the servo separator
plate on the main valve body.
8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter
housing along with the manual valve (B).
G A
/

I' -

B
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (0) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).
11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).
12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).
15. Install the two ATF feed pipes in the servo body,
four pipes in the regulator valve body, and one pipe
in the main valve body.
BACK
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
Exploded View
SOLENOID VALVES A and B
HARNESS CLAMP I
BRACKET

----- ' 6x 1.0mm '
12Nm
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE GASKET
Replace.
TRANSMISSION
HANGER
SPECIAL BOLT
_______ e'.!
RePla.:.:------
TRANSMISSION
HANGER/CONNECTOR
BRACKET
-----
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
GASKET
Replace.
TRANSMISSION GROUND
TERMINAL BRACKET
MOUNTING BOLTS
10x 1.25 mm

/ 12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
t t REVERSE IDLER GEAR
______ SHAFT/HOLDER ASSEMBLY
I
COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
v)
REVERSE GEAR
6x1.0mm
/
14N.m
11.4 kgfm, 10 Ibfft)
____ LOCK WASHER
Replace.
---SHIFT FORK
\COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
(cont'd)
14-191
BACK
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
this procedure.
1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft sub-
assembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary
shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse
selector hub on the countershaft. Ifthe reverse
selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the
installation (see page 14-173).
3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (B) and reverse selector (C) together on
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (0). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E)
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock
washer against the bolt head.
E
6x10mm
~ ____ F
~ Q
4. Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse
gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the
countershaft.
14-192
5. Place the reverse idler gear in the transmission
housing in the direction shown, then move it the
direction shown.
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft.
BACK
7. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the
torque converter housing.
8. Place the transmission housing on the torque
converter housing. then install the housing bolts
along with the transmission hanger/connector
bracket (A). transmission hangers (B), and
transmission ground terminal bracket (C). Tighten
the bolts and new special bolt ('01-02 models) (0) in
two or more steps in the sequence shown to 44 N
m (4.5kgfm, 33 Ibfft).
9. Install the ATF feed pipes (A) with their filter (B)
side into the transmission housing, then install new
a-rings (C), new gasket (0), harness clamp bracket
(E) and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B (F) over the ATF feed pipes on the
E
B
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfft)
A
10. Coat the reverse idler gear shaft (A), needle bearing
(B), and new a-rings (C) with lithium gearse lightly.
Assemble the new a-rings and needle bearing on
the reverse idler gear shaft, then install the reverse
idler gear shaft in the reverse idler gear shaft
holder (0). Align the O-shaped cut out of the shaft
with the O-shaped area of the holder.
11. Engage the reverse idler gear (A) with the
countershaft reverse gear and mainshaft reverse
gear, then install the reverse gear shaft/holder
assembly (B) on the transmission housing.
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibfft)
14-193 BACK
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation
Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on
the control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt (D)
with a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock
tab of the lock washer in this step; bend it after
check the park pawl engagement in step 25.
D
6x 1.0 mm E
N ~ /
A ~
u----c
14-194
2. Coat the following parts with ATF:
Splines of the countershaft, park gear, and old
locknut.
Threads of the countershaft and old locknut.
Old conical spring washer.
3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
and a collar (C). Engage the park pawl (D) to the
park gear, then tighten the old locknut until the
shaft splines come out slightly over the park gear
splines.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench.
4. Remove the locknut and the collar, then install only
the bearing hub/bearing assembly fA) and old
conical spring washer (B). Tighten the old locknut
(C) to seat the park gear to 226 Nm (230 kgfm, 166
Ibfft), then remove the locknut and conical spring
washer.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench. Always use a
torque wrench to tighten the locknut.
BACK
5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A)
using a puller (B).
6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing
(B), countershaft idler gear (e), thrust needle
bearing (D), bearing hub/bearing assembly (E), and
the old conical spring washer (F). Then tighten the
old locknut (G) to seat the bearing hub/bearing
assembly to 164 Nm (17.0 kgfm, 123Ibfft).
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench. Always use a
7. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler
gear (B) as shown.
8. Measure the countershaft idler gear axial clearance
in at least three places while moving the
countershaft idler gear(A). Use the avarage as the
actual clearance.
STANDARD:
0.015-0.045mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)
(cont'd)
14-195
BACK
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (cont'd)
bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as
descriped on the previous page.
10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing
assembly, then recheck.
j ~ [---I ] ~
I t
BEARING HUB
Mark Part Number Difference
A 90520-P6H-000 3.503mm(0.1379 in.)
8 90521-P6H-000 3.490 mm(0.137 4 in.)
C 90522-P6H-000 3.477 mm(0.1369 in.)
0 90523-P6H-000 3.464 mm(0.1364 in.)
11. After replacing the bearing hub/bearing assembly,
make sure the clearance is within standard.
12. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring
washer from the countershaft.
13. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
14-196
14. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
o Splines ofthe mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
idler gears.
o Threads ofthe mainshaft, and secondary shaft.
o Threads of the old mainshaft and secondary shaft
locknuts.
o Old conical spring washers.
15. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the old
conical spring washer (8) on the mainshaft (C).
Tighten the old locknut (D) to seat the mainshaft
idler gear to 226 Nm (23.0 kgfm, 166Ibfft).
NOTE:
o Do not use an impact wrench, always use a
o Mainshaft locknut has left-hand threads.
16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
sedondary shaft idier gear to 226 Nm (23.0 kgfm,
166Ibfft).
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench, always use a
17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring
washer from the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
BACK
18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft and new
locknuts, and new conical spring washers with ATF.
19. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the
direction shown, and install the new locknuts (B).
20. Tighten the locknuts to 167 Nm (17.0 kgfm,
123Ibfft).
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench, always use a
torque wrench to tighten the locknut .
Mainshaft locknut has left-hand threads.
21. Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 mm
punch.
22. For '00-02 models: Install the pitot flange (A) on the
mainshaft idler gear (B), then install the lubrication
pitot pipe (C) and the pitot pipe (D) on the
6x 1.0 mm
12Nm
11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
D
F E
24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the park pawl shaft (C) and the
park lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-152).
25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
(cont'd)
14-197
BACK
26. Install the end cover along with two dowel pins and
new O-rings. Tighten the 14 bolts to 12 Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft).
27. Set the transmission range switch to [HI position.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in [HI
position.
14-198
28. Set the control shaft to the [HI position by turning it.
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the
control shaft tips together when turning into
position. If the tips are squeezed together it will
cause a faulty shift signal or position due to the
play between the control shaft and the switch.
BACK
29. Install the transmission range switch (A) loosely on
the control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts.
Do not move the transmission range switch when
tightening the bolts.
30. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and
install the harness clamp on the clamp bracket (D)
on the transmission housing, then install the
harness clamp (E) on the end cover (F).
31. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing
washers. Tighten the line fittings to 28 Nm (2.9
kgfm, 21 Ibfft).
32. Install the breather tube.
33. Install the ATF dipstick.
For '01-02 models, follow this procedure:
34. Install the rear stiffener (A), then tighten the 10 x
1.25 mm bolt (B) to the specified torque.
s--
10x 1.25mm
~ c
8x 1.25 mm
26Nm
44 Nm 14.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibfftl
35. Secure the nut (C) by your hand until it contacts the
stiffener, then tighten it to the specified torque. If
you can not tighten the nut to the stiffener surface
by hand, replace the nut and the special bolt (D).
14-199 BACK
AfT Differential
~ F N A L DRIVEN GEAR
------DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 14-201
\TI!i'i;=ii?ff1l ------CARRIER BEARING
14-200
-----BEARING OUTER RACE
~ THRUST WASHER
- ---------
BACK
Backlash Inspection
1. Install both axles, and place the differential
assembly on V-blocks (A).
c
B
A
2. Check the backlash of both pinion gears (S) with a
dial indicator (C). Ifthe backlash is out of standard,
replace the differential carrier.
STANDARD:
mm in.)
Replacement
1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential
carrier.
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
threads.
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a
crisscross pattern.
TORQUE:
101 Nm (10.3 kgf.m, 74.5Ibf.ft)
14-201 BACK
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAO-PW50601
NOTE:
The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
set .
Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
bearing is replaced.
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) with a
bearing puller (B), a bearing separator (e), and a
stepper adapter (0).
A
D
14-202
2. Using the small end ofthe special tool, install the
new tapered roller bearings with a press.
Press the bearings on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearings and the differential
carrier.
BACK
Driver 07749-0010000
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG
40100
Pilot. 28 x 30 mm 07JAD-PH80400
housing (B).
A
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter
housing (B).
4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
07749-0010000
A
07JAD-PH80400
07GAD-PG40100
5. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter
housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
07JAD-PH80400
14-203 BACK
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07HAD-SF10100
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is to be replaced.
Do not use shim (s) on the torque converter housing
side.
Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race from the
transmission housing by heating the housing to
about 212F (100C) with a heat gun. Do not heat
the housing more than 212F (100C).
2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque
converter housing.
3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (8) and
outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D) with
the special tools.
077 49-0010000
07HAD-SF10100
14-204
4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (8) in
the torque converter housing (C), and be sure to
install the outer race until it bottoms is the housing
BACK
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07HAD-SF10100
Preload inspection tool 07HAJ-PK40201
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing,
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing
preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer
(B) and thrust shim (e) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212F
(100
0
e) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing
more than 212F (100
0
e).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer
race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing
side.
I_----D
~ _ c
4. Select the 2.60 mm (0.102 in.) thrust shim from the
middle of the table below.
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 mm (0.081 in.)
T 41439-PX4-700 2.01 mm (0.083 in.)
U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
B 41442-PK4-000 2.25 mm (0.089 in.)
e 41443-PK4-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
0 41444-PK4-000 2.35 mm (0.093 in.)
E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 mm (0.094 in.)
F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
G 41447 -PK4-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.)
H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 mm (0.100 in.)
I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 mm (0.104 in.)
K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 mm (0.106 in.)
L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 mm (0.108 in.)
M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 mm (0.110 in.)
N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
0 41455-PK4-000 2.90 mm (0.114 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 mm (0.116 in.)
Q 41457 -PK4-000 3.00 mm (0.118 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 mm (0.120 in.)
(cant'd)
14-205
BACK
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B) and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing
(0).
6. Drive the outer race with the special tools, and
install it securely in the transmission housing.
7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust
washer, outer race, shim and transmission housing.
07749-0010000
14-206
8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket IB), and
dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D).
Align the spring pin on the control shaft (E) with the
transmission housing groove.
9. Install the transmission housing (F) with the
transmission hangers (G), hanger/connector
bracket (H) and ground terminal bracket (I), then
tighten the bolts.
NOTE:
For '01-02 models: Use old special bolt (J) during
inspection, install the new special bolt when
assembling the transmission.
~
G
~
J
G
D
c
BACK
to seat the bearings.
11. Measure the starting torque of the differential
assembly with the special tool and a torque wrench
(A). Measure the starting torque at normal room
temperature in both directions.
STANDARD:
New bearing:
2.7-3.9 Nm (28-40 kgf.cm, 24-35Ibfin.)
Reused bearings:
2.5-3.6 Nm (25-37 kgfcm, 22-32Ibfin.)
07HAJ-PK40201
12. To increase the starting torque, increase the
thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting
torque, decrease the thickness of the shim.
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease starting torque about
0.3-0.4 Nm (3-4 kgfcm, 3-3 ibfin.)
14-207
BACK
BACK
Transaxle
Drivelinel Axle
Special Tools ................................................................. 16-2
Driveshaft Inspection ................................................... 16-3
Driveshafts Removal .................................................... 16-3
Driveshafts Disassembly ............................................. 16-5
Driveshafts Reassembly .............................................. 16-9
Driveshafts Installation ................................................ 16-20
Intermediate Shaft Removal........................................ 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ................................. 16-22
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly .................................. 16-24
Intermediate Shaft Installation .................................... 16-26
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number DescriPtion Qty
CD 07LAF-SM40300 Support Base Attachment 1
@ 07 MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07XAC-001020A Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 1
(!)
017 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 1
017 49-0010000 Driver 1
ill 07947-5090101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x15 mm 1
07947 -6340500 Driver Attachment 1
@ 07965-5090100 Support Base 1
CD
(!)

....
..
"- -_ .. -
ill
16-2
BACK
Driveshaft Inspection
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot
(B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands.
D
2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the
splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose.
3. Make sure the driveshaft is not twisted or cracked;
if it is, replace it.
Driveshafts Removal
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-
17).
3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheels.
4. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
then remove the nut.
5. If the right driveshaft is removed, drain the MTF
(see page 13-3) or the ATF (see page 14-113). It is
not necessary to drain the transmission fluid when
the left driveshaft is removed (for vehicles with
intermediate shaft).
6. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and 10 mm flange
bolts (B and C), then remove the damper fork (D).
D
A
(cont'd)
16-3
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Driveshafts Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the cotter pi n (A) from the lower arm ball
joint castle nut (8), and remove the nut.
07MAC-SLOO200
B ~ -
8. Separate the ball joint from the lower arm (C) with
the special tool (see page 18-9).
9. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the
driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub
using a plastic hammer.
16-4
10. Pry out the inboard joint (A) with a prybar, and
remove the driveshaft from the differential case or
bearing support as an assembly. Do not pull on the
driveshaft (8), because the inboard joint may come
apart. Draw the driveshaft straight out to avoid
damaging the differential oil seal or the
intermediate shaft outer seal.
~ Y I I ' ' ' ' ' ~ ' ' ' '
A
Left driveshaft with intermediate shaft:
A
BACK
Driveshafts Disassembly
Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001020A
Slide hammer, commercially available
Boot band pincer, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side:
1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint.
2. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper.
If the boot band is welded type (A), cut the boot
band (B).
If the boot band is a double loop type (e), lift up
the band bend (D), and push it into the clip (E).
If the boot band is a low profile type (F), pinch
and remove the boot band with a commercially
available boot band pincer (G).
Welded Type
Double Loop Type
D
E
Low Profile Type
3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
(e) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves
in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint
on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the
rollers when separating them from the inboard
jOint.
c
(cont'd)
16-5 BACK
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Disassembly (co nt' d)
4. Make a mark (A) on the rollers (B or C) and spider
(0) to identify the locations of rollers on the spider,
them remove the rollers.
NOTE:
Roller (B) is used on '98-00 A/T models and
all '01-02 models.
Roller (C) is used on '98-00 MfT models.
5. Remove the circlip (E).
6. Mark the spider (0) and driveshaft (F) to identify the
position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider.
16-6
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape
(A) to prevent damage to the boot and dynamic
damper (for left drives haft on A/T models and all
right driveshafts).
(Left driveshaft
on A/T models and
all right driveshafts)
9. Remove the inboard boot and dynamic damper.
Take care not to damage the boot and dynamic
damper.
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
BACK
Outboard Joint Side:
1. Remove the boot bands. Take care not to damage
the boot and dynami'c damper.
If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot
band (8).
If the boot band is a double loop type (e), lift up
the band bend (0), and push it into the clip (E).
If the boot band is an ear clamp type (F), lift up
the three tabs (G) with a screwdriver.
If the boot band is the locki ng tabs type, pry up
the tabs with a screwdriver, and lift up the end of
the band.
Welded Type
A
/
!J !
Double Loop Type
D
E
Ear Clamp Type
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) to the inboard joint side.
Take care not to damage the boot.
A
(cont'd)
16-7
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Driveshafts Disassembly (cont'd)
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same
position of the outboard joint end (C).
5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the special
tool and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide
hammer (B).
7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.
16-8
8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft.
BACK
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
'98-00 models
,',
INBOARD JOINT / .. , ..
( / . 2-------'FdIT-'
j <fj
.... , .... / ROLLER
SET RING
Replace.
Pack cavity with grease.
/ (For A/T modelsl
/
/ Cf'
SPIDER CiA
(For A/T modelsl /.

INBOARD BOOT
..

DYNAMIC DAMPER /
/DRNESHAFT
/STOPRING
(Left driveshaft for A/T modelsl DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
(
Replace.
/ Replace.

-
(Rubber typel ,,.. .. ,. OUTBOARD BOOT

/ , .. , ?RUBBERI
I .. , .. , _ DOUBLE LOOP BAND
, .. , .. Replace.
(" rrfl
.I '0
. '. / \1 1
A
ieJ
r

Replace. , .. ,' EAR CLAMP BAND
OUTBOARD BOOT (TPEI .. ,../ Replace.
(cont'd)
16-9
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
Exploded View
'01-02 models
-
ROLLE
()
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
R Replace.
I (Replacement parts only)
j';"DER 1
-v U
III ______ INBOARD BOOT
V .-fiiift
P"koavitywhh ., .....
LOW PROFILE BAND
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
DYNAMIC DAMPER I
(Both driveshafts for AfT models and
right driveshaftfor MIT models)
/STOPRING
DYNAMIC DAMPER BAND #" Replace.
(Both driveshafts for AIT models and WOC
16-10
right driveshaft for MIT models)
OUTBOA\RD BOOT (TPEI
,
EAR CLAMP BANDS
Replace.
BACK
o Boot band tool, KO-3191 or equivalent commercially
available
o Boot band pincers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent
o Boot band pincer, commercially available
this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side:
1. Wrep the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the inboard boot and dynamic damper
(for left driveshaft on AfT models and all right
driveshafts).
(Left driveshaft
on AfT models and
all right driveshaftsl
2. Install the dynamiC damper and inboard boot to the
driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape.Take care
not to damage the inboard boot and dynamic
damper.
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the
driveshaft.
4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always
rotate the circlip in its groove to be sure it is fully
seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A or B) onto the spider (C) with their
high shoulders facing outward, and note these
items:
o Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on
the spider by aligning the marks (0).
o Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
rollers from falling off.
o Roller (A) is used on '98-00 AfT models and
all '01-02 models.
o Roller (B) is used on '98-00 MIT models.
(cont'd)
16-11
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease
included in the new driveshaft set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 120-130 g (4.2-4.6 oz)
('98-00 models)
150-160 g (5.3-5.6 oz)
('01-02 models)
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note
these items:
Reinstall the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft
by aligning the marks (B) on the inboard joint and
the rollers.
Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up
to prevent it from falling off.
For MIT models, align the roller holders (e) with
the grooves in the inboard joint ('98-00 models).
16-12
8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure
below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the
driveshaft and joint.
Left drives haft:
MIT: 531- 536 mm (20.9-21.1 in.)
A/T: 883 - 888 mm (34.8 - 35.0 in.)
Right driveshaft: 511-516 mm (20.1-20.3 in.)
9. Position the dynamic damper as shown below.
Left drives haft:
A/T:
Right driveshaft:
539 - 543 mm (21.2 - 24.1 in.)
260-264 mm (10.2-10.4 in.)
10. Install the boot bands .
For the double loop type, go to step 13. (Boot
band replacement only)
For the low profile type, go to step 11.
BACK
11. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
(8) and dynamic damper, then hook the tab (C) of
the band.
B
I
c
12. Close the hook portion of the band with a
commercially available boot band pincers (A), then
hook the tabs (8) of the band.
B
13. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the band (A) onto the boot
(8).
14. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
15. Mark a position (A) on the band 10-14 mm (0.4-
0.6 in.) from the clip (8).
A
(cont'd)
16-13
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
16. Thread the free end ofthe band through the nose
section of the commercially available boot band
tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on
the winding mandrel (B).
17. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot
band tool, and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
18. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-14
19. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end ofthe band to leave a 5-10 mm (0.2-0.4
in.) tail protruding from the clip.
20. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a
hammer.
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything and the band does not move .
Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces
BACK
21. Install the new set ring. Outboard Joint Side:
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the outboard boot.
Rubber Type
TPEType
2. Install the new boot bands (B) (ear clamp type).
3. Install the outboard boot. Take care not to damage
the outboard boot.
(cont'd)
16-15
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
5. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft
groove (B).
A

6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
until the stop ring (C) is close on the joint.
16-16
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
driveshaft and joint, and drop them from about
10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
hammer as excessive force may damage the
driveshaft.
10cm
(4 in.)
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the
outboard joint end (B).
BACK
9. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease
included in the new joint boot set.
Grease quantity
Outboard joint (Rubber): 130-140 9 (4.6-4.9 oz)
Outboard joint (TPE): 140-150 9 (4.9-5.3 oz)
10. Install the outboard boot and boot bands .
For TPE type boot, go to step 20 .
For rubber type boot, go to step 11.
11. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint (e).
B
12. Set the new double loop band (A) onto the boot.
14. Mark a position (A) on the band 10--14 mm (0.4-
B
A
(cont'd)
16-17
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of a commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
winding mandrel (B).
c
spot (C) on the band meets the edge ofthe clip.
the band 90 to the clip. Center-punch the clip, then
fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-18
hammer.
NOTE:
anything, and the band does not move.
surrounding surfaces.
A
BACK
20. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
21. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a
commercially available boot band pincers (B).
22. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion
of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band further.
6.0mm
(0.24 in.) MAX
---
-----
---.-
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX
16-19
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Driveshafts Installation
1. Apply 0.3 -1.0 g (0.01- 0.04 oz) of specified grease
to the whole splined surface (A) of the left
driveshaft (for vehicles with intermediate shaft).
After applying grease, remove the grease from the
splined grooves at intervals of 2 - 3 splines and
from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed
from the intermediate shaft.
A B
/
r-r-
r e- \
I
(
(
\
I L ~
I
\ L-r-
2. Install a new set ring onto the set ring groove of the
driveshaft.
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the
differential thoroughly with solvent or carburetor
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) unitl the set
ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
~ _ ~
/
B
16-20
4. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B).
B
A
5. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be
careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe
off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball
joint. Torque the castle nut (D) to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut
by loosening.
A
c
12x 1.25 mm
49-59Nm
15.0-6.0 kgfm, 36-43 Ibfttl
6. Install the new cotter pin (E) into the pin hole, and
bend the cotter pin as shown.
BACK
7. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and
onto the lower arm. Install the damper in the
damper fork so the aligning tab (8) is aligned with
the slot in the damper fork. Loosely install the
flange bolt (C).
A
B
10 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
43 Nm (4.4 kgfm. 64 N.m (6.5 kgf.m.
32 Ibfft) 47 Ibf.ft)
8. Loosely install the flange bolt (D) and a new self-
locking nut (E).
9. Install a new spindle nut (A). then tighten the nut.
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (8) against the driveshaft.
10. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
front wheel, then install the front wheel with the
wheel nuts.
11. Tighten the flange bolts and the self-locking nut
with the vehicles weight on the damper.
12. Refill the transmission with recommended MTF
(see page 13-3) or ATF (see page 14-113).
13. Check the front wheel alignment and adjust if
necessary (see page 18-5).
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the MTF (see page 13-3) or ATF (see page 14-
113).
2. Remove the left driveshaft (see page 16-3).
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (8).
/ A p ~
\;) :. ,. "-.--.:.Pr:
J
-.
4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the
differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage
to the differential oil seal (8).
A
B
16-21
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Driver, 07749-0010000
Driver attachment, 07947-6340500
Support base attachment, 07LAF-SM40300
Support base, 07965-SD90100
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm, 07746-0010300
1. Remove the intermediate shaft outer seal (A) from
the bearing support (B).
2. Remove the external snap ring (e).
16-22
3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the special
tools and a press. Be careful not to damage the
metal rings (e) on the intermediate shaft during
disassembly.
07749-0010000 ~
~ ~
B
~ c
4. Remove the internal snap ring.
BACK
5. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
bearing support (B) using the special tools and a
press.
16-23
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
BEARING SUPPORT RING
16-24
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT BEARING
Replace.
BEARING SUPPORT
//EXTERNALSNAPRING
/
OUTERSEAL
Replace.
Pack the interior of the outer seal.
3.0-4.0 9 (0.11-0.14 oz)
BACK
Driver 077 49-0010000
Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Support base 07965-S090100
Oil seal driver attachment 07947-S090101
Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 07947-4630100
this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry
them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the
bearing support (B) using the special tools and a
press.
/07749-0010000
079478090101
3. Seat the internal snap ring in the groove of the
bearing support.
4. Press the intermediate shaft into the shaft bearing
using the special tool and a press.
------- 07947 4630100
5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of
the intermediate shaft (B).
(cont'd)
16-25
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
(cont'd)
6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the
outer seal into the bearing support (B) using the
07749-0010000
...

07LAF-SM40300
/
07965-S0901oo
16-26
A
Intermediate Shaft Installation
1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A)
contacts the transmission (differential) thoroughly
with solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with
compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
assembly into the differential. Hold the
intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to
the differential oil seal (B).
A B
2. Install the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (B).
A
10x 1.25mm
39 Nm (4.0 kgfm,
29 Ibfft) "
B
10x1.25mm
39 Nm (4.0 kgfm,
29lbf.ft)
BACK
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Symptom Troubleshooting ......................................... 17-6
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-7
Power Assist Check ...................................................... 17-7
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-8
Pump Pressure Test-with T/N 07406-0010001 ........... 17-9
Pump Pressure Test-with T/N 07406-001000A .......... 17-10
Fluid Leakage Inspection ............................................. 17-11
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment ....................... 17-12
Fluid Replacement ........................................................ 17-14
Hoses and Lines Replacement .................................... 17-15
Pump Replacement ...................................................... 17-16
Pump Overhaul ............................................................. 17-17
Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-22
Steering Wheel Disassembly and Reassembly ......... 17-23
Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-24
Steering Column Removal/Installation ...................... 17-25
Steering Column Inspection ........................................ 17-27
Steering Column Tilt Lever Inspection/
Adjustment .................................................................. 17-28
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-28
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-29
Steering Gearbox Removal ......................................... 17-30
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ......................................... 17-32
Steering Gearbox Installation ..................................... 17-47
Tie-Rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement ......................... 17-50
Power Steering
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Descrmtion Qty
CD 07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar 1
07HAG-SF10100 Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
*<D 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1
07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07NAD-SR3020A Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
ill 07NAG-SR3090A Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
07RAK-S040110 PIS Joint Adaptor (Pump) 1
07RAK-S040121 PIS Joint Adaptor (Hose) 1
@)
07406-0010001 or 07406-001000A PIS Pressure Gauge 1
@
07725-0030000 Universal Holder 1
@
07746-0010100 Attachment, 32x35 mm 1
@
077 49-0010000 Driver 1
@
07916-SA50001 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
@
07965-SA50500 Front Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
@
07974-SA5020A or 07974-SA50200 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
@
07974-SA50800 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1
* Included," the Belt TensIon Gauge Set, 07TGG-001000A.
0
U
"---...J
!
)f_.

.....
CD <D
0

" ..
._.
@@
ill
@

eJ
/

[]
' ... -
..... _--",.

.-
@ @ @ @ @
17-2
BACK
POWER STEERING FLUID
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING PUMP
Pressure Test (-with TIN 07406-0010001),
page 17-9
Pressure Test (-with TIN 07406-001000A),
page 17-10
Belt Adjustment, page 17-12
Overhaul, page 17-17
STEERING COLUMN
STEERING WHEEL
Removal, page 17-22
Disassembly and Reassembly,
page 17-23
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
ASSEMBLY
Removal/Installation,
page 23-278
Steering Column Removal and Installation, page 17-25
Steering Column Inspection, page 17-27
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-28
POWER STEERING GEARBOX
Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-29
Steering Gearbox Removal, page 17-30
Steering Gearbox Overhaul, step 1 on page 17-33
Steering Gearbox Installation, page 17-47
TIe Rod Ball Joint Boot
Fluid Replacement, page 17-14
Hoses and Lines Replacement, page 17-15
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-11
17-3
BACK
Power Steering
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(sl Also check for:
Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-6) Modified suspension
Tire sizes, tire varieties, and
air pressure
Power steering pump belt
adjustment
Assist (excessively light Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29). Front wheel alignment (see
steering at high speedl page 18-5).
Shock or vibration 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-291.
when the wheel is 2. Check the power steering pump belt for slippage and adjust as necessary
turned to full lock (see page 17-121.
3. Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-30).
Steering wheel will not 1. Check cylinder lines A and B for deformation.
return smoothly 2. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
3. Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-30).
Uneven or rough 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29).
steering 2. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-12).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-110).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to low fluid level.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to possible
leaks in system.
6. Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-301.
Steering wheel kicks 1. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-121.
back during wide turns 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-0010001
(see page 17-91, with TIN 07406-001000A (see page 17-101.
Humming 1. Check when the noise occurs.
Ifthe noise happens 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in cold
weather, this is normal.
o If the noise happens when the wheel is turn with the vehicle stopped,
this is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the sub-frame or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission convertor noise. Remove the power
steering belt, and recheck.
Rattle or chattering 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball jointsl. Tighten or
replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering columns
wobbles, replace the steering column assembly (see page 17-25).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley.
o Ifthe pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 32 on page 17-211.
o If the pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-161.
17-4
BACK
Hissing Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level and check
for leaks.
Check the reservoir for leaks.
Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into the
suction side of the system.
Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Pump noise Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to another
vehicle, (pump noise up to 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in cold
weather is normal).
Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page 17-18).
Squeaking Check the power steering belt tension and adjust as necessary (see page 17-
12).
Fluid leaks from the Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit:
steering gearbox Replace the valve oil seal on top of the valve housing.
Fluid leaks from the left tie-rod boot:
Replace the valve oil seal on the pinion shaft.
Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox side.
Fluid leaks from the right tie-rod boot: Replace the cylinder end seal.
Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt: Replace the
valve body unit.
Fluid leaks from lines Fluid leaks from the cylinder line A or B connections (flare nuts): Tighten the
connection and retest. If it still leaks, replace the line.
Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder line A or B: Replace the cylinder line.
Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the valve
body unit (flair nuts): Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still leaks, replace the
hose, the line, or valve body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from pump Fluid leaks from the front oil seal: Replace the front oil seal.
Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing: Replace the leaking
O-rings or seals (see page 17-17), and if necessary replace the power
steering pump (see page 17-16).
Fluid leaks from Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap: Fluid level is too high: drain the
reservoir reservoir to the proper level.
Fluid leaks from reservoir: Check for the reservoir for cracks and replace as
necessary. Aerated fluid: check for an air leak on the inlet side of pump.
Fluid leaks from pump Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the fitting 0-
outlet hose (high- ring.
pressure) Fluid leaks at the swagged joint: Replace the outlet hose.
Fluid leaks from pump Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly. Replace or
inlet hose (Iow- repair as necessary.
pressure)
17-5
BACK
Power Steering
Hard Steering
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-7).
Is the power assist more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6
Ibf)?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Power assist is OK .
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the
pump at idle with TIN 07406-0010001 (see page 17-
9), with TIN 07406-001000A (see page 17-10).
Is the pressure 1,500 kPa (15 kgflcrrr, 213 psi) or
less?
YES- Go to step 3.
NO-Goto step 7.
3. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle with TIN
07406-0010001 (see page 17-9), with TIN 07406-
001000A (see page 17-10).
Is the pressure 7,200- 7,800 kPa (73- 80 kgflcrrr,
1,040- 1,140 psi) or less?
YES- Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 8.
4. With a spring scale,measure the power assist in
both directions, to the left and to the right.
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
1. 121bf) of each other?
YES- Go to step 5.
NO- Go to step 9.
5. Measure the fluid pressure with TIN 07406-0010001
(see page 17-9), with TIN 07406-001000A (see page
17-10) with both pressure gauge valves open (if so
equipped), while turning the steering wheel fully to
the left and fully to the right.
Is the pressure 7,200- 7,800 kPa (73- 80 kgflcrrt,
1,040-1,140 psi) or less?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Faulty gearbox .
17-6
6. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-29), and retest.
Is the steering OK?
YES-Repair is completed .
NO-Faulty gearbox .
7. Check for the supply and return lines between the
pump and the gearbox for clogging and
deformation.
Are the lines clogged or deformed?
YES- Repair or replace the lines .
NO-Faulty valve body unit .
8. Check the flow control valve (see step 10 on page
17-18) for smooth movement and leaks.
Is the flow control valve OK?
YES-Faulty pump assembly .
NO - Faulty flow control valve .
9. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation
(see page 17-8).
Are the A or B lines deformed?
YES - Replace the lines
NO- Go to step 10.
10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (to tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted
too tight?
YES - Replace the rack shaft or readjust the rack
guide .
NO - Faulty valve body unit .
BACK
Steering Wheel Rotational Play
Check
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel
left and light without moving the front wheels.
If the play is within the limit, the gearbox and
linkage are OK.
If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-29). If the play is still excessive after
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering
linkage and gearbox (see page 17-8).
ROTATIONAL PLAY: 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
Power Assist Check
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-
14) and pump belt tension (see page 17-12).
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to warm up
the fluid .
3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
If the scale reads no more than 30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8
Ibf) the gearbox and pump are OK .
If the scale reads more than 30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 Ibf)
check the gearbox and pump.
17-7
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
17-8
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
STEERING GEARBOX
Inspect loose mounting bolts.
GEARBOX MOUNTING CUSHIONS
Inspect for deterioration.
STEERING JOINTS
Check for loose joint bolts.
BALL JOINT BOOT
DUST SEAL
LOCKNUT
Check for loose locknut .
.... rlc .. '" ... END BALL JOINT
Inspect for faulty movement
and damage.
BACK
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406-0010001
PIS joint adapter (pump), 07RAK-S040110
PIS joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040121
PIS pressure gauge, 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine
whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
14) and pump belt tension (see page 17-12).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the
pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (8).
07RAK-S040121
6x 1.0mm
11 Nm
(1.1 kgfm,
8Ibfft)
07RAK-S040110
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
(A) to the PIS joint adapter (hose).
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint
adapter (pump).
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
B
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (8).
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several
times to warm the fluid to operating temperature.
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15 kgfl
cm
2
, 213 psi).
If it reads high, check for:
Clogged or deformed feed or return line between the
pump and gearbox
Clogged valve body unit
10. Close the pressure control valve, then close the
shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
I NOTICE I
Do not keep the pressure control valve
closed more than 5 seconds or the pump
could be damaged by over-heating.
11. Immediatery open the pressure control valve fully.
Ifthe pump is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7,200-7,800 kPa (73-80 kgf/cm2,
1,040-1,140 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
17-9
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406001000A
PIS joint adapter (pump), 07RAK-S040110
PIS pressure gauge, 07406-001000A
14) and pump belttension (see page 17-12).
outlet (B).
07RAK-S040121
07406-001000A

adapter (pump).
17-10
5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15 kgfl
cm
2
, 213 psi). If it reads high, check for:
Clogged or deformed feed or return line between the
pump and gearbox
Clogged valve body unit
9. Close the pressure control valve gradually and read
the pressure.
INOTICEI
Do not keep the pressure control valve
closed more than 5 seconds or the pump
could be damaged by over-heating.
10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
the pump.
BACK
Fluid Leakage Inspection
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
seal, inlet and outlet fittings.
HOSES and LINES
GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT
Check for leaks at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections.
17-11
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Belttension gauge set, 07JGG-001000A
Belttension gauge, 07JGG-001010A
Inspection
1. Remove the PIS reservoir from the bracket, and set
it aside.
2. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt with the
gauge face toward the engine, and measure the
tension ofthe belt. Follow the gauge manufacturer's
instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace
it.
NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to
avoid hitting the gauge reset lever.
Tension:
Used Belt: 390-540 N (40-55 kgf, 88-121Ibf)
New Belt: 740-880 N (75-90 kgf, 165-198Ibf)
07JGG-001000A or
07JGG-001010A
specification.
17-12
Adjustment
4. Loosen the power steering pump mounting bolt (A)
and pump lock bolt (B).
A
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 161bf.ftl
B
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16lbf.ftl
5. Adjust the belt tension by moving the power
steering pump with a 1/2" drive breaker bar to
obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the
mounting bolt and lock bolt.
6. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from
lock-to-Iock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
BACK
Deflection Method
Inspection
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 221bf) and measure
the deflection between the power steering pump
pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B). Ifthe belt is
worn or damaged, replace it.
Deflection:
Used Belt: 13.0 -16.0 mm (0.51 - 0.63 in.)
New Belt: 11.0 -12.5 mm (0.43 - 0.49 in.)
B
specification.
Adjustment
3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting bolt (A)
and pump lock bolt (B).
A
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 161bfftl
B
4. Adjust the belt tension by moving the power
steering pump with a 1/2" drive breaker bar to
obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the
mounting bolt and lock bolt.
17-13
BACK
Power Steering
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (AI at regular intervals, and add the
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda
Power Steering Fluid-V or S. Using any other type of
power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid
can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold
weather.
SYSTEM CAPACITY:
1.1 A (1.16 US. qt, 0.97Imp.qt) at disassembly
RESERVOIR CAPACITY:
0.4 A (0.42 US. qt, 0.35 Imp.qt)
A
17-14
1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose
(AI to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the
fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled
fluid at once.
2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the
disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the
steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line.
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the
steering from lock-to-Iock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary.
Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
BACK
Hoses and Lines Replacement
Note these items during installation:
Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary.
Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP IA}
2.S-S.Smm
(0.01-0.22 in. I
6x 1.0mm
11 Nm
CYLINDER LINE
(1.1 kgfm,8Ibfttl
2.0-4.0mm
(0.08-0.16 in. I
HOSE CLAMP IB)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.01-0.22 in. I
CYLINDER LINE
17 Nm (1.7 kgfm, 12lbfttl
FEED HOSE 14 x 1.S mm
RETURN LINE 16 x 1.5 mm
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
10x 1.25 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfttl
17-15
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Remove the belt (A) by loosening the pump
mounting bolt (B) and pump lock bolt (C).
C
4. Cover the Ale compressor with several shop towels
to protect it from spilled power steering fluid.
Disconnect the pump inlet hose (D) and pump
outlet hose (E) from the pump (F). and plug them.
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
5. Remove the pump mounting bolt and pump lock
bolt. then remove the pump. Do not turn the
steering wheel with the pump removed.
6. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape
to prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
17-16
7. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose.
Tighten the pump fittings securely.
8. loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with
the mounting bolt and lock bolt.
9. Install the pump belt.
Note these item during belt installation:
Make sure that the power steering belt (A) is
properly positioned on the pulleys (B).
Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
power steering belt or pulley faces. Clean off any
fluid or grease before installation.
~
10. Adjustthe pump belt adjustment (see page 17-12).
11. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
17-14).
BACK
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
FLANGE BOLTS
~
*PUMP COVER "
~
5mmROllER
SNAP RING
~
4.5mm ROLLER
PUMP SEAL SPACER
DRIVE SHAFT
BAll BEARING
mmSNAPRING
0---15.2 x 2.4 mm ORING
~ Replace.
/
FLOW CONTROL VALVE CAP
PULLEVNUT
(cont'd)
17-17
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Universal holder, 07725-0030000
Disassembly
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure.
1. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-16).
2. Drain the fluid from the pump.
3. Hold the steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws,
hold the pulley (B) with the special tool, and
remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the
vise.
4. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex
wrench, then remove it, and the a-ring, flow
control valve, and spring.
5. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.
6. Remove the outer side plate, pump cam ring, pump
rotor, pump vanes, side plate and a-rings.
7. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve
from the pump housing.
8. Remove the circlip, then remove the pump drive
shaft by tapping the shaft end with a plastic
hammer.
9. Remove the pump seal spacer and pump seal.
17-18
Inspection
10. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and
other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
r-'r--

r--
=
r-
0 D
= - r----
-
'-
'--''-'
11. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the
pump housing for scratches or wear.
12. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump
housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 13; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
available separately.
BACK
13. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control
valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the flow
control valve (B) in a container of power steering
fluid or solvent (C), and blow in the hose.
o If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
o If the flow control valve tests OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
A
B
14. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race
slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (B).
B
,
A
,
15. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the
Exploded View; if any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
Reassembly
them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in solvent.
17. Align the pin (A) ofthe sub-valve (B) with the oil
passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the
sub-valve into place. Then install the snap ring (D).
18. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side
facing in) into the pump housing by hand, then
install the pump seal spacer (B).
O---F
__ -c
19. Position the pump drive shaft (C) in the pump
housing (D), then drive it in using a 29 mm socket
(E).
20. Install the 40 mm snap ring (F) with its radiused
side facing out.
(cont'd)
17-19
BACK
Power Steering
21. Coat the new pump cover seal (A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
pump cover (B).
22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the two rollers
(0).
23. Set the pump cam ring (A) over the two rollers with
its "." mark (B) facing up.
B
17-20
24. Assemble pump rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).
A
jo
[)
c
B

25. Set the 10 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.
Make sure that the round ends (0) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
26. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid,
and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).

/B

c
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roller set holes (0) in the side plate with the
rollers (E).
BACK
and position it in the bottom of the pump housing
(B).
8x 1.25 mm
/20N.m
, (2.0 kgfm, 14lbf.ftl
I
29. Install the pump cover assembly (C) in the pump
housing.
30. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump
housing.
A
I B
-4 /c
Ot(@)
/
D
49 Nm (5.0 kgf.m,
36lbfftl
31. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,
and install it on the flow control valve cap (D), then
install the cap on the pump housing, and tighten it.
-------- ---- - ----
32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
nut (8). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
B
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
47lbfftl
~ ~ ~
33. Hold the pulley (A) with the special tool, and tighten
the pulley nut (8).
34. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the
pulley by hand.
17-21
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Removal
(see page 23-28).
1. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove
the driver's airbag from the steering wheel (see
page 23-278).
2. Disconnect the radio remote switches connector
and cruise control switches connector if equipped.
17-22
3. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (A), then install a
steering wheel puller (B) on the steering wheel and
remove it.
Note these items when removing the steering
wheel:
Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
If you thread the puller bolts (e) into the wheel
hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller
bolt.
BACK
Steering Wheel Disassembly IReassembly
STEERING DYNAMIC DAMPER
HOOK PLATE
~
COVER
&.
~ ~
\
COVER
ACCESS PANEL
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
17-23
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
counterclockwise about 2 and halfturns.
The arrow mark (8) on the cable reel label point
should point straight up.
A
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal cancelling
sleeve (8) as shown, and install the steering wheel
on to the steering column shaft, making sure the
steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (0) of the
cable reel and tabs of the canceling sleeve. Do not
tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft
when installing the steering wheel.
D
17-24
3. Install the steering wheel bolt and tighten it to
39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 Ibfft).
4. Connect the radio remote switches connector and
cruise control switches connector if equipped.
5. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the
system is operating properly (see page 23-278).
6. Check the horn, radio remote switches, cruise
control set/resume switch and turn signal
cancelling for proper operation.
BACK
Steering Column Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Record the radio station presets, and disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the driver's airbag, steering wheel, and cable reel; '98-00 models (see page 23-289); '01-02 models (see
page 23-292)
4. Remove the column covers (A).
D
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16lbfftl
~
\
B
5. Remove the combination switch assembly (S) from the steering column shaft by disconnecting the connectors.
6. Disconnect the ignition switch connectors.
7. Remove the steering joint cover (e).
8. Disconnect the steering joint (D), and remove it from the column shaft.
9. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
(cont'd)
17-25
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation
1. Install the steering column and make sure the wires
are not caught or pinched by any parts.
2. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (B) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft).
22Nm
(2.2 k m, 16 Ibitt)
3. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft (E) (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
groove (G) around the shaft), and loosely install the
lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt is
securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
4. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated. Then install the upper
joint bolt and tighten it.
5. Finish the installation, and note these items:
Make sure the wire harness is routed and
fastened properly.
Make sure the connectors are properly connected.
Reinstall the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
Reconnect the battery and reset the radio presets.
Verify cruise control, horn, radio remote, and
turn signal switch operation.
Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
17-26
BACK
Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspection/Adjustment
Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (8) for play and proper movement. If any
bearing is noisy or has is excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the retaining collar (C) for damage. If it is damaged, replace the steering column as an assembly.
Check the absorbing plates (D) for distortion or breakage. If there is distortion breakage replace the steering column
as an assembly.
(cont'd)
17-27
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Column/Tilt Lever
Inspection/Adjustment (cont'd)
1. Move the tilt lever (A) from the loose position to the
lock position 3 to 5 times; then measure the tilt
lever preload 10 mm (0.4 in) from the end of the tilt
lever.
Preload: 70-90 N (7-9 kgf, 15-20 Ibf)
o
2. If the measurement is out of the specification,
adjust the preload using the following procedures.
o Loosen the tilt lever, and set the steering column
in the neutral position.
o Remove the 6 mm lock bolt (B), and remove the
stop (C). Be careful not to loosen the tilt lever
when installing the stop or tightening the 6 mm
lock bolt.
o Adjust the preload by turning the tilt lock bolt (0)
left or right.
o Pull up the tilt lever to the uppermost position,
and install the stop. Check the preload again. If
the measurement is still out of specification,
repeat the above procedures to adjust.
17-28
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-25).
2. Center punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill
their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
careful not to damage the switch body when
removing the shear bolts.
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper
operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
ignition key turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
1
~ W \ \ \ \ \ \ \ m
!
B
BACK
Rack Guide Adjustment
Locknut wrench, 40 mm, 07916-SA50001
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the
special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (8).
A
f
07916-SA50001
3. Remove the old sealant from rack guide screw, and
apply new sealant all around the threads (C).
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering
gearbox.
4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18 I bfft) , then loosen it.
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm (0.4 kgf
m, 2.9 Ibfft) then back it off to specified angle.
Specified Return Angle: 20
6. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide
screw.
7. Check for unusual steering effort through the
complete turning travel.
8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the
power assist (see page 17-7).
17-29
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal
Ball joint remover, 28 mm, 07MAC-SL00200
Note these items during removal:
o Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
of the valve body unit its lines, and the end if the
gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
o Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-14).
2. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported.
3. Remove the front wheels.
4. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 23-278).
5. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
6. Remove the steering joint cover.
17-30
7. Remove the steering joint bolts (A), disconnect the
steering joint by moving the steering joint (B)
toward the column.
B
A
8. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the 10 mm nut (B),
and loosen the nut.
07MAC-SL00200
9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the
special tool (see page 18-9).
BACK
10. Loosen the 14 mm flare nut (A), and disconnect the
pump outlet hose (8).
C D
A B
11. Loosen the 17 mm flare nut (e), and remove the
return line (D).
12. After disconnecting the hoses and lines, plug or
seal them with a piece of tape or equivalent to
prevent foreign materials from entering.
NOTE: Do not loosen the cylinder line A and 8
between the valve body unit and cylinder.
13. Grasp the right tie-rod and pull the rack all the way
to the right, then remove the right and left tie-rod
ends (A), and locknut (8).
A B
14. Remove the 3 way catalytic converter (see page 9-
5).
15. Disconnect the MfT shift cable (see page 13-4) or
AfT shift cable (see page 14-114) from the
transmission.
16. Remove the stiffener plates (A), then remove the
right mounting brackets (8).
A
17. Pull the steering gearbox (A) all the way down to
clear the pinion shaft (8) from the bulkhead, and
remove the pinion shaft grommet from the top of
the valve body unit.
18. Move the steering gearbox to the right so the left
rack end clears the rear beam, then place the left
rack end below the rear beam.
19. Move the steering gearbox to the left, and tilt the
left side down to remove it.
17-31
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
VALVE OIL SEAL
Replace. 'i _

VALVE HOUSING
BUSHING

Replace.
FLARE NUTS
17 Nm 11.7 kgfm.12Ibfftl

V SLEEVE
II /SlHVE SEAL .WGS
1/ ... Replace.
SEAL RING
Replace.

O-RING
/
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace. \ CYLINDER LINE B
Replace.

"" Replace.
/({o@
CYLINDER END
69 Nm (7.0 kgf.m. 51lbfftl
/
O-RING
Replace.
/()()
PISTON SEAL RING
Replace.
GEARBOX HOUSING
STEERING RACK
17-32
'- WAVE WASHER
woo "'-
PINION SHAFT
/O-RING
/ Replace.
a
RACK GUIDE SCREW
SPRING
RACK GUIDE
/BACKUP RING
" Replace.
/@()
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
BACK
Cylinder end seal remover attachment,
07NAD-SR3020A
Pilot collar, 07GAF-PH70100
Valve seal ring sizing tool, 07NAG-SR3090A
Ball joint boot clip guide, 07974-SA50800
Piston seal ring sizing tool,
07974-SA5020A or 07974-SA50200
Attachment, 32 x 35 mm, 07746-0010100
Driver, 07749-0010000
Piston seal ring guide, 07HAG-SF10100
07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200
Pincers,
Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially available
this procedure.
Disassembly
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-30).
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B).
Pull the boots away from the ends of the gearbox.
I!
3. Unbend the lock washer.
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side
steering rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew the
both rack ends (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to
damage the rack surface with the wrench. Remove
the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (B).
6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from
the gearbox.
(cont'd)
17-33
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Remove the cylinder lines from the gearbox.
8. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly
moving the steering rack back and forth.
9. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the
valve body unit (A) from the gearbox (B).
/
17-34
10. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 in.) diameter hole approximately
2.5-3.0 mm (0.10-0.12 in.) in depth in the staked
point (A) on the cylinder. Do not allow metal
shavings to enter the cylinder housing. After
removing the cylinder end (B), remove any burrs at
the staked point.
B
11. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (A) to the
steering gearbox mounts with bolts. Clamp the
yoke in a vise with soft jaws as shown, then loosen
and remove the cylinder end (B). Do not clamp the
cylinder housing or gearbox housing in the vise.
BACK
12. Install the bearing separator (Alan the gearbox
housing as shown.
c
13. Place a appropriate size deep socket wrench (B) on
the steering rack (C).
14. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the left side
points upward, then press the cylinder end seal (DI
and steering rack out of the gearbox. Hold the
steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed
clear. Be careful not to damage the inner surface of
the cylinder housing with the tool.
15. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering
rack.
I!'
16. Insert a 24" long, 3/8" drive extension (AI and the
special tool into the cylinder from the left side.
Make sure that the special tool is securely
positioned on the backup ring edges. Be careful not
to damage the inner surface of the cylinder with the
special tool.
(cont'd)
17-35
BACK
Power Steering
17. Setthe gearbox in a press, then press outthe
cylinder end seal (A) and backup ring (B) from the
gearbox.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end
seal:
Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool. It
will break the backup ring, and the cylinder end
seal will remain in the gearbox.
B
A
17-36
18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
19. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl
tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft (C).
~
_ ~
...______c
20. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft!
valve using a press.
BACK
21. With your finger check the inner wall of the valve
housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step
in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it.
NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal
ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the
valve housi ng only if the wall is stepped.
/
/
22. Check for wear, burrs and other damage to the
edges ofthe grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision
matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve
must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
23. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (8) from the
pinion shaft.
24. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and
remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. 8e
careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve
grooves and outer surface when removing the seal
rings.
(cont'd)
17-37
BACK
Power Steering
25. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve
seal ring (AI and O-ring (BI at the cutting groove
position (CI in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve
seal ring and O-ring. Be careful not to damage the
edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface
when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring.
26. Remove the valve oil seal (AI and wave washer (BI
from the pinion shaft.
Note these items during disassembly:
Inspect the ball bearing (CI by rotating the outer
race slowly.lfthere is any excessive play or wear,
replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an
assembly .
The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do
not intermix old and new pinion shafts and
sleeves.
I
Od
17-38
27. Press the valve oil seal (AI and bushing (BI out of
the valve housing using a hydraulic press and
special tool.
A
them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in the solvent.
BACK
Reassembly
29. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the
pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
with the power steering fluid.
30. Install the wave washer (8).
31. eoatthe inside surface of the new valve oil seal (e)
with power steering fluid, and install the seal with
its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then
slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to
damage its sealing lip (D).
32. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped
portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the
vinyl tape with the power steering fluid.
33. Fit the new a-ring (8) in the groove of the pinion
shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring (e) over
the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
34. Remove the tape, and apply power steering fluid to
the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
07NAGSR3090A
A
/
A
35. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the
special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the
special tool over the valve seal ring, and move the
special tool up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
36. Remove the special tool, turn it over, slide the
smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring.
Move it up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft groove.
(cont'd)
17-39
BACK
Power Steering
37. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the
special tool. Slip 2 new seal rings (A) over the
special tool from the smaller diameter end, and
expand them. Install only 2 rings at a time from
each end ofthe pinion shaft sleeve (B).
Note these items when installing the seal ring:
Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin
seal rings with care so as not to damage them.
After installation, be sure to contract the seal
rings using the special tool (sizing tool) .
There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black
and brown. Do not mix the different types of
rings as they are not compatible.
A
\
ii
38. Align the special tool with each groove in the
sleeve, and slide a sleeve seal ring into each
groove. After installation, compress the seal rings
with your fingers temporarily.
39. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the
sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the
special tool, then slowly insert the sleeve into the
special tool.
40. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to
make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. Be sure
thatthe seal rings are not twisted.
17-40
41. Apply power steering fluid to the surface ofthe
pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion
shaft by aligning the locating pin (C) on the inside
ofthe sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then
install the new snap ring (E) securely in the pinion
shaft groove.
Note these items during reassembly:
Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring
when inserting the sleeve .
Install the snap ring with its radiused side toward
the sleeve.
42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the
new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the
valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press and
special tools. Install the seal with its grooved side
facing the tool.
07746-0010100
BACK
43. Press the bushing (A) into the valve housing with a
hydraulic press and special tool.
07749-0010000
~ 07746-0010100
~ v
44. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat
the vinyl tape with power steering fluid.
45. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be
careful not to damage the valve seal rings (e).
46. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then
remove any residue from the tape adhesive.
I-g'
47. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing
with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaft/
sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
48. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then
slide it onto the rack, big end first.
49. Position the new D-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.
Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool) .
Replace piston's D-ring and seal ring as a set.
50. Pull the D-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
(cont'd)
17-41
BACK
Power Steering
51. Coat the piston seal ring (AI and the inside of the
special tool with power steering fluid. then
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
52. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
A
i
07HAGSF1020A or
07HAGSF10200
53. Wrap vinyl tape (AI around the rack teeth and rack
end edges. then coat the surface of the tape with
power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape
is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion.
A
17-42
54. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(AI with power steering fluid. then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston. When installing the cylinder end seal. be
careful not damage the lip of the seal with the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
55. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack. then
remove any adhesive residue.
56. Install the new backup ring (AI on the steering rack.
then place the cylinder end seal (81 against the
piston.
A
BACK
57. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the
steering rack into the gear box housing. Be careful
not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall
with the rack edges.
58. Insert an appropriate size deep socket wrench (A)
onto the steering rack as shown.
A
I!I""--B
59. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
60. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
61. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
coat the surface of the tape with the power steering
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
carefully so there is no stepped portion.
with power steering fluid, then install the seal onto
the steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston.
iii
63. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger.Be
careful not to damage the face of the seal with the
threads and burrs at the staked position of the
cylinder housing.
64. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
(cont'd)
17-43
BACK
Power Steering
65. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (A) to the
steering gearbox mounts with bolts, then clamp the
yoke in a vise with soft jaws. Do not clamp the
cylinder housing or gearbox housing in the vise.
A
\
66. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end (A) with
power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end
by screwing it into the cylinder (B).
C
67. Remove the yoke from the gearbox, then, after
tightening the cylinder end (C), stake the point of
the cylinder shown (opposite from where the stake
was removed during disassembly).
17-44
68. Coat the new O-ring (A) with grease, and carefully
fit it on the valve housing.
D
20 Nm (2.0 kgfm. 14Ibfft)
69. Apply grease to the needle bearing (B) in the
gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit
(C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit
installation position (direction of the line
connections).
70. TIghten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque.
BACK
71. Install the cylinder lines.
Thoroughly clean the joints ofthe cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
~ 11.7 ... m. 12Ibfft(
72. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and
install it onto the gearbox housing.
73. Apply sealant all around the threads on the rack
guide screw (B), then install the spring (C), rack
guide screw and locknut (0).
74. Adjustthe rack guide screw (see page 17-29). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
75. Install the stop washer (A), and screw each rack end
(B) into the rack while holding the lock washer (C)
so its tabs (0) are in the slots (E) in the end of the
rack .
78Nm
76. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side
steering rack with a wrench, and tighten the both
rack ends. Be careful not to damage the rack
surface with the wrench.
77. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
the rack end joint housing.
(cont'd)
17-45
BACK
Power Steering
78. Apply multipurpose grease (A) to the
circumference of the rack end joint housing.
~

(PIN 08798-9013)
\
B
79. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot
grooves (B) on the rack ends.
80. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Install the
boots on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips. After
installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
17-46
81. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with holes (B) of the band.
82. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
commercially available pincers Oetiker 1098 or
equivalent (B).
83. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
BACK
Steering Gearbox Installation
1. Before installing the gearbox, slide the rack all the
way to right.
2. Pass the right side of the steering gearbox (A)
above and through the right side ofthe rear beam.
Be careful not to bend or damage the two power
steering lines and cylinder lines when installing the
gearbox.
3. Raise the left side ofthe steering gearbox above
and through the left side of the rear beam. Then
insert the pinion shaft (B) up through the bulkhead.
4. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the slot
(B) in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion
on the valve housing.
B
5. Install the mounting cushion (A) on the steering
gearbox.
C, G: 38 Nm (3.9 kgfm, 28 Ibfttl
F: 43 Nm (4.4 kgfm, 32 Ibfttl
6. Install the mounting brackets (B) over the mounting
cushion, then install the two gearbox mounting bolts
(C). Position the split portion (0) of the mounting
cushion as shown.
7. Install the stiffener plates (E) with the two gearbox
mounting bolts (F) and six stiffener plate attaching
bolts (G). Install the bolts loosely first, then tighten
them securely.
8. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
(cont'd)
17-47
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
9. Install the steering joint (A), and reconnect the
steering shaft (B) and pinion shaft (C). Make sure
the steering joint is connected as follows:
o Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
steering shaft (line up the bolt hole (D) with the
flat portion (E) on the shaft).
o Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
groove around the shaft), and loosely install the
lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt
is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
o Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated. Then install the
upper joint bolt and tighten it.
22Nm
12.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
F
B
E
D
10. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise
until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise
(about 2 turns) until the arrow mark on the
label points straight up.
Reinstall the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
17-48
11. Install the steering joint cover (A) with the clamps
(B) and clips (C).
12. Connect the return line (A) and feed line (B) to the
valve body unit (C). After connecting the fluid lines,
make sure that there is no interference between the
lines and other parts.
16x 1.5 mm
28 Nm 129 kgfm, 21 Ibfft)
c
14x 1.5 mm
B
37 Nm 13.8 kgfm, 27 Ibf.ft)
BACK
13. Thread the right and left tie-rod ends (A) and
locknut (B) onto the rack an equal number of turns.
A B
14. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball
joint tapered section and threads then reconnect
tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install the
10 mm nut (B) and tighten it.
B
43Nm
(4.4 kgfm. 32 Ibf.ft)
15. Install the new cotter pin (C) and bend it as shown.
16. Connect the Mrr shift linkage (see step 26 on page
13-15) or AfT shift cable (see step 13 on page 14-120)
from the transmission.
17. Install the three way catalytic converter (see page
9-5).
18. Install the front wheels.
19. Fill the system with power steering fluid. and bleed
air from the system (see page 17-14).
20. After installation. perform the following checks.
Start the engine, allow it to idle. and turn the
steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-11).
Adjustthe fronttoe (see page 18-5).
Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by
turning the right and left tie-rods equally. if
necessary.
17-49
BACK
Power Steering
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Front hub dis/assembly tool, 07965-SA50500
1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the
old grease off the ball pin.
2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
multipurpose grease.
O
;C
B
. . ..
.' \ ..... 0
.......
A - --$jjjjiiffi
3. Pack the interior of the new boot (8) and lip (e) with
fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
Keep grease off the boot installation section (D)
and the tapered section (E) if the ball pin .
Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The
boot must not have a gap at the boot installation
sections (8). After installing the boot, check the ball
pin tapered section for grease contamination, and
wipe it if necessary.
17-50
BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension
Special Tools ................................................................. 18-2
Component location Index ......................................... 18-3
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................ 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-8
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-9
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement .......................................... 18-10
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-15
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-16
lower Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-17
Damper/Spring Replacement ...................................... 18-18
Rear Suspension
Hub/Bearing Replacement-Disc Brake ....................... 18-22
Hub/Bearing Replacement-Drum Brake ..................... 18-24
Knuckle Replacement ................................................... 18-25
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-27
Trailing Arm Replacement ........................................... 18-28
leading Arm Replacement .......................................... 18-28
lower Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-29
Control Arm Replacement ........................................... 18-29
Damper/Spring Replacement ...................................... 18-30
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
CD
07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1

07GAG-SD40700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1

07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
CD 07965-SA00600 Bearing Driver Attachment 1

07749-0010000 Driver 1
@ 07947 -6340201 Attachment, 58 x 72 mm 1
07965-SD90100 Sum>ort Base 1
CD
G),@

18-2
BACK
Front Suspension
FRONT DAMPER
Disassembly/Inspection, step 1 on page 18-19
Reassembly, step 1 on page 18-20
____ UPPER ARM
KNUCKLE/HUB
18-3
BACK
Rear Suspension
18-4
REAR DAMPER
Disassembly/Inspection, step 1 on page 18-31
Reassembly, step 1 on page 18-32
LEADING ARM
HUB (includes bearing)
BACK
Wheel Alignment
Caster Inspection
For proper inspection/adjustment of the wheel
alignment, check and adjust the following before
checking the alignment:
Check that the suspension is not modified.
Check the tire size and tire pressure.
Check the runout of the wheels and tires.
Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with
your hands and move it up and down and right and
left to check for wobbling).
Use commercially-available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Check the caster angle.
Caster angle: 248' 1
2. If out of specification, record the caster reading,
then adjust the caster.
Caster Adjustment
Caster angle can be adjusted by increasing/decreasing
the number of the adjusting shims. Remove and install
the radius rod each time the caster angle is adjusted.
securely supported.
2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) on the end of the
radius rod (8).
\
B
/
A
3. Remove the flange bolts at the radius rod (8) on the
lower arm, and remove the radius rod (see page
18-17).
4. Adjust the caster angle by increasing/decreasing
the adjusting shims (C).
Note these items during adjustment:
Do not use more than two adjusting shims.
One adjusting shim changes the caster angle by
35' and the caster angle can be adjusted by 110'
maximum.
One adjusting shim is 3.2 mm (0.13 in.) in
thickness.
5. After the adjustment, install the radius rod onto the
lower arm, and tighten the flange bolts (see page
18-17).
6. Tighten the new self-locking nut to the specified
torque.
(cont'd)
18-5
BACK
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspection
1. Check the camber angle.
Camber angle:
Front: 000' 1
Rear: - 030' 1
2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged
suspension components.
18-6
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use commercially-available computerized 4 wheel
1. Check the tire pressure.
2. Center the steering wheel spokes.
3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight
ahead.
Front toe: 0 2 mm (0 1/16 in.)
If adjustment is required, go on to step 4 .
If no adjustment is required, remove alignment
equipment.
4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A), and turn both tie-
rods (B) in the same direction until the front wheels
are pointing straight ahead.
A
14x 1.5 mm
5. Turn both tie-rods equally until the toe reading on
the turning radius gauge is correct.
6. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts.
Reposition the tie-rod boot if it is twisted or
displaced.
BACK
Rear Toe Inspection/ Adjustment
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
measurement.
2. Check the toe.
Rear toe-in: 22 mm (1/16 1/16 in.)
If adjustment is required, go to step 3 .
If no adjustment is required, remove alignment
equipment.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear control arm,
and loosen the self-locking nut (B).
B
10x 1.25mm
4. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt
until the toe is correct.
5. Install the self-locking nut, and tighten it while
holding the adjusting bolt.
1.11
Turning Angle Inspection
1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the
brake, and measure the turning angle of both
wheels.
Turning angle:
Inward wheel: 3832' 1
Outward wheel: 31 03' (Reference)
2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
18-7
BACK
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
supported.
2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts.
3. Attach the dial gauge. On the front, place the dial
gauge against the hub flange. On the rear, place the
dial gauge against the center of the hub cap.
Front/Rear:
Standard: 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.'
Front:
Rear:
4. Measure the bearing end play moving the brake
disc inward or outward.
5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than
the standard, replace the wheel bearing.
18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection
supported.
2. Check for bent or deformed wheels.
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure axial
runout by turning the wheel.
Front and Rear Wheel Axial Runout:
Standard:
Steel Wheel: 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.'
Aluminum Wheel: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.'
4. Readjust the dial gauge to the position shown, and
measure radial runout.
Front and Rear Wheel Radial Runout:
Standard:
Steel Wheel: 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.'
Aluminum Wheel: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.'
5. If the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
replace the wheel.
BACK
Ball Joint Removal
Ball Joint Remover. 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
1. Install a hex nut onto the threads of the ball joint.
Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end
to prevent damage to the threads end of the ball
joint.
2. Apply grease (A) to the special tool on the areas
shown. This will ease installation of the tool and
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
,
,
.
I
,
.-'
,
--
A
3. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws
carefully. making sure you do not damage the ball
joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the
pressure bolt.
07MAC-SL00200
4. Once the special tool is in place. turn the adjusting
bolt (A) as necessary to make the jaws parallel.
Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt (B). and
recheck the jaws to make sure they are still parallel.
5. After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt.
make sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this
position (A) to allow the jaw (C) to pivot.
6. With a wrench. tighten the pressure bolt (B) until
the ball joint pin pops loose from the steering/
suspension arm. If necessary. apply penetrating
type lubricant to loosen the ball joint.
7. Remove the tool. then remove the nut from the end
of the ball joint. and pull the ball joint out of the
steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot.
and replace it if damaged.
18-9
BACK
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement
Exploded View
CASTLE NUT
/10x1.25mm
/ 39-47 Nm (4.0-4.8 kgfm. 29-35 Ibfftl
7- -COTTER PIN
Replace.
/
WHEEL BEARING
Replace.
SNAP RING
o /
SET RING 0
q - BALL JOINT BOOT
~ ~ Check for deterioration
\'!!P and damage.
~
CASTLE NUT
12 x 1.25 mm
----COTTER PIN
Replace.
49-59 Nm (5.0-6.0 kgfm. 36-43 Ibfftl
/
WASHER-SCREW
6x 14mm
9.3Nm
(0.95 kgfm. 6.9 Ibfftl
FRONT HUB
Check for damage and
cracks.
/
6 mm BRAKE DISC RETAINING SCREW
9.3 Nm (0.95 kgfm. 6.9 Ibfftl
BRAKE DISC
Check for wear and
rust.
18-10
SPINDLE NUT
24x 1.5 mm
245 Nm (25.0 kgfm. 181 Ibf.ftl
Replace.
/
WHEELNUT
12x 1.5mm
108Nm
(11.0 kgfm.
80lbfftl
BACK
Ball Joint Remover, 26 mm 07MAC-SL00200
Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 07GAF-SE00100
Attachment, 58 x 72 mm 07947-6340201
Bearing Driver Attachment 07965-SA00600
Driver 077 49-0010000
Support Base 07965-SD90100
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
securely supported.
3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel.
4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (A), then
remove the nut.
A
108Nm
111.0 kgf.m,
r
oftl
245 Nm 125.0 kgfm, 181Ibfft)
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A).
B
108Nm
111.0 kgf.m. 80 Ibfft)
~ : 3 N m
10.95 kgfm,
6.9Ibfft)
6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts (B), and hang
the caliper assembly (C) to one side. To prevent
damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use
a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the
undercarriage.
7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B)
(for vehicles with ABS). Do not disconnect the
wheel sensor connector.
C
9.3Nm
10.95 kgfm. 6.9 Ibfft)
8. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A).
9. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to
push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns
at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
10. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle.
11. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
(cont'd)
18-11
BACK
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement (cont'd)
12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
joint, then loosen the nut (8).
07MAC-SL00200
A
B
10 x 1.25 mm
43Nm
(4.4kgfm,
32Ibfft)
13. Remove the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using
14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball
joint castle nut (8), and remove the nut.
07MAC-SL00200
C
15. Remove the lower ball joint from the knuckle using
18-12
16. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper ball joint
castle nut (8), and remove the nut.
B
10x 1.25 mm
39-47 Nm
14.0-4.8 kgfm,
29-35 Ibfft)
07MAC-SL00200
17. Remove the upper ball joint from the knuckle using
18. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the
driveshaft outboard joint (8) from the knuckle (A)
by tapping the driveshaft end (e) with a plastic
hammer, then remove the knuckle.
B C
BACK
19. Separate the hub (A) from theknuckle (BI using the
special tool, and a hydraulic press. Take care not to
distort the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep
it from falling when pressed clear.
~
B
20. Remove the snap ring (AI and the splash guard (BI
from the knuckle (C).
\
r7:=-..=t f..2
21. Press the wheel bearing (AI out of the knuckle (B)
Press
/
B
A
22. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) from the hub
(BI using the special tool, a commercially available
bearing separator (C), and a press.
Press
23. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash
point solvent before reassembly.
(cont'd)
18-13
BACK
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement (cont'd)
24. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)
using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing
on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal
color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage
the sleeve of the pack seal.
D
\

BLACK COLOR
/
07965-5D90100
B
25. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).
D
9.3 Nm (0.95 kgf.m, 6.9 Ibf.ft)
26. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws
(D).
18-14
27. Install the hub (A) on the knuckle (B) using the
special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be
careful not to distort the splash guard (C).
Press
... /01749-0010000

.-----C

28. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and pay particular attention to the following items:
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots
when installing the knuckle.
o Torque all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
o Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque
specifications, then tighten them only far enough
to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align
the castle nut by loosening.
o Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after
torquing.
o Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (C), then
remove the nut.
o Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surface of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
o Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
o Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 07GAG-SD40700
1. Remove the boot clip and the boot.
2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip (A) with grease.
Do not contaminate the lower collar of the boot (B)
with grease.
A c
B B
3. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the shaft
and pack fresh grease into the base. Do not let dirt.
or other foreign materials get into the boot.
4. Install the boot on the ball joint. then squeeze it
gently to force out any air.
5. For a lower ball joint. adjust the special tool with
the adjusting bolt (B) until its base is just above the
groove around the bottom of the boot. Then slide
the clip over the tool and into position on the boot.
6. For an upper ball joint. just hold the tool over the
joint. then slide the clip over the tool and into
position on the boot.
7. After installing a boot. wipe any grease off the
exposed portion of the ball joint shaft.
18-15
BACK
Front Suspension
Upper Arm Replacement
securely supported. Remove the front wheel.
2. Remove the front damper (see step 1 on page 18-
19).
3. Remove the wheel sensor bracket nut (A) from the
upper arm (B).
B
A
9.3 N'm (0.95 kgfm, 6.9 Ibfttl
4. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint
castle nut, and remove the nut.
10 x 1.25 mm
39-47Nm
(4.0-4.8 kgfm, 29-35 Ibfttl
07MAC-SL00200
\:
18-16
6. Remove the flange bolts (A) from the upper arm (B).
A
10x 1.25 mm
64Nm
(6.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibfttl
7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
B
Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.Tighten the castle nut to the lower
torque value, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
Use a new cotter pin on the castle nut.
Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
Lower Arm Replacement
2. Remove the damper fork.
-1 Remove the damper pinch bolt (A).
-2 Remove the lower bolt and self-locking nut (B)
from the damper fork.
-3 Remove the damper fork (C) from the damper.
~
./
Ci
~
II
B
12x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25 mm
3. Remove the cotter pin from the lower ball joint
07MAC-SL00200
12x 1.25 mm
49-59Nm
15.0-6.0 kgfm, 36-43 Ibfftl
C
4. Remove the lower ball joint from the knuckle using
5. Remove the lower arm.
-1 Remove the self-locking nut from the stabilizer
link (A).
-2 Remove the radius rod bolts (B).
-3 Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (C).
-4 Remove the lower arm (D) from the rear beam.
6. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
connecting the lower arm to the knuckle.
o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
o Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value,
then tighten it only far enough to align the slot
with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle
nut by loosening it.
o Use a new cotter pin on the castle nut.
surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
o Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
18-17
BACK
Front Suspension
Damper ISpring Replacement
Exploded View

PLATE

DUST COVER '-
Check for bending
and damage.
18-18
DAMPER SPRING
Check for weakened compression
and damage.
/
SELF LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25mm
Replace.
r _____ WASHER
,!.,_______ _______ RUBBER BUSHING
_____ Check for deterioration
@3 and damage.
0- COLLAR
MOUNT BASE
.. " .... __ -------RUBBER BUSHING
'81' Check for deterioration
and damage.
..... _o--_____ . SPRING CUSHION
Check for deterioration
and damage.

BUMP STOP
Check for weakness
and damage.
BACK
Strut Spring Compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model
7200, or equivalent, commercially available
Removal
2. Remove the damper fork.
-1 Remove the damper pinch bolt (A).
-2 Remove the lower bolt (B) and self-locking nut
(C) from the damper fork.
-3 Remove the damper fork (D) from the damper.
D
A
c
B
3. Remove the damper by removing the five flange
nuts.
NOTE: Damper springs are different, left and right.
Mark the springs Land R before you continue.
Disassembly Iinspection
1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially
available strut spring compressor (A) according to
the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the
self-locking nut (B). Do not compress the spring
more than necessary to remove the nut.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring
compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
3. Reassemble all parts, exceptthe spring.
4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should move smoothly. If it does not (no
compression or no extension), the gas is leaking,
and the damper should be replaced.
5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding
during these tests.
(cont'd)
18-19
BACK
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install the damper unit on a commercially available
strut spring compressor (A).
2. Assemble the damper in the reverse order of
removal except for the washer and self-locking nut.
Align the bottom of the damper spring and the
spring lower seat (8).
3. Position the mount base (AI on the damper unit.
V
A
4. Compress the damper spring with the spring
compressor.
18-20
5. Install the rubber bushing, washer (AI, and a new
10 mm self-locking nut (8).
A
B
10x 1.25mm
29 Nm 13.0 kgf.m, 22 Ibftt)
6. Hold the damper shaft, and tighten the 10 mm self-
locking nut.
BACK
Installation
1. Loosely install the damper (A) on the frame with
the aligning tab (B) facing inside, then loosely
install the five flange nuts (e).
__ --c
C
8x1.25mm
17Nm
(1.7 kgfm,
12Ibfft)
10x 1.25 mm
50 Nm (5.1 kgfm,
37Ibfft)
B
2. Install the damper fork (D) over the driveshaft and
onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the
damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with
the slot in the damper fork.
~
/
E
~
/1
F
12 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm
3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (E) into the
damper fork.
4. Loosely install a new self-locking nut (F) with the
flange bolt (G).
5. Raise the knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle
just lifts off the safety stand.
6. Tighten damper pinch bolt.
7. Tighten the flange bolt and the self-locking nut.
8. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to
9. Install the front wheel.
18-21
BACK
Rea.r Suspension
Hub/Bearing Replacement - Disc Brake
Exploded View
18-22
SPLASH GUARD
9.3 Nm (0.95 kgfm, S.9 Ibfft)
//S mm BOLT
BRAKE DISC
/
SPINDLE NUT 22 x 1.5 mm
181 Nm (18.5 kgfm, 139Ibfft)
Replace.
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7 Ibfft)
WHEEL NUT 12 x 1.5 mm
108Nm
BACK
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and rear wheel.
3. Pull the parking brake lever up.
4. Remove the hub cap (A).
B
22x 1.5 mm
181 Nm
118.5 kgf.m, 139Ibfft)
Replace.
A
12x1.5mm
108Nm
5. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (B), then
remove the nut.
6. Release the parking brake lever.
7. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
A
8x1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, 16 Ib'.ttl
8. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and
hang the caliper (C) to one side. To prevent damage
to the caliper or brake hose, use a short piece of
wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage.
9. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A).
A
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm, 7 Ibfft)
B
10. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc (C) to
push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at
a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
11. Remove the hub bearing unit from the knuckle.
12. Install the hub/bearing unit in the reverse order of
removal, and pay particular attention to the
following items:
o Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces ofthe rear hub and brake disc.
o Wash the bearing and spindle thoroughly in high
flash point solvent before reassembly.
o To prevent damage to the caliper or brake hose,
use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from
the undercarriage.
o After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle
nut shoulder against the spindle.
18-23
BACK
Rear Suspension
Hub/Bearing Replacement - Drum Brake
Exploded View
BRAKE DRUM
18-24
SPINDLE NUT 22 x 1.5 mm
181 Nm (18.5 kgfm, 134 Ibf.tt)
Replace.
HUBCAP
jR'PI'''.
((@
WHEEL NUT 12 x 1.5 mm
BACK
1. Raise the rear ofthe vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.
2. Remove the wheel nuts and rear wheel.
3. Pull the parking brake lever up.
4. Remove the hub cap (A).
B
22x 1.5 mm
181 Nm
(18.5 kgfm, 134Ibf.tt)
12x1.Smm
108 Nm
(11.0 kgf.m, 80 Ibftt)
5. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (B), then
remove the nut.
6. Release the parking brake lever.
7. Remove the brake drum and the hub/bearing unit.
8. Install the hub/bearing unit in the reverse order of
removal, and pay particular attention to the
following items:
Wash the bearing and spindle thoroughly in high
flash point solvent before reassembly .
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle
nut shoulder against the spindle.
Knuckle Replacement
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
securely supported, then remove the rear wheel.
2. Remove the rear brake caliper, the caliper
mounting bracket, and the brake hose mounting
bolt from the rear knuckle (disc brake model) (see
step 7 on page 18-23).
3. Remove the rear brake disc and hub/bearing unit
(disc brake model) (see step 9 on page 18-23) or
brake drum and hub/bearing unit (drum brake
model) (see left column).
07MAC-SL0020

\ /

12 x 1.25 mm
49-58Nm
(5.0-6.0 kgf.m.
36-43 Ibf ftl
5. Separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle
using the special tool (see page 18-9).
6. Remove the ABS sensor from the splash guard
(disc brake model) (see page 19-71).
7. Remove the flange nut (A) from the stabilizer link.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
39 Nm (4.0 kgfm.
29lbfftl
'7
I,
C
8. Remove the damper lower mount bolt (B), and the
stabilizer link mounting bracket (C).
(cont'd)
18-25
BACK
Rear Suspension
Knuckle Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the control arm mounting nut from the
rear knuckle.
10. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt from the
rear knuckle.
12 x 1.25 mm
11. Remove the splash guard mounting bolts and the
splash guard (A) (on disc brake model), or the
backing plate mounting bolts and the backing plate
(B) (on drum brake model).
18-26
12. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (A)
from the trailing arm, then remove the trailing arm
mounting bolt (B) from the rear knuckle.
22 Nm /2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
B-----
12x25mm
59 Nm (6.0 kgfm,
43lbfft)
13. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A) and nut
(B), then remove the knuckle.
14. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and pay particular attention to the fOllowing items:
torque values.
o Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque
specifications, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the hole in the ball joint pin. Do
not align the castle nut by loosening it.
o Use a new cotter pin in the castle nut.
surfaces on the brake disc or drum and inside of
the wheel.
o Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
Upper Arm Replacement
securely supported, then remove the rear wheel.
07MAC-SL00200
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A).
A
B 9.3 Nm (0.95 kgfm, 6.9 Ibftt)
9.3 Nm (0.95 kgfm,
6 . ~
5. Remove the wheel sensor mounting bolt (B) (for
vehicles with ABS).
6. Remove the upper arm bolt (A). Remove the upper
arm (B) from the vehicle.
B
A
12x 1.25 mm
7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
torque values.
o Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque
specifications, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
o Use a new cotter pin in the castle nut.
wheel.
o Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
18-27
BACK
Rear Suspension
Trailing Arm Replacement
securely supported. Remove the rear wheel.
2. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (A)
from the trailing arm (B).
3. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolts (C).
4. Remove the trailing arm (B) from the vehicle.
C
12x 1.25 mm
B
A
5. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of
torque values.
wheel.
Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
18-28
Leading Arm Replacement
2. Remove the leading arm mounting bolts (A), and
remove the leading arm (B) from the vehicle.
B
A
12x 1.25 mm
3. Install the leading arm in the reverse order of
torque values.
surfaces on the brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
BACK
Lower Arm Replacement
2. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A).
3. Remove the lower arm mounting nut (B) and
mounting bolt (C).
4. Remove the lower arm (0) from the vehicle.
A
12x 1.25mm
D
5. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
torque values.
wheel.
Control Arm Replacement
2. Remove the control arms from the vehicle.
-1 Remove the self-locking nut (A) from the
knuckle bolt.
-2 Remove the self-locking nut (B) from the rear
suspension subframe.
-3 Remove the control arms (C) from the vehicle.
B
10x 1.25mm

c
3. Install the control arm in the reverse order of
torque values.
wheel.
18-29
BACK
Rear Suspension
Damper ISpring Replacement
Exploded View
/
SELFOLOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
29 Nm 13.0 kgf.m. 22 Ibfft)
Replace.
( _____ WASHER
I@ _______ Check for weakness.
@>
@.. RUBBER BUSHING
MOUNT BASE
0----__ _
@ -COLLAR
-----------RUBBER BUSHING
,, __ -.J --------RUBBER
DAMPER SPRING
---------------/ /
DUST COVER
Check for bending and damage.
18-30
SPRING MOUNT
CUSHION
and damage.
SEAT CUSHION
and damage.
BUMPSTOPPLATE
BUMP STOP
Check for weakness
and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
BACK
Strut Spring Compressor, 8ranick MST-580A or Model
7200, or equivalent, commercially available.
Removal
2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (see page 20-76).
3. Remove the two flange nuts (A).
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the knuckle.
A
10x 1.25 mm
59 Nm 16.0 kgfm,
43lbfft)
\
B
10x 1.25 mm
39 Nm 14.0 kgf.m,
29Ibfft)
c
5. Remove the flange nut (8) from the stabilizer link.
6. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the
damper (C) from the vehicle.
NOTE: Damper springs are different, left and right.
Mark the springs Land R before you continue.
Disassembly Iinspection
1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially
available strut spring compressor (A) according to
the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the
self-locking nut (8). Do not compress the spring
more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut.
B
A
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring
compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
3. Reassemble all parts, except the spring.
4. Compress the damper by hand, and check for
smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should
move smoothly. If it does not, replace it.
5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding
during these tests.
(cont'd)
18-31
BACK
Rear Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install the damper unit on a commercially available
strut spring compressor (A).
2. Assemble the damper in the reverse order of
disassembly, except for the washer and self-
locking nut. Align the bottom of the damper spring
and the spring lower seat (8).
A
B
3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper
unit.
4. Compress the damper spring with the spring
compressor.
18-32
5. Install the washer(A), and loosely install a new self-
locking nut (8).
B
10x 1.25 mm
29 Nm (3.0 kgfm. 22 Ibftt)
6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench, and
tighten the self-locking nut.
BACK
Installation
1. Lower the rear suspension, position the damper(A),
and loosely install the two flange nuts(B).
B
10x 1.25 mm
50 Nm (5.1 kgfm,37 Ibfft)
~ ( \
~
2. Loosely install the flange bolt(A)and nut(B).
A
10x 125 mm
N ~ .... m.43"."
B
10x 1.25mm
39 Nm (4.0 kgf.m,
29Ibfft)
A
3. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the
vehicle just lifts off the safety stand.
4. Tighten the flange bolt and nut on the bottom ofthe
damper to the specified torque.
5. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to
6. Install the rear bulkhead cover (see page 20-76).
7. Install the rear wheels.
8. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
18-33
BACK
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components
Special Tools ................................................................ . 19-2
Component Location Index ........................................ . 19-3
Brake System Operation and
Leakage Check ........................................................... . 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position
Switch Adjustment .................................................... . 19-5
Parking Brake Check and
Adjustment ................................................................. . 19-6
Brake System Bleeding .............................................. .. 19-7
Brake System Indicator Circuit
Diagram ...................................................................... . 19-8
Parking Brake Switch Test .......................................... . 19-9
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ..................................... . 19-9
Front Brake Pads Inspection/
Replacement .............................................................. . 19-10
Front Brake Disc Inspection ........................................ . 19-12
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ..................................... . 19-13
Master Cylinder Replacement .................................... . 19-14
Master Cylinder Inspection ......................................... . 19-15
Master Cylinder Push rod Clearance
Adjustment ................................................................. . 19-15
Brake Booster Test ...................................................... . 19-17
Brake Booster Replacement ....................................... . 19-18
Rear Brake Pads Inspection/
Replacement .............................................................. . 19-19
Rear Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... . 19-21
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... . 19-22
Rear Drum Brake Inspection ....................................... . 19-25
Rear Brake Shoes Replacement ................................. . 19-27
Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement ............................ . 19-29
Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection ............................. .
Brake Hose Replacement ........................................... ..
Parking Brake Cable Replacement ............................. .
19-30
m
19-31
19-32
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Components .............................................. . 19-35
Special Tools
Tool Number
07JAG-SD40100
CD
19-2
BACK
FRONT BRAKES
Front Brake Pads, Inspection and
Front Brake Disc
Front Brake Caliper
BRAKE PEDAL
INDICATOR
Diagram, page 19-8
Parking Brake Switch
Test, page 19-9
Brake Fluid Level Switch
Test, page 19-9
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Parking Brake Check and
BRAKE BOOSTER
Brake Booster Test, page 19-17
Brake Booster
PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Parking Brake Cable
REAR BRAKES
REAR DRUM BRAKE:
Rear Drum Brake
Rear Brake Shoes
Rear Wheel Cylinder
REAR BRAKES
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
REAR DISC BRAKE:
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and
BRAKE HOSES/LINES
Brake Hoses and Lines
Brake Hoses Replacement, page 19-31
MASTER CYLINDER
Master Cylinder
Master Cylinder
Master Cylinder Push rod
Clearance Adjustment, page 19-15
Brake System Bleeding, page 19-7
Rear Brake Disc
Rear Brake Caliper
19-3
BACK
Brake System Operation and Leakage Check
Ch kllfhfll ec a 0 teo oWing Items:
Component Procedure
Brake Booster (A) Check brake operation by applying the brakes during a test drive. If the brakes do not
work properly, check the brake booster. Replace the brake booster as an assembly if it
does not work properly or if there are signs of leakage .
Piston Cup and Check brake operation by applying the brakes. Look for damage or signs of fluid
Pressure Cup leakage. Replace the master cylinder as an assembly if the pedal does not work
Inspection (B) properly or if there is damage or signs of fluid leakage.
Check for a difference in brake pedal stroke between quick and slow brake
applications. Replace the master cylinder if there is a difference in pedal stroke.
Brake Hoses (C) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. Replace the brake hose with a new one if it
is damaged or leaking.
Caliper Piston Seal and Check brake operation by applying the brakes.
Piston Boots (0) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. If the pedal does not work properly, the
brakes drag, or there is damage or signs offluid leakage, disassemble and inspectthe
brake caliper. Replace the boots and seals with new ones whenever the brake caliper
is disassembled.
Wheel Cylinder Piston Check brake operation by applying the brakes.
Cup and Oust Cover (E) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. If the pedal does not work properly, the
brakes drag, or there is damage or signs of fluid leakage, replace the wheel cylinder.
19-4
BACK
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height
1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch
connector, loosen the brake pedal position switch
locknut (A), and back off the brake pedal position
switch (B) until it is no longer touching the brake
pedal.
2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure
the pedal height (C) from the middle ofthe left side
of the pedal pad (D).
Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed):
MIT: 165 mm (68/16 in.)
A/T: 169 mm (610/16 in.)
3. Loosen the push rod locknut (A), and screw the
push rod in or out with pliers until the standard
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the push rod pressed.
4. Screw in the brake pedal position switch until its
plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching
the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then back off the
switch 3/4 of a turn to make 0.9 mm (0.04 in.) of
clearance between the threaded end and the pad.
Tighten the locknut firmly.
Connect the brake pedal position switch connector.
Make sure the brake lights go off when the
pedal is released.
5. Check the brake pedal free playas described below.
Pedal Free Play
1. With the engine off, check the pedal free play (A) on
the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand.
Free Play: 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.)
2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust
the brake pedal position switch (C). If the pedal free
play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag.
19-5
BACK
Parking Brake Check and Adjustment
Check
1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf,
44 Ibf) force to fully apply the parking brake. The
parking brake lever should be locked within the
specified number of clicks (B).
Lever Locked Clicks:
Vehicle With Rear Disc Brakes: 9 -11
Vehicle With Rear Drum Brakes: 9-11
Pulled up with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibtl
A
~
:-r
B
.... _._________________ I
.... ) ~
, ~
_.-.... _.-----_ ... _---- .. :
2. Adjust the parking brake if the lever clicks are out of
specification.
Adjustment
NOTE: After rear brake caliper servicing, loosen the
parking brake adjusting nut, start the engine, and press
the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting
brake before adjusting the parking brake.
1. Block the front wheels, then raise the rear of the
vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Make sure the parking brake arm (A) on the rear
brake caliper contacts the brake caliper pin (B).
19-6
3. Pull the parking brake lever up one click.
~ ~ y ~
~ 7 - -
4. Remove the rear console lid (see page 20-83).
5. Tighten the adjusting nut (A) until the parking
brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are
turned.
6. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check
that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
7. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied
when the parking brake lever is pulled up fully.
8. Reinstall the rear console lid.
BACK
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE:
Do not reuse the drained fluid.
Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using
a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and
decrease the life of the system.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed
to contaminate the brake fluid.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the
MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding
procedure and checked after bleeding each brake
caliper. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at
the MAX (upper) level line (A).
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal
several times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Loosen the left-front brake bleed screw to allow air
to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed
screw securely.
4. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the
sequence shown below until air bubbles no longer
appear in the fluid.
5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
Front Right @RB.rRight
~ c
:]
<D Front Left Rear Left
FRONT DISC BRAKE:
9 Nm (0.9 kgfm, 6.5 Ibfttl
REAR DISC BRAKE:
(
\
9 Nm (0.9 kgfm, 6.5 Ibfttl
REAR DRUM BRAKE:
7 N'm (0.7 kgfm, 5lbfttl
19-7
BACK
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDERHooD FUSE/
RELAY BOX IGNmON
SWITCH
BLK/VEL
UNDERDASH DRIVER'S
FUSE/RELAY BOX
I I

BRAKE
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
.. -=t.-. -"-"'-, --GRN/RED -----'
! DAYTIME RUNNING : I :
i UGHTS CONTROL UNIT ! GRN/RED !
ToABS
, GRN/WHT! !
i.... .. _ . _ .. _J._ .. . .
PARKING BRAKE
SWITCH
CLOSED: Laver up
OPEN: Lev .. down
CONTROL UNIT (PARK'
19-8
GRN/RED

BRAKE FLUID
I LEVEL SWITCH
CLOSED: Float down
OPEN: Float up
BLK
.A.
G302
BACK
Parking Brake Switch Test
1. Remove the rear console, and disconnect the
connector (A) from the switch (B).
B
and body ground:
With the brake lever up, there should be
continuity.
With the brake lever down, there should be no
continuity.
NOTE (Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK,
but the brake system indicator does not function,
do the input test for the daytime running
lights control unit (see page 22-96).
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Remove the reservoi r cap (A). Check that the float
(B) moves up and down freely; if it doesn't, replace
the reservoir cap assembly.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals with the
float in the down position (C) and the up position
(0):
With the float up, there should be no continuity .
With the float down, there should be continuity.
19-9
BACK
Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health.
Avoid breathing dust particles.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. Raise the front
of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A) from
the knuckle.
c
3. Remove pin A (B) and pivot the caliper (C) up out of
the way. Check the hoses and pin boots for damage
and deterioration.
4. Remove the pad shims (A), pad retainers (B), and
pads (C).
A
I
o
19-10
5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of
each brake pad lining. The measurement does not
include pad backing plate (A) thickness.
Brake Pad Thickness:
Standard: 10.5-11.5 mm (0.41-0.45 in.'
A
6. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit,
replace the front pads as a set.
7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and
check for grooves and cracks.
8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
9. Install the pad retainers (A).
BACK
10. Apply Molykote M77 grease to both sides of the
pad shims (A) and the back ofthe pads (B). Wipe
excess grease off the shim.
Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping
ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads.
A C
B
A
(t
o
0,.:
.-.
'-'
11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.
Install the pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
inside.
If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the
brake pads in their original positions to prevent a
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
12. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
13. Pivot the caliper down into position. Being careful
not to damage the pin boot, install the caliper bolt
(B) and torque it to proper specification.
B
/74 Nm 17.5 kgfm, 54Ibfft)
A
14. Install the brake hose onto the knuckle.
15. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
the brakes work, then test-drive.
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a
greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
pads have been replaced as a set. Several
applications of the brake pedal will restore the
normal pedal stroke.
16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
19-11
BACK
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the
Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-10).
3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks.
Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust.
4. Use wheel nuts and suitable flat washers (A) to
hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount
a dial indicator as shown, and measure the runout
at 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the outer edge ofthe disc.
Brake Disc Runout:
Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.'
108Nm
(11 kgf.m, 80 Ib'ftl
5. Ifthe disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the
brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-
Lathe produced by Kwik-way Manufacturing Co.
and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-
on Tools Co. are approved for this operation.
Max. Refinish limit: 21.0 mm (0.83 in.'
NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-10).
A new disc should be refinished if its runout is
greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.).
19-12
Thickness and Parallelism
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the
Remove the front wheels.
3. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at
eight points, approximately 45apart and 10 mm
(0.4 in.) in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace
the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less
than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake Disc Thickness:
Standard: 22.9-23.1 mm (0.90-0.91 in.'
Max. Refinishing Limit: 21.0 mm (0.83 in.'
Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.'
max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference
between the thickness measurements.
4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,
refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe.
The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way
Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc
Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
for this operation .
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-10).
BACK
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
o Avoid breathing dust particles.
o Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper and note these items:
o Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
o To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
o Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
o Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
o Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
o Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.
o Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
o When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
o Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
o Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of
the system.
o Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
o Replace all rubber parts with new ones.
o After installing the caliper,check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Rubber grease
FLANGE BOLTS
12 x 1.25 mm
_-'iiiiiiiI ,.............. INNER SHIM A .. k ... m
/
, 80 Ibfft)
itslear indicator upward.
INNER SHIM B V OUTER PAD SHIM
74 Nm 11.""m. "Ibfft' \0
BRAKE HOSE
\
BANJO BOLT
34Nm
(3.5kgfm,
25Ibfft)

BLEED SCREW
9 Nm (0.9 kgfm,
6.5Ibtft)
PIN A
- -fijijffi
BRAKE PADS
/PISTON SEAL
/ Replace.

____ PISTON BOOT
\ :e
p
;;.
CALIPER BODY PISTON
PIN BOOT
Replace.

CALIPER
BRACKET
CALIPER
BRACKET
19-13
BACK
Master Cylinder Replacement
I NOTiCe I
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the
paint, wash it off immediately with water.
1. Remove the 8 mm flange nuts (AI.
B
2. Remove the strut brace (B).
A
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16Ibf.ft)
4. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder
reservoir (C) with a syringe.
19-14
5. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the master
cylinder. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with rags or shop towels.
B
8x1.25mm
15 Nm 11.5 kgfm,11Ibfft)
6. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (B) and
washers.
7. Remove the master cylinder (C) from the brake
booster (D). Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines when removing the master cylinder.
8. Remove the rod seal (E) from the brake booster.
9. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of
Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever
removed.
Coat the lip of the new rod seal with
recommended seal grease in the master cylinder
set.
Install the rod seal onto the brake booster with its
grooved side toward the master cylinder.
BACK
Master Cylinder Inspection
NOTE:
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dust and other foreign particles.
Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly with
a new part if necessary.
Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the
brake fluid.
Check for blockage
/
RESERVOIR CAP
. . . . = ~ of vent holes .
. ' /RESERVOIR SEAL
_ Check for damage and
=. deterioration.
'"
RESERVOIR
MASTER CYLINDER
Check for leaks, rust and damage.
Master Cylinder Pushrod Clearance
Adjustment
Pushrod Adjustment Gauge 07JAG-SD40100
NOTE: Master cylinder pushrod-to-piston clearance
must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary,
before installing the master cylinder.
1. Set the special tool (A) on the master cylinder body
(B), push in the center shaft (C) until the top of it
contacts the end ofthe secondary piston (D) by
turning the adjusting nut (E) .
2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position,
install the special tool (A) backwards on the booster.
C
0-101 kPa
10-760 mmHg. 30 in.Hgl
B
15 Nm 11.5 kgfm.
11lbfftl
A
07JAG-SD40100
3. Install the master cylinder nuts (B), and tighten to
4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge
(C) 0-101 kPa (0-760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) to the
booster's engine vacuum supply. and maintain an
engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg,
20 in.Hg) of vacuum.
(cont'd)
19-15
BACK
Master Cylinder Pushrod Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5. With a feeler gauge (A), measure the clearance
between the gauge body and the adjusting nut (B)
as shown.
If the clearance between the gauge body and
adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 in.), the pushrod-to-
piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance
between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0 mm,
the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
or more. Therefore it must be adjusted and
rechecked.
Clearance: 0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in.'
6. If the clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut
(A) and turn the adjuster (B) in or out to adjust.
Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum
is applied to the booster.
Hold the clevis (C) while adjusting.
A
22Nm
7. Tighten the star locknut securely.
8. Remove the special tool (0).
19-16
9. Check the push rod length (A) as shown if the
booster is removed. If the length is incorrect,
loosen the pushrod locknut (B), and turn the clevis
(C) in or out to adjust.
A
116 mm (4.6 in.)
10. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-14).
BACK
Brake Booster Test
Functional Test
1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal
several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then
press the pedal hard and hold it for 15 seconds. If
the pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is
bypassing internally, or the brake system (master
cylinder, lines, modulator, proportioning valve, or
caliper) is leaking.
2. Start the engine with the pedal pressed. If the pedal
sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating
normally. If the pedal height does not vary, the
booster or check valve is faulty.
3. With the engine running, press the brake pedal
lightly. Apply just enough pressure to hold back
automatic transmission creep. Ifthe brake pedal
sinks more than 10 mm (3/8 in.) in 3 minutes, the
master cylinder is faulty. A slight change in pedal
height when the AlC compressor cycles on and off
is normal. (The AlC compressor load changes the
vacuum available to the booster.)
Leak Test
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
stop the engine. If the pedal height does not vary
while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum
booster is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is
faulty.
2. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal
several times using normal pressure. When the
pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On
consecutive applications, the pedal height should
gradually rise. If the pedal position does not vary,
check the booster check valve.
Booster Check Valve Test
1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (check
valve built-in) (A) at the booster (B).
A
2. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
check valve is not working properly. Replace the
brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
retest.
19-17
BACK
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-14).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the brake
booster (B), then remove the vacuum hose bracket
(C).
c
A
3. For MIT model only, remove the clutch reservoir
(D) and reservoir bracket. Do not disconnect the
clutch hose from the reservoir.
4. Remove the IAT sensor.
19-18
5. Remove the cotter pin (A) and joint pin (B).
B
C
8x 1.25 mm
6. Remove the four booster mounting nuts (C).
7. Pull the brake booster (A) forward, then turn it to
the right until the clevis (B) is clear of the bulkhead
(C).
8. Remove the brake booster from the engine
compartment.
9. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of
Adjust the pushrod length before installing the
brake booster.
After installation, adjust brake pedal height and
brake pedal free play (see page 19-5).
Replace the IAT sensor O-ring and the booster
clevis cotter pin.
BACK
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement
ACAUTION
health .
Avoid breathing dust particles .
cleaner.
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Remove the brake hose (A) from the suspension
arm by removing the mounting bolt (8).
Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to
prevent dust and dirt from entering inside.
Support the caliper with a piece of wire so that it
does not hang from the brake hose.
A
4. Remove the two caliper bolts (e) and caliper (D)
from the bracket.
5. Remove the pad shim (A) and brake pads (8).
B
each brake pad lining. Measurement does not
include pad backing plate (A) thickness.
Standard: 8.5-9.5 mm (0.33-0.37 in.)
(cont'd)
19-19
BACK
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the pad retainers.
10. Install the pad retainers.
11. Apply Molykote M77 grease to the pad side of the
shim (A). Wipe excess grease off the shim.
Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping
ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads.
~
c
B
12. Install the brake pads (B) and pad shim on the
caliper bracket. Install the inner pad with its wear
indicator (C) facing downward.
If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the
brake pads in their original positions to prevent a
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
19-20
13. Rotate the caliper piston (A) clockwise into the
cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston with
the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston
back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to
avoid twisting the piston boot. Ifthe piston boot is
twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly.
c B
14. Install the brake caliper (0).
F
E
8x1.0mm
25Nm
(2.5 kgfm, 18 Ibftt)
15. Install and torque the caliper bolts (E) to proper
specification.
16. Install the brake hose (F) onto the suspension arm
with the mounting bolt (G).
joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
the brakes work, then test-drive.
BACK
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout
securely supported.
3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks.
Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust.
4. Use wheel nuts and suitable flat washers (A) to
hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount
a dial indicator (B) as shown, and measure the
runout at 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the outer edge of the
disc.
Brake Disc Runout:
B
A
5. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the
brake disc.
Max. Refinishing Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
NOTE: A new disc should be refinished if its runout
is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.).
Thickness and Parallelism
1. Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, then raise the
Remove the rear wheels.
3. Using a micrometer (A), measure disc thickness at
eight points, approximately 45apart and 10 mm
(0.4 in.) in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace
the brake disc ifthe smallest measurement is less
than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake Disc Thickness:
Standard: 8.9 - 9.1 mm (0.350 - 0.358 in.)
Max. Refinishing Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm
(0.0006 in.) max.
This is the maximum allowable difference between
the thickness measurements.
4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,
refinish the brake disc.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-22).
19-21
BACK
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper and note these items:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the
system.
Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Replace all rubber parts with new ones.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
19-22
BACK
Sedan:
___ : Silicone grease
-
Rubber grease
Jgf.m, 25 Ibf.ttl
10 x 1.25 mm SEALING WASHERS
3 9 Nm f ttl Replace.
BRAKE HOSE , .N,m (0.' "",m .
CAM BOOT
Replace.
. CAUPE" BODY
. 0 / /SLEEVE
Y' SPftING

PISTON SEAL
Replace.
-

PISTON ASSEMBLY
PARKING LEVERI
CAM ASSEMBLY
Replace. SPRING
CASE
/
PISTON BOOT
(?&)
0/1
Replace.

CONNECTOR
Replace.
PAD SPRING

CALIPER BOLTS
RETAINER
RING
kgfm, 19 Ibfttl
Jj r\
\
BOOT CLIP
Replace.
I -",vf) ____

BRAKE PADS
OUTER PAD SHIM PIN B
PIN BOOTS

CALIPER BRACKET
CALIPER BRACKET
PIN
(cant'd)
19-23
BACK
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul (cont'd)
Coupe:
.. : Silicone grease
: Rubber grease
10 mm FLANGE BOLTS
34 Nm (3.5 kgfm. 25 Ib'ftl
BRAKE HO%E BANJO BOLT
34 Nm (3.5 kgf.m. 25 Ib'ftl
{
SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
_______ BLEED SCREW
Ii 9 Nm (0.9 kgfm. 6.5Ib'ftl
fig fI1- _______ CALIPER BODY

/PIN
/SPACER
CIRCLIP
O-RING //PISTONASSEMBlV
SPRING /PISTONBOOT
WASHER CUP "/ . Replace.
PARKING NUT ;,;a$4 ADJUSnNG /
27 N.m (2.8 kgf.m. 20 Ib'.ftl GREASE SPRING B
Jj
. " BEARING A SPRING COVER
()
PAD SPRING
Li
Il':!l. I PINB PIN BOOTS PISTON SEAL
I Replace. Replace.
BRAKE PADS _____
OUTER PAD SHIM &z,
CALIPER BOLTS 0 RETAINER
PIN A
\
10 mm FLANGE BOLTS
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm. 281b'ftl
PIN BOOT

19-24 BACK
Rear Drum Brake Inspection
ACAUTION
Avoid breathing dust particles
NOTE:
Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce stopping ability .
Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of the vehicle.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake drum (see page 19-271 .
Nm 6. ..... ft)
/
BACKING PLATE
Marked left and right.

WHEEL CYLINDER
Inspect for leakage.
BRAKE SHOE
If brake shoes are to be
reused, mark and reassemble
in same position.
SELF-ADJUSTER
LEVER
ADJUSTER BOLT
Check ratchet teeth
for wear and damage.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Marked left and right.
UPPER RETURN SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
WAVE WASHER
II
U-CLIP
Replace.

(cont'dl
19-25
BACK
Rear Drum Brake Inspection (cont'd)
3. Check the wheel cylinder (A) for leakage.
A
B
4. Check the brake linings (B) for cracking, glazing,
wear, and contamination.
5. Measure the brake lining thickness (e).
Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness.
. Brake Lining Thickness:
Standard: 4.5 mm (0.18 in.)
6. If the brake lining thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the brake shoes as a set.
7. Check the bearings in the hub unit for smooth
operation. If it requires servicing, replace it (see
19-26
8. Measure the inside diameter of the brake drum
with inside vernier calipers.
Drum Inside Diameter:
Standard: 219.9-220.0 mm (8.657-8.661 in.'
9. If the inside diameter of the brake drum is more
than the service limit, replace the brake drum.
10. Check the brake drum for scoring, grooves, and
cracks .
BACK
Rear Brake Shoes Replacement
ACAUTION
health.
cleaner.
1. Disengage the upper return spring (A) with the tool
(8).
A
B
o
2. Remove the tension pins (e) by pushing the
retainer spring (D) and turning them.
3. Lower the brake shoe assembly (A), and remove
the lower return spring (8). Make sure not to
damage the dust cover on the wheel cylinder.
E
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the
parking brake lever.
5. Remove the brake shoe assembly.
6. Remove the upper return spring (e), self-adjuster
lever (D), and self-adjuster spring (E), and separate
the brake shoes .
7. Remove the wave washer (A), parking brake lever
(8), and pivot pin (e) from the brake shoe (D) by
removing the U-c1ip (E).
E ~ /A
J ~
o
c
8. Apply brake cylinder grease (PIN: 08733-80202) or
equivalent rubber grease to the sliding surface of
the pivot pin (A), and insert the pin into the brake
shoe.
(cont'd)
19-27
BACK
Rear Brake Shoes Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the parking brake lever (B) and wave washer
(C) on the pivot pin, and secure with a new U-clip (D).
o Install the wave washer with its convex side
facing out.
o Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the pivot pin
from coming out from the brake shoe.
10. Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake lever.
11. Clean the threaded portions of clevises A and B.
Coat the threads of the clevises with grease.
To shorten the clevises, turn the adjuster bolt (C).
E
12. Hook the self-adjuster spring (D) to the adjuster
lever first, then to the brake shoe.
13. Install the clevises and upper return spring (E),
noting the installation direction. Be careful not to
damage the wheel cylinder dust covers.
14. Install the lower return spring (F).
19-28
15. Apply brake cylinder grease (PIN: 08733-B020E) or
equivalent rubber grease to the sliding surfaces
shown. Wipe off any excess. Don't get grease on
the brake linings.
... Sliding surface
16. Apply Molykote 44MA to the brake shoe ends and
opposite edges of the shoes shown. Wipe off any
excess. Don't get grease on the brake linings ..
.... Opposite edge of the shoe
t::::>o Brake shoe ends
(Shoe side ends and backing
/ ~ p / ~ _ ~ t e contact surface)
o '<"
BACK
17. Install the brake shoes (A) onto the backing plate.
Be careful not to damage the wheel cylinder dust
covers.
D
E
c
18. Install the tension pins (B) and the retainer springs
(C).
19. Hook the upper return spring (D) with the tool (E).
20. Install the brake drum.
21. If the wheel cylinder has been removed, bleed the
brake system (see page 19-7).
22. Press the brake pedal several times to set the self-
adjusting brake.
23. Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-5).
Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or
shop towels.
Use only a genuine Honda wheel cylinder special bolt.
1. Remove the brake shoes (see page 19-27).
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel
cylinder (B).
7 Nm (0.7 kgfm,
Slbfftl
C
9 Nm (0.9 kgfm, 6.S Ibfftl
3. Remove the bolt (C) and the wheel cylinder from
the backing plate.
4. Apply sealant (E) between the wheel cylinder (B)
and backing plate (D), and install the wheel cylinder.
5. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
6. Fill the brake reservoir up, and bleed the brake
system (see page 19-7).
7. After installation, check for a leak at the line joint,
and retighten if necessary.
19-29
BACK
Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses, for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leakage. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator unit for damage and leakage.
NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced.
BRAKE HOSE-to-CALIPER
(BANJO BOLT)
BRAKE LlNE-to-BRAKE HOSE
WithABS:
BRAKE LlNE-to-BRAKE HOSE
15 Nm 11.5 kgfm,11Ibf.ft)
DISC BRAKE:
BRAKE HOSE-to-CALIPER
(BANJO BOLT)
BLEED SCREW
DRUM BRAKE:
BRAKE LlNE-to-WHEEL CYLINDER
BLEED SCREW
7 (0.7 kgfm, 5lbfftl
PROPORTIONING CONTROL VALVE-to-
BRAKE LINE
15 Nm (1.5 kgfm, 11lbfft)
MASTER CYLINDER-to-BRAKE LINE
ABS MODULATOR UNIT -to-BRAKE LINE
ABS MODULATOR UNIT
19-30
BACK
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE:
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dust and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to
do so.
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
1. Replace the brake hose (A) if the hose is twisted,
cracked, or if it leaks.
B
1,,- (
"---
2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line (B)
using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C).
3. Remove and discard the brake hose clip (A) from
the brake hose (B).
4. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and disconnect the
brake hose from the caliper.
5. Remove the brake hose from the knuckle.
6. Install the brake hose (A) on the knuckle with 2
6 mm flange bolts (B) first, then connect the brake
hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new
sealing washers (D).
C
34Nm
A
\ ---
7. Install the brake hose (A) on the upper brake hose
bracket (B) with a new brake hose clip (C).
C D
\ ,'5 NO"m,,: ':omo ", Ib,f.ft)

8. Connect the brake line (D) to the brake hose.
9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake
system (see page 19-7).
10. Do the following checks:
Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary .
Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
19-31
BACK
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
ax1.2Smm
(Sliding surfacel
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Check for smooth
operation.
19-32
PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
PARKING BRAKE CABLE
(Drum brake)
';--.. .
./' ".
. .> BRAKE HOSE CLIP
"" ., .. ./.. Replace.
...... ./"'/
,-.,
lijf PARKING BRAKE CABLE
(Disc brake)
./ .. .-.. ..
. ' ,
Ii ./ .. ./"'/ "' ..

\
" .,./'

""" .. '/
6x1.0mm
9.a Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
EQUALIZER
ax1.2Smm
BACK
NOTE:
The parking brake cables must not be bent or
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature failure.
Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.
Rear Disc Brake: (EX Type)
1. Release the parking brake lever fully, and remove
the brake hose clip (A) from the parking brake cable.
C
B
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable (8) from the
lever (C).
Rear Drum Brake: (OX and LX Type)
1. Remove the brake shoe assembly (see page 19-27).
2. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolts
from the backing plate.
3. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the
backing plate (8) using a 12 mm offset wrench (C).

B J1-"
'" .' ,

/ J / \
)
_ iA \
. . /",/(
r
A
19-33
BACK
19-34
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ..................... 19-1
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Components
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 19-37
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 19-40
Sympton Troubleshooting Index ................................ 19-41
System Description ...................................................... 19-42
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-50
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ...................... 19-67
Modulator Unit Removal and
Installation ................................................................. 19-69
ABS Control Unit Replacement ................................... 19-70
Wheel Sensor Inspection ............................................. 19-70
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................ 19-71
ABS Components
UNDER-HOOD ABS RELAV BOX
(PUMP MOTOR RELA V)
UNDER-HOOD ABS RELA V BOX
(FAIL-SAFE RELAV)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAV BOX
-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAV BOX
A LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
ABS CONTROL UNIT
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
MODULATOR UNIT
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal and Installation, page 19-69
19-36
BACK
ABS Indicator
Ifthe system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off two
seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II)
without starting the engine, and then comes on again
and goes off 2 seconds after starting the engine. This
occurs because the ABS control unit is turned on by
the IG2 power source.
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS control
unit detects a problem in the system. However, even
though the system is operating properly, the ABS
indicator will come on, under the following
conditions:
- Only drive wheels rotate
- One drive wheel is stuck
- Vehicle spins
- ABS continues to operate for a long time
- Signal disturbance
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question
the customer about the problem, taking the above-listed
conditions into consideration.
When a problem is detected and the ABS indicator
comes on, there are cases when the indicator stays
on until the ignition switch is turned OFF, and cases
when the indicator light goes off automatically when
the system returns to normal. For OTCs 61 and 62, the
indicator goes off automatically when the system
returns to normal. For all other codes, the indicator
stays on until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
For OTCs 12, 14, 16, 18,21,22,23,24,51,52 and 53,
the ABS indicator goes off when the vehicle is driven
again and the system is OK after the ignition switch is
turned from OFF to ON (II). However, ifthe OTC is
cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes off
right after the engine is started if the system is OK.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
If the CPU cannot be activated or the CPU fails, the
ABS indicator comes on, but the OTC is not
memorized.
The memory can hold any number of OTCs. However,
when the same OTC is detected more than once, the
later one is written over the old one.
Therefore, when the same problem is detected
repeatedly, it is memorized as one OTC.
The OTCs are indicated in the order of ascending
number, not in the order they occur.
The OTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized OTCs
cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery.
Do the specified procedures to clear the OTCs.

Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
- Initial diagnosis:
Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS
indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis:
Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition
switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the
system:
- Turns the fail-safe relay OFF
- Turns the solenoid valve OFF
- Turns the pump motor OFF
- Turns the ABS indicator ON
Kickback
The motor operates when the ABS is functioning, and
the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
Pump Motor
The pump motor operates when the ABS is
functioning.
The ABS control unit checks the pump motor
operation during initial diagnosis when the vehicle is
started. You may hear the motor operate at this time,
but it is normal.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
are the same as for vehicles without ABS.
To ease bleeding, start with the front wheels.
(cont'd)
19-37
BACK
ABS Components
How to Troubleshoot ABS DTCs
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that
the cause ofthe problem is still present and the ABS
indicator is still on. Following the flowchart when the
ABS indicator does not come on can result in incorrect
diagnosis.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors with a single outline and the male terminal
connectors with a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions when
the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
when the ABS indicator came on, such as during
initial diagnosis, during ABS control, after ABS
control, when vehicle speed was at a certain speed,
etc.
2. When the ABS indicator does not come on during
the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based
on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
contact of the terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTC, and test-drive
the vehicle. Make sure the ABS indicator does not
come on.
How to Retrieve ABS DTCs
1. Connectthe Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data
Link Connector (B) located behind the driver's side
kick panel with the ignition switch OFF.
B
2. Select "scs" on the display of the Honda PGM
Tester, then push "YES" at the "SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL" mode.
19-38
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) without the brake
pedal pressed.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning
the ignition switch ON (II), the system shifts to the
MES mode.
4. The blinking frequency indicates the DTC.
ON
NOTE: If the DTC is not memorized, the ABS
indicator will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come
back on.
The system will not indicate the DTC unless these
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before the
The brake pedal is released.
c d
OFF
a
Ignition switch
ON {III
First cycle
a: 2 sec.
b: 3.6 sec.
Ii: 1.3 sec.
d: 0.4 sec.
e: 0.5 sec.
f: 0.3 sec.
6. Press "EXIT" on the Honda PGM Tester.
Second
cycle
7. Disconnect the Honda PGM Testerfrom the 16P
Data Link Connector.
BACK
How to Clear ASS DTCs
1. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data
Link Connector (B) located behind of the driver's
kick panel with the ignition switch OFF.
2. Select "SCS" on the display ofthe Honda PGM
Tester, then push "YES" at the "SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL" mode.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the
brake pedal pressed.
5. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake
pedal.
6. After the ABS indicator comes on, press the
brake pedal again.
~
~
pedal again.
You cannot clear the DTC unless these conditions
are met:
o Vehicle speed is 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
o SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before the
o The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition
switch is turned ON (II).
ABS
indicator
ON
OFF
a
Depressed--+--'--T
Brake
pedal
Released
Ignition switch ON (II)
a: 2 sec.
b: 4 sec.
c: 5 sec.
d
~
d: 0.3 sec.
e: within 3 sec.
8. After a few seconds, the ABS indicator blinks twice
and the DTC is cleared. Ifthe indicator does not
blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. If the indicator
stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the
DTC because a problem was detected during initial
diagnosis before shifting to MES mode.
10. Press "EXIT' on the Honda PGM Tester.
11. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the 16P
Data Link Connector.
19-39
BACK
ABS Components
DTC Detection Item Note
DTC:11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-52)
DTC:12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-53)
DTC:13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-52)
DTC:14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-53)
DTC:15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-52)
DTC:16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-53)
DTC:17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-52)
DTC:18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-53)
DTC:21 Right-front pulser (see page 19-54)
DTC:22 Left-front pulser (see page 19-54)
DTC:23 Right-rear pulser (see page 19-54)
DTC:24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-54)
DTC:31 Right-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:32 Right-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:33 Left-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:34 Left-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:35 Right-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:36 Right-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:37 Left-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:38 Left-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-55)
DTC:41 Right-front wheel lock (see page 19-58)
DTC:42 Left-front wheel lock (see page 19-58)
DTC:43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-58)
DTC:44 Left-rear wheel lock (see page 19-58)
DTC:51 Motor lock (see page 19-59)
DTC:52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-59)
DTC:53 Motor stuck ON (see page 19-61)
DTC:54 Fail-safe relay (see page 19-63)
DTC:61 Low ignition voltage (see page 19-65)
DTC:62 High ignition voltage (see page 19-65)
DTC:71 Different diameter tire (see page 19-66)
DTC:81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis s e e ~ a g e 19-66)
19-40
BACK
Symptom Diagnostic r o e d u r e
ABS indicator does not come on ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-67)
ABS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
DTC is stored 19-67)
~
~
Also check for
19-41
BACK
ABS Components
System Description
ABS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (22P)
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22PI
6 7 8 9 10 11
FLWH FLWC+) FRWH FRWC+) STOP IG2
16 17 18 1 9 20 21 22
MCK RLWC+) RLWH RRWC+)RRWH FSR OLC
Terminal Wire Terminal sign Description Measurement
number color (Terminal namel Terminal Conditions Voltage
(Ignition switch ON (II))
1 BLK GND3 Ground 1-GND -- Below 0.3 V
(Ground 31
4 GRN/ PARK Detects parking 4-GND Engine Pulled Below 0.3 V
RED (Parking) brake switch signal running, Release Battery
Parking Voltage
brake
6 BRN FLW(-) Detects left-front 6-7 Wheel Turn wheel AC:
(Front-left wheel sensor signal at 1 turn/ 0.053Vor
wheel second above
negative) (Reference)
7 GRN/ FLW(+) Oscilloscope:
BLU (Front-left 0.15 Vp-p or
wheel above
positive)
8 GRN FRW(-) Detects right-front 8-9
(Front-right wheel sensor signal
wheel
negative)
9 GRN/ FRW(+) Stopped 0.25 V-
BLK (Front-right 1.15 V
wheel
positive)
10 WHT/ STOP Detects brake switch 10-GND Brake pedal Depressed Battery
BLK signal Voltage
Released Below 0.3 V
11 YEll IG2 Power source for 11-GND Ignition ON (II) Battery
BLK (Ignition 21 activating the system switch Voltage
Start (III) Below 0.3 V
19-42
BACK
Terminal Wire Terminal sign Description
number color (Terminal name)
12 BLK GND4 Ground
(Ground 4)
14 BRN SCS Detects service check
(Service check connector signal
signal) (DTC indication or
DTC erasure)
16 GRN MCK Detects pump motor
(Motor check) drive signal
17 LT RLW (+) Detects left-rear
BLU (Rear-left wheel sensor signal
wheel
positive)
18 GRY RLW(-)
(Rear-left
wheel
positive)
19 GRN/ RRW(+) Detects right-rear
YEL (Rear-right wheel sensor signal
wheel
positive)
20 BLU/ RRW(-)
YEL (Rear-right
wheel
negative)
21 YEll FSR Drives fail-safe relay
GRN (Fail-safe (Fail-safe relay is
relay) turned OFF to shut
off the power source
to the solenoid and
pump motor relay
when problem
occurs.)
22 LT DLC Communicates with
BLU (Data link Honda PGM Tester
connector)
Measurement
Terminal Conditions
12-GND
--
14-GND SCS circuit Shorted
Opened
16-GND Pump motor ON
OFF
Remove MCK fuse
17-18 Wheel Turn wheel
at 1 turn/
second
19-20
Stopped
21-GND ABS Warning
(SCS circuit Normal
must be
open)
22-GND --

Voltage
BelowO.3V
Below 0.3 V
Approx. 5 V
Battery
Voltage
BelowO.3V
Approx. 10 V
AC:
0.053Vor
above
(Reference)
Oscilloscope:
0.15 Vp-p or
above
0.25 V-
1.15 V
Below 0.3 V
Approx.11V
--
(cont'd)
19-43
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (12P)
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
3 4 5 6
1 2 RR- FL- RL- FR-
WALP GND1 OUT OUT OUT OUT
8 9 10 11
7 RR- FL- RL- FR- 12
GND2 IN IN IN IN PMR
Terminal Wire Terminal sign Description Measurement
number color (Terminal Terminal Conditions Voltage
name) (Ignition switch ON (II))
1 BLU/ WALP Drives ABS indicator 1-GND ABS ON 4-6V
WHT (Warning light indicator OFF BelowO.3V
lamp) (Turns the indicator
light drive transistor
to ON, then turns off
the indicator light)
2 BLK GND1 Ground 2-GND -- Below 0.3 V
(Ground 1)
3 YEll
' RR-OUT Drives right-rear 3-GND ABS OFF Battery
WHT (Rear-right outlet solenoid valve indicator Voltage
outlet)
4 YEll FL-OUT Drives left-front 4-GND
BLU (Front-left outlet solenoid valve
outlet)
5 YEll RL-OUT Drives left-rear outlet 5-GND ON Below 0.3 V
GRN (Rear-left solenoid valve (Disconnect
outlet) connector
6 YEll FR-OUT Drives right-front 6-GND A to turn light on)
BLK (Front-right outlet solenoid valve
outlet)
7 BLK GND2 Ground 7-GND -- BelowO.3V
(Ground 2)
8 RED/ RR-IN Drives right-rear inlet 8-GND ABS OFF Battery
WHT (Rear-right solenoid valve indicator Voltage
inlet)
9 RED/ FL-IN Drives left-front inlet 9-GND
BLU (Front-left solenoid valve
inlet)
10 RED/ RL-IN Drives left-rear inlet 10-GND ON BelowO.3V
GRN (Rear-left solenoid valve (Disconnect
inlet) connector
11 RED/ FR-IN Drives right-front 11-GND A to turn light on)
BLK (Front-right inlet solenoid valve
inlet)
12 YEll PMR Drives pump motor 12-GND ABS OFF Pump ON Below 1.0V
RED (Pump relay indicator motor OFF Battery
motor relay) Voltage
ON Below 0.3 V
19-44
BACK
Features

When the brake pedal is pressed during driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In such an
event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the vehicle is
reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. The ASS precisely controls the slip
rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures maneuverability and stability
of the vehicle.
The ASS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the vehicle speed and the wheel speed, then it controls the
brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
SLIP RATE
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
Slip Rate
BRAKING
START POINT
A: Distance without slip
B: Slipped distance
C: Actual distance
C
B VEHICLE SPEED-WHEEL SPEED
SLIP RATE= C= VEHICLE SPEED
NO: Normally Open
NC: Normally Closed
(cont'd)
19-45
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit
Main Control
The ASS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration
based on the rate of deceleration.
The ASS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit
solenoid valve when the slip rate is high.
The pressure reduction control has 3-modes: pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying.
19-46
ABS CONTROL UNIT
r'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-I
" DETECT " VEHICLE SPEED
i I
BACK
Self-diagnosis

1. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU, that check each other for problems.
2. The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
3. Self-diagnosis can be classifield into 2 categories:
o Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS indicator goes off.
o Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
4. When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system:
o Turns the fail-safe relay OFF
o Turns the solenoid valve OFF
o Turn the pump motor OFF
o Turns the ABS indicator ON
Self-diagnosis Table
Diagnostic Trouble Detection hem Detection Timing
CodelDTCI Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
11.13. 15. 17 Wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to powerl CI 0
12.14.16. 18 Wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption I 0
21-24 Pulser 0
31-38 Solenoid (short to body ground/short to wirel C)
0
41-44 Wheel lock 0
51 Motor lock 0
52 Motor stuck OFF (>
53 Motor stuck ON 0 0
54 Fail-safe relay 0
(>
61 Low ignition voltage 0
62 High ignition voltage 0
11 Different diameter tire 0
81 Central Processing Unit (CPUI diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis 0 0
Operation Mode Table
Operation Mode Description
Regular operation Operation in normal condition
Fail-safe mode-S The ABS control unit turns the system off when the control unit detects a problem.
Fail-safe mode-A If the ABS control unit detects a malfunction during an emergency stop. it will turn off the
malfunctioning component. and continue to modulate the rest of the ASS system until the
vehicle comes to a stop. At that. the entire system will be turned off until the problem goes
away.
Fail-safe mode-L The ABS control unit stores a DTC in back-up memory when it detects a problem. If a
problem is detected when the ignition switch is turned ON (III. the ASS control unit will turn
the system off. If the problem goes away, the ABS control unit will turn the system on again.
Fail-safe mode-B The ABS control unit will turn the system off if ignition voltage drops. and will turn on again
when ignition voltage returns to normal.
On-board Diagnosis Function
The ABS control unit is connected to the 16P Data Link Connector.
The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
Fail-safe Mode
A
S. A and L. Sand L
Aand L
S
AandL
Sand L
AandL
AandL
S
B
B
S
S
ABS Indicator
OFF
Comes ON when a problem is
detected.
detected.
ON
detected.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
(cont'd)
19-47
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Modulator
The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the
damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator
because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has
three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an independent
four channel-type, one channel for each wheel.
SOLENOID VALVE
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
1-----------------
!
! "'""'\.:r...1.
I
,
I
i
L __ _
RF LR RR LF
IN: INLET VALVE (NORMAllY OPEN)
OUT: OunET VALVE (NORMAllY ClOSED)
Pressure intensifying mode: Inlet valve open, outlet valve closed
Pressure retaining mode:
Pressure reducing mode:
Motor operation mode:
19-48
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed
Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
Inlet valve closed, outlet valve open
Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir.
When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON.
When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF.
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the
master cylinder.
BACK
Wheel Sensor
~
~
The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic
coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ASS control unit
detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed.
GEARPULSER
O
. WHEEL SENSOR
I ~ ~
at HIGH SPEED
Wheel Speed and Modulator Control
SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
---=:::...::
TIME
PRESSURE
OUTLET
,
VALVE ON
.
,
.
,
.
OFF
, , , ,
.
. .
INLET
' .
.
VALVE ON
OFF
MOTOR
ON
OFF
When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the inlet valve closes to retain the caliper fluid pressure.
When the wheel speed drops further, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The
pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the
caliper fluid pressure.
19-49
BACK
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+
UNDER-HOOD FUSEIRELAY BOX BRAKE SWITCH
(lOAI Oosed: Brake pedal depressed

..

-:_"ulse..,,'rell DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
IGNITION ---__

ILKIYE (7_SAl BRAKEFLUID

\'p-----WHT l lEVEl SWITCH -
IG YEl-----1\JP---tliiloo OGsed: Lowlluid
Ac MIRROR (7.5AI
ABS F/S (lOAI
UNDER-HOOD FUSEIRELAY
BOX CONNECTORS
YEURE
WHT/GRN
UNDER-HOOD
ABS RELAY BOX
D-
ER-DASH
J
5
GRN
WHT/llU
..--YEl/GRN-

YEUBlK
FAIL-SAFE
I
RELAY
2
W
IRI

lK
-'I-
-
G20l
IR lK
MODULATOR UNIT
LEFT-FRONT SOLENOID
-:Nil
'N

RIGHT-FRONT SOLENOID
':1m

LEFT-REAR SDLENOID

.f'i'iI
I
OUT
RIGHT-REAR SOLENOID
.f'i'iI
IN
.f'iIII
PUMP MOTOR
,
....
FUSE/RELAY
I
T,
BLK.2,.
ABS INDICATOR
I
CIRCUIT -
Gsi"
4
FL-IN
8
FL-OUT
FR-IN
,
FR-OUT
5
2
RL-IN
RL-OUT
6
RR-IN
3
RR-OUT
7
2

-
lIP CONNECTOR 10 number) 7P CONNECTOR (0 numberl
[; IfuU" l2?3[1i'M171.2
18P CONNECTOR (0 numb.d 18P CONNECTOR (0 number)
PUMP MOTOR
RELAY CONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH DRIVER'S FUSEIRELAY
BOX CONNECTORS
2DPCONNECTOR (0_1 'IPCONNECTOR <0_1
I 2 3 567 I
is; II 2D 9 10 " 121314 15 1617 18
__ CONNECTORS
22PCONNECTOR (0..-)
Wire side of lemate lerminats
19-50
7 B 9 10 12 13 14
BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR
2P CONNECTOR 4P CONNECTOR
m (-1-)
5 & 7
'4 15
...IImI...
Q:J.IJ
FAIL-sAFE RELAY
CONNECTOR

G302
Bl UlWHT'----
YEUBlK:-----
YEUGRNI-----
YEIJRED-----
GRNI-----
R ED/BLU-----
YEUBLU-----
R ED/BLK-----
EUBLK---- Y
REDlGRNI-----
EUGRN---- Y
R EDJWHT'----
YEUWHT-----
MOOULATOR UNIT
CONNECTOR
(Onu_r)
4 3 2 1
17& 5
10
PUMP MOTOR
CONNECTOR
(Onurn"")
dIb
BACK
WHT/BlX---"::=-7"""
'f

ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A(22P)
CONNECTOR BI'2p)
rD'fCl

DATA lINK
CONNECTOR (16P)
W .. sicIootl __
PCMISCS)
V DATA LINK
SCS
IRN
T Y
PCM IDlC) 12 WHT/GRH
Y IJU(
LT BLU 1
R2 DlfT BLU4-LT BLU
G10l G40l
WHEEL SENSOR

______

I ______

' ______ @REAR
m
2 RIGHT.
- REAR
------I,
G30' G30S
WHEEl SENSOR
CONNECTOR

Terminaisiclo 01
....... -

19-51
BACK
ABS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13,15,17: Wheel Sensor (Open/Short
to Body Ground/Short to Power)
1. Disconnect the ASS control unit connector A (22P).
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and body ground
(see table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal
11 (Right-front) A9: FRW(+)
13 (Left-front) A7:FLW(+)
15 (Right-rear) A19:RRW(+)
17 (Left-rear) A17: RLW(+)
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A I22PI
FLW 1+1 IGRN/BLUI FRW 1+1 IGRN/BLKI
Is there 2 V or more?
YES- Repair short to power in the (+) circuit wire
between the ASS control unit and the appropriate
wheel sensor
NO - Go to step 4.
19-52
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate
(see table).
11 (Rioht-front) A9: FRW(+)
13 (Left-front) A7: FLW(+)
15 (Right-rear) A19: RRW(+)
17 (Left-rear) A17:RLW(+)
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 122PI
FLW 1+1 IGRN/BLUI FRW 1+1 IGRN/BLKI
YES- Go to step 5.
NO- Go to step 6.
5. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the
appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
between the (+) and (-) terminals of the harness
and body ground.
YES - Repai r short to body ground in the (+ ) or (- )
circuit wire between the ASS control unit and the
wheel sensor .
NO- Replace the wheel sensor .
BACK
6. Check the resistance between the appropriate
wheel sensor (+) and (-) circuit terminals (see
table).
1+) Side 1-) Side
11 (Right-front) A9: FRW(+) A8:FRW(-)
13 (Left-front) A7: FLWI+) A6:FLWI-)
15 (Right-rear) A19: RRW 1+) A20: RRW(-)
17 (Left-rear) A17:RLW(+) A18:RLW(-)
ASS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 122PI
FRW I-I IGRNI
RLW I-I IGRYI RRW 1+1 IGRN/YEl)
(s the resistance 450- 2,000 Q ?
YES - Check for loose ABS control unit connectors.
If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control
unit, and recheck.
NO-Goto step 7.
appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance
between the (+) and (-) terminals of the wheel
sensor.
Is the resistance 450- 2,000 Q ?
YES- Repair open in the (+) or (-) circuit wire, or
short between the (+) circuit wire and the 1-)
circuit wire between the ABS control unit and the
wheel sensor..
NO - Replace the wheel sensor..

OTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor (Electrical
Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
described below,the indicator goes off when you test-
drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h).
Only the drive wheels rotated
The vehicle spun
Electrical noise
1. Visually check for appropriate wheel sensor and
pulser installation (see table).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Riaht-front
14 Left-front
16 Riaht-rear
18 Left-rear
Are they installed correctly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO - Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser..
2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector A (22P).
3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
wheel sensor (+ ) and (- ) circuit terminals (see
table).
1+) Side 1-) Side
13 (Left-front) A7: FLW (+) A6: FLW (-)
15 (Right-rear) A19: RRW(+) A20: RRW(-)
17 (Left-rear) A17: RLW (+) A18: RLW(-)
(s there less than 450 Q ?
YES-Repair short to wire between the appropriate
wheel sensor (+) and (-) circuits .
NO-Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
19-53
BACK
ABS Components
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and other wheel
sensor (+) circuit terminals (see table).
DTC Appropriate Othere Terminal
Terminal
12 A9: A7: A19: A17:
FRW(+) FLW(+) RRW{+) RLW{+)
14 A7: A9: A19: A17:
FLW(+) FRW{+) RRW(+) RLW(+)
16 A19: A9: A7: A17:
RRW(+) FRW{+) FLW(+) RLW{+)
18 A17: A9: A7: A19:
RLW{+) FRW (+) FLW(+) RRW(+)
YES - Repair short to wire between the appropriate
wheel sensor and the other wheel sensor .
NO- Clear the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If
the ABS indicator comes on and the same DTC is
indicated, replace the ABS control unit .
19-54
OTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Pulser
1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Does the ABS indicator come on and are OTCs 21,
22, 23, or 24 indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - The system is OK at this time .
3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
tooth (see table).
DTC Appropriate Pulser
21 Right-front
22 Left-front
23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear
Is the pulser OK?
YES-Check for loose ABS control unit connectors.
unit, and recheck .
NO - Replace the driveshaft or the hub unit.
(Chipped pulser gear).
BACK
DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: Solenoid
1. Verify the DTC.
Is Dre 54 indicated?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for
DTC54 .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Disconnect the modulator unit connector and the
A8S control unit connector 8 (12P).
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate A8S
control unit connector 8 (12P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table).
31: FR-IN 811
32: FR-OUT 86
33: FL-IN 89
34: FL-OUT 84
35: RR-IN 88
36: RR-OUT 83
37: RL-IN 810
38: RL-OUT 85
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 112PI
FL-OUT IYEL/BLUI RL-OUT IYEL/GRNI
RR-OUT
IYEL/WHTI
FR-OUT
IYEL/BLKI
=
YES - Repair short to body ground in the
appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the A8S
control and the modulator unit .
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Connect the modulator unit connector.

DTC ApproP!iate Terminal
31: FR-IN 811
32: FR-OUT 86
33: FL-IN 89
34: FL-OUT 84
35: RR-IN 88
36: RR-OUT 83
37: RL-IN 810
38: RL-OUT 85
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12PI
FL-OUT IYEL/BLUI RL-OUT IYEL/GRNI
RR-OUT
IYEL/WHTI
FR-OUT
IYEL/BLKI
=
YES- Replace the modulator unit .
NO- Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the modulator unit connector.
=
(cont'd)
19-55
BACK
ABS Components
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit connector
solenoid circuit terminal to body ground with a
jumper wire (see table).
31: FR-IN No.1
32: FR-OUT No.5
33: FL-IN No.4
34: FL-OUT No.8
35: RR-IN No.3
36: RR-OUT No.7
37: RL-IN No.2
38: RL-OUT No.6
MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR
RR-IN (RED/WHT) RL-IN (RED/GRN)
FL-IN (RED/BLU) FR-IN (RED/BLK)
FL-OUT
,
=
'1 FR-OUT
(VEL/BLU)
4 312
1 (VEL/BLK)
8 716 5
10
IX /J
RR-OUT RL-OUT
(VEL/WHT) (VEL/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
19-56
31: FR-IN 811
32: FR-OUT 86
33: FL-IN 89
34: FL-OUT 84
35: RR-IN 88
36: RR-OUT 83
37: RL-IN 810
38: RL-OUT 85
FLOUT (VEL/BLU) RL-OUT (VEL/GRN)
RROUT
(YEL/WHT)
FR-OUT
(YEL/BLK)
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Repair open in the appropriate solenoid
circuit wire between the A8S control unit and the
modulator unit..
10. Remove the jumper wire from the modulator unit
connector.
BACK
12. Connect the fail-safe relay connector terminal No.2
NOTE: The wire colors of the fail-safe relay
connector are WHT/GRN, BRN/BlK, BlK, YELlGRN.
FAil-SAFE RELAY CONNECTOR

(BRN/BlK)
JUMPER 4 3
WIRE
=
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS
control unit connector B (12P) terminal and body
ground (see table).
IN: 8-10 Q (at 20C, 68F)
OUT: 3 - 5 Q (at 20C, 68F)
31: FR-IN 811
32: FR-OUT B6
33: Fl-IN 89
34: Fl-OUT 84
35: RR-IN 88
36: RR-OUT 83
37: Rl-IN B10
38: Rl-OUT B5
FL-OUT (YEL/BWI RL-OUT (VEL/GRNI
Q
RR-OUT
(YEL/WHTI
FR-OUT
(VEL/BLKI
Is there resistance OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO- Replace the modulator unit .
Q
=

14. Disconnect the modulator unit connector, and
remove the jumper wire from the fail-safe relay
connector terminal.
control unit connector 8 (12P) terminal and all other
solenoid circuit terminals (see table).
31: FR-IN 811
32: FR-OUT B6
33: Fl-IN B9
34: Fl-OUT B4
35: RR-IN 88
36: RR-OUT 83
37: Rl-IN 810
38: Rl-OUT B5
3 4 5 6
2
RR-OUT FL-OUT RL-OUT FR-OUT
(YEL (YEL (YEL (YEL
IWHT) IBLU) IGLN) IBLK)
8 9 10 11
7
RR-IN FL-IN RL-IN FR-IN
12
(RED (RED (RED (RED
IWHn IBLU) IGLN) IBLK)
YES- Repair the short in the appropriate wires
between the A8S control unit and the modulator
unit .
NO- Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
19-57
BACK
ABS Components
control unit connector 8 (12P) terminal and all other
solenoid circuit terminals (see table).
31: FR-IN 811
32: FR-OUT 86
33: FL-IN 89
34: FL-OUT 84
35: RR-IN 88
36: RR-OUT 83
37: RL-IN 810
38: RL-OUT 85
345 6
2 RR-OUT Fl-OUT RL-OUT FR-OUT
(YElIWHTl (YEl/BlUl (YELlGlN) (YELlBlK)
8 9 10 11
7 RR-IN Fl -IN RL -IN FR-IN 12
<RED/WHTl <RED/BlU) CRED/GlN) <RED/BlK>
Is there less than 3 Q ?
NO-Check for loose A8S control unit connectors.
If necessary, substitute a known-good A8S control
unit, and recheck .
19-58
DTC 41, 42, 43, 44: Wheel Lock
1. Check for brake drag.
Do the brakes drag?
YES-Repair the brake drag .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
sensor (see table).
41 Right-front
42 Left-front
43 Right-rear
44 Left-rear
Is it correct?
YES-Go to step 3 .
NO- Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly .
3. Check the modulator using the Honda PGM Tester.
Is kick-back felt in the pedal?
YES- The probable cause was the vehicle spun
during cornering. If the problem recurs, check for
loose connectors, or try a known-good A8S/TCS
control unit .
NO-Check for loose modulator unit connectors. If
necessary, r e p l c ~ the modulator unit .
BACK
DTC 51: Motor Lock
1. Clear the DTC.
Does the ABS indicator come on, and is DTC 51
indicated?
YES - Replace the modulator unit..
NO-The system is OK at this time .
~
~
DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
2. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal
No.3 to No.4 with a jumper wire for a moment,
and check the fuse.
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
~

4 3
+B MOTOR
(WHT) (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES- Check for a short to body ground in the
motor power source circuit .
NO- Go to step 3.
3. Check the ASS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the fuse, and go to step 4.
(cont'd)
19-59
BACK
ABS Components
and check the fuse.
PUMP MOTOR RELA V CONNECTOR
~

4 3
+B MOTOR
(WHT) (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the MCK
circuit .
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check the pump motor relay in the under-hood
ABS relay box (see page 22-52).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Replace the pump motor relay .
No.3 to No.4 with a jumper wire for a moment.
Does the pump motor operate?
NO-Goto step 7.
7. Disconnectthe pump motor connector.
No.3 to No.4 with a jumper wire.
19-60
9. Measure the voltage between the pump motor
PUMP MOTOR CONNECTOR
~ I
! M .... !W"""'"'
YES-Gotostep 10.
hood ABS relay box and the pump motor .
connector terminal No.1 and No.2.
MOTOR GND (BLK)t;joTOR (WHT/BLU)
2 1
':i
YES-Replace the modulator unit .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the pump
motor and body ground (G303) .
11. Disconnect the pump motor connector B (12).
PUMP MOTOR RELA V CONNECTOR
JUMPER ~ M R (VEL/RED)
WIRE 2 1
4 3
+B(WHT)
BACK
13. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit
connector terminal B12 and body ground.
=
hood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit .
14. Remove the jumper wire from the pump motor
relay connector.
connector terminal B 12 and body ground.
YES - Repair a short to power between the under-
hood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit.
NO-If the problem recurs, replace the ABS control
unit.
DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON

1. Check that the pump motor operates with the
ignition switch OFF.
YES-Replace the pump motor relay. (Pump motor
relay stuck ON.).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Remove the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck .
4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal
FUSE/RELAY BOX 16P CONNECTOR
MCK(GRN)
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ABS control unit .
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
(cont'd)
19-61
BACK
ABS Components
6. Disconnect the pump motor connector.
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.1 and
body ground.
crrp
MOTOR IWHT/BLUI
=
YES-Go to step 8.
MOTOR GND (BLK[!jMOTOR (WHT/BLUI
2 1
':L
Terminal side offemale terminals
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the pump
19-62
9. Remove the pump motor relay, then connect relay
terminals No.4 and No.5 together with a jumper
wire.
Does the pump motor run?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Replace the pump motor..
10. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B (12P).
11. Check for continuity between terminal B12 and
body ground.
YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
ABS control unit..
NO -If the problem recurs, replace the ABS control
unit .
BACK
DTC 54: Fail-safe Relay
1. Check the ABS F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Go to step 2.
2. Reinstall the fuse, and turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Does the fuse blow?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the fail-safe relay, pump motor relay, and
modulator unit .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the fail-safe relay in the under-hood ABS
relay box (see page 22-52). The wire colors of fail-
safe relay connector are WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK,
and YEL/GRN.
Is the relay OK?
YES - Leave the fail-safe relay removed, and go to
step 4.
NO- Replace the fail-safe relay .
4. Measure the voltage between the fail-safe relay
FAIL-SAFE RELAY CONNECTOR

=
YES- Go to step 5.
hood fuse/relay box and the fail-safe relay .

5. Connect the fail-safe relay connector terminal No.1
to No.2 with a jumper wire.
+B (WHT/GRNI
JUMPER WIRE

(BRN/BLKI
6. Disconnect the modulator unit connector.
body ground.
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe
relay and the modulator unit .
8. Remove the jumper wire from the fail-safe relay
connector.
(cont'd)
19-63
BACK
ABS Components
9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
-=
the fail-safe relay, modulator unit, and under-hood
ABS relay box .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector A (22P).
12. Measure the voltage between terminal A21 and
body ground.
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
-=
the ABS control unit and the fail-safe relay .
NO-Go to step 13.
19-64
13. Check for continuity between the ABS control unit
connector terminal A21 and body ground.
-=
between the ABS control unit and the fail-safe
relay .
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Check for continuity between the fail-safe relay
-=
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe
relay and body ground .
BACK
15. Connectthe fail-safe relay connectorterminals No.
3 and No.4 with a jumper wire.
2
4 3

FSR IYEL/GRN) GND IBLK)
JUMPER WIRE
16. Check for continuity between the ABS control unit
connector terminal A21 and body ground.
ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A I22P)
=
YES-If the problem recurs, replace the ABS
control unit .
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABS
control unit and the fail-safe relay .
DTC 61, 62: Ignition Voltage
1. Clear the DTC.

EI)
Does the ABS indicator come on?
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Verify the DTC.
Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
YES-Check the charging system .
NO- Do the appropriate troubleshooting for
the DTC .
19-65
BACK
ABS Components
DTC 71: Different Diameter Tire
1. Clearthe DTC.
indicated?
YES- Make sure all four tires are the specified
size .
NO-Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this
time .
19-66
DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Diagnosis, and ROM/RAM Diagnosis
1. Clear the DTC.
indicated?
YES - Replace the ABS control unit .
time .
BACK
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
YES -If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off,
it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, go to step 13.
NO-Goto step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?
YES-Goto step 3.
NO- Repair open in the brake system indicator
circuit .
Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK-UP LIGHT
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly.
Open circuit inside the fuse box.
unit, and recheck .
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge
assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Replace the ABS indicator bulb .
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 16P connector.

9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly
16P connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY 16P CONNECTOR
between the gauge assembly and the ABS control
unit .
NO- Go to step 10.
10. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector.
11. Connect the gauge assembly 22P connector
terminal No. 16 to body ground with a jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE GND (BlK)
-
YES-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and body ground (G501) .
NO-Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly .
(cont'd)
19-67
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Check the POWER MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash driver's fuse/relay box, and reinstall the
fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
14. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal
A 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
JUMPER
WIRE
GND3(BLKI
Does the ABS indicator go off?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ABS
control unit and body ground (G304) .
NO-Go to step 16.
IG2 (YEL/BLKI
YES- Go to step 17.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the CLOCK
(7.5 A) fuse and the ABS control unit .
19-68
17. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal B1
JUMPER
WIRE
WALP IBLU/WHTI
=
unit, and recheck .
NO-Go to step 18.
GAUGE ASSEMBL V 16P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE WALP IBLU/WHTI
assembly and the ABS control unit .
assembly .
BACK
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.

To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (C) and the pump motor connector (B).
2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (A).
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. Tighten the flare nuts to 15 Nm (1.5 kgfm, 11 Ibfft).
2. Connect the modulator unit connector and the pump motor connector.
3. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
4. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off.
5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on.
From
right-front
6mmNUT
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 Ibfft)
6mmBOLT
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
19-69
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the driver's kick panel.
2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors (A).
A
B
3. Remove the ABS control unit (B).
4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
19-70
Wheel Sensor Inspection
1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or
damaged teeth.
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and
pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser.
Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on
the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm
(0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard: 0.4-1.0 mm (0.02-0.04 in.)
Front
====l ~
t
Rear
t
BACK
VVheelSensorR -----------------
eplacement . ,
Install the se ________ : : ~ m :
nsors carefull
y to avoid twO .
Front Istmg the w
Ires.
Rear
/l
WHEEL SENSOR
6mmBOLT
9.8Nm (10k
/. f ~ 72''''''
WHEEL SENSOR
19-71
BACK
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the
dashboard above the glove box, seat belt tensioners ('01-02 models) in the front seat belt retractors, and side airbags
('00-02 models) in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service
Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items will require special precautions and tools, and should be done only
by an authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation ofthe SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and side airbags.
Do not bump the SRS unit. Otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy when the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
Body
Door Dashboard
Component Location Index-Coupe ............... 20-2 Instrument Panel Removal/
Component Location Index Installation ................................................... 20-84
-Sedan Front Door ...................................... 20-4 *Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Component Location Index Removal/Installation ................................... 20-84
-Sedan Rear Door ....................................... 20-6 Passenger's Dashboard Lower Cover
Front Door Panel Removal/ Removal/Installation .................................. 20-85
Installation-Coupe ..................................... 20-8 Center Panel Removal/
Front Door Panel Removal/ Installation .................................................. 20-86
Installation-Sedan ....................................... 20-9 *Glove Box Removal/Installation ................... 20-87
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement ........ 20-11 Driver's Side Vent Removal/
Front Door Latch Replacement ..................... 20-14 Installation ................................................... 20-88
Front Door Glass and Regulator Passenger's Side Vent Removal and
Replacement-Coupe ................................... 20-14 Installation ................................................... 20-89
Front Door Glass and Regulator Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal
Replacement-Sedan .................................. 20-16 and Installation ........................................... 20-89
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation ......... 20-17 *Dashboard Removal/lnstallation .................. 20-90
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ......... 20-19 Steering Hanger Beam
Rear Door Latch Replacement ...................... 20-21
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass and
Replacement ............................................... 20-94
Seats
Regulator Replacement .............................. 20-22 Component Location Index-Coupe ............... 20-97
Sticker Replacement ...................................... 20-25 Component Location Index-Sedan .............. 20-98
Rear Door Hook Pin and *Front Seat Removal/Installation ................... 20-99
Catcher Replacement ................................. 20-26 Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Front Door Glass Adjustment-Coupe ........... 20-26 -Manual without Side Airbag-Coupe ........ 20-102
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment *Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
-Sedan ........................................................ 20-28 -Manual with Side Airbag-Coupe .............. 20-103
Door Position Adjustment ............................. 20-29 Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Door Striker Adjustment ................................ 20-30
Mirrors
-Manual without Side Airbag-Sedan ........ 20-104
*Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Component Location Index-Coupe ............... 20-31 -Manual with Side Airbag-Sedan .............. 20-105
Component Location Index-Sedan ............... 20-32 Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Mirror Holder Replacement-Coupe .............. 20-33 -Manual Height Adjustable
Manual Mirror Replacement-Sedan ............... 20-34 without Side Airbag-Coupe ....................... 20-106
Power Mirror Replacement .......................... 20-35 Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Mirror Holder Replacement-Sedan .............. 20-36 -Manual Height Adjustable
Rearview Mirror Replacement ...................... 20-37
Glass
with Side Airbag-Coupe ............................. 20-107
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Component Location Index-Coupe ............... 20-38 -Manual Height Adjustable
Component Location Index-Sedan ............... 20-39 without Side Airbag-Sedan ....................... 20-108
Windshield Replacement ............................... 20-40 *Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Rear Window Replacement ........................... 20-49 -Manual Height Adjustable
Quarter Glass Replacement -Coupe ............... 20-55 with Side Airbag-Sedan ............................. 20-109
...................................... 20-59
-2-Way Powerwithout Side Airbag ........... 20-110
Component Location Index ........................... 20-60 *Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 20-61 -2-Way Powerwith Side Airbag ................. 20-111
Glass Height Adjustment ............................... 20-62 *Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly-8-Way
Glass Replacement ........................................ 20-62 power without Side Airbag-Coupe ........... 20-112
Drain Channel Replacement .......................... 20-63 *Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly-8-Way
Sunshade Replacement ................................. 20-64 power with Side Airbag-Sedan ................. 20-113
Motor Replacement ....................................... 20-65 *Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ............ 20-66 -8-Way power -Sedan ................................. 20-114
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Front Seat Wiring Harness and
Assembly Replacement ............................. 20-68 Cable Installation-Coupe ............................ 20-115
Position Switch Adjustment .......................... 20-70 Front Seat Wiring Harness
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ...... 20-71
Interior Trim
Installation-Sedan ....................................... 20-118
Front Seat Torsion Bar Replacement
Component Location Index-Coupe ............... 20-72 Manual Height Adjustable ......................... 20-120
Component Location Index-Sedan ............... 20-73 Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/
Trim Removal/Installation Reassembly 2-Way Power ......................... 20-121
-Door Area -Coupe ...................................... 20-74 Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/
Trim Removal/Installation Reassembly-8-Way-Power ........................ 20-122
-Door Area -Sedan ...................................... 20-75 *Front Seat Cover Replacement ..................... 20-123
Trim Removal/Installation Rear Seat Removal/Installation-Coupe ........ 20-128
-Rear Shelf Area -Coupe ............................ 20-76 Rear Seat Removal/Installation-Sedan ........ 20-129
Trim Removal/Installation Rear Seat Arm rest/Tru nk Pass -through
-Rear Shelf Area -Sedan ............................. 20-77 Cover Replacement-Sedan ........................ 20-130
Trim Removal/Installation-Trunk .................. 20-78 Trunk Pass-through Cover
Headliner Removal and Installation ............. 20-79 Key Cylinder Replacement ......................... 20-131
*Carpet Replacement ...................................... 20-81
Console
Rear Seat-back Latch and Lock Cylinder
Replacement-Coupe ................................... 20-132
Center Console Removal/Installation ........... 20-83
Rear Seat-back Latch
Replacement-Sedan ................................... 20-133
Rear Seat-back Lock
CylinderReplacement-Sedan ..................... 20-133
Rear Seat Cover Replacement-Coupe .......... 20-134
Rear Seat Cover Replacement-Sedan .......... 20-135
Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover
Replacement ............................................... 20-137
Rear Seat Cushion Cover
Replacement-Coupe ................................... 20-138
Rear Seat Cushion Cover
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal!
Installation-Coupe ...................................... 20-140
Front Bumper Removal!
Installation-Sedan ....................................... 20-142
Rear Bumper Removal/
Installation-Coupe ...................................... 20-145
Rear Bumper Removal/
Installation-Sedan ...................................... 20-148
Hood
Replacement .................................................. 20-150
Adjustment ..................................................... 20-151
Hood Insulator Replacement ......................... 20-152
Hood Seal Rubber and Hood Molding
Replacement ............................................... 20-153
Trunk Lid
Replacement ............. .................. .............. ..... 20-154
Adjustment .................................................... 20-156
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement.. ............. 20-157
Trunk Lid Dynamic Damper
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement ............ 20-158
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement-Coupe ....................... 20-159
Emblem Replacement-Sedan ....................... 20-160
Front Grille Replacement-Coupe ................. 20-160
Roof Drip Molding Replacement -Coupe .... 20-161
Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings
Roof Moldings Replacement ........................ 20-163
Door Moldings Replacement-Sedan ............ 20-164
Side Sill Panel Replacement-Coupe ............. 20-165
Side Sill Panel Replacement-Sedan ............. 20-166
Fenderwell
Inner Fender Replacement .......................... 20-167
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement .................. 20-167
Rear Air Outlet Replacement ....................... 20-168
Openers
Component Location Index .......................... 20-169
Hood Opener Cable Replacement ................ 20-170
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Lid Opener
Cable Replacement-Coupe ....................... 20-171
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Lid Opener
Cable Replacement-Sedan ...................... 20-173
Hood Release Handle Replacement ............. 20-175
Hood Latch Replacement ............................ 20-175
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door
Opener Replacement .................................. 20-176
Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-177
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement ....................... 20-178
Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement .......... 20-179
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement ................................ 20-180
*Frame Repair Chart ........................................ 20-182
Doors
Component Location Index - Coupe
PULL
DOOR
WEATHERSTRIP
\

SECURITY
INDICATOR
(Driver's)
POCKET c;;> COURTESY
LOWER
WEATHERSTRIP
_______ \I LIGHT LENS
bo< ..

SASH TRIM
,/'
DOOR GLASS
OUTER WEATHERSTRIP
I
S-DElENT
ROD

DOOR GLASS INNER
WEATHERSTRIP llID
I
tP
"'-PULL POCKET
BRACKET
Passenger's:
ARMREST /
SWITCH
PANEL
DOOR PANEL
Removal/Installation,
page 20-8
SWITCH PANEL
I
"Hi>
20-2
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
POWER MIRROR
SWITCH
4
m
POWER
/WINDOW
SWITCH
4
BACK
LOWER RUN
CHANNEL ('99-02 modelsl
GLASS
CENTER LOWER
CHANNEL
GLASS RUN
CHANNEL ('98 model)

POWER WINDOW
MOTOR
\
REGULATOR
/
LOWER
CHANNEL
HANDLE
CYLINDER
SWITCH
G
a .1
RETAINER
CLIP
/ '\'111(} INNER HANDLE dJ
IA/ '*:: ROD
\
LATCH '"
PROTECTOR POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
POWER DOOR INNER HANDLE
LOCK ACTUATOR
20-3
BACK
Doors
Component Location Index - Sedan Front Door
FRONT DOOR SASH
INNER TRIM ('99-02 models)
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP

END INNER TRIM
('99-02 models)
PLASTIC COVER

/ffS
PULL POCKET
(Manual window model)
20-4
FRONT DOOR UPPER SEAL
/
FRONT DOOR WINDOW OUTER TRIM
('99-02 models)
FRONT DOOR WINDOW INNER TRIM
('99-02 models)

/
DOOR GLASS OUTER
WEATHERSTRIP

Ilill
LOWER WEATHERSTRIP DOOR GLASS INNER WEATHERSTRIP
/. P;n!----PULL POCKET
BRACKET
if ______ CENTER
STIFFENER
'--. @f (Power window
. _____ models)
----
Passenger's:
/PULL POCKET
i TRIM

I:;!J
/? POCKET
POWER WINDOW
SWITCH
FRONT DOOR PANEL
Removal/Installation, page 20-9
BACK
CENTER LOWER GLASS RUN CHANNEL GLASS
CENTER LOWER
CHANNEL

REGULATOR

Replacement. page 20-16
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
.... /

POWER @j\
/WINDOW \
MOTOR

FRONT LOWER

LOCK CYLINDER
REGULATOR
HANDLE
(Manual window
model)
ROD
LATCH
RETAINER
CLIP
OUTER HANDLE
Replacement,
page 20-11

"\
ROD 0 OUTER HANDLE
""" PROTECTOR
51f1Cl OIl "-
',Y LATCH PROTECTOR
POWER DOOR POWER DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH
(Driver's)
INNER HANDLE
STRIKER
20-5
BACK
Doors
Component Location Index - Sedan Rear Door
REAR DOOR WINDOW OUTER TRIM
('99-02 models)
REAR DOOR UPPER SEAL
DOOR

REAR DOOR WINDOW
INNER TRIM
('99-02 models)
REAR DOOR WINDOW
END INNER TRIM
('99-02 models)
CHILD LOCK CAP
CATCH c:J'
Replacement,
page 20-26
DOOR HOOK PIN
LOWER
WEATHERSTRIP
PULL POCKET
TRIM

i g
PULL POCKET
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
20-6
REAR DOOR SASH INNER TRIM
('99-02 models)

REAR DOOR SASH END
INNER TRIM
('99-02 models)
-HINGE
ROD

HINGE
LOCK KNOB COVER
PULL POCKET BRACKET
BACK
QUARTER GLASS
GLASS
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
/
FRONT LOWER
GLASS RUN CHANNEL

STICKER ('99-02
Replacement,
page 20-25
/ FRONT LOWER CHANNEL

\\\\\1 _
COLLAR
MOTOR I(W
REGULATOR HANDLE

STRIKER
Adjustment,
page 20-30
LATCH
OUTER HANDLE
/ Replacement, page 20-19
a
G
G
o
LATCH
PROTECTOR OG

1
POWER DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR
REGULATOR
...,------ROD PROTECTOR
e)/INNER
HANDLE
ROD

l LOCK KNOB

G>" LOCK CRANK
\
INNER HANDLE
20-7
BACK
Doors
Door Panel Removal/Installation - Coupe
Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A177A, or equivalent,
commercially available.
1. Remove the mirror mount cover (see step 2 on
page 20-35). Take care notto scratch the door panel.
2. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to
scratch the door panel.
- 1 Pry out the cap (B), and remove the screw.
- 2 Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way.
- 3 Disconnect the inner handle rod (C) and power
door lock switch connector (D).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~
D
B
A
C
20-8
3. Remove the screw, and release the clips (A, B) that
hold the door panel (C) with a commercially
available trim pad remover (D), then remove the
door panel by pulling it upward. Disconnect the
power window switch connectors (E), and the
power mirror switch connector (F) (driver's side),
security indicator connector (G) (driver's side for
some models), and courtesy light bulb socket (H).
Remove the door panel with as little bending as
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
H
L195mmI3.74in.J ~
12mm ----..... =
10.47 in.1 r 1
1mm t = c : ~ ~
10.04 in.1 I.. .1
45mm
11.77 in.J
Fastener Locations
.. : Screw, 1 A [> : Clip, 10 B [>: Clip, 1
G
E
4. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
removal; make sure the connectors and the
courtesy light bulb socket are plugged in properly,
and the inner handle rod is connected properly.
BACK
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation - Sedan
Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A177A or equivalent,
1. Remove the mirror mount cover, power mirror (see
step 2 on page 20-35), manual mirror (see step 2 on
page 20-34). Take care not to scratch the door panel.
2. If applicable, remove the regulator handle (A) by
pulling the clip (8) out with a wire hook (e).
c
B
- 1 Pry out the cap (8), and remove the screw.
- 2 Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way.
- 3 Disconnect the inner handle rod (e) and power
door lock switch connector (D) (for some
models).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
D
B
4. Power window models: Remove the pull pocket
panel (A). Take care not to scratch the door panel.
c
B
- 2 Release the hooks (e), disconnect the power
window switch connector (D), and the power
mirror switch connector (E), driver's side only.
Driver's
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~
Passenger's
Fastener Location
~ : Screw. 1
~ ~
c
c
./
E
D
c
(cont'd)
20-9
BACK
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation - Sedan (cont'd)
5. Manual window model: Remove the pull pocket (A).
Take care not to scratch the door panel.
- 2 Lift out the pull pocket.
Fastener Location
1

B
20-10
6. Release the clips (A, B) that hold the door panel (e)
with a commercially available trim pad remover (D),
then remove the door panel by pulling it upward.
Disconnect the security indicator connector (E)
(driver's) and courtesy light bulb socket (F).
12mm "I
(D.47) )
. ) OF
45mm
(1.77 in.)
Fastener Locations
A l> : Clip, 8 B l> : Clip, 1

C
F
BACK
Make sure the connectors and the courtesy light
bulb socket are plugged in properly, and the rod
is connected properly .
If applicable, install the regulator handle so it
points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with
the glass fully closed.
\ 45"
\
\
\
-----t---
I
Forward
Front Door Outer Handle
Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands .
1. Raise the glass fully.
2. Remove these items:
Mirror mount cover, power mirror (see step 2 on
page 20-35), manual mirror (see step 2 on page
20-34)
Door panel
- Coupe (see page 20-8)
- Sedan (see page 20-9)
Plastic cover, as necessary
3. Remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (A) with center lower glass run channel (B)
by pulling it downward.
A
Fastener Location
: Bolt, 1
SX1.0mm
8Nm
IO.8kgfm,
Slbfftl
__ -8
(cont'd)
20-11
BACK
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A). Release the
retainer clip (8), then remove the lock cylinder (C).
5. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder
(A) and cylinder switch (8).
Fastener Location
~ Screw, 1
20-12
6. Disconnect the cylinder switch connector (A), and
detach the harness clips (8).
0/
B
7. Remove the hole seal (A), and remove the bolts
securing the outer handle protector (8) and outer
handle (C).
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
BACK
8. Remove the outer handle protector (A) from the
outer handle (B) by releasing the hook (C).
9. Detach the harness clip (D) from the outer handle
protector, then remove the outer handle protector
and cylinder switch (E) from the door.
10. Pull out the outer handle (A). Pry the outer handle
rod (B) out of its joint (C) using diagonal cutters (D).
NOTE:
o To ease reassembly, note the distance (E) ofthe
outer handle rod on the joint before
disconnecting it.
o Take care not to bend the outer handle rod.
o Use a shop towel (F) to protect the opening in the
door.
F
11. Replace the bushing (G) on the outer handle.
12. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items:
o Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed
properly.
o Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,
and each rod is connected securely.
o Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
o When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer
door handle bolts loose so the inner protector
does not interfere with the lock cylinder.
o Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the
handle, then install the lock cylinder. Be sure the
clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder.
20-13
BACK
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Mirror mount cover, power mirror (see page 20-
35), manual mirror (see page 20-34)
Door panel
Plastic cover, as necessary
Outer handle (see page 20-11)
3. Detach the harness clip (A) and inner handle rod (B),
and disconnect the actuator connectors (C).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 3
6J 6x 1.0mm
~ 6 Nm (0.6 kgfm,
4Ibfft)
F
4. Remove the screws, then remove the latch (D)
through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend
the outer handle rod (E), cylinder rod (F), lock rod
(G) and inner handle rod (B).
5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in
properly, and each rod is connected securely.
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
20-14
Door Glass and Regulator
Replacement - Coupe
Mirror mount cover (see page 20-35)
Door panel (see page 20-8)
Plastic cover (see page 20-2)
2. Carefully lower the glass until you can see the bolts,
then loosen them. Slide the guide (A) to the rear,
then remove the glass from the guide, and lift it out
through the window slot. Take care not to drop the
glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
6x 1.0 mm
(@)-
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
A
BACK
3. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and
harness clip (8) from the door. Scribe a line around
the rear roller guide bolt (C) to show the original
adjustment. Remove the bolts (C, D) and loosen the
bolts (E), then remove the regulator (F) through the
hole in the door.
Fastener Locations
C, D Bolt, 4
F
E
6x1.0mm J
8Nm
IO.8kgfm,
6Ibfft)

B
4. Scribe a line (A) across the regulator (8) and sector
gear (C).
5. Using a Torx T20 bit, remove the screws, then
separate the power window motor and regulator
(8).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 3
_@)mDDJ
6. Grease the moving portions of the regulator (A)
indicated by the arrows.
7. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
of removal, and note these items:
Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary.
20-15
BACK
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement - Sedan
Mirror mount cover, power mirror (see page 20-
35), manual mirror (see page 20-34)
2. Remove the screws securing the pull pocket
bracket (A). On power window models, remove the
nut securing the center stiffener (B).
Fastener Locations
.: Nut, 1
A

(0.8 kgf.m,
6Ibfft)
\
B
3. Remove the plastic cover (see page 20-4).
4. Carefully raise the glass until you can see the bolts,
then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out
through the window slot. Take care not to drop the
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
20-16
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
5. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and
harness clip (B) from the door (power window
models). Remove the bolts (C, D) and loosen the
bolts (E), then remove the regulator (F) through the
hole in the door .
Power window models:
Fastener Locations
c : Bolt, 3 D : Bolt, 1 E : Bolt, 3
8Nm

6x1.0mm
'j, (0.8 kgfm,
6Ibfft)
Manual window models:
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 3 E
6x 1.0 mm
8Nm
(0.8kgfm,
6Ibfft)
-j
BACK
6. Grease all the sliding surfaces ofthe regulator (A)
where shown.
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-28).
Rear Door Panel Removall
Installation
Trim Pad Remover, Snap-on A177A or equivalent,
1. If applicable, remove the regulator handle (A) by
pulling the clip (B) out with a wire hook (C).
- 2 Move the inner handle forward and half-way
out, then disconnect the inner handle rod (C).
Fastener Location
: Screw, 1

c
c
B
A
(cont'd)
20-17
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Power window models: Remove the pull pocket
panel (A). Take care not to scratch the door panel.
- 2 Release the hooks (C), and disconnect the
power window switch connector (D).
Fastener Location
4. Manual window model: Remove the pull pocket (A).
Take care not to scratch the door panel.
- 2 Lift out the pull pocket.
Fastener Location
1

B
20-18
---
--------

\pJ
5. Release the clips that hold the door panel (A) with a
(commercially available) trim pad remover (8), then
remove the door panel by pulling it upward, and
removing the courtesy light bulb socket (C).
12mm
{O.47 in.)
1mm
(O.04in.)
Fastener Locations
C>: Clip, 7
_<!ll
45mm
(1.77 in.)
C
A
BACK
Make sure the connector and courtesy light bulb
socket are plugged in properly.
If applicable, install the regulator handle so it
points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with
the glass fully closed.
Forward
Rear Door Outer Handle
Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands .
1. Raise the glass fully .
Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4)
3. Remove the screws, then remove the rod protector
(A).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 3
A
(cont'd)
20-19
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the screws, then remove the power door
lock actuator (A) from the door. Take care not to
bend the actuator rod (8).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
)
5. Remove the screws, then move the latch (A) down.
Take care not to bend the inner handle rod (8), lock
rod (C) and actuator rod (D).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 3
6x 1.0 mm
~ 6 N m
~ (0.6 kgfm,
4Ibfft)
20-20
6. Remove the bolts securing the outer handle (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
6x 1.0mm
~ 9.8Nm A
~ {1.0 kgf.m,. /
721bfftl V
7. Release the hook (A) while holding the outer handle
(8), then remove the outer handle and outer handle
protector (C) from the door.
e
I
,,'\..-------' 11
A
and make sure the door locks and opens properly.
BACK
Rear Door Latch Replacement
Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4)
Outer handle (see page 20-19)
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) and actuator rod (B),
then remove the power door lock actuator IC).
4. Disconnect the lock rod (A) from the lock crank (B).
-----
A
- - . ~
.--
/'
/
. ....----.
5. Move the latch (A) until you can disconnect each
rod, and disconnect the inner handle rod (B), lock
rod (C) and actuator rod (D) from the latch.Take
care not to bend any of the rods.
A
(cont'd)
20-21
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement
(cont'd)
6. With a shop towel (A) to protect the outer handle
opening, remove the latch (B) through the outer
handle opening.
B
~ '
______ ----, A
7. Remove the inner handle rod (A) and lock rod (B)
from the rod holder (C), and remove the lock crank
(D) from the door.
note these items:
Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and each rod is connected securely .
Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
20-22
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and
Regulator Replacement
Pull pocket bracket (see page 20-6)
Rod protector (see page 20-6)
2. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then loosen them. Slide the guide (B) to the
rear, then remove the glass from the guide, and
carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
@)m
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
A
B
BACK
3. Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) from the rear
channel (0). Pull the sub-seal (E) away as needed,
and remove the screw (F). Pull the glass run
channel (G) away as needed from the rear channel.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 1 B Bolt, 1

--IJJJJJ.J.JJJJ.J
,..--)))J!J!J!)))))) {O.8 kgf.m,
6lbfftl
----
F : Screw, 1
4xO.8mm

{O.4 kgfm,
3lbfftl
o
4. Move the rear channel (A) away from the quarter
glass (B) and the rear door glass (C), then carefully
remove the rear channel out through the window
slot.
A
5. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside
the door.
t
o
I
L
(cont'd)
20-23
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to
damage the door molding (B).
7. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) from the
door (power window models). Remove the bolts (B),
and loosen the bolts (C), then remove the regulator
(D) through the hole in the door.
Power window models
Fastener Locations
B : Bolt, 2 C : Bolt, 2
20-24
6x 1.0 mm
8Nm
(0.8 kgfm,
6Ibfft)
Manual window models
Fastener Locations

6x1.0mm
8Nm
(0.8 kgfm,
6Ibfft)
)

8. Scribe a line across the regulator (A) and sector
gear (B). Connect a 12 V battery supply to the
power window motor, and move the regulator until
you can remove the bolts securing the power
window motor (C).
Fastener Locations

6x1.0mm
7Nm
(0.7 kgf.m,
5Ibfft)
B
9. Remove the bolts, then separate the regulator (A)
and power window motor (C).
BACK
10. Grease the moving portions of the regulator (A)
closed.
Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
page 20-28)
Sticker Replacement
1. Clean the quarter glass surface with a sponge
dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the surface.
2. Apply the sticker where shown.

__ - 0
... mm /0.6' In.1
20-25
BACK
Doors
Rear Door Hook Pin and Catch
Replacement
1. With a Torx T40 bit, remove the door hook pin (A)
from the door.
(
A
_____ 10x1.2Smm
32 Nm (3.3 kgf.m,
24Ibfft)
C'! /
- , ~
'UJ
2. With a Torx T40 bit, remove the bolts, then remove
the catch (A) from the body.
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
ax 1.2Smm
0-
22Nm
(2.2 kgf.m,
16Ibf.ft)
A A..><_/
\(/!/;
/
/
3. Install the hook pin and catch in the reverse order
of removal, and apply liquid thread lock to the
threads of the door hook pin.
20-26
Front Door Glass Adjustment -
Coupe
NOTE: Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel
for damage or deterioration, and replace them if
necessary.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Mirror mount cover (see page 20-35)
Pull pocket bracket (see page 20-2)
C
6x 1.0mm
a Nm (o.a kgf.m, 6 Ibfft)
4. Loosen the roller guide bolts (C), and adjust the
glass (A) so it is parallel with the glass run channel
(B).
5. Tighten the roller guide bolts (C).
BACK
6. Loosen the front lower channel mounting bolts (A)
and nut (8), then lower the glass (C).
c
A
B
5xO.8mm
3 Nm {0.3 kgfm,
2lbfft}
6x 1.0 mm
8 Nm {0.8 kgfm, 6 Ibfftl
7. Push the front lower channel (D) against the glass
(C) while you tighten the mounting bolts (A) and
nut (8).
8. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
9. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Check that
the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (8)
evenly.
10. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A).
Adjust the rate of water flow (8)
Do not use a nozzle.
Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door.
12 mm (1/2 In.1 , "I
lr
J
~ ./111 05 m (18 m.1
A ~ A
300 mm (12 in. I
11. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
20-27
BACK
Doors
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment - Sedan
NOTE: Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel
for damage or deterioration, and replace them if
necessary.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Mirror mount cover, front door (see page 20-34)
Door panel
- Front door (see page 20-9)
- Rear door (see page 20-17)
Center stiffener, front door (see page 20-4)
Pull pocket bracket
Plastic cover
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
glass mounting bolts (8), then loosen them.
Front:
c A
B
20-28
Rear:
B c
4. Push the glass (A) against the center channel (C),
then tighten the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Check that
the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (8)
evenly.
BACK
7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
Use a 12mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A).
Adjust the rate of water flow as shown(B).
Do not use a nozzle.
Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door.
12
8;' .;1r}m"8mo'
A
300 mm (12 in.)
8. Reinstall all removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: After installing the door, check for a flush fit with
the body, then check for equal gaps between the front,
rear, and bottom door edges and the body. Check that
the door and body edges are parallel. Before adjusting,
replace the mounting bolts.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when
adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
E
Loosen the door mounting bolts (B) slightly, and
move the door in or out until it's flush with the
body.
Remove the inner fender (see page 20-167). With
a shop towel (C) on the jack (D), slightly loosen
the hinge mounting bolts (E), and move the door
backward or forward, up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps.
8x 1.25mm

B
8x1.25mm
29 Nm (3.0 kgfm,
22Ibfft)

/// ./,.-
/ /-
A
(cont'd)
20-29
BACK
Doors
Door Position Adjustment (cont'd)
3. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
rear of the doors flush with the body.
A
4. Grease the pivot portions of the hinges indicated by
the arrows.
5. Apply body paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-29).
20-30
Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A); the striker nuts are
fixed. The striker can be adjusted slightly up or down,
and in or out.
,. Loosen the screws (8), then insert a shop towel (C)
between the body and striker.
B
8x1.25mm
c
2. Lightly tighten the screws.
A
3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the
striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (0). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
4. Loosen the screws and remove the shop towel.
5. Lightly tighten the screws.
6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door
against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
BACK
Mirrors
RUBBER
BOOT
MIRROR HOLDER
MIRROR MOUNT
COVER
20-31
BACK
Mirrors
Component Location Index - Sedan
POWER MIRROR (Type A)
Replacement, page 20-35 MIRROR MOUNT
COVER
) ~
MIRROR HOLDER
POWER MIRROR (Type B)
~ ~
MOUNT / ~
SPRING
RETAINER
SPRING
MANUAL MIRROR
MIRROR MOUNT
COVER
MIRROR HOLDER
MIRROR MOUNT
COVER
MIRROR HOLDER
REARVIEW MIRROR
20-32
BACK
Mirror Holder Replacement - Coupe
1. Pry the mirror holder (A) out from the bottom until
you can see the pivot (B) of the actuator, then
detach the pivot using a flat-tip screwdriver. Take
care not to scratch the mirror(C).
B
A
2. Remove the actuator shafts (A) and release the
hooks (B) from the actuator (C), then remove the
mirror holder (0). If equipped, disconnect the
mirror defogger terminals.
B
3. Remove the actuator shafts (A) and rubber boots
(B) from the mirror holder (C). Check the actuator
shaft and rubber boot for damage or deterioration,
and replace them if necessary.
A
~
~ ~
C/,
4. Install the mirror holder in the reverse order of
Before installing the mirror holder, install the
actuator shafts and boots on the actuator.
Apply the grease to the pivot (A) and actuator
shafts.(B).
Reattach the mirror holder (C) to the pivot (A) and
actuator shafts (B) of the actuator, then carefully
push on the pivot and actuator shaft portions of
the holder until it locks into place.
If necessary, before installing the mirror holder,
heat the pivot and actuator shafts joi nt portions
of the holder.
Check the operation of the actuator.
B A
... IiiiPii ... ~
20-33
BACK
Mirrors
Manual Mirror Replacement - Sedan
1. Lower the door glass fully.
2. Carefully pry out the mirror mount cover (Al by
hand in the sequence shown.
3. Remove the bolts securing the mirror.
Fastener Locations

20-34
5xO.8mm
5Nm
IO.5kgfm,
4lbfftl
4. While holding the mirror, push out the clip (Al, and
remove the mirror. Take care not to scratch the
door.
A
5. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Power Mirror Replacement
1. Lower the door glass fully.
2. Carefully pry out the mirror mount cover (A) by
hand in the sequence shown.
3. Remove the door panel (see page 20-9).
4. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the
harness clip (8), then remove the nuts or bolts
securing the mirror.
Fastener Locations
Bolt, 3
5Nm

(0.5 kgfm,
4Ibfft)
: Nut, 3 (Type B)
5xO.8mm J
5Nm
(0.5 kgfm,
4Ibfft)
5. While holding the mirror, push out the clip (A), and
remove the mirror (8). Take care not to scratch the
door.
A
B
(0
o
6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly .
Attach the harness clip.
20-35
BACK
Mirrors
Mirror Holder Replacement - Sedan
1. Carefully pull outthe bottom edge ofthe mirror
holder (A) by hand. Take care not to scratch the
mirror.
D
A
I
B
c
2. Separate the mirror holder from the actuator (8) by
slowly pulling them apart while removing the
adhesive (C), and detaching the clips (D). If
equipped, disconnect the mirror defogger
terminals.
20-36
3. If equipped, connect the mirror defogger terminals.
4. Reattach the clips of the mirror holder to the
actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the clip portions of the
mirror holder until the holder locks into place.
5. Check the operation of the actuator.
BACK
Rearview Mirror Replacement
1. Slide the rearview mirror (A) down toward the
bottom of the windshield, then detach it from the
spring (B) in the mount (e), and remove the
rearview mirror. Take care not to scratch the mirror
base (0).
2. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.
3. Fitthe mirror base over the mount.
4. Secure the mirror by turning the base 90.
20-37
BACK
Glass
BUTYL TAPE, 2
('98modell
ft)

1
MOLDING MIDDLE UPPER SEAL
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
=/ /MOLDINGUPPERSEAL'
~ ~ ~ c : s ; : . WINDSHIELD
/ He.lao,m,"" pa., 2O-MJ
REAR WINDOW
MOLDING
~
20-38
DASHBOARD
SEAL
/
RUBBER DAM
/
FASTENER' 2
(Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
FASTENER,2
~ ~ 1011 ....... body shiel
~
/
QUARTER GLASS
,!PPER SPACER, 2 WINDOW ANTENNA
( 00-02 models) TERMINAL COVER
~ . WINDOW ANTENNA
~ TERMINAL BASE
~ I page 20-59
UPPER FASTENER, 2
~ ~ E:::i> I (Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
~ ~ ~ ('98-99 models)
~ .---UPPER FASTENER, 2
~ (Clip-type, body side)
('98-99 models)
'I ___ REAR WINDOW
~ Replacement, page 20-49
~ ____ LOWER FASTENER, 2
~ (Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
m
----- LOWER FASTENER, 2
(Self-adhesive-type, body side)
BACK
MOLDING UPPER
SEAL,2
('98-00 models)
MOLDING CORNER (Required for replacement or
/
FASTENER' 2
SEAL,2 r reinstallation on '99-02 models)
WINDSHIELD \ /J
MOLDING -//
\
FASTENER,2
(Clip-type, body side)
(Required for replacement or
,einstallation on '99-02 models)

y
RUBBER DAM
for replacement or
V "7 A reinstallation on '99-02 models)

RUBBER DAM A

-.;;;;;;;;;::;:::::::::::,. RUBBER DAM B
WINDSHIELD
'"
DASHBOARD SEAL
REAR WINDOW
MOLDING
MOLDING SIDE SEAL, 2
('98-00 models)
WINDOW ANTENNA WINDOW ANTENNA
TERMINAL COVER TERMINAL BA%E UPPER SPACER, 2
I
('00-02 models,
U.S.-Produced)
'/
UPPER FASTENER, 2
{:::::S. (Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
reinstallation on '99-02 models,
/
Japan produced)
/ ----UPPER FASTENER, 2
J (Self-adhesive-type, body side)
./ (Required for replacement or
/ reinstallation on '99-02 models,
// Japan produced)
/ MOLDING CORNER SEAL, 2
::---=::::=::- LOWER CORNER FASTENER, 2

___ (Required for replacement or
reinstallation on '99-02 models)
lE]J .. LOWER CORNER FASTENER, 2
reinstallation on '99-02 models)
LOWER CENTER FASTENER
('01-02 models, Japan produced)
LOWER CENTER FASTENER
('01-02 models, Japan produced)
20-39
BACK
Glass
Windshield Replacement
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
piano wire.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
Rearview mirror (see page 20-37)
Sunvisors and holders, both sides, Roof console,
Grab handles, both sides (see page 20-79)
Front door opening trim, both sides as necessary
Front pillar trim, both sides
Windshield wiper arms and cowl cover (see page
22-188)
2. Remove the molding (A) from the edge of the
windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife.
B
B
3. Pull down the front portion of the headliner (see
page 20-79). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, or you may crease or break it.
20-40
4. Apply protective tape (A) along the edge of the
dashboard (B) and body as shown. Using an awl,
make a hole through the rubber dam (C), adhesive
(0), and dashboard seal (E) from inside the vehicle.
Push a piece of piano wire (F) through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
A
F ~ L
~
/
A D
5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the windshield as possible to
prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
around the entire windshield.
A
~
~
6. Carefully remove the windshield.
BACK
7. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a
thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the bonding
surface around the entire windshield opening
flange:
Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the
body.
Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
8. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
grease, and water from getting on the clean surface.
9. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, use a putty
knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fastener, the rubber dam, and the dashboard seal
from the windshield. Clean the shaded portion of
the windshield with alcohol where new adhesive is
to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is
kept free of water, oil, and grease.
Coupe:
Sedan:
10. Glue the rubber dam (A), fasteners (B) and
dashboard seal (C) to the inside face of the
windshield (D) as shown:
Be sure the rubber dam, fasteners, and
dashboard seal line up with the alignment marks
(E).
Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied.
Coupe:
A
(cont'd)
20-41
BACK
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
Sedan:
11 mm
(0.43 in.'
1
1
1
1
1
I
_I
c
20-42
t
D
12mm
(0.47 in.'
A
E A
11. Apply primer (3M N-200, or equivalent) to the areas
between the alignment marks (A), and glue the
adhesive tape (B) (NITTO 501, or equivalent) to the
edge of the windshield. Be careful not to touch the
windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Coupe:
_ : Apply primer here.
6mm
(0.2 in.'
BACK
Sedan:
~ : i : Apply primer here.

I
I
I
I
I
~
6mm
(O.2in.1
50mm
(2in.1
12. Glue the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the
edge of the windshield (e):
Be sure the alignment mark (D) of the molding
lines up with the alignment mark (E) of the
windshield .
Be careful not to touch the windshield where
Coupe:
(cont'd)
20-43
BACK
Glass
Sedan:
20-44
I
l1J
B
13. Glue the molding middle upper seal (coupe) (A),
molding upper seal (coupe) (B), molding Corner
Seal (Sedan) (C) and molding side seal (coupe) (0)
to the molding (E). Be careful not to touch the
windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Coupe:
f
E 24.5mm B
'. J
/
A
.
175mm175mm
(6.89 in.) (6.89 in.)
E

A
BACK
Sedan: 14. Install the fasteners to the body.
Fastener Locations
[>: Fastener, 2
./
/
15. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it.
Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield
and body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown. Be careful not to touch the windshield
where adhesive will be applied.
A
16. Remove the windshield.
(cont'd)
20-45
BACK
Glass
17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
around the edge of the windshield (A) between the
dam (8) and molding (e) as shown, then lightly
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
Apply glass primer to the molding.
Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and
do not get the body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surface.
Coupe:
_ : Apply glass primer here.
8.Smm
(0.33 in.)
!
20-46
Sedan:
_ : Apply glass primer here.
8.Smm
(0.33
i
CD
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
A
A
BACK
18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to
the original adhesive remaining around the
windshield opening flange. Let the body primer dry
for at least 10 minutes:
Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be
careful not to mix up the glass and body primer
sponges.
Mask off the dashboard before painting the
flange.
W&!, : Apply body primer here.
5mm
10.2 in.)
19. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "v" in the end of the
nozzle (A) as shown.
7 mm 10.27 in.)
20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
around the edge of the windshield (B) between the
dam (e) and molding (D) as shown. Apply the
adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass
primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
Coupe:
2mm
10.OBin.)
-H-
13mm I ~ .
10.51 in.) 1-1 .A
B mm 10.31 in.)
A
\ ~ D C A
;1 D
C
2.5 mm
A
\ m.----B
I O O ~
(cont'd)
20-47
BACK
Glass
Sedan:
2mm
(O.OSin.'
-I-!-
13mm ~
(0.51 in.' ..
f.--I
20-48
S mm (0.31 in.'
2.5mm
(0.1 in.'
B
21. Use suction cups (A) to hold the windshield over
the opening, align it with the alignment marks (8)
made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive.
Lightly push on the windshield until its edges are
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do
not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry.
22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with alcohol.
23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray
water over the windshield and check for leaks.
Mark leaking areas, and let the windshield dry, then
seal with sealant:
o Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after
windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
o Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after
installation.
24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Install the
rearview mirror after the adhesive has dried
thoroughly. Advise the customer not to do the
following things for 2 to 3 days:
o Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
o Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
BACK
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE:
Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
piano wire.
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
Do not damage ~ e rear window defogger grid lines,
window antenna grid lines, and terminals.
1. Remove the trunk lid (see page 20-154).
Sedan (see page 20-129)
Rear seat cushion
Rear seat side bolster (both sides)
Coupe (see page 20-128)
Rear seat-back
Rear seat-cushion
Rear door opening trim (both sides as necessary)
Rear pillar trim (both sides)
Rear bulkhead cover
Center anchor bolt of the center belt
Center belt cover
High mount brake light
Lock cylinder trim
Rear shelf
Rear bulkhead cover
Rear shelf
Door sill trim
Rear side trim panel
Upper anchor bolts of the front and rear seat
belts
Coat hanger
Quartertrim panel
4. Remove the window antenna terminal cover (A)
from the window antenna terminal base (8), and
disconnect the window antenna connector (C).
------ -- - -_ .. - ---
--.--c..J----
5. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors
(A).
A
6. Remove the molding (A) from the edge ofthe rear
window (8). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife.
A ~
B
7. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (see
page 20-79). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, or you may crease or break it.
(cont'd)
20-49
BACK
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
8. Apply protective tape (A) along the inside and
outside edges of the body as shown. Using an awl,
make a hole through the adhesive (8) from inside
the vehicle. Push a piece of piano wire (C) through
the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of
wood.
9. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the rear window as possible to
prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
through the adhesive around the entire rear
window.
A
10. Carefully remove the rear window.
20-50
11. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in) on the
bonding surface around the entire rear window
opening flange:
bonding
Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
Remove the fasteners from the body.
grease, and water from getting on the surface.
13. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, then
clean the shaded portion of the rear window with
alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make
sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil,
and grease.
BACK
14. Glue the fasteners (A, B) and spacers (U.S.-
Produced); (C) to the inside face of the rear window
as shown. If necessary, apply primer (3M N-200, or
equivalent) to the areas where the window antenna
terminal base (0) will be glued, then glue the base
on:
Be sure the fasteners, spacers (and window
antenna terminal base cover) line up with the
alignment marks (E).
Be careful not to touch the rear window where
U.S.-Produced models:
:t;';M: : Apply primer here.
Fastener and spacer Locations
B [> : Fastener
Coupe, 2 (both sides)
Sedan, 3 (both sides and center)
C [>: Spacer, 2
13.5 mm 13.5 mm
(0 .. 53in.)

D
2mm
(0.08 in.)
Japan produced models:
: Apply primer here.
Fastener Locations
A[> : Fastener. 2 B [>: Fastener, 2
13.5 mm 135 mm
in'l

A " .. -
E E
-------- ------
C
2mm
(0.08 in.)
15. Apply the adhesive tape (A) (3M 4216, or
equivalent) to the edge of the rear window (B):
Be sure the adhesive tape lines up with the
alignment marks (C) .
...
(cont'd)
20-51
BACK
Glass
16. Glue the molding (A) around the edge of the rear
window (B):
Be sure the joint (Cl lines up with the alignment
mark (0) .
17. Sedan only, glue the molding corner seal (A) to the
molding (B). Be careful not to touch the rear
window where adhesive will be applied.
20-52
5mm
(0.2 in.)
18. Install the upper fasteners (A) (Japan-Produced
models). Glue the lower fasteners (B) to the body
as shown. Align the lower fasteners with 1.0 mm
(0.04 in.) offset surface ofthe rear parcel shelf (C) .
U.S.-Produced models:
Fasterner Locations
B [> : Fastener
Coupe, 2 (both sides)
Sedan, 3 (both sides and center)
~ I
- ~ -
Japan-Produced models:
Fastener Locations
A [> : Fastener, 2 B [> : Fastener, 2
~
.. \\.---\- . --.
~ , ~ - - - - ~ ~ ~ ~
BACK
19. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it.
Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window
and body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window
where adhesive will be applied.
A
20. Remove the rear window.
21. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
along the edge of the rear window (A) and molding
(B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
cheesecloth:
Do not apply body primer to the rear window,
and do not get the body and glass primer
sponges mixed up.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
: Apply glass primer here. 9 mm
-1----
I
I
A
(0.35 in.)
. ~ B
I "
. \. "., !J
./
A B
the original adhesive remaining around the rear
window opening flange. Let the body primer dry for
at least 10 minutes:
sponges .
)lI,l;I,; : Apply body primer here.
5mm
(0.2 in.)
20mm
(0.79 in.)
23. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the
~
--, 10 mm (0.39 in.)
"-
"
...
7 mm (0.27 in.)
(cont'd)
20-53
BACK
Glass
to ensure continuous delivery. Putthe cartridge in a
around the edge of the rear window (8) as shown.
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
13mm
(0.51 in.)
20-54
2mm
(0.08 in.)
--t-t-
1 ~ : A
I--..J
8 mm (0.31 in.)
B
f
( ~ \""""""s,
A
25. Use suction cups (A) to hold the rear window over
the opening, align it with the alignment marks (8)
you made in step 19, and set it down on the
adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its
edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way
around. Do not open or close the doors until the
adhesive is dry.
A
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel
dampened with alcohol. '
water over the rear window and check for leaks.
Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry,
then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at
least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the
vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it
must be driven slowly.
28. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Advise the
customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3
days:
Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
Twist the body excessively (such as when going
BACK
Quarter Glass Replacement - Coupe
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect your hands .
Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface.
1. Remove these items (see page 20-128):
Rear seat-back
Rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead cover
Center belt lid
Lock cylinder trim
Rear shelf
Door sill trim
Upper anchor bolts of the front and rear seat
belts
Coat hanger
Quarter trim panel
4. From inside the vehicle, use a knife (A) to cut
through the quarter glass adhesive (B) all the way
around:
If the quarter glass (C) is to be reinstalled, take
care not to damage the molding (D).
Ifthe molding is damaged, replace the quarter
glass, molding and clips (E) as an assembly.
If any ofthe clips are broken, the quarter glass
can be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to step
9).
Apply protective tape (F) along the edge of the
entire quarter glass opening flange.
E
Upper portion:
Lower portion:
Center piller portion:
Clip portion:
C
I 0
~ ~
! \ \ --
A F B
5. Carefully remove the quarter glass, and check the
molding for damage, and replace the quarter glass
if necessary.
(cont'd)
20-55
BACK
Glass
Quarter Glass Replacement - Coupe (cont'd)
6. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a
thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding
surface around the entire quarter glass opening
flange:
bonding.
If any of the clips are broken, remove them from
the body.
Mask off surrounding surfaces before applying
primer.
grease, and water from getting on the glass surface.
8. Ifthe old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off all traces of old adhesive
from the quarter glass. Scrape the old adhesive
from the molding with a knife, then clean the
quarter glass and molding shaded portion of the
with alcohol where adhesive is to be applied. Make
sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil,
and grease.
20-56
9. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and
either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light
coat of primer (C-100, or equivalent), then apply
butyl tape (A) and (B) to the molding (C) as shown:
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape.
A
300mm
(1.2 in.1
B
~ ~ / ~ ~ D - - - - \ J
400 mm (15.7 in.1
A------/
c
BACK
10. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and
either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body
holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the
quarter glass upright in the opening, and make
alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and
body with a grease pencil at the three points shown.
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
11. Remove the quarter glass.
12. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to
the inside face of the quarter glass (A) as shown,
then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass,
and do not get the body and glass primer
sponges mixed up.
If you do the adhesive may not bond to the
quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the
quarter glass is installed.
0',.@'i : Apply glass primer here.
10mm
(0.4 in.)
10mm
(0.4 in.)
"...--A
10mm
(0.4 in.)
A
(cont'd)
20-57
BACK
Glass
Quarter Glass Replacement - Coupe (cont'd)
the original adhesive remaining around the quarter
glass opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at
least 10 minutes:
sponges.
Mask off the dashboard before painting the
flange.
.. : Apply body primer here.
37mm
(1.5 in.)
14. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the
10 mm (0.39 in.)
7 mm (0.27 in.)
20-58
to ensure continuous delivery. Putthe cartridge in a
around the edge of the quarter glass (B) as shown:
After applying the adhesive, peel the separator
off the butyl tape .
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
applying the glass primer. Make slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
2mm
(0.08 in.)
-.f-i-
13mm I ~
(0.51 in.) : A
2mm
(0.08 in.)
2mm
f.-...j
8 mm (0.31 in.)
A
(0.08 in.) r ~
2 mm (0.08 in.)
BACK
16. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (8)
over the opening, align the clips or the alignment
marks (C) made in step 10, and set it down on the
adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its
edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way
around. Do not open or close the doors until the
adhesive is dry.
B
surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with alcohol.
water over the quarter glass and check for leaks.
Mark the leaking areas and let the quarter glass dry,
then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at
least 4 hours after quarter glass installation. If the
vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it
must be driven slowly.
19. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Advise the
customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3
days:
Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up .
Twist the body excessively (such as when going
Sticker Replacement
1. Clean the quarter glass surface with a sponge
2. Apply the sticker where shown.
GLASS MOLDING
EDGE
(
__ BLACK C.ERAMIC EDGE
I 3 mm (0.11 in.)
~ ~ i
20-59
BACK
Moonroof
20-60
~
SUNSHADE
FRAME
GLASS
Height Adjustment, page 20-62
Closing Force and Opening Drag
Check, page 20-71
CABLE ASSEMBLY
MOTOR
~ REAR DRAIN VALVE
~
REAR DRAIN TUBE
~
BACK
Water leaks 1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass
weatherstrip.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise 1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip
and the roof panel.
Motor noise 1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Glass does not move, 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
but motor turns 2. Check for foreign material stuck between the guide rail and
the slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
5. Check clutch adjustment.
Glass does not move 1. Check for a blown fuse.
and motor does not 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
turn (glass can be 3. Check the open/close-tilt/close switches.
moved with 4. Check for a run down battery.
moonroof wrench) 5. Check for a defective motor.
6. Check for a faulty relay.
20-61
BACK
Moonroof
Glass Height Adjustment
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass
weatherstrip (B), to within 2+0.5/-1 mm (0.08+0.02/-
0.04 in.) all the way around. If not, make the following
adjustment:
1. Open the glass all the way,and remove the bracket
cover.
2. Loosen the nuts (A), and install the shims (B)
between the glass frame (C) and glass bracket (D)
on each side.
Shim thickness: Front and rear max. 2 mm (0.08 in.)
... Forward
A
6x 1.0 mm
3. Repeat on opposite side if necessary.
20-62
Glass Replacement
1. Tilt the glass all the way up.
2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
3. Remove the caps (A) and screws, then remove both
bracket covers (B). Remove the nuts and shims (C)
from both glass brackets (D).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2 .:Nut.4
6x
&m> I
7lbfftl
\\ //
// / --/./'j
'" ----------.-- /'"
------- ---;
#
... Forward
B
\
A
4. Remove the moonroof glass by lifting it up. Do not
damage the roof panel.
5. Install the glass in the reverse order of the removal,
and adjust the glass height.
6. Check for water leaks_ Use free flowing water from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water.
BACK
Drain Channel Replacement
1. Remove the moonroof glass.
2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass
brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof
normally pivots down, and remove the screws
securing the drain channel (B).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~
A
/
3. Release the drain channel (A) from both hooks (B)
of the drain channel slider by pulling the drain
channel forward.
B
4. Remove the drain channel (A).
5. Install the drain channel in the reverse order of
Push the drain channel onto the hooks until a
faint click is heard .
Check the glass height adjustment.
6. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
20-63
BACK
Moonroof
Sunshade Replacement
Glass (see page 20-62)
Drain channel (see page 20-63)
2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both
sunshade slider spacers (B).
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4
B
3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers.
20-64
4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),
move the sunshade forward until you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the
sunshade and hooks
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4

B
5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.
BACK
6. Release both rear sunshade base sliders (A) from
the guide rail portions of the frame, then remove
the sunshade.
7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A).
A
8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,
and check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-62).
spray.
Motor Replacement
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-79).
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect
and detach the connector (A), and remove the bolts,
then remove the motor (8).
Fastener Locations
: 801t, 2
8
6x 1.0mm
9Nm
(O.9kgfm,
7Ibfft)
/
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
Check the motor operation.
20-65
BACK
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
Headliner (see page 20-79)
Moonroof glass (see page 20-62)
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A), open/c1ose-tilt/close switch connector
(B), and the drain tubes (e).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 10
c
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
G
F
c
H
3. Remove the ceiling light harness (D) by detaching the harness clips (E), and remove the harness cushion (F).
4. With an assistant holding the frame (G), remove the bolts, and release the rear hooks (H) by moving the frame
forward, then remove the frame. Remove the front bolts last.
5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to scratch
the interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers.
20-66
BACK
6. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body
remove the kick panel. left or right (Sedan (see
page 20-75). Coupe (see page 20-74)). Tie a string to
the end of the front drain tube (B) then pull the
drain tube down out ofthe front pillar.
7. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body.
remove these parts (see page 20-78):
Trunk floor
Trunk side trim panel
Trunk side pocket. left or right
Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B).
then pull back the trunk side trim panel and pull the
drain tube down out of the pillar.
8. Insta" the frame and drain tubes in the reverse
order of removal. and note these items:
Before installing the frame. clear the drain tubes
and drain valves using compressed air.
Check the frame seal.
Clean the surface of the frame.
When installing the frame. first attach the rear
hooks into the body holes.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
When connecting the drain tube. slide it over the
frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
Insta" the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
shown.
Up
spray.
20-67
BACK
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-66).
2. Remove these parts from the frame:
Drain channel (see page 20-63)
Sunshade (see page 20-64)
Moonroof motor (see page 20-65)
3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the
slide stops (A), cable tube rear brackets (B), cable
tube side bracket mounting bolts (e) and the cable
tube mounting screws (D) from both sides of the
frame (E).
Fastener Locations

@)mmn
6 x 1.0 mm
. 9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
D
F : Screw, 2 : Screw, 2
E
20-68
B
\G
zk
1
4. While pushing down on the hook (A), slide the
drain channel sliders (B) back on both sides.
BACK
6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link
lifter (B) back, then slide both glass brackets back
with the link lifter.
B
7. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass
brackets (B) back, then remove them from the
frame (e).
B
A
8. Install the sliders and cables in the reverse order of
-
B
Damaged parts should be replaced.
Apply mUltipurpose grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
Before reinstalling the moonroof motor, make
sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully
closed position.
Before reinstalling the moonroof motor, install
the frame and glass, then check the opening drag
(see page 20-71).
\
20-69
BACK
Moonroof
Position Switch Adjustment
2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully:
Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown.
Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height (see page 20-62).
G
C
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfftl
3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the position switch mounting bolts (C).
4. Adjust the position switch (0):
Move the switch a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the switch cam
(E) pushes the open/close switch (F).
Check that the switch contacts the switch bracket (G).
5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to the fully closed position, and from the fully open
position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch.
20-70
BACK
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
2. Closing force check:
With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (8), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to
stop it.
Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closing Force:
200 - 290 N (20 - 30 kgt, 44 - 66 Ibtl
B A
c
3. If the force in not within specification, remove the
moonroof motor (see page 20-65), then check these
items:
The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage
and damage. If the gear portion is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged,
remove the frame (see page 20-66), and replace
the cable assembly (see page 20-68).
The moonroof motor (see page 20-65). If the
motor fails to run or doesn't turn smoothly,
replace it.
The opening drag. Go to step 4.
4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
required to open the glass using a spring scale (8)
as shown.
A
5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check these
items:
The side clearance and glass height adjustment
(see page 20-62) .
For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
20-71
BACK
Interior Trim
20-72
REAR SHELF
page 20-76
REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL
page 20-74
REAR BULKHEAD COVER
page 20-76
DOOR SILL TRIM
page 20-74
BACK
REAR PILLAR TRIM
page 20-77
REAR DOOR OPENING TRIM
page 20-75
CENTER PILLAR UPPER TRIM
page 20-75
FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM
page 20-75
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; . . . . . = ~ ______ -HEADLINER
- Removal/Installation,
page 20-79
TRUNK
SIDE POCKET
page 20-78
TRUNK FLOOR
page 20-78
TRUNK SIDE TRIM PANEL
page 20-78
TRUNK REAR TRIM PANEL
page 20-78
TRUNK SIDE POCKET
page 20-78
REAR BULKHEAD COVER
page 20-77
CENTER PILLAR LOWER TRIM PANEL
page 20-75
20-73
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area - Coupe
NOTE:
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
Remove the trim as shown.
Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Replace any damage clips.
Apply liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before installation.
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belts.
ACCESS
Fastener Locations
A [>: Clip, 4 B [>: Clip, 3 C [>: Clip, 13 D [>: Clip, 2
REAR SEAT BELT
UPPER ANCHOR BOLT
7/16-20UNF
32 Nm (3.3 kgfm,
24Ibfft)
F
[A] portions:
TRIM
20-74
COAT HANGER

DOOR OPENING TRIM
FRONT SEAT BELT
UPPER ANCHOR BOLT
7/16-20UNF
32 Nm (3.3 kgfm,
24Ibfft)
[B] portions:
DOOR OPENING
TRIM
TRIM
I
E Screw, 1 Screw, 1

REAR SIDE TRIM
PANEL
Remove:
Rear seat-back and /
rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead
cover [A]
A
A
FRONT
PILLAR
TRIM
G 1

BACK
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area - Sedan
NOTE:
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are not twists or kinks in the belts.
REAR DOOR SILL TRIM
Remove the rear seat
cushion
HOOK
[A] portions:
CENTER PILLAR
LOWER TRIM PANEL
[B] portions:
TRIM DOOR TRIM TRIM
FRONT SEAT BELT
SHOULDER ANCHOR
ADJUSTER
20-75
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area - Coupe
NOTE:
Replace any damaged clips.
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belts.
Fastener Locations
A [>: Clip, 4 B [>: Clip, 1 C [>: Clip, 2

HIGHMOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
REAR SIDE
LOCK CYLINDER TRIM TRIM PANEL
_____ ,
HIGH
LIGHT CONNECTOR is
'98-00 models:
20-76
CENTER
BELT COVER
BELT
CENTER BELT
CENTER ANCHOR BOLT
7/16-20UNF
Remove the center belt lid from the center
belt, and slip the center belt through the
hole on the speaker grille.
Remove the rear seat-back and rear
seat cushion.
BACK
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area - Sedan
NOTE:
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are not twists or kinks in the belts.
Fastener Locations
A !> : Clip, 2 B !> : Clip, 6 C !> : Clip, 5
~ J ... ~ J __ ~
HIGHMOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
HIGHMOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
CONNECTOR
SLIT
--CENTER BELT
DOOR OPENING TRIM
REAR SHELF
Remove the child seat tether
anchors ('00-02 models).
REAR SEAT
BELT
Remove the center belt cover from the center belt,
and slip the center belt through the hole
CENTER
BELT
COVER
CENTER BELT
~ in the speaker grille or the center belt cap.
CENTER BELT CENTER ANCHOR BOLT
- . ~ 7/16-20 UNF
Remove the rear seat cushion.
SPEAKER GRILLE or CENTER BELT CAP
(without rear speaker.)
20-77
BACK
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area
NOTE:
Install the trim in the reverse order of removel, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 6 B I> : Clip, 4 C 1>: Clip, 6
TRUNK SIDE POCKET
TRUNK REAR TRIM PANEL
TRUNK SIDE POCKET
20-78
BACK
Headliner Removal/Installation
NOTE:
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other
interior trim.
1. Remove these items: (Sedan (see page 20-75),
Coupe (see page 20-74))
Door opening trim (both sides as necessary)
Front pillar trim (both sides)
Front seat belt upper anchor bolt (both sides)
Center pillar upper trim (both sides)
Coat hanger (left side)
Rear seat belt upper anchor bolt
Quarter trim panel
3. Remove the rear window antenna terminal cover
4. Remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B) from each
side. Disconnect the vanity mirror light connectors
(C) (driver's and passenger's for some models).
Fastener Locations
5. If equipped, remove the roof console.
- 1 Remove the lens (A).
- 2 Remove the screws.
- 3 Pull out the roof console (B), and disconnect
the spotlight connector (C).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 4
c
6. Remove the caps (A), and remove the ET screws
and washers (B), then remove the grab handles (C)
(driver's and each passenger's).
Fastener Locations
~ ETscrew, 8
5xO.8mm
4Nm
(O.4kgfm,
3Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-79
BACK
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the headliner.
-1 Remove the upper portion of the rear pillar
trim (A) from each side
-Coupe (see page 20-74)
-Sedan (see page 20-77)
-2 For moon roof model: remove the socket plug
(B) and roof trim (C).
- 3 With help of an assistant, detach the clips, and
lower the headliner (0).
-4 Remove the headliner through the front
passenger's door opening.
Fastener Locations
20-80
8. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,
When reinstalling the headliner through the door
opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be
careful not to scratch the body.
For moonroof model: When reinstalling the roof
trim (A), center the two joining ends (B) at the
rear of the moonroof frame.
If the threads on a visor or grab handle ET screws
are worn out, use an oversized ET screw (PIN
90137 -S30-0030)made specifically for this
application.
Check that both sides of the headliner are
securely attached to the trim.
B A
BACK
Carpet Replacement
SRS component locations (see page 23-23), and
precautions and procedures (see page 23-28) in the SRS
section before performing repairs or service.
NOTE:
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior trim pieces.
Front seats, both sides (see page 20-99)
Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-84)
Passenger's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-85)
Center console (see page 20-83)
Rear seat cushion
Front seat belt lower anchor bolt, both sides
- Coupe (see step 8 on page 23-6)
- Sedan (see step 6 on page 23-7)
Trunk lid/fuel lid opener (see page 20-176)
Sedan (see page 20-75):
Front door sill trim (both sides)
Rear door sill trim (both sides)
Center pillar lower trim panel (both sides)
Kick panel (both sides)
Coupe (see page 20-74):
Door sill trim (both sides)
Kick panel (both sides)
3. Remove the footrest.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
6x 1.0mm
7Nm
(0.7 kgfm,
5Ibfft)
4. Remove the bolts from the parking brake lever.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
8x 1.25 mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
(cont'd)
20-81
BACK
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the clips (A, B), and release the retainers
(e), hooks (0) and fasteners (E), then remove the
carpet (F). Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Coupe: .
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 2 B I> : Clip, 1 C I> : Clip, 2
~ i l l y
Sedan:
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 3 B 1>: Clip, 1
~ U
E
20-82
6. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,
Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the
carpet.
Make sure the seat harness is routed correctly.
Slip the slits in the carpet over the hooks.
BACK
Console
Center Console Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard and related parts.
Take care not to bend the parking brake cables.
Remove the center console as shown.
Install the center console in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
Readjust the parking brake cable, if necessary (see page 19-6).
Fastener Locations
.. : Screw, 8 A [> : Clip, 4 B [> : Clip, 2 C [> : Clip, 2 D [> :Clip, 7
J
HARNESS CLIP
Detach it from the
center console.
_ ~ l_l_1! 1ff. I ~
BEVERAGE HOLDER
I
Carefully pry here.
Do not pull on lid to remove.
CONSOLE PANEL
Remove the shift lever
knob (MIT).
Carefully pry here, then
lift up the console panel
to release the clips.
ARMREST
20-83
BACK
Dashboard
Instrument Panel Removal/
Installation
NOTE:
protective tape, and apply protective tape around the
related parts, to prevent damage .
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
1. Tiltthe steering column down.
2. Remove the screws, and detach the clips, then
carefully remove the instrument panel (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2 1>: Clip, 2
~ J ~
A
3. Install the instrument panel in the reverse order of
removal.
20-84
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
NOTE:
parts.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the dashboard center
lower cover.
Fastener Locations
C> : Clip, 4
/
2. Detach the clips, and release the tabs (A), then
remove the left fuse box cover.
Fastener Locations
C> :Clip,3
~
\
\
BACK
3. Remove the screws (A and B).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 1 B ~ : Screw, 2
C
1>: Clip, 5
~
B
4. Detach the lower right clip (e) first by pulling down
on the driver's dashbord lower cover (D), then
detach the remaining clips and remove the lower
cover.
5. Install the lower cover in the reverse order of
removal.
Passenger's Dashboard Lower
Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE:
parts.
1. Remove the dashboard center lower cover (see
2. Detach the clips, and release the tabs (A), then
remove the right fuse box cover.
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 3
~
. ~
1/ ,.
/1
(cont'd)
20-85
BACK
Dashboard
Passenger's Dashboard lower
Cover Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Remove the screws (A and B).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 1 B ~ : Screw, 2 I> : Clip, 7
~ ~ ~ i = J
j ~ ~
B
C D
4. Detach the lower left clip (C) first by pulling down
on the passenger's dashbord lower cover (D), then
detach the remaining clips and remove the lower
cover.
5. Install the lower cover in the reverse order of
removal.
20-86
Center Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE:
related parts, to prevent damage.
parts.
1. Detach the clips, and release the retaining tabs (A),
then pull the clock out. Disconnect the clock
connector (B) and hazard warning switch connector
(C).
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 2
B
BACK
2. Remove the screws, and detach the clips (A), then
detach the upper clips (A and B) to remove the
center panel by disconnecting the heater control
unit connectors (e).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 3 A [> : Clip, 5 B[>:Clip,2
~ ~ ~
3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,
and make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
Glove Box Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
related parts.
Dashboard center lower cover (see step 1 on
page 20-84)
Passenger's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-85)
2. Remove the screws from bottom of the glove box.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 4
(cont'd)
20-87
BACK
Dashboard
Glove Box Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
3. Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape,
and apply protective tape around the related parts,
to prevent damage. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver in
the notch (A) of the cap (8), and release the hooks
(C) by prying up the cap (8).
Fastener Locations C
~ : Screw, 4
~ I
4. Remove the screws.
5. Release the hooks (A), then pull down on the striker
(8) to remove the glove box. Disconnect the glove
box light connector (C).
6. Install the glove box in the reverse order of
removal, and make sure the glove box light
connector is plugged in properly.
20-88
Driver's Side Vent Removal!
Installation
1. Remove the coin pocket(A), then remove the
screws from under the coin pocket.
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 2 [> : Clip,2
E
D
A
and apply protective tape around the related parts
to prevent damage. Carefully insert a flat-tip
screwdriver next to the clip, and detach the clips by
prying on the driver's side vent (8). Take care not to
scratch the dashboard and related parts.
3. Release the retaining tabs (C), and remove the vent.
Disconnect the moonroof switch connector (D)(for
some models) and the cruise control master switch
connector (E)(for some models).
4. Install the vent in the reverse order of removal, and
make sure the connectors are plugged in properly
(for some models).
BACK
Passenger's Side Vent Removal and
Installation
screwdriver next to the clip, and detach the clips (A)
by prying on the passenger's side vent (B). Take
care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
C
A
2. Remove the vent by detaching the clips (C).
3. Reinstall the hook portions of the vent first, then
push the clip portions into place securely.
Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal
and Installation
screwdriver next to the clip, and detach the clip by
prying on the side defogger vent trim (A). Take care
not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
Fastener Location
1>: Clip, 1
2. Pull the vent trim out by releasing the hooks (B).
3. Reinstall the hook portions of the vent trim first,
then securely push the clips into place.
20-89
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard Removal/Installation
NOTE:
related parts to prevent damage.
An assistant is helpful when removing and installing
the dashboard.
Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body and
other related parts.
preset buttons.
Center console (see page 20-83)
Glove box (see page 20-87)
Door opening trim, both sides as necessary,
Front door opening trim, both sides as necessary,
Front pillar trim, both sides
4. Disconnect the combination switch connectors,
ignition switch connectors and driver's airbag
connector, and lower the steering column (see
page 17-25). To prevent damage to the steering
column, wrap it with a shop towel.
20-90
Driver's side:
5. From outside the driver's door, disconnect the side
wire harness connectors (A), cabin wire harness
connectors (B) and door wire harness connectors
(C) from the left (driver's) fuse box (D). Disconnect
the dashboard wire harness connector (E).
o
6. From under the dash, disconnect the dashboard
wire harness connectors (A, B), steering hanger
beam wire harness connector (C), and the brake
switch connector (D). On MIT model, disconnect
the clutch switch connectors (E).
A
o
BACK
Middle portion:
7. From the passenger's side, pull the carpet (A) back
as necessary (see page 20-81). Disconnect the SRS
wire harness connector (8), ECM/PCM connector
(C), air mix control motor connector (D), evaporator
temperature sensor connector (E) and antenna lead
(F). On '00 model Sedan and '01-02 models,
disconnect the dashboard wire harness connector
(s) (G). Detach the ECM/PCM and the antenna lead
harness clips (H). On '00 model Coupe and '01-02
models, detach the connector holders (I) from the
floor. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the ground bolt.
'98-99 models:
'00 model Sedan:
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
'00 model Coupe:
B
'01-02 models:
D
/ ~
A
H ~ ~
~ \ ~
A
(cont'd)
20-91
BACK
Dashboard
Dashboard Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. From the driver's side, disconnect the parking
brake switch positive terminal (A), and detach the
harness clips (8). On AT model, disconnectthe
parking pin shift connector (C), and the shift lock
solenoid connector (D).
B D B
20-92
Passenger's side:
9. From outside the front passenger's door,
disconnect the side wire harness connector (A),
cabin wire harness connectors (8), roof wire
harness connector (e) and the door wire harness
connectors (D) from the right (passenger's) fuse
box (E). Disconnect the dashboard wire harness
connector(s) (F).
10. From under the dash, disconnect the steering
hanger beam wire harness connectors (A), blower
motor connector (8), blower resistor connector (C)
and the recirculation control motor connector (D),
then detach the harness clip (E), harness holder (F)
and connector clip (G).
D A
G
A
BACK
11. From outside the driver's door, remove the caps (A), then remove the bolts (B, C, D, E), and lift up on the
dashboard (F) to release it from the guide pins (G).
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Bolt, 6 c : Bolt, 4 D ~ : Bolt, 3 E ~ : Bolt. 1
~ ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) O ~ ) ) ) ) ) I ) ) ) ) I ) ) O
G G
12. Carefully remove the dashboard through the front door opening.
8x 1.2Smm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16Ibf.ft)
13. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins correctly.
Before tightening the bolts, make sure the dashboard wire harnesses are not pinched.
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is connected properly.
Enter the anti-theft code for the radio. then enter the customer's radio station presets.
G
20-93
BACK
Dashboard
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement
1. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-90).
2. Remove the following parts from the dashboard:
Gauge assembly (see page 22-68)
Audio unit (see page 22-124)
3. From under the middle of the dash: release the
passenger's airbag connector (A) from the
connector holder (8), and disconnect the connector.
Detach the harness clips (C), and remove the
ground bolts (D).
c c A
c
D C
6x 1.0mm
20-94
4. From the driver's side, if applicable, disconnect and
detach the SRS wire harness connector (A).
If equipped, disconnect the cruise control unit
connector (8).
A
5. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness connectors
(A) from the right (passenger's) fuse box (8).
Detach the harness clip (C) and connector clip (D),
and remove the ground bolt (E).
C B
A
D
A
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfft)
BACK
6. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness connectors (A) from the left (driver's) fuse box (B). Disconnect and detach
the dashboard wire harness connector (C). Detach the dashboard wire harness connectors (D, E, F) from the
connector holder (G), the steering hanger beam (H) and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (B). Detach the
harness clip (I), and remove the ground bolt (J).
A
E
H
B
J
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm '1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
c
A
G
7. Remove the screws (A. B, C) and the front passenger's airbag mounting nuts from the dashboard.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 6 B ~ Screw, 4 C Screw, 2 .:Nut,4
~
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm '1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
D
(cont'd)
20-95
BACK
Dashboard
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement (cont'd)
8. Separate the dashboard (A) and steering hanger beam (B).
\ C
B
9. Install the steering hanger beam in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the dashboard wire harness (e) and steering hanger beam wire harness (0) are not pinched .
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
20-96
BACK
Seats
FRONT SEATS
Disassembly/Reassembly,
Manual Seat without Side Airbag, page 20-102
Manual Seat with Side Airbag, page 20-103
Manual Height Adjustable Seat without Side Airbag, page 20-106
Manual Height Adjustable Seat with Side Airbag, page 20-107
2-way Power Seat without Side Airbag, page 20-110
2-way Power Seat with Side Airbag, page 20-111
8-way Power Seat without Side Ai rbag, page 20-112
Seat Wiring Harness and Cable Installation, page 20-115
Torsion Bar Replacement, page 20-120
Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly,
2-way Power Seat, page 20-121
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-123
=
SEAT-BACK LOCK CYLINDER
REAR SEAT
Seat-back Latch and Lock Cylinder Replacement,
page 20-132
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-134
Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-138
20-97
BACK
Seats
FRONT SEATS
Disassembly/Reassembly,
Manual Seat without Side Airbag, page 20-104
Manual Seat with Side Airbag, page 20-105
SEAT -BACK LATCH
Manual Height Adjustable Seat without Side Airbag, page 20-108
Manual Height Adjustable Seat with Side Airbag, page 20-109
2-way Power Seat without Side Airbag, page 20-110
8-way Power Adjustable Seat, page 20-114
Seat Wiring Harness Installation, page 20-118
Torsion Bar Replacement, page 20-120
Seat Linkage Disassembly and Reassembly,
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-123
20-98
REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT SIDE BOLSTER
Side Bolster Cover Replacement,
page 20-137
Armrest and Armrest Lid Replacement,
page 20-130
Trunk Pass-through Cover Key
Cylinder Replacement, page 20-131
Seat-back Latch Replacement,
page 20-133
Seat-back Lock Cylinder Replacement, page 20-133
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-135
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-139
BACK
Front Seat Removal/Installation
'00-02 models: SRS components are located in this area.
Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-23),
and precautions and procedures (see page 23-28) in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service.
1. '00-02 models with side airbag: Make sure you
have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write
down the frequencies for the radio preset buttons.
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and
wait at leasts 3 minutes before beginning work.
2. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove
the bolts securing the front seat (8). When prying
with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective
tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch
the body or tear the seat covers.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt. 4
~
10x1.25mm J
' 34 Nm (3.5 kgf.m.
25Ibfft)
--
Without 8-way power With 8-way power seat:
seat:
3. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect and detach
the seat harness connector (A) and harness clip (8).
Manual seat (driver's seat):
B
A
To body.
Manual seat ('98-99 models passenger's seat with
seat heater):
B
To body.
(cont'd)
20-99
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (co nt' d)
Manual seat ('00 model passenger's seat on Coupe
with side airbag):
A
A
A
B
To body.
Manual seat ('01-02 models passenger's seat on
Coupe with side airbag):
B
A
A
A
To body.
20-100
A
Manual height adjustable seat ('98-00 models,
and '01-02 models without side airbag):
B
- . : ; : : : ~
~ - I --------.. ---.------
I I !
. JniJ
t
i

I
To body.
Manual height adjustable seat (,01-02 models with
side airbag):
A
A
B To body.
BACK
2-way power seat ('98-00 models):
A
A
B
A
A
A
To body.
A
To body.
A
B
A
To body. To body.
4. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
front seat through the front door opening.
5. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Make sure the seat harness connector is plugged
in properly .
'00-02 models: Enter the anti-theft code for the
radio, then enter the customer's radio station
presets.
20-101
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual without Side Airbag - Coupe
Disassemble the front seat as shown.
Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Route the seat wire harness, recline cable and connecting cable ('99-02 models) correctly (see page 20-115'.
Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
To prevent wrinkles in the seat-back cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
HEADREST
('98-00 models)
~ j
HEADREST
('01-02 models)
~
20-102
10 x 1.25 mm
47 Nm (4.8 kgfm,
35Ibfft)
_____ PIVOT NUT
~ ~ 8x1.25mm
y ~ ~ 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
PIVOT WASHER
____ INNER SEAT TRACK
CONNECTING CABLE ~
('99-02 models)
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual with Side Airbag - Coupe
'00-02 models
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-23), and precautions and
procedures (see page 23-28) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
Disassemble the '00 model front seat as shown. '01-02 models disassembly/reassembly is similar except the seat wire
harness locations are different.
Route the seat wire harness and recline cable correctly (see page 20-115).
Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
If the seat-back pad or the OPDS unit is replaced, reinitialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-46).
CLIPS
Replace.
OPDS UNIT HARNESS
RECLINE COVER
20-103
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual without Side Airbag - Sedan
Disassemble the driver's seat as shown. The passenger's seat is similar except that it doesn't have a seat belt switch
harness.
Route the seat wire harness correctly (see page 20-118).
PIVOT NUT
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibf.ft)
10x 1.25mm
47 Nm (4.8 kgfm,
35Ibfft)
INNER SEAT TRACK
20-104
CONNECTING WIRE
Twist 90 to connect.
HOOK
10x1.25mm
47 Nm (4.8 kgfm,
35Ibfft)
/HEADREST
SEAT CUSHION
RECLINE ADJUSTER/
OUTER SEAT TRACK
10x 1.25mm
47 Nm (4.8 kgfm,
35Ibfft)
RECLINE LEVER
RECLINE COVER
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual with Side Airbag - Sedan
'00-02 models
If the seat-back pad or the OPDS unit is replaced, reinitialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-46).
HEADREST

HOOKS
CLIPS
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
SEAT-BACK
ImRm
SEAT CUSHION

RECLINE ADJUSTER/
OUTER SEAT TRACK
CENTER COVER

//
20-105
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual Height Adjustable without
Side Airbag - Coupe
'99-02 models: Route the connecting cable correctly (see page 20-115).
HOOK
20-106
HEADREST
I .... ~
rr SAT-" \
~ /' HEADREST
CONNECTING WIREI'98 model)
Twist 90 to connect.
HOOKS
RECLINE ADJUSTER/
OUTER SEAT TRACK
10x1.25mm
1'01-02 models)
RECLINE COVER
f/
A'
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual Height Adjustable with Side
Airbag - Coupe
'0102 model
Route the connecting cable correctly (see page 20-115).
PIVOT NUT
HOOKS
___ BACK PANEL
HOOKS CD
f
CLIPS
Replace.
_____ RECLINE COVER

7J;:% LEVER

8xl.25mm (ffj) U,
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, U
16lbfftl CLIP
CONNECTNG WIRE 1'98 model)
Twist 90
0
to connect.
20-107
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual Height Adjustable without
Side Airbag - Sedan
HOOK
( _________ HEADREST
PIVOT NUT
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m,
16Ibf.ft)
CENTER COVER
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
20-108
8x 1.25 mm
RECLINE ADJUSTER/
OUTER SEAT TRACK

M COVER
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - Manual Height Adjustable with Side
Airbag - Sedan
'01-02 model
PIVOT NUT
8x 1.25 mm

22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
CENTER COVER
HOOKS

HOOKS
BACK PANEL
/
CLIPS
Replace.
WASHER ( BUSHING
/ 0,/0\ \.' 9' 1,.,/ /REClINEADJUSTERI
0& / OUTER SEAT TRACK
10x1.25mm
.. "/ (
8x1.25mm /
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm, . .;g f. [
16Ibfft) (CL.. > ...
WASHER" y END CAP / r RECLINE
'(/ ""'-. It!" . COVER
t
END
) WASHER CAP ifjJ ('.
TRACK WASHER yr::. /" LEVER
CONNECTING WIRE ---
Twist 90
0
to connect. U HEIGHT
8x1.25mm '" KNOB
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibfft) U CLIP
20-109
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - 2-Way Power without Side Airbag
'98-00 models
Route the seat wire harness correctly, Coupe (see page 20-115), Sedan (see page 20-118).
PIVOT NUT
8x1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm.
16Ibfft)
SEAT CUSHION

20-110
/HEADREST
HOOKS
10x1.25mm
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - 2-Way Power with Side Airbag
'01-02 model
Route the seat wire harness correctly, Coupe (see page 20-115), Sedan (see page 20-1181.
Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
PIVOT NUT
SEAT LINKAGE
HOOKS
CLIPS
Replace.
20-111
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - 8-Way Power without Side Airbag -
Coupe
'98-99 models
PIVOT NUT
ax 1.25mm
_ /HEADREST
HOOKS
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
WIRE TIE
SEAT
U ~
CLIP
To seat cushion
cover.
20-112
SEAT LINKAGE
10x 1.25mm
47 Nm (4.a kgf.m,
35Ibfft)
SEAT-BACK
HEATER HARNESS
(for some models)
SEAT CUSHION
HEATER HARNESS
(for some models)
CLIPS
Replace.
CLIP
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - a-Way Power with Side Airbag -
Coupe
'00-02 models
Disassemble the '00 model front seat as shown. '01-02 models Disassembly/Reassembly is similar except the seat
wire harness locations are different.
KNOB
SEAT-BACK
HEATER HARNESS
(for some models)
SEAT CUSHION
HEATER HARNESS
(for some models)
------RECLINE CABLE
Disconnect.
HOOKS
KNOBS
20-113
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - a-Way Power - Sedan
'00-02 models: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-23), and
precautions and procedures (see page 23-28) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
20-114
PIVOT NUT
8x 1.25 mm
PIVOT WASHER
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m, 16lbfftl
CLIP
To seat cushion
cover.
SEAT LINKAGE
10 x 1.25 mm
47 Nm 14.8 kgfm,
35Ibfft)
SEAT CUSHION HEATER HARNESS
Ifor some models)
CLIP
BACK
Front Seat Wiring Harness and Cable Installation - Coupe
When assembling the front seat, make sure the recline
cable (A), and connecting cable ('99-02 models) (8), seat
belt switch harnesses (C), seat harness (D), seat heater
harness (E), side airbag harness ('00-02 models) (F),
OPDS unit harness ('00-02 models) (G), connectors (H),
clips (I) and wire ties (J) are fastened correctly.
Manual seat ('98-99 model passenger's seat with seat
heater):
B
A
To seat-back
heater.
To recline
adjuster.
To seat cushion
heater.
D
E
Manual seat ('00 model passenger's seat without side
airbag):
To recline
adjuster.
B
A
Manual seat ('00-02 models passenger's seat with side
airbag):
-Seat back:
G
-Seat cushion ('00 model):
B
H
To recline To seat cushion
adjuster. heater.
H
-Seat cushion ('01-02 models):
J
[A] [B]
H
A
To seat
belt buckle.
To recline To seat cushion [A] [B]
adjuster. heater.
(cont'd)
20-115
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Wiring Harness and Cable Installation - Coupe (cont'd)
Manual height adjustable seat ('98-00 models):
B
H
Manual height adjustable seat ('01-02 models with side
airbag):
20-116
F
H
I
D
H
c
To seat belt
buckle.
[A]
F J
J
[A]
F
To power
seat switch.
D
BACK
8-way power seat ('98-99 models with seat heater):
c
To seat belt
buckle.
H
H
o
To seat cushion To seat-back
heater. heater.
8-way power seat ('00 model with seat heater):
To recline
adjuster.
c
To seat belt
buckle.
F
E J
H
To seat cushion
heater.
F
J

To recline
adjuster.
To seat belt
buckle.
To seat cushion
heater.
F
I
r
To power
seat switch.
H
o
J
20-117
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Wiring Harness Installation - Sedan
When assembling the front seat, make sure the seat
belt switch harness (A). seat harness (8), seat heater
harnesses (e), side airbag harness ('00-02 models) (D),
OPDS unit harness ('00-02 models) (E), connectors (F),
clips (G) and wire ties (H) are fastened correctly.
Manual seat (driver's seat):
Manual seat ('98-99 models passenger's seat with seat
heater):
G
F
c
20-118
~
To seat-back
heater.
,
To seat cushion
heater.
G
F
Manual seat ('00-02 models passenger's seat with side
airbag):
E
H
H
-4VI
F
G
G
D
J [A] [8] H
To seat cushion
heater.
H
H
F
[A] [8]
BACK
Manual height adjustable seat (without side airbag):
G
G
Manual height adjustable seat ('01-02 models with side
airbag):
0
G H
G
0
A
F

[AJ
G
B
H
G
[AJ
To power
seat switch.
G
B
(cant'd)
20-119
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Wiring Harness
Installation - Sedan (cont'd)
F
G
A
To seat belt
buckle.
F C
G
G
F
G
B
To seat cushion To seat-back
heater. heater.
G
G
G
A
F G
r- r':
D
20-120
~ H C r\
[BJ To seat cushion [AJ
heater.
D
G
F
G
B
G
Front Seat Torsion Bar
Replacement - Manual Height
Adjustable
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the
seat covers.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-99).
torsion bar (A) from the hook (8) with a flat-tip
screwdriver (C), then pull out the torsion bar from
the seat cushion frame (0).
3. Install the torsion bar in the reverse order of
removal.
D
BACK
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - 2-Way Power
NOTE:
o Before removing the front seat from the vehicle, raise the seat cushion to its maximum height.
o Put on gloves to protect your hands.
Disassemble the front seat linkage as shown.
Reassemble the seat linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
o Replace the bushings with new ones.
o Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding and pivoting portions of the linkage.
o Check operation ofthe recline and slide/up-down adjusters
8x1.25mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
SLIDE/UP-DOWN ADJUSTER
POWER SEAT HARNESS
8x 1.25 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
END CAP

LINK OUTER COVER
"
WASHER
6x1.0mm
4.9 Nm (0.5 kgfm, 3.6 Ibf.ft)
"

UP-DOWN MOTOR 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
20-121
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - B-Way Power
Disassemble the front seat linkage as shown.
Reassemble the seat linkage in the reverse order of disassembly. and note these items:
For the power height seat. replace the bushings with new ones.
Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions.
Check operation of the recline adjuster and slide/up-down adjuster.
SLIDE/UP-DOWN ADJUSTER
6x 1.0mm
8.5 Nm (0.87 kgf.m. 6.3 Ib'ftl
POWER SEAT HARNESS
20-122
BACK
Front Seat Cover Replacement
'00-02 models Sedan: SRS components are located in
this area. Review the SRS component locations (see
page 23-23), and precautions and procedures (see page
23-28) in the SRS section before performing repairs or
service.
NOTE:
With side airbag ('00-02 models): The seat with a
airbag is marked with a side airbag on the surface of
the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-
back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without
airbags are different, make sure you install only the
correct replacement parts.
'00-02 models Sedan: The front seats with side
airbags are produced by three different suppliers.
Before replacing the seat-back, make sure the seat-
back cover (A), pad (B) and frame (C) are from the
same supplier. Before assembling the seat-back,
make sure the suppliers identification (D) is the same
on each part.
With side airbag ('00-02 models): Do not repair any
tears or frayed spots of the seat-back cover. If
necessary, replace the seat-back cover.
Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
With side airbag ('00-02 models): Do not touch the
Occupant Position Detection System OPDS sensor in
the seat-back pad. Keep the sensor free from grease
oils and moisture, as they can damage the sensor.
Oils can corrode the sensor, causing its faulty.
Seat-back Cover
1. '98-99 models: With seat heater, remove the seat-
back heater harness from the seat cushion:
A
- 1 Remove the seat (see page 20-99).
- 2 Disconnect the seat-back heater connector (A).
- 3 Release the hooks (B), and pull back the seat
cushion cover (C).
- 4 Release the wire tie (D).
- 5 Pull out the harness (E).
Driver's seat (the passenger's seat is similar):
E
To seat-back
heater.
B
c
D
2. Fold the seat-back forward.
3. If equipped, remove the back panel (refer to step 7).
4. 8-way power seat on Coupe: Remove the rear seat
access knob, '98-99 models (see page 20-112) or
the access knob trim, '00-02 models (see page 20-
113).
(cont'd)
20-123
BACK
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
5. If equipped, remove the clip (A), then remove the
lumbar support knob (8).
'\.
B
6. Without back panel, release the hook strip (A), and
fold back the seat-back cover (8).
20-124
7. Release all of the inside springs (A), then fold back
the seat-back cover (8), and release the hook strip
(C).
Without back pane1('98-00 modelsl:
c
A
A
B
Without back panel ('01-02 modelsl:
A
With back cover/Without side airbag
(except leather seat cover, '98-00 model):
B
c
c
A
c
A
BACK
With back panel/Without side airbag
(leather seat cover, '98-00 models):
B c
A
c
With side airbag ('00-02 models):

\
c
c
A
c
A
8. '00-02 models: If equipped with side airbag, release
all the hooks (D, E). Ifthere is no inside springs to
release in step 7, release all of the clips from the
locations which are showed as inside spring
portions in this illustration.
9. Lift and pull out the release button (A), and remove
the screw (8), then remove the headrest guide (e).
10. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the
way around.
11. '98-00 models Sedan: Except leather seat cover,
release the fastner (A).
A
tlllilllllllli;
1------\\
12. Remove the seat-back cover.
(cont'd)
20-125 BACK
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement (co nt' d)
13. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the fastener, hook
and inside springs.
'00-02 models: On some type seats with side
airbag, replace the clips (A) with new ones using
commercially available upholstery ring pliers (8).
Use only original Honda replacement seat-back
covers ('00-02 models).
B
20-126
Seat Cushion Cover
2. Remove the seat cushion (see page 20-112).
3. Release the clips (A) and hooks (8) from under the s
eat cushion, then loosen the seat cushion cover (e).
All except 8-way power seat:
A
c
B
IJ-_-/ B
B
8-way power seat:
A
c
o 0
B
BACK
4. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the clips (A) and fastener
(B), then remove the seat cushion cover. On a
leather seat cover and '00-02 models seat cushion
cover, there is no fastener to remove.
Except leather seat cover ('98-00 models):
A
B
Except leather seat cover ('01-02 models):
A
and note these items.
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hooks .
Replace the released clips with new ones (A)
using commercially available upholstery ring
pliers (B).
B
A
20-127
BACK
Seats
Rear Seat Removal/Installation - Coupe
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
Remove the rear seat as shown.
Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belts and
center belt.
When installing the seat cushion, slip the seat belt buckles through the openings in the seat cushion.
Make sure the seat-back locks securely.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 4
@)mn
8x1.2Smm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
B
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
A [> : Clip. 1 B [>: Hook. 2
RIGHT
SEAT-BACK
20-128

SEAT
CUSHION
B
PIVOT
BRACKET
OPENINGS
C Bolt, 1 D 1

6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
I 9.8Nm

(1.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
CENTER PIVOT
BRACKET
LEFT
-- SEAT-BACK
CENTER BELT GUIDE
Remove the center belt
from the center belt guide.

PIVOT BRACKET
Remove the rear side
trim panel.
BACK
Rear Seat Removal/Installation - Sedan
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
Remove the rear seat as shown.
Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belts and
center belt.
When installing the seat cushion, slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion.
Make sure the seat-back locks securelly.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 4
8X1.25mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm,
16lbfftl
REAR SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
B : Bolt, 2
SEAT CUSHION
At>: Clip, 1 B t> : Hook, 2
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
11.0kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ftl
HOOK
.J.----LEFT SIDE
CENTER BELT GUIDE
Remove the center belt from
the center belt guide.
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE
BOLSTER
HOOK
CENTER BELT BUCKLE
PIVOT BRACKET
20-129
BACK
Seats
Rear Seat Armrest/Trunk Pass-through Cover Replacement - Sedan
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the
seat covers.
1. Remove the clip (A) from the left portion of the
armrest pivot.
2. Remove the armrest.
- 1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of
the vehicle.
- 2 Remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (e)
on the passenger's side of the vehicle by
pulling up on the armrest, and remove the
pivot shaft (B) from the collar (D) by pulling up
on the armrest.
20-130
3. Remove the beverage holder.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
5. Remove the screws, and detach the hooks (A), then
remove the trunk pass-through cover (B).
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 2
~ I
A
6. Install the armrest and trunk pass-through cover in
the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder Replacement
NOTE:
protective tape to prevent damage .
Take care not to scratch the cover.
1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the rear seat
handle (A) up at either hook portion (B) on forward
side of the trunk pass through cover (e). Then slide
the handle half-way up.
2. From trunk compartment side of the cover, using a
small screwdriver, press the inside hook (A) down
through the access hole (B).
3. While pressing the hook, pry the trunk handle (e)
up with a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the trunk handle (A) and rear seat handle
(B) together at the same time.
5. Remove the retainer clip (e), then remove the trunk
pass-through cover key cylinder (0) from the cover
(E).
6. Install the key cylinder in the reverse order of
Put the two handles together before installing
them on the trunk pass-through cover .
Make sure the trunk pass-through cover opens
properly and locks securely.
20-131 BACK
Seats
Rear Seat-back Latch and Lock Cylinder Replacement - Coupe
NOTE:
When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage .
Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim.
Rear seat-backs and rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead cover
Center belt lid
Lock cylinder trim
Rear shelf
Door sill trim (both sides) and rear side trim panel
4. Disconnect the cylinder rods (A) from the seat-back latch (8) on both sides.
Fastener Locations

6X1.0mm
9.8Nm
D : Screw, 2

I 1.6Nm
. 10.16 kgfm, 1.2 Ibf.tt)
5. Remove the bolts (C), then remove the seat-back latch.
6. Remove the screws (D), then remove the seat-back lock cylinder (E) and cylinder rods.
7. Install the latch and lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the cylinder rods are securely connected .
Make sure the seat-backs open properly.
20-132
BACK
Rear Seat-back latch Replacement -
Sedan
NOTE:
o When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
o Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim.
o Seat side bolster, both sides (see page 20-129)
o Rear bulkhead cover (see page 20-77)
2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A) from the trunk
compartment.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch.
Fastener Locations

6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
note these items:
o Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely.
o Make sure the seat-back locks securely and
opens properly.
Rear Seat-back Lock Cylinder
Replacement - Sedan
NOTE:
o When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
o Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim.
1. Remove the seat side bolsters (both sides) (see
page 20-129).
2. Remove the rear door opening trim (both sides)
(see page 20-75).
o Rear door opening trim (both sides)
o Rear pillar trim (both sides)
o Rear bulkhead cover
o Center anchor bolt of the center belt
o Center belt lid
o High mount brake light
o Lock cylinder trim
o Rear shelf
4. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the trunk
compartment. Refer to the Seat-back Latch
Replacement, step 2.
5. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back lock
cylinder.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 2
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
I
6. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of
o Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely.
o Make sure the seat-back open properly.
20-133
BACK
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement - Coupe
NOTE:
covers .
1. Remove the seat-backs (see page 20-128).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the center belt
guide from right seat-back.
Fastener Locations

3. Remove the clips, and pull the seat-back mat (A)
back, then separate the left seat-back (B) and right
seat-back (e).
Fastener Locations
C>: Clip, 16
jEJ
: .
............................................ .......................... .
A
20-134
4. Release all the clips (A), and fold back the seat-back
cover.
left seat-back:
A
Right seat-back:
A
BACK
5. Pull back of the seat-back cover (A) all the way
around, release the clips (8) and hooks (e) from the
pad (D).
Left seat-back:
B
Right seat-back:
B
over the pad before securing the hooks and clips .
Replace the released clips with new ones.
Rear Seat-back Cover
Replacement - Sedan
NOTE:
covers .
1. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-129).
2. If equipped, remove the armrest and armrest frame
(see page 20-130).
3. Remove the screws, then remove the center belt
guide.
Fastener Locations

(cont'd)
20-135
BACK
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement - Sedan (cont'd)
4. Remove the clips, then pull back the seat-back mat.
With armrest:
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 6
jEJ
,..
0<1
0<J
\7
~
/
Without armrest:
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip,S
IJ
0<1
0<J
\7
- 0
1
20-136
\ I
r ~
I><>
[>0
0 0
\J
\ ) Q
~
\ J
0 0
[>0
~ ~
\J
Q
1
5. Release all the clips (A) and hook strips (8), and
fold back the seat-back cover (e).
With armrest:
B A
B
Without armrest:
A
C
B
BACK
6. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
way around, and release the clips (B) and fasteners
(C), then remove the seat-back cover. On a leather
seat cover, there are no fasteners (C).
All except leather seat cover:
B C B
A
Leather seat cover:
B B
A
over the pad before securing the fasteners, hooks
and clips .
Replace the released clips with new ones.
Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover
Replacement - Sedan
1. Remove the seat side bolster (see page 20-129).
2. Release all the hook strips (A), fold back the seat
side bolster cover (B), and remove it.
and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing the
hook strips.
20-137
BACK
Seats
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement - Coupe
1. Remove the seat-backs and seat cushion (see page
20-128).
2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat
cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover.
A
way around, and release the clips (A) and inside
springs (B), then remove the seat cushion cover.
8 A 8
20-138
To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is
the inside springs and clips .
Replace the clips with new ones (A) using
commercially available upholstery ring pliers (B).
A
----8
BACK
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement - Sedan
1. Remove the seat cushion (see page 20-129).
2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat
cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover.
A
way around, and release the clips (A) and fasteners
(8), then remove the seat cushion cover. On a
leather seat cover, there are no fasteners (8).
To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
the fasteners and clips .
Replace the clips with new ones (A) using
commercially available upholstery ring pliers (8).
A
20-139
BACK
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation - Coupe
'98-00 models
NOTE:
An assistant is helpful when removing the front bumper.
Take care not to scratch the front grille, front bumper and body.
Remove the front bumper as shown.
Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips, and the hooks (of the corner upper beams) on each side securely.
Fastener Locations
A
20-140
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
B Screw. 2 A [>: Clip. 5
FRONT BUMPER
B [>:Clip,6
'Y---J
B
A
LEFT CORNER
BEAM
INNER
FENDER
BACK
'01-02 models
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front grille, front bumper and body.
Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips, and the hooks (of the corner upper beams) on each side securely.
Fastener Locations
B : Screw, 2 A I> : Clip, 5 B I> : Clip, 4
t:J
// CENTER UPPER BEAM
B
FRONT BUMPER
B
A
B
20-141
BACK
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation - Sedan
'98-00 models
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
After reinstalling the center upper beam, check the aim of the headlights (see page 22-98).
Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips, and the hooks (of the center and corner upper beams) on each
side securely.
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt. 2
B
20-142
B
B : Screw. 2
FRONT BUMPER
AI>:Clip,2 B I> : Clip. 6

B !
B B
1
A
LEFT CORNER
UPPER BEAM
BACK
Fastener Locations
A : Bolt, 6 B : Bolt, 4 C : Bolt, 6
9.a Nm 22 N.m
(1.0 kgfm, (2.2 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft) 16Ibf.ft)
6x1.0mm j ax1.25mm
------------ ._._------ -----------_ .. _--------
C
CENTER UPPER BEAM
Remove both headlights.
/
LEFT CORNER UPPER BEAM
ABSORBER
ABSORBER BOX
FRONT BUMPER BEAM
(cont'd)
20-143
BACK
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation - Sedan (cont'd)
'01-02 models
NOTE:
Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
Install the front bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
After reinstalling the center upper beam, check the aim of the headlights (see page 22-98).
Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips, and the hooks (of the center and corner upper beams) on each
side securely.
Fastener Locations
B Screw, 2 At>: Clip,2 B t>: Clip,S
FRONT BUMPER
A
B
B
20-144
BACK
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation - Coupe
'98-00 models
NOTE:
An assistant is helpful when removing the rear bumper.
Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
Remove the rear bumper as shown.
Make sure the rear bumper engages the side clips and the hooks (under the taillight) on each side securely.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 7 B 1>: Clip, 2 C 1>: Clip, 4
SIDE CLIP
LEFT SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
CONNECTOR
Detach the clip by
pulling out on the
rear bumper.
GROMMET REAR BUMPER

CLIP a=; I
CLIP

rP...,..,_
HOOKS
REAR
BUMPER
Remove the trunk
side trim to
detach clips.
A
REAR BUMPER
(cont'd)
20-145
BACK
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation - Coupe (cont'd)
Fastener Locations
.: Nut. 4

8x1.25mm
\ 22Nm
@ (2.2 kgfm.
16lbfftl
LEFT ABSORBER
20-146
GUSSET
REAR BUMPER
BEAM
RIGHT
ABSORBER
BACK
'01-02 models
NOTE:
Make sure the rear bumper engages the side clips, rear clips, and the hooks (under the taillight) on each side
securely.
Fastener Locations
A : Screw, 2 A [> : Clip, 7 B [>: Clip, 2
REAR
BUMPER
HOOKS
LEFT SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
CONNECTOR
Detach the clip by
pulling out on the
rear bumper.
On each side, pull the
bumper out to detach it
from the side and rear clips.
REAR BUMPER
A
A
20-147
BACK
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation - Sedan
NOTE:
Make sure the rear bumper engages the side clips and the hooks (under the taillight) on each side securely.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2 A I> : Clip, 7 B 1>: Clip, 2
CLIP
REAR BUMPER
SIDE CLIPS HOOKS
20-148
BACK
Fastener Locations
: Nut. 4
8x 1.25mm
22Nm
12.2 kgfm
16lbf.ft)
ABSORBER BOX
REAR BUMPER BEAM
ABSORBER
20-149
BACK
Hood
Replacement
NOTE:
An assistant is helpful when removing and installing the hood.
Take care not to damage the hood and body.
Remove the hood as shown.
Install the hood in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the windshield washer tubes are connected properly.
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.
Adjustthe hood alignment (see page 20-151).
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4
20-150
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ftl
HOOD
/
WINDSHIELD WASHER TUBES
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLES
HOOD HINGE
BACK
Adjustment
1. Slightly loosen each hood hinge bolt.
2. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence.
Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on the hood hinge
(A).
Turn the hood edge cushions (8), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at front and side edges.
Adjust the hood latch (e) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (0) is centered in the hood latch.
I

D
6 x 1.0 mm ' ..
:5,)" 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2 Ibfft) _.,----_-'-., r I
I
C
6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf.ft)
(cont'd)
20-151
BACK
Hood
Adjustment (cont'd)
3. Tighten each bolt securely.
4. Check that the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
5. Apply body paint to the hinge mounting bolts and
around the hinges.
6. Grease each location of the hood latch and hood
hinge as indicated by the arrows.
20-152
Hood Insulator Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the hood.
1. Remove the hood insulator (A).
- 1 Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (8)
from the windshield washer nozzles (C).
- 2 Release the windshield washer tube from the
clips (D).
- 3 Using a clip remover, detach the clips (D, E)
release the hooks (F), and remove the hood
insulator.
Fastener Locations
D 1>: Clip, 1 E I> : Clip, 11
A
B
2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,
Replace any damaged clips .
Make sure the washer tubes are connected
properly.
BACK
Hood Seal Rubber and Hood Molding Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove
the hood seals (A). On Canadian models, remove
the hood molding (8). On '00-02 Canadian Coupe
model, Carefully peel the hood molding adhesive
tapes (F) off of the hood. Take care not to scratch
the hood.
Coupe:
Adhesive tape ('00-02 models):
3M3511, or equivalent
Thickness: 1 mm (0.04 in.)
Width: 5 mm (0.2 in.)
Fastener Locations
C [> : Clip, 12 0 [> : Clip, 9
'98-'99 models:
~ b
'00-'01 models:
E ~ I F ~
/B
~ X X Ii X ~
\: yr--;;;;;;;:.'
o
A
A
Sedan:
Fastener Locations
C [> : Clip, 12 0[>: Clip, 7
E [> : Clip, 11
B
/
1F'NN'tY
A
, /
Y
o
A
2. Install the hood seal and hood molding in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Replace any damaged clips .
On '00-02 Canadian Coupe model: If the old hood
molding is to be reinstalled, scrape off all traces
of the old adhesive tape, then clean the molding
surface with alcohol. Apply primer (3M K500, or
equivalent) to the hood molding where the new
adhesive tape will attach, then give the molding
into place securely with new adhesive tape.
20-153
BACK
Trunk Lid
Replacement
,. Coupe only, remove the screws, then remove the taillight lid cover (A) from each side.
Fastener Locations
~ Screw, 2
o:nwl
2. Disconnect the taillight connectors (A), license plate light connector (8), trunk lid latch actuator connector (C),
trunk lid cylinder switch connector (D) and remove trunk lid opener cable (E).
B o
A
A
3. Detach the harness clips and connector clips (F), then remove the wire harness (G) and trunk lid opener cable from
the trunk lid.
20-154
BACK
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
5. Install the trunk lid in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and opener cable is connected properly, and the wire
harness and opener cable are routed properly.
Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
Adjust the trunk lid alignment (see page 20-156).
20-155
BACK
Trunk Lid
Adjustment
1. Slightly loosen each bolt.
2. Adjust the trunk lid alignment in the following sequence.
Remove the rear shelf
Adjust the trunk lid hinges (A) right and left. as well as forward and rearward. by using the elongated holes.
Take care not to hit the rear window when loosening the bolts (B).
Turn the trunk lid edge cushions in or out (C). as necessary. to make the trunk lid fit flush with the body at the
rear and side edges.
Adjust the fit between the trunk lid and the trunk lid opening by removing the striker (D).
3. Tighten each bolt securely.
B
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
4. Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
20-156
o
BACK
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement
1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar
center clip (8).
B
torsion bars with the torsion bar tool (A) from both
trunk lid hinges. First remove the right torsion bar
(8), and then remove the left torsion bar (e).
3. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body.
4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of
o Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with
the torsion bar assembly tool.
o Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
o = Normal position
= Higher tension
20-157
BACK
Trunk Lid
Replacement - Sedan
1. Remove the cover (A), and remove the bolts, then
remove the trunk lid dynamic damper (8). Take
care not to scratch the trunk lid.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 2
@-
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
I (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
2. Install the damper in the reverse order of removal.
20-158
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip
Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip by pulling it off.
2. Apply sealant (Cemedine PIN 08712-0004, or
equivalent) (A) in the groove of the trunk lid
weatherstrip (8) in the areas indicated by arrows.
Unit: mm (in.) 587
(23.1) Center
(!----=t-
-" Forward 1
'------- ------ -
\
B
3. Locate the painted alignment mark (A) on the trunk
lid weatherstrip (8). Align the painted mark with the
alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and install
the weatherstrip all the way around facing in the
direction shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in
the weatherstrip.
---
B
A
Forward
4. Check for water leaks.
BACK
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement - Coupe
1. Clean the trunk lid surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning. keep oil. grease and water from
getting on the surface.
2. Apply the emblem where shown.
Unit: mm (in.)
1310.51)
Edge ofthe
trunk lid.
ACCORD EMBLEM
20-159
BACK
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement - Sedan
1. Clean the trunk lid surface with a sponge
2. Apply the emblem where shown.
TRUNK LID
ACCORD EMBLEM
17 (0.67)
Unit mm (in.)
VERSION EMBLEM
17
(0.67)
Edge of the trunk lid.
ACCORD EMBLEM
jL
40 (1.6)!

/
L
.f
VERSION EMBLEM
(SPECIAL EDITION)
('00 model)
20-160
\

Jl
'I h
25 (0.98)
..
\
\
\
Edge of the trunk lid.
Front Grille Replacement - Coupe
'98-00 models
1. Remove the front bumper.
2. Remove the front grille by removing the screws
from the front bumper. Take care not to scratch the
front grille and front bumper.
Fastener Locations

3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
Roof Drip Molding Replacement - Coupe
1. Detach the moldings from each clip, then remove the roof drip molding (A) from the quarter glass molding (8).
Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener locations
!>: Clip, 9
A
2. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
B
B
20-161
BACK
Exterior Trim
Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings Replacement - Sedan
1. Detach the moldings from each clip, then remove the roof drip molding (A) and rear pillar molding (B) as an
assembly. Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
C I> : Clip, 10
('"
01>: Clip, 1 EI>: Clip, 1
2. Separate the roof drip molding and rear pillar molding.
FI>: Clip, 1
3. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
After joining the rear pillar molding (B) with the roof drip molding (A), lightly tap the locking tabs (e) .
A
20-162
BACK
Roof Molding Replacement
1. Apply protective tape to the body (A). Using a flat-
tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape (8),
pry up on the roof molding (C). Take care not to
scratch the body.
2. Pull up and slide the roof molding to release the
front bracket (0) from the pin (E).
3. Pull up the front portion of roof molding.
4. Pull up and release the rear bracket (A) from the pin
(8), then remove the roof molding (C).
5. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,
Take care not to damage the windshield and rear
window moldings .
Make sure the roof molding is installed securely.
20-163
BACK
Exterior Trim
Door Moldings Replacement - Sedan
NOTE:
Wrap the blade of your putty knife or flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape to prevent damage to the door.
Be careful not to pry too far or you may bend the molding.
1. Prepare to release the molding clips from inside the vehicle .
To remove the front door molding, remove the front door panel (see page 20-9) and plastic cover .
To remove the rear door molding, remove the rear door panel (see page 20-17) and plastic cover.
2. Release the clips, and gently pry the front door molding (A) or rear door molding (B) away from the door while
removing the adhesive tape (e).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 12

3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips and adhesive tape.
20-164
BACK
Side Sill Panel Replacement - Coupe
1. Remove the side sill panel.
- 1 If equipped, remove the splash guard (A).
- 2 Pull the inner fender (B) back as necessary, and remove the expansion clips (e).
- 3 Slide the side sill panel (0) forward and remove it. Side clips (E) will stay in the body.
- 4 Remove the side clips from the body.
Fastener Locations
C[>: Clip, 4 E [> : Clip, 12

----------
D
2. Replace any damaged clips.
3. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
4. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the clips snap
into place.
5. Install all the expansion clips.
6. Reinstall the inner fender and splash guard (if equipped).
20-165
BACK
Exterior Trim
Side Sill Panel Replacement - Sedan
1. Remove the side sill panel.
- 1 If equipped, remove the splash guard (A).
- 2 Pull the inner fender (B) back as necessary, and remove the expansion clip (e).
- 3 Slide the side sill panel (0) forward and remove it. Side clips (E) will stay in the body.
- 4 Remove the side clips from the body.
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 4 C [> : Clip, 4 E [> : Clip, 9
2. Replace any damaged clips.
3. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
4. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the clips snap
into place.
5. Install all the expansion clips.
6. Reinstall the inner fender and splash guard (if equipped).
20-166
BACK
Fenderwell
Inner Fender Replacement
1. Remove the inner fender as shown. Take care to
scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
Bol1.2
6x1.0mm

(1.0 kgf.m.
___ 7:....:..2=..:.::lb.:....f.ft:..::''-----'
C [> : Clip. 7 D [> : Clip. 3

Ex_' '01-02 modeb Coupe, /"
D
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of
removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement
1. Remove the fuel pipe protector as shown. Take
care to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 3

FUEL PIPE PROTECTOR
2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal,
and replace any damaged clips.
20-167
BACK
Fenderwell
Rear Air Outlet Replacement
1. Remove the rear bumper
-Coupe (see page 20-145)
-Sedan (see page 20-148)
2. Remove the screws, then remove the rear air outlet
(A). Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
.. : Screw, 2
~
3. Install the air outlet in the reverse order of removal.
20-168
BACK
Openers
HOOD OPENER CABLE
HOOD LATCH
FUEL FILL DOOR LATCH
TRUNK LID LATCH
TRUNK LID OPENER/
FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER CABLE
Replacement, page 20-171, page 20-173
TRUNK LID
LOCK CYLINDER
TRUNK LID/FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
20-169
BACK
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle (see page 20-167):
Splash guard (for some models)
Inner fender
2. Remove these items for the left side of the vehicle:
Door opening trim
Kick panel
Door opening trim
Kick panel
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B) (see page 20-175) and hood release handle (C) (see
Fastener Locations
D [>: Clip, 3 E [> : Clip, 3
4. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (0, E) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle.
Take care not to bend the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
20-170
BACK
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement - Coupe
Rear seat-back
Rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead cover (see page 20-76)
Front seat belt lower anchor bolt (left side) (see step 8 on page 23-6)
Door sill trim (left side)
Trunk floor
Trunk rear trim panel
Trunk side pocket (left side)
Trunk side trim panel (left side)
5. Pull the carpet back as necessary (see page 20-81).
6. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B) (see page 20-176).
Fastener Locations
F
C !>: Clip, 1 0 !> : Clip, 1 E !>: Cushion tape, 2

----
A
7. Release the opener cable from the clips (e, D), and remove the cushion tapes (E), then remove the fuel fill door
latch (F) and the opener cable junction box (G) from the body.
(cont'd)
20-171
BACK
Openers
Trunk Lid 0 pener IFuel Fill D oorOp
. 8. Disconnect the trunk r ener Cable Repla
trunk lid latch IBII ,d open cable IAl f cement Coupe (
see page 20-1781 rom the' cont'dl
WIth . W ..... utp
power trunk lid lock' owe. trunk lid 10 ...
. 'oat .
Fastener Locat' onw LocatiOM c[> c[>cr
Ions
D[>,Clip

E cushion
models. 1
20-172
B

--=---- -- ('

A D
CC

-cc
L :/E
)"0 cable
9 U . Junction box.
. sing a clip rem
cable cush. over, detach th I"
lid hing Ion (E) from the bod e c IPS (C,D) and/or
e. y, trunk lid and t
runk
10. Remo h ve t e trunk I"d
from the vehicle T I k opener/fuel lid ope
cable. . a e care not to b ner cable end the opener
11. Install the cable
and replace any of removal,
BACK
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement - Sedan
Rear seat cushion
Rear seat side bolster
Rear bulkhead cover (see page 20-77)
Front seat belt lower anchor bolt (left side) (see step 6 on page 23-7)
Front door sill trim (left side)
Rear door sill trim (left side)
Center pillar lower trim panel
Trunk floor
Trunk side pocket (left side)
Trunk side trim panel (left side)
5. Pull the carpet back as necessary (see page 20-81).
6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (8) (see page 20-176).
Fastener Locations
C 1>: Clip. 1 D I> : Cushion tape. 1
To trunk lid
latch.
F
7. Release the opener cable from the clip (e), and remove the cable cushion (D), then remove the fuel fill door latch
(E) and the opener cable junction box (F) from the body.
(cont'd)
20-173
BACK
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement - Sedan (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the
trunk lid latch (8) (see page 20-178).
With power trunk lid lock:
Fastener Locations
C 1>: Clip, 3
c
c
20-174
D 1>: Clip, 2
B
'L... To opener cable
junction box.
Without power trunk lid lock:
Fastener Locations
C 1>: Clip, 3
.JiJ
A
B
:::::--::::::;
-:::::...--- ,--'
" -----

arlL

C --
. y /
C
/
C
L... To opener cable
junction box.
9. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (C, D) from
the trunk lid hinge.
10. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener
cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the
cable.
11. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal,
and replace any damaged clips.
BACK
Hood Release Handle Replacement
1. Remove these items for the left side of the vehicle.
Door sill trim
Kick panel
Front door sill trim
Kick panel
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the
hood release handle (8). Take care not to bend the
cable.
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release
handle.
and note there items:
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly .
Make sure the hood opens properly.
Hood Latch Replacement
1. Remove the cover (A) from the hood latch (8).
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 3 [>: Clip, 1
~ r ; ~ o ~ ; ~ J &h J
7.2Ibfft) 1W
- - -- - -- - ------- --- --
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch from
the body.
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (C) and hood
latch switch connector (D), then detach the hood
latch switch connector from the body. Take care not
to bend the cable.
(cont'd)
20-175
BACK
Openers
Hood Latch Replacement (cont'd)
note these items:
Grease each location of the hood latch indicated
by the arrows.
Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and hood latch switch connector is
connected properly.
Adjust the hood latch alignment (see page 20-
151 ).
Make sure the hood locks securely.
20-176
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door
Opener Replacement
1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with
protective tape, pry open the cover (A), and remove
the opener lock cylinder (B) from the opener (C).
2. Pry out the access hole cover (A), and loosen the
bolt.
Fastener Location
.. : Bolt, 1
6x1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibf.ft)
B
3. Remove the opener (B) from the bolt, and release
the hook (C) by sliding the opener backward.
BACK
4. Disconnect the trunk lid/fuel fill door opener cable
(A), then remove the opener (8).
5. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal,
Make sure the opener cable is connected
properly .
Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open
properly.
Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement
1. Remove the following items (see page 20-78):
Trunk floor
Trunk side pocket, left side
2. Pull the rear edge of the left trunk side trim panel
back (see page 20-78).
3. Turn the fuel fill door latch (A) 90, and remove it.
(cont'd)
20-177
BACK
Openers
Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement
(cont'd)
note these items:
Grease each location indicated by the arrows.
Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and
locks securely.
5. Check that the fuel fill door fits flush against the
body. If necessary, adjust it.
Fastener Locations
:80It.2
20-178
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfftl
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement
1. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder
(see page 20-179).
2. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) and trunk
lid latch switch connector (B). If equipped with a
power trunk lid lock, detach the trunk lid latch
switch connector from the trunk lid. Take care not
to bend the opener cable.
With power trunk lid lock:
Fastener Locations
:80It.2
6x 1.0mm
@)nm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
Without power trunk lid lock:
Fastener Locations

@)nm
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm.
7.2Ibfftl
3. Remove the bolts from the trunk lid latch (C).
BACK
4. Pull the trunk lid latch out with the cylinder rod (A).
Take care not to bend the cylinder rod.
5. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the trunk lid latch.
note these items:
Grease the locations of the trunk lid latch
Make sure the connector is plugged in properly
and the cylinder rod is connected properly.
Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder
Replacement
1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A) and cylinder switch
connector (8), then detach the cylinder switch
connector from the trunk lid.
B
2. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder. Then
turn the trunk lid lock cylinder (A) 45, and remove
it.
Fastener Location
Bolt, 1
.
1i)l111)))))I))) 9.8 Nm
@
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of
Make sure the connector is connected properly
and the cylinder rod is connected properly .
Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
20-179
BACK
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
20-180
FRONT SEAM
8x 1.25mm
26 Nm (2.7 kgfm,
20Ibf.ft)
FRONT SEAM
~ l ~
SPECIAL SOL T _
14x1.5mm ~
Replace.
/
SPECIAL SOL T
14x 1.5 mm
103 Nm (10.5 kgfm, 76 Ibfft)
Replace.
12x 1.25 mm
BACK
SPECIAL BOLTS
14x 1.5 mm
103 Nm (105 k
Replace. . gfm, 76 Ibfftl
20-181
BACK
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
Ill: Inner diameter
20-182
N
" en
CENTER !:!
UNE g:
5!
POINT a
I
;:::-
-
Gi "! "': "l
en GO CD ..,

.., ..,

o N
o CD
" CD o en en CD
...
iii iii
..;

GO CD
en
II)
I
V!.t
lYY
r.C
./.

7L

POINTb3
POINTh
POINTg
POINTf
/
i POI:;'!nk
LfA r
KWa

v[) /
.:1:
t rf
oyr4

-It- 1>1
0
1
""
.
is
/
V

"
1ft

c;;
C!
iii
iii
"
"
ai
.., .., ..,
!:!
01--
1--

-I-
!
:;
0
liD
...
CD 0
...

\
1'\
...If'""1\,....
ri'
Y:
0 .
t'l- I II:!s1' 0 o I 0
. ......
i!!.-j"
""F-

VI'
1
..-t:! :J
\....;T
V
4 .5
130 10.21
15.12; Fj'7713.01
8817.401 280 111.01
23819.371 425116.71
268110.61 595123.41
361114.21 610124.01
490119.31 1425156.101
...
c(
c.J
i=UI

> ...
BACK
POINTn
POINTm POINT 0
POINTq
POINT I
F
)J
\
M
\
\
(/.

@ 0
"-8
0 -......;:::

!) I
0
I I
I IfII 0
\
{[
..--

1\
iii
c;
iii iii
-
1-=

CD
CD
II!
... CD
..
3
:;
en
0
II!
II>
!:!
..

en ...
ct
- 0-

.. ..
0
If!
0
CD ...
.. ... 0 0
CD

... 0 ... N ... ...
... ...
t--
I I

I I
i
i

I

i I
,
i
I
.,11",,---=

.L-.(!l , 0
I I
.
\
I 1M \ II ([
t--
)
@
":Jt":7
i
;' ............
[\'

I
I

r
\
I I

I
L I
..-J
\ POINT V
I
I
I
I

2145 184.45)
2365193.111
2750 1108.3)
2899 1114.1)
29981118.0)
--
---_ ... -._. _._ .. _--_ ... _-_._-
32001126.0)
36221142.6)
(cont'd)
20-183
BACK
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
D: Inner diameter
POINTe
BASE
LINE
20-184
POINTf
269 110.6)
SECTION BB
POINTe
POINTe
815 (0.59) Transmission Mount Point
M12 x 1.25
\
POINTh
1111 (0.43) Engine Mount Point
M14x 1.5
~
~
.,;
~
of
po
~
po
N po
en
...
... po
en
... ...
00
=
...
0:>
0:>
...
...
For Front Beam
POINTbl
POINTb2
811.5 (0.453)
811.5 (0.453)
SECTIONAA
811.5 (0.453)
2-811
(0.43)
Front Damper Center
For Rear
Beam I
M4 x 1.5
POINTi
817 (0.7)
For Rear
Beam
iii
,..;
~
...
~
po
oci
po
po
~
.t
iii
N
~
....
...
....
~
~
POINTu
825 (1.0)
Locate Hole
815 (0.59)
Locate Hole
825 (1.0)
Locate Hole
BACK
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Heating
Special Tools ................................ 21-2 Air Conditioning
Component Location Index ........ 21-3 Component Location Index ........ 21-31
General Troubleshooting AlC Service Tips and
Information ............................... 21-4 Precautions ............................... 21-32
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....... 21-5 AlC Refrigerant Oil
Symptom Troubleshooting Replacement ............................ 21-32
Index ......................................... 21-6 Symptom Troubleshooting
System Description ..................... 21-7 Index ......................................... 21-34
Circuit Diagram ............................ 21-8 System Description ..................... 21-35
DTC Troubleshooting .................. 21-9 Circuit Diagram ............................ 21-36
Recirculation Control Motor Condenser Fan Circuit
Circuit Troubleshooting .......... 21-14 Troubleshooting ...................... 21-37
Blower Motor Circuit Radiator and Condenser Fans
Troubleshooting ...................... 21-15 Common Circuit
Heater Control Troubleshooting ...................... 21-38
Power and Ground Compressor Clutch Circuit
Circuits Troubleshooting ........ 21-19 Troubleshooting ...................... 21-39
Air Mix Control Motor AlC Pressure Switch Circuit
Test and Replacement ............. 21-20 Troubleshooting ...................... 21-41
Mode Control Motor AlC System Tests ........................ 21-43
Test and Replacement ............. 21-21 Evaporator Removal and
Recirculation Control Motor Installation ................................ 21-46
Test and Replacement ............. 21-22 Evaporator Components
Heater Fan Switch Test ............... 21-23 Replacement ............................ 21-47
Evaporator Temperature Compressor Replacement .......... 21-48
Sensor Test .............................. 21-23 Compressor Clutch Check .......... 21-50
Heater Control Panel Compressor Clutch Overhaul ..... 21-51
Removal and Installation ........ 21-24 Compressor Relief Valve
Heater Control Panel Replacement ............................ 21-52
Disassembly and Condenser Replacement ............ 21-53
Reassembly .............................. 21-24 Refrigerant Recovery .................. 21-54
Dust and Pollen Filter System Evacuation ...................... 21-55
Replacement ............................ 21-25 System Charging ......................... 21-56
*Blower Unit Removal and Refrigerant Leak Test .................. 21-57
Installation ................................ 21-26
Blower Unit Components
Replacement ............................ 21-27
*Heater Unit/Core
Replacement ............................ 21-28
Heater Valve Cable
Adjustment ............................... 21-30
HVAC {Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning}
Special Tools
Tool Number Descri tion
07SAZ-OO 1 OOOA
CD
21-2
BACK
Heating
HEATER VALVE CABLE
Adjustment. page 21-30
HEATER UNIT/CORE
HEATER DUCT (Without A/C)
EVAPORATOR (With A/C)
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS (With AlC)
Replacemant, page 21-47
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-22
BLOWER UNIT
... / Removal and Installation, page 21-26
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (With AlC)
Test, page 21-23
- BLOWER UNIT COMPONENTS
BLOWER RESISTOR
DUST AND PDLLEN FILTER
HEATER FAN SWITCH
Test, page 21-23
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-21
Test, page 21-20
21-3
BACK
Heating
How to Retrieve a DTC
The heater control panel has a self-diagnosis function.
Running the Self-diagnosis Function
2. Turn the fan switch OFF, and the recirculation control switch to Recirculate (recirculation indicator comes on).
3. Press and hold the recirculation control switch to Fresh (recirculation indicator goes off). Continue to hold the
switch until the recirculation indicator comes on for 2 seconds, then it will blink the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
to indicate a faulty component.
RECIRCULATION INDICATOR
FAN SWITCH
RECIRCULATION CONTROL SWITCH
Example of OTC Indication Pattern (OTC 2):
Recirculation _
indicator on
0.3 sec
-
0.3 sec
rm
Recirculation ....... 1-------------4
indicator off ----- -
- I.... ~ : ~
Press and hold the
recirculation
control switch
Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function
2 sec 2 sec 1 sec
Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnosis function. After completing repair work, run the self-diagnosis
function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
21-4
BACK
DTC Detection Item Page
(Recirculation
Indicator Blinks)
1 A problem in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-9)
2 A problem in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-10)
3 A problem in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-12)
(WithA/C)
In case of multiple problems. the recirculation indicator will indicate only the DTC with the least number of blinks.
21-5
BACK
Heating
Recirculation control doors do not Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Blown fuse No.3 (7.5A) in the
change between Fresh and Troubleshooting (see page 21-14) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate. Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Blower motor runs, but one or more Blower Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the
speeds are inoperative. Troubleshooting (see page 21-15) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202 and G401
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Blower motor does not run at all. Blower Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the
Troubleshooting (see page 21-15) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
dash fuse/relay box
connectors
Both heater and AlC do not work. Heater Control Power and Ground Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the
Circuits Troubleshooting (see page under-hood fuse/relay box, No.3
21-19) (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box, and No. 13 (7.5A)
in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
connectors
21-6
BACK
System Description
Heater Control Panel Inputs and Outputs
1 2
11 12
Cavity Wire color
1 GRN/WHT
2 BLK/YEL
3 WHT/YEL
4 BRN/YEL
5 (With AlC) YEL/GRN
6 BLU/GRN
7 LTGRN/BLK
8 GRN/YEL
9 BLK
10 RED/BLK
11 GRN/RED
12 RED/YEL
13 RED/WHT
14 BLU/WHT
15 BLU/BLK
16 GRY
17 YEL/GRN
18 GRN/BLK
19 PNK/BLK
20 (with AlC) BRN
21 GRN
22 RED
3
13
HEATER CONTROL PANEL 22P CONNECTOR
t, r-'
4 5
><
6 7 8
14 15
161XI17
18 19 20
9
21
Signal
RECIRCULATE
IG2 (Power)
+B (Power)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
AlC PRESSURE SWITCH
MODE 4
MODE 3
MODE 2
GROUND
10
22
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY
FRESH
AIR MIX HOT
AIR MIX COOL
MODEVENT+
MODEDEF+
AIR MIX POTENTIAL +5 V
SENSOR COMMON GROUND
MODE 1
AIR MIX POTENTIAL
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FAN SWITCH
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S)
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
21-7
BACK
Heating
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD FUSEIRELA Y BOX
B ATIERY
No.4. (.OOA) No.42 (50A)
+
IGNITION SWITCH
I

I
WHT YE
IG2
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX

BLKlYEL I
No.54 (40A) NO.56 (40A)
r--O""
21-8
I
BLKlYEL
4
BLOWER

MOTOR
RELAY
12
3
BLOWER
MOTOR

BL
-,

U/RED
BLOWER RESISTOR
No.13
(7.5A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
..-'IM .... 'VV'v1"'V'IJ'v-t--- BLUIRED
WHT/YEL
AC
YEUGRN
SWITCH
(WilhACl
REAR
BRNlYEL
RELAY
COMSINATION
BLU
SV
4
BLUIYEL
BLU/BLK ...---- BLU/RED
6 3
3
GRN
BLK
GRN
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (With AlC)
..l..@-
BRN YEUGRN
GRY SCOM
AIR MIX
CONTROL
MOTOR
MHOT
-
M-VENT
MDEF
S-COM
MODEl
MODE
MODE2
CONTROL
MOTOR
MODE3
MODE4
FRS RECIRCULATION
5
7
LIGHT SWITCH or RED/BLK
TAILLIGHT
7
CONTROL
IG2 BLKlYEL
RELAY
LIGHTS
REC MOTOR
MULTIPLEX
<J---RED
BLK CONTROL UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
HEATER CONTROL PANEL
BLK
1
G401
BLK
1
G202
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1: A problem in the air mix control motor
circuit
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
2. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21-20).
Is the air mix control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Go to step 8.
3. Disconnect the heater control panel 22P connector.
heater control panel 22P connector terminals
No. 12,13,16,17 and 19 individually.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL 22PCONNECTOR
= =
YES- Repair any short to body ground in the
wire(s) between the heater control panel and the air
mix control motor .
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
terminals for voltage.
234 5 7 8 9 10
11 21 22
=
Is there any voltage?
YES- Repair any short to power in the wire(s)
between the heater control panel and the air mix
control motor. This short also damages the heater
control panel. Repair the short to power before
replacing the heater control panel..
NO- Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
21-9
BACK
Heating
7. Check for continuity between following terminals
of the heater control panel 22P connector and the
air mix control motor 7P connector.
22P: 7P:
No.12 No.2
No.13 No.1
No.16 No.7
No.17 No.5
No. 19 No.3
HEATER CONTROL PANEL22P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female termimals
RED/WHT
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the heater control panel 22P connector and at the
air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original heater
control panel..
NO- Repair any open in the wire(s) between the
heater control panel and the air mix control
motor .
8. Remove the air mix control motor (see page 21-20).
9. Check the air mix control linkage and door for
smooth movement.
Do the air mix control linkage and door move
smoothly?
YES- Replace the air mix control motor .
NO- Repair the air mix control linkage or door .
21-10
DTC 2: A problem in the mode control motor
circuit
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
2. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-21).
Is the mode control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Go to step 8.
heater control panel 22P connector terminals No.6,
7,8, 14, 15, 17 and 18 individually.
=
YES- Repair any short to body ground in the wire
(s) between the heater control panel and the mode
control motor .
NO - Go to step 5.
BACK
terminals for voltage
between the heater control panel and the mode
control motor. This short also damages the heater
control panel. Repair the short to power before
replacing the heater control panel..
NO - Go to step 6.
of the heater control panel 22P connector and the
air mix control motor 7P connector.
22P: 7P:
No.6 No.3
No.7 No.4
No.8 No.5
No.14 No.2
No. 15 No.1
No. 17 No.7
No.18 No.6
BLU/BLK
VEL
IGRN
LTGRN/BLK
MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
mode control motor 7P connector. lfthe
control panel..
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the
heater control panel and mode control motor..
(cont'd)
21-11
BACK
Heating
8. Remove the mode control motor (see page 21-21).
9. Check the mode control linkage and doors for
smooth movement.
Do the mode control linkage and doors move
smoothly?
YES - Replace the air mix control motor .
NO- Repair the air mix control linkage or doors .
21-12
DTC 3: A problem in the evaporator
temperature sensor circuit
1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
No.2 terminals of the evaporator temperature
sensor.
RESISTANCE
kQ
40
30
20
10

---
50 68 86F
10 20 86C
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance within the specifications shown
on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the evaporator temperature
sensor .
BACK
4. Check for continuity between the No. 20 terminal of
the heater control panel 22P connector and body
ground.
234 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22
between the heater control panel and the
evaporator temperature sensor..
NO-Go to step 5.
the heater control panel 22P connector and the No.2
terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2P CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 6.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the heater
control panel and the evaporator temperature
sensor .
the heater control panel 22P connector and the
No.1 terminal of the evaporator temperature
sensor 2P connector.
2P CONNECTOR
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
control panel..
NO- Repair open in the wire between the heater
control panel and the evaporator temperature
sensor..
21-13
BACK
Heating
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
the recirculation control motor 7P connector and
body ground.
7P CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.3 fuse
in the driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box and the
recirculation control motor .
6. Test the reci rculation control motor (see page 21-
22).
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 12.
21-14
8. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No. 11
terminals of the heater control panel 22P connector
and body ground individually.
GRN/WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22
=
(s) between the heater control panel and the
NO-Go to step 9.
wires for voltage.
GRN/WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22
between the heater control panel and the
recirculation control motor. This short also
damages the heater control panel. Repai r the short
to power before replacing the heater control
panel..
NO-Goto step 10.
BACK
11. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of the heater control panel 22P connector
and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
22P: 7P:
NO.1 No.7
No.11 No.5
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES- Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the heater control panel 22P connector and at
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
control panel..
NO-Repair any open in the wire(s) between the
heater control panel and the recirculation control
motor .
12. Remove the recirculation control motor (see page
21-22).
13. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors
for smooth movement.
Do the recirculation control linkage and doors
move smoothly?
YES- Replace the recirculation control motor..
NO - Repair the recirculation control linkage or
doors .
Blower Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and the heater fan
switch ON.
Does the blower run?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 16.
2. Turn the heater fan switch OFF.
3. Make sure the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the blower motor run?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
6. Disconnect the blower resistor 5P connector.
7. Disconnectthe heater fan switch 7P connector.
8. Check for continuity between the No.3, 4, 5 and 6
terminals of the heater fan switch 7P connector and
body ground individually.
HEATER FAN SWITCH 7P CONNECTOR
BLU/RED
YES-Repair any short to body ground in the wire
(s) between the blower motor, the blower resistor
and the heater fan switch .
NO- Replace the heater fan switch .
(cont'd)
21-15
BACK
Heating
Blower Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Disconnect the blower resistor 5P connector.
No.5 terminals of the blower resistor.
BLOWER RESISTOR
Is there about 3- 3.5 ohms?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO- Replace the blower resistor .
12. Reconnect the blower resistor 5P connector.
13. Disconnect the heater fan switch 7P connector.
21-16
15. Ground each of the heaterfan switch 7P connector
terminals individually in the following order: No.4,
5,6 and 3.
BLU/RED
4
BLU
BLU/VEL
= =
Does the blower motor run at progressively higher
speeds?
YES - Replace the heater fan switch .
NO-Repair any open or cause of excessive
resistance in the appropriate wire(s) between the
blower resistor and the heater fan switch .
16. Turn the heater fan switch OFF and the ignition
switch OFF.
17. Check the No. 56 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse
/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO- Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .
18. Connect the No.2 terminal of the blower motor 2P
connector to body ground with a jumper wire.
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
JUMPER
WIRE
=
BLU/RED
BACK
NO-Goto step 27.
21. Disconnect the jumper wire.
22. Disconnect the heater fan switch 7P connector.
the heater fan switch 7P connector and body
ground.
BLU/RED
4
YES-Go to step 25.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor and the heater fan switch .
the heater fan switch 7P connector and body
ground.
BlK
2 3
4 5 6
=
YES- Replace the heater fan switch .
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the
heater fan switch and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G401 .
the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.
YES - Replace the blower motor .
NO - Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
21-17
BACK
Heating
Blower Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
31. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-52).
/s the relay OK?
NO- Replace the blower motor relay .
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
=
21-18
=
YES- Go to step 35.
fuse in the driver's under-hood fuse/relay box and
the blower motor relay .
=
YES - Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor relay and the blower motor..
blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe wire is
BACK
Heater Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 54 (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A)
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
ground.
-=
BLK/YEL
234 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22
YES - Go to step 5.
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the heater control panel .
ground.
=
YES- Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the No. 13
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the heater control panel..
ground.
.Q
=
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the heater control panel 22P connector. If the
control panel..
heater control panel and body ground. If the wire is
21-19
BACK
Heating
Air Mix Control Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 7 P connector from the ai r mix
control motor.
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the
air mix control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and
stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Hot. Ifthe air mix control motor
does not run, remove it, then check the air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace
the air mix control motor .
If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
234 567
NO.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 k to 7.8 k
Q.
NO.5 terminals.
Max Cool-0.58 k to 109 k Q
Max Hot-3.52 k to 6.55 kQ
21-20
Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
1. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix
control motor (B). Remove the rod (C) of the air mix
control motor from the air mix control linkage (D).
Remove the self-tapping screws and the air mix
control motor from the heater unit.
D
2. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, make sure the motor runs
smoothly.
BACK
Mode Control Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control
motor.
2. Connect battery power to the No.2 terminal, and
ground the No.1 terminal; the mode control motor
should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't,
reverse the connections; the mode control motor
should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the
mode control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
3 4 5 6 7
3. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or
less at the 20 k Q range. With the mode control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity
between the No.3, 4, 5, 6 terminals and the NO.7
terminal individually. There should be continuity
for a moment at each terminal.
4. If the mode control motor does not run in step 2,
remove it, then check the mode control linkage and
doors for smooth movement.
If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace
the mode control motor.
If the linkage or doors sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
Mode Control Motor Replacement
1. Remove the wire harness clip (A), then disconnect
the 7P connector (8) from the mode control motor
(C). Remove the rods (D) of the mode control motor
from the mode control linkage (E). Remove the self-
tapping screws and the mode control motor from
the heater unit.
smoothly.
21-21
BACK
Heating
Recirculation Control Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
control motor.
I NOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the recirculation control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal, and
ground the No.5 and No.7 terminals; the
recirculation control motor should run smoothly.
To avoid damaging the recirculation control motor,
do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the
No.5 or No.7 terminals from ground; the
recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh or
Recirculate. Don't cycle the recirculation control
motor for a long time.
23456 7
3. If the recirculation control motor does not run in
step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation
control linkage and doors for smooth movement .
If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace
the recirculation control motor .
If the linkage or doors sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
21-22
Recirculation Control Motor
Replacement
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-87).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-
tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
from the blower unit.
B
smoothly.
BACK
Heater Fan Switch Test
Check for continuity between the terminals in each
1\
Terminal
\
1 2 3 4 5 6
Position
OFF
1
2
3
4
~ ~ ~
HEATER FAN SWITCH
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test
1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
resistance between its terminals.
2
2. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a
change in resistance.
3. Compare the resistance readings with the
specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
RESISTANCE
kQ
40
30
20
10
~
~
..........
..........
50 68 86F
10 20 30C
TEMPERATURE
21-23
BACK
Heating
Heater Control Panel Removal and
Installation
1. Remove the center panel together with the heater
control panel (see page 20-86).
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the heater
control panel (A) from the center panel (B).
A
~
!e
B
3. Install the control panel in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the control
panel controls to see whether it works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that
there are no problems in the system (see page 21-
4).
21-24
Heater Control Panel Disassembly
and Reassembly
1. Remove the fan switch (A) and temperature control
dial (B), then remove the front panel (e). Remove
the mode control switch (0), recirculation control
switch (E), rear defogger switch (F) and Ale switch
lid (G) (or Ale switch (H)) buttons.
2. Reassemble the control panel in the reverse order
of removal.
BACK
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
The dust and pollen filter should be replace every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever
comes first. Replace the filter more often if the airflow is
less than usual.
2. Remove the bolt, the screws and the glove box
frame.
3. Remove the filter lid (A) from the evaporator, then
pull out the lower dust and pollen filter (B) and the
upper dust and pollen filter (e) in that order.
4. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and
replace it.
5. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the
evaporator.
21-25
BACK
Heating
Blower Unit Removal and Installation
SRS components locations, precautions, and
procedures in the SRS section before performing
repairs or service (see page 23-28).
preset buttons.
4. With air conditioning; remove the evaporator (see
page 21-46).
5. Without air conditioning; remove the self-tapping
screws, the moutning nut, the mounting bolts and
the heater duct.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
6x 1.0 mm
21-26
6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower
motor, the blower resistor and the recirculation
control motor, then remove the wire harness clip
(B). Remove the mounting nuts, the mounting bolt
and the blower unit (e).
6x 1.0mm
A
\
u\:\; /
~ \,//
B I--<c
6x 1.0 mm
7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
Enter the anti-theft code for radio, then enter the
customer's radio station presets.
BACK
Blower Unit Components Replacement
Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
The recirculation control motor (AI. the blower resistor (BI and the blower motor (CI can be replaced without
removing the blower unit.
Before reassembly. make sure that the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly without binding.
After reassembly. make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-221.
c
21-27
BACK
Heating
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
repairs or service (see page 23-28).
preset buttons.
3. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to
the fully opened position as shown.
A
4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
from the radiator (see page 10-10).
21-28
5. Remove the heater valve mounting nut. Slide the
hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet (B)
and outlet (C) heater hoses from the heater unit.
Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
not to let coolant spill on electrical parts or painted
surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
C
\ ()
~
A
6x 1.0mm
6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit.
Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines, the
brake lines, etc.
ax 1.25 mm
13 Nm 11.3 kgf.m. 9.4Ibfft)
BACK
8. Remove the heater duct (see page 21-26) or
evaporator (see page 21-46).
9. Remove the mounting bolts and the heater unit.
10. Remove the self-tapping screws and the bracket (A),
then carefully pull out the heater core (B) so you
don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes.
11. Install the heater core in the reverse order of
removal.
12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of
Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
Refill the cooling system with engine coolant (see
page 10-10).
Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-30).
Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
21-29
BACK
Heating
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
then disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the
heater valve arm (C).
A
c B
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve
cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
A
D
3. Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool (60F
or 18C) with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the air mix
control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end
of the heater valve cable housing against the stop
(D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into
the cable clamp (A).
21-30
5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
A
c B
BACK
Air Conditioning
SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE)
CONDENSER
/
21-31
BACK
Air Conditioning
A/C Service Tips and Precautions
AWARNING
Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a
combustible vapor.
The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury.
Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134
a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems.
ACAUTION
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
Be careful when connecting service equipment.
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil,
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral
oil in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning
system or your servicing equipment will result.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is
certified to meetthe requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work
area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
with compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
Always disconnect the negative cable from the
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
When discharging the system, use a R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-32
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
Recommended PAG oil: DENSO NO-OIL 8:
PIN 38897 - PR7 - A01AH: 120 m.e (4 floz)
PIN 38899-PR7-A01: 40 m.e (11/3floz)
Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
listed if you replace any of the following parts.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the
container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately.
Condenser ............ 25 m.e (5/6 floz, 0.9 Impoz)
Evaporator ............ 40 m.e (1 1/3 floz, 1.4 Impoz)
Line or hose .......... 10 m.e (1/3 floz, 0.4Impoz)
Receiver/Dryer .... 10 m.e (1/3 floz, 0.4Impoz)
Leakage repair ..... 25 m.e (5/6 floz, 0.9 Impoz)
Compressor ......... For compressor replacement,
subtract the volume of oil drained
from the removed compressor from
160 m.e (51/3 floz, 5.6Impoz), and
drain the calculated volume of oil
from the new compressor: 160 m.e (5
1/3 floz, 5.6Impoz) - Volume of
removed compressor = Volume to
drain from new compressor.
REMOVED
COMPRESSOR
NOTE: Even if no oil is drained from
the removed compressor, don't
drain more than 50 m.e (1 2/3 floz,
1.8 Impoz) from the new
compressor.
NEW
COMPRESSOR
00 00
~ -SAME V L _.J)} .-NWG }
tl D VOLUME : A
A: 160 mA (5 1/3 floz. 5.6Impoz)
BACK
SUCTION HOSE
EVAPORATOR

CONDENSER UNE
DISCHARGE
HOSE

BRACKET
CD Discharge hose to the compressor (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibf.ft)
Discharge hose to the condenser (6 x 1.0 mm) : 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibf.ft)
Condenser line to the condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibf.ft)
Condenser line to the receiver/dryer: 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m. 7.2 Ibf.ft)
@ Receiver line to the receiver/dryer: 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibf.ft)
@ Receiver line to the evaporator: 13 Nm (1.3 kgfm. 9.4Ibf.ft)
(j) Suction hose to the evaporator: 31 Nm (3.2 kgfm. 23 Ibf.ft)
Suction hose to the compressor (6 x 1.0 mm) : 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibf.ft)
Compressor to compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mm) : 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm. 16Ibf.ft)
@Compressorbrackettoengineblock (10 x 1.25 mm): 49 Nm (5.0 kgfm. 36Ibf.ft)
21-33
BACK
Air Conditioning
Condenser fan does not run at all Condenser Fan Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the
(but radiator fan runs with the AlC Troubleshooting (see page 21-37) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
on) No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Both fans do not run with the AlC on Radiator and Condenser Fans Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No.
Common Circuit Troubleshooting 58 (20A) in the under-hood fuse/
(see page 21-38) relay box, and No.3 (7.5A) in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor clutch does not engage Compressor Clutch Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the
Troubleshooting (see page 21-39) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
dash fuse/relay box
connectors
AlC system does not come on (both AlC Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
fans and compressor) Troubleshooting (see page 21-25) connectors
21-34
BACK
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by circulating refrigerant through the
system as shown below.
BLOWER FAN
\
(Meters the required
amount of refrigerant
into the evaporator)
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
When the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm' ,28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm' ,
455 psi), the NC pressure
switch opens the circuit to
the NC switch and stops the
air conditioning to protect the
compressor.
RECEIVER/DRYER
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
EVAPORATOR
EVAPORATOR (Absorption of heat)
TEMPER%TURE
SENSOR
EQUALIZING TUBE
(Meters pressure and
improves the expansion
valve reaction time)
CAPILLARY TUBE SENSING BULB
(Controls the temperature of the
refrigerant leaving the evaporator
by metering the expansion valve)
RELIEF VALVE
(Relieves pressure at the
compressor when the
pressure is too high)
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
EWit- LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL8) designed for the R-134a
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in
compressor failure.
All NC system parts (compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, condenser, receiver/dryer, expansion
valve, O-rings for joints) have to be proper for refrigerant R-134a. Do not confuse with R-12 parts.
Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meetthe requirements of SAE J2210 to service R-134a air conditioning
system.
Always recover the refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting
any NC fitting.
21-35
BACK
Air Conditioning
Circuit Diagram
B ATIERY
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)
+
WHT
NO.54 (40A)
"'"'
YEL

NO.S6 (20A)
1 3 1 3

)
RADIATOR
------
FAN
RELAY
'I
2 4 2 4
GRN BLU/YEl

I
IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.3 (7.5A)

YEL
r
IG2
4 1

CDNDENSER
FAN
RELAY
3 2
RED RED
1

PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
I
No.13 (7.5A)
COM PRESSOR
TCH CLU
RELA Y
COMP RESSOR
CH ClUT
BL KNEl
BLU/BLK GRN
GiN
.JL
21-36
RADIATOR
M FAN
MOTOR
BLK
G201
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH
1 (Closed: Above )
199F (93C)
BLK
G101
CONDENSER
M FAN
MOTOR
BLK
G201
FANC
SV
HEATER CONTROL PANEL
1
BlUiRED l'
SWITCH
.-"----..(5}-- YEUGRN
BlK
G401
BlKNEL
BACK
Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Remove the condenser fan relay from the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-52).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the condenser fan relay .
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
CONDENSER FAN RELA V 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
=
YES-Go to step 4.
NO- Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
CONDENSER FAN RELAV 4P SOCKET
1
2
BLU/VEl
4 3
Does the condenser fan run?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 8.
JUMPER
WIRE
2
4
YES - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.3 fuse
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
condenserfan relay .
9. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.
(cont'd)
21-37
BACK
Air Conditioning
Condenser Fan Circuit
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No.2
terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector.
CONDENSER FAN RELAV 4P SOCKET
1----1 BLU/VEL
2
4 3
Q
CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 11.
condenser fan relay and the condenser fan .
the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
BLK
=
YES - Replace the condenser fan motor .
condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201 .
21-38
Radiator and Condenser Fans
Common Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20A) and No. 58 (20A) fuses in
the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A)
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
2
4 3
BLK/VEL
=
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the No.3 fuse
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
condenser fan relay .
6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
7. Make sure the Ale switch is OFF.
BACK
9. Using a 8ackprobe Set, measure the voltage
between the No. 20 terminal of the PCM connector
A (32P) and body ground with the PCM connectors
connected.
V12
3 4
1121 13 14 15
25 26
GRN
5 6
/
8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23
27 28 29 30
/
32
-
/1
24 I
'Y.
=
the PCM connector A(32P). If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good PCM,and recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM .
and the condenser fan relays and PCM .
Compressor Clutch Circuit
Troubleshooting
relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .
2. Check the engine coolant temperature (Use the
Honda PGM Tester PGM-FI data list if possible).
Is the coolant temperature higher than nomal?
YES- Troubleshoot and repair cause of high
engine coolant temperature .
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Remove the compressor clutch relay from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-
52).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO- Replace the compressor clutch relay .
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body
ground.
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELA V 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
=
YES - Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
21-39
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper
wire.
1
2
RED
4 3
Does the compressor clutch click?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO- Go to step 14.
JUMPER
WIRE
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body
ground.
2
4 3
BlK/VEl
=
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.3
the compressor clutch relay .
21-40
10. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay.
13. Using the Backprobe Set, measure the voltage
connected.
23456
25 26 27
RED
YES - Check for loose wi res or poor connections at
the PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM .
compressor clutch relay and the PCM .
14. Disconnectthe jumper wire.
15. Disconnectthe compressor clutch 1P connector.
BACK
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the No.1
terminal of the compressor clutch 1 P connector.
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
RED
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 1P CONNECTOR
YES - Check the compressor clutch clearance and
the compressor clutch field coil (see page 21-50) .
compressor clutch relay and the compressor
clutch .
AIC Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the AlC pressure switch 2P connector.
the AlC pressure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
BLU/RED
Is there about 5 volts?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Gotostep 10.
terminals of the AlC pressure switch.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH
- - - - - ~ . Q r - - - - -
YES- Go to step 6.
NO-Gotostep 11.
(cont'd)
21-41
BACK
Air Conditioning
AIC Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
6. Reconnect the AlC pressure switch 2P connector.
ground.
=
VEL/GRN
2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22
AlC pressure switch 2P connector. If the
control panel..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the heater
control panel and the AlC pressure switch .
21-42
10. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage
connected.
1/
2 3 4
12 13 14 15
25 26
5 6
/
8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23
27 28 29 30
L
32
f u ~ D
=
/
24
YES- Repair open in the wire between the PCM
and the AlC pressure switch .
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
original PCM .
11. Check for proper AlC system pressure.
Is the pressure within specifications?
YES - Replace the AlC pressure switch .
NO- Repair the AlC pressure problem .
BACK
Ale System Tests
Pressure Test
Test results
Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge (high) After stopping compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-55),
pressure
drops to about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28
and recharge with specified amount
abnormally high psi) QuicklY, and then falls araduallv.
(see paae 21-56).
Reduced or no air flow through Clogged condenser or radiator Clean
condenser fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
Condenser or radiator fan not Check fan direction.
workina properlv
Line to condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant in Restricted lines
svstem
Discharge pressure High and low pressures are balanced Faulty compressor discharge Replace the compressor.
abnormally low soon after stopping compressor. Low valve
side is hiaher than normal. Faulty compressor seal
Outlet of expansion valve is not Faulty expansion valve Replace
frosted, low-pressure gauge indicates Moisture in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge
vacuum. with specified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and Frozen expansion valve Recover, evacuate, and recharge
pressure low-pressure line is not cold. Low- (Moisture in system) with specified amount.
abnormally low pressure gauge indicates vacuum. Faulty expansion valve Replace the expansion valve.
Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with compressor off, then
air flow from vents is restricted. check evaporator temperature sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Cloaaed expansion valve Clean or replace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and inlet Clogged receiver/dryer Replace
is warm (should be warm during
operation).
Suction pressure Low-pressure hose and check joint are Expansion valve open too long Repair or replace.
abnormally high cooler than the temperature around Loose expansion capillary tube
evaporator.
Suction pressure is lowered when Excessive refrigerant in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled by water. specified amount.
High and low-pressure are equalized Faulty gasket Replace the compressor.
as soon as the compressor is stopped, Faulty high-pressure valve
and both gauges fluctuate while Foreign particle stuck in high-
runnina. pressure valve
Suction and Reduced air flow through condenser. Clogged condenser or radiator Clean
discharge fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures Condenser or radiator fan not Check fan direction.
abnormally high workina properly
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal end Clogged or kinked low-pressure Repair or replace.
discharge pressure areas are cooler than evaporator. hose parts
abnormally low Temperature around expansion valve Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
is too low compared with that around
receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant leaks COlTlPressor clutch is dirty. Compressor shaft sealleakina Replace the compJessor.
Compressor bolt(s) are dLrty. Leaking around bolt(s) Tiahten boltls) or replace compressor.
Compressor aasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking Replace the compressor.
(cont'd)
21-43
BACK
Air Conditioning
Ale System Tests (cont'd)
Performance Test
AWARNING
combustible vapor.
injury.
Never use compressed airto pressure test
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems.
ACAUTION
The performance test will help determine if the air
conditioner system is operating within specifications.
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning
system.
manufacturers.
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recover/recycling/
charging station to the high-pressure service port
and the low-pressure service port, following the
2. Determine the relative humidity and air
temperature.
21-44
3. Insert a thermometer in the center air vent.
4. Test conditions:
Avoid direct sunlight.
Open the hood.
Open the front doors.
Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool, the
mode control switch on Vent and the
recirculation control switch on Recirculate.
Turn the AlC switch on and the fan switch on Max.
Run the engine at 1,500 rpm.
No driver or passengers in vehicle.
5. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the dash
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit
behind the glove box and the high and low system
pressure from the AlC gauges.
BACK
6. To complete the charts:
Mark the delivery temperature along the vertical line.
Mark the intake temperature (ambient air temperature) along the bottom line.
Draw a line straight up from the air temperature to the humidity.
Mark a point 10 % above and 10 % below the humidity level.
From each point, draw a horizontal line across the delivery temperature.
The delivery temperature should fall between the two lines.
Complete the low-side pressure test and high-side pressure test in the same way.
Any measurements outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
kPa
(kgf/cm2)
psi
2900
(30)
[430]
2500
(25)
[360]
kPa
2000
(20)
(kgf/cm2)
[280]
psi
1500 400
(15) (4)
[210] [57]
980 300
(10) (3)
[140] [43]
DELIVERY 200
(2)
PRESSURE [28]
100
(1)
[14]
0
INTAKE
PRESSURE
86
(30)
77
(25)
68
(20)
59
(15)
50
(10)
41
(5)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
Of
(CC)
DELIVERY
PRESSURE
INTAKE
PRESSURE
I
68
(20)
I
77
(25)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
I
86
(30)
I
95
(35)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
I
80%
30%
80%
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
HUMIDITY
80% LEVEL
30%
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
30%
104 Of
(40) (CC)
21-45
BACK
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
charging station (see page 21-54).
2. Disconnect the suction (A) and the receiver (B) lines
from the evaporator. Plug or cap the lines
immediately after disconnecting them to avoid
moisture and dust contamination.
A
31 Nm (3.2 kgf.m, 23 Ibfftl
B
13 Nm (1.3 kgf.m, 9.4Ibfftl
4. Remove the bolt, the screws and the glove box
frame (A). Remove the self-tapping screw, the bolts
and the passenger's knee bolster (B).
B
21-46
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the evaporator
temperature sensor, then remove the self-tapping
screws, the mounting nut, the mounting bolts and
the evaporator (B).
B
6x 1.0 mm
6. Install the evaporator in the reverse order of
If you're installing a new evaporator, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL8) (see page 21-32).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
Charge the system (see page 21-56).
BACK
Evaporator Components Replacement
1. Remove the filter lid (A), then pull out the dust and pollen filters (B).
B
9th fin from inlet side
1135mm
(4.45O.2 in.)
2. Pull out the evaporator temperature sensor (C) from the evaporator fins.
D
3. Remove the screws, carefully separate the upper housing (D) from the lower housing (E), then remove the
evaporator core (F).
4. If necessary, remove the expansion valve (G). Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting on the valve so the
evaporator line won't twist. Leave the first fitting loosely connected so you can use it to hold the valve while you
loosen the second fitting.
5. Reassemble the evaporator in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Replace all O-rings with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them.
Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
Install the capillary tube (H) directly against the outlet line, and wrap it with electrical tape (I).
Reinstall the evaporator temperature sensor in its original location.
Make sure no air is leaking from the upper housing and the lower housing fitting.
21-47
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement
1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.
preset buttons.
5. Loosen the Ale compressor belt (see page 4-39).
6. Remove the nuts, then disconnect the suction line
(A) and discharge line (B) from the compressor.
Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
&x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibf.ftl
A
21-48
7. Disconnect the compressor clutch connector (A),
then remove the mounting bolts and the
compressor(B).
8x1 mm
8. Remove the bolts, the suction service valve (A) and
the O-ring (B) from the compressor.
25.5 Nm 12.& kgfm, 18.8Ibfftl
A
BACK
9. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts, mounting
nuts and the compressor bracket.
10x 1.25mm
A( ( f'/YI-
/ ~ (
/ ~
. / ~ /
10. Install the compressor in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items.
If you're installing a new compressor, you must
calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (see page 21-32).
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage .
Use refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OILS) for
HFC-134a OENSO piston type compressors only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
absorption.
00 not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
contacts the paint. wash it off immediately.
Adjust the AlC compressor belt (see page 4-39).
21-49
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-51).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-51).
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and
the pressure plate (8) all the way around. If the
clearance is not within specified limits, remove the
pressure plate (see page 21-51) and add or remove
shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance.
Clearance: O.SO.1S mm (O.020O.006 in.'
NOTE: The shims are available in three
thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5 mm.
B
21-50
4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not
within specifications, replace the field coil (see
page 21-51).
Field Coil Resistamce: 3.4 - 3.8 ohms at 68F (20C)
BACK
Compressor Clutch Overhaul
AlC clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872,
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure
plate with a commercially available AlC clutch
holder.
13.2 Nm (1.35 kgf.m, 9.76Ibfftl
I
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B),
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-50).
3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and
compressor.
(cont'd)
21-51
BACK
Air Conditioning
(cont'd)
4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground
terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (8) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). 8e careful
not to damage the field coil and compressor.
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
Install the field coil with the wire side facing
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the compressor.
Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum
solvent.
Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after
it's reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
21-52
Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recover/recycling/
2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (8). Plug
the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the system and the compressor oil from running
out.
A
13.2 Nm (1.35 kgfm, 9.76Ibfft)
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
6. Charge the system (see page 21-56).
BACK
Condenser Replacement
2. Remove the coolant reservoir, but do not
disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant
reservoir and the radiator.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the upper mount
brackets from the radiator.
4. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge
line (A) and condenser line (B) from the condenser.
contamination.
A
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
5. Remove the bolts and the upper mount brackets (A),
then remove the condenser (8) by lifting it up. Be
careful not to damage the radiator and condenser
fins when removing the condenser.
6x 1.0mm
A
~
~ ~ ~ o
\
6. Install the condenser in the reverse order of
If you're installing a new condenser, add
refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OIL 8) (see page 21-
32).
absorption.
Be careful not to damage the radiator and
condenser fins when installing the condenser.
21-53
BACK
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Recovery
ACAUTION
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J221 0 to
system.
manufacturers.
21-54
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
port (8) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
/
/
\
".
i
i
(1 i
../
i
./
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed
from the AlC system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
refrigerant oil back into the AlC system before
charging.
BACK
System Evacuation
ACAUTION
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-Iisted and is
system.
manufacturers.
1. When an AlC System has been opened to the
atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station (If the system
has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.)
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
instructions. Evacuate the system.
3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3
kPa (700 mm Hg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is
probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the
system, and check for leaks.
21-55
BACK
Air Conditioning
System Charging
ACAUTION
Use only service equipmentthat is U.L.-Iisted and is
system.
manufacturers.
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery!recycling!
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (Cl. as
instructions.
./
--- ./
(
\
."
21-56
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-55).
3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
system that was removed during recovery. Use
only OENSO NO-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
the compressor will be damaged.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant capacity:
600 to 650 g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.3 to 1.4 Ibs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-57).
6. Check for system performance (see page 21-44).
BACK
Refrigerant Leak Test
Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM,
AWARNING
Compressed air mixed with R-134a froms a
combustible vapor.
injury.
Never use compressed air to pressure test
conditioning system.
ACAUTION
certiified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
system.
obtained from the refrigerant and lulbricant
manufacturers.
instructions.
.._______A

./
2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to
the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
and remove the charging system couplers.
Refrigerant capacity:
600 to 650 g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.3 to 1.41bs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a
refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be
opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.),
recover the system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system
must be evacuated.
21-57
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the
dashboard above the glove box, seat belt tensioners ('01-02 models) in the front seat belt retractors, and side airbags
('00-02 models) in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service
Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items will require special precautions and tools, and should be done only
by an authorized Honda dealer.
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and side airbags.
Do not bump the SRS unit. Otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy when the
SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
Body Electrical
Body Electrical
Special Tools ......................... 22-2
Information .................... 22-3
and Control
Unit Locations ....... 22-7
Connectors and
Harnesses .............. 22-11
Fuse/Relay boxes ....... 22-43
Power
Distribution 22-46
Ground
Distribution ........... 22-49
Battery ......................... 22-51
Relay:s .......................... 22-52
*Igmtion Switch
Test ......................................... 22-55
Replacement .......................... 22-56
*Gauges
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-57
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-60
Gauge Assembly
Replacement .................. 22-68
VSS Replacement ................. 22-68
VSS Circuit
Troubleshooting ............ 22-69
Maintenance Required
Indicator Reset
Procedure ....................... 22-72
Safety Indicator System
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-73
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-74
Safety Indicator Input Test ... 22-76
Brake Light Failure Sensor
Test ................................. 22-78
Lights-on, Key-in, Seat Belt
Reminder, Key Light
Timer, Engine Oir
Pressure Indicator
Systems
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-79
Control Unit Input Test ......... 22-80
Exterior Lights
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-82
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-84
Back-up Lights Circuit
Diagram .......................... 22-90
Brake Lights Circuit
Diagram .......................... 22-91
Automatic Lights Off Feature
Circuit Diagram .............. 22-92
Combination Light Switch
Test/Replacement .......... 22-95
DRL Control Unit Input
Test ................................. 22-96
Headlight Replacement ........ 22-98
Taillight Replacement ........... 22-100
High Mount Brake Light
Replacement .................. 22-102
License Plate Light
Replacement .................. 22-103
Rear Side Marker
LiQttt Replacement ........ 22-103
*Turn Signal/Hazard
Flasher
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-104
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-105
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay
Input Test ........................ 22-106
Hazard Warning Switch
Test ................................. 22-107
Interior Lights
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-108
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-109
Spotlight Test ........... ............. 22-110
Trunk light Test ..................... 22-111
Latch Switch Test .................. 22-111
Dash Lights Brightness
Control
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-112
Controller Test ....................... 22-114
Entry Light Control System
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-115
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-116
Ignition Key Switch Test ....... 22-120
Ignition Key Light Test .......... 22-120
System 22-121
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-122
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-123
Audio Unit Removal ............. 22-124
Audio Unit TerminallD ......... 22-124
Speaker Replacement .......... 22-125
Window Antenna Test .......... 22-126
Window Antenna Repair ...... 22-126
Window Antenna Coil
Test ................................. 22-127
Clock
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-128
Replacement .......................... 22-129
*Horns
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-130
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-131
Horn Test/Replacement ........ 22-131
Accessory Power Socket
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-132
Test/Replacement ................. 22-133
Multiplex Control System
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-134
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-135
System Descriptions ............. 22-136
Troubleshooting .................... 22-137
Power and Ground Test ....... 22-141
Power Mirrors
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-145
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-146
Function Test ......................... 22-148
PowerMirrorSwitchTest .... 22-149
Power Mirror Actuator
Test ................................. 22-150
Power Mirror Actuator
Replacement .................. 22-151
Moonroof
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-155
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-156
Switch Test ............................ 22-157
MotorTest ............................. 22-157
Rear Window Defogger
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-158
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-159
Function Test ......................... 22-160
Defogger Wire Repair ........... 22-160
Power Windows
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-161
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-162
Master Switch
Replacement .................. 22-179
Passenger's Window Switch
Replacement .................. 22-179
Driver's Window Motor
Test ................................. 22-180
Passenger's Window Motor
Test ................................. 22-180
Wiper/Washer
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-181
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-182
Wiper/Washer Switch
Test/Replacement .......... 22-187
WiperMotorTest .................. 22-188
Wiper Motor Replacement ... 22-188
Washer Motor Test ............... 22-189
Washer Reservoir
Replacement .................. 22-190
Washer Level Switch Test
(Canada) ......................... 22-190
Washer Tube
Replacement .................. 22-191
Power Seat
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-192
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-193
Switch Test ............................ 22-195
Motor Test ............................. 22-197
Seat Heaters - Canada
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-199
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-200
Switch Test ............................ 22-201
Heater Test ............................. 22-201
Immobilizer System
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-202
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-203
System Description .............. 22-204
Troubleshooting .................... 22-206
Immobilizer Receiver Unit
Replacement .................. 22-207
Keyless Entry/Security
Alarm System
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-208
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-210
System Descriptions ............. 22-215
Front Door Lock Actuator
Test ................................. 22-225
Rear Door Lock
ActuatorTest .................. 22-225
Driver's Door Lock Knob
Switch Test ..................... 22-226
Passenger's Door Lock Knob
Switch Test ..................... 22-226
Door Key Cylinder Switch
Test ................................. 22-227
Door Lock Switch Test .......... 22-227
Trunk Lid Opener/Latch
Switch Test ..................... 22-228
Trunk Key Cylinder Switch
Test ................................. 22-228
Security Indicator Test .......... 22-229
Hood Switch Test .................. 22-229
Transmitter Test .................... 22-230
Transmitter Programming ... 22-230
Power Door locks
Component Location
Index ............................... 22-231
Circuit Diagram ..................... 22-232

I..::..J
Body Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description aty
CD 07LAJ-PT3020A Test Harness
.
1
(]) 07WAZ-001010A MPCS Short Switch 1
CD
22-2
BACK
Tips and Precautions
Before Troubleshooting
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay
box.
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
I NOTICE I
Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery
ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise
you will damage the alternator diodes .
Do not attempt to crank the engine with the
battery ground cable loosely connected or you
will severely damage the wiring.
3. Check the alternator belt tension.
Handling Connectors
Make sure the connectors are clean and have no
loose wire terminals.
Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with
grease (except watertight connectors).
All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
A
r::-:,
I.!!!!.I
Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
unless you first release the lock and remove the
connector from its mount bracket (A).
Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
Always reinstall plastic covers.
Before connecting connectors, make sure the
terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
A
(cont'd)
22-3
BACK
Body Electrical
Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (8).
A
B
The backs of some connectors are packed with
grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is
contaminated, replace it.
Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is
securely locked.
Position wires so thatthe open end of the cover faces
down.
22-4
Handling Wires and Harnesses
Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the
hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and
other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (8).
BACK
Testing and Repairs
Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape.
After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them.
When using electrical test equipment, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and those described in
this manual.
If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire
side (except waterproof connector).
Use a probe with a tapered tip.

I..:!!..I
Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for
identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
22-5
BACK
Body Electrical
Five-step Troubleshooting
1. Verify The Complaint
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit
to verify the customer complaint. Note the
symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing
until you have narrowed down the problem area.
2. Analyze The Schematic
look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power feed
through the circuit components to ground. If
several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or
ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem
Once the specific problem is identified. make the
repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
22-6
Wire Color Codes
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics:
WHT.................................... White
VEL...................................... Vellow
BlK...................................... Black
BlU ..................................... Blue
GRN..................................... Green
RED ..................................... Red
ORN..................................... Orange
PNK..................................... Pink
BRN..................................... Brown
GRV..................................... Gray
PUR ..................................... Purple
l T BLU ................................ Light Blue
l T GRN ............................... Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
BACK
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Engine Compartment
SEAT HEATER RELAY (Canada]
lWire colors: BlK/YEl. BlK.
LWHT/BlK and WHT/GRN
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY
[Wire colors: YEL/RED.
LBRN/BlK. WHT/BLU and WHT
MULTI-RELAY BOX
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
[Wire colors: YEL/GRN. BlK.
LBRN/BlK and WHT/GRN
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELA Y BOX
r--:'I

BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
CONDENSER FAN RELAY
U----t--- RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
INTERMITTENT
WIPER RELAY
[
Wire colors: GRN/BlK.
WHT. BlK. GRN/RED
and BLU/WHT
22-7
BACK
Dashboard
MOONROOF OPEN RELAY
[
Wire colors: WHTNEl, BlK,
GRYNEl, GRN and GRNNEl
MOONROOF CLOSE RELAY
[
Wire colors: WHTNEl, BlK.
GRN/RED. GRN and GRN/RED
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)

DRIVER'S
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
22-8
DAYTIME
RUNNING LIGHTS
CONTROL UNIT
(Canada)
SRSUNIT
STARTER CUT RELAY
AfT REVERSE RELAY
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD
RELAY
BACK
IMMOBILIZER
CONTROL UNIT

HEATER CONTROL
PANEL
'" /---------.
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX
ACCESSORY
SOCKET RELAY
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY

o -1. __ // )
to.
- - ,
o / /-------:::--------=--/----,
/ / c-----; - .
'I
(
--/
I ,I..-

CANADA: HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY
]
[
Wire colors: BLU, BLU!RED ]
ORN and ORN/WHT '
TAILLIGHT RELAY
[
Wire colors: RED/GRN
RED/VEL, RED/GRN and RED/BLK
CALIFORNIA: HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY
[
Wire colors: GRN/RED ]
BLK/YEL, WHT and RED/BLU
22-9
BACK
Door and Seat
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DOOR)
22-10
OPDSUNIT
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT
BACK
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index
r-:'I
t=!..I
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors. The number is preceded by the letter "c" for connectors, "G" for ground
terminals or "T" for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Aoor, Door, Notes
Trunk, and Roofl
Starter cable T1, T2 and (+ I (see page
22-121
Battery ground cable T3 (see page
G1 and (-I 22-121
Engine ground cable T4 (see page
G2 22-121
Engine wire harness C101 and C102 (see page
T101 and n02 22-141
G101
Right engine compartment wire C101 and C102 C201 through C204 (see page
harness G201 and G202 22-161
Left engine compartment wire harness G301 through G303 C301 and C302 (see page
G304 and G30S 22-181
Dashboard wire harness B lIeft C301, C401, C402 and (see page
branch I C404 22-201
G401
Dashboard wire harness B (right C201 through C203 (see page
branchl and C403 22-201
Dashboard wire harness A C204, C302 and C401 CS01 through CSOS (see page
GS01 and GS02 andCS82 22-221
GS03 and GS04
Left side wire harness C501 and (seepage
C5S1 through CS57 22-24)
G551 and G552
Right side wire harness C581 through CS86 (see page
and C851 22-261
G581
Rear wire harness C554 and C601 (see page
G601 22-281
Moonroof wire harness C502 (see page
22-301
Roof wire harness (see page
22-301
Driver's power seat wire harness C551 (seepage
22-311
Driver'S door wire harness C631 and C632 (seepage
22-321
Passenger's door wire harness (see page
22-341
Left rear door wire harness C553 (see page
22-361
Right rear door wire harness C581 (see page
22-371
Ignition switch lead (see page
22-38)
Clutch switch sub-harness (MITI C404 (see page
22-381
SRS main harness C503 C556, C557, C583 and C (see page
584 G801 22-391
SRS floor harness (Sedanl C505 and C851 (see page
22-39)
OPOS wire harness C851 (see page
(with side airbags) 22-42)
Rear window defogger wire harness (see page
22-42)
22-11
BACK
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
T1 2 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
T2 3 RiQht side of enQine compartment Starter motor
(+) Battery Battery positive terminal
Battery Ground Cable
T3 6 Rioht side of enoine compartment Transmission housino
G1 1 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via battery
Qround cables
(-) Battery Battery neQative terminal
Engine Ground Cable
T4 4 Middle of enQine compartment Cylinder head cover
G2 5 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via engine
Qround cable
22-12
BACK
ENGINE GROUND CABLE
STARTER CABLE
2
\+)
(-)
5
6
BATTERY GROUND CABLE
r:-:'I

22-13
BACK
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities
Alternator 23 4
AfT clutch pressure control valve A 36 2
AfT clutch pressure control valve B 35 2
Transmission range switch (AfT gear 42 10
position switch)
Back-up light switch connector A (+) 32 1
Back-up light switch connector B (-) 31 1
Countershaft speed sensor 41 2
Distributor 39 4
Coolant temperature gauge sending 38 1
unit
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 37 2
sensor
EVAP canister purge valve (EVAP 14 2
purge control solenoid valve)
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) 9 6
valve
Idle air control (lAC) valve 10 3
Intake air temperature (lAT) sensor 15 2
C103 (Junction connector) 12 14
Knock sensor 13 1
Torpue converter clutch solenoid 27 2
valve (Lock-up control solenoid
valve) and shift control solenoid
valve A
Mainshaft speed sensor 34 2
MAP sensor 8 3
Fuel injector No.1 17 2
Engine oil pressure switch 11 1
PCM/ECM connector B 4 25
PCM/ECM connector C 5 31
PCM/ECM connector 0 6 16
Primary heated oxygen sensor 26 4
(Primary H02S)
Radiator fan switch 40 2
Second clutch pressure switch 43 1
Shift control solenoid valve B 28 2
Shift control solenoid valve C 30 2
Starter solenoid 29 1
TDC/CKP sensor 18 4
Throttle position (TP) sensor 7 3
Third clutch pressure switch 33 1
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) 44 3
VTEC pressure switch 25 2
VTEC solenoid valve 24 1
C101 2 10
C102 3 14
C102 3 8
C102 3 10
T101 1
T102 22
G101 16
* 1: 98-99 models
* 2: '98-99 models, '00-02 model (except California)
* 3: '00-02 model (California)
22-14
Location
Left side of engine compartment
Under the battery
Under the battery
Right side of engine compartment
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Under the battery
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Under middle of dash
Middle of engine
Middle of engine
Under the battery
Under the under-hood fuse/relay
box
box
box
box
Under-hood fuse/relay box
Alternator
Middle of engine compartment
Connects to Notes
MfT
MfT
AfT
* 1
AfT
AfT
AfT
AfT
AfT
AfT
MfT
Right engine compartment
wire harness (see page 22-16)
Right engine compartment AfT
Right engine compartment * 2 (MfT)
Right engine compartment * 3 (MfT)
Engine ground via engine
wire harness
BACK
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23

22-15
BACK
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness
ABS fail-safe relay 7 4 Right side of engine compartment
ABS pump motor relay 6 4 Right side of engine compartment
ABS right front wheel sensor 34 2 Right side of engine compartment
AlC compressor clutch 23 1 Left side of engine compartment
Condenser fan motor 22 2 Middle of engine compartment
Diode (Lighting) 1 2 Behind right kick panel Canada
ELD unit 13 3 Into under-hood fuse/relay box
Engine mount control solenoid valve 20 2 Right side of engine compartment AfT
Heated oxygen sensor relay 2 4 Behind right kick panel California
High beam cut relay 2 4 Behind right kick panel Canada
Left horn 24 1 Behind middle of front bumper
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 4 18 Behind right kick panel
connector C (see page 22-45)
connector D (see page 22-45)
Radiator fan motor 27 2 Middle of engine compartment
Right front parking light 29 2 Behind right headlight
Right front side marker light 32 3 Behind right of front bumper
Right headlight (High beam) 28 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (Low beam) 30 2 Behind right headlight
Right horn 26 1 Behind middle of front bumper
Seat heater relay 8 4 Right side of engine compartment Canada
Secondary heated oxygen sensor 21 4 Right side of engine compartment
(Secondary H02S)
Security hood switch 25 2 Under hood latch
Taillight relay 3 4 Behind right kick panel
Test tachometer connector 33 2 Right side of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 12 18 Right side of engine compartment
A (see page 22-43)
B (see page 22-43)
C (see page 22-43)
D (see page 22-43)
C101 19 10 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see
page 22-14)
C102 18 14 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see AfT
page 22-14)
C102 18 8 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see "1 (MIT)
page 22-14)
C102 18 10 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see "2 (MIT)
page 22-14)
C201 14 16 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-20)
(see page 22-20)
(see page 22-20)
C204 16 22 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see Daoe 22-22)
G201 31 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via right engine
compartment wire harness
G202 35 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via right engine
" 1: 98-99 models, '00-02 model (except California)
* 2: '00-02 model (California)
22-16
BACK
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELA V BOX
2
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
r--:'I

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELA V BOX
22
23
24
25
22-17
BACK
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
ABS control unit connector A 12 12 Behind left kick panel
ABS control unit connector B 13 22 Behind left kick panel
ABS left front wheel sensor 14 2 Left side of engine compartment
ABS modulator unit 22 10 Left side of engine compartment
ABS pump motor 21 2 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch 5 1 Left side of engine compartment
connector A ( + )
Brake fluid level switch 6 1 Left side of engine compartment
connector B (-)
Cruise control actuator 15 4 Left side of engine compartment
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 10 5 Behind left kick panel
connector E (see page 22-44)
Intermittent wiper relay 4 6 Left side of engine compartment
Left front parking light 24 2 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 16 3 Behind left of front bumper
Left headlight (High beam) 25 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (Low beam) 23 2 Behind left headlight
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 26 2 Left side of engine compartment
Washer level switch 17 2 Behind left of front bumper Canada
Windshield washer motor 18 2 Behind left of front bumper
Windshield wiper motor 7 5 Left rear of engine compartment
C301 8 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-20)
C302 9 8 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
. (see page 22-22)
G301 20 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via left engine
G304 3 Behind left kick panel Body ground via left engine
G305 2 Behind left kick panel Body ground via left engine
22-18
BACK
1
26
25
19
20
2
3
r--:'I

DRIVER'S
./ UNDER-DASH
/ FUSE/RELAY BOX
;/;1.1..._---10
15
12
13
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
22-19
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left Branch)
Connector or Terminal
Brake switch
Brake switch
Cable reel
Clutch interlock switch
(Without clutch wire harness)
Clutch switch
(Without clutch wire harness)
Combination light switch
Data link connector (DLC)
Daytime running lights control unit
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector 0 (see page 22-44)
connector P (see page 22-44)
connector Q (see page 22-44)
Ignition switch
Immobilizer control unit
Intermittent dwell time controller
PGM-FI main relay
Windshield wiper/washer switch
C301
C401
C402
C402
C404 (with clutch wire harness)
G401
* 1. 98-99 models
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
Ref
6
6
14
5
17
13
18
15
1
3
2
12
11
10
7
9
8
16
4
4
20
19
Cavities Location
2 Under left side of dash
14 In the steering column covers
20 Behind left kick panel
Behind left kick panel
Connects to Notes
CRUISE
* 1 (MfT)
* 1 (MfT)
Left engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-18)
Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-22)
Security system wire harness Canada
(Optional)
Security system wire harness USA
(Optional)
Clutch wire harness (see page MIT
22-38)
Body ground via dashboard
wire harness B
to Right Branch

.... /
11
17 or20
22-20 BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right Branch)
r--:'I

Air mix control motor 14
Blower motor 10
Blower resistor 11
Evaporator temperature sensor 4
Heater fan switch 2
Heater control panel 3
Mode control motor 1
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 8
connector J (see page 22-45)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 9
connector K (see page 22-45)
Recirculation control motor 5
C201 6
C202 13
C203 12
C403 7
Continues to Left Branch
1
7 Under right side of dash
2 Under middle of dash
16 Behind right kick panel
16 Under right side of dash Right engine compartment
2 Under right side of dash Security system wire harness
IOotionall'
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B (right branch)
11
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
8
22-21
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness A
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location
Accessory socket 23 2 Behind middle of dash
AfT gear position console light/parking 26 4 Behind console panel
pin switch
Audio unit 11 20 Behind audio unit
Clock 10 S Behind middle of dash
Cruise control unit 31 14 Behind left side of dash
Cruise control main switch 2 S Behind instrument panel
Driver's seat heater switch 2S 6 Behind middle of dash
connector I (see page 22-44)
ECM/PCM connector A 22 32 Behind middle of dash
Gauge assembly connector A 6 14 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector B S 22 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector C 7 16 Behind gauges
Glove box light 21 2 Behind glove box
Hazard warning switch 9 10 Behind middle of dash
Left tweeter 4 2 Behind instrument panel
Moonroof switch 3 6 Behind instrument panel
Multiplex control unit (driver's) 40 22 Behind left kick panel
connector B
MUltiplex control unit (passenger's) 17 22 Behind right kick panel
connector B
Parking brake switch 30 1 Behind center console
Passenger's seat heater switch 24 6 Behind middle of dash
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 1S 18 Behind right kick panel
connector H (see page 22-4S)
connector I (see page 22-4S)
Right tweeter 14 2 Behind instrument panel
Shift lock solenoid 28 2 Behind console panel
SRS memory erase signal (MES) 39 2 Behind left kick panel
connector
SRS unit 27 8 Middle of floor
C204 20 22 Behind right side of dash
C302 32 8 Behind left side of dash
C401 33 22 Behind left side of dash
CS01 3S 18 Behind left kick panel
CS01 3S 20 Behind left kick panel
CS02 1 7 Behind instrument panel
CS03 8 3 Under middle of dash
CS04 34 2 Behind left kick panel
CSOS 29 6 Middle offloor
CS82 19 16 Behind right kick panel
CS82 19 6 Behind right kick panel
GS01 12 Under middle of dash
GS02 13 Under middle of dash
GS03 36 Behind left kick panel
GS04 18 Behind right kick panel
* 1: 00-02 Sedan, 01-02 Coupe
* 2: All '98-99 models, '00-02 Coupe, '00-02 Sedan without seat heater
* 3: '00-02 Sedan with seat heater
* 4: '00 Sedan with side airbags
22-22
Connects to Notes
AfT
'01-02
models
* 1
Right engine compartment wire
Left engine compartment wire harness
(see page 22-18)
Dashboard wire harness B (see page
22-20)
Left side wire harness (see page 22-24) *2
Left side wire harness (see page 22-24) *3
Moonroof wire harness (see page 22-
30)
SRS main harness (see page 22-39) '98-99
models
Sedan
Coupe
Security system wire harness USA
(Optional)
SRS floor harness (see page 22-39) *4
Right side wire harness (see page 22- '00 Coupe
27).
Right side wire harness (see page 22- '01-02
26). models
Body ground via dashboard wire
harness A
harness A
harness A
harness A
BACK
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
36
13
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A
6 7
15
____ ___ 16
17
30
-1-_-18
22-23
BACK
Left Side Wire Harness (Sedan)
ABS left rear wheel sensor 12 2 Under left side of trunk
Driver's door switch 23 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt switch 6 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat belt switch 6 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's side airbag inflator 20 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's side impact sensor 24 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's side seat belttensioner 21 2 Left B-pillar
connector A (see page 22-44)
connector B (see page 22-44)
EVAP bypass solenoid valve 10 2 Left side of trunk
EVAP control canister vent shut 9 2 Left side oftrunk
solenoid valve
Fuel pump/Fuel gauge sending unit 18 5 Fuel tank
Fuel tank pressure sensor 11 3 Left side of trunk
High mount brake light 16 2 Middle of rear shelf
Left rear door switch 13 1 Left quarter panel
Left rear speaker 15 2 Left quarter panel
Trunk light 17 2 Middle of rear shelf
C501 1 18 Behind left kick panel
C501 1 20 Behind left kick panel
C551 5 10 Under driver's seat
C551 5 4 Under driver's seat
C553 22 10 Left B-pillar
C554 19 12 Left quarter panel
C555 4 2 Under left side of dash
C556 7 4 Under center console
C557 8 4 Under center console
G551 25 Under driver'S seat
G552 14 Left side of trunk
,
* 1: 00-02 models Without B-way power seat
* 2: All '98-99 models, '00-02 model without seat heater
* 3: '00-02 model with seat heater
2
Connects to
Dashboard wire harness A (see
page 22-22)
Dashboard wire harness A (see
page 22-22)
Driver's power seat wire
Driver's power seat wire
Left rear door wire harness C
(see page 22-36)
Rear wire harness (see page 22-
28)
Security system wire harness
(Optional)
SRS main harness (see page 22-
39).
SRS main harness (see page 22-
39).
Body ground via left side wire
harness
Body ground via left side wire
harness
14
17
19
LEFr SIDE WIRE HARNESS
22-24
Notes
'98-99
models
*1
'01-02
model
'01-02
models
'01-02
models
*2
*3
8-way
2-way
'01-02
models
'01-02
models
BACK
Left Side Wire Harness I o u p _ ~
ABS left rear wheel sensor 17 2
Driver's door switch 20 1
Driver's seat belt switch 5 2
Driver's seat belt switch 21 3
Driver's side airbag inflator 5 2
Driver's side impact sensor 19 2
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 2 10
EVAP bypass solenoid valve 9 2
EVAP control canister vent shut 8 2
solenoid valve
Fuel pump/Fuel gauge sending unit 14 5
Fuel tank pressure sensor 10 3
High mount brake light 12 2
Left rear speaker 15 2
Left side seat belt tensioner 18 2
Trunk light 13 2
C501 1 18
C551 22 10
C551 22 4
C554 16 12
C555 4 2
C556 6 4
C557 7 4
G551 23
G552 11
23
Location Connects to
Under left side of trunk
Left B-pillar
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Under driver's seat
Left side of trunk
Left side of trunk
Fuel tank
Left side of trunk
Middle of rear shelf
Left quarter panel
Left B-pillar
Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-22)
Under driver's seat Driver's power seat wire
Under driver's seat Driver's power seat wire
Left quarter panel Rear wire harness (see page
22-29)
Under left side of dash Security system wire harness
(Optical)
Under center console SRS main harness (see page
22-39)
Under center console SRS main harness (see page
22-39)
Under driver's seat Body ground via left side wire
harness
Left side of trunk Body ground via left side wire
harness
11
LEFT SIDE WIRE HARNESS
r:'I
I.!!!:..I
Notes
'98-99
models
'00-02
models
'00-02
models
'00-02
models
'01-02
models
8-way
2-way
'01-02
models
22-25
BACK
Right Side Wire Harness (Sedan)
ABS right rear wheel sensor
Front passenger's side airbag inflator
Passenger's door switch
Passenger's seat belt switch
Passenger's seat heater
Passenger's side impact sensor
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
connector G (see page 22-45)
Right rear door switch
Right rear speaker
Right side seat belt tensioner
Window antenna coil connector A
C581
C582
C583
C584
C851
G581
,
* 1. 00-02 model without seat heater
* 2: '98-99 model
* 4: '00-02 models
1
18
22-26
Ref Cavities Location
16 2 Under right side of rear seat
2 2 Under passenger's seat
13 1 Right B-pillar
7 20 Behind right kick panel
15 1 Right quarter panel
17 2 Right quarter panel
14 2 Right B-pillar
18 1 Middle of rear shelf
1 10 Right side of floor
5 4
6 4
12 4
10 Under passenger's seat
5 6
17 16
Connects to Notes
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
Canada
*4
Right rear door wire harness
(see page 22-37)
Dashboard wire harness A *4
(see page 22-22)
SRS main harness (see page *4
22-39)
SRS main harness (see page *4
22-39)
OPDS wire harness (see page *4
22-421
Body ground via right side
wire harness
10
BACK
Riaht Side Wire Harness (Coupe)
Passenger's side airbag inflator
Passenger's seat belt tensioner
Right rear speaker
C582
C582
C583
C584
C585 (Connects to C586)
C851
G581
,
* 1. 00-02 model without seat heater
* 2: '98-99 models
* 4: '00 model
* 5: '01-02 models
* 6: '00-02 models
18
Ref Cavities
16 2
13 1
12 3
10 3
10 4
15 2
14 2
9 2
5 20
6 3
17 2
18 1
7 16
7 6
2 4
3 4
4 1
8 1
11 4
1
RIGHT SIDE WIRE
HARNESS
17
Location
Under right side of rear seat
Right B-pillar
Under passenger's seat
Right B-piller
Behind right kick panel
Right quarter panel
2
Connects to
Dashboard wire harnessA
(see page 22-22)
(see page 22-22)
SRS main harness (see page
22-39)
SRS main harness (see page
22-39)

t=!!..I
Notes
* 1
*2
*3
*5
*5
Canada
*4
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
OPDS wire harness (see page *6
22-42)
wire harness
7
9
22-27
BACK
Rear Wire Harness (Sedan)
Brake light failure sensor 15 6 Left side of trunk
Left back-up light 13 3 Left side of trunk lid
Left inner taillight 12 2 Left side of trunk lid
Left rear turn signal light 17 2 Left side of trunk
Left taillight 16 4 Left side of trunk
License plate light 9 2 Middle oftrunk
Right back-up light 5 3 Right side oftrunk lid
Right inner taillight 6 2 Right side of trunk lid
Right rear turn signal light 3 2 Right side of trunk
Right taillight 4 4 Right side of trunk
Trailer lighting connector 2 6 Left side oftrunk
Trunk actuator 7 6 Right side of trunk
Trunk key cylinder switch 8 2 Middle of trunk
Trunk latch switch 10 2 Middle oftrunk
C554 1 12 Left side of rear shelf
C601 11 1 Middle oftrunk
G601 14 Left side of trunk
1 2
22-28
Connects to
Left side wire harness (see
page 22-24)
(OotionaJ)
Body ground via rear wire
harness
j,.'1......-_--3
::..\9 ...... -----4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Notes
Security
Security
BACK
Rear Wire Harness (Coupe)
Connector or Terminal Ref
Brake light failure sensor 16
Left back-up light 4
Left inner taillight 3
Left rear side marker light 18
Left taillight 2
License plate light 12
License plate light 13
Right back-up light 11
Right inner taillight 10
Right rear side marker light 8
Right taillight 9
Trailer lighting connector 17
Trunk actuator 6
Trunk key cylinder switch 7
Trunk latch switch (Without keyless 14
entry/security alarm system)
C554 1
C601 5
G601 15
* 1: 01-02 models
Cavities Location
6 Left side of trunk
2 Left side of trunk lid
3 Left side of trunk lid
6 Left side oftrunk
2 Middle oftrunk
2 Middle of trunk
2 Right side of trunk lid
3 Right side of trunk lid
2 Right side of trunk
6 Right side of trunk
6 Middle of trunk
2 Middle of trunk
2 Middle of trunk
12 Left side of rear shelf
1 Middle of trunk
Left side of trunk
5
Connects to
page 22-24)
(OPtional)
Body ground via rear wire
harness
r:-:'I

Notes
* 1
Security
Security
22-29
BACK
Moonroof Wire Harness
Moonroof close relay
Moonroof motor
Moonroof open relay
Moonroof position switch
C502
Roof Wire Harness
Ceiling light
Driver's vanity mirror light
Passenger's vanity mirror light
SpotliQht
ROOF WIRE HARNESS
10
22-30
8 5 Behind left kick panel
1 2 Roof area
2 4 Roof area
3 3 Roof area
5 2 Roof area
4 2 Roof area
6 3 Roof area
1 2 3 4
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
Connects to Notes
(see paQe 22-22)
Connects to Notes
MOONROOF WIRE HARNESS
7
8
l f J J l ~ - - - - - 9
BACK
Driver's Power Seat Wire Harness IS-way adjustable)
Driver's power seat switch connector
A
Driver's power seat switch connector B
Driver's recline motor
Driver's seat belt switch
Driver's seat belt switch
Driver's seat heater
Driver's seat heater
Power seat front up-down motor
Power seat rear up-down motor
Power seat slide motor
C551
,
* 1. 98-99 models
* 2: '00-02 models
* 3: '98-99 models (Canada)
* 4: '00-02 models (Canada)
Ref
9
11
12
5
5
3
3
4
2
1
10
Cavities Location Connects to
6 Left side of driver's seat
6 Left side of driver's seat
2 Under driver's seat
10 Left side of driver's seat Left side wire harness (see
oaoe22-241
Driver's Power Seat Wire Harness 12-way adjustable)
Driver's power seat up-down motor 6
Driver's power seat up-down switch 8
C551 7
1
12 11 10
Cavities Location Connects to
2
5
4
9
Under driver's seat
Left side of driver's seat
Under driver's seat
DRIVER'S POWER SEAT
WIRE HARNESS
IS-way adjustable)
nane 22-241
6
DRIVER'S POWER SEAT
WIRE HARNESS
12-wayadjustable)
r--:'I
--=:.I
Notes
*1
*2
*3
*4
Notes
22-31
BACK
Driver's Door Wire Harness (Sedan)
Driver's door courtesy light 16 2 Driver's door
Driver's door key cylinder switch 3 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator 1 2 Driver's door
Driver's door lock knob switch 2 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock switch 6 3 Driver's door
Driver's door speaker 11 2 Driver's door
Driver's power window motor 14 4 Driver's door
connector F (see page 22-44)
Left power mirror 7 6 Driver's door
Left power mirror 7 3 Driver's door
Multiplex control unit (door) connector 15 20 Driver's door
A
Multiplex control unit (door) connector 5 2 Driver's door
B
Power mirror switch 12 10 Driver's door
Security indicator light 4 2 Driver's door
C631 10 2 Driver's door
3 4 5 6 7
2
1
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
16 15 14
22-32
13 12
Connects to
(Optional)
(Optional)
IOotional)
8
9
Notes
Canada
Canada
USA
USA
Canada
Canada
---DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
10
11
BACK
Driver's Door Wire Harness (Coupe)
Driver's door courtesy light 13
Driver's door key cylinder switch 16
Driver's door lock actuator 14
Driver's door lock knob switch 15
Driver's door lock switch 4
Driver's door speaker 10
Driver's power window motor 6
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 7
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 8
Left power mirror 5
Left power mirror 5
Multiplex control unit (door) connector 2
A
Multiplex control unit (door) connector 3
B
Power mirror switch 11
Security indicator light 1
C631 9
C631 9
C632 12
16
14
13
Cavities Location
2 Driver's door
3 Driver's door
2 Driver's door
3 Driver's door
3 Driver's door
2 Driver's door
4 Driver's door
6 Driver's door
3 Driver's door
20 Driver's door
2 Driver's door
10 Driver's door
2 Driver's door
2 Driver's door
3 Driver's door
2 Driver's door
5
r--:'I

Connects to
(Optional)
(Optional)
(Ootional)
6
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
7
8
9
Notes
Canada
Canada
USA
USA
Canada
Canada
22-33
BACK
Passenger's Door Wire Harness (Sedan)
Passenger's door courtesy light 9 2 Passenger's door
Passenger's door key cylinder switch 6 3 Passenger's door
Passenger's door lock actuator 8 2 Passenger's door
Passenger's door lock knob switch 7 3 Passenger's door Security
Passenger's door lock switch 4 3 Passenger's door
Passenger's door speaker 11 2 Passenger's door
Passenger's power window motor 10 2 Passenger's door
Passenger's power window switch 5 6 Passenger's door
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 1 2 Behind left kick panel Canada
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 2 20 Behind left kick panel
Right power mirror 3 6 Passenger's door Canada
Riaht Dower mirror 3 3 Passenaer's door USA
PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
2
1
7
k;..I.L.I--I----8
PASSENGER'S /
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
11 10 9
22-34
BACK
Passenger's Door Wire Harness (Coupe)
Passenger's door courtesy light 9 2
Passenger's door key cylinder switch 6 3
Passenger's door lock actuator 8 2
Passenger's door lock knob switch 7 3
Passenger's door lock switch 4 3
Passenger's door speaker 11 2
Passenger's power window motor 10 2
Passenger's power window switch 5 6
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 1 2
Right power mirror 3 6
RiQht power mirror 3 3
3
2
1
11 10
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
Passenger's door
PassenQer's door
4
5
9
PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
Notes
Canada
Canada
USA
6
7
8
22-35
BACK
Left Rear Door Wire Harness (Sedan)
Left rear door courtesy light 4 2 Left rear door
Left rear door lock actuator 5 2 Left rear door
Left rear door lock knob switch 6 3 Left rear door
Left rear power window motor 3 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window switch 1 6 Left rear door
C553 2 10 Left rear door
1
6 5 4 3
22-36
Location
2
Connects to
pa!:!e 22-24)
LEFT REAR DOOR
WIRE HARNESS
Notes
Security
BACK
Right Rear Door Wire Harness (Sedan)
Right rear door courtesy light
Right rear door lock actuator
Right rear door lock knob switch
Right rear power window motor
Right rear power window switch
C581
RIGHT REAR DOOR
WIRE HARNESS
Ref
5
4
3
6
2
1
Cavities
2
2
3
2
6
10
Right rear door
Right rear door
Right rear door
Right rear door
Right rear door
Right rear door Right side wire harness (see
page 2226)
6 5 4

Notes
Security
22-37
BACK
Ignition Switch Lead
connector M (see a e 22-44)
Clutch Switch Sub-Harness (MIT)
Clutch interlock switch
Clutch switch
C404
Ref
2
3
4
IGNITION SWITCH LEAD
1
Location
Cavities Location
2
3
Connects to
Connects to
Dashboard wire harness B
(see oaoe 22-20)
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX
CLUTCH SWITCH SUBHARNESS IM/TI
22-38
Notes
BACK
SRS Main Harness ('98-99 models)
Cable reel 5 2
connector N (see page 22-44)
Front passenger's airbag assembly 1 2
SRS memory erase signal (MES) 6 2
connector
SRS unit 4 18
C503 2 3
G801 3
7
6
DRIVER'S
BOX
Location
Under left side of dash
Behind glove box
Middle offloor
Middle of floor
SRS MAIN HARNESS
Connects to
(see paCle 22-22)
Body ground via SRS main
harness
2
r--:'I

Notes
(cont'd)
22-39
BACK
SRS Main Harness ('00 Sedan)
Cable reel 13 2
connector
SRS unit 10 18
C503 14 2
GB01 1
SRS Floor Harness ('00 Sedan with Side Airbags)
Driver's side airbag inflator 6
Driver's side impact sensor 7
Front passenger's seat belt switch 5
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 3
Front passenger's side impact sensor 2
SRS unit 9
C505 8
CB51 4
SRS MAIN HARNESS
DRIVER'S
BOX
12
9
8
Cavities
2
2
3
2
2
14
6
4
Location
Behind glove box
Middle offloor
Middle of floor
Location
Under driver's seat
Left side of floor
Under front passenger's seat
Right side of floor
Middle of floor
Connects to
(see oaoe 22-22)
Body ground via SRS main
harness
Connects to
(see page 22-22)
OPDS wire harness (see page
22-421
1
5
SRS FLOOR HARNESS
6
22-40
Notes
Notes
BACK
SRS Main Harness ('00-02 Coupe, '01-02 Sedan)
Cable reel 11 2
Cable reel 11 4
connector
SRS unit 8 8
SRS unit 9 14
SRS unit 10 18
C503 1 8
C556 6 4
C557 7 4
C583 3 4
C584 4 4
G801 5
,
* 1. 00 Coupe
* 2: '01-02 models
* 3: With seat belt tensioner
SRS MAIN HARNESS
Behind glove box
Middle of floor
Middle offloor
Middle of floor
Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-22)
Middle offloor Left side wire harness (see
page 22-25)
Middle of floor Left side wire harness (see
page 22-24)
Middle of floor Right side wire harness (see
page 22-27)
Middle offloor Right side wire harness (see
Daoe 22-27)
Middle of floor Body ground via SRS main
harness
,
5
r:-:'I
L=!..I
Notes
*1
*2
* 1
* 1
*1
*3
22-41
BACK
OPDS Wire Harness (With Side Airbags)
OPDS unit 1 B Left side offront passenger's seat
CB51 2 4 Under front passenger's seat SRS floor harness (see page '00
22-39) Sedan
CB51 2 4 Under front passenger's seat Right side wire harness (see Coupe
page 22-26)
CB51 2 4 Under front passenger's seat Right side wire harness (see '01-02
paQe 22-26) Sedan
Rear Window Defogger Wire Harness
Rear window defogger 3 1 Right C-pillar
connector A ( + )
Rear window defogger 1 1 Left C-pillar
connector B (- )
Window antenna coil 2 2 Middle of rear shelf
1 2 3
OPDS WIRE HARNESS
1
REAR WINDOW
2 DEFOGGER WIRE HARNESS
22-42
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal
A 15 18
NC compressor clutch relay 3 4
B 14 7
Blower motor relay 11 4
C 13 3
Condenser fan relay 1 4
D 12 16
Diode 9 2
ELD Unit 4 3
Horn relay 10 4
Headlight relay 1 7 4
Radiator fan relay 2 4
T1 6
T101 5
1 2 3
Q ~ t ~
4
11
00
5
6
9
ro ro ro
464748
L..J L..J L..J
ro ro ro
434445
8
L..J L..J L..J
7
Connects to
~
I.!!!.J
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-16)
Not used
Battery positive cable (see page 22-12)
Engine wire harness (see page 22-14)
12
13
14
15
22-43
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
A 11 10 Left side wire harness (see page 22-24)
B 3 14 Left side wire harness (see page 22-24)
C 10 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
D 7 -- Not used
Diode 1 --
Diode 2 --
E 4 20 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-18)
F 9 6 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-32)
G 8 18 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-32)
H 5 6 Not used
I 13 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-22)
J 12 2 Service check connector
K 14 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-22)
L 23 -- Not used
M 15 6 Ignition switch lead (see page 22-38)
Multiplex control unit connector A 6 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
N 22 2 SRS main harness (see page 22-39)
0 21 20 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-20)
P 16 7 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-20)
Q 17 22 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-20)
R 26 1 Optional connector
Reverse relay 19 4
S 27 1 Optional connector
Starter cut relay 18 4
T 24 1 Optional connector
Turn signal/hazard relay 20 4
U 25 1 Ootional connector
26 27 12
14
15
16
17
7 6
20 19 18
22-44
BACK
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref
A 10
Accessory relay 15
B 4
C 9
0 5
Diode 1
Diode 2
Diode 3
E 8
F 7
G 6
H 18
I 12
J 17
K 13
Multiplex control unit connector A 11
Power window relay 14
Rear window defogger relay 16
a
:J
7
Terminal
20
4
4
18
3
--
--
--
2
20
3
18
18
16
16
24
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
Connects to
Right side wire harness (see page 22-26)
Roof wire harness (see page 22-30)

Not used
Passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-34)
Passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-34)
Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-22)
Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-20)
(Plugs directly into the fuse box)
11
18 12
13
16 15 14
22-45
BACK
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index
Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
41 100A -- Battery, Power distribution
42 50A WHT Ignition switch (BAT)
43 20A RED/GRN Right headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
44
-- -- Not used
45 20A RED/YEL Left headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), High beam
indicator, High beam cut relay (Canada)
46 15A WHT/GRN PGM-FI main relay, Data link connector (DLC)
47 20A WHT/YEL Ignition key light and key interlock solenoid, ABS control unit (BLS), Cruise
control unit, ECM/PCM, Horn relay, High mount brake light, Brake failure
sensor, Trailer lighting connector
Fuse/relay Multiplex control unit (driver's)
box socket
48 20A WHT/GRN ABS control unit
49 15A WHT/GRN Turn signal/hazard relay
50 30A WHT ABS pump motor No. 14 fuse (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
51 40A WHT/BLU No.1 fuse (in passenger's under-dash fuse/rela'Lbox), Power window relay
52 -- -- Not used
53 40A WHT/GRN Rear window defogger relay_
54 40A YEL No.9, 10, 11, 12 and 13 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
55 40A YEL/GRN No.2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 fuses (inpassenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
56 40A YEL/BLK Blower motor
57 20A BLU/BLK Radiator fan motor
58 20A BLU/YEL Condenser fan motor
RED AlC compressor clutch
59 20A WHT/GRN Driver's and front passenger's seat heaters (Canada)
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
22-46
BACK
r--:'I
L=.!..I
Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 15A RED/WHT PGM-FI main relay
RED/BLU SRS unit (VA)
(or GRN)
2 10A BLK/WHT SRS unit (VB)
(or GRN)
3 7.5A BLK/YEL Heater control panel, Recirculation control motor, Rear window defogger relay,
Seat heaters (Canada)
4 7.5A VEL/BLK ABS control unit, Power mirror actuators, Power mirror defoggers (Canada)
Fuse/relay Optional connector
box socket
5 7.5A VEL/RED Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
6 15A BLK/YEL Alternator, Cruise control unit, Cruise main switch indicator, ECM/PCM, ELD
unit, Engine mount control solenoid valve (A!T), Evaporative emission bypass
solenoid valve, Evaporative emission purge control solenoid valve, Gauge
assembly, Heated oxygen sensor relay, Primary and secondary heated oxygen
sensors, Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (MIT), Vent shut solenoid valve
7 7.5A VEL/GRN Multiplex control unit (driver's) (All '98-99 models and '00 Sedan), OPDS unit
(with side airbags), Windshield washer motor (All '98-99 models and '00-02
Sedan)
8 7.5A VEL/BLK Accessory socket relay
Fuse/relay Optional connector
box socket
9 7.5A VEL Back-up lights, Brake failure sensor, Clock, DRL indicator light (Canada), Gauge
assembly, Multiplex control unit (passenger's), Shift lock solenoid, Trailer
lighting connector
Fuse/relay Multiplex control unit (driver's)
box socket
10 7.5A VEL/RED Turn signal/hazard relay
11 15A BLK/YEL Ignition coil
12 30A GRN/BLK Windshield wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper motor, Windshield
washer motor ('00-02 Coupe), Multiplex control unit (driver's) ('00-02 Coupe)
13 7.5A BLU/ORN ECM/PCM, PGM-FI main relay
2
11
3
4
9
5
8
7 6
(cont'd)
22-47
BACK
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Fuse Amps Wire Color
Number
1 30A GRN
2 20A RED
3
-- --
4 20A BLU
5
-- --
6 10A RED/BLU
20A RED/BLU
7 20A WHT/YEL
a 20A BLU/BLK
9 20A WHT/GRN
WHT/RED
10 10A RED/GRN
(Sedan)
15A
(Coupe)
Fuse/relay
box socket
11 7.5A WHT/BLU
12 20A Fuse/relay
box socket
13 7.5A WHT/YEL
Fuse/relay
box socket
14 7.5A GRN
15 20A GRN/WHT
16 20A WHT/BLK
22-48
Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Moonroof motor
Power seat up-down motor (2-way adjustable), Power seat rear up-down
motor, Recline motor (a-way adjustable)
No used
Power seat front up-down motor, Slide motor (a-way adjustable)
Not used
Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Heated oxygen sensor (California)
Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Left rear power window motor
(Sedan), Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
Passeng_er's power window motor
Audio unit
Audio unit, Accessory socket
Heater control panel, AfT gear position console light, Driver's seat heater
switch light (Canada), Audio unit, Gauge lights, Cruise main switch light
Moonroof switch light, Clock, Hazard warning switch light, Glove box light
Vanity mirror lights, Front parking lights, Front side marker lights, Rear
side marker lights, License plate light(s), Taillights, Trailer lighting
connector
Multiplex control unit (driver's)
Courtesy lights, Trunk light, Ceiling light, Spotlights
Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
ECM/PCM, Heater control panel, Security indicator, Multiplex control unit
(door), Gauge s s e m b t ~ Clock
Multiplex control unit (driver's), Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
ABS control unit
Multiplex control unit (door), Driver's power window
Right rear power window motor (Sedan)
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
BACK
Ground Distribution
r--:'I
t=:.I
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or circuit grounded
Gl Battery, Transmission housing
G2 Engine block
Gl0l ECM/PCM (PGl and PG2 are BLK; LGl and LG2 are BRN/BRK), Idle air control solenoid valve, Radiator
fan switch, PGM-FI main relay, EGR control solenoid valve, Shift control solenoid valve assembly (AfT),
Vehicle speed sensor (MIT), AfT gear position switch
Shielding between the ECM/PCM (all have braided wires) CKPITDC sensor, CYP sensor, Primary and
secondary heated oxygen sensors, Knock sensor, Mainshaft speed sensor (AfT), Countershaft speed
sensor (AfT). switch, Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer control unit
G201 Condenser fan motor, Radiator fan motor, Right headlight (low beam), Right front parking light. Right
front side marker light, Right front turn signal light. Hood switch (security)
G202 Seat heater relay (Canada). Blower motor relay, ELD unit, ABS fail-safe relay
G301 Washer level switch (Canada), Windshield washer motor, Left headlight (low beam), Left front parking
light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal light
G302 Brake fluid level switch, Windshield wiper motor, Intermittent wiper relay, Power steering pressure
switch, Cruise control actuator
G303 ABS pump motor
G304 ABS control unit (2 wires)
G305 ABS control unit (2 wires)
G401 Multiplex control unit (driver's), Turn signal/hazard relay, Power window master switch, Driver's door
key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Ignition key switch,
Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), Clutch switch (MIT). Data link connector (DLC).
Combination light switches, Heater control panel (2 wires), Windshield wiper/washer switch
G501 Moonroof switch, Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Driver's seat heater switch (Canada),
Front passenger's seat heater switch (Canada), Glove box light. Clock, Audio unit, Accessory socket,
Gauge assembly, Cruise control unit, Cruise main switch, OPDS unit ('00 Sedan with side airbags), Fuel
gauge sending unit ('00 Coupe), Front passenger's seat belt switch ('OO Sedan). Memory erase signal
-- G502-
(MES) connector ('01-02 models). ParkQin switch
Audio unit
G503 Multiplex control unit (driver's)
G504 Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
G551 Power mirror switch, Left power mirror defogger (Canada), Driver's power window motor, Power
window master switch (2 wires), High mount brake light, Driver's seat belt switch, Left rear door lock
knob switch, Driver's power seat switch (2 wires), Driver's seat heater (Canada)
G552 Fuel pump (FP), Fuel gauge sending unit (All '98-99 models and '00-02 Sedan)
G581 Multiplex control unit (passenger's), Power window relay, Accessory relay, Vanity mirror lights,
Spotlight, Passenger's door key cylinder switch, Passenger's door lock switch, Passenger's door lock
knob switch, Front passenger's seat heater (Canada). Right power mirror defogger (Canada), Right rear
door lock knob switch, OPDS unit (Coupe with side airbags, '01-02 Sedan with side airbags), Front
Passenger's seat belt switch ('00 Coupe, '01-02 models)
G601 Taillights (right. left). License plate light, Trunk latch switch, Trunk key cylinder switch (security), Trunk
actuator (security), Brake failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
G801 SRS unit (2 wires), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('00 model)
22-49
BACK
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Removal and Installation
(see page 23-28).
Removal
preset buttons.
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least
three minutes.
page 20-84) or the passenger's dashboard lower
cover (see page 20-85).
4. Remove the door sill molding, left or right kick
panel (see page 20-74) and fuse box cover (see
page 20-84).
5. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box (A) or passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box (B) away from the body.
22-50
6. Disconnect the driver's or pasHenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box connectors, and remove the driver's
or passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
NOTE: The SRS main harness connector is a
springloaded lock type (see page 23-28).
Installation
1. Connect the connectors to the driver's or
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, then install
the driver'S or passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the left or right kick panel and access panel,
and the door sill molding.
3. Install the dashboard lower cover.
4. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable
to the battery, enter the anti-theft code for the radio,
then enter the customer's radio station presets.
5. Confirm that all systems work properly.
BACK
Battery
Battery Test
AWARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and follow the
manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized tester, follow this conventional test
procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is
between 70F (21C) and 100F (38C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
If the case is damaged, replace the battery .
If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to
step 4.
If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the
surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps
for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK .
If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE
shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30
minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be
necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged within
3 hours, the battery is OK .
If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged
within 3 hours, replace the battery .
r:'I
a.=:..J
22-51
BACK
Relays
Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the
test listed for it.
NOTE (see page 22-106) for the turn signal/hazard relay
input test.
Relay Test
ABS fail-safe relay Normally-open type
Accessory socket relay A
AlC compressor clutch
relay
Condenser fan relay
Headlight relay 1
Headlight relay 2
Heated oxygen sensor relay
(California)
High beam cut relay
Horn relay
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay
Reverse relay
Seat heater relay
Starter cut relay
Taillight relay
ABS pump motor relay Normally-open type
Blower motor relay, type 1 B
Blower motor relay, type 2
Rear window defogger
relay
Windshield wiper Five-terminal type A
intermittent relay
Moonroof open and close Five-terminal type B
rela,{s
Normally-open type A:
Check for continuity between the terminals .
There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.
2 terminals when power and ground are connected to
the No.3 and No.4 terminals .
There should be no continuity between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals when power is disconnected.
22-52
2 3
DE]
1 4
type 1:
type 2:
BACK
Normally-open type B:
There should be continuity between the No.1 and
No.3 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals .
1 2
1+ ..
3 4
Rear window defogger relay
ABS pump motor relay
Blower motor relay, type 1:
Blower motor relay, type 2:
r--:'I
l!!!!!..I
(cont'd)
22-53
BACK
Relays
Power Relay Test (cont'd)
Five-terminal type A:
connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals.
5 2
Windshield wiper intermittent relay
22-54
Five-terminal type B:
Check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals .
3 2 4
................... 1:J
5 1
Moonroof open and close relays
BACK
Ignition Switch
Test
(see page 23-28).
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
3. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-
84).
4. Disconnect the 6P connector from the driver's
Wire side offemale
terminals

1\ Terminal
3 2 5 4 6
WHT!
WHT
BlK!
VEL
BlK!
\
BlK VEL WHT
Position
(ACC)
(BAT)
(lG1)
(lG2)
(ST)
o (lOCK)
I (ACC) 0
,....

II (ON)
,.... ,.... ,....
III (START) 0
r-.
,.,.

6. If the continuity checks do not agree with the table,
replace the electrical switch.
7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft
code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio
station presets.
22-55
BACK
Ignition Switch
Replacement
repairs of service (see page 23-28).
preset buttons.
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-
25).
4. Insert the ignition key, and turn it to "0".
5. Remove the 3 screws (A), and replace the electrical
switch (B).
B
6. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft
code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio
station presets.
22-56
BACK
Gauges
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE SENDING UNIT
page 10-5
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) (MIT)
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
Bulb Locations, page 22-59
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
page 19-9
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
page 8-4
r--:'I
I..!:!..I
(cant'd)
22-57
BACK
Gauges
22-58
C1 - - - - - -- C7
X ~ L
I I ~ I
~ ~
o
B1 ------ B10
\.Jl = rL"\
~ ~ ~
CONNECTORC CONNECTOR A CONNECTORB
TACHOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
page 11-128
SAFETY INDICATOR
page 22-73
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
page 14-136
COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
page 10-5
BACK
Gauge Bulb Replacement
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR IMMOBILIZER
L1GHT(1.4 W) INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 WI
ABS INDICATOR CRUISE INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 WI LIGHT (1.4 WI
SIDEAIRBAG
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.4WI
(With side airbags)
RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 WI
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
LIGHT (3.0 WI
LCD BACK
LIGHT (1.4 WI
GAUGE LIGHTS
(1.4Wx2)
LOW ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.4WI
r--:'I
I..:!:..I
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 W)
(Canada)
DRL INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4 W)
(Canada)
GAUGE LIGHT
(3.4W)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP (MIl)
(1.4WI
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.4WI
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
LIGHTS (1.12 W x 71
22-59
BACK
Gauges
Circuit Diagram
'98-99 models
22-60
UNDERHOOD FUSEIRELAV BOX IGNITION SWITCH
()-
No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOA) BAT
BATIERV -Q-
+ BLK BLKlYEL ----.,
No.54 (40A) IGI
(Canada) (USA)
--I
I RUNNING
: LIGHTS
I
i I. :
A13
HIGH
BEAM
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
A12
BLU/RED ORNlWHT
11
BLK
1.
G401
COMBINATION
LIGHT
SWITCH
7
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(USA)
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS CONTROL
UNIT (Canada)
YEL PASSENGER'S
UNDEFlDASH
FUSEIRELA V BOX
No.13
(7.5A)
WHTNEL
WHTNEL
B20
ODOITRIPI
MAINTENANCE!
WASHER CIRCUIT
(To page 2261)
BLKlYEL
B9
(MIT)

VEHICLE
SENSOR (VSS)
(To page 22:,6!)
IMMOBILIZER CHARGING
CIRCUIT
(1.4W) (1.4W)
B19 B8
VEL
YEL
No.9
(7.SA)
Bl1
C14
PNK GRNlRED
7
ECM/PCM ALTERNATOR
MULTiPlEX CONTROl UNIT
(Driver'S) (USA)
ABS CONTROl UNIT
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
GAUGE ASSEMBl V
I
I
YEL
A4
(Canada)
I
m&CATOR I
LIGHT
I (1.4W) I
I '
, I
i
:9 :
I
8SkROL J
UNIT

r-,,- ...
"'" -- I Euorr I
: BRAKE : :>:
down ) I (E1= ) I I GRNlWHT :
OFF: Aoatup I PARKING I
BLK: I l' BRAKE
: __ L:_:J
BACK
ECMlPCM
Y
BLU
BLU
TACHO-
METER
Bl
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
ECM (MIT)
Y
BLUlWHT
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
SPEEDO-
METER
B2
BLUIWHT
No.6 (lSA)
No.13 (7.SA)
PASSENGER'S FUSE
(From page 22-60)
r
WHTJVEL
B21 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TRIP/MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
INDICATOR
RESET SWITCH
ODorrRIP/MAINTENANCElWASHER CIRCUIT
B16
BLK.
DRiVER'S FUSE 1
, _
[ &- t
I
1
BLK
1 :
__ _J G501
(MIT)
B12
PNK
1 WASHER
I LEVEL
I SENSOR
I&K
:1

(Canada)
r--:'I

(cant'd)
22-61
BACK
Gauges
'98-99 models
22-62
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(3.0W)
Cl Cl1
SRSUNIT
I
BW
C9
COOLANT
FUEL TEMPERATURE
GAUGE GAUGE
C2
LT GRNlRED YElIBLU YEUGRN
LOW
~ U L
SENSOR
3
BLK
1
G552
2
FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
FUEL GAUGE
SENDING UNIT
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENDING UNIT
Cl0
ABSCONTROL
UNIT
ARS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
TURN SIGNAlIHAZARD
RELAY
LEH RIGHT
Y Y
GRNlBW GRNlYEL
GRNlBW GRNlYEL
V V
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
LIGHTS LIGHTS
GRNlBLU GRNlYEL
A14 C8
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
INDICATOR INDICATOR
LIGHT LIGHT
(1.4W) (1.4W)
BACK
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(DX,LX)
TAILLIGHT RELAY
(EX)y
REDIBLK
GAUGE ASSEMBLY B22
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
LIGHT
(1.4W)
C3
REDIBLU
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Drive(s)
y
REDIBLU
REDIBLU
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP (MIL)
(1.4W)
B6
CRUISE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
A6
GRN/ORN BLUlBLK

ECMlPCM CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT

DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
BLK
1.
6551
(
ON ; Unbuckled )
OFF; Buckled
LOW
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
B7
YEURED
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Drive(s)
YEURED
YEURED
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(
ON ; Engine slOPped)
OFF; Engine running
GAUGE
LIGHTS
(
1.4Wx2)
3.0W
3.4Wx3
AlTGEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
BID
RED

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Drive(s)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
lOy
REDlWHT
B4
B5
WHT/RED

I.!!!:.I
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
IDrive(s)
22-63
BACK
Gauges
'00-02 models
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
er
No.4l (l00A) No.42 (SOA) BAT
BATIERY -Q-
+ BLK -+-<::r"....t>-.... -C"-l>--i-WHT BLKIVEL -----,
No.54 (40A) IGl
(canada) (USA)
I 001
: LIGHTS i I :
I ,: >, "
'Y ,
i :
YEL PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.13
(7.5A)
WHTIVEL
WHTIVEL
ODOrrRIPI
MAINTENANCE/
WASHER CIRCUIT
(To page 2265)
NO.6
(1 SA)
BLKlVEL
(Mfr)

t:
VEHICLE
SENSOR (VSS!
(To page
YEL
NO.9
(7.5A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
A13 B20 Bll GAUGE ASSEMBLY
BLUIRED
HIGH
BEAM
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
A12
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(USA)
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS CONTROL
UNIT (Canada)
SAFETY
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR CHARGING
INDICATOR CIRCUIT SYSTEM
LIGHT LIGHT
(1.4W) (1.4W)
B19
PNK

ECMlPCM
B8
WHTIBLU

ALTERNATOR
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
(Drivefs) (USA)
ASS CONTROL UNIT
1-._,
C14
GRNlRED
(USA)
(Canada)
YEL
A4
DRL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
AS

J
UNIT
(Canada)

GRNlRED, I
COMBINATION
LIGHT
SWITCH
)
PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
,.1'-'\.,
,'\n/,
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
CONTROL UNIT
11
r
G401
T OFF: Float up
! i. __ .J
(
ON : Lever up )
OFF: Lever down
,
GRNIWHT ,
, PARKING
, BRAKE
L
SWITCH:
. I
22-64
BACK
COOLANT
ECM/PCM
Y
BLU
BLU
BLU
V
TEST
No.13 (7.SA)
PASSENGER'S FUSE
(From page 22-64)
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
I
WHTIYEL
B1 B21 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TEMPERATURE TACHO-
GAUGE METER SPEEDOMETER TRIP/MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
INDICATOR
C2
YEUGRN

ECMlPCM
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
B2
RESET SWITCH
ODOrrRIP/MAINTENANCEIWASHER CIRCUIT
B16
UNIT
(Drive(s) BLUIWHT
BLK
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
ECM (MfT)
?
BLUIWHT
No_6 (1SA)
FUSE
(From page 22-64)
y
BLUlWHT BLK/YEL
: I BLUiHT-
.<:::>: :
'" i
1 :
G101 J
---
(MfT)
GS01
I
,
,
B12
PNK
I
WASHER
LEVEL
SENSOR
:1

(Canada)
r--:'I
a..=.J
(cont'd)
22-65
BACK
Gauges
Circuit Diagram (cant'd)
'00-02 models
22-66
SRSUNIT
I
BLU
GAUGE ASSEMBL V C9
FUEL
GAUGE ""--r-'
Cl1
LTGRNlRED VEUBLU
LOW
FUEL
SENSOR
3 2
I
FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
FUEL GAUGE
SENDING UNIT
G552 (Sedan, '0102 Coupe)
G501 rOO Coupe)
SRS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
SIDE
AIRBAG
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
B17
I
OPDS I
: UNIT I
__ --.J
(WIJh side airbags)
CIO
ABSCONTROl
UNIT
TURN SIGNAUHAZARD
RELAV
LEFT RIGHT
Y Y
GRNlBLU GRNlYEL
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
LIGHTS LIGHTS
GRNlBLU GRNlYEL
ABS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
A14
LEFT
TURN
SIGNAL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
C8
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
BACK
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(DX, LX)
TAIlliGHT RELAY
(EX)?
REDIBLK
GAUGE ASSEMBLY B22
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
LIGHT
(1.4W)
C3
REDIBLU
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Drivefs)
y
REDIBLU
REDIBLU
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP (MIL)
(1.4W)
B6
CRUISE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
A6
GRNlORN BLUIBLK

ECMJPCM CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT

DRIVER'S
I' SEATBELT
SWITCH
BLK
.1
G551
(
ON : Unbuckled )
OFF: Buckled
LOW
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.4W)
B7
YEURED
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNrr (Drivefs)
YEURED
YEURED
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(
ON : Engine stopped)
OFF: Engine running
GAUGE
LIGHTS
(
1.4Wx2)
3.0W
3.4Wx3
AfT GEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
Bl0
RED

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Drivefs)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Dry
REDIWHT
B4
B5
WHTIRED

r--:'I
I..=:J
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Drivefs)
22-67
BACK
Gauges
Gauge Assembly Replacement
2. Remove the screws (A) from the gauge assembly
(8), and spread a protective cloth (C) on the upper
column cover.
D
: : : : : : : : : : : = = : ~ ~ ~ - ~ ~ - - l ~
--"
...... ----
-... .. _--_.-
- --.-
3. Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the
gauge assembly.
22-68
VSS Replacement (MIT)
1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the VSS
(vehicle speed sensor) (8).
2. Remove the mounting bolt (C), then remove the
VSS.
BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (MIT)
Special Tools Required:
Test harness 07LAJ-PT3020A
Before testing, inspect the No.6 (15A) fuse in the driver's
1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the VSS (vehicle
speed sensor) (A).

2. Connect the test harness only to the engine wire
harness.
3. Connect the RED test harness clip (B) to the positive
probe of an ohmmeter. Cover the white (C) and
green (D) test harness with protective tape (E).
4. Check for continuity between the RED test harness
clip and body ground.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the BLK wire between the VSS
and G101 .
5. Connect the WHT test harness clip (C) to the
positive probe of a voltmeter, and connect the RED
test harness clip (B) to the negative probe.

c
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the
VSS and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .
7. Disconnect the WHT test harness clip (C).
8. Connect the GRN test harness clip (D) to the
positive probe of a voltmeter.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Repair short in the BLU/WHTwire between
the VSS and the ECM, cruise control unit, or the
driver's multiplex control unit .
(cont'd)
22-69
BACK
Gauges
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (MIT) (cont'd)
10. Connect the other test harness connector (A) to the
VSS (8).
B
securely supported.
12. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch
ON (II).
13. Slowly rotate 1 wheel with the other wheel blocked.
Does voltage pulse from 0 to approx. 5 V or more?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO- Replace the VSS .
22-70
14. Disconnect the 22P connector "8" from the gauge
assembly.
B1
=
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
22P CONNECTOR B
619 620 621 622
15. Touch a probe to the 8LU/WHTwire, and connect it
to body ground through a voltmeter.
16. Slowly rotate one wheel with the other wheel
blocked.
Does the meter indicate pulsing voltage?
YES- Replace the speedometer..
NO- Repair open in the 8LU/WHT wire between
the VSS and the speedometer..
BACK

I..!::..I
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (AfT)
Before Testing:
Check to see if diagnostic trouble code P0720 (9) is
indicated. If it is, troubleshoot the DTC (see page 14-
75).
Inspectthe No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-
Check for continuity between the 816 terminal and
body ground (G501).
supported.
2. Disconnect the 22P connector from the gauge
assembly.
3. Connect the 82 terminal to the positive probe of a
voltmeter, and connect the negative probe to body
ground. To prevent damage to the gauge assembly,
lay the gauge assembly on a shop rag.
=
22P CONNECTOR B
4. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch
ON (II).
5. Slowly rotate (over 3 mph (2 km/h)) 1 wheel with
the other wheel blocked.
Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more?
YES-Replace the gauge assembly .
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Connect the No.9 terminal of the 32P PCM
connector to the positive probe of a voltmeter, and
connect the negative probe to body ground.
PCM 32P CONNECTOR (Connected)
BLU/WHT
VI2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
/1
112113 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24 I
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
32
-
'::L
=
7. Putthe vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch
ON (II).
8. Slowly rotate (over 3 mph (2 km/h)) 1 wheel with
the other wheel blocked.
Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more?
YES- Repair open in the 8LU/WHTwire between
the PCM and the gauge assembly .
NO- Check for loose connections at the PCM
connector. If necessary; substitute a known-good
PCM, and recheck .
22-71
BACK
Gauges
Maintenance Required Indicator Reset Procedure
How to Reset:
Push the select switch and reset switch at the same
time, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and hold them
sr k" P tt In Ing a ern:
Miles (km) Maintenance Reminder Light
At 5,900 (9,440) Blinks for 10 seconds when the
to 6,100 (9,760) ignition switch is turned ON (II).
At 7,400 (11,840) Comes on and stays on while
to 7,600 (12,160) the ignition switch is ON (II).
22-72
BACK
I BRAKE LAMP I
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
(BRAKE SWITCH)
Test, page 4-49
Pedal Height Adjustment,
page 19-5
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
SAFETY INDICATOR
r--:'I

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
TRUNK LIGHT
Test, page 22-111
BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR
Test, page 22-78
22-73
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
()-BLK
No.47 (20A)
No.41 (IOOA) No.42 (SOA)
<T'
SAFETY INDICATOR (In the gauge
II:I,.NG --I

I tiil::rM:i
Y
BLKIW HT
BLKIWHT

TIPLEX MUL
CONTR OL
,
,
I
,
'AID
,
,
I
,
,

-
, r
"
,
, r
::
::-
::.
...
A2 A7
IGNITION SWITCH
--E5-
WHT
IGI

UNDER-DASH
FUSEJRELA Y BOX
No.9 (7.5A)
BLKNEL ----+--or:r""'-'l .... O-.... YEL --------
YEL
BlI
SAFETY INDICATOR CIRCUIT

-
-
r--
" "
" "
, , r , r
, , r
All
WHT/GRN --
AI A8 A9 B8 BI6
..... "._.\ I

GRNIORN GRN GRNNEL GRNIWHT CAN BLK
22-74
(Withoul keyless )
\enrrysyslem
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
COURTESY
LIGHT
Y
GRNIORN
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Passenger's)
COURTESY
LIGHT
Y
GRN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
, COURTESY
LIGHT
Y
GRNNEL
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
, MULTIPLEX
CONTROl
UNIT
(Passenger's)
, COURTESY
LIGHT
Y
GRNNEL
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Sedan)
TRUNK
LIGHT
Y
ORN
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Sedan)
ALTERNATOR
TRUNK
LATCH
SWITCH
BLK
1
G601 G501
BACK
4[2)
---WHTlGRN
YEL
5(6)
BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR
6[1)
3[5) 2[3)
BLK GRN
h
GRN GAN
BLK
BLK
1
GSOl
LEFT
BRAKE
LIGHT
(27W)
BLK
I
WHTIYEL
+
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
(BRAKE SWITCH)
WHTIBLK
[ ) : Coupe
1 - ~ ~ 1 7
~ ~ l
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (Driver'S)
ECMlPCM
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
ABS CONTROL UNIT
TRAILER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
RIGHT
BRAKE
LIGHT
(27W)
GRNIWHT
BLK
G551
HIGHMOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
(21W)
~
I.!!!!!..I
22-75
BACK
Safety Indicator Input Test
1. Remove the gauge assembly (A) from the dashboard (see page 22-68), and disconnect the 22P connector (B) and
the 14P connector (e) from the gauge assembly.
*Without keyless entry system
WHT/BLU
t
~ o o o o ~ M M ~
~ 4 - - ~ ~ + - ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ - + - - ~ + - 4
B19 B20 B21 B22 All A12 A13 A14
+ +
ORN WHT/GRN
Wire side of female Wire side of female
terminals terminals
c
B
A
2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
3. Make these input tests at the connectors.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, the printed circuit board must be faulty; replace it.
22-76
BACK
B16 BLK Under all
conditions
B11 VEL Ignition switch ON
(II)
A11 WHT/GRN Ignition switch ON
(II) and brakes
applied
A10 BLK/WHT Ceiling light switch
in middle position
(Without keyless
entry system)
A9 ORN Trunk lid open
A7 GRN Front passenger's
door open
A2 GRN/ORN Driver's door open
A1 GRN/YEL Left rear door open
(Sedan)
A8 GRN/WHT Right rear door
open (Sedan)
B8 WHT/BLU Engine running
Connect to ground:
The ceiling light should come
on.
NOTE: Before testing, remove
No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse from the
passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
r-:'I
I..!!!!..I
Possible cause if result is not obtained
Poor ground (G501)
An open in the wire
Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
Blown brake light bulbs
Faulty sensor
A short to ground in the wire
Faulty ceiling light
An open in the wire
Blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the
relay box
Blown ceiling light bulb
Faulty trunk latch switch
An open in the wire
Faulty front passenger's door
switch
An open in the wire
Faulty driver's door switch
An open in the wire
Faulty left rear door switch
An open in the wire
Faulty right rear door switch
An open in the wire
Faulty charging system
An open in the wire
22-77
BACK
Brake Light Failure Sensor Test
1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the
brake pedal is pressed.
If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2.
If one of the brake lights does not come on, check
whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to
step 2.
If none of the brake lights come on, check the
brake light circuit (see page 22-91).
2. Open the trunk lid, and remove the left trunk side
trim (see page 20-78).
Sedan:
22-78
Wire side of
female terminals
Coupe:
WHT/GRN
3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety
indicator does not come on and stay on when the
6P connector is disconnected and the engine is
running. If the BRAKE lAMP light in the safety
indicator comes on and stays on, check for:
a short to body ground in the WHT/GRN wire
between the safety indicator and the No.4
(Sedan) or 2 (Coupe) terminal ofthe failure
sensor.
a faulty safety indicator circuit (printed circuit
board) in the gauge assembly.
4. Reconnect the 6P connector. Make sure the BRAKE
lAMP light in the safety indicator comes on and
goes off when the No.3 (Sedan) or 5 (Coupe)
terminal ofthe 6P connector is grounded, the brake
pedal is pressed, and the engine is running.
If the BRAKE lAMP light does not go off, replace
the failure sensor.
If the BRAKE lAMP light goes off, check for:
- a poor ground (G601).
- an open in the BlK wire.
BACK
Lights-on, Key-in, Seat Belt Reminder, Key Light
Timer, and Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems
Circuit Diagram
BAnERV
c:>- BlK
Bll
UNDERHooD FUSEIRELA Y BOX
No,41 (100A) No.42 (SOA)
~
B17
No.54 (40A)
.-::1"'\
No.47
~ (20A)
WHTlYEl
7
IGNITION
KEY LIGHT
(lED)
6
WHTlBlK
Al
lOW ENGINE
Oil PRESSURE
INDICATOR LIGHT
BS
~ ' , , , :l('
BlK
1
G503
YEURED
ENGINE Oil
PRESSURE
SWITCH
Engine Slapped
[
Closed: ]
Open:
Engine running
ALTERNATOR
IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S
UNDER DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
~ BlKIYEL -+--<"..0---11-"1
\..:!!T
BAT
WHT
I
YEl
I
~
LlGHTSON
No.13
PASSENGER'S SIGNAL
I
(7.SA)
UNDERDASH
I
FUSE/RELAY BOX
g
,..
'"
i
:>
!:.
WHTIYEl REDlBlK
A12 A6
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Driver's)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
LIGHT
A13 A16
BlUIWHT GRNlORN
BlK
1
G401
IGNITION
KEY
SWITCH
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
Al8
BLK
1
G551
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
A24
r--:'I
I.!!:.I
22-79
BACK
Lights-on, Key-in, Seat Belt Reminder, Key Light
Timer, and Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems
1. Before testing these systems, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-137).
Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's:
2. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
o If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
o If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
Al A2 A3 IV. AS 1> A7
ASI
Al3 Al4 Al5 AlB
I--
Al7 Al8 Al9
A20r-
Fuse/relay box socket
/>S A10 All
A21 A22 A23
Al2 81
A24 811
BU< VEL/RED
RED/GRN
4. Make these input tests at the connector and fuse/relay box socket.
o If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
o If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
L' hR' d .Igl ts-on emln er:
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (G503)
conditions There should be continuity. o An open in the wire
A6 Fuse/relay Combination Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No. 10 (10 or 15A) fuse in
box socket light switch ON There should be battery voltage. the passenger's under-dash fuse/
Jump battery relay box
voltage to B 16 o Faulty combination light switch
(RED/GRN) on o An open in the wire
automatic lights
off feature only
A16 Fuse/relay Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
box socket open There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
Seat Belt Reminder'
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (G503)
conditions There should be continuity. o An open in the wire
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
box socket ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
o Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
A18 Fuse/relay Driver's seat belt Check for continuity to ground: o Faulty seat belt switch
box socket is not buckled. There should be continuity. o Poor ground (G551)
o An open in the wire
22-80
BACK
E . O'IP nglne I ressure n Ica or as er: I d' t FI h
B11 BlK Under all
conditions
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch
box socket ON (II)
B5 WHT/BlU Engine
running
B17 VEL/RED Ignition switch
OFF
Ignition switch
ON (II)
Start the
engine.
K L' h l' ey Iglt Imer:
B11 BlK Under all
conditions
A12 Fuse/relay Under all
box socket conditions
A16 Fuse/relay Driver's door
box socket open
K . R d
ey-m emm er:
B11 BlK Under all
conditions
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch
box socket ON (II)
A16 Fuse/relay Driver's door
box socket open
A13 Fuse/relay Ignition key is
box socket inserted into
the ignition
switch.
Check light operation.
If the light does not come on,
attach the VEL/RED terminal to
ground:
Light should come on as the
There should be continuity
Attach to ground:
Ignition key light should come
on.
There should be 1V or less.
There should be 1 V or less.
There should be 1 V or less.

l!::.I
Poor ground (G503)
An open in the wire
Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
Faulty charging system
An open in the wire
Faulty engine oil pressure switch
An open in the wire
Blown bulb
An open in the wire
Insufficient oil
Improper lubrication
Faulty engine oil pressure switch
A short in the wire
Poor ground (G503)
An open in the wire
Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
relay box
An open in the wire
Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G503)
An open in the wire
Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
Faulty driver'S under-dash fuse/
relay box
An open in the wire
Faulty ignition key switch
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
22-81
BACK
Exterior Lights
(BRAKE SWITCH) DRL INDICATOR LIGHT (Canada)
Test, page 4-49
HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY
(Canada)
Test, page 22-52
TAILLIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-52
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS CONTROL
UNIT (Canada)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
Test, page 22-95
DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
UNDER HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HEADLIGHT RELAY 2
1: Test, page 22-52
22-82
HEADLIGHT RELAY 1
Test, page 22-52
HEADLIGHTS/FRONT PARKING LIGHTS
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
BACK
Sedan:
Coupe:
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
TAILLIGHT and BRAKE LIGHT
HIGHMOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
INNER TAILLIGHT

l!!!..J
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT and TAILLIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS
BRAKE LIGHT and INNER TAILLIGHT
BRAKE LIGHT and TAILLIGHT
22-83
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - USA with Automatic Lights-off Feature
UNDER HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
B ATIERY
@-
No.41 (IDOA)
r---'
)
HEADLIGHT

RELAY 2
1
No.45
(20A)
I
HIGH BEAM
lEFT
INDICATOR
LIGHT
HEADLIGHT
(1.4W)
LOW HIGH
(SIW) (&OW)
)
1
No.43
;> (2OA)
RIGHT
HEADLIGHT
HIGH LOW
(60W) (SIW)
NO.55 (40A)
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 1
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Drivel's)
I
REDIWHT
/ HIGH
DIMMER
11
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL

MULTIPLEX
y
Y
L
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Oriver's)
y
UIWHT
BL ",
J.
YEL PASSENGE R'S
H
Y
UNDER-OAS
FUSEIRELA
BOX
No.IO
.1 !'OAI
;> .2 ISA
CONTROL
UNIT
(Passenger's)
BLUIRED REDlYEL REDlGRN RED/GRN
I
BLU/RED
3 4
PASSING
10 COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
REDIYEL
REDlYEl REOIBlK
6
7
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
REOIBLK

ORNIWHT ORNIWHT ORNlWHT BlK ORNlWHT BlK REDlBLK
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
BLK
1
G301
22-84
.1 : Sedan
.2 :Coupe
j
I
I
I
UNIT
(Ilrivef'S)
I 1 1
,
1
,
REDIBLK REDlBlK REDIBLK REDIBLK REDlBlK REOIBLK REDlBlK REDIBLK
RIGHT TAILLIGHTS INNER LEFT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(aw)
RIGHT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(&W)
lEFT
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
(5W)
FRONT .1 (5WIC2) TAILLIGHTS
.2 (7Wx4)
liCENSE
PLATE
liGHTS
.1 (SW)
.2 (SWIC2)
.2
REAR
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHTS
(5Wx2)
(SW)
BLK BlK BLK
I 1
I
111111 I
G201 G401 G301 G201 0001 G201 G&OI
BACK
r--:'I
~
Circuit Diagram - USA without Automatic Lights-off Feature
AlTERY B
@-
NO.4! (!OOA)
r--v
1 1 1 1
I ~ .{
~ f ~
HEADLIGHT
~ ~ ~
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2 RELAY!
J
No.4S No.43
(20A) (20A)
REDIYEl
m-
rI
REDIYEl RED/GRN
H!GHBEAM
INDICATOR
LIGHT
lEFT (1.4W)
HEADLIGHT
lOW HIGH
(SIW) (&OW)
ORNlWHT ORNIWHT ORNlWHT
I
G301
REOIBLK
~
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver'S)
RIGHT
HEADLIGHT (Not used) COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
BlK BlK
11
G201 G401
lEFT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
liGHT
(ew)
BlK
1
G301
I HIGH
DIMMER
PASSING
10 11
OF1N1WHT
RIGHT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
(aw)
BlK
1
G201
lEFT
fRONT
PARKING
lIGHT
(SW)
BLK
1
RIGHT
FRONT
PARKING
liGHT
(SW)
BlK
1
G301 G201
NO.54
(40A)
*! :Sedan
*2 : Coupe
Blu/RED YEl
4
No.!O
*1 (IDA!
*2(15A
REDlGRN
6
REOIBlK
REDlBlK
TAilLIGHTS INNER
* 1 (SWx21 TAILLIGHTS
*2 (7Wx4 *1 (SWx2)
*2 (7Wx2)
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
fUSEIRElAY BOX
LICENSE
PLATE
LIGHTS
*1 (SW)
*2 (5Wx2)
*2
REAR
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHTS
(SWx2)
BlK BlK BlK BlK
I
I
f
I
BlK
1
G601
22-85
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Canada with Automatic Lights-off Feature
ATIERY B
No.41 (100A)
+ I .L
I I I
,6 .. -;T

HEADLIGHT

HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2 RELAY 1
No.42 No.55 No.45 No.43
(50A) (40A) (lOA) (2OA)
WHT YEUGRN BLUIWHT REDIYEl REDlGRN
A
t
REDlYEl

BLU
REDIYEl BLUIRED
MULTIPLEX
lEFT RIGHT
IGNITION BAT
CONTROL
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT I
UNIT
SWITCH IG2 (Drivers)
REDIYEl REDLr REtlRN
PASSENGER'S
/
UNDERDASH
"I
YfL
FUSE/RELAY

BOX
DRIVER'S
No.5 :) No.6
HIGH
UNDER DASH
(51W) (&OW)
BEAM
(&OW)

FUSEJRELAY (7.5A) (IDA)
,
INDICATOR
BOX
LIGHT
(1.4W)
DRL
REDlYEL BLK ORNlWHT ORNlWHT ORjHT BLK
INDICATOR
LIGHT
Y-0RNIWHT
Y
YEURED REDIBLU
-1
ORNlWHT REDIORN BLUIRED
22-86
BLUIWHT
9 12 2 3 1 G301 10
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT
13 6
BRAKE SYSTEM LIGHT

GRNlWHT
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
GRNlWHT3
GRNlRED

BRAKE
FLUID
lEVEL
SWITCH
N : Flail down
(8FF : Flail up
BlK
1
G302
-
....
G201
REDlGRN
11
4
P
I
G401
BACK

HIGH
BEAM
CUT
RELAV
-- BlUiRED """T-U!.lllol:r1r--
--ORNIWHT ORN-----"'I
10
DIMMER
11
BLK
BLUIRED
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Passenger's)
y y
REDIWHT BLUIRED
3
(:0)
4
(m)
MULTIPLEX

UNIT
yy
VEL
I
No.54
(4OA)
No.l0
*1 (10AI
;> *2(15A
., : Sedan
*2 :Coupe
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA V BOX
.a>m
REDIYEL REDlBlK
h
""'"
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver'S)
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
BLK
r--:,
I.!!!..I
REDIBLK RED/BLK REDlBlK REDlBLK REDlBLK FlED/BlK REDlBlK REDIBLK
lEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT TAILLIGHTS INNER LICENSE *2
FRONT FRONT FRONT FRONT ., !5Wx2) TAILLIGHTS PLATE REAR
SIDE SIDE PARKING PARKlNG *2 7Wx4) *1 (5Wx2) UGHTS SIDE
MARKER MARKER LIGHT LIGHT *2 (7Wx2)
*1 !5W)
MARKER
LIGHT LIGHT (SW) (5W) *25Wic2) LIGHTS
(8Wl (8W) (5Wx2)
BLK BlK BlK BLK
I I
I
I
BlK BLK BLK BLK BlK
1. 1. 1. 1. 1.
BLK
.!.
G401 G301 G201 G301 G201 G601
22-87
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Canada without Automatic Lights-off Feature
B ArrERY
+
22-88
No.41 (100A)
1 I
16 ,J I ,J

HEADLIGHT

HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2 RELAY 1
'1
No.42 NO.55 No.45 No.43
(50A) (40A) (20A)
!
(20A)
WHT YEUGRN REDIYEl RED/GRN
REDIYEl

BLU
LEFT RIGHT
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
REDIYEl REDLHT REDLHT
BLUIRED
IGNITION BAT
SWITCH IG2 REDIGRN
PASSENGER'S

UNDER-DASH

(f::>
::> HIGH l
FUSE/RELAY
P
P
BOX
lOW HIGH
HIGH
lOW
DRIVER'S (51W) (60W)
BEAM
(60W) (SIW)
UNDER-DASH No.6
INDICATOR
NO.5
FUSE/RELAY (7.5A) (IDA)
LIGHT
..)
BOX
(1.4W)
DRL RED/YEl BlK
"4"-..0A
1
INDICATOR

LIGHT
Y
YEURED REDlBlU ORNlWHT
BlUIWHT
12 3 1 G301 10
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT
13 6
BRAKE SYSTEM LIGHT
-=r
GRNIWHT
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
GRNIWHT3
GRNJRED
$
BRAKE
FLUID
lEVEL
SWITCH
(ON : Floal down1
BlK lOFF: Floal up )
1
G302
BLK
....
G201
REDIORN BlUiRED
REDIGRN
11 8
4
BLK BlK

I
G401
BACK
--BLU
4---+-..J
- BLUIRED
- ORNIWHT ----...,j
HIGH
BEAM
CUT
RELAY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
/ HIGH
DIMMER
ORN
10
PASSING
BLUIRED
/ I
(=0) 6
t--------... ---.I (000:)
11 COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
lEFT RIGHT lEFT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT FRONT FRONT
VEL
NO.54
(40A)
~ No.l0
*1 (10Al
~ *2 (15A
RED/GRN
6
RED/BLK
RED/BLK
TAILLIGHTS
*1 : Sedan
*2 : Coupe
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
INNER liCENSE
TAilliGHTS PLATE
SIDE SIDE PARKING PARKING
*1 ~ 5 W X 2
*2 7Wx4
*11
5WX2
l
LIGHTS
MARKER MARKER LIGHT LIGHT *2 7Wx2 *1 (5W)
LIGHT LIGHT (5W) (5W) *2 (5Wx2)
(8W) (8W)
BLK BLK BLK
I
1
I
BlK BLK BLK BLK BLK BlK
1 1 1 1 1 1
G401 G301 G201 G301 G201 G601
*2
~
~
REAR
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHTS
(5Wx2)
BlK
I
22-89
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
22-90
BATTERY
()
(MIT)
I
I
GRNlBLK
LEFT
No.41 (IOGA) No.42 (SOA) _

BlKIYEL
VEL
2
No.9
(7.SA)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-OASH
fUSE/RELAY
BOX
BACK-UP
LIGHT
SWITCH
I (On Ihe )
lIans.mission
housing
(Closed: In position 1]]) :
GRNlBLK
I I
GRNlBLK GRNlBLK
fliGHT
BACK-UP BACK-UP

LIGHT LIGHT
(21W) (21W)
TRAILER
LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
BLK BLK
Y
BLK
1
I
I G601
L-..
IGNITION SWITCH
BLKlYEL ----,

BLKlYEL
No.9
(7.5A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX

REVERSE
RELAY
GRNlBLK WHT
I I I
I GRNIBlK GRNlBLK GRNlBLK

TRANSMISSION
LEFT RIGHT
RANGE SWITCH
(AITGEAR )
BACK-UP BACK-UP
POSiTION SWITCH
LIGHT LIGHT
(Back-UP )
(21W) (21W)
TRAILER lighl swilch
LIGHTING (Closeci : In position lID )
CONNECTOR
BlK BLK
Y
BLK BLK
1 1
I
I
G601 GI01
..
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
ABS CONTROL UNIT
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
ECMlPCM
TRAilER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
BATTERY
WHTNEl
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
MULTIPLEX
(BRAKE SWITCH)
CONTROL UNIT
IClosed : Pedal depressed]
(Driver's)
WHT/BlK
- ~ - 1
WHT/BlK
BLI(
G55!
HIGH
MOUNT
BRAKE
LIGHT
(21W)
WHTlBlK
611J
BRAKE LIGHT FAilURE SENSOR
213J
GRN
r--1
GRN GRN
~ p lEFT ~
P RIGHT
:> ~ ~ :1
BRAKE
:> LIGHT
(27W) (27W)
BlK
I
i
BlK
1
G601
YEl
I
~
No_9
(7.5A)
YEl
516J
315J
BlK
I
I J : Coupe
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
SAFETY
INDICATOR
7
WHTIGRN
412J
r--:'I
I.!:..I
22-91
BACK
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Auto-off Headlights
Automatic Light Off Feature
BATTERY
No_41 (IOOA) No_S4(40A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No_l D 11 DA : Sedan!
15A: CoIJpe
+>-+-C'-'_ .... <r'-l>-+ ..... -YEl __ I-....c:'""'-'o--+-------------__.
No_13 (7_5A)

IGNITION SWITCH
'-C-t--WHT
No_42 (SOA)
_______ ..... IGI
MULTIPLEX A15 A2
CONTROL UNIT >-- BRN
(Door)
A7
PNK
0, I lOCK
DRIVER'S
DOOR lOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
BlK
1
G401
22-92
BlKlYEl WHTIYEl
DRIVER'S
NO.9 UNDER-DASH
(7.5A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX
i
III
i
1;"
]!

A24 A12
A6
AI3 A16 A14 B13 AID A22 B16
BLUIWHT GFINIOfIN BlK
IGNITION DRIVER'S
KEY DOOR
SWITCH SWITCH
3
BlK
1
G401 G401
HEADLIGHTS (HIGH)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LIGHT RELAYS
\l \l REOIYEL REDlBLK
I I t- REDlBLK
(NG/used)
I HIGH
PASSINGo-RE.DIW ... 3H ... T .. __ ,
EXTERIOR
LIGHTS
lOW I I
(:0) 6
..
11
BlK
f
BlK
1
G401
BLK
I
BACK
~
I.!!:..I
1. Before testing exterior light control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-137).
Wire side of female ,e,minals
4. Make these input tests at the connector or fuse/relay box socket.

If II h . OK 5 ate InPut tests prove ,goto step .
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
box socket ON (II) There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. An open in the wire
Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
A12 Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the passenger's
conditions There should be battery under-dash fuse/relay box
voltage. An open in the wire
A13 Ignition key is in Check for voltage to ground: Faulty ignition switch
the ignition There should be 1 V or less. An open in the wire
switch Poor ground (G401)
A16 Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
o ~ n There should be less than 1 V. An open in the wire
A14 Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
conditions There should be continuity. An open in the wire
A10 Combination light The headlights should come on. Poor ground (G401)
switch (ON) and An open in the wire
jumpbanery Faulty headlight relay
voltage to A 10 Faulty combination light switch
A22 Combination Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
light switch (ON) There should be continuity. An open in the wire
Faulty combination light switch
A6 Combination light Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 10 (10 or 15A) fuse in the
switch (ON) and There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
Jumpbanery voltage. Faulty combination light switch
voltage to B 16 Faulty taillight relay.
(RED/GRN) An open in the wire.
B16 RED/GRN Combination Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
light switch (ON) There should be 75 Q An open in the wire
resistance. Faulty combination light switch
Faulty taillight relay
B13 RED/WHT Passing switch Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
ON there should be continuity. An open in the wire
(cont'd)
22-93
BACK
Exterior Lights
Multiplex Control Unit, Door:
5. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the 20P connector from the door multiplex control unit.
PNK
L .J

Al A2
V
A4
V
A6 A7 A8
V
Al0
All A12
V V
A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
V
7. Reconnect the connectors to the unit, and make this input test .
Cavit Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
A7 PNK Driver'S door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door lock actuator
lock knob locked There should be less than 1 V. Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
8. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. Ifthe system works properly, the original control unit is
faulty; replace it. If there is still a malfunction, substitute a known-good control unit for the next most likely unit to
be at fault, and recheck. If the system works properly, the original unit is faulty; replace it.
22-94
BACK
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-84) and steering column covers (see page 17-25).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the combination light switch (8).
3. Remove the two screws (e), then pull out the switch (8).
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
~
I..!!!:..I
If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables.
- If there is no continuity, replace the switch.
Light switch:
\
Terminal
Position
OFF
:00:
Headlight switch
sD
OFF
Passing switch
ON
*: With auto-off headlight feature
Turn signal switch:
1\
Terminal
\
12
Position
LEFT
,....
NEUTRAL
RIGHT
LOW
HIGH
13
,....
'"'
B
3
\
(*)
,....
'"'
'"'
,....
'"'
A
4 11
,.... ,....
'"'
-v
'"' "" '"'
,.... ,....
''-' -v
14
'"'
-1
( (
- - - - - - ~ c
~
10 6
,....
v
.... 0
,....
7
,....
'"'
-0
,....
-
22-95
BACK
Exterior Lights
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (Canada)
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the control unit (8).
B
RED/BLU RED/GRN
RED/WHT RED/VEL BlK GRN/WHT
2 3
8 9
BLK BLU/WHT RED/ORN GRN/RED
BLU/RED ORN/WHT VEL/RED
4. Make these input tests at the disconnected connector.
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
22-96
BACK
1 RED/WHT Under all
11 RED/ORN conditions
10 ORN/WHT
2 RED/BLU Under all
conditions
4 BLK Under all
7 conditions
6 GRN/WHT Parking brake lever
up
8 BLU/RED With automatic
lights OFF:
Combination light
switch ON(D)
Without automatic
lights OFF:
Under all
conditions
9 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON
(II)
3 REDNEL Combination light
switch ON @D)
5 RED/GRN Combination light
switch ON
12 VEL/RED Ignition switch ON
(II)
13 GRN/RED Brake fluid
reservoir float in
down
Check for continuity between
each terminals:
Connect to ground: The
indicator light should come on.
r--:'I
I.!!:.I
Blown headlight bulb (High beam)
Blown high beam indicator light.
An open in the wire
Blown No. 55 (40 A) fuse in the
Blown No.6 (10 A) fuse in the
relay box
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Faulty parking brake switch
An open in the wire
Faulty headlight relay 1 and 2
An open in the wire
Faulty headlight relay 1 and 2
An open in the wire
Faulty DRL indicator light
An open in the wire
Faulty headlight relay 2
An open in the wire
Faulty headlight relay 1
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Faulty brake fluid level switch
An open in the wire
22-97
BACK
Exterior Lights
Headlight Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper (Coupe (see page 20-140),
Sedan (see page 20-142)).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A).
3. Remove the 5 mounting bolts (8), then remove the
headlight assembly (C).
A
HEADLIGHT: 60/51 W
FRONT PARKING LIGHT: 5 W
4. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
5. After replacement, adjust the headlights to local
requirements.
22-98
Headlight Adjustment
Before adjusting the headlights:
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Make sure the fuel tank is full.
The driver or someone who weight the same should
sit in the driver'S seat.
Load the trunk with the items you usually carry.
Push down on the front and rear bumpers several
times to make sure the vehicle is sitting normally.
'98-00 models:
1. Open the hood.
2. Check the horizontal adjustment indicator.
The "0" mark (A) on the horizontal adjustment
indicator gear should be aligned with the mark (8)
on the horizontal indicator.
A
B
L-R
3. Check the vertical adjustment indicator. The bubble
(A) should be centered underneath the longest
scribe mark (the "0" mark) on the gauge.
A
4. If either indicator is not aligned with its "0" mark as
described above, adjust it to "0" with a Phillips
screwdriver.
BACK
5. Adjust the headlights to local requirements by
turning the adjusters.
6. After headlight assembly replacement, it may be
necessary to readjust the horizontal indicator gear
(A).
First install the headlight, and adjust its
horizontal and vertical aimings according to local
requirements .
Then check that the arrow on the horizontal
indicator gear is aligned with the mark on the
horizontal indicator.
'01-02 models:
r--:'I
I.!!!!.I
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
ofthe headlights (A).
A
B
/
7.5 mm (25 tt)
2. Align the center ofthe headlights to 7.5 m (25 ft)
from the wall or a screen (B), and park the vehicle.
3. Turn the low beams on.
4. Measure the height of the headlights (A) and the
lights should reflect 52 mm (2.1 in.) below
headlight height (B).
I
(cont'd)
22-99
BACK
Exterior Lights
Headlight Adjustment (cont'd)
5. If necessary, adjust the headlights to local
requirements by turning the vertical adjuster.
22-100
Taillight Replacement - Sedan
Taillights
1. Open the trunk lid and pull back the trunk side trim
(see page 20-78).
2. Disconnect the connectors from the taillight.
3. Remove the three mounting nuts, then pull out the
taillight.
4. Install the taillight, and note these items:
Inspect the gasket; replace it if it is distorted or
stays compressed .
After installing the taillights, run water over them
to make sure they do not leak.
BRAKE/TAILLIGHT BULB: 21/5 W
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB: 21 W
BACK
Inner Taillights
,. Open the trunk lid.
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the inner
taillight.
A
B
3. Remove the three mounting nuts (8) and a clip (C),
then pull out the inner taillight.
TAILLIGHT BULB: 5 W
BACK-UP LIGHT BULB: 21 W

I.!!:..I
Taillight Replacement - Coupe
Taillights
,. Open the trunk lid and pull back the trunk side trim
(see page 20-78).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the taillight
(8).
B
3. Remove the four mounting nuts (C), then pull out
the taillight (8).
NOTE:
Inspect the gasket: replace it if it is distorted or
stays compressed .
After installing the taillights, run water over them
to make sure they do not leak.
TURN SIGNAL/TAILLIGHT BULB: 27/7 W
(cont'd)
22-101
BACK
Exterior Lights
Taillight Replacement - Coupe
(cont'd)
Inner Taillights
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the screw (D) and taillight lid cover (E).
E D
3. Disconnect the connectors from the inner taillight
(F).
4. Remove the mounting nuts then pull out the inner
taillight (F).
BACK-UP LIGHT BULB: 21W
22-102
Replacement
1. Push the light rearward to release the clips.
2. Pull the light out, then disconnect the 2P connector
from the light.
3. Clean the rear window glass, and install the light in
the reverse order of removal.
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT BULB: 21 W
BACK
License Plate Light Replacement
Sedan
1. Pull the license plate light assembly (A) out, and
disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB: 5 W
B
2. Take the lens off, then replace the bulb (C).
Coupe
1. Pull the license plate light assembly (A) out, and
disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB: 5 W
A
2. Take the lens off, then replace the bulb (C).
Rear Side Marker Light
Replacement - Coupe

a=!:..I
1. Remove the screw from the rear side marker light
assembly (A).
B
2. Carefully pry the light (A) out of the rear bumper,
and disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.
Be careful not to damage the rear bumper.
3. Remove the bulb socket (A) by turning it 45
counterclockwise, then replace the bulb (B).
REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT BULB: 5 W
22-103
BACK
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
22-104
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LIGHTS
Bulb Replacement, page 22-59
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
Test, page 22-107
COMBINATION LlGHT/TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Test, page 22-95
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD FUSE/RELAV BOX
r--:'I

DRIVER'S ' COMBINATION
UNDER-DASH LIGHT SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX (OX, LX)
BATIERV
(r-BlK
No.41 (100A)
BAT BlKIYEL -""'"-CT""""O-.. --... (EX)

TAilLIGHT RELAY
LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
REAR FRONT
Sedan (21W)
Coupe (27W)
(27W)
BLK BlK
G601 G301
WHT
IGl
No.49 (15A)
WHTiGRN -------------. VEURED
_----- GRNlBLU ------...., RED/BLK
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
ON
12 lEFT \ I RIGHT 14
13
GRNlYEl
1 [41
GRNlBLU
(GRNlREDI
HAZARD
WARNING
6 [61 SWITCH
LIGHT
(O.84W)
5(2] 7(5)
GRNlWHT RED
L-___ --1I-__ GRNlBlU
(GRNlRED]
GRNlBlU
INDICATOR lHT RIGHT
(1.4W)
.
TRAilER
LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
BlK
I
3
GRNIYEl
TURNSIGNAU
HAZARD RELAY
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
INDICATOR FRONT REAR
(1.4W) (27W)
Coupe (27
BLK BLK BlK
I
BLK
1
GSOI G201 G601
2
BLK
G401
MULTIPLEX
CONTROl UNIT

22-105
BACK
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test
1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (B).
2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
B
3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box .
If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it.
CavLtv Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
1 Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. An ooen in the wire
2 Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Faultv hazard warning switch
Hazard warning switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 49 (15 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Faultv hazard warning switch
3 Hazard warning switch Hazard lights should come on. Poor ground (G201, G301, G501,
ON; G601)
connect the No.2 Faulty hazard warning switch
terminal to the No.3 An open in the wire
terminal.
Ignition switch ON (II) Right or left turn signal lights Faulty turn signal switch
and turn signal switch should come on.
in Right or Left;
connect the No.2
terminal to the No.3
terminal.
22-106
BACK
Hazard Warning Switch Test
1. Carefully pry the clock (A) out of the center panel
(8).
D
l[ffi]mmJl
'98-00 models
1[ffi]tt?W11
'01-02 models
Terminal side of
male terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Pull the hazard warning switch (C) out from the
clock.
3. Disconnect the 10P connector (D) from the hazard
warning switch.
\
Terminal
6 7 1 2 10 9 3 5
Position
\
[6] [5] [4] [7] [1 ] [3] [10] [2]
OFF 0

-D 0 D
0

-D 0 -0 D
ON
0
r-

[l : '01-02 models

l.!!:.I
22-107
BACK
Interior Lights
22-108
TRUNK LIGHT
Test, page 22-111
SPOTLIGHTS
Test, page 22-110
PASSENGER'S
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
- : : : : : ; ; z ~ _
BACK
Circuit Diagram
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
BATIERY No.l0 (lOA: Sedan!
No.4l (100A) No.54 (40A) (l5A:Coupe

1
WHTlBlU WHT/BlU
DRIVER'S
OOOR
COURTESY
TRUNK LIGHT
LIGHT
(3.BW)
(5W)
ORN YEUBlU
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT

,
GRNlORN
TRUNK
LATCH
SWITCH
(
Closed: )
Lid open
BlK
G60l
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(
Closed: )
Door open
1 1 I
No.ll
(7.SA)
WHTIBLU
I
WHT/BlU WHTlBlU WHTIBLU WHTIBLU
lEFT REAR RIGHT REAR PASSENGER'S
DOOR DOOR DOOR
COURTESY COURTESY COURTESY
LIGHT lIGHT LIGHT
(3.8W) (3.8W) (3.8W)
YELlGRN VEL YEl.JWHT
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Passe!'ger's)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
3
GRNlYEl GRN GRNIWHT BlK
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(
Closed: )
Oooropen
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(
Closed: )
Oooropen
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(
Closed: )
Oooropen
SPOTLIGHTS
(6.2Wx2)
I
REDIBLK
DRIVER'S
VANITY
MIRROR
LIGHT
(1.lWx2)
BlK
BlK
1
G58l
RED/GRN
V
, COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(DX,LX)
- tAilLIGHT
RELAY (EX)
Y
T
RED/BlK
PASSENGER'S
VANITY
MIRROR
LIGHT
(1.lWx2)
BlK
I
REDlBlK
2
BlK
G50l
r:-:'I
I.!!!:..I
GLOVE
BOX
LIGHT
22-109
BACK
Interior Lights
Spotlight Test
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
2. Remove the four mounting screws (8).
3. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the housing
(D).
22-110
1\
Terminal
\
1 3
Position
ON
0
r.-.
-0
"'" LEFT
OFF
ON 0
r.-.
-0
RIGHT ""
OFF
BACK
Trunk Light Test
2. Pry out the trunk light assembly.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the housing
(B).
4. Open the trunk light cover (C).
5. Make sure that the bulb (D) is OK. Check for
continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals.
6. If there is no continuity replace the trunk light
assembly.
r--:'I
I..!!!!..I
Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (without keyless entry/
security alarm system), or 6P connector (with
keyless entry/security alarm system) from the trunk
latch.
Without Keyless Entryl
Security Alarm System:
With Keyless Entry I
Security Alarm System:
p/
Terminal side of
male terminals
Without Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System
1\ Terminal
1 2
Position
\
OPEN
0 D
CLOSED
With Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System
1\ Terminal
1 6
Position
\
OPEN
0 -0
CLOSED
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
trunk lid latch switch.
22-111
BACK
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
Circuit Diagram
22-112
UNDERHOOD FUSEIRELAY BOX PASSENGER'S UNDERDASH FUSEIRELAY BOX
No.41 (100A) No.S4 (40A)

1 No.l0 1
:1
1
10A :sedan\ :1 No.13
lSA : Coupe (7.5A)
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(DX,LX)
TAILLIGHT RELAY
(EX)
Y
REDIBLK
r---- RED/BlK --------t----- RED/BLK
REDIBLK RED
AUDIO UNIT LIGHT
AfT GEAR POSITION LIGHT
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT
PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH LIGHT
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH LIGHT
CLOCK
MODNROOF SWITCH LIGHT
HEATER CONTROL PANEL LIGHT
B22
GAUGE
LIGHTS
BID
L-_____
B4 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
!o
DASHUGHTS

BRIGHTNESS
CONTROllER
BS

RED
WHTNEL
tAG A12
-...,
B3
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
B4
A20
A14
I
G401
BACK
r--:'I
I.!!.I
1. Before testing dash light brightness control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-
137).
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
Fuse/relay box socket Wire side of female terminals
4. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and fuse/relay box socket.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired resuh Possible cause if result is not obtained
A6 Fuse/relay Combination light Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 10 (10 or 15A) fuse in
box socket switch ON ~ O O ~ ) or ~ D ) There should be battery voltage. the passenger's under-dash
(Jump battery voltage to fuse/relay box
816 (RED/GRN) on Faulty combination light switch
automatic headlights off Faulty taillight relay
feature onl}') An open in the wire
A12 Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
An open in the wire
A14 Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
A20 RED Combination light Attach to ground: Dash lights An open in the wire
switch ON ~ O O ~ ) or ~ D ) should come on full bright.
(Jump battery voltage to
816 (RED/GRN) on
automatic headlights off
feature only)
B3 RED/WHT Adjusting dial Check for resistance between Faulty dash light brightness
and rotated the B3 and B4 terminals: There controller
B4 WHT/RED should be 0-20 kQ at all times. An open in the wire
22-113
BACK
Controller Test
1. Remove the gauge assembly (A) (see page 22-68).
RED/WHT WHT/RED
B
2. Disconnect the 22P connector (B).
3. Measure resistance between the B4 and B5
terminals while rotating the adjusting dial.
Resistance should vary from 0 to 20,000 ohms as
the dial is rotated.
22-114
BACK
IGNITION KEY SWITCH, KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-120
CEILING LIGHT
Test, page 22-121
PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
r--:'I
I..!!:..I
22-115
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD BOX
BAITERY
No.41 (100A) No_54 (40A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX

MULTIPLEX AI 5
CONTROL UNIT BRN
(Door)
A17
BRNIRED
A2
-
UN- ,0
lOCK
DRIVER'S
DOOR lOCK
KNOB
SWITCH
L--_+-.....I
2
I
G401
22-116
IGNITION SWITCH
No.42 (SOA)
No.47
(20A)
&...<r"''''''O-+-WHT----+o
WHTIYEL
7
:?-
IGNITION

KEY
LIGHT

(LED)
6
WHTlBlK
AI
A13
BlUIWHT
I IGNITION
KEY
SWITCH
LIGHT SWITCH

, AllLiGHT
RELAY (EX)
Y
REDIBLK
A6
(Driver's)
A16
GRN/ORN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
if
ti
0
'"
"
.8

.,
j
" !!:.
A24
Bl B9
C>-PNK __
A17
GRYIYEL
lEFT REAfl
DOOR
SWITCH
BLKlYEL
NO.9
(7.SA)
YEL
A22
REDJGRN
I
DRIV ER'S
ERDASH
ElRELAY
UNO
FUS
BOX
No.l1
(7.5A)
WHTIBLU
3
l'
BLKlWHT
A21
CEILING
LIGHT
MULTIPLE X CONTROL UNIT
'5) (Passenger
AIS
GRN
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
AI4
GRNlWHT
RIGHT REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
3 (Closed: Key inserted) (Closed: Door open) (Closed: Door open) (Closed: Door open) (Closed: Door open)
BlK
1
G401
BACK
r--:'I
a.=:J
1. Before testing the entry light control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-137).
2. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect its
connector.
If all terminals look OK, go to step 4.
Al A2 A3 A4 A5
A13 A14 A15 A16
-
A17
A6 A7
A18 A19
Fuse/relay
box socket
A8
A20
-
A9 Al0 All A12
A2l A22 A23 A24
4. With the driver's unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the fuse/relay box socket.
A1 Fuse/relay Under all Attach to ground: The ignition Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
box socket conditions key light should come on. under-hood fuse/relay box
Blown LED
An open in the wire
A6 Combination Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 10 (10 or 15A) fuse in
light switch There should be battery voltage. the passenger's under-dash fuse/
ON (Jump relay box
battery An open in the wire
voltage to B16 Faulty combination light switch
(RED/GRN) on
automatic
headlights off
feature only)
A24 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
A13 Ignition key is Check for continuity to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
inserted into There should be continuity Poor ground (G401)
the ignition An open in the wire
switch
A16 Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door switch
opened There should be less than 1V. An open in the wire
A17 Left rear door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty left rear door switch
opened There should be less than 1V. An open in the wire
(cont'd)
22-117
BACK
Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's:
5. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect
its connector.
Al A2 A3 A4 A5
A13 A14 A15 A16
r---
A17
A6 A7
A18 A19
Fuse/relay
box socket
A8
A20
-
A9 A10 All A12
A2l A22 A23 A24
7. With the passenger's mUltiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the fuse/relay box socket.
A22 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.SA) fuse in the
An open in the wire
A21 Ceiling light Connect to ground: Ceiling light Blown No. 11 (7.SA) fuse in the
switch in the should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/
middle relay box
position Faulty ceiling light
An open in the wire
A15 Passenger's Check for voltage to ground: Faulty passenger's door switch
door opened There should be less than 1 V. An oQen in the wire
A14 Right rear Check for voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door switch
door opened There should be less than 1 V. An open in the wire
22-118 BACK
r:-:'I
I.!:..I
8. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the 20P connector from the door multiplex control unit.
Ifthe terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
Al
All
A2
/
A4
A12
/ 1/
Wire side of
female terminals
L
/
A15
,J
A6 A7 A8
/
AlO
A16 A17 A18 A19
l(
BlK/RED
10. Reconnect the connectors to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connector.
A17 BlK/RED Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door lock actuator
lock knob There should be less than 1 V. Poor ground (G401)
unlocked An open in the wire
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
22-119
BACK
Ignition Key Switch Test
NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the
circuit diagram (see page 22-79) and input test (see
page 22-80).
When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper
in the driver's multiplex control unit senses ground
through the closed ignition key switch. When you open
the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground
through the closed door switch.
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
covers (see page 17-25).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector.
3. Check for continuity between terminals No.1 and
No.3 .
There should be continuity with the key in the
ignition switch .
There should be no continuity with the key
removed.
4. If continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition
key switch.
22-120
Ignition Key Light Test
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
covers (see page 17-25).
111 1
2
1
3
J4I 51
6
1
7
11
3. The LED should come on when power is connected
to terminal No.7, and ground is connected to
terminal No.6.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition
key switch.
BACK
Ceiling Light Test
1. Turn the light switch OFF.
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
D
3. Remove the two mounting nuts (8) and the housing
(C).
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (D) from the housing.
\
Terminal 1
\
5 or 4 3
Position
l'
OFF
0
'-'"
()
"""
MIDDLE
0-
ro
'-'"
()
'-'
ON
0
1'"""\
'-'"
()
'-'
......,
l' 4
3
BULB (8WI
r--:'I
I.!!!!!..I
ceiling light.
22-121
BACK
Stereo Sound System
REAR SPEAKERS
22-122
WINDOW ANTENNA
Test, page 22-126
Repair, page 22-126
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
AUDIO UNIT
Connector Replacement, page 22-124
ANTENNA LEAD
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD BOX
BATTERY
C)-BLK
No.41 (100A)
......
No.42 (SOA)
NO.54 (40A)

DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSEIRELA Y BOX
--
r
WHT WHTiBLK
ACC
YEUBLK
YEL
I
No.9
(20A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEJRELAY BOX
r--:'I
l!:.I

ACCESSORY
WINDOW
ANTENNA
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(OX, LX)
TAILLIGHT
RELAY (EX)
I
REDIBLK
WHTIRED
--l
WHT/GRN WHTIRED
ANTENNA LEAD
ACCESSORY SOCKET
GRYIWHT BRNIWHT
BLUIYEL RED/YEL
LEFT REA!'! RIGHT REAR
SPEAKER SPEAKER
10
18 8
GRYIBLK
BLU/GRN
GRJIBLK
I \lj
DRIVER'S BLU/GRN
DOOR SPEAKER
LEFT
TWEETER
AUDIO UNIT
e
17
BRNlBLK
RED/GRN

I \lj
PASSENGER'S RED/GRN
DOOR SPEAKER
RIGHT
TWEETER
SOCKET
RELAY
BL
1
G581
RED

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver'S)
BLK

I
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenge(s)
:1
BLU
4
('98-00 models)
BLK
I I
GS02
(With SI!QJIny alarm syslem)
22-123
BACK
Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit Removal/Installation
SRS component locations, precautions and procedures
(see page 23-28).
NOTE:
parts.
preset buttons.
3. Remove the center panel (see page 20-86).
4. Remove the bolts, disconnect the audio unit
connectors (A) and the antenna lead (B), then
remove the audio unit.
Fastener Locations

5xO.8mm

(0.9 kgfm,
7lbfftl
B
5. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note
these items:
Make sure the audio unit connectors are plugged
in properly, and the antenna lead is connected
properly.
22-124
Audio Unit Connector Replacement
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the
wires to the cavities as listed in the following table.
Cavities 1,3,11,12, and 13 are not used.
Cavity Wire Connects to
2 WHT/RED ACC (Main stereo power
supply)
4 BlU Security in
5 RED/YEl Right rear sp_eaker (+)
6 BLU/YEl left rear speaker (+)
7 RED/GRN Front passenger's speaker
(+)
Right tweeter (+ )
8 BlU/GRN Driver's door speaker (+)
left tweeter (+ )
9 RED/BlK Lights-on signal
10 WHT/GRN Constant power
14* BlK Security out
15 BRN/WHT Right rear speaker (-)
16 GRY/WHT left rear speaker (-)
17 BRN/BlK Front passenger's door
speaker (-)
Right tweeter (-)
18 GRY/BlK Driver's door speaker (-)
left tweeter (-)
19 RED Multiplex control unit,
driver's
20 BlK Ground (G502)
* : '98-00 models
::--::
1 121314 5 61718
9
10
1
111112113114
15 16117/18 19
20
1
BACK
Speaker Replacement
Door
1. Remove the front door panel (see page 20-8).
2. Remove the three screws (A), then disconnect the
2P (8) connector from the speaker (C).
B
c
/
Tweeter
Carefully pry the tweeter (A) out of the dashboard, then
disconnect the 2P connector (8) from the tweeter.
A
/
Rear
r:-:'I
t.=.I
1. Remove the two screws from the trunk side, then
remove the speaker cover (A).
A
~ /
2. Remove the four screws (8), disconnect the 2P
connector (C) from the speaker (D), and remove the
speaker.
22-125
BACK
Stereo Sound System
Window Antenna Test
1. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester
probe (8) as shown.
2. Touch 1 tester probe to the window antenna
terminal (A) hear, and move the other tester probe
along the antenna wires to check that continuity
exists. Repair if continuity does not exist.
A\
I
-1
I
- t
I
-
U
[j
0:: J
22-126
Window Antenna Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
must be no longer than 1 inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
c
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
ofthe window antenna wire (8) with cellophane
tape (C).
3. Mix the silver conductive paint thoroughly. Using a
small brush, apply a heavy coat of paint (A)
extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break.
Allow 30 minutes to dry.
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
BACK
Window Antenna Coil Test
1. Remove the rear shelf, Coupe (see page 20-59),
Sedan (see page 20-77).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A, B) from the window
antenna coil (C).
3. Check for continuity between terminal 82 and body
ground and between terminals A 1 and 81. If there
is no continuity, replace the window antenna coil.

l!!!..I
22-127
BACK
Clock
Circuit Diagram
22-128
BATIERY
No.4l (100A) No.42 (50A)
&-- BLK -+-C'1'"\...I>-.... -<f"""O-...... -WHT
No.54
(40A)
YEL
PASSENGER'S
No.13 UNDER-DASH
(7.5A)
BOX

IGNITION
SWITCH
BLKlYEL
No.9
(7.5A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(OX, LX)
-F
m m1
CLOCK
I
LCD
DISPLAY
- ECMlPCM
-GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
i!I (O.7W)
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
3
<1
S\ h'WJACK
1 ______ .... _--------..
CIRCUIT 1
,
5
4
BLK RED

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Drivefs)
G50l
BACK
Replacement
1. Remove the clock (A) from the center panel (B).
B
\ ~
111 I 2 TIT 41 511
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (C) from the clock.
3. Remove the clock.
Terminals
Cavity Wire Connect to
1 VEL IG1 (Main clock power
supply)
2 WHT/ Constant power
VEL
3 RED/ Lights-on signal
BLK
4 RED Multiplex control unit,
driver's
5 BLK Ground (G501)
~
I.!!:..I
22-129
BACK
Horns
22-130
r [J 000 0 0 [-- D
DDD DOD I DOD
Cl Cl Cl ClOOD ~ D
~ 0 fQCJaL9 oc:JDJ
HORN RELAY
Test. page 22-52
HORNS
Test. page 22-131
HORN SWITCH
page 23-278
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
~
BLK
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.47
i (20A)
tEL WHT
~ --- -- -- ---}l1
HORN
RELAY
~
LIGHT BRAKE
CIRCU IT
TERLOCK KEY IN
SOLEN
'ABSC
UNIT
010
ONTROL
I
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
CRUISE CONTROL
LTGRN/BLU BLU/RED BLu/RED
CABLE H HORN HORN
REEL (Low) H (High)
SETIRESUME/ HORN
CANCEL SWITCH SWITCH
Horn Test/Replacement
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the horn cover (A).
C
~
I..::.J
B
3. Disconnect the 1 P connector (B), and remove the
horn (e).
4. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the
terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (B). The
horn should sound.
B
A
5. If it fails to sound, replace it.
22-131
BACK
Accessory Power Socket
Circuit Diagram
22-132
!RED WHT
~
AU
UN
DIO
IT
BATTERY
~
BlK
No.41
(10GA)
NO.54
(40A)
No.42
(50A)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
IGNITION
SWITCH
YEl WHT/BlK
NO.8
(7.SA)
YEUBlK
No.9 I
;) (20A)
DRIVER' S
DASH
ELAY
UNDER-
.USEJR
BOX
~ 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
ACCESSORY
SOCKET
RELAY
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
WHT/RED
- -
~
ACCESSORY
SOCKET
'--
-
BlK BlK
1 1
G501 G581
BACK
Test/Replacement
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are
all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded,
repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
8
2
' ~ L K
~ --------.- WHT IRED
4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for
voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals.
If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- blown No.8 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
- faulty accessory socket relay.
- poor ground (G501, G581).
- an open in the wire.
- blown No.9 (20 A) in the passenger's under-
r--:'I
~
22-133
BACK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S
(Has built-in the beeper)
MULTIPLEX CONTROL INSPECTION CONNECTOR
22-134
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BACK
r--:'I
I.!:..I
Circuit Diagram (Power, Ground, Communication Lines)
IGNITION SWITCH
Y BATTER
e>-
NO.41 (I00A) No.42 (SUA)
BAT
BLK-
r---v
WHT
IGI
NO.51 (40A)

WHT/BLU
No.54 (40A) BLKlYEL

VEL
I
No.47 (20A)
PASSENGER'S
No.13 NO.9
DRIVER'S

UNDERDASH UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY
(7.5A) (7.5A)
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BOX
WHTIYEL
7
r- r-
i

0
IGNITION
..
!'j
KEY LIGHT S>

(LED) 1:;'
'iii
""
..
'- '" ::J
6 !:.
WH TIYEL WHTIBLK WHTIYEL WHTIYEL YEL WHTIBLU
AI AI A12 A24 A24 A22
BUZZER
MULTI PLEX A15 A2
R
MULTIPLEX Bl B9 MULTIPLEX
CONT ROLUNIT CONTROL UNIT >-- PNK--C CONTROL UNIT
(Ooor) (Driver's) (Passenger's)
A12 A'9 A2 Bll A13 A14 A15 B22 AS A2
=

I
5\

POWER
"
0
WINDOW
S>
1:;'
RELAY
GRi
HT
BLUIWHT BLK
I
BLK
..
::J
!:.
No.15 (20A)

PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
,-

MULTIPLEX
FUSEIRELAY BOX
IGNITION
---0
CONTROL
KEY
INSPECTION
T
SWITCH

CONNECTOR
-
BLK B LK BLK
Br
r
BlK BLK
1 1 1 1 1
BlK
1
G401 G551 G503 G401 G504 Gsal
22-135
BACK
System Description
The multiplex Control System has four internal
functions:
Multiplexing (send multiple signals over shared
wires)
Wake up/sleep (runs at full power only on demand to
reduce battery draw)
Fail-safe (fixes or ignores faulty signals)
Self-diagnosis (Mode 1 for the system, Mode 2 for
input lines)
The system controls the function ofthe following
circuits
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Lights-on Reminder
Key-in Reminder
Key Light Timer
Dash Lights Brightness Control
Entry Light Control (EX, SE) (ignition key light and
ceiling light)
Automatic Lights-off (EX)
Power Door Locks
Power Window (including key-off timer operation)
Wiper/Washer (including speed responsive
intermittent wiper)
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm (EX, SE)
Interlock system (see page 14-144).
Multiplex Communication
To reduce the number of wire harnesses, digital signals
are sent via shared mUltiplex communication lines
rather than sending normal electrical signals through
individual wires.
The input signals from each switch are converted to
digital signals at the central processing unit (CPU).
The digital signals are sent from the transmitter unit
to the receiver unit as serial signals.
The transmitted signal is converted to a switch signal
at the receiver unit, and it operates the related
component.
There are exclusive communication lines between
each of the multiplex control units:
- Door Driver's (between the door and the driver's
multiplex control units) Wire color: BRN
- Driver's Passenger's (between the driver'S and
the passenger's multiplex control units) Wire color:
PNK
The control units always communicate via these lines
when the system is operating, and they stop
communicating when the system is OFF.
22-136
Wake-up and Sleep
The multiplex control system has "wake-up" and
"sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
In the sleep mode, the multiplex control unit stops the
functions (communication and CPU control) when it
is not necessary for the system to operate.
As soon as any operation is requested (for example,
door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep
mode immediately wakes up and begins to function.
This control unit also sends a wake-up signal to the
other control units via the communication lines.
When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and driver's
or front passenger's door opened, there is about a 10
second delay before the control units go from the
wake-up mode to the sleep mode.
If any door is open, the sleep mode will not function.
If a key is in the ignition switch, the sleep mode will
not function.
When in sleep mode, the current draw is reduced
from 70 - 80 mA to less than 10 mAo
Fail-safe
To prevent improper operation, the multiplex control
system has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode,
the output signal is fixed when any part ofthe system
malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or
communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that
fixes the output signal when there is any CPU
malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that
ignores the signal from the malfunctioning control unit
and allows the system to operate normally.
BACK
Troubleshooting
SCS Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A
dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in
the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse .
2. Connect the special tool to the multiplex control
inspection connector (A).
A
Ifthe driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the seat belt
reminder will beep five times.
4. Check self-diagnosis function Mode 1 for a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC). After about 5
seconds, the ignition key light should come on and
the beeper should beep for 2 seconds, then go off
for 0.2 seconds, then blink and beep for 0.2
seconds. This means that you are in Mode 1 of the
self-diagnosis function.
o If the system enters Mode 1, go to step 5.
o Ifthe system does not enter Mode 1, see ifthe
SCS circuit is working properly. Go to step 6.
0.2 sec.
ON
OFF
0.2 sec.
2 sec.

I.!!!!:..I
5. About 1 second after you go into self-diagnosis
Mode 1, the ignition key light and beeper indicate
the DTC, and repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is a
code, it will blink/beep, pause, then repeat the code
as long as the ignition switch is ON (II). If there is
more than one DTC, the system will indicate them
in ascending order, beginning from the DTC with
the lowest numerical value.
Does the ignition key light blink and the beeper
beep?
YES- There is a DTC. Count the blinks/beeps to
find your DTC in the table, then go to step 9 and
check the communication lines.
DTC Cause
1 The driver's unit is not able to receive
signals from the door unit.
2 The driver's unit is not able to receive
signals from the passenger's unit.
3 Malfunction in the driver'S unit.
4 Signals from each unit do not match.
(LX and EX control units are not
interchangable)
5 The passenger's unit is not able to receive
signals from the other units.
6 The door unit is not able to receive signals
from the other units.
NO-Ifthe system goes into Mode 1 as described
in step 4, and there is not repeating DTC. Go to step
11.
6. Remove the special tool from the SCS connector.
the inspection connector and the A15 terminal in
the driver's multiplex control unit.
YES- Go to step 8.
NO- Replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box, and recheck for DTC's .
(cont'd)
22-137
BACK
the inspection connector and body ground G401.
YES-Ifthere is still no Mode 1 confirmation,
replace the driver's multiplex control unit and try
again. After replacing the driver'S multiplex control
unit the system confirms Mode 1 and there are no
codes, go to step 12.
NO- Repair open in the wire, and recheck for
DTC's .
9. With the ignition switch OFF, check for continuity
Communication Line Wire Continuill'
Door unit to Driver'S unit BRN YES
Driver's unit to Passenger's unit PNK YES
NO-Check for an open in the wire .
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check for
voltage between the communication line and
ground.
Communication Line Wire V o t a ~ e
Door unit to Driver's unit BRN 3.5-9.5
Driver's unitto PassenjJer's unit PNK 3.0-10.0
Does the voltage match the table?
YES-Communication lines are OK. Go to step 11.
NO- Repair the line according to the following .
o If the voltage is too high:
- Check for a short to another wire with voltage.
- Check for poor contact in the connectors at each
control unit connector to the wire.
o If the voltage is too low:
- Check for a short to ground or to another wire.
- Check for poor connections at each control unit
connector to the wire.
- Faulty circuit in one of the multiplex control units
connected to the wire.
o If anyone or all the control units are completely
inoperative, perform the multiplex control unit input
test (see page 22-141).
22-138
11. Shift to the sleep mode:
o Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
o Remove the special tool from the SCS connector.
o Cancel the key-off operation timer in the power
window system by opening and closing one of
the doors.
o Make sure that the exterior lights are off. If you
do not operate any switches related to the
multiplex control units within 1 minute after
meeting the above conditions, the system
function shifts to the sleep mode. (All of the
switches must be turned OFF except door lock
knob switches). Go to step 12.
12. Confirm the sleep mode:
o Check for voltage to ground on the BRN wire and
PNK wire. There should battery voltage in the
sleep mode.
o Check the parasitic draw at the battery while
shifting to the sleep mode. Amperage should
change from about 70 to 80 mA to less than
20mA.
o If the vehicle does not go into the sleep mode,
carefully perform Mode 2 test (see step 14), and
check for faulty input for example a key cylinder
switch keeping the system awake.
13. Confirm the wake up mode.
o When any switch in the multiplex system is
turned on, it wakes up its related control unit
which, in turns wakes up the other units. After
one minute it will return to sleep mode again If
the switch is returned to the original position.
o When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), all of
the multiplex control units wake up at the same
time without "talking" to each other through the
communication lines.
Ifthe wake up mode is confirmed on the first switch
tested, and there is no problem with any other
switch operation, the system is working correctly.
Go to step 14.
After confirming a problem in sleep mode, look in
the following tables for the switch most closely
related to the problem you may be having. Operate
that switch and see if its control units wake up. Also
use Mode 2 step 14 to confirm switch inputs.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake
up, several functions (locks, windows, etc.) of the
system will malfunction at the same time.
BACK
In each table below, the control unit is followed by
a list of the switches and input signals that can
wake it up.
No.9 (7.5A) driver's fuse
No. 13 (7.5A) passenger's fuse
Communication lines (BRN, PNK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's key cylinder switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)*
Front passenger's key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Right rear door switch (OPEN)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)*
Keyless transmitter (LOCK)
Keyless transmitter (UNLOCK)
Keyless transmitter (TRUNK)
Security input for the radio. Test by disconnecting
and reconnecting the radio connector.
*When testing the passenger's door lock knobs, be
sure all other passenger lock knobs are in the locked
position.
Combination switch
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Trunk latch switch (OPEN)
Trunk key cylinder switch(UNLOCK)
Engine hood switch (OPEN)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
r--:'I

14. With the system in Mode 1, and the ignition switch
still in the ON (II) position, disconnect the special
tool from the multiplex control inspectin connector
for about 5 to 10 seconds, then reconnect it. The
ignition key light should come on and the beeper
should beep for 2 seconds, then blink and beep
twice more at 0.2 second intervals. This means the
system has gone from Mode 1 to Mode 2. Go to
step 15.
Mode 2:
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
2 sec.
..
_ 0.2 sec .
ON
OFF
-
_ 0.2 sec.
NOTE: To cancel Mode 2, disconnect the SCS
service connector from the multiplex control
inspection connector for 10 seconds or more, or
turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Look in the following tables for the switch most
closely related to the problem. Test all the switches
in the following order, otherwise the test results
maybe inaccurate. While still in Mode 2, operate
that switch to test the wire, switch, and its control
unit input. If the circuit is OK, the ignition key light
should blink once and the beeper should beep once.
If the circuit is faulty, there will be no indication.
Does the ignition key light blink and beeper beep?
YES- The circuit is OK. Test the other switches.
NO-Go to step 16.
In each of the following tables, the control unit is
followed by list of circuits that it can check in Mode
2.
A second key is necessary to test the key cylinder
switches. If only one key is available, cut a second
key from a non-immobilizer type key blank for the
test.
(cont'd)
22-139
BACK
Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's
Test all the switches in the following order, otherwise the
test results maybe inaccurate:
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's key cylinder switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)*
Front passenger's key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (UNLOCK/LOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)*
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Right rear door switch (OPEN)
Keyless transmitter (LOCK)
Keyless transmitter (UNLOCK)
Keyless transmitter (TRUNK)
Security input for the radio. Test by disconnecting and
reconnecting the radio connector.
*When testing the passenger's door lock knobs, be sure
all other passenger lock knobs are in the locked position.
Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's
Dash lights brightness controller (ROTATE)
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Trunk latch switch (OPEN)
Trunk key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's seat belt switch (BUCKLED)
Windsheild wiper/washer switch (except MIST switch)
Brake pedal position switch (Brake switch) (PRESSED)
Parking brake switch (ON)
Hood switch (OPEN)
Headlight or combination switch (ON)
Multiplex Control Unit, Door
Test all the switches in the following order, otherwise the
test results maybe inaccurate:
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Driver's key cylinder switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Power window master switch (not the passenger's
switches)
The key cylinder switches should only beep/flash when
turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. If they beep/flash when
returning to the center position, the switch is defective
or misaligned. Adjust or replace the affected key
cylinder switch.
22-140
16. Check 2 or 3 more circuits listed for that control unit.
Does the ignition key light blink and the beeper
beep for each additional circuit?
VES- The additional circuits are OK. Repair the
short or open in the circuit that failed the test in the
proceeding step. Refer to the testIs) for that
individual system .
NO-Multiple failed circuits can mean thatthe
control unit has failed, but without triggering a DTC.
Test a few more circuits. If they also fail, substitute
a known-good control unit, then recheck. If the
sytem works properly, the original control unit is
faulty; replace it. If there is still a malfunction,
substitute a known-good control unit for the next
most likely faulty control unit, then recheck. If the
sytem works properly, that control unit is faulty;
replace it .
BACK
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test

t.=!..I
NOTE: If the multiplex control unit is replaced, never use a multiplex control unit other than the one which is
manufactured by the original multiplex control unit maker. Using other multiplex control units, manufactured by a
non-original maker could cause a malfunction of communication among the multiplex control unit.
Door Unit:
1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the connectors from the door multiplex control unit.
3. Make the following input tests at connector A.
Wire side of
female terminals
(cont'd)
22-141
BACK
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
A1 WHT/yEl Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
relay box
An open in the wire
A2 GRN/WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 15 (20A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fusel
relay box
underhood fuse/relay box
An oJ:!en in the wire
A12 BlK Under all Check for continuity go ground: Poor ground (G401)
conditions There should be continuity. An oJ:!en in the wire
A19 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G551)
conditions There should be An open in the wire
22-142
BACK
Passenger's Unit:
r:-:'I

4. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
5. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are a" making good contact.
6. Make the following input tests at connector B and the fuse/relay box socket.
If a" the input tests prove OK, go to step 7.
Cavity
A24
A8
A22
B22
Wire side of
female terminals
PASSENGER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B
Al AZ A3 A4 AS A6 A7 A8 A9 AID All AIZ
A13 A14 A16 A16 I-- A17 A18 A19 AZO f..- All AZZ AZ3 AZ4
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET
Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Fuse/relay Under a" Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
An open in the wire
Under a" Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G581)
Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
(") There should be battery voltage. driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
BLK Under a" Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G504)
(cont'd)
22-143
BACK
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
Driver's Unit:
9. Make the following input tests at connector B and the fuse/relay box socket.
If all the inputtests prove OK, troubleshootthe Multiplex Control System (see page 22-137).
A14 Under all
conditions
A24 Ignition switch ON
(II)
A13 Ignition key is
inserted into the
tgnition switch
A1 Under all
conditions
A15 Short the multiplex
control inspection
connector terminals.
B11 BLK Under all
conditions
22-144
Wire side of
female terminals
Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box
An open in the wire
Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Check for continuity to ground: Faulty ignition key switch
Poor ground (G401)
Attach to ground: Ignition key Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
light should come on. under-hood fuse/relay box
Blown LED
An open in the wire
Faulty driver's fuse/relay box
BACK
Power Mirrors
/
POWER MIRRORS
Function Test. page 22-148
Test. page 22-150
r--:'I
t.=!..I
Mirror Actuator Replacement. page 22-151
POWER MIRROR SWITCH
Test. page 22-149
22-145
BACK
Power Mirrors
Circuit Diagram - USA without Defogger
UNDER-HOOD FUSEIRELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
<r
No.41 (1OGA) No.42 (SOA) BAT
BATTERY -&-
+ BLK YEL
IG2
UP
LEFT
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
ND.4(7.5A)
0-...00-1-..... ,
YEUBLK
POWER MIRROR SWITCH
RIGHT
,,-------------- \
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
4 7 8 9 10 2
BLUIWHT BLK
BLUlGRN YELlWHT
LEFT MIRROR 2 RIGHT MIRROR 2
LEFT LEFT
e 0
0 0 0 0
UP UP
BLUlWHT BLUJORN
G5S1
22-146
BACK
Circuit Diagram - Canada with Defogger
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
&-
No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOA) BAT No.4 (7.SA)
BATTERY -@-
+ BlK ---+r--v--C::T"'\J>---C::T"'\J>--1I---WHT YEl - - ~ ~
IG2
I
YEUBlK
..---- YEUBLK - ~ P - - - - - - - _____ ...II
3 POWER MIRROR SWITCH
LEFT MIRROR S
il\ DEFOGGER
lY SWITCH
....,.. -Y' 'IC)'
6
ORNlWHT
ORNlWHT
2
4
BLUIWHT
JTRN
- - - - - - - - r - - - ~
~ ~ I ~ ~
UP RIGHT
DEFOGGER
4 6
BLK
.......
G551
LEFT
~
LEFT
J
RIGHT
~
'V
I
I
I
A
I ------------------l "
RIGHT LEFT ( RIGHT
7 8 9 10 2
YELIWHT BLK
OR!HT
RIGHT MIRROR 5 2
UP RIGHT
DEFOGGER
6
....... ......
G581 G551
~
~
22-147
BACK
Power Mirrors
Function Test
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8).
~
~
VEl/BlK ~
(Canada model)
BlU/WHT
BLU/ORN
Wire side of
female terminals
2. Disconnect the 1 OP connector from the power
mirror switch.
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the
symptom:
o Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4.
o Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6.
o Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7.
o Defogger doesn't work (Canada), go to step 8.
Both mirrors
4. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and
body ground with the ignition switch ON (II).
o If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
- an open in the YEL/BLK wire.
o If there is battery voltage, go to step 5.
5. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal
and body ground.
o If there is no continuity, check for:
- an open in the BLK wire.
o Ifthere is continuity, check both mirrors
individually as described in the next column.
22-148
Left mirror
6. Connect the No.1 terminal to the No.7 terminal,
and the No.4 (or No.9) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The left mirror should tilt down
(or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
o If the mirror does nottilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the BLU/WHT (or BLU/
ORN) wire between the left mirror and the 10P
connector. If the wire is OK, check the left mirror
actuator.
o If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
repair the BLU/GRN wire.
o If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Right mirror
7. Connect the No.1 terminal to the No.8 terminal,
and the No.4 (or No. 10) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The right mirror should tilt
down (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
o If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the BLU/WHT (or L T
GRN) wire between the right mirror and the 10P
connector. If the wi re is OK, check the right
mirror actuator.
o If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
repair the YEL/WHTwire.
o If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Defogger (Canada)
8. Connect the No.3 and No.6 terminals with a
jumper wire, and check for voltage between the
No.3 terminal and body ground. There should be
battery voltage and both mirrors should warm up
with the ignition switch ON (II).
o If there is no voltage or neither warms up, check
for:
- an open in the YEL/BLK and ORN/WHT wires.
- blown No.4 (7.5 A) in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
- poor ground (G551, G581).
o If only one fails to warm up, check its defogger.
o If both fail to warm up, check the defogger switch.
BACK
r--:'I
l!!:.I
Power Mirror and Mirror Defogger Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8). 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
Mirror Switch:
1\ Terminal
1 2 4 7 8 9 10
Position \
UP

DOWN
0-
ro
L
""
LEFT

'"'
r.
RIGHT
UP
DOWN
0-
:-0
R
LEFT
RIGHT
Defogger Switch (Canada):
1\ Terminal
3 6
Position
\
ON
0 D
OFF
power mirror switch.
22-149
BACK
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Test
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8).
2. Disconnect the 3P or 6P connector (A) from the
power mirror (B).
USA:
Canada:
22-150
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table.
1\
Terminal
1 2 3
Position
\
141 151 161
TILT UP
ffi 8
TILT DOWN
e
(f)
SWING LEFT (f)
e
SWING RIGHT (f)
II: Canada
Defogger Test ICanada)
terminals of the 6P connector. There should be
continuity.
5. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the
mirror actuator.
BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!..I
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement - Sedan
1. Remove the power mirror from the door (see page
20-35), and disconnect the 6P or 3P connector.
2. Cut the wire harness (A) with wire cutters.
3. Remove the seat base (B).
4. Protect the mirror housing with shop towel (A).
5. Insert the screwdriver (B) along holder ramp (C),
and placing flat blade underneath adapter ear (D) at
end of ramp. Be careful not to damage the mirror
housing.
6. Pry off holder (A) from the housing (B).
B
/
7. Remove the three screws (A) and the actuator (B)
from the housing.
/E
A c o
8. Prying the wire clip (C) with a screwdriver (E).
9. Pull the wire (D) from the housing.
(cont'd)
22-151
BACK
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement - Sedan (cont'd)
10. Install in the reverse of removal. Replace the seat
base and three screws with new one.
11. Insert the terminals into the connector in the
original arrangement as shown below.
USA:
'98-00 models
Left
1 f7l3
VEL/JHT t VtL/BLK
VEL/RED
View from wire side
'01-02 models:
Left
Right
1f7l
3
1
+ t +
VEL/WHT BLU/BLK
BLU/GRN
Right
View from wire side
22-152
Canada:
'98-00 models
Left
BLK/WHT BLU/RED
+ +
BETIffi
+ t +
VEL/WHT VEL/BLK
VEL/RED
Right
BLK/WHT BLU/RED
+ +

+ t +
VEL/WHT BLU/BLK
BLU/GRN
View from wire side
'01-02 models:
Left Right
BLK/WHT BLU/RED BLK/WHT BLU/RED
+ +
+ +
BETIffi BETIffi
GtN r vt GtN r vt
BLU WHT
View from wire side
12. Operate the power mirror to check that the actuator
works smoothly.
BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement - Coupe
1. Remove the power mirror from the door (see page
20-35), and disconnect the connector.
2. Cut the wire harness with wire cutters.
3. Record the terminal locations and wire colors.
4. Remove the mirror holder (A) from the mirror
housing (8). Gently pull it out by hand.
5. Remove the 3 screws (A) and the actuator (8).
6. Route the wire harness (A) of the new actuator
through the hole in the bracket (8).
A
(cont'd)
22-153
BACK
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement - Coupe (cont'd)
7. Insert the terminals into the connector in the
original arrangement as shown below.
USA:
left Right
I
IzI
3
I
I
IzI
3
f \ f \
I
GRN
r
VEL GRN
r
VEL
RED BRN
[GRV] [ORN]
'01-02 models
View from wire side
Canada:
left
BlK BLK
\ I
~
G ~ ! ~ l
RED
[BLU]
Right
BlK BlK
\ I
~
G'N f V ~ l
BRN
[WHT]
'01-02 models
View from wire side
8. Apply tape to seal the intersection of the wire
harness.
9. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
Be careful not to break the mirror when reinstalling
it to the actuator.
10. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
11. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth
operation.
22-154
BACK
Moonroof
MOONROOFCLOSERELAY
rWire colors: GRN/RED, GRN,
LWHT/YEl, BlK, GRN/RED
Test, page 22-52
MOONROOF OPEN RELAY
rWire colors: GRN/YEl, GRN,
LWHT/YEl, BlK, GRY/YEl
Test, page 22-52
MOONROOF SWITCH
Removalrrest, page 22-157
]
KEY -OFF TIMER CIRCUIT
r--:'I

[In the multiplex control unit (passenger's)]
MOONROOF MOTOR
Test, page 22-157
MOONROOF
POSITION SWITCH
22-155
BACK
Moonroof
Circuit Diagram
BAlTERY
<>-
BlK
No.41 (10DA) No.51 (4D_A)
ND.1
(3OA)
GRN
f
GRN
BlK WHTIYEl BLK
MOONROOF
OPEN
RELAY
MOON ROOF
MOTOR
WHTlBlU -
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
(
Ker-olllimer )
cirQlh

POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
I
GRN
BLK
NO.7
(20A)
WHTIYEl
WHTlYEl
MOONROOF
CLOSE
RELAY
BLK
GRNlYEl
GRY/YEl 1 ... ___ .;..1 ___ ...
GRYIYEl
OPEN
6
G501
22-156
CLOSE OPEN
4
CLOSE I
3
GRYIRED
2
BlK
1
G501
, ,
, ,
CLOSE
2
YEURED
MOONROOF SWITCH
COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH (DX, LX)
, TAllLlGHi RELAY (EX)
Y
REDlBlK
3
LIGHT
(D.56Wx2)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
BlK
1
G581
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSElRE:LAY BOX
BACK
Switch Test
NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the "II"
to the "I" or "0" positions, as long as neither of the
doors have been opened. This provides a convenience
to parked occupants while offering a degree of security
against unwanted or accidental moonroof operation.
page 20-84).
2. Carefully pry out the switch from the dashboard,
and disconnect its connector.
1\ Terminal
1 3 2 4 5 6
Position
\
CLOSE
-8- 0- 4J
TILT 0- -0 0 -0
OPEN l)-
0 -0
switch.
Motor Test
r--:'I
I.!::.J
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the moonroof
motor.
terminal
3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground
1\ Terminal
1 2
Position
\
OPEN G)
e
CLOSE
e
G)
4. If the motor does not run, replace it.
NOTE: See closing force check (see page 20-71) for
motor clutch test.
22-157
BACK
WINDOW ANTENNA COIL
Test, page 22-127
22-158
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
[
Rear window defogger switch is ]
built into heater control panel
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Function Test, page 22-160
Defogger Wire Repair, page 22-160
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
()--BLK
UNDER-HOOD FUSE I RELAY BOX
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A)
l

'U
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
WHT-----AT YEL--_
IG2

WHTIGRN BLKlYEL

BLKlGRN BRNIYEL
4
REAR
WINDOW
DEfOGGER
RELAY
No.3
i (7.5A)
I
BLKlYEL

2
r--:'I
l!!:.I
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HEATER CONTROL
REAR WINooW PANEL
( Rear window defogger)
DEFOGGER
and defogger
SWITCH
timer buitt into
INDICATOR
(LED)
A1
B1
BLKlGRN
neater control panel
WINDOW ANTENNA COIL
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
e
82
BLK
9
BLK
G401
22-159
BACK
Function Test
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger
wires with the tester probe.
1. Check for voltage between the positive termi nal (A)
and body ground with the ignition switch and
defogger switch ON.
If there is no voltage, check for:
- faulty defogger relay.
- faulty window antenna coil
- an open in the BLK/GRN wire.
2. Check for voltage between the positive terminal
and the negative terminal (B) and body ground.
If there is no voltage, check for an open in the
defogger ground wire.
3. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to the halfway
point of each defogger wire, and the negative
probe to the negative terminal.
There should be approximately 6 V with the
ignition switch and the defogger switch ON.
If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire is
OK.
If the voltage is not as specified, repair the
defogger wire.
- If it is more than 6 V, there is a break in the
negative half of the wire.
- If it is less than 6 V, there is a break in the
positive half of the wire.
22-160
Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
must be no longer than one inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
c
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
of the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Mix the silver conductive paint thoroughly. Using a
small brush, apply a heavy coat of (A) paint
extending about 1/8" on both sides ofthe break.
Allow 25 minutes to dry.
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
BACK
Power Windows

l!!!!.I
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
POWER WINDOW MASTER
SWITCH
DRIVER'S WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-180
LEFT REAR WINDOW MOTOR
KEY-OFF TIMER CIRCUIT
[
In the multiplex control ]
unit (passenger's)
PASSENGER'S WINDOW SWITCH
Test, step 6 on page 22-175
PASSENGER'S WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-180
RIGHT REAR WINDOW MOTOR
RIGHT REAR WINDOW SWITCH
LEFT REAR WINDOW SWITCH
22-161
BACK
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram - Sedan
'98-99 models
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
BATTERY
A) No.41 (I00A) No.54(40
&-BLK
22-162
No.42(SOA)
IGNITION
SWITCH
No.9
(7.5A)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(passenger'sl
(To page 22- 65)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
) No.51 (4OA
No.13 (7.5A)
YEL
WHTIBLU -
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT

Fromr)
2-1
1

POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
BLK
G581
No.7 No.8 No.16
(20A) (20A) (20A)
LEFT FRONT RIGHT
REAR PASSENGER'S REAR
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(
To page} \ y
22-164
(
To PIlle)
22-165
No.15
(2OA)
MULT
C
( .
LC> (To
WHTNEL -
IPLEX
ONTROLUNIT
Driver's)
5
(P
(To
PIlle 22-164)
PLEX
ROLUNIT
assanger's)
page 22-165)
GRNlWHT-
BACK
I
WHTIYEl
A1
, ,
,
,
UP'
A2
-GRNlWHT
-
I
"
L ______
...
All
REDlBlU
2
DRIVER'S WINDOW
MOTOR
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH
(In the MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DOOR))
DN:DOWN
DRIVER'S RIGHT lEFT RIGHT
SWITCH FRONT REAR REAR
ALITO
, ON
\DN \DN

UP / UP /
UP</
ON
H
CONTROL UNIT
L
I
I

\-
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
(
From page )
22-164,165
r
WHT/RED
B2
MAIN
SWITCH
Al0 A4 A19 A12 Bl A15
REDIYEl RED BlK BLK BlK BRN
3
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT

(1'0 page 22-164)
4
BLK
BLK BlK
1 1
G551 G401
r:-:'I
I.=:J
(cont'd)
22-163
BACK
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram - Sedan (cont'd)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Ooor)
No.13 (7.5A)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(
From page)
22163 (From page 22162)
22-164
A16
GRNIORN
NO.7 (20A)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(From page 22162)
y
WHT
r
EL
DRIVER'S
DOORsWITC
(Closed: Door
H
open)
T
BRN
A2
3
T
WHTIYEL
A12
A19 A7
GRN GRNlBLU
5 6
, ,
i-
DOWN .-
\UP
)
-
~
I
~ L ____
~ ~
r-
~ - - - - ) p
~
I 1
<4 1
REDIBLU REDIYEL
I
' 1
cro--@
I'
I
LEFT REAR WINDOW MOTOR
LEFT
REA R
CH SWIT
2
I
WHTIRED
t
POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
(To page 22163)
Bl
PNK-
A14
BLK
1
G401
BACK
B9
A15
GRN
A12
I
.8
I
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
(
To page)
22-162
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH

A8
BLK
I
G581
No.9 (7.SA)
DRIVER'S
FUSE
(From page 22-162)
I
YEL
A22
No.13 (7.SA)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(From page 22-162)
I
WHTIYEL
A24
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Passenger's) (Key-oH timer circuH)
No.16/20AJ
PASSE:NGER'S
FUSE
A7
(From page 22-162)
?
YEUGRN
WHT

5
I
"
.
DOWN(/

I
__

4
REDIBLU
)
AS
YEL
6
, UP

No.8/2OAJ
PASS "ENGER'S
FUSE
(From page 22-162)
?
RIGHT

REAR
SWITCH
I
,
I
A19
BLU
5
"
DOWN/

. />

___
r

'J
1 2 4
REDlYEL BLUlWHT
\UP
AlB
BLUIYEL

FRONT
PASSENGER'S
6 SWITCH

I

I
1 2
BLUIYEL
22-165
BACK
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram - Sedan (cont'd)
'00-02 models
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
BATIERY
&-BLK
No.41 (100A) No.54 (40A) No.13 (7_SA)
0--+-- YEL ---------I---<T''''''O---+---- WHTIYEL ---
No.42 (5QA) No.51 (40A)
WHT/BLU -
22-166
WHT
IGNITION
SWITCH
YEL
NO.9
(7.5A)

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
(To page 22-166)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT

(
From page )
22-166
)1

POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
I
G581
(. No,7 No_8
(20A) 9 (20A)
No.16
(20A)
LEFT FRONT RIGHT
REAR PASSENGER'S REAR
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(
To page)
22-166
(
To page)
22-167
No,lS
'i (20A)
LL-_______ GRNIWHT __ _
BACK
r--:'I
a.=:J
- WHTlYEl "'1------------------------ WHTlYEl
PASSENGER'S
WHTNEl
Al
A2
-GRNIWHT
,
1:
'- --
..
....-,
..
...
...
I
L ______
c ....
A19 All
RED/BLU
2 1
(In lite MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
DN:DOWN
DRIVER'S RIGHT lEFT RIGHT
SWITCH FRONT REAR REAR
I

"DN "DN
,ON
I

UP'
- ---- - -- --- 1---
--- --
1----1---
.
po---

, POWER WINDOW
IMMERSION

CIRCUIT
I
I
I

-'
AID A4
SWITCH
(
Frompage )
22166,167
'Y
WHTIRED
B2

SWITCH
--- -------
-
A12 Bl AIS
REDil
T
BlK BLK BRN
3

MULTIPLEX
CONTROLUNI
(Driver's)

------- - ....
(To page 22-1
T
66)
4
PULSER
DRIVER'S WINDOW
MOTOR
BLK BLK
1 ....... 1 ... ... ... ....
GSSI GSSI G401 GSSI
(cent'd)
22-167
BACK
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram - Sedan (co nt' d)
(
From ) r:-......
::ous WHTIYEL
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (DOOR)
(
From page)
22-165
r
I ): '01-02 models
NO.9 (7.5)
DRIVER'S
FUSE
(
From page)
22-164
y
BRN WHTIYEL WHTIYEL YEL
A14
BLK
1
G401
22-168
A2 A12
A16
GRNIORN
DRIVER'S
DOOR SWITCH
(Closed: Door open)
NO.7 (20A)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(From page 22-164)
A19
W
I GRN
A7
GRNlBLU
WHr
EL
3(5) 5(3) 6(1)
I

DOWN UP
,00 k), I
, ,
, ,
L_
----
_-1
n

___

'I
4(6)
RED/BLU
PNK
LEFT REAR SWITCH
,t:>
10-
-

r
1(2) 2(4)
REDIYEL

LEFT REAR WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
(To page 22-165)
A24 A2
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Passenger's)
(Key-off timer circuR)
B9 A8
BLK
1
G581
A15 A12
GRN
I
.8
f
!!:.
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY

FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(
Closed: I
Door open
BACK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Passenge(s) (Key-off timer circuit)
A7 AS

PASS NG R'S
FUSE
(From page 22-164)
y
VEUGRN VEL
WHTIBLK
3[5] 5 (3) 6[1)
4 [6)
RIGHT REAR WINDOW MOTOR
RIGHT
REAR SWITCH
1[2) 2[4)
POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
(To page 22-165)

PASSEN ER'S
FUSE
(From page 22-164)
)Y
BLlJIBLK
3 [5]
4[6)
A19
BLU
5[3)
FRONT PASSENGER'S
WINDOW MOTOR
A18
BLUJYEL
6[1)

[ ): '01-02 models
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
1 (2) 2[4)
POWER WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
(To page 22-165)
22-169
BACK
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram - Coupe
'98-99 models
UNDER-HOOO FUSEIRELA Y BOX IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOA) BAT
BATTERY
&-BlK WHT----+- IGI BLKlYEl ---P-AS-S-EN-G-E-R'-S ---
22-170
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
(From page)
\22171
WHTlBlU YEl
No.54 SWITCH
(40A)
)7
.13 . No (15A)
WHTIRED
WHTIYEl WHTIYE
AI (In the MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Door)) B2
DN:DOWN
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
SWITCH SWITCH

ER POW
WIND
RELA
OW
y
I
I
1
Upl
' AUTO
UP /
, ON
C
MAIN
'22
SWITCH ,
ON
BLK
1
G581
NO.8
(20AJ
1 No.15
(20A)
GRNIW
IHT
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
(To page 22167)
A2

p
J
11
L _______
\
All
REDIBLU
3
DRIVER'S WINDOW
MOTOR
H
CONTROL UNIT
r
J

I
\0-
.
Al0 A4 A19 A12 Bl A15
REDIYEl RED BlK BlK BlK BRN
I
4
BlK
BlK
1
G551 G401
l-
BACK
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX

l.:!..I

-
I I
BRN WHTIYEL
MULTIPLEX CONTROl UNIT
(Driver's)
A16
GRNIORN
DRIVER'S
OOORSWITCH
(Closed: Door open)
A14
I
G401
Bl
Pf:NI ER WINDOW RELAY
(To page 22170)
1

A15
GRN
(Fuselrelay box soc:keI)
WHTIYEL
A12
MULTIPLEX CONTROl UNIT
(Passenger's) (Kay-olllimer circuit)
AS
No.8 (20A)
PASSENGER'S FUSE
(From page 22170)
A19
BLK BLU

5

VEL
A22
A18
BLUIYEL
PASSENGER'S
WINDOW
6 SWITCH

4
DOWN / , UP
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed : Door open)
I
GSal

I
L ____
j
'I
4
BLUJWHT
PASSENGER'S
WINDOW MOTOR
T
__ !lf
I
1 2
BLUIYEL
POWER WINDOW
MAlNSWlTCH
(To page 22170)
22-171
BACK
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram - Coupe (cont'd)
'00-02 models
BATTERY @
t:i:\....- No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOl.) BAT
&- BlK IGI *"---- BlKlYEl ---------
PASSENGER'S
22-172
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
a
Passenger'S)
From page )
2-171
BlK
1
GSSI
WHTIBLU
ER POW
WI
RE
NDOW
LAY
YEl
No.54 SWITCH
(401.) m_ffie)
)1
WHT/RED
r
t---
(In the MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Ooor)) B2
ON:DOWN
...- DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
SWITCH SWITCH

.?- AUTO
/, ........ ".1J'
I \ I \

I -,," - -....;-
't. :1up ON

MAIN
SWITCH

--- -- ---_. - --- --- - -----
('01-02 models)
-.
I
1-'
RED
I
j
I
I
No.8
(201<)
No.1S I
(201.)
No.13
(7.51<)
-
....
_I-

I
A20

lL

J
YEUBLK GR
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
(To page 22-171)
N/WHT WHTIYEl
Al
A2
WHTIYEL

, MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
(To page 22,171)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Passenger's)
(To page 22-171)
I
... 1
L _______ .....
*
'I
..
All
REDIBLU
2
DRIVER'S WINDOW
MOTOR
H
I
P
; l-
r
1.10 1.4 1.19 1.12 Bl 1.15
RED/YEl RED BLK BlK BLK BRN
I
3
4
BlK
BlK
1
GSSI G401
BACK
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
[ J: 'OHl2modelS

1..:=..1

No.13 (7.5A)

FUSE
(
From gage)
22-17
7
T'
WI"IT/YEl
A12
(Driver's)
A2 A16 A14
BRN GRNlORN

DRIVER'S
OOORSWITCH

BlK
........ 1
G401
Bl B9
>--
I
B
I
POW ERWINDOW
LAY RE
(To page 22-170)
A15 AS
GRN BlK
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(
Closed: )
Door open
I
G581
WHTIVEl
A24
(Passenger's) (Key-a" limer
No.8 (20A)
PASSENGER'S FUSE
(From page 22-170)
7
BljlK
3[5J
A18
BLUIVEl
6 [lJ
.....-
'r<\j
\
\
'--
YEl
A19
BLU
PASSENGER'S
WINDOW
5[3J SWITCH
11r

I \
\
\
----
_l

I

" L_
f

___
1 [2J 4[6J 2[4J
BLUIVEl BLUIWHT
L.......---I--' I I l
PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW
WINDOW MOTOR MAIN SWITCH
(To page 22,,170)
22-173
BACK
Power Windows
1. Before testing the power window control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-137).
Driver's Multiplex Control Unit:
connector.
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
o If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
o If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET DRIVER'S UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR A
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box socket.
o If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
o An open in the wire
A14 Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. o An open in the wire
5. Reconnect the driver'S multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following
input tests at Connector A on the back of the driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box.
For driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-46).
o If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause then recheck the system.
A2 GRN Jump A2 to Check the left rear window o An open in the wire
battery motor operation: o Faulty window switch
voltage The window should go down. o Blown No.7 (20A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
open There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire (no voltage drop)
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o Short to ground (voltage remains less
closed There should be 5 V or more. than W)
A5 GRN/BLU JumpA5to Check the left rear window o An open in the wire
battery motor operation: o Faulty window switch
voltage The window should go up. o Blown No.7 (20A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
A10 GRN/YEL Left rear door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty left rear door switch
ORen There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire (no voltage drop)
Left rear door Check for voltage to ground: o Short to ground (voltage remains
closed There should be 5 V or more. less than W)
22-174
BACK

I...!!!..I
its connector.
FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET
Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 All
A13 A14 A15 A16
I--
A17 A18 A19 A20
t--
A21 A22 A23
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A
...
n
--"'l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 111
12
1
13 14
1
15 16
1
17 18
1
19
20
...
//
'"
..
YEL YEL/GRN GRN
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F
BLU/YEL
I ....
4151F=11617

1 2 3 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 I 16 I 17 I 18 19 20 21 22
/
BLU
Wire side of female terminels
A12
A24
(cont'd)
22-175
BACK
Power Windows
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the passenger's under-
dash fuse/relay box socket .
A24 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
Faulty passenger's fuse/relay
box
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for continuity to Faulty power window relay
box socket conditions ground: Poor ground (G581)
There should be continuity An open in the wire
A8 Fuse/relay Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G581)
box socket conditions ground: Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
There should be continuity. relay box
9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the
following input tests at the appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
For passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-45) .
If all the inputtests prove OK, go to step 10.
A16 GRN Front passenger's Check for voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door
door open There should be 1 V or less. switch
Front passenger's Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
door closed There should be 5 V or more. (voltage stays high)
Short to ground
(voltage stays low)
F18 BLU Jump F18 to Check the front passenger's Faulty front passenger switch
battery voltage window motor operation: An open in the wire
The window should go down. Faulty window motor
F9 BLU/YEL Jump F9 to battery Check the front passenger's Faulty front passenger switch
voltage window motor operation: An open in the wire
The window should go up. Faul!y window motor
A12 VEL/GRN JumpA12to Check the right rear window Faulty right rear switch
battery voltage motor operation: An open in the wire
The window should go down. Faulty window motor
A11 VEL Jump A11 to Check the right rear window Faulty right rear switch
battery voltage motor operation: An open in the wire
The window shouldJJ_o UQ. Faulty window motor
22-176
BACK
10. Remove the door multiplex control unit from the driver's door, and disconnect its connectors.
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR CONNECTOR A
WHT/VEL
GRN/WHT
tr .s--2
,
RED
+
RED/VEL

A1 A2 A4 A6 A7 A8 A10

/ /
A11 A12

A15 A16
/
A17 A18 A19 f::.2fJ
Wire side of
female terminals
t
BLK
\
WHT/RED
('01 Coupel
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR CONNECTOR B
BLK

t
WHT/RED
Wire side of
female terminals
(cont'd)
22-177
BACK
Power Windows
12. With the door multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
If all the input test prove OK, go to step 13.
A1 WHT/yEl Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
relay box
An open in the wire
A2 GRN/WHT Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 15 (20A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
An open in the wire
A12 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401,G551)
A19 conditions There should be continuity. An open in the wire
B1
A11 RED/BlU Connect the A 10 Check the driver's window Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
A10 RED/YEl terminal to the A motor operation: passenger's under-dash fuse/
12 terminal, and The window should go up. relay box
the A 11 terminal NOTE: If the window is up, jump Faulty driver's window motor
to the A1 A11 to A12, and A10 to A1; the An open in the wire
terminal. window should go down.
A20 WHT/RED Operating any Check for voltage to ground: Faulty passenger's switch
passenger's There should be battery voltage. An open in the wire
switch with
ignition switch
ON (II)
13. Reconnect the door multiplex control unit and perform the following input test.
A4 RED While operating Check for the voltage on the A4 Faulty pulser
the driver's and A12 terminals: Faulty driver's window motor
window switch Approx. 6 V should be indicated An open in the wire
with the ignition as the driver's window motor A short to ground in the wire
switch ON (II) runs.
B2 WHT/RED Operating any Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G401, G551)
passenger's There should be battery voltage. Faulty passenger's switch
switch with An open in the wire
master main
switch OFF, and
the ignition
switch ON (II)
one that is most likely at fault, then check the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
22-178
BACK
Master Switch Replacement
1. Remove the screw and master switch assembly
from the door panel.
2. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove
the master switch from the panel.

Passenger's Switch Replacement
1. Remove the screw and passenger's switch
assembly from the door panel.
2. Remove the three mounting screws, then remove
the passenger's switch from the panel.
22-179
BACK
Power Windows
Driver's Window Motor Test
Motor Test:
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the window
motor.
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting
battery power and ground according to the table.
When the motor stops running, disconnect one
lead immediately.
1\ Terminal
1 2
Direction
\
UP
G?> e
DOWN
e G?>
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
Pulser Test:
5. Connect the test leads of an analog ohmmeter to
the No.3 and No.4 terminals.
6. Run the motor by connecting power and ground to
the No.1 and No.2 terminals. The ohmmeter
needle should move back and forth alternately.
22-180
Passenger's Window Motor Test
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-
8).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the window
motor.
3. Check window motor operation by connecting
power and ground according to the table. When the
motor stops running, disconnect one lead
immediately.
\ Terminal
1 2
Direction
\
UP
<> e
DOWN
e <>
replace it.
BACK
Wiper/Washer
r:-:'I
I.!!!!.I
WINDSHIELD WASHER TUBE
WASHER RESERVOIR
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARMS and LINKAGE
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
Test, page 22-187
INTERMITTENT WIPER CIRCUIT
(In the multiplex control unit (driver's))
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Test, page 22-188
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELA V
Test, page 22-52
WASHER MOTOR
Test, page 22-189
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH (Canada)
Test, page 22-190
22-181
BACK
Wiper/Washer
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSEIRELAY BOX
No.9 (7.5A)
@-
BLK
No.41 (I00A) No.42 (50A) BAT BATTERY
.-of---WHT BLKlYEL --+-",--",-C-'-'>-+---
22-182
IGI
::1::-' *2
GRNlBLK
*1
----"J
-----,--__ --.J I
-----------------------,
I
YELlGRN
______________ __.J
A7 WINDSHIELD WIPERIWASHER SWITCH

D WASHER
T\------ , HI
SWITCH
OFF 00 00
'y MIST MIST
INT
Al A2
BLKlYEL
Gr
GR NlBLK
WINDSHIELD
WIPER MOTOR
4
HI
,
LO
I
t)
-a
'----""'-
5 3
BLKlYEL
M WASHER
MOTOR
2
BLK
1
G301
* 1 : All '98-99 models, Sedan
.2: '00-02 Coupe
BLK
L
0002
OFFnNT
A5 AS A4 A3
WHT
GRlBLK
1
BLUIYEL
2
BLU

r
BLUlWHT
BLK BLK
L 1 1
0401 G302
No.7
(7.5A)
- BLUlWHT
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
INTERMITTENT
RELAY
GRNlRED
BLKlYEL
BACK
I
YEL
A24 A22
Bl
o-________
AS
-GRN----<"l
A23
- BLUIWHT -_-<"l
INTERMITTENT
WIPER CIRCUIT
(
'n Ihe MULTIPLEX )
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
B14
AS
"':& :t:1-
VEHICLE \l
SPEED I
POSITION
SWITCH
(BRAKE SWITCH)
PEDAL
0----- WHTIBLK
Bll
B16
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
B22

0----- BLKlBLU -------------
All
- GRN/RED -_-0
A21
B15
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
ABS CONTROL UNIT
USA : GRN/RED \l
Canada: GRNlWHT I
L GRN/RED
1
1
I
: GRNlREDpARKING I: GRNIRED
_ BLKlYEL _____ -J
BRAKE BRAKE FLUID
SWITCH LEVEL SWITCH
GRNIWHT : ) , J: J
1
PARKING 1 I' 1
BRAKE
up J: ' lBLK
L __ i 7
(Canada) - - ---(USA) G302
I
G1DI
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(
AITGEAR )
POSITION SWITCH
(ON : In posillon If))
I I
G503 G504

I..!::..I
22-183
BACK
Wiper/Washer
1. Before testing the wiper/washer control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-137).
connector.
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact .
BLK
\
GRN/RED (USA)
GRN/WHT (Canada)
BLU/WHT
4. With the driver's unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and fuse/relay box socket .
A9 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.7 (7.5A) [No. 12
box socket ON (II) and There should be battery voltage. (30A)] fuse in the driver's under-
wiper switch dash fuse/relay box
atlNT Faulty wiper switch
An open in the wire
AS Brake pedal Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
pushed There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
..
An open in the wire
A11 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 12 (30A) fuse in the
Faulty intermittent wiper relay
An open in the wire
A21 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.7 (7.5A) [No. 12
ON (II) and There should be battery voltage. (30A)] fuse in the driver's under-
washer switch dash fuse/relay box
ON Faulty washer switch
An open in the wire
A23 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 12 (30A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
A3 Shift lever in Check for voltage to ground: Faulty AfT gear position switch
[f] There should be less than 1 V. Poor ground (G101)
An open in the wire
A24 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
[] : '00-02 Coupe
22-184
BACK
Cavity Wire
B11 BLK
B15 GRN/RED
(USA)
GRN/WHT
(Canada)
Test condition Test: Desired result
Under all Check for continuity to ground:
conditions There should be continuity.
Parking brake Check for continuity to ground:
lever up There should be continuity.
r:-:'I
I.!!:..I
Poor ground (G503)
An open in the wire
Faulty parking brake switch
An open in the wire
5. Reconnect the connector to the driver's unit, and make this input test at the connector .
If the test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If the test proves OK, go to step 6.
B14 BLU/WHT Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty vehicle speed sensor (M{T)
ON (II) and There should be 0 to approx. or PCM (AfT)
rotate one 5 Vor more. An open in the wire
front wheel (voltage stays high)
slowly with Short to ground
other wheel (voltage stays low)
blocked
(cont'd)
22-185
BACK
Wiper/Washer
6. Remove the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-50).
its connector.

AI A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AID All Al2
Al3 Al4 A15 Al6 f-- A17 Al8 Al9 A20 - A21 A22 A23 A24
GRNffll 1 .1
GRN/VEL
9. With the passenger's unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and fuse/relay box socket .
B22 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G504)
conditions There should be continuity An open in the wire
A22 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
B16 GRN/YEL Intermittent Check for resistance between Faulty intermittent dwell time
B15 GRN/WHT dwell time the terminals: It should vary controller
control ring from 0 to 30 kQ as the ring is An open in the wire
turned turned.
22-186
BACK
Wiper /Washer Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-84) and steering column covers (see page 17-25).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
3. Remove the two screws (e), then pull out the switch (B).
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
r--:'I
~
If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables.
- If there is no continuity, replace the switch.
c
8
1\
Terminal
\
A1 A2
Position
OFF
INT
LO
HI
Mist switch ON
Washer switch ON
0
Intermittent dwell time
controller turned
A
A3 A4 A5
0
()
0
()
0
0
0
A7 AS 81
-0
-0
-0
()
Wire side of
female terminals
"
~ k Q
82
22-187
BACK
Wiper/Washer
Wiper Motor Test
1. Open the hood, and remove the cap nuts and the
wiper arms.
NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms, so that
they do not touch the hood.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-
188).
3. Disconnect the connector from the wiper motor.
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power and
ground according to the table.
If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
1\
Terminal
\
1 2 4
Position
LOW SPEED
e
(B
HIGH SPEED
e
(B
5. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.5 (+ )
and No.3 (-) terminals, and run the motor at low
or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V
and 4 V or less alternately.
22-188
Wiper Motor Replacement
1. Remove the nuts (A) and remove the windshield
wiper arms (8).
Remove and replace the clips.
2. Remove the hood seal and cowl cover.
3. Remove the bolt (A) and windshield wiper linkage
assembly (8).
~ : 8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
_ /B
D C
4. Disconnect the connector (C) from the wiper motor
(D).
BACK
5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield
wiper linkage to show the original adjustment.
Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the
wiper motor (C).
18 Nm (1.8 kgfm,
13lbfttl
B
C
8Nm
~ ' ' __ - : : ~ (0.8 kgfm,
6lbfttl
A
6. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,
o Grease the moving parts.
o Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper
switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to
the park position.
o If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
o Check the wiper motor operation.
Washer Motor Test
~
~
1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-167).
2. Disconnect the connector from the washer motor.
3. Test the washer motor by connecting battery
power and ground according to the table.
o If the motor fails to run smoothly, replace it.
o If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no
washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
or blocked washer hose, or a clogged pump
outlet in the motor.
1\
Terminal
\
1 2
Battery
Connected (f)
e
22-189
BACK
Wiper /Washer
Washer Reservoir Replacement
1. Pull away the left inner fender (see page 20-167).
2. Disconnect the washer tube(s) (A) and washer
motor connector (8).
C
\---
rTI
.__ I L=::2
---B
C
C
3. Remove the three bolts (C) and washer reservoir
(D).
4. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal.
Check the washer motor operation.
22-190
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
(Canada)
1. Remove the left innerfender (see page 20-167).
2. Disconnect the switch 2P connector (A).
A
float (8) position according to the table.
1\
Terminal
\
1 2
Position
FLOAT UP
FLOAT DOWN 0 0
BACK
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-167).
2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube.
r--:'I

3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield washer
operation.
22-191
BACK
Power Seat
a-way Adjustable:
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR
SLIDE MOTOR
RECLINE MOTOR
~ ~ ~ = = ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Test/Replacement. page 22-195
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR
2-way Adjustable:
HEIGHT MOTOR
22-192
BACK
Circuit Diagram - 8-way Adjustable
BATIERY

L=:I
No.4l (l00A) No.55 (40A)

UP ,f )
BS A3 A4
BlK REDIYEl RED
G551
FRONT UP-DOWN
MOTOR
2
BACK- \)
WARD
Al

YEUGRN
No.4
(lOA)
BlU
B6
FOR- \)
WARD
A5
BLUIYEl
SLIDE
MOTOR
2
YEUGRN
No.2
(lOA)
RED
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
B2 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
) UP ,)
AS A2
GRN GRNIYEl
2
REAR UP-DOWN
MOTOR
BACK-
WARD
,)
54
VEL
FOR-
,)
WARD
53 B1
YEUGRN BlK
RECLINE
MOTOR
2
G551
22-193
BACK
Power Seat
BATIERY
No.41 (100A) No.55 (40A)

22-194
YEUGRN
RED
1
No.2
(20A)

4
GRNlYEl
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
0-
DOWN \ I
2 5 3
GRNlRED BlK BlK
BlK
G551
BACK
Switch Test - 8-way Adjustable
1. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the
driver's seat by removing the three screws (8), and
pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C).
D
E
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) from the
adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch from
the cover by removing its two mounting screws.
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.
r--:'I
t=:..I
1\
Terminal
\
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
Position
FOR
(\
IV
h
SLIDE
WARD
SWITCH
BACK \.J
WARD
In If\
FOR
1(\
IV V
h
RECLINE
WARD
SWITCH
BACK

n
1'-'
WARD
In
FRONT
UP
IV
(\ (\
UP-
DOWN
DOWN
\.J
SWITCH
1(\ h
REAR
UP-
UP :'-' (\ (\
1'--'
DOWN
DOWN '-' j::; I'-'
SWITCH
(\
Al
F=I
A2
A3
A41A5 A6
Bl
F=I
B2
B3 B41 B5 B6
switch.
B6
\.J
\.J
\.J
\.J
22-195
BACK
Power Seat
Switch Test - 2-way Adjustable
driver's seat by removing the two screws (B) and
the recline knob (e).
D
B
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (D) from the
adjustment switch, then remove the switch from
the cover by removing its two mounting screws.
22-196
\
Terminal
\
,
2 3 4 5
Position
,...
UP ,...

,...

DOWN
111 12 TIT 41511
/
switch.
BACK
Motor Test - 8-way Adjustable
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-98).
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors from the adjustment
switch.
FRONT
UP-DOWN
MOTOR
REAR
UP-DOWN
MOTOR
SLIDE
MOTOR
RECLINE
MOTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
r--:'I
I.!!!:.I
3. Test the motor. When the motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
Recline motor:
1\
Terminal
\
B3 B4
Position
Forward (E)
e
Backward
e
(E)
Slide motor:
1\
Terminal
\
A1 AS
Position
Forward
e GJ
Backward
GJ e
Front up-down motor:
\
Terminal
\
A3 A4
Position
UP
GJ e
DOWN
e GJ
Rear up-down motor:
\
Terminal
\
A2 A6
Position
UP
GJ e
DOWN
e GJ
check for an open in the power seat wire harness
between the 6P connector and the 2P connectors. If
the harness is OK, replace the motor (see page 20-
122).
22-197
BACK
Power Seat
Motor Test - 2-way Adjustable
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-99).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the adjustment
switch. When the motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
3. Testthe motor:
1\
Terminal
\
2 4
Position
UP
e
()
DOWN ()
e
between the 5P connector and 2P connectors. If the
harness is OK, replace the motor (see page 22-115).
22-198
BACK
,-
~ ~ .
I ~ (3)
I .. LJ
'-.-====--
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
TesVReplacement, page 22-201
SEAT HEATER RELAY
Test, page 22-52
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-201
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test, page 22-201
~
t=:.I
DRIVER'S SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test,page 22-201
DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-201
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
TesVReplacement, page 22-201
22-199
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHOOD BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100,1.) No.42 (SOA)
BATTERY
C)-BlK
I
No.59 (20,1.)
WHT

.... --YEl ----..,
TH : THERMOSTAT
BR:BREAKER
HI :High
lO: low
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(DX, LX)
tAilLIGHT
RELAY (EX)
Y
RED/BLK
LIGHT
(O.S6W)
LO
RED WHT/BlU
7
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
CUSHION
DRIVER'S SEAT
HEATER
22-200
I
IBR
I
I
ITH
I

[
ON : Below 93 F (34 C) )
OFF: Above 109F (43C)

RED/GRN
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRfLAY
BOX
BLKlYEl
[
ON : Below 86F (30C) )
OFF: Above 122F (50'C)
SEAT HEATER RELAY
HI
BlK
1
G551
WHT/BLK
r---- WHT/BlK ----------.. 1
WHT/BlK
6
/
,
DRIVER'S SEAT
HEATER SWITCH
/
,
lod HI
INDICATORS
(O.56WlC2)
3
BlK
WHT/RED
-, -,
,
,
,
,
----
BACK
BlK
1
G501
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT HEATER SWITCH
/ ,
lO HI
3
GRNlBlU 8lK
CUSHION
FRONT PASSENGER'S 1
SEAT HEATER
BlK
1
G581
6
/
,
/
lod
INDICATORS
(O.56Wx2)
GRN/RED
--::;1
,
-, -,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
----
, BACK
,
,
'--__ =-.1
(Wrthoul side airbag)
,
COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH (DX, LX)
TAILLIGHT RELAY (EX)
Y
REDIBLK
HI
LIGHT
(O.56W)
4
RED
7
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
BLK
1
G202
BACK
Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the switch (B),
and remove the switch from the console tray.
Terminal
Position
ON
HIGH
LOW
OFF
switch.
Seat Heater Test
r--:'I
l!!!!!..I
1. Carefully remove the driver's and passenger's seat
(see page 20-99).
2. Check for continuity in the driver's seat heater
between the No.1 and No.2 terminals, and No.1
and No.3 terminals.
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. Check for continuity in the passenger's seat heater
between the No.3 the No.2 terminals, and No.3
and No.1 terminals. There should be continuity.
heater.
22-201
BACK
Immobilizer System
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT
Bulb Location, page 22-59
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER UNIT
/ TRANSPONDER
_r -1-0 f""'" 'nto ,h. i9""'0" kovf
IGNITION KEY
(Master and valet keys)
22-202
c
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
-BLK
No.41 (100A) No.S4(40A)
<r"
~ NO.46
(1 SA)
No.1 (ISA) No.13 (7.SA)
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S
FUSE FUSE
Y Y
WHTIGRN REDlWHT BLUIORN
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
No,13 (7.SA)
YEL -----+-Cr'\...D--t------,
WHTIBLU
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
'00--+--.... '"""+-+- YEUBLK - .... -- YEUBLK
IMMOBIUZER
INDICATOR
LIGHT
~ ~
PGMFI
MAIN
L....ji-----+---..... -J RELAY
BLK
Gl01
BlKIYEL
FUEL
P PUMP
(FP)
BLK
1
GS52
GRNNEL
IMOFlR
2
IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER
UNIT
3
YEUBLK YEUBLK RED BLU BRN/BlK
IGPI IMOCD IMOEN
ECMOI PCM
T
Gl01
(1.4W)
KEY
--cUJ
PNK
IMOLMP
LGI
22-203
BACK
Immobilizer System
System Description
The vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless the proper ignition key is used.
This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer receiver unit, an indicator light, and
the ECM/PCM.
The vehicle has two kinds of keys .
The black master key for:
- ignition switch.
- door locks.
- trunk lock.
- glove box.
- trunk handle.
- rear seat and pass through .
The gray valet key for:
- ignition switch.
- door locks.
When the key is inserted in the ignition and turned to the (II) position, the immobilizer unit sends power to the
transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the immobilizer unit to the
ECM/PCM.
_0\" RECEIVE" UNIT
\
IGNITION KEY KEY CYLINDER
(Has built-in transponder)
The immobilizer system can store up to six key codes.
ECM/PCM
FUEL SUPPLY
SYSTEM
If it is necessary to rewrite the ECM/PCM to learn a new key, the dealer needs the customer's vehicle, all its master
keys and valet keys, and the Honda PGM Tester equipped with an immobilizer program card. Any key that is not
learned during rewriting will no longer start the engine.
If the customer has lost his key, and cannot start the engine, contact Honda Customer Relations.
22-204
BACK
r--:'I
l=!..I
If the proper key has been used, the ECM/PCM will energize the fuel supply system. The immobilizer indicator light
in the gauge assembly will simultaneously come on for about 2 seconds, then go off, indicating that the immobilizer
unit has recognized the code sent by the transponder.
If the wrong key has been used and the code was not received or recognized by the ECM/PCM, the indicator light will
come on for about 2 seconds, then it will continue blinking until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF, the indicator will blink for about 5 seconds to signal that the ECM/PCM has been
set correctly, then the indicator will go off.
Problems and Replacement Parts:
Problem Part set PGM-Tester
required 7
CD Master or valet key has been lost or additional Blank key YES
master or valet key is reauired.
All master and valet keys have been lost. Blank key (2), valet key YES
@ Immobilizer receiver unit does not work. Immobilizer receiver unit NO
G) ECM/PCM does not work. ECM/PCM YES
Ignition switch does not work. Ignition switch with immobilizer receiver unit YES
Master key
22-205
BACK
Immobilizer System
Troubleshooting
Follow this procedure if the vehicle does not start after
rewriting the ECM/PCM with the PGM-Tester.
Note these items before troubleshooting:
o Due to the action of the immobilizer system, the
engine takes slightly more time to start than engines
of vehicle without an immobilizer system.
o When the system is normal, and the proper key is
inserted, the indicator light comes on for 2 seconds,
then it will go off.
o Ifthe indicator starts to blink after 2 seconds, or ifthe
engine does not start, repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine still does not start troubleshoot the
system.
o If all the transponder and immobilizer unit tests are
OK, check the ECM/PCM (see page 11-3).
If the ECM/PCM is faulty, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM, and recheck (see page 11-5).
1. Using a scan tool, check for a Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) (see page 11-3).
YES-Replace the ECM/PCM (see page 11-5) .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the proper key.
3. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator light
comes on.
Does the indicator light blink?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO- Check for these problems:
o An open in the PNK wire between the gauge
assembly and ECM/PCM.
o A faulty immobilizer indicator light..
22-206
4. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the
immobilizer receiver unit (B).
5. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and
body ground.
YES- Go to step 6.
NO - Check for these problems:
o A blown fuse No.1 (15A) in the driver's under-
o A blown No. 46 (15A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
o An open in the YEL/BLK wire between the PGM-FI
main relay and the immobilizer receiver unit .
and body ground.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in the BLK wire between the
immobilizer receiver unit and G101 .
BACK
and the ECM/PCM.
VES- Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in the RED wire between the
immobilizer receiver unit and ECM/PCM.
and ECM/PCM.
VES- Replace the immobilizer receiver unit (see
page 22-207) .
NO- Repair open in the BLU wire between the
immobilizer receiver unit and ECM/PCM .
r:-:'I
I.!!:..I
Replacement
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and
steering column covers (see page 17-25).
2. Disconnect the 5P and 7P connectors (A) from the
immobilizer receiver unit (B).
B
D
3. Remove the 2 screws (C) and the immobilizer
receiver unit from the ignition key cylinder (D).
A
5. After replacement, check the immobilizer system.
22-207
BACK
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System

I
------ro/O
DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-227
TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-230
Programming, page 22-230
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-227
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-120
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/
KNOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-225
Knob Switch Test, page 22-226
22-208
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/
KNOB SWITCH

PANIC BUTTON
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-227
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR!
KNOB SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR!
KNOB SWITCH
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-228
TRUNK LID OPENER MOTOR!
LATCH SWITCH
Test, page 22-228
KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
(In the multiplex control unit, passenger's)
Input Test, step 6 on page 22-220
BACK
HEADLIGHT RELAY 1
Test, page 22-52
HEADLIGHT RELAY 2
Test, page 22-52
HOOD SWITCH
Test, page 22-229
HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY (Canada)
Test, page 22-52
TAILLIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-52

I.!!!!!..I
SECURITY INDICATOR
Test, page 22-229
HEADLIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
TAILLIGHTS
22-209
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY ---@-
<r-
No.41 (100A) No.42 (50A) BAT
+ BLK - ..... - .... ----<1'"U_ .... --<1'"U_--+--WHT BLKlYE
IGI
L
NO.54 (40A)
\ (
To page)
22-213

I
No.l0
1
10A) : Sedan
15A) : Coupe
No.43
(20A)
RED/GRN
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 1
RED/GRN

DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
CONTROL
UNIT
(Canada)

No.45
(20A)
REDIYEL
REDIYEL

HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2
BLU/RED
HIGH BEAM
CUT RELAY
(Canada)
Y
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
REDtGRN
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
I
NO.9 (7.5A)
I
I
)(
.8
,..
nI

!:.
1 BLUIWHT
B16 AID
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Drivefs)
A22 A6
BLU/RED REDIBLK REDIYEL

BLK
G201
22-210
RIGHT
HEADLIGHT
(LOW BEAM)
BLK
G301
LEFT
HEADLIGHT
(LOW BEAM)

MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
(To page 22-212)
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHT CONTROL
UNIT (Canada)
REDIYEL

COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
EXTERIOR
LIGHTS
REDIBLK
I
I
A24
BACK
YEL
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.6 (20A)
NO.13 (7.SA)
NO.ll
(7.SA)
WHTIBLU

G>
WHT---B>

WHTIYEL
SECURITY
INDICATOR
(lED)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passengefs)
(To page 22-212, 214)
MULTIPLEX
7 UNIT (Door)
r--:'I
I..!=..I
e UNIT (Passengefs)

CEILING (To page 22-214) (To page 22-212)
LIGHT
)
22-21
WHTIYEL REDlBlU BRN PNK
A12 AS A2 Bl
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
UNLOCK
A16 A17 B6 A13 B9 Be B7 Bll
GRNJORN GRYIYEL YEl BlUIWHT GRY BLUIGRN GRNlORN
lEFT
\ ,0
2 2
DRIVER'S
REAR HOOD
IGNITION LEFT REAR TRUNK TRUNK
DOOR
DOOR SWITCH
KEY DOOR LOCK LATCH KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH
SWITCH
(Closed: )
SWITCH KNOB SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(Closed: )
(Closed' )
Hood open
(Closed: ) (Closed: )
6
(ClOsed: ) (Closed: )
Door open
Door open
Kaylnsarted
2
Unlocked UdOpen Unlocked
(Sedan)
(Sedan)
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BlK
Y
BLK
1
G201 G401 G551 G601 G503
(cont'd)
22-211
BACK
22-212
MUTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Drive(s)
(
From page)
22-211
No.13 (7.5A) NO.6 (20A) No.9 (7.5A)
PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S
FUSE FUSE FUSE
(
From page) (FrOm page) (FrOm page)
22-211 22-211 22-211
HEADLIGHT
RELAY
(
From page)
22-210
T T T T T
PNK WHTIYEL WHT YEL BLU/RED
B9 A24 A23 A22 A20
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
A15 A14 821
GRN GRNIWHT BlU
4
PASSENGER'S RIGHT REAR AUDIO
DOORSWlTCH DOOR SWITCH UNIT
(Closed' ) (Closed: )
Oooropen Oooropen
14
(Sedan)
BLK
GSOI
B22
BlK
G504
No.ll (7.5A)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(From page 22-211)
I
WHTIBLU
, ,
CEILING
LIGHT
_-+0' ''0
BLKIWHT
... .:
-
A21
Bl
WHT/RED
3
TRUNK
M
LID
OPENER
MOTOR
4
BLK
G601
BACK
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
KNOB SWITCH
Al0
WHT/RED ~ LT GRNlRED
RIGHT REAR
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
(Sedan)
WHTIRED ~ LT GRNlRED
All Bll
No.47 (20A)
FUSE
(
From page)
22-210
HORN
SWITCH
LTGRNlBLU
AS
HORN
RELAY
BLUIRED BLUIRED
LOW
HORN
HIGH
HORN
r--:'I
~
(TRANSMITTER)
I
I
LOCK<) UNLOCK<)
LOCK
UNLOCK
TRUNK
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
UNLOCK UNLOCK LOCK
A3
DOOR LOCK KONB
GRNlBLK
Q
KEY
[ : : > - - ~
o
....... +--'
2
BLK
I
I
I
I
_____ L __
A17 AS
ORN
BLKlBLU
3
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
- .... .-
DOOR
KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH
2
BLK
UNLOCK LOCK
A4 A16
BLUIORN
BLKIORN
3
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
,
.-
DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
2
BLK
I
G581
KEYLESS
RECEIVER
UNIT
UNLOCK PANIC
A13 AS
REDIBLU BLK
0 RIGHT REAR
I DOOR LOCK
KNOB SWITCH
(Sedan)
2
BLK
(cont'd)
22-213
BACK
A17 A7
DOOR LOCK KNOB
BlK/RED Q
I
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Drivers)
(
From page)
22211
r
BRN
A15
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Door)
UNLOCK lOCK
A16 A6
BlU
No.13 (7.5A)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(
FIOm page)
22211
r
WHTIYEl
Al
UNLOCK lOCK
AlB AS
GRNlRED
PNK
I KEY
BlUIWHT BlKIWHT
3
DRIVER'S UNLOCK lOCK
~ ~ \ ~ - - - -
KNOB
SWITCH
22-214
2
BlK
I
f---cOJ
I
I
I
I
I
I
----------
1
- ~
/
2
BlK
I
BlK
1
G40l
3 3 1
DRIVER'S DOOR
'\
DRIVER'S
KEY CYLINDER
/
DOOR
SWITCH
lOCK
SWITCH
2
BLK
I
A12
BlK
BlK
I
BACK
System Description
Security Alarm System
The security alarm system is armed automatically after
the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed and locked.
For the system to arm, the ignition switch must be off,
the key must be removed, and the security control unit
must receive signals that the doors, hood, and trunk lid
are closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at
any time by unlocking either door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
When everything is closed and locked, the only control
unit inputs that are grounded, and have 0 volts, are the
driver's door lock knob switch, and the audio unit. In
other words, all of the other switches are open,
including the key cylinder switches, and they have
about 10 volts. Ten seconds after the doors are locked
with the key or the lock knob (with the door open), or
immediately after the doors are locked with the LOCK
button on the remote transmitter, the security system
arms, and the security indicator on the door panel
flashes. If the security indicator does not flash, the
system is not arming. Check the doors, hood, and trunk
to see if they are closed. A beep to confirm the security
alarm system is armed will sound if the LOCK button is
pressed a second time within 5 seconds.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or there is a short
in the system, the system will not arm. As long as the
control unit continues to receive a ground signal, it
senses that the vehicle is not closed and locked, and
the system will not arm. Conversely, a switch that is
slightly misadjusted can sound an alarm for no
apparent reason. In this case, a significant change in
outside temperature, the vibration of a passing truck, or
someone bumping into the vehicle could cause the
alarm to sound.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the
system is armed, the control unit receives a ground
signal from that switch, and the 10 volts reference
drops to 0 volts. If the radio is disconnected, the input
loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 10 volts.
The system sounds the alarm when any of these things
occur:
A door is forced open
A door is unlocked without using the key or the
remote transmitter
The hood is opened
The trunk is opened without using the transmitter
The audio unit is disconnected
The panic mode is activated
When the system sounds the alarm, the security horn
sounds and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The
alarm can be stopped at any time by unlocking either
door with the key or by pushing any button on the
remote transmitter.
Panic Mode
r--:'I
I.!!!!!..I
The panic mode allows the security system to sound
the alarm with the remote transmitter in order to attract
attention. When the PANIC button is pressed and held
for 2 seconds, the alarm will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
The panic mode can be canceled at anytime by
pressing any button on the remote transmitter or by
turning the ignition switch ON (II). The panic mode will
not function if the ignition switch is ON (II).
(cont'd)
22-215
BACK
Keyless Entry System
The security alarm system is integrated with the keyless
entry system. The keyless entry system allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle with the remote transmitter.
When you push the LOCK button, all doors lock. When
you push the UNLOCK button once, only the driver's
door unlocks. The remaining doors unlock when you
push the button a second time.
The ceiling light, if its switch is in the center position,
will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If
you do not open a door, the light will go off in about 30
seconds, the doors will automatically relock, and the
security system will rearm. If you relock the doors with
the remote transmitter within 30 seconds, the light will
go off immediately.
You cannot lock the doors with the remote transmitter if
a door is not fully closed, or if the key is in the ignition
switch. If the doors will lock and unlock but the Security
System will not arm make sure the trunk and hood are
closed. If the doors will unlock, but not lock, the system
may think a door is open. Check the door switches, the
dome light operation, and the safety indicator.
To open the trunk, push the Trunk Release button and
hold it for about 2 seconds. The trunk will not open if the
key is in the ignition switch. If the doors lock and unlock
normally, but the trunk opener is inoperative or erratic,
the problem could be a wrong remote or passenger
multiplex control unit. 1998-99 remotes and control units
are different than 2000-02 control units. Multiplex control
units are also different for trim level and body style
(coupe and sedan).
If a third keyless/security transmitter has been added,
the trunk release button must be pushed twice on that
transmitter to open the trunk.
The system will signal you when the doors lock and
unlock by flashing the parking lights, side marker lights,
and taillights: once when they lock. and twice when they
unlock. Push the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds and
the horn will confirm the car is locked with one short
beep. If the lights do not flash. make sure the doors the
hood and the trunk are closed and locked. Check that the
security indicator blinks. If the Security Alarm System
does not arm, see multiplex mode and input tests.
22-216
BACK
r--:'I
I.:!..I
1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system with mode 1
and mode 2 tests (see page 22-137).
Al 1>\1. ~ A4 A5
/lJj
A7 AB I>S AID All A12
A13 A14 Al5 AlB
-----
A17 AlB A19 A20
t--
A21 A22 A23 1>\1.4
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTOR B
GRN/ORN GRY
~ \Bl\,GRN/
Bl B3 B4 B5
Bll B12 B13 B14 B15
/ t
BlK
RED/GRN
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A
GRN/ORN
,
2 3 4
5 6 9 10
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR 0
BlU/WHT
...
,
..
1 2 3 4
F=L
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
14
1
15
16 17 18 19 20
..... L..
(cont'd)
22-217
BACK
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box sockets .
If all the input tests prove OK go to step S.
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (GS03)
conditions ground: An open in the wire
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.SA) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
An o ~ e n in the wire
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.SA) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery driver's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
An oQen in the wire
A10 Headlight switch The headlights should come Poor ground (G401)
ON ~ D ) and jump on. Faulty headlight relay 1 or 2
A 10 to battery An open in the wire
voltage Faulty combination liaht switch
AS Under all Attach to ground: The Blown No. 13 (7.SA) fuse in the
conditions security indicator should passenger's under-dash fuse/
come on. relay box
Faulty security indicator
An o ~ e n in the wire
A22 Combination light Check for continuity to Poor ground (G401)
switch ON ground: Faulty combination light switch
Combination light Check for continuity to
switch OFF ground:
There should be no continuity.
B16 RED/GRN Combination light Check for continuity to Faulty taillight relay
switch OFF ground: Faulty combination light switch
There should be no continuity. An open in the wire
Combination light The taillights should come on.
switch ON and
jump B16to
batterv voltaae
22-218
BACK

L.:.I
5. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the fuse/relay box, and perform the following input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the back of the fuse/relay box.
09 BLU/WHT Ignition key is in Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G401)
the ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty Ignition key switch
Ignition key is out Check for voltage to ground: o An open in the wire
of the ignition There should be 5 V or more.
switch
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground:
closed There should be 5 V or more.
B6 VEL Hood open Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty hood switch
There should be 1 V or less. o Poor ground (G201)
Hood closed Check for voltage to ground: o An open in the wire
There should be 5 V or more.
B7 GRN/ORN Trunk key cylinder Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty trunk key cylinder switch
switch in unlock There should be 1 V or less. o Poor ground (G601)
Trunk key cylinder Check for voltage to ground: o An open in the wire
switch in neutral There should be 5 V or more.
B8 BLU/GRN Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty trunk latch switch
There should be 1 V or less. o Poor ground (G601)
Trunk lid closed Check for voltage to ground: o An open in the wire
B9 GRV Left rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty left rear door lock
knob unlocked There should be 1 V or less. actuator
Left rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G551)
knob locked There should be 5 V or more. o An open in the wire
(cont'd)
22-219
BACK
6. Remove the passenger's mUltiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect
its connector.
AI A2. ~ M A5 /lS A7 AB
p.s
AIO All AI2
AI3 AI4 A15 AI6
~
A17 AlB A19 I

A21 A22 A23 A2.4
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S CONNECTOR B
WHT/RED
t
YEl
BLU BlK
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A
..
.,
1 2 3
4
n
5 6 7
8 9 101 11 12
1
1
3 14
1
15 16117 181 19 20
..
,
/
,
..
RED/BLU GRN/WHT GRN
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F
GRN/BlK BlK/BLU BlU/ORN BlK/ORN ORN
\ I
I ~
....
4lSl1=11617 1 2 3 8 9 10 11
...
12 13 14 15 I 16 I 17 J 18 19 20 21 22
22-220
BACK
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors and the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box sockets .
A8 Fuse/relay Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G581)
box socket conditions ground: An open in the wire
A9 Under all Attach to ground: Horn Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
conditions should sound. under-hood fuse/relay box
Faulty horn relay
Faulty horn
An oQen in the wire
A20 Under all Attach to ground: Headlights Faulty headlight relay
conditions should come on. An o1!en in the wire
A21 Ceiling light switch Attach to ground: Ceiling light Blown No. 11 (7.5A) fuse in the
in the middle should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/
position relay box
Faulty ceiling light
An oQen in the wire
A22 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery driver's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
An oJ!en in the wire
A23 Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.6 (20A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
An open in the wire
A24 Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
An open in the wire
B22 BlK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G504)
A10 Fuse/relay JumpA10to Check driver's door lock Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
box socket battery voltage, operation: relay box
B11 VEL then jump B11 to The door should lock. An open in the wire
body ground. Faulty driver's actuator
A11 Fuse/relay JumpA10to All passenger doors should Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
box socket battery voltage lock. relay box
and A 11 to body An open in the wire
ground. Faulty passenger's actuator
B1 WHT/RED Connect the B 1 Check trunk opener Poor ground (G601)
terminal to the A24 operation: Faulty trunk opener solenoid
terminal Trunk lid should open. An open in the wire
momentarily.
(cont'd)
22-221
BACK
9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the
following input tests at the appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (see connector
views page 22-218). For passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-46).
NOTE: All passenger lock knobs must be in the locked position, then unlocked and locked one at a time, or
the test results will not be correct .
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
F2 GRN/BLK Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G581)
lock knob unlocked There shoudl be 1 V or less. Faulty front passenger's door
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: lock actuator
lock knob locked There should be 5 V or more. An open in the wire
F5 BLU/ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G581)
lock switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 1 V. Faulty front passenger's door
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: lock switch
lock switch in the There should be 5 V or more. An open in the wire
neutral position
F6 BLK/ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground:
lock switch in LOCK There should be 1 V or less.
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground:
lock switch in the There should be 5 V or more.
neutral position
F3 BLK/BLU Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G581)
lock key cylinder There should be 1 V or less. Faulty front passenger's door
locked lock key cylinder switch
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
lock key cylinder the There should be 5 V or more.
neutral position
F7 ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground:
lock key cylinder There should be 1 V or less.
unlocked
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground:
lock key cylinder the There should be 5 V or more.
neutral position
A14 GRN/WHT Right rear door opened Check for voltage to ground: Faulty right rear door switch
There should be 1 V or less. An open in the wire
Right rear door closed Check for voltage to ground:
A16 GRN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty front passenger's door
opened There should be 1 V or less. switch
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
closed There should be 5 V or more.
A8 RED/BLU Right rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G581)
knob unlocked There shoudl be 1 V or less. Faulty right rear door lock
Right rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: switch
knob locked There should be 5 V or more. An open in the wire
B21 BLU Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
There shoudl be 1 V or less. Poor ground (G501)
Faulty connections at the
audio unit
Faulty audio unit
22-222
BACK
10. Remove the driver's multiplex control door unit, and disconnect its connector.
11. Inspect all the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact .
BLU/WHT BLK/WHT
WHT/YEL
C, i ~ ~ N ! n
~ r
Al A2
1/
A4
1/
A6 A7 A8
1/
A11 A12
1/ /
A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
BLK
I Btu I GRN/RED
BRN BLK/RED
Al0
1/
Wire side of
female terminals
12. With the door unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector .
~
~
A12 BlK Under all Check for continuity to Poor ground (G401)
A1 WHT/YEl Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
conditions There shoudl be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
volltage. relay box
An ooen in the wire
(cont'd)
22-223
BACK
13. Reconnect the connectors to the door multiplex control unit, make these input tests at the connector .
A6 BLU/WHT Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V. switch
LOCK Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more.
neutral
A16 BLU Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground:
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V.
UNLOCK
Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground:
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more.
neutral
A7 PNK Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver'S door lock
knob locked There should be less than 1 V. actuator
Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: Poor ground (G401)
knob unlocked There should be 5 V or more. An open in the wire
A17 BLK/RED Driver'S door lock Check for voltage to ground:
knob unlocked There should be less than 1 V.
Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground:
knob locked There should be 5 V or more.
A8 BLK/WHT Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in LOCK There should be less than 1 V. Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
A18 GRN/RED Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground:
switch in LOCK There should be less than 1 V.
Driver'S door lock Check fQr voltage to ground:
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
22-224
BACK
Front Door Lock Actuator Test
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator.
ground according to the table. To prevent damage
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily.
1\
Terminal
\
1 2
Position
LOCK
CB 8
UNLOCK
8 CB
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it.

t..=..I
Rear Door Lock Actuator Test
1. Remove the rear door panel (see page 20-8).
momentarily.
!\
Terminal
\
1 2
Position
LOCK
CB 8
UNLOCK
8 CB
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it.
22-225
BACK
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch
Test
knob switch position according to the table.
\
Terminal
1 2 3
Position
\
LOCK
0 0
UNLOCK
0 0
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the lock
knob switch.
22-226
Passenger's Door Lock Knob Switch
Test
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-
8).
FRONT PASSENGER'S:
RIGHT REAR: LEFT REAR:
knob switch position according to the table.
FRONT PASSENGER'S:
RIGHT REAR:
\
Terminal
\
1 2
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
0 -0
LEFT REAR:
\
Terminal
\
2 3
Position
LOCK
UNLOCK
0 -0
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the lock
knob switch.
BACK
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder
switch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminal in each
\ Terminal
1
\
2 3
Position
LOCK
0 0
OFF
UNLOCK
0
)
switch.
Door Lock Switch Test

1. Remove the front door inner handle (see page 20-8).
2. Remove the two screws, then remove the door lock
switch.
1\ Terminal
1 2
\
3
Position
LOCK
C" 0
OFF
UNLOCK
0 0
switch.
22-227
BACK
Trunk Lid Opener Motor/Latch
Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the trunk latch.
/
Terminal side of
male terminals
momentarily.
1\ Terminal
3 4
Position
\
UNLOCK 8)
8
trunk lid position according to the table.
1\
Terminal
\
2 6
Position
Open
0 -0
Closed
5. If the motor does not operate as specified or the
continuity is not as specified, replace the opener
motor/latch switch.
22-228
Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the trunk key
cylinder switch.
---
Terminal side of
male terminals
\ Terminal
1 2
Position
\
LOCK
UNLOCK 0 -0
trunk key cylinder switch.
BACK
Security Indicator Test
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the security
indicator.
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. The LED should come on when power is connected
the No.2 terminal and ground is connected to the
No.1 terminal.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace it.
Hood Switch Test
1. Open the hood.
r--:'I

2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch.
Terminal side of
male terminals
f\
Terminal
1
\
2
Position
Hood open
0
(Lever released)
Hood closed
(Lever pushed down)
hood switch.
22-229
BACK
Transmitter Test
NOTE:
If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but
the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED
is faulty; replace the transmitter.
If any door is open, you cannot lock or unlock the
door with the transmitter.
If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do
not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the
doors relock automatically.
The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
1. Press the lock or unlock button 5 or 6 times to reset
the transmitter.
If the locks work, the transmitter is OK .
If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
If you find any water damage, replace the
transmitter.
If there is no water damage, go to step 3.
3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button 5
or 6times.
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is
OK .
If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4.
,r-)
4. Reprogram the transmitter, then try to lock and
unlock the doors (see page 22-227).
If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is
OK .
Ifthe doors don't lock and unlock, replace the tra
nsmitter..
NOTE: The transmitters for LX models and EX
models are different and are not interchangeable.
22-230
Transmitter Programming
Storing transmitter codes:
The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into
the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is
stored, the code which was input first will be erased.)
NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits
between the steps.
2. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter lock or
unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the
keyless receiver unit behind the glove box.
3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Confirm you can hear the sound ofthe door lock
actuators. Within 1 to 4 sec., push the transmitter
lock or unlock button again.
13. Within 15 sec., aim the remaining transmitters at the
keyless receiver unit (up to two additional ones) whose
codes you want to store at the receiver, and press the
transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door
lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key.
15. Confirm proper operation ofthe transmitters.
BACK
Power Door Locks
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-227
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

Test, page 22-227
DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-227
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATORI
KNOB SWITCH
Test, page 22-225
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Test, page 22-225
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Test,page 22-225
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Test, page 22-225
22-231
BACK
Power Door Locks
Circuit Diagram
22-232
BATTERY
()--BLK
No.41 (l00A) No.42 (50A)
No.54 (40A)

DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
-@-
ATNo.9(7.SA)
WHT BLKlYEL -+-c:rVJ-+-- YEL -----
IGl
No.12 (20A)
YEL -+-.... -a--.....o--t----------WHT-----
Bl1
BlK
G503
No.13
(7.SA)
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

WHTIYEL
A12
MULTIPLEX
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Door)
(To page 22234)
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
A13
I
PNK
Bl
A2
BLUfWHT BRN

IGNITION
KEY
SWITCH
(ON : Inserted )
OFF: Removed
BLK
G401
MULTIP
2
(To page
LEX
OLUNIT
22234)
BACK
PNK WHTNEL WHT YEL
B9 A24 A23 A22
UNLOCK LOCK
A17 AS
DOOR LOCK KONB
Q
ORN
KEY
BLKiBLU
[ p - - ~
I
FRONT
3
~ - - - - - - - /
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
KEY CYLINDER
L.....---II--.I SWITCH
2
BLK
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
11'0M 12 r-- WHTIRED LTGRNlRED-
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
~ WHTIRED ~ LTGRN/RED-
LEFT REAR
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
(Sedan)
~ WHTIRED ~ LTGRNlRED-
RIGHT REAR
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
(Sedan)
~ WHTIRED ~ LTGRN/RED-
Al0 All
LOCK() UNLOCK()
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
UNLOCK LOCK
A4 A16
BLU/ORN
BLKJORN
3
, /
2
BLK
I
G581
FRONT
PASSENGfiR'S
DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
AS B22
BLK
BLK
r:-:'I
I..!=:.J
(cont'd)
22-233
BACK
Power Door Locks
A17 A7
DOOR LOCK KNOB
BLKlRED Q
I
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
(
From page)
22232
r
BRN
A15
MULTIPLEX
CONTROl UNIT
(Door)
UNLOCK LOCK
A16 A6
BLU
No.13 (7.5A)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(
From page)
22232
r
WHTIYEL
Al
UNLOCK LOCK
AlB A8
GRNlRED
PNK
I KEY
BLUIWHT BLKIWHT
3
DRIVER'S UNLOCK LOCK
l'88: ~ ~ ---
KNOB
SWITCH
22-234
2
BLK
I
:---c:[]
I
I
I
I
I
I
- ~ : /
2
BLK
I
BLK
1
-
.
G40l
3 3
DRIVER'S DOOR
, /
DRIVER'S
KEY CYLINDER
DOOR
LOCK
SWITCH
SWITCH
2
BLK
I
A12
BLK
BLK
I
BACK
Restraints
Restraints
Special Tools ................................................................. 23-2
Seat Belts
Component location Index
-Coupe ....................................................................... 23-3
-Sedan ........................................................................ 23-4
Front Seat Belt Replacement
-Coupe ....................................................................... 23-5
-Sedan ........................................................................ 23-7
Rear Seat Belt Replacement
-Coupe ....................................................................... 23-12
-Sedan ........................................................................ 23-15
Inspection ...................................................................... 23-17
Child Seat Tether Anchor Installation
-'98-99 models ........................................................... 23-19
Child Seat Anchor Plate Removal/Installation
-'00 model Coupe ...................................................... 23-20
-'01-02 models Coupe ............................................... 23-21
-'00-02 models Sedan ............................................... 23-22
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Component location Index ......................................... 23-23
Precautions and Procedures ....................................... 23-28
SRS Unit Identification ................................................. 23-47
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 23-67
SRS Indicator light Circuit Troubleshooting ............. 23-242
Component Replacement!
Inspection After Deployment ................................... 23-277
Driver's Airbag Replacement ...................................... 23-278
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement ..................... 23-280
Side Airbag Replacement ............................................ 23-282
Airbag Disposal ............................................................ 23-283
Cable Reel Replacement .............................................. 23-289
SRS Unit Replacement ................................................. 23-295
Side Impact Sensor Replacement ............................... 23-297
OPDS Unit Replacement .............................................. 23-300
Restraints
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Descril!tion Qt}'
CD*' 07HAZ-SG00500 Deployment Tool 1
@ 07PAZ-0010100 SCS Service Connector 1
07SAZ-TB4011A SRS Inflator Simulator 1
CD 07TAZ-SZ5011A SRS Simulator Lead C 1
@*2
07TAZ-001020A Backprobe Adapter, 17 mm 2
07XAZ-S1A0100 SRS Test Box 4P 1
(J) 07XAZ-S1A0200 SRS Simulator Lead E 1

07 XAZ -SZ30 1 00 SRS Simulator Lead F 1
07Y AZ -S3AA 100 SRS Simulator Lead H 1
* 1: Included In SRS Tool Set 07MAZ-SM5000B
*2: Use with the stacking patch cords from TIN 07SAZ-001000A, Backprobe Set.
CD
@

@
.g}"
~ , . ~
_0'
'9'
lQI
~
CD
@

23-2
BACK
Seat Belts
FRONT SEAT BELT
,/
/
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . ~ .
FRONT SEAT
BELT BUCKLES
page 23-9
REAR SEAT BELT
CHILD SEAT
TETHER ANCHOR
Installation-'98-99 models,
page 23-19
-'00 model, page 23-20
-'01-02 models, page 23-21
REAR CENTER BELT and
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES
page 23-13
/
23-3
BACK
Seat Belts
23-4
FRONT SEAT BELT
FRONT SEAT
BELT BUCKLES
page 23-9
SHOULDER
ANCHOR ADJUSTER
step 10 on page 23-8
REAR SEAT BELT
CHILD SEAT ANCHOR PLATE
Installation-'98-99 models,
page 23-19
Removal/lnstallation-'OO-02 models,
page 23-22
REAR CENTER BELT and
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLES
page 23-16
BACK
Front Seat Belt Replacement - Coupe
and precations and procedures (see page 23-28) in the
SRS section before preforming repairs or service.
NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and
replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage
them during removal and installation.
Front Seat Belt
1. '01-02 models: Make sure you have the anti-theft
code for the radio, then write down the frequencies
for the preset buttons.
2. Slide the front seat forward fully.
3. '01-02 models: Disconnect the negative battery
cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning
work.
Rear seat-backs
Rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead cover
6. Remove the side trim (see page 20-74).
7. Remove the middle cross-member gusset (A):
-1 Detach the clips, and pull back the carpet (B).
-2 Remove the bolts (C, D) and nut, then remove
the gusset.
Fastener Locations
c Bolt,4
10X1.2smm
38Nm
(3.9 kgfm,
2.8Ibfft)
.: Nut, 1

8x1.2Smm
22Nm
(2.2kgfm,
16Ibfft)
D
8X1.2smm
22Nm
(2.2 kgf.m,
16Ibfft)
B
(cont'd)
23-5
BACK
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement - Coupe (cont'd)
8. Remove the upper anchor cap (A) and lower anchor
cap (8).
A
\
CE>
9. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat belt guide
(A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
@mm
6X1.0mm
) I 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
23-6
10. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A)
('01-02 models). Remove the upper anchor bolt (8)
and lower anchor bolt (e), the retractor mounting
bolt (D), and the retractor bolt (E). Remove the front
seat belt (F) and retractor (G).
'98-00 models (without tensioner):
B
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
F
E
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
C
7/16-20 UNF
32Nm
'01-02 models (with tensioner):
B \
7/16-20 UNF
32 Nm (3.3 kgfm, II \ \
241.'ftl / ' ~
D
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
G
D
6x 1.0mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfftl
G
F
A
E
7/16-20 UNF
BACK
11. Install the seat belt and retractor in the reverse
order of removal, and note these items:
Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions (see page 23-17).
Assemble the washers, collar and bushing on the
upper and lower anchor bolts as shown.
Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt.
'01-02 models:
Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is
plugged in properly.
Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Upper anchor bolt construction:
UPPER TOOTHED
BUSHING
Lower anchor bolt construction:
LOWER ANCHOR BUSHING
I
WAVE LOWER
WASHER ANCHOR
Retractor bolt construction:
\
RElRACTOR
Front Seat Belt Replacement -
Sedan
NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and
Front Seat Belt
1. '01-02 models: Make sure you have the anti-theft
code for the radio, then write down the frequencies
for the preset buttons.
3. '01-02 models: Disconnect the negative battery
cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning
work.
4. Remove the rear seat cushion (see page 20-129).
Front side trim
Rear side trim
Center pillar lower trim panel
6. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and pull the
lower anchor cover (B) back.
(cont'd)
23-7
BACK
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement - Sedan (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A),
('01-02 models). Remove the upper anchor bolt (B)
and lower anchor bolt (C), the retractor mounting
ET screw (D), the retractor bolt (E), and remove the
front seat belt (F) and retractor (G).
'98-00 models (without tensioner):
B
7/16-20UNF
32Nm
D
6x1.0mm
4Nm
10.4 kgf.m, 3 Ibfft)
c-
7/16-20 UNF
G
7/16-20UNF
32Nm
'0102 models (with tensioner):
B
7/16-20UNF
32Nm
F
~ X 1 0 ~
4Nm
10.4kgf.m,
3Ibfft)
G
c-
7/16-20UNF
23-8
E
7/16-20UNF
32Nm
A
8. Remove the front and rear door trim as necessary
(see page 20-75).
9. Remove the center pillar upper trim (see page 20-
75).
10. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).
8x 1.2Smm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
Apply liquid thread lock to the upper anchor bolt
before reinstallation.
If the threads on the retractor mounting ET screw
90133-SZ4-0030)made specifically for this
application.
functions as described (see page 23-17).
upper and lower anchor bolts as shown.
there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt.
'0102 models:
Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is
plugged in properly.
Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
BACK
Upper anchor bolt construction:
UPPER ANCHOR
"1

/
BUSHING
RETRACTOR
BOLT
\

\
COLLAR
TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
SPRING
WASHER
TOOTHED

@
RETRACTOR
Seat Belt Buckle
2. Remove the following parts from the front seat:
Manual seat: center cover (see page 20-104)
Manual height adjustable seat: center cover (see
page 20-108)
8-way power seat: center cover (see page 20-114)
2-way power height adjustable seat: Bracket
cover (see page 20-110)
3. On a driver's seat and '00-02 models passenger's
seat with side airbag, disconnect and/or detach the
seat belt switch connector and clip (A) and harness
clips (B).
Manual seat:
Manual height adjustable seat:
A
B
r- .... --- .. --1
To seat belt
buckle.
(cont'd)
23-9
BACK
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement - Sedan (cont'd)
2-way power seat ('98-99 models);
A
B
To seat belt
buckle.
2-way power seat ('00 model);
2-way power seat ('01-02 models);
B
23-10
To seat belt
buckle.
8-way power seat;
To seat belt
buckle.
A
BACK
4. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the
seat belt buckle (B).
NOTE: The 2-way power seat is shown, the manual
seat, and the manual height adjustable seat are
similar.
.I
A
7/16-20UNF
5. On a driver's seat and '00-02 models passenger's
seat with side airbag, remove the seat belt switch
harness (A):
Without manual seat and without 2-way power
seat ('00-02 models): Adjust the seat cushion to
its maximum height, and remove the harness .
With manual seat: Remove the seat cushion
mounting bolts (B) from the inner seat track (e),
then pull the inner seat track down away from the
seat cushion, and remove the harness.
Take care not to damage the hinge bracket (D).
B
10x1.25mm
47 Nm (4.8 kgf.m, 35lbfftl
6. Install the seat belt buckle in the reverse order of
removal. Assemble the washers on the center
anchor bolt as shown.
Center anchor bolt installation:
CENTER ANCHOR COLLAR
BOLT \ TOOTHED
\ \\ LOCKW ......
~
\ . ((III ) ~
,1 ) ) @-B J y ~
/ ' \
WAVE ! SPRING
WASHER CENTER WASHER
ANCHOR
23-11
BACK
Seat Belts
Rear Seat Belt Replacement - Coupe
Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them
if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during
removal and installation.
Rear Seat Belt
Rear seat-backs
Rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead cover
4. Remove the side trim (see page 20-74).
5. Remove the upper anchor cap (A).
A
23-12
6. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A) and lower
anchor bolt (B), and the retractor bolt (C). Remove
the rear seat belt (D) and retractor (E).
A
7/16-20 UNF
C
7/16-20 UNF
32 Nm (3.3 kgfm,
24lbfftl
E
D
B
7/16-20 UNF
BACK
upper anchor bolt as shown.
there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt.
Upper anchor bolt installation:
UPPER ANCHOR UPPER TOOTHED
Tl
CHOR
LOCKW\HER
@mmn- @
I, v:
LR
BUSHING
WASHERS COLLAR
Lower anchor bolt installation:
__ LOWER ANCHOR

LOCK WASHER
Retractor bolt installation:

@
\ /
RETRACTOR !
BOLT RETRACTOR TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles
Rear seat-backs
Rear seat cushion
Rear bulkhead cover
Lock cylinder trim
Center belt cover
Rear shelf
4. Remove the side trim, both sides as necessary (see
page 20-74).
5. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove
the seat belt buckles (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
B
(cont'd)
23-13
BACK
Seat Belts
Rear Seat Belt Replacement - Coupe (cont'd)
6. Remove the retractor mounting ET screw (A) and
the retractor bolt (B). Remove the center belt (C)
and retractor (0).
7. Remove the protector (A).
23-14
B
7/16-20UNF
32 Nm 13.3 kgfm.
order of removal. and note these items:
Check that the retractor. locking mechanism
Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt
as shown.
Before installing the center anchor bolt. make
sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt.
Center anchor bolt installation:
-WASHER
____ CENTER
ANCHOR
__ ---TOOTHED
lOCK WASHER
Retractor bolt installation:
t::::I----- RETRACTOR BOLT
~ ..... TOOTHED
lOCK WASHER
BACK
Rear Seat Belt Replacement - Sedan
NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and
Rear Seat Belt
Rear seat cushion
Rear seat side bolster, both sides
Rear door trim
Rear pillar trim, both sides
Rear bulkhead cover
Center belt cover
Lock cylinder trim
Rear shelf
3. Remove the center anchor bolt of the center belt.
4. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A), the retractor
mounting ET screw (B), the retractor bolt (C), and
remove the rear seat belt (0) and retractor (E).
o
A

4 Nm 10.4 kgfm,
3Ibfft)
D
7/16-20 UNF
32 Nm 13.3 kgfm, 24Ibfft) /
__ LOWER ANCHOR

LOCK WASHER
____ --RETRACTOR
6
1<:'\ --TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
90133-SZ4-0030) made specifically for this
application.
functions as described (see page 23-17) .
Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt.
(cont'd)
23-15
BACK
Seat Belts
Rear Seat Belt Replacement - Sedan (cont'd)
Center Belt and Seat Belt Buckles
1. Remove the rear seat cushion and rear seat side
bolster, both sides (see page 20-129).
2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove
the seat belt buckles (B).
A
7/16-20 UNF
B
Rear door trim, both sides as necessary
Rear pillar trim, both sides
Rear bulkhead cover
Lock cylinder trim
Center belt cover
Rear shelf
23-16
4. Remove the retractor mounting ET screw (A), and
the retractor bolt (B), then remove the center belt
(C) and retractor (0).
A
6x 1.0mm B
4 Nm (0.4 kgf.m, 7/16-20 UNF
3 Ibfft) 32 Nm (3.3 kgfm,
_____________ 24Ibfft)
"-- '-L

-=:::-; /'
)l .......
Vi '-' ""r-

C
5. Remove the protector (A).
----A
BACK
90133-SZ4-0030) made specifically for this
application.
functions properly (see step 1 on page 23-17).
Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt
as shown.
Before installing the center anchor bolt, make
sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt.
Center anchor bolt construction:
___ CENTER
ANCHOR
I_---TOOTHED
LOCK WASHER
TOOTHED
WASHER
Inspection
Retractor
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat
belt can be pulled outfreely.
2. Make sure the seat belt does not lock when the
retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15from the
mounted position. The seat belt should lock when
the retractor is leaned over 40. Do not attempt to
disassemble the retractor.
Coupe:
Front:
*
I
40" I 40"
<If/

Forward b
Rear:
*
40:-" ...----..,-.. ____ 40"
Rear center:
15115"
\17,/

I A
Forward b
*
Inside b
*: Mounted Position
*
_____ -.-____ ,40"
Inside
*
40" 40"
15; 15"

.. Inside
.. Forward
(cont'd)
23-17
BACK
Seat Belts
Inspection (co nt' d)
Sedan:
Front:
Forward Inside
Rear:
A
. o
40. 15;Jo/ :u:-
, ,,/.
/'
Inside Forward
Rear Center:
Inside Forward
3. Replace the seat belt with a new one if there is any
abnormality.
23-18
In-vehicle
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on
anything.
2. After installing the anchors, check for free
movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary,
remove the anchor bolts and check that the
washers and other parts are not damaged or
improperly installed.
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration.
Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only
soap and water to clean.
NOTE: Dirt build-up in the metal loops ofthe upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled
out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only
during a sudden stop or impact.
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract
automatically when released.
6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt
retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic
locking retractor). This function is for securing child
seats.
- 1 Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the
ALR. The seat belt should retract with a
ratcheting sound, but not extend. This is
normal.
- 2 To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and
allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt
out part-way. The seat belt should retract and
extend normally.
7. Replace the seat belt with a new one if there is any
abnormality.
BACK
Child Seat Tether Anchor Installation - '98-99 Models
Coupe:
Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted
child restraint system which uses a top tether. The
attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just
behind the rear seat-back.
NOTE:
Do not remove the toothed washer (E) from the child
seat anchor plate. Use the child seat anchor plate
with the toothed washer attached to it.
When installing a child seat on the rear seat, follow
the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat.
Additional anchor plates are available.
Make sure the rear seat-backs are locked firmly when
installing a child seat.
The rear shelf (A) is perforated at each attachment point
(8). Use a razor blade or sharp knife to carefully cut a 1
inch diameter circle at the attachment point, then cut
the rear shelf along the perforations to make a hole.
When using a child seat with a top tether, install the
child seat anchor plates (C) securely.
B
298 mm (11.7 in.)
8x 1.25 mm

E
Sedan:
Attachment points are provilled for a rear seat mounted
child restraint system which uses a top tether. The
attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just
behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with
a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely.
NOTE:
Do not remove the toothed washer from the child
seat anchor plate. Use the child seat anchor plate
with the toothed washer attached to it.
When installing a child seat on the rear seat, follow
the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat.
Additional anchor plates are available.
Make sure the rear seat-backs is locked firmly when
installing a child seat.
1. On a Canada model, remove the plug (A) from the
attachment point (8) on the rear shelf then go to
step 4. On a U.S. mode/, go to step 2.
mm (11.5 in.) A -, 141 mm (5.6 in.)
.
'. . .... ::0(
i -.--.-.- - - --- __ /._<::/
, B 355 mm (14 in.)
8x 1.25mm
'"
2. From inside the trunk, select one of the three
attachment points (weldnuts) and poke an awl
through it to make a marker hole in the rear shelf
fabric.
3. From inside the vehicle, use a sharp knife to cut a
22 mm (7/8 in.) diamater hole in the rear shelf
fabric and pad at the marker hole.
4. Install the child seat anchor plate (C). Torque the
bolt to 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft).
23-19
BACK
Seat Belts
Child Seat Tether Anchor Removal/Installation - '00 model Coupe
1. Remove the middle child seat tether anchor cover (A) and both side child seat tether anchor covers (8) from the
attachment points (e) on the rear shelf (D).
c
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgf.m,
16Ibfft)
2. Remove the child seat tether anchors (E). Do not remove the toothed washer (F) from the tether anchor.
3. Install the child seat tether anchors in the reverse order of removal. When installing the middle and both side
covers on each child seat tether anchor, the one with a slot (G) goes in the middle.
23-20
BACK
Child Seat Tether Anchor Removal/Installation '01-02 models Coupe
1. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-76).
2. Remove the middle child seat tether anchor (A) and both side child seat tether anchors (8). Do not remove the
toothed washer (e) from the tether anchor.
Unit: mm (in.)
" '.
ax 1.2Smm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
A
> - - - = = = = = ~ ~ - - - / - - ~
B
tether anchors on the body, the one with a shorter spacer goes in the middle.
23-21
BACK
Seat Belts
Child Seat Tether Anchor Removal/Installation - '00-02 models Sedan
1. '00 model: Remove the child seat tether anchor covers (A) from the attachment points (8) on the rear shelf (C).
Unit: mm (in.)
'00 model:
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
B
o
8(0.3)
Forwar
Y 8x1.25mm
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
'01-02 models:
13
(0.51)
~
____ 'A
G F o r w a ~ I
Forward ::' .. F 17 (0.67) Y 8 x 1.25 mm
~
~
22Nm
yo- I (2.2 kgfm.
'-J-./ 16Ibfft)
8x 1.25mm ~ I
22Nm
(2.2kgfm,
16Ibf.ft)
2. '01-02 models: Release the hooks (D), and remove the middle child seat tether anchor upper cover (E) and both
side child seat tether anchor upper covers (F) from the attachment points (8) on the rear shelf (C).
3. Remove the middle child seat tether anchor (G) and both side child seat tether anchors (H). Do not remove the
toothed washer (I) from the tether anchor.
tether anchors on the rear shelf, the one with a shorter spacer goes in the middle.
23-22
BACK
SRS
Component location Index
'98-00 Models (without side airbags)
MEMORY ERASE SIGNAL
(MES) CONNECTOR (2P)
[GRN, GRN] or [BLK, LTGRN/BLK]
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC) (16P)
SRS INDICATOR LIGHT
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
Disposal, page 23-283
SRS UNIT GROUND
SRS UNIT
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
23-23
BACK
SRS
'00 Model-Sedan (with side airbags)
SRS INDICATOR LIGHT
SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR LIGHT
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
MEMORY ERASE SIGNAL
[GRN, GRN] or
lLT GRNIBLK.
23-24
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC) 16P
SRS UNIT GROUND

FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDEAIRBAG
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
DRIVER'S SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
BACK
'00 Model-Coupe (with side airbags)
MEMORY ERASE SIGNAL
[GRN, GRN] or
[L T GRN/BLK, BLK]
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(DLC)16P
SRS INDICATOR LIGHT
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
DRIVER'S SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
OPDSSENSOR
-FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDEAIRBAG
OPDSUNIT
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
23-25
BACK
SRS
Component Location Index (co nt' d)
'01-02 Models (with side airbag)
MEMORY ERASE SIGNAL
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC) 16P
DRIVER'S SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
SRS INDICATOR LIGHT
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
SRSUNIT
OPDSSENSOR
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDEAIRBAG
RIGHT SIDE SEAT
./ BELT TENSIONER
,. Replacement (Sedan),
page 23-12
Replacement (Coupe),
page 23-15
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
SRS UNIT GROUND
LEFT SIDE SEAT BELT TENSIONER
Replacement (Sedan). page 23-12
Replacement (Coupe), page 23-15
23-26
BACK
- bag) -thout side air '01-02 Models (WI
SESIGNAL
MEMOCROY (2P)
(MES)
SRS 23-265
Troubleshooting,
DRIVER'S AIRB!G
e
23-278
Replacement, P2:r-286
Disposal, page BAG
ENGER'S AIR
FRONT page 23-280
Replacemen, 23-286
Disposal, page
BELT TENSIONER
LEFT SIDE SEAT dan) page 23-12
Replacement page 23-15
Replacement e 23-286
Disposal, pag
SRS UNIT t page 23-296
Replacemen ,
RIGHT SIDE SEAT
/
BEL TI
Rep ac 2
(Coupe),
Rep 2315
p.age I- page 23-286
Dlsposa,
SRS UNIT GROUND
23-27
BACK
SRS
Precautions and Procedures
General Precautions
Please read the following precautions carefully before
performing airbag system service. Observe the
instructions described in this manual, or the airbags
could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Except when performing electrical inspections,
always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect
the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least
3 minutes before beginning work.
NOTE: The contents in the memory is not erased
even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery
cables are disconnected from the battery.
Use the replacement parts which are manufactured to
the same standards as the original parts and quality.
Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle.
Use only new parts when making SRS repairs.
Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it.
Do not install any part that shows signs of being
dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks,
or deformation .
Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the
disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect
the SRS connector.
23-28
Use only a digital multi meter to check the system. If it
is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output is 10
mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value
in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output
could cause accidental deployment and possible
injury.
Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag.
The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit.
Be sure to get the customer's radio code and write
down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations
before disconnecting the battery cable.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter
the radio code, then enter the customer's radio
station presets, and set the clock.
BACK
Airbag Handling and Storage
Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable
parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be
repaired or reused.
For temporary storage of the airbag during service,
please observe the following precautions .
Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.
Never put anything on the removed airbag.
Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to
prevent damage to the airbag assembly.
Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface
away from any high heat source (exceeding 200
0
F/
93
0
C).
Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags,
such as measuring resistance.
Do not position yourself in front ofthe airbag
assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement .
Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the
damaged airbag.
(cont'd)
23-29
BACK
SRS
Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
SRS Unit-'98-01 models and Side Impact
Sensors-'OO-02 models with Side Airbags
Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit or the
side impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is
ON (II), or at least for three minutes after the ignition
switch is turned OFF.
During installation or replacement, be careful not to
bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area
around the SRS unit and the side impact sensor. The
airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage
or injury.
After a collision in which any airbags or seat belt
tensioners ('01-02 models) were deployed, replace
the SRS unit and other related components.
After a collision in which the side airbag was
deployed, replace the side impact sensor on the
deployed side and the SRS unit. After a collision in
which the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy,
inspect for any damage or any deformation on the
SRS unit and the side impact sensors. If there is any
damage, replace the SRS unit and/or the side impact
sensors.
23-30
Do not disassemble the SRS unit or the side impact
sensors .
Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery
negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning installation or replacement ofthe SRS unit,
or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS unit.
Be sure the SRS unit and side impact sensors are
installed securely, with the mounting bolts torqued to
Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side
impact sensors, and keep them away from dust.
Store the SRS unit and the side impact sensors in a
cool (less than 104F/40C) and dry (less than 80%
relative humidity, no moisture) area .
BACK
Steering-related Precautions
Cable Reel Alignment
Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in
the wiring, making the SRS system and the horns
inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever the
following is performed (see step 6 on page 23-291).
- Installation ofthe steering wheel
- Installation of the cable reel
- Installation of the steering column
- Other steering-related adjustment or installation
Do not disassemble the cable reel.
Do not apply grease to the cable reel.
If the cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace
it with a new one. For example, it does not rotate
smoothly.
(cont'd)
23-31
BACK
SRS
Wiring Precautions
SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer
covering (except the SRS indicator light circuit).
Observe the instructions described in this section.
Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring.
If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring, replace
the harness.
Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get
pinched or interfere with other parts.
Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and
grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-
metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent
problems that are difficult to diagnose.
23-32
Precautions for Electrical Inspections
When using electrical test equipment, insert the
probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector.
Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal
side of the connector, and do not tamper with the
connector.
Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe
forcibly.
C...L-.--l m D ~
Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.
Using improper tools could cause an error in
inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
BACK
Spring-loaded Lock Connector
Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded
lock.
Front Airbag Connectors:
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
B
Connecting
1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector half,
and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector
half in the direction shown. As the two connector
halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is
pushed back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the
sleeve.
2. When the connector halves are completely
connected, the pawl is released, and the spring-
loaded sleeve locks the connector.
Side Airbag Connector:
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the
connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
Connecting
Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly
together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side
connector clicks.
(cont'd)
23-33
BACK
SRS
Backprobing Spring-loaded Lock Connectors
When checking voltage or resistance on this type of
connector the first time, you must remove the retainer
to insert the tester probe from the wire side.
NOTE: It is not necessary to reinstall the removed
retainer; the terminals will stay locked in the connector
housing.
A
To remove the retainer (A), insert a flat-tip screwdriver
(B) between the connector body and the retainer, then
carefully pry out the retainer. Take care not to break the
connector.
A
23-34
Seats with Side Airbags
Seats with side airbags have a "SIDE AIR BAG" label on
the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back
cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags
are different, make sure you install only the correct
replacement parts.
Label
SlDEAlRBAG
Because the seats are made by more than one
manufacturer, make sure you replace any seat
components (seat-back cover, frame, etc.) with the
correct parts. The name of the seat manufacturer is
indicated on the seat-back.
Label Manufacturer
TSJ __ TS-Japan
TSU --TS-USA
SETEX-- SETEX
The manufacturer name is also on the seat-back frame
and the seat-back pad. Confirm the name when you
exchange these parts.
o When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid,
and do not spray steam on the seat.
o Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back covers. Replace
the seat-back cover.
o After a collision in which the side airbag was
deployed, replace the seat-back cover and the side
airbag with new parts. Ifthe seat-back cushion is split,
it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is
deformed, it must be replaced.
o Never put after market accessories on the seat
(covers, pads, seat heaters, etc.).
BACK
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors
'98-99 Models
Before removing the airbag or SRS related devices (the
SRS unit and the cable reel), disconnecting connectors
from SRS related devices, or removing the dashboard
or the steering column, disconnect the airbag
connectors from the airbags to prevent accidental
deployment.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the
negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3
minutes before beginning the following procedures .
Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from
the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C, D) .
Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B),
disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C).
I
SRS UNIT
I
I
i
I lA
r'l
IB
L
SRSMAIN
HARNESS
CABLE
REEL
r-, D
I I
r'l C
I I
FRONT
DRIVER'S
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
AIRBAG
Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least
3 minutes.
Driver's Airbag:
Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then
disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and
cable reel 2P connector (B).
Front Passenger's Airbag:
Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front
passenger's airbag 2P connector (A) and SRS main
harness 2P connector (B).
B
A
(cont'd)
23-35
BACK
SRS
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors and Side Airbag Connectors
'00 Model-Sedan
Before removing a front airbag, side airbag or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel and the side
impact sensors), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column,
disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning the following procedures.
Before disconnecting SRS unit connector A (18P) (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector
(e) and front passenger's airbag 4P connentor (D).
Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (14P) (E) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (F,
G).
Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (e).
A B C
-
- -
-
r CABLE r DRIVER'S
L
REEL
L
AIRBAG
- D
,...
n
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
I--
SRS MAIN HARNESS U
AIRBAG
""-
..
-. .-
--
-.
. ~
!
E F
-
,...
I
-
h DRIVER'S
I
I
SRSFLOOR
~
SIDEAlRBAG
HARNESS ..
I
DRIVER'S I I
SIDE IMPACT
I
SENSOR
G
-
I
I
h
FRONT
I
I
PASSENGER'S
I
~ SlDEAlRBAG
..
I
fRONT I
I
PASSENGER'S
I
SIDE IMPACT
_J
I-
SENSOR
""-
, -
-- -- --
--
(WIth side alrbag)
23-36
BACK
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors and Side Airbag Connectors
'00 Model-Coupe
Before removing a front airbag, side airbag or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel and the side
impact sensors), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the dashboard or the steering column,
disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent accidental deployment.
(e) and the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (D).
Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (14P) (E) from the SRS unit. disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors
(G,I).
Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (e).
Before disconnecting the left side wire harness 4P connector e556 (F), disconnect the driver's side airbag 2P
connector (G).
Before disconnecting the right side wire harness 4P connector e584 (H), disconnect the front passenger's side airbag
2P connector (I).
A B C
r-- I""
I-
r CABLE r DRIVER'S
L
REEL

AlRBAG
I..
DI..
,...
h
FRONT
SRS MAIN HARNESS

PASSENGER'S
I-- AlRBAG
l..- I..
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
!
E F G
..- I"" roo
l-
i-
n DRIVER'S
,
SRSMAIN LEFT SIDE

SIDfAiRBAG
HARNESS WIRE HARNESS
"-
DRIVER'S
,
SIDE IMPACT
,
-
SENSOR
H I
I""
to-
n
FRONT
,
PASSENGER'S
I
RIGHT SIDE
I-J SIDEAIRBAG
WIRE HARNESS ...
FRONT
,
PASSENGER'S
I
I
l- i-
SIDE IMPACT
L--
SENSOR
L __
-- -- -- --
- - -- --
::.J
(With side airbag)
(cont'd)
23-37 BACK
SRS
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors and
Side Airbag Connectors
'00 Model
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at
least 3 minutes.
Driver's Airbag
2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel,
then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector
(A) and cable reel 2P connector (8).
A
Front Passenger's Airbag
3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front
harness 4P connector (8).
B
23-38
Side Airbag
4. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) from
the SRS floor harness 2P connectors (8) or both
side wire harness 2P connectors (8).
B
A
BACK
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors, Side Airbag Connectors, and Seat Belt Tensioner
Connectors
'01-02 Models
Before removing a front airbag, side airbag, or other SRS related devices (the SRS unit, the cable reel, the side impact
sensor and the seat belt tensioner connector), disconnecting connectors from related devices, or removing the
dashboard or the steering column, disconnect the airbag connectors or the side airbag connectors to prevent
accidental deployment.
(C), front passenger's airbag 4P connector (0), and both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (F, H).
Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (14P) (I) from the SRS unit, disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (K,
M).
Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (C).
Before disconnecting the driver's side wire harness 4P connector C557 (E), disconnect the left side seat belt
tensioner 2P connector (F).
Before disconnecting the passenger's side wire harness 4P connector C583 (Coupe) or C584 (Sedan) (G), disconnect
the right side seat belt tensioner 2P connector (H).
Before disconnecting the driver's side wire harness 4P connector (J), disconnect the driver's side airbag 2P
connector (K).
Before disconnecting the passenger's side wire harness 4P connector (L), disconnect the front passenger's side
airbag 2P connector (M).
A 8
SRSMAIN
HARNESS
SRS MAIN HARNESS
E
G
G
LEFT SlOE
WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
LEFT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
(cont'd)
23-39
BACK
SRS
Disconnecting the Airbag Connectors and
Side Airbag Connectors
'01-02 Models
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at
least 3 minutes.
Driver's Airbag
2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel,
then disconnect the driver'S airbag 4P connector
(A) and cable reel 4P connector (B).
A
Front Passenger's Airbag
3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front
harness 4P connector (B).
B
23-40
Side Airbag
4. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) from
the SRS floor harness 2P connector (B) or both side
wire harness 2P connectors (B).
B
A
Seat Belt Tensioner
5. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors
(A) from the side wire harness 2P connectors (B).
A
B
BACK
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system allows it to locate the causes of system problems and then store this
information in memory. For easier troubleshooting, this data can be retrieved via a data link circuit.
When you turn the ignition switch ON (11), the SRS indicator will come on. If it goes off after 6 seconds, the system is
normal.
If there is an abnormality, the system locates and defines the problem, stores this information in memory, and turns
the SRS indicator light on. The data will remain in the memory even when the ignition switch is turned off or if the
battery is disconnected.
When you connect the Honda PGM Tester to the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) to short the SCS terminal, and turn
the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS indicator light will indicate the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) by the number of
blinks.
After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with the troubleshooting procedure for the code indicated.
Precautions
Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it's not a Honda multimeter, make sure it's output is 10 mA
(0.01 A) or less when switched to the smallest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher output could
damage the airbag circuit or cause accidental airbag deployment and possible injury.
Whenever the ignition switch is ON (11), or has been turned OFF for less than 3 minutes, be careful not to bump the
SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
Before you remove the SRS main harness, disconnect the driver's airbag connector and the front passenger's airbag
connector.
Before you remove the SRS main harness or SRS floor harness, disconnect the driver's side airbag connector and
the front passenger's side airbag connector (on model with side airbags).
Make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. If the battery is dead or low, the measured values won't be correct.
Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect the terminals
with a jumper wire. Use only the backprobe set to backprobe spring-loaded lock type connectors (see step 1 on page
23-33).
Reading the DTC
When the SRS indicator light is on, read the DTC using either ofthe following methods:
Honda PGM Tester "SRS" Menu Method
Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the 16P DLC (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SRS" menu. If the
Tester indicates no DTC, DTC 9-1, or DTC 9-2, double-check by selecting "SCS" on the display, and watching the SRS
indicator light.
(cont'd)
23-41
BACK
SRS
Honda PGM Tester "ses" Menu Method (retrieving the flash codes) -'98-99 Models
The SRS indicator light (A) indicates the OTC by the number of blinks when the Honda PGM Tester (C) is connected to
the OLC (B).
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (C) to the OLC (16P)(B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the"SCS"menu (see the
Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual).
A
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). The SRS indicator light (A) comes on for about 6 seconds, and then goes off. Then
it will blink to indicate the OTCs (see the table below).
The OTC consists of a main code and a sub-code.
Including the most recent problem, up to 3 different malfunctions can be indicated.
In case of a continuous failure, the OTC will be indicated repeatedly (see example 1 below).
In case of an intermittent failure, the SRS indicator light will indicate the OTC one time, then it will stay on (see
example 2 below).
If a continuous and an intermittent failure occur at the same time, both OTCs will be indicated as continuous
failures.
When the system is normal (no OTCs), the SRS indicator light will stay on (see example 3).
1. Continuous failure, SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
S:Second
:: J, 2S 1f2S h US 'H].O.3S n
I ... t I I U I [.,-.,
check: Main code (21 Sub-code (11 Main code 111 Sub-code (21 Main code (11 Sub-code (1) are repeated
period , '------v-----' '-------y-' in case of
DTC 2-1 DTC 1-2 DTC 1-1 continuous
Most recent problem Second-most recent Third-most recent failure.
2. Intermittent failure, SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
problem problem
ON
OFF Light stays on in case of
Bulb check --: y intermittent failure.
period DTC 5-1
3. Normal (no failurel, SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
:: J
Bulb check light stays on.
period
4. Read the OTC (proceed with the troubleshooting procedure for this OTC).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds.
6. Oisconnectthe Honda PGM Testerfrom the OLC (16P).
23-42
BACK
Honda PGM Tester "SCS" Menu Method (retrieving
the flash codes) -'00-02 Models
The SRS indicator light (A) indicates the DTC by the
number of blinks when the Honda PGM Tester (C) is
connected to the DLC (16P) (B).
2. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (C) to the DLC (16P)
(B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS"
menu (see the Honda PGM Tester Operator's
Manual).
A
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). The SRS indicator
light (A) comes on for about 6 seconds, and then
goes off. Then it will blink to indicate the DTCs (see
the table below).
4. Read the DTC (proceed with the troubleshooting
procedure for this DTC).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10
seconds.
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester (C) from the
DLC (16P) (B).
Patterns of DTC Indications:
The DTC consists of a main code and sub-code.
5: Second
65 35 25 35
1-1-..--1 ---,1-1
ON
1---1
OFF
I-I I-I I-I
First emitting Main code 5ub-code
Reading the main code:
Incaseof1-10
Count the number of the blinks.
Example:
1.251.251.251.251.25
ON
1--1--1--1--1---1
OFF
Maincode=
+ + =3
In case of 11 - 15
Four continuous blinks count as ten.
Add any further blink together as shown.
Example:
0.15
~ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
ON
--I I I I I I I - I - ~ - - - I
OFF
Main code= 10
+
Reading the sub code:
Count the number of the blinks.
Example:
+
0.3 5 0.3 5 0.3 5 0.3 5 0.3 5 0.3 5 0.3 5
ON
1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1
OFF
5ubcode=
+ + +
In case of main code is '3', sub code is '4', record a
DTC 3-4.
=4
= 12
(cont'd)
23-43
BACK
SRS
Including the most recent problem, up to three different malfunctions can be indicated (see example 1 below).
In case of a continuous failure, the DTC will be indicated repeatedly (see example 1 below).
In case of an intermittent failure, the SRS indicator light will indicate the DTC one time, then it will stay on (see
example 2 below).
If both a continuous and an intermittent failure occur, both DTCs will be indicated as continuous failures.
When the system is normal (no DTCs), the SRS indicator light will stay on (see example 3).
If the SRS indicator light comes on continuously without a DTC, there may be a problem with the system.
If the SRS indicator light does not come on, always check for an open or a short to ground in the SCS circuit before
troubleshooting the system.
Example of the DTC Indications:
1. Continuous failure, SRS Indicetor Light blinks like this:
S:Second
OFF
.n. XL [dkafl .
check: I Main:: 12) (1) Main code 11) Sub-code 12) Main code 11) Sub-code 11) are repeated
penod 'y " ''-------y--' in case of
DTC 2-1 DTC 1-2 DTC 1-1 continuous
Most recent problem Second-most recent Third-most recent failure.
problem problem
ON
2. Intermittent failure, SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
ON
OFF

__ ...J _ '-__ ...... Indicator light stays on
in case of intermittent
Bulb check DTC 5.1 failure.
period
3. Normallno failure). SRS Indicator Light blinks like this:
:: JI-__ N. DTC. _em;' ...... t ,h,
Bulb check light stays on.
period
23-44
BACK
Erasing the DTC Memory
SCS Service Connector 07PAZ-0010100
To erase the DTC(s) from the SRS unit, use a Honda
PGM Tester (see the Honda PGM Tester SRS Vehicle
System Supplement) or the following procedure.
2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the MES
connector (2P)(B). Do not use a jumper wire.
B
07PAZ-0010100
4. The SRS indicator light will come on for about 6
seconds, and then go off. Remove the SCS service
connector from the MES connector (2P) within 4
seconds after the light goes off.
5. The SRS indicator light will come on again.
Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES
connector (2P) within 4 seconds after the light
comes on.
6. When the SRS indicator light goes off, remove the
SCS service connector from the MES connector (2
P) within 4 seconds.
7. The SRS indicator light will blink two times
indicating that the memory has been erased.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10
seconds.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) again. The SRS is
OK if the SRS indicator light comes on for 6
seconds, and then goes off.
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
If there was a malfunction, but it doesn't recur, it will be
stored in the memory as an intermittent failure, and the
SRS indicator light will come on.
After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follows:
1. Read the DTC (see "Reading the DTC").
2. Erase the DTC memory (see "Erasing the DTC
Memory").
3. With the shift lever in Park or neutral, start the
engine, and let the engine idle.
4. The SRS indicator light will come on for about 6
seconds and then go off.
5. Shake the wire harness and the connectors, take a
test drive (quick acceleration, quick braking,
cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left and
right, and hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds. If the
problem recurs, the SRS indicator light will come
on.
6. If you can't duplicate the intermittent failure, the
system is OK at this time.
(cont'd)
23-45
BACK
SRS
Initializing the OPDS (Occupant Position Detection System) Unit-'OO-02 Models with side
airbags
When a seat-back cover. seat-back cushion. and/or OPDS unit is replaced with a new one. initialize the OPDS by
following the procedure below.
1. Set the seat-back in the normal position. and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat.
2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. If it is not dry, start the engine, and turn on the air conditioning system
for 30 minutes to dry any moisture from it.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the DLC (16P) (B), and follow the Tester's prompts in the "SCS" menu (see
the Honda PGM Tester Operator's Manual).
5. Connect the SCS service connector (C) to the MES connector (2P) (D). Do not use a jumper wire.
D
A
7. The SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds and goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the
MES connector within 4 seconds after the SRS indicator light went off.
8. The SRS indicator light comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector within 4
seconds after the SRS indicator light comes on.
9. The SRS indicator light goes off. Remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector within 4 seconds.
10. Watch the SRS indicator light.
If the indicator light blinks two times and then stays on, the OPDS is initialized, but the DTCs need to be erased.
Go to step 11, then erase the DTCs.
If the indicator light blinks two times and then goes off, the OPDS unit is initialized. Go to step 11.
If the indicator light stays on without first blinking, the OPDS is not initialized. Read the DTC, and go to the
appropriate page in the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
11. Turn the ignition switch off, and disconnect the PGM Tester.
23-46
SRS indicator
light
MES
connector
terminals
ON
OFF
CONNECTED ---i--i
DISCONNECTED
Blinking

BACK
SRS Unit Identification
'98-02 Models
The troubleshooting procedures are different for each type of SRS unit. Identify the SRS unit in the vehicle using the
chart below, then follow the proper flow chart in the following pages. The identification mark is at the end of the model
number on the SRS unit.
MAKER IDENTIFICATION MARK NOTE
NEe M1 '98-02 Models
KEIHIN M2 '99 Model
SIEMENS M3 '98-02 Models
23-47
BACK
SRS
'98-99 Models
NEC (M1) SRS unit
DTC
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
5-1
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-6
9-1
9-2
10-1
23-48
Detection Item
Open in driver's airbag inflator
Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's
airbag inflator
Short to power in driver's airbag inflator
Short to ground in driver's airbC!g inflator
Open in front passenger's airbag inflator
Increased resistance in front l!assenger's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front
passenger's airbaj} inflator
Short to power in front passenger's airbag inflator
Short to ground in front passenger's airbag inflator
Internal failure of SRS unit
NOTE: Before troubleshooting DTCs 5-1 through 8-2,
check battery/system voltage. If voltage is low, repair
the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs.
Internal failure of SRS unit or two failures at a time
Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could
mean internal failure of the unit or a faulty indicator
light circuit. Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent
Failures (see page 23-45).
mean internal failure of the power supply (VB line).
Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-45).
SRS airbag deployed (SRS unit must be replaced)
Notes
(see page 23-74)
(see page 23-74)
(see page 23-76)
(see page 23-78)
(see page 23-80)
(see page 23-82)
(see page 23-82)
(see page 23-83)
(see page 23-85)
(seepage 23-86)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-89)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-88)
BACK
'99 Model
KEIHIN (M2) SRS unit
Dle Detection Item Notes
1-1 Open in driver's airbag inflator (seeJJage 23-74)
1-2 Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's (see page 23-76)
airbag inflator
1-4 Short topower in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-78)
1-5 Short to ground in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-80)
2-1 Open in front passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)
2-2 Increased resistance in front passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front (see page 23-83)
passenger's airbag inflator
2-4 Short to power in front passenger's airbajJ inflator (see p ~ 23-85)
2-5 Short to ground in front passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-86)
5-1 Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-106)
5-2 NOTE: Before troubleshooting DTCs 5-1 through 8-6,
5-3 check battery/system voltage. If voltage is low, repair
5-4 the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
9-1 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could (see page 23-106)
Failures (see ~ g 23-45).
9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could
page 23-45).
10-1 SRS airbag deployed (SRS unit must be replaced) (see page 23-88)
(cont'd)
23-49
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
'98-99 Models
SIEMENS (M3) SRS unit
DTC
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-5
5-1
5-4
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-6
9-1
9-2
10-1
23-50
Detection Item
Open or increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's
airbag inflator
Short to power in driver's airbag inflator
Short tog round in driver's airbag inflator
Open or increased resistance in front passenger's
i r b ~ inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front
Short to power in front passenger's airbag inflator
Short to ground in front passenger's airbag inflator
Internal failure of SRS unit
NOTE: Before troubleshooting DTCs 5-1 through 8-6,
check battery/system voltage. If voltage is low, repair
the charging system before troubleshooting the DTCs.
page 23-45).
SRS airbag deployed (SRS unit must be replaced)
Notes
(see page 23-74)
(see page 23-76)
(see ~ g e 23-78)
(see page 23-80)
(see page 23-82)
(see page 23-83)
(see page 23-85)
(see page 23-86)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-88)
BACK
'00 Model-Sedan-without side airbags
NEC (M1) SRS unit
DTC Detection Item Notes
1-1 Open in driver's airbaq inflator (see paqe 23-92)
1-2 Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-92)
airbaq inflator
1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator (see 23-96)
2-1 Open in front passenger's airbag inflator 23-100)
2-4 Short to power in front passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-103)
2-5 Short to !:Hound in front passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-104)
5-8
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
page 23-45).
9-3 Faulty driver'S seat belt buckle switch (see 23-204)
9-4 Faulty front passenqer's seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-208)
10-1 Airbags deployed (SRS unit must be replaced) (see 23-106)
(cont'd)
23-51
BACK
SRS
'00 Model-Sedan-with side airbags
DTC Detection Item
1-1 Open or increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's
airbaa inflator
1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator
1-5 Short to around in driver's airbag inflator
2-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger's
airbag inflator
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front
2-4 Short to power in front passenger's airbag inflator
2-5 Short to ground in front passenger's airbag inflator
5-1 Internal failure of SRS unit
6-3
6-4
6-7
6-8
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
mean internal failure ofthe unit or a faulty indicator
page 23-45).
9-3 Faulty driver's seat belt buckle switch
9-4 Faultv front passenger's seat belt buckle switch
23-52
Notes
(see page 23-92)
(see page 23-94)
(see page 23-96)
s e e p a ~ e 23-98)
(see page 23-100)
(see page 23-101)
(see page 23-103)
(see page 23-104)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-106)
(see a g e 23-204)
(see page 23-208)
BACK
10-1 Airbags deployed (see page 23-106)
10-2 Driver's side airbag deployed
10-3 Airbags and driver's side airbag deI!loyed
10-4 Front passenger's side airbag deployed
10-5 Airbags and front passenger's side airbag deployed
10-6 Driver's and front passenger's side airbag deployed
10-7 Airbags and driver's and front passenger's side airbags
deployed
11-1 Open or increased resistance in driver's side airbag (see page 23-108)
inflator
side airbag inflator
11-4 Short to power in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-111)
11-5 Short to ground in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-112)
12-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger's side (see page 23-114)
airbag inflator
passenger's side airbag inflator
12-4 Short to power in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 23-117)
12-5 Short to ground in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 23-118)
13-1 Internal failure of the driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-107)
13-2
13-3 No signal from the driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-120)
13-4 Faulty power supply to the driver's side imI!act sensor (see pajle 23-122)
14-1 Internal failure of the front passenger's side impact (see page 23-107)
14-2 sensor
14-3 No signal from the front passenger's side impact (see page 23-124)
sensor
14-4 Faulty power supply to the front passenger's side (see page 23-126)
impact sensor
15-1 Faulty_ OPDS unit or OPDS system not initialized (see page 23-128)
15-2 Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit (see page 23-133)
15-3 Faulty OPDS sensor (see page 23-138)
23-53
BACK
SRS
'00 Model-Coupe-without side airbags
NEC (M1) SRS unit
DTC Detection Item
1-1 Open in driver's airbag inflator
1-2 Increased resistance in driver's airbaginflator
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's
airbaJJ inflator
1-5 Short to ground in driver's airbl!Rinflator
2-1 Open in front passenger's airbag inflator
2-2 Increased resistance in front passenoer's airbaginflator
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front
2-5 Short to ground in front passenger's airbag inflator
5-2 NOTE: Before troubleshooting OTCs 5-1 through 8-6,
5-5 the charging system before troubleshooting the OTCs.
5-8
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
page 23-45).
9-3 Faultv driver's seat belt buckle switch
9-4 Faulty front passenger's seat belt buckle switch
10-1 Airbags deploved (SRS unit must be replaced)
23-54
Notes
(see paoe 23-92)
(see page 23-92)
(see page 23-94)
(see paoe 23-96)
(see page 23-98)
(see page 23-100)
(see page 23-100)
(see page 23-101)
(see page 23-103)
(see page 23-104)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-106)
(see page 23-204)
(see page 23-208)
(see page 23-106)
BACK
'00 Model-Coupe-with side airbags
1-1 Open or increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-92)
airbag inflator
1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-96)
2-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger's (see page 23-100)
airbag inflator
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front (see page 23-101 )
2-4 Short to power in front a s s e ~ e r s airbag inflator (see PClge 23-103)
6-3
6-4
6-7
6-8
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
page 23-45).
9-3 Faul!v driver'S seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-204)
9-4 Faulty front passenger's seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-208)
(cont'd)
23-55
BACK
SRS
10-1 Airbags deployed (see page 23-106)
10-2 Driver's side airbag deployed
10-3 Airbags and driver's side airbag deployed
10-4 Front passenger's side airbag deployed
10-5 Airbags and front passenger's side airbag deployed
10-6 Driver's and front Qassenger's side airbag deployed
10-7 Airbags and driver's and front passenger's side airbags
deployed
11-1 Open or increased resistance in driver's side airbag (see page 23-139)
inflator
11-4 Short to power in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-143)
12-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger's side (see page 23-147)
airbag inflator
passenger's side airbag inflator
13-1 Internal failure of the driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-107)
13-2
13-3 No signal from the driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-155)
13-4 Faulty power supply to the driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-157)
14-1 Internal failure of the front passenger's side impact (see page 23-107)
14-2 sensor
14-3 No signal from the front passenger's side impact (see page 23-159)
sensor
14-4 Faulty power supply to the front passenger's side (see page 23-161 )
impact sensor
15-1 Faulty OPDS unit or OPDS system not initialized (see page 23-163)
15-2 Faultyside airbag indicator light circuit (see page 23-168)
15-3 Faulty OPDS sensor (see page 23-173)
23-56
BACK
'01-02 Models-Sedan-without side airbags
NEC (M1) SRS unit
1-1 Open in driver's airbag inflator 23-174)
1-2 Increased resistance in driver's (see page 23-174)
1-3 Short to another wire or decresed resistance in driver's airbag (see page 23-176)
inflator
1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator (seej>aJle 23-178)
2-1 Open in front passenger's airbag inflator (see 23-182)
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's (see page 23-183)
airbag inflator
2-4 Short to power in front passenger's airbag inflator 23-185)
3-1 Open in left side seat belt tensioner (see 23-188)
3-2 Increased resistance in left side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-188)
3-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side seat belt (see page 23-190)
tensioner
3-4 Short to power in left side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-192)
3-5 Short to ground in left side seat belt tensioner 23-194)
4-1 Open in right side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-196)
4-2 Increased resistance in right side seat belt tensioner 23-196)
4-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side seat belt (see page 23-197)
tensioner
4-4 Short to power in left side seat belt tensioner (see page 23-199)
4-5 Short to ground in right side seat belt tensioner (see 23-200)
5-2 NOTE: Before troubleshooting DTCs 5-1 through 8-6, check battery/
5-3 system voltage. If voltage is low, repair the charging system before
5-4 troublshooting the DTCs.
5-5
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
9-1 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could mean internal (see page 23-202)
failure of the unit or a faulty indicator light circuit. Refer to
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see page 23-451.
9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could mean internal
failure of the power supply (VB line). Refer to troubleshooting
Intermittent Failures (see page 23-45).
9-3 Faultv driver's seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-204)
10-1 Seat belt tensioners (and airbag (s) ) deployed (see page 23-202)
(cont'd)
23-57
BACK
SRS
'01-02 Models
DTC Detection Item
1-1 Open or increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's airbag
inflator
1-5 Short to around in driver's airbag inflator
2-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger's airbag inflator
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's
airbag inflator
2-5 Short to ground in front passenger's airbC!Q inflator
3-1 Open or increased resistance in left side seat belt tensioner
3-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side seat belt
tensioner
3-4 Short to power in left side seat belt tensioner
3-5 Short to ground in left side seat belt tensioner
4-1 Open or increased resistance in right side seat belt tensioner
4-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side seat belt
tensioner
4-4 Short to power in left side seat belt tensioner
4-5 Short to ground in left side seat belt tensioner
5-2 NOTE: Before trobleshooting DTCs 5-1 through 8-8, check battery/
5-4 system voltage. If voltage is low, repair the charging system before
5-8 troubleshooting the DTCs.
6-3
6-4
6-7
6-8
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
23-58
Notes
(seeJ!age 23-174)
(see page 23-176)
(see_page 23-178)
(see page 23-180)
(see page 23-182)
(see page 23-183)
(see page 23-185)
(see page 23-186)
(see page 23-188)
(see page 23-190)
(see page 23-192)
( s e e ~ C g e 23-194)
(see page 23-196)
(see page 23-197)
(seeJ!age 23-199)
(see page 23-200)
(see page 23-202)
BACK
DTC
Detection Item Notes
9-1
Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could mean internal (see page 23-202)
failure of the unit or a faulty indicator light circuit. Refer to
Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see paQe 23-45).
9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, it could mean internal
failure of the power supply (VB line).Refer to Troubleshooting
Intermittent Failures (see page 23-45).
9-3 Faulty driver's seat belt buckle switch (see page 23-204)
10-1 Seat belt tensioners (and airbaQ(s)) deployed (see page 23-202)
10-2 Driver'S side airbag deployed
10-3 Seat belttensioners (and airbag(s)) and driver's side airbag
deployed
10-4 Front passenQer's side airbag deployed
10-5 Seat belt tensioners (and airbag(s)) and front passenger's side
airbag deployed
10-6 Driver'S and front passenger's side airbags deployed
10-7 Seat belttensioners (and airbag(s)) and driver's and front passenger's
side airbags deployed
11-'
Open or increased resistance in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-211)
11-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's side airbag (see page 23-212)
inflator
11-4 Short to power in driver'S side airbaQ inflator (see page 23-214)
12-1 Open or increased resistance in front passenger's side airbag (see page 23-218)
inflator
12-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's (see page 23-220)
13-1 Faulty driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-203)
13-2
13-3 No signal from the driver's side impact sensor (see p ~ e 23-226)
13-4 Faulty power supply to the driver's side impact sensor (see page 23-227)
14-1 Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor (see page 23-203)
14-2
14-3 No signal from the front passenger's side impact sensor (see page 23-229)
14-4 Faulty power supply to the front passenQer's side impact sensor (see page 23-230)
15-1 Faulty_ OPDS unit or OPDS system not initialized (see page 23-232)
15-2 Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit (see page 23-236)
15-3 Faulty OPDS sensor (see page 23-241 )
23-59
BACK
SRS
'98-99 Models
SRS indicator light doesn't come on SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting
(see page 23-242)
The SRS indicator light stays on SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting Inability to retrieve OTCs with the
when in "SCS" menu method (see step 1 on page 23-244) PGM Tester. Retrieve the flash
codes with the SCS mode (see page
23-42).
The SRS indicator light comes on SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting
for the bulb check, goes off, then (see step 1 on page 23-248)
comes back on after self-diagnosis,
but no OTCs are stored (NEC SRS
unit only)
'00 Model-Sedan
(see page 23-252)
23-43).
for the bulb check, goes off, then (see page 23-257)
unit only)
00 M d Ie o e- oupe
(see page 23-260)
23-43).
unit only)
23-60
BACK
'01-02 Models
(see page 23-265)
23-43).
unit only).
'00-02 Models
Side airbag indicator light stays on Make sure nothing is on the front
after bulb check passenger's seat
Make sure the front passenger's
seat isn't wet. If the seat is wet,
start the engine, and turn on the
air conditioning system for 30
minutes to dry any moisture from
the seat.
If the side airbag indicator light
stays on after the ignition switch
is turned ON (11), initialize the
OPOS unit (see page 23-46).
- Ifthe side airbag indicator light
operates normally, the system
is OK.
- If the side airbag indicator light
stays on, replace the OPOS
sensor (see section 20).
The sensor is part of the
seatback pad.
23-61
BACK
SRS
System Description
'98-99 Models
SRS Components
The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver
and front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists ofthe SRS unit, including
safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver'S airbag (C) and the front passenger's airbag (D).
B C
SRS Operation
The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charges. If
battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power
circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate:
(1) The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflators.
(3) The inflators must ignite and deploy the airbags.
DRIVER'S I
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRElAY
BOX
Self-diagnosis System
SRSUNIT
OLe MES SCS
CABLE
REEL
DRIVERS
AIRBAG
INFlATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AlRBAG
INFLATOR
A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light
comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds ifthe system is operating normally.
If the light does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an
abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
For better serviceability, the memory will store the cause ofthe malfunction, and the data link circuit passes on the
information from the memory to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM
Tester connected to the DLC (16P).
23-62
BACK
'00 Model
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front
passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists ofthe SRS unit, including safing
sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (e) and the front passenger's airbag (D).
Side Airbags
Some models are equipped with side airbags (E) which located in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper
torso of the driver or front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each
door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag.
Only one side airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side
airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.
OPOS
The side airbag system includes an Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G)
and an OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the
SRS unit. If the SRS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front
passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, it will automatically disable the airbag. The SRS unit will
also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the Side
Airbag indicator light on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side
impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag indicator light will go off, alerting
the driver that the side airbag will deploy in a side impact.
o A
c
G
(cont'd)
23-63
BACK
SRS
SRS Operation
circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(sl
(1) The frontal impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat
belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflator(s).
(3) The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbag(sl
(1) The side impact sensors must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the
microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag ifthe SRS unit determines that the front
passenger's head is in the deployment path ofthe side airbag.
(3) The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag.
DRIVER'S 1
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
SRSUNIT
DRIVER'S
AlRBAG
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
,
DRIVER'S '
SIDE AIABAG I
INfLATOR
FRONT ,
PASSENGER'S '
SIDE AIRBAG J
INFLATOR
----------

DlC MES SCS IDC
comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds ifthe system is operating normally.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is
connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is
connected to the DLC (16P).
23-64
BACK
'01-02 Models
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and front
passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing
sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front passenger's airbag (D), side airbags
(E), and seat belt tensioners (I).
Side Airbags
The side airbags (E) are in each front seat-back. They help protect the upper torso of the driver or front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side impact. Side impact sensors (F) in each door sill and in the SRS unit detect such an
impact and instantly inflate the driver's or the passenger's side airbag. Only one side airbag will deploy during a side
impact. If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.
Seat Belt Tensioner
The seat belt tensioner (I) is linked with the SRS airbags to further increase the effectiveness of the seat belt. In a front-
end collision, the tensioner instantly retracts the belt firmly to secure the occupants in their seats.
OPOS
The side airbag system includes an Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS). This system consists of sensors (G)
and an OPDS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS unit sends occupant height and position data to the
SRS unit. If the SRS unit determines that the front passenger is of small stature (for example, a child) and the front
passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment path, it will automatically disable the airbag. The SRS unit will
also disable the airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the Side
Airbag indicator light on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a side
impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the Side Airbag indicator light will go off, alerting
the driver that the side airbag will deploy in a side impact.
c B D
G
(cont'd)
23-65
BACK
SRS
SRS Operation
circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)
(1) The frontal impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals, and depending on the severity of the collision and whether the seat
belt buckle switch is ON or OFF, it sends the appropriate signals to the airbag inflators.
(3) The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbag(s).
Side Airbag(s)
(1) The side impact sensors must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2) The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the
microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines that the front
passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag.
(3) The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag(s).
(WIIhside airbag) ___ _
,-----
-- --:-1
FRONT DRIVER'S
PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S AlR8AG

TRIGGER CIRCUIT
7
scs IDC
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AlReAG
SECOND
INFlATOR
comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit is
connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester when it is
connected to the DLC (16P).
23-66
BACK
Circuit Diagram
'98-99 Models
UNDERHooD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100Al No.42 (SOA) BAT
BATTERY -@-
+ 1--+-oC""'\...C>---<f'"'V.:>-+-WHT BLKlYEL -----__.
IGI ...-___ +-____ ---,
TERMINAL NUMBER
\
FEMALE
CONNECTOR iliTERMINAL
NUMBER I
'\.. C3 2
C4 T\
BLK
G501
FRONT
MALE
TERMINAL
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
INFLATOR
I I
GRN GRN
(YEL) (BLUIYEL)
GRN
(BLK I)
GOOl
GRN
(BRN)
GRN
(BLK2)
IGI HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
I
GRN
SRS INDICATOR CIRCUIT
(In .he gauge assembly)
CABLE
REEL
SRS INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4W)
BLU
GRN
(GRN) (BLU)
SRS UNIT
GRN GRN
(L T GRN/RED) (RED)
31 21

I I
I
LTBLU BRN
9 9
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(DLC)
YEL
DASHBOARD
WIRE
HARNESS
GRN GRN
No.2
(lOA)
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
SRSMAIN
HARNESS
(REDIBLU) (BLKlWHT)
18
GRN GRN SRSMAIN
(BLK3) (L T GRNlBLK) HARNESS
21
"
I I
MEMORY ERASE
SIGNAL elMES)
CONNE TOR
23-67
BACK
SRS
'00 Model-Sedan
23-68
BATTERY
UNDERHOOD
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
YElJGRN
DASHBOARD
11 WIRE HARNESS A
16
I
G501
GAUGE
ASSEMBlY
No.2
(lOA)
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
INFLATOR
~
RED RED
1 1 21
I I
, ,
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
~ ~ ~ ~ ~
BlK BLK RED RED RED RED
/ , 21 I ~ I '==:::::::1:===:=' ==:!:J' I
, , 1 , 4'
GRN GRN GRN GRN
(GRNlBLK) (BLUlYEL) (REDlYEL)
SRSUNIT
G R N - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - -
G501
6
I I I I I
BLU GRN YElJGRN BLK YELIBLU BLU
BLU
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS A
OPDS I
41
UNIT
HARNESS 7
31 1 1 21
I
31 21
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH
I
GRN
(BLK)
Gaol
SRS
MAIN
HARNESS
Bn
G501
5
I
BLK
SRSFLOOR
11
HARNESS
BACK
(Wnh side airbag)
ITl : WIth heated seal
II] : WlthouI haatad sail
,---
----------------------
SRS
FLOOR
HARNESS
FRONT
SIDE AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
: r@l r@l
I
RED REO REO RED
I I I I
'I 1 211 'I 1 21'
GRN GRN GRN GRN
(GRNlYEL) (REDIYEL) (REO)
4
6
BRN
SRSUNIT
DRIVER'S
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
4
- REDIBLU --+----+---------....
DRIVER'S
UNDER-OASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
9 14
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
I
12
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
LTGRNlBLK
DASHBOARD 1
WIRE HARNESS A
LEFT SIDE
WIRE
HARNESS
2
SRSMAIN
HARNESS
W
BLK
REDIBLU BLUIRED
1 2 3
I
~ ~ J
GRN GRN
<'U
GS51
DATA"LlNK
CONNECTOR
(OLC) (t6P)
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH
MEMORY ERASE
SIGNAL (MES)
CONNECTOR (2P)
23-69
BACK
SRS
'00 Model-Coupe
BATTERY
UNDERHooD
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
IGl HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
INFLATOR
rSl
RED RED
1 1 21
I I
1 1
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
FIRST
INFLATOR
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
BlK
DRIVER'S UNDERDASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
H ~ ~
Lf---f-J REEL
rE1rE1
23-70
YEL YEIJGRN
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS A
11
16
I
G501
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
No.2
(lOA)
G561
GRN
BLK BLK
1 1 21
i I
1 1
GRN GRN
(BRN)
RED RED RED RED
1 1 I I
I ,
1 1 41
GRN GRN
(BLUlYEl) (WHT)
SRSUNIT
5
G801
SRS
MAIN
HARNESS
SRS
MAIN
HARNESS
----+-------+--.... ----+--+--- REDIBLU -
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS A
BLU --+---il------..
10
OPDS
UNIT
10 1 11 1
BLUIWHT BLK
31 BL2jRN d
~ I *===::=== I
..---1--1---.
,.t:=========::L, HARNESS FRONT
PASSENGER'S BUCKLED
G581
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH
'----t--........
RIGHT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
BACK
(WHh side airbag)
i--
FRONT
SIDEAIRBAG SIDEAIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
re, re,
DRIVER'S
FRONT
RED RED SIDE IMPACT RED RED
PASSENGER'S
SIDE IMPACT
I I
SENSOR
I I
SENSOR
I I I I
LEFT SIDE
' 1
21
,
RIGHT SIDE ' 1
21
WIRE REDIVEL RED
HARNESS
I I
I
21
' 1
GRN GRN
SRS
(REDIVEL) (RED)
MAIN
4
HARNESS
21
LTGRN
41
I
LTGRN
9
DRIVER'S
UNDER,DASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
GRNIWHT GRNiORN WIRE
I 1
HARNESS
31 41
I
GRN GRN
(GRNIWHT) (GRNlORN)
6
BRN
51
I
BRN
14
SRS UNIT
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
BLUIVEL YEL REDIWHT RED/BLU BLU
1 1 I I
~ I
21
' 1
31 41
I
T
GRN GRN GRN GRN GRN
(BLU/YEL) (YEL) (REDIWHT) (REDIBLU) (BLU)
8
BLU/RED
SRS MAIN
HARNESS L T GRNIBLK BLK
81
RE.a" I
WIRE HARNESS A
DASHBOARD
BLU/RED
1..
12 8
2
LEFT SIDE
WIRE
HARNESS
,1 d
MEMORY ERASE
SIGNAL (MES)
CONNECTOR (2P)
LTGRN 9
BRN
nBLK
~ ~ ~
-------..---.- G ~ 1 ~
DRIVER'S
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC) (16P)
RIGHT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH
RIGHT SIDE
WIRE
HARNESS
7f
BLU
23-71
BACK
SRS
'01-02 Models
23-72
BATTERY
YEL YEl/GRN VA VB
11
16
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS A
SRS
INDICATOR
CIRCUIT
SAS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
I
G501
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
FIRST
INFLATOR
5
DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
SECOND
INFLATOR
FRONT FRONT

AlRBAG AIRBAG
FIRST SECOND
INFLATOR INFLATOR
SRSUNIT

BLU
OPDS
UNIT
HARNESS
5 6
GRN YEUGRN BLK
31
d d
I I I
I
GRN WHT/RED BLK
LEFT SIDE
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
LEFT
SIDE WIRE
HARNESS
3
RIGHT SIDE
SEAT BELT
TENSIONER
BLU YEUBLU
4
ON:UN
BUCKLED
FRONT

ON: SEAT BELT
BUCKLED BUCKLE
SWITCH
BACK
side airbag)
-------------
FRONT
SIDE AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR INFLATOR
...c:;:;:;.., FRONT
I \.;,J 1 DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S I \.;,J I
RED RED SIDE IMPACT SIDE IMPACT RED RED
I I SENSOR SENSOR I I
n
2
LEFT 1 R,GHT n
2
SIDE W,RE SIDE WIRE
HARNESS HARNESS
III : Sedan
m : Coupe
*1 :5edan
*2 : Coupe
------,
EL --T .:r 'r-JT l ',EDrl Rr __
1_'21 , _2-, L L 3
1
__ "21 __ II' _TI
12 13
,-,
- ,
G801
,
i
*1
1,3 :
SRS
- I
MAIN 1
HARNESS 4
--
-9'--1 --.
-"41
-
13
-&-1 11 i-----7 -
-- ----- ----------
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
SRS UNIT
41 81 21 &1
(WIth heated 1-(WI_,tho_ut_he_at_:_d-sea::t)::::_-_- __ R_E....
! I 1: :) , 12 .
lTIJ
' DRIVER'S , WIRE DATAUNK
20 9 UNDER-DASH HARNESS CONNECTOR
I UNIT (DLC)(16P)
,
,
,
I
I
REDIBLU BlUIRED
I
(Wrth power seat)
! ,2
1
-- d 1 -- 1 1 - DRIVER'S 1
POWER SEAT
BLK i BLK REDlBlU BLUIRED WIRE
G551
L,1- 21 _3_"'I __
,
I

ON: UN-

I
I
L------i ON:
I
I
I
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
BUCKLE
SWITCH
1 1
lTGRNlBLK
2
BlK
G501
MEMORY
ERASE
SIGNAL IMES)
CONNECTOR
(2P)
23-73
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '98-99 Models
DTC 1-1: Open in driver's airbag inflator
DTC 1-2: Increased resistance in driver's
airbag inflator
1. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-45).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator light stay on?
YES - Go to step 3.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-45).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector from
the cable reel 2P connector (A).
A

C?:
,-0
5. Connect the special tool (2 Q connector) to the
cable reel connector.
23-74
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
7. Erase the DTC memory.
8. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 1-1 or DTC 1-2 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the driver's
airbag inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
23278) .
9. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the cable reel 2P connector from the
SRS main harness 2P connector (A).
07TAZSZ5011A
11. Connect the special tool (2 Q connector) to the SRS
main harness 2P connector.
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the cable reel;
replace the cable reel (see page 23-289) .
3 minutes.
16. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P
connector (A).
A
17. Disconnect the SRS main harness 18P
connector (A) from the SRS unit.
A
18. Check resistance between the No.1 terminal and
the No. 13 terminal of the SRS main harness 18P
connector. There should be 2.0 - 3.0 Q.
SRS MAIN HARNESS 18P CONNECTOR
r---1 1
1/
3
:/
6 7 8 9
10
V V
13 14 15 16 17 18
Q
I
Wire side of femal e
terminals.
Is the resistance as specified?
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the SRS
main harness 18P connector and the SRS unit.
Check the connection between the SRS main
harness 18P connector and the SRS unit. If the
connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
23-295) .
NO-Open or increased resistance in the SRS main
harness; replace the SRS main harness .
23-75
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '98-99 Models (cont'd)
DTC 1-3: Short to another wire or decreased
resistance in driver's airbag inflator.
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A

/07SAZ-.-llA
,-0
cable reel 2P connector.
23-76
8. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 1-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short in the driver's airbag; replace the
driver's airbag (see page 23-278) .
3 minutes.
07TAZ-SZ5011A
14. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO- Short in the cable reel; replace the cable reel
(see page 23-289) .
BACK
3 minutes.
connector (A) from the SRS main harness 2P
connector (B).
B
A
17. Disconnect the special tool from the SRS main
harness 2P connector.
18. Disconnectthe SRS main harness 18P
A
the No. 13 terminal of the SRS main harness 18P
connector. There should be 1 M Q or more.
10
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
YES - Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-295) .
NO- Short in the SRS main harness; replace the
SRS main harness .
23-77
BACK
SRS
DTC 1-4: Short to power in driver's airbag
inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnectthe
A
f .
q:
,-0
23-78
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO- Short to power in the driver's airbag; replace
the driver's airbag (see page 23-278) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the cable reel2P connector from the
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
NO - Short to power in the cable reel; replace the
cable reel (see page 23-289) .
3 minutes.
connector (8).
B
A
A
20. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal of the
SRS main harness 18P connector and body ground,
and between the No. 13 terminal and body ground.
There should be 0.5 V or less.
=
10
=
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
Is the voltage as specified?
page 23-295) .
NO - Short to power in the SRS main harness;
replace the SRS main harness .
23-79
BACK
SRS
DTC 1-5: Short to ground in driver's airbag
inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A

/075AZ-1840".
,0
23-80
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's airbag inflator;
replace the driver's airbag (see page 23-278) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the SRS main harness 2P connector
from the cable reel 2P connector (A).
07TAZ-SZ5011A
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 15.
NO- Short to ground in the cable reel; replace the
3 minutes.
connector (8).
B
A
A
18. Check resistance between the No.1 terminal of the
SRS main harness 18P connector and body ground,
There should be 1 M Q or more.
10
=
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
YES- Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-295) .
NO-Short to ground in the SRS main harness;
23-81
BACK
SRS
DTC 2-1: Open in passenger's airbag inflator
DTC 2-2: Increased resistance in passenger's
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector from the SRS main harness 2P
connector (A).
23-82
5. Connect the special telol (2 Q connector) to the SRS
main harness 2P conrlector.
6. Reconnect the batter" negative cable.
8. Read the DTC.
Is ore 2-1 or 2-2 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the front
passenger's airbag inflator; replace the front
passenger's airbag (see page 23-280) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A)
from the cable reel 2P connector (8).
A
BACK
A
12. Check resistance between the No. 10 and No. 14
terminals ofthe SRS main harness 18P connector.
There should be 2.0-3.0 Q.
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
YES- Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the SRS
unit connector; check the connection between the
SRS main harness 18P connector and the SRS unit.
If the connector is OK, replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-295) .
resistance in passenger's airbag inflator.
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
~
~
(cont'd)
23-83
BACK
SRS
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short in the front passenger's airbag inflator;
replace the front passenger's airbag (see page 23-
280) .
3 minutes.
A
23-84
(A) from the SRS unit.
A
terminals ofthe SRS main harness 18P connector.
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
page 23-295) .
SRS main harness .
BACK
DTC 2-4: Short to power in passenger's
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's airbag
inflator; replace the front passenger's airbag (see
page 23-280) .
3 minutes.
from the cable reel 2P connector (8), and
disconnect the special tool from the SRS main
A
(cont'd)
23-85
BACK
SRS
A
14. Check for voltage between the No.1 0 terminal of
the SRS main harness 18P connector and body
ground, and between the No. 14 terminal and body
ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.
= =
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
page 23-295) .
NO- Short to power in the SRS main harness;
23-86
DTC 2-5: Short to ground in passenger's
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the passenger's airbag
inflator; replace the passenger's airbag (see page
23-280) .
3 minutes.
from the cable reel 2P connector (B), and
A
(A) from the SRS unit.
A
12. Check resistance between the No. 10 terminal of
ground,and between the No. 14 terminal and body
ground.There should be 1 M Q or more.
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side offemale
terminals.
page 23-295) .
NO- Short to ground in the SRS main harness;
23-87
BACK
SRS
OTe Troubleshooting - '98-99 Models (cont'd)
DTC 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-8, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4,
6-7,6-8, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 8-1, 8-2, 8-5, 8-6, 9-1, 9-2:
Internal Failure of the SRS unit
Note: Before Troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check
batterysystem voltage. If the voltage is low, repair the
charging system before troubleshooting the SRS.lf the
battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the customer if
the battery ever went dead.
and then goes off.
YES - Replace the SRS unit (see page 23-295) .
page 23-45).
23-88
DTC 10-1: Airbags deployed
The SRS unit must be replaced after any airbags have
deployed (see page 23-295).
BACK
DTC 8-6: Internal Failure of SRS unit, or two
Failures at a time
Besides indicating an abnormality in the SRS unit, DTe
8-6 may also indicate that two problems equivalent to
DTe 1-1 and 2-4,1-4 and 2-1, or 1-4 and 2-4 occurred at
the same time. Proceed in the order shown below.
1. Erase the DTe memory (see page 23-45).
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag and front passenger's
airbag connectors (A).
A
A
(cont'd)
23-89
BACK
SRS
connector (A) from the SRS unit (B).
A
8. Check for voltage between the No.1 0 terminal of
ground, and between the No. 14 terminal and body
ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
YES-Go to step 9.
23-90
9. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal ofthe
SRS main harness 1ap connector and body ground,
10
=
6 7 8 9
16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals.
page 23-295) .
NO-Goto step 10.
BACK
11. Disconnect the cable reel 2P connector (A) from the
SRS main harness 2P connector (8).
B
SRS main harness 18P connector and body gro.!.Jnd,
and between No. 13 terminal and body ground.
=
10
=
6 7 8 9
15 16 17 18
Wire side offemale
terminals.
YES-Short to power in the cable reel; replace the
NO-Shortto power in the SRS main harness;
23-91 BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Model
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Goto step 3.
page 23-45).
cable reel connector.
23-92
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
airbag inflator; replace the driver's airbag assembly
(see page 23-278) .
3 minutes.
A
07SAZ TB4011A

0.-
07TAZSZ5011A
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the cable reel;
replace the cable reel (see page 23-289) .
3 minutes.
connector (A).
A
17. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (18P) from the
SRS unit.
A
the No. 16 terminal of SRS unit connector A (18P).
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (18P)
3 4 5 6
12 13 14 15
Wire side offemale
terminals
YES- Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit
connector A (18P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection between the connector and the SRS
unit. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit
(see page 23-296) .
23-93
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Model (cont'd)
OTe 1-3: Short to another wire or decreased
resistance in driver's airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A

q::
-.0
23-94
8. Read the DTC.
Is OTe 1-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the driver's airbag; replace the
3 minutes.
A
07TAZ-SZ5011A
07SAZTB4011A
12. Reconnectthe battery negative cable.
14. Read the DTC.
Is OTe 13 indicated?
NO - Short in the cable reel; replace the cable reel
(see page 23-289) .
BACK
3 minutes.
connector (8).
A
SRS unit.
A
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (18PI
3 4 5 6
12 13 14 15
Wire side of female
terminals
page 23-296) .
SRS main harness .
23-95
BACK
SRS
inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
23-96
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
3 minutes.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
~
~
07TAZ-SZ5011A
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
NO-Short to power in the cable reel; replace the
3 minutes.
connector (B), and disconnect the special tool from
the SRS main harness 2P connector.
A
SRS unit.
A
20. Check for voltage between the No.7 terminal of
SRS unit connector A (18P) and body ground,
345 6
12 13 14 15
-=
-=
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to power in the SRS main harness;
23-97
BACK
SRS
inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A

/07SAZ-T84011A

23-98
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the driver's airbag inflator;
3 minutes.
from the cable reel 2P connector (A).
07TAZ-SZ50 11 A
BACK
14. Read the DTC.
VES- Go to step 15.
NO - Short to ground in the cable reel; replace the
3 minutes.
connector (8), and disconnect the special tool from
A
SRS unit.
A
18. Check resistance between the No.7 terminal of
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (1ap)
345 6
12 13 14 15
Wire side offemale
terminals
=
=
VES- Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-296) .
23-99
BACK
SRS
DTC2-1: Open in passenger's airbag inflator
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011 A

0::
23-100
8. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 2-1 or 2-2 indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the front
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the driver'S airbag 2P connector (A)
from the cable reel 2P connector (B).
A
BACK
SRS unit.
A
12. Check resistance between the No.6 and No. 15
terminals and between the No.5 and No. 14
terminals of SRS unit connector A (18P). There
should be 2.0-3.0 Q.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A 118P)
Wire side of female
terminals
page 23-296) .
resistance in passenger's airbag inflator.
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
-07XAZ-SZ30100
5. Connect the special tool (2 Q connectors) to the
SRS main harness 2P connector.
(cont'd)
23-101
BACK
SRS
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the front passenger's airbag inflator;
280) .
3 minutes.
B
A
23-102
SRS unit.
A
terminals of the SRS main harness 18P connector.
Wire side of female
terminals.
YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-296) .
SRS main harness .
BACK
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
-07XAZ-SZ30100
5. Connect the special tool (2 .Q connector) to the SRS
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to power in the front passenger's airbag
page 23-280) .
3 minutes.
A
(cont'd)
23-103
BACK
SRS
SRS unit.
A
between the No. 15 terminal and body ground,
between the No.5 terminal and body ground, and
between the No. 14 terminal and body ground.
Wire side of female
terminals
page 23-296) .
23-104
airbag inflator
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (H),and check that the
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
-07XAZ-SZ30100
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the passenger's airbag
23-280) .
3 minutes.
B
A
SRS unit.
A
between No. 14 terminal and body ground. There
should be 1 M Q or more.
Wire side of female
terminals
- =
page 23-296) .
23-105
BACK
SRS
DTC 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-5, 5-8, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-7,
6-8, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 8-1 to 8-8, 9-1, 9-2: Internal
Failure of the SRS unit
Note: Before Troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check
the battery/system voltage. If the voltage is low, repair
the charging system before troubleshooting the SRS. If
the battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the customer
if the battery ever went dead.
,. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-45).
and then goes off.
page 23-45).
23-106
DTC 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7:
Airbags, side airbags and/or seat belt
tensioners deployed
BACK
DTC 13-1, 13-2: Internal Failure of the driver's
side impact sensor
and then goes off.
YES-Replace the driver's side impact sensor
(Sedan) (see page 23-297) (Coupe) (see page 23-
298) .
page 23-45).
DTC 14-1, 14-2: Internal Failure of the front
passenger's side impact sensor
and then goes off.
YES - Replace the front passenger's side impact
sensor (Sedan) (see page 23-297) (Coupe) (see
page 23-298) .
page 23-45).
23-107
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan with Side Airbags
DTC 11-1: Open or increased resistance in
driver's side airbag inflator
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check that the
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connector (A)
from the driver's side airbag (B).
B
A
07TAZ-SZ5011A
j
SAZ
OTB40".
-0
floor harness 2P connector.
23-108
8. Read the DTC.
/sDTC 11-1 indicated?
YES- Go to step 9.
side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side
airbag (see page 23-282) .
3 minutes.
from the front passenger's side airbag (B).
B
A
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (14P) from the
SRS unit. Do not disconnect the special tool from
the SRS floor harness 2P connector.
BACK
terminals of SRS unit connector 8(14P). There
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit
connector 8 (14P) and the SRS unit; check the
connection. If the connector is OK, replace the SRS
unit (see page 23-296) .
NO-Open or increased resistance in the SRS floor
harness; replace the SRS floor harness .
resistance in driver's side airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
3 minutes.
from the driver's side airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07TAZSZ5011A
/
'-0
(cont'd)
23-109
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan with Side Airbags (cont'd)
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to another wire in the driver's side
airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see
page 23-282) .
3 minutes.
from the front passenger's side airbag (8).
A
11. Disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor
12. Disconnect SRS unit connector 8 (14P) from the
SRS unit.
B
23-110
terminals of SRS unit connector 8 (14P). There
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to another wire in the SRS floor
BACK
DTC 11-4: Short to power in driver's side
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
B
A
07TAZ-SZ5011A
lSAZ.TIWl11 A
~
8. Read the DTC.
/sDTC 11-4 indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO-Shortto power in the driver's side airbag
inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see page
23-282) .
3 minutes .
from the front passenger's side airbag (B), and
disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor
B
A
(cont'd)
23-111
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan with Side Airbags (co nt' d)
SRS unit.
12. Check resistance between the No. 13 and No.6
terminals of SRS unit connector 8 (14P), and
between the No. 13 and No.7 terminals. There
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to power in the SRS floor harness;
replace the SRS floor harness .
23-112
DTC 11-5: Short to ground in driver's side
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07T AZ-SZ5011 A
/
'-0
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the driver's side airbag
23-282) .
3 minutes.
from the front passenger's side airbag (8), and
disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor
A
SRS unit.
B
terminals of SRS unit connector 8 (14P), between the
No. 13 and No. 12 terminals, and between the
No. 13 terminal and body ground.
There should be 1 MQ or more.
Wire side of female
terminals
567
13 14
.Q
=
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to ground in the SRS floor harness;
23-113
BACK
SRS
front passenger's side airbag inflator.
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

H-
07TAZ-SZ5011A
23-114
8. Read the DTC.
YES - Go to step 9.
passenger's side airbag inflator, replace the front
passenger's side airbag (see page 23-282) .
3 minutes.
A
BACK
the SRS floor harness 2P connector.
B
should be 2.0 - 3.0 Q.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B 114P)
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit
NO-Open or increased resistance in the SRS floor
resistance in front passenger's side airbag
inflator.
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
from the passenger's side airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0-
07TAZ-SZ50 11 A
(cont'd)
23-115
BACK
SRS
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9
NO - Short to another wire in the front passenger's
side airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's
side airbag (see page 23-282) .
3 minutes.
A
11. Disconnect the special tool from the SRS floor
23-116
SRS unit.
B
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to another wire in the SRS floor
BACK
DTC 12-4: Short to power in front passenger's
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0-
07TAZ-SZ5011A
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the front passenger's side
airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's side
3 minutes.
from the front driver's side airbag (8).
A
SRS unit.
(cont'd)
23-117 BACK
SRS
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to power in the SRS floor harness;
23-118
OTe 12-5: Short to ground in front passenger's
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0-
07TAZ-SZ5011A
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the front passenger's side
airbag inflator, replace the front passenger's side
3 minutes.
A
SRS unit.
12. Check resistance between the No.1 4 and No.1 1
terminals of SRS unit connector 8 (14P), between the
No. 14 and No. 12 terminals, and between the
No. 14 terminal and body ground.
Wire side of female
terminals
5 6 7
14
Q
page 23-296) .
NO - Short to ground in the SRS floor harness;
23-119
BACK
SRS
DTC 13-3: No signal from the driver's side
impact sensor
SRS indicator light comes on for about six seconds
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
negative battery cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
A
5. Check the connection at the SRS floor harness 2P
connector and the driver'S side impact sensor.
Is the connection OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Poor contact at the SRS floor harness 2P
connector; reconnect or replace SRS floor
harness .
23-120
A
from the driver's side impact sensor (8).
/
07XAZ-S1A0100
8. Connectthe special tool to the SRS floor harness
2P connector.
BACK
SRS unit.
B
SRS unit connector B (14P) and the No.2 terminal
of the special tool. There should be 0-1.0 Q.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the SRS floor harness; replace the
SRS floor harness .
ofthe special tool. There should be 0-1.0 Q.
SPECIAL
TOOL
YES- Faulty driver's side impact sensor or SRS
unit; replace the driver's side impact sensor (see
page 23-297). If the problem is still present, replace
the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
NO- Open in the SRS floor harness; replace the
SRS floor harness .
23-121
BACK
SRS
OTC 13-4: Faulty power supply to the driver's
side impact sensor.
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connectors (A)
from the driver's and front passenger's side
airbags (8).
B
A
B
A
23-122
from the driver's side impact sensor (8).
~
. ~ ~ . .
SRS unit.
BACK
SRS unit connector B (14P) and body ground. There
7
14
=
/s the resistance as specified?
VES- Go to step 8.
NO-Short to ground in the SRS floor harness;
terminals of SRS unit connector B (14P). There
VES- Faulty driver's side impact sensor or SRS
NO - Short to another wire in the SRS floor
23-123
BACK
SRS
DTC 14-3: No signal from the front
passenger's side impact sensor.
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
from the front passenger's side airbag (B).
B
A
5. Check the connection at the SRS floor harness 2P
connector and the front passenger's side impact
sensor.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO - Poor contact at the SRS floor harness 2P
connector; reconnect or replace SRS floor
harness .
23-124
A
from the front passenger's side impact sensor (B).
07XAZ-S1A0100
8. Connect the SRS floor harness 2P connector to the
special tool.
BACK
SRS unit.
of the special tool. There should be 0-1.0 Q.
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
SRS floor harness .
of the special tool. There should be 0 -1.0 Q.
SPECIAL
TOOL
YES-Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor
or SRS unit; replace the front passenger's side
impact sensor (see page 23-297). If the problem is
still present, replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .

SRS floor harness .
23-125
BACK
SRS
OTC Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan with Side Airbags (cont'd)
DTC 14-4: Faulty power supply to the front
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the SRS floor harness 2P connectors
airbags.
A
A
23-126
from the front passenger's side impact sensor (8).
SRS unit.
BACK
=
VES- Go to step 8.
NO-Short to ground in the SRS floor harness;
VES- Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor

NO-Shortto another wire in the SRS floor
23-127
BACK
SRS
DTC 15-1: Faulty OPDS unit
1. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
2. Initialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-46).
4. Read the DTC.
/s DTC 15-1 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
page 23-45).
/s the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Go to step 13.
6. Disconnect OPDS unit connector 0 (8P) from the
OPDS unit (8).
o
B
23-128
OPDS unit connector 0 (8P) and body ground.
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR 0 (BPI
=
NO- Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the SRS floor harness 6P connector C505 (A)
from the dashboard wire harness A 6P connector (8).
A
BACK
dashboard wire harness 6P connector C505 and
body ground. There should be battery voltage.
6P CONNECTOR C505
=
2
6
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Open in the SRS floor harness or OPDS unit
harness; if the OPDS unit harness is OK, replace the
SRS floor harness .
NO-Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace
dashboard wire harness A.
13. Replace the No.7 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box .
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds, then
turn it OFF.
15. Check the No.7 (7.5A) fuse in driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Finished .
NO-Gotostep 16.
16. Replace the No.7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
17. Disconnect dashboard wire harness connector I
(18P) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
turn it off.
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
NO-Shortto ground in the No.7 (7.5A) fuse
circuit; refer to section 22 and continue
troubleshooti ng .
20. Disconnect the SRS floor harness 6P connector
C505 (A) from the dashboard wire harness A 6P
connector (8).
A
(cont'd)
23-129
BACK
SRS
21. Connectthe dashboard wire harness 18P connector
to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
22. Turn ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds, then
turn it OFF.
23. Check the No.7 (7.SA) fuse in driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Go to step 24.
NO- Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A;
replace dashboard wire harness A..
24. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness 8P connector (A)
from the OPDS unit (8).
A
B
2S. Reconnect the SRS floor harness 6P connector
CSOS (A) to the dashboard wire harness A 6P
connector (8).
A
23-130
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds.
Then turn it OFF.
27. Check the No.7 (7.S A) fuse in the driver's under-
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see
page 23-300) .
NO-Short to ground in the SRS floor harness or
OPDS unit harness; if the OPDS unit harness is OK,
OPDS unit connector D (8P) and body ground.
There should be 0 -1.0 Q.
OPOS UNIT CONNECTOR 0 (BP)
=
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Open in the SRS floor harness or OPDS unit
harness; if OPDS unit harness is OK, replace the
SRS floor harness .
BACK
30. Disconnect the side airbag connectors (A).
SRS unit.
B
SRS unit connector 8 (14P) and body ground. There
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
=
YES- Go to step 33.
NO-Short to ground in the SRS floor harness or
the OPDS unit harness; if the OPDS unit harness is
OK, replace the SRS floor harness .
SRS unit connector B (14P) and No.7 terminal of
OPDS unit connector 0 (BP). There should be
0-1.0 Q.
Q
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (SPI
4
8
YES- Go to step 34.
NO-Open in the SRS floor harness or the OPDS
unit harness; if the OPDS unit harness is OK,
(cont'd)
23-131
BACK
SRS
should be 0.5 V or less.
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
NO- Short to power in the SRS floor harness or
37. Install a known-good OPDS unit.
38. Reconnect all connectors.
39. Initialize the OPDS unit.
41. Read the DTC.
NO- Finished .
23-132
side airbag indicator light comes on for about 5
Does the side airbag indicator stay on?
YES - Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the
OPDS unit (see page 23-300). If the problem is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
NO-Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit; Go to
troubleshooting DTC 15-2 .
BACK
DTC 15-2: Faulty side airbag indicator light
circuit.
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 4.
page 23-45).
side airbag indicator light comes on.
Does the side airbag indicator light come on?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 6.
5. Make sure the side airbag indicator light comes on
for 5 seconds and then goes off.
Does the side airbag indicator light go off?
YES- Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the
OPDS unit (see page 23-300). Ifthe problem is still
NO- Go to step 36.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Short to ground in the No.9 (7.5 A) fuse
circuit; refer to section 22 and continue
troubleshooting .
8. Check for a blown side airbag indicator bulb.
Is the side airbag indicator bulb OK?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Blown side airbag indicator bulb; replace the
bulb .
9. Disconnect OPDS unit connector D (8P) from the
OPDS unit (B).
o
B
11. Check for voltage between No.3 terminal of OPDS
unit connector D (8P) and body ground. There
should be battery voltage.
OPOS UNIT CONNECTOR 0 (8P)
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO - Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
23-133
BACK
SRS
13. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness connector
I (18P) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (8P)
VES- Faulty OPOS unit; replace the OPOS unit (see
page 23-300).
NO-Go to step 16.
23-134
17. Disconnect gauge assembly connector B (22P) from
the gauge assembly.
--
B
=
VES- Short to power in the gauge assembly;
replace the gauge assembly .
NO - Go to step 20.
BACK
connector (8).
A
=
YES- Short to power in dashboard wire harness A;
NO- Short to power in the SRS floor harness or the
25. 8ackprobe the No. 17 terminal of gauge assembly
connector 8 (22P). Do not disconnect the connector
from the gauge assembly.
27. Check for voltage between the No. 17 terminal of
gauge assembly connector 8 (22P) and body
ground. There should be battery voltage.
GAUGE ASSEMBL V CONNECTOR B (22P)
2
11 12
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Go to step 28.
NO- Go to step 32.
=
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
connector (8).
A
(cont'd)
23-135
BACK
SRS
dashboard wire harness A 6P connector (CS51) and
6P CONNECTOR (CBS11
3
2
6
Wire side of female
terminals
YES - Poor contact at the dashboard wire harness
A 6P and SRS floor harness 6P connectors or an
open in the SRS floor harness. Check the
connection between the dashboard wire harness A
6P and SRS floor harness 6P connectors; if the
connection is OK, replace the SRS floor harness .
NO - Poor contact at gauge assembly connector B
(22P) or an open in dashboard wire harness A.
Check the connector; if the connection is OK,
replace Tdashboard wire harness A .
the gauge assembly.
B
23-136
gauge assembly connector B (22P) and body
GAUGE ASSEMBl V CONNECTOR B (22P)
=
Wire side offemale
terminals.
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
YES- Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit;
dashboard wire harness A .
37. Disconnect the OPDS unit harness SP connector (A)
from the OPDS unit (B).
A
B
3S. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the side airbag indicator light stay off?
YES- Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see
page 23-300) .
NO-Go to step 39.
BACK
connector (8).
A
YES - Short to ground in the SRS floor harness or
the OPDS unit harness; if the OPDS unit harness is
OK. replace the SRS floor harness .
NO - Go to step 42.
43. Disconnect gauge assembly connector 8 (22P) from
the gauge assembly.
B
YES-Short to ground in dashboard wire harness
A; replace dashboard wire harness A .
NO - Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
23-137
BACK
SRS
DTC 15-3: Faulty OPOS sensor
and then goes off.
YES-Goto step 3.
page 23-45).
NOTE: Aftermarket devices (fluorescent map lights,
laptop computers, etc.) used near the front passenger's
seat-back can interfere with the seat-back sensors and
cause a false DTC 15-3. If one of these devices was used,
erase the DTC, operate the device near the seat-back,
and recheck for DTCs. If DTC 15-3 is reset, erase it, and
do not use the device near the seat-back.
3. Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness
connector and the OPDS unit connector.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO- Reconnect the OPDS sensor harness
connector, and clear the DTC .
4. Replace the OPDS sensor/seat back foam (see page
20-98), and reinitialize the OPDS system (see page
23-46).
6. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-The system is OK .
23-138
7. Replace the OPDS unit (see page 23-300), and
reinitialize the OPDS unit (see page 23-46).
9. Read the DTC.
Is 15-3 indicated?
YES-Replace the SRS unit .
NO - The system is OK .
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Coupe with Side Airbags
OTC 11-1: Open or increased resistance in
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P connector
from the driver's side airbag.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07TAZ-SZ5011A
/
'-0
5. Connect the special tool (2 Q connector) to the left
side wire harness 2P connector.
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
side airbag inflator, replace the driver's side
airbag. (see page 23-282) .
C556 (A) from the SRS main harness 4P connector
(8).
A
07\ ...... 11 A
0::
07TAZ-SZ5011A
12. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the left side
wire harness; replace the left side wire harness .
(cont'd)
23-139
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Coupe with Side Airbags (cont'd)
3 minutes.
14. Disconnect the right side wire harness 2P
connector (A) from the front passenger's side
airbag (8).
B
A
B
23-140
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit
BACK
DTC "3: Short to another wire or decreased
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
from the driver'S side airbag.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07TAZ-SZ5011A
/
-6
8. Read the DTC.
YES -- Go to step 9.
NO- Short to another wire in the driver's side
airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see
page 23-282) .
(8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
\
0::
07TAZSZS011A
12. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO - Short to another wire or decreased resistance
in the left side wire harness; replace the left side
wire harness .
(cont'd)
23-141
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
airbag (8).
A
SRS unit.
B
23-142
17. Check resistance between No.4 and No. 13
page 23-296) .
NO-Shortto another wire in the SRS main
BACK
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07TAZ-SZ5011A
/
-0
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to power in the driver's side airbag
23-282) .
(B).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
\
0=
07TAZ-SZ5011A
12. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Short to power in the left side wire harness;
replace the left side wire harness .
(cont'd)
23-143
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
14. Disconnect the right side wi re harness 2P
airbag (B).
B
A
SRS unit.
23-144
terminals of SRS unit connector B (14P), and
between the No. 13 and No. 7 There
page 23-296) .
BACK
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P
connector (A) from the driver's side airbag (B).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07T AZ-SZ5011A
/
-0
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the driver's side airbag
23-282) .
(B).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
\
0=
07T AZ-SZ5011 A
11. Erace the DTC memory.
12. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 13.
NO-Short to ground in the left side wire harness;
(cont'd)
23-145
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
14. Disconnect the right side wi re harness 2P
airbag (8).
A
15. Disconnect sRs unit connector 8 (14P) from the
sRs unit.
B
23-146
terminals of sRs unit connector B (14P), between
the No. 13 and No. 12 terminals, and between the
No. 13 terminal and body ground. There should be
1 M Q or more.
Wire side of female
terminals
567
14
Q
=
Is this resistance as specified?
YES-Faulty sRs unit; replace the sRs unit (see
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to ground in the sRs main harness;
replace the sRs main harness .
BACK
front passenger's side airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0- I
07T AZ-SZ5011A
right side wire harness 2P connector.
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front
passenger's side airbag. (see page 23-282) .
connector C584 (A) from the SRS main harness 4P
connector (8).
07XAZ-SZ30100
r-
TB4011

::0
12. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the right side
wire harness; replace the right side wire harness .
(cont'd)
23-147
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
connector (A) from the driver's side airbag (8).
A
B
23-148
BACK
DTe 12-3: Short to another wire or decreased
inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (B).
A
07SAZ-TB4011 A

0-
07TAZ-SZ5011 A
8. Read the DTC.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Short to another wire in the front passenger's
connector (B).
B
07SAZ-TB4011 B
/
07XAZ-SZ30100
12. Read the DTC.
NO - Short to another wire or decreased resistance
in the right side wire harness; replace the right side
wire harness .
(cont'd)
23-149
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
A
15. Disconnectthe special tool from the SRS main
SRS unit.
B
23-150
B
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to another wire in the SRS main
BACK
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
3 minutes.
connector from the front passenger's side airbag.
A
07SAZTB4011A

0- I
07XAZS1A0200
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to power in the front passenger's side
connector (8).
B
07XAZSZ30100

::0
12. Read the DTC.
YES-Gotostep 13.
NO- Short to power in the right side wire harness;
replace the right side wire harness .
(cont'd)
23-151
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
A
SRS unit.
B
23-152
B
page 23-296) .
BACK
DTC 12-5: Short to ground in front passenger's
and then goes off.
YES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0-
07TAZ-SZ5011A
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the front passenger's side
connector (8).
B
07XAZ-SZ30100

::0
12. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO - Short to ground in the right side wire harness;
(cont'd)
23-153
BACK
SRS
3 minutes.
A
SRS unit.
B
23-154
B
terminals of SRS unit connector B (14P), between
the No. 14 and No. 12 terminals, and between
the No. 14 terminal and body ground.
Wire side of female
terminals
6 7
14
page 23-296) .
NO-Shortto ground in the SRS main harness;
BACK
impact sensor
and then goes off.
VES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
5. Check the connection at the left side wire harness
2P connector and the driver's side impact sensor.
VES- Go to step 6.
NO- Poor contact at the left side wire harness 2P
connector; reconnect or replace the left side wire
harness .
connector from the front passenger's airbag.
A
7. Disconnect the left side wire harness 2P connect (A)
from the driver's side impact sensor (B).
07XAZ-S1A0100
8. Connect the special tool to the left side wire
B
(cont'd)
23-155
BACK
SRS
SRS unit.
of the special tool. There should be 0 -1.0 Q.
YES- Go to step 11.
NO- Open in the SRS main harness or in the left
side wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
23-156
SPECIAL
TOOL
NO-Open between the SRS main harness and the
left side wire harness; replace the harness .
BACK
DTC 13-4: Faulty power supply to the driver's
side impact sensor
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the side wire harness 2P connectors
airbags.
A
A
connector (A) from the driver's side impact
sensor (8).
B
SRS unit.
B
(cont'd)
23-157
BACK
SRS
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Short to ground in the SRS main harness or in
the left side wire harness; replace the faulty
harness .
23-158
YES-Faulty driver's side impact sensor or SRS
unit; replace the driver'S side impact sensor (see
NO- Short to another wire in the SRS main
harness or in the left side wire harness; replace the
faulty harness .
BACK
DTC 14-3: No signal from the front
and then goes off.
YES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (8).
A
5. Check the connection at the right side wire harness
2P connector and the front passenger's side impact
sensor.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Poor contact at the right side wire harness 2P
connector; reconnect or replace the right side wire
harness .
A
impact sensor (8).
8. Connect the special tool to the left side wire
(cont'd)
23-159
BACK
SRS
SRS unit.
B
of the special tool. There should be 0 - 1.0 Q.
NO-Open in the SRS main harness or in the right
23-160
SPECIAL
TOOL
YES-Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor
still present, replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296).

NO-Open in the SRS main harness or in the right
BACK
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconrfect the side wire harness 2P connector (A)
airbags (8).
B
A
B
A
impact sensor (8).
A
SRS unit.
(cont'd)
23-161
BACK
SRS
=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Short to ground in the SRS main harness or in
the right side wire harness; replace the faulty
harness .
23-162
YES- Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor
still present, replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296).

harness or in the right side wire harness; replace
the faulty harness .
BACK
DTC 15-1: Faulty OPDS unit
4. Read the DTC.
Is DTe 15-1 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
page 23-45).
5. Check the No.7 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO- Go to step 13.
6. Disconnect OPDS unit connector D (BP) from the
OPDS unit (8).
D
B
B. Check for voltage between the No.4 terminal of
OPDS unit connector D (BP) and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 2B.
NO- Go to step 9.
connector C5B2 (A) from the dashboard wire
harness A 16P connector (8).
A
(cont'd)
23-163
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00 Coupe with Side Airbags (co nt' d)
dashboard wire harness A 16P connector C582 and
16P CONNECTOR IC582)
Wire side offemale
terminals
YES-Open in the right side wire harness or OPDS
unit harness: if the OPDS unit harness is OK,
replace the SRS floor harness
NO-Open in dashboard wire harness A: replace
turn it OFF.
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Finished .
NO-Go to step 16.
dash fuse/relay box .
23-164
17. Disconnectthe dashboard wire harness connector
I (18P) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
turn it off.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Go to step 20.
NO-Short to ground in the No.7 (7.5A) circuit;
refer to section 22 and continue troubleshooting .
connector C582 (A) from the dashboard wire
harness A 16P connector (B).
BACK
21. Connect dashboard wire harness connector I (18P)
to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
22. Turn ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds, then
turn it OFF.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 24.
NO-Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A;
replace dashboad wire harness A.
OPDS unit (B).
D
B
25. Reconnect the right side wire harness 16P
connector C582 (A) to the dashboard wire harness
A 16P connector (B).
B
turn it OFF.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see
page 23-300) .
NO- Short to ground in the right side wire harness
or OPDS unit harness; If the OPDS unit harness is
OK, replace the right side wire harness .
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (SP)
=
YES- Go to step 30.
NO- Open in the right side wire harness or OPDS
(cont'd)
23-165
BACK
SRS
SRS unit.
B
23-166
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
=
NO- Short to ground in the SRS main harness or in
the OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty
harness .
of the OPDS unit connector D (8P). There should be
0-1.0 Q.
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D ISP)
YES-Go to step 34.
NO-Open in the SRS main harness and the OPDS
unit harness; replace the faulty harness .
BACK
456 7
11 12 13 14
=
NO- Short to power in the SRS main harness or in
the OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty
harness .
37. Install a known-good OPDS unit.
38. Reconnect all connectors.
39. Initialize the OPDS unit.
41. Read the DTC.
NO-Finished .
side airbag indicator light comes on for about 5
Does the side airbag ingicator stay on?
YES- Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the
OPDS unit (see page 23-300). If the problem is still
NO- Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit; go to
troubleshooting DTC 15-2 .
2 3 1 6 ~
BACK
SRS
DTC 15-2: Faulty side airbag indicator light
circuit
1. Erace the OTC memory (see page 23-45).
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
Go to troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-45).
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Go to step 6.
YES - Faulty OPOS unit or SRS unit; replace the
OPOS unit. If the problem is still present, replace
the SRS unit .
NO - Go to step 36.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step S.
NO-Short to No.9 (7.5A) fuse related circuit; refer
to section 22 and continue troubleshooting .
23-168
S. Check for a blown side airbag indicator bulb.
YES - Go to step 9.
bulb .
9. Disconnect OPOS unit connector 0 (SP) from the
OPOS unit (B).
D
B
OPOS unit connector 0 (SP) and body ground.
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (BP)
=
YES-Go to step 12.
NO - Go to step 24.
BACK
13. Disconnect dashboard wire harness A 18P
connector I (18P) from the driver's under-dash fuse!
relay box.
page 23-300) .
NO- Go to step16.
the gauge assembly.
B
19. Check for voltage between the No.3 termi nal of the
YES - Short to power in the gauge assembly;
NO- Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
23-169
BACK
SRS
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (8PI
YES - Short to power in dashboard wire harness A;
replace dashboard wire harness A .
NO- Short to power in the right side wire harness
or the OPDS unit harness; if the OPDS unit harness
is OK, replace the right side wire harness .
23-170
25. Backprobe the No. 17 terminal of gauge assembly
connector B (22P). Do not disconnect the connector
from the gauge assembly.
27. Check for voltage at the No. 17 terminal of gauge
assembly connector B (22P) and body ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBL V CONNECTOR B (22PI
2
11 12
Wire side of female
terminals.
YES- Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 32.
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
BACK
the dashboard wire harness A 16P connector (C582)
and body ground. There should be battery voltage.
16P CONNECTOR (C5821
terminals
YES-Poor contact atthe dashboard wire harness
A 16P and right side wire harness 16P connectors
or an open in the right side wire harness. Check the
connection between the dashboard wire harness A
16P and right side wire harness 16P connectors; if
the connection is OK, replace the right side wire
harness .
NO- Poor contact at gauge assembly connector 8
(22P) or an open in the dashboard wire harness A.
Check gauge assembly connector 8 (22P) and the
gauge assembly; if the connection is OK, replace
dashboard wire harness A..
the gauge assembly.
B
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
=
Wire side of female
terminals.
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
YES- Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit;
OPDS unit (8).
D
B
(cont'd)
23-171
BACK
SRS
YES- Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit .
NO-Go to step 39.
YES - Short to ground in the right side wire harness
NO - Go to step 42.
23-172
the gauge assembly.
B
A; replace dashboard wire harness A..
NO-Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
BACK
DTC 15-3: Faulty OPDS sensor
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
laptop computers, etc.) used near the front
passenger's seat-back can interfere with the seat-
back sensors and cause a false DTC 15-3. If one of
these devices was used, erase the DTC, operate the
device near the seat-back, and recheck for DTCs. If
DTC 15-3 is reset, erase it, and do not use the
device near the seat-back.
3. Check the connection at the OPOS sensor harness
connector and the OPOS unit connector.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO- Reconnect the OPDS sensor harness
connector, and clear the OTC .
4. Replace the OPDS sensor/seat back foam (see page
20-97), and reinitialize the OPOS unit (see page 23-
46).
6. Read the DTC.
YES -- Go to step 7.
NO- The system is OK .
7. Replace the OPOS unit (see page 23-300), and
reinitialize the OPOS unit (see page 23-46).
8. Erase the OTC memory.
9. Read the OTC.
Is 15-3 indicated?
YES - Replace the SRS unit .
23-173
BACK
SRS
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
/07SAZ-TB4011A
:::6
23-174
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
airbag inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
23-278) .
3 minutes.
BACK
connector (B).
B
B
SRS unit.
13. Check resistance between the No.7 and the No. 16
terminals and between the No.2 and the No. 11
terminals of SRS connector A (18P). There should
be 2.0-3.0 Q.
345 6 7 8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals
connector A (18P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection. If the connection is OK, replace the
SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
harness or cable reel; replace the SRS main
harness or cable reel (see page 23-292) .
23-175
BACK
SRS
resistance in driver's airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
: : : : ~ = 9 L j ... t--_-07XAZ-SZ30100
/07SAZ-TB4011A
::0
23-176
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the driver's airbag; replace the
3 minutes.
BACK
connector (8).
A
(A) from the side wire harness 2P connectors (8).
A
B
12. Disconnect the special tool from the cable reel 4P
connector.
SRS unit.
14. Check resistance between the No.7 and the No. 16
3 4 5 6 789
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Wire side of female
terminals
page 23-296) .
NO-Short in the SRS main harness or cable reel;
replace the SRS main harness or cable reel (see
page 23-292) .
23-177
BACK
SRS
inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A

/07SAZ-TB4011A
::6
23-178
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
3 minutes.
BACK
connector (8), and disconnect the special tool from
the cable reel 4P connector.
B
A
SRS unit.
234 5 6 789
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
= = = =
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to power in the SRS main harness or
cable reel; replace the SRS main harness or cable
reel (see page 23-292) .
23-179
BACK
SRS
inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
A
/07SAZ-TB4011A
::iO
23-180
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the driver's airbag inflator;
3 minutes.
BACK
connector (B), and disconnect the special tool from
the cable reel 4P connector.
A
11. Disconnect both belt tensioner 2P connectors (A)
from the side wire harness 2P connectors (B).
SRS unit.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
= =
page 23-296) .
NO - Short to ground in the SRS main harness or
cable reel; replace the SRS main harness or cable
reel (see page 23-292) .
23-181
BACK
SRS
DTC 2-1: Open in passenger's airbag inflator
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
-07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A

0:
23-182
8. Read the DTC.
Is DTC 2-1 or 2-2 indicated?
YES--Go to step 9.
NO- Open or increased resistance in the front
3 minutes.
from the cable reel 4P connector (B).
A
BACK
SRS unit.
J
,I
?1
/
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I
I
YES- Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the SRS
page 23-296) .
resistance in passenger's airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
-07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A

0::
(cont'd)
23-183
BACK
SRS
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the front passenger's airbag inflator;
280) .
3 minutes.
A
23-184
SRS unit.
r
,I
?1
7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
T
T
page 23-296) .
SRS main harness .
BACK
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
VES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
-07XAZ-SZ30100
07SAZ-TB4011A

U::
8. Read the DTC.
VES-Goto step 9.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's airbag
page 23-280) .
3 minutes.
A
A
B
(cont'd)
23-185
BACK
SRS
SRS unit.
234 5 678 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
page 23-296) .
23-186
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
battery negative cable, and waitfor 3 minutes.
connector (A).
/
07XAZ-SZ30100
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to ground in the passenger's airbag
23-280) .
3 minutes.
A
SRS unit.
between No. 14 terminal and body ground. There
234 5 678 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
= = =
page 23-296) .
23-187
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models (co nt' d)
DTC 3-1: Open in left side seat belttensioner
DTC 3-2: Increased resistance in left side seat
belt tensioner
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the left side seat belt tensioner 2P
connector from the left side wire harness 2P
connector (A).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
/07TAZ-SZ5011A

0.-
23-188
8. Read the DTC.
Is ore 3-1 or ore 3-2 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in left side seat
belt tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
(see page 23-4) .
3 minutes.
C557 (A) from the SRS main harness 4P connector.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

14. Read the DTC.
Is ore 3-1 or ore 3-2 indicated?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO- Open or increased resistance in left side wire
harness; replace the left side wire harness .
3 minutes.
BACK
16. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector (A), front
passenger's airbag connector (8), and right side
seat belt tensioner connector (C).
B
C
SRS unit.
A
234 5 678 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
connector A (18P) and at the SRS unit. Check the
23-189
BACK
SRS
resistance in left side seat belt tensioner
and then goes off.
VES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
/ 07TAZ-SZ5011 A

23-190
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO- Short in the left side seat belt tensioner;
replace the left side seat belt (see page 23-4) .
3 minutes.

A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0=
14. Read the DTC.
NO- Short in left side wire harness; replace the left
side wire harness .
3 minutes.
BACK
passenger's airbag connector (8), and right side
B
C
SRS unit.
A
234 5 678 9
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
page 23-296) .
SRS main harness .
23-191
BACK
SRS
DTC 3-4: Short to power in left side seat belt
tensioner
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
07SAZ-TB4011 A
/07TAZ-SZ5011A

0.,
23-192
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to power in left side seat belt tensioner;
replace the left side seat belt (see page 23-4) .
3 minutes.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

a::
14. Read the DTC.
NO-Short to power in left side wire harness;
3 minutes.
BACK
16. Disconnectthe driver's airbag connector (A), front
passenger's airbag connector (B), and right side
A
B
C
SRS unit.
A
SRS unit connector A (18P) and body ground, and
234 5 6 789
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
YES- Faulty SRS unit; repiace the SRS unit (see
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to power in SRS main harness; replace
the SRS main harness .
23-193
BACK
SRS
DTC 35: Short to ground in left side seat belt
tensioner
,. Erase the DTC memory (see page 23-45).
and then goes off.
YES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A
07SAZTB4011A

23-194
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Goto step 9.
NO- Short to ground in left side seat belt
tensioner; replace the left side seat belt
(see page 23-4) .
3 minutes.
A
07SAZTB4011A

[j::
14. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO - Short to ground in the left side wire harness;
3 minutes.
BACK
passenger's airbag connector (B), and right side
A
B
C
SRS unit.
A
23456789
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to ground in SRS main harness; replace
23-195
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting '0'02 Models (cont'd)
DTC 4-1: Open in right side seat belt
tensioner
DTC 4-2: Increased resistance in right side
seat belt tensioner
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnect the right side seat belt tensioner 2P
connector from the right side wire harness 2P
connector (A).
A---I-/:.Hl;l
23-196
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Goto step 9.
NO-Open or increased resistance in right side
seat belt tensioner; replace the right side seat belt
(see page 23-4) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnect the driver'S airbag connector (A), front
passenger's airbag connector (B), and left side seat
belt tensioner connector (e).
A
B
c
BACK
SRS unit.
A
234 5 6 789
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Q
unit connector. Check the connection between the
If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-296) .
harness or rightside wire harness; replace the
faulty harness .
resistance in right side seat belt tensioner
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
5. Connect the special tool (2 Q connector) to the right
(cont'd)
23-197
BACK
SRS
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Short in the right side seat belttensioner;
replace the right side seat belt (see page 23-4) .
3 minutes.
passenger's airbag connector (8), and left side seat
belt tensioner connector (C).
A
B
C
23-198
SRS unit.
A
12. Disconnect the special tool (2 Q) from the right side
wire harness 2P connector.
234 5 678
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
page 23-296) .
NO- Short in the SRS main harness or the right
BACK
DTC 4-4: Short to power in right side seat belt
tensioner
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A - - - - i - I ~
~ /01TAZ-SZ5011A
.7SAZ-T84011A
~ ~
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the right side seat belt
tensioner; replace the right side seat belt (see page
23-4) .
3 minutes.
A
B
c
(cont'd)
23-199
BACK
SRS
SRS unit.
A
12. Disconnect the special tool from the right side wire
234 5 6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to power in the SRS main harness or
harness .
23-200
DTC 4-5: Short to ground in right side seat
belt tensioner
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
connector (A).
A I 4 4 ~ ~ ~
'- /07TAZ-SZ5011A
'7SAZTB4011A
~ .
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
SRS unit.
NO- Short to ground in right side seat belt A
tensioner; replace the right side seat belt (see page
23-4) .
3 minutes.
A
C
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . ~ ~ ~ ?
(<<
\
"
... --='
B
12. Disconnect the special tool from the right side wire
234 5 678
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to ground in the SRS main harness or
harness .
23-201
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '0'02 Models (cont'd)
DTC 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-8, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-7, 6-8,
7-1,7-2,7-3,8-1,8-2,8-3,8-4,8-5,8-6,8-7,8-8,
9-1,9-2: Internal Failure of the SRS unit
Note: Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check
the battery/system voltage. If the voltage is low, repair
the charging system before troubleshooting the SRS. If
the battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the customer
if the battery ever went dead.
and then goes off.
YES- Replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
page 23-45).
23-202
DTC 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 10-4, 10-5, 10-6, 10-7:
Airbags, side airbags and/or seat belt
tensioners deployed
BACK
OTC 13-1, 13-2: Internal Failure of the driver's
side impact sensor
and then goes off.
page 23-45).
OTC 14-1, 14-2: Internal Failure of the front
and then goes off.
YES- Replace the SRS unit (see page 23-299) .
page 23-45).
23-203
BACK
SRS
DTC 9-3: Faulty driver's seat belt buckle
switch
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and
unbuckle the driver's seat belt several times.
3. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 4.
page 23-45).
4. Check the No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
Is the fuse blown?
YES- Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 6.
5. Replace the No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box, and turn the ignition switch ON (II)
for 30 seconds.
Did the fuse blow-out again?
YES- Locate and repair the short to ground on the
No.9 fuse circuit, and clear the DTC .
NO- Go to step 6.
23-204
7. Disconnect the driver's power seat wire harness 3P
connector (with power seat) or left side wire
harness 3P connector (without power seat) (A) from
the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector (B).
B
8. Buckle the driver's seat belt.
Check resistance between the No.1 and No.3
terminals of the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector. There should be 0-1 Q.
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No.2
terminals of the same connector. There should be
1 MQ or more.
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
3P CONNECTOR
Are the resistance readings as specified?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly,
and clear the DTC .
BACK
9. Unbuckle the driver's seat belt.
terminals of the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector. There should be 0 -1 Q.
1 MQ or more.
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
3P CONNECTOR
YES-Goto step 10.
NO- Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly,
and clear the DTC .
driver's seat wire harness 3P connector and body
ground. There should be 0--1 Q.
DRIVER'S SEAT
WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Gotostep 11.
NO - Open in the driver's seat wire harness or poor
ground connection at G551. If G551 is OK, replace
the faulty harness .
Does the seat belt reminder stay on?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Gotostep 12.
(cont'd)
23-205
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '00-02 Models (co nt' d)
12. Connect No.2 terminal ofthe driver's seat wire
harness 3P connector to body ground with a
jumper wire.
DRIVER'S SEAT
WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR

1 JUMPER WIRE
Does the seat belt reminder come on?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO- Open in the driver's seat wire harness, driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, or dashboard wire
harness A. Isolate the faulty harness, and replace
the harness or component as necessary .
negative cable from the battery.
14. Disconnect all SRS unit connectors from the SRS
unit, and reconnect the battery.
23-206
15. Connect the No.4 terminal of SRS unit connector
C (BP) to body ground with a jumper wire. Turn the
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (BPI
JUMPER WIRE
I c;----? I
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
--
YES- Disconnect the jumper wire, then go to step
1B.
NO- Open in dashboard wire harness A. Replace
negative cable from the battery.
17. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (BP), reconnect
the battery, and turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES- Short to ground in the dashboard wire
harness A, driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box
(without heated seat), driver's multiplex control
unit (without heated seat), left side wire harness,
driver's power seat wire harness (with power seat),
or gauge assembly/circuit board. Replace the faulty
harness or component..
NO- Replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
BACK
driver's seat wire harness 3P connector and body
ground. There should be 1 M Q or more.
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR
=
NO-Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A,
left side wire harness, or driver's seat wire harness.
Replace the faulty harness .
dashboard wire harness A 8P connector and the
No.3 terminal of the driver's power seat wire
harness 3P connector (with power seat) or left side
wire harness 3P connector (without power seat).
There should be 0 -1 Q.
DRIVER'S POWER
SEAT WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR
SRS UNIT
CONNECTOR C (BP)
5
L----{Ql--------'
YES - Replace the SRS unit..
NO- Open in the dashboard wire harness A, left
side wire harness or driver's power seat wire
harness (with power seat). Replace the faulty
harness .
23-207
BACK
SRS
DTC 9-4: Faulty front passenger's seat belt
buckle switch
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and
unbuckle the front passenger's seat belt several
times.
3. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 4.
page 23-451.
5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch 3P connector (AI from the passenger's
power seat wire harness 3P connector (B).
23-208
6. Buckle the front passenger's seat belt.
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No.3
terminals of the front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch 3P connector. There should be 0-1 Q.
terminals of the same connector. There should be 1
MQ or more.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR
BLU/GRN (BLUI
YES-Goto step 7.
NO - Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle
assembly, and clear the DTC (see page 23-9) .
BACK
7. Unbuckle the front passenger's seat belt.
terminals of the front passenger's seat belt buckle
switch 3P connector. There should be 0 -1 Q.
1 MQ or more.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle
assembly (see page 23-9), and clear the DTC .
passenger's power seat wire harness 3P connector
(with power seat) or right side wire harness 3P
connector (without power seat) and body ground.
There should be 0-1 Q.
PASSENGER'S POWER SEAT WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR OR
RIGHT SIDE WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR
r
23
BLK
Q
Is the resistance reading as specified?
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Open in the passenger's power seat wire
harness (with power seat), open in the right side
wire harness, or poor ground connection at G581. If
G581 is OK, replace the faulty harness .
Disconnect the dashboard wire harness A 8P
connector from the SRS unit.
10. Check resistance between the No.2 terminal ofthe
passenger's power seat wire harness 3P connector
(with power seat) or right side wire harness 3P
connector (without power seat) and body ground.
PASSENGER'S POWER SEAT WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR OR
RIGHT SIDE WIRE HARNESS 3P CONNECTOR

BLU/GRN
YES-Gotostep 11.
NO-Shortto ground in dashboard wire harness A,
right side wire harness, or passenger's power seat
wire harness (with power seat). Replace the faulty
harness .
(cont'd)
23-209
BACK
SRS
passenger's seat wire harness 3P connector and
body ground. There should be 1 M Q or more.
PASSENGER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR
=
BLU/WHT
(VEL/BLU)
NO - Short to ground in the dashboard wire
harness A, right side wire harness or passenger's
power seat wire harness (with power seat). Isolate
the faulty harness, and replace as necessary .
SRS unit connector C (BP) and the No.3 terminal of
the passenger's seat wire harness 3P connector.
There should be 0 -1 Q.
PASSENGER'S SEAT
WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR
SRSUNIT
CONNECTOR C (BP)
YES- Go to step 13.
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness A, right
side wire harness, or passenger's seat wire
harness. Isolate the faulty harness, and replace
as necessary .
23-210
the passenger's seat wire harness 3P connector.
PASSENGER'S SEAT
WIRE HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR
SRSUNIT
CONNECTOR C (BP)
234
567 8
YES-Replace the SRS unit .
NO-Open in the dashboard wire harness A, right
side wire harness, or passenger's seat wire
harness. Isolate the faulty harness, and replace
as necessary .
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models with Side Airbags
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
(A) from the driver's side airbag (8).
A
07XAZ-S1A0200
lSAZ-TB4011A
--0
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Open or increased resistance in the driver's
side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side
3 minutes.
airbag (8).
A
(cont'd)
23-211
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models with Side Airbags (cont'd)
the left side wire harness 2P connector.
terminals of SRS connector 8 (14P). There should
be 2.0-3.0 Q.
YES-Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the SRS
main harness 14P connector and the SRS unit;
check the connection at the SRS main harness 14P
connector and SRS unit. If the connector is OK,
replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
harness or left side wire harness; replace the faulty
harness .
23-212
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
(A) from the driver'S side airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
/
'-0
BACK
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Short to another wire in the driver's side
airbag inflator; replace the driver's side
airbag (see page 23-2821 .
3 minutes.
connector (AI from the front passenger's side
airbag (81.
A
11. Disconnect the special tool from the left side wire
12. Disconnect SRS unit connector 8 (14PI from the
SRS unit.
terminals of SRS unit connector 8 (14PI. There
page 23-2961 .
NO-Short to another wire in the SRS main
harness or left side wire harness; replace the faulty
harness .
23-213
BACK
SRS
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
(A) from the driver's side airbag (B).
B
A
07XAZ-S1A0200
lSAZ
O
lB4011A
'-6
23-214
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Short to power in the driver's side airbag
23-282) .
3 minutes .
airbag (B), and disconnect the special tool from the
left side wire harness 2P connector.
A
BACK
SRS unit.
B
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to power in the SRS main harness or
left side wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
23-215
BACK
SRS
airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Goto step 3.
page 23-45).
3 minutes.
A
07SAZ-TB4011A
07XAZ-S1A0200
I
--0
5. Connect the special tool (2 .Q connector) to the left
23-216
8. Read the DTC.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Short to ground in the driver's side airbag
inflator; replace the driver'S side airbag (see page
23-282) .
3 minutes.
airbag (B), and disconnect the special tool from the
B
A
BACK
SRS unit.
1 MQ or more.
Wire side of female
terminals
567
14
page 23-296) .
NO- Short to ground in the SRS main harness or
the left side wire harness; replace the faulty
harness .
23-217
BACK
SRS
DTC Troubleshooting '0102 Models with Side Airbags (cont'd)
front passenger's side airbag inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0- I
07XAZ-S1A0200
23-218
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front
passenger's side airbag (see page 23-282) .
3 minutes.
10. Disconnectthe right side wire harness 4P
connector (8).
A
/07SAZ-TB4011A
::0
14. Read the DTC.
NO-Open or increased resistance in the right side
wire harness; replace the right side wire harness .
3 minutes.
BACK
A
B
should be 2.0 - 3.0 Q.
6 7
13 14
Q
YES- Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit
connector 8 (14P) and atthe SRS unit. Check the
NO- Open or increased resistance in the SRS main
23-219
BACK
SRS
OTe Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models with Side Airbags (cont'd)
DTe 12-3: Short to another wire or decreased
inflator
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (B).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

u- !
07XAZ-S1A0200
23-220
8. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 9.
NO- Short to another wire in the front passenger's
3 minutes.
connector (B).
A
/07SAZ-TB4011A
::0
14. Read the DTC.
YES-Goto step 15.
NO-Short in the right side wire harness; replace
the right side wire harness .
3 minutes.
BACK
A
SRS unit.
B
6 7
13 14
Q
page 23-296) .
23-221
BACK
SRS
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (8).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

0- I
07XAZ-S1A0200
23-222
8. Read the DTC.
Is DrC 12-4 indicated?
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Short to power in the front passenger's side
3 minutes.
connector (8).
/07SAZ-TB4011A
::0
14. Read the DTC.
Is DrC 12-4 indicated?
YES-Gotostep 15.
NO-Shortto power in the right side wire harness;
3 minutes.
BACK
A
SRS unit.
B
page 23-296) .
23-223
BACK
SRS
DTC 12-5: Short to ground in front passenger's
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
airbag (B).
A
07SAZ-TB4011A

H- I
07XAZ-S1 A0200
5. Connect the special tool (2 Q connector) to the right
23-224
8. Read the DTC.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the front passenger's side
3 minutes.
connector (B).
A
/07SAZ-TB4011A
::0
14. Read the DTC.
NO- Short to ground in the right side wire harness;
3 minutes.
BACK
A
17. Disconnect SRS unit connector B(14P) from the
SRS unit.
1 MQ or more.
=
page 23-296) .
23-225
BACK
SRS
impact sensor
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Check the connection between the left side wire
harness 2P connector and the driver's side impact
sensor.
YES- Go to step 5.
NO- Poor contact between the left side wire
harness 2P connector and the driver's side impact
sensor; reconnect or replace the driver'S side
impact sensor .
5. Disconnect the driver's side airbag and front
passenger's side airbag 2P connectors (A).
A
23-226
6. Disconnect the left side wi re harness 2P connector
(A) from the driver's side impact sensor (8).
~ B
A------- \ ~
07SAZ-TB4011A
~
t i ~
7. Connect the special tool (jumper connector) to the
SRS unit.
BACK
should be 0-1.0 Q.
7
14
Q
YES-Faulty driver's side impact sensor or SRS
NO-Open in the SRS main harness or left side
wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
DTC 13-4: Faulty power supply to the driver's
side impact sensor
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
(cont'd)
23-227 BACK
SRS
OTe Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models with Side Airbags (cont'd)
connector (A) from the driver's side impact
sensor (8).
A
SRS unit.
23-228
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B /14P)
7
14
=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Short to ground in the SRS main harness or
left side wire harness; replace the faulty harness .
7
14
NO-Short in the SRS main harness or left side
BACK
DTC 14-3: No signals from the front
and then goes off.
YES- Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Check the connection between the right side wire
harness 2P connector and the front passenger's
side impact sensor.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Poor contact between the right side wi re
harness 2P connector and the front passenger's
side impact sensor; reconnect or replace the
sensor (see page 23-299) .
A
impact sensor (8).
07SAZ-TB4011A
~
t i ~
7. Connect the special tool (jumper connector) to the
SRS unit.
(cont'd)
23-229
BACK
SRS
should be 0-1.0 Q.
6 7
13 14
YES - Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor

NO-Open in the right side wire harness or SRS
main harness; replace the faulty harness .
23-230
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
4. Disconnectthe driver's side airbag and front
A
BACK
5. Disconnectthe right side wire harness 2P
impact sensor (8).
SRS unit.
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
Q
=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Short to ground in the SRS main harness or
right side wire harness; replace the faulty
harness .
6 7
13 14
YES- Faulty front passenger's side impact sensor

NO-Short in the SRS main harness or right side
23-231 BACK
SRS
DTC 15-1: Faulty OPOS unit
4. Read the DTC.
YES- Go to step 5.
page 23-45).
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Goto step 13.
OPDS unit (B).
B
D
23-232
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (8PI
=
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 9.
BACK
dashboard wire harness A 6P connector (C5B2) and
6P CONNECTOR (C582)
=
YES - Open in the right side wire harness or OPDS
NO - Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace
turn it OFF.
15. Check the NO.7 (7.5A) fuse in driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
page 23-45).
NO- Go to step 16.
17. Disconnect OPDS unit connector D (BP) from the
OPDS unit (B).
D
B
1B. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) for 30 seconds, then
turn it off.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Short to ground in the OPDS unit; replace the
OPDS unit (see page 23-300) .
NO-Short to ground in the No.7 (7.5A) circuit;
refer to section 22 and continue troubleshooting .
(cont'd)
23-233
BACK
SRS
OPDS unit 0 (8P) connector and body ground.
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (SPI
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Open in the right side wire harness or OPDS
unit harness, or poor ground (GS81). If GS81 is OK,
replace the faulty harness .
3 minutes.
23-234
SRS unit.
B
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
=
YES-Go to step 26.
NO- Short to ground in the SRS main harness, in
the right side wire harness, or in the OPDS unit
harness; replace the faulty harness .
BACK
of OPDS unit connector D (8P). There should be
0-1.0 Q.
I
1
V" L
4 5 6 7
V V /
11 12 13 14
OPDS UNIT CONNECTOR D (8 PI
Q
I c:;---;:>
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
NO-Open in the SRS main harness, in the right
side wire harness or in the OPDS unit harness;
27. Disconnect the SRS main harness 2P connector N
N
28. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
4 5 6 7
11 12 13 14
=
YES- Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit. Replace the
OPDS unit (see page 23-300). Ifthe problem is still
NO-Short to power in the SRS main harness, in
the right side wire harness or in the OPDS unit
harness; replace the faulty harness .
23-235
BACK
SRS
OTC 15-2: Faulty side airbag indicator light
circuit
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Go to step 6.
YES - Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the
OPDS unit (see page 23-300).If the problem is still
NO- Go to step 36.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Short to ground in the No.9 (7.5A) fuse
circuit; refer to section 22, and continue
troubleshooting .
23-236
8. Check for a blown side airbag indicator bulb.
YES- Go to step 9.
bulb .
OPDS unit (B).
D
B
OPOS UNIT CONNECTOR D (8P)
=
NO- Go to step 24.
BACK
13. Disconnect dashboard wire harness connector
I (1BP) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
page 23-300) .
NO-Go to step 16.
the gauge assembly.
B
1B. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES - Short to power in the gauge assembly;
NO - Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
23-237
BACK
SRS
YES - Short to power in dashboard wire harness A;
NO- Short to power in the right side wire harness
23-238
25. 8ackprobe the No. 17 terminal of gauge assembly
connector 8 (22P). Do not disconnect gauge
assembly connector 8 (22P) from the gauge
assembly.
2 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 18 19 20 21 22
=
YES- Go to step 28.
NO- Go to step 32.
A
BACK
dashboard wire harness A 6P connector (C582) and
6P CONNECTOR IC582)
2
3 6
=
YES- Poor contact at the dashboard wire harness
A 6P connector and right side wire harness 6P
connector or an open in the right side wire harness.
Check the connection between the dashboard wire
harness A 6P connector and right side wire harness
6P connector; if the connection is OK, replace the
right side wire harness .
NO-Poor contact atthe dashboard wire harness A
22P connector and gauge assembly connector C
(22P), or an open in dashboard wire harness A.
Check gauge assembly connector B (22P) and
gauge assembly connections; if the connections
are OK, replace dashboard wire harness A .
the gauge assembly.
--------
B
6 7 8 9 10
18 19 20 21 22
=
YES-Faulty side airbag indicator light circuit;
NO- Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace
(cont'd)
23-239
BACK
SRS
OPDS unit (B).
D
B
NO- Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see
page 23-300) .
the gauge assembly.
B
23-240
ground. There should 1 M Q or more.
2 678910
11 12 18 19 20 21 22
=
YES - Short to ground in the side airbag indicator
light circuit; replace the gauge assembly .
NO- Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A,
right side wire harness, or OPDS unit harness;
BACK
DTC 15-3: Faulty OPDS sensor
SRS indicator light comes on for about 6 seconds,
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
laptop computers, etc.) used nearthe front passenger's
seat-back can interfere with the seat-back sensors and
cause a false DTC 15-3. If one ofthese devices was used,
erase the DTC, operate the device near the seat-back,
and recheck for DTCs. If DTC 15-3 is reset, erase it, and
do not use the device near the seat-back.
3. Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness
connector and the OPDS unit connector.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reconnectthe OPDS sensor harness
connector, and clear the DTC .
4. Replace the OPDS sensor/seat back foam (Sedan)
(see page 20-98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97), and
reinitialize the OPDS system (see page 23-46).
6. Read the DTC.
Is orc 15-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
7. Replace the OPDS unit (see page 23-300), and
reinitialize the OPDS system.
9. Read the DTC.
Is orc 15-3 indicated?
YES- Replace the SRS unit .
23-241 BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '98-99 Models
The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check to see if
the other indicator lights come on (brake system,
etc).
Do the other indicator lights come on?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 2.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO- Go to step 3.
3. Replace the No.9 (7.5A) fuse, and check to see if
the SRS indicator light comes on.
Does the SRS indicator light come on?
YES- The system is OK .
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Check for an open in the wire harness between fuse
No.9 (7.5A) and the gauge assembly, and repair.
Check that the SRS indicator light comes on.
YES-The system is OK .
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Remove the gauge assembly.
23-242
7. Check for a blown SRS indicator bulb.
Is the SRS indicator bulb OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 8.
8. Replace the bulb, and reconnect the gauge
assembly connectors. Then turn the ignition switch
ON (II).
YES- The system is OK .
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect gauge
assembly connector C (16P) from the gauge
assembly.
c
10. Connect a voltmeter between the No.9 terminal of
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16PI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals.
=
BACK
voltage.
Is there 8.5 V or less within the first 6 seconds
after turning the ignition switch ON (II)?
YES-Faulty sRS indicator light circuit in the gauge
assembly; replace the sRs indicator circuit board in
the gauge assembly .
NO-Go to step 12.
13. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 3P
connector C503 (A) from the sRs main harness.
A
the dashboard wire harness 3P connector (C503)
and body ground.
3P CONNECTOR IC503)
terminals
voltage.
Is there 8.5 V or more within the first 6 seconds
YES-Short to power in the BLU wire ofthe
dashboard wire harness; repair the harness .
NO- Go to step 16.
17. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait 3
minutes.
18. Disconnect the driver's and front passenger's
A
(cont'd)
23-243
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '98-99 Models (cont'd)
A
the SRS main harness 18P connector and ground.
7 8 9
16 17 18
voltage. There should be 0.5 V or less.
YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the unit (see page
23-295) .
NO- Short to power in the BLU wire ofthe SRS
main harness; replace the harness .
23-244
The "SRS" Indicator Light Stays On When In
"ses" Menu Method
NOTE:
Inability to retrieve DTCs with the PGM Tester.
Retrieve the flash codes with the SCS mode (see
page 23-42).
A new SRS unit must sense the entire system is OK
before completing its initial self-test. The most
common cause of an incomplete self-test is the
failure to replace all deployed parts after a collision,
in particular, and seat belt tensioners.
An incomplete self-test prevents the PGM Tester from
retrieving DTCs, although flash codes are available in
the Tester's SCS mode.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the SRS
indicator light.
YES - Go to step 3.
Recheck for an intermittent failure (see page 23-45).
4. Check for blown No.2 (10 A) fuse in the driver's
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the No.2 (1 OA) fuse, and recheck the
system .
3 minutes.
BACK
A
A
A
ground.
6 7 8 9
16 17 18
=
Wire side of female terminals.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Open in the SRS main harness (VB line);
replace the harness .
11. Connectthe SRS main harness 18P connector
terminals No.6 and No.3 with a jumper wire and
backprobe adapters.
JUMPER WIRE
I
I
1
1/
3
1/ 1/
6 7 8 9
10
V 1/
13 14 15 16 17 18
Wire side offemale terminals.
Does the SRS indicator light go off?
YES- Faulty SRS unit, or poor contact at the SRS
main harness 18P connector; check the connector.
page 23-295) .
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
23-245
BACK
SRS
.I
12. Check the No.2 (10A) fuse in the driver's under-
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 16.
14. Disconnect gauge assembly connector C (16P) from
the gauge assembly.
C
gauge assembly connector C (16P) and ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBL V CONNECTOR C (16P)
2 3 567
8 14 15 16
YES - Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
NO - Go to step 23.
23-246
17. Remove the gauge assembly. Do not disconnect
the connector from the gauge assembly.
19. Connect the No.9 terminal of gauge assembly
connector C (16P) and No. 11 terminal of gauge
assembly connector B (22P) with a jumper wire.
8
2 3
9 10 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals.
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 20.
NO- Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge
assembly; replace the SRS printed circuit board in
the gauge assembly.
C
BACK
SRS main harness 18P connector and No.9
terminal of gauge assembly connector C (16P).
There should be 0 - 1.0 Q.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16P)
1 2 3 5 6 7
8 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals.
789
16 17 18
NO-Go to step 28.
C503 (A) from the dashboard wire harness.
A
24. Check resistance betweeen the No.1 terminal of
the SRS main harness 3P connector C503 and
ground. There should be 1 M Q or more.
SRS MAIN HARNESS
3P CONNECTOR 1C503,
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Short to ground in the dashboard wire
harness; repair the dashboard wire harness .
NO - Short to ground in the SRS main harness;
25. Reconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector to
the SRS unit.
gauge assembly connector C (16P) and ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C 116P'
Wire side of female
terminals.
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait for 6 seconds,
then measure voltage.
YES - The problem corrected itself after
disconnecting and connecting the connectors. Be
sure all terminals make good contact, and recheck
the system for an intermittent failure (see page 23-
45) .
NO-Poor contact at the SRS main harness 18P
connector; check the connector.
If the connector is OK, substitute a known-good
SRS unit, and recheck.
lfthe connector is damaged, replace the SRS main
harness .
(cont'd)
23-247
BACK
SRS
28. Disconnect the SRS main harness 3P connector (A)
from the dashboard wire harness.
A
SRS main harness 18P connector and the No.1
terminal of the SRS main harness 3P connector;
there should be 0 -1.0 Q.
SRS MAIN HARNESS
18P CONNECTOR
10
Wire side of female
terminals.
7 8 9
16 17 18
YES-Open in the BLU wire ofthe dashboard wire
harness; repair the dashboard wire harness .
NO-Open in the SRS main harness; replace the
SRS main harness .
23-248
The SRS Indicator Light Comes On for the
Bulb Check, Goes Off, then Comes Back On
After Self- Diagnosis, but no DTCs are
stored (NEC SRS unit only)
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
3. Check for blown No.1 (15A) fuse in the driver'S
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO- Go to step 4.
4. Replace the fuse. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
and check that the fuse doesn't blow.
Is the fuse OK?
page 23-45) .
NO-Go to step 5.
3 minutes.
BACK
A
A
A
SRS main harness 18P connector and body ground.
8 9
17 18
page 23-295) .
NO-Gotostep 10.
A
(cont'd)
23-249 BACK
SRS
SRS main harness 18P connector and ground.
There should be 1.0 M Q or more.

I
1
/
3
/ V
6 7 8 9
10
/ /
13 14 15 16 17 18
VES- Short to ground in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box; replace the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box .
23-250
3 minutes.
A
A
BACK
A
the SRS main harness 18P connector and ground.
8 9
10 17 18
=
voltage.
YES-Poor contact at the SRS main harness 18P
If the connector is OK, substitute a known-good
SRS unit, and recheck.
If the connector is damaged, replace the SRS main
harness .
NO-Goto step 18.
A
SRS main harness 2P connector and No.7 terminal
ofthe SRS main harness 18P connector. There
should be 0-1.0 Q.
SRS MAIN HARNESS
18P CONNECTOR
8 9
10 15 16 17 18
YES - Poor contact at the SRS main harness 2P
Ifthe connector is OK, substitute a known-good
under-dash fuse/relay box, and recheck.
Ifthe connector is damaged, replace the SRS main
harness .
NO- Open in the SRS main harness, replace the
SRS main harness .
23-251
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check to see if
etc).
VES- Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No.9
(7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box.
Is the fuse OK?
VES-Gotostep 14.
NO-Go to step 3.
VES- The system is OK .
NO-Goto step 4.
4. Check for a short to ground between fuse No.9
(7.5A) and the gauge assembly, and repair. Check
to see if the SRS indicator light comes on.
VES- The system is OK .
NO- Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
replace the circuit board in the gauge assembly .
VES- Go to step 8.
NO- Blown SRS indicator bulb; replace the bulb .
23-252
the gauge assembly.
::::=:==--:==----
gauge assembly connector C (16P) and body
ground.
8
=
567
14 15 16
Wire side offemale
terminals.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and mea!;ure
voltage.
after turning the ignition switch ON (/I)?
VES- Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge
assembly; replace the SRS indicator circuit board in
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
12. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (8P) from the SRS
unit.
SRS unit connector C (8P) and body ground. Turn
the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (BP)
234
5 6 7 8
Wire side of female
terminals
Is voltage as specified?
page 23-296) .
NO-Short to power in the BLU wire of dashboard
wire harness A; replace dashboard wire harness
A..
the gauge assembly.
B
15. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 11 terminal of
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and
measure voltage. There should be battery voltage.
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Open in dashboard wire harness A; repair or
(cont'd)
23-253
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan (cont'd)
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check resistance
between the No. 16 terminal of gauge assembly
connector 8 (22P) and body ground. There should
beO-1.0 Q.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B 122P)
2
11 12
=
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
Wi re side of female
terminals.
YES-Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge
NO-Open in dashboard wire harness A or bad
body ground; check the body ground connection. If
it is OK, repair or replace dashboard wire harness
A .
23-254
The SRS Indicator Light Stays On When In
"ses" Menu Method
NOTE:
page 23-43).
in particular, the seat belt tensioners.
1. Check for a blown No.2 (10A) fuse in the driver'S
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the No.2 fuse. Turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and check for a blown No.2 fuse. If
the fuse is blown; replace the SRS main harness. If
the fuse is OK; replace the SRS unit .
2. Disconnectthe driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and
front passenger's airbag 4P connector (8).
A
B
BACK
3. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (1BP) from the
SRS unit.
A
SRS unit connector A (1BP) and body ground.
=
567
14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect SRS unit
connector C (BP) from the SRS unit.
7. Connect a jumper wire between the No.4 terminal
of SRS unit connector A (1BP) and the No.5
terminal of SRS unit connector C (BP). Turn the
JUMPER WIRE
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
I
A118P)
/ /
3 4 5 6 7
/ /
/ /
12 13 14 15 16
/ /
Wire side of female t erminals
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
CI8P)
Ie;----?
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
I
YES- Faulty SRS unit, poor contact at the SRS
main harness 1BP connector, or poor contact at the
dashboard wire harness A BP connector; check the
connectors. If the connectors are OK, replace the
NO- Go to step B.
(cont'd)
23-255
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Sedan (cont'd)
B. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the No.2 (10 A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Goto step 9.
NO-Go to step 11.
the gauge assembly.
=
SRS unit connector C (BP) and body ground. There
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
=
4
8
Wire side of female
terminals
YES - Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
NO-Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A;
repair or replace dashboard wire harness A .
23-256
the gauge assembly.
gauge assembly connector C (16P). There should
beO-1.0Q.
8
2 3 567
14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
CI8P)
234
5 678
Wire side of female
terminals
BACK
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Model without Side
Airbags
After Self-Diagnosis, but no DTCs are stored
(NEC SRS unit only)
and then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
3. Check for a blown No.1 (15A) fuse in the driver's
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Goto step 11.
NO-Goto step 4.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK this time.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent failures (see
page 23-45).
NO - Go to step 5.
3 minutes.
7. Disconnect the driver'S and front passenger's
airbag connectors.
A
SRS unit.
A
(cont'd)
23-257
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Model without Side
Airbags (cont'd)
9. Disconnect SRS main harness 2P connector N from
the driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box.
N
SRS unit connector A (18P) and body ground. There
=
456 7
13 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Short to ground in the No.1 (15A) fuse circuit,
or faulty SRS unit; check the No.1 (15 A) fuse
circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the SRS unit (see
page 23-296) .
23-258
3 minutes.
A
A
BACK
SRS unit.
A
SRS unit connector A (18P) and body ground.
=
4 5 6 7
13 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
voltage.
VES- Poor contact at the SRS main harness 18P
connector, or faulty SRS unit; check the connector.
page 23-296) .
NO- Poor contact at the SRS main harness 2P
connector, or open in the SRS main harness; check
the connector. If the connector is OK, replace the
SRS main harness .
23-259
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Coupe
etc).
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the
No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
NO-Go to step 3.
NO- Go to step 4.
4. Check for a short to ground in the wire harness
between fuse No.9 (7.5A) and the gauge assembly,
and repair. Check to see if the SRS indicator light
comes on.
NO - Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
replace the circuit board in the gauge assembly .
YES- Go to step 8.
NO- Blown SRS indicator bulb; replace the bUlb .
23-260
the gauge assembly.
ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16PI
2 3
8
567
14 15 16
Wire side offemale
terminals.
voltage.
YES- Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge
NO-Gotostep 11.
BACK
12. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (8P) from the
SRS unit.
c
SRS unit connector C (8P) and body ground. Turn
the ignition switch ON (11), and measure voltage.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C 18P)
4
8
=
page 23-296).
wire harness A or the SRS main harness; replace
dashboard wire harness A or the SRS main harness.
the gauge assembly.
B
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and
GAUGE ASSEMBL V CONNECTOR B 122P)
7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
=
NO-Open in dashboard wire harness A; repair or
(cont'd)
23-261
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Coupe (cont'd)
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check resistance
between the No. 16 terminal of gauge assembly
connector 8 (22P) and body ground. There should
be 0-1.0 Q.
2 7 8 9 10
11 12 19 20 21 22
=
Wire side of female
terminals.
NO-Open in dashboard wire harness A or body
ground; check the body ground connection. )f it is
OK, repair or replace dashboard wire harness A..
23-262
"ses" Menu Method
NOTE:
page 23-43).
1. Check for a blown No.2 (1 OA) fuse in the driver's u
nder-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the No.2 fuse. Turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and check for a blown No.2 fuse. If
the fuse is blown; replace the SRS main harness. If
the fuse is OK; replace the SRS unit .
2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (A) and
front passenger's airbag 4P connector (8).
A
B
BACK
SRS unit.
=
4 5 6 7
14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
YES - Go to step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect SRS unit
connector C (8P) from the SRS unit.
C
7. Connect the No.4 terminal of SRS unit connector A
(18P) and the No.5 terminal of SRS unit connector
C (8P) with a jumper wire and backprobe adapters.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
JUMPER WIRE
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
I
A118P)
LJ/
3 4 5 6 7
/ /
/V
12 13 14 15 16
/ /
Wire side of female t erminals
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
CI8P)
,e;--?
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
J
YES- Faulty SRS unit, poor contact at SRS unit
connector A (18P), or poor contact at SRS unit
connector C (8P); check the connectors. If the
connectors are OK, replace the SRS unit (see page
23-296) .
NO- Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
23-263
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '00 Coupe (cont'd)
s. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the No.2 (10 A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES- Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 11.
the gauge assembly.
SRS unit connector C (ap) and body ground. There
4
8
=
YES-Short to ground in the gauge assembly;
NO-Short to ground in the BLU wire of dashboard
wire harness A or the SRS main harness; replace
the dashboard wire harness or the SRS main
harness .
23-264
the gauge assembly.
--:::=:---------
SRS unit connector C (SP) and the No.9 terminal of
gauge assembly connector C (16P). There should
beO-1.0 Q.
8
567
14 15 16
Wire side offemale
terminals
4
8
Wire side of female
terminals
NO-Open in the BLU wire of dashboard wire
harness A or the SRS main harness; replace
dashboard wire harness A or the SRS main
harness .
BACK
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models
etc).
YES-Go to step 2.
NO - Go to step 9.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect
gauge assembly connector B (22P) from the gauge
assembly.
ground. There should be 0 -1.0 Q.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B I22P)
2 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 18 19 20 21 22
=
Is resistance as specified?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO - Open in the BLK wire of dashboard wire
harness A, or faulty body ground terminal. If the
body ground terminal is OK, replace dashboard
wire harness A..
the gauge assembly.
ground for 6 seconds after turning the ignition
switch ON (II). There should be 8.5 V or less.
567
8 14 15 16
Is voltage as specified?
YES- Blown SRS indicator bulb or faulty SRS
indicator light circuit in the gauge assembly. Check
for a blown SRS indicator bulb. Ifthe SRS indicator
bulb is OK, replace the gauge assembly .
NO - Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
23-265
BACK
SRS
7. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (BP) from the SRS
unit.
C
B. Connect a voltmeter between the No.9 terminal of
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (Ill, and
measure voltage. There should be 0.5 V or less.
567
8 14 15 16
=
YES-Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit .
wire harness A; replace dashboard wire harness A .

23-266
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the No.9 (7.5A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect gauge assmbly connector B (22P) from
the gauge assembly.

BACK
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and
6 7 8 9 10
18 19 20 21 22
=
assembly, or poor contact at gauge assembly
connector B (22P) and the gauge assembly; if the
connection is OK, replace the gauge assembly .
NO-Open in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box No.9 (7.5 A) fuse line, open in the VEL wire of
dashboard wire harness A. If the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box is OK, replace dashboard wire
harness A..
12. Replace the No.9 (7.SA) fuse, and check to see if
YES- The system is OK at this time .
NO-Short to ground in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box No.9 (7.SA) fuse Ii ne; refer to the
"Electrical" section, then continue
troubleshooting .
(cont'd)
23-267 BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting - '01-02 Models (co nt' d)
SCS" Menu Method
NOTE:
Retrieve the flash codes with .the SCS mode (see
page 23-43).
Does the SRS indicator light go off while the DTC
memory is being erased?
YES-Go to step 42.
NO-Goto step 2.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Replace the No.2 (10A) fuse in the driver's under-
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30
seconds. Then turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- The system is OK at this time .
NO- Go to step 6.
3 minutes.
23-268
8. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector.
connector.
BACK
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors.
SRS unit.
A
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and wait for 30
14. Check the No.2 (1 OA) fuse in the driver's under-
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Short to ground in the SRS unit; replace the
NO-Goto step 15.
N
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and waitfor 30
Is the fuse OK?
A; replace dashboard wire harness A .
NO- Short to ground in the driver'S under-dash
fuse/relay box No.2 (10A) fuse line; replace the
(cont'd)
23-269 BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting '0102 Models (cont'd)
3 minutes.
20. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A).
21. Disconnect the front passenger's 4P connector (A).
23-270
(A).
23. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (1SP) from the
SRS unit.
A
BACK
25. Connect a voltmeter between the NO.4 terminal of
SRS unit connector A (18P) and body ground. Turn
the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage.
I
V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
':L
=
YES-Go to step 29.
NO - Go to step 26.
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
N
SRS unit connector A (18P) and the No.2 terminal
of SRS main harness 2P connector N. There should
be 0-1.0 Q.
SRS MAIN HARNESS 2P CONNECTOR N
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
A (18P)
5 678 9
14 15 16 17 18
YES-Open in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box, or poor contact at the SRS main harness 2P
connector; check the connection. If the connection
is OK, replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box .
NO- Open in the SRS main harness; replace the
SRS main harness .
unit.
C
(cont'd)
23-271
BACK
SRS
31. Connect the No.4 terminal of SRS unit connector A
(18P) and the No.5 terminal of SRS unit connector
C (8P) with a jumper wire.
,e;---';)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
JUMPER
Wire side of female term inals
WIRE SRS UNIT CONNECTOR
A 118P)
V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
33. Check the SRS indicator light.
page 23-296) .
NO-Go to step 34.
35. Disconnect the jumper wire between the No.4
terminal of SRS unit connector A (18P) and the No.
5 terminal of SRS unit connector C (8P).
36. Check the No.2 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 40.
NO-Go to step 37.
23-272
the gauge assembly.
SRS unit connector C (8P) and body ground. There
2 3 4
5 6 7 8
=
assembly; replace the gauge assembly .
NO- Short to ground in dashboard wire harness A;
BACK
the gauge assembly.
gauge assembly connector 8 (22P) and the No.5
terminal of SRS uint connector C (8P). There should
be 1 Q or less.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR B (22P)
1 2
11 12
2 3 4
5 678
6 7 8 9 10
18 19 20 21 22
YES - Faulty SRS indicator light circuit in the gauge
assembly or poor contact at gauge assembly
connector 8 (22P). Check the connection. If the
connection is OK, replace the gauge assembly .
NO- Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace
unit.
C
43. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A) to the Data Link
Connector (16 P) (8) and follow the Tester's
prompts in the "SCS" menu.
A
(cont'd)
23-273
BACK
SRS
SRS unit connector C (8P) and body ground. There
should be 0-1.0 Q.
4
5 8
YES - Faulty SRS unit, or poor contact at the
dashboard wire harness A 8P connector; check the
connection at the dashboard wire harness A 8P
connector and the SRS unit. If the connection is OK,
replace the SRS unit (see page 23-296) .
NO- Open in the SCS line between the No.6
terminal of the dashboard wire harness A 8P
connector and the No.9 terminal (brown wire) of
the Data Link Connector (DLC) (16P), or open
between the No.4 terminal of the Data Link
Connector (DLC) (16P) and body ground; refer to
the "Electrical" section, then continue
troubleshooting .
23-274
After Self-Diagnosis, but no DTCs are stored
(NEC SRS unit only)
and then goes off.
YES-Go to step 3.
page 23-45).
3. Check for a blown No.1 (15A) fuse in the driver's
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- The problem is gone. Test-drive the vehicle,
and see Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-45).
NO-Go to step 5.
3 minutes.
BACK
7. Disconnect the driver's airbag, front passenger's
airbag, and seat belt tensioner connectors (A).
A
SRS unit.
A
N
(cont'd)
23-275
BACK
SRS
SRS Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting '0102 Models (cont'd)
SRS unit connector A (18) and body ground. There
=
456 7
13 14 15 16
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Short to ground in the No.1 (15A) fuse circuit,
or faulty SRS unit; check the No.1 fuse circuit. If the
circuit is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page 23-
296) .
3 minutes.
23-276
12. Disconnect the driver'S airbag, front passenger's
airbag, and seat belt tensioner connectors (A).
A
BACK
SRS unit.
A
I
/
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
)L
=
voltage.
VES- Poor contact at SRS unit connector A (18P) or
faulty SRS unit; check the connector. If the
connector is OK, replace the SRS unit (see page 23-
296) .
NO-Poor contact at SRS main harness 2P
connector N or open in the SRS main harness;
check the connector. Ifthe connector is OK, replace
Component Replacement/
Inspection After Deployment
NOTE: Before doing any SRS repairs, use the PGM
Tester SRS menu method to check for DTCs; refer to the
DTC Troubleshooting Index for the less obvious
deployed parts (seat belt tensioners, OPDS sensor, side
airbag sensors, etc.)
'98-00 Models:
After a collision where the frontal airbags deployed,
replace these items:
SRS unit
Deployed airbag(s)
'01-02 Models:
After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed,
Seat belt tensioners
SRS unit
After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed,
SRS unit
Deployed airbag(s)
Seat belt tensioners
'00-02 Models:
After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed,
SRS unit
Deployed side airbag(s)
Side impact sensor(s) for side(s) deployed
'98-02 Models:
During the repair process, inspect these areas:
Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, don't
repair, any damaged harnesses.
Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any
damage, replace the cable reel.
After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for
about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS airbag
system is OK. If the indicator does not function properly,
use the PGM Tester SRS Menu Method to read the DTC
(s). If this doesn't retrieve any codes, use the Tester's
SCS menu method. If the SCS method doesn't work,
you may need to install a known-good SRS unit to read
the DTC(s). If you still cannot retrieve a code, go to SRS
Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting.
23-277
BACK
SRS
Driver's Airbag Replacement
Removal
least 3 minutes before beginning work.
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering
wheel, then disconnect the connector between the
cable reel 2P (or 4P) connector (B) and driver's
airbag 2P (or 4P) connector (C).
A
23-278
3. Remove the covers (A, B) from the steering wheel,
then remove the two Torx bolts (C) using a Torx
T30 bit. Remove the driver's airbag (D).
o
4. Disconnect the horn connector from the steering
wheel.
BACK
Installation
1. Place the new driver's airbag (AI in the steering
wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts (81. Install
the covers (CI.
A
2. Connect the cable reel 2P (or 4PI connector (AI to
the driver's airbag 2P (or 4PI connector (8), then
install the access panel (CIon the steering wheel.
B c
3. Connect the battery negative cable.
4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system
operation:
o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
light should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
o Make sure both horn buttons work.
23-279
BACK
SRS
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement
Removal
2. Remove the glove box (see page 20-87), then
disconnect the connector between the SRS main
harness 2P (or 4P) connector (A) and front
passenger's airbag 2P (or 4P) connector (8). Then
remove the harness clamp (C).
A
B
23-280
3. Remove the four mounting nuts (A) from the
bracket. Cover the lid and dashboard with a cloth,
and pry carefully with a screwdriver to lift the front
passenger's airbag (8) out of the dashboard.
A
BACK
Installation
1. Place the new front passenger's airbag (A) into the
dashboard. Tighten the front passenger's airbag
mounting nuts (B), and install the harness clip (C).
A
c L
B
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2 Ibfft)
2. Connect the front passenger's airbag 2P (or 4P)
connector (A) to the SRS main harness 2P (or 4P)
connector (B).
Attach the front passenger's airbag connector to
the connector holder (C), then reinstall the glove
box.
c
A
4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system
operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS
indicator light should come on for about 6 seconds
and then go off.
23-281
BACK
SRS
Side Airbag Replacement
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the
body section before performing repairs or service.
Removal
2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P
connector (A).
A
3. Remove the seat assembly (Sedan) (see page 20-
98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97), and seat-back cover
(Sedan) (see page 20-98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97).
4. Remove the two mounting nuts (A) and the side
airbag (B).
A
23-282
Installation
I NOTICE I
Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are
not pinched or interfering with other parts.
NOTE:
If the side airbag lid is secured by a tape, remove the
tape.
Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover.
Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified
torque when you replace a side airbag.
Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed
properly. Improper installation may prevent proper
deployment.
1. Place the new side airbag on the seat
back-frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting
nuts (B).
A
2. Install the new seat-back cover (Sedan) (see page
20-98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97).
3. Install the seat assembly(Sedan) (see page 20-98),
(Coupe) (see page 20-97), then connect the side
airbag harness 2P connector.
4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their
full ranges of movement, making sure the harness
wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
6. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper
system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II);
the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6
BACK
Airbag Disposal - '98-99 Models
Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500
Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a
whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be
deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty
period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda
District Service Manager must give approval and/or
special instructions. Only after the airbags have been
deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example),
can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not
deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this
procedure:
Deploying Airbags In the vehicle
If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its
airbags should be deployed while still in the vehicle.
The airbags should not be considered as salvageable
parts and should never be installed in another vehicle.
battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag is securely mounted.
3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly
by following the check procedure on the tool label.
Driver's Airbag:
4. Remove the access panel (A), then disconnect the
2P connector between the driver's airbag (B) and
the cable reel (C).
5. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the 2P
connector between the front passenger's airbag (A)
and SRS main harness (B).
A
6. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the
airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool
alligator clips (A) to the airbag. Place the
deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away
from the airbag.
DRIVER'S FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG AIRBAG
A
(cont'd)
23-283 BACK
SRS
(cont'd)
7. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool.
If the green light on the tool comes on, the airbag
igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the
airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure.
If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is
ready to be deployed.
8. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag
should deploy (deployment is both highly audible
and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation ofthe
bag, followed by slow deflation).
If the airbags deploy and the green light on the
tool comes on, continue with this procedure.
If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light
comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal
of Damaged Components.
During deployment the airbag can become hot
enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbag.
9. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be
reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and seal
it securely.
A
/
23-284
Airbag Disposal - '00 Model
Before scrapping any airbags or side airbags (including
those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags or
side airbags must be deployed. Ifthe vehicle is still
within the warranty period, before deploying the
airbags or side airbags, the Honda District Service
Manager must give approval and/or special instruction.
Only after the airbags or side airbags have been
deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example),
can they be scrapped.
Ifthe airbags or side airbags appear intact (not
deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this
procedure.
airbags or side airbags should be deployed while still in
the vehicle. The airbags or side airbags should not be
considered as salvageable parts and should never be
installed in another vehicle.
battery negative cable and wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag or side airbag are
securely mounted.
Driver's Airbag:
the cable reel (C).
B
c
BACK
and SRS main harness (8).
B
Side Airbag:
6. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side
airbag (A) and the SRS floor harness (8) or side
wire harness (8).
B
A
7. Cut off the ai rbag connector, strip the ends of the
airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool
alligator clips (A) to the airbag. Place the
deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away
from the airbag.
NOTE: The front passenger's airbag has 4 wires, 2
yellow and 2 red. Twist each pair of unlike color
wires together, and connect one alligator clip to
each pair.
A
(cont'd)
23-285
BACK
SRS
Airbag Disposal- '00 Model (cont'd)
If the green light on the tool comes on, the airbag
igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the
airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure.
If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is
ready to be deployed.
9. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag
should deploy (deployment is both highly audible
and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the
bag, followed by slow deflation).
If the airbags deploy and the green light on the
tool comes on, continue with this procedure.
If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light
comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Disposal
of Damaged Components.
During deployment the airbag can become hot
it securely.
23-286
Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, or seat belt
tensioners (including those in a whole vehicle to be
scrapped), the airbags, side airbags, or seat belt
tensioners must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within
the warranty period, the Honda District Service
Manager must give approval and/or special instruction
before deploying the airbags, side airbags, or seat belt
tensioners. Only after the airbags, side airbags, or seat
belt tensioners have been deployed (as the result of
vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped.
Ifthe airbags, side airbags, or seat belttensioners
appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme
caution. Follow this procedure.
airbags, side airbags, or seat belt tensioners should be
deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags, side
airbags, or seat belt tensioners should not be
considered as salvageable parts and should never be
installed in another vehicle.
battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, and seat belt
tensioner is securely mounted.
Driver's Airbag:
the cable reel (C).
c
BACK
and SRS main harness (8).
Side Airbag:
6. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side
airbag (A) and the side wire harness (8).
B
A
Seat belt tensioner:
7. Disconnect the 2P connector between the seat belt
tensioner (A) and side wire harness (8).
B
8. Pull the seat belt out all the way and cut it.
9. Cut off each airbag connector, strip the ends of the
wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator
clips (A) to the wires. Place the deployment tool at
least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle.
NOTE: The driver's airbag and front passenger's
airbag have four wires, two yellow (1 st inflator) and
2 red (2nd inflator). Twist each pair of unlike
colored wires together, and connect an alligator
clip to each pair.
A
(cont'd)
23-287
BACK
SRS
Airbag Disposal - '01-02 Models (cont'd)
If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter
circuit is defective and cannot deploy the
component. Go to Disposal of Damaged Airbag.
If the red light on the tool comes on, the
component is ready to be deployed.
11. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and
tensioners should deploy (deployment is both
highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid
inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation).
If the components deploy and the green light on
the tool comes on, continue with this procedure.
If an component doesn't deploy, yet the green
light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to
Disposal of Damaged Components.
During deploymentthe airbag can become hot
it securely.
A
/
23-288
Deploying the Components Out of the
Vehicle
If an intact airbag has been removed from a scrapped
vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during
transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as
follows:
by following the check procedure on this page or
on the tool label.
2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on flat
ground, at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any
obstacles or people.
3. Follow steps 6, 7, 8, and 9 or 7,8,9 and 10 or 9,10,
11 and 12 of the in-vehicle deployment procedure.
Disposal of Damaged Components
1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal
procedure of driver's airbag (see page 23-278),
front passenger's (see page 23-280), and side
airbag (see page 23-282), and seat belt tensioner
(see page 23-4).
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by twisting
together the two inflator wires.
3. Package the component in exactly the same
packaging that the new replacement part came in.
4. Mark the outside ofthe box "DAMAGED AIRBAG
NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE AIRBAG NOT
DEPLOYED" or "DAMAGED SEAT BELT
TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get
confused with your parts stock.
5. Contact your Honda District Service Manager for
how and where to return it for disposal.
Deployment Tool Check
1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector
handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery.
2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is
OK; red means the tool is faulty.
3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips.
BACK
Cable Reel Replacement - '98-00 Models
Removal
1. Make sure the front wheels are aligned straight
ahead.
least 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cruise
control set/resume switch, then remove the
steering wheel bolt (B).
B A
the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A).
7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove
the column covers (B, C).
(cont'd)
23-289
BACK
SRS
Cable Reel Replacement - '98-00 Models (cont'd)
from the cable reel 2P connector (B), then
disconnect the dashboard harness 4P connector (C)
from the cable reel (D).
D
9. Remove the screws (A) from the cable reel, then
remove the cable reel from the column.
23-290
Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, the front
wheels should be aligned straight ahead.
least 3 minutes.
3. Set the cancel sleeve (A) so that the projections (B)
are aligned vertically.
B
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering
column shaft. Then connect the 4P connector (B) to
the cable reel, and connect the 2P connector (C) to
the SRS main harness 2P connector (D).
BACK
5. Install the steering column covers.
6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New
replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by
first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops.
Then rotate it counterclockwise (about 2 1/2 turns)
until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points
straight up.
7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the
holes on the steering wheel, and install the steering
wheel with a new steering wheel bolt.
A
8. Install the driver's airbag (see step 1 on page 23-
279).
10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper
system operation:
Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
then go off.
After the SRS indicator light has come off, turn
the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm
the SRS indicator light does not come on.
Make sure both horn buttons work.
23-291
BACK
SRS
Cable Reel Replacement '0102 Models
Removal
1. Make sure the front wheels are aligned straight
ahead.
least 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the cruise
control set/resume switch and radio remote switch,
then remove the steering wheel bolt (B).
A
the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
23-292
6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A).
7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove
the column covers (B, C).
BACK
dashboard wire harness B 4P connector (C) from
the cable reel 4P connector (D).
c
9. Remove the tab (A), then remove the cable reel
from the column.
A
Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, the front
wheels should be aligned straight ahead.
least 3 minutes.
3. Set the cancel sleeve (A) so that the projections (B)
are aligned vertically.
t
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering
column shaft. Then connect dashboard wire
harness B 4P connector (B) to the cable reel 4P
connector (C), and connect the cable reel connector
(D) to the SRS main harness 4P connector (E).
B
(cont'd)
23-293
BACK
SRS
Cable Reel Replacement - '01-02 Models (cont'd)
5. Install the steering column covers.
6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New
replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by
first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops.
Then rotate it counterclockwise (about 2 1/2 turns)
until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points
straight up.
7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the
holes on the steering wheel, and install the steering
wheel with a new steering wheel bolt.
A
23-294
8. Install the driver's airbag (see step 1 on page 23-
279).
10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper
system operation:
o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
then go off.
o After the SRS indicator light has come off, turn
the steering wheel fully left and rightto confirm
the SRS indicator light does not come on.
o Make sure both horn buttons work.
BACK
SRS Unit Replacement - '98-99 Models
Removal
least 3 minutes before beginning work (see page
23-28).
2. Disconnect the airbag connectors.
(A) from the SRS unit (B).
A
5. Remove the three Torx bolts (A) from the SRS
unit (B), then pull out the SRS unit from the bracket.
A
Installation
1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then
connect the SRS main harness lSP connector (e) to
the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks.
NOTE: When tightening the Torx bolts to the
specified torque after replacement, be careful to
turn them in so that their heads rest squarely on the
brackets.
B
2. Install the center console (see page 20-83).
3. Reconnect the airbag connectors.
5. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system
and then go off.
23-295
BACK
SRS
SRS Unit Replacement - '00-02 Models
Removal
least 3 minutes before beginning work (see page
23-28).
2. Disconnect the airbag connectors (see page 23-39).
3. Disconnect the side airbag connectors (see page
23-39).
5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the SRS unit (B).
A B
6. Remove the three Torx bolts (A) from the SRS
unit (B), than pull out the SRS unit from the bracket.
B
23-296
Installation
1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then
connect the connectors (e) to the SRS unit; push it
into position until it clicks.
NOTE:
When tightening the Torx bolts to the specified
torque after replacement, be careful to turn them
in so that their heads rest squarely on the
brackets.
A
B
9.S Nm (1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
2. Install the center console (see page 20-83).
3. Reconnect the airbag connectors. (see page 23-39).
4. Reconnect the side airbag connectors (see page 23-
39).
6. Initialize the OPOS unit (see page 23-46).
7. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system
and then go off.
BACK
Side Impact Sensor Replacement - '00 Sedan
Removal
I NOTICE I
Removal of the side impact sensor must be
performed according to the precautions/
procedures described before.
Before disconnecting the side impact sensor 2P
connector(s), disconnect the side airbag 2P
connector(s).
Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II) and do not
connect the battery cable while exchanging the
side impact sensor.
2. Remove the seat assembly (see page 20-83).
3. Remove the front door sill trim (see page 20-75).
4. Remove the center pillar trim (see page 20-75).
5. Remove the lower anchor bolt (see page 23-7).
6. Turn up the carpet (A), then remove the 2 mounting
bolts (B) and the plate (C).
B
from the side impact sensor.
8. Remove the two Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit,
then remove the side impact sensor (B).
Installation
I NOTICE I
Be sure to install the harness wires so that they
are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
side impact sensor.
1. Install the new side impact sensor with new Torx
bolts (A) then connect the SRS floor harness 2P
connector (B) to the side impact sensor (C).
2. Reinstall the plate.
A
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, ______ ---
7.2 Ibf.ft) _________ -----
~
4. After installing the side impact sensor, confirm
proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch
ON (II): the SRS indicator light should come on for
about 6 seconds and then go off.
23-297
BACK
SRS
Side Impact Sensor Replacement - '00 Coupe
Removal
I NOTICE I
connector(s).
side impact sensor.
4. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-74).
6. Turn up the carpet (A), then remove the two
clips (B) and the plate (C).
B
7. Disconnect the side wire harness 2P connector
8. Remove the two Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit,
than remove the side impact sensor (B).
23-298
Installation
INOTICEI
side impact sensor.
1. Install the new side impact sensor with new Torx
bolts (A) then connect the side wire harness 2P
2. Reinstall the plate.
A
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfftl
BACK
Side Impact Sensor Replacement - '01-02 Models
Removal
I NOTice I
connector(s).
side impact sensor.
4. Remove the center pillar trim (see page 20-75).
6. Turn up the carpet (A), then remove the two
mounting bolts (B) and the plate (C).
= ~
B
7. Disconnect the side wire harness 2P connector
8. Remove the Torx bolt (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then
remove the side impact sensor (B).
Installation
I NOTiCe I
side impact sensor.
1. Install the new side impact sensor with a new Torx
bolt (A), then connect the side wire harness 2P
~ ~ / ~ ~
B/
t>
A/
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibf.ftl
23-299
BACK
SRS
OPOS Unit Replacement
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure in the
body section (see page 20-99) before performing
repairs or service.
Removal
2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connector
(see page 23-282).
3. Remove the seat assembly (Sedan) (see page 20-
98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97), and seat-back cover
(Sedan) (see page 20-98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97).
4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS
unit harness 8P and sensor connectors from the
OPOS unit.
5. Remove the three screws (B) and OPDS unit (C).
c
B
23-300
Installation
1. Place the new OPOS unit on the seat-back frame.
A
Tighten the three screws (A), then connect the
OPOS unit harness 8P and sensor connectors to the
OPOS unit. Reinstall the cover.
2. Install the new seat-back cover (Sedan) (see page
20-98), (Coupe) (see page 20-97).
3. Install the seat assembly (Sedan) (see page 20-98),
(Coupe) (see page 20-97), then connect the side
airbag harness 2P connector.
5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make
sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat.
6. Initialize the OPOS unit (see page 23-46).
7. After installing the OPOS unit, confirm proper
system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II);
the SRS indicator light should come on for about 6
BACK
Service Manual Index
NOTE: Refer to the following list to look up
DTCs, symptoms, fuses, connectors, wire
harnesses, specifications, maintenance
schedules, and general service
information:
DTC Troubleshooting Indexes
ABS{TCS Components ...................... 19-40
Automatic Transaxle ............................. 14-7
Fuel and Emissions ................................ 11-6
HeatingNentilation ................................ 21-5
SRS ....................................................... 23-48
Symptom Troubleshooting Indexes
AlC ....................................................... 21-34
ABS{TCS Components ........................ 19-41
Automatic T ransaxle ........................ 14-8
Cruise Control System .......................... 4-43
Fan Controls ......................................... 10-16
HeatingNentilation ................................ 21-6
Moonroof/Sunroof .............................. 20-61
SRS .................................................... 23-61
Steering ................................................... 17-4
FuselRelay Indexes
AlC Compressor Clutch Relay ........... 22-43
AlC Condenser Fan Relay .................. 22-43
Blower Motor Relay ............................. 22-43
ELD (Electrical Load Detector) ............ 22-43
Headlight Relay ................................... 22-43
Horn Relay ............................................ 22-43
Power Distribution .............................. 22-46
Radiator Fan Relay ........................... 22-43
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Driver's ........ 22-44
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Passenger's .. 22-45
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box ............... 22-43
Connector and Wire Harness Indexes
Component Connectors (to hamess) ......... 22-12
Grounds (to components) ................... 22-49
In-line Connectors (to hamess) ........... 22-11
Specifications section .... Section 2
Maintenance section ............. Section 3
General Information section ........ Section 1
A
AIC
Component Location Index ................. 21-31
Description ........................................... 21-35
Circuit Diagram .................................... 21-36
Test ....................................................... 21-43
AlC Compressor
Replacement ......................................... 21-48
AIC Compressor Clutch
Inspection ............................................. 21-50
Overhaul ............................................. 21-51
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit
Troubleshooting ................................... 21-39
AIC Compressor Clutch Relay
AIC Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement ......................................... 21-52
AIC Condenser
Replacement ......................................... 21-53
AIC Condenser Fan Assembly
Component Location Index. 10-2, 15,21-31
Test .......................................................... 10-8
Replacement ......................................... 10-14
AIC Condenser Fan Circuit
AIC Condenser Fan Relay
Component Location Index ..... 10-15,21-31
AIC Pressure Switch
AIC Service Valve, High Pressure
Component Location Index ................ 21-31
AIC Service Valve, Low Pressure
AIC Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ................................ 11-102
AfT Assembly
Removal ............................................ 14-114
Installation .......................................... 14-119
Valves
Test ..................................................... 14-108
Replacement ....................................... 14-109
AfT Countershaft Assembly
Disassembly/lnspection/Reassembly ...... 14-171
AfT Differential
Component Location Index .............. 14-200
Replacement
AfT Gear Position Indicator System ..... 14-142
AfT Gear Position Indicator System ....... 22-57
AfT Gear Position Indicator System
Circuit Diagram .................................. 14-137
Test ...................................................... 14-141
AfT Hydraulic Controls
Test ...................................................... 14-104
AfT Mainshaft Assembly
AfT Secondary Shaft Assembly
Inspection ........................................... 14-176
AfT Shift Cable
Replacement ....................................... 14-131
Adjustment ......................................... 14-134
AfT Shift Lever
Removal .............................................. 14-127
Installation .......................................... 14-128
Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 14-130
A-pillar Trim
ABS Control Unit
Replacement ......................................... 19-70
ABS Indicator
Replacement
ABS{TCS Components .................... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
ABS Indicator Circuit
ABS Modulator Unit
Removal/Installation ............................ 19-69
ABSfTCS Components
How-to Information ............................. 19-37
Description ........................................... 19-42
Circuit Diagram .................................... 19-50
Accessory Power Socket, Front
Test/Replacement .............................. 22-133
Accessory Power Sockets
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-132
Accumulator Body
Air Cleaner Element
Replacement ....................................... 11-131
Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement ......................................... 21-20
Test ........................................................ 21-20
Airbag, Driver's
Component Location Index .......... 23-24, 25
Replacement ....................................... 23-300
Repair .................................. 23-305, 306, 308
Airbag, Front Passenger's
Component Location Index ........... 23-24, 25
Replacement ....................................... 23-302
Alternator
Replacement ........................................... 4-32
Overhaul ............................................... 4-33
Alternator Belt
Inspection/Adjustment ......................... 4-40
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ......................... 11-104
Alternator-compressor Belt
Inspection/Adjustment .......................... 4-39
Antenna Lead
Component Location Index .......... 22-122
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
ATF
Inspection ........................................... 14-113
Replacement ....................................... 14-1 13
ATFCooier
Repair .................................................. 14-125
ATF Cooler Lines and Hoses
Component Location Index ................... 10-2
Replacement ....................................... 14-1 26
ATFPump
Inspection ........................................... 14-162
Audio Unit
Removal/Installation .......................... 22-124
Replacement ....................................... 22-124
Audio/Entertainment
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-123
Automatic Transaxle
Description ........................................... 14-18
Test ...................................................... 14-101
B
Back-up Light Switch
Test .......................................................... 13-3
Back-up Lights
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-90
Balancer Belt
Component Location Index ..................... 6-3
Inspection ............................................... 6-20
Balancer Shaft Bearings
Inspection ............................................... 7-15
Balancer Shaft Oil Seal
Installation .............................................. 7-38
Balancer Shafts
Inspection ............................................... 7-15
Ball Joint Boots
Replacement ......................................... 18-15
Ball Joints
Removal .................................................. 18-9
Battery
Test ........................................................ 22-51
Blower Motor
Replacement ......................................... 21-27
Blower Motor Circuit
Blower Motor Relay
Blower Unit
Brake Booster
Test ........................................................ 19-17
Replacement ......................................... 19-18
Brake Calipers
Overhaul ......................................... 19-13,22
Brake Discs
Inspection ....................................... 19-12,21
Brake Drums
Inspection ............................................. 19-25
Brake Fluid Level Switch
Test
Brake System Indicator Components ...... 19-9
Conventional Brake Components ..... 19-9
Brake System Indicator Components .... 22-57
Brake Light Failure Sensor
Test ........................................................ 22-78
Brake Lights
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-91
Brake Lines and Hoses
Inspection ............................................. 19-30
Replacement ......................................... 19-31
Brake Master Cylinder
Replacement ......................................... 19-14
Adjustment ........................................... 19-15
Inspection ............................................. 19-15
Brake Pads
Inspection/Replacement ................ 19-10, 19
Brake Pedal
Adjustment ............................................. 19-5
Test .......................................................... 4-50
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit
Brake Shoes
Replacement ......................................... 19-27
Brake System Indicator
Replacement
Conventional Brake Components .. 22-59
Circuit Diagram
Brake System Indicator Components ...... 19-8
Conventional Brake Components ..... 19-8
Brake Wheel Cylinders
Replacement ......................................... 19-29
Bulkhead Cover, Rear
Bumper, Front
Removal/Installation .................. 20-140,142
Bumper, Rear
Removal/Installation .................. 20-145,148
c
Cable Reel
Component Location Index . 22-130, 23-24,
25
Replacement .............................. 23-311, 314
Camshaft
Inspection ............................................... 6-41
Installation .............................................. 6-50
Camshaft Pulley
Camshaft Seal
Carpet
Replacement ......................................... 20-B1
Test ...................................................... 11-135
Ceiling Light
Test ...................................................... 22-121
Center Console
Center Panel
Charging System
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-28
Troubleshooting ..................................... 4-29
Charging System Indicator
Replacement
Charging System .............................. 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Child Seat Tether Anchor
Installation ............................................ 23-19
Removal/Installation ................ 23-20,21,22
CKP/TDC (Crankshaft Position/Top Dead
Center) Sensors
Replacement ........................................... 6-55
Clock
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-128
Replacement ....................................... 22-129
Clutch
Clutch Disc
Replacement ........................................... 12-7
Clutch Interlock Switch
Test ............................................................ 4-6
Clutch Master Cylinder
Replacement ........................................... 12-5
Clutch Pedal
Component Location Index .................. 12-3
Adjustment ............................................. 12-4
Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Test .......................................................... 4-50
Clutch Pressure Plate
Clutch Release Bearing
Clutch Slave Cylinder
Replacement ........................................... 12-6
Combination Light Switch
Test/Replacement ................................ 22-95
Connecting Rod Bearings
Replacement ........................................... 7-13
Connecting Rod Bolts
Inspection ............................................... 7-28
Connecting Rods
Inspection ................................................ 7-8
Replacement ........................................... 7-25
Connectors
(See first page ofthis Index)
Control Arms
Replacement ......................................... 18-29
Inspection ............................................. 19-4
Repair ..................................................... 19-7
Coolant
Replacement ......................................... 10-10
Coolant Reservoir
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Troubleshooting
Cooling System .................................. 10-5
Components ......................................... 22-57
Coolant Temperature Gauge Sending Unit
Components ........................ 10-2,22-57
Cooling System .................................. 10-2
Test
Cooling System .................................. 10-7
Cooling System
Replacement ....................................... 14-174
Countershaft Bearing, A/T Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-155
Countershaft Bearing, Torque Converter
Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-167
Countershaft Bearings
Removal ................................................ 13-34
Replacement ......................................... 13-43
Countershaft Idler Gear
Installation .......................................... 14-194
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Replacement ....................................... 14-172
Countershaft Speed Sensor
Replacement ....................................... 14-109
Crankshaft
Inspection ........................................... 7-8, 21
Removal .................................................. 7-18
Installation .............................................. 7-33
Crankshaft Main Bearings
Replacement ............................................. 7-9
Crankshaft Oil Seal, Pulley End
Installation .............................................. 7-38
Crankshaft Oil Seal, Transmission End
Installation .............................................. 7-39
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft ............................................. 6-3
Timing Belt ............................................ 6-3
Timing Belt .......................................... 6-18
Crankshaft Pulley Bolt
Crankshaft ............................................. 6-3
Timing Belt ............................................ 6-3
Cruise Control Actuator
Test .......................................................... 4-52
Replacement ........................................... 4-53
Cruise Control Actuator Cable
Adjustment ............................................ 4-55
Cruise Control Actuator Solenoid
Test ......................................................... 4-51
Cruise Control Communication Circuit
Cruise Control Indicator
Replacement
Cruise Control System ..................... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Cruise Control Main Switch
Test/Replacement .................................. 4-49
Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Switch
Cruise Control System
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-42
Cruise Control Unit
Input Test ................................................ 4-46
Cylinder Head Assembly
Removal ................................................ 6-30
Installation ............................................ 6-52
Cylinder Head Bolts
Inspection ............................................... 6-35
Cylinder Head Cover
Component Location Index .................... 6-3
Installation .............................................. 6-54
Cylinder Head Cover Gasket
Cylinder Head Gasket
Cylinder Head, Bare
Inspection ............................................... 6-35
D
Dampers, Front
Replacement ......................................... 18-18
Dampers, Rear
Replacement ....................................... 18-30
Dash Lights Brightness Control
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-112
Test .................................................... 22-114
Dash Vents
Dashboard .................................. 20-88, 89
Heating/Ventilation .......................... 20-89
Dashboard
Dashboard Lower Cover
Removal/Installation ................... 20-84, 85
Differential Carrier Bearing Outer Races, AIT
Replacement ....................................... 14-204
Differential Carrier Bearing Outer Races, MIT
Differential Carrier Bearings, A/T
Replacement ....................................... 14-202
Inspection ........................................... 14-205
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Differential Carrier Bearings. MIT
Replacement ......................................... 13-55
Adjustment ........................................... 13-57
Differential Carrier. AfT
Component Location Index ............ 14-200
Replacement ....................................... 14-201
Differential Carrier. MfT
Component Location Index ............. 13-53
Replacement ......................................... 13-54
Differential Oil Seals. AfT
Replacement ....................................... 14-203
Differential Oil Seals. MIT
Replacement ......................................... 13-55
Differential Pinion Gears. A/T
Inspection .................................. , ........ 14-201
Differential Pinion Gears. MIT
Inspection ...................................... 13-54
Distributor
Replacement ........................................... 4-19
Overhaul ........................................... 4-21,22
DLC (Data Link Connector)
Component Location Index ...... 23-24. 25
Door Courtesy Light
Door Courtesy Lights
Door Glass
Replacement ................................... 20-14,16
Adjustment ..................................... 20-26, 28
Door Key Cylinder Switches
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Power Door Locks ................... 22-229
Test
Alarm System ............................. 22-225
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-225
Door Latches
Replacement
Front Doors ....................................... 20-14
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-21
Door Lock Actuators
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-229
Test
Alarm System ...................... 22-223
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-223
Door Lock Knob Switches
Alarm System ...................... 22-206
Test
Alarm System ............................. 22-224
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-224
Door Lock Switches
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-229
Test
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-225
Door Moldings
Replacement ....................................... 20-164
Door Opening Trim
Door Outer Handles
Replacement
Front Doors ....................................... 20-11
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-19
Door Panels
Front Doors ..................................... 20-8, 9
Rear Doors ........................................ 20-17
Door Sill Trim
Component Location Index ............... 20-72
Door Strikers
Adjustment ........................................... 20-30
Door Switches
Door Courtesy Lights ..................... 22-108
Entry Light Control System .......... 22-115
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Power Door Locks ........................ 22-229
Drive Plate
Removal/Installation ................................ 7-7
DRL (Daytime Running Lights) Control
Unit
Input Test .............................................. 22-96
DRL Indicator
Replacement
Headlights ......................................... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
DTCs
(See first page ofthis Index)
Dust and Pollen Filter
Replacement ......................................... 21-25
D41ndicator Circuit
E
ECM
ECTSensor
EGRValve
Replacement ............................................. 9-2
Emblems
Replacement .............................. 20-159.160
End Cover. AIT
Removal .............................................. 14-149
Engine Assembly
Removal .................................................... 5-2
Installation .............................................. 5-10
Engine Block Assembly
Engine Block. Bare
Inspection ............................................... 7-22
Repair ...................................................... 7-24
Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-57
Troubleshooting ............................. 4-58
Circuit Diagram ............................ 22-116
EVAP Control System
EVAP Two-Way Valve
Test ...................................................... 11-158
Evaporator
Removal/Installation ...................... 21-46
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test ........................................................ 21-23
Replacement ......................................... 21-47
Exhaust Manifold
Removal/Installation .......................... 9-3, 4
Exhaust Pipe
Replacement ......................................... 9-5, 6
F
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram .............................. 10-17,18
Final Driven Gear, AIT
Replacement ..................................... 14-201
Final Driven Gear, MIT
Replacement ......................................... 13-54
Aywheel
Crankshaft ............................................. 7-7
Clutch ............................................. 12-3
Frame
Repair Chart ........................................ 20-182
Front Doors
Component Location Index ............. 20-2, 4
Adjustment ........................................... 20-29
Front Driveshaft Assembly
Inspection ............................................... 16-3
Removal ................................................ 16-3
Disassembly ...................................... 16-5
Resassembly .......................................... 16-9
Installation .......................................... 16-20
Front Seats
Component Location Index . 20-97, 98, 22-
190
Circuit Diagram .......................... 22-191,192
Front Speakers
Replacement ....................................... 22-125
Front Suspension
Fuel and Emissions
Description ........................................... 11-10
Circuit Diagram .............................. 11-33
Fuel Fill Cap
Component Location Index ........... 11-109
Fuel Fill Door Latch
Replacement ....................................... 20-177
Fuel Fill Door Opener
Component Location Index ........... 20-169
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable
Fuel Filter
Replacement ....................................... 11-121
Fuel Gauge
Test
Fuel Supply System ................. 11-126
Fuel Gauge Components .............. 22-57
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Fuel Gauge Components ............. 22-57
Fuel Supply System ....................... 11-109
Test/Replacement
Fuel Supply System ................... 11-127
Fuel Injection Air Control Valve
Fuel Injection System (PGM-AI
Fuel Injectors
Replacement ....................................... 11-95
Fuel Lines and Hoses
Inspection ........................................... 11-116
Removal .............................................. 11-118
Installation .......................................... 11-119
Fuel Pipe Protector
Replacement ....................................... 20-167
Replacement ....................................... 11-121
Fuel Pump
Test ...................................................... 11-115
Replacement ................................... 11-1 22
Fuel Rail
Fuel Supply System
Adjustment ......................................... 11-113
Troubleshooting ............................... 11-113
Fuel Tank
Replacement ....................................... 11-123
Test ...................................................... 11-159
Replacement ....................................... 11-161
Fuses
(See first page of this Index)
G
Gauge Assembly
Replacement ......................................... 22-68
Gauges
Circuit Diagram .............................. 22-60, 64
General Information
(See section 1)
Glove Box
Glove Box Light
Grille
Replacement ....................................... 20-160
H
Hazard Warning Switch
Test ..................................................... 22-107
Headlight
Adjustment ........................................... 22-98
Replacement ......................................... 22-98
Headlight Relay
Headlights ....................................... 22-206
Alarm System ............................ 22-206
Headlights
Circuit Diagram ........... 22-84, 85, 86, 88, 92
Headliner
Heater Control Panel
How-to Information ............................... 21-4
Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 21-24
Heater Control Power and Ground Circuits
Heater Fan Switch
Test ..................................................... 21-23
Heater Hoses and Pipes
Heater Unit
Replacement ......................................... 21-28
Heater Valve
Heater Valve Cable
Adjustment ........................................... 21-30
Heating/Ventilation
Description .............................................. 21-7
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 21-8
High Beam Cut Relay
High Beam Indicator
Replacement
Headlights ......................................... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Replacement ..................................... 22-102
Hood
Replacement ....................................... 20-150
Adjustment ......................................... 20-151
Hood Insulator
Replacement ....................................... 20-152
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Hood Latch
Replacement ....................................... 20-175
Hood Opener Cable
Replacement ....................................... 20-170
Hood Release Handle
Replacement ....................................... 20-175
Hood Seal
Replacement ....................................... 20-153
Hood Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-227
Horn
Horns ............................................... 22-130
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Test/Replacement
Horns ............................................... 22-131
Horn Relay
Horns ............................................... 22-130
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System ....
22-206
Horn Switch
Horns
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-131
H02S. Primary
Replacement ......................................... 11-97
H02S. Secondary
Replacement ......................................... 11-97
Hubs
Front Suspension ............................... 18-3
Rear Suspension ................................ 18-4
Replacement
Rear Suspension ........................ 18-22.24
lAC (Idle Air Control) Valve
Replacement ............................................. 9-2
IAT (Intake Air Temperature) Sensor
Replacement ............................................. 9-2
ICM (Ignition Control Module)
Input Test ............................................... 4-23
Idle Control System
Adjustment ......................................... 11-108
Ignition Coil(s)
Test .......................................................... 4-24
Ignition Key Light
Test ...................................................... 22-120
Ignition Key Switch
Entry Light Control System ........... 22-115
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Test
Alarm System ............................. 22-120
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-120
Ignition Key/Transponder
Ignition Switch
Test
Starting System ................................ 22-55
Wiring System .................................. 22-55
Replacement
Wiring System .................................. 22-56
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-18
Inspection ............................................... 4-19
Ignition Wires
Test/Inspection ....................................... 4-25
Immobilizer Indicator
Replacement
Immobilizer System ......................... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Immobilizer System ....................... 22-200
Replacement ....................................... 22-205
Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-201
Description ......................................... 22-202
Indicators
Inner Fender
Replacement ....................................... 20-167
Inside Rearview Mirror
Component Location Index ........... 20-31.32
Replacement ......................................... 20-37
Instrument Panel
Intake Air System
Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold Chamber
Intake Manifold Gasket
Replacement ............................................. 9-2
Interlock System
Circuit Diagram .................................. 14-144
Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Removal ................................................ 16-21
Disassembly ......................................... 16-22
Resassembly ........................................ 16-24
Installation ............................................ 16-26
Intermittent Dwell Time Controller
Intermittent Wiper Relay
K
Key Interlock Solenoid
Test ...................................................... 14-147
Key Interlock System Circuit
Keyless Entry Transmitter
Repair .................................................. 22-228
Test ...................................................... 22-228
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-208
Description ......................................... 22-213
Keyless Receiver Unit
Kick Panel
Knuckles
Rear Suspension ................................ 18-4
Replacement
Front Suspension ............................. 18-10
Rear Suspension .............................. 18-25
L
Leading Arms
Replacement ......................................... 18-28
License Plate Light
Replacement
Lights. Exterior ............................... 22-103
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
lights, Exterior
lights, Interior
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-109
lights-on Reminder
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-79
lights-on Reminder Indicator
Replacement
Headlights ......................................... 22-59
Lights-on Reminder ......................... 22-59
Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve
Test ...................................................... 14-103
Low Fuel Indicator
Test
Fuel Supply System ....................... 11-128
Replacement
Fuel Supply System ......................... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Replacement
Low Engine Oil Indicator
Components ................................. 22-59
Lubrication System .......................... 22-59
Lower Arms
Rear Suspension ................................ 18-4
Replacement
Rear Suspension .............................. 18-29
Lubrication System
Test ............................................................ 8-4
M
MIT Assembly
Removal .................................................. 13-4
Installation ............................................ 13-10
Disassembly ......................................... 13-21
Resassembly ........................................ 13-48
MIT Counters haft Assembly
Inspection ....................................... 13-32, 35
Disassembly ......................................... 13-34
Resassembly ........................................ 13-36
MIT Differential
Inspection ............................................. 13-54
MIT Mainshaft Assembly
Inspection ....................................... 13-26,29
Disassembly ......................................... 13-28
Resassembly ........................................ 13-30
Adjustment ........................................... 13-45
MIT Reverse Shift Fork
Inspection ............................................. 13-25
M/T Shift Cables
Replacement ......................................... 13-52
M/T Shift Lever
Replacement ......................................... 13-52
Main Valve Body
Removal .............................................. 14-156
Repair .................................................. 14-158
Installation .................................. 14-159,189
Disassemblyllnspection/Reassembly ...... 14-160
Mainshaft Bearing, Torque Converter
Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-166
Mainshaft Bearings
Removal ................................................ 13-28
Installation ............................................ 13-30
Replacement ......................................... 13-44
Mainshaft Oil Seal
Replacement ......................................... 13-44
Mainshaft Sealing Rings
Replacement ....................................... 14-170
Maintenance
(See section 3)
Maintenance Required Indicator
Replacement ......................................... 22-59
Map light/Spotlight
Test ...................................................... 22-110
MES (Memory Erase Signal) Connector
MIL
Replacement
Fuel Injection System (PGM-FI) ...... 22-59
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
MIL Circuit
Mirrors
Mode Control Motor
Replacement ......................................... 21-21
Test ........................................................ 21-21
Moonroof Cable Assembly
Moonroof Close Relay
Moonroof Drain Channel
Replacement ......................................... 20-63
Moonroof Drain Channel Slider
Replacement ......................................... 20-68
Moonroof Drain Tubes
Moonroof Frame
Replacement ......................................... 20-66
Moonroof Glass
Adjustment ........................................... 20-62
Replacement ......................................... 20-62
Moonroof Motor
Component Location Index ... 20-60,22-153
Replacement ......................................... 20-65
Test ...................................................... 22-155
Moonroof Open Relay
Moonroof Position Switches
Adjustment ........................................... 20-70
Moonroof Sunshade
Replacement ......................................... 20-64
Moonroof Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-155
Moonroof ISunroof
Test ........................................................ 20-71
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-154
MTF
Inspection/Replacement ........................ 13-3
Multiplex Control Inspection Connector
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-135
Description ......................................... 22-136
Input Test ............................................ 22-140
Multiplex Control Unit, Door
Headlights ....................................... 22-134
Alarm System ............................. 22-134
Multiplex Control System ............. 22-134
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-134
Power Windows ............................. 22-134
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Input Test
Dash Lights Brightness Control .... 22-113
Headlights ......................................... 22-93
Interlock System ............................. 14-145
Alarm System ............................. 22-215
Lights-on Reminder ......................... 22-80
Power Windows ............................. 22-172
Wiper/Washer ................................. 22-182
Dash Lights Brightness Control .... 22-134
Headlights ....................................... 22-134
Interlock System ............................. 22-134
Key Light Timer .............................. 22-134
Key-in Reminder .......................... 22-134
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System . 22-134
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-134
Power Windows ............................. 22-134
Seat Belt Reminder ...................... 22-134
Wiper/Washer ................................. 22-134
Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's
Entry Light Control System .......... 22-134
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System. 22-134
Power Door Locks .......................... 22-134
Power Windows ............................. 22-134
Wiper/Washer ................................ 22-134
o
Oil Control Orifice
Oil Drain Bolt
Oil Filter
Replacement ....................................... .... 8-6
Oil Pan
Engine Block Assembly ...................... 8-3
Lubrication System .............................. 8-3
Oil Pressure Switch
Low Engine Oil Indicator Components .. 22-57
Test
Low Engine Oil Indicator Components ....... 8-4
Oil Pump, Engine
Engine Block Assembly ....................... 8-3
Overhaul
Oil Screen
Oil, Engine
Replacement ............................................. 8-5
OPDSSensor
OPDSUnit
Component Location Index .......... 23-24, 25
Replacement ....................................... 23-322
Outside Manual Mirrors
Replacement ......................................... 20-34
Outside Mirror Defogger Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-147
Outside Mirror Holders
Replacement ................................. 20-33, 36
Outside Power Mirror Actuators
Test ...................................................... 22-148
Replacement ............................. 22-149,151
Outside Power Mirror Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-147
Outside Power Mirrors
Component Location Index ... 20-31,32,22-
143
Replacement ......................................... 20-35
Circuit Diagram .......................... 22-144, 145
Test ...................................................... 22-146
p
Park Lever Position Stop
Inspection/Adjustment ...................... 14-152
Park Pin Switch
Test ...................................................... 14-148
Parking Brake
Inspection/Adjustment .......................... 19-6
Parking Brake Cable
Replacement ......................................... 19-32
Parking Brake Switch
Test
Brake System Indicator Components ..... 19-9
Pa rki ng Brake ........... ... .... ... .... ...... ....... 19-9
PCM
Engine Mount Control System ........ 4-56
Immobilizer System ....................... 22-200
PCVValve
Test ...................................................... 11-141
PGM-A Main Relay
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit
Piston Pins
Replacement ........................................... 7-25
Piston Rings
Replacement ........................................... 7-29
Pistons
Replacement ........................................... 7-25
Installation .............................................. 7-31
Power Door Locks
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-230
Power Seat Unkage
Disassembly/Reassembly ........ 20-121.122
Power Seat Motors
Test .............................................. 22-195. 196
Power Seat Switch
Test .............................................. 22-193.194
Power Steering Fluid
Replacement ......................................... 17-14
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Unes and Hoses
Replacement ......................................... 17-15
Power Steering Pump
Test .................................................... 17-9. 10
Replacement ......................................... 17-16
Overhaul ............................................... 17-17
Power Steering Pump Belt
Inspection/Adjustment ........................ 17-12
Power Window Motor, Driver's
Test ..................................................... 22-178
Power Window Motors, Passenger's
Test ...................................................... 22-178
Power Window Relay
Test ........................................................ 22-52
Power Window Switch, Master
Replacement ....................................... 22-177
Power Window Switch, Passenger's
Replacement ...................................... 22-177
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram .......... 22-160.164.168.170
PSP (Power Steering Pressure) Switch
PSP (Power Steering Pressure) Switch
Signal Circuit
a
Quarter Trim Panel
Quarter Window Glass
Replacement ................................... 20-22, 55
Quarter Window Glass Sticker
Replacement ................................... 20-25, 59
R
Radiator
Test .......................................................... 10-8
Replacement ......................................... 10-14
Radiator and Condenser Fans Common
Circuit
Radiator Cap
Test .......................................................... 10-7
Radiator Fan Assembly
Component Location Index. 10-2, 15,21-31
Test .......................................................... 10-8
Replacement ......................................... 10-14
Radiator Fan Circuit
Troubleshooting ............................. 10-19,21
Radiator Fan Relay
Radiator Fan Switch
Component Location Index ............. 10-2,15
Test ........................................................ 10-24
Radiator Hoses and Pipes
Rear Air Outlet
Replacement ....................................... 20-168
Rear Door Hook Pin
Replacement ......................................... 20-26
Rear Doors
RearSheH
Rear Side Trim Panel
Rear Speakers
Rear Suspension
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-157
Rear Window Defogger Switch
Rear Window Defogger Wires
Repair .................................................. 22-158
Test ...................................................... 22-158
Rear Window Glass
Replacement ......................................... 20-49
Receiver IDryer
Replacement ......................................... 21-22
Test ........................................................ 21-22
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Refrigerant
Replacement ............................. 21-54, 55, 56
Test ........................................................ 21-57
Refrigerant Oil
Replacement ......................................... 21-32
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly ...... 14-163
Rocker Arm Assembly
Removal .................................................. 6-36
Disassembly/Reassembly ............... 6-37, 38
Rocker Arms
Test .......................................................... 6-11
Inspection ............................................... 6-39
Roof Drip Moldings
Replacement .............................. 20-161,162
Roof Moldings
Replacement ....................................... 20-163
s
Safety Indicator
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-74
Input Test .............................................. 22-76
Seat Armrest, Rear
Replacement ....................................... 20-130
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Replacement
Seat Belt Reminder .......................... 22-59
Seat Belts
Component Location Index ............... 23-3,4
Seat Belts, Front
Replacement ....................................... 23-5, 7
Inspection ............................................. 23-17
Seat Belts, Rear
Replacement ................................... 23-12, 15
Seat Cover, Front
Replacement ....................................... 20-123
Seat Cushion Cover, Rear
Replacement .............................. 20-138,139
Seat Heater Elements
Test ...................................................... 22-199
Seat Heater Switches
Test ...................................................... 22-199
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-198
Seat Side Bolster Cover, Rear
Replacement ....................................... 20-137
Seat Torsion Bar
Replacement ....................................... 20-120
Seat Wire Harness, Driver's
Installation .................................. 20-115, 118
Seat, Front
Disassembly/Reassembly ....... 20-102,103,
104,105,106,107,108,109,110,111,112,1
13, 114
Seat, Rear
Removal/Installation .................. 20-128, 129
Seat-back Cover, Rear
Replacement .............................. 20-134,135
Seat-back Latch, Rear
Replacement .............................. 20-132,133
Seat-back Lock Cylinder, Rear
Replacement ....................................... 20-133
Secondary Shaft Bearing, Torque
Converter Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-167
Replacement ....................................... 14-178
Security Indicator
Indicators ........................................ 22-206
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Test
Indicators ........................................ 22-227
Alarm System ............................. 22-227
Select Lever
Replacement ......................................... 13-18
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Servo Body
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly ...... 14-164
Shift Arm
Replacement ......................................... 13-18
Shift Control Solenoid Valves
Replacement ....................................... 14-107
Test ...................................................... 14-107
Shift Forks
Inspection ............................................. 13-39
Shift Lock Solenoid
Test ...................................................... 14-147
Replacement ....................................... 14-148
Shift Lock System Circuit
Side Airbag Indicator
Replacement
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
SRS .................................................... 22-59
SRS .............................................. 23-24, 25
Side Airbag, Driver's
Replacement ....................................... 23-304
Side Airbag, Front Passenger's
Side Impact Sensors
Component Location Index ........... 23-24,25
Replacement ...................... 23-319, 320, 321
Side Marker Light
Replacement ....................................... 22-103
Side Sill Panels
Replacement .............................. 20-165,166
Spark Plugs
Inspection ............................................... 4-26
Specifications
(See section 2)
Speedometer
SRS
Component Location Index ... 23-23, 24, 25,
26,27
Description ............................... 23-62, 63, 65
Circuit Diagram .................. 23-67,68,70,72
SRS Indicator
Replacement
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
SRS .................................................... 22-59
SRS .............................................. 23-24, 25
SRS Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting ...... 23-264, 274, 279, 282,
287,297
SRS Unit
Component Location Index ........... 23-24, 25 T
Replacement .............................. 23-317, 318
Starter Tachometer
Test ............................................................ 4-8 Component Location Index ................. 22-57
Replacement ............................................. 4-9
Overhaul ................................................. 4-10 Taillight
Replacement .............................. 22-100,101
Starter Solenoid Component Location Index .............. 22-206
Test ............................................................ 4-7
Taillight Relay
Starter Switch Signal Circuit Component Location Index
Troubleshooting ................................ 11-105 Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System . 22-206
Taillights .......................................... 22-206
Starting System
Component Location Index ..................... 4-3 Thermostat
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 4-4 Test .......................................................... 10-9
Troubleshooting ....................................... 4-5 Replacement ......................................... 10-13
Steering Throttle Body
Component Location Index ................... 17-3 Test ...................................................... 11-130
Troubleshooting ..................................... 17-6 Removal/Installation .......................... 11-133
Inspection ......................................... 17-7,11 Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 11-134
Steering Column Throttle Cable
Component Location Index ................... 17-3 Adjustment ......................................... 11-132
Inspection/Adjustment ........................ 17-27 Tie-rod Ball Joint Boots
Replacement ......................................... 17-50
Steering Gearbox
Component Location Index ................... 17-3 Timing Belt
Inspection ............................................... 17-8 Component Location Index ..................... 6-3
Removal ................................................ 17-30 Inspection ............................................... 6-19
Overhaul ............................................... 17-32 Adjustment ............................................. 6-22
Installation ............................................ 17-47 Removal .................................................. 6-23
Installation .............................................. 6-26
Steering Hanger Beam
Replacement ......................................... 20-94 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Replacement ....................................... 14-106
Steering Linkage Test ...................................................... 14-106
Inspection ............................................... 17-8
Trailing Arms
Steering Lock Component Location Index ................... 18-4
Component Location Index ................... 17-3 Replacement ......................................... 18-28
Replacement ......................................... 17-28
Steering Rack Guide Removal .............................................. 14-153
Adjustment ........................................... 17-29 Installation .......................................... 14-191
Steering Wheel Transmission Range Switch
Component Location Index ................... 17-3 Test ...................................................... 14-138
Inspection ............................................... 17-7 Replacement ....................................... 14-139
Removal ................................................ 17-22
Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 17-23 Trim
Installation ............................................ 17-24 Component Location Index ........... 20-72, 73
Removal/Installation .... 20-74, 75, 76, 77, 78
Sub-frames
Replacement ....................................... 20-180 Troubleshooting
Suspension
Adjustment ............................................. 18-5 Trunk Floor Mat
Synchro Ring, Dual-cone
Inspection ............................................. 13-41 Trunk Key Cylinder Switch
Synchro Sleeve Test ...................................................... 22-226
Inspection/Reassembly ....................... 13-41
Trunk Latch Switch
Alarm System ............................. 22-206
Trunk Light ...................................... 22-108
Test
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System . 22-226
Trunk Light ...................................... 22-111
Trunk Lid
Replacement ....................................... 20-154
Adjustment ......................................... 20-156
Replacement ....................................... 20-158
Trunk Lid Latch
Replacement ....................................... 20-178
Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder
Replacement ....................................... 20-179
Trunk Lid Opener
Replacement ....................................... 20-176
Trunk Lid Opener Cable
Replacement .............................. 20-171,173
Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid
Test ...................................................... 22-226
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar
Replacement ....................................... 20-157
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip
Replacement ....................................... 20-158
Trunk Light Assembly
Test ...................................................... 22-111
Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder
Replacement ....................................... 20-131
Trunk Rear Trim Panel
Trunk Side Pocket
Trunk Side Trim Panel
Turn Signal Indicators
Replacement
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights ....... 22-59
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights ..... 22-104
Turn Signal Light Switch
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay
Test ...................................................... 22-106
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-105
Tweeters
u
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Driver's
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Passenger's
Upper Arms
Rear Suspension ................................ 18-4
Replacement
Rear Suspension .............................. 18-27
v
Valve Guides
Inspection ............................................... 6-44
Replacement ........................................... 6-45
Valve Seals
Replacement ........................................... 6-16
Removal .................................................. 6-43
Valve Seats
Repair ...................................................... 6-47
Valve Springs
Removal .................................................. 6-43
Valves
Adjustment ............................................. 6-14
Removal .................................................. 6-43
Inspection ............................................... 6-44
Installation .............................................. 6-49
Vanity Mirror Lights
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ............................. 22-69, 71
VSS
Speedometer Components ............. 22-57
Replacement
Cruise Control System ..................... 22-68
Fuel Injection System (PGM-Fil ...... 22-68
Speedometer Components ............. 22-68
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies/Springs
VTEC Solenoid Valve
Test .......................................................... 6-10
VTEC Solenoid Valve Filter
w
Washer Auid Level Indicator
Replacement
Indicators .......................................... 22-59
Wiper/Washer ................................... 22-59
Washer Fluid Level Switch
Test ...................................................... 22-188
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Replacement ....................................... 22-188
Washer Motor, Windshield
Test ...................................................... 22-187
Washer Tube, Windshield
Replacement ....................................... 22-189
Water Outlet
Replacement ......................................... 10-12
Water Pump
Inspection ............................................... 10-9
Replacement ......................................... 10-10
Wheel Bearings
Rear Suspension ................................ 18-4
Inspection
Wheel Speed Sensors
Inspection ............................................. 19-70
Replacement ......................................... 19-71
Wheels and Tires
Inspection ............................................... 18-8
Window Antenna Coil
Antenna ........................................... 22-122
Rear Window Defogger ................. 22-156
Test
Antenna ........................................... 22-127
Window Antenna Wires
Repair .................................................. 22-126
Test ...................................................... 22-126
Windows
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Windshield Glass
Replacement ......................................... 20-40
Wiper Arms. Windshield
Wiper Linkage. Windshield
Wiper Motor. Windshield
Replacement ....................................... 22-186
Test ...................................................... 22-186
Wiper/Washer
Circuit Diagram .................................. 22-180
Wiper/Washer Switch
Test/Replacement ............................. 22-185
Wire Harnesses
Wiring System
How-to Information ............................... 22-3
Relay and Control Unit Locations .. , 22-7.8.
10
1
1st/2nd Clutch Assemblv
Disassembly ....................................... 14-179
Inspection ........................................... 14-182
Resassembly ...................................... 14-184
2
Replacement .............................. 14-110. 111
3
Replacement ....................................... 14-112
3rd/4th Clutch Assembly
Inspection ........................................... 14-169
(HJ 1998 -2002
Service Manual
V6 Supplement
General Information
- 1998 Model .................................................. 1-2
- 1999 Model .................................................. 1-3
- 2000 Model 11 .. 1 ..... II ... 11 ............ 1 ...... 1............. 1-4
- 2001 Model ....... ........................................... 1-5
- 2002 Model ............................ II 1-6
Identification Number Locations .................... 1-7
Warning/Caution Label Locations . .......... ....... 1-8
Under-hood Emission Control Label............... 1-9
Parts Marking .................................................... 1-14
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes -1998 Model
1HG CG1 64 * W A 000001
Ilrrriri
a b cdefgh
a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle
HONDA, Passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body, and Engine Type
CG1: ACCORDV6/J30A1
CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1
US model
4: LX, LXV6
5: EX, EXV6
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
W: 1998
g. Factory Code
Canada model
4: LX, LXV6
5: EX, EXV6
6: EX-L
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
1-2
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification.
Number and Canadian
Engine Number
J30A1 - 1300001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
J30A1: 3.0.e SOHC VTEC Sequential Multipart
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 5000001
II
a b
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code Color
B-80P
Mystic Blue Pearl 'Notet
NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic
RP-25P Black Currant Pearl
RP-29P Raisin Pearl
R-94 San Marino Red
YR-508P Heather Mist Metallic 'Note2
* Note 1: US model only
* Note 2: Canada model only
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KAS84AOA
BACK
1 HG CG1 64 * X A 000001
11IIII1I
a b cdefgh
HONDA. Passenger vehicle
CG 1: ACCORD V6/J30A 1
US model
4: LX, LXV6
5: EX, EXV6
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
X: 1999
g. Factory Code
Canada model
4: LX
5: EX
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
800001 -: Canada model
Number and Federal
Number and Canadian
Engine Number
J30A 1 - 2000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
J30A 1: 3.0.e SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 6000001
II
a b
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code Color
NH-612M Regent Silver Metallic -Not.2
RP-25P Black Currant Pearl -Not.t
R-94
San Marino Red -Not.t
YR-508M Heather Mist Metallic
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
8-80P
KAS84AOA
Paint Code '----------/
1-3
BACK
General Information
1 HG CG1 6 4 * Y A 000001
II111111
a b cdef gh
CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1
US model
4: LX, LXV6
5: EX, EXV6
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
Y:2000
g. Factory Code
Canada model
4: LX
5: EX
A: Marysvi"e, Ohio Factory in U.S.A.
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
1-4
Number and Federal
Number and Canadian
Engine Number
J30A 1 - 3000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
J30A 1: 3.0 SOHC VTEC Sequential M ultiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 7500001
II
a b
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-92P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-623M
RP-31M
R-94
YR-524M
* Note: US model only
Color
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White Not.
Satin Silver Metallic
Signet Silver Meta"ic
San Marino Red Not.
Naples Gold Meta"ic
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KAS84AOA
BACK
1 HG CG1 6 4 * 1 A 000001
IIIIIII1
a b cdefgh
US model
4: LX, LX V6
5: EX, EXV6
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
1: 2001
g. Factory Code
Canada model
4: LX
5: EX
C: Saitama in Japan (Sayama).
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
Number and Federal
Number and Canadian
Engine Number
J30A 1 - 4000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
J30A 1: 3.0.e SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 8000001
II
a b
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code Color
B-96P Eternal Blue Pearl Note2
G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl -No'.'
NH-578 Taffeta White -No'.'
R-94 San Marino Red -No'e'
R-507P Firepepper Pearl
RP-31M Signet Silver Metallic -No'e2
YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
8-80P
KAS84AOA
Paint Code '-------'
1-5
BACK
General Information
1HG CG1 64* 2 A 000001
IIIII111
a b cdef gh
US model
4: LX V6
5: EX V6
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
2:2002
g. Factory Code
Canada model
1: SE
4: LX
5: EX
C: Saitama in Japan (Sayama)
h. Serial Number
000001-: US model
800001 -: Canada model
1-6
Number and Federal
Number and Canadian
Engine Number
J30A 1 - 5000001
II
a b
a. Engine Type
J30A1: 3.0 Q SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 9000001
II
a b
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code Color
B-96P Eternal Blue Pearl 'Note2
G-508P Noble Green Pearl -Not.,
NH-578
Taffeta White -Not.,
R-94
San Marino Red -Note'
R-507P Firepepper Pearl
YR-524M Naples Gold Metallic
COLOR LABEL
Example:
INT. COLOR
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-SOP
KAS84AOA
Paint Code '-------'
BACK
Identification Number Locations
Number (VIN)
Engine Number
Transmission Number
(Automatic)
1-7 BACK
General Information
Warning/Caution Label Locations
1-8
ENGINE
COOLANT
INFORMATION
SERVICE
INFORMATION
(Under-hood
Emission
Control Labell
SRS
WARNING
LABEL
BATTERY
CAUTION
BACK
Example:
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1991
MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
VALVE LASH
(COLDI
(IN)O. 22O. 02mm
{EX} O. JOO. 02mm
SPARl PLUG GAP 1. 0-1. lmm
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.
WHNXVDl. OFF1 rWC/H02S (2)
WHNXR0130AAA EGR/SFI
(' 86.1 30-96 PROCEDURES)
l.Ol
CATALYST
(HJ
HONOA MOTOR CO. , L TO
FEDERAL
30VHGXBG
@
PBC-ADD
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
TIER 1/LEV
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA LEV
CALIFORNIA ULEV
Engine and Evaporative Families
Engine Family:
W HNX V 03.0 FF1
III1I
abc d e
a. Model Year
W: 1998
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
W HNX R 0130 AAA
1IIII
abc d e
a. Model Year
W:1998
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
1-9
BACK
General Information
Example:
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
MODEL YEAR HEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
VALVE LASH
(COLD)
(IN) O. 22O. 02mm
(EX)O. lOtO. 02mm
SPARK PLUG GAP 1. 0-1. Imm
XHNXV03. OFF! TWC/H02S (2)
XHNXR0130AAA EGR/SFI
l.OL
CATALYST
HONDA MOTOR CO L TO
FEDERAL
30VHGXBG
(Soy)
P8e-ADI
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
NEWTLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
TIER 1/LEV
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA LEV
CALIFORNIA ULEV
1-10
Engine Family:
X HNX V 03.0 FF1
rlr"
abc d e
a. Model Year
X: 1999
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
X HNX R 0130 AAA
rlr"
abc d e
a. Model Year
X: 1999
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
BACK
Example:
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA [] TO CANISTER EVIoP PURGE
NlEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000
;;. -+ :;- MODEL YEAR NEW lEV PASSENGER CARS
AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS FUEli'RESSURt .. = .. , !
APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW
LEV PASSENGER CARS.
:;::, , ""'rg-::l
VALVE LASH (I N) O. 22O. 02mm
(COLD) (EX) O. lOO. 02mm . I,
, . , ,
SPARl PLUG GAP 1.0*1. lmm
" I', \
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDEO.

' , I .,
YHNXV03. OFA3 TWC!H02S (2) \ \ I \ I ,-
YHNXR0130AAA EGR/SF] \ '.t.J "
l.Ol '.- '- .. \ ,:
CATALYST
RAe VALVE '
______________ --"",. {} FRONT
(HJ
30VHGFFG
@
I I
HONDA MOTOR CO . LTD
P8C-A02
FEDERAL
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, AND CALIFORNIA
Engine Family:
Y HNX V 03.0 FF1
III11
ab c d
a. Model Year
Y:2000
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V:LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
Y HNX R 0130 AAA
rlill
ab c d
a. Model Year
Y:2000
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
1-11
BACK
General Information
Example:
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U,S. EPA NLEV
REGULATiONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR
lAC VALVE
.fYAL fY!E.
NEW lEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA

REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR .,n t
NEW lEV PASSENGER CARS.
0
VALVE LASH (IN) O. UfO. 02mm
";"::;: , \ngt
(COLO) (EX) O. laO. 02mm
I' ,.
SPARK PLUG GAP 1.0-1.1mm ' ' ,
, " I
./,--,:,.;;-" , 0 I
' I I I
IHNXV03.0MSU TWC/HOZS (2) r
lHNXR0130AAF EGR/SF1
'." \ .1 "
loOt OBOII CERTIFIED
IA BYPASS CONTROL
CATALYST
THERMAL VALVE ___
{!r
FRONT
(HJ
30VAGFFG
@
HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD
P8C-A03
FEDERAL
CANADIAN TIER 1
REGULATIONS AND CAN DIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS
FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS.
1-12
Engine Family:
1 HNX V 03.0 M5U
IIIII
ab cd
a. Model Year
1: 2001
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T:LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
1 HNX R 0130 AAF
IIIII
ab c d
a. Model Year
1:2001
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
BACK
Example:
THIS vEHICLE CONFORNS TO ll. S. EPA
o TOCANISTER EVA'PU"E
HLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 200t
roo -. - J;LVE NODEl YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS
FUEL-'RESiii,t=="
AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 2002 MODEL VEAR NEW
LEV PASSENGER CARS.
:"'"'::'g
VALVE LUN (1110. ZHO. 02mm
/ ,I /-, y;r::): -:1
(COLD) (Exlo. 30:'0. Ohllil " \
I I f \
SPARK PlUG GAP 1. 01. lmlD / : I \

2HNXYOJ.OWlC TWC/H02S(2)
, \ I ' I
I \ I I I .-
2HNlR0130UF EGRISri
': ;
3.0l DaD I CERTIFIED \ \ \ \ "
CATALYST
;;';;;.ssc"TROL/:'..o-
_______
(HJ
30VHGFFG

I I
Honda Motor Co . Ltd
pac .'&'04
FEDERAL and CANADIAN TIER 1
Engine Family:
2 HNX V 03.0 MYC
rlill
ab c d
a. Model Year
2:2002
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
2 HNX R 0130 AAF
rlill
ab c d
a. Model Year
2:2002
e
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
1-13 BACK
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts will have self-adhesive labels, and a replacement engine and
transmission will have the VIN plate attached with a break-off bolt.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
1-14
BACK
specs
Specifications
Engine Electrical .................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .................................................. 2-2
Cylinder Head ........................................................ 2-3
Engine Block .......................................................... 2-4
Engine Lubrication ................................................ 2-5
Cooling ................................................................... 2-5
Fuel and Emissions ............................................... 2-5
Automatic Transmission and Differential ........... 2-6
Steering .................................................................. 2-12
Suspension ............................................................ 2-13
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-13
Dimensions ............................................................ 2-14
Weight (U.S.A.) ...................................................... 2-14
Weight (CANADA) ................................................. 2-14
Engine .................................................................... 2-14
Starter .................................................................... 2-14
Automatic Transmission ...................................... 2-14
Steering .................................................................. 2-15
Suspension ............................................................ 2-15
Wheel Alignment .................................................. 2-15
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-15
Tires ........................................................................ 2-15
Electrical Ratings ................................................... 2-16
Body Specifications
Illustration .............................................................. 2-17
E EI ct .
ngme e rica
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12 V
Primary winding resistance at 68F (20C) 0.34-0.42 Q
Secondary winding resistance at 68F (20C) 1.71-20.3kQ
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition wire Resistance at 68F (20C) 25 kQ max.
Spark plug Type NGK: PZFR5F-ll
DENSO: PKJ16CR-L 11
Gap 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) 1.3 mm (0.05 in.)
Ignition timing At idle (check NT (in INJ or [fj): 102BTDC at 68050 rpm
the red mark)
Alternator belt Tension adjustment Auto adjuster type
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and 100A
normal engine
temperature
Starter Output 1.6kW
Commutator mica depth 0.4-0.5 mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.016-0.020 in.)
Brush length 15.8-16.2 mm (0.62-0.64 in.) 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
Brush spring tension (new) 15.7 -17.7 N (1.60 -1.80 kgf, 3.53 - 3.97 Ibs)
E ngme A ssem bl IV
Compression Pressure Check at 200 rpm with wide Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm', 135 psi)
--
open throttle. (See Design Specs for Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) --
ratio.) variation
2-2
BACK
II
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height 120.95-121.05 mm (4.762-4.766 in.) --
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake. primary 34.615 mm (1.3628 in.) --
Intake. mid 36.210 mm (1.4256 in.) --
Intake. 31.188 mm (1.2279 in.) --
secondary
Exhaust 36.076 mm (1.4203 in.) --
Valves Clearance (cold) Intake 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) --
Exhaust 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.) --
StemO.D. Intake 5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in.) 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust 5.450-5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.018 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve seats Width Intake 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.75-47.55 mm (1.841-1.872 in.) 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Valve springs Free length Intake 51.03 mm (2.009 in.) --
Exhaust 53.48 mm (2.106 in.) --
Valve guides 1.0. Intake 5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171-0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.) --
Exhaust 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812-0.852 in.) --
Rocker arms Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010-0.0026 in.) 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)
2-3
BACK
E 81 k ngme oc
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 86.000-86.015 mm 86.065mm
(3.3858-3.3864 in.) (3.3884 in.)
Bore taper -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit -- 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Piston Skirt O.D.at 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from 85.975-85.985 mm 85.965mm
bottom of skirt (3.3848-3.3852 in.) (3.3844 in.)
Clearance in cylinder 0.015-0.040 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0006-0.0016 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Second 1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0,0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Oil 2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in.) 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
Piston rings Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.035-0.060 mm (0.0014-0.024 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Second 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.040-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in.) 0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin 0.0. 21.962-21.965 mm 21.954mm
(0.8646-0.8648 in.) (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.0050-+0.0010 mm 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020- +0.00004 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
(0.0002-0.0006 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm --
(0.8650-0.8652 in.)
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 56.0 mm (2.20 in.) --
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0,018 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 71.976-72.000 mm --
(2.8337 - 2.8346 in.)
Rod journal diameter 52.976-53.000 mm --
(2.0857 - 2.0866 in.)
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0,018 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearings clearance
Rod bearing 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.002 in.)
clearance
2-4 BACK
E Lb ngme u rlcatlon
Engine oil Capacity 5.0.e (5.3 US qt, 4.4 Imp qt) for engine overhaul
4.4.e (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt) for oil change, including filter
4.0.e (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) for oil change, without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.04-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.14-0.19 mm (0.006-0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial 0.02-0.07 mm (0.001-0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
clearance
Oil pressure with oil temperature at at idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm', 10 psi)
176F (80C) at 3,000 rpm 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm', 71 psi)
c r oomg
I
Service Limit
Radiator Coolant capacity (includes engine, Engine overhaul 7.5.e (7.9 US qt, 6.6 Imp qt)
heater, hoses and reservoir) Coolant change 5.6.e (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt)
Reservoir Coolant capacity 0.6.e (0.6 US qt, 0.5 Imp qt)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm', 14-18 psi)
'98-00 models Fully open 194F (90C)
'01-02 models Fully open 190F (88C)
Radiator fan Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196-203F (91-95C)
switch Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5-15F (3-8C) from actual "ON" temperature
Fan timer "ON" temperature 217-232F (103-111C)
Fan timer "OFF" temperature Subtract 5- 23F (3-13C) from actual "ON" temperature
Fuel and Emissions
I
Service Limit
Fuel pressure Pressure with regulator 280 - 330 kPa (2.9 - 3.4 kgf/cm', 41 - 48 psi)
regulator vacuum hose disconnected
Fuel tank Capacity 64.8.e (17.1 US gal, 14.3 Imp gal)
Engine idle Idle speed with headlights In [HI or [f] 68050 rpm
and radiator fan off
IdleCO% 0.1 max.
2-5
BACK
Automatic Transmission and Differential
ATF (Automatic Capacity Use Honda For fluid change: 2.9 4 (3.1 US qt, 2.6 Imp qt)
Transmission ATF-Z1 For overhaul: 7.2 4 (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt)
Fluid)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 1,500 rpm in BOO-B60 kPa 760kPa
!HI r ~ (B.2-B.B kgf/cm', 120-130 psi) (7.7 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
position
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 790-B70 kPa 750kPa
~ position (B.1-B.9 kgf/cm', 120-130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 790-B70kPa 750kPa
~ position (B.1-B.9 kgf/cm', 120-130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 1,500 rpm in 790-B70kPa 750kPa
00 position (B.1-B.9 kgf/cm', 120-130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
1 st cl utch pressu re At 1,500 rpm in 790-B70 kPa 750kPa
ill position (B.1-B.9 kgf/cm', 120-130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed: Check with vehicle on 2,250-2,550 rpm
level ground
Clutches Clutch end plate-to-top disc 1st 1.2-1.4mm
clearance (0.047-0.055 in.)
2nd 0.B5-1.05 mm
(0.033-0.041 in.)
3rd 0.55-0.75 mm
(0.022-0.030 in.)
4th 0.55-0.75 mm
(0.022-0.030 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 45.7 mm (1.BO in.) 43.7 mm (1.72 in.)
2nd 63.0 mm (2.48 in.) 61.0 mm (2.40 in.)
3rd,4th 33.5 mm (1.32 in.) 31.5 mm (1.24 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch plate thickness 1st 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
2nd 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
3rd 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
4th 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
1st and 2nd clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 3.10 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
MarkO 3.00 mm (0.11B in.) When discolored
3rd and 4th clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 2.10 mm (0.OB3 in.) When discolored
Mark2 2.20 mm (0.OB7 in.) When discolored
Mark 5 2.50 mm (0.09B in.) When discolored
2-6 BACK
Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact 1.0. Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm When worn or
side (1.0630-1.0638 in.) damaged
ATF pump side 29.000-29.021 mm When worn or
(1.1417-1.1426 in.) damaged
ATF pump gear thrust clearance 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
ATF pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.) --
ATF pump drive gear 1.0. 14.016-14.034 mm When worn or
(0.5518-0.5525 in.) damaged
ATF pump driven gear shaft 0.0. 13.980-13.99 mm When worn or
(0.5504-0.5508 in.) damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.60-6.00 mm (0.220-0.236 in.) 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear and When worn or
pawl damaged
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000 14.010 mm
(0.5512-0.5516 in.)
Shift fork shaft valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm 37.045 mm
(1.4567-1.4582 in.) (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact 1.0. 32.000-32.025 mm 32.050mm
body (1.2598-1.2608 in.) (1.2618 in.)
Accumulator Sealing ring contact 1.0. 35.000-35.025 mm 35.05mm
body (1.3780-1.3789 in.) (1.3799 in.)
Stator shaft Sealing ring contact 1.0. 29.000-29.013 mm 29.050mm
(1.1417-1.1422 in.) (1.1437 in.)
(cont'd)
2-7
BACK
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at stator shaft 22.984-23.000 mm When worn or
at 3rd gear 52.975-52.991 mm When worn or
(2.0856-2.0863 in.) damaged
at 4th gear collar 33.975-33.991 mm When worn or
(1.3376-1.3382 in.) damaged
1.0. of 3rd gear 59.000-59.019 mm When worn or
(2.3228-2.3236 in.) damaged
1.0. of 4th gear 40.000-40.016 mm When worn or
(1.5748-1.5754 in.) damaged
End play of 3rd gear 0.03-0.31 mm (0.001-0.012 in.) --
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Thrust washer thickness 27x47x5mm 5.00 mm (0.197 in.) When worn or
damaged
Length of 4th gear collar 58.5-58.6 mm (2.303-2.307 in.) --
4th gear collar flange thickness 4.45-4.60 mm (0.175-0.181 in.) When worn or
damaged
Sealing ring thickness 32 mmsealing 1.850-1.950 mm (0.073-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring
29 mm sealing 1.850-1.950 mm (0.073-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025 - 2.060 mm (0.079 - 0.081 in.) 2.080 mm (0.082 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 3rd clutch 5.97 - 5.98 mm (0.2350 - 0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
4th clutch 11.47 - 11.48 mm (0.4516 - 0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 3rd clutch 6.018 - 6.030 mm (0.2369 - 0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
4th clutch 11.500 -11.518mm 11.530 mm
(0.4528 - 0.4535 in.) (0.4539 in.)
2-8
BACK
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 4th gear 34.975-34.991 mm When worn or
(1.5740-1.5748 in.) damaged
at park gear 41.964-41.980 mm When worn or
(1.6521-1.6528 in.) damaged
at right end 38.505-38.515 mm When worn or
(1.5159-1.5163 in.) damaged
1.0. of 4th gear 41.000-41.016 mm When worn or
(1.6142-1.6148 in.) damaged
1.0. of idler gear 50.000-50.016 mm When worn or
(1.9685-1.9691 in.) damaged
1.0. of reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm When worn or
(1.8110-1.8116 in.) damaged
End play of 1st gear 0.00-0.33 mm (0.000-0.013 in.) --
End play of idler gear 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.) --
End play of reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.004-0.010 in.) --
Length of distance collar 53.92-53.96 mm (2.123-2.124 in.) --
Reverse selector hub 0.0. 55.87 -55.90 mm (2.1996-2.2008 in.) Whenwprnor
damaged
(cont'd)
2-9
BACK
Secondary shaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 1st gear 37.978-37.993 mm When worn or
(1.3380-1.3385 in.) damaged
1.0. of 1 st gear 44.000-44.016 mm When worn or
(1.7323-1.7329 in.) damaged
1.0. of 2nd gear 40.000-40.016 mm When worn or
(1.5748-1.5754 in.) damaged
End play of 1 st gear 0.07-0.15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.)
--
End play of 2nd gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.) --
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer thickness No.1 6.85 mm (0.270 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.)
--
Sealing ring thickness 1.890-1.950 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 7.97-7.98 mm (0.3138-0.3142 in.) 7.95 mm (0.3130 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 8.000-8.015 mm (0.3150-0.3156 in.) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in.)
Reverse idler Diameter of needle bearing contact at reverse idler 13.990-14.000 mm When worn or
gear area gear shaft (0.5508-0.5512 in.) damaged
End play 0.03-0.36 mm (0.001-0.014 in.) --
I.D. 18.007 -18.020 mm When worn or
(0.7089-0.7094 in.) damaged
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.97 -1.03 mm (0.038-0.041 in.) --
housing side
Reverse idler 0.97-1.03 mm (0.038-0.041 in.) --
gear shaft holder
side
1.0. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.006-14.024 mm When worn or
(0.5514-0.5521 in.) damaged
1.0. oftransmission housing of reverse 14.006-14.024 mm --
idler gear shaft contact area (0.5514-0.5521 in.)
2-10 BACK
Wire Diameter D.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Main valve body Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4 mm 33.5mm 9.8
page 14-161) Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Shift valve D spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 35.7 mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 32.2mm 13.4
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.268 in.)
Relief valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6mm 30.1 mm 10.7
(0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.185 in.)
Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9mm 7.6mm 63.0mm 22.4
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.480 in.)
Cooler check valve spring 0.6mm 5.8mm 14.5 mm 6.8
(0.024 in.) (0.228 in.) (0.571 in.)
Torque converter check 1.2mm 8.6mm 35.1 mm 14.3
valve spring (0.047 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.382 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 35.7 mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 5.5mm 37.4 mm 30.3mm 2.12
body springs (0.217 in.) (1.472 in.) (1.193in.)
(see page 14- Regulator valve spring A 1.8mm 14.7 mm 87.5mm 16.5
164) (0.071 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.445 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.7mm 9.4mm 44.0mm 13.4
(0.067 in.) (0.370 in.) (1.732 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.9mm 14.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.65mm 6.6mm 34.8mm 15.6
(0.026 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.370 in.)
Servo body Shift valve B spring 0.8mm 7.1 mm 40.4mm 16.9
page 14-165) Shift valve A spring 0.8mm 7.1 mm 40.4mm 16.9
(0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.591 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
4th accumulator spring A 2.6mm 19.6 mm 66.4mm 9.7
(0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.614 in.)
4th accumulator spring B 2.4mm 12.8mm 51.5 mm 11.5
(0.094 in.) (0.504 in.) (2.028 in.)
3rd accumulator spring A 2.6mm 19.6 mm 66.4 mm 9.7
(0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.614 in.)
3rd accumulator spring B 2.4mm 12.8 mm 51.5 mm 11.5
(0.094 in.) (0.504 in.) (2.028 in.)
Accumulator 1st accumulator spring B 2.7mm 15.0 mm 52.5mm 10.3
(see page 14- 1st accumulator spring A 2.5mm 21.6 mm 87.5 mm 11.8
166) (0.098 in.) (0.850 in.) (3.445 in.)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.4mm 12.6 mm 53.5mm 12.9
(0.094 in.) (0.496 in.) (2.106 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.7mm 19.6mm 66.3 mm 9.9
(0.106 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.610 in.)
(cont'd)
2-11
BACK
Automatic Transmission and Differential (co nt' d)
AfT differential Pinion shaft contact area J.D. 18.010-18.028 mm --
carrier (0.7091- 0.7098 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.023-0.057 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
Driveshaft contact area J.D. 30.025-30.045 mm (1.182-1.183 in.) --
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.086 mm (0.002-0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080-0.116 mm (0.003-0.005 in.)
--
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 2.7-3.9 Nm Adjust
(preload) (28-40 kgfcm, 24-35Ibfin.)
For used bearing 2.5-3.6 Nm Adjust
(25-37 kgfcm, 22-32Ibfin.)
AfT differential Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in.) --
pinion gear J.D. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm (0.0022-0.0037 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
s teermg
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside With engine 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
--
edge running
Starting load measured at outside With engine 30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 Ibs) --
edge running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 60
o
5
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 7,600-8,300 kpa
closed (78-85 kgf/cm',
1,110-1,210 psi)
Power steering Capacity Use Genuine For fluid change: 0.4 e (0.42 US pt, 0.35 Imp qt)
fluid Honda Power For system overhaul: 1.1 e (1.16 US qt, 0.97 Imp qt)
Steering Fluid
Power steering Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) Used belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in.)
pump belt applied mid-way between pulleys New belt: 8.5-11.0 mm (0.34-0.43 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a Tension (measured with belt tension Use belt: 390-540 N (40-55 kgf, 88-120 Ibs))
new belt to the gauge) New belt: 740-880 N (75-90 kgf, 170-200 Ibs))
new belt spec,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
then readjust it
to the used belt
spec.
2-12
BACK
~ s uspenslon
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0000' 1
Rear -0030' 1
Caster Front 248' 1
Total toe Front 02 mm (O 1/16 in.)
Rear IN 22 (1/16 1116 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 3832'2
Outside wheel 3103' (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Steel wheel Runout Axial 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearings End play Front 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Rear 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Brakes
Parking brake Distance travelled when 6-9 clicks
lever pulled with 196 N (20 kgf, 441bs) of
force
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 148 mm (513/16 in.)
Free play 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance 0-0.4 mm (0-0.015 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 22.9-23.1 mm (0.90-0.91 in.) 21.0 mm (0.83 in.)
Rear 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.) 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Runout Front 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Rear 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Parallelism Front and rear 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pads Thickness Front 10.5 -11.5 mm (0.41 - 0.45 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 8.9-9.1 mm (0.355-0.358 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
A" C d"" Ir on Itlonmg
I
Service Limit
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacities of systems Calsonic condenser 450-500 g (15.9-17.6 oz)
Showa condenser 600-650 g (21.2-22.9 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type DENSO: ND-OIL 8 (PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 me (5/6 fl OZ, 0.9 Imp OZ)
Evaporator 40 me (1 1/3 fl OZ, 1.4 Imp OZ)
Each line and 10 me (1/3 fl OZ, 0.4 Imp OZ)
hose
Receiver 10 me (1/3 fl OZ, 0.41mp oz)
Compressor 160-175 ml! (5 1/3-6 fl OZ, 5.6-6.2 Imp OZ)
Compressor Starter coil resistance at 68F (20C) 3.4-3.8 Q
(DENSO) Pulley-to-pressure plate 0.50.15 mm (O.020.006 in.)
clearance
2-13
BACK
DIMENSIONS Overall length 4-door 4,795 mm (188.8 in.)
2-door 4,745 mm (186.8 in.)
Overall width 1,785 mm (70.3 in.)
Overall height 4-door 1,455 mm (57.3 in.)
2-door 1,405 mm (55.3 in.)
Wheelbase 4-door 2,715 mm (106.9 in.)
2-door 2,670 mm (105.1 in.)
Track Front 1,555 mm (61.2 in.)
Rear 1,535 mm (60.4 in.)
Ground clearance 158 mm (6.2 in.)
Seating capacity Five
WEIGHT (U.S.A.) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4-door 4,2351bs
(GVWR) 2-door 4,1901bs
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4-door 1,920 kg
(CANADA) (GVWR) 2-door 1.900 kg
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gasoline
engine
Cylinder arrangement 60V6-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 86.0 x 86.0 mm (3.39 x 3.39 in.)
Displacement 2,997 cm' m ~ ) (183 cu in.)
Compression ratio 9.4
Valve train Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 58.4 Ii (61.7 US qt, 51.41mp qt)/minute
Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 172 Ii (182 US qt, 151 Imp qt)/minute
Fuel required UNLEADED gasoline with 86 pump octane number or
higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output 1.6kW
Nominal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Clockwise as viewed from gear end
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically controlled automatic, 4-speed forward, 1
TRANSMISSION reverse
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
2nd 1.502
3rd 0.947
4th 0.608
Reverse 1.846
Gear ratio 4.200
2-14 BACK
STEERING Type Power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 15.77
Turns,lock-to-lock 3.05
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent double wishbone, coil spring with stabilizer
Rear Five-link double wishbone
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
WHEEL Camber Front 0
ALIGNMENT Rear -030'
Caster Front 248'
Total toe Front o mm (Din.)
Rear In 2 mm (1/16 in.)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 59 cm' x 2 (9.0 sq in. x 2)
Rear 28 cm' x 2 (4.3 sq in. x 2)
TIRES Size of front and rear tires P205/65 R15 92V
Size of spare tires T135/90D15100M
AIR Cooling capacity 5,240 Kcal/h (20,800 BTU/h)
CONDITIONING Compressor Type/Manufacturer Swash plate/DENSO
Number of cylinders 10
Capacity 177.7 mll/rev. (10.84 cu in/rev.)
Maximum speed 7,600 rpm
Lubricant capacity 160 mll (5 1/3 fl oz)
Lubricant type ND-OIL 8
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Sirocco fan
Motor input 230W/12 V
Speed control Manual AlC: 4-speed Auto AlC: Infinite variable
Maximum capacity 520 m'/h (18,300 cu ft/h)
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
Electrical power 40 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at 68F (20C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
Quantity Calsonic condenser 450-500 g (15.9-17.6 fI oz)
Showa condenser 600 - 650 g (21.2 - 22.9 fl oz)
2-15 BACK
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V-55 AH/5 hours
RATINGS Starter 12 V-1.6 kW
Alternator 12 V-100A
Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 100A, 50A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 15A
Under-dash driver's fuse/ 30A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A
relay box
Under-dash passenger's 30A, 20A, 10A, 7.5A
fuse/relay box
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12V-60W
Headlight low beam 12 V-51 W
Front turn signal/Front side 12 V-24 W/2.2 CP (candlepower) (two filaments)
marker lights
Front parking lights 12V-3CP
Rear turn signal lights 12V-21 W
Brake/Taillights 12 V-21/5 W
Taillight 12V - 3CP
High mount brake light 12 V-21 W
Back-up lights 12 V-21 W
License plate light 12 V-3 CP
Ceiling light 12V-8W
Trunk lights 12V-5W
Door courtesy lights 12 V-2 CP
Vanity mirror lights 12V-1.1W
Glove box light 12V-3.4W
Spotlights 12 V-4 CP
Gauge lights 12V-1.26W,3.78W
Indicator lights 12V-LED,14V-0.56W,0.7W,1.4W
Panel and pilot lights 14 V-0.56 W, 0.84 W
Heater control panel lights 8V-1.2W, 14V-1.12W, 1.4W
2-16
BACK
Body Specifications
4-door sedan
1,455 (57.3)
Q) co
<ci cO
(;) co
........
N M
...: 0
<C .....
In In
In co
In .....
.... ....
Unit: mm (in.)
(cant'd)
2-17
BACK
Body Specifications
(cont'd)
2-door coupe
2-18
o
o
.. 1.405 (55.31 ..
... 00
Lti ..0
c 00
......
N M
...: ci
H - - - - - - I 1 I ~ 1 - - t <C ....
III III
III 00
III ....
... ...
tt--+--'- ,
Unit: mm (in.)
BACK
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2
Listed by Distance/Time ............................................... 3-4
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work
procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
NO. LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT
1 Engine Honda Motor Oil. API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy
Conserving" grade oil. The oil container may also
display the API Certification seal shown below. Make
sure it says "For Gasoline Engines." SAE Viscosity: See
chart below.
2 Transmission Honda ATF-Z1*'
3 Brake line (includes ABS line) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*2
4 Power steering gearbox Steering grease PIN 08733-B070E
5 Throttle cable end (Dashboard lower panel hole) Silicone grease
6 Throttle cable end (Throttle link) Multi-purpose grease
7 Brake master cylinder pushrod
8 Pedal linkage
9 Battery terminals
10 Fuel fill lid
11 Hood hinges and hood latch Honda White Lithium Grease
12 Trunk hinges and latch
13 Door hinges, upper and lower
14 Door opening detent
15 Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots. Silicone grease
16 Brake line joints (Front and rear wheelhouse) Rust preventives
17 Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid*3
18 Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: DENSO: NO-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-
A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
For Refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil
Engine oil viscosity for ambienttemperature ranges
For '98-00 models For '01-02 models
.1
1 RWP=:4.j.@
1 I:
II
I I
+
I I
II
-20 20 40 60 80 100"F -20 0 20 40 60 80 100'F
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
-30 -20 -10 10 20 30 40'1: ~ -20 -10 0 10 20 30 4O'C
*1: Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
*2: Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
*3: Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission
fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
3-2
BACK
@ @ @ @
<D @ @ @

i

I
./
3-3
BACK
1 9 9 8 ~ 2 0 0 0 Models)
7,500 mil 12,000 km/- D Do items in A.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year D Do items in A and B.
30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years D Do items in A, B, and C.
37 ,500 mil 60,000 km/ D Do items in A.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/3 years
D Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: 5.6 fl (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/coolant Type 2.
D Replace brake fluid. Use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/4 years D Do items in A, B, and C.
67,500 mi/108,000 km/- D Do items in A.
75,000 mi/120,000 km/ 5 years
D Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: 5.6 fl (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt). Use Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/coolant Type 2.
82,500 mi/132,000 km/ D Do items in A.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/ 6 years
D Replace transmission fluid. 2.9 fl (3.1 US qt, 2.6 Imp qt). Use Honda ATF-Z1 (see page 14-113).
D Replace brake fluid. Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
D Do items in A, B, and C.
97 ,500 mi/156,000 km/ - D Do items in A.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years
D Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-13).
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
D Replace spark plugs (see page 4-24). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ 16CR-L 11).
GAP: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in)
D Replace timing belt (see page 6-19) and inspect water pump (see page 10-10).
D Check idle speed. Should be 68050 rpm in [HI or III position (see page 11-69).
D Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: 5.6 fl (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/coolant Type 2.
112,500 mi/181 ,000 km/- D Do items in A.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 8 years D Do the items in A, B, and C. '
3-4 BACK
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
D Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). -Capacity with filter change: 4.4 A (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt)
B
o Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
o Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mount bolts.
D Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks.
o Check rack grease and steering linkage.
o Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
o Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
o Check bolts for tightness.
o Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
D Inspect driveshaft boots. Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness (see page 16-3)*'.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). -Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage.
D Check all fluid levels and condition offluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), engine coolant, brake fluid, and
windshield washer fluid.
o Check for damage, leaks, and deterioration.
o Check for proper fan operation.
C
D Inspect and adjust drive belt.
o Look for cracks and damage, then check belt deflection by pushing on it (about 22 Ibs) midway between the pulleys.
- PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in) (see page 17-10).
D Replace the air conditioning filter (see page 21-26)*'.
o Replace it twice as often (at 15,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
o Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance service items marked with asterisk (*) will not void customer's
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval to ensure long-term
reliability.
*': Refer to '98-02 ACCORD Service Manual (P/N 6158400)
3-5
BACK
(1998-2000 Models)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule ifthe vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
Trailer towing
3,750 mil 6,000 km/ - o Replace oil and filter.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year
18,750 mil 30,000 km/-
22,500 mil 36,000 km/ 1 1/2 years:
26,250 mil 42,000 km/
30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years:
33,750 mil 54,000 km/-
37,500 mil 60,000 km/2 1/2 years:
41,250 mil 66,000 km/-
45,000 mil 72,000 km/ 3 years:
o Replace oil and filter.
o Do items in A.
o Replace oil and filter
o Do items in A, B, and C
o . Do items in A.
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: 5.6!! (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
o Replace brake fluid (see page 19-7)*' .
Use Honda DOT 3; fill to between marks on reservoir.
52,500mi/ 84,000 km 3 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/ 4 years:
o Replace timing belt (see page 6-19) and inspectthe water pump (see page 10-9) if the vehicle is regularly driven in weather over 110F
(43C) or under -20F (-29C); If not, replace the belts at 105,000 miles.
63,750 mi/l02,000 km/ o Replace oil and filter.
67,500 mi/l08,000 km 41/2 years: o Do items in A.
71,250 mi/114,000 km- o Replace oil and filter.
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: 5.6 II (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/CoolantType 2.
82,500 mi/132,000 km/51/2 years o Do items in A.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/ 6 years:
o Replace brake fluid (see page 19-7)*'. Use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid; fill to between marks on reservoir.
97,500 mi/156,000 km/6 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years:
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-13I1ntake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
o Replace spark plugs. Use NGK (PZFR5F-ll) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L 11). Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in) (see page 4-24).
o Replace timing belt (see page 6-19), and inspect the water pump (see page 10-10) only if the belts was not replaced at 60,000 miles.
o Check idle speed. Should be 68050 rpm in lID or [f] position (see page 11-69).
o Replace coolant (see page 10-10). Capacity: 5.6 II (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
108,750 mi/174,000 km/ - 0 Replace oil and filter.
112,500 mi/180,000 km/ 71/2 years: 0 Do items in A.
116,250 mi/186,OOO km/ - 0 Replace oil and filter.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 8 years: 0 Do items A, B, and C.
*': Refer to '98-02 ACCORD Service Manual (P/N 61S8400)
3-6
BACK
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval.
A
D Replace engine oil and filter (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.411 (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt)
D Inspect front and rear brakes, every 6 months if vehicle is driven less than 7,500 miles per year (see page 19-2).
condition.)
D Inspecttie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-12).
D Inspect drives haft boots. Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness (see page 16-3)*'.
B
D Check parking brake adjustment. - Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks.
D Lubricate locks, latches, and hinges with Honda white lithium grease.
leakage (see page 19-30)*'.
D Check fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), engine coolant, brake fluid, and
D Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the positions of the headlights (see page 22-98)*'.
C
pulleys:
PIS pump belt: 13.0- 16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in) (see page 17-10)
D Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF).
D Replace air conditioning filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-26)*'.
*': Refer to '98-02 ACCORD Service Manual (P/N 6158400)
3-7
BACK
(1998-2000 Models)
If driven in severe conditions (see page 3-6) or normally driven in Canada, do the circle (0) and dot (.1 items.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever miles x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25
comes first.
kmx 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
years -
1/2
-
1 - 11/2 -
30 33.75 37.5
48 54 60
2 - 21/2
Replace engine oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,SOO miles (12,000 kml or 1 year
Severe Conditions: Every 3,7S0 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter Normal Condhions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change
Clean air cleaner element
0

Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt, NOTE 1 and inspect water pump

Inspect idle speed*
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid 0

0

0
Replace brake fluid

Replace air conditioning filter NOTE'

Lubricate locks, latches, and hinges 0 0
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once a monthl

Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 0

0

0

0

0

0

0
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ASSI





NOTE:
1. If the vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather, over 110F (43CI or under -20F (-29CI, replace this belt every 60,000 miles;
If not, replace it at 10S,OOO miles.
2. Replace the air conditioning filter every 1S,OOO miles ifthe vehicle is driven mostly where air has a high concentration of soot from industry ."",
and diesel-powered vehicle; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual.
* According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void the customer's
3-8
BACK
reliability.
41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
- 3 - 31/2 - 4 - 41/2 -
5
- 51/2 - 6 - 61/2 - 7 - 71/2 - 8
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change
0 0 0


0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
3-9
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
7 ,500 mil 12,000 km/ - o Do items in A.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year o Do items in A and B.
22,500 mil 36,000 krn/- o Do items in A.
30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years o Do items in A, B, and C.
37 ,500 mil 60,000 km/ o Do items in A.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/ 3 years o Do items in Aand B.
/ /3 years o Do item in D.
52,500 mil 84,000 krn/ - o Do items in A.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/4 years o Do items in A, B, and C.
67,500 mi/108,000 krn/- o Do items in A.
75,000 mi/120,000 km/ 5 years o Do items in A and B.
90,000 mi/144,000 km/ 6 years o Do items in A, B, and C.
/ /6 years o Do item in D.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-13).
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
o Replace spark plugs (see page 4-24). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ 16CR-L 11).
GAP: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in)
o Replace timing belt (see page 6-19) and inspect water pump (see page 10-9).
o Check idle speed. Should be 68050 rpm in IltI or position (see page 11-69).
o Do items in A and B. .
120,000 mi/192,000 krn/ 8 years o Do the items in A, B, and C.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 years
o Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-113), then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
-/-/9 years 0 Do item in D.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/1 0 years
o Replace Coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: 5.64 (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt), then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years.
3-10
BACK
Do the items in parts A, B, C, and D as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
D Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). -Capacity with filter change: 4.4 (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt)
B
o Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
o Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mount bolts.
D Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks.
D Inspecttie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-12).
o Check rack grease and steering linkage.
o Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
o Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
o Check bolts for tightness.
o Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). -Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage.
D Check all fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), engine coolant, brake fluid, and
o Check for damage, leaks, and deterioration.
o Check for proper fan operation.
c
D Inspect and adjust drive belt.
o Look for cracks and damage, then check belt deflection by pushing on it (about 22 Ibs) midway between the pulleys.
- PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in) (see page 17-10).
D Replace the dust and pollen filter (see page 21-26)*'.
o Replace it twice as often (at 15,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
o Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
o
D Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of Distance). Use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir, (see page
19-7)*'.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance service items marked with asterisk (*) will not void customer's
reliabil ity.
3-11
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
listed by Distance/Time
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule ifthe vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
Trailertowing
3,750 mil 6,000 kml - D Replace engine oil and filter.
11 ,250 mil 18,000 km/- D Replace engine oil and filter.
15,000 mil 24,000 kml 1 year
D Clean air cleaner element with low pressure air.
D Do items in A and S.
18,750 mil 30,000 km/-
22,500 mil 36,000 kml 1 112 years:
26,250 mil 42,000 kml
30,000 mil 48,000 kml 2 years:
33,750 mil 54,000 km/-
37 ,500 mil 60,000 km/2 112 years:
41,250 mil 66,000 km/-
45,000 mil 72,000 kml 3 years:
D Replace engine oil and filter.
D Do items in A.
D Replace engine oil and filter
D Do items in A, S, and C
D Do items in A.
D Do items in A, S, and D.
-1-13 years D Do item in D.
48,750 mil 78,000 km/- D Replace engine oil and filter.
52,500mil 84,000 km 3 1/2 years: D Do items in A.
56,250 mil 90,000 km/- D Replace engine oil and filter.
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 years
D Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-113), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
60,000 mil 96,000 kml 4 years:
D Replace timing belt (see page 6-19) and inspect the water pump (see page 10-9) if the vehicle is regularly driven in weather over 110F
(43C) or under -20F (-29C); If not, replace the belts at 105,000 miles.
D Do items in A, Sand C.
63,750 mi/102,000 km/- D Replace engine oil and filter.
67,500 mi/108,000 km 41/2 years: D Do items in A.
71 ,250 mi/114,000 km - D Replace engine oil and filter.
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
82,500 mi/132,000 km/5 112 years D Do items in A.
90,000mi/144,000 km/5 years:
D Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-113), then every 30,000miles (48,000km) or 2 years.
90,000 mi/144,000 kml 6 years: D Do items in A, S, C. and D.
-1-16 years D Do item in D.
93,750 mi/150,000 kml - D Replace engine oil and filter.
97,500 mi/156,000 km/6 1/2 years: D Do items in A.
101,250 mi/162,000 km/ - D Replace engine oil and filter.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years:
D Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-13Hntake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
D Replace spark plugs. Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L11). Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in) (see page 4-24).
D Replace timing belt (see page 6-19), and inspect the water pump (see page 10-9) only ifthe belts was not replaced at 60,000 miles.
D Check idle speed. Should be 680 50 rpm in [HI or [f) position (see page 11-69).
112,500 mi/180,000 km/ 71/2 years: D Do items in A.
120,000 mi/192,000 kml 7 years:
D Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF-Z1 (ATF) (see page 14-113), then every 30,000miles (48,000km) or 2 years.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/ 8 years:
D Replace timing belt (see page 6-191. and inspect the water pump (see page 10-9) only ifthe belts was not replaced at 60,000 miles.
D Do items A, S, and C.
-/-/9 years D Do item in D.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 years
D Replace engine coolant (see page 10-10). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: 5.6 (5.9 US gt, 4.9 Imp gtl. then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years.
3-12
BACK
r
Do the items in parts A, S, C, and D as required for mileage/time interval.
A
D Replace engine oil and filter (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.4l! (4.6 US qt, 3.91mp qt)
D Rotate tires, ifthe vehicle has been driven the distance listed. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual. (Check tire inflation and
condition.)
B
D Check parking brake adjustment. - Should be fully applied within 6 to 9 clicks.
D Lubricate locks, latches, and hinges with Honda white lithium grease.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ASS). Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ASS modulator for damage and
leakage (see page 19-30)*'.
D Check fluid levels and condition offluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-112), engine coolant, brake fluid, and
D Inspect exhaust system.* Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-4).
D Inspect fuel lines and connections.* Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
D Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the positions ofthe headlights (see page 22-98)*'.
c
pulleys:
PIS pump belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in) (see page 17-10)
D Replace dust and pollen filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-26)*'.
D
D Replace brake fluid every 3 years (Independent of Distance). Use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir, (see page
19-7)*'.
warranties. However, Honda recommends that ali maintenance services be done at the recommended interval to ensure long-term reliability.
3-13
BACK
(2001-2002 Models)
If driven in severe conditions (see page 3-12) or normally driven in Canada, do items with a circle (0) and items with a dot (.).
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever I miles x 1000 3.75 I 7.5 11.25 I 15 18.75 22.5 J 26.25 30 J 33.75 37.5
comes first. L
km x 1000 6 I 12 18 I 24 30 36 42 48 I 54 60
I vears - I 1/2 - I 1 - 11/2 I - 2 I - 21/2
Replace engine oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Severe Conditions: Every 3 750 miles (6 000 km) or 6 months
Clean air cleaner element I 10 I I
Replace air cleaner element J I .1
Inspect valve clearance Adust only if noisy.
Replace Qiugs
Replace timina belt NOTE1 and inspect water pump
Inspect and adlust drive belts

Inspect idle speed*
Replace engine coolant Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then
Severe Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then
every 60 000 miles (96 000 km) or 5 years
Replace transmission fluid Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every
30000 miles (48 000 km) or 2 years
Inspect front and rear brakes 0 I. 10

0
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (inde endent of distance
Check parking brake adiustment

Replace dust and pollen filter NOTE 2

Lubricate locks latches and hinges 0 0

Inspect tie-rod ends and boots 0

0

0
Inspect comjJonents 0

0

0
driveshaft boots 0

0

0
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ASS)





NOTE:
1. Ifthe vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather, over 110F (43C) or under -20F (-29C), replace this belt every 60,000 miles;
If not, replace it at 105,000 miles.
2. Replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles if the vehicle is driven mostly where air has a high concentration of soot from industry
and diesel-powered vehicle; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual.
3-14
BACK
41.25 45 48.7H 52.5 56.25 I 60 63.75167.5 71.25 75 178.75 82.5 86.251 90 93.75 I 97.5 I 101.25 105 108.75 I 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 I 84 90 I 96 102 I 108 114 120 I 126 I 132 138 I 144 150 I 156 I 162 168 175 I 181 187 193
-
3 - I 31/2
-
4 I - I 41/2
-
5 I - I 51/2 - I 6 - I 61/2 I - 7 - I 71/2
-
8
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Severe Conditions: Every 3 750 miles (6 000 km) or 6 months
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change
Severe Conditions: Every oil c h a n ~ e
10 L I 0 I I I L 0
1 I. 1 I I. I 1

Adiust only if noisy.

0

0

Severe Conditions: At 120 000 miles (192 000 km) or 10 years then every 60 000 miles (96 000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 60 000 miles (96 000 km) or 3 years then every 30 000 miles (48 000 kmtor 2years
I. 10 I. 10

10 I. 10

L 0

Every 3 years (inde endent of distance)

0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
3-15
BACK
BACK
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools ................................................................. 4-2
Starting System
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-4
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting .................................. 4-5
Starter Solenoid Test ................................................... 4-6
Starter Performance Test ............................................. 4-7
Starter Replacement .................................................... 4-8
Starter Overhaul ........................................................... 4-9
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-16
Ignition Timing Inspection ........................................... 4-18
Distributor Replacement .............................................. 4-19
Distributor Disassembly/Reassembly ........................ 4-20
ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input Test ................... 4-21
Ignition Coil Test ........................................................... 4-22
Ignition Wire Inspection and Test ............................... 4-22
Ignition Coil Troubleshooting ..................................... 4-23
Spark Plug Inspection/Replacement ........................... 4-24
Charging System
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-26
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting .............................. 4-27
Alternator-Compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement ..................................... 4-31
Alternator Replacement ............................................... 4-31
Auto-Tensioner Inspection .......................................... 4-33
Alternator Overhaul ..................................................... 4-35
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-42
Troubleshooting ....................................................... 4-45
Control Unit Input Test ................................................. 4-46
Main Switch Test/Replacement .................................. 4-48
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement .......... 4-49
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test ................................ 4-50
Actuator Solenoid Test ................................................ 4-50
Actuator Test ................................................................. 4-51
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement ...................... 4-52
Actuator Cable Adjustment ......................................... 4-54
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-56
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 4-57
r--:'I
L:J
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number DescriPtion Qty
07746-0010400 Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
077 49-00 1 0000 Driver 1
I

4-2
BACK
\
Starting System
STARTER
OO[==:J
OOQc::=:J
o 0 c=J
c:=Ju
c::J
DOD
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-5
Performance Test, page 4-7
Overhaul, page 4-9
r--:'I
I.!:!..I
STARTER CUT RELAY
Test, page 22-55
in the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
BATTERY
Test, page 14-140
4-3 BACK
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDERHooD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (l00A) No.42 (50A) ---f'::J
+ 1--.... - BLK - ...... -o""""o---<:""o-o+-WKT 1HOT.srART
BATTERY
BlKIWHT
___________ _
DRIVER'S
STARTER UNDER.DASH
CUT .
RELAY FUSE/RELAY
BOX
NO.13 (1.5A)
BlK/RED BLU/oRN BLUIWHT
4-4

'PCM
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
BLKlWHT
B S

M SOLENOID
M
STARTER
.......
BLK
Gl0l
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
SWITCH
im position)
BACK
!""'"
\ Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Air temperature must be between 59and 1 OOF (15
and 38C) during this procedure.
After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to clear any
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC); refer to the '98-02
Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged.
Recommended Procedure:
Use a starter system tester.
Connect and operate the equipment in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Alternate Procedure
1. Hook up the following equipment:
Ammeter, 0-400 A
Voltmeter, 0-20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt)
Tachometer, 0-1200 rpm
2. Remove the No. 46 (15 A) fuse from the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
3. With the shift lever in [H] or [f], turn the ignition
switch to start (III).
Did the starter crank the engine normally?
YES-The starting system is OK .
NO-If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go
to step 4. If it cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 7. If it won't disengage from the
torque converter ring gear when you release the
key, check for the following until you find the cause.
Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction
Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch.

I.!:!J
4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical
connections at the battery, the negative battery
cable to body, engine ground cables, and the
starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try
starting the engine again.
YES-The starting system is OK .
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then
disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (A) from the starter
solenoid (B). Connect a jumper wire from the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
B
YES - Go to step 6.
NO- Remove the starter and repair or replace as
necessary .
6. Check the following items in the order listed until
you find the open circuit.
Check the BLK/WHTwire and connectors
between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the ignition switch, and between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and the starter.
Check the ignition switch, refer to the '98-02
Check the transmission range switch and
connector (see page 14-141).
Substitute a known-good starter relay.
(cont'd)
4-5 BACK
Starting System
(cont'd)
7. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm?
YES-Go to step 8.
until you find the cause .
Excessively worn starter brushes
Open circuit in commutator brushes
Dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear
Faulty drive gear clutch
8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.
Is cranking voltage no less than 8.5 volts, and
current draw no more than 380 amps?
YES-Go to step 9.
until you find the cause .
Open circuit in starter armature commutator
segments
Starter armature dragging
Shorted armature winding
Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and
the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
4-6
Starter Solenoid Test
1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S
terminal and the armature housing (ground). There
should be continuity.
5
2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S
and M terminals. There should be continuity.
Ifthere is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
BACK
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wires from the S terminal and the M
terminal.
2. Make the connections as described below using as
heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to
the wire used for the vehicle). To avoid damaging
the starter, never leave the battery connected for
3. Connect the battery as shown. Be sure to
disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
12V
BATTERY
s
4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the
pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the
solenoid is working properly.
12V
BATTERY

I.!:!..I
5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the
pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
@ e
12V
BATTERY
6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
s
7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in
the diagram below, and confirm that the motor
starts and keeps rotating.
BATTERY
12V
8. If the electric current and motor speed meet the
specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is working properly.
4-7
BACK
Starting System
Starter Replacement
preset buttons.
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3
minutes.
3. Remove the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
cooler hose from the clamp on the starter motor.
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal
on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire
(B) from the S terminal.
\
/
12x 1.25 mm
64Nm
B
A
8x 1.25mm
9Nm
(0.9 kgfm,
7Ibfft)
5. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then
remove the starter.
4-8
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure
the crimped side ofthe ring terminal (A) is facing
out.
A
7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative
cable to the battery.
9. Retest starter performance.
BACK
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
END COVER
NUT
9 Nm (0.9 kgf.m, 7 Ib'ttl
\
BRUSH HOLDER
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
Q@)
/"
STARTER SOlEND", /
SOLENOID LEVER
GEAR HOUSING
r--:'I
~
ARMATURE HOUSING
\= ....
ARMATURE
GEAR HOUSING
COVER
(cant'd)
4-9
BACK
Starting System
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8).
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
Armature Inspection and Test
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage due to
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
4. Check commutator (A) surface. If the surface is
dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe
within the following specifications, or recondition
with # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (B).
4-10
5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
6. Measure the commutator runout .
Ifthe commutator runout is within the service
limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
BACK
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (8),
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
the commutator segments. The undercut should
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
Commutator Mica Depth
D
8. Check for continuity between the segments of the
commutator. If an open circuit exists between any
segments, replace the armature.
r--:'I

9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (8).
Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core.
If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
B
c
A
10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists
between the commutator (A) and armature coil
core (8), and between the commutator and
armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the
armature.
(cont'd)
4-11
BACK
Starting System
Starter Brush Inspection
11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
4-12
Starter Brush Holder Test
12. Check that there is no continuity between the (+)
brush holder (A) and (-) brush holder (B). If there
is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.
13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact with the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension atthe moment the spring lifts off
the brush. If the spring tension is not within
specification, replace the spring.
Spring Tension:
15.7-17.7 N (1.6-1.8 kgf,3.53-3.97Ibf)
___ --8
BACK
14. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then
position the brush about halfway out of its holder,
and release the spring to hold it there.
NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or
# 600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate
the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
will be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
15. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back
each brush spring again, and push the brush down
until it seats against the commutator, then release
the spring against the end of the brush.
I
D
16. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush
holder (8).
A

Overrunning Clutch Inspection
17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. If it
does not lock in either direction or it locks in both
directions, replace it.
B
19. If the starter drive gear (8) is worn or damaged,
replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring
gear if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.
20. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of
disassembly.
4-13
BACK
Ignition System
'98-99 models:
SPARK PLUG
4-14
IGNITION WIRES
Inspection and Test, page 4-22
DISTRIBUTOR
Overhaul, page 4-20
Ignition Control Module (lCM) Input Test, page 4-21
Ignition Timing Inspection, page 4-18
~
BACK
'00-02 models:
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL

I.!::J
4-15
BACK
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
'98-99 models:
BATIERY
WHT
No.41 (100A)
V- BlK - r---'
~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
No,42 (50A)
DISTRIBUTOR
4-16
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
BlKlYEl
~
No,6
~ (15A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
I
BlKlYEl
A
...-I--------.B
C
IGNITION COil
IGNITION WIRES
IGNITION CONTROL
MODULE (ICM)
(
Has built-in )
noise condenser
BACK
'00-02 models:
BATTERY

-+---WHT---+o-..,.. BLKlYEL ---,
""""-__
PCM
f
BRNIWHT BLK/RED BRN
3 3
II ICM J I ICM I

2 NO.6 2 NO.5 2 No.4
BLK
r r
........ ...... ...... ... L.
Gl0l
ICM : ignition Control Module

WHT/BLU
IGI
IGI HOT In ON (II)
and START (III)

BLU/RED
3
II ICM I II ICM I
- -
2 No.3 2 No.2
r r
3
... L. .......
1
YEUGRN
2
No.ll
(15A)
yf-----J
BLKlYEL
BLKlYEL
3
-
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
IGNITION
COILS
No.1

SPARK
PLUGS
... L.
4-17
BACK
Ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see
page 11-87).
2. Connect the Honda PGM tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC), and follow the tester's prompts in
the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester
Operator's Manual).
no load, shift lever in IN] or [fl, until the radiator fan
4. Connect the timing light to the No.1 ignition wire
(ignition coil wire for '00-02 models).
4-18
5. Point the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing
belt cover. Check the ignition timing under a no
load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear
window defogger, and air conditioner are not
operating. If the ignition timing differs from the
specification below, replace the PCM; refer to
the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
Ignition Timing:
10
o
2 BTDC (RED mark (B)) during idling in IN] or
[fl
A
B
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM tester and the timing
light.
BACK
Distributor Replacement - '98-99 models
Removal
1. Disconnect the connector(A) from the distributor.
D
-----A
B
2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor
cap.
3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts (B) then
remove the distributor (C) from the cylinder head.
Installation
1. Bring the No.1 piston to compression stroke TDC.
2. Coat a new a-ring (D) with engine oil, then install it.
3. Slip the distributor into position.
NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its
mating grooves in the camshaft end (E) are both
offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the
distributor 180
0
out of time.
4. Tighten the mounting bolts (B).
r-:'I

5. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor cap as
shown.
No.5
6. Connect the 3P connector to the distributor.
4-19
BACK
Ignition System
Distributor Disassembly IReassembly - '98-99 models
4-20
_____ 0
O-RING
Replace.
CAP SEAL
Check for damage.
/DISTRIBUTOR HOUSING
/ Check for cracks and damage.
DISTRIBUTOR CAP
Check for cracks, wear,
damage, and fouling.
Clean or replace.
~
r r ; : : r ; ~ ~ ~ = \ CONTROL MODULE UCMI
BACK
r--:'I

ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input Test - '98-99 models
NOTE:
Ifthe malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on,
refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
troubleshooting Index; refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual.
Perform an input test for the ignition control module
(lCM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the
ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems.
1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the distributor.
Wire side of
female terminals
between the No.2 terminal and body ground .
- ignition coil.
- BLK/YEL wire between the ICM and ignition
coil.
between the No.3 terminal and body ground.
- ignition coil.
- BLU wire between the ICM and ignition coil.
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) and check for
continuity on the No.1 terminal between the ICM
connector terminal No.1 (YEL/GRN) and PCM
connector terminal B13. There should be continuity.
5. Check for continuity on the No.1 terminal to body
ground. There should be no continuity. Ifthere is
continuity (short to ground), the ICM is probably
damaged.
6. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P) and the
distributor 3P connector.
7. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM.
4-21
BACK
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Test - '98-99 models
2. Disconnect the 3P connector and the ignition coil
wire.
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between
the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is
not within specifications.
NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil
temperature; specifications are at 68F (20C).
Primary Winding Resistance
(Between the terminals 1 and 3): 0.34-0.42 Q
Secondary Winding Resistance
(Between terminal 2 and
secondary winding terminal): 17.1 - 20.3 k Q
2
3
4-22
Ignition Wire Inspection and
Test - '98-99 models
1. Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on
the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might
break them inside.
2. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If
any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken
or distorted, replace the ignition wire.
Check for broken,
corroded, or bent
terminals.
3. Connect ohmmeter probes, and measure resistance
while flexing and moving the wire. Do not bend the
wires; you might break them inside.
Ignition Wire Resistance:
25 k Q max. at 68F (20e)
4. If resistance exceeds 25 k Q, replace the ignition
wire.
BACK
r--:'I

Ignition Coil Troubleshooting - '00-02 models
NOTE: Perform an ignition coil test after finishing the
fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel
and emissions system.
1. Remove the ignition coil cover.
2. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil 3P connectors.
4. Measure the voltage at the No.3 terminal of each
ignition coil 3P connector.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
1
2 IG
3 (BLK/VEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
and No. 11 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box .
each ignition coil 3P connector and body ground.
1 GND
2 (BLK)
3
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 7.
NO - Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
and body ground (G101) .
connector C (31 P).
8. With all the coils still disconnected, check for
continuity between the body ground and PCM
connector terminals C3, C4, C12, C13, C14,
and/or C23 individually.
PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)
IGP lS3 (WHT /BLU)
ignition coil and PCM .
NO- Go to step 9.
9. Connect PCM connector C (31P).
10. Connect the coil(s) and 3P connector(s).
12. Measure the voltage at the No.1 terminal of each
ignition coil 3P connector with the ignition switch to
start (III).
IGNITION COll3P CONNECTOR
IGP lS1 (YEl/GRN)
IGP lS2 (BLU/RED)
IGP lS3 (WHT/BlU)
IGP lS4 (BRN)
IGP lS5 (BlK/RED)
1 IGP lS6 (BRN/WHT)
2
3
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there about 0.25 V to 0.5 V?
YES- Replace the ignition coil..
NO-Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
and PCM .
4-23 BACK
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
Advanced ignition timing
Loose spark plug
Plug heat range too hot
Insufficient cooling
Fouled plug may be caused by:
Retarded ignition timing
Oil in combustion chamber
Incorrect spark plug gap
Plug heat range too cold
Excessive idling/low speed running
Clogged air cleaner element
Deteriorated ignition coil
Worn or deformed
electrodes
{
Improper gap
Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
Cracked center
ir- .'",",od.'n,"'.!o,
4-24
2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A);
replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification.
Electrode Gap:
3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the
center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
plugs listed below.
Spark Plugs:
NGK: PZFR5F-11
DEN SO: PKJ16CR-L 11
4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to
the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head finger-tight. Torque them to 18 Nm
BACK
Charging System
ALTERNATOR
Alternator/Regulator Test, step 1 on page 4-28
[
Has built-in ELECTRICAL LOAD ]
DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT
r:-:'I
l!!!.I
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
Test, page 22-29
BATIERY
Test, page 22-30
4-25 BACK
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
No.41 (1 aOA)
+
BLK/YEL
PCM
BLK

-- --
ALTERNATOR B
H
FIELD WINDING
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
:<=),
,
--
- -

-- --
'00-02 models '98-99 models
4-26
WHT/GRN
--
C
IGNITION
SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
BLKlYEL
I
No.S
(15A)
BLK/YEL
BLKlYEL
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LIGHT
BULB
(1.4W)
PCM
WHT/BLU
Y
BLKlYEL
-- RED
IG L
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
:WHl
FR

,
,
FIELD WINDING
,
,

,
I
,
,
--
__ =-.1
-' ...
BACK
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
Ifthe charging system indicator does not come on or
does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the
following items in the order listed below:
Battery (see page 22-30)
Charging system indicator
Alternator/regulator circuit
Alternator control system
Charging System Indicator Test
1. Check the battery terminals, the battery ground, the
main fuses, and that the 4P connector at the
alternator and under-hood fuse/relay box terminals
to be sure they are securely tightened.
Are they securely tightened?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Tighten or reconnect .
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Go to step 7.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK .
NO-Go to step 4.
YES - Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repair the
short in the WHT/BLU wire. Ifthe WHT/BLU wire is
shorted to ground, the voltage regulator in the
alternator may be damaged .
NO-Go to step 10.
r--:'I

9. Ground the No.3 terminal of the 4P connector.
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
2
Wire side of
female terminals
3 4
l(WHT/BlU)
=
YES- Go to step 10.
NO- Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check for a
blown No.6 (15 A) fuse and a blown charging
system light bUlb. If the fuse and bulb are OK,
repair the open in the WHT/BLU wire to the
indicator bulb .
10. Measure the voltage at the No.1 terminal of the
alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON
(II).
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
IG
(BlK/VEl)
=
2
3 4
Wire side of
female terminals
YES- Repair or replace the alternator .
NO-Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the
alternator and the under-dash driver's fuse relay
box .
(cont'd)
4-27
BACK
Charging System
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test-'98-99
models
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD TESTER
(CARBON PILE) LEAD (BLU)
_VOLTMETER
II, NEGATIVE
LEAD (BLK)
FIELD
SELECTOR
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
LEAD (RED)
/
;\\
TESTER
CABLE (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
CABLE (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold
there.
YES - Repair or replace the alternator..
NO-Go to step 5.
idle.
ammeter.
of the alternator so that the arrow points away from
the alternator.
4-28
there.
YES- Repair or replace the alternator .
NO- Go to step 10.
voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.
YES- The charging system is OK .
NO- Replace the alternator..
BACK
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test-'OO-02
models
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD TESTER
(CARBON PILE) LEAD (BLU)
' ...-VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE
LEAD (BLK)
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
(RED)

TESTER
CABLE (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
CABLE (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold
there.
YES - Repair the voltage regulator .
NO-Go to step 5.
idle.
ammeter.
of the alternator so that the a rrow poi nts away from
the alternator.

there.
YES- Repair the alternator components (see page
4-35) .
NO-Go to step 10.
voltage drops to between 12 -13.5 V.
YES-The charging system is OK .
NO-Go to step 11.
11. With the engine speed still at 2,000 rpm, full-field
the alternator Attach the probe to the VAT-40 full-
field test lead, and insert the probe into the full field
access hold at the back of the alternator. Switch the
field selector to the" A (Ground)" position
momentarily, and check the amperage reading.
Because voltage will rise quickly when the
alternator is full-fielded, do not allow the voltage to
exceed 18 V: it may damage the electrical system.
END
COVER
REGULATOR
(Located inside
the end cover)
FULL FIELD
ACCESS HOLE
Is the alternator out put 75 A or more?
YES - Replace the voltage regulator .
NO- Repair or replace the alternator (see page 4-
35) .
(cont'd)
4-29
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Control System Test
1. Check for proper operation of the Electrical Load
Detector (ELD) by confirming that the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) is OFF and there is no DTC for
ELD failure.
3. Start the engine and turn the headlights (high
beam) ON.
4. Measure voltage between the 4P connector
terminal No.2 and the positive terminal of the
battery.
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
3
Is there 1 V or less?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 5.
BATIERY
2
4
C(WHT/GRN)
Wire side of
female terminals
6. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
connector C (31P).
4-30
7. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
PCM CONNECTOR C (31PI
ALTC (WHT/GRNI
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
[7 12 13 14 [7 16 17 18 19 20 21
23
II
25 26 27 28 29 30
Q
=
10
V
II
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between
the alternator and PCM .
NO-Check thatthe terminals are firmly seated at
the connectors. If OK, substitute a known-good
PCM, and recheck; refer to the '98-'02 Accord
Service Manual. If prescribed voltage is now
available, replace the original PCM .
9. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31 Pl.
terminal C2 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No.2.
AL TC (WHT/GRNI
Q
C(WHT/GRNI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
II
12 13 14 [7 16 17 18 19 20 21
17
1 2
25 26 27 28 29 30
3 4
23V
PCM CONNECTOR C (31 PI
II
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
YES- Test the alternator/regulator .
alternator and PCM .
BACK
Alternator-compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt
is cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Check that the pointer (A) on the auto-tensioner
housing is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib
(B) on the tensioner base.
/
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tensioner
from the alternator belt (B), and remove the
alternator belt.
4. Install the new belt in reverse order of removal.
r--+'I
I.!:!..I
Alternator Replacement
preset buttons.
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension from
the alternator belt (B), and remove the alternator
belt.
(cont'd)
4-31 BACK
Charging System
Alternator Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the condenser fan motor connector (A)
from the condenser fan shroud.
6x 1.0 mm
9.a Nm (1.0 kgfm.
7.2Ibfft)
6x1.0mm
9.a Nm (1.0 kgfm. 7.2Ibfft)
B
5. Remove the condenser fan/shroud assembly (8).
6. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 8LK wire (8)
from the alternator.
4-32
/" "'.
'9a-99 models
6x 1.0 mm
7.a Nm 10.a kgf.m. 5.8Ibfft)
'00-02 models
ax 1.25 mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm. 8.7 Ibfft)
7. Remove the mount bolt (A) and alternator bracket
mounting bolt (8). then remove the harness clamp
(C) from the alternator bracket.
8x 1.25mm
A 22 Nm 12.2 kgfm.16Ibfft)
10x 1.25 mm
BACK
r--:'I
I.!:!..I
Auto-Tensioner Inspection/Replacement
1. Check the position ofthe auto-tensioner indicator's
pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position
of the pointer again. If the position changes, go to
step 5.
2. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.
If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley.
3. Stop the engine, then remove the alternator belt
(see page 4-31).
4. Check if the auto-tensioner (A) moves smoothly
and check for abnormal noise when the pulley is
turned counterclockwise with the designated tool. If
the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly or if
the there is abnormal noise. Replace the auto-
tensioner. Do not move the auto-tensioner beyond
its limit.
A
5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm. 8.7Ibf.ftl
(cont'd)
4-33 BACK
Charging System
Auto-Tensioner Inspection/Replacement (co nt' d)
c
7. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt.
Measure the torque when the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than
specified value, replace the auto tensioner.
A
4-34
8. If necessary, remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand
threads), and replace the tensioner pully (B).
A
38 Nm j .... m. '" (bfft]
BACK
Alternator Overhaul - '00-02 models
Exploded View
SPACER RING
\ REAR BEARING
~ \ \ ROTOR
~ ~ \
STATOR THROUGH BOLT
STATOR
DRIVE-END HOUSING
~
~
PULLEY LOCKNUT
REAR HOUSING
\
(cont'd)
4-35 BACK
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - '00-02 models (cont'd)
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you
remove them (see step 1 on page 4-27).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the
pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a 22
mm wrench (8). If necessary, use an impact wrench.
4. Remove the 3 flange nuts (A) and the screw (8)
from the alternator, then remove the plate terminal
(C).
4-36
5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (8) from
the "8" terminal, then remove the end cover (C)
and dust seal (D).
A ~
B
6. Remove the brush holder.
BACK
7. Remove the voltage regulator.
8. Remove the 4 screws (A), then remove the rectifier
(B) and rubber seal (C).
9. Remove the 4 flange nuts.
r:-:'I

10. Remove the 4 insulators (A), rear housing (B) and
washer (C).
(cont'd)
4-37
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul- '00-02 models (cont'd)
11. (If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or
rear bearing, go to step 18). Remove the rotor from
the stator drive end housing.
12. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the
bearing journal surface in the stator housing for
seizure marks .
If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged,
replace the alternator .
If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK,
go to step 13.
13. Remove the rear bearing using a puller as shown.
4-38
14. With a hammer and commercially available tools
shown, install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft.
15. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
BACK
16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out
the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer.
A
17. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new
front bearing in the stator housing.
Rectifier Test
r-:'I
~
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the
B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the
E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair.
All diodes should have continuity in only one
direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed
to allow current to pass in one direction, and the
rectifier is made up of 8 diodes (4 pairs), you must
test each diode in both directions for continuity
with an ohmmeter that has diode checking
capability: a total of 16 checks .
If any diode failed, replace the rectifier assembly.
(Diodes are not available separately.)
If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.
A B',
~ ~ .. ~ .. ~
~ ~
.. ~ ..
~
B,
B.
B.
B.
c
(cont'd)
4-39
BACK
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul- '00-02 models (cont'd)
Alternator Brush Inspection
19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a
vernier caliper (B).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush assembly.
If brush length is OK, go to step 20.
Alternator Brush Length:
Rotor Slip Ring test
20. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings
(A).
If there is continuity, goto step 21.
If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.
C
J
A
21. Then check that there is no continuity between
each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor
shaft (C).
If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
4-40
Stator Test
22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of
leads (A).
Ifthere is continuity, go to step 23.
Ifthere is no continuity, replace the alternator.
_----::::::::::::::::;:?A
B
23. Check for no continuity between each lead and the
coil core (B).
Ifthere is continuity, replace the alternator.
24. Reassemble the alternator in reverse order of
Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip
rings.
If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
111 Nm (11.3 kgfm, 81.7 Ibfft) when you
reinstall it.
BACK
Cruise Control
MAIN SWITCH
Test, page 4-48
Replacement, page -
ACTUATOR
Test, page 4-51
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(Built into gauge assembly)
Bulb Locations, page 22-32
Test, page 4-50
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-8

I!!!.I
SET/RESUME/CANCEL SWITCH
Test, page 4-49
VACUUM TANK
Test, page 14-140
ACTUATOR CABLE
4-41
BACK
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
BATTERY --
No.42 (SOA) BAT
BLKlYEl -+-+-----.
No.47 IG1 No.9 NO.6
4-42
(20A) IG1 HOT in ON (II) (7.SA) (1 SA)
and STMT (III)
HORN
RELAY
BLU/RED

HORNS
RAKE PEDAL
OSITION
B
P
S WITCH
I
WHT/BlK

BRAKE
LIGHTS
YEl
IT GRN/BlU MAIN
SWITCH
WHTIYEl
2

l
3
G!:
5 2
11
BRN/BlK
BRNIWHT
HORN SWITCH
I
I II CAN-II
SET CEl
3
SET/
RESUME/
RE- CANCEL
SUME SWITCH
2
, PCM
CABLE GAUGE
REEL ASSEMBLY PCM
\( \(
2[3]
lTGRN
lTGRN/RED LTGRN/BLK BLUIWHT BlU/GRN lTGRN
6 7 12 8 13
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 10
14 3
BRN
CRUISE CONTROL
lTBlU BLK
ACTUATOR
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
SWITCH
[ON: [g], IiW , Ii@ ]
3
BlK BlK
1 1
G202 G101
1 [7]
BLK
BlK
BlK
BLK
1
GS01
[ ]: '01-02 models
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
?
RED/BlK
RED/BLK
4[1]
S [2]
RED
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
BlU/BlK
RED/BLK
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
BACK
NOTE:
The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence .
Before troubleshooting,
- check that the speedometer works properly.
- check for proper engine vacuum at the actuator.
r--:'I
I.!!:.I
- check the No.9 (7.5A) and No.6 (15A) fuses in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
- check that the horn sounds.
- check the tachometer to see if it works properly.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure
Cruise control cannot be set. 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48)
2. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)
3. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see
page 4-50)
4. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140)
5. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Cruise control can be set, but Check control unit (see page 4-46)
indicator light does not go on.
Cruise speed is noticeably 1. Check actuator and vent line for the actuator (see
higher or lower than what 2. page 4-51)
was set. Check control unit (see palle 4-46)
Excessive overshooting or 1. Check actuator and vent line for the actuator (see
undershooting when trying to 2. page 4-51)
set speed. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Speed fluctuates on a flat 1. Check actuator (see page 4-51)
road with cruise control set. 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Vehicle does not decelerate 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)
or accelerate accordingly 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
when SET/RESUME/CANCEL
button is pushed.
Set speed not cancelled 1. Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140)
(engine rpm stays high) when 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46)
shift lever is moved to [NJ
position.
Set speed is not cancelled 1. Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see
when brake pedal is pushed. page 4-50)
2. Check control unit (see palle 4-46)
Also check for
Poor ground: G101
Open circuit, loose
or disconnected
terminals: LT GRN,
LT GRN/RED, GRV,
LT BLU, BLU/WHT
Poor ground: G501
Open circuit, loose
or disconnected
terminals: VEL,
BLU/BLK
Open circuit, loose or
disconnected
terminals:
L T GRN/RED, L T
GRN/BLK
disconnected
terminals, short to
ground: L T BLU
disconnected
terminals: WHT/BLK
(cont'd)
4-43
BACK
Cruise Control
Set speed, does not cancell 1. Check main switch (see page 4-48) Shorted main switch,
when main switch is pushed 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) or short to power: L T
OFF GRN
Set speed, does not cancelled 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49) Open circuit, loose or
when CANCEL button is 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) disconnected
pushed terminals: L T GRN/
RED, L T GRN/BLK
Set speed will not resume 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49) Open circuit, loose or
when RESUME button is 2. Check control unit (see page 4-46) disconnected
pushed (with main switch on, terminals: L T GRN/
set speed is temporarily BLK
cancelled by pressing brake
pedal).
The transmission shifts down 1. Troubleshoot the cruise control communication Open circuit, loose or
slower than normal when circuit (see page 4-45) disconnected
going up a hill with the cruise terminals, short to
control on. ground: BLU/GRN
4-44 BACK
r:-:'I
I.!:I
Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive
the vehicle to speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with
the cruise control.
Does the cruise control operate?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Check the cruise control unit (see page 4-46).
or cruise control actuator .
connector A (32P) and cruise control unit 14P
connector.
terminal A5 and body ground.
IBLU/GRN
/
2 3 4 5 6
V
8 9 10
V
12 13 14 15
V
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 24
25 26 27 2B 29 30
V
32
'--
.Q
YES- Repair a short to ground in the wire between
the PCM connector terminal A5 and the cruise
control unit 14P connector terminal No.8 .
NO-Goto step 8.
6. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise
control unit 14P connector.
8. Connect a voltmeter between cruise control unit
Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40
km/h) with the cruise control set, and watch the
voltmeter.
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
2 3 567
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
=
Is there about 1 V?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO-Substitute a known-good control unit.lfthe
system works properly, replace the cruise control
unit..
9. Connect a voltmeter between PCM connector
terminal A 15 and body ground. Drive the vehicle at
speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise
control set, and watch the voltmeter .
PCM CONNECTOR A (32PI
IBLU/GRN
VI2
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/1
1
12
1
13
14 15
/
17 18 19 20 21
V
23 241
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
32
-
'::L
=
Is there about 1 V?
YES-Check for loose connections of the BLU/GRN
wire between the cruise control unit and the PCM. If
necessary replace the PCM and recheck, refer
to '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3) .
NO- Repair or open in the BLU/GRN wire between
the A5 terminal and the cruise control unit .
4-45 BACK
Cruise Control
SRS before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-25).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit.
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
BRN/BlK
lTGRN/BlK
lTBLU
Wire side of female
terminals
4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.
9 BRN/WHT Under all Check for resistance to Faulty actuator solenoid
conditions ground: Poor ground (G202)
There should be 80-120 Q. An open in the wire
1 BRN Under all Check for resistance to Short to ground
conditions ground:
11 BRN/BLK Under all Check for resistance to
conditions ground:
2 GRY Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: Faulty brake pedal position
(II), main switch There should be 0 V with the switch
ON and brake pedal depressed and battery An open in the wire
pedal depressed, voltage with the pedal Open in cruise control main
then released released. switch.
Blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
4-46
BACK
3 BLK Under all conditions
5 WHT/BLK Brake pedal depressed,
then released
6 LTGRN/ Set button pushed
RED
7 LTGRN/ Resume button pushed
BLK
10 BLU/BLK Ignition switch ON (II)
12 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) and
main switch ON; raise the
front of the vehicle, and
rotate 1 wheel slowly
while holding the other
wheel
13 LTGRN Ignition switch ON (II)
and main switch ON
14 LTBLU Shift lever in 00, or

8 BLU/GRN Reconnect the cruise
control unit 14P connector,
start the engine, main
switch ON and drive the
vehicle to speeds over 25
mph (40 km/h) with the
cruise control set.
There should be battery voltage
with the pedal depressed, and 0 V
with the pedal released.
When testing terminal No.6, there
should be no voltage on terminal
No.7.
When testing terminal No.7, there
should be no voltage on terminal
No.6.
Attach to ground:
Cruise indicator light in the gauge
assembly should comes on.
Check for voltage between the
BLU/WHT (+) and BLK (-)
terminals:
There should be 0-8 V
-O-S V (2.S V average).
There should be approx. 1 V
r--:'I

Possible cause if result is not
obtained
Poor ground (GS01)
An open in the wire
in the under-hood fusel
relay box
Faulty brake pedal position
switch
An open in the wire
relay box
Faulty horn relay
Faulty set/resume/cancel
switch
Faulty cable reel
An open in the wire
Blown bulb
Blown No.9 (7.SA) fuse
in the under-dash driver's
fuse/relay box
Faulty dimming circuit in
the gauge assembly
An open in the wire
Faulty vehicle speed
sensor
An open in the wire
Short to ground
Blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the
under-dash driver's fusel
relay box
Faulty main switch
An open in the wire
Faulty transmission range
switch
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Faulty cruise control unit
Short to ground
Faulty PCM
S. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK,
the control unit may be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works properly,
replace the control unit.
4-47
BACK
Cruise Control
Main Switch Test/Replacement
'98-00 models:
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument
panel.
terminals
B
Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
switch.
4-48
'01-02 model:
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument
panel.
Terminal side of
male terminals
Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
switch.
BACK
IfI""'"
,.
r:-:'I
I.!:!.I
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement
1. Carefully remove the set/resume/cancel switch
cover (A) by prying between the cover and the
switch (B) in the sequence shown.
A
2. Remove the 2 screws (A), then remove the switch
(B).
Terminal side of
male terminals
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in
If there is continuity and it matches the table, but
switch failure is occurred on the cruise control
unit input test, check and repair the wire harness
on the switch circuit .
If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
\
Terminal
\
1 2 3
Position
SET (ON)
,..... ,.....
RESUME (ON) 0 -0
0 -0
CANCEL (ON)
I
,.....
4-49
BACK
Cruise Control
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch (A).
2. Remove the brake pedal position switch.
\
Terminal
\
1 2 3
Brake Switch
DEPRESSED 0 -0
RELEASED 0
4
height, refer to '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see
page 19-5).
4-50
Actuator Solenoid Test
Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Check for resistance between the terminals
NOTE: Resistance will vary slightly with
temperature; specified resistance is at 70F (20C).
Terminal
Resistance (Q ) \
1 2 3 4
VENT SOLENOID
40-60 Q
VACUUM SOLENOID
30-50 Q
SAFETY SOLENOID
40-60 Q

4 1 3 2
actuator.
BACK
Actuator Test
A973X-041-XXXXX
1. Disconnect the actuator cable from the actuator rod
and disconnect the 4P connector (A).
Terminal side of
male terminals
A973X-041-XXXXX
2. Connect battery power to the No.4 terminal and
ground the No.1, No.2 and No.3 terminals.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose, then
apply vacuum to the actuator.
4. The actuator rod (A) should pull in completely. If
the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for
a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid.
A
/
..
r:-:'I

5. With voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull
the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be
able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective.
6. Disconnect ground from the No.3 terminal. The
actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but
the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the
solenoid valve assembly is defective.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground
from the No.1 terminal. The actuator rod should
return. If it does not return, butthe vent hose and
filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly
is defective.
8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure
to use new O-rings on each solenoid.
9. Disconnect power and ground from the 4P
connector. Disconnect the vent hose from the
actuator. Connect a vacuum pump to the actuator
vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod
should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve
is stuck open. Replace the actuator.
4-51
BACK
Cruise Control
Actuator /Solenoid/Cable Replacement
B
A
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), and remove the
mounting bolt (C), then remove the actuator with
the bracket.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D).
4. Remove the 3 nuts (A).
B
D
5. Disconnect the actuator cable (B) from the actuator
rod (C) by releasing the clip (D) from the rod with a
screwdriver.
4-52
6. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the
actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage (C).
A
B
c
7. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust
the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting
the actuator cable.
BACK
Disassembly IReassembly
ACTUATOR CABLE
ACTUATOR BRACKET
VACUUM TANK
ACTUATOR
SOLENOID VALVES
VACUUM HOSE
FILTER COVER

4-53
BACK
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly
with no binding or sticking.

B A
no load ([H] or [f] position) until the radiator fan
3. Measure the amount of movement of the output
linkage (8) until the engine speed starts to increase.
At first, the output linkage should be located at the
fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should be
3.750.5 mm (0.150.02 in.).
4. Ifthe free play is not within specs, move the cable
to the point where the engine speed starts to
increase, and tighten the locknut (A) and adjusting
nut (8).
B
/
4-54
5. Turn the adjusting nut (8) until it is 3.750.5 mm
(0.150.02 in.) away from the bracket (C).
3.75O.5 mm (O.15O.02 in.)
/
c B
6. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (8) touches
the bracket, and tighten the locknut (A).
BACK
SOLENOID VALVE

I!:!J
4-55 BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOA)
r - - - - ~ ~ - - ~ ~ ~ - - ~
4-56
WHT
IGNITION
SWITCH
IGI HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
BlKNEl
NO.6
(1 SA)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
BUKNEl
GRNIWHT
A2
PCM
BlK
1
Gl0l
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
BACK
Troubleshooting
A973X-041-XXXXX
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively
when idling.
temperature (the cooling fan comes on 2 times).
Is the idle speed less than 800 rpm?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Adjustthe idle speed (see page 11-87) .
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. With the transmission in gear, have an assistant
disconnect and reconnect the 2P connector from
the engine mount control solenoid valve.
when the 2P connector is disconnected?
YES- Reconnect the 2P connector to the solenoid
valve. The engine mount control system is OK .
NO-Go to step 4.
r:-:'I
I.!!:!!.I
4. Shift to IHl or position.
5. Disconnect the 2P connector from the engine
mount control solenoid valve.
6. Measure voltage between the No.2 terminal and
body ground.
Wire side of
female terminals
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in BLK/YEL wire between the 2P
connector and No.6 (15A) fuse in the driver's
terminals.
GRN/WHT
Wire side of
female terminals
BLK/YEL
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in GRN/WHT wire between
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (A2) and the 2P
connector. If the wire is OK, substitute a known-
good PCM and recheck, refer to '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 11-3) .
(cont'd)
4-57 BACK
8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.
terminals.
Wire side of
female terminals
BlK/VEl
YES-Repair short to body ground in GRN/WHT
wire between PCM (A2) and the 2P connector. If the
wire is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck, refer to '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-3) .
NO-Gotostep 10.
10. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) from the
engine mount control solenoid valve (8), and
connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose. Apply
vacuum for 20 seconds.
A
\ A973X-04'XXJ(XX
~
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Either the vacuum hose or one ofthe engine
mounts has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed .
4-58
11. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
with and without vacuum applied?
NO-Isolate and replace the leaking engine
mount .
12. Disconnect the lower vacuum hose (A) from the
engine mount control solenoid valve (8) and
connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose.
A973X-041-XXXXX
A : 2 ~
Is there manifold vacuum at idle a decrease when
you raise the engien speed above 1,000 rpm?
YES - Replace the engine mount control solenoid
valve .
NO-A hose is restricted or pinched orthe intake
manifold port is plugged, Repair as needed .
BACK
r
\
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal ........................................................... 5-2
Engine Installation ........................................................ 5-11
Cylinder Head .................................................... 6-1
Engine Block ..................................................... 7-1
Engine Lubrication ........................................... 8-1
Intake Manifold/Exhaust System ................... 9-1
Engine Cooling ..... ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ .... ....... 10-1
NOTE: Refer to the 1998-2002 Accord Service Manual, PIN 61S8008, for items not shown in this section.
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Belt Tension Release Arm, VA 9317, commercially
available
NOTE:
surfaces.
1. Remove the support struts from the hood, then fix
the hood in a vertical position.
preset buttons.
the positive terminal. Remove the battery.
4. Remove the throttle body cover (A) and intake
manifold cover (B).
5-2
hose (A) from the throttle body.
C B
6. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C),
then remove the intake air duct (D).
7. Remove the ground cable (A) and harness clamp
(B).
D
8. Remove 6 mounting bolts (C), and loosen the
mounting bolt (D), then remove the battery base (E)
and battery base bracket (F).
BACK
cable (8) by loosening the locknuts (e), then slip the
cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care
not to bend the cables when removing them.
Always replace any kinked cable with a new one.
c
10. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on
the left side of the engine compartment.
(8).
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models:

A
13. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and
the cruise control vacuum hose (8).
(cont'd)
5-3
BACK
Engine Assembly
14. Remove the engine wire harness clamps.
11111111 ~
111111 ~ ~ ~ ~
--.....-' ~
11111
1
15. Remove the battery cables (A), and disconnect the
connector (8) from the under-hood fuse/relay box
(C).
16. Remove the flange bolt (D), then remove the under-
17. Remove the harness clamps (E).
5-4
18. Remove the starter cable clamps.
19. Disconnect the connectors from the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM).
BACK
20. Remove the grommet (A), then pullout the peM
connectors.
21. Move the auto-tensioner (A) with the belt tension
release arm (8) to remove tension from the
alternator belt (e), then remove the alternator belt.
22. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), and remove the
locknut (8) and mounting bolt (e), then remove the
Power Steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump
23. Remove the PIS hose clamp (E).
25. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned
properly. Raise the hoist to full height.
(cont'd)
5-5
BACK
Engine Assembly
28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator to drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-10).
29. Drain the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF).
Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer (see
page 14-113).
30. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
31. Disconnect the Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor
connector (A), then remove the exhaust pipe A (8).
32. Remove the damper fork, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 18-19).
33. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints;
refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page
18-17).
34. Remove the driveshafts; refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 16-3). Coat all precision-
finished surfaces with clean engine oil. Tie plastic
bags over the driveshaft ends.
5-6
35. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder
(8), then remove the shift cable cover (C). To
prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure
to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
cover.
A
lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable while
removing it.
37. Unplug the PIS hose clamps (A), and disconnect the
engine mount control vacuum hose (8).
A
B
BACK
38. Lower the hoist, then remove the upper radiator
hose (A), and the lower radiator hose (8).
A
39. Remove the distributor cap, then remove the heater
hoses.
40. Remove the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
cooler hoses, then plug the ATF cooler hoses and
lines.
(cont'd)
5-7
BACK
Engine Assembly
41. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown.
5-8
42. Remove the side engine mount bracket.
43. Remove the rear mount bracket support nut (A) and
mounting bolt (8).
BACK
44. Remove the front mount bracket support nut.
45. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned
properly. Raise the hoist to full height.
46. Remove the flange bolts securing the radius rods.
47. Make a mark (A) on the front beam (8) and rear
beam (e), then remove the front beam.
B
48. Remove the Ale compressor without disconnecting
the Ale hoses.
(cont'd)
5-9
BACK
Engine Assembly
49. Remove the rear mount.
50. Remove the transmission lower rear mount.
5-10
51. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses and
electrical wiring.
52. Slowly lower the engine about 150 mm (6 in.).
Check once again that all hoses and wires are
disconnected from the engine/transmission.
53. Lower the engine all the way, and disconnect the
chain hoist from the engine.
54. Remove the engine from under the vehicle.
BACK
r Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
10x 1.25mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm,
33lbfftl
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m,
16lbfftl
P/SPUMP
BRACKET
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m, 16lbfftl
- . . f - - . . . . . : : : : : ~ 10 x 1.25 mm
44 Nm 14.5 kgfm,
33lbf.ftl
(cont'd)
5-11
BACK
Engine Assembly
2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach the
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle.
I NOTICE I
Reinstall the mounting bolts/nuts in the
sequence given. Failure to follow this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the transmission lower rear mount.
10x 1.25 mm
4. Install the rear mount bracket.
I
10x 1.25mm
5-12
5. Install the AlC compressor.
!
8x 1.25 mm
6. Install the front beam. Align mark (A) on the rear
beam (8) and front beam (C), then tighten the bolts
(D).
F
10x 1.25 mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm,
28lbfftl
B
A
c
1 10x1.25mm
\
' 38 Nm (3.9 kgf.m,
'\. 28 Ibfftl
D
12x 1.25 mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
D 40lbfftl
14x 1.5mm
103 Nm (10.5 kgfm,
76lbfftl
Replace.
7. Tighten the transmission lower rear mount
mounting nuts (E) and transmission lower front
mount mounting nuts (F).
BACK
8. Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods.
14x 1.5 mm
162 Nm (16.5 kgf.m, 119 Ibfft)
~
/
9. Lower the hoist.
10. Tighten the front mount bracket support nut.
12x 1.25mm
~ e
11. Tighten the rear mount bracket support nut and
mounting bolt.
10 x 1.25 mm
12x 1.25 mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgfm,
40Ibfft)
I
12. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
12x 1.25 mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgfm,
40Ibfft)
\
CD 10 x 1.25 mm
44 Nm (4.5 kgf.m,
40Ibfft)
\
13. Remove the chain hoist from the engine.
(cont'd)
5-13
BACK
Engine Assembly
15. Install a new spring clip on the end of each
driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure
each clip "clicks" into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
16. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints use
new cotter pins; refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Manual (see page 18-17).
17. Install the damper fork; refer to the '98-02 Accord
18. Install exhaust pipe A (A); use new gaskets (8)
and new self locking nuts (C). Then connect the
Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor connector (0).
C
10x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25 mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm, 28 rbftt)
C
10x 1.25 mm
54 Nm (5.5 kgfm, 40 rbftt)
Replace.
5-14
19. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable on
the control shaft. 00 not bend the shift cable any
more than is necessary to install the control lever.
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7 rbftt)

8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16rbftt)
20. Install the lock bolt (8) with a new lock washer (C),
then bend the lock tab of the lock washer.
21. Install the shift cable cover (0), then install the shift
cable holder (E) on the shift cable cover.
22. Install the PIS hose into the clamps (A), and
connect the engine mount control vacuum hose (8).
BACK
23. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), and the lower
radiator hose (B).
A
24. Install the heater hoses, then install the distributor
cap.
25. Connectthe Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)
cooler hoses.
(cont'd)
5-15
BACK
Engine Assembly
27. Install the front tires/wheels.
29. Install the alternator belt.
30. Loosely install the Power Steering (P/S) pump belt
and pump.
31. Adjust the Power Steering (P/S) pump belt (see
page 17-13).
32. Push in the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
connectors, through the bulkhead then install the
grommet (A).
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibf.ft)
33. Connect the PCM connectors.
5-16
A
34. Install the starter cable clamps.
35. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A) and
harness clamps (B).
c
6x1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
36. Install the battery cables (C), and connect the
connector (D) from the under-hood fuse/relay box
(A).
BACK
37. Install the engine wire harness clamps.
38. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the
cruise control vacuum hose (8).
B
39. Install the fuel hose (A) and fuel return hose (8),
using new washers (C).
'98-99 models:
c
'00-02 models:
A
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
"'--------
22Nm
(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
40. Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the
left side of the engine compartment.
(cont'd)
5-17
BACK
Engine Assembly
41. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
cable (see page 4-53).
42. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
page 11-100).
43. Install the battery base bracket (A), battery base (B),
then install the ground cable (C) and harness clamp
(D).
8x 1.2Smm
/
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgf.m,
~ ~ t l
c
8x1.2Smm
22 Nm 12.2 kgf'm, 16 Ibfft)
44. Install the throttle body cover (A) and intake
manifold cover (B).
5-18
45. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C).
c B
46. Install the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister
hose (D) to the throttle body.
47. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble ~
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
48. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).
49. Refill the transmission with Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) (see page 14-113).
50. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see page 10-10).
52. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn on (II) the ignition switch
(do not operate the starter) so that the fuel pump
runs for approximately 2 seconds and pressurizes
the fuel line. Repeat this operation two or three
times, then check for fuel leakage at any point in
the fuel line.
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools .................................................................... 6-2
Component Location Index ............................................. 6-3
DTC Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-6
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test ............................................... 6-9
VTEC Rocker Arms Test ................................................... 6-10
Valve Clearance Adjustment ........................................... 6-13
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and
Installation ..................................................................... 6-17
Timing Belt Inspection ..................................................... 6-18
Timing Belt Removal ....................................................... 6-19
Timing Belt Installatioin ................................................... 6-22
Cylinder Head Removal ................................................... 6-31
Warpage ...................................................................... 6-36
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ..................................... 6-36
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly ..... 6-37
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection ............................... 6-38
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies
Inspection .................................................................... 6-39
Camshaft Inspection ........................................................ 6-40
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals
Removal ...................................................................... 6-43
Valve Inspection ............................................................... 6-44
Inspection .................................................................... 6-44
Valve Guide Replacement ............................................... 6-45
Valve Seat Reconditioning .............................................. 6-47
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals
Installation ................................................................... 6-49
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft
Seal, and Pulley Installation ...................................... 6-50
Cylinder Head Installation ............................................... 6-51
TDC Sensor Replacement ............................................... 6-55
CKP Sensor Replacement ................................................ 6-56
BACK
Cylinder Head
Special T 0015
Ref. No. Tool Number
CD 07HAH-PJ7010B
CD 07 JAA-OO 1 020A
07 JAB-OO 1 020A
CD 07MAB-PY30100
07 NAJ-P070 1 OA
07VAJ-P8A010A
(j) 07VAJ-P8A020A
-1 07406-0070300
-2 07MAJ-PY4011A
-3 07MAJ-PY40120
07742-0010100
@l 07757-PJ1010A
CD

6-2
5J
I I
Description Qtv
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
Socket, 19 mm 1
Holder Handle 1
Pulley Holder Attachment, 50 mm Offset 1
Pressure Gauge Adapter
VTEC Air Adapter
VTEC Air Stopper
AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
AfT Pressure Hose Adapter
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment

~ ~
~
-1, -2, -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BACK
REAR UPPER COVER

PULLEY BOLT
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
AUTO-TENS lONER
RUBBER SEAL
IDLER PULLEY
TIMING BELT
Removal. page 6-19
RUBBER SEAL
TIMING BELT DRIVE PULLEY
(cant'd)
6-3
BACK
Cylinder Head
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
WASHER
RUBBER SEAL
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
6-4
HEAD COVER GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD
COVER
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
BACK
VALVE KEEPERS

-----@)
SPRING RETAINER
____ VALVE SPRING SEAT
O-RING
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLIES
Removal, page 6-36
CAMSHAFT
KEEPERS

INTAKE VALVE SPRING /Installation, page 6-49
______ LOST MOTION
INTAKE VALVE SEAL @ / ASSEMBLY
SPRING
VALVE SEAL
page 6-49
VALVE SPRING SEAT
INTAKE VALVE
GUIDE
Inspection,
page 6-44
Replacement,
page 6-45
INJECTOR BASE
page 6-49
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE
....,-CYLINDER HEAD
(b Removal, page 6-31
Warpage, page 6-36
Valve seat reconditioning,
page 6-47
@n ... "s,;oo, pags 6-51

OILSEAL
\
EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-43
6-5
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
Ole P1259: A problem in the VTEC Oil
Pressure Switch circuit or VTEC Solenoid
Valve circuit
Pressure Gauge Adaptor 07NAJ-P0701 OA
AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070300
AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
AfT Pressure Adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Do the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) reset
procedure; refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
4. Road test the vehicle:
Accelerate in [!] position to an engine speed over
4,000 rpm. Hold that engine speed for at least 2
seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the
1st road test, repeat this test two more times.
YES - Go to step 5.
VTEC solenoid valve and PCM .
6. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector.
6-6
7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure
switch between the pressure switch connector
VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
CONNECTOR
terminals
YES-Go to step 8.
NO - Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch .
9. Measure the voltage between the VTEC oil
pressure switch harness connector No.1 terminal
and body ground.
CONNECTOR
=
NO-Inspect for an open or short to ground in the
wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the
PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a known-
good PCM and recheck .
'""',
BACK
10. Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure
switch harness 2P connector.
2P CONNECTOR
L-----{'Y,}------'
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Go to step 11.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil
pressure switch and G101.lfthe wire is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .
13. Check for continuity on the VTEC solenoid valve
between the solenoid valve 1 P connector terminal
and body ground.
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE
1P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of
male terminal
Is there 14- 30 Q ?
.Q
=
NO - Replace the VTEC solenoid valve .
14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and
install the special tools as shown, then reinstall the
VTEC oil pressure switch.
A
07NAJ-P07010A
15. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1 P connector
and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector.
16. Connect a tachometer.
18. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000, 2,000
and 3,000 rpm. Keep measuring time as short as
possible because the engine is running with no
load (less than 1 minute).
Is pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgflcrrf , 7 psi)?
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-
9) .
21. Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC
solenoid valve terminal.
22. Start the engine and check oil pressure at an engine
speed of 3,000 rpm.
Is pressure above 390 kPa (4.0 kgflcrrf ,57 psi)?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO -I nspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 6-
9) .
(cont'd)
6-7
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
23. With the battery positive terminal still connected to
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between
C10 and body ground.
VTM (BLU/BLKI
Is there battery voltage above 4,000 rpm?
NO- Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch .
25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal from the
VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
valve harness 1 P connector terminal and the PCM
connector terminal 812.
6-8
1 P CONNECTOR
VTS (GRN/YELI
PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(812) and VTEC solenoid valve connector .
valve 1 P connector terminal and body ground.
1P CONNECTOR
=
Wire side offemale
terminal
YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(812) and VTEC solenoid valve connector .
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
If symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM .
BACK
Cylinder Head
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test
1. Disconnect the 1 P connector from the VTEC
solenoid valve.
2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body
ground.
Resistance: 14-30 Q
=
3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the
VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the
oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter
(8) for clogging. If there is clogging, clean the filter
and replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil.
8x 1.2Smm
22 N\12.2 '''.m. 1. Ibl.-:-ft .... ) ' ~ / /
4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid
valve with your finger and check its movement. If
the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the
engine oil pressure.
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibfft)
22 Nm 12.2 'glm. j
o &>
6-9
BACK
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
VTEC Air Adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A
VTEC Air Stopper 07VAJ-P8A020A
1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
ignition wire cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
'00-02 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
intake manifold covers (B) and intake manifold
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
c
'00-02 models:
6-10
hose (A) from the throttle body .
C B
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
BACK
r
vacuum hoses (8) and Positive Crankcase
Ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
A
6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models),
breather hose (8) and water bypass hoses (C).
A
B c
8. Remove the cylinder head covers.
9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page
6-18).
10. Set the No.1 piston at TOC (see step 10 on page 6-
14).
11. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No.1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (8) and
secondary rocker arm (C) .
Ifthe intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the
pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary, mid and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and retest .
Ifthe mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 12.
B
c A
(cont'd)
6-11 BACK
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
12. Repeat step 11 on the remaining intake mid rocker
arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 13.
13. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0
kgf/cm2, 100 psi).
14. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
15. Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect
the belt.
16. Remove the 2 intake rocker shaft mounting bolts,
then connect the special tools and Valve Inspection
an air pressure regulator with a 0-100 psi gauge
(A) as shown below.
07VAJ-P8A020A 07VAJ-P8A010A
17. Loosen the valve on the regulator and apply the
specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
390 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm2, 57 psi)
NOTE: Ifthe synchronizing pistons A and 8 do not
move after applying air pressure; move the primary
or secondary rocker arm up and down manually by
rotating the crankshaft clockwise.
6-12
18. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A)
and intake secondary rocker arm (8) are
mechanically connected by the piston and that the
mid rocker arm (C) does not move when pushed
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
independently of the primary and secondary rocker
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
A
B c
19. Remove the tools.
20. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion
assembly (see page 6-37). Replace the lost motion
assembly if it does not move smoothly.
BACK
r Valve Clearance Adjustment
".,'
\,
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head
temperature is less than 100F (38C).
(C).
'00-02 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
c
'00-02 models:
then remove the intake air duct (0).
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
(cant'd)
6-13
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models),
A
B c
6-14
9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page
6-18).
10. Set the No.1 piston at TDC. Align the pointer (A) on
the back cover with the No.1 piston TDC mark (8)
on the front camshaft pulley.
A B
BACK
11. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the
valves you're going to check.
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.)
Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
Adjusting screw locations:
EXHAUST
No.1 No.2 No.3
REAR:
No.1 No.2 No.3
INTAKE
No.4 No.5 No.6
FRONT:
No.4 No.5 No.6
EXHAUST
12. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
B
13. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
A
7xO.75mm
20 Nm (2.0 kgf.m, 14lbfftl
B
14. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the back cover with the No.4 piston TOC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B
16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No.4 cylinder.
(cont'd)
6-15
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
(A) on the back cover with the No.2 piston TDC
mark (8) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B
on No.2 cylinder.
A B
on No.5 cylinder.
6-16
A B
on No.3 cylinder.
A B
on No.6 cylinder.
BACK
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07 MAB-PY301 OA
Removal
attachment (B).
B
07MAB-PV3010A
~
07JAA-001020A
Installation
1. Clean the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B), bolt (C) and
washer (D). Lubricate the points shown below.
0: Clean
: Lubricate
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to
245 Nm (25.0 kgfm, 181 Ibfft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
-1 Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (B).
-2 Tighten the bolt with a torque wrench and 19
mm socket (C).
A B
07JAB-001020A 07MAB-PV3010A
\
~
07 JAA-001 020A
6-17
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Inspection
ignition wire cover (8) and intake manifold cover
(e).
'00-02 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A)
and intake manifold cover (8).
'98-99 models:
\
c
'0002 models:
6-18
2. Remove the front upper cover.
3. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant
soaking. Replace the. belt if it is oil or coolant
soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the
belt.
BACK
Timing Belt Removal
Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MAB-PY301 OA
Belt Tension Release Arm, YA931 7,
1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up
with the pointer (B).
B
/1
A
2. Check that the rear camshaft pulley mark (A) and
rear upper cover mark (B) are aligned.
A
B

...........
=
5. Move the auto-tensioner (A) with the belt tension
release arm (B) to remove tension from the
alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt.
(cont'd)
6-19
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
6. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), locknut (8) and
mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering
(PIS) pump belt (D).
e
A
under the oil pan.
6-20
9. Remove the dipstick and tube (A); discard the 0-
ring (8).
attachment (8).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
---e
07 JAA-001 020A
lor Commercially available)
BACK
12. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover
(8) and lower cover (C).
B
\
A
c
13. Remove one ofthe battery clamp bolts from the
battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
14. To hold the timing belt adjuster its current position,
screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown.
Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench.
15. Remove the engine mount bracket.
(cont'd)
6-21 BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
16. Loosen the idler pulley bolt (A) about five or six
turns, then remove the timing belt.
A
6-22
Timing Belt Installation
NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a new
timing belt. If you are installing a used timing belt, refer
to the next procedure.
New Belt
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning
the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt
drive pulley with the pointer (8) on the oil pump.
BACK
3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft
pulleys to TOC by aligning the TOC marks (A) on
the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (8) on the
back covers.
FRONT:
B
A
REAR:
4. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
6. Hold the auto-tensioner (A) with the maintenance
bolt pointing up. Loosen and remove the
maintenance bolt (8).
NOTE: Handle the auto-tensioner carefully so the
oil inside does not spill or leak. If any of the oil has
spilled or leaked out of the auto-tensioner, refill it
with 5 W-30 motor oil. The total capacity is 6.5 mll
(0.22 fl oz).
7. Clamp the boss of the auto-tensioner in a soft-
jawed vise. 00 not grip the housing of the auto-
tensioner.
S. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (C) into the
maintenance hole. Place the holder (0) (PIN 14540-
PSA-A01) on the auto-tensioner while turning the
screwdriver clockwise to compress the bottom.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the threads or the
gasket contact surface with the screwdriver.
9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a
new gasket (8).
A

(cont'd)
6-23
BACK
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Make sure no oil is leaking around the maintenance
bolt, then install the auto-tensioner (A).
NOTE: Make sure the holder (8) stays in place.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibfft)
11. Install the timing belt in a counter clockwise
sequence starting with the drive pulley.
E
6-24
c
12. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
10x 1.25 mm
44 Nm /4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibftt)
13. Remove the holder.
BACK
14. Install the engine mount bracket.
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)

&'-- 44 Nm (4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)
15. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (S)
and rear upper cover (C).
\
B
A
6x 1.0 mm
17. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft
pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (S) and
washer (C).
0: Clean
: Lubricate
c
! ..
impact wrench.
holder attachment (S).
mm socket (C).
A B
07JAB-001020A 07MAB-PY3010A
\
"-c
07 JAA-001 020A
19. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions on the
pulleys.
(cont'd)
6-25
BACK
Cylinder Head
20. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up with the pointer (8).
B
A
21. Check the camshaft pulley marks.
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to
step 22 .
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2
through 20.
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
A
6-26
A
(8).
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibftt)
23. Install and adjust the PIS pump belt (see page 17-
10).
shown.
Q) 10 x 1.25 mm

12x 1.25 mm
\'.' '".m. 40 Ibfftl
BACK
Used Belt
Follow this procedure when installing a used timing
belt.
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TOC by aligning
the TOC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt
drive pulley with the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
B
\ A
the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the
back covers.
FRONT:
B A
REAR:
B
(cont'd)
6-27
BACK
Cylinder Head
4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing
belt cannot be installed, remove and compress the
auto-tensioner (refer to steps 6-23 of the New Belt
Installation Procedure).
5. Install the timing belt in a counter clockwise
sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the timing belt when installing it.
-1 Drive pulley (A).
-2 Idler pulley (B).
-3 Front camshaft pulley (C).
-4 Water pump pulley (D).
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E).
-6 Adjusting pulley (F).
\
E 0
c
6. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
10x 1.2Smm
6-28
7. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
8. Install the engine mount bracket.
6x1.0mm
~
-D10X1.25mm
~ 44 Nm 14.5 kgfm, 33Ibfft)
BACK
9. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B)
and rear upper cover (C).
C
\
B
A
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft)
11. Clean any oil off the inside face (A) of the
crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley
bolt (B) and washer (C).
O:Clean
: Lubricate
C
I .. [ J ~
impact wrench.
holder attachment (B).
mm socket (C).
A
07 Jj'''"1'020A
B
07MAB-PY3010A
~
07JAA-001020A
13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions on the
pulleys.
14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up with the pointer (B).
B
A
(cont'd)
6-29
BACK
Cylinder Head
15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A).
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to
step 16 .
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2
through 14.
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
A
6-30
A
(8) .
A
17. Install and adjust the PIS pump belt (see page 17-
10).
shown.
Ci)10 x 1.25 mm
44 Nm(4.5 kgfm, 33 Ibfft)

12x 1.25 mm
'\.' k"m. 40 Ibf1tl

i
BACK
Cylinder Head Removal
Belt Tension Release Arm,YA9317, commercially
available
Engine removal is not required this procedure.
NOTE:
surfaces.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100F (38C)
before loosening the retaining bolts.
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-10).
4. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A) ,
(C).
'00-02 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A) ,
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
c
'00-02 models:
C B
6. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C) ,
(cont'd)
6-31
BACK
Cylinder Head
cable (8) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
cable ends out ofthe accelerator linkage.Take care
(8).
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models
,-----
A
6-32
A
11. Remove the vacuum hose (A), ('98-99 models)
A
B
BACK
12. Remove the ground cable (A).
o
13. Move the auto-tensioner (8) with the belt tension
release arm (C) to remove tension from the
alternator belt (D), then remove the alternator belt.
under the oil pan.
16. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), then remove the
locknut (8) and mounting bolt (C). Remove the
Power Steering (PIS) pump belt (D) and pump
~ ~
o B
17. Remove the PIS hose clamp (E).
19. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps from the cylinder heads and
the intake manifold.
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) sensor connector
Idle Air Control (lAC) valve connector
Throttle Position (TP) sensor connector
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor
connector
Radiator fan switch A connector
Radiator fan switch 8 connector
Coolant temperature gauge sending unit
connector ('98-99 models)
CKP sensor connector
TDC sensor connector
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve connector
Distributor connector ('98-99 models)
VTEC solenoid valve connector
VTEC oil pressure switch connector
Oil pressure switch connector
20. Remove the spark plug caps and distributor from
the cylinder heads.
(cont'd)
6-33
BACK
Cylinder Head
22. Disconnect the six injector connectors.
23. Remove the fuel rails.
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models:
6-34
24. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake air
bypass control thermal valve (8).
A
/ B
A
26. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (8).
A
\
B
BACK
27. Remove the heater hoses.
28. Remove the front and rear exhaust manifolds (see
page 9-3).
29. Remove the water passage.
30. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and back covers
(B).
32. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE:
33. Remove the cylinder heads.
6-35
BACK
Cylinder Head
Warpage
NOTE: If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 6-
40) are not within specifications, the cylinder head
cannot be resurfaced.
If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances are within
specifications, check the cylinder head for warpage.
Measure along the edges, and three ways across the
center.
If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.), cylinder
head resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and 0.2
mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) based
on a height of 121 mm (4.76 in.).
Cylinder Head Height:
6-36
(4.762-4.766 in.'
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A).
A
A
2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
-1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts two
turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to
prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm
assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING
SEQUENCE:
BACK
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly IReassembly
NOTE:
o Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
o Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-38).
o Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
o When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
o Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
o Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply lubricant to any contact points.
e
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
[QJ 0 0 [QJ [QJ 0 0 [QJ [QJ 0 0 [QJ
e
e e
WM
B
1
A
SPRING
[Q]o o [Q] 0 o [Q] 0
Letter B is stamped
on rocker arm.
Letter A is stamped
on rocker arm.
e
o[Q]
INTAKE ROCKER
~ E _ Y
e
~
6-37
BACK
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection
Measure the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker
shaft.
1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
6-38
3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
Intake: 0.026-0.067 mm
(0.0010-0.0026 in.)
Exhaust: 0.026-0.077 mm
(0.0010-0.0030 in.)
Inspect rocker arm
face for wear.
4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the
clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any intake
rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three
rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and
secondary).
BACK
r
VTEC Rocker Arms
5. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push them
manually. Ifthey do not move smoothly, replace
the rocker arm set.
NOTE:
Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling .
When reassembling the primary rocker arm (8),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
B
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies
Inspection
Push on the lost motion assembly (A) with your finger.
If it does not move smoothly, replace it.
A
6-39 BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arms.
2. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
Specified torque:
8X1.25mm
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
@ <D 0

6-40
3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
read the end play.
Camshaft End Play:
(0.002-0.008 in.)
5. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out
the camshaft (B).
BACK
6. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted,
scored or excessively worn.
7. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
8. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
9. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder
head. Measure the inside diameter of each
camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-
round condition.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, go to step 11.
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 10.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance:
(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
(cont'd)
6-41
BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
10. Check total runout with the camshaft supported on
V-blocks.
If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil
clearance. If tl1e clearance is still out of tolerance,
Camshaft Total Runout:
Rotate camshaft
while measuring.
6-42
11. Measure cam lobe height.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):
INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 34.615 mm 36.076mm
(1.3628 in.) (1.4203 in.)
MID 36.210mm
(1.4256 in.)
SEC 31.188mm
(1.2279 in.)
SEC MID PRI
FRONT BANK
EX IN EX
-T/B
PRI MID SEC
REAR BANK
EX IN EX
-T/B
Inspect this area for wear.
BACK
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal
07757-PJ1010A
Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor
KD383 with No.32 jaws
Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover
KD3350
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are
removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
B
\
spring and remove the valve keepers.
07157-PJ1010A
3. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
A
4. Remove the valve seal.
6-43
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection
Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 33.90-34.10 mm
(1.335-1.343 in.)
B Standard (New): 114.85-115.15 mm
(4.522-4.533 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
D Standard (New): 0.85 -1.15 mm
(0.033-0.045 in.)
D Service Limit: 0.65 mm (0.026 in.)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 28.90-29.10 mm
(1.138-1.146 in.)
B Standard (New): 112.85-113.15 mm
(4.443-4.455 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450 - 5.460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in)
D Standard (New): 1.05-1.35 mm
(0.041-0.053 in.)
D Service Limit: 0.95 mm (0.037 in.)
1 ..... 1-------B ---------i .... 1
--11--
0
p ~ _ ____;_:---.J-L...jJO]
6-44
Inspection
1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm, then
measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial
indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of
normal thrust (wobble method).
o If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
recheck it using a new valve.
o If the measurement is now within the service
limit, reassemble using a new valve.
o If the measurement with a new valve still
exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
(0.002-0.004 in.)
(0.004-0.006 in.)
/
(
o
~
2. Subtract the 0.0. of the valve stem, measured with
a micrometer, from the 1.0. ofthe valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
(0.0008-0.0018 in.)
(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
BACK
Valve Guide Replacement
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7010B
1. As illustrated below, use a commercially available
air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
;
A 5.3mm I
(0.21 in.' +
["-..--1 -D 0 I:'
1
. 87 mm _1 __ 57 mm -I t
(3.43 in.' (2.24 in.'
10.8mm
(0.42 in.'
2. Select the proper replacement guides and chill
them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300F (150C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300F (150C); Excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
4. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1
in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward
the camshaft side of head.
b
l
6. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm
(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
7. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a
time, as you need them.
(cont'd)
6-45
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside
of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the
camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to
drive the guide in to the specified installed height
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to do,
you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height:
Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust: 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812-0.852 in.)
6-46
9. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
cutting oil.
10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length ofthe
valve guide bore.
11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
removing it from the bore.
12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water
to remove any cutting residue.
13. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-44).
Verify that the valve slides in the intake and
exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure.
Turn reamer in
clockwise direction only.

I
BACK
Valve Seat Reconditioning
Ifthe valve guides are worn (see page 6-44), replace
them (see page 6-45)before cutting the valve seats.
1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.
-1 Carefully cut a 45seat, removing only enough
material to ensure a smooth and concentric
seat.
-2 Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30
cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the
60cutter. Check the width of the seat and
adjust accordingly.
-3 Make one more very light pass with the 45
cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by
the other cutters.
Valve Seat Width:
Standard (New): 1.25 -1.55 mm
(0.049-0.061 in.)
60
2. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve
seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
A
3. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
must make a second cut with the 60cutter to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45
cutter to restore seat width .
If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with
the 45cutter.
(cont'd)
6-47
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and
measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height:
(1.841-1.872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height:
(1.838-1.869 in.)
5. If the valve stem installed height is over the service
limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
6-48
BACK
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation
07757-PJ1010A or 07VAE-001010A
Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor
K0383 with No.32 jaws, commercially available
Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover
K03372, commercially available
1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the
valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (8).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring
(0) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
)
E c
5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
toward the cylinder head.
spring and install the valve keepers.
7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three
times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
the stem.
6-49 BACK
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil
seal.
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
-1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
-2 Tap the oil seal into the cylinder head about 0.5
-1.5 mm (0.02-0.06 in.) from the surface of
the cylinder head.
3. Insert the camshaft (8) into the cylinder head, then
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D).
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
8x 1.25 mm
27m '2.2 kgfm, 1. I.,ftl
'(0
/0 /"
C
6-50
5. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely
install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
7. Tighten each bolt 2 turns at a time in the sequence
shown below to ensure that the rockers do not bind
on the valves.
Specified torque:
8x1.2Smm
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
CD CD (j)

8. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new
gasket (8).
A
\
ax 1.25 mm
BACK
9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft
pulley (8).
ax 1.25 mm
12x 1.25 mm
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
Cylinder Head Installation
Install the cylinder heads in the reverse order of
removal:
1. Clean the cylinder heads and block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) with
new O-rings (8).
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head
gaskets (D).
B
A
(cont'd)
6-51
BACK
Cylinder Head
4. Clean the timing belt drive pulley.
5. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TOC by aligning
the TOC mark (A) on the tooth ofthe timing belt
drive pulley with the pointer (8) on the oil pump.
6-52
the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (8) on the
back covers.
FRONT:
B
A
REAR:
A
B
BACK
7. Apply clean engine oil to the threads and flange of
the cylinder head bolts.
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in
three steps. Perform each step twice.
1st step torque: 39 Nm (4.0 kgfm, 29 Ibfft)
2nd step torque: 69 Nm (7.0 kgfm, 51 Ibfft)
3rd step torque: 98.1 Nm (10.0 kgfm, 72.3 Ibfft)
Use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a
preset-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten
slowly and not to overtighten.
If a bolt makes any noise while you are torquing it,
loosen the bolt, and retighten it from the first step.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE SEQUENCE:
9. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the nuts in
a crisscross pattern in two or three steps,
beginning with the inner nut (see page 9-3). Always
use a new exhaust manifold gasket.
10. Install exhaust pipe A and bracket, then install the
cover (see page 9-4).
11. Install the timing belt (see page 6-22).
12. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
13. Install the cylinder head covers.
NOTE:
Before installing the cylinder head cover, clean
the cylinder head contacting surfaces with a shop
towel.
Take care not to damage the spark plug seals
when installing the cylinder head cover.
Visually check the spark plug seals for damage.
Replace any washer that is damaged or
deteriorated.
(cont'd)
6-53
BACK
Cylinder Head
14. Tighten the nuts in two or three steps. In the final
step, tighten all nuts, in sequence, to 12 Nm (1.2
kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf.ft).
CD
~ ~ ~ ~ ~

15. Install the water passage (A). Always use a new D-
ring (8) and new gaskets (C).
B
8x 1.25 mm
22 Nm(2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
6-54
16. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and
nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use
a new intake manifold gasket.
Specified torque:
8x 1.25 mm
17. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly.
BACK
Toe Sensor Replacement
1. Set the No.1 piston at TDC (see page 6-22l.
2. Remove the upper covers.
3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current
position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight
(see step 14 on page 6-21l.
4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about 5 or 6 turns, then
remove the timing belt from the front camshaft
pulley (see step 16 on page 6-22l.
5. Remove the front camshaft pulley.
12x 1.25 mm
90 Nm (9.2 kgf.m, 67 Ibf.tt)
Apply engine oil to
the bolt threads.
6. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor connector, then
remove the back cover.
8x 1.25mm
7. Remove the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor from the back
cover.
8. Install the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor in reverse order of
removal. Reinstall the timing belt and other
removed components (see page 6-22l.
6-55
BACK
Cylinder Head
CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the alternator belt, then remove the alternator belt
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt, locknut and mounting
bolt, then remove the power steering (PIS) pump
belt (see step 6 on page 6-20).
3. Remove the dipstick and tube (see step 9 on page
6-20).
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 10 on page
6-20).
5. Remove the upper and lower covers (see step 12
on page 6-21).
6. Remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump.
:---6 x 1.0 mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfftl
7. Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of
removal.
6-56
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Drive Plate Removal and Installation .......................... 7-6
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................... 7-7
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-8
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-10
Crankshaft and Pistons Removal ................................ 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-14
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-15
Cylinder Honing ............................................................ 7-17
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-18
Piston Rings Replacement ........................................... 7-21
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection .................................. 7-23
Crankshaft and Piston Installation .............................. 7-23
Pulley End Crankshaft Seallnstallation-In-car ........... 7-28
Installation-In-car ........................................................ 7-28
BACK
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty
CD 07 LAD-PT30 1 OA Oil Seal Driver 1
@ 07VAD-P8A010A Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm 1.0. 1
077 49-00 1 0000 Driver 1
CD
7-2
BACK
OIL SCREEN
OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-7
OIL PAN
Install, page 7-23
ENGINE BLOCK END COVER
~ o = ~
~
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
/
and page 7-28
\
DRIVE PLATE BOLT
Torque sequence,
page 7-6
(cont'd)
7-3
BACK
Engine Block
MAIN BEARING CAPS
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil clearance, page 7-8
Selection, page 7-8
7-4
~ - -
End play, page 7-7
/
CRANKSHAFT
DOWEL PIN
BACK
L PISTON RINGS
/) 0 __ SNAP RING

(7 0 PISTON PIN
d Removal, page 7-18
LJ Installation, page 7-18
a Inspection, page 7-18

Removal, page 7-12
CONNECTING ROD
End play, page 7-7
Small end measurement, page 7-18
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder bore inspection, page 7-15
Warpage inspection, page 7-15
Cylinder bore honing, page 7-17
Ridge removal, page 7-12
CONNECTING ROD BEARING

Clearance, page 7-10
Selection, page 7-10
.4
/
4 CONNECTING ROD BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD BOLT
Tightening, page 7-23
7-5
BACK
Engine Block
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
2. Remove the eight drive plate bolts, then separate
the drive plate from the crankshaft flange. After
shown.
12x1.0mm
74Nm
7-6
BACK
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-8).
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 6 on page 7-12).
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (8) and
crankshaft (e).
Connecting Rod End Play:
c
A
4. Ifthe connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance,
install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it still
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see step 6
on page 7-12).
5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play:
6. If end play is excessive, replace the thrust washers
and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the
crankshaft.
7-7
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the main caps and bearing halves.
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a
clean shop towel.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt
the main cap down to check the clearance, the
weight ofthe crankshaft and drive plate will flatten
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the
bolts (see page 7-23). Do not rotate the crankshaft.
5. Remove the caps and bearing halves, and measure
7-8
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:
(0.0008-0.0017 in.'
(remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove
the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the
bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
adjust clearance.
again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
replace the crankshaft and start over.
BACK
Main Bearing Selection
Crankshaft Bore Code Location
1. Letters or Bars have been stamped on the end of
the block as a code for the size of each of the four
main journal bores.
If you cannot read the codes because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with
solvent or detergent.
Main Journal Code Locations
2. Number or bars have been stamped on the
crankshaft No.1 web as a code for the main journal
sizes.
B BB
333
3
No.4 JOURNAL
(DRIVE PLATE END) (PULLEV END)
3. Use the crankshaft bore codes and journal codes to
select the appropriate main bearings from the table.
10r'
20rll
3 or III
4orlll'
Sorlllll
60rllllll
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
Journal (Thicker)
Larger crank bore
Smaller bearing (Thicker)
Red!
Pink
Pink!
Pink Vellow
Pink
Pink!
Vellow
Veil ow
Pink!
Veil ow
Vellow!
Vellow Green
Vellow
Vellow!
Green
Green
Vellow!
Green
Green!
Green Brown
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
NOTE:
When using bearing
halves of different colors,
Vellow
Vellow!
Green
Green
Green!
Brown
Brown
Brown!
Black
it does not matter which color
is used in the top or bottom .
Color code is on the dege of
the bearing.
7-9
BACK
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
with a clean shop towel.
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal.
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the
bolts (see page 7-23). Do not rotate the crankshaft.
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:
(0.0008-0.0017 in.)
PLASTIGAGE STRIP
7-10
remove the upper half ofthe bearing, install a new,
complete bearing with the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
BACK
Rod Bearing Selection
1. Inspect the connecting rods for cracks and heat
damage.
Connecting Rod Bore/Journal Code Locations
2. Each rod has a tolerance range (from 0 to 0.024 mm
(0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) increments)
depending on the size of its big end bore.
It's then stamped with a code (1,2,3, or 4/1, II, 11I,0r
1111) indicating the range.
You may find any combination of 1,2,3, or 4/1, II, III,
or 1111 in any engine.
Half ofthe code is stamped on the bearing cap and
the other half is stamped on the rod. If the codes
are indecipherable because of an accumulation of
dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 56.0 mm (2.20 in.)
Half of number or bar
is stamped on bearing cap
and the other half is
stamped on rod.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations
3. Letters or bars have been stamped on the
crankshaft No.1 web as a code for the rod journal
sizes.
No.1 JOURNAL
(PULLEY END)
No.6 JOURNAL
(DRIVE PLATE END)
4. Use the connecting rod bore codes and journal
codes to select the appropriate rod bearing from
the table.
edge of the bearing
Aorl
B or II
Corlll
o or 1111
E or 11111
For 111111
Smaller
rod
Journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
I . ~ Smaller bearing (Thicker)
Pink Pink! Yellow Yellow!
Yellow Green
Pink! Yellow Yellow! Green
Yellow Green
Yellow Yellow! Green Green!
Green Brown
Yellow! Green Green! Brown
Green Brown
Green Green! Brown
Brown!
Brown Black
Green! Brown Brown! Black
Brown Black
NOTE: When using bearing halves
of different colors, it does not
matter which color is used in
the top or bottom.
7-11
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the engine assembly (see page 5-2).
3. Remove the CKP sensor (A) from the oil pump, then
remove the timing belt drive pulley (B).
4. Remove the oil pan.
5. Remove the engine block end cover.
7-12
6. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B) and oil
pump (C).
C
7. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon
around the top of any cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. Ifthe ridge is not removed, it may
damage the piston as it is pushed out.
BACK
8. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the
crank pin at 8DC for each cylinder. Remove the
piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod.
Take care not to damage the crank journal or
cylinder with the connecting rod.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
x
9. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/
bearings in order.
10. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
connecting rods and set them aside with their
respective caps.
11. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,
reinstall the cap on the rod.
12. To avoid mixup during reassembly, mark each
piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
13. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap
side bolts (8), then remove the bearing cap (C).
A
B
(cont'd)
7-13
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
(cont'd)
14. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the cylinder block,
being careful not to damage the journals.
A
15. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the
cylinder block in the proper order.
7-14
Crankshaft Inspection
Straightness
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see
page 7-12).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe
cleaners or a suitable brush. .
3. Check the keyway and threads.
4. Support the crankshaft with a V-blocks.
5. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure
the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft two
complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
that the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout:
BACK
Out-of-Round and Taper
1. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod
and main journal in two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round:
o
o
o
o
o
o
2. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:
Block and Piston Inspection
page 7-12).
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm
(0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
Piston Diameter:
(3.3848-3.3852 in.)
16.0 mm ~ ~ SKIRT DIAMETER
(0.63 in.)
(cont'd)
7-15
BACK
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
4. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at
three levels in each cylinder as shown.
If the measurements in any cylinder are beyond
the oversize bore service limit, replace the
cylinder block.
If the block is to be rebored, refer to Piston
Clearance Inspection after reboring (refer to step
5).
E
Cylinder Bore Size:
(3.3858-3.3864 in.)
Reboring Limit: 0.50 mm (0.02 in.)
7-16
Oversize
0.25: 86.250-86.265 mm (3.3957-3.3963 in.)
0.50: 86.500-86.515 mm (3.4055-3.4061 in.)
Bore Taper
Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
5. Check the top of the cylinder block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Cylinder Block Warpage:
BACK
6. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and piston diameter.
Piston-to-Block Clearance:
(0.0006-0.0016 in.)
SERVICE LIMIT
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Oversize Piston Diameter
I""""' 0.25: 86.225-86.235 mm (3.3947-3.3951 in.)
\. 0.50: 86.475-86.485 mm (3.4045-3.4049 in.)
Cylinder Honing
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-15).lfthe
cylinder block is to be reused, hone the cylinders
and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
cylinder bores must be honed.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:
Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone,
such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent.
Do not use stones that are worn or broken.
3- 60
xxx
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the
cylinder block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the
cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical
scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep
enough to catch your fingernail and does not run
the full length of the bore.
7-17
BACK
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly
1. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)
and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (8).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
A B
2. Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in
the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings
carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear
eye protection.
A
7-18
3. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to
about 158F (70C), then remove the piston pin.
BACK
r"
\
Inspection
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod
when they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter:
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance:
Standard (New): -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
(- 0.00020 to + 0.00004 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance:
(0.0002 - 0.0006 in.)
(cont'd)
7-19
BACK
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A).
A
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in
the connecting rod, and the piston pin with engine
oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158F (70C).
7-20
4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (8)
and connecting rod (C) with the embossed marks
(D) on the same side.
o
o
/ZA
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
BACK
Piston Ring Replacement
page 7-12).
2. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
cylinder bore 15-20 mm (0.6-0.8 in.) from the
bottom.
A
15-20mm
(0.6-0.8 in.)
3. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler
gauge:
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
the proper rings for your engine .
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter againstthe wear limits (see page 7-15).
If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap:
Top Ring
(0.008-0.014 in.)
2nd Ring
(0.016-0.022 in.)
Oil Ring
(0.008-0.028 in.)
4. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
B
\ -------=----
5. Clean all the ring grooves throughly with a
squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade if necessary. Top ring groove and 2nd ring
grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide, and the oil ring
groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire
brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring
grooves deeper with the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet .
(cont'd)
7-21
BACK
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1 B
and the 2nd ring (B) is marked 2B. The
manufacturing marks (e) must be facing upward.
Piston Ring Dimensions:
gf
A
7-22
c
/
A
B
Top Ring (Standard)
A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
2nd Ring (Standard)
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
ring-to-groove clearance:
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0014-0.0024 in.)
2nd Ring Clearance
(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005in.)
8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
at piston thrust surfaces.
TOP RING GAP
in line with piston pin hole.
OIL RING
GAP
OIL RING GAP
BACK
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
35mm
(1.38in.)
20mm
(0.79 in.)
A
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point
A and point B.
Point A - Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,
replace the connecting rod bolt.
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
Driver 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm I.D.
07V AD-P8AO 1 OA
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-8).
3. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-23).
4. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod
bearings.
5. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and
connecting rods.
6. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the block.
7. Oil the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust
washers (A) in the No.3 journal.
A
(cont'd)
7-23 BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
8. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with
the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the
engine.
0

0
Y-
"-
-.-.
E
10x80 mm
N
0
'"
0 0
c
E
10x80 mm
"""
0
E
10x60mm
9. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange,
then install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing
cap side bolts (E).
7-24
10. Set the crankshaft to BDC for the cylinder you are
working on.
11. Remove the connecting rod caps. Install the ring
compressor, and check that the bearing is securely
in place.
12. Install the piston with the arrow (A) facing the
timing belt side of the engine.
A
A
14. Stop after the ring compreJsor pops free, and
check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
BACK
15. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap,
then install the cap.
16. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. Torque the
bolts (B) to 20 Nm (2.0 kgfm, 14Ibfft).
~
A
17. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as
shown.
B
the bolt 90).
19. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the
bearing cap side bolts (B). Follow the numbered
sequence shown.
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for about 15 minutes.
A
11 x 1.5mm
76 Nm (7.8 kgfm,
56lbfftl
~
B
10x 1.25 mm
49 Nm (5.0 kgf.m,
36lbfftl
(cont'd)
7-25
BACK
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
20. The seal mating surface on the engine block end
cover should be dry.
21. Drive the crankshaft oil seal sequarely into the left
side cover.
07VAD-PSA010A
22. Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way
around with a feeler gauge.
Clearance: 0.5-0.8 mm (0.02-0.03 in.)
O.S-O.Smm
(0.02-0.03 in. I -+----1
7-26
23. Clean and dry the left side cover mating surfaces.
Apply a light coat of grease the crankshaft and to
the lip ofthe seal.
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of
the left side cover and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (8)
and the engine block end cover (C) on the cylinder
block.
have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
A
B
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, S.7Ibfftl
BACK
-1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump
-2 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
bolt holes.
-3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-ring (B).
pump.
check the seal for distortion.
6x 1.0mm
12Nm
/
6X1.0mm
12Nm
(1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfft)
j
11.2,\m. 8.7 'bfftl

'f? ,5--{
o
A
6x 1.0 mm
28. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen
(E).
29. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of
the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes,
then install the oil pan.
step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 Nm (1.2
kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft).
CD
(j) @
_--.JII;l---@
I
@ @
7-27 BACK
Engine Block
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal
Oil Seal Driver 07LAD-PT3010A
3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the
crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not
distorted.
07LAD-PT3010A
7-28
Driver 07749-0010000
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm 1.0.
07VAD-P8A010A
the lip ofthe seal.
3. Using the special tools, drive the crankshaft oil seal
into the engine block end cover until the driver
attachment bottoms against the crankshaft. Align
the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the
crankshaft.
07VAD-P8A010A
4. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-4
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-4
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-5
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-5
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-7
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No.
CD

8-2
Tool Number
07GAD-PH70201
07912-6110001
~
'
-"',
, '>,
\ '- - - , ~ ,
~ - - - ~ - '
CD
Description Otv
Oil Seal Driver 1
Oil Filter Wrench 1
BACK
OIL FILTER
OILPRESSUR
OIL PUMP
Overhaul pa
Inspect"' ge 8-7
lon, page 8-7
<;lauge Circuit
In the '98-02 A lagram, page 22-60
51'itch test, Service Manual
I pressure test, page 8-4
CONTROL ORIFICES
O-RING
. C)/
"
"-
OIL SCREEN
/ e
DRAIN BOLT/
WASHER
\
OIL PAN
8-3
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test
1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil
pressure switch (B).
B C
(C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity with the engine stopped. There should
be no continuity with the engine running.
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil
level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine
oil pressure.
8-4
Oil Pressure Test
Ifthe oil pressure warning light stays on with the
engine running, check the engine oil level. Ifthe oil
level is correct:
1. Connect a tachometer or a Honda PGM tester.
2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install
an oil pressure gauge (A).
3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176F (SOOe)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi)
minimum
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi)
minimum
5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect
these items:
Check the oil filter for clogging .
Check the oil pump (see page 8-7).
BACK
Engine Oil Replacement
NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be
replaced at every other oil change. Under severe
conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil
change.
Change interval:
(Normal conditions)
(Severe conditions).
1. Warm up the engine.
A
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
4.0 g (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) at oil change.
4.4 g (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt) at oil change
including filter.
5.0 g (5.3 US qt, 4.4 Imp qt) after engine overhaul.
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil Filter Wrench 07912-6110001
1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter
wrench.
2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block,
then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal.
Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.
B
(cont'd)
8-5
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the oil filter by hand.
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise with the special tool.
Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise.
Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16Ibfft)
8-6
5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside
of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten
the filter.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the block, and note which number is at the
bottom .
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 7
numbers from the one you noted. For example, if
number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is lightly
seated, tighten the filter until the number 1
comes around to the bottom.
Number when rubber
seal is seated.
Number when 1
rubber seal is
seated
Number after 8
tightening
2 3
1 2
Number after tightening.
4 5 6 7 8
3 4 5 6 7
6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the
specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
BACK
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
18 Nm (1.8 kgfm,13Ibfft)
1/8 in. BSPT (British standard pipe taper)
28 threads/inch. Use the
proper liquid sealant.
/

O-RING -
Replace.
6x 1.0 mm
'0.6 k.'; ... '"
PUMP COVER
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
OIL SEAL
Replace.

Apply liquid gasket
to the mating surface of
the cylinder block
when installing.
RELIEF VALVE
Valve must slide freely
in the housing bore.
Replace if it is scored.

--------6x1.0mm
SEALING BOLT
SPRING
39 Nm (4.0 kgf.m, 29 Ibf.ft)
(cont'd)
8-7
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (co nt' d)
Oil Seal Driver 07GAD-PH70201
Removal
1. Drain the engine oil.
2. Turn the crankshaft so that the No.1 piston is at
TDC (see page 6-22).
4. Remove the idler pulley.
5. Remove the CKP sensor, then remove the timing
belt drive pulley (see page 6-56).
6. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve and oil filter
assembly (see page 6-9).
7. Remove the oil pan and the oil screen (A).
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the oil pump
assembly (8).
9. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then
separate the housing and cover.
8-8
Inspection
10. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (8). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
(0.002-0.006 in.)
11. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between
the rotors (A) and pump housing (8). If the housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance
(0.001- 0.003 in.)
BACK
12. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump
assembly.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
(0.006-0.007 in.)
13. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for
scoring or other damage. Replace parts if
necessary.
14. Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump.
15. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the special tool
bottoms on the pump.
07GAD-PH70201
16. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing
screws.
Installation
17. Reassemble the oil pump.
18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
-1 Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003 evenly to the block mating surface
bolt holes.
-2 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-rings (B).
pump.
-4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check the seal for distortion.
A
12Nm
(1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
21. Install the oil screen (D).
(cont'd)
8-9
BACK
Engine Lubrication
22. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-
0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the
block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes,
then install the oil pan.
reapply liquid gasket after removing the old
residue.
step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 Nm (1.2
kgf.m, 8.7 Ibfft).
CD
_ . J I . I . ~
@ @
8-10
BACK
,-...
\
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ................. 9-2
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation .............. 9-3
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-4
BACK
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Use new a-rings and gaskets when reassembling.
Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
CHAMBER
Replace if it is cracked or
ifthe mating surfaces
is damaged.
9-2
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if it is cracked or
if the mating surfaces is
damaged.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibftt)
BOOSTP%LAE
/
Y
INTAKEAIR
TEMPERATURE

O-RING
e---Replace. 12 1 5
- x. mm
26Nm
SPACER
12.7 kgfm, 20 Ibftt)
('98-99 models)
THROTTLE
BODY
BACK
r Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
FRONT:
REAR:
REAR EXHAUST MANIFOLD
\
SELFLOCKING NUT
8x 1.25 mm
SELFLOCKING NUT
8x 1.25mm
31 Nm /3.2 kgfm,
23Ibfft)
Apply engine oil to the
nut threads.
Replace.
8x 1.25mm
22 Nm /2.2 kgfm,
T ~
~ G S m
Replace.
8x 1.25mm
31 Nm /3.2 kgfm, 23 Ibfftl
Apply engine oil to the
nut threads.
22 Nm /2.2 kgfm, 16lbfftl Replace.
9-3
BACK
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
HEAT SHIELD
6x1.0mm \
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibftt)
GASKETS
Replace.

(W
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10x 1.25 mm
54Nm
Replace.
EXHAUST PIPE B
9-4
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25 mm
33Nm
Replace.
EXHAUST PIPE A
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 mm
54Nm
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25 mm
33Nm
Replace.
SENSOR
HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
44Nm
:II'()'II'Ii /

THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC)
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
10x1.25mm
------GASKET
Replace.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC)
GASKET
Replace.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibftt)
BACK
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Coolant Temperature Gauge Testing ......................... 10-5
Sending Unit Testing ................................................... 10-7
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-7
RadiatorTest ................................................................. 10-8
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-8
Thermostat Test ........................................................... 10-9
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-9
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-10
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-10
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-12
Radiator and Fans Replacement ................................. 10-13
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-16
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting ........................ 10-17
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting ........ 10-19
Fan control Module Input Test .................................... 10-20
Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test ............................... 10-21
BACK
Cooling System
ATFCOOLER
HOSES
10-2
RADIATOR FAN SHROUD
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR
~ AIC CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY
RADIATOR FAN
Fan Motor Test, page 10-8
~
BACK
WATER BYPASS HOSES
HEATER HOSES
THERMOSTAT COVER
WATER PASSAGE
RADIATOR
LOWER RADIATOR HOSE
(cont'd)
10-3
BACK
Cooling System
WATER PUMP
10-4
'98-99 models:
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test, page 10-7
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH B
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR
O-RINGS
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A
'__ ___ /CONNECTINGPIPE
BACK
r'
, Coolant Temperature Gauge Test
I""
\
'98-99 models:
1. Check the No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then
disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) from the coolant
temperature gauge sending unit (B), and ground it
with a jumper wire.
A
B
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the
pointer of the coolant temperature gauge starts
moving toward the "H" mark. Turn the ignition
switch OFF before the pointer reaches "H" on the
gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge.
If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all,
check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the
wires are OK, replace the coolant temperature
gauge .
If the coolant temperature gauge works, test the
coolant temperature gauge sending unit.
'00-02 models:
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at
All
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) connector
terminal A 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
nVEL/GRN
11 12
3 4 5 6
/
8 9 10
/"1
112 113
14 15
1/
17 18 19 20 21
1/
23 24 1
25 26 Z1 28 29 30
/
32
'---
-'-
=
After 30 seconds or more, does the temperature
gauge needle move to the Hot side?
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck,
refer to '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-
5). Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace
the original PCM.
NO - Go to step 3 .
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM
connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
10-5
BACK
Cooling System
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont'd)
voltage between PCM connector terminal A 1 and
body ground.
Is there about 5V ?
assembly .
NO-Go to step 5.
voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and
body ground.
GAUGE CONNECTOR C (16P)
assembly .
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A 1 and gauge connector
terminal C2 .
10-6
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes Past the Hot
Mark
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM
connector A (32P).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (1I).and watch the
coolant temperature gauge.
Does the temperature gauge needle move at al/ ?
(you may have to watch it for about 30 seconds.)
YES - Go to step 3.
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer
to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
PCM .
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again, and watch the coolant temperature gauge.
Does the temperature gauge needle immediately
go past the Hot mark?
assembly .
NO-The temperature gauge needle went past the
Hot mark after about 30 seconds or more.Go to
step 4.
gauge assembly connector C (16P).
5. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal aaA 1 and gauge assembly connector
terminal C2.
YES- Replace short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A 1 and gauge connector
terminal C2 .
NO- Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly .
BACK
Sending Unit Test
'98-99 models:
1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) from the coolant
temperature gauge sending unit (8).
A
2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the change in
resistance between the positive terminal (C) and
the engine (ground) with the engine cold and with
the engine at operating temperature.
Temperature 133F (56C) 185F (85C)-
212F (100C)
Resistance ( Q ) 137 46-30
3. If the obtained readings are substantially different
from the specifications above, replace the sending
unit.
Radiator Cap Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with
engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester
(8) (commercially available).
B
2. Apply a pressure of93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25
kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
10-7
BACK
Cooling System
Radiator Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach the pressure tester (A) (commercially
available) to the radiator and apply a pressure of
93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm', 14-18 psi).
~
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
pressure.
4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in
the engine oil.
10-8
Fan Motor Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan
motor (A) and condenser fan motor (8).
LOCK
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the
8 terminal, and ground to the A terminal.
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,
replace it.
BACK
Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (8) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
~ ~ B
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a
thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is
fully open.
STANDARD THERMOSTAT
Lift height:
Starts opening:
'98-00 models:
'01 model:
Fully open:
'98-00 models:
'01 model:
above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
169-176F (76-80C)
163-171F (73-77C)
194F (90C)
190F (88C)
Water Pump Inspection
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise.
Check that it turns freely.
3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of
"weeping" from the bleed holes (A) is normal.
A
A
10-9
BACK
Cooling System
Water Pump Replacement
2. Remove the timing belt tensioner.
3. Remove the water pump (A) by removing 5 bolts.
A "
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
4. Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and
mating surface on the cylinder block.
5. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (8) in the
6. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
10-10
Coolant Replacement
1. Set the heater temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool to the touch.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
A
4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (8)
located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen
the drain bolt.
5. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain
bolt.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
BACK
7. Remove, drain, and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the
tank to the MAX mark with Honda All Season
8. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Pre-
mixing is not required.
Engine Coolant Refill Capacity
[including the reservoir capacity of
(0.6 (0.6 US qt, 0.5 Imp qtllJ
5.6 (5.9 US qt, 4.9 Imp qt)
9. Install the radiator cap loosely.
10. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda All Season.
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if needed.
12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
again and check for leaks.
10-11
BACK
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
10-12
THERMOSTAT
Install with pin up.
PIN
RUBBER SEAL
Replace.
6x 1.0mm
THERMOSTAT COVER
BACK
Radiator and Fans Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses.
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
LOWER RADIATOR HOSE

6x1.0mm
7 Nm (0.7 kgfm,
5Ibfft)
RADIATOR
FAN SHROUD
6x 1.0 mm
RADIATOR CAP
/

"-6x 1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm,

UPPER BRACKET
AND CUSHION

__ -O-RING
------------ DRAIN PLUG
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)

4.4Nm (0.45kgfm,
3.3Ibfft)
AIC CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBL V
FAN CONNECTORS
3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.
4. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.
5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from radiator.
6. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.
7. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.
8. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air.
10-13
BACK
Fan Controls
RADIATOR FAN
SWITCHB
Test, page 10-21
10-14
CONDENSER FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-52
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-52
/
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE
Inputtest, page 10-20
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A
Test, page 10-21
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
Motor Test, page 10-8
BACK
r
\ Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Before performing any troubleshooting procedures check:
Fuses
Grounds
Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
SYMPTOM PROCEDURE
Radiator fan does not run at all. Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-17)
Both fans (radiator and condenser) do not run for Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting (see
engine cooling, but they do run with the AlC on. page 10-19)
Both fans do not run with AlC on. Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit
Troubleshooting, refer to '98-02 Accord Service Manual,
(see page 21-14)
10-15
BACK
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
SA TTERY
+
RADIATOR
FAN MOTOR
10-16
No.41 (100A)
NO.57 (20A)
r-<Y"
~ ~
'I
BLUlBlK
BlK
BlK
1
G201
No.42 (SOA)
NO.58 (20A)
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
M ~
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
BlUIYEl GRN
.... ---GRN
GRN
BlK BlK
I
BlK
1
G101
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH A
[
Closed: Above]
199F (93C)
IGNITION SWITCH
WHT
IG2HOTIn
YEL
YEl BlKlYEl
No.3 No.6
(7.5A) (15A)
BlKlYEl
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
h
BlKlYEl BlKlYEl
7
BlK
I
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH B
[
Closed: Above ]
225F (107C)
4
G401
AIR
CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
~
I
BACK
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the fuse and recheck .
fuse/relay box, and test it. Refer to the '98-02
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the radiator fan relay .
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
2
3 4
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 4.
radiator fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
4PSOCKET
1
n
2
3 4
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the radiatorfan connector.
the radiator fan relay 4P socket and the No.2
terminal of the radiator fan connector.
Terminal side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
4PSOCKET
RADIATOR FAN
CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 8.
BLU/BLK
NO- Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan .
(cont'd)
10-17
BACK
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
the radiator fan connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN CONNECTOR
=
YES- Replace the radiator fan motor .
NO-Check for an open in the BlK wire between
the radiator fan connector and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for a poor ground at G201 .
9. Disconnect the jumper wire, and turn the ignition
switch on (II).
10. Measure the voltage between No.3 terminal of the
radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
=
2
3 4
Terminal side of
female terminals
YES- Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
NO-Go to step 11.
10-18
. the radiator fan control module and body ground.
=
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL
MODULE 8P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Repair open in the VEL wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan
control module .
NO- Perform the radiator fan control module input
tests (see page 10-20) .
BACK
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A connector.
3. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal on
the radiator fan switch connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
1-----iGRN
Wire side of
female terminals
YES - Go to step 4.
=
NO-Repair open in the GRN wire between the
radiator fan switch A and under-hood fuse/relay
box .
continuity between the No.1 terminal on the
radiator fan switch A connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
=
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Check for an open in the BlK wire between
the radiator fan switch A connector and body
ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at
G101 .
5. Check the cooling system.
Is the cooling system OK?
YES- Replace the radiator fan switch A .
NO-Repair the cooling system .
10-19 BACK
Fan Controls
Fan Control Module Input Test
Perform the following tests with the radiator fan control module 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II)
and the AlC switch OFF.
If you find the cause of a problem, correct it before you continue.
Wire color Test condition
BLK Check for voltage to body
~ r o u n d
WHT Check for battery voltage to
body ground.
BLK/YEL' Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (II)
BLK/YEL2 Check battery voltage to
switch-ON (II)
VEL/WHT Check battery voltage to
switch-ON (II)
VEL Check battery voltage to
switch-ON (III)
GRN Connect body ground:
Ignition switch-ON (II)
WHT/GRN Check for voltage: Engine
coolant temperature below
225F (107C)
10-20
BLK/VEL' VEL/WHT
Desired result
There should be less than 1V.
There should be battery
voltage.
Radiator fan and condenser
fan should come on.
There should be approx. 11 V.
BLK
GRN
BLK/VEL'
Terminal side of
male terminals
Possible cause if desired result is not obtained
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
An open in the wire
Blown No.6 (15 A) fuse in the
under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Faulty radiator fan control module
An open in the wire
Faulty radiator fan relay or
condenser fan relay
An open in the wire
Faulty radiator fan switch B
Faulty radiator fan control module
BACK
Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test
NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing
the radiatorfan switch (see page 10-10).
1. Remove radiator fan switch A from the water
passage and radiator fan switch B from the cylinder
head (see page 10-2).
2. Suspend each radiator fan switch (A) in a container
of coolant as shown.
C
o
A
WATER
3. Heat the coolant and check the temperature with a
thermometer (B). Do not let the thermometer touch
the bottom of the hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C)
and B terminal (D) according to the table.
1\
Terminal
\ A
B
Operation Temperature
ON
196-203F
0--0
(91-95C)
SWITCH
A
5-15F (3-S0C) lower
when it goes on
ON
217-232F
0--0
(103-111C)
SWITCH
B
5-23 (3-13) lower
when it goes on
10-21 BACK
BACK
Fuel and Emissions
Special Tools .................................................................... 11-2
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............................................ 11-3
Symptom Troubleshooting Index .................................. 11-6
System Descriptions ........................................................ 11-7
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting ...................................................... 11-52
Injector Replacement ....................................................... 11-81
Primary H02S Replacement ........................................... 11-85
Secondary H02S Replacement ...................................... 11-85
Idle Control System
Idle Speed Adjustment .................................................... 11-87
Fuel Supply System
II"""""
Fuel Pressure Relieving ................................................... 11-88
Fuel Pressure Test ............................................................ 11-90
Fuel Lines Inspection ....................................................... 11-92
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ........................... 11-93
Fuel Gauge Test ............................................................... 11-95
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test ............................................................ 11-97
Air Cleaner Element Replacement .................................. 11-99
Throttle Cable Adjustment .............................................. 11-100
Throttle Body Removal/Installation ................................ 11-101
Throttle Body Assembly/Reassembly ............................ 11-102
Intake Air Bypass Control Valve Test ............................. 11-103
PCVSystem
PCV Valve Inspection and Test ....................................... 11-104
EVAPSystem
Refer to the 1998-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN 61S8400, for the items not shown in this section.
Outline of Accord V6 Model Change
I J30A 1 engine has been added.
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
07VAJ-0040100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment 1
07406-004000A Fuel Pressure GauQe 1
CD
11-2
BACK
OTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Temporary DTe Detection Item Note
(MIL indication*)
P0107 (3)
--
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Low Voltage Manual (see page 11-47)
P0108 (3)
--
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
High Voltage Manual (see page 11-48)
P0112(10)
--
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Circuit Low Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Voltage Manual (see page 11-50)
P0113 (10)
--
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Circuit High Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P0116 (86) P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Range/Performance Problem Manual (see page 11-52)
P0117 (6)
--
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Circuit Low Voltage Manual (see page 11-52)
P0118 (6)
--
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Circuit High Voltage Manual (see page 11-53)
P0122 (7)
--
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-52)
Voltage
P0123 (7)
--
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P0128 (87)*'
--
Thermostat Range/Performance Problem (see page 11-55)
P0131 (1)
--
Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary (see page 11-56)
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage
P0132 (1)
--
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage
P0133 (61) P0133 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary (see page 11-58)
P0135 (41)
--
H02S) (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
P0138 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (see page 11-60)
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) High Voltage
P0141 (65)
--
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary (see page 11-61)
H02S) (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Lean Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-69)
P0172 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Rich Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P0300 and P1399 Random Misfire (see page 11-64)
some of
P0301 (71)
P0302(72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
*: These DTCs are rndlcated by a blrnkrng Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service slgnallrne IS
*4: '02 model
(cont'd)
11-3
BACK
.Fuel and Emissions Systems
OTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC Temporary DTe Detection Item Note
(MIL indication*)
P0301 (71) P1339 No.1 Cylinder Misfire *1: (see page 11-65)
*2: (see page 11-69)
P0302(72) P1339 No.2 Cylinder Misfire * 1: (see page 11-65)
*2: (see page 11-69)
*2: (see page 11-69)
*2: (see page 11-69)
*2: (see page 11-69)
*2: (see page 11-69)
P0335 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No (see page 11-74)
Signal
P0336 (4)
--
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (see page 11-74)
Intermittent Interruption
P0401 (80) P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Insufficient Flow Manual (see page 11-138)
P0420(67) P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Threshold Manual (see page 11-137)
P0451 (91)*' P0451 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/ Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Performance Problem Manual (see page 11-145)
P0452 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P0453 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P0505 (14) P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P0560 (34) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Back Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
up Circuit Low Voltage Manual (see page 11-76)
P0700** (70)
--
Automatic Transaxle System Refer to the Automatic
P0715** (70) Malfunction Transmission DTC Troubleshooting
P0720** (70) Index
P0730** (70)
P0740** (70)
P0753** (70)
P0758** (70)
P0763** (70)
P0780** (70)
P1106 (13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARD) Sensor Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Range/Performance Problem Manual (see page 11-77)
P1107 (13)
--
Barometric Pressure (BARD) Sensor Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Circuit Low Input Manual (see page 11-77)
P1108 (13)
--
Barometric Pressure (BARD) Sensor Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Circuit High Input Manual (see page 11-77)
P1121 (7) P1121 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Lower (see page 11-76)
Than Expected
*: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line IS
*1: '98-99 models
*2: '00-02 models
11-4
BACK
DTe Temporary DTe Detection Item Page
(Mil indication*)
P1122 (7) P1122 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher (see page 11-76)
Than Expected
P1128 (5) P1128 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Sensor Lower Than Expected Manual (see page 11-49)
P1129 (5) P1129 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Sensor Higher Than Expected Manual (see page 11-49)
P1259 (22) -- VTEC System Malfunction (see page 6-6)
P1297 (20)
--
Electrical Load Detector (ELO) Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P1298 (20)
--
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
P1361 (8) -- Top Dead Center (TOC) 1 Sensor (see page 11-77)
P1362 (8)
--
Top Dead Center Sensor (TOC) 1 No (see page 11-77)
Signal
P1366 (58) -- Top Dead Center Sensor (TOC) 2 (see page 11-77)
P1367 (58) -- Top Dead Center Sensor (TOC) 2 No (see page 11-77)
Signal
P1456 (90) P1456 (90) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
System Leakage (Fuel Tank System) Manual (see page 11-149)
P1457 (90) P1457 (90) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
System Leakage (EVAP Canister Manual (see page 11-152)
System)
P1491 (12) P1491 (12) Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Insufficient Lift Manual (see page 11-138)
P1498 (12)
--
Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage Manual (see page 11-142)
P1519 (14) -- Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve Circuit Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Malfunction Manual (see page 11-102)
P1607 (-) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Internal Circuit Malfunction Manual (see page 11-90)
P1676 (35)*3
--
FPTOR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-79)
P1678 (35)*3
--
FPTOR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-79)
P1705** (70)
--
Automatic Transaxle System Refer to the Automatic
P1706** (70) P1706 Malfunction Transmission OTC Troubleshooting
P1738** (70) Index
P1739** (70)
P1750** (70)
P1751 ** (70)
P1753** (70)
P1768** (70)
P1773** (70)
*: These OTCs are indicated by a blinking Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line IS
**: The 04 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
*3: '01-02 models
11-5
BACK
These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and cause the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) to come on. If the MIL is
reported on, check for DTCs. If the vehicle has one of these symptoms, do the diagnostic procedure for it, in the sequence listed, until you find
the cause.
SvmDtom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engine will not start 1. Testthe battery (see page 22-30). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Testthe starter (see page 4-7). No ignition spark
3. Test the fuel pump, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see Intake air leaks
page 11-117). Locked up engine
4. Test the ignition wires for '98-99 models (see page 4-22). Slippedl
5. Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or for '00-02 broken timing belt
models (see page 4-23). Contaminated fuel
6. Check the ignition control module (lCM) inputs for '98-99 models
(see page 4-21).
..
7 . Troubleshoot the PGM-FI main relay circuit, refer to the '98-02
Engine will not start (MIL comes on Troubleshoot the MIL circuit, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
and stays on, or never comes on at all, (see page 11-91).
no DTCsset)
Engine will not start (immobilizer Troubleshoot the immobilizer system, refer to the '98-02 Accord
indicator light comes on) Service Manual (see page 22-206).
Hard starting 1. Test the battery (see page 22-30). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-90). Intake air leaks
3. Test the ignition wires for '98-99 models (see page 4-22). Contaminated fuel
4. Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or for '00-02
models (see page 4-23).
5. Check the ignition control module (lCM) input for '98-99 models
(see oaoe 4-21 ).
Cold fast idle too low Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-87).
(MIL works OK no DTCs set)
Cold fast idle too high 1. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-87).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-100).
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-97).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-87). Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. InspeCt/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-100).
3. Insoect and test the throttle bodv (see oaoe 11-97).
Low power 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-90). Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-97).
3. Insoect/adiust the throttle cable (see paoe 11-100).
Engine stalls 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-90). Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the ignition wires for '98-99 models (see page 4-22). Faulty harness and
3. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-87). sensor connectors
4. Troubleshoot the brake switch signal circuit.
Difficult to refuel 1. Test the fuel tank vapor control valve, refer to the '98-02 Accord
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) Service Manual (see page 11-160).
2. Inspect the fuel tank signal tube between the fuel pipe and the fuel
tank vapor control valve.
3. Inspect the fuel tank vapor vent tube between the EVAP control
canister and the fuel tank vapor control valve.
4. Check the EVAP canister, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-138).
Fuel overflows during refueling Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve, refer to the '98-02 Accord
(No DTCs set) Service Manual (see page 11-162).
11-6
BACK
System Descriptions
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed
value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the system in
order to permit minimal driving.
SeN-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable memory. When the ignition is first turned on, the PCM
supplies ground to the MIL for 2 seconds ('98-01 models) or 15 to 20 seconds ('02 models) to check the MIL bulb condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method
To prevent false indications, the "two driving cycle detection method" is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the PCM stores it in its memory. When the same abnormality recurs after the ignition
switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the PCM turns on the MIL.
(cont'd)
11-7
BACK
PCM Data
You can retrieve data from the PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below conform to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester
also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE to help you find the causes of intermittent problems.
NOTE:
The "operating values" listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual
vehicle .
Unless noted otherwise, "at idle speed" means idling with the engine completely warmed up, transmission in Park
or neutral, and the AlC and all accessories turned off.
Diagnostic Ifthe PCM detects a problem, it will store it as a If no problem is detected, YES
Trouble Code code consisting of one letter and four numbers. there is no output.
(DTC) Depending on the problem, an SAE-defined code
(POxxx) or a Honda-defined code (P1xxx) will be
output to the tester.
Engine Speed The PCM computes engine speed from the signals Nearly the same as YES
sent from the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. tachometer indication
This data is used for determining the time and At idle speed: 68050
amount of fuel injection. rpm
Vehicle Speed The PCM converts pulse signals from the Nearly the same as YES
countershaft speed sensor into speed data. speedometer indication
Manifold The absolute pressure caused in the intake With engine stopped: YES
Absolute manifold by engine load and speed. Nearly the same as
Pressure (MAP) atmospheric pressure.
At idle speed: 20-34 kPa
(150-260 mmHg, 6-10
in.Hg), 0.9 - 1.0 V
Engine Coolant The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into With cold engine: Same YES
Temperature voltage, and sends a voltage signal to the PCM. as ambient temperature
(ECT) The sensor is a thermistor whose internal resistance and IAT
changes with coolant temperature. The PCM uses With engine warmed up:
the voltage signals from the ECT sensor to about 176 - 212F (80-
determine the amount of iniected fuel. 100C), 0.9 - 1.0 V
Primary Heated The H02S detects the oxygen content in the 0.0-1.25 V NO
Oxygen Sensor exhaust gas and sends voltage signals to the PCM. At idle speed:
(Primary H02S) Based on these signals, the PCM controls the air/ about 0.1-0.9 V
(Sensor 1), fuel ratio. When the oxygen content is high (that is,
Secondary when the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric
Heated Oxygen ratio), the voltage signal is lower. When the oxygen
Sensor content is low (that is, when the ratio is richer than
(Secondary H02 the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is
S) (Sensor 2) higher.
11-8
BACK
Data Description Operating Valve Freeze Data
Fuel System Fuel system status is indicated as "open" or At idle speed: closed YES
"closed". Closed: Based on the H02S output, the
PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the
Open: ignoring H02S output, the PCM refers to
signals from the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature
(fAT), Barometic Pressure (BARO), and Engine
Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the
Short Term The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for 0.73-1.47 YES
Fuel Trim correcting the amount of injected fuel when Fuel
System Status is "closed". When the ratio is leaner
than the stoichiometric ratio, the PCM increases
short term fuel trim gradually, and the amount of
injected fuel increases. The air/fuel ratio gradually
gets richer, causing a lower oxygen content in the
exhaust gas. Consequently, the short term fuel trim
is lowered, and the PCM reduces the amount of
injected fuel. This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio
close to the stoichiometric ratio when in closed
loop status.
long Term long term fuel trim is computed from short term 0.81-1.19 YES
Fuel Trim fuel trim and indicates changes occuring in the fuel
supply system over a long period. If long term fuel
trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of injected fuel
must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the
amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
Intake Air The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into With cold engine: Same YES
Temperature voltage and signals the PCM. When intake air as ambient temperature
((AT) temperature is low, the internal resistance of the and ECT
sensor increases, and the voltaQe siQnal is hiRher.
Throttle Based on the accelerator pedal position, the At idle speed: YES
Position opening angle ofthe throttle valve is indicated. approx.10%
Ignition Ignition timing is the ignition advance angle set by At idle speed: 10
o
2 NO
Timing the PCM. The PCM matches ignition timing to the BTDC with the SCS
driving conditions. service signal jumped
with the Honda PGM
Tester
Calculated ClV is the engine load calculated from the MAP At idle speed: YES
Load Value data. 16-33%
(ClV) At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
17-25%
(cont'd)
11-9
BACK
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
PGM-FI MAIN RElAY
1= ... 1=

IGNmON SWITCH

Ifdil;
lflL
>---

-.<2
B IG1
PUMP:
ST
@
STARTER
CD
,..--. CUT

j@
RELAY
:
@
B1IGP1 PGl B2 ;>-
@) B91GP2 PG2810
rru
1 '--- A24STS IMOFLRA15
@
821 VBU

1
B20 LG1
B22LG2
+ INJ1 B11
- -------_. - -----
C20TOC1P INJ2 B5
TOC
SENSOR 1
C21 TOC1M INJ3 B15
TOC
---_._------ - -----
C29T0C2P INJ4B4
SENSOR 2
C30TOC2M INJ5 B3
- ----- -------------
C8CKPP INJ& B&
CKP
SENSOR
C9CKPM
IACV B23
ToELD A30ELD
To SPEEDOMETER A9VSSOUT
MILA18
r.::
100
DATA
A21 KoUNE ACCA17
UNK
CONNECTOR FANCA20

ACSA27
C
....
A10SCS ALTCC2
ALTFCS
USES:
BACK UP, ACC (40A)*A IMOLMPA12
STOP (20A)*A
ACGS (15A) * A
BATTERY (100A) *A
IG MAIN (50A)*A
02. o'MTRTW A1
No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A)*8
No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A) * 8
No.6 ECU (PCM)

CRUISE CONTROL (15A)*8
<I> No.11 IG COIL (15A) * 8
4l No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A) * 8
II]) No.13 CLOCK BACKUP (7.5A)*C
* A : In the under-hood fuse/relay box
* 8 : In the driver'a under-ciaah fuse/relay box
*C: in the passenger's under-ciash fuse/relay box
11-10
r;
>---j-

INJECTORS
No.1
>-----<>- No.2
E 0
r----<> No.3
No.4
r---<>
No.5
r---<>
No.6
r--

f' ..., lAC VALVE

ToAIC CLUTCH RELAY
To RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
To AIC SWITCH

I--
>---
ALT

,
INDICATOR
UGHT
To ECTGAUGE
*1 '98-99 models
*2 '00 model
*3 '01-02 models
BACK
T
S
P
ENSOR
GR E
V
P
S
r--
ALVE
osmON
ENSOR
E
V
GR
ALVE

P FT
S ENSOR
AP M
S ENSOR
UMATE ToC
C
U
DNTRDL
NIT
Iii
B
IMARY PR
HO 2S (SENSOR 1)
II
.1#. 'j,
IF/'
CONDARY SE
HO 2S (SENSOR 2)
I

I

E
-----
...
----------
I
n
-.
IA!.SENSDR
-.
PSP;;;;'CH

BRAKE PEDAL
PosmON

VTEC PRESSURE

'-7

- ...... _- _ .. _-----

------ --------

C28VCC2 'ICM B13
C27TPS
C18SG2
CSEGRL NEPA19
B7EEGR CRSA5
A29PTANK PCSA6
C19VCCl MCSA2
C17MAP VBSDLD5
C7SGl
2WBSA3
C2BECT VSVA4
VTSB12
C25IAT
A2BPSPSW
A32BKSW .... 3IGPLS1C4
t2,'3IGPLS2 C14
.2 3IGPLS3 C3
C10VTM
02, '3IGPLS4 C13
'2,'3 IGPLS5 C12
'2, '3IGPLS& C23
C1 P02SHTC
C1&PH02S
A8S02SHTC
BARO
A23SH02S SENSOR
(BulK Into
tho PCM)

ICM
! TO GAUGE
ASSEMBLY,
ABS/TCS
CONTROLUNI
.3
T
1 -D TEST TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
To CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
ijI
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
ENGINE /,Ir,UNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
'W
EVAP BlI SS SOLENOID VALVE
j!!TER VENT SHUT VALVE
VTECSOL
. v
1
F
To <I
..u ICM .. "PARK
PLUG
No.lIGNmON COIL .2,.3
To j
n ICM
>--
No. 21GNmON COIL ...
3
-
To
II ICM
No.3 IGNITION COIL .2, .3
To
U-t ICM
No.4 IGNmON COIL .2, .3
.-----. To
il ICM
No. SIGNmON COIL .2, .3
To
U-t ICM
No. 61GNmON COIL .2, .3

(cont'd)
11-11 BACK
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
11-12
PRESSURE SWITCH
TolMMOBIUZER
UNIT A251MOCD pP2SW B14, oi"3 -U
Ai3,A:iIMOEN 1
To MULTIPLEX 3RD gCH PRESSURE SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT A281LU OP3SW B24 ""t' "I I
(DRIVER'S) ......,
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH crCC)
VALVE ASSEMBLY
LCDl
A
SHAD7
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
OJ
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
I
II If
PCM A (32P)
PCM C (31P)
A14D41ND
D13ATPNP
D8ATPR
D9ATPD4
D8ATPD3
D14ATP2
D15ATPl
SHBD2
SHCD3
LSA+B17
LSA B8
LSB+B25
LSB B18
NMD11
NMSGD12
NCD10
NCSGD18
.3 ATSFTP A11
.3VREFA7
.3 THLOUT A31
.3PFINHA13
.3FPTDRA22
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
'UO
SHIFT...9!.ENOID (SS) VALVE ASSEMBLY B
SHI..;.jtLENOID (SS) VALVE ASSEMBLY C
'00

'W I
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CAmCLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY A
I
CAm CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY B
C
PCM B (25P)
PCM D (16P)
ABSfTCS
CONTROL
UNIT3
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)
tk
3 4
l!MlS VSV
12 13 14
litO IMO

D6
LMP !NO FLR
25

IMe
CD
Terminal Wire color
number
1*" *' VEL/GRN
2 GRN/WHT
3 BLU
4 LTGRN/
WHT
5 BLU/GRN
6 RED/VEL
7*' ORN/GRN
8 BLK/WHT
9 BLU/WHT
10 BRN
11*' LTGRN
12 PNK
13*" *' BLU
14 GRN/BLK
15 GRN/VEL
16*' BLU
17 RED
.'
*1. 98-99 models
*2: '00 model
*3: '01-02 models
Terminal name
MTRlW
MCS (ENGINE MOUNT
2WBS (EVAP BVPASS
SOLENOID VALVE)
VSV (EVAP CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE)
CRS (CRUISE CONTROL
SIGNAL)
PCS (EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE)
VREF (REFERRENCE
VOLTAGE)
S02SHTC(SECONDARV
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
HEATER CONTROL)
VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL]
SCS (SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL)
ATSFTP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
IMOLMP (lMMOBLlZER
INDICATOR LIGHT)
IMOEN (lMMOBILZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
D41ND (04 INDICATOR)
IMO FLR (IMMOBILIZER
FUEL PUMP RELAV)
IMOEN (IMMOBILIZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
ACC (AiC CLUTCH RELA V)
5 6 7
8 9
10 11
CRS PCS VREF
S02S VSS
scs AlSFTP
HTC ClJT
16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
IMO
EN
ICC MIL NEP FANC IH.i1IE FPItfI SH02S STS
27 28 29 30

32
/>CS IW PTANK ELD BKSW
Description Signal
Sends engine coolant With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
temDerature sianal.
Drives engine mount At idle: OV
control solenoid valve. Above idle: battery voltaae
Drives EVAP bypass With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
solenoid valve.
Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
shut valve.
Detects cruise control signal. With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
Drives EVAP canister purge With engine running, engine coolant, below 147
G
F (64
valve. GC): battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant, above 147
G
F (64
GC): duty controlled
Provides reference voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
to ABSrrCS control unit. With ianition switch OFF: 0 V
Drives secondary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
oxygen sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty controlled
Sends vehicle speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
signal.
Detects service check With the service check signal shorted with the Honda
connector signal (the signal PGM Tester: 0 V
causing a DTC indication). With the service check signal opened: about 5 V or
battery voltage
Sends transmission gear With engine running in park position: about 4 V
switch signal. With the service check signal opened: about 5 V or
battery voltage
Drives immobilizer With immobilizer indicator light turned ON: 0 V
indicator light. With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery voltage
sianal.
Drives 04 indicator light. With 04 indicator light turned ON: 0 V
With 04 indicator liaht turned OFF: battery voltaae
Drives fuel pump relay. o V for two seconds after turning ignition switch ON
(II) then battery voltage
signal.
Drives AlC clutch relay. With compressor ON: 0 V
With compressor OFF: battery voltage
(cont'd)
11-13
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)

2 3 4
MCS VSV
12 13 14
1110
16
IMO IMO 05 IMO
LMP EWfINH INO FLR EN
25
26 27
IMO
CD
PSP5W M:;S
Terminal Wire color
number
18 GRN/ORN
19 BLU
20 GRN
21 GRY
22*' GRN/RED
23 WHT/RED
24 BLU!ORN
25 RED
26 GRN
27 BLU/RED
28 WHT/RED
29 LTGRN
30 GRN/RED
31*' YEL/GRN
32 WHT/BLK
,
*1: 98-99 models
*2: '00 model
*3: '01-02 models
11-14
Terminal name
MIL (MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT)
NEP (ENGINE SPEED PULSE)
FANC (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
K-LiNE
FPTDR (FRAME TO
POWERTRAIN TORQUE
DOWN REQUEST)
SH02S (SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR,
SENSOR 2)
STS (STARTER SWITCH
SIGNAL)
IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER CODE)
PSPSW (PIS PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
ACS (NC SWITCH SIGNAL)
ILU (INTERLOCK CONTROL
UNIT)
PTANK (FUEL TANK
PRESSURE SENSOR)
ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR)
THLOUT (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR OUTPUT
SIGNAL)
BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH)
5 6 7
8 9
CRS PCS VREF
S02S VSS
HTC OUT
17 18 19 20 21 22
ACC MIL NEP FANC K-UNE FPTDR
28 29 30

ILU PTANK ELO
Description
Drives MIL.
OutPuts enoine speed pulse.
Drives radiator fan relay.
Sends and receives scan
tool
Detects engine retard
request signal.
Detects secondary heated
oxygen sensor (sensor 2)
sional.
Detects starter switch signal.
Detects immobilizer sional.
Detects PSP switch signal.
Detects AlC switch signal.
Sends Interlock control
sional.
Detects FTP sensor signal.
Detects ELD signal.
Sends TP sensor signal.
Detects brake pedal
position switch sional.
10 11
scs AlSFTP
23 24
SH02S STS
32
BKSW
Signal
With MIL turned ON: 0 V
With MIL turned OFF: battery voltage
With enoine runnino: pulses
With radiator fan running: 0 V
With radiator fan stopped: batterv voltaoe
With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
With TCS operating: about 5 V
With TCS not operating: about 2.5 V
With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
With throttle quicklv closed: below 0.4 V
With starter switch ON (II): battery voltage
With starter switch OFF: 0 V
At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position: 0 V
At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery
voltage
With AlC switch ON: 0 V
With AlC switch OFF: about 5V
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap:
opened: about 2.5 V
With parking lights turned on at idle: about 2.5-
3.5V
With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.5-
2.5V
With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
With throttle fully closed: about 0.5 V
With brake pedal released: 0 V
With brake pedal pressed: batterv voltaoe
BACK
r
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P)
1 2
IGP1 PG1
9 10
IGP2 PG2
/
20
LG1
Terminal Wire color
number
1 VEL/BlK
2 BlK
3 BlK/RED
4 VEL
5 RED
6 WHT/BlU
7 PNK
8 WHT
9 VEL/BlK
10 BlK
11 BRN
12 GRN/YEl
13*' VEL/GRN
14*' BLU/BlK
1 4 ~ *' BLU/WHT
15 BlU
17 RED
18 GRN
20 BRN/BlK
21 WHT/yEl
22 BlK*'
BRN/BlK*'
23 BlK/BlU
24 BlU/WHT
25 ORN
* .' 1. 98-99 models
*2: '00 model
*3: '01-02 models
Terminal name
IGP1 (POWER SOURCE)
PG1 (POWER GROUND)
INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR)
E-EGR
lSA - (AfT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A - SIDE)
IGP2 (POWER SOURCE)
PG2 (POWER GROUND)
VTS (VTEC SOLENOID
VALVE)
ICM (IGNITION CONTROL
MODULE)
OP2SW (2ND Oil PRESSURE
SWITCH)
ATPNP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
lSA + (AfT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A + SIDE)
lSB (AfT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B - SIDE)
lG1 (lOGIC GROUND)
VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP)
lG2 (lOGIC GROUND)
IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL
VALVE)
OP3SW (3RD Oil PRESSURE
SWITCH)
lSB + (AfT CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B + SIDE)
3 4 5 6 7 8
INJ5 INJ4 INJ2 INJ6 E-EGR LSA-
11 12 13
~
15
/
17 18
INJ1 VTS leM
ATPN ....
INJ3 LSA+ LSB-
21 22 23
24
25
OP
VBU LG2 lACY
39N
LSB+
Description Signal
Power source for the PCM With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit. With the ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
Ground for the PCM circuit. less than 1.0 V at all times
Drives No.5 injector. With engine running: pulses
Drives EGR valve. With EGR operating: duty controlled
With EGR not operatinQ: about 0 V
AfT clutch pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): pulses
supplynegative terminal
Power source for the PCM With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit. With the ignition switch OFF: 0 V
Drives No.1 iniector. With engine running: pulses
Drives VTEC solenoid valve. With engine at low rpm: 0 V
With engine at high rpm: battery voltage
Sends ignition pulse. With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
With engine running: about 10 V (depending on
engine speed)
Detects 2nd oil pressure With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
switch.
Detects transmission range In Park or Neutral: 0 V
switch signal. In anv other position: battery voltaae
Drives No.3 iniector. With enaine runninQ: pulses
supply positive terminal
supply negative terminal
Power source for the PCM Battery voltage at all times
circuit.
Power source for the DTC
memory.
Drives lAC valve. With engine running: pulses
Detects 3rd oil pressure With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
switch.
supply positive terminal
(cont'd)
11-15
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C (31P)
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P02S
HTC
ALTC IG'lS3 1GI'l.S1 ALTF EGRL 931 CKPP CKPM VTM
V
12 13
d&
V

17 18 19 20
n:i:11M
V
1GPI.S5 IGPI.S4 MAP 932 VCCl TDC1P
23
V
25 26 27 28 29

V
1GI'l.S6 IAT ECT TPS VCC2 TDC2P
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal
number
1 BlK/WHT P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER oxygen sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty
CONTROL) controlled
2 WHT/GRN AlTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With engine running: about 0 V 5 V (depending
CONTROL) s19nal. on electrical load)
3*" *3 WHT/BLU IGPlS 3 (No. 3 IGNITION COil Drives No.3 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
PULSE) With engine running: pulses
4*" *3 YEL/GRN IGPlS 1 (No.1 IGNITION COil Drives No.1 ignition coil.
PULSE)
5 WHT/RED AlTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal. With engine running: about 0 V-5 V (depending
SIGNAL) on electrical load)
6 WHT/BlK EGRl (EGR VALVE LIFT Detects EGR valve lift At idle: about 1.2 V
SENSOR) sensor signal.
7 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Ground for MAP sensor. less than 1.0 V at all times
8 BlU CKPP (CKP SENSOR P SIDE) Detects CKP sensor. With enaine
9 WHT CKPM (CKP SENSOR M SIDE) Ground for CKP sensor.
10 BlU/BlK VTM (VTEC PRESSURE Detects VTEC pressure With engine at low rpm: 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAL) switch sianal. With enaine at hiah rom: battery voltaae
*3 BlK/RED IGPlS 5 (No. 5 IGNITION COIL Drives No.5 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): OV
PULSE) With engine running: pulses
*3 BRN IGPlS 4 (No. 4 IGNITION COIL Drives No.4 ignition coil.
PULSE)
*3 BlU/RED IGPlS 2 (No. 2 IGNITION COIL Drives No.2 ignition coil.
PULSE)
16 WHT PH02S (PRIMARY HEATED Detects primary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully,
OXYGEN SENSOR, SENSOR oxygen sensor (sensor 1) warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
1 ) sianal. With throttle auicklv closed: below 0.4 V
17 RED/GRN MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Detects MAP sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
PRESSURE SENSOR) At idle: about 1.0 V (deoendina on enaine soeed)
18 GRN/BlK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around. less than 1.0 V at all times.
19 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Power source to MAP With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
sensor. With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
20 GRN TDC1P (TDC SENSOR 1P Detect TDC sensor 1. With engine running: pulses
SIDE)
21 RED TDC1 M (TDC SENSOR 1 M G round for TDC sensor 1.
SIDE)
*3 BRN/WHT IGPlS 6 (No. 6 IGNITION COil Drives No.6 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): OV
PULSE) With enaine run nina: oulses
25 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (deoendina on intake airtemoerature)
26 RED/WHT ECT (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (deoendina on enaine coolant temoerature)
27 RED/BlK TPS (THROTTLE POSITION Detects TP sensor signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
SENSOR) With throttle fullv closed: about 0.5 V
28 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With ianition switch OFF: 0 V
29 YEl TDC2P (TDC2 SENSOR P Detects TDC sensor 2. With engine running: pulses
SIDE)
30 BlK TDC2M (TDC2 SENSOR M G round for TDC sensor 2.
SIDE)
,
*2: 00 model
*3: '01-02 models
11-16
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P)
r---
1
LC
6 7
ATPR SHA
13
14

ATPD2
bP25W"'
Terminal Wire color
number
1 VEL
2 GRN/WHT
3 GRN
5 BLK/YEL
6 WHT
7 BLU/YEL
8 PNK
9 VEL
10 BLU
11 RED
12 WHT
13*"*' BLU/WHT
13*2,*3 BLU/BLK
14 BLU
15 BRN
16 GRN
*1: 98-99 models
*2: '00 model
*3: '01-02 models
Terminal name
LC (TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE)
SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B)
SHC (SHIFT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C)
VBSOL (BA TTERV VOLTAGE
FOR SOLENOID VALVE)
ATPR (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A)
ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
ATPD4 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
NC (COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR)
NM (MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR)
NMSG (MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR GROUND)
ATPNP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
OP2SW (2ND OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH)
ATP2 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
ATP1 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
NCSG(COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR GROUND)
2 3
/
5
SHB SHC VBSOL
8 9 10 11 12
ATPD3 ATPD4 NC NM NMSG
15 16
ATP1 NCSG
'---
Description Signal
Drives torque converter clutch With lock-up ON: battery voltage
solenoid valve. With 0 V
Drives shift solenoid valve B. With engine running in 1st, 2nd gears: battery
voltage
With runnirmin 3rd 4th qears: about 0 V
Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 1st and 3rd gears: battery
valve C. voltage
With enqine runninq in 2nd and 4th qears: 0 V
Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
valve.
Detects transmission range In R position: 0 V
switch signal. In anv other oosition: batterv voltaqe
Drives shift solenoid valve A. With engine running in 2nd, 3rd gears: battery
voltage
With enqine runninq in 1st, 4th qears: about 0 V
Detects transmission range In D3 position: 0 V
switch siqnal. In any other position: battery voltaqe
Detects transmission range In D4 position: 0 V
switch signal. In any other position: about 5 V or battery voltage
Detects countershaft speed With ignition switch ON (II), and front wheels
sensor signals. rotating: battery voltage
Detects mainshaft speed With engine running: pulses
sensor siqnals.
Ground for mainshaft speed
sensor.
Detects transmission range In Park or Neutral: 0 V
switch signal. In any other position: battery voltaqe
Detects 2nd oil pressure With the ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
switch.
Detects transmission range In 2nd position: 0 V
switch signal. In any other position: battery voltaqe
Detects transmission range In 1 st position: 0 V
switch sifjnal. In voltage
Ground for countershaft
soeed sensor.
(cont'd)
11-17
BACK
Vacuum Hose Routing - '98-99 models:
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
11-18
CRUISE CONTROL DIAPHRAGM
FUEL INJECTION AIR (FIA) CONTROL VALVE
/
VACUUM
TANK
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL
CANISTER
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
BACK
'00-02 models:
CRUISE CONTROL DIAPHRAGM
FRONT OF
VEHICLE

INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR
To ENGINE
MOUNT
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
CHECK VALVE
/VACUUM
/ TANK
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
(cont'd)
11-19
BACK
Vacuum Distribution - '98-99 models:
11-20
CD PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY
H02S) (SENSOR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
@ENGINECOOLANTTEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR
@ FUEL INJECTION AIR (FIA) CONTROL VALVE
(j) IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE
THROTTLE BODY (TB)
FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL FILTER
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
@ FUEL PUMP (FP)
@FUEL TANK
@ AIR CLEANER
@RESONATOR
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
LIFT SENSOR
@
I====J&
@
@ POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
@THREEWAYCATALYTICCONVERTER
l EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL
CANISTER
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL
CANISTER FILTER
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
@ FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
ONBOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
VENT SHUT VALVE
@ ONBOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
@ ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
BACK
'00-02 models:
To :J29 ENGINE +=
MOUNT
To +=
10
CD PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY
H02S) (SENSOR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
<ll ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
@ INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
(j) IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE
THROTTLE BODY
INJECTOR
FUEL FILTER
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
@ FUEL PUMP (FP)
(j])FUEL TANK
@ AIR CLEANER
@RESONATOR
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
POSITION SENSOR
*1
, .. _ .. _.@ .. - ..
-, !
i
i
. i
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. --' *2
,... .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ---,
. @ :
: !
i
i
. i
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. --'
*1: '00 model
*2: '01-02 models
@ POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
@THREEWAYCATALYTICCONVERTER
l EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER
@EVAPORATIVEEMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
@EVAPORATIVEEMISSION(EVAP) BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
@ FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
@ FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
@ ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(cont'd)
11-21
BACK
PGM-FI System
The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a
sequential multi port fuel injection system.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the
AlC system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the AlC mode.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch
The AlC switch signals the PCM whenever there is a
demand for cooling.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) during charging. The PCM then controls the
voltage generated at the alternator assording tothe
electrical load determined by the Electrical Load
Detector (ELD) and driving mode. This reduces engine
load to improve fuel economy.
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The Baro sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor determines timing for fuel injection of
each cylinder and also detects engine speed.
The PCM detects misfiring by using the CKP sensor to
monitor fluctuations in crankshaft speed. It will then set
DTCs depending on how much misfiring occurs.
11-22
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
as the Engine Coolant temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
Ignition Timing Control
The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing
at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
pressure. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
coolant temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration
The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the PCM detect long
term malfunctions in the fuel system and set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
BACK
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
as the intake air temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
to Readiness Codes)('01-02 models)
Ifthe vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has
been reset, these codes are reset to complete. In some
states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not
set to complete, the test cannot be finished.
To check ifthe readiness codes are set, turn the ignition
switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will
come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, one or
more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set
each code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as
described in the procedures to set them. Refer to
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
Primary Heated Oxygen sensor (Primary H02S)
The primary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas and sends signals to the PCM which varies
the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its
output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary
H02S is installed in the exhaust manifold.
By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary H02S and
secondary H02S, the deterioration of the primary H02S
can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the
feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable
driving conditions, the sensor is considered
deteriorated and the PCM sets a DTC.
ZIRCONIA
ELEMENT
HEATER
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
TERMINALS
Secondary Heated Oxygen sensor (Secondary H02S)
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic
Converter (TWC) and sends signals to the PCM which
varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To
stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The secondary H02S is installed in the TWC.
ZIRCONIA
ELEMENT
HEATER
Starting Control
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
TERMINALS
When the engine is started, the PCM provides a rich
mixture by increasing injector duration.
(cont'd)
11-23
BACK
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the
throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the
sensor varies the signal voltage to the PCM. The TP
sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body.
HOLDER
TERMINAL
Top Dead Center (TOC) Sensor
The TDC1/TDC2 sensor determines ignition timing at
start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal.
TDC2SENSOR
I
11-24
Idle Control System
When the engine is cold, the AlC compressor is on, the
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed,
the PIS load is high, or the alternator is charging, the
PCM controls current to the lAC valve to maintain the
correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see
the functional layout of the system.
The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM when
the brake pedal is pressed.
Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve
To maintain the proper idle speed, the lAC valve
changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body
in response to an electrical signal from the PCM.
VALVE
From AIR
CLEANER
To INTAKE
MANIFOLD
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power
steering load is high.
Starter (Ignition) Switch
The starter switch signals the PCM when the engine is
cranking.
BACK
r
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Cut-off Control
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
current to the fuel injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at speeds over 1,100 rpm.
Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed
exceeds 6,600 rpm, regardless of the position of the
throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-rewing.
When the vehicle is stopping, the PCM cuts the fuel at
engine speed over 5,000 rpm.
Fuel Pump Control
When the ignition is turned on, the PCM grounds the
PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to the fuel pump
for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the
engine running, the PCM grounds the PGM-FI main
relay and feeds current to the fuel pump. When the
engine is not running and the ignition is on, the PCM
cuts ground to the PGM-FI main relay which cuts
current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay
The PGM-FI relay contains two separate relays. One is
energized whenever the ignition is on. It supplies
battery voltage to the PCM, power to the fuel injectors,
and power for the second relay. The second relay is
energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2
seconds when the ignition is switched ON (11), and when
the engine is running.
Intake Air System
Intake Air Bypass Control System (Fuel Air (FIA)
Control System)
When the engine is running, the Intake Air Bypass
control valve sends air to the fuel injectors.
'98-99 models:
INJECTOR
-----...."' ..
,
... :: ..... : ......
,,:INTAKE
AIR _____
INTAKE AIR BYPASS
CONTROL VALVE
VALVE
'00-02 models:
o
__ -----'--__ BYPASS CONTROL
VALVE
To
INJECTORS INJECTORS
<:=>From
AIR
CLEANER
VALVE
(cont'd)
11-25 BACK
Throttle Body
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting
screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, is located
on the top of the throttle body.
IDLE ADJUSTING
Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), dinitrogen (N2),
and water vapor.
THREE-WAY
CATALYSTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of
the system.
EGRValve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
and into the combustion chambers.
11-26
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
<F : FRESH AIR
PCV
VALVE
Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of
the system.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is above 167F
(75C), the PCM controls the EVAP canister purge valve
which provides vacuum to the EVAP canister.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM.
SENSOR CHIP
BACK
Idle Control System Diagram
The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the lAC (Idle Air Control) valve:
After the engine starts, the lAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the
idle speed by about 150-300 rpm .
When the engine coolant temperature is low, the lAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The
amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature .
.
\
Intake Air System Diagram
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
'----____ YELl
'----__ BLK/
BLU
BLK
PCM VARIOUS SENSORS
BLK

This system supplies air to the engine. A resonator in the intake air duct provides additional silencing as air is drawn
into the system.
'98-99 models:
INTAKE MANIFOLD
,
IACVAbLE ACL

L-____ INTAKE
DUCT
'----___ YELl
BLK
-----RESONATOR
From
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
[BLK
BLK/
BLU
PCM
BLK
.-L

(cont'd)
11-27 BACK
'00-02 models:
INTAKE MANIFOLD
f
THROTTLE BODY fAIR CLEANER
I
lAC VALVE AIR INTAKE
.. _ .. _ ._y DUCT
I
! J i ...____RESONATOR

1.. .. _ .. _ .. _ .. J
INTAKE

BLK
=
AIR CLEANER From
...
BLK/
BLU y SENSORS
BLK
J..
=
*1: '00 model
*2: '01-02 models
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM memory includes the ideal EGR valve position for
varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then
compares it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference
between the two, the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
11-28
EGRVALVE
POSITION
SENSOR ,..-_______ GRN/ ____ --
BLK
PCM
BLK
-L

SENSORS
BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount offuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is
above 14JOF (64C).
When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP two way valve, the valve opens and
regulates the flow of fuel vapor to the EVAP control canister.
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
From
No.6
ECU(PCM)
_ ___ ....... CRUISE
....... CONTROL
FUEL TANK VAPOR
RECIRCULATION VALVE
SIGNAL
FUEL TANK \
(15A)
(in the
driver's

dash
fuse/relay
TUBE

/
FUEL
FILL
CAP
FUEL TANK VAPOR
RECIRCULATION
TUBE
EVAP
CANISTER
FILTER
LTGRN/
WHT
RED/
VEL
PCM
box)

11-29
BACK
Circuit Diagram
PCM Circuit Diagram - '98-99 models:
11-30
VELIRED ftI:5l=1
'F=--- p
MAP SENSOR
F"'---GRN/WHr.
REDIWHT
To CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
RED/VEL'
VELIBlU
RED/BlK
JUNCTION
WHT/BlK'
CONNECTOR
PNK'
A
Cl05

JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
C
(To page 11-31 )
GRN/BLK
ECTSENSOR
GRN/BL
IATSENSOR
TPSENSOR
VELIBlU

EGRVAlVE

BACK
r
'r----
r
( From page 11-30 )

GRN/BLK
Z
BLK/YEL
PRIMARY
H02S (SENSOR 1)
BLK/YEL
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL
C104

1
m

G101
__ .GRN. __________ _
REDS
__ YELZ. ____ : __
BLK'-r-------=-----==

SOLENOIO
VALVE -=
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR

YEVGRN _______________________________ J
[1 __ ICM-----.JI
(cont'd)
11-31
BACK
PCM Circuit Diagram (co nt' d) - '98-99 models:
11-32

r---WHT/RED'-
ALT
BLUIWHT'

LOCKUP CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
LC
VEL'

SHA
BLU/VEL
G
SHIFT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
SHB
GRNlWH-rl

BLK2
SOLENOID VALVE B
GRN'

BLI<'
SOLENOID VALVE C
E
WHr.
MAINS HAFT SPEED SENSOR

COUNTERSHAFTSPEEDSENSOR
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
__ - I
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
BACK
\----BRN
,
RED
,
'\----Blu'
__ VEL
,
INJ5
1-----BlKl RED
).:1;,.:;NJ:.:6___ WH
T/BlU
I)....---BLKI BLU
\,;.;IG;;.P_l___ V
IGP2
V
EL/BlK'-
EL/BlK'
H
r
I
VEL/BLK'
]1
No.1 FUEL INJECTOR
YEL/BlK' -

No.2 FUEL INJECTOR
YEl/BlK'

No.3 FUEL INJECTOR
YEL/BlK'
I r
No. 4 FUEL INJECTOR
YEL/BlK'
I[

No.5 FUEL INJECTOR
.--VEL/BlK'
1r
No.6 FUEL INJECTOR
-YEL/BlK'-

BlK'-
lAC VALVE

l....--
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
'--
(cant'd)
11-33 BACK
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) - '98-99 models:
11-34
--------------------IIE--:" I
2ND 1
CLUTCH PRESSURE -
SWITCH -
I
3RD 1
CLUTCH PRESSURE -=
SWITCH

;r:MOBIUZER
UNIT
GRWORN-----------------i

GRWBLK'------------------I
r--------BLKlBW

LU' BLU'
RN' BRN'
C103 C302
CONNECTOR K
WHr''---+-+--.
BLKlBLU -f
MIL
1------1-.... P
I------+-l R
I------+-l N
0,
1----.... 0,
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
4+--------WHr'----L DRIVER'S
__
YEL'
C103
PNK'
'-+-+------BLKlBLU
'-+------RED/BLK
BLU'

AIT GEAR POSITION SWITCH
BACK
C204

SECONDARY
H02S (SENSOR 2)
C302 BLKlYEL -,
GRNiWHT':j I-----------+-+--GRN.IWHT'--l U
ENGINE MOUNT
VALVE
RED/YEL' RED/YEL'-----------REDIYEL'JITl
BLU/GRN'
'}""=""--PNK'
IF'---BLu'
C302
'-----l
o
I BLKlYEL EVAP PURGE
o

BLu'
II
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
I
IMMOUZER
INDICATOR UGHT
To
+ TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TEST
TACHOMETER
[ CONNECTOR
iF=----WHT/RED'----------------------jIQI::::::J
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(DRIVER'S)

1 PSPSWITCH
G202
From
GRN'-------------------------<'41 RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
(cont'd)
11-35
BACK
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) -- '98-99 models:
11-36
CIDI
}-V;.;;;SV"---_ L T GRNlWHT
I #l
BLK/YEL
CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE
----I

FUEL TANK
PRESSURE SENSOR
F-=--BW'-----I
BW' ---rOJ
+----BLKlYEL ----l C1D4
EVAPBYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
D 0 0 DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
i i CONNECTORF FUSI!IRELAYBOX
-.J
GRN/BLK'
'-------BLKIYEL
'-----------BLKlYEL
'--+------------WHTIYEL

,...--------- BLKlYEL
_______ R __________ CO_N_N_EC_T_O,R[K
BLU/ORN ------------------\.
HHA32}=;.:.;....-WHT/BLK'-------------------1
IGNmON
SWITCH
FUSES
A: No. 9 BACK UP UGHT
INSTRUMENT UGHT (7.5A)
B : No.8 ECUCPcM)
CRUISE CONTROL (1&A)
C: No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL
(7.5A)
D: No. 1 FUEL PUMP (1&A)
r-
i--
0
r---<
f---
f---
f---
A
B
-
f---
C
-

i
-
D
\
Y
(To page 11-37 )
I
BACK
U
OIlY
':rJ
I '(
C10S C1M
I
C401
GIINIYEL -1
r-1]C202
WHT

C401
i

Y

( From page 11.:16 )
A
CONNECTOR I

BW/OIIN

I--
IIED/WHT
BLKlYEL f--
f--
WHTIYEL
CONNECTOR N
WHT-[
I-- '---
CONNECTORE
-- BLKIYEL -{ I--
DRIVER'S UNOEII-DASH
FUSEillELAY BOX

BIIN', DATA UNK
BIINIILK CONNECTOR
WHT/ORN
r
BLK
=
0401

WHTIYEL
BRAKE SWITCH
'---
--:,,--=:[0

r FUEL PUMP
=
G552
ILK' BLK'_
811N1BLK' BllNlBLK'
C301
-
RED/WHT-
l!}-
I
BW/OIIN-

ORNIYEL-
BLKlYEL- f---o-
T
PGM ....
MAIN RELAY
(cont'd)
11-37
BACK
11-38
N o
ONNECTOR B C
.--+--BLKI
BLKI
.-f-------YEL
YEL-
YEL-
'--___ -11-1--____ BRNI
BLK'-
IRED- To AlC ...-- BLU.
PRESSURE SWITCH
ONNECTORG C
'F":'---BLU/RED ------+-11---+--+- BLUI
BRNI
WHT
RED=!
BLK'
IYEL
Q

LWHT
ONNECTOR H
YEL---[
ONNECTOR I
IYEL===[
BLK'
T
'!
E
-
-
'-
-
f----
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
CONNECTOR C F
L

CONNECTOR A G
'-----WHT/GRN---[ 1--............. ----.
o--
C202 CONNECTOR B H
WHT/YEL-++-I WHT/YEL---f I
'--+------YEL-------LI--............. ----.
ELD
J
C204
GRN/RED,
r---------+-
UNDER-HOOD
G202 FUSEIRELA Y BOX
FUSES
E: No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP ('r.sA)
F : IG MAIN (soA) BATTERY
G:ACGS (15A)
H: STOP (20A)
I : BACK UP ACC (40A)
J : BATTERY (100A)
G1
BACK
'"
r
'00-02 models:

MAP SENSOR
RED/WHT---------

ToCUMATE
RED/YELZ ______
GRNlBLK
z
--------'
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
IATSENSOR
EGRVALVE
POSITION
LII-t::::::::::::::::::::::= SENSOR
,r-_____
GRWBL,.;---------.J
YEV
BLU
EGRVALVE
A
(To page 11-40 )
(cont'd)
11-39
BACK
11-40
( From page 11-39 )
ClOB
BLKlYEL --------1
LBLKlYEL
C104
I
JUNCnON
CONNECTOR
PRIMARY
H02S (SENSOR 1)
'l-'-":..--GRNIYEL'---t------------t------i
BLKlYEL
1 SOLENOID -
o -
BLU/BLK
BRN/BLK'

BRN/BLK'--_---..
BLK'----+-----l-+-4--.

GlOl
C105
BLK'
C107
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
I
JUNCnON
CONNECTOR

CB BLlJ"'", . ,:,: "" :":.,:,: "" :":.r:, :":.",-, "" ",.:,: ,:,: "" :,:.,:,: "" ",.:': "" "' :':.':': "" :":.':': "" ==."'-' . "' .. :":'.::: . "' .. "' .. :':.':': .. "" .. :':.':'!'I

TDC
SENSOR 1
lDC
SENSOR 2

BACK
r-
__ WMT/GRN, _________________________________________ (25)
ALTC
r WMT IREo'-
VSSOUT
LC
SHA
SHB
SHC
ALT

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (Tee)
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY
YEL'
BLUIYEL

W SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) =
VALVE ASSEMBLY A

VALVE ASSEMBLY B
GRN'
BLK'

VALVE ASSEMBLY C
E
011 RED"".", ,".", ,".", :::."" ",.,".", ,".", :::.", :::."".,,, ,".,,, ,"."' :::."' :::.,.,.,."'."' "'."' :::."" "'."'."' "'."" "'."'."' "'."' "'.",.", ,".n==:::;;:--1

010 BW'".", ,".", :::."" ::":."".", ",.", :::."" ",."".", ,,,.,,, ,,,.,,, :::."' :::.""."' ,,!.,.:::."' :::."'."' :::."" "'."'."' "'."' :::.""."' "'."' :::."" :-I"F='"

AUTOMA11C TRANSAXLE (An)
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SDLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY A
AUTOMA11C TRANSAXLE (An)
CWTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY B
(cant'd)
11-41
BACK
11-42
INJ1
'r----BRN
,
}-1_NJ_2__ RED'
;}----BLu'
)-IN_J_4__ VEL'
}'INJ"",,-S__ BLK!
RED
INJ6
}----WHT/ BLU
I}--'-'--- BLK/B LU
IGP1
+--...---(Bl VEL/
IGP2
}-----VEL/
BLK'-
BLK'
H
I
VEL/BLK'
l[ ]1
No.1 INJECTOR
VEL/BLK'
l[ ]1
No.2 INJECTOR
VEL/BLK'
l[ ]1
No. 3 INJECTOR
VEL/BLK'
l[ ]1
No. 4 INJECTOR

II
NO.5 INJECTOR
-VEL/BLK'
l[ ]1
No. 6 INJECTOR

r-VEL/BLK' -

BLK'-

lAC VALVE
C12!.,
-
JUNCT10N
CONNECTOR
-
BACK
JUNCTION
CONNECTDR
.1: '00 modol
.2 : '01-112 modoIo
- BLU/BLK ----------------11 p--C I
2ND 1
CLUTCH PRESSURE --
SWITCH -
,}-"'-="--BLUIWIIT'------------ll puc I
3RD 1
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
=-----------------4:} l:MDBIUZER
UNIT

MIL
=[
QRNlBLK'--------------------1
Ctoa
-=-
--r-

BLKlBLU - P
CONNECTOR
WHY'- R

--
ATPNP BWIWIIT'
- N
--
D.
NIe' PNIe'-
--

2
N' BAN'-
--
1
C103 C302
='==
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTDRK
ATPR WIlT'
BLKlBq-
WHY' [] DRIVER'S
ATPD4
.... =: YEL'-- "-- BLKlBW _ BOX
Ct03
ATPD3
PNK'--
BWIWHT'---
BLKlBW -

-- WHY' f--r; -<>
REO/BLK- f--'N -<> l\
ATP2
Bur-
f--"D: -<>
---PNIe' f--to,..."
sw' - f--r;- ..."
ATP1
BRi
BAN'
I-

..." -
.!05
I f--- BRri
r--- BRN' Ct08
I

JUNCTION
t--BLU'- _ .... CONNECTOR

I
I- - PNK'
r-- PNIe'
--
(cont'd)
11-43
BACK
11-44
C204
: ::;-::ul
L
----' 5E
SECONDARY
H02S (SENSOR 2)
N
C302
BLKlYEL
GRNlWHTI:j
ENGINE MOUNT

-- RED/YELl REDIYELI REDIYELI1o:J
r-
BLKlYEL EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
K
BLU/GRN'-----------------;[c=J
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
}==-PNKI----------------------l

- - BLu'--.._-------------------l
I
IMMOiiGZER
INDICATOR LIGHT
To
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
C302
O
TEST
>------j 1---------BLu'-------1[ TACHOMETER
*2,- --l CONNECTOR
i :-.. - .. - .. - .. - .. - .. - .. - .. -._-.. - .. - .. ,
: C40I C201 I
I
_ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. J
WHT/REDI--------------------I[c=J
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
::=iE5J
1 PSPSWITCH
G202
From
GRNI'-------------------...... RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
BACK
}VS=V __ LTGRNIWHT

II :}
BLK/YEL
VENT SHIIT VALVE
p=-LTGIVI-----1
BJ=I
FTPSENSOR
F==--BW'-----I 1------+++-----BW'-----nF==;:--,
II :]
..... --BLKlYEL
VBU
C104
SOLENOID VALVE

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
CONNECTOR F FUSEIRELAY BOX
GRNI
BLK'
C204C,
GRNlYELI BLKlYEL
BLK' BLU GRNlBLK'
VELIBLU
t
C104 CONNECTO
YELIBLU
GRNlBuc'
AD
-
--

L---------BLKlYEL
BLK/VEL
'--I-----------WHT/YEL
-
-
-
-
RJ
RK
I--
r-
0
r-
r-
r-
r-

[:
BRN"--------------------
BW/ORN-----------------
HHA32}=:.::....-WHT/BLK'-----------------
IGNJnON
SWITCH
CONNECTO

RA
FUSES
A: No.l1IG COIL (1SA)
B : No.9 BACK UP UGHT
INSTRUMENT UGHT tT.sA)
C : No. ECU{PCM)
CRUISE CONTROL (ISA)
D: No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL

\
A",,-
-
B
C
-
D
-

i
Y
J
E
(7,SA)
E: No. I FUEL PUMP (1SA)
(To page 11-46 )
1
(cont'd)
11-45
BACK
U
NE
GRY
F
II
I I
C103 C104
I
C401
FLR GRNlYEL-1
11-46
rl
C202
WHT

C401
I
I
,
V

CONNECTOR I
r---
BLU/ORN

REDIWHT
BLKlYEL
.--- WHT/BLK'
WHTIYEL
CONNECTOR N
.WHT-[
CONNECTORE
- BLKlYEL-{
(From page 11-45 )

f---
'--
-
--
-
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
-
GRY-
BRN'-
DATAUNK
BRNlBLK'-
CONNECTOR
WHT/GRN-
r
BLK
- _
=
G401

WHT/YEL
BRAKE PEDAL
POSmON
(BPP) SwrrCH
-

r
BLK
C201
WHT/GRN 0-WHT/GRN
_ FUEL PUMP
G552

BLK' BLK'-
BRN/BLK' BRNlBLK'
C301
REDIWHT-
I
BLU/ORN-

GRNIYEL-
BLKlYEL-

PGM-FI
T
MAIN RELAY
BACK
ACS

\
'::"
BW/RED
N
ONNECTORB C
r---t--- BLK! YEL-
YEL- BLK!
r-+----- VEL
L---------+-;----------BRW
To AIC +-- BLUI
PRESSURE SWITCH
BLK'-
RED-
ONNECTORH C
-------r-t--r--t-BWI
BRW
WHT
RED=f
BLK'
IYEL
ONNECTORI
YEL---{
1Y===r BLK'
lflL-:
LWHT

T
CONNECTORC
L __
WHT [
CONNECTOR A
WHT/GRN---{
C202 CONNECTOR B

YEL
C204

RED'
G202
FUSES
F: No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP tr.5A)
G: IG MAIN (5OA)
H:ACGS (1SA)
I : STOP (20A)
J : BACK UP ACC (40A)
K: BATTERY (100A)
11
F
r--
I-
-
r--
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
G
H
J
K
UNDER-HOOD
FUSMIELAY BOX
BATTERY
Gl
(cant'd)
11-47
BACK
11-48
IGPLS1

BlK'
No. 1 IGNITION COil

PLUG.
No. 2 IGNITION COil
IGPlS3
F..:;;;;.'-------------++t---+-WHT/BlU __
BlK' C!==::==:""';:":::..J
__
BlKlYE=t
Gt01
t
C102
BlK/VEl =-0-BlK/YEl
BLK'
No. & IGNITION COil

BlK'--L!
Ct07
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
ECT
GAUGE
BACK
r
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
C204
LTGRN'
aRM/ClRN
YELlGRrI
aw'
GRNIRED

LTClRN'
aRM/ORN
YELlO ....
aw'
ORNIRED
BLU'
*2
.. ,
r-----i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
. _ . _ _ .. _ . _ _ . _ .. _ .. _ AIISITCSCONTROLUNrr i
.. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. -
____ ---1 .. - .. - .. - .. - .. j
11-49
BACK
PGM-FI System
NOTE: The illustration shows '00-02 models,
TOP DEAD CENTER 1 (TDC1)1
TOP DEAD CENTER 2 (TDC2)
SENSOR
11-50
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S)
(SENSOR 2)
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
AKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(lAT) SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
page 11-50
in the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
Troubleshooting,
page 11-47
Service Manual
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR
and page 11-57
Service Manual
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
"
"
j'
!" . ..=-] '98-99 California model
.. ...J and models
",-""""1
(,
L.: . ..:.... .. :.1
Except '98-99 California model
and '00-02 models
n
SENSOR (PRIMARY H02S)
(SENSOR 1)
BACK
NOTE: The illustration shows '00-02 models.
INJECTORS
General Troubleshooting Information,
page 11-3
General Troubleshooting Information,
page 11-3
11-51
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
sensor and the PCM .
NO - Go to step 4.
7. Measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector
SG2 (GRN/BLKI VCC2 (VEL/BLUI
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 19.
11-52
9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between TP
sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with
the throttle fully closed.
TPS
Is there approx. 0.5- 0.9 kQ ?
YES-Go to step 10.
10. Measure resistance between TP sensor 3P
throttle fully closed.
TPS
Is there approx. 4.5k Q ?
YES-Gotostep 11.
11. Disconnec the PCM connector C (31 PI connector.
BACK
and body ground.
=
YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C
27) and the TP sensor..
NO-Go to step 13 ('01-02 models), or step 17
('98-00 models).
PCM connector terminal A31.
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111
112113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
-
THl
lOUT
(VEL/GRN)
.Q
=
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 17.
15. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.
PCM connector terminal A31.
1112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

THl
OUT
(VEl/GRN)
.Q
=
YES- Repair short in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and PCM (A31) .
NO-Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit .
17. Connect PCM connectorterminal C27 and body
ground with a jumper wire.
L1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IL
12 13 14
li'
16 1 718 19 20 21
1/
23
/
25 262 728 29 30
1/
TPS (RED/BlK)
JUMPER WIRE
--
=
(cont'd)
11-53
BACK
PGM-FI System
and body ground.
=
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5). If the prescribed voltage is now available,
replace the original PCM .
NO-Repair open inthewire between the PCM
(C27) and the TP senso r .
19. Measure voltage between PCM connector
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
11 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
1/ 12 13 14
1/
16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23
V
25 26 27 28 29 30 l,{
VCC2 (VEL/BLU) L-oo---
Is there about 5 V?
(C28) and the TP sensor..
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and rechecki.
page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the original
PCM .
11-54 BACK
DTe P0128: Rangel Performance Problem in
Thermostat
NOTE: If the DTCs listed below are stored at the same
time as DTC P0128, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then
recheck for PO 128.
P0107, P0108, P1129: MAP Sensor
P1106, P11 07, P11 08: Barometric Pressure Circuit
P1259: VTEC system
P1491: EGR Valve Position Insufficient
P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor High Voltage
P0116, P0117, P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature
Circuit
P0112, P0113: Intake Air Tenperature Circuit
P0335, P0336, P1359: Crankshaft Position Sensor
P0300: Random Misfire
P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306: Cylinder
1,2,3,4,5 or 6 Misfire Detected
P0505 :Idle Control System Malfuction
P1519: Idle Air Control Valve
DTC P0128 can occasionally set when the hood is
opened.
1. Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant level low?
YES-Refill the engine coolant. If necessary, check
the cooling system .
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and make sure the AlC is off.
3. Check the radiator fan.
Dose the radiator fan keep running?
YES-Check the radiator fan circuit (see page 10-
16), radiator fan switch circuit (see page 10-16), and
the radiatorfan switch (see page 10-16).
If they are OK, substitute the PCM and recheck,
refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5) .
If the symptom/indicator goes away, replace the
original PCM .
NO-Test the thermostat, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 10-9) .
11-55 BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0131: Primary H02S(Sensor 1) Circuit
Low Voltage
1. Resetthe PCM.
comes on.
3. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage
with the scan tool during acceleration using wide
open throttle.
YES-Go to step 4.
primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM .
Is it normal?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Repair the fuel supply system .
6. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector.
with the scan tool.
Does it stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
10. Disconnect PCM connector C (31 Pl.
11-56
11. Check for continuity between primary H02S
ground.
4P CONNECTOR
PH02S(WHT)
2
3 4
(C16) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
BACK
High Voltage
1. Reset the PCM.
comes on.
with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 4.
primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM .
5. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector.
6. Connect primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector
4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
r--l
-
1 2
r---
PH02S(W HT) SG2( GRN/BLK)
3 4
with the scan tool.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
10. Connect PCM connector terminals C16 and C18
with a jumper wire.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
12 13 14 l-( 16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23
1/
25 ,26
27 2

29 30
/
PH02S (WHT) SG2 (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
with the scan tool.
(C16 or C18) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
11-57
BACK
PGM-FI System
Slow Response
NOTE: If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at
the same time as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0133.
1. Reset the PCM.
comes on.
55 mph (89 km/h) steady speed
Transmission in D4 position
Until readiness code or Temporary DTC P0133
comes on
YES-Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .
(located at the right side of the engine
compartment), the primary H02S (Sensor 1) and
the PCM .
11-58
BACK
r
DTe P0137: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
Circuit Low Voltage
1. Reset the PCM.
comes on.
3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output
YES - Go to step 4.
compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM .
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO - Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
10. Check for continuity between the secondary H02S
ground.
SECONDARY H02S
2
SH02S (WHT IRED)
3 4
YES - Repai r short in the wi re between the PCM
(A23) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original PCM.
11-59 BACK
PGM-FI System
Circuit High Voltage
1. Reset the PCM.
comes on.
YES-Go to step 4.
compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM .
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
6. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
SECONDARY H02S
JUMPER WIRE
2
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
SH02S (WHT IRED)
3 4
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
11-60
with a jumper wire.
11 12 3 4
112113 14 15
/
25 26 27
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
5 6
/
8 9 10 /1
17 18 19 20 21
/
23 24 1
28 2930L
JUMPER WIRE

C (31P) (GRN/BLK)
11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V
12 13 14
/
16 17 18 19 20
23
/
25 26 27 28 29
21
30
10
/
L
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A23 or C18) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
BACK
DTC P0135: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater
Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0141: Secondary H02S(Sensor 2)
Heater Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( * ) applies
to DTC P0141.
1. Reset the PCM.
YES - Go to step 3.
(located under the right side of the dash), C1 01 or
C102 (located at the left side of the engine
compartment), the Primary H02S (Sensor 1), the
3. Check the No.6 ECU (PCM) CRUSE CONTROL
(15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the fuse and retest .
5. Disconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
6. At the H02S side, measure resistance between
H02S 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
H02S 4P CONNECTOR
c!
2
3 4
.Q
Terminal side of
male terminals
*,-Ellih
Q
Wire side of
female terminals
Isthere5-15Q (10-40Q)*?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) or
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * .
7. Check continuity between body ground and
H02S 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4
individually.
H02S 4P CONNECTOR
= =
=
=
Terminal side of
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
YES- Replace the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) .
NO-Go to step 7.
terminal No.3 and No.4.
PRIMARV/SECONDARV*H02S (SENSOR 1/
P02HTC r-........ -,
(BLK/ 2
WHT)
S02HTC
(BLK/
WHT)
*
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-61 BACK
PGM-FI System
11. Disconnect PCM connector C (31 P) (PCM
connector A, 32P)*.
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C1 (A8)* and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
C(31P)
567
S02SHTC (BLK/WHT)*
- A (32P)
I
1112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 16 17 18 1920 2122 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C1,
A8*) and the H02S (Primary or Secondary*)
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2*) .
PRIMARY /SECONDARY*H02S (SENSOR 1/
2 IG1
1---1--1 (BLK/YEL)
3 4
-=
Wire side of
female terminals
YES-Go to step 14.
*
1 2
3 4
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
-=
Terminal side of
male terminals
ECU (PCM) CRUSE CONTROL (15A) fuse and the
H02S .
11-62
15. Reconnect the H02S 4P connector.
16. Disconnectthe PCM connector C (31P) (PCM
18. Measure voltage between the PCM connector
terminals 82 and C1 (A8) * .
PCM CONNECTORS
+
lP02SHTC (BLK/WHT) C (31P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
17 12 13 14
17
16 17 1819 20 21V
23
1/
25 26 27 28 29 30
1/
'" PG1 (BLK)
+
B(25P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 1314 15 [7 17 18
""7 20

23 24 25
S02SHTC
A (32P)
(BLK/WHT)*
1112 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 1
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 ]
25 26 27 28 29 3031

YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
(C1, A8*) and the H02S (primary or secondary*)
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2*) .
BACK
OTe P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
Circuit Slow Response
1. Reset the PCM.
comes on.
Does the voltage stay within 0.3- 0.8 V for two
minutes?
YES - Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .
compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
and the PCM .
11-63 BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P0300: Random Misfire
and Any Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire
NOTE:
If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored .
If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P0131, P0132: Primary H02S
P0171, P0172: Fuel metering
P0401, P1491, P1498: EGR System
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC System
P1361, P1362, P1366, P1367: TDC 1!TDC 2 Sensor
P1519: lAC Valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the symptom.
3. Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures and checks, in the order listed, until you find
the cause.
Symptom Procedure Also check for:
Random misfire only 1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-90) Low compression
at low RPM and 2. Inspect the ignition distributor housing* Low quality fuel
under load Correct EGR valve function
Random misfire only 1. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22). * Malfunction in the
during acceleration 2. Inspect the ignition distributor housing.* VTEC system (see
3. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-90). page 6-9)
4. Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22),
or for '00-02 models (see page 4-23).
5. Testthe iQnition control module (see paQe 4-19).*
Random misfire at 1. Check fuel pressure (see page 11-90). Correct valve clearance
high RPM and under 2. Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).* (see page 6-13)
load, or under 3. Inspect the ignition distributor housing.*
random conditions 4. Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22),
or for '00-02 models (see page 4-23).
Test the ignition control module (see page 4-21). *
*: '98-99 models
11-64 BACK
('98-99 models)
('98-99 models)
('98-99 models)
('98-99 models)
('98-99 models)
('98-99 models)
1. Remove the intake manifold cover (see step 4 on
page 6-31).
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset
the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misfiring, just
clear the DTC.
3. Start the engine, and listen for a clicking sound at
YES - Go to step 4.
NO- Go to step 19.
5. Inspect the ignition wire on the problem cylinder
(see page 4-22).
Is the ignition wire OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO- Replace the faulty ignition wire .
6. Check the distributor cap for cracks, wear, damage,
and fouling.
Is the distributor cap OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Clean or replace the distributor cap .
was no freeze data.
tool.
Is OTe P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306, or Temporary OTe P1399 indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
10. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug .
NO-Gotostep 11.
with one from the another cylinder.
was no freeze data.
tool.
Is OTe P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306, or Temporary OTe P1399 indicated?
YES-Gotostep 16.
(cont'd)
11-65
BACK
PGM-FI System
YES - Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-81) .
NO-Gotostep 17.
18. Check the engine compression.
Is the engine compression OK?
NO- Repair the engine .
22. Measure voltage between body ground and the
PCM connector terminal (see table).
INJ4(YEl) INJ2(RED)
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 1415
20 21 22 24 25
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6
(BlKI (BRN) (BLU) (WHTI
RED) BLU)
Y. Y. Y.
-
= = =
-
=
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN
No.2 P0302 B5 RED
No.3 P0303 B15 BLU
No.4 P0304 B4 YEL
No.5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
11-66
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 31.
24. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the
problem cylinder.
25. Measure resistance between injector 2P connector
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is there 10 Q - 13 Q ?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-81) .
the freeze data or under various conditions ifthere
was no freeze data.
tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305,
P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
etc .
~
BACK
problem cylinder.
34. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector
terminals No.2 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 35.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the injector
INJ4(VELI
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
1 2
9 10
20
INJ1
(BRNI
-= -=
DTC PCM
TERMINAL
P0301 B11
P0302 B5
P0303 B15
P0304 B4
P0305 B3
P0306 B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
YES - Repai r short in the wi re between the PCM
and the injector .
NO-Go to step 37.
37. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No.1 to
body ground with a jumper wire (see table).
r
2
INJ
JUMPER WIRE
PROBLEM DTC WIRE
CYLINDER COLOR
No.1 P0301 BRN
No.2 P0302 RED
No.3 P0303 BLU
No.4 P0304 YEL
No.5 P0305 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 WHT/BLU
(cont'd)
11-67
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
PCM connector terminals (see table).
INJ4 (YEL) INJ2 (RED)
1 2
9 10
20 2122
""'---'---'
INJ1
(BRN)
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN
No.2 P0302 B5 RED
No.3 P0303 B15 BlU
No.4 P0304 B4 YEl
No.5 P0305 B3 BlK/RED
No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BlU
YES-Replace the injector (see page 11-81). then
recheck .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the injector .
11-68
BACK
OTe P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire
('00-02 models)
('00-02 models)
('00-02 models)
('00-02 models)
('00-02 models)
('00-02 models)
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the ignition
coil cover (see step 4 on page 6-31).
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset
the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misfiring, just
clear the DTC.
3. Start the engine, and listen for a clicking sound at
VES- Go to step 4.
NO- Go to step 31.
5. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem
cylinder with one from another cylinder.
was no freeze data.
tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305,
VES- Go to step 8.
NO-Intermittent misfire due to ignition coil fouling,
ignition coil was exchanged?
VES- Replace the faulty ignition coil..
NO- Go to step 9.
was no freeze data.
tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305,
VES- Go to step 13.
VES- Replace the faulty spark plug .
NO-Go to step 14.
with one from the another cylinder.
was no freeze data.
(cont'd)
11-69
BACK
PGM-FI System
tool.
Is OTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305,
P0306, or Temporary OTC P1399 indicated?
YES-Gotostep 19.
YES- Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-83) .
NO-Go to step 20.
21. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
problem cylinder.
23. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P
1
2
3
IG1
(BLK/VEL)
=
No. 11 COIL (15 A) fuse and the ignition coil..
11-70
25. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P
1 GND
2 (BLK)
3
Q.
=
YES-Go to step 26.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil and G101 (or G102) .
PCM CONNECTOR c (31P)
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) IGPLS1 (VEL/GRN)
8 9 10
Q.
= =
=
=
=
No.1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN
No.2 P0302 C14 BLU/RED
No.3 P0303 C3 WHT/BLU
No.4 P0304 C13 BRN
No.5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 C23 BRN/WHT
and the ignition coil..
NO-Go to step 28.
BACK
28. Connect the ignition coil 3P connector terminal
No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire (see table).
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
1
2
3
JUMPER WIRE
DTC WIRE
COLOR
P0301 YEL/GRN
P0302 BLU/RED
P0303 WHT/BLU
P0304 BRN
P0305 BLK/RED
P0306 BRN/WHT
PCM CONNECTOR c (31P)
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU) IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
8 9 10
.Q
No.1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN
No.2 P0302 C14 BLU/RED
No.3 P0303 C3 WHT/BLU
No.4 P0304 C13 BRN
No.5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 C23 BRN/WHT
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ignition coil..
30. Check the engine compression.
Is the engine compression OK?
NO- Repair the engine .
34. Measure voltage between body ground and the
INJ4 (VEL)
1 2
9 10
20 21 22
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3
(BLK/ (BRN) (BLU)
RED)
'::L '::L '::L
INJ2 (RED)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN
No.2 P0302 B5 RED
No.3 P0303 815 8LU
No.4 P0304 B4 YEL
NO.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
NO - Go to step 43.
problem cylinder.
(cont'd)
11-71
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
37. Measure resistance between the injector 2P
~
I N J ~ I P
Is there 10 Q -13 Q?
YES-Go to step 38.
NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-83) .
39. let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
was no freeze data.
tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305,
YES-Go to step 42.
NO-Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
etc .
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose
problem cylinder.
11-72
46. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector
'
2
IGP
=IYaJBLKJ
YES-Go to step 47.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the injector
INJ4(YEL)
1 2
9 10
20
INJ5 INJ1
(BLKI (BRN)
RED)
=
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN
No.2 P0302 B5 RED
No.3 P0303 B15 BlU
No.4 P0304 B4 YEL
No.5 P0305 B3 BlK/RED
No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BlU
and the injector .
NO-Go to step 49.
BACK
49. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No.1 to
body ground with a jumper wire (see table).
r
2
INJ
JUMPER WIRE _
PROBLEM DTC WIRE
CYLINDER COLOR
No.1 P0301 BRN
No.2 P0302 RED
No.3 P0303 BLU
No.4 P0304 YEL
No.5 P0305 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 WHT/BLU
PCM connector terminals (see table).
INJ4IVEL) INJ2IRED)
1 2
9 10
20 21 22
INJ5 INJ1 INJ3 INJ6
IBLK/ IBRN) IBLU) IWHT/
RED) BLU)
Q
= = = = = =
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN
No.2 P0302 B5 RED
No.3 P0303 B15 BLU
No.4 P0304 B4 YEL
No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
YES-Replace the injector (see page 11-83). then
recheck .
the injector .
11-73
BACK
PGM-FI System
OTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal
OTC P0336: CKP Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
1. Reset the PCM.
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0336 indicated?
YES- Go to step 3.
CKP sensor and the PCM .
4. Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
5. Measure resistance between CKP sensor 2P
CKP SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
CKPP CKPM
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-56) .
11-74
6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP
sensor 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2
individually.
CKP SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
CKPP CKPM
YES- Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-56) .
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Reconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
a. Disconnect PCM connector C (31 Pl.
9. Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals ca and C9.
It
CKPP CKPM
(BLUI (WHTI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/
12 13 14
/
16 17 18 19 20 21
/
23
1/
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
YES-Goto step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (Ca,
C9) and the CKP sensor..
BACK
PCM connector terminal C8.
ICKPP(BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

12 13 14
1/
16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23 L( 25 26 27 28 29 30
V
.Q
=
VES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C8) and the CKP senscA
11-75
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (co nt' d)
DTC P1121: TP Sensor Lower Than Expected
Is 13.7% or higher indicated when the throttle is
fully opened?
time .
11-76
DTC P1122: TP Sensor Higher Than Expected
Is 16,9% or less indicated when the throttle is
fully closed?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK atthis
time .
NO-Replace the throttle body (The TP sensor is not
available separately) .
BACK
DTC P1361: TOC1 Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
DTC P1362: TOC1 Sensor No Signal
DTC P1366: TOC2 Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
DTC P1367: TOC2 Sensor No Signal
1. Reset the PCM.
Is DTC P1361, P1362, P1366, and/or P1367
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor and the PCM .
4. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC2 sensor 4P connector.
5. Measure resistance between the terminals of the
indicated sensor (see table).
TDC1/TDC2 SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
TDC1P TDC1M
TDC2P TDC2M
SENSOR DTC SENSOR PCM WIRE
TERMINAL TERMINAL COLOR
TDC1 P1361 1 C20 GRN
P1362 2 C21 RED
TDC2 P1366 3 C29 VEL
P1367 4 C30 BlK
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
YES- Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 6-
55) .
6. Check for continuity to body ground on both
terminals ofthe indicated sensor individually.
TDC1/TDC2 SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
TDC1P TDC1M
1 2 H-----,
3 4
YES-Replace the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 6-
55) .
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Reconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor 4P connector.
9. Measure resistance between the terminals ofthe
indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table).
PCM CONNECTOR C (31 PI
234 567
2627 28
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
NO- Repair open in the indicated sensor wires (see
table) .
(cont'd)
11-77
BACK
PGM-FI System
PCM connector terminals C20 and/or C29
individually.
TDC1P(GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10
V
12 13 14
V
16 17 18 19 20 21
V
23
IV
25 26 27 28 29 30
V
Q ~
fCZPIYEU
=
VES- Repair short in the indicated sensor wires
(see table) .
11-78
BACK
DTC P1676: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
1. Reset the PCM.
2. Start the engine and wait 10 seconds.
Is OTC P1676 indicated?
YES-Goto step 3.
ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM .
4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and the
ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.
5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM
connector terminal A22.
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
1121131415161718192021122 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
FPTDR
GRN/RED,
@ '98-00 models,
PNK, '01"()2 models
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and the PCM (A22) .
NO-Goto step 6.
6. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit
16P connector terminal No.1 and PCM connector
terminal A22.
FPTDR GRN/RED, '98-00 models.
,---------' PNK, '01-02 models
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT 16P
CONNECTOR
YES-Goto step 7.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABS/TCS
control unit and the PCM (A22) .
7. Reconnect PCM connector E (32).
with a jumper wire.
JUMPER
WIRE
9. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.
Is OTC P1678 indicated?
YES-Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
11-79
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTe P1678: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
1. Reset the PCM.
YES-Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control
unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.
11-80
BACK
Injector Replacement
'98-99 models:
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (B). Place a rag or shop towel
over the hoses before disconnecting them.
5. Disconnect the fuel hose (e) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the retainer bolts (E) from the fuel rails and harness holders (F), then replace the O-rings (G).
7. Disconnectthe fuel rails.
8. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
(cont'd)
11-81
BACK
PGM-FI System
9. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).
c
A
B
E
10. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
11. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D).
13. Install the injectors into the intake manifold.
14. Install and tighten the retainer bolts.
15. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail with new washers.
16. Connect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator.
17. Install the connectors on the injectors and harness holders.
18. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold covers.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-82
BACK
'00-02 models:
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
9.8Nm
E
4. Remove the retainer bolts (D) from the fuel rails (C) and harness holders (E), then replace the O-rings (F).
5. Disconnect the fuel rails.
6. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
(cont'd)
11-83
BACK
PGM-FI System
7. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (8).
c
A
B
E
8. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
9. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D).
11. Install the fuel injectors into the intake manifold.
12. Install and tighten the bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold covers.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about
2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-84
BACK
Primary H02S Replacement
Commercially available 02 sensor wrench:
Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent
1. Disconnect the primary H02S 4P connector (A),
then remove the primary H02S (B).
B
2. Install the primary H02S in the reverse order of
removal.
Secondary H02S Replacement
Commercially available 02 sensor wrench:
Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent
1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A),
then remove the secondary H02S (B).
2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of
removal.
11-85
BACK
Idle Control System
POWER STEERING PRESSURE
(PSP) SWITCH
11-86
IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE
BACK
Idle Speed Adjustment
Adjust idle speed using the Honda PGM Tester
procedure, if possible. If not, use the following
procedure:
NOTE:
Leave the lAC valve connected.
Before setting the idle speed, check these items:
- The MIL has not been reported on.
- Ignition timing
- Spark plugs
- Air cleaner
- PCV system
On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever up.
Start the engine, then check that the headlights are
off.
1. Disconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve
2P connector.
2. Connect a tachometer, or connect the Honda PGM
Tester (A) or an aBO II scan tool to the Data Link
Connector (DLC) (B) located under the driver's side
of the dashboard.
no load (transmission in Park or neutral position)
until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan,
and air conditioner off.
Idle speed should be:
68050 rpm (in Park or neutral)
5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the
idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more
than 1/4-turn without checking the idle speed.
A
6. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn,
check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn
the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn again.
7. Idle the engine for one minute with the heater fan
switch at HI, and the air conditioner on, then check
the idle speed.
Idle speed should be:
680 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
NOTE:
Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air
conditioner is on .
If the idle speed is not within specification, see
the Symptom Troubleshooting Index.
8. Reconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve
2P connector.
11-87
BACK
Fuel Supply System
FUEL FEED LINE
FUEL TANK
Replacement for '98-99 models, page 11-93
Replacement for '00-02 models, page 11-94
PGM-FI MAIN RELA V
11-88
FUEL PUMP
Test, page 11-117
FILTER
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test, page 11-95
FUEL TUBE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS
Precautions, page 11-120
BACK
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, release
pressure from the system by loosening the fuel
pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail.
preset buttons.
4. Place a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at
the fuel rail.
A
22Nm
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper (A) one
complete turn.
NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel
pulsation damper is loosened or removed.
11-89
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040001
Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-00401 00
2. Use a wrench to remove the fuel pulsation damper
from its fitting, then attach the fuel pressure gauge
attachment.
07VAJ-0040100
/
11-90
3. Attach the fuel pressure gauge.
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models:
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) of the fuel
pressure regulator and pinch it closed with a clamp
(8).
Ifthe engine starts, go to step 7.
If the engine does not start, go to step 6.
6. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: remove
the fuel fill cap and listen to the fuel fill port while
an assistant turns the ignition switch ON (II). You
should hear the pump run for about 2 seconds
when the ignition is turned ON (II).
Ifthe pump runs, go to step 7.
If the pump does not run, test it, refer to
the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-
117) .
BACK
7. Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure
regulator vacuum hose disconnected and clamped).
The pressure should be:
'98-00 models: 280-330 kPa (2.9-3.4 kgf/cm2, 41-
48 psi).
'01-02 models: 320-370 kPa (3.3-3.8 kgf/cm2, 48-
54 psi).
Ifthe pressure is OK and the engine is running,
go to step 8. If the engine is not running, repair
the cause, then continue this test.
8. With the engine running, reconnect the vacuum
hose, and read the gauge again.
The pressure should be:
'98-00 models: 220-270 kPa (2.25-:2.75 kgf/cm2,
32-40 psi).
'01-02 models: 260-310 kPa (2.7-3.2 kgf/cm2, 38-
46 psi).
If the fuel pressure is OK, the test is complete. Go
to step 10.
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pressure
regulator again while you watch the pressure
gauge. The pressure should rise when you
disconnect the hose.
If the pressure did not rise, replace the fuel
pressure regulator for '98-99 models (see page
11-93) orfor '00-02 models (see page 11-94), and
recheck the fuel pressure.
If the pressure rose, and all your readings were
within spec, go to step 10.
If the pressure rose, but your readings were out
of spec, check for these problems:
- If the pressure is too low, check for a clogged
fuel filter and for leaks in the fuel lines .
- If the pressure is too high, check for a pinched
or clogged fuel return hose or line .
10. Reconnect the vacuum hose, remove the pressure
gauge, and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper with
a new washer.Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to
22 Nm (2.2kgfm, 16Ibfft).
NOTE: Disassemble and clean the fuel pressure
gauge attachment thoroughly after use.
11-91
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, or deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
37Nm
11-92 BACK
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
'98-99 models:
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake
manifold.
89).
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return
hose (8).
E
4. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel
pressure regulator (D).
5. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and
6. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail.
Turn it by hand until stops.
7. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)
counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.
/A
~
8. Tighten the locking nut to 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 22
Ibfft).
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring .
When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
(cont'd)
11-93
BACK
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
'00-02 models:
89).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return
hose (B).
A
B
3. Loosen the locking nut (e), and remove the fuel
pressure regulator (D).
4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and
5. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel joint.
Turn it by hand until stops.
11-94
6. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)
counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.
7. Tighten the locking nut to 29 Nm (3.0 kgfm, 22
Ibfft).
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring .
When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
BACK
Fuel Gauge Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer
to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-60).
LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnectthe
5. Measure voltage between the fuel pump 5P
ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5
and 8V.
If the voltage is as specified, go to step 6 .
If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- an open in the YELjBLU or BLK wire.
7. Install a 2 Q resistor between the fuel pump 5P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2, then turn the
JUMPER
WIRE
(BlK)
2Q RESISTOR
(VEL/BLU)
8. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts
moving toward the "F" mark.
If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at
all, replace the gauge.
Ifthe gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending
unit, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-129).
NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer
reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so
may damage the fuel gauge.
The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, so
the fuel level is continuously indicated even
when the ignition switch is OFF.
The fuel gauge pointer moves more slowly than
a bimetal type.
11-95
BACK
Intake Air System
INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
Test, page 11-103
11-96
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-97
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-102
BACK
,....
\
Throttle Body Test
A973X-041-XXXXX
'98-99 models:
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) between the top of
the throttle body at the intake air bypass control
valve, and connect it to a vacuum gauge.
comes on, then let it idle. The gauge should not
indicate any vacuum.
o If the gauge indicates vacuum, check and if
necessary adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-
100), then go to step 3.
o If the gauge does not indicate vacuum, go to
step 3.
3. Open the throttle slightly from idle, and check the
gauge again. The gauge should indicate vacuum.
o If the gauge indicates vacuum, go to step 4.
o If the gauge does not indicate vacuum, check the
throttle body port. If it's clogged, clean it with
carburetor cleaner, then go to step 4.
4. With the engine OFF, check the throttle cable
operation. The cable should operate without
binding or sticking.
o Ifthe cable is OK, go to step 5.
o If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.
If the cable is faulty, reroute it or replace it, and
adjust it (see page 11-100), then go to step 5.
o If there is excessive play in the throttle valve
shaft or if the throttle valve binds at the fully
closed position, replace the throttle body.
o If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 6.
6. Check for clearance between the throttle stop screw
and the throttle lever at the fully closed position.
If there is any clearance, replace the throttle body
(see page 11-101). Do not adjust the throttle stop
screw.
(cont'd)
11-97
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test (cont'd)
'00-02 models:
NOTE:
Do not adjust the throttle stopscrew. It is preset at the
factory .
Ifthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs), refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-3).
1. With the engine off, check the throttle cable
operation. The cable should move without binding
or sticking.
If the cable operates OK, go to step 2.
Ifthe cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.
If the cable is faulty, reroute it or replace it and
adjust it (see page 11-100), then go to step 2.
If there is excessive play in the throttle valve
shaft, or any binding in the throttle valve at the
fully closed position, replace the throttle body.
If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 3.
3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
(DLC).
5. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. There
should be about 10% when the throttle is fully
closed and about 90% when the throttle is fully
opened.
If the throttle position is correct, the throttle body
isOK.
If the throttle position is not correct, replace the
throttle body.
11-98
BACK
ement R I ..# )
ep acement
AIR CLEANER HOUSING
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
r
11-99
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Cable Adjustment
2. Hold the throttle link (A) to the throttle lever (8).
There should be no clearance.
3. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable
deflection (A) should be 10-12 mm (3/8-1/2 in.)
4. If deflection is not within spec (10-12 mm, 3/8-
1/2 in.) loosen the locknut (8), turn the adjusting nut
(C) until the deflection is as specified, then
retighten the locknut.
5. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle
valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
11-100
BACK
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
NOTE:
Do not adjust the throttle stop screw.
After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-54) and the throttle cable (see page 11-100).
The TP sensor is not removable.
'98-99 models:
MAP SENSOR
THROTILE CABLE
/
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE
~ 2 2 N m
~ 12.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf.ft)
TPSENSOR
lAC VALVE
'00-02 models:
SENSOR
THROTTLE CABLE
/
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE
Nm
TPSENSOR
r
lAC VALVE
11-101
BACK
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Disassembly IReassembly
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models:
11-102
TPSENSOR
O-RING
Replace.
TPSENSOR
O-RING
Replace.

(0.21 kgfm, 1.5 Ibfft)
IDLE ADJUSTING SCREW
O-RING
Nm (0.35 kgfm, 2.5Ibfft)
2.1Nm
(0.21 kgfm, 1.5 Ibfft)
IDLE ADJUSTING SCREW
O-RING
_ Nm (0.35 kgfm, 2.5Ibfft)
BACK
Intake Air Bypass Control Valve Test
Vacuum pump gauge, 0-30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
'98-99 models:
no load (in Park or neutral position) until the
2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from the intake duct,
and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
A
A973X-041-XXXXX
3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure
the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm
changes.
If the vacuum reading does not change, check for
these problems:
Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air
bypass control system vacuum lines .
A cracked or damaged intake air bypass control
valve.
'00-02 models:
1. Start the engine. then let it idle.
NOTE: Engine coolant temperature must be below
104F (40C).
2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from the intake duct,
and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
A
\
A973X-041-
XXXXX
~ !l\
the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm
changes.
If the vacuum reading does not change, check for
these problems:
bypass control system vacuum lines.
A cracked or damage intake air bypass control
valve .
4. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park
or neutral position) until the radiator fan comes on,
then let it idle.
the vacuum gauge reading does not change as the
rpm changes.
If the vacuum reading changes, check for these
problems:
bypass control system vacuum lines.
A cracked or damage intake air bypass control
valve.
11-103
BACK
PCVSystem
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and
connections for leaks and restrictions.
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models:
B
11-104
B
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the
PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
fingers or pliers.
Ifthere is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
'98-99 models:
A
'00-02 models:
A
BACK
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO-WAY VALVE
Test, page 11-159
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
Test, page 11-160
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
11-105
BACK
BACK
Special Tools ................................................... 14-2
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-3
DTCTroubleshooting Index ............................ 14-7
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-8
System Description .................................... 14-18
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-64
Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-93
Interlock System Troubleshooting
Shift Lock System Circuit ......................... 14-96
Key Interlock System Circuit ...................... 14-99
Road Test ....................................................... 14-101
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-103
Pressure Tests ................................................ 14-104
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve-
ShiftSolenoidValveATest .................... 14-106
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve-
Shift Solenoid Valve A Replacement ........ 14-106
Shift Solenoid Valves Band C Test ............... 14-107
Sl1ift Solenoid Valves Band C
Replacement ............................................... 14-107
Valves A and B Test .................................... 14-108
Valves A and B Replacement ..................... 14-109
Speed Sensor Replacement ......................... 14-110
Replacement ............................................... 14-111
Replacement ............................................... 14-111
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-112
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-113
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-114
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-121
ATF Cooler Flushing ....................................... 14-127
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement ................... 14-128
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-129
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-130
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-132
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-133
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-136
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-139
Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-140
Transmission Range Switch
Replacement ............................................... 14-141
Indicator Input Test ........................................ 14-143
Indicator Bulb Replacement .......................... 14-144
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-146
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 14-147
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test .............. 14-149
ShiftLockSolenoidTest ................................ 14-149
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-150
Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-150
Outline of V6 Model Change
The B7XA automatic transmission has been added.
End Cover Removal ....................................... 14-151
Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment .......... 14-153
End Cover and Idler Gears Instllation ........... : .......... 14-195
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal ................ 14-154
Bearing Replacement ..................................... 14-156
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation ............ 14-192
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal ................ 14-157
Valve Body Repair .......................................... 14-159
Valve Body Valve Installation ........................ 14-160
Main Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection and Reassembly ....................... 14-161
ATF Pump Inspection ..................................... 14-163
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection and Reassembly ...................... 14-164
Servo Body Disassembly,
Inspection and Reassembly ...................... 14-165
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-166
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer
Installation ................................................... 14-190
Mainshaft Bearing/Oil Seal
Replacement .............................................. .
Countershaft Bearing Replacement .........
Secondary Shaft Bearing Repacement
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
14-167
14-168
14-168
and Reassembly ........................................ 14-169
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection ............. 14-170
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement ........ 14-171
Countershaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-172
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub,
3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement ........ 14-173
Replacement ............................................... 14-175
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-176
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection ........ 14-177
Replacement .............................................. 14-179
Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-180
Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-183
Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-185
AfT Differential
Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-201
Final Driven Gear/Carrier Replacement .................. 14-202
Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-202
Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-203
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement ............... 14-204
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ............... 14-205
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description
CD 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder
07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 Seal Driver Attachment
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly
*G) 07 HAC-PK40 1 02 Housing Puller

07HAJ-PK40201 Preload Inspection Tool
07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment
(j) 07 JAD-PH80400 Pilot, 28 x 30 mm
07 LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm
** 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment
> 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
@ 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
@ 07 NAD-PX40 1 00 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm
@ 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set
@ 07WAZ-002010A SCS Service Connector (DLC)
@ 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment
@ 07406-0020400 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set W/Panel
***@ 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm
@ 077 46-00 10300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm
@ 077 46-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm
@ 077 46-00 10600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm
077 46-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D.
@ 077 49-00 1 0000 Driver
@ 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment
* If the top arm is too short, replace It with 07SAC-POZ01001.
** 07HAE-PL501 01 may be used to substitute one of these tools.
*** Must be used with commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer.
A

I ....
..
. I ~ ~ ~
(1) ~
CD

14-2
~ . \ \
~

@
@
~
~ f
aty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

(!)
(O\'
, /
\ -=-- ,
, ,
_ .. _.
BACK
r General Troubleshooting Information
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester/Scan Tool
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the indicator in the gauge assembly will
blink. When the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester as shown, the scan tool or tester will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
(16P)
HONDA PGM TESTER or
OBD II SCAN TOOL
/
If the indicator or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this procedure
1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and observe the DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, AfT DTCs, and freeze data.
DTC P0700). DTC P0700 means there is one or more AfT DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit ofthe PCM.
5. Get the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets.
6. Reset the memory with the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
recheck for DTCs. If the AfT DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index on page 14-7. If the DTC does not
return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight,
and then go to step 8.
8. Enter the radio code, reset the radio preset stations, and set the clock.
(cont'd)
14-3
BACK
How to Check for DTCs
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the indicator in the gauge assembly will usually
blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may come on. When the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to
the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the indicator will blink the Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
When the indicator has been reported on, connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the ignhion switc
ON (II), select Honda Systems, and then the SCS mode, then observe the indicator.

Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After
determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
Short blink (once)

Long blink Short blinks (five times)
lfliUlnn I

If the indicator or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel/emissions DTCs, AfT DTCs, and freeze data.
DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more AfT DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the numbers of the radio station presets.
4. Reset the memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
recheck for DTCs. If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does no return, there was
an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.
14-4
BACK
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital
multimeter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a multi meter (C).
Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
07SAZ-001000A
07SAZ-001000A
(cont'd)
14-5
BACK
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM memory:
Use the aBO II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester .
Remove the BACK UP fuse (7.5 A)(A) from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.
D
This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
2. Disconnect the aBO II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester (C) from the DLC (D).
3. Reset the PCM.
5. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minuites at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).
14-6
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting Index
DTC* ~ Indicator MIL Detection Item Page
D1
- ~
P0715 (15) Blinks ON Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-77)
P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-76)
P0730 (41) OFF ON Shift control system (see page 14-90)
P0740 (40) OFF ON Lock-up control system (see page 14-89)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-72)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-74)
P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-81)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-66)
P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-69)
P1738 (25) OFF OFF 2nd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-85)
P1739 (26) OFF OFF 3rd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-87)
P1753 (1) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-64)
P1768 (16) Blinks ON NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-79)
P1773 (23) Blinks ON NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-83)
The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the indicator indicates when the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester.
NOTE: Codes P0780 (45), P1750 (46), and P1751 (47) are applied to the '00-02 models.
14-7
BACK
These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the indicator to blink. If the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) was reported ON orthe indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if
the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the following chart, check the probable causes(s) for it, in the sequence listed,
until you find the problem.
When you turn the A problem in the indicator Check the indicator circuit (see page 14-93).
ignition switch ON (II), circuit
the indicator comes
on and stays on or
never comes on at
all
Shift lever cannot be A problem in shift lock Check interlock system - shift lock system circuit (see
moved from the [f] system of interlock system page 14-96).
pushing on the brake
pedal
Ignition key cannot be A problem in key interlock Check interlock system - key interlock system circuit
moved from ACC (I) system of interlock system (see page 14-99).
position to LOCK (0)
pushing the ignition
key with the shift lever
in the [f] position
14-8
BACK
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
move in any gear adjustment ATF cooler lines.
4. ATF pump worn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
5. Regulator valve stuck or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
spring worn symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
6. ATF strainer clogged a high pitched squeak.
7. Mainshaft worn or Measure line pressure.
damaged Ifthe strainer is clogged, find the damaged
8. Final gears worn or components that caused debris.
damaged Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear.
9. Transmission-to-engine If the differential pinion gears are worn, replace
assembly error the differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
10. Axle disengaged thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush the
torque converter, cooler, and lines.
Install the main seal flush with the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in [!] 1. 1st accumulator defective Inspect 1st clutch pressure.
and [RJ, but not n ~ 2. 1st gears worn or damaged Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
~ or III position 3. 1st clutch defective assembly for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
(cont'd)
14-9
BACK
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (co nt' d)
Vehicle moves in ~ 1. Shift solenoid valve A Check the 00 indicator indication, and check for
~ / I l [RJ, but not in defective loose connectors. Inspect the a-rings, and check the
00 position 2. Shift valve A defective shift solenoid valve for seizure.
3. 2nd accumulator defective Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
4. 2nd gears worn or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the clutch piston and a-rings. Check the
5. 2nd clutch defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance
Vehicle moves in ~ 1. Shift fork shaft stuck Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure.
~ 00, /Il, but not in 2. Modulator valve defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
[RJ position 3. Reverse CPC valve shaft.
defective If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
4. 4th accumulator defective aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
5. 4th clutch defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
6. Reverse gears worn or replace the torque converter.
damaged Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the
reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are
worn or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking,
grinding, or whirring noises, also replace the
mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.
If the 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If
the ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is
dented. The a-ring under the guide is probably worn.
Replace the mainshaft ifthe bushing for the 3rd and
4th clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th
clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace
the end cover.
and a-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
clearance. Ifthe clearance is out oftolerance, inspect
them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
with the clutch end plate.
14-10
BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
flares on starting off 2. Shift cable broken or out of leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
i n ~ a n d ~ adjustment ATF cooler lines.
positions: 3. ATF pump worn or binding Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Stall speed high in ~ 4. Regulator valve stuck or transmission control shaft.
~ [II, and m spring worn Check line pressure.
positions 5. ATF strainer clogged Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
6. Torque converter check converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
valve defective symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
pitched squeak.
flares on starting off adjustment transmission control shaft.
i n ~ a n d ~ 2. 1 st cl utch defective Check 1 st clutch pressure.
positions: Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
Stall speed high in ~ spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
~ and m positions clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
flares on starting off adjustment transmission control shaft.
in [II position: 2. 2nd clutch defective Check 2nd clutch pressure.
Stall speed high in [II Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
position spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
Poor acceleration; 4th clutch defective Check 4th clutch pressure.
flares on starting off Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
in [HJ position: and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
Stall speed is in damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
specification in ~ clearance. If the clearance is out oftolerance, inspect
[II, and m positions, the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
but high in [HJ the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
position them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-11 BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. Torque converter clutch Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Stall speed low solenoid valve defective
2. Torque converter one-way
clutch defective
3. Engine output low
defective
defective
Engine idle vibration 1. Low ATF level Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
2. Torque converter clutch no good, adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
solenoid valve defective engine section of this service manual.
3. Drive plate defective or Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for
transmission misassembed leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
4. Engine output low ATF cooler lines.
defective
6. ATF pump worn or binding
defective
Vehicle moves in [HJ 1. Excessive ATF Check ATF level, and drain ATF if necessary.
position 2. Foreign material in Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
separator plate orifice and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
3. 1st clutch defective damage. Inspectthe clutch end plate-to-top disc
4. 2nd clutch defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
5. 3rd clutch defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
6. 4th clutch defective the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
7. Clutch clearance incorrect them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
8. Needle bearing seized up, plate clearance.
worn, or damaged Check for clutch pressure in neutral.
9. Thrust washer seized up,
worn, or damaged
14-12
BACK
Late shift from IHl 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
position to and defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
positions 2. AfT clutch pressure control shift solenoid valve for seizure.
5. Shift fork shaft stuck If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. CPC valve A stuck aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. Ifthe ATF pump is
7. Foreign material in OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
separator plate orifice replace the torque converter.
8. Shift valve C defective Check 1st clutch pressure.
9. Servo control valve Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
10. 1st accumulator defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
11. 1st check ball stuck clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
12. 1st clutch defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
plate clearance.
Late shift from IHl 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
position to lBJ defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
position 2. AfT clutch pressure control shift solenoid valve for seizure.
5. Shift fork shaft stuck Ifthe ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. Foreign material in aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
separator plate orifice OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
7. Reverse CPC valve replace the torque converter.
defective Check 4th clutch pressure.
8. 4th accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
9. 4th clutch defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-13
BACK
No shift Modulator valve defective Measure line pressure.
Erratic shifting gears: 1. Shift solenoid valve A Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve
Fails to shift in ~ defective for seizure.
position; does not 2. Mainshaft speed sensor Check the ~ indicator indication, and check for
upshift to 4th defective loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
3. Countershaft speed sensor switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
defective replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
4. Shift valve A defective adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
5. Shift valve D defective
Erratic shifting gears: 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the ~ indicator indication, and check for
Fails to shift in ~ and defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
~ positions; does 2. Shift fork shaft stuck shift solenoid valve for seizure.
not upshift to 3rd and 3. Shift valve B defective Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
4th 4. Servo control valve shaft.
defective
Erratic shifting gears: 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the ~ indicator indication, and check for
Fails to shift in ~ ~ defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
and [I] positions; 2. Shift valve B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
starts off in 3rd 3. Shift valve E defective
Excessive shock, or 1. A(f clutch pressure control Check the ~ indicator indication, and check for
flares on all upshifts solenoid valves A and B loose connectors. Inspect the A(f clutch pressure
and downshifts defective control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
2. CPC valve A defective pipes for wear and damage. If the A(f clutch pressure
3. CPC valve B defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. Foreign material in Ifthe ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
separator plate orifice aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump. Ifthe ATF pump is
OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the ~ indicator indication, and check for
flares on 1-2 upshift defective loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
or 2-1 downshift 2. 2nd clutch pressure switch shift solenoid valve for seizure.
defective Check the ~ indicator indication, and check for
3. Foreign material in loose connectors. Check that the outlet is not clogged
separator plate orifice inside of the connector.
4. Shift valve C defective Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
5. 1st accumulator defective Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
6. 2nd accumulator defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
7. 1st check ball stuck clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
8. 2nd check ball stuck is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
9. 1st clutch defective for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
10. 2nd clutch defective or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
14-14
BACK
Excessive shock, or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
or 3-2 downshift 2. 3rd clutch pressure switch shift solenoid valve for seizure.
defective Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
3. Foreign material in Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
separator plate orifice and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
4. Shift valve C defective damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
5. 2nd accumulator defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
6. 3rd accumulator defective the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
7. 2nd check ball stuck the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
8. 2nd clutch defective them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
9. 3rd clutch defective plate clearance.
Excessive shock, or 1. Shift solenoid valve C Check the indicator indication, and check for
or 4-3 downshift 2. Foreign material in shift solenoid valve for seizure.
separator plate orifice Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
3. Shift valve C defective If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
4. 3rd accumulator defective aluminum, inspect the ATF pump.lfthe ATF pump is
5. 4th accumulator defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
6. 3rd clutch defective replace the torque converter, and check the stall
7. 4th clutch defective speed.
clearance. If the clearance is out oftolerance, inspect
plate clearance.
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Torque converter housing converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
shift lever positions or transmission housing symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
bearing worn or damaged pitched squeak.
Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary
shaft with the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates
for damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe
for damage and out of round. If the 1 st clutch feed
pipe is damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace
the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st clutch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate more than defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
(cont'd)
14-15 BACK
Vibration in all shift Drive plate defective or Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
lever positions transmission misassembled no good, adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
engine section of the service manual.
Check the stall speed.
Shift lever does not 1. A/T gear position switch Check the indicator indication, and check for
operate smoothly defective or out of loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
adjustment switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
2. Shift cable broken or out of replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
not shift into [f] adjustment transmission control shaft.
position 2. Joint in shift cable and Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
transmission or body worn lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
3. Park mechanism defective install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the
distance between the park pawl and the park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance with the park lever stop.
Lock-up clutch does 1. Torque converter clutch Check the indicator indication, and check for
not disengage solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
2. A/T clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
solenoid valves A and B pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure
defective
defective
defective
defective
14-16
BACK
not operate smoothly solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
3. Lock-up clutch piston Center all engine mounts.
defective
valve defective
defective
defective
defective
not engage solenoid valve defective loose connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes
solenoid valves A and B for wear and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. Mainshaft speed sensor
defective
4. Countershaft speed sensor
defective
defective
valve defective
defective
S. Lock-up control valve
defective
AfT gear position 1. Transmission range switch Check the indicator indication, and check for
indicator does not defective or out of loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
indicate shift lever adjustment switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
positions 2. Shift cable broken or out of replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
Speedometer does Countershaft speed sensor Check the indicator indication, and check for
not operate defective loose connectors.
14-17 BACK
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
automatic transmission which provides 4 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft. The
mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral with the
4th gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive gear
is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd and
idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center,
providing 4th gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector moved. The gears on the mainshaft and the
secondary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted from the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the
countershaft to provide ~ 00, [I] and [RJ positions.
Electronic Control
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo
body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and 3rd and 4th
accumulators. The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid from
the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive
fluid from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B while
receiving input signal from various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the
positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift smoothly between lower gear and higher gear. This
pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In ~ position (3rd and 4th), and ~ position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
the timing ofthe lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of
the transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
14-18
BACK
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions: [f] PARK, [HJ REVERSE, [NJ NEUTRAL, ~ 1 st through 4th gear ranges, ~ 1st through
3rd gear ranges, [II 2nd gear, and [j] 1st gear.
Position Description
[f] PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches released.
[HJ REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.
[NJ NEUTRAL All clutches released.
~ R I V E General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
(1stthrough 4th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
~ R I V E Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
(1st through 3rd) driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1 st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
[II SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear; does not shift up or down.
[I] FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in [f] and [NJ positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (AfT) Gear Position Indicator
The AIT gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look
down at the console.
(cont'd)
14-19
BACK
Clutches
The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle ofthe secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rdClutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
14-20
BACK
Transmission Sectional View
PITOT FLANGE
('00-02 models)
LUBRICATION
PITOTPIPE
('00-02 models)
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR
2ND CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
4TH GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
PISTON
111 .....---_ DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
NTERSHAFT
3RDGEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
(cont'd)
14-21 BACK
Power Flow
POSITION PART
TORQUE 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RDGEAR 4TH REVERSE PARK
CONVERTER 1ST CLUTCH 2ND 3RD GEAR CLUTCH GEAR GEAR
CLUTCH CLUTCH
(f]
0
x x x x x x
0
[RJ
0
x x x x
0 0
x
IHl 0
x x x x x x x
1ST 0 0
x x x x x x
2ND 0 x 0
x x x x x
3RD 0
x x
0
x x x x
4TH 0
x x x
0 0
x x
1ST 0 0
x x x x x x
2ND 0
x
0
x x x x x
3RD 0
x x 0
x x x x
II]
0
x
0
x x x x x
[I]
0 0 x x x x x x
O:Operates
X :Doesn't operate
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.
The 4th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The idler gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft
The final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.
The 1st gear, 3rd gear, 2nd gear, and park gear are splined with the countershaft and rotate with the countershaft.
The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined with the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
The idler gear rotates freely from the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft
The 1st gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
The 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
The idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft and rotates with the secondary shaft.
14-22
BACK
[f] Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
[N] Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged with the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, when the shift lever is shifted in [N] position from position. The countershaft reverse gear is engaged when
shifted from [RJ position.
MAINS HAFT IDLER GEAR
~ ~ F=1J---'------=-----'
/
COUNTERSHAFT
~
SECONDARY SHAFT
/
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
~
(cont'd)
14-23
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
In or position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
or Position in 1st gear and II] Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft.
The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1 st gear drives the countershaft 1 st gear and the countershaft.
MAINSHAFT

COUNTERSHAFT

COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
14-24
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
BACK
or Position in 2nd gear and [g] Position
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
MAINS HAFT
IDLER GEAR
MAINSHAFT

COUNTERSHAFT

SECONDARY
SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
14-25
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
~ or Position in 3rd gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
MAINSHAFT
~
COUNTERSHAFT
~
/
SECONDARY
SHAFT
14-26
TORQUE CONVERTER
3RD CLUTCH MAINSHAFT
\ ~ G ~ R
,...--,"'i:t.r.r.'i"I /
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
BACK
~ Position in 4th gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range ~ , ~ , 00 and [II position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
MAINSHAFT
---------
C O U ~
MAINSHAFT
4TH GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
/
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
------FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
14-27
BACK
Power Flow (cont'd)
[RJ Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft (reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the [RJ position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
TORQUE CONVERTER
4TH CLUTCH
/
SERVO VALVE
REVERSE SELECTOR
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-28
BACK
Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists ofthe Powertrain Control Model (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Throttle Position Sensor
Signal
1
1
Engine Coolant Temperature '1-__ -+1
Sensor Signal ,
INTERLOCK lJ:-l
- CONTROL UNIT I L J I ~ l ~ l H
8-J
D4
D3
2
PCM
PGM-FI
Control System
AfT Control System
Shift Control
Lock-up Control
1-+-----11 Data Link Connector
1+1----1: Shift Solenoid Valve A
I
1
I
Shift Solenoid Valve B
1
1-+-1----...,1 Shift Solenoid Valve C
1 Automatic Transaxle Clutch I
1+1---.--1
1
Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A
, Automatic Transaxle Clutch
1+1--.----7-1, Pressure Control Solenoid
ValveB
1
1
2nd Clutch Pressure
Switch
I
1 3rd Clutch Pressure I
~ / IL--Sw_itc_h ___ ----'
I-+-I----...,J Torque Converter Clutch
l Solenoid Valve
I
rl ~ Indicator
'------------' 1-+ __ -1' Mainshaft Speed Sensor I
r------..., , Signal
U Self-Diagnosis Signal If-----il+i Self-Diagnosis '-------------'
I 1 Function
'-----------' L _____ --' 1-+ __ -1' Countershaft Speed I
, Sensor Signal J
(cont'd)
14-29
BACK
Electronic Controls Location
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
n
EflU
1
\ POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE IPCMI
PARKING PIN SWITCH
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
14-30
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
SOLENOID VALVE!
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
A!T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
MAINS HAFT SPEED
SENSOR
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
BACK
Shift Control
Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly
determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors, and actuates the shift solenoid valves
A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System to controls shifting in and ~ positions while the
vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C is shown in the table below.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves
A B C
~ ~ Shifting from [f!] position ON ON ON
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON OFF OFF
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON
~ Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF
[I] 2nd ON ON OFF
[II 1st OFF ON ON
[ID Shifting from [f] and [f!] position OFF ON ON
Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF
Reverse inhibit OFF ON ON
[f] Park OFF ON OFF
[f!] Neutral OFF ON OFF
NOTE: For a description ofthe reverse Inhibit mode, refer to page 14-56.
Lock-up Control
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON, the condition of lock-up starts. The AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure, and apply the
pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd, and
4th gear in ~ and in 3rd gear in positions.
(cont'd)
14-31
BACK
Grade Logic Control System
How it works:
The PCM compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the
countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, and the shift level position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or
descending a slope, or reducing speed.
SENSORS/SWITCHES SIGNALS DETECTED PCM
-
H Countershaft Speed \-
Sensor
-- Judgement of Controlling Area
H Throttle Position
\-
--
1/1
Sensor
Driving Resistance e-
I:
I I
0
!!
"CI
Detection of I:
Calculation Calculation 0
standard
CJ
of actual
acceleration
of decelera-
a!
acceleration tion
I: (in Memory)

I I
Q
H Engine Coolant
Coolant Temperature
Temperature Sensor Calculation of gradient
I
I I
H Transmission Range
or Position
r-
I I
Switch
Selection of Shifting Mode
i---
Normal Mode (Flat road mode)
Ascending Mode
Fuzzy Logic
Descending Mode
Gradual Mode
Steep Descending ode
Deceleration Mode
I
I
Automatic 4 Speeds
14-32
BACK
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in and positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
NOTE:
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable the PCM's
fuzzy logic to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
Fuzzy logic is a form of artificial intelligence that lets computers respond to changing conditions much like a human
mind would.
Descending Control
'"
c
'c
II
g-
Il

100%
o L......J'--L __
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
--: FLAT ROAD MODE
- - - - _. : GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
_ .. _ .. - : STEEP ASCENDING MODE
_ : 3RD4TH SHIFTING CHARACTERISTICS
CONTROL AREA
62 mph Vehicle speed
(100 km/h,
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in and positions, the shift-up speed from 3rd to
4th gear and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to
widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking from the deceleration lock-up,
achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are two descending modes with different 3rd gear
driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the
vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will
downshift to 3rd gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100%
'"
c
'c
II
CI.
0

50
2

0
Deceleration Control
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
--: FLAT ROAD MODE
- - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
- .. - .. - : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
62 mph Vehicle speed
(100km/h,
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope with
upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
14-33
BACK
IGNITION SWITCH
ATTERY
IGI
+

-V--J'
-v
l
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
PGMFI
MAIN
RELAY
-
-
I ENGINE COOLANT I--
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
I
DATAUNK
I-
CONNECTOR
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
B2

BI

B21
C28
C27
18
C26
AID
A32
+B --------0
BRAKE UGH; --=-----..J
B20
1 B22
*
IGNITION SWITCH
IGI
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
I
Aff GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
PCM
I
PGI
I
PG2 I
I
I
IGPI
I
I
I
IGP2
I
I
VBU
I
?
VCC2
TPS
I
SG2
?
I
PGMFI
I
ECT CONTROL
I
SYSTEM
6
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
SCS
STOPSW
LGI
LG2
05
VB SOL
A9
VSSOUT

00
TRANSMISSION
P
I
RANGE SWITCH R os
Ir
ATPR
N
D. 09
ATPD.
0, 08
ATPD,
2 014
ATP2
I 015
AlP1

NP
D. INDICATOR 1
@I
AI.
D41ND
PCM Connactor Terminal Locations
A (32P) B(25P) C(31P)
14-34
LSA+
B17
Aff CLUTCH PRESSUR
CONTROL SOLENOID
B8
VALVE A
LSA
LSB+
B25
Aff CLUTCH PRESSUR
CONTROL SOLENOID
B18
VALVE B
LSB
07
SHA
SHIFT SOLENOID
J-VALVEA
SHB
02
SHIFT SOLENOID
J-VALVEB
SHC
03
SHIFT SOLENOID
J-VALVEC
LC 01
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
J-VALVE
011
NM
MAINSHAFT
'"'-' SPEED SENSOR
NMSG
012
NC
010
COUNTERSHAFT
'"'-' SPEED SENSOR
NCSG
016
ILU
A28 I MULTIPLEX CONTROL I
I UNIT (DRIVER'S)
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
OP2SW
B14
3RD CLUTCH

PRESSURE SWITCH
OP3SW
CRS
A5
I CRUISE CONTROL I
I UNIT
Al1 I
I
ATSFTP
I
BSUUNIT
(01 model)
o (16P)
BACK
The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals related to the AfT control
system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 11.

-r-- r-
f5l
V/2
3 4 5 6
V
891OVI12
345 6 7
8"1 2V /
567 8 9 10 1 2 3/
1
12
1
13
1415 16 17 18 1920 21/ 23
24J
9 10 1112 13 1415
/
17
18J / kt" / 1/
16 17 1819 20 21/ 6 7 8 9 10 111121
2526 27 2829 30
V
32
L20
2122 23 24 25
V V
25 26 27 28 29 30
/
13 1415 16
'--- '--'--- -'-- '--
A (32P) B (25P) C (31P) D (16P)
Number
A5 BLU/GRN CRS Downshift signal input from When cruise control is used: Pulsing signal
cruise control unit
A9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT Vehicle speed signal detected Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
from countershaft speed
sensor
A10 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
service check signal connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected with Honda PGM
tester: 0 V
A14 GRN/BLK D41ND D4 indicator light control When ignition switch is first turned ON (II):
Battery voltage for two seconds
In position: Battery voltage
A28 WHT/RED ILU Interlock control When ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
A32 WHT/BLK BKSW Brake pedal position switch Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
signal output Brake pedal released: 0 V
(cont'd)
14-35 BACK

-;-- r--
Isl
Iml2
3 4 5 6 m 8 9 10 11111 1 2 345 6 7
alll 2V
V
567 8 9 10 1 23/
1
12
1
13
14 1516 17 1819 20 21f2.2 23 241 9 10 1112 13 1415
V
17
181V
V V V V
16 17 18 19 20 21V 6 7 8 9 10
111121
25 26 27 2E 29 30 (31 32
L20 2122 23 24 25
/ V
25 26 27 28 2930 l( 1314 15 16
'-- '--'-- '--'--
--
A (32P) B(25P) C(31P) D(16P)
Number
B2 BlK PG1 Ground
B8 WHT lSA- AfT clutch pressure control
B10 BlK PG2 Ground
B14 BlU/BlK OP2SW AfT 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
('98-99) switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure)
B14 BlU/BlK ATPNP Transmission range switch [f] In [f] and IHI positions: 0 V
('00-02) and IHI positions input In other than [f] and IHI position: Battery
voltage
B17 RED lSA+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
suppl'[Qositive electrode
B18 GRN lSB- AfT clutch pressure control
B20 BRN/BlK lG1 Ground
B21 WHT/YEl VBU Back-up power supply Always battery voltage
B22 BlK lG2 Ground
('98-99)
BRN/BlK
('00-02)
B24 BlU/WHT OP3SW AfT 3rd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
switch signal input (No 3rd clutch pressure)
B25 ORN lSB+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
14-36
BACK
Number
01 VEL LC Torque converter clutch During lock-up conditions: Battery voltage
solenoid valve control During no lock-up condition: 0 V
02 GRN/WHT SHB Shift solenoid valve B control Battery voltage in following positions:
ill, [!] positions.
~ and ~ positions in 1st and 2nd gear
~ IBJ, and [f!) positions
~ and positions in 3rd gear
03 GRN SHC Shift solenoid valve C control Battery voltage in following positions:
ill position
~ and positions in 1st and 3rd gear
[!] position
~ and positions in 2nd gear
04 -- -- Not used
05 BLK/YEL VBSOL Power supply for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
under-dash fuse/relay box)
06 WHT ATPR Transmission range switch [R] In [R] position: 0 V
position input In other than [R] position: Battery voltage
07 BLU/YEL SHA Shift solenoid valve A control Battery voltage in following positions:
[!] position
~ and ~ positions in 2nd and 3rd gear
ill position
~ and ~ positions in 1st gear
(cont'd)
14-37
BACK
,(
-;--
~
f5l
1(1) 234 5 6 m 8 9 10 <1111 1 2 345 6 7
811 1 2'1
V
567 8 9 10 1 23'1
~
13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21i22 23
241 9 10 1112 13 1415
V
17
181V I V V /
16 17 1819 20 21V 6 7 8 9 10111121
25 26 27 2829 30(3 32
L20
2122 23 24 25
I 'I
25 26 27 28 2930
'I
13 14 15 16
"'""- '--"'""- '--'--
-
A (32P) B(25P) C(31P) D(16P)
Number
D8 PNK ATPD3 Transmission range switch In ~ position: 0 V
position input In other than ~ position: Battery voltage
D9 VEL ATPD4 Transmission range switch In position: 0 V
_position inJ!ut In other than p_osition: Battery voltage
D10 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
input When vehicle is stopped: Approx. 0 V
D11 RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
When engine is stopped: Approx. 0 V
D12 WHT NMSG Mainshaft speed sensor
ground
D13 BLU/WHT ATPNP Transmission range switch ~ In ~ and IN] positions: 0 V
('98-99) and IN] positions input In other than ~ and IN] position: Battery
voltage
D13 BLU/BLK OP2SW AfT 2nd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
('00-02) switch signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure)
D14 BLU ATP2 Transmission range switch 00 In 00 position: 0 V
position input In other than 00 position: Battery voltage
D15 BRN ATP1 Transmission range switch [II In [II position: 0 V
position input In other than [II position: Battery voltage
D16 GRN NCSG Countershaft speed sensor
~ o u n d
14-38
BACK
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The
ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve directing
pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves Band C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter
housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the torque
converter housing as an assembly. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
SERVO BODY

ACCUMULATOR BODY

PRESSURE SWITCH
mtf CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
SOLENOID VALVE/
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
(cont'd)
14-39
BACK
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve
E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up
shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main valve body are to switch fluid
pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
MODULATOR VALVE
SHIFTVALVEC
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
SHIFT VALVE D
SHIFT VALVE E
RELIEF VALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
COOLER CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up timing valve and the lock-up control valve.
REGULATOR VALVE
LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
14-40
BACK
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through Band B'.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the
left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and
the amount of fluid from B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line
pressure.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the illustration below.
From ATF PUMP
j
To LUBRICATION
t
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction ofthe arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
STATOR
REGULATOR VAL
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR SHAFT ARM
(cont'd)
14-41
BACK
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, shift valve A, shift valve B, CPC valves A and B,
and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.
SHIFT VALVE A
SHIFT VALVE B
ACCUMULATOR PISTON
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and 2nd
accumulators and the lubrication check valve.
ACCUMULATOR BODY 1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON
14-42
BACK
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure
to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and
switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulated the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply
the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode.
The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the
port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted.
Engaging the clutch with line pressure happens when shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure atthe parts is as follows:
PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF
NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE
1 LINE 5H CPC B or LINE 57 LS B
3 LINE 5J CPC B or LINE 58 LS Aor LS B
3' LINE 5K CPC B or LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
3" LINE 5K' CPC B or LINE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER
4 LINE 6 MODULATE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
4' LINE SA SHA 91' TORQUE CONVERTER
4" LINE SB SH B 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
4A CPCA SC SHC 93 ATF COOLER
4B CPCB LA LC 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
5A CPCA 9 LINE 95 LUBRICATION
5D CPCB 10 1ST CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION
5B CPCAor LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
5E CPCAor LINE 25 LINE 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
5F CPCAor LINE 30 3RDCLUTCH 99 SUCTION
5F' CPCAor LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH X DRAIN
5C CPC B or LINE 41 4TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5G CPC B or LINE 56 LSA AX AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
SH: Shift Solenoid pressure
LS: AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure
LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
14-43
BACK
!Nl Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is moved to the left side.
The shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and the shift valve B remains in the right side.
The shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at shift valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the
modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift solenoid valves and
the NT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
14-44
BACK
r
Position; 1st gear shifting from IHI position
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and C ON when shifting to position from IHI. Shift solenoid valve B
remains ON. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of the shift valve Cis
released, then the shift valve C is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA)
in the left side of the shift valve A is released, then shift valve A is moved to the right side. The AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A regulates LS A pressure (56) and applies it to CPC valve A. Line pressure (1) becomes line
pressure (4) at the manual valve, and flows to shift valve C and CPC valve A. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A
pressure (4A) and passes through shift valve C, A, and B, then CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at
shift valve B. 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch is engaged with pressure of the
CPC pressure mode. Line pressure (4) passes through shift valve A and B, then stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
ATlCOO&.U '------'
AlT ClUtcH MESSUM
CONTIIOL SDUNOID
VALVE.
(cont'd)
14-45
BACK
Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves Band C remain ON. SH A pressure (SA) is applied
to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is moved to the left side. This movement switches the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 1st
clutch is engaged securely. CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
'NO
Ancoou" '-___ J
14-46
BACK
Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. Shift solenoid
valves 8 and C remain ON. Then shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift
valve A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The
PCM also controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and 8 apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and 8. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC 8 pressure (48) at the CPC valve
8, and CPC 8 pressure passes through shift valves C, 8, and A, to become 2nd clutch pressure. The 1 st and 2nd
clutches are engaged with the CPC pressure mode.
NOTE:
'00
AlT ClUTC" ","HUM.
CONTaOL SOLENOID
(cont'd)
14-47
BACK
Position: Driving in 2nd gear
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC A
pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turnd OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the
right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC
pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC
B pressure (50) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '0002 models are similar.
14-48
BACK
Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also
control AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A
remains ON, and C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and SH B pressure (SB) is applied to the right
side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at the CPC valve A. The CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 3rd clutch
pressure (30) at shift valve B, and flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by
switching the position of shift valve B.
NOTE:
TOAQlE CONYIATER
...
II
I
_liB rT Juo I
.................. ;,;!I I
"
(cant' d)
14-49
BACK
[Q;I Position: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B
pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in the CPC valve B
releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC)
in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged
securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.
NOTE:
14-50
AfT ClUTCH I'I'lIS5U1'lf
CONTIIiOlIOllNOID
BACK
Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also
controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valve B
remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left
side of shift valve A. Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch line pressure and CPC pressure. Line
pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes 4th clutch pressure (41)
at shift valve D, and flows to the 4th clutch via the manual valve. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure
mode by switching the position of shift valve A.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-51
BACK
Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A{f clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and 8 remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the 3
rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of
shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
The CPC 8 pressure (58) changes to line pressure (58) at shift valve C, and flows to the 4th clutch via shift valve 8, shift
valve C, shift valve D, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching
the position of shift valve C, and 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC 8 pressure (5D) stops at shift valve A.
NOTE:
... .RO
ACCUMULATO" ACCUMULATOIt
14-52
BACK
00 Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and the shift valve A is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and the shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C is moved to the left side.
The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve
A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and
2nd clutch is engaged.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-53
BACK
rn Position
The PCM the shift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift
solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is moved to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and shift valve 8 is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (58) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve 8 via shift valve A,
and becomes 1 st clutch pressure (10). 1 st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1 st clutch, then 1 st clutch is engaged.
NOTE:
14-54
BACK
[R) Position: Shifting to [R) position from or lID position
Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the
reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40). The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and 4th clutch is engaged with the reverse CPC
pressure mode.
NOTE:
AlT CLUTCH 'I'tlS5URt
CONTIIIOl SOUNOIO
(cont'd)
14-55 BACK
[RJ Position: Driving in reverse gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and 8 remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is same as shifting to [RJ position,
and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
NOTE:
AITCLUTCH ""fSSUM:
CON'Tl'lOL SOLENOID
14-56
BACK
[tI Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC
valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo
valve. Line pressure (3') passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-02 models are similar .
1STACCUMULAlOlt
...
ACCUMULATCM
..." CLUTCN rN.5UIlt
cornaoa. IOUHOID
V"'-VlI
(cont'd)
14-57
BACK
Lock-up System
In position (3rd and 4th), and position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back ofthe torque converter
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of
the transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.
General Operation
1. Operation (clutch on)
With the lock-up clutch on, fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is
drained off, and the converter fluid exerts pressure through the piston against the torque converter cover. As a
result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the
vehicle in direct drive.
I Power flow I
The power flows by way of:
E'lgin.
plate
Tlrque converter cover
LIck-UP piston
DTmper spring
Turbine
I
Mainshaft
2. Operation (clutch off)
LOCKUP PISTON
/
TORQUE CONVERTER
COVER
DAMPER SPRING
To A TF cooler
MAINSHAFT
With the lock-up clutch off, fluid flows in the reverse of CLUTCH ON. As a result, the lock-up piston moves away
from the converter cover, and torque converter lock-up is released.
14-58
I Power flow I
E'lgine
plate
Torque converter cover
I

Turbine
I
Mainshaft
TURBINE
PUMP
TORQUE CONVERTER

To ATF cooler
MAINS HAFT
BACK
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA)
on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the
port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92)
becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up
clutch. The lock-up clutch is OFF.
NOTE:
r r ] J [ ~ ~ = ~ ~ ~ MODULATORPRIESSURE
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
ATfCOOLER
LOCKUP SHIFT
VALVE
(cont'd)
14-59
BACK
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the
left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side ofthe torque converter.
Torque converter pressure (92) flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM
also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter
pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) from the
lock-up timing valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. LS A or LS B (58) increases, and the lock-up
timing valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch
is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure from the right side of the
torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
NOTE:
14-60
BACK
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to
increase LS A or LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the
lock-up timing valve, and moves them to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure is released
fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
NOTE:
MODULATOR PRESSURE
- LSAOlLS8PRESSURE
COOLER CHECK
VALVE
ATFCOOLER
LOCKUP SHIFT
VALVE
(cont'd)
14-61
BACK
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
UNDERHOOD FUSEIRElAYBOX
No.47 (2OA)
No.41 (100A) No.<12 (50A)
No.54 (4OA) N o . ~ (15A)
WHTNEL
B21
V8U
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
ToSV
IGl
IGNITION SWITCH
No.6 (lSA)
No.9 (7.SA)
No.1 (15A)
DRIVER'S UNDER'[)ASH
FUSEIRELAY BOX
VEUBLK VEUBLK
Bl B9
IGPl IGP2
Tol2V
5V
REGULATOR
BLK
82
PGl
PGM-F1
MAIN
RELAY
WHTNEL --------------
1
~
~ - ~
SOLENOID
2
GRN
-:-
Bl0 G1Dl
PG2
MULTIPLEX CONTROl
UNIT, DRIVER'
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
22
ILU
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
PPOSITION
BLKlYEL
05
VB SOL
Tol2V
POWERTRAIN CONTROl MODULE (PCM)
VSP
OUT
AS
ILlIIWHT
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
No.9 (7.5A)
Y
VEL
ILK
1
G501
14-62
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
B2
811
8181-__ ---'
STARTER
CUT RELAY
-t>
CRUISE
LTBLU CONTROL
UNIT
BACK
--- WHTIYEL ---4r---,
STEERING LOCK
ASSEM8LY
LSAM
88
WHTIYEL
WHTlREO
J,
PARK CfD
PIN
SWITCH
8LK
l.
G501
.,.
LSAP LS8M
817 B18
WHT RED GRN
A (32P)
.,.
8RAKE PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
I
8RN 8LUIGRN
?
LS8P LC SHA SH8
B25 01 07 02
ORN GRf>W/HT
TORQUE SHIFT
CONVERTER SOLENOID
CLUTCH VALVE A
SOLENOID
VALVE
B (25P)
RED WHT BLU
All 011 012 010
ATSFTP NM NMSG NC
PDWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
SHC
D3
GRN BLUIBLK
Gl0l
C(31P)
GRN
016
NCSG
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
r
NGINE
II
THROTTLE
I
~ ~ T U R
POSITION
SENSOR
SENSOR
Y
REDlBLK
r
REOIWHT YEUBLU GRNlBLK
C26
ECT
BlUJWHT
o (16P)
3ROCLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
C28 C27 C18
VCC2 TPS SG2
LGI LG2
820 B22
Gl0l Gl0l
14-63
BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P1753: Problem in Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid Valve Circuit
2. Disconnectthe 8 (25P) and D (16P) connectors from
the PCM.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
';i
LC (VEL)
B(25P)
D (16P)
--
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
81
1 23V
9 10 11 121 314 15/ 17 181 6 7 8 9 10
/20
'--
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
2122 2324 25 1314 15
-
LG2(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
';i
/s there voltage?
16
'--
J
5
l
111121
VES- Repair short to power in the wire between
solenoid valve .
NO-Go to step 5.
14-64
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
LC (VEL)
B(25P)
D (16P)
;---
81 23V
J5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 121 314 15
/ 1718
1
6 7 8 9 10 111121
L 20
"'--
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
2122
'--
23 24 25 1314 15
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
Q
/s the resistance 12- 25Q ?
VES- Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
16
'--
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 1112131415
20 21 22 23 24 25
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG2(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
VES- Go to step 8.
BACK
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
lC (YEll

D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
81
1 23V
9 10 11121 314
1511 17181 6 7 8 9 10
V 20
"--
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
2122 2324 25 1314 15
'--
lG2(BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
Q
16
'--
f5l
111121
solenoid valve .
NO-Go to step 10.
ofthe lock-up control solenoid valve/shift solenoid
valve A connector and body ground.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE/
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR (3P)
=
Is the resistance 12-25Q?
YES-Check for open in the wire between the D1
terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve .
valve/shift solenoid valve A .
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
'Y
B(25P)
""""';-r--
81
r--
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15V 17181 6 7
IL 20
"--
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
2122
.....
2324 25 1314
lG2 (BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
'Y
VB SOL
(BlK/YEl)
0"6.1 I
2 3/ 5
8 9 10111121
15 16
'--
PCM and recheck .
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .
14-65
BACK
OTC P1705: Short in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit
2. Observe the AfT gear position indicator, and shift
each position separately.
Do any indicators stay on when the shift lever is
not in that position?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-The system is OK at this time. Check the wire
harness for damage .
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
Do all gear position indicators go out?
YES- Replace the transmission range switch .
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect the
6. Shift to all positions other than [RI.
7. Measure the voltage between the D6 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
1415 16
ATPRIWHTI
YES-Go to step 8.
gear position indicator, and check for an open in
the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and
body ground (G101). If wires are OK, check for
recheck .
14-66
8. Shift to all positions other than [f] or INJ.
9. Measure ATP NP voltage between these terminals:
'98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20
or B22 .
'00-02 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
or B22.
'98-99 models:
B(25P)
1 2
PCM CONNECTORS
D(16j::::P)::;::::::::;::::::;!
9
'------J ':i. _ l
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
'00-02 models:
9
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
2 3 4 5
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Gotostep 10.
terminal and the transmission range switch, and in
the [f] and INJ position signal wires between the AfT
gear position indicator and the transmission range
switch. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit
10. Shift to all positions other than .
BACK
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
--
al
roo-
23/
f5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15
/
17 lal
6 7 a 9 10
111121
L 20
2122 23 2425 1314 15 16
'--
L....
-
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
ATPD4( VEL)
LG1 ':i.
(BRN/BLK)
':i.
Is there about 5 V?
YES- Go to step 12.
NO - Check for short in the wire between the 09
terminal and the transmission range switch. If wire
is OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck .
12. Shift to all positions other than
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
;--;--
al
roo-
3lL
J5] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2
9 10 11121 314 15
V
17 lal 6 7 a 9 10 111121
~ 2 0
2122 23 24 25 13141 16
L.... L....
LG2(BLK: '98-99) ATPD3 (PN K)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
LG1 ':i.
(BRN/BLK)
':i.
recheck .
(cont'd)
14-67
BACK
14. Shift to all positions other than 00.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
-
r--r--
81 23V
/sl
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15
/
17181 6 7 8 9
10 11 112 1
~ 2
2122 23 24 25 131 415 16
L.- L.-
lG2
ATP2(BLU)
(BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
lG1 '::i.
(BRN/BlK)
'::i.
YES-Go to step 16.
recheck .
16. Shift to all positions other than [II.
14-68
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
-- -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
81
1
2 3V [5
9 10 11121 314 15
/
17181 6 7 8 9 1011112
/20
2122 23 24 25 131415 16
'- '-- '--
lG2 (BlK: '98-99) ATP1 (BRN)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
lG1 '::i.
(BRN/BlK)
'::i.
PCM and recheck .
recheck .
BACK
DTC P1706: Open in Transmission Range
Switch Circuit (no gear position inputs)
1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-
140).
Is the switch OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the transmission range switch .
1 2 345
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the 820 and
822 terminals and ground (G101), or repair poor
ground (G101) .
822 terminals.
B(25P)
PCM CONNECTORS
D(16P)
--
81
-
2 3/
f5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 121 314 15
/
17 181
6 7 8 9 10
111121
L 20
2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
'-- r- '--
-
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
ATPD4(
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there voltage?
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Shift to [RJ position.
YEll
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
--
81
-
23V
f5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15
V
17
1aJ
6 7 8 9 10111 12 1
/20 2122 23 24 25 14 15 16
<--
-
'--
LG2 ATPR(WHT)
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there voltage?
NO-Goto step 9.
9. Shift to [f] or [H] position.
(cont'd)
14-69
BACK
10. Measure ATP NP voltage between these terminals:
'98-99 models: Between terminals 013 and B20
or B22 .
'00-02 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
or B22.
'98-99 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
9
2 3 4 5
20
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
D(16P)
~ r
'00-02 models:
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
Is there voltage?
('98-99) or B14 ('00-02) terminal and the
transmission range switch .
NO-Go to step 11.
14-70
12. Measure the voltage between the 08 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
B(25P)
r--r--
1 2 3
PCM CONNECTORS
D(16P)
-
4 5 678 1 2 3/
f5l
9 10 11121 314 15
/
17 18 6 7 8 9 10111 12 1
li: 20
2122 23 24 25 13141 16
"--
L- L-
lG2(BlK: '98-99) ATPD3(PN K)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
lG1 'Y.
(BRN/BlK)
'Y.
Is there voltage?
NO-Gotostep 13.
14. Measure the voltage betweet1 the 014 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
--
8J
r-
2 3lL
I5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15
/
17 181 6 7 8 9 10
111121
L 20
2122 23 24 25 131 415 16
<-- L- L-
lG2
ATP2 (BLU)
(BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
lG1 'Y.
(BRN/BlK)
'Y.
Is there voltage?
NO-Go to step 15.
BACK
15. Shift to rn position.
822 terminals.
B(25PI
PCM CONNECTORS
D(16PI
-
-,--
81
2 3'/
f5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 12 1 314
15/ 17 181 6 7 8 9 10111 12 1
,/ 20 2122 2324 25 131415 16
"--
L-
--
LG2(BLK: '98-991 ATP 1 (BRNI
(BRN/BLK: '00-021
LG1 ':/..
(BRN/BLKI
':/..
Is there voltage?
PCM and recheck .
14-71
BACK
A Circuit
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SH A (BLU/VEL)
B (25P)
D (16P)
r--r--
81
-
23/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15V 17181 6 7 8 9 10
lL 20
2122 2324 25 13 1 415 16
L.- '-
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Q
/s there voltage?
lil
111121
the D7 terminal and the shift solenoid valve A..
NO - Go to step 5.
14-72
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SH A (BLU/VEL)
B(25P)
D (16P)
r--r--
81
-
23V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 121 314 15V 17
181
6 7 8 9 10
lL 20
2122 2324 25 131 415 16
L.- L.-
LG2(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Q
/s the resistance 12- 25 Q ?
YES-Gotostep 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
["5]
111121
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 1112131415
20 21 22 23 24 25
LG2(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
YES-Go to step 8.
~
BACK
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SH A (BLU/VEL)
B(25P)
D (16P)
r--r---"
al
r-
2 3V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 121 314 15
/
17 1al 6 7 a 9 10
lL 20
2122 23 24 25 131 415 16
"--
....... .......
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Q
f5l
111121
the D7 terminal and shift solenoid valve A..
NO-Go to step 10.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE/
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR (3P)
=
YES-Check for open in the wire between the D7
terminal and shift solenoid valve A..
valve/shift solenoid valve A..
822 terminals.
B (25P)
;--;--
1 2
9 10
PCM CONNECTORS
':i
aJ
r-
3 4 5 6 7 1
11 121 314 15
/
17
181
6 7
VB SOL
(BLK/VEL)
OI16P)
23/ 5
a 9
10111 12 1
lL 20
2122 23 24 25 13 1415 16
"--
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
.......
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
':i
-
PCM and recheck .
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
and the driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box .
14-73 BACK
OTe P0758: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve
B Circuit
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
)L
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B (25P)
.---
81
r-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15/ 171eJ 6 7
/20 2122 2324 25 1314
'-- '--
LG2(BLK: '98-99)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
)L
II D (16P)
2 3V
f5l
8 9 10 111121
15 16
'--
/s there voltage?
the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve 8 .
NO-Go to step 5.
14-74
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B (25P)
liD (16P)
-;--
81
r-
23/
f5l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314
151/ 171eJ 6 7 8 9 10 111121
~ 2
<--
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
2122
-
2324 25 1314 15
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
Q
/s the resistance 12- 25 Q ?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
16
-
terminals and body ground individually.
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 1112131415
232425
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
YES-Go to step 8.
BACK
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the 02 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
Q
SH B IGRN/WHT)
IIDI16P)
B125P)
~ . . . . . . . . . ; .
81
,.....
2 3V
/sl
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15V 17181 6 7 8 9 10111 121
V 20
II'--
LG1
IBRN/BLK)
2122 2324 25 1314 15
'-
LG2IBLK: '98-99)
IBRN/BLK: '00-02)
16
L-.
the 02 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B .
NO-Gotostep 10.
10. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
BCONNECTOR
Is the resistance 12-25 Q?
YES-Check for open in the wires between the 02
terminal and the shift solenoid valve Band
valve B connector and ground (G101) .
NO- Replace the shift solenoid valve B .
12. Measure the voltage between the 05 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
')L
B125P)
-,.......
8J
-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15
V
17181 6 7
lL' 20
II'--
LG1
IBRN/BLK)
2122
'-
2324 25 1314
LG2IBLK: '98-99)
IBRN/BLK: '00-02)
')L
VB SOL
IBLK/YEL)
0)'6P) I
2 3V 5
8 9 10 1 ~ 121
15 16
L-.
Is there approx. battery voltage?
PCM and recheck .
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the 05 terminal
14-75 BACK
DTC P0720: Problem in Countershaft Speed
Sensor Circuit
1. Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
Is the countershaft speed sensor installed
properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Reinstall and recheck .
2. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor 2P
connector.
3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at
the sensor connector.
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the countershaft speed sensor .
14-76
NC(BLU)
=
the D10 and D16 terminals and the countershaft
speed sensor .
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector.
terminals.
NC(BLU)
2 3
6 7 8 9
13 14 15
PCM and recheck .
between the D10 and D16 terminals and the
countershaft speed sensor .
BACK
DTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed
Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn't always mean
there's an electrical problem in the mainshaft or
countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15)
may also indicate a mechanical problem in the
transmission. Any problem causing irregular
countershaft to mainshaft speed difference can cause
this code.
1. Check the mainshaft and countershaft speed
sensor installation.
Are the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensor
installed properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
connector.
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the
sensor connector.
MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the mainshaft speed sensor..
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11
13 1415 16
NM(RED)
the D11 and D12 terminals and the mainshaft speed
sensor .
NO-Goto step 6.
6. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector.
terminals.
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
131415 16
NM(RED)
YES-Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart
for code P0720 (code 9). Check for loose terminal fit
NO - Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
14-77
BACK
connector.
the No.1 terminal ofthe mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
YES-Gotostep 10.
connector.
2 3
6 7
131415
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
WHT
PCM and recheck .
terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor .
14-78
BACK
OTC P1768: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
valve A 2P connector.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
Is the resistance about 5 Q?
YES - Go to step 3.
solenoid valve A..
B8 terminal and the B17 terminal individually.
lSA- (WHT)
2 3 4 5
9 10
20
=
YES - Repair short to ground in the wires between
the B8 and B17 terminals and AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A..
NO-Go to step 5.
valve A connector.
6. Measure the resistance between the B8 and B17
terminals.
lSA- (WHT)
2 345
9 10
20
lSA+ (RED)
YES-Go to step 7.
between the B8 and B17 terminals and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A..
9. Measure the voltage between the D5 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
'Y.
B (25P)
-r--
81
-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 121 314 15
/
17
18
1
6 7
L
20
"--
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
2122
-
23 24 25 1314
lG2(BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
'Y.
VB SOL
(BlK/VEl)
DI16P) !
2 3V 5
8 9
10111 12 1
15 16
L-.
driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
(cont'd)
14-79 BACK
1 2 3 4 5
=
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
PCM and recheck .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the 82, 810,
820 and 822 terminals and ground (G 1 01). Repair
poor ground (G 1 01) .
14-80
~
BACK
C Circuit
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
':i.
SHC(GRN)
B(25P)
D (16P) Jl
,........;-,....-'
81
r-
231i
m
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314
15V 17181 6 7
IL' 20
2122 2324 25 1314
"--
l...-
lG2 (BlK: '98-99)
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
':i.
8 9
15
/s there voltage?
10111 12 1
16
I...-
NO-Go to step 5.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SHC(GRN)
B(25P)
D (16P) II
,........;-,....-'
81
r-
2317
151
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11 121 314 15V 17181 6 7 8 9 10111121
IL 20
"""-
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
2122
'"-
2324 25 1314 15
lG2(BlK: '9899)
(BRN/BlK: '0002)
Q
/s the resistance 12-25 Q?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Goto step 7.
16
'--
1 2
9
345
lG2 (BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
YES - Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
14-81 BACK
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve 8 2P connector.
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
S C G H ( RN)
B(25P)
D (16P) II
r---r--
81
,-
2 311 [5] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15V 17181 6 7
V 20 2122 2324 25 1314
---
'--
lG2 (BlK: '98-99)
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
Q
8 9
15
10111121
16
'--
NO-Goto step 10.
10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
CCONNECTOR
Is the resistance 12-25 Q ?
YES-Check for open in the wires between the D3
terminal and the shift solenoid valve C and
valve C connector and ground (G101) .
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C .
14-82
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
'Y.
B(25P)
,.......;. r---'
81
r-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15/ 17181 6 7
12': 20
lG1
(BRN/BlK)
2122
L-
2324 25 1314
lG2 (BlK: '98-99)
(BRN/BlK: '00-02)
'Y.
VB SOL
(BlK/YEl)
0118PI !
2 3V 5
8 9 10 111121
15 16
'--
PCM and recheck .
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK,
BACK
DTe P1773: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
resistance atthe solenoid valve connector.
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 3.
solenoid valve 8 .
2 3 4 5
9 10
20 2122
the 818 and 825 terminals and AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve 8 .
NO-Go to step 5.
terminals.
YES-Go to step 7.
between the 818 and 825 terminals and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve 8 .
(cont'd)
14-83
BACK
822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
':::L
B(25PI
,.......:-......-'
81
r--
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
9 10 11121 314 15/ 17181 6 7
~ 20
"--
LG1
(BRN/BLKI
2122
.......
23 2425 1314
LG2 (BLK: '98-991
(BRN/BLK: '00-021
':::L
VB SOL
(BLK/VELI
0116P) !
2 3V 5
8 9 10 ~ 2
15 16
.......
YES-Go to step 10.
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. lfthe fuse is OK,
repair open inthe wire between the 05 terminal
14-84
terminals and body ground individually.
2 345
LG2 (BLK: '98-991
(BRN/BLK: '00-021
PCM and recheck .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the 82,810,
820 and 822 terminals and ground (G 1 01). Repair
poor ground (G101) .
BACK
OTC P1738: Problem in 2nd Clutch Pressure
Switch Circuit
2. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals.
'98-99 models: Terminals B14 and B20 or B22.
'00-02 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22.
'98-99 models:
2 345 678
9 10 1112131415 1718
20 21 22 23 24 25
~ . . . . . . . . . , . - -
OP2SW (BlU/BlK)
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
'00-02 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
--
81
-
23/
J5J
1 2 345 6 7 1
9 10 11 12 13 1415
V
7 1 ~
6 7 8 9
10111 12 1
/20
2122 2324 25 1314 15 16
'-- '--
l:T
w--J
OP2SW (BlU/Bl K)
(BRN/BlK)
G1 l
(BRN/BlK)
'::L
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) ('98-99) or D
(16P) ('00-02).
connector.
6. Check OP2SW for continuity to ground:
'98-99 models: Between B 14 termi nal and body
ground .
'00-02 models: Between D13 terminal and body
ground.
'98-99 models:
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 11 12131415
20 21 22 23 24 25
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
=
'00-02 models:
2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
=
the B 14 ('98-99) or D13 ('00-02) terminal and the
2nd clutch pressure switch .
connectors. )f necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck .
(cont'd)
14-85
BACK
securely supported.
securely.
9. Start the engine, then shift to 00 position and drive
for more than five seconds.
10. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals:
'98-99 models: Terminals 814 and 820 or 822 .
'00-02 models: Terminals 013 and 820 or 822.
'98-99 models:
'00-02 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
D (16P):;:::;::::;!
lG1 ':::/..1--------'
(BRN/BlK)
/s there about 0 V?
PCM and recheck .
NO-Gotostep 11.
14-86
connector.
14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
ground.
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
NO- Repair open in the wire between the 2nd
15. Measure the resistance between the 2nd clutch
ground.
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
=
/s the resistance 10 MQ or more?
PCM and recheck .
NO- Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch .
BACK
OTe P1739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure
Switch Circuit
822 terminals.
2 3 4 5
9 10
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
20
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-02)
__ ....,'Y.".--__
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 3.
connector.
6. Check for continuity between the 824 terminal and
body ground.
1 2 345
9 10
20 2122
the 824 terminal and the 3rd clutch pressure
switch .
PCM and recheck .
(cont'd)
14-87 BACK
securely supported.
securely.
9. Start the engine, then shift to position and drive
in 3rd gear for more than five seconds.
822 terminals.
2 3 4 5
LG1
(BRN/BLK) LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-02)
':i.
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
Is there about 0 V?
PCM and recheck .
NO-Gotostep 11.
connector.
14-88
14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 15.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the 3rd
15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch
ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
=
PCM and recheck .
NO- Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch .
BACK
DTe P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control
System
NOTE:
solenoid valve A
another code.
troubleshooting .
NO - Go to step 2.
corrected.
2. Measure the line pressure.
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Repair the hydraulic system as necessary (see
page 14-104) .
than 10 seconds.
6. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the
engine coolant temperature is in 176F (80C) and
above.
7. Drive the vehicle at 55 mph (88 km/h) constantly for
more than one minute.
YES- Replace the transmission and torque
converter .
14-89
BACK
DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System
NOTE:
solenoid valve A
- Shift solenoid valves Band C
another code.
troubleshooting .
NO - Go to step 2.
corrected.
2. Measure the 1 st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch pressure
(see page 14-104).
Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Repair the hydraulic system as necessary .
4. Replace the shift solenoid valves Band C (see page
14-107).
than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle at a speed over 12 mph (20 km/h)
in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th gear in position for more
than 30 seconds.
14-90
YES- Replace the transmission .
BACK
Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve A
Control System
NOTE:
solenoid valve A
another code.
troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 2.
shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-106), and the AI
T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
(see page 14-109).
YES-Replace the transmission .
14-91
BACK
Control System for AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valves A and Bf or Problem
in Hydraulic Control System
another code.
troubleshooting .
NO-Go to step 2.
valvesAand B (see page 14-109).
Does the OBO" scan tool indicate code P1750?
14-92
Control System for Shift Solenoid Valve B
Valves A and Bf or Problem in Hydraulic
Control System
NOTE:
- Shift solenoid valve B
another code.
Does the OBO " scan tool indicate another code?
troubleshooting .
NO - Go to step 2.
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-
107), and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
BACK
[Q;ilndicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ~
indicator light.
Does the indicator come on and stay on?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-If the light comes on for about two seconds
and then goes off, it's OK. If it doesn't come on at
all, go to step 11.
5. Measure the voltage between the A 14 terminal and
body ground.
2627 28 29 30
D4 IND (GRN/BLK)
=
Is there voltage?
the A 14 terminal and the gauge assembly .
NO - Go to step 6.
7. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).
9. Shift to any position other than ~
10. Measure the voltage between the D9 terminal and
body ground.
r-
3V
-
1 2 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
L..-
ATPD4(VE L)
'::l.
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Faulty PCM or the gauge assembly .
NO-Check for short to ground in the wire between
the D9 terminal and the transmission range switch.
If wire is OK, check the transmission range
switch .
11. Make sure the Honda PGM Tester is not connected
to the DLC.
Does the indicator come on?
connectors and recheck the indicator several
times. Ifthe problem is intermittent, substitute a
known-good PCM and recheck. If the light then
works OK every time, replace the original PCM .
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
14-93
BACK
~ Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between body ground and 820
and 822 terminals.
1 2 345
LG2(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
Is there continuity between ground and each
terminal?
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the 820 or
822 terminal and ground (G101 ) .
17. Measure the voltage between terminals 81 and 822,
and between terminals 89 and 820.
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
81 or 89 terminal and the PGM-FI main relay and
from fuse No. 46 in the under-hood fuse/relay box
to the PGM-FI main relay .
14-94
19. Reconnect PCM connector 8 (25P).
20. Connect the digital multimeter between the A 14
and 820 or 822 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P) B(25P)
'-------I'Y.. - - - - -
LG2 (BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK: '00-02)
Is there voltage for at least 2 seconds?
YES - Check for open in the wi re between the A 14
terminal and the gauge assembly. If wire is OK,
check for a faulty Ip;J indicator bulb or a faulty
printed circuit board in the gauge assembly .
NO- Go to step 22.
BACK
24. Check for continuity between the A 14 terminal and
No. 12 terminal of the gauge assembly C (16P)
connector.
GAUGE ASSEMBL V C (16P)
CONNECTOR
connectors. Check the transmission range switch. If
recheck .
terminal and the gauge assembly .
14-95
BACK
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
Are the brake lights ON?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Repair faulty brake light circuit, refer to
the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 19-8) .
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to [f]
position.
3. Press the brake pedal, and release the accelerator
pedal.
body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 8.
14-96
connector and body ground with the throttle
released and the brake pedal pressed.
B (22P) CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 6.
terminal of the PCM and 812 terminal of the driver's
multiplex control unit..
6. Measure the voltage between the 822, terminal of
connector and body ground.
B (22P) CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the 822
terminal ofthe driver's multiplex control unit and
the driver's under-dash fuse No.9 (via the shift lock
solenoid) .
BACK
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the shift
lever to [l] position.
Dose the [l] indicator in the gauge assembly
illuminate?
YES- Check for loose terminal fit to the driver's
multiplex control unit 812 and 822 terminal wires.
If necessary, substitute a known-good driver's
NO- Repair open in the [l] position switch circuit
from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box K10
(8LK/8LU) wire to ground (G101) .
9. Disconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and 8 (25P).
10. Measure the voltage between the A32 and 820 or
822 terminals while pressing the brake pedal.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32PI B(25PI
lG2
(BlK: '98-991
(BRN/BlK: '00-021
YES-Go to step 11.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the A32
terminal and the brake pedal position switch (brake
switch) .
(cont'd)
14-97
BACK
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and 8 (25P).
13. Measure the voltage between the C27 and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25PI
r---
1 2 3 4 5
PCM CONNECTORS
C(31PI
6 7
811 1 2V
/
5 6 7 8 9 10
9 10 11121 314 15
/
17
181 V
V V / V
161 718 19 20 21V
IL 20
2122 23 24 25
V V
25 262 728 2930
V
L-
LG2(BLK: '98-991 TPS
(BRN/BLK: '00-021 (RED/BLKI
LG1 Y.
(BRN/BLKI
Y.
Is there approx. 0.5 V (throttle fully closed)?
PCM and recheck .
NO-Go to step 14.
15. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.
14-98
the throttle position sensor and the 820 or 822
terminal of the PCM.
YES-Replace the throttle body .
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Check for continuity between the C18 and 820 or
822 terminals.
B(25PI
r--r--
1 2 3 4 5
PCM CONNECTORS
C(31PI
6 J
811
1 2lJ"
V
567 8 9 10
9 10 11121 314 15V 17181 V
V V V V
16 171 819 20 2111
IL 20
2122 23 24 25
/ kt"
25 26 27 29 30
/

--
SG2
LG2(BLK: '98-991
(BRN/BLK: '00-021
(GRN/BLKI
LG1
.Q
(BRN/BLKI
.Q
YES-Repair open in the wire between the C18
terminal and the throttle position sensor .
PCM and recheck .
BACK
~ Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the AfT shift cable adjustment (see page 14-
136).
3. Connect the No.7 terminal of the key switch
terminal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the
ignition key.
'0. \ . r l ~ . the key interlock solenoid operation. A
clicking sound should be heard while pushing the
ignition key, and no sound should be heard when
releasing the key.
Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace
the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly .
NOTE: Do not re-key the new ignition switch.
Re-key the other lock cylinder to match the new
switch.
6. Measure the voltage between the No.7 terminal
and body ground.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open or short in the wire between the No.7
terminal ofthe key switch connector and under-
7. Disconnect the park pin switch 4P connector on the
front side ofthe shift lever.
8. With the shift lever in Park, check for continuity
between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the park
PARK PIN SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Repair open in the wires between the park pin
switch and the 4P connector. If wires are OK,
replace the park pin switch .
(cont'd)
14-99
BACK
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
the park pin switch 4P connector and the No.5
terminal of the key switch connector.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No.4
terminal ofthe park pin switch 4P connector and
the No.5 terminal of the key switch connector .
PARK PIN SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose key switch connector and
park pin switch connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good steering lock assembly .
terminal of the 4P connector and ground (G1 01) .
14-100
BACK
,"'"
Road Test
8ackprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to position while pressing the brake
pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in ~ position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and go to the PGM-FI Data List; then go to step 1. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM (A).
6. Connect the digital multimeter (8) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 (+) terminal and 820
(-) or 822 (-)terminal of the PCM.
A (32P)
F=
VI2
3 4 6 6/
112113 1416 1617 1819
262627
1---1-
2829
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) C(31P)
r--' r-
F;=;=
r-r-[8l
8 9 10/1 1 2 346 678112//
C
07SAZ001000A
o (16P)
F;=;= -,.... r- ~
23V 6 6 7 8 9 10 1
161
2021
~ 3 Z4J
9 10 11 1213 1416
V17 181V // //
161 718 1920
21V 6 7 8 9 10 111121
aoV
31
L20
2122
~ ~ ~
//26 28 2728 29 aoV 18 14 16 16
'-- .....
lG;'r
--
'-
_ .... 1-1-
I-
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
'Y
TPS (RED/BlK)
(BlK: '9899)
(BRN/BlK: '0002)
'Y
(cont'd)
14-101
BACK
Road Test (cont'd)
7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st --+ 2nd 2nd --+ 3rd 3rd --+ 4th Lock-upON
Fully-opened throttle. mph 35-39 65-68 98-101 99-103
position
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 4th --+ 3rd 3rd --+ 2nd 2nd --+ 1st
Throttle position mph 44-47 17-19 -- 6-8 (3rd --+ 1st)
sensor voltage: 0.8 V km/h 71-75 27-31 -- 9-13 (3rd --+ 1st)
Throttle position mph 68-71 -- -- --
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 109-115 -- -- --
Fully-opened throttle. mph 90-94 89-92 54-58 27-31
8. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift from position to [!] position.
The vehicle should immediately begin slowing down from engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the following positions.
[j] (1st Gear) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur with the shift lever in this position.
[!] (2nd Gear) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
IRl (Reverse) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
10. Test in [f] (Park) Position.
Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16), apply the parking brake, and shift into [f] position. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
14-102
BACK
r Stall Speed Test
1. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.
3. Make sure the NC switch is OFF.
4. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to 00 position.
5. Fully press the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
6. Allow two minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in [1], and IRI positions.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
Stall speed should be the same in ~ 00, [1], and IRI positions.
Do not test stall speed with the NT pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE
Stall rpm high in 00, [1], and IRI positions Low fluid level or ATF pump output
Clogged ATF strainer
Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
Slipping clutch
Stall rpm high in [1] position Slippage of 1st clutch
Stall rpm high in 00 position Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall rpm high in IRI position Slippage of 4th clutch
Stall rpm low in 00, [1], and IRI positions Engine output low
Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
14-103
BACK
Pressure Tests
AfT oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400
AfT pressure hose, 2210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
2. Raise the front ofthe vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect the tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the holes.
TORQUE: 18 Nm p.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft)
AfT OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
SETWfPANEL
07406-0020400
LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION HOLE
14-104
AfT PRESSURE HOSE, 2210 mm
07MAJ-PY4011A
(4 Required)

..
INSPECTION HOLE
AfT PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER
07MAJ-PY 40120
(4 Required)
4TH CLUTCH PRESSURE
INSPECTION HOLE
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
INSPECTION HOLE
BACK
7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm.
8. Shift to [ID or [fl position, and measure line pressure at line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than [ID or [fl.
9. Shift to rn position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1 st clutch pressure inspection hole (8).
10. Shift to IZl position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to [fl position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to position, and release the brake pedal (the transmission is in 1st gear).
13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission will be shifted to 2nd gear).
14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission is shifted to 2nd gear, the engine speed
will decrease to about 1,000 rpm.
15. Press the accelerator very slowly (so it takes at least 5 seconds to raise the engine speed to 2,000rpm), then hold
the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure atthe 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), as the transmission will shifted 2nd gear to 3rd gear, then to 4th gear.
PRESSURE SHIFT SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE
LEVER
POSITION Standard Service Limit
Line [ID or [fl No (or low) Torque converter, 800-860 kPa 760 kPa
(A) line pressure ATF pump, pressure (8.2-8.8 kgf/cm2, (7.7 kgf/cm2, 110
regulator valve, 120-130 psi) psi)
torque converter
check valve
1st clutch rn No or low 1st 1st clutch 790-870 kPa 750 kPa
(8) pressure (8.1-8.9 kgf/cm2, (7.6 kgf/cm2, 110
120-130 psi) psi)
2nd clutch IZl No or low 2nd 2nd clutch
(C) pressure
3rd clutch No or low 3rd 3rd clutch
(D) pressure
4th clutch No or low 4th 4th clutch
(E) pressure
[RJ
Servo valve or 4th
clutch
17. Install the inspection hole bolts with new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 18 Nm (1.8 kgf.m,13Ibf.ft)
NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.
14-105 BACK
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test
valve 3P connector/shift solenoid valve A.
2. Measure the resistance of the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve between the No.3 terminal of
STANDARD: 12-25Q
3. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve A
between the No.1 terminal of the 3P connector and
body ground.
STANDARD: 12-25Q
shift solenoid valve A if either resistance is out of
specification.
No.1 terminal of the 3P connector to the battery
positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Connect the No.3 terminal to the battery positive
Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A if no sound is heard when
connecting either terminal to the battery positive
terminal.
14-106
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A
Replacement
NOTE: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A assembly must be removed/replaced
as an assembly.
1. Remove the bolts securing the ignition coil bracket
('98-99 models), then remove the harness cover
from the transmission hanger.
2. Remove the mounting bolts and torque converter
clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A.
6x 1.0 mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A, and install a new torque
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
A with a new filter/gasket (8).
4. Install the harness cover on the transmission
hanger, and install the ignition coil bracket bolts
('98-99 models).
5. Install the male terminal connector (C) of the
solenoid connector on the harness cover.
BACK
Shift Solenoid Valves Band C Test
1. Remove the starter.
2. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B or C
connector.
c
No.2 terminals of the shift solenoid valve B or C.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
4. Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if the
resistance is out of standard.
No.2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve B or C
Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if no sound
is heard.
Replacement
NOTE: If the shift solenoid valve Band C are replaced or
removed at the same time, be sure to reinstall them
correctly. The connector color of shift solenoid valve B
is black, and the connector color of shift solenoid valve
C is brown.
1. Remove the starter.
NOTE: If you are only replacing shift solenoid valve
C, starter removal is not needed.
valve B.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7 Ibftt)
valve C.
4. Install a new shift control solenoid valve B or C with
new O-rings (A). While installing the valves, do not
allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then
6. Install the starter.
14-107 BACK
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
1. Disconnect the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B 2P connectors.
A
B
2. Measure the resistance of the AIT clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B between the No.1
and No.2 terminals of each connector.
STANDARD: About 5.0 Q
3. If the resistance of either AIT clutch pressure
control solenoid is out of standard, replace the AIT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
4. Connect the No.1 terminal ofthe AIT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the
terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking
sound should be heard.
5. If not, remove the AIT clutch pressure control
6. Check the fluid passage of the AIT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve for dust and dirt.
14-108
7. Connectthe No.1 terminal ofthe AIT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the
terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make
sure the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
Aand B move.
c
~
B A
8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check
valve movement.
NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the AIT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
body (C).
9. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the
AIT clutch pressure control solenoid does not
operate, replace the AIT clutch pressure control
~
I
BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement
1. Remove the ATF cooler hose (outlet line) at the ATF
cooler line. Turn the end of the cooler hose up to
prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the line
and hose.
2. Remove the ATF cooler line (outlet line) from the
3. Remove the mounting bolts and the AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B (A).
D
B
the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B and the transmission housing.
5. Place the new gasket (B) on the transmission
housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipe
(C), 8 x 26 mm pipe (D) and 8 x 36 mm pipe (E) with
their filter side into the transmission housing.
6. Install the new O-rings (F) over the feed pipes, and
install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (G).
7. Install the new AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B and harness clamp bracket (H).
8. Check the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
them securely.
9. Install the ATF cooler line (outlet line), and connect
the ATF cooler hose to the cooler line.
14-109
BACK
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and
countershaft speed sensors.
2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed
sensor, then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
from the end cover.
6x1.0mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibfft)
3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed
sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor
from the transmission housing.
6x1.0mm
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones before installing
the sensors.
5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed
sensors, then connect the connectors.
14-110
BACK
Replacement
connector.
2. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch, then install
Replacement
connector.
2. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install
14-111
BACK
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out ofthe transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Turn off the
engine.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.
\
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It
should be between the upper mark (8) and lower
mark (C).
14-112
6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the
recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to bring it
to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
B
24x 1.5mm
A
7. Install the ATF filler bolt (8) with a new sealing
washer (C).
8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
BACK
ATF Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the
engine off.
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF
Cooler Flushing (see page 14-127).
18x 1.5 mm
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer.
5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the
dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.9 4 (3.1 US qt, 2.6 Imp qt) at changing
7.2 4 (7.6 US qt, 6.3 Imp qt) at overhaul
B
24x 1.5 mm
A
6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) with a new sealing
washer (C).
14-113
BACK
1. Before disconnecting power, make sure you have
the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down
the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal, then
remove the positive terminal.
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then
remove the battery and battery tray.
4. Remove the battery cable clamps from the battery
base.
5. Loosen the mounting bolts securing the battery
base bracket, then remove the battery base bracket
and battery base.
6. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
supported. Remove the drain plug, and drain the
automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall the
drain plug with a new sealing washer.
14-114
8. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) from the clamp (B)
on the starter.
\
c
B A
9. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
cooler lines (C). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler
hoses up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then
plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose
joints.
10. Remove the starter cables (A) from the starter (B)
and clamp bracket (C), then remove the starter.
~
E
D
C
11. Remove the transmission ground terminal (D).
12. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B connector (E),
and C connector (F), then remove the harness
clamp from the clamp bracket.
BACK
13. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch
pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (8),
and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and 8 (e), then remove the harness clamps from
the clamp brackets.
14. Disconnect the connector from the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
A assembly (A), then remove the connector from
harness cover (8).
B
A
D
15. Remove the two bolts securing the harness cover
and the ignition coil bracket, and remove the
ignition coil (e). ('98-99 models)
16. Push the harness cover rearward to remove from
the transmission hanger (D).
17. Disconnect the connectors from the countershaft
speed sensor (A), and 2nd clutch pressure switch
(8).
A
(e) from the connector bracket (D), then disconnect
it.
19. Remove the nut from the front mount.
(cont'd)
14-115 BACK
program, or equivalent).
14-116
22. Remove the cotter pins (A) and castle nuts (hex
nuts) (8), and remove the damper forks (e), then
separate the ball joints from the lower arms (D),
18-17).
E
23. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods from the lower arms (D).
24. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the
intermediate shaft, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see step 10 on page 16-4).
BACK
25. Make reference marks (A) across both the front
beam (B) and the rear beam (C).
26. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam
(B), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipe (C)
from the clamps on the front beam.
A
27. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower
mounts, then remove the front beam (B).
28. Remove the transmission lower rear mount (A)
from the transmission.
A
29. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left
driveshaft from the differential and to remove the
right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.
30. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,
then tie the plastic bags (B) over the driveshaft
ends.
31. Remove the intermediate shaft.
32. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean
engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the both
ends of intermediate shaft.
(cont'd)
14-117 BACK
33. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A),
then remove shift cable cover (8).
remove the bolts securing the holder before
removing the bolts securing the cover.
D
34. Remove the lock bolt (e) securing the control lever
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
35. Install a 6 x 1.0 x 14 mm bolt (A) and nut (8) on the
shift cable cover (e), then reinstall the shift cable
cover to the torque converter housing.
(The torque converter may stay on the engine, and
the bolt head will support the torque converter,
when the transmission is removed.)
/
c
A
14-118
36. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then
remove the eight drive plate bolts (8) one at a time
while rotating the crankshaft pulley.
B
/
c
A
37. Remove the engine stiffener bolts (e).
38. Remove the front mount bracket.
BACK
39. Place a transmission jack under the transmission.
40. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts.
41. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts
(A) and connector bracket bolt (8).
B A
clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the
transmission jack.
NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive
plate, reach through the starter opening, and pull it
toward the transmission housing.
43. Remove the shift cable cover, then remove the
torque converter assembly from the torque
converter housing.
44. Remove the transmission lower front mount.
(cont'd)
14-119 BACK
45. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's
damaged.
46. Remove the 6 x 1.0 x 14 mm bolt (A) and nut (B)
from the shift cable cover (C).
~ ~
/
A
14-120
BACK
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-127).
2. Install the transmission lower front mount.
10 x 1.25 mm
3. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the
mainshaft (8) with a new O-ring (e).
D
A\ \
c
B
E
4. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (D) and 10 mm dowel
pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F).
5. Place the transmission on a transmission jack, and
raise it to engine level.
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install
the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) and
connector bracket bolt (8).
B
12x 1.25mm
A
12 x 1.25 mm
7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
/
12 x 1.25 mm
(cont'd)
14-121
BACK
8. Install the front mount bracket.
10x 1.25 mm
B
~
/ ~ : ~ : : : , ~ kgfm, . 7Iblft)
A
10x 1.25 mm
10. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (8)
with eight bolts (C). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
11. Install the torque converter cover (D).
12. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see
page 6-17).
14-122
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (8)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6x 1.0mm
~
B
c
'8x1.25mm
22 Nm (2.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
14. Install the lock bolt (D) with a new lock washer (E),
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift ~
cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.
converter housing.
16. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft
contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent
or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
Then install the intermediate shaft in the
differential. While installing the intermediate shaft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
10x 1.25 mm
BACK
17. Install new set rings on the right and left
driveshafts.
18. Install the right and left drives haft, refer to
While installing the left driveshaft in the differential,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
NOTE:
Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) with solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air .
Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully
outward, and slide the left driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its spring clip engage
the side gear. Slide the right driveshaft into the
intermediate shaft until you feel its spring clip
engage the intermediate shaft.
19. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the
transmission.

10x1.25mm
38 Nm 13.9 kgf.m, 28 Ibfftl
20. Install the front beam (A) by aligning both reference
marks (8) on both rear beam (C), and tighten the
bolts.
12x 1.25mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
47lbfftl
A
D
10x 1.25 mm
38 Nm (3.9 kgfm,
28lbfftl
21. Install the transmission lower mount nuts (D).
22. Connect the vacuum tube (E), and install the power
steering fluid pipe (F) on its clamps.
(cont'd)
14-123
BACK
23. Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball
joints on each lower arms (8) with the castle nuts
(hex nuts) (C) and new cotter pins (D).
10x 1.25 mm
12x 1.25mm
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
47Ibfft)
14x 1.5 mm
179 Nm (18.3 kgfm,
132Ibfft)
E
. /
D/.
12x 1.25mm
49-59 Nm (5.0-6.0 kgf.m,
36-43 Ibfft)
24. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.
25. Remove the jack from the transmission.
14-124
27. Install and tighten the nut on the front mount.
28. Remove the hoist, then remove the hoist bracket
from the engine.
(A), then install it on its connector bracket (8) .
D

A
c
30. Connect the connectors to the countershaft speed
sensor (C) and 2nd clutch pressure switch (D). Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
BACK
r
31. Install the harness cover (A) on the transmission
hanger (8), then install the ignition coil (C). ('98-99
models)
A
D
8x1.25mm
26 Nm (2.7 kgfm,
20Ibfft)
32. Install the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A assembly connector (D) on
the harness cover, then connect the connector.
33. Connect the connectors to the 3rd clutch pressure
switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (8), and AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 (C),
then install the clamps on the clamp brackets. Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector.
34. Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve
8 (A) and shift solenoid valve C (8), then install the
clamp on the clamp bracket.
B
c
12x 1.25 mm
64Nm
(6.5 kgfm,
47Ibfft)
9 Nm (0.9 kgfm,
6.5Ibfft)
35. Install the transmission ground terminal (C).
36. Install the starter (D) on the torque converter
housing. Connect the starter cables (E) to the
starter, and install the harness clamp on the clamp
bracket. Make sure the crimped side of the starter
cable ring terminal is facing out.
37. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (8) (see page 14-128). Clamp the ATF cooler
hose with the clamp (C) on the starter.
(cont'd)
14-125
BACK
Transmission Installation (co nt' d)
38. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
39. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
40. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
41. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
42. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-113).
43. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect
the negative terminal.
44. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
45. Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
46. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment, refer
to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 18-
5).
47. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the
transmission in or [t!l position, then turn it off
and check the ATF level (see page 14-112).
48. Perform a road test (see page 14-101).
50. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then
retighten the nut to the specified torque.
12x 1.25 mm
14-126
BACK
ATF Cooler Flushing
Commercially available transmission cooler flusher
Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent
This procedure should be performed before reinstalling
the transmission.
1. Check the equipment for wear and cracks before
using it. Replace any worn or cracked components.
2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21
ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable
flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with
any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on
the fluid container.
3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the
flusher with compressed airto 550-829 kpa (5.6-
8.45 kgf/cm2, 80-120 psi). The air line should be
equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air
system.
4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle.
5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (8) to the return
line of the ATF cooler using a clamp.
6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the
ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the
opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or
floor drain.
7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
available.)
8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water
does not flow through the cooler, it is completely
plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced.
9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the
water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger
down.
10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for
two minutes, turn the air valve on for five seconds
every 15-20 seconds to create a surging action.
AIR PRESSURE: MAX 845 kPa (8.45 kgf/cm',
120 psi)
11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then
reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in
the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler with water
for one minute.
13. Turn the water valve and the water supply off.
14. Turn the air valve on for two minutes, or until no
moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
transmission.
15. Remove the flusher from the cooler line. Attach the
drain hose to an ATF container.
16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose
attached to the cooler line.
(cont'd)
14-127
BACK
ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd)
17. Make sure the transmission is in [fJ position.
Fill the transmission with ATF, and run the engine
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 2
(1.0 US qt., 0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged.
18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler
return hose to the transmission.
19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level
(see page 14-113).
14-128
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement
1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the
ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips (C).
E D
2. Clamp the ATF cooler hose with the yellow mark
.(0) on the clamp (E).
""""\
I
BACK
Shift Lever Removal
1. Shift the transmission into [RJ position.
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-02 Accord
lever assembly.
A
bracket base (C).
5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)
and park pin switch 4P connector (B).
c
6. Remove the four bolts (C) securing the shift lever
bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.
14-129
BACK
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (\1), and verify that the
IRJ position indicator comes on.
(I)
step so that the shift position is in IRJ.
@/""'-> ........
+++++[8]+
14-130
positioning hole (8) on the shift lever bracket base
assembly.
shift cable.
D F
BACK
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
@D)=
I
T
\
A
B
cable bracket base.
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and park
12. Move the shift leverto each gear, and verify that
lever releases.
14-131
BACK
Shift Lever Disassembly IReassembly
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
Apply silicone grease to these parts:
Movable parts of the shift lever.
Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism.
Sliding surfaces on the detent spring.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
PLUNGER
PLUNGER SPRING
SHIFT LOCK

/
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
14-132
PUSHBUTTON
I SPRING
/ /.SHIFTLEVER KNOB
)
SCREW
/3 Nm (0.3 kgfm, 2lbfftl
APely non-hardening thread
loc sealant.

/
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
AfT GEAR POSITION
, V INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT HOUSING
---LEVER COVER


SHIFT CABLE
8x1.2Smm

I
BACK
Shift Cable Replacement
securely supported, refer to the '98-02 Accord
securely.
3. Shift the transmission into IRl position.
4. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-02
lever assembly.
A
bracket base (C).
)
7. Remove the floor heat shield.
8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and
grommet (8).
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibfft)
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A),
then remove the shift cable cover (8).
cover.
10. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
lever.
(cont'd)
14-133
BACK
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
11. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket.
12. Verify that the transmission is in [RJ position on the
control shaft.
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). 00 not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6x 1.0 mm
9.a Nm 11.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
o
6x 1.0 mm
c
\
ax1.25mm
22 Nm 12.2 kgfm,
16Ibfft)
14 Nm 11.4 kgfm,
10Ibfft)
14. Install the lock bolt (0) with a new lock washer (E),
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the cover.
converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
14-134
[RJ position indicator light comes on.
@-) .........
+++++1BJ+
assembly.
BACK
square shape (G) atthe bottom ofthe stud. Rotate
shift cable.
\
//
Properly Installed:
@D=
/
T
\
A
B
cable bracket base.
8x1.25mm
27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
14-135
BACK
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Shift the transmission into [RI position.
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-02 Accord
lever assembly.
bracket base (C).
the shift cable guide (D).
)
14-136
5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release your
hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the
shift position is in [RI.
ii
[8]+
[RI position indicator light comes on.
assembly.
BACK
shift cable.
)
Properly Installed:
@D=
I
r
\
A
B
cable bracket base.
8x 1.25 mm
lever releases.
14-137
BACK
AIT Gear Position Indicator
14-138
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
Indicator Input Test, page 14-143
Indicator Bulb Replacement, page 14-144
Test, page 14-140
BACK
Circuit Diagram
VSP
OUT
AS
BLUlWHT
82
811
No.41 (IOGA) No.42 (50A)
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
IGNITION SWITCH
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
C.2
C.S
C4
YEL -----------'
POWIERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
D4
IND
AI4
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
GRN!BLK FUSEIRELAY
BOX
BlKIBLU
W1HT
MUlTIPLEX
CONTROL

ATP
R
D6
WHT
C.i REDIBLK ---1 11 REDIBLK -l .0 REDlBLK
YEL
PNK
iH ___ -I cs
PNK ---l 11
BlU
}-t ___ -I C7
BlU ---l.2 BLU -+-t--I--I--+--1'
ATP
NP
015 0131'88-99 models)
BI4 '00-02 modols)
BlUlW1HT
BRN
STARTER
CUT RELAY
-[>
CRUISE
L TBlU CONTROL
UNIT
H-----i C5
PNK----; .0
BLU ----;
BRN----; BRN ---l.3 BRN---\--+-+--II--+-+--+
8'. J----4---..J
.0
BLK BLK
1. 1.
G501
ST A E
Gl01
14-139
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) from the connector bracket (8), then disconnect the
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below.
NOTE: Terminal No.1: Neutral position switch
B
Transmission Range Switch Continuity Check
1\
Terminal
\
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Position
[f]
,... ,... ,...
-
IRl
,...
- -
1m
,...
- - -

- - -

,... ,...
-
[!]
- - -
[IJ
'"
- -
14-140
BACK
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
securely supported, refer to the '98-02 Accord
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels
securely.
(A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect
the transmission range switch connector.
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (C),
then remove the transmission range switch (0)
from the end cover.
7. Set the transmission range switch to 00 position.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in 00
position.
8. Set the control shaft to 00 position.
(cont'd)
14-141
BACK
A/T Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the transmission range switch (A) on the
control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts.
NOTE: Do not move the transmission range switch
when tightening the bolts.
E
B
the harness clamp (D) on the end cover (E).
(A), then install it on the connector bracket (B).
14-142
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all gears, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the AfT gear
position indicator (A).
CD
A
13. Move the shift lever through all gears, and verify
the following:
The engine will not start in any position other
than [HI or [fl .
. The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in [RJ position.
BACK
Indicator Input Test
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).
2. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68),
then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
- If a test indicates a problem, find a correct the cause, then recheck the system.
- If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
B11 VEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.S A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver'S under-dash fuse/relay
box
An ODen in the wire
B16 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (GS01)
conditions There should be continuity. An ODen in the wire
C4 WHT Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range
ON (II) and shift There should be 1 V or less. switch
lever in IRl There should be battery voltage in An open in the wire
CS BRN Ignition switch any other shift lever position.
ON (II) and shift
lever in [I]
C6 PNK Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in
C7 BLU Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in 00
C12 GRN/BLK Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty transmission range
ON (II) and shift There should be battery voltage. switch
lever in Faulty PCM
An open in the wire
C1S BLK/BLU Shift lever in Check for continuity to ground: Faulty transmission range
There should be no continuity in any switch
other shift lever Dosition. An open in the wire
C16 RED/BLK Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground:
ON (II) and shift There should be 1 V or less.
lever in IHl There should be battery voltage in
any other shift lever position.
14-143 BACK
Indicator Bulb Replacement
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-
28).
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-02
2. Remove the gauge assembly, refer to the '98-02
3. Disassemble the gauge assembly, refer to
NOTE: Disassembly is not required on all models.
4. Replace the bulbs (A) at the reverse side of the
gauge assembly (B).
14-144
BACK
AIT Interlock System
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SWITCH
Test, page 14-149
PARK PIN SWITCH
Test, page 14-150
SHIFT LOCKSOLENOID
Test, page 14-149
14-145 BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
No.47 (20A)

No.41 (10DA) No.42 (SOA)
IGNITION SWITCH
BAT
IGl
YEL
A12
IGl
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
NO.9 (7.SA)
SHIFT
SOLENOID
YEL
2
GRN
B22
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
LG AlP P
Bll A1S
STEERING LOCK
ASSEMBLY
ILU
KEY
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
KEY
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID
B12
WHTNEL
WHT/RED
1
PARK
PIN
SWITCH
BRAKE
PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
BLK BLK BLKlBLU WHT/RED BLK WHTIBLK

1
G501
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
A28 A32
ILU BKSW
L:H
H
POWER TRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
G401
14-146
BACK
1. Disconnect the 22P connector from the multiplex control unit (driver's), then remove the mUltiplex control unit
(driver's) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) while depressing the brake pedal
with the shift lever in [f] position, the shift lock system is OK. If the shift lever cannot be shifted from [f] position,
test the transmission range switch.
3. With the driver's unit still disconnected from its connector and the fuse/relay box, make these input tests at its
connector or its fuse/relay box socket.
(cont'd)
14-147
BACK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTORS
22P
Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
Multiplex C
" 0
ontrol Umt ( river's 24 PC onnector
A3
--
Shift lever in Check for continuity to ground: Faulty transmission range switch
There should be continuity. Poor ground (G101)
An open in the wire
A12
--
Under all Check for voltage to ground: Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
relay box
Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
A14
--
Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G401)
A24
--
Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
turned ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
M I" I C u tlJ)lex ontro mt rivers I U " (0" ') 22P C onnector
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: Poor ground (G503)
conditions There should be continuity. An op_en in the wire
B22 GRN Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
Faulty shift lock solenoid
An open in the wire
4. Reconnect the connectors to the multiplex control unit (driver's), and make this input test.
B12 WHT/RED Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty brake pedal position
ON (II) and brake There should be battery switch
pedal pushed voltage. Faulty PCM
Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: Faulty multiplex control unit
ON (II), brake pedal There should be 1 V or less. (driver's)
and accelerator An open in the wire
pedal pressed at
the same time
If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit (driver's), and recheck the system.
Ifthe system is OK, the multiplex control unit (driver's) must be faulty; replace it.
14-148
BACK
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-
28).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, refer
to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-
84).
terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no
continuity when the key is released.
4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power
connected to the No.7 terminal and ground
connected to the No.3 terminals.
If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock
solenoid is OK .
If the key can be removed, replace the steering
lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not
available separately).
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
3. Connect the No.1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid
terminal.
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the (f]
position. Release the battery terminals from the
shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
back to the (f] position, and make sure it locks.
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 terminal
(reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
inside the solenoid.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release
lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the
release lever is released.
6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.
14-149 BACK
AIT Interlock System
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a
screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (8).
E
A
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (e) and
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of
the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock
stop (E).
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then
connect the shift lock solenoid connector.
14-150
Park Pin Switch Test
2. Disconnect the park pin 4P connector.
3. Shift the shift lever into the [f) position, then check
for continuity between the No.3 and No.4
terminals. There should be no continuity.
4. Shift the shift lever out of the [f) position, and check
for continuity between the terminals in step 3.
5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace the shift
lever bracket base.
NOTE: The park pin switch is not available
separately from the shift lever bracket base.
BACK
End Cover Removal
Exploded View
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH COVER
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
BEARING HUBI
BALL BEARING
ASSEMBLY
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
PARK PAWL SHAFT
END COVER
END COVER GASKET
Replace. SHAFT
PITOTPIPE
('00-02 models)

PITOTPIPE
('00-02 models)
SPRING WASHER
Replace.
PITOT FLANGE
('00-02 models)
-'COINIC:ALSPRING WASHER
LINE BOLT
(cant'd)
14-151 BACK
End Cover Removal (cont'd)
Mainshaft holder
1. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
2. Remove the bolts securing the harness clamp (one
bolt) and transmission range switch (two bolts),
then remove the transmission range switch.
3. Remove the bolts securing the end cover (sixteen
bolts), then remove the end cover.
4. For '00-02 models: Remove the pitot pipe (A) and
the lubrication pitot pipe (B) from the transmission
housing (C), then remove the pitot flange (0) from
the mainshaft idler gear (E).
14-152
5. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.
6. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
7. Cut the lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (B) using
a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical
spring washers from each shaft.
NOTE:
Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the
press fit idler gears on the mainshaft and
secondary shaft, and the park gear and bearing
hub on the countershaft.
Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
I/c
A
8. Remove the special tool (mainshaft holder) from
the mainshaft.
BACK
9. Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the
secondary shaft idler gear (B) with a puller (e).
D
c\
B
10. Remove the bearing hub (0) with the puller from
the countershaft, then remove the counters haft
idler gear (E) and bearings.
11. Remove the park gear (F) with the puller.
A
12. Remove the park pawl, spring, shaft, and shaft stop.
13. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
14. Remove the Ii ne bolts, then remove the ATF cooler
lines.
Park Lever Stop Inspection and
Adjustment
1. Set the park lever (A) in the position.
6x 1.0mm
2. Measure the distance (B) between the park pawl
shaft (e) and the park lever roller pin (0).
STANDARD: 84.6-85.6 mm (3.33-3.37 in.)
3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and
install the appropriate park lever stop (E) from the
table below.
PARK LEVER STOP
Mark Part Number L1 L2
1 24537 -PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
(0.433 in.) (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the
distance is within tolerance.
14-153
BACK
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
/
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
14-154
REVERSE IDLER GEAR TRANSMISSION HOUSING
SHAFT HOLDER / MOUNTING BOLTS
REVERSE IDLER
GEAR SHAFT i HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
i /
2ND EAR
TRANSMISSION HANGER!
HOUSING

TRANSMISSION HANGER
MAINS HAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
BACK
Housing puller 07HAe-PK40102
1. Remove the two bolts securing the reverse idler
gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler
gear shaft holder (A), shaft (B), and washer (e).
2. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts,
transmission hangers, and harness clamp bracket.
3. Move the reverse idler gear (A) to disengage it from
the mainshaft and countershaft reverse gears.
NOTE: The transmission housing will not separate
from the torque converter housing if the reverse
idler gear is not moved.
control shaft.
A C 07HAC-PK40102
'"
5. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then
remove the transmission housing (0).
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too
short, replace it with Housing Puller Arm, 205 mm,
07SAe-POZ0101.
6. Remove the reverse idler gear, needle bearings,
and thrust washer from the transmission housing.
7. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then remove
the countershaft reverse gear and the needle
bearing.
8. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then
remove the shift fork with the reverse selector,
reverse selector hub, and countershaft 4th gear.
If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, leave it
and 4th gear on the countershaft.
9. Remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly. If the
reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove the
secondary shaft sub-assembly, countershaft
sub-assembly and mainshaft sub-assembly
together.
10. Remove the countershaft sub-assembly.
11. Remove the mainshaft sub-assembly.
14-155
BACK
Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft
bearing (B) and secondary shaft bearing (C) from
the transmission housing, expand each snap ring
with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's
necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
A
2. Install the bearings in the direction shown.
3. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers,
and insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
14-156
4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into
the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
5. After installing the bearings verify the following:
The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and
housing grooves .
The ring end gaps (B) are correct.
B:0-7mm
(0-0.28 in.)
A
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Exploded View
SERVO DETENT
BASE
/6x1.0mm,
,. Two Bolts
6x1.0mm,
Two Bolts
REGULATOR
VALVE BODY

/ ACCUMULATOR
COVER
/J
ATFFEED
\Y

PIPES
Replace.
DETENT
8x 1.25mm,
Three Bolts

ARMSHAFT
ATF FEED PIPE,
8x198mm
I/
ATF FEED PIPES,
8x85mm
Three Pipes
CHECK VALVE
6x 1.0mm,
Six Bolts
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
TORQUE CONVERTER
HOUSING
ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
SHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
(cant'd)
14-157
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the regulator
valve body, servo body, and accumulator body.
2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).
3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).
4. Remove the accumulator cover (two bolts).
NOTE: The accumulator cover is spring loaded. To
prevent stripping the threads in the servo body,
press down on the accumulator cover while
unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern.
5. Remove the bolts securing the servo body (nine
bolts), then remove the servo body, servo
separator plate and dowel pins (two).
6. Remove the accumulator body (six bolts).
7. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
8. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
9. Remove the regulator separator plate and dowel
pins (two).
10. Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm, then
remove the detent arm shaft, detent arm, and
control shaft.
11. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler
check valve (steel ball).
12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).
13. Remove the torque converter check valve and
spring.
14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then
remove the ATF pump gears.
15. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins
(three).
14-158
16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (8)
thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not
clogged.
17. Testthe ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
BACK
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for
about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and
insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't
require much polishing to remove any burrs.
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
compressed air.
6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. Ifthe
valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-159
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Reassembly
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence
shown for the main valve body (see page 14-161),
regulator valve body (see page 14-164), and servo
body (see page 14-165). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body.
14-160
BACK
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball.
6. Install the filter in the direction shown.
MAIN VALVE BODY
damage.
REVERSECPC
VALVE
MODULATOR VALVE
FILTER

SHIFTVALVEC
SHIFT VALVE D
SHIFT VALVE E
VALVE
SLEEVE

VALVE CAP CLIP
LOCK-UP SHIFT
VALVE
COO"'" CHECK IBALLJ
\ TORQUE CONVERTE" CHECK VALVE

SERVO CONTROL VALVE
(cont'd)
14-161
BACK
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Sectional View

/
MAIN VALVE BODY
Sectional View
No. Spring
CD
Modulator valve spring
Shift valve C spring
@ Shift valve D spring
G) Shift valve E spring
Relief valve spring
Lock-up shift valve spring
CD Cooler check valve spring

Torque converter check valve
Servo control valve spring
@ Reverse CPC valve spring
14-162
WireOia.
1.6 (0.063)
0.8 (0.031)
0.7 (0.028)
0.7 (0.028)
1.1 (0.043)
0.9 (0.035)
0.6 (0.024)
1.2 (0.047)
0.7 (0.028)
0.7 (0.028)

o

Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
6.6 (0.260) 32.2 (1.268) .13.4
8.6 (0.339) 30.1 (1.185) 10.7
7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4
5.8 (0.228) 14.5 (0.571) 6.8
8.6 (0.339) 35.1 (1.382) 14.3
6.6 (0.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
BACK
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (8)
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main
valve body (0). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved
and chamfered side facing up.
2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
gear (A) and driven gear (8).
ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance:
Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.035-0.063 mm (0.0014-0.0025 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (8) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (0).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)
Clearance:
B
14-163
BACK
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement, If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
REGULATOR SPRING CAP ;
REGULATOR VALVE
S. _______ STOPBOLT
<D .. 6x1.0mm
____ 12 Nm 11.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfft)
;,'
@
VALVE CAP
----------=::::
damage.
VALVE CAP CLIP __________ \
"
VALVE SLEEVE LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
FILTER
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
CD Stator reaction spring 5.5 (0.217) 37.4 (1.472) 30.3(1.193) 2.12
Regulator valve spring A 1.8 (0.071) 14.7 (0.579) 87.5 (3.445) 16.5
Regulator valve spring B 1.7 (0.067) 9.4 (0.370) 44.0 (1.732) 13.4
G) Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.65 (0.026) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370) 15.6
14-164
BACK
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
CPC VALVE A

Replace.
CPCVALVEB
SERVO BODY
Inspect for scoring
and damage.
SHIFT VALVE A
_______ VALVE CAP

VALVE CAP
CLIP
<D
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
WireOia. 0.0. Free Lenath No. of Coils
CD Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4 (1.591) 16.9
Shift valve A spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4 (1.591) 16.9
CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
@ CPC valve B spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
4th accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6 (0.772) 66.4 (2.614) 9.7
4th accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8 (0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5
(J)
3rd accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6 (0.772) 66.4 (2.614) 9.7
3rd accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8 (0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5
14-165
BACK
Valve Body
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls: it may magnetize the balls.
passages.
CHECK BALLS, 2

I :
1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON
\0

ORING
Replace.
No. Springs
CD 1st accumulator spring B
1st accumulator spring A
2nd accumulator spring B
<D 2nd accumulator spring A
14-166
/ WBRlCA110N CHECK VALVE
.... VALVE CLIP
_____
ACCUMULATOR BODY
damage.

I :
. I
SNAP RINGS
Wire Dia.
2.7 (0.106)
2.5 (0.098)
2.4 (0.094)
2.7 (0.106)

Replace.
Standard (New)Unit: mm (in.)
O.D. Free Length
15.0 (0.591) 52.5 (2.067)
21.6 (0.850) 87.5 (3.445)
12.6 (0.496) 53.5 (2.106)
19.6 (0.772) 66.3 (2.610)
No. of Coils
10.3
11.8
12.9
9.9
BACK
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the
special tool and a commercially available 3/8"-16
slide hammer (A).
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in
the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with
the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
14-167
BACK
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) with the
slide hammer (B).
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
0-0.03mm
(0-0.001 in.'
A
the special tools.
14-168
Secondary Shaft Bearing
Replacement
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) with the
slide hammer (B).
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
0-0.03mm
(0-0.001 in.'
B
A
A
the special tools.
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Replace.
THRUST WASHER,
27x47x5mm
226 Nm (23.0 kgfm, 166Ibfft)-0-
167 Nm (17.0 kgfm, 123Ibfft)
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING \
4TH GEAR
I GCONICAL SPRING WASHER

o
x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
I ('00-02 models)
PITOT FLANGE
models)
IDLER GEAR
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
3RD/4TH CLUTCH ASSEMBL V
SEALING RINGS,
32mm

---- Install sealing ring
SEALING RINGS, 0 mating faces as shown.
29mm
NEEDLE BEARING ""
SET RING
------
BEARING
2. Check the clearance of the 3rd/4th clutch assembly (see page 14-170).
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
7. Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 73 mm thrust shim in the direction shown.
8. Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged, replace them (see page
14-171).
14-169
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings from the mainshaft.
2. Assemble the 41 x 73 mm thrust shim (A), 3rd/4th
clutch assembly (B), and 4th gear collar (C) on the
mainshaft (D).
14-170
~ c
~
3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch
assembly (B), then measure the clearance between
the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar with a
feeler gauge (F) in at least three places. Use the
STANDARD: 0.03 - 0.11 mm (0.001 - 0.004 in.)
F
\
c
~ F
thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.
1 90414-P7X-00O 7.85 mm (0.309 in.)
2 90415-P7X-000 7.90 mm (0.311 in.)
3 90416-P7X-000 7.95 mm (0.313 in.)
4 90417 -P7 X -000 8.00 mm (0.315 in.)
5 90418-P7X-000 8.05 mm (0.317 in.)
6 90419-P7X-000 8.10 mm (0.319 in.)
6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the
clearance is within standard.
BACK
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement
The sealing rings are synthetic resin with chamfered
ends. Check condition of the sealing rings, and replace
them only if they are worn, distorted, or damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze the sealing rings (A)
together slightly before installing them.
2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install
them on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the
following:
The rings are fully seated in the groove.
The rings are not twisted.
The chamfered ends ofthe rings are properly
joined.
14-171
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and take off components down to the reverse selector hub.
Replace.
Lefthand threads
226 Nm (23.0 kgf.m, 166 Ibfft}-O-
167 Nm (17.0 kgfm, 123Ibfft)
NEEDLE BEARING
-------:
REVERSE SELECTOR
_____...rfilUlllLUlllh"
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
S N ~ O D O O ~
~
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
1ST GEAR
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-173).
-BEARING HUB
Selective part
IDLER GEAR
PARK GEAR
3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-175).
6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
7. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
8. Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and distance collar in the direction shown.
14-172
BACK
Driver 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
Removal
1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th
gear (8) with a universal two-jaw (or three-jaw)
puller (C). Place a shaft protector (D) between the
puller and countershaft (E) to prevent damaging the
countershaft.
press-fitted, and can be removed without using a
puller.
E
2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance
collar, and 31 mm cotters from the countershaft.
3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (8) together
from the countershaft (C) with a puller (D). Place a
shaft protector (E) between the puller and
countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.
E
__ --I+-f----c
(cont'd)
14-173
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
(cont'd)
Installation
1. Apply ATF to the parts.
2. Install the 1st gear on the countershaft by hand.
3. Align the shaft splines with those on 3rd gear, then
press the countershaft (A) into the 3rd gear with
press.
Place an attachment (B) between the press and
countershaft .
Stop pressing the countershaft when the 3rd gear
contacts the 1st gear (C).
14-174
4. Install the 31 mm cotters, distance collar, snap ring,
needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the
countershaft.
5. Slide the reverse selector hub (B) over the
countershaft (C), and then press it into place with
the special tool and a press.
press-fitted and can be installed without using the
special tool and a press .
I /07746-0030100
c
BACK
I"""
\ Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing Replacement
r
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
replace it.
2. Remove the bearing (A) from the bearing hub with
the special tools, a bearing separator (8), and a
press.
07746-0010300 ." ..... , ....
/
3. Install the new bearing on the bearing hub with the
07' ..... ' ....
/
14-175
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears.
Replace.
Left-hand threads
226 Nm (23.0 kgfm, 166Ibfft)-0-
CONICAL SPRING WASHER 167 No/m (17.0 kgfm, 123 Ibfft)
Replace. \

THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
SECONDARY SHAFT

NEEDLE BEARING

BEARING ""

HOUSING BEARING /
TRANSMISSION
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
/
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
/
SPLINED WASHER,
38 x 56.5 mm
Selective part

___ COTTERS, 32 mm
_COTTER RETAINER
ASSEMBLY
O-RINGS
Replace.
---SEALING RINGS, 25 mm
3. Check clearance ofthe secondary shaft assembly (see page 14-177).
5. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
6. Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-179).
9. Install the conical spring washer and 38 x 56.5 mm splined washer in the direction shown.
14-176
BACK
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-ri ngs from the shaft.
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle
bearing (B), 1st gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D),
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer (E), 32 mm cotters (F),
cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the
secondary shaft (I).
__ ----G
...-----H
3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 mm
splined washer (E) and cotters (F) with a feeler
gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average
as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.07-0.15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.)
-----J
\
c
/
J
splined washer, and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new splined washer, then
recheck.
SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 mm
1 90502-POZ-000 6.85 mm (0.270 in.)
2 90503-POZ-000 6.90 mm (0.272 in.)
3 90504-POZ-000 6.95 mm (0.274 in.)
4 90505-POZ-000 7.00 mm (0.276 in.)
5 90506-POZ-000 7.05 mm (0.278 in.)
6 90507 -POZ -000 7.10 mm (0.280 in.)
(cont'd)
14-177
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer from the
mainshaft.
7. Assemble the 1st/2nd clutch assembly (A), 37 x 55
mm thrust shim (8), thrust needle bearing (e),
needle bearing (D), 2nd gear (E), thrust needle
bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer
(removed from mainshaft) (G) on the secondary
shaft (H).
__ _ G
__ --F
A
S. Set the dial indicator (I) on 2nd gear (E).
\ /
14-178
9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer (G) against
the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear
axial clearance in at least three places while
moving the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the
actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.04 - 0.12 mm (0.002 - 0.005 in.)
A
10. Ifthe clearance is out of standard, remove the 37 x
55 mm thrust shim and measure its thickness.
11. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck.
1 90406-POZ -000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.)
2 90407 -POZ -000 4.95 mm (0.195 in.)
3 9040S-POZ -000 5.00 mm (0.197 in.)
4 90409-POZ -000 5.05 mm (0.199 in.)
5 9041 O-POZ -000 5.10 mm (0.201 in.)
6 90411-POZ-000 5.15 mm (0.203 in.)
7 90412-POZ-000 5.20 mm (0.205 in.)
12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer on the
mainshaft.
BACK
r
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, go
to step 2.
2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with
soft jaws.
3. Remove the bearing (A) from the secondary shaft
idler gear (8) with a commercially available 3-jaw
slide hammer (C).
4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear
with the special tool and a press .
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
14-179
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch
end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates with a
screwdriver (B).
B
2. Remove the disc spring (A) from the 1 st, 3rd and
4th clutches.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
A
14-180
assembly.
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
07LAE-PX40100
/
\
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
B
BACK
5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (8) of
special tool works on the clutch return spring (C).
7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be
removed.
8. Remove the snap ring (A). Then remove the special
tools (8), spring retainer (C), return spring.
(cont'd)
14-181 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
9. For 3rd and 4th clutch: Wrap a shop rag around the
clutch drum (A), and apply air pressure to the fluid
passage to remove the piston (B). Place a finger tip
on the other end while applying air pressure.
B
14-182
BACK
Clutch Inspection
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
NOTE: There are two types of spring retainer, you may find either type in the clutch assembly. Some spring retainers
have seal lips, and do not have O-rings. The seal lip is undetachable from the spring retainer.
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
CLUTCH END
PLATE
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
JI .... ----SNAP RING
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
___ ,....r SNAP RING
RETAINER

Replace.
SPRING
-'STCLUTCH
DRUM
(cont'd)
14-183 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection (cont'd)
3RD/4TH CLUTCH
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH END
14-184
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.3 mm (O.091 in.)
-"""'=:::0::"../ SNAP RING
CLUTCH END PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (O.079 in.)
/ .... O-RINGS
Replace.
4TH CLUTCH DRUM
3RD CLUTCH DRUM

I
BACK
Clutch Reassembly
07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch compressor attachment
07ZAE-PRP0100
Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor
cleaner, and dry them with compressed air.
Blowout all passages.
Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
1. Inspect the check valve (A) on the 3rd and 4th
clutch pistons (B); if it's loose, replace the piston.
j
2. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B) and the
spring retainer (1st and 2nd clutches).
NOTE: Some spring retainers of the 1st and 2nd
clutch have seal lips and do not have O-rings.
A
3. Install the piston (A) in the clutch drum (B). Apply
pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before
installing.
NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the
piston with too much force.
A
(cont'd)
14-185
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B),
and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer.
assembly.
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
14-186
07LAE-PX40100
~
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
6. Be sure the special too (A) is adjusted to have full
contact with the spring retainer (8) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
7. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (8) of
the 1 st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the
special tool work on the clutch return spring (C).
BACK
9. Compress the return spring.
10. Install the snap ring (A).
12. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches in the direction shown.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
(cont'd)
14-187
BACK
Shafts and Clutches
13. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a
minimum of 30 minutes. Before installing the
plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch
drum is free of dirt and other foreign matter.
14. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the
clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) with the flat side toward the disc (B).
A
B
15. Install the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver (B).
14-188
16. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end plate (B).
17. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end plate
lifted up to the snap ring (e).
BACK
18. Release the clutch end plate to lower the clutch end
plate, then put the special tool on the end plate (A).
19. Press the special tool down with 40 N (4 kgf, 9lbf)
using a force gauge, and read the dial indicator (B).
The dial indicator reads the clearance (e) between
the clutch end plate and top disc (D). Take
measurements in at least three places, and use the
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:
Clutch Service Limit
1st 1.2-1.4 mm (0.047-0.055 in.)
2nd 0.85-1.05 mm (0.033-0.041 in.)
3rd 0.55-0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.)
4th 0.55-0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.)
20. If the clearance is out of the service limit, select a
new clutch end plate from the following table.
NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed,
but the clearance is still over the service limit,
replace the clutch discs and clutch plates as a set.
t
1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
6 22551-P7Z-003 2.6mm (0.102 in.)
7 22552-P7Z-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22553-P7Z -003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22554-P7Z -003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
0 22555-P7Z -003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
1 22556-P7Z -003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
2 22557 -P7Z -003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
3 22558-P7Z-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
4 22559-P7Z -003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
3RD and 4TH CLUTCH END PLATES
1 22551-PX4-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22552-PX4-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22553-PX4-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22554-PX4-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22555-PX4-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22556-PX4-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22557 -PX4-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22558-PX4-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22559-PX4-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
14-189
BACK
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation
Exploded View
Torque:
- 6 x 1.0 mm: 12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibf.ft)
- 8 x 1.25 mm: 18 Nm (1.8 kgfm, 13Ibfft)
./6x1.0mm, 610
'T B Its x . mm,
_____ ATF FEED PIPE,
8x198mm
SERVO DETENT
BASE

/
ACCUMULATOR BODY
wo 0 Eight Bolts
REGULATOR
VALVE BODY
I ACCUMULATOR
COVER
ATFFEED
PIPES
/
___ ATF FEED PIPES,
8x85mm
Three Pipes
14-190
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
BACK
NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during the
1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and
ATF pump driven gear shaft (0). Install the ATF
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered
side facing down.
2. Install the torque converter check valve and spring,
then install the main valve body (one 6 mm bolt
and three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump
drive gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal
operating direction, and the ATF pump driven gear
shaft (0) moves smoothly in the axial and normal
operating direction.
B
o
3. Ifthe ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF pump
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized
ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear
shaft.
4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the
main valve body, then install the two dowel pins
and the regulator separator plate.
5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
7. Install the two dowel pins and the servo separator
plate on the main valve body.
8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter
housing along with the manual valve (B).
~
-------0
B E
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (0) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).
11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).
12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).
15. Install the two ATF feed pipes in the servo body,
four pipes in the regulator valve body, and one pipe
in the accumulator body.
14-191
BACK
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
Exploded View
COUNTERSHAFT
SUBASSEMBLY
14-192
8x1.25mm
MOUNTING BOLTS
10x1.25mm
,H.G,RNIFSS CLAMP BRACKET
TRANSMISSION HANGERI
/
TRANSMISSION HANGER
GASKET
Replace.
REVERSE IDLER
GEAR
MAINSHAFT
SUBASSEMBLY
BACK
1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft sub-
assembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary
shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse
selector hub on the countershaft. If the reverse
selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the
installation procedure (see page 14-173).
3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (8) and reverse selector (C) together on
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (0). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E)
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock
washer against the bolt head.
E
6x 1.0mm
~ ~ ~ F
~ ~
c
~
4. Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse
gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the
countershaft.
5. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission
housing.
6. Place the reverse idler gear (A) in the transmission
housing as shown, then slide it in the direction
shown.
(cont'd)
14-193
BACK
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
control shaft.
A
B
8. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the
torque converter housing.
9. Place the transmission housing on the torque
converter housing, then install the transmission
housing mounting bolts along with the harness
clamp bracket (A), transmission hanger (B) and
transmission hanger/harness clamp bracket (e).
Tighten the bolts in two or more steps in the
sequence shown.
14-194
10. Engage the reverse idler gear with the countershaft
reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then
install the needle bearings (A), reverse idler gear
shaft (B) and thrust washer (e) in the reverse idler
gear, and install the reverse idler gear shaft holder
(0) on the transmission housing.
BACK
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation
Mainshaft holder
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on
the control shaft (e), then install the lock bolt (D)
with a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock
tab of the lock washer in this step; bend it after
checking park pawl engagement.
~
..---------E
/
o
6x 1.0 mm
Splines ofthe countershaft, the park gear, and
the old locknut.
Threads of the countershaft and the old locknut.
Old conical spring washer.
3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
and a collar (e). Hold the park pawl (D) to engage
with the park gear, then tighten the old locknut until
the shaft splines come out slightly over the park
gear splines.
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench.
eountershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
o
4. Remove the locknut and the collar, then install only
the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) and old
conical spring washer (B). Tighten the old locknut
(e) to seat the park gear to 226 Nm (23.0 kgfm, 166
Ibfft), then remove the locknut and conical spring
washer.
c ~
A------....
(cont'd)
14-195
BACK
5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) with
a puller (B).
6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing
(B), countershaft idler gear (C), thrust needle
bearing (D), bearing hub/bearing assembly (E), and
the old conical spring washer (F). Then tighten the
old locknut (G) to seat the bearing hub/bearing
assembly to 164 Nm (17.0 kgfm, 123Ibfft).
14-196
7. Setthe dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler
gear (B) as shown.
8. Measure the countershaft idler gear axial clearance
in at least three places, while moving the
countershaft idler gear (A).
Use the average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)
A
BACK
bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as
described on the previous page.
10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing
assembly, then recheck.
BEARING HUB
Mark Part Number Difference
A 90520-P6H-000 3.503 mm (0.1379 in.)
8 90521-P6H-000 3.490 mm (0.1374 in.)
C 90522-P6H-000 3.477 mm (0.1369 in.)
D 90523-P6H-000 3.464 mm (0.1364 in.)
11. After replacing the bearing hub/bearing assembly
make sure the clearance is within standard.
12. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring
washer from the counters haft.
13. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.
Splines of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
idler gears.
Threads ofthe mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
new locknuts.
Old conical spring washers.
15. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the old
conical spring washer (8) on the mainshaft (C).
Tighten the old locknut (D) to seat the mainshaft
idler gear to 226 Nm (23.0 kgfm, 166 Ibfft).
16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
secondary shaft idler gear to 226 Nm (23.0 kgfm,
166Ibfft)
NOTE:
Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.
17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring
washer from the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
14-197
BACK
18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft and new
locknuts, and new conical spring washers with ATF.
19. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the
direction shown, and install the new locknuts (B).
~ _ B
20. Tighten the locknuts to 167 Nm (17.0 kgfm, 123
Ibfft).
NOTE:
Coutershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
21. Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 mm
punch.
14-198
22. For '00-02 models: Install the pitot flange (A) on the
mainshaft idler gear (B), then install the lubrication
pitot pipe (C) and the pitot pipe (D) on the
6x 1.0mm
12 Nm 11.2 kgfm,
8.7Ibfft)
c
23. Set the park lever in the position, then verify that
the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
c
A
F
24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the pawl shaft (C) and the park
lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-153).
25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
BACK
26. Install the end cover (A) along with two dowel pins,
new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp
bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 Nm, (1.2
kgfm, 8.7 Ibfft).
B
27. Set the transmission range switch to IHl position.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in IHl
position.
28. Set the control shaft (A) to the IHl position by
turning it.
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end ofthe
control shaft tips together when turning into
position. If the tips are squeezed together it will
cause a faulty shift signal or position due to the
play between the control shaft and the switch.
(cont'd)
14-199
BACK
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (co nt' d)
29. Install the transmission range switch (A) loosely on
the control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts.
Do not move the transmission range switch when
tightening the bolts.
___ ---77 6 x 1.0 mm
12 Nm(1.2 kgfm,
8.7 Ibfft) .
B
install the harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket
(E) on the transmission housing, then install the
harness clamp (F) on the end cover (G).
31. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing
washers. Tighten the line fittings to 28 Nm
32. Install the breather tube.
33. Install the ATF dipstick.
14-200
BACK
AIT Differential
--
BEARING OUTER RACE
BEARING
--
CARRIER BEARING
-------
BEARING OUTER RACE
-----THRUST WASHER
Backlash Inspection
1. Install both axles, and place the differential
assembly on V-blocks (A).
c
/
A
B
"
A
2. Check the backlash of both pinion gears (B) with a
dial indicator (C).
STANDARD: 0.05-0.15 mm (0.002-0.006 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the
differential carrier.
14-201
BACK
AIT Differential
Replacement
1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential
carrier.
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
threads.
~ I J f ~
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a
crisscross pattern.
TORQUE: 101 Nm (10.3 kgfm, 74.5 Ibfft)
14-202
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAO-PW50601
NOTE:
The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
set.
Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
bearing is replaced.
Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
. 1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially
available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepped adapter (0).
D
2. Install the new carrier bearings with the special tool
and a press.
NOTE:
Press the bearings on until they bottom.
Use the small end of the special tool to install the
bearing.
Press the bearings on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearings and the
differential carrier.
~
I
BACK
Driver 07749-0010000
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or
07 GAD-PG401 00
Pilot, 28 x 30 mm 07JAD-PH80400
Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
housing (B).
A
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter
housing (B).
4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
07749-0010000
07 JAD-PH80400
5. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter
housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
07 JAD-PH80400
A
14-203
BACK
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is to be replaced.
Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race from the
transmission housing by heating the housing to
about 212F (100C) with a heat gun. Do not heat
the housing morethan 212F (100C).
2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque
converter housing.
3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (8) and
outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D) with
the special tools.
14-204
4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (8) in
the torque converter housing (C), and be sure to
install the outer race until it bottoms in the housing
B
A
07749-0010000
07NAD-PX40100
BACK
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
Preload inspection tool 07HAJ-PK40201
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing,
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing
preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer
(8) and thrust shim (e) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212F
(100
0
e) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing
more than 212F (1000e).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
/E

o
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer
race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing
side.
4. Select the 2.60 mm (0.102 in.) thrust shim from the
middle of the table below.
THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 mm (0.081 in.)
T 41439-PX4-700 2.01 mm (0.083 in.)
U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
8 41442-PK4-000 2.25 mm (0.089 in.)
e 41443-PK4-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
D 41444-PK4-000 2.35 mm (0.093 in.)
E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 mm (0.094 in.)
F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
G 41447 -PK4-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.)
H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 mm (0.100 in.)
I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 mm (0.104 in.)
K 41451-PK4-000 2.70 mm (0.106 in.)
L 41452-PK4-000 2.75 mm (0.108 in.)
M 41453-PK4-000 2.80 mm (0.110 in.)
N 41454-PK4-000 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
0 41455-PK4-000 2.90 mm (0.114 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 mm (0.116 in.)
Q 41457 -PK4-000 3.00 mm (0.118 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 mm (0.120 in.)
(cont'd)
14-205
BACK
AIT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (8), and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing
(D).
6. Drive the outer race with the special tools, and
install it securely in the transmission housing.
7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust
washer, outer race, shim, and transmission
housing.
14-206
8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (8), and
dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D).
Align the spring pin on the control shaft (E) with the
transmission housing groove.
10 x 1.25 mm

H
A c D
9. Install the transmission housing (F) with the
transmission hangers (G) and harness clamp
bracket (H), and tighten the bolts.
G
BACK
to seat the bearings.
11. Measure the starting torque of the differential
assembly with the special tool and a torque wrench
(A). Measure the starting torque at normal room
temperature in both directions.
STANDARD:
New bearing: 2.7-3.9 Nm
(28-40 kgfcm, 24-35Ibfin.)
Reused bearings: 2.5-3.6 Nm
(25-37 kgfcm, 22-32Ibfin.)
07HAJ-PK40201
12. To increase the starting torque, increase the
thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting
torque, decrease the thickness of the shim.
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease starting torque about
0.3-0.4 Nm (3-4 kgfcm, 3-3Ibfin.).
14-207
BACK
BACK
Transaxle
Drivelinel Axle
Special Tools ............................................................. 16-2
Driveshafts Reassembly ........................................... 16-3
Intermediate Shaft Removal.................................... 16-14
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ............................. 16-14
Intermediate Shaft Resassembly ............................ 16-16
Intermediate Shaft Installation ................................ 16-18
NOTE: Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN 6158400, for the items not shown
in this section.
Outline of Model Changes
'98 model:
The installation length of the driveshafts is different; installation instructions and specifications are
included.
The installation position ofthe intermediate shaft is different; related service information is included.
'99 model:
The Thermoplastic Polyester Elastomer (TPE) outboard boot has been added.
The replacement procedure for ear clamp type boot bands has been added.
The outboard joint disassembly/reassembly procedure has been added.
'01 model:
The replacement procedure for low profile type boot bands has been added.
Drivelinel Axle
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description at'[
CD 07LAF-SM40300 Support Base Attachment 1
ill 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
077 49-0010000 Driver 1
CD 07947-SD90101 Oil Seal Driver, Attachment 1
07947 -4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2x49.5x15 mm 1
07947 -6340500 Driver Attachment 1
IJ) 07965-S D90 1 00 Support Base 1
CD

16-2
BACK
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
'98-00 models
(Rubber typel
EAR CLAMP BAND
Replace.
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT

Replace.
G

Replace.
OUTBOARD BOOT
(Rubber)
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
(cont'd)
16-3 BACK
Drivelinel Axle
'01-02 models
SET RING
Replace.
ROLLER
LOW PROFILE BAND
Replace.
OUTBOARD BOOT (TPE)
..
BOOT BANDS
Replace.
16-4
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
(Replacement parts only)
BACK
Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent commercially
available
Boot band pincers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent
Boot band pincer, commercially available
this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side
damage to the inboard boot.
A

2. Install the inboard boot to the driveshaft, then
remove the vinyl tape.Take care not to damage the
inboard boot.
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the
driveshaft.
4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always
rotate the circlip in its groove to be sure it is fully
seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A or B) onto the spider (C) with their
high shoulders facing outward, and note these
items:
Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on
the spider by aligning the marks (D).
Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
rollers from falling off.
Roller (A) is used on '98-00 AfT models and all
'01-02 models.
Roller (B) is used on '98-00 MIT models.
(cont'd)
16-5
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease
included in the new driveshaft set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 120 -130 g (4.2 - 4.6 oz)
('98-00 models)
150-160 g (5.3-5.6 oz)
('01-02 models)
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note
these items:
o Reinstall the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft
by aligning the marks (8) on the inboard joint and
the rollers.
o Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up
to prevent it from falling off.
o For Mrr models, align the roller holders (e) with
the grooves in the inboard joint ('98-00 models).
16-6
8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure
below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the
driveshaft and joint.
Left driveshaft:
Right driveshaft:
554-559 mm (21.8-22.0 in.)
544-549 mm (21.4-21.6 in.'
9. Install the boot bands.
o For the double loop type, go to step 13 .
For the low profile type, go to step 11.
BACK
10. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
(8) and dynamic damper, then hook the tab (C) of
the band.
11. Close the hook portion of the band with a
commercially available boot band pincers (A) then
hook the tabs (8) ofthe band.
B
12. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the band (A) onto the boot
(8).
(cont'd)
16-7
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
15. Thread the free end ofthe band through the nose
section of the commercially available boot band
tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on
the winding mandrel (B).
16. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel ofthe boot
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-8
hammer.
NOTE:
anything and the band does not move .
surrounding surfaces
BACK
20. Install the new set ring. Outboard Joint Side:
damage to the outboard boot.
Rubber type
TPEtype
2. Install the new boot band (B) (TPE type).
3. Install the outboard boot. Take care not to damage
the outboard boot.
(cont'd)
16-9
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
5. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft
groove (8).
A

6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (8)
until the stop ring (C) is close on the joint.
16-10
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
driveshaft and joint, and drop them from about
10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
hammer as excessive force may damage the
driveshaft.
10cm
(4in.1
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the
outboard joint end (8).
BACK
9. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease
included in the new joint boot set.
Grease quantity
Outboard joint (Rubber): 130-140 9 (4.6-4.9 oz)
Outboard joint (TPE): 140-150 9 (4.9-5.3 oz)
10. Install the outboard boot and boot bands.
For TPE type boot, go to step 20.
For rubber type boot, go to step 11.
11. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint (e).
B
12. Set the new double loop band (A) onto the boot.
(cont'd)
16-11
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of a commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
winding mandrel (B).
c
the band 90
0
to the clip. Center-punch the clip, then
fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-12
hammer.
NOTE:
anything, and the band does not move.
surrounding surfaces.
A
BACK
20. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
commercially available boot band pincers (B).
A
22. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion
of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band further.
6.0mm
(0.24 in.) MAX
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX
16-13
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the ATF, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
2. Remove the left driveshaft; refer to the '98-02
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).
B \ ~
, ~
~ , ,
6)
4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the
differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage
to the differential oil seal (B).
A
B
16-14
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Driver 07749-0010000
Support base 07965-SD90100
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
1. Remove the heat shield (A) and intermediate shaft
outer seal (B) from the bearing support (C).
c ~
o
2. Remove the external snap ring (D).
3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the special
tools and a press. Be careful not to damage the
metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during
disassembly.
Press
07749-0010000
BACK
4. Remove the internal snap ring.
5. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
bearing support (8) using the special tools and a
press.
16-15
BACK
Drivelinel Axle
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
6x1.0mm
Grease splines.
0.3-1.0 9 (0.01-0.04 oz)
16-16
BEARING SUPPORT RING
SNAP RING
BEARING SUPPORT
Pack the interior of the outer seal.
3.0-4.0 9 (0.11-0.14 oz)
OUTER SEAL
Replace.
BACK
Driver 07749-0010000
Support base 07965-S090100
Oil seal driver attachment 07947-S090101
Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x15 mm 07947-4630100
this procedure.
them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the
bearing support (8) using the special tools and a
press.
3. Seatthe internal snap ring in the groove ofthe
bearing support.
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
bearing using the special tool and a press.
_ - - - . . . L . - _ . L . . J . . . ~ _ _ 07947-4630100
5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of
the intermediate shaft (8).
A
(cont'd)
16-17 BACK
Drivelinel Axle
(cont'd)
6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the
outer seal into the bearing support (8) using the
A
Pack the interior
ofthe outer seal.
3.0-4.0g
10.11-0.14ozl
7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.
16-18
Intermediate Shaft Installation
1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A)
contacts the transmission (differential) thoroughly
with solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with
compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
assembly into the differential. Hold the
intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to
the differential oil seal (8).
B A
2. Install the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (8).
3. Refill the transmisson with recommended ATF,
14-113).
BACK
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ............................................................. 17-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ........................... 17-4
Symptom Troubleshooting ..................................... 17-6
Pump Pressure Test-with TIN 07406-0010001 ..... 17-7
Pump Pressure Test-with TIN 07406-001000A .... 17-8
Fluid Leakage Inspection ......................................... 17-9
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment ................... 17-10
Hoses and Lines Replacement ................................ 17-12
Pump Replacement .................................................. 17-13
Pump Overhaul ......................................................... 17-14
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................ 17-19
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ..................................... 17-20
NOTE: Refer to the 1998-2002 Accord Service Manual, PIN 61S8400 for items not shown
in this section.
Outline of V6 Model Changes
The Steering System has been changed to suitthe V6 engine.
Power Steering
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Oty
<D 07LAG-SM40100 or 07LAG-SM4010A Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
07LAG-SM40200 or 07LAG-SM4020A Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
* 07 JGG-001 01 OA Belt Tension Gauge 1
G) 07T AF-SZ50 1 00 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
07RAK-S040122 PIS Joint Adaptor (Hose) 1
07VAK-P8A011 A PIS Joint Adaptor (Pump) 1
CD 07VAK-P8A012B PIS Joint Adaptor Plate (Pump) 1
07406-0010001 or 07406-001000A PIS Pressure Gauge 1
077 46-00 10300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@ 077 49-00 1 0000 Driver 1
*Included In the Belt Tension Gauge Set, 07TGG -001000A.

!

<D
G)
eIJ

CD

17-2
BACK
RESERVOIR
Hoses and Lines Replacement, page 17-12
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-9
POWER STEERING PUMP
Pump Pressure Test, page 17-7
Pump Belt Adjustment, page 17-10
Pump Replacement, page 17-13
Pump Overhaul, page 17-14
POWER STEERING GEARBOX
Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-19
Steering Gearbox Overhaul, page 17-20
17-3
BACK
Power Steering
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
SvmDtom Procedurelsl Also check for:
Hard Steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-61. Modified suspension
Tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air
pressure
Power steering pump
belt adjustment
Assist (excessively light Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-191. Front wheel alignment;
steering at high speedl refer to the '98-02
Accord Service Manual
(see Daae 18-51.
Shock or vibration when the 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-191.
wheel is turned to full lock 2. Check the power steering pump belt for slippage and adjust as necessary (see
page 17-101.
3. Replace the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see
paae 17-301.
Steering wheel will not 1. Check cylinder lines A and B for deformation.
return smoothly 2. Check wheel alignment; refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page
18-51.
paae 17-301.
Uneven or rough steering 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-191.
2. Check power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-101.
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-871.
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to low fluid level.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to possible leaks
in system.
paae 17-301.
Steering wheel kicks back 1. Check power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-101.
during wide turns 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-0010001 (see
paae 17-7) with TIN 07406-001000A (see paae 17-8).
Humming 1. Check when the noise occurs
If the noise happens 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in cold weather,
this is normal .
If the noise happens when the wheel is turn with the vehicle stopped, this is
normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the sub-frame or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission convertor noise. Remove the power
steering belt and recheck.
17-4
BACK
Rattle or chattering 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints). Tighten or
replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering columns
wobbles, replace the steering column assembly, refer to the '98-'02 Accord
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-19).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley.
If the pulley is loose, tighten it (see page 17-14) .
Ifthe DumD shaft is loose reDlace the DumD (see Dage 17-13).
Hissing Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level and check for
leaks.
Check the reservoir for leaks.
Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into the suction
side ofthe system.
Check the Dower steerina DumD shaft oil seal for leaks.
Pump noise Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to another vehicle,
(pump noise up to 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in cold weather is
normal).
Remove and insDectthe DumD for wear and damage (see steD 1 on Dage 17-15).
Saueaking Check the Dower steering belt tension and adiust as necessary (see Dage 17-10).
Fluid Leaks from the Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit:
steering gearbox Replace the valve body unit.
Fluid leaks from the left tie-rod boot:
Replace the valve oil seal on the pinion shaft.
Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox side.
Fluid leaks from the right tie-rod boot: Replace the cylinder end seal.
Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt: Replace the valve
body unit.
Fluid leaks from line Fluid leaks from the cylinder line A or B connections (flare nuts):
Tighten the connection and retest. If it still leaks, replace the fitting a-rings.
Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder line A or B:
Replace the cylinder line.
Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the valve body
unit (flair nuts): Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still leaks, replace the hose, the
line or valve body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from pump Fluid leaks from the front oil seal: Replace the front oil seal.
Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing:
Replace the leaking a-rings or seals (see page 17-14), and if necessary replace
(see Dage 17-13)
Fluid leaks from reservoir Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap: Fluid level is too high: drain the
reservoir to the proper level. Aerated fluid: check for an air leak on the inlet side
of pump.
Fluid leaks from reservoir: Check for the reservoir for cracks and replace as
necessary.
Fluid leaks from pump Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the fitting a-ring.
outlet hose (high-pressure) Fluid leaks atthe swagruld joint: Replace the outlet hose.
Fluid leaks from pump inlet Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly. Replace or
hose (low-Dressure) reDair as necessarv.
17-5
BACK
Power Steering
Hard Steering
1. Check the power assist, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Is the power assist more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6Ibf)?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Power assist is OK .
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump
at idle with TIN 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or
with TIN 07406-001000A (see page 17-8).
Is the pressure 1,500 kPa (15 kgflcrrf, 213 psi) or less?
YES- Go to step 3.
NO-Goto step 7.
3. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle with TIN
07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or with TIN 07406-
001000A (see page 17-8).
Is the pressure 7,600-8,300 kPa (78-85 kgflcm
2, 1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?
YES-Goto step 4.
NO-Go to step 8.
4. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in
both directions, to the left and to the right.
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
1.12Ibf) of each other?
YES-Goto step 5.
NO- Go to step 9.
5. Measure the fluid pressure with TIN 07406-0010001
(see page 17-7) or with TIN 07406-001000A (see
page 17-8) with both pressure gauge valves open
(if so equipped), wheel turning the steering wheel
fully to the left and fully to the right.
Is the pressure 7,600- 8,300 kPa (78- 85 kgflcrrf,
1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?
YES-Goto step 6.
NO-Faulty gearbox .
17-6
6. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-19), and retest.
Is the steering OK?
YES-Repair is completed .
NO- Faulty gearbox .
7. Check for feed and return lines between the pump
and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.
Are the lines clogged or deformed?
YES- Repair or replace the lines .
NO- Faulty valve body unit .
8. Check the flow control valve, refer to the '98-02
Accord Service Manual (see page 17-17) for
smooth movement and leaks.
Is the flow control valve OK?
YES-Faulty pump assembly .
NO-Faulty flow control valve .
9. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation
(see page 17-12).
Are the A or B lines deformed?
YES- Replace the lines .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (to tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted
too tight?
YES- Replace the rack shaft or readjust the rack
guide .
NO- Faulty valve body unit .
BACK
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406-0010001
PIS joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A
PIS joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A0128
PIS pressure gauge, 07406-0010001
1. Check the power steering fluid level; refer to
the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14)
and pump belttension (see page 17-10).
outlet (8) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
07VAK-P8A011A
adapter (pump).
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
B
A
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (8).
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine
is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge
should read less than 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm
2
, 213 psi).
Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and gearbox .
Clogged valve vody unit.
10. Close the pressure control valve, then close the
shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
INOTICEI
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
over-heating.
11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
Ifthe pump is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7,600-8,300 kPa (78-85 kgf/cm
2
,
the pump.
17-7
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406001000A
PIS joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A
PIS joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A0128
PIS pressure gauge, 07406-001000A
1. Check the power steering fluid level; refer to
the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14)
and pump belt tension (see page 17-10).
outlet (8) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
07VAK-P8A011A
07VAK-P8A012B
adapter (pump).
17-8
5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.
A
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine
is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge
should read less than 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi).
Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and gearbox .
Clogged valve vody unit.
9. Close the pressure control valve gradually and read
the pressure.
INOTICEI
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
over-heating.
10. Immediatery open the pressure control valve fully.
If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
the pump.
BACK
Fluid Leakage Inspection
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
inlet and outlet fittings.
GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT
Check for leaks at the mating surface
flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES
Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections.
17-9
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Belttension gauge set, 07JGG-001000A or
Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-001010A
Inspection
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt with the
gauge face toward the engine, and measure the
tension of the belt. Follow the manufacture's
instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace
it.
NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to
avoid hitting the gauge reset lever.
Tension:
Used Belt: 390-540 N (40-55 kgf, 88-121Ibf)
New Belt: 740-880 N (75-90 kgf, 165-198Ibf)
07JGG-001000A or
07JGG-001010A
specifications.
17-10
Adjustment
3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
A
B
4. Turn the adjusting nut (e) to get the proper belt
tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.

I
BACK
r
Deflection Method
Inspection
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf) and measure
the deflection between the power steering pump
pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B).
Deflection:
Used Belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in.)
New Belt: 8.5-11.0 mm (0.33-0.45 in.)
B
.....
specifications.
Adjustment
3. loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
A
B
4. Turn the adjusting nut (e) to get the proper belt
tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
recheck the tension of the belt .
17-11
BACK
Power Steering
Hoses and lines Replacement
Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary.
Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
17-12
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.01-0.22 in.)
2.0-4.0mm
(0.08-0.16 in.)
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
10x1.25mm
12 Nm (1.2 kgfm, 8.7Ibfftl
HOSE CLAMP (B)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.01-0.22 in.)
RETURN LINE
16x 1.5 mm
FEED HOSE
14x 1.5 mm
37 Nm (3.8 kgfm,
27lbfftl
BACK
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Remove the intake manifold cover.
4. Cover the crankshaft pulley with several shop
towels to protect if from spilled power steering
fluid. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (A) and pump
outlet hose (8) from the pump (C), and plug them.
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
F
24Nm
12.4 kgf.m, 17 Ibfftl
G
24Nm
6x 1.0 mm BOLT
11 Nm 11.1 \m. 81bfftl
5. Remove the belt (D) by loosening the pump
adjusting nut (E), then remove pump mounting
bolts (F), nut (G) and pump. Do not turn the steering
wheel with pump removed.
6. Connect the pump outlet hose and inlet hose.
Tighten the pump fittings securely.
7. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with
the mounting bolts and nut.
8. Install the pump belt (A) on the pulley (8).
Note these items during belt installation:
Make sure that the power steering belt is
properly positioned on the pulleys.
Do not get the power steering fluid or grease on
the belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
grease before installation.
9. Adjust the pump belt adjustment (see page 17-10).
10. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line; refer to
17-13
BACK
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*1 are worn or damaged.
4.5 mm ROLLER

*OUTER SIDE PLATE
FLANGE BOLTS
COVER
*SIDE PLATE
-------------

PUMP COVER SEAL
Replace.
15.2 x 2.4 mm O-RING
Replace.
/
PULLEY NUT
17-14
*PUMP CAM RING
*PUMPROTOR
0
v:
51 x 2.4 mm O-RING
Replace.
V
13 x 1.9 mm O-RING
*SUB-VALVE
\
\ 'PUMP HOUSING
BALL BEARING
40 mm SNAP RING
Replace.
/ INLET JOINT
/
FLANGE BOLTS
11 Nm (1.1 kgfm,
8lbfftl
-------*SPRING
g-----15.2 x 2.4 mm O-RING
Replace.
CONTllOL VALVE CAP
BACK
Universal holder, 07725-0030000
Disassembly
1. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-13).
2. Drain the fluid from the pump.
3. Hold the steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws,
hold the pulley (B) with the special tool, and
remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the
vise.
4. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex
wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, flow control
valve, and spring.
5. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.
6. Remove the outer side plate, pump cam ring, pump
rotor, pump vanes, side plate, and O-rings.
7. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve
from the pump housing.
8. Remove the circlip, then remove the pump drive
shaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic
hammer.
9. Remove the pump seal spacer and pump seal.
Inspection
10. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and
other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
"... "...
'---
=
0 0
r--
-=-
'-'-
11. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the
pump housing for scratches and wear.
12. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump
housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 13; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
(cont'd)
17-15
BACK
Power Steering
13. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control
valve (8) as shown. Then subl'l1erge the flow
control valve (8) in a container of power steering
fluid or solvent (C), and blow in t ~ hose.
If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm
2
; 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
If the flow control valve tests OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
A
14. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race
slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (8).
B
~
A
~
15. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the
Exploded View; if any ofthem are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
17-16
Reassembly
them with compressed air. 00 not dip rubber parts
in solvent.
17. Align the pin (A) of the sub-valve (8) with the oil
passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the
sub-valve into place. then install the snap ring (0).
18. Install the new pump seal (A)(with its grooved side
facing in) into the pump housing by hand, then
install the pump seal spacer (8).
O---F
__ -c
19. Position the pump drive shaft (C) in the pump
housing (0), then drive it in using a 29 mm socket
(E).
20. Install the 40 mm snap ring (F) with its radiused
side facing out.
BACK
21. Coatthe new pump cover seal (A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
pump cover (B).
22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the two
rollers (0).
23. Set the pump cam ring (A) over the two rollers
with its "." mark (B) facing up.
B
24. Assemble pump rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).
A
}oo
aD
c
D
25. Set the 10 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.
Make sure that the round ends (0) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).
~
/B
E
E
c
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roller set holes (0) in the side plate with the
rollers (E).
(cont'd)
17-17
BACK
Power Steering
and position it in the bottom of the pump housing
(B).
8x 1.25 mm
/20N.m
/ (2.0 kgf.m, 14Ibfft)
29. Install the pump cover assembly (C) in the pump
housing.
30. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump
housing.
B
1/
Of(()
/
o
49 Nm (5.0 kgfm,
36Ibfft)
31. Coat the new O-ring (0) with power steering fluid,
and install it on the flow control valve cap (E).
Install the cap on the pump housing, and tighten it.
17-18
32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
B
64 Nm (6.5 kgfm,
47Ibfft)
~ A
33. Hold the pulley (A) with the special tool, and tighten
the pulley nut (B).
34. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the
pulley by hand.
BACK
r
Rack Guide Adjustment
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with a
commercially available 1 3/4" crowfoot wrench
(B), then remove the rack guide screw (C).
c A
69 Nm (7.0 kgf.m,
51Ibfft)
f
3. Remove the old sealant from rack guide screw
threaded section, and apply new sealant all the way
around the first three threads (A). Loosely install
the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 Nm (2.5 kgfm,
18 Ibfft), then loosen it.
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm
(0.4 kgfm, 2.9 Ibfft), then back it off to specified
angle.
Specified Return Angle: 60
0
50
6. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide
screw.
7. Check for tight or loose steering through the
complete turning travel.
8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the
power assist; refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
17-19
BACK
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
FLARE NUTS
13 Nm (1.3 kgfm, 9.4Ibfttl
CYLINDER LINE B
ORING
Replace.
CIRCLIP GEARBOX HOUSING
\
ORING
Replace.
Ifj) \ I CYLINDER END SEAL
J@ 1 Replace.
/OO@J(@
RACK STOP ______ () 0
RACK BUSHING / '\
PISTON SEAL RING
Replace.
17-20
ORING
Replace.
STEERING RACK
FLANGE BOLTS
19 Nm 11.9 kgf.m, 1.4Ibfttl
til

/" _ Replace.
()CI
%5)-, \ ----LOCKNUT
\
\ RACK GUIDE SCREW
SPRING
fi). \. RACK GUIDE
\ 12.5 kgf.m. ,.,bf.ft)
END PLUG
(j
/
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
BACK
Cylinder end seal remover attachment,
07T AF-SZ50100
Driver, 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 X 47 mm, 07746-0010300
Piston seal ring guide,
07LAG-SM4010A or 07LAG-SM40100
07LAG-SM4020A or 07LAG-SM40200
Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially
available
Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-02
Note these items during removal:
Disconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 5-2) to allow
clearance for the steering gearbox.
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot band (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull
the boots away from the ends of the gearbox.
3. Unbend the lock washer (A).
A
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side
steering rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew both
rack ends (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to
damage the rack surface with the wrench. Remove
the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
I
(cont'd)
17-21
BACK
Power Steering
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (B).
6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from
the gearbox.
7. Remove the cylinder lines from the gearbox.
8. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly
moving the steering rack back and forth.
17-22
9. Remove the end plug (A) from the gearbox housing,
then remove the nut (B) from the pinion shaft end.
C
__ --A
10. Remove the two flange bolts, the valve body unit
(C), and gasket (D) from the gearbox. Check that the
valve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. If
any play or roughness is felt, replace the valve
body unit with a new part if necessary. Do not try to
disassemble the valve body unit.
11. Slide the steering rack all the way to the left.
12. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the
end of the circlip (B) sticks out from the hole (C) in
the rack stop. Then turn it clockwise to remove the
circlip (D).
B
D
BACK
r
13. Remove the rack stop (AI, rack bushing (B), and
steering rack (C) from the steering gearbox.
14. Remove the a-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B)
from the rack bushing (C).
15. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and a-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of seal ring groove and piston edges when
removing the seal ring.
16. Install a washer (0.0.27.5 mm, PIN 94103-10400)
(A) so it will fit through the rack guide hole of the
gearbox housing, then position the washer on the
cylinder end seal (B). Make sure that the washer is
securely positioned on the cylinder end seal edges.
A
17. Install a socket with a 27.5 mm 0.0. (A) onto a 24" long,
3/8" drive extension (B), and carefully place it on the
washer (C).
.. B

5-6 mm
(0.20-0.24 in.)
18. Install a bearing separator (D) on the gearbox.
housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the
gearbox housing points upward, then push outthe
cylinder end seal (E) 5-6 mm (0.20-0.24 in.) by
pressing on the end of the extension.
19. Remove the steering gearbox from the press, and
remove the washer from the gearbox inside.
(cont'd)
17-23
BACK
Power Steering
20. Turn the special tool so it will fit through the rack
guide hole of the steering gearbox, then position
the special tool on the cylinder end seal (A). Make
sure that the special tool is securely positioned on
the seal edges.
~
f ~ i
/
07T AF-SZ501 00
A
21. Insert a 24 in. long, 3/8 in. drive extension (A), on
the special tool. Place the steering gearbox in a
press, then remove the cylinder end seal (B) from
of the gearbox by pressing on the end of the
extension.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end
seal:
Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool;
striking the tool would break the cylinder end
seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox.
A ~
07TAF-SZ50100
B
17-24
Reassembly
22. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then
slide it onto the rack, big end first.
23. Position the new C-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.
Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool) .
Replace the piston's C-ring and seal ring as a set.
B
i
1/
07LAG-SM4010A or
07LAG-SM40100
24. Pull the C-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the C-ring.
25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
special tool with power steering fluid, then
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
A
i
07LAG-SM4010A or
07LAG-SM40100
26. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
BACK
27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped
portion.
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not damage the lip of the seal with the
edges or teeth ofthe steering rack.
A
30. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the
steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be careful
not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall
with the rack edges.
31. Insert a deep socket (A) onto the steering rack as
shown.
Press
~
32. Install the cylinder and seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
(cont'd)
17-25
BACK
Power Steering
34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
coat the surface of the tape with power steering
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
carefully so there is no stepped portion.
(A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
rack bushing (8) using the special tools.
i 07749-0010000
< /A ~ 0"40-0010300
B
I ......... ~
i
36. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,
and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
17-26
37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with
the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the
piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger.
39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the
hole (8) is aligned with the slot (C) on the steering
rack.
BACK
r
40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of
the rack stop (e). Turn the rack stop
counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in
the rack stop.
A
c
41. Apply grease to the needle bearing (A) in the
gearbox housing, and install the valve body unit (B)
and gasket (e) by engaging the gears. Note the
valve body unit installation position (direction of
line connections). Then loosely install the two
flange bolts.
B
~ _ 1 9 N m
42. Install the nut (D) onto the pinion shaft end, and
tighten to specified torque. After tightening, use a
drift to stake the nut shoulder (E) against the pinion
shaft.
43. Apply sealant all the way around the threads on the
end plug (F), install the end plug onto the gearbox
housing, and tighten it to the specified torque.
44. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.
45. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new 0-
rings with power steering fluid, then install the
lines.
Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
46. Apply mUltipurpose Grease to the sliding surface of
the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
housing.
47. Apply new sealant all the way around the first three
threads ofthe rack guide screw (B), then install the
spring (e), rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
48. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-19). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
(cont'd)
17-27
BACK
Power Steering
49. Install the stop washer (A) with the chamfered side
facing out, and screw each rack end (B) into the
rack while holding the lock washer (C) so its tabs
(D) are in the slots (E) in the end of the rack.
83Nm
50. Hold the flat surface sections ofthe right side
steering rack with a wrench, and tighten both rack
ends. Be careful not to damage the rack surface
with the wrench.
51. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
the rack end joint housing.
17-28
52. Apply mUltipurpose grease (A) to the
circumference of the rack end joint housing.
A
53. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (B) to the boot
grooves (B) on the rack ends.
54. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Install the
boots on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips. After
installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
A
BACK
55. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (8) ofthe band.
commercially available Oetiker 1098 pincer or
equivalent (8).
57. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
Installation
58. Install the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-02
Reinstall exhaust pipe A with new gasket (see
page 5-11) .
Reconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
1729
BACK
BACK
Brakes
Front Brake Pads Inspection
and Replacement .................................................. 19-2
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul .................................... 19-4
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) Components ..................... 19-7
NOTE: Refer to the 1998-2002 Accord Service Manual, PIN 6158400 for the items not
shown in this section.
The front brake caliper is different; the brake pad replacement and the brake caliper overhaul procedures
are included.
Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust,regardless of
material composition,could be hazardous to your
health .
cleaner.
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. Raise the front
of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the front wheels. Remove the
brake hose mounting bolts (A) from the knuckle.
A
9.8Nm
11.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
c
2. Remove the caliper bolt (B), and pivot the caliper
(C) up out of the way. If the caliper pin head is the
hex. type, the caliper bolt should be removed using
a wrench while holding the caliper pin with another
wrench. Check the hoses and pin boots for damage
and deterioration.
19-2
3. Remove the pads (A), pad shims (B), and pad
retainers (C).
c
B
each brake pad lining. The measurement does not
include the pad backing plate (A) thickness.
Standard: 10.5-11.5 mm (0.41-0.45 in)
Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
f
A
5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the front pads and shims together as
a set.
BACK
8. Install the pad retainers (A).
9. Apply Molykote M77 grease to both sides of the
pad shims (A) and the back of the pads (8). Wipe
excess grease off the shim.
A C
A
I
(t
._.
..
. -.
' ..
10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.
Install the pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
inside.lf you are reusing the pads,always reinstall
the brake pads in their original positions to prevent
loss of braking efficiency.
11. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
B
NOTE: Check the brake fluid level, the brake fluid
may overflow the reservoir if too full.
49 Nm 15.0 kgfm, 36 Ibf.ft) A

12. Pivot the caliper down into position, being careful
not to damage the pin boot. Install the caliper bolt
(8), and torque it to proper specification. If the
caliper pin head (C) is the hex. type, the caliper bolt
should be installed by using a wrench while
holding the caliper pin with another wrench. Install
the brake hose onto the knuckle .
the brakes work, then road-test.
joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
19-3
BACK
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
When reusing pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the
system.
Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Replace all rubber parts with new ones.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
19-4 BACK
r
Sedan:
_ : Silicone grease
: Rubber grease
BANJO BOLT
\
d
SEALING WASHERS
BRAKE HOSE Replace.
10 mm FLANGE BOLTS BLEED SCREW
34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25 Ibf.tt) \, (0.9 kgfm, 6.5 Ibftt)
ARM CAM 0 CALIPER BODY
CAM /SLEEVE PISTON BEARING A
'- PIN \ ADJUSTING SPACER
LEVER \0 BILT ADJUSTING SPRING B
-------= - t@ ; SPRING COVER
27 Nm (2.8 kgfm, 20 Ibftt) .1fN

=------ CALlPEIi BOLTS
OUTER PAD SHIM 23 N.m
(2.3 kgfm, 17Ibftt)
PIN A
CALIPER BRACKET
10 mm FLANGE BOLTS
PIN BOOT

(cont'd)
19-5
BACK
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (cont'd)
Coupe:
: Silicone grease
: Rubber grease
BANJO BOLT
10 x 1.25 mm 34 Nm (3.5 kgfm, 25Ibfft)
32 Ibf.ft) \ WASHERS
19-6
HOSE 'i BLEED SCREW

9 Nm (0.9 kgfm, 6.5Ibf.ft)
ARM 0 CALIPER BODY
0 / /SLEEV:PRING

CAM BOOT .---__
R,pl", 7;}- /
PISTON SEAL
Replace.

PISTON ASSEMBLY
CAM ASSEMBLY Replace.
SPRING
CASE
RETURN \
SPRING CONNECTOR
Replace.
PAD SPRING RETAINER
CALIPER BOLTS RING
8x1.0mm
JJ
25 Nm (2.5 kgfm, 19 Ibfft) BOOT CLIP
"\ PIN A Replace.
V
f1

Y
BRAKE PADS /
/RETAINER
OUTER PAD SHIM
PIN BOOTS
SILICONE
GREASE
PIN
PINB
BUSH
CALIPER
BRACKET
FLANGE BOLTS
10x 1.25mm
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ................ 19-1
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Components ('98-00 Models)
DTC Troubleshooting Index ..................................... 19-9
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ........................... 19-10
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 19-12
DTC Troubleshooting ............................................... 19-14
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ................... 19-18
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation .............. 19-21
ABS Control Unit Replacement ............................... 19-22
ABS/TCS (Anti-lock Brake System/Traction
Control System) Components
('01- 02 Models) ................................................ 19-23
NOTE: Refer to the 1998-2002 Accord Service Manual (PIN 61S8400) for the items not
shown in this section.
The locations of the modulator unit and ASS control unit were changed;
- Component location index was added.
- Modulator unit removal and installation was added.
- ABS control unit replacement was added.
Ground numbers of pump motor ground and ABS control unit ground were changed;
- DTC troubleshooting index was added.
- Symptom troubleshooting index was added.
- Circuit diagram was added.
- DTC troubleshooting was added.
- ABS indicator circuit troubleshooting was added.
ABS Components
19-8
RIGHT-FRONT SENSOR
UNDER-HOOD ABS RELAY BOX
(PUMP MOTOR RELAY)
/UI"DE:R-tIO(JID FUSE/RELAY BOX
/PA.SSIENC;ER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (16P)
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
RIGHT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
BACK
DTC Detection Item
DTC: 11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
DTC: 12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
DTC: 13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
DTC: 14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
DTC: 15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
DTC: 16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
DTC: 17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
DTC: 18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
DTC: 21 Right-front pulser
DTC:22 Left-front pulser
DTC:23 Right-rear pulser
DTC:24 Left-rear pulser
DTC: 31 Right-front inlet solenoid
DTC:32 Right-front outlet solenoid
DTC:33 Left-front inlet solenoid
DTC:34 Left-front outlet solenoid
DTC:35 Right-rear inlet solenoid
DTC:36 Right-rear outlet solenoid
DTC:37 Left-rear inlet solenoid
DTC:38 Left-rear outlet solenoid
DTC: 41 Right-front wheel lock
DTC:42 Left-front wheel lock
DTC: 43 Right-rear wheel lock
DTC:44 Left-rear wheel lock
DTC: 51 Motor lock
DTC: 52 Motor stuck OFF
DTC:53 Motor stuck ON
DTC:54 Fail-safe relay
DTC: 61 Low ignition voltage
DTC:62 High ignition voltage
DTC: 71 Different diameter tire
DTC: 81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis
Note

E!I
(see paQe 19-52)
(see paQe 19-53) .
(see paQe 19-52)
19-53)
(see Dace 19-52)
(see paQe 19-53)
(see paQe 19-52)
(see paQe 19-53)
(see paQe 19-54)
19-54)
(see paQe 19-54)
(see paQe 19-54)
(see paQe 19-55)
(!lee 19-55)
(see Dace 19-55)
(see paoe 19-55)
(see paQe 19-55)
(see paQe 19-55)
(see Dace 19-55)
(see paoe 19-55)
(see paoe 19-58)
(see paQe 19-58)
(see paQe 19-58)
(see page 19-58)
19-59)
(see Dace 19-14)
(see Dace 19-16)
(see Dace 19-63)
(see Dace 19-65)
(see paQe 19-65)
(see page 19-66)
(see Dace 19-66)
19-9
BACK
ABS Components
ABS indicator does not come on ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)
ABS indicator does not go off ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)
and no OTC is stored
19-10
BACK
r ~ ~ ~ ~
19-11
BACK
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
19-12
BAITERY
+
.B UNDERHOOD FUSE,RElAY BOX BRAKE SWITCH
Closed: Brake pedal depressed
STOPI20A)
t---... WHTIBlK---
IGNITION
SWITCH
DRIVER'S UNDERDASH
FUSE/RElAY BOX
r----cru:_-ffi- VEl--<il>-r--fJt+---@]-GRNlRED--'I'I----
UP LIGHT GRNJRED
'U>---<>-

Closed: low fluid:1::.
ASS FtS (20AI
G3D2

UNDERHOOD
ABS RElAY BOX
FAil-SAFE
RELAY

ABS INDICATOR
CIRCUIT
GS01
T
_____ ______________________ YElJ8lK---
YEURED---
BRtfBlK
WHT:SLU
I I! ..... ------------------YEUGRN---
BR lK
...
WHTBLU
... RED!8LU---
... YElJ8lU---

L...------WHT!8LU----ffi------1
UNDERHOOD FUSE-RELAY
BOX CONNECTORS
laP CONNECTOR () number) 7P CONNECTOR (0 number)
t"Zf 3 I
7 ; 8 ' 9 :Zl" t:m:J:ilij
DRIVER'S UNDERDASH FUSEIRELA Y
BOX CONNECTORS
lOP CONNECTOR (0 number)
';2i3456789
10'11:12,,3 14,15i16117 181920
lap CONNECTOR (0 number)
1234 5678
9 10 11 12 13 1415 1617 18
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX CONNECTORS
lap CONNECTOA (0 number) 16P CONNECTOR (0 number)
3 4
7 8 9 10 12 13 14 17 18
BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR
r1'Gl
tillJ
GAUGE ASSEMBLRY CONNECTORS
22P CONNECTOR (0 number) l6P CONNECTOR (0 number)
6 7' 8 9 10 j.,'+2+3+'T?+,:4,r,:.'+:,:6 j,7'o1
::.22::1 8191011 12 141516
1 2 415
Wire side of female tenTinais
PUMP MOTOR
RELAY CONNECTOR
JIJ:>'<Iil
Q.J:TI
FAllSAFE RELAY
CONNECTOR

MOOULATOR UNIT
CONNECTOR
(Onumbcr)
PUMP MOTOR
CONNECTOR
(0 number)
cITb
Terminal side of female term"aIs
BACK

BRAKE
LIGHT

---------------YElJR!:O
MCK
GRN
FL-IN
REO/BLU
FL-OUT

FR-IN
REO/BLK
FR-OUT

RL-IN
RED/GRN
RL-OUT
VElJGIIN
RR-IN
RED,WHT
RR-OUT

ABS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (22P)
CONNECTOR B (12P)
123458
7 8 9 10 11 12
IG2
A,6
ttL
PCM(SCS)
'V DATA LINK
8ft
, CONNECTOR (16P) .8
SCS N 1 'Y
J
PCM (DLC) WHT/GRN
lXU BlKl
F""'!t-GKO.@D-LfTBlU...J...-lTBLU8ftr1.
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (16P)
Gl0l G.ol
WHEEL SENSOR

2..... FRONT

2 - FRONT

,
- REAR

,
- REAR
U:\l
:=4. _
G20' G205
WHEEL SENSOR
CONNECTOR

T arminal side of
male terminals

19-13
BACK
ABS Components
OTC Troubleshooting
DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 3 .
NO - Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
and check the fuse.
~

4 3
+B MOTOR
(WHT) (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
19-14
and check the fuse.
~

4 3
+B MOTOR
(WHT) (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES- Check for a short to body ground in the MCK
circuit.
NO-Go to step 5.
ABS relay box, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Replace the pump motor relay .
No.3 to No.4 with a jumper wire for a moment.
YES- Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK
cITP.
1fMOTOR (WHT/BlUJ
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-
MOTOR GND IBLK[!jMOTOR IWHT/BLU)
2 1
Y..
~
~
12. Connectthe pump motor relay connector terminal
PUMP MOTOR RELAV CONNECTOR
JUMPER ~ R (VEL/RED)
WIRE 2 1
4 3
+B(WHT)
PMR (VEL/RED)
hood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit..
(cont'd)
19-15
BACK
ABS Components
relay connector.
PMR (VEL/REDI
YES- Repair a short to power in the wire between
the under-hood ASS relay box and the ABS control
unit .
unit..
19-16
Ole 53: Motor Stuck ON
YES- Replace the pump motor relay. (Pump motor
relay stuck ON.).
NO-Goto step 2.
2. Remove the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
/s the fuse OK?
YES - Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.
under-dash fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal
FUSE/RELA V BOX 16P CONNECTOR
MCK(GRNI
/s there about 10 V?
YES- Go to step 5.
ABS control unit .
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
BACK
body ground.

iOTOR (WHT/BLUI
=
Is there about 10 V?
YES-Go to step 8.
MOTOR GND IBe: I MTOR IWHT/BLUI
Terminal side offemale terminals
YES-Go to step 9.

terminals No.4 and No.5 together with ajumper
wire.
NO- Replace the pump motor .
body ground.
=
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire
ABS control unit .
unit .
19-17
BACK
ABS Components
1. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
NO - Go to step 2.
YES-Ifthe ABS indicator comes on and goes off,
it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Repair open in the brake system indicator
circuit .
Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK-UP LIGHT
If necessary, substitute a known-gooq ABS control
unit, and recheck .
NO - Go to step 6.
assembly.
Is the bl,llb OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the ABS indicator bulb .
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 16P connector.
19-18
between the gauge assembly and the ABS control
unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector.
JUMPER GND (BLK)
WIRE
-=
YES- Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly .
BACK
13. Check the POWER MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash driver's fuse/relay box, and reinstall the
fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
NO- Replace the fuse, and recheck .
14. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal
A1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
GND3(BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ABS
control unit and body ground (G204) .
NO-Gotostep 16.

IG2 (YEL/BLK)
=
YES-Go to step 17.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the POWER
MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS control unit .
17. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal B1
JUMPER
WIRE
=
unit, and recheck .
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
19-19
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
JUMPER WALP (BLU/WHT)
WIRE
=
assembly and the ABS control unit..
NO- Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly .
19-20
BACK
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel.
Removal
1.
6mmNUT
9.8 Nm 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfft)

2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (C).
Installation
From
left-front
From
right-rear
From
right-front
6mmBOLT
/m (1 . "gfm, 7.2lbfft(
3. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. Tighten the flare nuts to 15 Nm (1.5 kgfm, 11 Ibfft).
4. Connect the modulator unit connector and the pump motor connector.
6. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on.
19-21
BACK
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's kick panel.
2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors.
3. Remove the ABS control unit.
4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
19-22
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components .................... 19-1
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Components
('98-00 Models) .................................................. 19-7
ABS/TCS (Anti-lock Brake System/Traction
Control System) Components ('01-02 Models)
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-46
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ...................... 19-76
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ....................... 19-78
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation .................. 19-80
TCS Switch test ............................................................. 19-81
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement ........................... 19-82
Wheel Sensor Inspection ............................................. 19-82
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................ 19-83
The ABS has been changed to ABS/TCS; troubleshooting was added.

ABS/TCS Components
MODULATOR UNIT
Removal and Installation,
page 19-80
UNDER-HOOD ABS RELAY BOX
PUMP MOTOR RELAY
Inspection, page 22-52 in the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
Test, page 22-52 in the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
TCSRELAY
Test, page 22-31
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Replacement page 19-83
19-24
BACK
ABS/TCS Indicators
If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off once
after turning the ignition switch ON (II) without
starting the engine, and then comes on again and
goes off several seconds later after starting the
engine. This occurs because the ABSrrCS control unit
is turned on by the IG2 power source.
The TCS or ABS indicator comes on when the ABS/
TCS control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating
properly, the TCS or ABS indicator will come on,
under the following conditions:
For ABS or TCS Indicator:
- Only drive wheels rotate
- One drive wheel is stuck
- The vehicle goes into a spin.
- The ABS continues to operate for a long time.
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal
disturbance.
For TCS Indicator:
- The TCS operated when the front brake pad
temperature rises excessively.
- The TCS switch is OFF.
- One or more of these components are faulty:
Heated oxygen sensor, Manifold absolute pressure
sensor, Crankshaft position sensor, Engine coolant
temperature sensor, Throttle position sensor, Top
dead center sensor, Top dead center sensor 2,
Intake air temperature sensor, Exhaust gas
recirculation, Barometric pressure sensor, Idle air
control valve, VTEC pressure switch, Knock sensor,
Fuel supply system, Automatic transaxle, Misfire
detection system ofthe PGM-FI system.
To determine the actual cause ofthe problem, question
the customer about the problem, taking the above-listed
conditions into consideration.
When a problem is detected and the ABS or TCS
indicator comes on, there are cases when the
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned
OFF, and cases when the indicator goes off
automatically when the system returns to normal. For
ABS DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off
automatically when the system returns to normal. For
all other codes, the indicator stays on until the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
For ABS DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18,21,22,23,24,51,52 and
53, the ABS indicator goes off when the vehicle is
driven again and the system is OK after the ignition
switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). However, if the
DTC is cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes
off right after the engine is started ifthe system is OK.

The ABS is not operational when the ABS indicator is
ON; the TCS is not operational when the TCS
indicator is ON.
When the ABS and TCS indicators are both ON,
troubleshoot the ABS first.
When the TCS indicator and MIL are both ON,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
more recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
Therefore, when the same problem is detected
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
not in the order they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery.
Do the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine
starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis,the
ABSrrCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The pump motor operates when the ABS is functioning,
and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
cylinder, causing kickback atthe brake pedal.
Pump Motor
The pump motor operates when the ABS is
functioning.
The ABSrrCS control unit checks the pump motor
operation during initial diagnosis when the vehicle is
started. You may hear the motor operate at this time,
but it is normal.
Brake Fluid Replacementl Air Bleeding
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not
equipped with ABSrrCS. To ease bleeding, start with
the front wheels.
(cont'd)
19-25 BACK
ABS/lCS Components
How to Troubleshoot ABS and TCS DTCs
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that
the cause ofthe problem is still present and the ABS
and/or TCS indicator is still on. Following the flowchart
when the ABS and/or TCS indicator does not come on
can result in incorrect diagnosis.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors with a single outline and the male terminal
connectors with a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions when
the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
when the ABS and/or TCS indicator came on, such
as during ABS control, after ABS control, when
vehicle speed was at a certain speed, etc.
2. When the ABS or TCS indicator does not come on
during the test drive, but troubleshooting is done
based on the DTC, check for loose connectors,
poor contact of the terminals, etc. before you
start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-
drive the vehicle. Make sure the ABS and TCS
indicators do not come on.
How to Retrieve ABS or TCS DTCs
Honda PGM Tester Method:
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
(DLC) (B) behind the driver's kick panel.
19-26
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the
prompts on the Honda PGM Tester to display the
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
for specific instructions.
Service Check Signal (SCSI Circuit Method:
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the
Honda PGM Tester.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) without pressing the
brake pedal.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning
the ignition switch ON (II), the system shifts to the
DTC clearing mode.
BACK
4. The blinking frequency indicates the DTC.
NOTE: If the DTC is not memorized, the ABS or TCS
indicator will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come
back on.
The system will not indicate the DTC unless these
conditions are met:
The TCS switch is not pushed.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
The ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The engine is stopped.
The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Example of DTC15
Short blinks
Long blink (five times)
t----t-, t-,-----J
ON
OFF
Example of DTC22
Long blinks (two times)
Short blinks
(two times)
!-.-,------1-, H
::=J U UUl
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the DLC.
How to Clear ABS DTCs

E!I
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe Honda
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC
(s) by following the screen prompts on the Honda
PGMTester.
Service Check Signal (SCSI Circuit Method:
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the
Honda PGM Tester.
(cont'd)
19-27 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the
brake pedal pressed.
pedal.
6. After the ABS indicator comes on, press the brake
pedal again.
pedal again.
You cannot clear the DTC unless these conditions
are met:
The vehicle speed is 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition
switch is turned ON (II).
ABS
indicator
ON ....
OFF
a
Depressed--+-...l..r
Brake
pedal
c
d d d
c
Released .... ......... . ..... ,
19-28
Ignition switch ON (II)
a: 2 sec.
b: 4 sec.
c: 0.3 sec.
d: within 3 sec.
8. After a few seconds, the ABS indicator blinks twice
and the DTC is cleared. If the indicator does not
blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. If the indicator
stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the
DTC because a problem was detected during initial
diagnosis before shifting to DTC clearing mode.
10. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the DLC.
BACK
How to Clear rcs orcs
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC
(s) by following the screen prompts on the PGM
Tester.
~
~
Service Check Signal (SCS) Circuit Method:
1. Press the parking brake pedal with the SCS circuit
opened. Keep the pedal pressed during the entire
DTC clearing procedure.
2. Press and hold the TCS switch, then turn the
ignition switch ON (II) without starting the engine.
~ Continue to hold the TCS switch for 4 seconds,
then turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Within 6 seconds, turn the ignition switch back
ON (II) for at least 4 seconds, then release the TCS
switch, and watch the TCS indicator.
5. After a few seconds, the TCS indicator will come on
after blinking to indicate that the DTC is cleared. If
the indicator blinks repeatedly, repeat steps 1
through 4.
Standard Indication Pattern
ON-----r---,
TCS Indicator
OFF----- ------------
Ignition Switch ON (II) a a
Abnormal Indication Pattern
ON-----r--....,
TCS Indicator
OFF----- ------------
Continues ON
blinks repeatedly
a a a: 0.3 sec.
Ignition Switch ON (II)
19-29 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
ABSDTCs
11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-48)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-49)
21 Right-front pulser (see page 19-50)
22 Left-front pulser (see page 19-50)
23 Right-rear pulser (see page 19-50)
24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-50)
31 Right-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
32 Right-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
33 Left-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
34 Left-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
35 Right-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
36 Right-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
37 Left-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
38 Left-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-51)
41 Right-front wheel lock (see Rage 19-54)
42 Left-front wheel lock (see page 19-54)
43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-54)
44 Left-rear wheel lock (see page 19-54)
51 Motor lock (see page 19-55)
52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-55)
53 Motor stuck ON (see page 19-57)
54 ABS Fail-safe relay (see page 19-59)
61 Low ignition voltage (see page 19-61)
62 High ignition voltage (see page 19-61)
71 Different diameter tire (see page 19-62)
81 Central ProcessingUnit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis (see page 19-62)
TCS DTCs
24 RF TCS NO solenoid (see page 19-63)
25 RF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-63)
26 LF TCS NO solenoid (see page 19-63)
27 LF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-63)
28 TCS relay (see page 19-66)
31 Engine retard command (PFINH) signal (see page 19-69)
32 Engine speed (NEP) signal (see page 19-71)
34 Reference voltage (VREF) signal (see page 19-72)
36 Throttle position sensor output (THLOUT) signal (see page 19-73)
61 AfT shift position (ATSFTP) signal (see page 19-74)
81 Continuous TCS operation (see page 19-75)
19-30
BACK
Symptom Diagnostic procedure
ABS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-76)
ABS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
ABS indicator came on once, but it is The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
OK now
TCS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-78)
TCS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
TCS indicator came on once, but it is The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
OK now

Also check for
19-31
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
System Description
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (26P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
I><
1 2 3 4
L
6
V
F ~ W
FF.r Fh}
11
12 13
GN01 NCL NOL ABS SCS
FRW
STOP IG2
H (+1
V
15 16
/
18
/
20
R ~ W
RI}
~
R ~ t v
25 26
NCR NOR rCS1 MCK (+) (-I FSR OLC
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Measurement
number (Terminal namel Terminal Conditions Voltage
IIgnition switch ON 11111
1 BlK GND1 Ground 1-GND -- BelowO.3V
(Ground 11
2 VEL/GRN NCl Drives left TCS normally 2-GND TCS OFF Battery
(Normally closed leftl closed solenoid valve Indicator Voltage
3 GRV NOl Drives left TCS normally 3-GNO ON BelowO.3V
(Normally open left) open solenoid valve (Disconnect
16P connector
to turn
indicator on)
4 BLU/WHT ABS Drives ABS indicator 4-GND ABS ON 4 6V
(Turns the indicator drive indicator OFF Below 1.0V
transistor to ON, then
turns off the indicatorl
6 BRN SCS (Service check Detects service check 6-GNO SCS Circuit Shorted Below 0.3 V
signal) connector signal (Use for Opened About5V
DTC indication)
8 BRN FlW(-) Detects left-front wheel 8-9 Wheel Turn wheel at AC:
(Front-left wheel sensor signal 1 turn/second 0.053 Vor
neaative) above
9 GRN/BlU FlW(+) (Reference)
(Front-left wheel Oscilloscope:
positive) 0.15 Vp-p or
10 GRN FRW( ) Detects right-front wheel 10-11 above
(Front-right wheel sensor signal
negative)
11 GRN/BlK FRW(+) Stopped 0.25V-
(Front-right wheel 1.15 V
positive)
12 WHT/BlK STOP Detects brake switch 12-GND Brake pedal Pressed Battery
signal Voltage
Released Below 0.3 V
13 VEL/BlK IG2 Power source for 13-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
(Ignition 2) activating the system Voltage
Start (1111 BelowO.3V
19-32
BACK
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description
number !Terminal name)
15 RED/GRN NCR Drives right TCS normally
(Normally closed right) closed solenoid valve
16 LTBLU NOR Drives right TCS normally
(Normally opened open solenoid valve
right)
18 RED/WHT TCS1 Drives TCS indicator
(Turns the indicator drive
transistor to ON, then
turns off the indicator)
20 GRN MCK Detects pump motor
(Motor check) drive signal
21 LTBLU RLW(+) Detects left-rear wheel
(Rear-left wheel sensor signal
positive)
22 GRY RLW(-)
(Rear-left wheel
positive)
23 GRN/YEL RRW(+) Detects right-rear wheel
(Rear-right wheel sensor signal
oositive)
24 BLU/YEL RRW(-)
(Rear-right wheel
neaative)
25 YEL/GRN FSR Drives ABS fail-safe relay
(Fail-safe relay) (ABS fail-safe relay is
turned OFF to shut off the
power source to the
solenoid and pump
motor relay when a
oroblem occurs.l
26 LTBLU DLC Communicates with the
(Data link connector) Honda PGM Tester
Measurement
Terminal Conditions
15-GND TCS indicator OFF
16-GND ON
(Disconnect
16P connector
to turn
indicator on)
18-GND TCS indicator With engine
running, and
indicator OFF
ON
20-GND Pump motor ON
OFF
Remove MCK fuse
21-22 Wheel Turn wheel at
1 turn/second
23-24
Stopped
25-GND ABS Warnina
(SCS circuit Normal
must be open)
-- --

EBI
Voltage
Battery
Voltage
BelowO.3V
Battery
Voltage
About2V
Battery
Voltage
Below 0.3 V
About10V
AC:
0.053Vor
above
(Reference)
Oscilloscope:
0.15 Vp-p or
above
0.25V-
1.15 V
BelowO.3V
About 11V
--
(cont'd)
19-33 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Measurement
number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
1 PNK FPTDR Outputs engine retard 1-GND TCS Not operating About 2.5 V (5
(Frame to powertrain request signal V du!,/5QL
torque down request) Ooeratina About5V
2 ORN/GRN VREF Reference voltage for the 2-GND -- About5V
(Voltage reference) sensors of the PGM-FI
svstem
4 ORN/WHT TCSSW Detects TCS switch signal 4-GND TCS TCS switch Battery
(TCS switch) switch pressed Voltaae
OFF (TCS indicator OV
isON)
7 LTGRN ATSFTP Detects AfT shift position 7-GND Shift the transmission to 1:eJ. About 4 V
LAT shift o s i t i o n signal then start the enaine.
9 VEl/GRN THLOUT Detects throttle position 9-GND Throttle I Fullvclosed AboutO.5V
(Th rottle out) sensor sianal valve Fullvopened About4.8V
10 BLU PFINH Detects TCS operation 10-GND Permission (normal) About2.5V
(powertrain to frame permission signal (5V dutv50)
inhibition) Inhibition (the coolant About 5 V
temperature is OC or below)
Failure (TCS and/or PCM has AboutOV
failed)
11 BLU NEP Detects engine speed 11-GND Engine idling About6V
(Engine speed pulse) signal
13 GRN/YEL TCSR Drives TCS relay (TCS 13-GND TCS(SCS Warnina Below 0.3 V
(TCS relay) relay is turned OFF to circuit Normal About 11 V
shut off the power source must be
to the TCS solenoid and opened)
pump motor relay when a
problem occurs)
14 GRN/RED PARK Detects parking brake 14-GND With Pulled BelowO.3V
(Parking) switch signal engine Released Battery
running. Voltage
parking
brake
15 VEl/RED PMR Drives pump motor relay 15-GND ABS
OFF I Pump I ON
Below 1.0V
(Pump motor relay) indicator motor I OFF Battery
Voltaae
ON Below 0.3 V
16 RED/WHT TCS2 Drives TCS indicator 16-GND TCS OFF Battery
(Turns the indicator drive indicator Voltaae
transistor to ON. then ON About2V
turns off the indicatorl
19-34 BACK
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (12P)
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign
number (Terminal name)
2 BRN/BlK lG
(logic ground)
3 VELlWHT RR-OUT
(Rear-riaht outlet)
4 VEL/BlU Fl-OUT
(Front-left outlet)
5 VEL/GRN Rl-OUT
(Rear-left outlet)
6 VEL/BlK FR-OUT
(Front-right outlet)
7 BlK GND3
(Ground 3)
8 RED/WHT RR-IN
(Rear-riaht inlet)
9 RED/BLU FL-IN
(Front-left inlet)
10 RED/GRN Rl-IN
(Rear-left inlet)
11 RED/BlK FR-IN
(Front-right inlet)
12 BlK GND2
(Ground 2)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)
4 5 6
Fb- RL- FR-
o T OUT OUT
7
GND3
9
FL-
IN
10 11 12
~ ~ ~ GND2
Description
Terminal
Ground for logic circuit 2-GND
Drives right-rear outlet 3-GND
solenoid valve
Drives left-front outlet 4-GND
solenoid valve
Drives left-rear outlet 5-GND
solenoid valve
Drives right-front outlet 6-GND
solenoid valve
Ground 7-GND
Drives right-rear inlet 8-GND
solenoid valve
Drives left-front inlet 9-GND
solenoid valve
Drives left-rear inlet 10-GND
solenoid valve
Drives right-front inlet 11-GND
solenoid valve
Ground 12-GND
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition switch ON (1111
--
ABS indicator OFF
ON
(Disconnect
16P connector
to turn
indicator on)
--
ABS indicator OFF
ON
(Disconnect
16P connector
to turn
indicator on)
--
~
~
Voltage
BelowO.3V
Battery
Voltage
BelowO.3V
BelowO.3V
Battery
Voltage
BelowO.3V
BelowO.3V
(cont'd)
19-35
BACK
ABS/lCS Components
Outline
This system consists of the ABS/TCS control unit, the modulator unit, four wheel sensors, and the PCM. The system integrates the ABS (Anti-
lock Brake System) and the TCS (Traction Control System) and controls both systems using the brakes.
I ABS/TCS

WHEEL
SENSOR
WHEEL
SENSOR
19-36
rl ABS control .Improves maneuverability and stability when braking.
LJ Improves accelerating ability from a standstill on slipperly road surfaces.
TCS control r--
.Improves traction when one drive wheel is on a slippery road surface.
MASTER CYLINDER
RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
.. _ .. - __-IIiiODULATOR uillrr-_
NO: Normally Open
NC: Normally Closed
BACK
ABS Features
~
~
When the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of
the vehicle is reduced ifthe front wheels are locked, and the stability of the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an
extremely unstable condition. The ABS precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby
ensures maneuverability and stability of the vehicle.
The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the vehicle speed and the wheel speed, then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach
the target slip rate.
TCS Features
Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
SLIP RATE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
The TCS provides low speed traction. When a drive wheel loses traction on a slipperly road surface and starts to spin, the ABS{TCS control unit
sends a brake signal to the modulator unit, which applies brake pressure to slow the spinning wheel. At that time, the ABS{TCS control unit
sends an engine retard signal to the PCM to prevent damage to the transmission.
__ --...... I I
1[',I[
[II','
['['['
',I,'
[I,ll'
[1,1,'
III [,I
[1[',1
1 J 1',1
[I t I,'
[1 1 1 1 '
,1,1[1
,III,'
,1'1',1
I 1 ',1,1,'
[I I I I I
SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE
(cont'd)
19-37
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Main Control
The ABS{fCS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on
the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration.
The ABS{fCS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when
the slip rate is high.
The pressure reduction control has 3 modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
._ .. _ .. - .. _ .. - ._ .. _ .. - .. - .. - .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. - .. _!
i
i
i

1-,-=,===_ ....
rcs Main Control
The ABS{fCS control unit controls the TCS based on signal inputs from the throttle position sensor, engine speed sensor, shift position sensor,
and the wheel sensors. In addition, the ABS{fCS control unit sends an engine retard request signal to the PCM if necessary. The ABS{fCS
control unit uses the modulator unit to control the TCS. The pressure intensifying control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure
retaining, and pressure reducing.
Shift position signol-+------'
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .-.. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. j
19-38
BACK
ABS Self-Diagnosis

EJI
The ABS{fCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS{fCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
ABSS ltd e - lagnosls a " T bl e
Diagnostic Trouble Detection Item Detection Timing Fail-safe Mode
Code (DTC) Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
11,13,15,17 Wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) 0 0 AO
12, 14, 16, 18 Wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) 0 AO,LO
21-24 Pulser 0 AO, LO
31-38 Solenoid (short to body ground/short to wire) 0 0 S1
41-44 Wheel lock 0 AO, LO
51 Motor lock 0 AO, LO
52 Motor stuck OFF 0 AO,LO
53 Motor stuck ON 0 0 AO,LO
54 Fail-safe relay 0 0 S1
61 Low ignition voltage 0 BO
62 High ignition voltage 0 BO
71 Different diameter tire 0 S1
81 Central Processing Unit (CPU), ROM/RAM 0 0 S1
ABSO t" MdT bl ,pera Ion o e a e
Operation Mode Description ABS Indicator TCS Indicator
Regular operation Operation in normal condition OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode-S1 The ABS/TCS control unit turns the system off (ABS fail-safe relay off) when the ON ON
control unit detects a problem.
Fail-safe mode-AO If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a malfunction while the ABS or TCS is ON ON
operating, it will turn off the malfunctioning component, and continue to
modulate the rest of the ABS system until completing the ABS or TCS operation.
At that time, the entire system will be turned off until the problem goes away.
Fail-safe mode-LO The ABS/TCS control unit stores a DTC in back-up memory when it detects a ON ON
problem. If a problem is detected when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the
ABS/TCS control unit will turn the system off. If the problem goes away, the
ABS/TCS control unit will turn the system on again.
Fail-safe mode-BO The ABS/TCS control unit will turn the system off if ignition voltage drops, and ON ON
will turn it on again when ignition voltage returns to normal.
The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
(cont'd)
19-39
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
Tes Self-diagnosis
The ABSrrCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABSrrCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
TCSS ltd e - iagnosls a - T bl e
Diagnostic Trouble Detection Item Detection Timing Fail-safe Mode
Code (DTC) Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
24-27 TCS solonoid (short to body ground/short to wire) 0 0 S1
28 TCSrelay 0 S1
31 Engine retard command (PFINH) signal (open/short to body 0 A2
ground)
32 Engine speed(NEP)signal (open/short to body ground) 0 A2
34 Reference voltage(VREF) signal(open/short to body ground) 0 0 A2
36 Throttle position sensor output(THLOUT)signal(open/short to 0 0 A2
body ground)
61 AfT shift position(ATSFTP) signal (open/short to body ground) 0 A2
81 Continuous TCS operation 0 A2
TCSO Jperatlon o e a MdT bl e
Operation Mode Description ABS Indicator TCS Indicator
Regular operation Operation in normal condition OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode-S1 The ABS/TCS control unit turns the system off (fail-safe relay off) when the ON ON
control unit detects a problem.
Fail-safe mode-A2 Ifthe ABS/TCS control unit detects a malfuction while the TCS is operating. it OFF ON
will turn off the malfunctioning component, and continue to modulate the rest of
the TCS system until completing the TCS operation. At that time. the TCS
system will be turned off.
TCS deactivate If the front brake pad temperature rise excessively, the ABS/TCS control unit OFF Comes ON when
mode stops the TCS system and it turns the TCS indicator on. When the brake pad the front brake pad
temperature lowers, the ABS/TCS control unit turns off the TCS indicator and temperature rises
restarts the TCS system. excessively.
TCS OFF mode The ABS/TCS control unit cancels the TCS system under these conditions: ON or OFF ON
If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a problem with the PGM-FI (ON: When the
communication circuit. ABS system is
The ABS system is faulty. faulty)
The TCS system is OFF.
If these conditions return to normal, the ABS/TCS control unit restarts the TCS
system.
The TCS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
PGM Tester. See the Honda Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
19-40 BACK
Modulator Unit

The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS normally open (NO) solenoid valve, TCS normally closed
(NC) solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the damping chamber.
The modulator controls the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid circulates through the
caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel.
.'
ABSControl
Pressure intensifying mode
TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed.
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Pump Motor
When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF.
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the master cylinder.
MASTER CVUNDER
MODULATOR UNIT
r'-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-'
!
RL FR
Pressure retaining mode
TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed.
Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CYUNDER
MODULATOR UNIT
r"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-'
R. RR
RL FR FL RR
(cont'd)
19-41
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
Pressure reducing mode
TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open.
MASTER CYUNDER
MODULATOR UNIT , .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _.
i
i
i
!
!
!
i
i
RL
TCSControl
Pressure intensifying mode
FR
TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
FL
The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the front caliper.
19-42
MASTER CVUNDER
MODULATOR UNIT , .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _.
i
!
!
!
!
i
i
i
RL FA FL
RR
RR
BACK
Pressure retaining mode
rcs NO valve open, rcs NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
Front caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CVUNDER
MODULATOR UNIT , .. _00_ .. _00_00_00_00_00_00_ .. _00_00_00_00_.
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
RL
Pressure reducing mode
FA
rcs NO valve closed, rcs NC valve open, front inlet valve closed, front outlet valve open, pump motor ON.
MASTER CYUNDER
RR

(cont'd)
19-43
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
Wheel Sensor
The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is
generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS{TCS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal
frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed.
GEARPULSER
oa
at HIGH SPEED
at LOW SPEED
Wheel Speed and Modulator Control (ABS)
SPEED VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
TIME
C0 AA=
When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The
pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure.
19-44
BACK
r
Wheel Speed and Modulator control (TCS)
OUTLET
VALVE
INLET
VALVE
TCSNCVALVE
TCS NO VALVE
MOTOR
SPEED
I
BRAKE
PRESSURE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

DRIVE WHEEL SPEED
I
DRIVEN WHEEL SPEED
(VEHICLE SPEED)
-TIME
When the front wheel speed rises sharply above the vehicle speed, the TCS NC valve opens, the TCS NO valve closes, and the pump motor
starts to intensify the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops, the front inlet valve closes momentarity to retain the front
caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the front outlet valve opens momentarity to reduce the front caliper fluid pressure.
19-45 BACK
ABS/lCS Components
Circuit Diagram
+
+B UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
STOP (20A) Closed: Brake pedal pressed
___ __________ __
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
BATTERY I.UDAI
IGNITION
SWITCH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
Closed: Low fluid
IG. MAIN I60AJ

.. ________ __________ ,
BSC F/S I20AI
UNDER-HOOD
ABS RELAY BOX
ABS I
FAILSAFE I
RELAY
______ ....,BRN/BLK .x.
YEL/
BLK
YELl BLK/
WHT/BLU
-----------------

GRlN ___ ________________________________
L ________ ..!:====!... _____________
-----------
L..-t--------------------------------------------------YEURED -----------

BRN/BLK
GR Rr.
FL-IN
RED/BLU
FL-OUT
YEL/BLU

RED/BLK
19 FR'()UT

RED/GRN
RL-OUT

13 RRIN
RED/WHT
RR-OUT

GRY
NCL

NOR
LTBLU
NCR
RED/GRN
PUMP MOTOR

M
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (1BP) CONNECTOR B (7P)
WitiILJ,,11l3kt/lk'17rn U, m ,37 1
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR B (1BP) CONNECTOR 1116P)
19-46
BLK----:l...
G203
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR M (20P) CONNECTOR J (1BP)
BRAKE SWITCH
CONNECTOR
rID)
FAIL SAFE RELAY/
CRUISE CONTROL/
TCS SWITCH BP CONNECTORS
ffimrJID
TCS RELAY 4PCONNECTOR
m
ABS PUMP MOTOR
RELAY 5P CONNECTOR

BACK
WHT/BLK
BRAKE
LIGHT
-------..;;;-.--"<lGRN/RED
RED/WHT ---"Lr--REDIWHT
RED/WHT ---Q!l) ....

------------------yEL/GRN
------------------YEL/RED ---<iiID--.
-------------------GRN/yEL ...
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (26P) CONNECTOR B (16P)
PCM(SCS)
? DATA LINK +8
HT/GRN J

_ i y
__ : 11
0401 G101

C!!)---VEL/GRN
---Cau"
.....

BRN/BLK :1..
WHEEL SENSOR
RN/BLUl
Gl01
C!lD------BRNI----- 2 -
RN/BLK RIGHT.
FRONT
LTBlU

GRN/YEL RIGHT.
@!9----BLU/VEL _____ REAR
CONNECTOR C (12P)
WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTOR
FRONT/REAR
(ID)
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (16P)
tdl2W!/\
11 12 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

19-47 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
DTe Troubleshooting
ABS DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/
Short to Body Ground/Short to Power)
1. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A
(26P).
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate
(see table).
DTC Terminal
11 (Right-front) A 11: FRW(+)
15 (Ri_ght-rear) A23: RRW(+)
FLW(+)
(GRN/BLU)
FRW(+)
(GRN/BLK)
YES-Repair short to power in the (+) circuit wire
between the ABS/TCS control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor .
NO - Go to step 4.
19-48
(see table).
11 (Right-front) A 11: FRW(+)
15 (Right-rear) A23: RRW(+)
FLW(+)
(GRN/BLU)
FRW(+)
(GRN/BLK)
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 6.
appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
between the (+) and (-) terminals of the harness
and body ground.
YES-Repair short to body ground inthe (+) or (-)
circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the wheel sensor .
NO- Replace the wheel sensor .
BACK
table).
DTe Appropriate Terminal
(+) Side (-)Side
13 (Left-front) A9:FLW(+) A8:FLW(-)
15 (Right-rear) A23:RRW A24:RRW
(+) (-)
17 (Left-rear) A21: RLW(+) A22:RLW(-)
Is the resistance between 450- 2,000 Q?
YES-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
connectors.lf necessary, substitute a known-good
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck .
NO-Goto step 7.
7. Disconnectthe harness 2P connectorfrom the
appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance
between the (+) and (-) terminals of the wheel
sensor.
Is the resistance between 450- 2,000 Q ?
YES-Repair open in the (+) or (-) circuit wire, or
short beween the (+) circuit wire and the (-)
the wheel sensor .
NO-Replace the wheel sensor .

ABS DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor
(Electrical Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
described below,the indicator goes off when you test-
drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h).
Only the drive wheel rotated
The vehicle spun
Electrical noise
1. Visually check for appropriate wheel sensor and
pulser installation (see table).
DTe Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Right-front
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear
Are they installed correctly?
YES-Goto step 2.
NO- Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser .
(26P).
3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
table).
DTe Appropriate Terminal
(+) Side (-) Side
12 (Right-front) A11: FRW A10: FRW
(+) (-)
14 (Left-front) A9: FLW A8: FLW
(+) (-)
16 (Right-rear) A23: RRW A24: RRW
(+) (-)
18 (Left-rear) A21: RLW A22:RLW
(+) (-)
YES- Repair short to wire between the appropriate
wheel sensor (+) and (-) circuits .
NO - Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
19-49 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and other wheel
sensor (+) circuit terminals (see table).
OTC Appropriate Other Terminal
Terminal
12 A11 : A9: A23: A21 :
FRW FLW(+) RRW RLW
(+) (+) (+)
14 A9: A11 : A23: A21:
FLW(+) FRW RRW RLW
(+) (+) (+)
16 A23: A11 : A9: A21 :
RRW FRW FLW(+) RLW
(+) (+) (+)
18 A21: A11 : A9: FLW A23:
RLW(+) FRW(+) (+) RRW(+)
YES-Repair short to wire between the appropriate
wheel sensor and the other wheel sensor .
NO- Clear the OTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If
the ABS indicator comes on and the same OTC is
indicated, replace the ABS/TCS control unit .
19-50
ABS OTe 21, 22, 23, 24: Pulser
1. Clear the OTC.
Does the ABS indicator come on and are DTCs
21, 22, 23, or 24 indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
tooth (see table).
OTC Appropriate Pulser
21 Right-front
22 Left-front
23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear
Is the pulser OK?
NO- Replace the driveshaft or the hub unit.
(Chipped pulser gear).
BACK
ABS DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38:
Solenoid
1. Verify the DTC.
Is DTC 54 indicated?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for DTC
54 .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and
the ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P).
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
OTC Appropriate Terminal
31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
YES- Repair short to body ground in the
appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the
ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit .
NO-Go to step 5.

5. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
(cont'd)
19-51 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P
connector solenoid circuit terminal to body ground
with a jumper wire (see table).
31: FR-IN No.11
32: FR-OUT No. 19
33: FL-IN No. 14
34: FL-OUT No. 22
35: RR-IN No. 13
36: RR-OUT No.21
37: RL-IN No. 12
38: RL-OUT No. 20
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
19-52
ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid
circuit terminal and body ground (see table).
31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Repair open in the appropriate solenoid
the modulator unit .
10. Remove the jumper wire from the modulator unit
24P connector.

!
BACK
12. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector
terminal No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
NOTE: The wire colors of the ABS fail-safe relay
connector are WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, and
YELlGRN.
ABS FAil-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
SOlEN[&ID
(BRN/BlK) ;
JUMPER 3 4
WIRE
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and
body ground (see table).
IN: 8-10 Q (at 20C, 68F)
OUT: 3-5 Q (at 20C, 68F)
OTe Appropriate Terminal
31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR c (12P)
Is the resistance OK?
YES-Gotostep 14.
14. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector, and
remove the jumper wire from the ABS fail-safe
relay 4P connector.

ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit
terminals (see table).
OTe Appropriate Terminal
31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
Tes Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit
Connector A (26P) Terminal
NOR A16
NCR A15
NOL A3
NCL A2
RED/GRN lTBLU
VES- Repair short in the appropriate wires
modulator unit .
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
19-53 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
ABSrrCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit
terminals (see table).
31: FR-IN C11
32: FR-OUT C6
33: FL-IN C9
34: FL-OUT C4
35: RR-IN C8
36: RR-OUT C3
37: RL-IN C10
38: RL-OUT C5
TCS Solenoid ASS/TCS Control Unit
Connector A (26P) Terminal
NOR A16
NCR A15
NOL A3
NCL A2
RED/GRN LTBLU
YES-Replace the modulator unit..
NO-Check for loose ABSrrCS control unit
ABSrrCS control unit, and recheck .
19-54
ABS DTC 41, 42, 43, 44: Wheel Lock
1. Check for brake drag.
Do the brakes drag?
YES-Repair the brake drag .
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
sensor (see table).
41 Right-front
42 Left-front
43 Right-rear
44 Left-rear
Is it correct?
YES-Go to step 3 .
NO- Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly .
3. Check the modulator using the Honda PGM Tester.
Is kick-back felt in the pedal?
YES - The probable cause was the vehicle spun
during cornering. If the problem recurs, check for
loose connectors, or try a known-good ABSrrCS
control unit .
NO-Check for loose modulator unit connectors. If
necessary, replace the modulator unit..
BACK
ABS OTC 51: Motor Lock
1. Clear the DTC.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTe 51
indicated?
YES- Replace the modulator unit..

ABS OTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
1. Check the ASS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Go to step 3.
2. Remove the pump motor relay, and connect the
pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No.4 to
No.5 with a jumper wire for a moment, and check
the fuse.
PUMP MOTOR RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
{1
3
4 5
MOTOR +B (WHT}
(WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check the ASS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
(cont'd}
19-55
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
4. Connect the pump motor relay 5P connector
terminal No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire for a
moment, and check the fuse.
PUMP MOTOR RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
+B(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the GRN
wire between the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit .
NO-Go to step 5.
ABS relay box. Refer to the '98- 02 Accord Service
Manual (P/N 61S8400) (see page 22-52).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the pump motor relay .
terminal No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire for a
moment.
YES-Gotostep 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
terminal No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire.
19-56
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
YES-Go to step 10.
hood ABS relay box and the pump motor..
24P connectorterminal No.1 and No. 16.
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
MOTOR GND (BlK)
11. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P).
PUMP MOTOR RELA V 5P CONNECTOR
PMP
(VEL/RED) JUMPER WIRE
1 3
4 5
+B(WHT)
BACK
13. Measure the voltage between the ABS(TCS control
unit connector B (16P) terminal B15 and body
ground.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI
YES-Go to step 14.
hood ABS relay box and the ABS(TCS control unit.

relay 5P connector, and reinstall the pump motor
relay.
ground.
the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS(TCS
control unit .
NO -If the problem recurs, replace the ABS(TCS
control unit .

ABS DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON
YES-Replace the pump motor relay. (pump motor
relay stuck ON.).
NO- Go to step 2.
2. Remove the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the
Is the fuse OK?
YES- Leave the fuse removed, and go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .
under-dash fuse/relay box connector I (16P)
PASSENGER'S UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR I (16P)
MCK(GRN)
YES-Go to step 5.
ABS(TCS control unit .
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the
(cont'd)
19-57 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
body ground.
MOTOR (WHT /BLU)
=
YES-Go to step 8.
24P connector terminal No.1 and No. 16.
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
MOTOR GND (BLK)
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the pump
1958
terminals No.4 and No.5 together with a jumper
wire.
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Replace the pump motor .
B (16P).
body ground.
PMR (VEL/RED)
Q
=
ABS/TCS control unit .
NO-If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS
control unit .
BACK
ABS DTC 54: ABS Fail-safe Relay
1. Check the ASS F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
15 the fuse OK?
YES- Go to step 2.
Does the fuse blow?
between the ASS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the
pump motor relay, and modulator unit .
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the ASS fail-safe relay in the under-hood
ASS relay box. Refer to the '98 - 02 Accord Service
Manual (P/N 61 S8400) (see page 22-52). The wire
colors of the ASS fail-safe relay connector are
WHT/GRN, SRN/SLK, SLK, and YEL/GRN.
15 the relay OK?
YES - Leave the ASS fail-safe relay removed, and
go to step 4.
NO- Replace the ASS fail-safe relay .
4. Measure the voltage between the ASS fail-safe
relay 4P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
+B (WHT/GRF-ffi

15 there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 5.
hood fuse/relay box and the ASS fail-safe relay .

5. Connect the ASS fail-safe relay 4P connector
+B (WHT IGRN) .
JUMPER WIRE

(BRN/BLK)
body ground.
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
=
15 there battery voltage?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ASS
fail-safe relay and the modulator unit .
8. Remove the jumper wire from the ASS fail-safe
relay connector.
(cont'd)
19-59
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
=
the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the
modulator unit, and the under-hood ABS relay
box .
NO-Gotostep 10.
A (26P).
12. Measure the voltage between terminal A25 and
body ground.
8 9 10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
=
the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-safe
relay .
NO- Goto step 13.
19-60
13. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control
unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body
ground.
8 9 10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
=
between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS
fail-safe relay .
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Check for continuity between the ABS fail-safe
relay 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
=
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABS
fail-safe relay and body ground, or a loose or poor
connection at body ground (G202) .
~
BACK
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELA V 4P CONNECTOR
GND (BLK) FSR (VEL/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
16. Check for continuity between the ABS(TCS control
ground.
8 9 10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (VEL/GRN)
=
YES-Ifthe problem recurs, replace the ABS(TCS
control unit .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ABS(TCS
control unit and the ABS fail-safe relay .
ABS DTC 61, 62: Ignition Voltage
1. Clear the DTC.

YES- Go to step 3.
3. Verify the DTC.
Is DTe 61 or 62 indicated?
YES-Check the charging system .
NO- Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
DTC .
19-61
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
ABS DTC 71: Different Diameter Tire
1. Clear the DTC.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 71
indicated?
VES- Make sure all four tires are the specified size
and are inflated to proper specification .
time .
19-62
ABS DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Diagnosis, and ROM/RAM Diagnosis
1. Clear the DTC.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 81
indicated?
VES- Replace the ABS/TCS control unit .
time .
BACK
TCS DTC 24, 25, 26, 27: TCS Solenoid
1. Verify the TCS DTC.
Is rcs orc 28 indicated?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for
DTC28 .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and
the ABS{TCS control unit connector A (26P).
ABS{TCS control unit connector A (26P) TCS
solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see
table).
TeSOTe Apprcmriate Terminal
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15
26: NOL A3
27: NCL A2
NOL(GRY)
YES-Repair short to body ground in the
appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the
ABS{TCS control unit and the modulator unit .
NO-Go to step 5.

ABS{TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid
circuit terminal and body ground (see table).
TeSOTe Terminal
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15
26: NOL A3
27: NCL A2
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26PI
NOL(GRYI
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P
connector TCS solenoid circuit terminals to body
ground with jumper wires (see table).
TeSOTe Appropriate Terminal
24: NOR No.5
25: NCR No.6
26: NOL No.8
27: NCL No.7
NCR (RED/GRNI NCL (YEL/GRNI
JUMPER
WIRE
=
(cont'd)
19-63 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit
TCSDTC Appropriate Terminal
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15
26: NOl A3
27: NCl A2
NOL(GRY)
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the appropriate TCS solenoid
the modulator unit..
10. Remove the jumper wires from the modulator unit
24P connector.
19-64
12. Remove the TCS relay, and connect the TCS relay
4P connector terminal No.2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
NOTE: The wire colors of the TCS relay 4P connector
are BlU, RED/BlU, BRN/BlK, and GRN/yEL.
TCS RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
TCS
SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
JUMPER
WIRE
BACK
ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal
and body ground (see table).
NOR, NOL, NCR, NCL: 8-10 Q (at 20C, 68F)
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15
26: NOL A3
27: NCL A2
ASS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
NOL(GRV}
Is there resistance OK?
YES-Goto step 14.
14. Disconnect the modulator unit connector, and
remove the jumper wire from the TCS relay 4P
connector terminal.

ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal
and each of the other terminals listed (see table).
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15
26: NOL A3
27: NCL A2
ABS Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit
Connector C (12P) Terminal
FR-IN C11
FR-OUT C6
FL-IN C9
FL-OUT C4
RR-IN C8
RR-OUT C3
RL-IN C10
RL-OUT C5
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 126P)
GRV
RED/GRN L T BLU
YES- Repair short in the appropriate wires
modulator unit .
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
19-65 BACK
ABS/lCS Components
TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and all
other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit terminals (see
table).
TCSOTC Appropriate Terminal
24: NOR A16
25: NCR A15
26: NOl A3
27: NCl A2
ABS Solenoid ABS/TCS Control Unit
Connector C (12P) Terminal
FR-IN C11
FR-OUT C6
Fl-IN C9
Fl-OUT C4
RR-IN C8
RR-OUT C3
Rl-IN C10
Rl-OUT C5
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26PI
YEL/GRN
RED/GRN LTBLU
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12PI
Is there less than 3&2 ?
YES - Replace the modulator unit .
NO-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
19-66
lCS DlC 28: res Relay
1. Check the BSC F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
Does the fuse blow?
between the TCS relay and the modulator unit .
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check the TCS relay in the under-hood ABS relay
box (see page 22-31). The wire colors of the TCS
relay 4P connector are BlU, RED/BlU, BRN/BlK,
and GRN/YEL.
Is the relay OK?
YES-leave the TCS relay removed, and go to
step 4.
NO-Replace the TCS relay .
4. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P
+B1BFm
~ W l l i
YES-Go to step 5.
hood fuse/relay box and the TCS relay .
BACK
5. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No.1
to No.2 with a jumper wire.
+B(BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

(RED/BLU)
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 17 and
body ground.
TCS SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
'::I..
=
YES - Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the TCS
relay and the modulator unit .
8. Remove the jumper wire from the TCS relay 4P
connector.

24P connector terminal No. 17 and body ground.
TCS SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
'::I..
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the TCS relay and the modulator unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect the A8S/TCS control unit connector 8
(16P).
11. Measure the voltage between terminal 813 and
body ground.
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS relay .
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
19-67
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
12. Check for conti nuity between the ABS{fCS control
ground.
between the ABS{fCS control unit and the TCS
relay .
NO-Gotostep 13.
14. Remove the ABS fail-safe relay. The wire colors of
ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector are WHT/GRN,
BRN/BLK, BLK, and YEL/GRN.
terminal No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
ABS FAil-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
+B (WHT/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE ~
S O l E N ~
(BRN/BlK)
19-68
16. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P
YES-Go to step 17.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe
relay and the TCS relay .
17. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector No.3 and
No.4 with a jumper wire.
NOTE: Make sure the ABS{fCS control unit
connector B (16P) is disconnected.
SOLENOID
(BRN/BlK)
TCSR
(GRN/YEl)
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
ground.
YES -If the problem recurs, replace the ABS(TCS
control unit..
NO- Repair open in the wire between the TCS
relay and the ABS(TCS control unit .

TCS DTC 31: Engine Retard Command
(PFINH) signal
NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
the PGM-FI or ABS first.
1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and the
ABS(TCS control unit connector B (16P).
2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A13 and body ground.
1112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

PFINH (BLU)
.Q
=
between the PCM and the ABS(TCS control unit..
NO-Goto step 3.
3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
19-69
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A13 and body ground.
NOTE: Use the 10 V range or similar range in an
analog tester.
PCM CONNECTOR A (32PI
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
11211 314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
..lL
PFINH(BLUI
'Y..
sv ........... .
About 2.SV _. . . '- . . . ._. . . .-
OV ...... .
Is there about 2.5 V?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck .
19-70
6. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar
range, measure the voltage between the ABS(TCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B10 and
body ground.
PFINH (BLUI
SV ........... .
About 2.SV _. . . .- . . . ._. . . .-
OV ...... .
YES-Check for loose ABS(TCS control unit
ABS(TCS control unit, and recheck .
the ABS(TCS control unit .
BACK
TCS DTC 32: Engine speed (NEP) Signal
NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
the PGM-FI or ABS first.
1. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P), ABS{TCS
control unit connector B (16P) and gauge
assembly connector A (30P).
(32P) terminal A 19 and body ground.
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 16 17 18 1920 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 ~ 30 31
~
NEPIBLU)
Q
=
between the PCM and the ABS{TCS control unit.
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Start the engine, warm it up to normal operating
temperature, and let it idle.
~
~
range, measure the voltage between the PCM
connector A (32P) terminal A 19 and body ground.
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112j13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 Il 30 31
~
NEPIBLU)
'Y
12V
About 6V _. . . .- . . . ._. . . .-
OV ...... .
Is there about 6 V?
YES - Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
19-71 BACK
ABS/lCS Components
6. With the engine still idling, measure the voltage
between the ABS{TCS control unit connector
B (16P) terminal B11 and body ground with the
analog voltmeter again.
12V
About 6V -' . . .- . . . .-. . . .-
OV ...... .
Is there about 6 V?
YES - The system is OK at this time. If the problem
recurs, replace the ABS{TCS control unit..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ABS{TCS control unit .
19-72
TCS DTC 34: Reference Voltage (VREF) Signal
NOTE: Ifthe MIL orthe ABS indicator is ON,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS first.
ABS{TCS control unit connector B (16P).
A (32P) terminal A7 and body ground.
11 12
112113
VREF (ORN/GRN)
I
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

11 1
24 1
Q
between the PCM and the ABS{TCS control unit..
NO-Goto step 3.
BACK
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector
A (32P) terminal A7 and body ground.
11 12
112113
VREF (ORN/GRN)
I
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
'--
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
111
24 1
':i.
=
6. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control
unit connector B(16P) terminal B2 and body ground.
VREF (ORN/GRN)
=
Is there about 5 V?
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit .
the ABS/TCS control unit .

TCS DTC 36: Throttle Position Sensor Output
(THLOUT) Signal
NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON,
ABS/TCS control unit connector B(16P).
(32P) terminal A31 and body gound.
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 16 17 18 19 202 122 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 3031
...R
THLOUT (VEL/G RN)
Q
=
between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit .
NO-Go to step 3.
(cont'd)
19-73
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A31 and body ground with the
throttle fully opened and fully closed. There should
be a smooth transition from approx. 0.5 V and 4.5 V.
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
l12113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 I
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

THLOUT (YEL/G RN)
':i
=
YES - Go to step 6.
ground with the throttle fully closed.
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit..
the ABS/TCS control unit..
19-74
TCS DTC 61: AfT Shift Position (ATSFTP)
Signal
ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).
A (32P) terminal A 11 and body ground.
1112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
112113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

ATSFTP
(LTGRN)
r-
11 J
24 ]
Q
=
between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit .
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Shift the transmission to [f] position.
BACK
range, measure the voltage between the PCM
connector A (32P) terminal A 11 and body ground.
r--
11 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
-R.
ATSFTP (VEL/GRN)
':L
i f I n Wire s de of ema e terml als
=
5V ..... JJ] ... JI;iiiJl :.:ii JI;i:i JI;::: iiii
About 4V - "TT:: n':: Tf;: 'rr:: TTT1
III: .11111\11111111
OV ..... : : :: :::: :::: :::: Ll..i..i
Is there about 4 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
range, measure the voltage between the ABSrrCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B7 and body
ground.
=
ATSFTP
(LTGRN)
5V ..... JJ] ... 'JI:iiiJl i;ii JI;iiiJl i;ii iiii
About 4V - -:-:':: :-;':: .:-::: ':-,"",: ':-:-;',
! . !! !!! 111111111 ! III
OV ..... :::: ;::: :::: :::: Ll..i..i
Is there about 4 V?
YES-Check for loose ABSrrCS control unit
ABSrrCS control unit, and recheck .
the ABSrrCS control unit .

TCS DTC 81: Continuous TCS Operation
1. Clear the DTC.
Does the TCS indicator come on, and is DTC 81
indicated?
YES- Replace the ABSrrCS control unit .
time .
19-75 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
YES -If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off,
it's OK. Ifthe ABS indicator stays on, turn the
ignition switch OFF, and go to step 13.
NO- Go to step 2.
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit.
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
A (26P).
NO - Go to step 6.
assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Replace the ABS indicator bulb .
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).
19-76
connector C (16PI terminal C10 and body ground.
ABS (BLU/WHT)
=
between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
control unit .
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).
11. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)
terminal B16 to body ground with a jumper wire.
GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
=
YES- Repair open in the wire between the gauge
NO-Replace the gauge assembly .
BACK
13. Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
14. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
A (26P) terminal A 1 to body ground with a jumper
wire.
ABS/TCS CONTROL CONNECTOR A (26P)
YES-Repair open in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and body ground (G403) .
NO-Go to step 16.
ground.
YES-Gotostep 17.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the R/C
MIRROR 0.5 A) fuse and the ABS/TCS control
unit..

A (26P) terminal A4 to body ground with a jumper
wire.
=
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P)
terminal C10 to body ground with a jumper wire.
ABS (BLU/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
=
assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit .
NO- Replace the gauge assembly .
19-77
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and watch the TCS indicator.
Does the TCS indicator come on?
YES -If the TCS indicator comes on and goes off, it's
OK. If the TCS indicator stays on, go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the engine OFF, then restart it again.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit..
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
3. Turn the engine OFF, and check the TCS indicator
bulb in the gauge assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO- Replace the TCS indicator bulb .
4. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)
terminal B18 and body ground with a jumper wire.
GAUGE ASSEMBl V CONNECTOR B (22P)
TCS (RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the gauge assembly .
19-78
5. Remove the jumper wire at the gauge assembly,
and connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P) terminal B16 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
TCS2
(RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Goto step 6.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit..
C (12P) terminal C2 and body ground with a jumper
wire.
lG (BRN/BlK)
JUMPER
WIRE
_ .....
...JII
/2
7 8
1'5<1
n....
3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
YES- Repair open in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and body ground (G101) .
NO-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
BACK
7. Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
itisOK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
ground.
IG2 (YEl/BlK)
2 3
15 16
YES-Goto step 9.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS control
unit..

(26P) and connector B (16P).
11. Turn the ignition switch ON(lI).
Does the TCS indicator go off?
NO- Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
control unit..
19-79
BACK
ABS/TCS Components
NOTE:
To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Push the modulator unit connector lock (e), and turn the connector lever (D).
2. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B).
3. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (A).
c
o
6mmNUT
9.S Nm 11.0 kgfm.
7 2 1 ~
~
SmmBOLT
22 Nm 12.2 kgf.m.16Ibf.ft)
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.
3. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator and the TeS indicator go off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and the TeS indicator do not come on.
19-80 BACK
Tes Switch Test
1. Remove the cruise control/TCS switch (A) from the
switch panel.

2. Check for continuity between terminal No.5 and
No.6. There should be continuity when the TCS
switch is pushed.
CRUISE CONTROl/TCS SWITCH CONNECTOR
4
IG2
(BlK/VEl)
19-81 BACK
ABS/TCS Components
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's kick panel.
2. Remove the ABS/TCS control unit (A).
A
~ ~ ~ t
3. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connectors (B).
4. Install the ABS/TCS control unit in the reverse order
of removal.
19-82
Wheel Sensor Inspection
1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or
damaged teeth.
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and
pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser.
Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on
the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm
(0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard:
Front: 0.4 -1.05 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in)
Rear: 0.19-1.14 mm (0.01-0.05 in)
Front
t
Rear
t
BACK
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting wires.
Front
Rear
6mmBOLT
-----..
WHEEL SENSOR

(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfft)
/
6mmBOLT
9.8Nm
WHEEL SENSOR
19-83 BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-02 models) located in the front seat-backs.
Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-02 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual,
PIN 61S8400.ltems marked with an asterisk (* ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items will require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
done by and authorized Honda dealer.
co/fision, a/f SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and side airbags on some '00-02 models).
Do not bump the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a co/fision, or the airbags may deploy when the
ignition switch is ON (/f).
SRS electrical connectors are indicated with ye/fow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats
('00-02 models) and around the floor ('00-02 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
Body
Seats
Front Seat Removal and Installation
-4-Way Power-Sedan ........................................ 20-2
-4-Way Power-Sedan ........................................ 20-3
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
-4-Way Power-Sedan ........................................ 20-4
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation
-4-Way Power-Sedan ........................................ 20-5
Bumper
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement ..................... 20-6
Hood
Replacement
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement-Coupe
Emblem Replacement-Sedan
Frame
20-7
20-8
20-8
Sub-frame Replacement ....................................... 20-9
Frame Repair Chart ............................................... 20-12
NOTE: Refer to the 1998- 2002 Accord Service Manual
(PIN 6158400) for the items not shown in this section.
1998 model:
The Accord sedan and coupe V6 model has been added.
- The V6 emblem has been added.
- The hood replacement procedure is different.
tfP"" - The sub-frames are different.
- The frame repair chart is different.
2001 model:
The following item has been added on Sedan or Coupe V6 model.
- The passenger's 4 way power seat (sedan)
- The rear bumper spoiler (coupe)
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation - 4-Way Power - Sedan
and precautions and procedures (see page 23-28) in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service. Refer
to '98-02 ACCORD Service Manual, PIN 61 S8400.
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and
wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove
the bolts securing the front seat (8). When prying
with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective
tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch
the body or tear the seat covers.
20-2
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt,4
~
10x1.25mm
34 Nm (3.5 kgfm,
251bf.ftl
A
1>: Clip, 1
~
4. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect and detach
the seat harness connector (A) and harness clip (8).
A B B
A
A
To body. To body.
5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
front seat through the front door opening.
6. Install the front seat in the reverse order of removal,
and note these item:
Replace the damaged track and cover clip.
Make sure the seat harness connector is plugged
in properly.
Enter the anti-there code for the radio, then enter
BACK
Front Seat Disassembly IReassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan
precautions and procedures (see page 23-28) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Refer to '98-02
ACCORD Service Manual, PIN 61S8400.
Disassembly the front sent as shown.
If the seat-back pad or the OPDS unit is replaced, reinitialize the OPDS unit. Refer to '98-02 ACCORD Service Manual,
PIN 61S8400 (see page 23-300).
HOOKS

SEAT-BACK
/ PIVOT WASHER
10 x 1.25 mm

RECLINE COVER
------..:'" "",-"
WIRE TIE
10x1.25mm
47Nm
IS< '" "
"
SEAT LINKAGE
/ 10x1.25mm
.. '(), 47 Nm (4.8 kgfm, 35 Ibftt)
CAPS SWITCH KNOBS
20-3
BACK
Seats
Front Seat linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'0102 models:
NOTE:
To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the front seat backward fully.
Disassemble the linkage as shown.
Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Before installing the slide motor and slide gearbox, align portion (AI as shown to align both slide gearbox positions.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions of the linkage.
Check operation of the recline and slide adjusters.
8x 1.2Smm
14Nm
RIGHT SLIDE GEARBOX
\-
3.7 Nm (0.38 kgfm, 2.7 Ibfft)
20-4
OUTER SLIDE

6x 1.0mm
9Nm
] kgfm. 7Iblft]
?t ff
6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm .. 0
0
9N.m 8Nm
1O.9kgfm.
SLIDE MOTOR!
LEFT SLIDE GEARBOX
6x 1.0mm
9Nm
(0.9 kgfm, 7 Ibfft)
END CAP

BACK
r-' Front Seat Wire Harness Installation - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'01-02 models:
When assembling the front seat, make sure the seat
belt switch harness (A), seat harness (8), seat heater
harnesses (e), side airbag harness (0), OPOS unit
harness (E), connectors (F), clips (G) and wire tie (H) are
fastened correctly.
F
F G F
G
E
G
~ ~ ~ Y. To seat belt
. buckle.
[A][B] To seat cushion heater.
To recline
[C] motor.
L-----, G ~
~
~
B F
20-5
BACK
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement - Coupe
'01-02 models:
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
Remove the rear bumper spoiler as shown.
Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
6xl.0mm I
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
20-6
/1
REAR BUMPER
SPOILER
REAR BUMPER l
HOOKS
BACK
\
Hood
Replacement
1. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (A) from
the windshield washer nozzles (B), and release the
windshield washer tube from the clips (C).
c B
A
2. With a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the clips (A) out of
the support struts (B) on each hood side, then
release both support struts from the pivot bolts (C)
with the help of an assistant. Do not remove the
clips from the support struts. If necessary, release
the support strut from the pivot bolt on the body,
then remove the support strut.
Fastener Locations
~ Bolt, 4
@an
6x1.0mm
9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibfft)
B
3. With the help of an assistant, remove the bolts,
then remove the hood (D). Take care not to damage
the hood and body.
4. Install the hood in the reverse order of removal,
c
Before reattaching the support struts, adjust the
hood alignment.
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
Make sure the windshield washer tubes are
connected properly.
When reattaching the support struts, set the clips
(A) to the original position, then attach the
support struts (B) on the pivot bolts (C) by
pushing the support strut.
20-7
BACK
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement - Coupe
Apply the emblem where shown.
NOTE:
Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface with a
sponge dampened in alcohol.
After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from
Attachment Point (Reference):
20-8
TRUNK LID
Unit: mm (in.)
Edge ofthe
trunk lid.
V6EMBLEM
Emblem Replacement - Sedan
Apply the emblem where shown.
NOTE:
Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface with a
sponge dampened in alcohol.
After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from
Attachment Point (Reference):
Unit: mm (in.)
V6EMBLEM
Edge of the
rear bumper.
Edge ofthe
rear bumper.
13.5
(0.53)
BACK
Frame
r"" Sub-frame Replacement
REAR BEAM
STIFFENER
/
FRONT BEAM
REAR BEAM
8x 1.25 mm
..... SPEt.AL BOLT
~ 14x1.5mm
"" ~ ~ ~ Nm (10.5 kgfm, 76lbfftl
WASHER ~ ~ ' . ,
~ 12x1.Z5mm
~
SPECIAL BOLT
14x 1.5 mm
Replace.
(cont'd)
20-9
BACK
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement (cont'd)
1
REAR SUSPENSION ~
S U ~ ~ t f
8x 1.25 mm
20-10
REAR SUSPENSION
SUB-FRAME
To body.
kJ
------- REAR SUSPENSION
SUB-FRAME STAY
8x 1.25 mm
SPECIAL BOLTS
14x1.5mm
Replace.
BACK
20-11
BACK
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
"': Inner diameter
20-12
CENTER
LINE
N
,...
Gi
!2
'"
0
0
...
POINT
9
POINTh

POINTf
POINTd2
/
POINTi
';':;, d3 \'\\

POINTj
POINTk
POINT a
POINTu

I
L=
l\ J
tlV1
/
- N.

I)-
rf
I
I
.......

in

;::

iii
M
;:: P;-iij P;- iD
,...
Gi
00 an an
C;
Gi
!2
aO aO ..;
'" ...
'"
..; ,..: ..;
!2
!2 !2!2
an an ..
!2 !2 !2
0 0
0 N M 0 0 0 .. ...
0 00
,... CD ,...
.. 00 0
... en en 00 00 en 00 ...
"'"
.....
t..t
0
, o i .",
: 1)5
L...i
w;,(
1/
/\

b-.)
M
J
11 ... J
I...J
l/
---
.5
130

(5.12i 77 (3.0)
200 (7.9) 280 (11.0)
268 (10.6) 425 (16.7)
321 (12.6)
490 (19.3) 595 (23.4)
610 (24.0)
1425 (56.10)

"'
(J

wZ
>::::i
POINT I
\
\
0
I I
iD
..;
!2
..
00
00
0
I Y r
BACK
POINT n
POINTq
rolm,
POINT \ POINT 5

\
I
I
@
I I

.........
1\
tr
0
\ I I JiJI
.
-....;

0
-
in 0 0

_l
....
00 C I')
'"
....
-
f\
,.: 0
..;

'C
.....
It) It)
:!. !e :!.
"""c
- I')
ri ri
N N C
'"
- I-- -
N
.... It)
"""
It)C

C C
N .... .... CUI C C
.... ... ... ... .......

'"
'"
....-

0
I I
\
,
0
([
.--
@)
@

I
;:[l

r r
I
\
""L..,
..J

POINTw
POINTp POINTt
2145 (84.45)
2236 (88.03)
2365 (93.11)
2750 (108.3)
2899 (114.11
2971 (117.0)
2998 (118.0)
3008 (118.4)
3200 (126.0)
3622 1142.6)
(cont'd)
20-13
BACK
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (In,)
111: Inner diameter
POINTe
269(10.6/
SECTIONBB
POINTf
POINTe
Upper Arm Point
M10x 1.25
.11 (0.43) Engine Mount Point
M10x 1.25
M14x 1.5
20-14
,J
e(
(J
tlw
wZ
>:::::1
.11.5 (0.45)
.11.5 (0.45)
SECTIONAA
POINTg
Front Damper Center
ii
...

ii cD
."

!:
r.n
...
...

;
POINTu
.25 (1.0)
Locate Hole
POINTk
2-811
(0.43)
N
cl
IS
.15 (0.59) Locate Hole
POINT I
.25 (1.0) Locate Hole
825 (1.0)
Locate Hole
POINT I
.17 (0.7) For Rear Beam
BACK
:-------=i
POINTm
820 10.81 Locate .Iole
2 - .13
10.51
SECTION DD
Rear Damper Center
M8 x 1.25
POINTq
1125 11.01 Locate Hole
POINTw
10.81 Locate Hole
i
POINTn
1111.410.4491
For Rear
Suspension Sub-
frame
M14x 1.5
118 10.311 For Rear
Suspension Sub-
frame Stay
r::
POINTt
119 10.35) For Rear Suspension
Sub-frame Stay
111510.59) Locate Hole
1111.4(0.449) For Rear Suspension
Sub-frame
20-15
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)
PIN 61S8400.ltems marked with an asterisk (* ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items will require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
Improper service procedures,"including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe frontal airbags (and side airbags on some '00-02 models).
Do not bump the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy when the
SRS electrical connectors are indicated with yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats
('00-02 models) and around the floor ('00-02 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
Air Conditioning
Special Tools ........................ 21-2
Component Location
Index .................................. 21-3
AlC Refrigerant Oil
Replacement ..................... 21-6
Index .................................. 21-7
Circuit Diagram .................... 21-8
Condenser Fan Circuit
Troubleshooting ............... 21-10
Radiator and Condenser Fans
Common Circuit
Heater Valve Cable
Adjustment ....................... 21-13
AlC System Tests ................... 21-15
('98-00 model) ................... 21-18
('98-00 model) ................... 21-20
('98-00 model) ................... 21-21
Replacement
('98-00 model) ................... 21-22
('01-02 model) ................... 21-23
('01-02 model) ................... 21-25
('01-02 model) ................... 21-26
Replacement
('01-02 model) ................... 21-27
Condenser Replacement ..... 21-28
Refrigerant Leak Test ............. 21-29
System Charging .................... 21-30
Climate Control
Component Location
Index .................................. 21-32
Information ....................... 21-34
DTC Troubleshooting
Index .................................. 21-35
Index .................................. 21-36
System Description .............. 21-37
Circuit Diagram .................... 21-38
DTC Troubleshooting .......... 21-40
ECT Sensor Circuit
Climate Control Power and
Ground Circuits
Circuit Troubleshooting ... 21-58
AlC Pressure Switch Circuit
In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement and Test ..... 21-61
Outside Air Temperature
Sensor Replacement
and Test ............................. 21-62
Sunlight Sensor Replacement
and Test ............................. 21-63
Power Transistor Test .......... 21-64
Climate Control Unit Removal
and Installation ................. 21-64
Climate Control Unit
Disassembly and
Reassembly ....................... 21-65
Refer to the 1998-2002 Accord Service Manual (PIN 61S8400) for items not shown in this section.
The air conditioning and climate control has been changed to suit the Accord V6.
Special Tools
Tool Number Descri tion
07SAZ -001 OOOA
CD
21-2
BACK
Air Conditioning
EVAPORATOR
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
SERVICE VALVE
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE)
COMPRESSOR
('98-00 models)
Clutch Check, page 21-20
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-21
SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE)
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-22
COMPRESSOR
('01-02 model)
Clutch Check, page 21-25
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-26
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-27
(cont'd)
21-3
BACK
Air Conditioning
21-4
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY,
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
(Located in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-52
AlC PRESSURE SWITCH
RADIATOR FAN
CONDENSER FAN
BACK
HEATER VALVE CABLE
HEATER UNIT/CORE
EVAPORATOR
Test, page 21-22
BLOWER UNIT
/
Removal and Installation,
page 21-26
... in the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
BLOWER UNIT COMPONENTS
BLOWER RESISTOR
AM> POLLEN FILTER
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-21
-",,,,,r---.,.,, % Q 0 in the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
Q CONTROL PANEL
Test, page 21-23
HEATER FAN SWITCH
Test, page 21-23
Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-24
Test, page 21-20
21-5
BACK
Air Conditioning
Ale Refrigerant Oil Replacement
EVAPORATOR
SUCTION HOSE
LINE

LINE
CD
COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
CD Discharge hose to the compressor (6 x 1.0 mm) : 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
Discharge hose to the condenser (6 x 1.0 mm) : 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 Ibf.ft)
Condenser line to the condenser (6 x 1.0 mm) : 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 Ibfft)
Condenser line to the receiver/dryer: 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
Receiver line to the receiver/dryer: 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
Receiver line to the evaporator: 13 Nm (1.3 kgfm, 9.4Ibfft)
(J) Suction hose to the evaporator: 31 Nm (3.2 kgfm, 23 Ibfft)
Suction hose to the compressor (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
Compressor to compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mm) : 22 Nm (2.2 kgfm, 16 Ibfft)
@ Compressor bracket to engine block (10 x 1.25 mm) : 44 Nm (4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibfft)
21-6

BACK

\ Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Recirculation control doors do Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Blown fuse No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's
not change between Fresh and Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-02 under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate. Accord Service Manual (see page Cleanliness and tightness of all
21-14) connectors
Blower motor runs, but one or Blower Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the under-
more speeds are inoperative. Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-02 hood fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A)
Accord Service Manual (see page in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
21-15) box
connectors
Blower motor does not run at all. Blower Motor Circuit Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the under-
Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-02 hood fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A)
21-15) box
connectors
Condenser fan does not run at Condenser Fan Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
all (but radiator fan runs with Troubleshooting (see page 21-10) hood fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A)
theAlC on). in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Both fans do not run with the Radiator and Condenser Fans Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
AlC on. Common Circuit Troubleshooting (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
(see page 21-12) and No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor clutch does not Compressor Clutch Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
engage. Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-02 hood fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A)
21-39) box
connectors
AlC system does not come on AlC Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
(both fans and compressor). Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-02 connectors
Accord Service Manual (see page
21-41 )
Both heater and AlC do not Heater Control Power and Ground Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the under-
work. Circuits Troubleshooting, refer to hood fuse/relay box, No.3 (7.5A) in
the '98-02 Accord Service Manual the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
(see page 21-19) and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors
21-7
BACK
Air Conditioning
Circuit Diagram
B
21-8
ATTERY
+
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
No.6 (15A)
No.42 (50A) IGI BlK/YEl <f" BlKlYEl
;-0'"' WHT BAT No.3 (7.5A)
IG2 VEL
L
BlKlYEl
r-- BlKlYEl
I I
No.41 (IOOA) No.54 (40A) No.13 (7.5A)
VEL r:t"VJ WHTIYEl
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELA Y BOX

No.57 (20A) NO.58 (20A)
"'V
RADIATOR CONDENSER COMPRESSOR BLOWER
FAN FAN CLUTCH MOTOR
I RELAY 3 1 RELAY 3 4 RELAY 1 1 RELAY 4
S
2 4 2 4 3 2 2 3
GRN BlUIYEl RED RED
YEflK

CLUTCH
- -
-
BlUlBlK GRN GRN

G202
ACC
5V
AlC
2
FANC -:- T ..
PRESSURE
RADIATOR
SWITCH
FAN
ACS

SWITCH A
27 BlU/RED YEUGRN
(Closed: Above) 1
-GRN
27
r
199'F (93'C)
2 2
RADIATOR CONDENSER
-
FAN M FAN M
MOTOR MOTOR PCM
I 1
BlKlYEl
YEUWHT
1,
VEL
GI:
WHT
17
BlKlYEl
2 3 6
I
Is
4
BLK BlK BlK WHT/GRN
1 1 1

RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCHB
2 (Closed: Above)
BlK 22S'F (107'C)
BlK
1 1
G201 GIOI G201 GIOI G401
BACK
..... ---- WHTIYEL
---------- YEUGRN
REAR
WINDOW C>-
DEFOGGER BRN/YEL
RELAY
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH or C>- RED/BLK
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MULTIPLEX <J--
CONTROL UNIT RED
(DRIVER'S)
YEUBLK
BLOWER
MOTOR
2
BLOWER RESISTOR
BLKlYEL
BLU/YEL
BLUIRED JBLU/RED
BLU BLUIBLK ...---- BLUIRED
5V
..... --+--GRN
.....
GRN
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

BRN YEUGRN ---.,
S5V SCOMo---t
AMDP
AIR MIX
MCOOL CONTROL
MOTOR
MHOT
MVENT
MDEF
SCOM
MODEl
MODE
MODE2
CONTROL
MOTOR
MODE3
MODE4
YEUGRN __ __ J
BLK
FRS RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
MOTOR IG2
BLKlYEL I
BLK-----+i
HEATER CONTROL PANEL G401
21-9
BACK
Air Conditioning
Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
hood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-02
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the condenser fan relay .
CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
2
4 3
=
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
21-10
condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
2
JUMPER
WIRE
4 3 BLU/YEL
Does the condenser fan run?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
4
YEL/WHT
=
YES- Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
NO- Go to step 8.
BACK
r
B. Measure the voltage between the No.3 terminal of
the radiator fan control module BP connector and
body ground with the BP connector connected.
8P CONNECTOR
VEL/WHT
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the
condenser fan relay and the radiator fan control
module .
NO-Perform the radiator fan control module input
10. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No.2
terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector.
condenser fan relay and the condenser fan .
the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
=
YES - Replace the condenser fan motor .
condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
21-11
BACK
Air Conditioning
Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20 A) and No. 58 (20 A) fuses in
the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5 A)
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .
2
4
=
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Perform the radiator fan control module input
6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
21-12
connected.
8 9 10
23
32
24
=
the PCM connector A(32P). If the connections are
original PCM .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the radiator
fan relay, the condenser fan relay and PCM .
BACK
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
then disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the
heater valve arm (C).
B
/r\ I
(,/' (:0)
,',I ,Ii ,

,
><-.:::: " \,

A
c
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve
cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
A
o
c
B
3. Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool (60F
or 18C) with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the air mix
control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D),
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp (A).
5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
B
!
A
c
21-13
BACK
Air Conditioning
21-14
BACK
Ale System Tests
Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge (high) After stopping compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate, refer to the
pressure drops to about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
, 28
'98-02 Accord Service Manual
abnormally high psi) quickly, and then falls gradually.
(see page 21-55), and recharge
with specified amount
(see page 21-30)
Reduced or no air flow through Clogged condenser or radiator Clean
condenser fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
Condenser or radiator fan not Check fan direction.
workinc orooerlv
Line to condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant in Restricted lines
system
Discharge pressure High and low pressures are balanced Faulty compressor discharge Replace the compressor.
abnormally low soon after stopping compressor. Low valve
side is hioherthan normal. Faultv comoressor seal
Outlet of expansion valve is not Faulty expansion valve Replace
frosted, low-pressure gauge indicates Moisture in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge
vacuum. with soecified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and Frozen expansion valve Recover, evacuate, and recharge
pressure low-pressure line is not cold. Low- (Moisture in system) with specified amount.
abnormally low oressure cauce indicates vacuum. Faulty exoansion valve Reolace the exoansion valve.
Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with compressor off, then
air flow from vents is restricted. check evaoorator temoerature sensor.
Exoansion valve is frosted. l o ~ g e d eXDansion valve Clean or reolace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and inlet Clogged receiver/dryer Replace
is warm (should be warm during
ooeration).
Suction pressure Low-pressure hose and check joint are Expansion valve open too long Repair or replace.
abnormally high cooler than the temperature around Loose expansion capillary tube
evaoorator.
Suction pressure is lowered when Excessive refrigerant in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled by water. soecified amount.
High and low-pressure are equalized Faulty gasket Replace the compressor.
as soon as the compressor is stopped, Faulty high-pressure valve
and both gauges fluctuate while Foreign particle stuck in high-
runnino. Dressure valve
Suction and Reduced air flow through condenser. Clogged condenser or radiator Clean
discharge fins Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures Condenser or radiator fan not Check fan direction.
abnormally hiQh workinc orooerlv
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal end Clogged or kinked low-pressure Repair or replace.
discharge pressure areas are cooler than evaoorator. hose oarts
abnormally low Temperature around expansion valve Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
is too low compared with that around
receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant leaks Comoressor clutch is dirty. Comoressor shaft sealleakinQ Reolace the comoressor.
Comoressor bolt(s) are dirtv. Leaki!)Q around bolt(s) Tichten bolt(s) or reolace comoressor.
Comoressor oasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking_ Reolace the comoressor.
r
(cont'd)
21-15
BACK
Air Conditioning
Ale System Tests (cont'd)
Performance Test
I AWARNING
combustible vapor.
injury.
conditioning systems.
I ACAUTION
The performance test will help determine if the air
conditioner system is operating within specifications.
certified to meetthe requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove HFC-134a (R-134al from the air conditioning
system.
manufacturers.
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recover/recycling/
charging station to the high-pressure service port
and the low-pressure service port, following the
2. Determine the relative humidity and air
temperature.
21-16
3. Insert a thermometer in the center air vent.
4. Test conditions:
Avoid direct sunlight.
Open the hood.
Open the front doors.
Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool, the
mode control switch on Vent and the
recirculation control switch on Recirculate.
Turn the AlC switch on and the fan switch on Max.
Run the engine at 1,500 rpm.
No driver or passengers in vehicle.
5. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the dash
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit
behind the glove box and the high and low system
pressure from the AlC gauges.
BACK
r
6. To complete the charts:
Mark the delivery temperature along the vertical line.
Mark the intake temperature (ambient air temperature) along the bottom line.
Draw a line straight up from the air temperature to the humidity.
Mark a point 10 % above and 10 % below the humidity level.
From each point, draw a horizontal line across the delivery temperature.
The delivery temperature should fall between the two lines.
Complete the low-side pressure test and high-side pressure test in the same way.
Any measurements outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
Show.:
kPa

psi]
2900
(30)
[430]
2500
(25)
[360]
2000
kPa
(20)
(kgf/cm')
[280]
[psi]
1500 400 86
(15) (4) (30)
[210] [57]
980 300 77
(10)
[140]
(3)
[43]
(25)
DELIVERY 200
68
PRESSURE
(20)
100 59
(1)
[14]
(15)
0 50
(10)
INTAKE
PRESSURE
41
(5)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
of
(OC)
DELIVERY
PRESSURE
I
68
120)
I
77
(25)
Showatype
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
I
86
(30)
I
95
(35)
Calsonic type
Calsonic:
kPa
(kgf/cm')
[psi]
2900
800/0
(30)
[430]
HUMIDITY
2500
LEVEL
(25)
[360]
300/0
2000
kP.
120)
[280]
psi]
1500 400 86
800/0 (15) (4) (30)
HUMIDITY
[210] [57]
800/0 LEVEL
980 300 77
300/0
300/0
110)
[140]
(3)
[43
(25)
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
DELIVERY 200 68
PRESSURE
(2) (20)
[28
100 59
11)
[14
(15)
o 50
(10)
INTAKE
PRESSURE
41
(5)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
of
1C)
I
68
(20)
77
(25)
86
(30)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
95
(35)
800/0
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
300/0
800/0
800/0
30%
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
300/0
21-17
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('98-00 model)
preset buttons.
charging station, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from
the condenser fan shroud (8), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (e), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt. then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the
condenser fan shroud. 8e careful not to damage
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan
shroud.
kgf.m. 7.20bfttl

E
A
6x1.0 mm
21-18
7. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
suction (A) and discharge (8) lines from the
compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
contamination.
6x 1.0 mm
B
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.
8e careful not to damage the radiator fins when
removing the compressor.
ax 1.25 mm

I
BACK
9. Remove the bolts, the suction service valve (A) and
the O-ring (B) from the compressor.
B
10. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts and the
compressor bracket.
10 x 1.25 mm
removed from it, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) for HFC-
134a DENSO piston type compressor only.
absorption.
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
21-19
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Check ('98-00 model)
(see page 21-21).
3. Measure the clearance betweenn the pulley (A) and
the pressure plate (8) with a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the
pressure plate when the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not within the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-21).
Clearance: O.5O.15 mm (O.020O.006 in)
21-20
e
12V
page21-21).
Field Coil Resistance: 3.4-3.8 ohms at 68F (20C)
BACK
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 model)
Ale clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872,
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure
plate with a commercially available Ale clutch
holder.
13.2 Nm (1.35 kgfm, 9.76Ibfft)
~
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:
0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, and 1.5 mm.
compressor.
terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (e). Be careful
not to damage the field coil and compressor.
B
~
(cont'd)
21-21
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00
model) (cont'd)
solvent.
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
21-22
Replacement ('98-00 model)
out.
A
13.2 Nm 11.35 kg/7.7.,bf.ftJ
~ ~ ~ ~
B
installing it.
valve.
BACK
Compressor Replacement ('01-02 model)
preset buttons.
charging station, refer to '98-02 Accord Service
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from
the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (e), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the
condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan
shroud.
7. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
suction line (A) and discharge line (B) from the
compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
contamination.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgfm,
7.2Ibfft)
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.
removing the compressor.
8x1.2Smm
(cont'd)
21-23
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('01-02 model) (cont'd)
9. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts and the
compressor brecket.
10 x 1.25 mm
21-24
removed from it, refer to '98-02 Accord Service
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) for HFC-
134a DENSO piston type compressor only.
absorption.
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
BACK
Compressor Clutch Check ('01-02 model)
(see page 21-26).
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and
the pressure plate (B) with a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the
pressure plate when the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not within the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-26).
Clearance: 0.5 0.15 mm (0.020 0.006 in.)
page 21-26).
Field Coil Resistance: 3.4-3.8 ohms at 68F (20C)
21-25
BACK
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('01-02 model)
Ale clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872,
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the
pressure plate with a commercially available Ale
clutch holder (B).
A
13.2Nm
(1.35 kgf.m,
9.76Ibfft)
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:
0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm, and 1.5 mm.
A
B
21-26
compressor.
B
terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (e). Be careful
notto damage the field coil and compressor.
BACK
r
solvent.
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Replacement ('01-02 model)
charging station, refer to '98-02 Accord Service
out.
B
A
13.2 Nm 11.35 kgfm, 9.76Ibfft)
installing it.
valve.
21-27
BACK
Air Conditioning
Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery!recycling!
2. Remove the coolant reservoir, but do not
disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant
reservoir and the radiator.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the upper mount
brackets from the radiator.
6x 1.0mm
9.S Nm 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibfft)
4. Remove each bolt, then disconnect the discharge
line (A) and condenser (B) line from the condenser.
contamination.
A
B
21-28
5. Remove the bolts and the upper mount brackets (A),
then remove the condenser (B) by lifting it up. Be
careful not to damage the radiator and condenser
fins when removing the condenser.
A

6x1.0mm
9.S Nm (1.0 kgfm, 7.2Ibfft)
6. Install the condenser in the reverse order of
If you're installing a new condenser, add
refrigerant oil (DEN SO NO-OIL 8), refer to the '98-
02 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-32).
absorption.
may damage the paint; ifthe refrigerant oil
Be careful not to damage the radiator and
condenser fins when installing the condenser.
BACK
Refrigerant Leak Test
Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM,
AWARNING
Compressed air mixed with R-134a froms a
combustible vapor.
injury.
conditioning system.
ACAUTION
certiified to meet the requirements of SAl; J2210 to
system.
obtained from the refrigerant and lulbricant
manufacturers.
instructions.
2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to
the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
and remove the charging system couplers.
Refrigerant capacity with Showa condenser:
SOOtoS50 g
O.SO to 0.S5 kg
1.3 to 1.41bs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
Refrigerant capacity with Calsonic condenser:
450to500g
0.45 to 0.50 kg
1.0to 1.11bs
15.9 to 17.Soz
3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a
refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be
opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.),
recover the system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system
must be evacuated.
21-29
BACK
Air Conditioning
System Charging
: ACAUTION
system.
manufacturers.
instructions.
21-30
/, .. -.. .....-
/
\..
'-...
!
i
i
I
i
./
2. Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-02 Accord
3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
system that was removed during recovery. Use
only OENSO NO-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
the compressor will be damaged.
Refrigerant capacity with Showa condenser:
600t0650g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.3 to 1.41bs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
Refrigerant capacity with Calsonic condenser:
450 to 500 g
0.45 to 0.50 kg
1.0to 1.11bs
15.9 to 17.6 oz
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-29).
6. Check for system performance (see page 21-16).
BACK
21-31
BACK
Climate Control
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-62
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY, CONDENSER FAN
21-32
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
(Located in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-52
BACK
TER VALVE CABLE
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Test, page 21-63
HEATER UNIT/CORE
/
RePlacement, page 21-63

CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-22
Test, page 21-20
Test, page 21-23
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-61
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-21
MOTOR HIGH RELAY
Test, page 22-52
DUST AND POLLEN FILTER
EVAPORATOR
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-65
21-33
BACK
Climate Control
How to Retrieve a DTC
The climate control unit has a self-diagnosis function.
Running the Self-diagnosis Function
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
OFF BUTTON
C" E B,D

K I H 'N
2. Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool, then slowly to Max Hot.
3. After 1 minute, press the AUTO button and then the OFF button. Continue to hold both buttons down. If there is
any abnormality in the system when both buttons are pressed, the temperature indicator will light up the segment
(A to N) corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator will then alternate every second between
displaying "88" (all segments lit) and the error segment. Ifthere is no abnormality, the segments will not light up.
Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function
Turning the ignition switch OFF will cancel the self-diagnosis function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnosis function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
21-34
BACK
I"""
\ DTC Troubleshooting Index
r
To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnosis function (see page 21-34). In the case of multiple problems, the
respective indicator segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I, and L come on at the same time, there
may be an open in the common ground wire of the sensors.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
C E B D

A --Q -0 QB--F

K I H N
DTe Detection Item Page
(Temperature
Indicator
segment)
A An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-40)
B A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-41)
C An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-41)
D A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-43)
E An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-43)
F A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-44)
G An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-45)
H A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-46)
I An open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-47)
J A short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-47)
K A problem in the air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-48)
L An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-49)
M A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-50)
N A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-51)
21-35
BACK
Climate Control
The blower motor does not run ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting Cleanliness and tightness of all
immediately even through the (see page 21-56) connectors
engine is fully warmed up
NOTE: The temperature control
dial or button must be set
between 64F (18C) and 90F
(32C)
Recirculation control doors do Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Blown fuse No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's
not change between Fresh and Troubleshooting (see page 21-58) under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate. Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Condenser fan does not run at Condenser Fan Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
all (but radiator fan runs with Troubleshooting (see page 21-10) hood fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A)
the AlC on). in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Both fans do not run with the Radiator and Condenser Fans Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
AlC on. Common Circuit Troubleshooting (20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
(see page 21-12) and No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor clutch does not Compressor Clutch Circuit Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the under-
engage. Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-02 hood fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A)
21-39) box
connectors
AlC system does not come on AlC Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
(both fans and compressor). Troubleshooting (see page 21-59) connectors
Both heater and AlC do not Climate Control Power and Ground Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the under-
work. Circuits Troubleshooting (see page hood fuse/relay box, No.3 (7.5A) in
21-57) the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors
21-36
BACK
System Description
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
8P CONNECTOR 20P CONNECTOR

4 5 6 }8
rs <'1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
8P CON ECTOR (0 on Circuit Diagram)
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 BLK/YEL IG2 (Power) INPUT
2 WHT/yEL +B (Power) INPUT
3 RED/WHT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR OUTPUT
4 BLU/ORN BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELAY INPUT
5 ORN/BLK POWER TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
6 BLU/RED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
7 BRN/YEL REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INPUT
8 BLK GROUND OUTPUT
20P CONECTOR (0 on Circuit Diagram)
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 PNK/BLK AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
2 YEL/GRN AlC PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT
3 GRN/RED FRESH INPUT
4 GRN/WHT RECIRCULATE INPUT
5 BLU/BLK MODE DEF OUTPUT
6 BLU/WHT MODE VENT OUTPUT
7 RED/YEL AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
8 RED/BLK COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY INPUT
9 RED/WHT AIR MIXCOOL OUTPUT
10 RED MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S) OUTPUT
11 YEL/GRN SENSOR COMMON GROUND INPUT
12 WHT/RED SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPUT
13 GRY AIR MIX POTENTIAL +5V OUTPUT
14 BRN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
15 BRN/WHT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
16 YEL/RED IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
17 BLU/GRN MODE4 OUTPUT
18 LT GRN/BLK MODE3 OUTPUT
19 GRN/YEL MODE 2 OUTPUT
20 GRN/BLK MODE 1 OUTPUT
21-37
BACK
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
B
21-38
ATTERY
+
No.42 (SOA)
--<:J"'\ WHT
No.4l (100A) No.S4(40A)
VEL
No.SS(40A)
-.0"'\
No.S7(20A) No_58 (20A)
--..
RADIATOR CONDENSER
FAN FAN
1 RELAY 3 1 RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH
IGl
BAT
IG2
3 4
BlKiYEl
VEL
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.S(lSA)
-..
NO.3 (7_SA)
L
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY 1

2 4 2 4 3 2
GRN BlUIYEl RED RED
t--
GRN
BlKiYEL
BLKiYEl
BlKiYEl
BLOWER
MOTOR
1 RELAY 4

2 3
BlUlBlK GRN G1N
1
CLUTCH
YEr
K
- -

G202
ACC.
T
..
AlC
PRESSURE
SWITCH
ACS

2
- ,
,,7 BlUiRED YELlGRN
RADIATOR
FAN
-
cT
SWITCH A FANC
(Closed: Above) 1

r?
199'F (93'C)
ECT
?'
REDIWHT REDIWHT

< COOLANT
1< TEMPERATURE
2 2 SG2
(ECT) SENSOR
-!-
1
GRNlBlK _ 1
RADIATOR CONDENSER
FAN M FAN M
MOTOR MOTOR
-
1 1 PCM
BlKiYEl
YELlWHT
VEL
Gl:
1s
WHT
17
BlKiYEl
2 3 1
I I
BlK BlK BLK
4
WHT/GRN

RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCHB
2 Closed: Above
(107'C) ,
BlK BlK
1 1
G201 Gl01 G20l Gl01 G401

I
BACK
No.13
(7.5A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
BLKlYEL
'------ WHTIYEL
------- YEUGRN
-------REDIWHT
REAR
[>- BRNIYEL
RELAY
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH or [>- REDIBlK
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MULTIPLEX <r-
CONTROL UNIT RED
(DRIVER'S)
YEUBlK
BLOWER
MOTOR
2
BLUIRED
f
BlUIR:D BLUIRED
BLOWER
---------_-IJ
1 RELAY
3 5
BLUIORN BLK POWER
BlUIORN ___ ""","",,"_.....J TRANSISTOR
BLUIRED ----+-------t--j-''YYIrt

A: IN-CAR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B : OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C : SUNLIGHT SENSOR
....----.C
0: EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
.... YEUGRN
S-COMo--....
AIR MIX
CONTROL
MOTOR
S.COM 0-.;.7_-t
MODE
CONTROL
MOTOR
--'=--- YEUGRN _...!=======-_--J
GRNIRED FRS RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
GRNIWHT ----y REC MOTOR IG2 BlKIYEL
BLK
o : 8P CONNECTOR
o : 20P CONNECTOR
BlK
1
G401
21-39
BACK
Climate Control
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC indicator light A: An open in the in-car
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-61).
2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor.
*Check for a change in resistance by heating or
cooling the sensor with a hair drier.
12
11
10
9
8
\
\
\
RESISTANCE
7
\
kQ 6
5
4
3
2
1
\.
'"
."",
"-......
-......
---
14 32 50 68 86 104 of
-10 0 10 20 30 40C
TEMPERATURE
* Is the resistance within the specifications shown
on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the in-car temperature sensor .
3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
21-40
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
2 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
connector.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor .
1 terminal ofthe in-cartemperature sensor 2P
connector.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the in-
car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate l
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor .
BACK
lflii'
,
\
DTC indicator light B: A short in the in-car
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-61 ).
2. Test the in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-61).
on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the in-car temperature sensor .
the climate control unit 20P connector and body
ground.
15<1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
~ W R E D
=
between the climate control unit and the in-car
temperature sensor..
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit.
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit .
DTC indicator light C: An open in the outside
air temperature sensor circuit
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see
page 21-62).
2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor.
*Dip the sensor in ice water the and measure the
resistance. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and
check for a change in resistance.
12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE
7
1\
\
\
\
kQ 6
5
4
3
2
1
'"
'"
"'"
"",
.......
r---.
14 32 50 68 86 104"F
-10 0 10 20 30 40"C
TEMPERATURE
* Is the resistance within the specifications shown
on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the outside air temperature sensor .
(cont'd)
21-41
BACK
Climate Control
1 terminal ofthe outside airtemperature sensor 2P
connector.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor .
21-42
2 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
control unit..
sensor .
BACK
DTC indicator light 0: A short in the outside
air temperature sensor circuit
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see
page 21-62).
2. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-62).
on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the outside air temperature sensor .
ground.
I><l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
? R N W ~
=
between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor..
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
DTC indicator light E: An open in the sunlight
sensor circuit
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
1 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4.
control unit and the sunlight sensor .
(cont'd)
21-43
BACK
Climate Control
2 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
sensor. II
5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
6. Reconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
7. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-63).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
replace the original climate control unit..
NO- Replace the sunlight sensor..
21-44
DTC indicator light F: A short in the sunlight
sensor circuit
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
ground.
1><1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
f ~ ~ D
=
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor..
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-63).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
NO - Replace the sunlight sensor .
BACK
DTC indicator light G: An open in the
evaporator temperature sensor circuit
connector.
2 terminals of the evaporator temperature sensor.
RESISTANCE
kQ
40
30
20
10
~
I
I
I
I
i
I
~
i'--
50
10
68
20
TEMPERATURE
~
86 of
30C
on the graph?
YES - Go to step 3.
sensor..
2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor .
(cont'd)
21-45
BACK
Climate Control
the climate control unit 2ap connector and the No.
1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2P CONNECTOR
the climate control unit 2ap connector and at the
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
control unit .
control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor. II
21-46
DTC indicator light H: A short ill the
evaporator temperature sensor circuit
connector.
2. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see step 2
on page 21-45).
on the graph?
YES- Go to step 3.
sensor .
3. Disconnect the climate control unit 2ap connector.
the climate control unit 2ap connector and body
ground.
1'5<1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
~ N
between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor .
BACK
r
OTC indicator light I: An open in the air mix
control motor circuit
of the climate control unit 20P connector and the air
mix control motor 7P connector.
20P: 7P:
No.1
No.7
No.9
No.11
No. 13
No.3
No.2
No.1
No.5
No.7
PNK/BLK
RED/WHT
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YELl GRY
GRN
Q
RED/WHT
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Q Q
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the air
mix control motor 7P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit .
climate control unit and the air mix control
motor .
OTC indicator light J: A short in the air mix
control motor circuit
climate control unit 20P connector terminals No.1,
7,9,11 and 13 individually.
=
=
YES- Repair any short to body ground in the
wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air
mix control motor..
NO - Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
21-47
BACK
Climate Control
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same
YES-Repair any short to power in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the air mix
control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit .
and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
21-48
DTC indicator light K: A problem in the air
mix control linkage, door and motor
1. Test the ai r mix control motor, refer to the '98-02
Is the air mix control motor OK?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Remove the ai r mix control motor, refer to
3. Check the air mix control linkage and door for
smooth movement.
Do the air mix control linkage and door move
smoothly?
YES-Replace the air mix control motor .
NO- Repair the air mix control linkage or door .
BACK
DTC indicator light L: An open or short in the
mode control motor circuit
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
climate control unit 20P connector terminals No.5,
6,11,17,18,19 and 20 individually.
YES-Repair any short to body ground in the wire
(s) between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor .
NO-Go to step 4.
= = = =
/s there any voltage?
between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit .
NO- Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
21-49
BACK
Climate Control
continuity between following terminals of the
climate control unit 20P connector and the mode
control motor 7P connector.
20P: 7P:
No.5 No.1
No.6 No.2
No.11 No.7
No.17 No.3
No. 18 No.4
No.19 No.5
No. 20 No.6
VEL/GRN 1--I----I--+--+-+---1-t--I----I--I
Q Q
MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Q
mode control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit .
climate control unit and the mode control motor..
21-50
OTC indicator light M: A problem in the mode
control linkage, doors and motor
1. Test the mode control motor, refer to the '98-02
Is the mode control motor OK?
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Remove the mode control motor, refer to the '98-02
3. Check the mode control linkage and doors for
smooth movement.
Do the mode control linkage and doors move
smoothly?
YES- Replace the air mix control motor .
NO- Repair the mode control linkage or doors .
BACK
DTC indicator light N: A problem in the
blower motor circuit
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and turn the blower
fan speed knob to HIGH.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Go to step 15.
power transistor 5P connector.
the power transistor 5P connector and body ground.
POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 4.
power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
4. Connect the No.4 and No.5 terminals of the power
transistor 5P connector with a jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE
Does the blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the power
transistor and the blower motor..
(cont'd)
21-51
BACK
Climate Control
the climate control unit 8P connector and the No.3
terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the power transistor .
ground.
4
=
between the climate control unit and the power
transistor .
NO-Go to step 11.
21-52
terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.
YES- Go to step 12.
control unit and the power transistor .
ground.
4
=
between the climate control unit and the power
transistor .
NO-Go to step 13.
BACK
14. Testthe power transistor (see page 21-64).
Is the power transistor OK?
power transistor 5P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit..
NO - Replace the power transistor .
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No. 56
(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No.3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES- Go to step 16.
16. Connect the No.2 terminal ofthe blower motor 2P
connector to body ground with a jumper wire.
JUMPER
WIRE
=
BLU/RED
NO- Go to step 31.
19. Discor.nect the jumper wire.
20. Remove the blower motor high relay, and test it,
22-52).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO- Replace the blower motor high relay .
21. Connect the No.4 terminal ofthe blower motor
high relay 5P connector to body ground with a
jumper wire.
BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELAY
5P CONNECTOR
JUMPER
WIRE
BLU/RED
=
motor high relay and the blower motor..
(cont'd)
21-53
BACK
Climate Control
the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground.
5P CONNECTOR
=
motor high relay and the No.3 fuse in the driver's
the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground.
5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 29.
blower motor high relay and body ground. Ifthe
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401 .
21-54
terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P
connector.
5P CONNECTOR
blower motor high relay 5P connector. If the
control unit .
control unit and the blower motor high relay .
BACK
the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.
=
YES - Replace the blower motor .
NO-Go to step 34.
35. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-02
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 36.
NO - Replace the blower motor relay .
BLOWER MOTOR RELA V 4P SOCKET
BLOWER MOTOR RELA V 4P SOCKET
=
the blower motor relay .
(cont'd)
21-55
BACK
Climate Control
=
YES- Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor relay and the blower motor..
blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is
21-56
ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Does the malfunction indicator lamp come on?
YES-Read the DTC and perform the appropriate
troubleshooting for that code. Refer to the fuel and
emissions section ofthe '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-3) .
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
ground.
2 3 RED/WHT
1---+-'''9"'-1-+--I
4 7 8
=
the climate control unit 8P connector and at the ECT
sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good climate control unit, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
control unit and the ECT sensor..
BACK
Climate Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 54 (40A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A)
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
ground.
BlK/VEl
4
=
YES - Go to step 5.
the climate control unit .
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 13
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the climate control unit .
ground.
the climate control unit 8P connector. If the
connections are good,substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
control unit .
blower motor high relay and body ground. Ifthe
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401 .
21-57
BACK
Climate Control
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
Is the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck .
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
the recirculation control motor 7P connector and
body ground.
7P CONNECTOR
terminals of the climate control unit 20P conector
and body ground individually.
Q
GRN/RED I
I GR:HT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Q
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
=
YES-Go to step 5.
recirculation control motor and the No.3 fuse in the
6. Test the recirculation control motor, refer to
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Goto step 11.
21-58
(s) between the climate control unit and the
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and check the same
wires for voltage.
'Y.
GRN/RED I
I R ~ H T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
'Y.
=
between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor. This short also
damages the climate control unit. Repair the short
to power before replacing the climate control unit.

NO- Go to step 10.
BACK
continuity between the following terminals of the
climate control unit 20P connector and the
reci rculation control motor 7P connector.
20P: 7P:
No.3 No.5
No.4 No.7
7P CONNECTOR
the climate control unit 20P connector and at
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit .
NO-Repair any open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor..
11. Remove the recirculation contol motor, refer to
12. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors
for smooth movement.
Do the recirculation control linkage and doors
move smoothly?
YES - Replace the recirculation control motor .
NO- Repair the recirculation control linkage or
doors .
Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the NC pressure switch 2P connector.
the NC presure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 10.
terminals of the NC pressure switch.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH
- - - ~ Qf----'
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Goto step 11.
(cont'd)
21-59
BACK
Climate Control
AIC Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the AlC pressure switch 2P connector.
ground.
':i.
=
I VEL/GRN
r><I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AlC pressure switch 2P connector. If the
control unit .
control unit and the AlC pressure switch .
21-60
between the No. 27 terminal ofthe PCM connector
connected.
V
2 3 4
12 13 14 15
25 26
5 6
V
8 9
y" 17 18 19 20 21
1/
27 28 29 30
/
fLU IRED
=
10
/
23 24
and the AlC pressure switch .
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM .
11. Check for proper AlC system pressure.
Is the pressure within specifications?
YES- Replace the AlC pressure switch .
NO- Repair the AlC pressure problem .
BACK
Replacement
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the
dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B)
and the air hose (C). Be careful not to damage the
sensor and the dashboard.
B
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
In-car Temperature Sensor Test
Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling
the sensor with a hair drier.
Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with
the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
'----{Ql-----'
12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE
7
1\
\
\
\
(kQ)
6
5
4
3
2
1
"-
"
"'"
"I'-..
........
b-
14 32 50 68 86 104 of
-10 0 10 20 30 40C
TEMPERATURE
21-61
BACK
Climate Control
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the outside air
temperature sensor. Release the lock, and remove
the outside air temperature sensor.
~ n
, .
.... I
21-62
Test
Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance.
Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a
change in resistance.
Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor
with the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
Q
12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE
7
1\
\
\
\
(kQ)
6
5
4
3
2
1
""
'" 1"-
"-
r-.....
.........
r--
14 32 50 68 86 104 OF
-10 0 10 20 30 40C
TEMPERATURE
BACK
Sunlight Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard,
then disconnect the 2P connector. Be careful not to
damage the sensor and the dashboard.
Sunlight Sensor Test
Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage
between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No.1
terminal and the (-) probe on the No.2 terminal with
the 2P connector connected. The voltage will not
change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent
lamp. Voltage should be:
3.6-3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct
sunlight .
3.3-3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.
WHT/RED VEL/GRN
21-63
BACK
Climate Control
Power Transistor Test
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the power
transistor.
4 terminals of the power transistor. If should be
approximately 1.4 -1.5 k Q .
If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 3.
If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
POWER TRANSISTOR
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.3 terminal
(ORN/BLK) (A) in the 5P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
B
o A
4. Connect a 1.2-3.4 W bulb (B) between the No.3
and the No.4 cavity on the 5P connector.
~ Reconnect the 5P connector to the power transistor.
blower motor runs .
If the blower motor does not run, replace the
power transistor.
Ifthe blower motor runs, replace the climate
control unit.
21-64
Climate Control Unit Removal and
Installation
1. Remove the center panel together with the climate
control unit, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
control unit (A) from the center pagnel (B) .
~
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the control unit
controls to see whether it works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnosis function to comfirm that
there are no problems in the system
(see page 21-34).
BACK
Climate Control Unit Disassembly and Reassembly
1. Remove the fan switch (A) and temperature control (8) dials, then remove the front (C), temperature control (D)
and fan switch (E) panels. Remove AlC switch (F), MODE control switch (G), AUTO switch (H), OFF switch (I),
recirculation. control switch (J), front defroster switch (K) and rear defogger switch (L) buttons.
D
E
G
J A
2. Reassemble the control unit in the reverse order of removal.
21-65
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)
PIN 61S8400. Items marked with an asterisk (*) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items will require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-02 models).
Do not bump the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy when the
SRS electrical wiring harnesses are indicated with yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-02 models) and around the floor ('00-02 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
BACK
Body Electrical
Relay and Control Unit Locations ................ 22-2
Connectors and Harnesses ...................... ..... 22-4
Fuse/Relay Boxes .............. .................... ........ 22-23
Power Distribution ........................................ 22-26
Ground Distribution .............. ................ ........ 22-29
Battery ......................... ........................... ........ 22-30
Relays
Power Relay Test ...................................................... 22-31
* Gauges
Gauge Bulb Replacement ........................................ 22-32
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 22-33
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 22-38
* Stereo Sound System
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 22-41
Audio Unit Connector Replacement ....................... 22-42
Radio Remote Switch Test ....................................... 22-42
Homelink Remote Control System
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 22-43
Test ............................................................................. 22-43
Power Seat ('01-02 Sedan)
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 22-45
Motor Test ................................................................. 22-46
Switch Test/Replacement ........................................ 22-47
Seat Heaters-Canada
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 22-49
NOTE: Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN 61S8400, for the items not shown in this section.
1998 model:
The ASS control unit location has been changed; related component locations are included.
A blower motor high relay and a radiator fan control module have been added; related component locations
are included.
The wire harness and ground locations have been changed.
The bulb locations in the gauges have been changed.
The stereo sound system has been changed.
Homelink remote control system has been added; related information is included.
Circuit diagrams which differ from those in the '98 Accord Service Manual have been included.
1999 model:
There are no changes to the 1998 model.
2000 model:
There side airbag system has been added; related information is included.
The engine wire harness has been changed.
Circuit diagrams which differ from theose in the '98-99 Accord Service Manual have been included.
2001 model:
The seat heater relay location has been changed
The ASS/TCS control unit, TCS relay, and TCS indicator have been added.
The wire harness and ground locations have been changed.
The passenger's power seat has been added in the sedan.
Circuit diagrams which differ from those in the '98-01 Accord Service Manual have been included.
2002 model:
There are no changes to the 2001 model.
r--:'I
L:.I
Engine Compartment
SEAT HEATER RELAV (Canada)
t
'98-00 models)
Wire colors: BlK/VEL, BlK,
WHT /BlK and WHT /GRN
TCSRElAV
t
'01-02 models)
Wire colors: GRN/VEl,
BRN/BlK, RED/BLU and BLU
J
)
ABS FAil-SAFE RElAV
(Wire colors: VEl/GRN, BlK,
lBRN/BlK and WHT/GRN
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELA V
(Wire colors: VEL/RED, )
l BRN/BlK, WHT /BlU and WHT
22-2
HORNRELAV
ElD UNIT
CONDENSER FAN RElAV
RADIATOR
FANRELAV
INTERMITTENT
WIPERRELAV
[
Wire colors: GRN/BlK, J
WHT, BlK, GRN/RED,
and BlU/WHT
BACK
Dashboard
SEAT HEATER RELAV (Canada)
('01-02 models)
(Wire colors: BlK/VEl, BlK, J
lWHT/BlK, and WHT/GRN

I..!!:..I
BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELA V
(Wire colors: BlK/VEl, J
lBlU/ORN, BLU/RED and BlK
RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL MODULE
ABS CONTROL UNIT
('98-00 models)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
('01-02 models)
22-3
BACK
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors. The number is preceded by the letter "C" for connectors, "G" for ground
terminals or "T" for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others IFloor, Door, Notes
Trunk and Roof)
Starter cable T1 T2 and (+) (see Dace 22-5)
Battery ground cable T3 (see page 22-5)
G1 and (-)
Engine ground cable T4 (see page 22-5)
G2
Engine wire harness C103 through C108 (see page 22-6)
T101 and T102
G101 and G102
Right engine compartment wire G201 through G20S C201 through C204 Isee page 22-12)
harness
Left engine compartment wire G301 and G302 C103 and C104 (see page 22-14)
harness C301 and C304
Dashboard wire harness B C301, C401 and C402 Isee page 22-16)
(left branch) G401
Dashboard wire harness B C201 through C203 and (see page 22-16)
(right branch) C403
Dashboard wire harness A C204, C302 and C401 CS01 through CSOS and (see page 22-18)
GS01 and GS02 CS82
GS03 and GS04
Left side wire harness CS01 and Refer to the '98-02
CSS1 through CSS7 Accord Service Manual
GSS1 and GSS2 (see page 22-24)
Right side wire harness CS81 through CS86 and (see page 22-20)
C8S1
GS81
Rear wire harness CSS4 and C601 Refer to the '98-02
G601 Accord Service Manual
isee pjlge 22-26)
Moon roof wire harness CS02 Refer to the '98-02
(see page 22-30)
Roof wire harness Refer to the '98-02
(see page 22-30)
Driver's power seat wire harness CSS1 Refer to the '98-02
Isee p_age 22-31)
Passenger's power seat wire C701 (see page 22-22)
harness ('01 Sedan)
Driver's door wire harness C631 and C632 Refer to the '98-02
(see page 22-32)
Passenger's door wire harness Refer to the '98-02
(see page 22-34)
Left rear door wire harness CSS3 Refer to the '98-02
(see paoe 22-36)
Right rear door wire harness CS81 Refer to the '98-02
(see Dace 22-37)
Ignition switch harness C404 Refer to the '98-02
(see Dace 22-38)
SRS main harness CS03 CSS6, CSS7, CS83 and Refer to the '98-02
CS84 Accord Service Manual
G801 (see page 22-38)
SRS floor harness (Sedan) CSOS and C8S1 Refer to the '98-02
(see Dace 22-39)
OPDS wire harness C8S1 Refer to the '98-02
(with side airbags) Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-42)
Rear window defogger wi re Refer to the '98-02
harness Accord Service Manual
(see paoe 22-42)
22-4
BACK
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal . Ref Cavities
T1 1
T2 2
(+1
Battery Ground Cable
T3 6
G1 5
(-I
Engine Ground Cable ('99 mode\)
T4 8
G2 7
Engine Ground Cable ('00-02 models)
T4 4
G2 3
STARTER CABLE
8
Location
Left side of enQine compartment
Battery
Location
Battery
Location
Location
Connects to
Under-hood fuse/relay box
Starter motor
Battery positive terminal
Connects to
Transmission housinQ
Body ground via battery
Qround cables
Batterv neQative terminal
Connects to
Valve cover
Body ground via engine
Qround cable
Connects to
Transmission housinQ
Body ground via engine
ground cable
r:'I
I.!>!.I
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes
~ - - - - J - - - 4
22-5
BACK
Engine Wirre Harness ('98-99 models)
Alternator 42 4 Right side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve A 27 2 Right side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve B 28 2 Right side of engine compartment
Transmission range switch (AfT gear 15 10 Right side of engine compartment
position switch)
CKPsensor 4 2 Right side of engine compartment
Countershaft speed sensor 16 2 Right side of engine compartment
Coolant temperature gauge sending 41 1 Middle of engine compartment
unit
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 39 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
Radiator fan switch B 45 2 Right side of engine compartment
Exhaust gas recircuration (EGR) 40 6 Middle of engine compartment
control solenoid valve
Idle air control (lAC) valve 35 3 Right side of engine compartment
Ignition coil 18 3 Right side of engine compartment
Ignition control module (lCM) 14 3 Right side of engine compartment
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 13 2 Middle of engine compartment
Lock-up control solenoid valve and 32 3 Right side of engine compartment
shift control solenoid valve A
Mainshaft speed sensor 29 2 Right side of engine compartment
MAP sensor 38 3 Right side of engine compartment
No.1 fuel injector 7 2 Middle of engine compartment
Oil pressure switch 2 1 Right side of engine compartment
PCM connector B 19 25 Under middle of dash
PCM connector C 20 31 Under middle of dash
PCM connector D 21 16 Under middle of dash
Primary heated oxygen sensor 11 4 Middle of engine compartment
(Primary H02S)
Radiator fan switch A 25 2 Right side of engine compartment
Second. clutch pressure switch 33 1 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve B 36 2 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve C 34 2 Right side of engine compartment
Starter solenoid 31 1 Right side of engine compartment
TDCsensor 44 4 Right side of engine compartment
Third clutch pressure switch 30 1 Right side of engine compartment
Throttle position (TP) sensor 37 3 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC pressure switch 1 2 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC solenoid valve 5 1 Right side of engine compartment
C103 23 14 Right side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
C105 (Junction connector) 22 20 Right side of engine compartment
C106 (Junction connector) 17 8 Riqht side of enqine compartment
T101 3 Under-hood fuse/relay box
T102 43 Alternator
G101 26 Right side of engine compartment Engine ground via engine
wire harness
22-6
BACK
8 9 10 11
45
44
ENGINE
WIRE HARNESS
43
42
41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
r--:'I

27
28
29
30
31
(cont'd)
22-'1
BACK
Engine Wire Harness ('00-02 models)
Alternator 46 4 Right side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve A 28 2 Right side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve B 29 2 Right side of engine compartment
Transmission range (TR) switch (AfT 15 10 Right side of engine compartment
gear position switch)
CKP sensor 4 2 Right side of engine compartment
Countershaft speed sensor 16 2 Right side of engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 41 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor
Exhaust gas recircuration (EGR) 40 6 Middle of engine compartment
control solenoid valve
Idle air control (lAC) valve 36 3 Right side of engine compartment
Intake air temperature (lAT) sensor 14 2 Middle of engine compartment
Lock-up control solenoid valve and 33 3 Right side of engine compartment
shift control solenoid valve A
Mainshaft speed sensor 30 2 Right side of engine compartment
MAP sensor 39 3 Right side of engine compartment
No.1 ignition coil 8 3 Middle of engine compartment
NO.3 ignition coil 11 3 Middle of engine compartment
Oil pressure switch 2 1 Right side of engine compartment
PCM connector B 19 25 Under middle of dash
PCM connector C 20 31 Under middle of dash
PCM connector D 21 16 Under middle of dash
22-8
BACK
51
50
r--:'I
I.!:..I
28
29

31
45 43 41 37 35 33
(cont'd)
22-9
BACK
Engine Wire Harness ('00-02 models) (cont'd)
Primary H02S 12 4 Middle of engine compartment
Radiator fan switch A 26 2 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan switch B 51 2 Right side of engine compartment
Secondary clutch switch pressure 34 1 Right side of engine compartment
switch
Shift control solenoid valve B 37 2 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve C 35 2 Right side of engine compartment
Starter solenoid 32 1 Right side of engine compartment
TDCsensor 50 4 Right side of engine compartment
Third clutch pressure switch 31 1 Right side of engine compartment
Throttle position (TP) sensor 38 3 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC pressure switch 1 2 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC solenoid valve 5 1 Right side of engine compartment
T101 3 Under-hood fuse/relay box
T102 47 Alternator
G101 27 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via engine wire
harness
G102 6 Middle of engine compartment Body ground via engine wire
harness
22-10
BACK
51
50
49
78 91011
r:-:'I
I..:!:..I
28
29

\'\ 'E11----tt--'-=::::ttt---flf--- 31

34
45 43 41 39 37 35 33
22-11
BACK
h Rial t Enaine ComDartment Wire Harness
ABS control unit connector A
ABS control unit connector B
ABS fail-safe relay
ABS modulator unit
ABS pump motor
ABS pump motor relay
ABS rightfront wheel sensor
ABSrrCS control unit connector A
ABSrrCS control unit connector B
ABSrrCS control unit connector C
ABSrrCS modulator unit
AlC pressure switch
Condenserfan motor
Cruise control actuator
Diode (Lighting)
ELD unit
High beam cut relay
Left horn
Outside air temperature sensor
connector D (see page 22-25)
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch
Radiator fan motor
Right front parking light
Right front side marker light
Right headlight (High beam)
Right headlight (Low beam)
Right horn
Seat heater relay
Secondary heated oxygen sensor
(Secondary H02S)
Security hood switch
Taillight relay
rcs relay
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector
D (see page 22-23)
C (see page 22-23)
B (see page 22-23)
A (see page 22-23)
Washer level switch
Windshild washer motor
C201
C202
C203
C204
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
* 1: '98-00 models
* 2: '01-02 models
22-12
Ref Cavities
1 12
2 22
6 4
22 10
23 2
5 4
20 2
45 26
1 16
2 12
22 23
31 1
25 2
30 2
21 4
40 2
12 3
42 4
26 1
28 2
4 3
3 18
19 2
24 2
33 2
39 3
32 2
34 2
29 1
7 4
18 4
27 2
41 4
7 4
8 16
9 3
10 7
11 18
38 2
37 2
13 16
14 7
15 5
16 22
35
17
36
43
44
Location
Behind condenser fan motor
Inside under-hood fuse/relay box
Behind middle offront bumper
Behind right headlight
Behind right of front bumper
Behind middle of front bumper
Behind right offront bumper
Behind right of front bumper
Under right side of dash
Connects to Notes
*1
*1
* 1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
Canada
Canada
* 1
*2
Canada
(see page 22-16)
(see page 22-16)
(see page 22-16)
(see page 22-1 8)
Body ground Via right engine
BACK
ABS RELA V BOX
44
r--:'I

11/ UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELA V BOX
17

8 9 10
24
25
27
29
36
35
22-13
BACK
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
ABS left front wheel sensor 17 2 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch connector A 6 1 Left side of engine compartment
(+)
Brake fluid level switch connector B 7 1 Left side of engine compartment
(-)
Engine mount control solenoid valve 4 2 Left side of engine compartment
EVAP purge control solenoid valve 3 2 Left side of engine compartment
Intermittent wiper relay 15 6 Left side of engine compartment
Left front parking light 22 2 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 19 3 Behind left of front bumper
Left headlight (High beam) 23 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (Low beam) 21 2 Behind left headlight
Seat heater relay 14 4 Behind left kick panel
*
Test tachometer connector 1 2 Left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 8 5 Left rear of engine compartment
C103 2 14 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see
page 22-6)
C104 16 10 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (see
page 22-6)
C301 9 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-16)
(see page 22-18)
C303 11 1 Above left kick panel Coupe
C304 18 1 Left side of enaine compertment Coupe
,
*: 01-02 models
22-14
BACK
18
23
5
r--:'I

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
14
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
22-15
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left Branch)
Brake switch 5 4 Under left side of dash
Cable reel 13 4 Under left side of dash
Combinaion light switch 12 14 Under left side of dash
Data link connector (DLC) 16 16 Under left side of dash
Daytime running lights control unit 14 14 Under left side of dash
connector a (see page 22-24)
connector P (see page 22-24)
connector Q (see page 22-24)
Ignition switch 11 7 Under left side of dash
Immobilizer control unit 10 5 Under left side of dash
Intermittent dwell time controller 8 2 Under left side of dash
PGM-FI main relay 7 7 Under left side of dash
Windshield wiper/washer switch 9 8 In steering column covers
C301 6 20 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
(see page 22-18)
C402 4 8 Under left side of dash Security system wire harness Canada
(Optiona/)
C402 4 4 Under left side of dash Security system wire harness USA
(Ootiona/)
G401 17 Behind left kick panel Body ground via dashboard
wire harness B
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B lIeft branch)
22-16
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
5
~
16
17
Continues to Right Branch
9
10
11
13
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right Branch)
Air mix control motor 16 7
Blower motor 12 2
Blower motor high relay 11 4
Blower resister 13 5
Climate control unit connector A 3 20
Climate control unit connector B 1 8
Evaporator temperature sensor 4 2
Heater control panel 3 22
Heater fan switch 1 7
Mode control motor 2 7
connector J (see page 22-25)
Power transistor 10 4
Radiator fan control module 17 8
Recirculation control motor 5 7
C201 6 16
C202 15 7
C203 14 5
C403 7 2
Continues to Left Branch
2
Location
r--:'I
~
Connects to Notes
AUTOA/C
MAN.A/C
AUTOA/C
AUTOA/C
MAN.AlC
MAN.A/C
AUTOA/C
(OotionaU
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B (right branch)
~ - - _ - - 8
9
12
22-17
BACK
Dashboard Wire Harness A
Accessory socket 29 2 Behind middle of dash
NT gear position console lighVparking 32 4 Middle of floor between front
pin switch seats
Audio unit 17 20 Behind audio unit
Clock 16 5 Behind middle of dash
Cruise control unit 37 14 Behind left side of dash
Cruise main switch 7 5 Behind instrument panel
* 1
Cruise main {TCS switch 7 8 Behind instrument panel
*2
Driver's seat heater switch 31 6 Behind middle of dash
Gauge assembly connector A 11 14 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector B 10 22 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector C 12 16 Behind gauges
Glove box light 27 2 Behind glove box
Hazard warning switch 14 10 Behind middle of dash
In-car temperature sensor 38 2 Behind left side of dash
Left tweete r 9 2 Behind instrument panel
Moonroof switch 8 6 Behind instrument panel
Multiplex control unit (driver's) 5 22 Behind left kick panel
connector B
Multiplex control unit (passenger's) 23 22 Behind right kick panel
connector B
Parking brake switch 36 1 Middle offloor between front
seats
Passenger's seat heater switch 30 6 Behind middle of dash
connector H (see page 22-25)
PCM connector A 28 32 Behind middle of dash
Right tweeter 20 2 Behind instrument panel
Shift lock solenoid 34 2 Middle offloor between front
seats
Sunlight sensor 15 2 Behind middle of dash
SRS memory erase signal (MES) 4 2 Behind left kick panel *2
SRS unit 33 8 Middle offloor *3
C204 26 22 Behind right side of dash Right engine compartment wire
C302 39 16 Behind left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C401 40 22 Behind left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B (see
page 22-16)
C501 42 18 Behind left kick panel Left side wire hareness, refer to
(see page 22-24)
C502 6 7 Behind instrument panel Moonroof wire harness, refer to
(see page 22-30)
C503 13 3 Under middle of dash SRS main harness, refer to the '98- * 1
02 Accord Service Manual (see
page 22-39)
C503 13 2 Under middle of dash SRS main harness, refer to the '98- '00 Sedan
page 22-39)
C503 13 8 Under middle of dash SRS main harness, refer to the '98- '00 Coupe
page 22-39)
C504 41 2 Behind left kick panel Security system wire harness USA
(Optional)
C505 35 6 Middle offloor SRS floor harness, referto the '98- '00 Sedan
02 Accord Service Manual (see with side
page 22-39) airbags
C582 25 16 Behind right side of dash Right side wire harness (see page '00 Coupe
22-21)
22-18
BACK
C582
G501
G502
G503
G504
.
* 1: 98-00 models
* 2: '01-02 models
* 3: '00-02 Sedan. '01-02 Coupe
Ref Cavities
25 6
18
19
1
24
Behind right side of dash Right side wire harness (see
page 22-20)
Under middle of dash Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
Under middle of dash Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
Behind left kick panel Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
Behind right kick panel Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
r--:'I

Notes
*2
19
24
22-19
BACK
Right Side Wire Harness (Sedan)
Front passenger's side airbag inflator
Right rear door switch
Right rear speaker
Right side seat belt tensioner
C581
C582
C583
C584
C701
C851
G581
* 1: '00 model wIthout seat heater
* 2: '98-99 models
* 3: '00 model with seat heater
* 4: '01-02 models
22-20
Ref
16
2
13
4
3
3
11
7
8
15
17
14
18
1
9
5
6
3
12
10
Cavities Location
2 Under right side of rear seat
1 Right B-pillar
1 Right quarter panel
2 Right B-pillar
1 Middle of rear shelf
10 Right side of floor
4
4
4
Connects to Notes
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
Canada
*4
Right rear door wire harness,
refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-
37)
Dashboard wire harness A, *4
refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-
18)
SRS main harness, refer to *4
the '98-02 Accord Service
SRS main harness, refer to *4
Passenger's seat wire harness *2
(see page 22-22),
OPDS wire harness, refer to *4
Manual (see paae 22-421
wire harness
BACK
Right Side Wire Harness (Coupe)
Passenger's side airbag inflator
Right rear speaker
Right side seat belttensioner
C582
C582
C583
C584
C851
G581
,
* 1: 00-02 model without seat heater
* 2: '98-99 models
* 4: '00 model
* 5: '01-02 models
* 6: '00-02 models
18
Ref
16
13
12
10
10
15
14
5
6
17
9
18
7
7
2
3
4
8
11
1
Cavities Location
2 Under right side of rear seat
1 Right B-pillar
2 Right B-piller
1 Middle of rear shelf
4
4
4
17 16 15 14
Connects to
(see page 22-18)
(see page 22-18)
SRS main harness, refer to
SRS main harness, refer to
OPDS wire harness, refer to
wire harness
r--:'I
I.!:..I
Notes
* 1
*2
*3
*5
Canada
*5
*4
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
22-21
BACK
Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (4-way Adjustable) ('01-02 models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to
Passenger's power seat adjustment 4 6 Right side of passenger's seat
switch connector A
Passenger's power seat adjustment 2 6 Right side of passenger's seat
switch connector B
Passenger's seat belt switch 7 3 Under passenger's seat
Passenger's seat heater 5 4 Under passenger's seat
Recline motor 1 2 Under passenger's seat
Slide motor 6 2 Under passenger's seat
C701 3 10 Right side of passenger's seat Right side wire harness (see
paqe 22-20)
PASSENGER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS
/4-way Adjustable)
7
2
6
3
5
22-22
Notes
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Socket Ref Terminal
A 15 18
AlC compressor clutch relay 3 4
B 14 7
Blower motor relay 11 4
C 13 3
Condenser fan relay 1 4
D 12 16
Diode 9 2
ELD unit 4 3
Horn relay 10 4
Radiator fan relay 2 4
T1 6
T101 5
1 2 3
('"
,.
4
11
5
6
[eJ
O
n
[eJ ~
[JO
n n n
464748
LJ LJ LJ
9
0
n n n
43 44 45
8
LJ LJ LJ
7
Connects to
r--:'I
I.!!!.I
Not used
Battery positive cable (see paae 22-5)
Enaine wire harness (see oaoe 22-6)
0
12
~
13
{]
14
0
15
22-23
BACK
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Socket Ref
A 11
B 3
C 10
D 7
Diode 1
Diode 2
E 4
F 9
G 8
H 5
I 13
J 12
K 14
L 23
M 15
Multiplex control unit 6
connector A
N 22
0 21
p
16
Q 17
R 26
Reverse relay 19
S 27
Starter cut relay 18
T 24
Turn signal/hazard relay 20
U 25
22-24
Terminal
10
14
5
20
6
18
6
18
2
18
6
24
2
20
7
22
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
Connects to
Left side wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
Left side wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)
Not used
Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)
Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service
No used
Dashboard wi re harness A (see page 22-18)
Service check connector
Not used
Ignition switch harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-38)
SRS wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual (see
page 22-39)
Optional connector
Optional connector
Optional connector
o tional connector
23
21
........ __ ~ -1-ft----17
2o--t-Door- 18
~ 9
~
I
BACK
Socket Ref
A 10
Accessory relay 15
B 4
C 9
0 5
Diode 1
Diode 2
Diode 3
E 8
F 7
G 6
H 18
I 12
J 17
K 13
Multiplex control unit connector 11
A
Power window relay 14
Rear window defogger relay 16
9
8
7
Terminal
20
4
4
18
3
--
--
--
2
20
3
18
18
16
16
24
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
r--:'I
l=!..I
Connects to
Roof wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-30)
Not used
Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-34)
Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-02 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-34)
11
18
12
13
16 15
14 .
22-25
BACK
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index
Fuse Amps Wire color
Number
41 100A --
42 50A WHT
43 20A RED/GRN
44 -- --
45 20A RED/YEL
46 15A WHT/GRN
47 20A WHT/YEL
Fuse/relay
box socket
48 20A WHT/GRN
49 15A WHT/GRN
50 30A WHT
51 40A WHT/BLU
52 20A BLU
53 40A WHT/GRN
54 40A YEL
55 40A YEL/GRN
56 40A YEL/BLK
57 20A BLU/BLK
58 20A BLU/YEL
WHT
RED
59 20A WHT/GRN
11
1
9
8
7
22-26
Battery, Power distribution
Ignition switch (BAT)
Right headlight, Daytime running Ii!::jhts control unit (Canada)
Not used
Left headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Hight beam indicator, Hight beam cut relay (Canada)
PGM-FI main relay, Data link connector (DLC)
Ignition key light and key interlock solenoid, ABS control unit (BLS)
Cruise control unit, PCM, Horn relay
High mount brake light, Brake failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
ABS-TCS control unit
Turn signal/hazard relay
No. 14 fuse under-dash fuse/relay box)
No.1 fuse (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box), Power window relay
TCS fail-safe relay
Rear window defogger relay
No.9, 10, 11, 12 and 13 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/rela,{box)
No.2, 4, 5 and 6 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
Blower motor
Radiator fan motor
Condenser fan motor
Fan control module (Radiator fan control module)
Driver's and front passenger's seat heaters (Canada)
1""11""11""1
46 47 48
L.I L.I L.I
1""11""11""1
43 44 45
L.I L.I L.I
4
5
6
BACK
Fuse Number Amps
1 15A
2 10A
3 7.5A
4 7.5A
5 7.5A
6 15A
7 7.5A
8 7.5A
9 7.5A
10 7.5A
11 15A
12 30A
13 7.5A
Wire Color
RED/WHT
RED/BLU (or GRN)
BLK/WHT (or GRN)
BLK/YEL
YEL/BLK
YEL/RED
BLK/YEL
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
YEL
11
10
9
8
YEL/RED
BLK/YEL
GRN/BLK
BLU/ORN

t=:.I
PGM-FI main relay
SRS unit (VA)
SRS unit (VB)
Blower motor high relay, Climate control unit, Heater
control panel, Fan control module (Radiator fan control
module), Recirculation control motor, Rear window
defogger relay, Seat heater relay (Canada)
ABS control unit, Power mirror actuators, Power mirror
defoggers (Canada), ABS/TCS control unit ('01-02
models)
Optional connector
Alternator, Cruise control unit, Cruise control main
switch indicator, ELD unit, Engine mount control
solenoid valve, Evaporative emission bypass solenoid
valve, Evaporative emission purge control solenoid
valve, Gauge assembly, PCM, Primary and Secondary
heated oxygen sensors, Vent shut solenoid valve, TCS
switch ('01-02 models)
Multiplex control unit (driver's) (All '98-99 models
and '00 Sedan), Windshield washer motor (All '98-99
models and '00-02 Sedan), OPDS unit (with side
airbags)
Accessory socket relay
Optional connector
Back-up lights, Brake failure sensor, Clock, DRL
indicator light (Canada), Gauge assembly, Multiplex
control unit (passenger's), Security system (USA except
EX), Shift lock solenoid, Trailer lighting connector
Turn signal/hazard relay
Ignition coils
Windshield wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper
motor, Windshield washer motor ('00-02 Coupe),
Multiplex control unit (driver's) ('00-02 Coupe)
PCM, PGM-FI main relay
(cont'd)
22-27
BACK
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Fuse NllImber Amps Wire Color
1 30A GRN
2 20A RED
3 20A RED
4 20A BLU
5 20A WHT/RED
6 10A RED/BLU
7 20A WHTNEL
8 20A BLU/BLK
9 20A WHT/GRN
WHT/RED
10 10A RED/GRN
(Sedan)
15A
(Coupe)
11 7.5A WHT/BLU
12 20A Fuse/relay box socket
13 7.5A WHTNEL
14 7.5A GRN
15 20A GRN/WHT
16 20A WHT/BLK
9
8
22-28
Moonroof motor
Power seat rear up-down motor, Recline motor
Passenger's power seat Slide motor ('01-02 Sedan)
Power seat front up-down motor, Slide motor
Passenger's power seat, Recline motor ('01-02 Sedan)
Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Left rear
power window motor (Sedan),
Qower window motor
Audio unit
Audio unit, Accessory socket
Heater control panel, AfT gear position console light,
Driver's seat heater switch light (Canada), Audio unit,
Gauge lights, Cruise main switch light, Moonroof
switch light, Clock, Hazard warning switch light,
Glove box light, Vanity mirror lights, Front parking
lights, Front side marker lights, Rear side marker
lights, License plate light(s), Taillights, Trailer lighting
connector, Climate control unit
Courtesy lights, Trunk lillht, Ceilinlllillht, Spotlillhts
PCM, Heater control panel, Security indicator,
Multiplex control unit (door), Gauge assembly, Clock,
Climate control unit
ABS control unit ('98-00 models), ABS-TCS control
unit ('01-02 models)
Multiplex control unit (door)
Right rear power window motor (Sedan)
2
3

L-JIn---
5
6
BACK
Ground Distribution
r:-:'I

Ground to Components Index
NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.
Ground Component or circuit grounded
G1 Battery, Transmission housinR
G2 Engine block
G101 PCM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), Idle air control solenoid valve, Radiator
and fan switch, PGM-FI main relay, EGR control solenoid valve, Shift control solenoid valve assembly,
G102 AfT switch, Radiator fan switch A and B, Ignition coils ('00 model)
('00-01 Shielding between the PCM and these components (all have braided wires): CKP sensor, TDC
models) sensor, Primary and secondary heated oxygen sensors, Mainshaft speed senser, Countershaft
speed sensor, VTEC pressure switch, Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer control unit
G201 Condenser fan motor, Radiator fan motor, Right headlight (low beam), Right front parking light,
Right front side marker light, Right front turn signal light, Hood switch (security), Windshield
washer motor
G202 Seat heater relay ('98-00 modelsHCanada), Blower motor relay, ELD unit, ABS fail-safe relay,
Power steering pressure switch, Cruise control actuator
G203 ABS pump motor, ABS/TCS modulator unit ('01-02 models)
G204 ABS control unit (2 wires), ABS/TCS control unit ('01-02 models)
G205 ABS control unit (2 wires), ABS/TCS control unit (2 wires) ('01-02 models)
G301 Left headlight (low beam), Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal
light, Washer level sensor (Canada)
G302 Brake fluid level switch, Windshield wiper motor, Intermittent wiper relay, Seat heater relay
('01-02 modelsHCanada)
G401 Multiplex control unit (driver's), Turn signal/hazard relay, Power window master switch, Driver's
door key cylinder switch, Driver'S door lock switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Ignition key
switch, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), Data link connector (DLC), Combination light
switch, Heater control panel (2 wires), Fan control module (Radiator fan control module), Blower
motor high relay, Power transistor, Climate control unit, Windshield wiper/washer switch
G501 Moonroof switch, Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Driver's seat heater switch (Canada),
Front passenger's seat heater switch (Canada), Glove box light, Transmission range switch (AfT
gear position switch), Clock, Audio unit, Accessory socket, Gauge assembly, Cruise control unit,
Cruise control main switch, OPDS unit ('00 Sedan with side airbags), Fuel gauge sending unit
('00-02 Coupe), Front passenger's seat belt switch ('00 model), Memory erase signal (MES)
connector ('01-02 models), Cruise control main/TCS switch ('01-02 models)
G502 Audio unit
G503 Multiplex control unit (driver's)
G504 Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
G551 Power mirror switch, Left power mirror defogger (Canada), Driver'S power window motor, Power
window master switch (2 wires), High mount brake light, Driver's seat belt switch, Left rear door
lock knob switch, Driver's power seat switch (2 wires), Driver'S seat heater (Canada)
G552 Fuel pump (FP), Fuel gauge sending unit (All '98-99 models, '00 Sedan, and '01-02 models)
G581 Homelink unit, Multiplex control unit (passenger's), Power window relay, Accessory relay, Vanity
mirror lights, Spotlights, Passenger's door key cylinder switch, Passenger's door lock switch,
Passenger's door lock knob switch, Front passenger's seat heater (Canada), Right power mirror
defogger (Canada), Right rear door lock knob switch, OPDS unit (Coupe with side airbags, '01-02
Sedan with side airbags) Front passenger's seat belt switch ('01-02 models), Front passenger's
power seat switch (2 wires) ('01-02 models)
G601 Taillights (right, left), License plate light, Trunk latch switch, Trunk key cylinder switch (security),
Trunk actuator (security), Brake light failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
G801 SRS unit (2 wires), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('00 model)
22-29
BACK
Battery
Battery Test
I AWARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and follow the
manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized tester, follow this conventional test
procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is
between 70F (21C) and 100F (38C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
If the case is damaged, replace the battery .
If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to
step 4.
If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the
surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps
for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK .
If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE
shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30
minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be
necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged within
3 hours, the battery is OK .
Ifthe EYE indicates the battery is not charged
within 3 hours, replace the battery .
22-30
BACK
Relays
Power Relay Test
Identify the relay, then do the test listed for it.
NOTE: Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual for
the relay input test except that it is mentioned in this
manual (see page 22-52)
I e l a ~
I Test
Normally-open type A
Normally-open type A:
Check for continuity between the terminals.
r:-:'I
l.!!:..I
There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.
2 terminals when power and ground are connected to
the No.3 and No.4 terminals.
- TCS relay ('01-02 models)
2 3
H
4
22-31
BACK
Gauges
Gauge Bulb Replacement
Bulb Location
ABS INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.26 W) HIGH BEAM
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR
INDICATOR LIGHT (1.26 W) LIGHT (1.26 W)
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT (1.26 W)
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.26 W)
(Canada)
SIDE AIR BAG INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.26W)
CRUISE INDICATOR
LlGHT(1.26 W)
DRL INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.26 W)
(Canada)
('00-01 models)
GAUGE LIGHT
(3.78W)
GAUGE LIGHT
(3.78W)
22-32
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
LIGHT (3.78 W)
LCD BACK
LIGHT (1.26 W)
GAUGE LIGHT
(3.78W)
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26W)
o
TCS INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.26 W)
('01 model!
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
INIDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26W)
GAUGE LIGHTS
(3.78W)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26W)
BACK
Circuit Diagram
r--:'I
t=!..I
()-
No.41 (100A) No.42 (SOA) BAT -'-__
BATIERY
+ BlK .... -a"""",o---I--WHT---foi- "T BlKlYEl --------.
No.54 (40A) IGl
. ""j
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
I I
. y ...
i
(Canada)
HIGH
BEAM
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
Blu/RED
A12

4
11
BlK
1
G401
COMBINATION
LIGHT
SWITCH
V
, COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(USA)
'DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS CONTROL
UNIT (Canada)
NO.13
(7.SA)
WHTNEl
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
NO.6
(lSA)
BlKlYEl VEL
No.9
(7.SA)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
YEL --t::> I

(Canada)
WHTNEl
B20
SAFETY
INDICATOR
CIRCUIT
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR

(1.26W)
I":'
B9 GAUGE ASSEMBLY : A4
BRAKE
DRl
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
Flher Circun :
B19
PNK
V
PCM
B8
WHT/BlU
V
ALTERNATOR
(Driver's) (USA)
ASS CONTROL UNIT

G?RNIRED BRAKE
FLUID
lEVEL
SWITCH
(
ON : Floal down )
OFF: Floal up
BlK
1
G302
C14
GRNlRED
(lED)
(USA)
AS

V
J
UNIT
(Canada)
I --I
'''''NO 1 ,
GRN/RED I
DAYTIME
RUNNING

CONTROL UNIT
BRAKE "
SWITCH ' .;LI\.
(
ON : lever up ) '\r-V
OFF: lever down
.

GRNlWHT

PARKING
BRAKE

(cont'd)
22-33
BACK
Gauges
B21
22-34
B11
C11
YEUBLU
2

FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
1
BLK
1
G552
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
MICRO CONTROLLER and SUB SYSTEM CIRCUIT
C2 B2 B3
(SCS)
YEUGRN BLUIWHT

PCM
FUEL
ENGINE

COOLANT
GAUGE
TEMPERATURE
SENDING

UNIT
EN INGUNIT
PCM
('0002 models)
('98-99 models)
PCM
I
BLU
TEST
TACHOMETER
BLU CONNECTOR
B1
B13 B14
(RXD) (TXD)

BACK

\
r
MICRO CONTROlLER and SUB SYSTEM CIRCUIT
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR DIMMING CIRCUIT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
wAsHER!
lEVEL I
INDICATOR I
LIGHT (1.26W)
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
or TAilLIGHT
RELAY
I
REDlBlK
B12
PNK
B16
BlK
Bl0
I
WASHER
LEVEL
SENSOR
I_
I
G301 __ ---.J G501
(Canada)
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
r--:'I

(cont'd)
22-35
BACK
Gauges
SRS UNIT
I
BLU
C9
22-36
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
ABSCONTROL
UNIT
ABS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
TURN SIGNAUHAZARD
RELAY
LEFT RIGHT
1 1
GRN/BLU GRNIYEL
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
SIGNAL SIGNAL
LIGHTS LIGHTS
GRNtBLU GRNlYEL
TCS
INDICATOR I
LIGHT I
(1.26W)
A14
LEFT
TURN
SIGNAL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
C8
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(3.78W)
B18
: ~
C1
LTGRNlRED
: ABsrrcs
r
ONTROL
UNIT
---
(,01-02 models)
LOW FUEL
FUEL GAUGE
SENSOR SENDING
UNIT
BLK
1
G552
BACK
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
y
REDIBLU
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
l
--I
!
,
,

(
D (

'(
D

MALFUNCTION

SIDE AlRBAG
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
,

LIGHT LIGHT
,
(I. (1.26W)
,
(1.26W)
REMINDER ENGINE OIL
,
LIGHT PRESSURE
(LED) INDICATOR
LIGHT
(LED) ,
,
C3 B6 A6 B7
,
B17 ,
REDIBLU GRNIORN BLUIBLK YEURED
MULTIPLEX
GRN
PCM
REDIBLU
I
G551
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
(
ON : Unbuckled )
OFF: Buckled
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
CONTROL
,
UNIT (DrIver's) ,
\l :L2
I UNIT
YEURED - - ___
('00-02 models)
YELJRED
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(
ON : !;nglne stopped )
OFF: engine runrung

l!!!:I
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Orivefs)
I
REDIWHT
B4

.!O-
85
WHT/RED
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
22-37
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
0-BLK
No.41 (IOOA)
No.41 (20A)
No.42 (50A)
IGNITION SWITCH

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.9 (I.SA)
'-r\ WHT
--@--
BLKNEL --........ rJ"'...D-+---.... ,---- YEL -
22-38
ILiNG --l
HT
.
.
HT
I BLKlWHT
AIO

I

I

I
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL J
UNIT
:
(
WithOUI keyless )
enlry syslem
IGI
SAFETY INDICATOR (In Ihe gauge assembly)

DOOR PASSENGER'S REAR REAR
INDICATOR DOOR DOOR DOOR
LIGHT INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
(LED) LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
(LED) (LED) (LED)
,.

...
...
..
..
A2 Al AI A8
GRN/ORN GRN GRNNEL GRNIWHT
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT

OURT SY
LIGHT
Y
GRN/ORN
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT

OURT SY
LIGHT
Y
GRN
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT

OURT SY
LIGHT
Y
GRNNEL
,RONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT

OURT SY
LIGHT
Y
GRNNEL
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Sedan)
TRUNK
LIGHT
Y
ORN
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
(Sedan)

INDICATOR
LIGHT
(LED)
A9
ORN
TRUNK
LATCH
SWITCH
BLK
1
G601

"
YEL
I BII
I
MICRO
CONTROLLER
and SUB SYSTEM
CIRCUIT

INDICATOR
LIGHT
(LED)
..

::
All
...
::
::
B8
WHTIBLU

ALTERNATOR
BACK
WHT/GRN
4[2]
r
I
VEL
5[6]
-
BRAKE FAILURE SENSOR
~
3[5]
BlK
.....
2 [3]
I
GRN
h GRN
BlK
BlK
1
G601
lEFT
BRAKE
LIGHT
1
21 W)
27Wx2]
BLK
I
:r-,
TSWITCH
WHTIBLK
[ ]: Coupe
1 ~ ~
~
MULTIPLEX CONTROl.
UNIT (Drivers)
WHTlBlK PCM
: CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
ASS CONTROL UNIT
RIGHT
BRAKE
LIGHT
(21W)
(27Wx2)
TRAilER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
WHT/BLK
BLK
G551
HIGHMOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
(21W)
22-39
BACK
Stereo Sound System
REAR SPEAKERS
22-40
TWEETERS
PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER
AUDIO UNIT
Connector Replacement, page 22-42
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
RADIO REMOTE SWITCH
Test, page 22-42
WINDOW ANTENNA
Test, page 22-126
Repair, page 22-126
BACK
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY
@-BlK
No.41 (100A)
"V
No.42 (SOA)
No.54 (40A)
1......0--\ n.
DRIVER'S
UNDERDASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
Q
AT
WHT WHT/BlK
ACC
YEL/BlK
VEL
NO.9
(20A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDERDASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

ACCESSORY
GRN/RED
WINDOW
ANTENNA
-1-
m
ANTENNA lEAD
e o e
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
I
REDlBlK
o e
18
WHT/RED

WHT/GRN WHT/RED
ACCESSORY SOCKET
10
AUDIO UNIT
e
8 17 7
GRYIWHT BRNiWHT GRYlBlK BRNlBlK
RED/GRN BlUIYEl REDIYEl BlU/GRN
GRY/BlK I J BRNLlK
SOCKET
RELAY
BlK
1
GS81
RED
lEFT REAR RIGHT REAR DRIVER'S gLU/GRN gED/GRN MULTIPLEX
SPEAKER SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
RADIO REMOTE SWITCH
lEFT RIGHT
TWEETER TWEETER
I
SEEK
I (AUDIO/CH)
BlK

CONTROL UNIT
(Passenger's)
I
BlU
4
('98-<10 models)
14
BlK
I
I I
GS02 I i
(With securrty alarm system)
22-41
BACK
Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit Connector Replacement
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the
wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
Cavities 1, 11, 12, and 13 are not used.
Cavity Wire Connect to
2 WHT/RED ACC (Main stereo power
supply)
3 GEN/RED Radio remote switch
4 BLU Security IN
5 RED/YEL Right rear speaker (+)
6 BLU/YEL Left rear speaker (+)
7 RED/GRN Front passenger's speaker
(+)
Right tweeter (+)
8 BLU/GRN Driver's door speaker (+)
Left tweeter (+)
9 RED/BLK Liahts-on sianal
10 WHT/GRN Constant power
14* BLK Security OUT
15 BRN/WHT Right rear speaker (-)
16 GRY/WHT Left rear speaker (- )
17 BRN/BLK Front passenger's door
speaker (-)
RiQht tweeter (-)
18 GRY/BLK Driver's door speaker (-)
Left tweeter (- )
19 RED Dash lights brightness
controller
20 BLK Ground (G502)
* : '98-00 models
22-42
Radio Remote Switch Test
1. Remove the radio remote switch (A) from the
steering wheel by removing the two screws, and
disconnect the 2P connector (B).
A
B
2. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.2
terminals in each switch position according to the
table.
Position Resistance
OFF AJ!QI"ox. 3.6 k Q
AUDIO/CH Approx. 780 Q
(SEEK)
.& Approx. 360 Q
(VOL. UP)
,.
Approx. 100 Q
(VOL. DOWN)
radio remote switch.
BACK

I.!!!!:..I
Circuit Diagram
BATIERY

SlK
VEL
No.4!
(100.)
NO.54
(4OA)
WHTJBLU
J
Gsal
UNDERHOOD
FUSE/RElAY
sox
PASSENGER"S
UNDERCASH
FUSEIRELAY
BOX
SPOTLIGHTS
Test
Turn on the spotlight.
If the spotlight comes on, the Homelink's power and
ground circuits are OK. If the Homelink will not open
the customer's garage door, check that the Homelink
is programmed properly (see the owner's manual) or
call Homelink at 800-355-3515. On the Internet, go to
www.homelink.jci.com
If the spotlight does not come on, check for these
problems:
- A blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
- An open in the WHT/BLU wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and
spotlight.
- An open in the BLK wire between the spotlight and
G581.
22-43
BACK
Power Seat
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adiustable):
NOTE: Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN 61S8400, for the driver's power seat.
22-44
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Test/Replacement,
page 22-47
RECLINE MOTOR
Test, page 22-46
SLIDE MOTOR
Test, page 22-46
BACK
BATTERY
~ No.41 (l00Al
&-BlK -fo-..... a--..J>---o""-'>-+---,
No.55 (40Al
YEUGRN
No.3
(20Al
~ No.5
(20Al
PASSENGER'S
UNDER DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
RED WHT/RED
B4
BLK
G581
1 0
FOR.' I
WARD
A4
BLU
~
WARD
A2
BlUtYEL
SLIDE
MOTOR
2
B3 BI POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
-,)
WARD
B5
YEl
2
FOR \ I
WARD
B6
YEUGRN
RECLINE
MOTOR
B2
BlK
GS81
~
I..!!:.I
22-45
BACK
Power Seat
Motor Test
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):
1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-2).
passenger's seat by removing the 2 screws (B).
B
3. Disconnect the 6P connectors (A) from the
adjustment switch (B).
B
22-46

Wire side of
female terminals
A
Wire side of
female terminals
4. Test the motor. When the motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
Recline motor:
1\ Terminal
B5 B6
Position
\
Forward e
<>
Backward
<>
e
Slide motor:
1\ Terminal
A2 A4
Position
\
Forward e
<>
Backward
<>
e
between the 6P connector and the 2P connectors. If
the harness is OK, replace the motor (see page 20-
2).
BACK
r
Switch Test/Replacement
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):
passenger's seat by removing the 2 screws (8), and
pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C).
B
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) from the
adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch from
the cover by removing its 2 mounting screws.
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.

f\
Terminal
\
A2 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
Position
FOR
'-'
SLIDE
WARD
,....

SWITCH
BACK
;)
WARD
0

FOR v
RECLINE
WARD

SWITCH
BACK 0 -0
WARD
61
I==!
62
63
64
1
65
66
switch.
B6
'-'
.....
22-47
BACK
D
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
in the '98-02 Accord Service Manual.
22-48
SEAT HEATER RELAY
('98-00 models)
Test, page 22-52
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-201
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test, page 22-201
DRIVER'S SEAT-BACK HEATER
Test,page 22-201
DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-201
SEAT HEATER RELAY
(,01-02 models)
Test, page 22-52
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSEIRELA Y BOX
BATTERY
()-BlK
No.4l (100A) No.42 (SOA)
I
TH : THERMOSTAT
BR:BREAKER
HI :High
lO : low
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
(OX, LX)
tAilLIGHT
RELAY (EX)
"(
RED/BlK
2
Below 93F (34C)
[
ON. )
[
ON : Below B6F (30C) )
,....--- WHTlBlK
No.S9 (20A)
"V
DRIVER'S SEAT FRONT PASSENGER'S
6 HEATER SWITCH SEAT HEATER SWITCH

I
,
I
,
HI LOd HI lO HI
liGHT
(O.S6W)
S 4 3
RED WHTlBlU BlK GRN/BlU BlK
V
MULTIPLEX
WHT/RED
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's) 2 2 3
CUSHION BACK CUSHION
DRIVER'S SEAT 3 FRONT PASSENGER'S
HEATER SEAT HEATER
BlK BlK BlK
1 1 1
GSSI GSOI GS81

WHT
IGNITION SWITCH

---,
RED/GRN
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No.3
(7.SA)
BlKlYEl
SEAT HEATER RELAY

WHTlBlK
6
I
,
GRN/RED
BACK
I
LOd
INDICATORS
(O.56Wx2)
--=;l
(Wrthout side airbag)
COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH (OX, LX)
TAIlLiGHi RELAY (EX)
"(
REDlBlK
,
HI
LIGHT
(O.S6W)
4
RED
V
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
BlK
1
G2021'98-00 modelsl
0002 '01-02 models
22-49
BACK
BACK
Restraints
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
SRS Unit Identification ................................................. 23-2
NOTE: Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN 6158400, for
the items not shown in this section.
SRS
SRS Unit Identification
'98 Model
MAKER IDENTIFICATION MARK
KEIHIN M2
I
23-2
BACK
'98 Model
KEIHIN (M2) SRS unit
1-1 Open in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)*'
1-2 Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-74)*'
1-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's (see page 23-76)*'
airbag inflator
1-4 Short to power in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-78)*'
1-5 Short to ground in driver's airbag inflator (see page 23-80)*'
2-1 Open in passenger's i r b ~ inflator (see page 23-82)*'
2-2 Increased resistance in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-82)*'
2-3 Short to another wire or decreased resistance in (see page 23-83)*'
2-4 Short to power in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-85)*'
2-5 Short to ground in passenger's airbag inflator (see page 23-86)*'
5-1 Internal failure of SRS unit (see page 23-88)*'
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
9-1 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could (see page 23-88)*'
mean internal failure ofthe unit or a faulty indicator
Failures (see page 23-45)*'
9-2 Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could
page 23-45)*'
10-1 SRS airbag dej)loyed (SRS unit must be replaced) (see page 23-88)*'
* 1: Refer to the '98-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN 61S8400.
23-3
BACK
SRS
'98 Model
SRS indicator light doesn't come on. SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
refer to '98-02 Accord Service
Manual, PIN 61S8400 (see page 23-
242).
The SRS indicator light stays on SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting, Inability to retrieve DTCs with the
when in "SCS" menu method. refer to '98-02 Accord Service PGM Tester. Retrieve the flash
Manual, PIN 61S8400 (see page 23- codes with the SCS mode, refer to
242). '98-02 Accord Service Manual, PIN
61S8400 (see paQe 23-42).
23-4
BACK
NOTE: Refer to the following list to look up
DTCs, symptoms, fuses, connectors, wire
harnesses, specifications, maintenance
schedules, and general service
information:
DTC Troubleshooting Indexes
ABS/TCS Components .......................... 19-9
Automatic Climate Control ................. 21-29
AutomaticTransaxle ............................. 14-7
SRS .......................................................... 23-3
Symptom Troubleshooting Indexes
NC ........................................................... 21-7
ABS/TCS Components .................. 19-10,31
Automatic Climate Control ................. 21-30
Automatic Transaxle ............................. 14-8
Cruise Control System .......................... 4-43
Fan Controls ......................................... 10-15
SRS .......................................................... 23-4
Steering ................................................... 17-4
FuselRelay Indexes
NC Compressor Clutch Relay ............ 22-23
NC Condenser Fan Relay ................... 22-23
Blower Motor Relay ............................. 22-23
ELD (Electrical Load Detector) ............ 22-23
Headlight Relay .................................... 22-23
Horn Relay ............................................ 22-23
Power Distribution ............................... 22-26
Radiator Fan Relay ............................... 22-23
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Driver's .... 22-
24
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box, Passenger's ..
22-25
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box ............... 22-23
Connector and Wire Harness Indexes
Component Connectors (to hamess) ... 22-5
Grounds (to components) ................... 22-29
In-line Connectors (to hamess) ............. 22-4
Specifications section .................. Section 2
Maintenance section .................... Section 3
General Information section ........ Section 1
A
AlC
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 21-8
Test ......................................................... 21-15
AIC Compressor
Replacement ................................... 21-18, 23
AIC Compressor Clutch
Inspection ....................................... 21-20, 25
Overhaul ......................................... 21-21, 26
AIC Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement ................................... 21-22, 27
AIC Condenser
Replacement ......................................... 21-28
AIC Condenser Fan Assembly
Test .......................................................... 10-8
Replacement ......................................... 10-13
AIC Condenser Fan Circuit
AIT Assembly
Removal .............................................. 14-114
Installation .......................................... 14-121
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valves
Test ...................................................... 14-108
Replacement ....................................... 14-109
AfT Countershaft Assembly
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly .... 14-
172
Installation .......................................... 14-192
AIT Countershaft 1st Gear
Replacement ....................................... 14-173
AIT Countershaft 3rd Gear
Replacement ....................................... 14-173
AIT Differential
Replacement ....................................... 14-144
AfT Gear Position Indicator System
Circuit Diagram .................................. 14-139
Test ...................................................... 14-143
AIT Hydraulic Controls
Test ...................................................... 14-104
AIT Mainshaft Assembly
Disassembly/lnspection/Reassembly .... 14-
169
Installation .......................................... 14-192
AlT Secondary Shaft Assembly
176
Inspection ........................................... 14-177
Installation .......................................... 14-192
AfT Shift Cable
Replacement ....................................... 14-133
Adjustment ......................................... 14-136
AIT Shift Lever
Removal .............................................. 14-129
Installation .......................................... 14-130
Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 14-132
ABS Control Unit
Replacement ......................................... 19-22
ABS Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting ............................. 19-18,76
ABS Modulator Unit
Removal/lnstallation ............................ 19-21
ABSfTCS Components
Circuit Diagram .............................. 19-12,46
Description ........................................... 19-32
ABSTCS Control Unit
Replacement ......................................... 1982
ABSTCS Modulator Unit
Accumulator Body
166
Air Cleaner Element
Replacement ......................................... 1197
Alternator
Component Location Index ................... 425
Replacement ........................................... 4-31
Overhaul ................................................. 435
Alternatorcompressor Belt
NC Compressor ................................. 4-25
Charging System ................................ 4-25
Inspection/Replacement
Charging System ................................ 4-31
Alternatorcompressor Belt Auto
tensioner
ATF
Inspection ........................................... 14-112
Replacement ....................................... 14-113
ATFCooier
Repair .................................................. 14-127
ATF Cooler Lines and Hoses
Component Location Index ................... 102
Replacement ....................................... 14-128
ATFPump
Inspection ........................................... 14-163
Audio Unit
Replacement ......................................... 22-42
AudiolEntertainment
Circuit Diagram .................................... 2241
Automatic Climate Control
Description ........................................... 21-31
Circuit Diagram .................................... 21-32
Automatic Transaxle
Description ........................................... 14-18
Test ...................................................... 14-101
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
B
Battery
Charging System ................................ 4-25
Test
Wiring System .................................. 22-30
Blower Power Transistor
Test ........................................................ 21-58
Brake Calipers
Overhaul ................................................. 19-4
Brake Pads
Test .......................................................... 4-50
Bumper Spoiler. Rear
Replacement ........................................... 20-6
c
Camshaft
I nspection ............................................... 6-40
Installation .............................................. 6-50
Charging System
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-26
Charging System Indicator
CKP (Crankshaft Position) Sensor
Replacement ........................................... 6-56
Climate Control Power and Ground
Circuits
Climate Control Unit
Connecting Rod Bearing Caps
Connecting Rod Bearings
Replacement ........................................... 7-10
Connecting Rod Bolts
Inspection ............................................... 7-21
Connecting Rods
Inspection ................................................. 7-7
Connectors
Coolant
Replacement ......................................... 10-10
Coolant Reservoir
Test .......................................................... 10-5
Coolant Temperature Gauge Sending Unit
Components ........................................... 10-2
Cooling System .................................. 10-2
Test
Components ........................................... 10-7
Cooling System .................................. 10-7
Cooling System
Replacement ....................................... 14-175
Countershaft Bearing. AfT Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-156
Countershaft Bearing. Torque Converter
Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-168
Countershaft Idler Gear
Installation .......................................... 14-195
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub
Replacement ....................................... 14-173
Countershaft Speed Sensor
Replacement ....................................... 14-1 10
Crankshaft
Inspection ........................................... 7-7.14
Removal .................................................. 7-12
Installation .............................................. 7-24
Crankshaft Main Bearings
Replacement ............................................. 7-8
Crankshaft Oil Seal. Pulley End
Installation .............................................. 7-29
Crankshaft Oil Seal. Transmission End
Installation .............................................. 7-29
Crankshaft Pulley
Removal/Installation .............................. 6-17
Crankshaft Thrust Washers
Cruise Control Actuator
Test .......................................................... 4-51
Replacement ........................................... 4-52
Cruise Control Actuator Cable
Adjustment ............................................. 4-54
Cruise Control Actuator Solenoid
Test .......................................................... 4-50
Cruise Control Main Switch
Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel Switch
Cruise Control System
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-42
Cruise Control Unit
Input Test ................................................ 4-46
Cylinder Head Assembly
Removal .................................................. 6-31
Installation .............................................. 6-51
Cylinder Head. Bare
Inspection ............................................... 6-36
D
Differential Carrier Bearing Outer Races, A
/T
Replacement ....................................... 14-204
Differential Carrier Bearings. AfT
Replacement ....................................... 14-202
Inspection ........................................... 14-205
Differential Carrier, A/T
Replacement ....................................... 14-202
Differential Oil Seals. AfT
Replacement ....................................... 14-203
Differential Pinion Gears. A/T
Inspection ........................................... 14-201
Distributor
Replacement ........................................... 4-19
Disassembly/Reassembly ..................... 4-20
Drive Plate
DTCs
D41ndicator Circuit
E
ECTSensor
ECT Sensor Circuit
EGRValve
Emblems
Replacement ........................................... 20-8
End Cover, AfT
Removal .............................................. 14-151
Engine Assembly
Removal .................................................... 5-2
Installation .............................................. 5-11
Engine Block Assembly
Engine Block End Cover
Engine Block, Bare
Inspection ............................................... 7-15
Repair ...................................................... 7-17
Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve
Circuit Diagram ...................................... 4-56
EVAP Control System
Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust Manifold Gasket
Replacement ............................................. 9-3
Exhaust Pipe
Replacement ............................................. 9-4
F
Fan Control Module
Input Test .............................................. 10-20
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram .................................... 10-16
Final Driven Gear, AlT
Replacement ....................................... 14-202
Frame
Repair Chart .......................................... 20-12
Front Driveshaft Assembly
Resassembly .......................................... 16-3
Front Seats
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-45
Fuel and Emissions
Description .............................................. 11-7
Circuit Diagram .............................. 11-30,39
Fuel Gauge
Test ........................................................ 11-94
Fuel Injection System (PGM-FI)
Fuel Injectors
Replacement ................................... 11-80,82
Fuel Lines and Hoses
Inspection ............................................. 11-91
Replacement ................................... 11-92, 93
Fuel Supply System
Adjustment ........................................... 11-88
Fuses
G
Gauges
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-33
General Information
(See section 1)
H
Heater Hoses and Pipes
Heater Valve
Heater Valve Cable
Adjustment ........................................... 21-13
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-43
Test ........................................................ 22-43
Hood
Replacement ........................................... 20-7
H02S, Primary
Replacement ......................................... 11-84
H02S, Secondary
Replacement ......................................... 11-84
IA (Intake Air) Bypass Control Valve
Test ...................................................... 11-101
ICM (Ignition Control Module)
Input Test ................................................ 4-21
Idle Control System
Adjustment ........................................... 11-86
Ignition Coil(s)
Test .......................................................... 4-22
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram ................................ 4-16,17
Inspection ............................................... 4-18
Ignition Wires
Test/Inspection ....................................... 4-22
Replacement ......................................... 21-61
Test ........................................................ 21-61
Intake Air System
Intake Manifold
Interlock System
Circuit Diagram .................................. 14-146
Intermediate Shaft Assembly
Disassembly ......................................... 16-14
Removal ................................................ 16-14
Resassembly ........................................ 16-16
Installation ............................................ 16-18
K
Key Interlock Solenoid
Test ...................................................... 14-149
Key Interlock System Circuit
L
Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve
Test ...................................................... 14-103
Low Fuel Indicator
Replacement ......................................... 22-32
(cont'd)
(cont'd)
Lubrication System
Test ............................................................ 8-4
M
Main Valve Body
Removal .............................................. 14-157
Repair .................................................. 14-159
Resassembly ..................................... 14-160
161
Installation ......................................... 14-190
Mainshaft Bearing, Torque Converter
Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-167
Mainshaft Sealing Rings
Replacement ...................................... 14-171
Mainshaft Speed Sensor
Replacement ....................................... 14-110
Maintenance
(See section 3)
Input Test ............................................ 14-147
o
Oil Filter
Replacement ............................................. 8-5
Oil Pan
Oil Pressure Switch
Test
Low Engine Oil Indicator Components .
8-4
Oil Pump, Engille
Overhaul
Oil, Engine
Replacement ............................................. 8-5
Replacement ......................................... 21-62
Test ........................................................ 21-62
p
Park Lever Position Stop
Inspection/Adjustment ..................... 14-153
Park Pin Switch
Test ...................................................... 14-150
PCM
PCVValve
Test ...................................................... 11-102
Piston Pins
Piston Rings
Replacement ........................................... 7-22
Pistons
Component Location Index .................... 7-3
Removal .................................................. 7-12
Replacement ........................................... 7-18
Power Seat Linkage
Power Seat Motors
Test ........................................................ 22-46
Power Seat Switch
Test/Replacement ................................ 22-47
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Lines and Hoses
Replacement ......................................... 17-12
Power Steering Pump
Test ...................................................... 17-7,8
Replacement ......................................... 17-13
Overhaul ............................................... 17-14
Power Steering Pump Belt
Inspection/Adjustment ........................ 17-10
R
Radiator
Test .......................................................... 10-8
Replacement ......................................... 10-13
Radiator and Condenser Fans Common
Circuit
Radiator Cap
Test .......................................................... 10-7
Radiator Fan Assembly
Test .......................................................... 10-8
Replacement ......................................... 10-13
Radiator Fan Circuit
Radiator Fan Switch
Test ........................................................ 10-21
Radiator Hoses and Pipes
Radio Remote Switch
Test ........................................................ 22-42
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Refrigerant
Replacement ......................................... 21-30
Test ......................................................... 21-29
Refrigerant Oil
Replacement ........................................... 21-6
164
Rocker Arm Assembly
Removal .................................................. 6-36
Rocker Arms
Test .......................................................... 6-10
Inspection ............................................... 6-38
s
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-38
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram .................................... 22-49
Seat Wire Harness, Driver's
Installation .............................................. 20-5
Seat, Front
Removal/Installation .............................. 20-2
Secondary Shaft Bearing, Torque
Converter Housing
Replacement ....................................... 14-168
Replacement ....................................... 14-179
Servo Body
165
Shift Control Solenoid Valves
Replacement ....................................... 14-107
Test ...................................................... 14-107
Shift Lock Solenoid
Test ...................................................... 14-149
Replacement ....................................... 14-150
Shift Lock System Circuit
Spark Plugs
Inspection ............................................... 4-24
Specifications
(See section 2)
Starter
Test ............................................................ 4-7
Replacement ............................................. 4-8
Overhaul ................................................... 4-9
Starter Solenoid
Test ............................................................ 4-6
Starting System
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 4-4
Troubleshooting ....................................... 4-5
Steering
Inspection ............................................... 17-9
Steering Column
Steering Gearbox
Overhaul ............................................... 17-20
Steering Lock
Steering Rack Guide
Adjustment ........................................... 17-19
Steering Wheel
Sub-frames
Replacement ........................................... 20-9
Sunlight Sensor
Replacement ......................................... 21-63
Test ........................................................ 21-63
T
TCS Indicator Circuit
TCSRelay
Test ........................................................ 22-31
TCSSwitch
Test ........................................................ 19-81
TDCSensors
Replacement ........................................... 6-55
Thermostat
Test ......................................................... 10-9
Replacement ......................................... 10-12
Throttle Body Wire Harnesses
Test ........................................................ 11-96 (See first page of this Index)
Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 11-100 Wiring System
Relay and Control Unit Locations ..... 22-2, 3
Throttle Cable
Adjustment ........................................... 11-98
Timing Belt 1
Inspection ............................................... 6-18
Removal .................................................. 6-19
Installation .............................................. 6-22 1st/2nd Clutch Assembly
Disassembly ....................................... 14-180
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Inspection ........................................... 14-183
Replacement ....................................... 14-106 Resassembly ...................................... 14-185
Test ...................................................... 14-106
Removal .............................................. 14-154 2
Installation .......................................... 14-192
Transmission Range Switch 2nd Clutch Pressure Switch
Test ...................................................... 14-140 Replacement ....................................... 14-111
Replacement ....................................... 14-141
Troubleshooting
(See first page of this Index) 3
v Replacement ....................................... 14-111
3rd/4th Clutch Assembly
Valve Guides Inspection ................................... 14-170, 183
Inspection ............................................... 6-44
Replacement ........................................... 6-45
Valve Seals
Removal .................................................. 6-43
Valve Seats
Repair ...................................................... 6-47
Valve Springs
Removal .................................................. 6-43
Valves
Adjustment ............................................. 6-13
Removal .................................................. 6-43
Inspection ............................................... 6-44
Installation .............................................. 6-49
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies/Springs
Inspection ............................................... 6-39
VTEC Solenoid Valve
Test ........................................................... 6-9
w
Water Pump
Inspection ............................................... 10-9
Replacement ......................................... 10-10
Wheel Speed Sensors
Inspection ............................................. 19-82
Replacement ......................................... 19-83

Honda Accord 1998 - 2002 Service Manual COMPLETE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Accord 1998 - 2002 Service Manual COMPLETE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

1998 - 2002 Accord 2/4 Dr

Nm (4.5 kgfm, 33lbfftl

(lOAI Oosed: Brake pedal depressed

ILKIYE (7_SAl BRAKEFLUID

,einstallation on '99-02 models)

CONNECTING ROD BEARING

HOSE 'i BLEED SCREW

You might also like